Nissan almera n15 мануал

Думаю одной из главных тем в любом сообществе которое ведётся по узкой специальности, а в нашем случае Almera N15, нужно иметь максимальную информацию по ремонту и обслуживанию. Так вот, небольшая подборочка полезного чтива:

1) Nissan Almera N15 Service Manual
Руководство по ремонту и техобслуживанию Nissan Almera N15 содержит подробное и полное описание ремонта и диагностики всех агрегатов автомобиля Ниссан Алмера, включая кузовные размеры для вытяжки кузова, подробный ремонт АКПП и МКПП, подробные электрические схемы, моменты затяжек, процесс сборки и разборки двигателя и других агрегатов и узлов, ремонт сцепления, рулевого управление, кондиционера, всех электрических устройств и блоков управления, необходимый специальный инструмент, а так же другая информация.

Ссылка на ЯндексДиск (архив .zip) Размер 152мб. Файлы в формате .pdf

Пример из одного PDF файла

2) Инструкция по эксплуатации Almera N15.
Это стандартная книженция которая выдавалась счастливому обладателю при покупке нового автомобиля в те далёкие годы, обычно шло в комплекте с сервисной книжкой и прочими «фантиками» =)

Ссылка на ЯндексДиск (формат .pdf) Размер 7,6мб.

3) Родная инструкция по ремонту и обслуживанию.
Стандартная инструкция которая шла вместе с автомобилем при покупке. Здесь собраны основные данные по машине, сколько чего заливать, как менять и когда))
Качество копирования не очень, но всё равно читается =)

Ссылка на ЯндексДиск (формат .pdf) Размер 90мб.

4) Мультимедийное руководство по ремонту Almera N15
• Секреты эксплуатации
• Детальное описание операций
• Более 500 иллюстраций
• Цветные электросхемы
В новой серии представлены руководства по ремонту, техническому обслуживанию и эксплуатации самых популярных в России на сегодняшний день зарубежных легковых автомобилей.В этих руководствах на основе обширного иллюстрированного материала автовладельцы, автомеханики средних и небольших автомастерских найдут всю необходимую для ремонта информацию по различным узлам и системам, познакомятся с особенностями эксплуатации и технического обслуживания. Издания снабжены цветными электросхемами.

Ссылка на ЯндексДиск (формат .rar) В разархивированном варианте образ диска .ISO) Размер 260мб.

з.ы. возможно будет продолжение =)

Руководство по эксплуатации, техническому и ремонту автомобиля Ниссан Альмера первого поколения (код N15) с четырехцилиндровыми бензиновыми двигателями объемом 1.4 литра (GA14DE), 1.5 литра (GA15DE), 1.6 литра (GA16DE) и 2.0 литра (SR20DE), а также с дизельными моторами объемом 2.0 литра (CD20, CD20E). Коробки передач описываются механические RS5F30A, RS5F31A и RS5F32A, а также автоматические.

Смотрите этот мануал на: болгарском, белорусском, украинском, сербском, хорватском

Руководство по эксплуатации

Приборы управления

Введение в руководство по эксплуатации

Описание панели управления

Сигнальные и контрольные лампочки и зуммеры

Сигнальная лампа противоугонной системы NATS

Полный список статей этой категории »

Подготовка к движению

Ключ зажигания

Дверные замки

Отпирание капота

Замок вещевого ящика

Полный список статей этой категории »

Отопитель, кондиционер и аудио

Центральные и боковые сопла вентилятора

Ручки управления кондиционером и отопителем

Работа обогревателя

Работа кондиционера

Полный список статей этой категории »

Запуск двигателя и вождение

Обкатка нового автомобиля

Перед запуском двигателя

Меры предосторожности при запуске двигателя и движении

Меры безопасности при движении

Полный список статей этой категории »

Техническое обслуживание

Общий уход за автомобилем

Защита кузова от коррозии

Меры предосторожности при выполнении технического ухода

Схема расположения точек обслуживания

Полный список статей этой категории »

Техническая информация

Рекомендуемое топливо, смазочные жидкости и заправочные объемы

Рекомендуемые типы смазочных жидкостей

Смазочная жидкость и хладагент воздушного кондиционера

Основные характеристики двигателей

Полный список статей этой категории »

Силовой агрегат

Ремонт двигателя

Общие указания по ремонту двигателя

Стандартные и специальные инструменты и приспособления

Измерение компрессии в цилиндрах

Масляный поддон — снятие и установка

Полный список статей этой категории »

Система смазки

Нанесение герметика в качестве «жидкой прокладки»

Специальные инструменты и приспособления

Схема смазочной системы

Проверка давления масла

Полный список статей этой категории »

Система охлаждения

Схема системы охлаждения

Водяной насос — снятие, проверка и установка

Термостат — снятие, установка и проверка

Выходной патрубок — проверка и установка

Полный список статей этой категории »

Система управления (бензин)

Общие меры предосторожности

Специальные инструменты и приспособления

Электрическая принципиальная схема

Структурная схема системы управления двигателем

Полный список статей этой категории »

Система управления (дизель)

Общие меры предосторожности

Специальные инструменты и приспособления

Электрическая принципиальная схема

Структурная схема системы управления двигателем

Полный список статей этой категории »

Система питания и выхлопа

Привод дроссельной заслонки — устройство

Регулировка троса привода дроссельной заслонки

Управление подачей топлива в двигателе CD20E

Топливный бак и топливный насос — устройство

Полный список статей этой категории »

Трансмиссия

Сцепление

Общие меры предосторожности

Специальные инструменты и приспособления

Регулировка педали сцепления

Удаление воздуха из гидравлического привода сцепления

Полный список статей этой категории »

Механическая коробка передач

Специальные и стандартные инструменты и приспособления

Замена сальников МКПП

Проверка выключателей

Снятие и установка коробки передач

Полный список статей этой категории »

Автоматическая коробка передач

Специальные инструменты и приспособления

Механизм переключения передач

Конструкция автоматической коробки передач

Проверка рабочей жидкости

Полный список статей этой категории »

Шасси

Передняя подвеска

Общие замечания

Специальные и стандартные инструменты и приспособления

Проверка деталей подвески на автомобиле

Устройство передней подвески

Полный список статей этой категории »

Задняя подвеска

Общие замечания о ремонте задней подвески

Специальные и стандартные инструменты и приспособления

Устройство задней подвески

Устройство ступицы заднего колеса

Полный список статей этой категории »

Рулевое управление

Общие указания по ремонту рулевого управления

Специальные и стандартные инструменты и приспособления

Рулевое колесо и рулевая колонка — устройство

Проверка рулевого управления на автомобиле

Полный список статей этой категории »

Тормозная система

Общие указания по ремонту тормозной системы

Стандартные инструменты и приспособления

Обслуживание тормозной системы

Удаление воздуха из гидравлического привода

Полный список статей этой категории »

Кузов

Отопление и кондиционирование

Общие меры предосторожности

Правила работы с компрессором кондиционера

Правила работы с соединениями

Специальные инструменты и приспособления

Полный список статей этой категории »

Система безопасности

Указания по работе с подушками безопасности

Расположение компонентов в системе с двумя подушками безопасности

Блок управления — снятие и установка

Механические натяжители ремней безопасности — снятие к установка

Полный список статей этой категории »

Элементы кузова

Зажимы и фиксаторы

Снятие и установка бамперов

Регулировка петель и замков

Наружное зеркало заднего вида — снятие

Полный список статей этой категории »

Электрооборудование

Оборудование и приборы

Электрические разъемы

Стандартные реле

Список сокращений, используемых на схемах

Принципиальная схема подачи питания к потребителям

Полный список статей этой категории »

Силовые устройства

Защита электрических цепей

Аккумуляторная батарея

Устройство стартера

Стартер — снятие, проверка и сборка

Полный список статей этой категории »

Отправить эту информацию вашим друзьям:

программа для ремонта автомобилей . Купить отзывы авито: накрутка отзывов авито.

Ссылка в разных форматах на этот раздел

TEXTHTMLBB Code

Electronic Service Manual Nissan Almera Classic.

Руководство на английском языке по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera Classic серии B10.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
  • Год издания: 2006
  • Страниц:
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 74,1 Mb

Electronic Service Manual Nissan Almera N16.

Руководство на английском языке по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera серии N16.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
  • Год издания: 2001
  • Страниц:
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 101,2 Mb

Electronic Service Manual Nissan Almera N16.

Руководство на английском языке по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera серии N16.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
  • Год издания: 2003
  • Страниц:
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 118,0 Mb

Сборник руководств на английском языке по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera серии N15 1995-2000 годов выпуска.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц:
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 211,9 Mb

Руководство на английском языке по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобилей Nissan Almera/Latio/Sunny/Versa 2011-2012 годов выпуска.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Motorist
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 2747
  • Формат:
  • Размер:

Инструкция по ремонту и обслуживанию Nissan Almera.

Руководство по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera 1996 года выпуска.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Nissan Europe
  • Год издания: 1995
  • Страниц: 318
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 67,0 Mb

Инструкция по эксплуатации Nissan Almera 2013 г.

Руководство по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию автомобиля Nissan Almera 2013 года выпуска.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Nissan International SA
  • Год издания: 2012
  • Страниц: 172
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 3,1 Mb

Инструкция по эксплуатации Nissan Almera.

Руководство по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию автомобиля Nissan Almera 1996 года выпуска.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Nissan Europe
  • Год издания: 1995
  • Страниц: 149
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 7,7 Mb

Ремонт без проблем. Nissan Almera Classic с 2005 г.

Руководство по эксплуатации, техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera Classic с 2005 года выпуска с бензиновым двигателем объемом 1,6 л.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Третий Рим
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 344
  • Формат:
  • Размер:

Руководство по ремонту Nissan Almera 2000-2006 г.

Руководство по эксплуатации, техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera серии N16 2000-2006 годов выпуска с бензиновыми двигателями объемом 1,5/1,8 л.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: АртСтиль
  • Год издания: 2007
  • Страниц: 424
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 114,8 Mb

Руководство по ремонту и ТО Nissan Almera 1995-1999 г.

Руководство по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera 1995-1999 годов выпуска с бензиновыми и дизельными двигателями.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Атласы автомобилей
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 190
  • Формат:
  • Размер:

Руководство по ремонту и эксплуатации Nissan Almera Classic с 2006 г.

Руководство по эксплуатации и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera Classic серии с 2006 года выпуска с бензиновым двигателем объемом 1,6 л.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Монолит
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 302
  • Формат:
  • Размер:

Руководство по эксплуатации Nissan Almera Classic.

Руководство по эксплуатации и техническому обслуживанию автомобиля Nissan Almera Classic.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: MoToR
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 270
  • Формат:
  • Размер:

Руководство по эксплуатации, ремонту и ТО Nissan Almera с 2000 г.

Руководство по эксплуатации, техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera с 2000 года выпуска с бензиновыми двигателями объемом 1,5/1,8 л.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Арго-Авто
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 264
  • Формат:
  • Размер:

Устройство и ремонт Nissan Almera Classic 2006-2012 г.

Руководство по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera Classic серии B10 2006-2012 годов выпуска с бензиновым двигателем объемом 1,6 л.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Автонавигатор
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 374
  • Формат:
  • Размер:

Устройство и ремонт Nissan Almera с 2013 г.

Руководство по эксплуатации, техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera серии G15 с 2013 года выпуска с бензиновым двигателем объемом 1,6 л.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Автонавигатор
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 296
  • Формат:
  • Размер:

Устройство, обслуживание, диагностика, ремонт Nissan Almera с 2013 г.

Руководство по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera с 2013 года выпуска.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: За рулем
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 255
  • Формат:
  • Размер:

Устройство, ТО и ремонт Nissan Almera с 2000 г.

Руководство по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобилей Nissan Almera и Nissan Sunny с 2000 года выпуска с бензиновыми двигателями объемом 1,5/1,8 л.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Автонавигатор
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 376
  • Формат:
  • Размер:

Эксплуатация, ТО, ремонт Nissan Almera Classic с 2006 г.

Руководство по эксплуатации, техническому обслуживанию и ремонту автомобиля Nissan Almera Classic серии B10 с 2006 года выпуска.

  • Автор:
  • Издательство: Автонавигатор
  • Год издания: 2007
  • Страниц: 344
  • Формат: DjVu
  • Размер: 28,7 Mb

Доп информация

Инструкция на русском языке для Nissan Almera N15 1995, содержит справочные данные и описание основных моментов эксплуатации автомобиля.

Рекомендуем перед началом использования изучить руководство, это позволит избежать проблем при эксплуатации и узнать о всех функциях и особенностях автомобиля.

Информация о файле: 90.12 Мб

manual-nissan-almera-n15-1995

◀Скачать руководство для Nissan Pathfinder 2010

Скачать руководство для Nissan Almera 2013▶

This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for NISSAN model N15 series. In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the Gl section be completely understood before starting any repair task. All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.

The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle. The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately. Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service method selected.

CONTENTS

  • GENERAL INFORMATION
  • MAINTENANCE
  • ENGINE MECHANICAL
  • ENGINE LUBRICATION & COOLING SYSTEMS
  • ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
  • ACCELERATOR CONTROL, FUEL & EXHAUST SYSTEMS
  • CLUTCH
  • MANUAL TRANSAXLE
  • AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
  • FRONT AXLE & FRONT SUSPENSION
  • REAR AXLE & REAR SUSPENSION
  • BRAKE SYSTEM
  • STEERING SYSTEM
  • RESTRAINT SYSTEM
  • BODY & TRIM
  • HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER
  • ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
  • ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Language: English
Format: PDF
Pages: 1712

Nissan Almera N15 series Service Manual

  1. Главная
  2. Nissan
  3. Almera
  4. Книга по эксплуатации и ремонту Nissan Almera N15 1995-1999 гг.

Год выпуска:

1995 — 1999 гг.

Найдено 5 книг стоимостью от 444 руб.

Быстро купить книгу в оригинальной качественной версии PDF от издательства

Купить бумажную версию книги с доставкой по вашему адресу

Скачать руководство с предоставленного файлообменника

Команда нашего сайта предоставляет вам возможность скачать руководство по ремонту, диагностике и техническому обслуживанию автомобилей Nissan Almera N15, которые выпускались с 1995 по 1999 года.

Мануал содержит в себе всю информацию по автомобилям Nissan Almera N15 с бензиновыми и двигательными двигателями. Бензиновые двигатели представлены в следующих вариациях объёма: 1.6, 2.0 и малолитражный мотор – 1.4 литра. Дизельные двигатели автомобилей Nissan Almera N15 представлены лишь одним мотором, объёмом 2.0 литра.

Пособие включило в свой состав не только голый текст, но и набор иллюстраций, которые присутствуют в каждом разделе руководства. Каждой детали автомобиля отведена отдельная глава. В этой главе, вы найдете правила и порядок проведения диагностики и ремонта детали в случае поломки, для этого в пособии и присутствуют иллюстрации, которые графически объясняют, как правильно диагностировать и ремонтировать деталь.

Эксплуатация Nissan Almera

Похожие руководства на сайте


AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

AT

SECTION

CONTENTS
PREPARATION AND PRECAUTIONS
Special

Service

Commercial
Service

Tools

Service

Notice
Restraint

System

Supplemental

Restraint

BAG»

Air Bag System)

(Single

All Models
Except

Model

Model

34X81

System

(SRS) «AIR

Cross-sectional

View

Control

Circuit

42
42

34X81

.44
45

Shift Control
7

DESCRIPTION
Hydraulic

3

(SRS) «AIR

(Dual Air Bag System)

MAJOR OVERHAUL..

6
7

Supplemental
BAG»

Tools

3

Components

46

Oil Channel

47

Locations

of Adjusting

7

Bearings,

Thrust

8

Except

8

Locations

of Adjusting

10

Bearings,

Thrust

Model

Shims,

Washers

Needle

and Snap Rings —

34X81

.48
Shims,

Washers

Needle

and Snap Rings —

Shift Mechanism

14

Control

15

DiSASSEMBLy

17

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

System

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Preliminary

(Prior

to Road Testing)

34X81

.49
50
66

17

Manual

Road Testing

17

Oil Pump

Stall Tasting

24

Control

Valve

Assembly

74

Pressure

26

Control

Valve

Upper

Body

86

28

Control

Valve

Lower

Body

30

Reverse

31

High Clutch

31

Forward

33

Low & Reverse

35

Rear Internal

36

Overrun

37

Output

Wiring

Check

Model

Testing
Diagram

Electrical

AT —

Components

Inspection

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control

Valve

Assembly

Throttle

Wire Adjustment..

Control

Cable

Governor
Inhibitor
Differential

and Accumulator

Installation

and Adjustment

Valve
Switch

Adjustment

Side Oil Seal Replacement..

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
Installation

Shaft and Throttle

Lever

66
70

90

Clutch

93
97

Clutch

and Overrun

108

Forward

Clutch

112
Gear,

Idler

Gear,

Reduction

Pinion

Gear and Bearing

39

Model

34X81

39

Output

.40

Shaft,

Idler Gear,

Gear and Bearing
Band Servo

Hub and

Hub

Output

37

Except

102

Brake
Gear,

Clutch
Shaft,

Clutch

Piston

Retainer
116

Reduction

Retainer

Model

Assembly

Final Drive —

Except

Model

Final Drive —

Model

34X81

Pinion
34X81

121
126

34X81

131
135


i

CONTENTS
ASSEMBLy

Assembly 1
Adjustment 1
Assembly 2
Adjustment 2
Assembly 3

138
138
139

147
151

(Cont’d.)

Adjustment 3
Assembly 4
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
General Specifications
Specifications and Adjustments

155

When you read wiring diagrams:
• Read GI section, «HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS» .
• See EL section, «POWER SUPPLY ROUTING» for power distribution circuit.

157
158
165
165

165

PREPARATION AND PRECAUTIONS
Special Service Tools
Tool number
Tool name

Description

8T25058001
Oil pressure gauge set
G) 8T25051001
Oil pressure gauge
@ 8T25052000
Hose
@ 8T25053000
Joint pipe
@ 8T25054000
Adapter
@ 8T25055000
Adapter

Measuring line pressure and governor
pressure

NT097

KV31103000
Drift

Installing differential side oil seal
(Use with 8T35325000)

a: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia.
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.

NT105

8T35325000
Drift

Installing differential side oil seal
(Use with KV31103000)

a: 215 mm (8.46 in)
b: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia.
c: M12 x 1.5P

NT417

Removing and installing clutch return
spring

KV31103200
Clutch spring compressor

a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 76 mm (2.99 in) dia.
c: 174 mm (6.85 in)

NT425

Removing and installing parking rod plate
and manual plate

8T23540000
Pin punch

a: 2.3 mm (0.091 in) dia.
b: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.

NT442

Installing throttle lever and manual shaft
retaining pins
Removing and installing differential pinion
mate shaft lock pin.

KV32101000
Pin punch

a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.

NT410

AT-3

PREPARATION AND PRECAUTIONS
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
Tool name

Description

ST3306S001

Removing differential side bearing inner

Differential side bearing
puller set

race

CD

ST33051001
Puller
@ ST33061000
Adapter

,~
a
NT413

KV381054S0
(ST33290001)
Puller

a:
b:
c:
d:
e:

38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
130 mm (5.12 in)
135 mm (5.31 in)
100 mm (3.94 In)

• Removing differential side oil seal
• Removing idler gear bearing outer race
— EXCEPT MODEL 34X81 • Removing output shaft bearing outer
race from bearing retainer
• Removing output gear bearing outer
race from bearing retainer
— MODEL 34X81 • Removing differential side bearing outer
race
• Removing needle bearing from bearing
retainer
a: 250 mm (9.84 in)
b: 160 mm (6.30 in)

NT414

ST27180001
Puller

• Removing idler gear
• Removing output gear (Except model
34X81)
a: 100 mm (3.94 In)
b: 110 mm (4.33 in)
c: M8 x 1.25P

NT424

ST30031000
Puller

Removing reduction pinion gear bearing
inner race (Except model 34X81)

a: 90 mm (3.54 In) dia.
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.

NT411

ST30021000
Puller

Removing differential side bearing
(Except model 34X81)

a: 110 mm (4.33 in) dia.
b: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.

NT411

ST35272000
Drift

• Installing reduction pinion gear bearing
inner race
• Installing idler gear bearing inner race
• Installing output gear bearing inner race
(Except model 34X81)

~

a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 35.5 mm (1.398 in) dia.

NT426

AT-4

PREPARATION AND PRECAUTIONS
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
Tool name

Description

8T37830000
Drift

Installing idler gear bearing outer race

a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
b: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia.

NT427

8T33200000
Drift

Installing differential side bearing (Except
model 34X81)

a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.

NT091

8T35271000
Drift

• Installing idler gear
• Installing output gear (Except model
34X81)
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 44 mm (1.73 in) dia.

NT115

8T33400001
Drift

• Installing oil pump housing oil seal
• Installing output gear bearing outer race
onto bearing retainer (Except model
34X81)
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.

NT086

KV40104840
Drift

Installing output shaft bearing outer race
onto bearing retainer (Except model
34X81)
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
NT108

b: 42 mm (1.65 in) dia.

— MODEL 34X81 • Measuring turning torque of final drive

KV38105710
Preload adapter

assembly
• Measuring clearance between side gear
and differential case with washer
• Selecting differential side bearing
adjusting shim

NT087

8T35321000
Drift

Installing output shaft bearing
(Model 34X81)
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.

NT073

ST30633000
Drift

Installing differential side bearing outer
race (Model 34X81)
a: 67 mm (2.64 in) dia.
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.

NT073

AT-5

PREPARATION AND PRECAUTIONS
Commercial Service Tools
Tool name

Description

Puller

=m
o

NT077

0

Drift

• Removing idler gear bearing inner race
• Removing and installing band servo piston snap ring
— EXCEPT MODEL 34X81 • Removing output gear bearing inner
race
• Removing differential side bearing
Removing idler gear bearing inner race
(Except model 34X81)

NT109

~

a: 34 mm (1.34 in) dia.
Installing needle bearing onto bearing
retainer (Model 34X81)

Drift

NT109

~

a: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia.
Removing output gear bearing inner race
(Except model 34X81)

Drift

NT109

~

a: 33 mm (1.30 in) dia.
Removing differential side bearing (Except
model 34X81)

Drift

NT109

~

a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
Removing output shaft bearing inner race
(Except model 34X81)

Drift

NT110

a: 70 mm (2.76 in) dia.
b: 30 mm (1.18 in) dia.

~

Installing output shaft bearing inner race
(Except model 34X81)

Drift

a:
b:
c:
d:

~d
NT111

AT-6

70 mm (2.76 in) dia.
34 mm (1.34 in) dia.
30 mm (1.18 in) dia.
2 mm (0.08 in)

PREPARATION AND PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice



Before proceeding
with disassembly,
thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is
important to prevent the internal parts from
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work
area.
Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts
clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers
that could interfere with the operation of the
transaxle.
Place disassembled parts in order, on a parts
rack, for easier and proper assembly.
All parts should be carefully cleaned- with a
general
purpose,
non-flammable
solvent
before inspection or reassembly.
Gaskets,
seals
and O-rings
should
be
replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled.
It is very important to perform functional tests
whenever they are indicated.

The valve body contains precision parts and
requires
extreme
care when
parts are
removed and serviced. Place disassembled
valve body parts in order, on a parts rack, for
easier and proper assembly. Care will also
prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
Properly installed vales, sleeves, plugs, etc.
will slide along their bores in the valve body
under their own weight.
Before assembly,
apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum
jelly to protect O-ring and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly.
Do not use grease.
Extremely care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when
assembling.
After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new
ATF.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
BAG» (Dual Air Bag System)
The Supplemental Restraint System «Air Bag» used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or
severity of injury to the driver and front passenger in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint
System consists of air bag modules (located in the center of the steering wheel and on the instrument
panel on the passenger side), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:

To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
Ii
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the
harness connectors or for the complete harness, for easy identification.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
BAG» (Single Air Bag System)
The Supplemental Restraint System «Air Bag» and used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk
or severity of injury to the driver in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint System consists of
an air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp,
wiring harness and spiral cable. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the
RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:

To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.

Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the
Service Manual.

AT-7

risk of personal injury or death
maintenance must be performed
of the SRS, can lead to personal
SRS unless instructed

to in this

DESCRIPTION
Cross-sectional View
EXCEPT MODEL 34X81

Band servo piston
Reverse clutch drum

Converter housing

High clutch
Brake band

Torque converter

SAT502HB

AT-8

DESCRIPTION
Cross-sectional View (Cant’ d)
MODEL 34X81

Reverse clutch drum

Band servo piston

High clutch
Front planetary gear
Reverse clutch

Low one-way clutch

Oil pump assembly
Brake band

Rear planetary gear

Converter housing

Forward clutch
Overrun clutch
Low & reverse brake

Torque converter

Input shaft

c

Idler gear

-;-

I

,»‘I

L_
Forward one-way clutch

Reduction pinion gear
Final gear

Differential case

SAT101EA

AT-9

DESCRIPTION
Hydraulic Control Circuit
MODEL 34X68
Low & reverse
brake
High clutch

Forward
clutch

4th
speed cut
valve
Overrun
clutch
control
valve

Lock-up
control
valve

1-2
shift
valve

Torque
‘~ ..•.•
converter
relief
..••…..
valve
..

>..•.••••

Governor
valve

X

: Drain port

Detent valve

: Orifice
SAT1961

AT-10

DESCRIPTION
Hydraulic Control Circuit (Cont’d)
MODEL 34X69 AND 34X70
Torque
converter

High clutch

Forward
clutch

Oil
pump

4th
speed
cut
valve

i
accumulator
valve

Lock-up
control
valve

Overrun
clutch
control
valve

II


1-2
shift valve

00 cancel
solenoid

X

: Drain

=:= :

port

Orifice

SAT509H

AT-11

DESCRIPTION
Hydraulic Control Circuit (Cont’d)
MODEL 34X80
Low & reverse
Torque
converter

Oil

brake
Overrun
,clutch

tJ

I g~

pump

I

~J
speed cut
valve

C-1

(~

Forward
clutch

—;::;-;r.]O

~~ l]

~

J~

~

UL «-‘ IU4~1~~

~%~

1

~frEJ!

-!

6 ~,

Lock-up_
control
valve

tf1

(T,

N

~iJ —

Reverse
clutch

Band servo

(Jp::-

1 ~

4th

Overrun
clutch
controlvalve

High clutch

-~

1-2
accumulator

valve

cooler-

L-

_

m

0

~,—J

,-O…J

ILJ

ar

r

I ‘—,~

r::r=<
,’-

=-

II

.
,,’

~tL

(

I

IJ

(

I
,

~1
i i
xU

~H
::l.

-= ~ I

rr=-

LL:

L~

Torque x'»
converter
relief
valve

~

x

r

~

i i

2 ~ ‘-

3-4 shift valv~-HiliJI
Governor../l
valve
Pressure
regulator
valve

~M~ ·

F= f=’l

.,.11
L 2-3

~
=—=-.J

!lJF

II

:;;; ~ I

=-.—‘

00 cancel
solenoid

»

1-

~

L…—…l

I

nn
I

1-2
shift
valve

~reducing_
~

«~’L—.J

lJl.

U
p RNb’21

11

r’

.
4-2
I ~valve=
~
seq!!.enc~
,-=-valve—j
h
1J;;;.Q»t….

Ma~alve

II

~

II

‘i-VD
-,

c: I

I

modifier
Throttle
valve

II

‘:fj’~1

I

:=~-‘

Pressure
modifier valve
: Drain port

~I»

shift
valve

..-

D ~Y&

X

I~

J~

Detent valve

1″

Throttle valve

.

If.’

.

«;’Jnn!

~
~

l…
,
Klckdown
modifier
valve

:::::: : Orifice

SAT1971

AT-12

DESCRIPTION
Hydraulic Control Circuit (Cont’d)
MODEL 34X81

Oil
pump

Torque
converter

High clutch

4th speed
cut valve

Lock-up
control valve

Overrun
clutch
control valve


1-2
shift valve
3-4 shift valve

X

Drain port

:::::= : Orifice

SAT1981

AT-13

DESCRIPTION
Shift Mechanism
CONSTRUCTION

,:-1

18

SAT214H

ill
@
@

@
@

Brake band
Reverse clutch
High clutch

@

Front sun gear
Front pinion gear

@

o

@
@l
@
@

Torque converter
Oil pump
Input shaft

FUNCTION

@

@
@
@

Front internal gear
Front planetary carrier
Rear sun gear
Rear pinion gear
Rear internal gear
Rear planetary carrier
Forward clutch
Forward one-way clutch

@

@
@
@
@

@
@

@

Overrun clutch
Low one-way clutch
Low & reverse brake
Parking pawl
Parking gear
Output shaft
Idle gear
Output gear

OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE

Glutch and brake components

Abbr.

Function

Reverse clutch

RIG

To transmit input power to front sun gear

High clutch

HIG

To transmit input power to front planetary carrier

Forward clutch

FIG

To connect front planetary carrier with forward one-way clutch

Overrun clutch

OIG

To connect front planetary carrier with rear internal gear

Brake band

BIB

To lock front sun gear

Forward one-way clutch

F/O.G

Low one-way clutch

LlO.G

Low & reverse brake

L & RIB

When forward clutch is engaged, to stop rear internai gear from rotating in opposite direction against engine speed
To stop front planetary carrier from rotating in opposite direction
against engine speed
To lock front planetary carrier

AT-14

DESCRIPTION
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
OPERATION

OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Band servo

Shift posi- Reverse
tion
clutch

High
clutch

Forward
clutch

Overrun
clutch

2nd
apply

3rd
release

Forward
Low
one-way one-way
clutch
clutch

4th
apply

Low &
reverse
brake

Lock-up

PARK POSITION

P
R

REVERSEPOSITION

0

0

NEUTRAL POSITION

N

D
‘4

1st

0

’10

2nd

0

’10

0

’10

‘2@

@

‘3@

@

3rd

0

0

4th

0

@

1st

0

0

2nd

0

0

1st

0

0

2nd

0

0

• •
••
• •
•• •

0

2
0

1

‘1
‘2
‘3
‘4

o

Remarks

0

Automatic shift
1<—>2<—>3<—>4

0
Automatic shift
1<—>2

0

Locks (held stationary) in 1st
speed 1 <— 2

Operates when overdrive switch is sel to «OFF».
Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd «apply» side and 3rd «release» side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract
because oil pressure area on the «release» side is greater than that on the «apply» side.
Oil pressure is applied to 4th «apply» side in condition ‘2 above, and brake band contracts.
AIT will not shift to 4th when overdrive switch is set to «OFF» position.
Operates.

Operates. During «progressive»

@

Operates but does not affect power transmission.

acceleration.

Control System
CONTROL SYSTEM

Engine
AIT

:

Governor valve
1

1

I
1

Lock-up cancel
solenoid’1

‘1:

1
1

Equipped on model
34X69, 34X70 and 34X80

I

: Electrical signal

1
1

Overdrive
control switch

OD cancel solenoid :
;

….

: Hydraulic pressure

I

J

L

AT-15

SAT985HA

DESCRIPTION
NOTE

AT-16

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Preliminary Check (Prior to Road Testing)

Fluid leakage

AIT FLUID CHECK
Fluid leakage check
1.
2.
3.
4.

Clean area suspected of leaking, — for example, mating
surface of converter housing and transmission case.
Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in «0»
position and wait a few minutes.
Stop engine.
Check for fresh leakage.

SAT288G

Fluid condition check
Fluid color

Suspected problem

Oark or black with burned odor

Wear of frictional material

Milky pink

Water contamination
— Road water entering through
filler tube or breather

Varnished fluid, light to dark brown
and tacky

Oxidation
— Over or under filling
— Overheating

Fluid level check — Refer to MA section (CHASSIS AND
BODY MAINTENANCE).

Road Testing
Perform
AT-20.

road

tests

using

«Symptom»

chart.

Refer to page

«P» POSITION
1.

2.

Place selector lever in «P» position and start engine. Stop
engine and repeat the procedure in all positions, including
neutral position.
Stop vehicle on a slight upgrade and place selector lever in
«P» position. Release parking brake to make sure vehicle
remains locked.

«R» POSITION
1.
2.

Manually move selector lever from «P» to «R», and note
shift quality.
Drive vehicle in reverse long enough to detect slippage or
other abnormalities.

«N» POSITION
1.
2.

Manually move selector lever from «R» and «0» to «N» and
note shift quality.
Release parking brake with selector lever in «N» position.
Lightly depress accelerator
pedal to make sure vehicle
does not move. (When vehicle is new or soon after clutches
have been replaced, vehicle may move slightly. This is not
a problem.)

AT-17

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Road Testing (Cont’d)
«0» POSITION

SAT612GA

1. Manually move selector lever from «N» to «D» position, and
note shift quality.
2. Using the shift schedule as a reference, drive vehicle in «D»
position. Record, on symptom chart, respective vehicle
speeds at which up-shifting and down-shifting occur. These
speeds are to be read at three different throttle positions
(light, half and full), respectively. Also determine the timing
at which shocks are encountered during shifting and which
clutches are engaged.
3. Determine whether lock-up properly occurs while driving
vehicle in proper gear position and at proper vehicle speed.
4. Check to determine if shifting to overdrive gear cannot be
made while OD control switch is «OFF».
5. Drive vehicle in «D3» position at half to light throttle position. Keep driving at 60 to 70 km/h (34 to 43 MPH). FUlly
depress accelerator pedal to make sure transaxle downshifts from 3rd to 2nd gear.
6. Drive vehicle in «D2» position at half to light throttle position. Keep driving at 25 to 35 km/h (16 to 22 MPH). Fully
depress accelerator pedal to make sure transaxle downshifts from 2nd to 1st gear.

SAT497G

«2» POSITION
1. Shift to «2» position and make sure vehicle starts in 1st
gear.
2. Increase vehicle speed to make sure transaxle upshifts from
1st to 2nd gear.
3. Further increase vehicle speed. Make sure transaxle does
not upshift to 3rd gear.
4. Drive vehicle in «22» position at half to light throttle position.
Keep driving at 25 to 35 km/h (16 to 22 MPH). Fully depress
accelerator pedal to make sure transaxle downshifts from
2nd to 1st gear.
5. Allow vehicle to run idle while in «2» position to make sure
that transaxle downshifts to 1st gear.
6. Move selector lever to «D» position and allow vehicle to
operate at 30 to 40 km/h (19 to 25 MPH). Then, shift to «2»
position to make sure transaxle downshifts to 2nd gear.

«1» POSITION
1. Place selector lever in «1» position and accelerate vehicle.
Make sure transaxle does not shift from 1st to 2nd gear
although vehicle speed increases.
2. Drive vehicle in «1» position. Release accelerator pedal to
make sure that engine compression acts as a brake.
3. Place selector lever in «D» or «2» position and allow vehicle to run at 15 to 25 km/h (9 to 16 MPH). Then move selector lever to «1» position to make sure transaxle downshifts
to 1st gear.

AT-18

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Road Testing (Cont’d)
SHIFT SCHEDULE
Drive the vehicle for approx. 10 minutes. Measure the oil temperature. When the oil temperature
becomes between 50 and
80°C (122 and 176°F), carry out this check.

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING

GEARS

Model 34X68
Throttle position
Full throttle

Half throttle

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
0, ~ O2

O2

->

03

48 — 56

88 — 96

(30 — 35)

(55 — 60)

03

->

04

04

~

03

03

->

O2

O2

->

0,

12

~

1,

133 — 141

80 — 88

37 — 45

45 — 53

(83 — 88)

(50 — 55)

(23 — 28)

(28 — 33)

31 — 39

54 — 62

102 — 110

75 — 83

44 — 52

7 — 15

45 — 53

(19 — 24)

(34 — 39)

(63 — 68)

(47 — 52)

(27 — 32)

(4 — 9)

(28 — 33)

O2

03

Model 34X69 and 34X70
Throttle pasition
Full throttle

Half throttle

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
0, ~ O2

~

03

51 — 60

94 — 102

(32 — 37)

(58 — 63)

->

04

04

~

03

03

->

O2

O2

~

0,

12

~

1,

136 — 144

85 — 93

40 — 48

48 — 56

(85 — 89)

(53 — 58)

(25 — 30)

(30 — 35)

30 — 38

52 — 60

97 — 105

67 — 75

42 — 50

8 — 16

48 — 56

(19 — 24)

(32 — 37)

(60 — 65)

(42 — 47)

(26 — 31)

(5 — 10)

(30 — 35)

0, ~ O2

O2

03

Model 34X80
Throttle position
Full throttle

Half throttle

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
->

03

52 — 60

100 — 108

(32 — 37)

(62 — 67)

~

04

04

->

03

03

~

O2

O2

->

0,

1″ -> 1,

145 — 153

90 — 98

40 — 48

49 — 57

(90 — 95)

(56 — 61)

(25 — 30)

(30 — 35)

30 — 38

53 — 61

103 — 111

69 — 77

42 — 50

8 — 16

49 — 57

(19 — 24)

(33 — 38)

(64 — 69)

(43 — 48)

(26 — 31)

(5 — 10)

(30 — 35)

Model 34X81
Throttle position
Full throttle

Half throttle

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
0, ~ O2

O2

->

03

58 — 66

107 — 115

(36 — 41)

(66 — 71)

03

~

04

04

->

03

03

->

O2

O2

~

0,

12

~

1,

160 — 168

96 — 104

39 — 47

48 — 56

(99 — 104)

(60 — 65)

(24 — 29)

(30 — 35)

33 — 41

57 — 65

105 — 113

69 — 77

45 — 53

8 — 16

48 — 56

(21 — 25)

(35 — 40)

(65 — 70)

(43 — 48)

(28 — 33)

(5 — 10)

(30 — 35)

AT-19

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Road Testing (Cont’d)
ROAD TEST SYMPTOM CHART
Numbers are arranged in order of probability.
Perform inspections starting with number one
and work up.
Circled numbers indicate that the transaxle
must be removed from the vehicle.

ON VEHICLE

~

Q)

c:
.;:

~

‘;:

::l
0″

«lJ

Iii

~

«lJ

c:

ro

;:

(/)

(/)

~
;:

Ol

c:

~

~
::l

(/)
(/)

Q)

>
Iii
>

ec s:0

E

0

c:

0

.E

I-

c:
W

ec

:::i

0

2

5

3

4

7

When shifting from 1st to 2nd or
2nd to 3rd

2

4

3

6

When shifting from 3rd to 4th

2

4

3

5

When shifting from D to 2 and 1
position.
When OD switch is set from
«ON» to «OFF»

2

4

3

5

When shifting from 2nd to 1st in
«1» position

2

4

3

5

When shifting from 1st to 2nd

2

4

3

5

When shifting from 2nd to 3rd

2

4

3

6

When shifting from 3rd to 4th

2

4

3

5

Sharp shocks in shifting from «N» to «D» position

Shift slippage with accelerator
pedal depressed

:0
ro

.l:l

od

<.l

0

~

Q)

~e

Q)

c:

‘0,

~
0Q)

0

When shifting from 4th to 2nd

2

5

3

6

When shifting from 4th to 3rd

2

4

3

6

When shifting from 4th to 1st
and shifting from 3rd to 1st

2

5

3

6

When vehicle starts

2

4

3

6

When upshifting

2

4

3

7

When shifting from «D» to «2»
and» 1″ position

2

4

3

5

When OD switch is set from
«ON» to «OFF»

2

4

3

7

When shifting from 2nd to 1st in
«1» position

2

4

3

5

Too Iowa gear change point
from 2nd to 3rd and from 3rd to
2nd.

3

2

6

Too high a gear change point
from 2nd to 3rd and from 3rd to
2nd.

3

2

6

Too Iowa gear change point
from 2nd to 1st in «1» position.

3

2

6

Too high a gear change point
from 2nd to 1st in «1» position.

3

2

6

Poor power/acceleration

No engine braking

Shift quality

AT-20

Q)

>
Iii
>
Q)

E

~e

l-

Q)

>

co>

Q)

~

eC

>
Iii
>

ro
«3

~

<.l

~

B

«lJ

0-

>
2

Q)

Shift slippage when upshifting

Q)

>
Iii
>

Q)

Q)
Q)

ro

>
Iii
>

Q)

C
2

«lJ

c:

‘0

Q)

>
Iii
>

Ol

: Valve expected to be malfunctioning

Shift shocks

~

Ol

~
~
::l
(/)
(/)

~

0

Q)

>
Iii
>

Q)

Q)

>
Iii
>

>
Iii
>

~

.c

;:

;;:

(/)

(/)

M

C)’

N

.l:l
.2
u
c:

eQ;

>
0

«lJ

0

E

~
::l

(/)
(/)
Q)

0:

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Road Testing (Cont’d)

..

ON VEHICLE

~

OFF VEHICLE

Q)

>

Iii
>

~

~0
~0

Q)

>

Iii

Q)

>

Q)

>

Iii

Qi

Q)

>

>
~

Iii

Q)

>

Q)

;;::

(;

‘6

c;;

0

~
~

E

E

c:::

~
0

(J
(J

«0

nl

-‘»
(J

‘}’

~

~

>

Q)

>

Iii

Iii
>

>

OJ

OJ

U

c:::

«E
:;:;

‘}’
C»)

c:::

~
«0
~
ii)
~

>

Iii

0

>

~
CT

(;
l-

Q)

>

Oi

Q)

Q)

Q)

~
«0

>

:;

>

Iii
>

0

1:

E

«0

u

Q)
Q)

~
.r:
I-

Q)

0-

‘»

.r:

::

Q)

u
c:::

0

~
~
0
..J

~

Q)

0(J

>

Oi

«2

u

Q)

.r:

>

.B

CT
Q)

‘»

N

.}

«0
0

~
~

‘»‘»
Ci
Q)

~
0
c:::

(j;
>

0

~

c:::

Q)

>

Oi

>

(;
c:::

(j;
>

0

~

‘»

>

Iii

Q)

~
~
~>
c:::
u

B

c:::

Q)

(5

‘»

Qj
(J

c:::

nl
(J

D
0

~
U
~
Q)

t
Q)

>
c:::
0
u

~

Q)

CT

0

E

~

Q)

‘»

nl
Q)

~
0
~
Q)

«~

~

«0

.r:
u

nl

U

.r:

.r:

>-

.B

~

~

U

‘»
c:::

nl

‘»(;

Z

.r:

(;

.B

~~
E
~

~~
E
~

(;

(J
(J

I-

<{

(J
(J

<{

c:::

ill
«0

D

OJ

«;:

«~

‘»c:::0
E

c:::

E’

:;

c:::

.B
«~

«2′»

1:
0
(J

D
0

(j;
t
>
c:::
0
u

~

Q)

CT

(;
l-

5

.r:
u

.B

Q)

6

I

.r:

~

0-

E

~
0-

u
Q)

~
Q)

>

Q)

(5

e::

9

8

.r:

.B

~

u

.r:
OJ

I

:;
u

nl
Q)

c:::

«0

0
«0

tii

tii

(;

(;

~

LL

~

LL

.B

~

U
c:::

;:

(j;
>
0

>nl

~

Q)

c:::

Q)

>

~
o1S

~
0

~
0

..J

A

8
5

4

7
5

5

5

If

I[

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

AT-21

c:::

lD

0..

~

6

6
6
8

7

7

6

10

11

7

8

11

8

9

7

13

14

15
10

16

17

12

11

9
9

10
8
8

8

6

4

OJ

~

8
9

0

-‘»

Q)

7

6

6

u

.Q

9

9

6

E

nl

c:::

6

7

7

«0

7

7

4

0
0-

tii

7

8

5

c:::
Q)
c:::

Q)

~

0

..J

tl

:;
U

8
8

.r:

.r:
u

7

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Road Testing (Cont’d)
~

Numbers are arranged in order of probability.
Perform inspections starting with number one
and work up.
Circled numbers indicate that the transaxle
must be removed from the vehicle.

(J)

. Valve expected to be malfunctioning

~

«0

::J

c:

III

‘0
c:

III

a;

Lock-up quality

(J)

:0

III
<.>

£

.~
rtl

~

eC

.8
:0

6

u

EO

0

J::.

Q)

rtl

~

.~
(J)

E

e

J::.

~

01

c:

~
(J)

.!::
01

c:
UJ

oil

~
::J
rtl
rtl

~

0.
(J)

c:

(J)

>
0;
>

ec
0

::i

u

Failure to change gear from 4th
to 2nd with accelerator pedal
depressed.

3

2

6

Failure to change gear from 3rd
to 2nd with accelerator pedal
depressed.

3

2

6

Failure to change gear from 1st
to 2nd in «0» and «2» position.

3

2

6

Vehicle does not start from
«1st» in «0» and «2» position.

3

2

6

Failure to change gear to 3rd
and 4th in «0» position.

3

2

6

Changes gear to 1st directly
when selector lever is set from
«D» to «1» position.

3

2

6

Changes gear to 2nd in «1»
position.

3

2

6

Lock-up point is extremely high
or low.

3

2

6

Torque converter does not lockup.

3

2

7

Lock-up is not released when
accelerator pedal is released.
Engine does not start in «P» and «N» positions or engine starts
in positions other than «P» and «N» positions.

2

2

Vehicle moves with selector lever in «P» position.

AT-22

3

.8III

«0

0.

J::.

~

>

>
0;
>

(J)

«0
(J)
(J)

(J)

>
0;
>
(J)

E

0

.c~

>
0;
>

(J)

c

.~

rr
«0

(J)

>
0;
>

01
c:
.;::

0;

Shift quality

..

ON VEHICLE

(J)

:;
01

>
0;
>
0;

~
~
::J

::J

rtl
rtl
(J)

c:

III

::E

a:

>
0;
>

J::.

ii

0
<.>

(J)

(J)

(J)

>
0;
>

>
0;
>

>
0;
>

;:

‘E

;t:

J::.
rtl

J::.
rtl

«‘f

C’)

C’)

N

:c
rtl

C)’

(J)

eC
£

::J
(3

c:

~
0

E

~

2

::J

>

a:

li;
0

rtl
rtl
(J)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Road Testing (Conl’d)

~ …

ON VEHICLE

~

OFF VEHICLE

QJ

>

OJ

>

«0

.0
c:

QJ

QJ

>

(5

OJ
>

OJ

QJ

OJ

>

>

QJ

>

0

.8

~
«0
E
c:

:;:
0
«0


()

~

QJ

>

QJ

~
::l

E
::l
()
()

OJ

>

Ol

.~
E

:;:;

‘}’
C’)

>

OJ

>

Ol

c:
.0
::l

«0

~
u;
~

~
~

2
Qi
>
c:

0
()

QJ
::l

0
f-

rr

0

(5

QJ

>

OJ

>

QJ

>

OJ

~

«0
0

E
QJ

E

2
.s::
f-

>

«5
()

«0
QJ
QJ
0.

en

.s::

::;

>

OJ

>

e1:
0
()

0.

l’


()
0
..J

QJ

>

~

>

en
en

OJ

QJ
()

c:
QJ
::l

0QJ

en
N

..,;.

QJ

0.
0c:
Qi

>

QJ

>

OJ

>

ac:
Qi

>

0

0

Cl

Cl

4

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

4

5

en

>

.s::

.B
::l
t3

~

‘»

~
~en

0

2

>

«0

Qi

en

Z

.s::

>
c:

0

0

.~

«0

::l

E

QJ

>

OJ

QJ

en

.0
c:

~0
en

Qi

Q)

0

()

()

c:

‘»

()

Cl

0

QJ
::l

2″

0
f-

QJ

Cl

1ii

1ii

::l

::l

E

E

()
()

()
()

<{

<{

::l

::l

Ol

c:

..:;

.~

‘»

.s::

‘»

.B

en
c:
0

E

c:

~

7

.B
::l
t3

c:

c:

.B

.s::

«0

Qi

.~

t

.s::

.s::

en

>
c:

.B

::l

.B
::l
t3

e1:
0

()

Cl

0

QJ

0
()

QJ
::l

0-

0

f-

.s::

>-

0.

E

::l
0.

<5

u
QJ

en

Qi

>
QJ

a:

.s::

.B
::l
t3
.s::
Ol

I

«0

:a

~
0

u..

‘»d>

:;:

c:

0
«0

:a:;:

0
u..

.s::

.B

::l

t3
c:

.B
::l
t3
>-

‘»

:;:
d>

.s::

.B

.!!l

t3

QJ

~
QJ

>

~

t

>

:;:

:;:

0
..J

0
..J

QJ

0

0

QJ

c:

0

c:
c:

::l

o(l

0.

«0

c:

~ID

Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in
«0» position.


SAT7678

6. Accelerate to wide-open throttle gradually while applying
foot brake.
7. Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately
release throttle.
• During test, never hold throttle wide-open for more than 5
seconds.
Stall revolution .standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-166.

SAT514G

8. Move selector lever to «N» position.
9. Cool off ATF.
• Run engine at idle for at least one minute.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in «2», «1» and
«R positions.
n

SAT7718

AT-24

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Stall Tasting (Cont’d)
JUDGEMENT

OF STALL TEST
Selector

Damaged

Judgement

lever position

o

L
L

H

o
o

L

o

H

L

D

H

2

H

R

o : Stall
H
L

revolution
: Stall revolution
than specified.

is normal.
is higher

: Stall revolution
than specified.

is lower

components

Forward
cluth

one-way
Engine


Torque converter
one-way clutch

Hydraulic

circuit

line pressure

clutch

Low one-way

clutch

for

control

(Line pressure

Reverse

is low.)

D

H

2

H

R
Selector

lever position

o
o

H

o

H

o

Clutches and brakes except
high clutch, brake band and
overrun clutch are OK.
(Condition of high clutch,
brake band and overrun
clutch cannot
stall test.)

be confirmed

by

Judgement

SAT871H

AT-25

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Pressure Testing

Test port for
line pressure

Location of pressure test port.
Always replace pressure plugs
bolts.

as they are self-sealing

governor pressure
SAT565D

LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Check AfT and engine fluid levels. If necessary, add fluid.
Drive vehicle for about 10 minutes until engine oil and ATF
reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 — 80°C (122 — 176°F)

3.

Install pressure

SAT647B

gauge to line pressure

port.

4. Set parking brake and block wheels.
Continue to depress brake pedal fully while
pressure test at stall speed.

performing

line

SAT513G

5.

Start engine and measure
speed.
Line pressure:
Refer to SOS, AT-166.

JUDGEMENT

SAT494G

line pressure

at idle and stall

OF LINE PRESSURE TEST

If line pressure does not rise, first check to make sure that
throttle wire is connected properly.
1) When line pressure while idling is low at all positions («D»,
«2», «1», «R» and «P»), the problem may be due to:

Wear on interior of oil pump

AT-26

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Pressure Testing (Cont’d)

Oil leakage at or around oil pump, control valve body, transmission case or governor

Sticking pressure regulator valve

Sticking pressure modifier valve
2) When line pressure while idling is low at a particular
position, check the following.

If oil leaks at or around low & reverse brake circuit, line
pressure becomes low in «R» position. But line pressure is
normal in «P», «D», «2» or «1» position.
3) When line pressure is high while idling, pressure regulator
valve may have stuck.

GOVERNOR

PRESSURE TESTING

1. Check AIT and engine fluid levels. If necessary, add fluid.
2.. Drive vehicle for about 10 minutes until engine oil and ATF
reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 — 80°C (122 — 176°F)

‘-)

~)o

(

3.

Install pressure

gauge to governor

pressure

port.

4.
5.
6.
Be

Set parking brake and block rear wheels.
Jack up front wheels.
Set selector lever in D position and drive vehicle.
careful of rotating wheels.

Front

SAT498G

Governor pressure:

Governor
pressure
is not generated
when vehicle
is
stopped. (front wheels are not rotating.)

Governor pressure rises gradually in response to vehicle
speed. (front wheel rotating speed.)
If not, check governor valve assembly. Refer to AT-36.

AT-27

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Wiring Diagram —

AT —

AT-A/T-01
(b):

:
@:
FUSE
BLOCK
(J!B)

@:
@:
@:

Refer to EL-POWER.

([@
(El06)

LHD models
RHO models
For Europe and Israel
Except@
GA engine
SR engine

l—t~’~

Y ~Next

I

y

III
Y

~ .~

~

y
(E202)

METER (00
C~INATION

OFF
INDICATOR)

OR!B

I .-

O~

OR!B ~1-

DRIB

(BID (Elan

CBID

rm

3 00 CANCEL
SOLENOID
VALVE
(E224) : @
OR!B

I

L

(El0n

OVERDRIVE
CONTROL
SWITCH
~

~

.-1
OR!B ~O

OR!B ~

/I; II

P!B@l)
E20l

I P!B ~

@ (E20n

SR

i

P!B ~

II II E203
P!B ~

<0>
~
0—1

-cz::n.

OR!B
OR!B ~
(E?6)(E203)

SR

OFF

~
~
OR!B P!B

4 ~~
TA
~o ~

DRIB -ea-O~

OR!B ~

ORI!B

ON

t~)
I!::iJl

@

O~

A!T CONTROL
VALVE (E223) : @
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
SOLENOID
VALVE

Y

~
I .-

112•61

page

L

PIB -@>Next

page

JOINT
CONNECTOR-1

B

L ~==~
~

B

B

r———————————,

Refer to last page
(Foldout page) .
~

(E224)

~GY
L

~

~~

~@D

~W

~

~
B

rn:rn:rz::rnJ

(E202),~
B
GY

CHID ,(EtOn
([@ ,(El06)

~
@J)
W@
B

ITIII:illIillIi ~

~

BR
HAT001

AT-28

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Wiring Diagram — AT —

(Coni’ d)

AT-A/T-02

ECM
(ECCS

CONTROL
MODULE)

LKUP
@

NEUT

I1¥Jl

3 5
11 • 1

P/B

t

LHD models
: RHO models
@: Except for Europe
and Israel
~:
GA engine for Australia
@: Except@
*1 … @ 30 , @ 115
(b):

em

G/OR

~CIID~

~-
I

G/OR

. {~P/8~
~

G/OR

lltlJr — $100 — ~

Precedlng ~
page

G/OR

CHID

c:

C
Q)

0-

o

,/

,-

r-/

~

I

2

I

I
I
Normal

:

.J

,/
/

£

I-

If throttle wire stroke is improperly adjusted the following problems may arise.
• «P1» is the throttle drum fully-open position. When «P1» is
too far in direction «T», the shift schedule will be @ in the
figure. And the kickdown range will greatly increase.
• When «P1» is too far in direction «U», the shift schedule will
be CD in the figure. And the kickdown will not occur.

,,~/~
o

Vehicle speed
SAT669H

AT-34

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Cable Installation and Adjustment

Move selector lever from the «P» range to the «1» range.
You should be able to feel the detents in each range.
The control cable needs adjustment in the following cases:
1) When the detents cannot be felt;
2) When the pointer indicating the range is improperly
aligned.
Always adjust control cable when it is removed from selector lever or manual shaft.

SEC. 349

Front

~

<;:::J

Selector lever assembly

4.4 — 5.9 (0.45 — 0.60, 39.1 — 52.1) Transax1,e
~

Cable bracket

~4.4

~

— 5.9
(0.45 • 0.60.
39.1 — 52.1)

4.4 • 5.9 (0.45 — 0.60, 39.1 — 52.1)

‘I
Floor panel

17.5 — 23.7 (1.8 • 2.4, 13 • 17)
Sub frame

.~

4.4 — 5.9 (0.45 • 0.60. 39.1 — 52.1)

AIT control cable assembly

~

: N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

~

: N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)
SAT499HA

INSTALLATION
-{‘

.~

did

Selector lever

I’y- Clamp
,I .
‘4’i»» .,)

‘OJ}

»

I
,i
Selector lever bracket Vu
7/ /
( (
. tll@:::(-c/»,/.I
»’J)!I’r.
cY’?1I /’
;
j \-.. ) ~j ‘.-It
‘.~/;,J~
‘j (,k;;. l~.: eee:::
Control cable
t;- ‘II/.f Lock nut ~i’.— l~}I’
p
u
/,<,:.~ 4.4 • 5.9 N.m
.. »
— (0.45 — 0.6 kg-m,
‘~-39.1 — 52.1 in-Ib)

A(

i t:J- .,’-‘

1. Place selector lever and manual shaft at «P» position.
2. Connect control cable to selector lever and tighten control
cable lock nut. Clamp control cable to selector lever
bracket.

,

D

I

SAT230EA

AT-35

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Cable Installation and Adjustment
(Cont’d)
3.
4.

5.
6.
7,

8.

Connect control cable to manual shaft and clamp control
cable to bracket at transaxle.
Pull control cable in the direction of the arrow shown in the
illustration by specified force.
Specified force: 6.9 N (0.7 kg, 1.5 Ib)
Return control cable in the opposite direction of the arrow
for 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
Tighten control cable lock nut.
Move selector lever from «P» position to «1» position. Make
sure that selector lever can be moved smoothly without any
sliding noise.
Apply grease to contacting areas of selector lever and control cable. Install any part removed.

SAT576E

ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

7.

Loosen control cable lock nut at transaxle side.
Place selector lever and manual shaft at «P» position.
Pull control cable in the direction of the arrow shown in the
illustration by specified force.
Specified force: 6.9 N (0.7 kg, 1.5 Ib)
Return control cable in the opposite direction of the arrow
for 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
Tighten control cable lock nut.
Move selector lever from «P» position to «1» position. Make
sure that selector lever can be moved smoothly without any
sliding noise.
Apply grease to contacting areas of selector lever and control cable.

SAT577E

Governor Valve
1.
2.
3,

Remove air duct.
Remove governor
Remove governor

AT-36

cap snap ring.
cap,

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Governor Valve (Cont’d)
4.
5.

Remove governor valve assembly from transaxle.
Check governor valve assembly if necessary «DISASSEMBLY»,
AT-65.

Refer to

Inhibitor Switch Adjustment
1. Remove control cable end from manual shaft.
2. Set manual shaft in «N» position.
3.» Loosen inhibitor switch fixing bolts.

4.

Use a 4 mm (0.16 in) pin for this adjustment.

a. Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole.
b.

5.
6.
7.
8.
SAT580E

9.

Rotate inhibitor switch until the pin can also be inserted
straight into hole in inhibitor switch.
Tighten inhibitor switch fixing bolts.
Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting inhibitor
switch.
Reinstall any part removed.
Adjust control cable — Refer to «Control Cable Installation
and Adjustment», AT-35.
Check continuity of inhibitor switch — Refer to «Electrical
Components Inspection», AT-30.

Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement
1.
2.

Remove drive shaft assemblies. Refer to FA section
(«Removal»,
«FRONT AXLE — Drive Shaft»).
Remove oil seals.

AT-37

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement

(Cont’d)

3. Install oil seals.
• Apply ATF to oil seal surface before installing.

Converter housing side (RHS)

Transmission

case side (LHS)

SAT259EA

Transmission
case side
B

Oil
seal

Converter housing
side

Install oil seals so that dimensions «A» and «8» are within
specifications.
Unit: mm (in)

Oil seal

A

B

5.5 — 6.5 (0.217 — 0.256)

0.5 (0.020) or less

4. Reinstall any part removed.
A
SAT639D

AT-38

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal








Remove battery and bracket.
Remove air duct.
Disconnect AIT solenoid harness connector, inhibitor switch
harness connector and speedometer
pinion harness connector.
Disconnect throttle wire at engine side.
Drain ATF.
Remove undercover and side cover.
Disconnect control cable from transaxle.
Disconnect oil cooler hoses.

Remove
«FRONT
Remove
Remove

drive shafts Refer to FA section
AXLE — Drive Shaft»).
exhaust front tube.
starter motor from transaxle.

(«Removal»,


Remove front and rear gussets and engine rear plate.

Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.
Rotate crankshaft for access to securing bolts.

Support engine by placing a jack under oil pan.
Do not place jack under oil pan drain plug.




Support transaxle with a jack.
Remove LH and rear mountings from transaxle.
Remove bolts fixing AIT to engine.
Lower transaxle while supporting it with a jack.

AT-39

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Installation

Drive plate runout
Maximum allowable runout:
Refer to EM section («Inspection»,
«CYLINDER
BLOCK»).
If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate with
ring gear.

When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure
distance «A» to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance «A»:
Except model 34X81
21.1 mm (0.831 in) or more
Model 34X81
15.9 mm (0.626 in) or more


Install converter to drive plate.
With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to
check that transaxle rotates freely without binding.

SAT037C

SAT573D

o AIT to engine
o Engine (gusset)


Tighten bolts fixing transaxle
GA engine models

to AIT

Tightening torque
N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

G)

30 — 40 (3.1 — 4.1,22 — 30)

50 (1.97)

@

.30 — 40 (3.1 — 4.1, 22 — 30)

30 (1.18)

@

16 — 21 (1.6 — 2.1,12 — 15)

25 (0.98)

Front gusset to
engine

30 — 40 (3.1 — 4.1,22 — 30)

20 (0.79)

Rear gusset to
engine

16 — 21 (1.6 — 2.1,12 — 15)

16 (0.63)

AT-40

Bolt length
mm (in)

«e»

Bolt No.

REMOVAL AND INSTAllATION
Installation (Cont’d)
SR engine models

:0

E
Ql
en

gj
0.

E
::>

0.

~
E
:cen
Cl

c

en::>
‘0

‘»

Cl

c
.~
Ql

.0
Ql

«0

«in

Ql
.0

.a

Cl

c
«in

::>

o

.c

~

ill
>
c

o

()

~

ill
>
c

0

()

e;;-

Ql

.».

~

C»l
C»l

::>
0-

0
cD
It)

:!.
01
It)

.».
.».

(;j
Ql

Cl
Ql

«0

CI.i

o

SAT1991

AT-42

SEC. 315
«Q)

‘»‘»

~c
Qi.x
«-()


::J ~
Q) Q)

» (5
LL::.O

c.

~ ~ c.
>->-u

o.o.~
c.c.Q)
««en

SAT932HA

AT-43

MAJOR OVERHAUL
Except Model 34X81

~

:0-

.~

.:::

~ E6>
~ ~
Ol

E

E

z z

~~

…ai
….
co

o10

g
COO
ai.

o

e

SAT2001

AT-44

II)
(‘)
:;

c

0

….
13 (‘)
3~
SAT2011

AT-45

MAJOR OVERHAUL
Shift Control Components

~

SEC. 349

I
»»’-y.

Control cable clamp~

«.

NT

«01co,

p

4.4 • 5.9 (0.45 • 0.6, 39.1 • 52.1)

Return

«‘.,,’,,»
Selector lever

spring

m

rror.;

«II»

S»»», ,,,»

k,o’

-~~
Position indicator

Control lever assemblY~

~11.8
• 14.7
(1.20 — 1.50, 8.76 • 10.84)
~

4.4 — 5.9
(0.45 • 0.6, 39.1 — 52.1)

Dust cover

AT-46

~

: N’m (kg-m. in-Ib)

~

: N’m (kg-m, tt-Ib)

SATOBOI

MAJOR OVERHAUL
Oil Channel
High clutch pressure

Torque converter pressure
(Lock-up released)

Reverse clutch
pressure

Reverse clutch
pressure
Oil pump suction hole
Differential lubricant hole

Torque converter pressure
(Lock-up released)
SIR accumulator shoulder pressure
SIR accumulator back pressure
(Reverse clutch pressure)

Oil cooler tube (IN)
Torque converter pressure
(Lock-up applied)
» Servo 4th apply chamber pressure
Servo 2nd apply chamber pressure
• Servo 3rd release
chamber pressure

Oil pump suction hole
Torque converter
pressure
(Lock-up applied)

Oil pump discharge hole
High clutch pressure
Low & reverse brake pressure
Overrun clutch pressure
Forward clutch pressure

Forward clutch pressure

Oil cooler tube (OUT) hole

Overrun clutch pressure
Low & reverse brake
pressure

Torque converter
pressure
(Lock-up applied)
Torque converter
pressure
(Lock-up released)

High clutch pressure
Oil pump discharge hole
Reverse clutch
pressure
Oil pump suction hole

Governor pressure

Oil cooler tube (IN) hole

Line pressure

SAT586DC

AT-47

MAJOR OVERHAUL
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings — Except
Model 34X81
Outer diameter and color of thrust washers
Item number

Outer diameter

@

mm (inl

Outer and inner diameter of needle bearings
Color

Item number

Outer diameter
mm(in)

Inner diameter

47.0 (1.8501

32.0 (1.2601

35011.3781

20.1 10.7911

72.012.8351
black

@

78.5 13.091)

mm(in)

60.012.3621

42.00.6541

60.0 (2.362)

45.011.7721

47.011.850)

30011.1811

42.6 0.677)

26.1 0.0281

48.0 (1890)

33.511.319)

54.0 121261

40.1 11.5791

Outer & inner diameter of bearing races, adjusting shims and
adjusting spacer
Outer diameter of snap rings

Outer diameter

Inner diameter

mm linl

mm (in)

@

48.00.8901

33.0 (1.299)

Q.

142.0 (5.591

@

29.0 11.1421

25.0 (0.9841

CV

113.0 (4.451

@

34.5 (358)

26.1 11.0281

@

162.4 (6391

@

79.5 13.1301

72.012.835)

@

135.4 15.331

~

55.012.165)

42.0 (1.654)

Item number

*: Select

Item number

proper thickness.

AT-48

Outer diameter

mm lin)

CID

126.0 (4.961

@

161.5 16.361

SAT510H

MAJOR OVERHAUL
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings — Model 34X81
Outer & inner diameter of needle bearings

Outer diameter and color of thrust washers
Item number

Outer diameter
mm (in)

@

72.0 (2.835)

@

78.5 (3.091)

Outer diameter

Item number

Color

mm (in)

Black

Inner diameter
mm (in)

47.0 (1.850)

32.0 (1.260)

35.0 (1.378)

20.0 (0.787)

60.0 (2.362)

42.0 (1.654)

60.0 (2.362)

45.0 (1.772)

47.0 (1.850)

30.0 (1.181)

42.6 (1.677)

26.1 (1.028)

48.0 (1.890)

33.5 (1.319)

55.0 (2.165)

40.5 (1.594)

60.0 (2.362)

40.1 (1.579)

Outer diameter of snap rings

* : Select proper thickness.

Item number

Outer diameter mm (in)

Item number

Outer diameter
mm (in)

Inner diameter
mm (in)

CD
ClJ
0

@

48.0 (1.890)

33.0 (1.299)

0

135.4 (5.33)

@

72.0 (2.835)

61.0 (2.402)

~

161.5 (6.36)

@

34.5 (1358)

26.1 (1.028)

@

126.0 (4.96)

@

68.0 (2.677)

60.0 (2.362)

(j)

40.5 (1.594)

Outer & inner diameter of bearing race and adjusting shims

142.0 (5.59)
113.0 (4.45)
162.4 (6.39)

SAT106EC

AT-49

DISASSEMBL Y
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.

J!in

plug

SAT007D

2. Remove torque converter.

/

~:e2
I

;,cr~~ar~

— ~

g
….

..

/

/

3. Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as
shown at left.
a. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
b. While fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one-way
clutch spline using flat-bladed screwdriver.
c. Check inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace
torque converter assembly.

/

Bend a wire and use
it as a check tool .
.—-:Approx. 3.0 (0.118)
[Bend a 1.5 (0.059) die ..
wire In hall.]
Outer race

2

:

Approx.
15 (0.59)

Unit: mm (in)

One-way clutch
SAT009D

4. Remove oil charging pipe and oil cooler tube.

SAT586H

AT-50

DISASSEMBL Y
5.
6.

Set manual shaft to «P» position.
Remove inhibitor switch.

7.

Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
Do not reuse oil pan bolts.

8.

Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause
of malfunction.
If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or
contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches,
band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe
clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves,
servo and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair
of AlT. Refer to LC section («Radiator», «ENGINE COOLING
SYSTEM»).

SAT620E

Waste
material

Oil pan
SAT013D

9.
a.

Remove control valve assembly according to the following
procedures.
Remove control valve assembly mounting bolts @, CID, @
and @.

SAT711D

AT-51

DISASSEMBL Y
Model

b.

Remove stopper ring from terminal

body.

c.

Push terminal body into transmission
solenoid harness.

34X68

case and draw out

SAT496HB

10. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly.

SAT0170

11. Remove return spring from SIR accumulator

piston.

12. Remove SIR accumulator piston with compressed
13. Remove O-rings from SIR accumulator piston.

AT-52

air.

DISASSEMBL Y
14. Remove N-D accumulator
piston and return
compressed air.
15. Remove O-rings from N-D accumulator piston.

(‘l:,~~
o

o
Contact

0

~A~~l

u~!~~:
&k .~
9

‘»~~~~~)(?~~
SIR

accumulator piston

~.

spring

with

16. Check accumulator pistons and contact surface of transmission case for damage.
17. Check accumulator
return springs for damage and free
. length.
Unit: mm (in)
Spring

Free length

Outer diameter

SIR accumulator

spring

56.4 (2.220)

21.0 (0.827)

N-D accumulator

spring

43.5 (1.713)

28.0 (1.102)

/

SAT023DB

18. Remove lip seals from band servo oil port.

SAT129E

19. Remove oil filter for governor.

20. Check oil filter for governor

SAT024D

AT-53

for damage or clogging.

DISASSEMBL V
21. Remove throttle wire from throttle lever.

22. Remove throttle wire mounting bolt.
23. Draw out throttle wire from transmission case.

All models —

24. Remove converter housing according to the following procedures.
a. Remove converter housing mounting bolts @ and CID.

b. Remove converter housing.

c. Remove O-ring from differential oil port.

AT-54

DISASSEMBL V
25. Remove final drive assembly from transmission case.

If it is difficult to lift up by hand, tap final drive slightly with
a soft hammer (Except model 34X81).

SAT030D

26. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transmission case (Model 34X81).

27. Remove differential
mission case.

side bearing adjusting

shim from trans-

SAT132E

28. Remove differential side bearing outer race from converter
housing (Model 34X81).

KV381054S0

SAT840DB

29. Remove oil seal from converter
driver.

Be careful not to damage case.

SAT133E

AT-55

housing

using

a screw-

DISASSEMBL

Y

30. Remove side oil seal from transmission case using a screwdriver.

31. Remove oil tube from converter housing.

SAT134E

32. Remove oil pump according to the following procedures.
a. Remove O-ring from input shaft.

b. Remove oil pump assembly from transmission case.

c. Remove thrust washer and bearing race from oil pump
assembly.

AT-56

DISASSEMBLY
33. Remove brake band according to the following procedures.
a. Loosen lock nut, then back off anchor end pin.

Do not reuse anchor end pin.

l~~

.

b.

Remove brake band from transmission

case.

To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not
stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing the
brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in the
figure at left.
Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band .

_~

Unit: mm (in)
SAT039D

c.

Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or burns.

34. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) and reverse
clutch according to the following procedures.
a. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) with reverse
clutch.

AT-57


i

DISASSEMBl Y
b.

Remove
clutch.

input shaft assembly

(high clutch)

from

reverse

c.
d.

Remove needle bearing from high clutch drum.
Check input shaft assembly and needle bearing for damage
or wear.

SAT042D

Needle bearing ~

High clutch

SAT043D

35. Remove high clutch hub and needle bearing from transmission case.
36. Check high clutch hub and needle bearing for damage or
wear.

Front
sun gear

37. Remove front sun gear and needle bearings from transmission case.
38. Check front sun gear and needle bearings for damage or
wear.

39. Remove front planetary carrier assembly and low one-way
clutch according to the following procedures.
a. Remove snap ring using a screwdriver.

AT-58

DISASSEMBLY
b.

Remove front planetary

c.

Check that low one-way clutch rotates in the direction of the
arrow and locks in the opposite direction.
Remove low one-way clutch from front planetary carrier by
rotating it in the direction of unlock.

d.

carrier

with low one-way clutch.

e.

Remove needle bearing from front planetary

carrier.

f.

Check front planetary carrier, low one-way clutch and needle bearing for damage or wear.
Check clearance between pinion washer and planetary carrier using feeler gauge.
Standard clearance:
0.15 — 0.70 mm (0.0059 — 0.0276 in)
Replace if the clearance exceeds 0.80 mm (0.0315 in).

Front planetary carrier

SAT049D

g.

40. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly and rear sun gear
according to the following procedures.
a. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly from transmission
case.

AT-59

DISASSEMBL Y

~

b.

Remove rear sun gear from rear planetary

c.

Remove needle
assembly.

d.

Check rear planetary carrier, rear sun gear and needle
bearings for damage or wear.
Check clearance between pinion washer and rear planetary
carrier using feeler gauge.
Standard clearance:
0.15 .0.70 mm (0.0059 . 0.0276 in)
Replace if the clearance exceeds 0.80 mm (0.0315 in).

bearings

from

rear

carrier.

planetary

carrier

Needle bearing
SAT053D

Clearance

tarn:

e.

SAT054D

41. Remove rear internal gear from transmission

case.

Rear internal
gear

~

42. Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear.
43. Check needle bearing for damage or wear.

N.»»,..»I»,
I
Rear internal gear

SAT056D

AT-50

DISASSEMBL V
44. Remove forward

clutch assembly

from transmission

case.

45. Remove thrust washer and bearing race from transmission
case.

All models —

46. Remove
driver.

return


spring

from

parking

shaft using a screw-

Parking shaft
SAT064D

Except model 34X81 —

47. Remove output shaft, output gear and reduction
according to the following procedures.
a. Remove side cover.

Do not reuse side cover bolts.

pinion gear

SAT702D

b.
c.

Set manual lever to «p» position to fix idler gear and output gear.
Unlock both idler gear and output gear lock nuts using a pin
punch.

AT-61

i

DISASSEMBL V
d. Remove idler gear and output gear lock nuts.
• Do not reuse idler gear and output gear lock nuts.

SAT704D

e. Remove idler gear and output gear using a puller.

f. Remove reduction pinion gear and output shaft.
g. Remove adjusting shim from reduction pinion gear.
h. Remove adjusting spacer from output shaft.

Reduction
pinion gear

SAT706DA

Model 34X81 —

47. Remove output shaft assembly according to the following
procedures.
a. Remove side cover bolts.

b. Remove side cover by lightly tapping it with a soft hammer.
• Be careful output shaft assembly does not drop out when
removing cover.

AT-62

DISASSEMBL Y
c.

Remove adjusting shim.

d.

Remove output shaft assembly.

If output shaft assembly is still attached to side cover, separate the two by tapping cover with a soft hammer.

e.

Remove needle bearing.

SAT439D

SAT435D

48. Disassemble reduction pinion gear according to the following procedures.
a. Set manual shaft to position «P» to fix idler gear.
b. Unlock idler gear lock nut using a pin punch.

AT-53

DISASSEMBL V
c.

Remove idler gear lock nut.

Do not reuse idler gear lock nut.

SAT061D

d. Remove idler gear with puller.

ST27180001

—«»

SAT841DA

e. Remove reduction pinion gear.
f. Remove adjusting shim from reduction pinion gear.

SAT310G

— All models 49. Draw out parking shaft and remove parking pole from transmission case.
50. Check parking pole and shaft for damage or wear.

SAT065D

«(
~~~

~,O
0

Eh~
~
-vf~SDO

II ~ ~~—‘-:c
,L.J,,=-….
o

0

~_

Parking actuator~
support

0)

CH
0

51. Remove parking actuator support from transmission case.
52. Check parking actuator support for damage or wear.

_

0

C’:l

C’:l

I-i

~~
SAT066D

AT-64

DISASSEMBL Y
53. Remove governor valve assembly according
ing procedures.
a. Remove snap ring using a screwdriver.

to the follow-

b.
c.

Remove governor cap using water pump pliers.
Remove a-ring from governor cap.

d.

Remove governor

e.

With low primary weight closed, place top of governor valve
assembly down to make sure governor valve properly lowers under its own weight.
Place top of governor assembly down. Operate both low and
high secondary weights to make sure governor valve functions properly.

valve assembly.

SAT070D

LOW secondary weight
Low primary weight

f.

Governor valve

High primary weight
High secondary weight
SAT071D

54. Remove side oil seal from transmission
driver.

Be careful not to damage case.

AT-55

case using a screw-

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Manual Shaft and Throttle Lever
SEC. 319

~

6.4 • 7.5 N.m
(0.65 — 0.76 kg-m. «-

Retaining pm ~~
Throttle shaft

~

56.4 — 66.0 In-Ib)

~

0.»»
Th»»‘. ,,~,/

f

»»0»’11)

V

,
~

Return spnng
~

Retaining pin ~

)

c&D:

Apply ATF.
SAT109EB

REMOVAL
1.

Remove detent spring from transmission

2.

Pullout throttle shaft retaining
shaft from transmission case.

3.

Drive out manual plate retaining

AT-66

case.

pin, then draw out throttle

pin.

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Manual Shaft and Throttle Lever (ConI’ d)
4.

Drive and then pull out parking

rod plate retaining

pin.

5.
6.

Remove parking rod plate from manual shaft.
Draw out parking rod from transmission case.

7.
8.

Pull out manual shaft retaining pin.
Remove manual shaft and manual plate from transmission
case.

9.

Remove manual shaft oil seal.


i

SATOBOD

INSPECTION

Check component
necessary.

AT-67

parts for wear

or damage.

Replace

if

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Manual Shaft and Throttle Lever (Cont’d)
INSlALLA liON
1. Install manual shaft oil seal.

Apply ATF to outer surface of oil seal.

2.
3.

Install throttle lever and return spring on throttle shaft.
Install throttle lever assembly on transmission case.

4.
5.

Align groove of throttle shaft and hole of transmission
Install throttle shaft retaining pin.

6.
7.

Move throttle lever in the direction of the arrow.
Install manual shaft and manual plate.

8.
9.

Align groove of manual shaft and hole of transmission
Install manual shaft retaining pin.

AT-68

case.

case.

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Manual Shaft and Throttle Lever (Co nt’ d)
10. Install parking rod to parking rod plate.
11. Install parking rod assembly to manual shaft.

Parking rod plate

View A

12. Install manual
retaining pin.

Retaining Pin~
Manual plate
and parking
(rod plate

plate retaining

pin and parking

rod plate

» ~5 .6 mm
— (0.20 • 0.24 In)

tt

~ /1
ST2354~

~~

SAT087D

13. Install detent spring.

AT-69

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump
SEC. 313
a-ring

~

~@D

7 -11 N.m
(0.7 — 1.1 kg-m,
61 — 95 in-Ibj

‘,- Ouler gear

o
Seal ring ~

Inner gear

m C!’

@V:

Apply ATF.
petroleum jelly.

m C~) : Apply

SAT698HA

DISASSEMBL Y
1. Remove seal rings.

SAT699H

2. Loosen bolts in numerical
cover.

order and remove oil pump

3. Remove inner and outer gear from oil pump housing.

AT-70

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
4.

Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.

5.

Remove oil pump housing oil seal.

(

(

~)
SAT093D

SAT094D

INSPECTION
Oil pump housing, oil pump cover, inner gear and outer
gear

Check for wear or damage.

Side clearance

Dial gauge
/
Span (180 mm
(7.09 In)]

Oil pump
housing

Inner gear

*: Measuring

Measure side clearance of inner and outer gears in at least
four places around each outside edge. Maximum measured
values should be within specified ranges.
Standard clearance:
0.02 — 0.04 mm (0.0008 — 0.0016 in)
If clearance is below standard, select inner and outer gears
as a set to assure clearance within specifications.
Inner and outer gear:
Refer to SOS, AT-169.
If clearance is more than standard, replace whole oil pump
assembly except oil pump cover.

points
SAT095D

AT-71

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Cont’d)

Measure clearance between outer gear and oil pump housing.
Standard clearance:
0.08 — 0.15 mm (0.0031 — 0.0059 in)
If not within standard clearance, replace whole oil pump
assembly except oil pump cover.

SAT0960

Seal ring clearance
• Install new seal rings onto oil pump cover.
• Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance:
0.10 — 0.25 mm (0.0039 — 0.0098 in)
Allowable limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
• If not within wear limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.

ASSEMBLY
1. Install oil seal on oil pump housing.

2. Install O-ring on oil pump housing.
• Apply ATF to O-ring.

3. Install inner and outer gears on oil pump housing.
• Take care with the direction of the inner gear.

AT-72

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Conl’d)
4.
a.

b.

Install oil pump cover on oil pump housing.
Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover
assembly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly
on oil pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape.
Tighten bolts in numerical order.

SAT101D

5.

Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring groove
with petroleum jelly.

Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while installing .
. It may deform the ring.

SAT699H

AT-73

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly
SEC. 317

Model 34X69, 34X70,
34X80, 34X81
Clip

~ 6-T1ng~

~

: N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)
‘I : Model 34X68
‘2 : Model 34X69, 34X70.
34X80, 34X81

SATOB11

DISASSEMBL Y

Model
34X68

1.

Remove
body.

tube connector

SAT603DB
Model
34X69,
34X70.
34X80,
34X81

SAT104DB

AT-74

and tube from control valve

lower

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
2.

Disassemble upper, inter and lower bodies using the following procedures.
Bolt length, number and location:
Without torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Model 34X68

@

Bolt symbol
Bolt length ‘T’
@

~Qmm(in)
Number of bolts

@

@

@

cD

CID

13.5

58.0

40.0

66.0

33.0

78.0

(0.531)

(2.283)

(1.575)

(2.598)

(1.299)

(3.071)

4

3

6

11

2

2

@

Section Y —

Y

CD

@Bolt~

Support plate

Plain
washer

f

Nut
SAT245EB

With torque converter
Bolt symbol
Bolt length» (»

~>-,-1

Q mm (in)

Number of bolts

Section Z Section y —

y

(E)BOIt~

Support

clutch solenoid valve
@

@

@

@

CID

CD

13.5

58.0

40.0

66.0

33.0

78.0

(0.531)

(2.283)

(1.575)

(2.598)

(1.299)

(3.071)

5

3

6

11

2

2

Z

Reamer bolt

(f)

Plain
washer

plate ~

Nut
Model 34X68

SAT515HB

a.
b.

Remove bolts @, @ and CB shown in the illustration.
Remove oil strainer from control valve assembly.

AT-75

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
Model 34X69. 34X70. 34X80, 34X81

Model 34X68

Model 34X69. 34X70, 34X80. 34X81

c.

Remove aD cancel solenoid
(Model 34X68)

d.

Remove aD cancel solenoid and torque converter clutch
solenoid valve from control valve assembly. (Model 34X69,
34X70, 34X80, 34X81)

e.

Remove a-rings from aD cancel solenoid,
minal body. (Model 34X68)

f.

Remove a-rings from aD cancel solenoid, torque converter
clutch solenoid valve and harness terminal body. (Model
34X69, 34X70, 34X80, 34X81)

Torque
converter
clutch
solenoid
valve

~)

from control

valve assembly.

SAT519HB

Model 34X68

and harness ter-

Ori~

SAT240EB

ModeJ
34X69.
34X70.
34X80.
34X81

Overdrive cancel solenoid
Torque
converter
clutch
‘0
solenoid valv~

»
o_rin~
Terminal
body
O-ring~

0

l
SAT521HB

AT-76

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
g.

Place upper

body facedown,

and remove

bolts.

h.

Remove

i.

Turn over
plate.

j.

Remove
separating
plate and separating
gaskets
from
lower body.
Remove steel balls and relief valve springs
from lower
body.
Be careful not to lose steel balls and relief valve springs.

I.

Remove

SAT107DA

Accumulator
support plate

lower

body from

lower

body,

inter body and upper

and

remove

body.

accumulator

support

SAT109D

Line pressure
relief valve
spring

k.

Section A-A

SAT110D

inter body from upper

AT-77

body.

REPAIR FOR COMPONEN
Control Val
T PARTS
ve Asse b
m. Check to see that
m Iy (Cont’d)

body and th
steel balls ar
Be careful n~~ ;:m ove them. e properly positioned in .
ose steel b
Inter
l
ails.

SAT111D

Model 34X69 and 34X70

n.

Remo ve separatin

upper bodye:n~ht steel balls are
els from
Be careful nollo ~en remove them properly positioned.

upper body
o. Check
to s.

9 plate

and separating gask

ose steel balls.

Model 34X68

SAT523H

Model

Model

34X80

34X81

SAT0831

AT-78

.

In

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
Lower and upper bodies

Check to see that retainer
lower body.

plates are in proper position

in

Check to see that retainer
upper body.

plates are in proper position

in

Be careful not to lose these parts.

SAT113D

Oil strainer

Oil strainer
Model 34X68

Check wire netting of oil strainer for damage.

SAT115D

Overdrive cancel solenoid

00 cancel solenoid and torque converter clutch solenoid
valve

Measure resistance
Inspection», AT-3D.

SAT608DB

Model 34X69, 34X70, 34X80, 34X81
Overdrive cancel solenoid

Torque converter
clutch
solenoid valve

SAT522HB

AT-79

Refer to «Electrical

Components

REPAIR FOR COM PONE
Control Val
NT PARTS
0″1
ve
Asse
I cooler reli f
m b Iy (Cont’d)

Check f
e valve spring
Measureorfree
damag
Ie e or deformation
Inspection
ngth and outer d’Iameter
.
Re f er tostandard»
of valve spring
50S AT.
,
-167.
.

Q (Length)

ASSEMBLY

Model 34X69 and 34X70

1. PI
Install upper, inter and
a
. tha~e oil circuit of u
lower body
I Ions.
elr pro per posT
pper b0dY face. up. Install ste e lb’ ails

Model 34X68

Model

34X80

SATOB21

SATOB31

AT-SO

In

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
b.

Install new upper separating gasket, new upper inter separating gasket and upper separating plate in order shown in
illustration.

c.

Install reamer bolts (!) from bottom of upper body and
install separating gaskets and separating plate as a set on
upper body using reamer bolts as guides.

d.

Place lower body side of inter body face up. Install
balls in their proper positions.

e.

Install inter body on upper body using reamer bolts (!) as
guides.
Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls.

Upper
separating
gasket
SAT243E

Separating
plate &
gaskets

SAT119DA

Inter body

steel

SAT121DA

f.
Line pressure
relief valve
spring

Install steel balls and relief valve springs
positions in lower body.

Section A-A

SAT110D

AT-81

in their

proper

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
g.

Install new lower separating gasket, new lower inter separating gasket and lower separating plate in order shown in
illustration.

h.

Install support plate fixing bolts CID from bottom of lower
body and install separating gaskets and separating plate as
a set on lower body using bolts CID as guides.

i.

Temporarily

j.

Install lower body on inter body using reamer bolts (f) as
guides and tighten reamer bolts (f) slightly.

2.

Install a-rings to aD cancel solenoid, torque
clutch solenoid valve and harness connector.
Apply ATF to O-rings.

Lower separating
plate
Lower separating
gasket

SAT244E

Separating
plate & gaskets

Lower body
>

(~)

Boit
SAT124DA

install support plates on lower body.

SAT125DA

Lower body

Inter and
upper bodies

SAT126D

Model 34X68

Overdrive cancel solenoid 7
.’

AT-82

converter

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
Model
34X69,
34X70,
34X80,
34X81

Overdrive cancel solenoid
Torque~
converter
clutch
‘0
solenoid valv~

‘»
o_rin~
Terminal
body

0

l

O-ring~

SAT521HB

3. Install and tighten bolts.
Bolt length, number and location:
Without torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Model 34X68

@

Bolt symbol
Bolt length «C»
Q mm(in)

~

Number of bolts

@

@

@

(!)

ffi

13.5

58.0

40.0

66.0

33.0

78.0

(0.531)

(2.283)

(1.575)

(2.598)

(1.299)

(3.071)

4

3

6

11

2

2

3.4 —

Tightening torque
N’m (kg-m, in-Ib)
Section Z —

7 — 9 (0.7 — 0.9, 61 — 78)

30.4 —

(:E)

Support plate

0.9,61
— 78)

39.1)

y

@Bolt~

7 — 9
(0.7 —

0.45,

Z

Reamer bolt
Section y —

4.4
(0.35 —

/

Plain
washer

r

Nut
SAT245EB

With torque converter

@

Bolt symbol
Bolt length «C»
~

clutch solenoid valve

Q mm (in)

Number of bolts

@

@

@

(!)

ffi

13.5

58.0

40.0

66.0

33.0

78.0

(0.531)

(2.283)

(1.575)

(2.598)

(1.299)

(3.071)

5

3

6

11

2

2

3.4 4.4

Tightening torque
N’m (kg-m, in-Ib)

7 — 9 (0.7 — 0.9, 61 — 78)

(0.35 0.45,
30.4 39.1)

Section y (ElBolt —

y

Section Z Reamer bolt

Z

en Plain
washer

. S»PP~

AT-83

7-9
(0.7 0.9,61
— 78)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
a.

Install and tighten bolts @ slightly.

b.
c.

Install OD cancel solenoid to lower body. (Model 34X68)
Install OD cancel solenoid and torque converter clutch solenoid valve to lower body. (Except model 34X68)
Install and tighten bolts @ and @ slightly.
Remove both reamer bolts (f) previously
installed
as
guides. Install one reamer bolt (f) (marked in illustration)
from lower body side.
Tighten bolts @, @, @ and (f) to specified torque.
~: 7 — 9 N’m (0.7 — 0.9 kg-m, 61 — 78 in-Ib)

SAT609D

Model 34X68

d.
e.

f.

SAT525HA

00 cancel
solenoid

SAT526HB

g.

Install oil strainer
and the other bolt CB (marked in
illustration), then tighten bolts @, @ and CB to specified
torque.
~: 7 — 9 N’m (0.7 — 0.9 kg-m, 61 — 78 in-Ib)

Oil

strainer
SAT516HA

AT-84

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cant’ d)
Model 34X69, 34X70, 34X80, 34X81

h,

Model 34X68

Install support plates and tighten bolts CID to specified
torque.
[j]: 3.4 — 4.4 N’m (0.35 — 0.45 kg-m, 30.4 — 39.1 in-Ib)

SAT529HA

Model
34X69,
34X70,
34X80,
34X81

i.

Model
34X68

Install tube connector and tubes to lower body,
Install oil circuit side of tube connector face up.

SAT603DB

Model
34X69,
34X70,
34X80,
34X81

SAT104DB

AT-8S

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body
SEC. 317

Ql

OJ

c:
.~
(J)

c:

Cil

c.
iii
c:

Z ~

u c: >

0 0
-J u

Ql

c:

5

~

a:

@

~

Ql

U

c:
Ql

::J

0Ql
(J)

CI

.;.
iii
0.
0.

::>

OJ

c:
‘;:

iit
E
::J

~

a:

e
(I)

Cil

c.
iii
c:
’19
Ql
a:

2
co

c.
iii
c:

yg

Ql

a:

Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in Spring Chart of SDS on page AT-167,

AT-86

SAT2021

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBL Y
1.

Remove valves at retainer plates.
Do not use a magnetic «hand».

a.

Use a screwdriver

b.

Remove retainer plates while holding spring, plugs and
sleeves.
Remove plug slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping
out.

SAT114D

to remove retainer

plates.

SAT135D

c.

Place mating surface of valve face down, and remove internal parts.
If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body face down and
lightly tap it with a soft hammer.
Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.

SAT137D

INSPECTION
Valve

spring

Measure free length and outer diameter of each
spring. Also check for damage or deformation.
Inspection standard:
Refer to 50S, AT-167.

Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
Control valves

Q (Length)

Check sliding

SAT138D

AT-87

surfaces of valves, sleeves

and plugs.

valve

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY

Lay the control valve body down when installing valves.
Do not stand the control valve body on edge.

SAT139D

1. Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF.
Install control valves by sliding them carefully into their
bores.
• Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body.

Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert
the valves into their proper positions.

Screwdriver

SAT141D

1-2 accumulator valve
• Install 1-2 accumulator valve. Align 1-2accumulator retainer
plate from opposite side of control valve body.
• Install return spring and 1-2 accumulator piston.

SAT142D

Retainer plate

Screwdriver

2. Install retainer plates.
• While pushing plug or return spring, install retainer plate.

J
SAT143D

AT-SS

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
Retainer plate:

A

A

Unit: mm (in)

E{1}
B

Name of control valves

Length A

Length B

6.0 (0.236)

28.0 (1.102)

Type

Pressure modifier valve
Lock-up control valve

Type B

4-2 sequence valve
Kickdown modulator valve
A

3-2 timing valve
Type A

SAT611D

6.0 (0.236)

21.5 (0.846)

1-2 accumulator valve

6.0 (0.236)

38.5 (1516)

Torque converter relief valve

13.0 (0.512) 17.0 (0.669)

1st reducing valve
Throttle modulator valve
4th speed cut valve

B

Install proper retainer plates.

AT-89

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT

PARTS

Control Valve Lower Body
SEC. 317

~o

.0

Ol
::>

i5.

oo

a.

W

~Ol

::>

a:
~

Cll

m

i5.

Q;
c

‘OJ

a;

a:

Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in Spring Chart of SOS on page AT-167.
SAT532H

AT-gO

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Lower Body (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBL Y
1.

Remove valves at retainer plate.
For removal procedures, refer to «DISASSEMBLY»
trol Valve Upper Body», AT-B?

in «Con-

SAT1130

Throttle valve
o

f2-

Remove throttle valve at E-ring.

SAT147D

INSPECTION
Valve springs


Q (Length)

Check each valve spring for damage or deformation.
measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard:
Refer to 50S, AT-167.
Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.

Also

Control valves

SAT13BO

Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs
for damage.

ASSEMBLY
Throttle valve

Insert throttle valve to control
E-ring to throttle valve.

valve body and then install

SAT1490

Pressure regulator valve

Install pressure regulator
plug, plug A and plug B.

SAT1500

AT-91

valve

after

assembling

sleeve

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Lower Body (Cont’d)
3-4 shift valve and 2-3 shift valve

Install 3-4 shift valve and 2-3 shift valve after fixing plugs to
retainer plates on the opposite side.

Install control valves.
For installation procedures, refer to «ASSEMBLY
trol Valve Upper Body», AT-8?

SAT151D

in «Con-

SAT113D

Retainer plate:
«A»

Unit: mm (in)

«A»

«B»

U

Eli

Name of control valve

Length A

Length 8

Type

Throttle valve & detent valve

6.0 (0.236)

7.2 (0.283)

1/

6.0 (0.236)

28.0 (1.102)

I

Pressure regulator valve
3-4 shift valve

Type II

2-3 shift valve
1-2 shift valve

Type I

SAT153D

Overrun clutch control valve

Install proper retainer plates.

AT-92

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch
SEC. 315
Snap ring

I

*

Retaining plate
Driven plate

Snap ring~
Piston
Oil seal~@D
D-ring~

@:>

* : Select proper thickness.

Dish plate
Snap ring~

Drive plate

~.

Apply ATF.
SAT940HA

DISASSEMBLY
1.
a.

b.
c.


Check operation of reverse clutch.
Install seal ring onto drum support of oil pump cover and
install reverse clutch assembly. Apply compressed air to oil
hole.
Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
If retaining plate does not contact snap ring,
D-ring might be damaged.
Oil seal might be damaged.
Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.

2.
3.

Remove snap ring.
Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, and dish
plates.

4.

Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from
reverse clutch drum while compressing return springs.
Set Tool directly above springs.
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
Remove spring retainer and return springs.
Do not remove return springs from spring retainer.

SAT156D

KV31103200



5.

SAT157D

AT-93

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
6. Remove piston from reverse clutch drum by turning it.

SAT159D

7. Remove O-ring and oil seal from piston.

SAT13BE

INSPECTION
Reverse clutch snap ring, spring retainer and return
springs


Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
Replace if necessary.
When replacing spring retainer and return springs, replace
them as a set.

Reverse clutch drive plates
• Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
• Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard value 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Wear limit 1.8 mm (0.071 in)
• If not within weC1rlimit, replace.

Facing

SAT162D

Reverse clutch dish plates

Check for deformation or damage.
Measure thickness of dish plate.
Thickness of dish plate:
2.89 — 3.19 mm (0.1138 — 0.1256 in)
If deformed or fatigued, replace.

SAT163D

AT-94

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
Reverse clutch piston


Check air does not flow
through ball hole.

Make
Apply
return
Apply
make

sure check balls are not fixed.
compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the
spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to
sure air leaks past ball.

SAT164D

ASSEMBLY
1. Install O-ring and oil seal on piston.

Take care with the direction of the oil seal.

Apply ATF to both parts.

Oil seal
SAT138E

2.

Install piston assembly

by turning it slowly.

3.

Install return springs and spring retainer on piston.

4.

Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing return springs.
Set Tool directly above return springs.

SAT159D

Spring
retainer

Piston

SAT168D

KV31103200

SAT157D

AT-95

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
5. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plates.

CD

evCD
.~

~

?

Do not align the projections

of any two dish plates.

jjfu

SAT170D

6. Install snap ring.

SAT156D

7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance:
Standard 0.5 — 0.8 mm (0.020 — 0.031 in)
Allowable limit 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Retaining plate:
Refer to SOS, AT -168.
Retaining plate

SAT174D

8. Check operation of reverse clutch.
Refer to «DISASSEMBLY» in «Reverse Clutch», AT-93.

AT-96

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
High Clutch
SEC. 315
Fa

O2

O2

—>

03

Full throttle

48 — 56
(30 — 35)

88 — 96
(55 — 60)

Half throttle

31 — 39
(19 — 24)

54 — 62
(34 — 39)

03

—>

O.

102 — 110
(63 — 68)

O.

—>

03

03

—>

O2

O2

—>

D,

12

—>

1,

133 — 141
(83 — 88)

80 — 88
(50 — 55)

37 — 45
(23 — 28)

45 — 53
(28 — 33)

75 — 83
(47 — 52)

44 — 52
(27 — 32)

7 — 15
(4 — 9)

45 — 53
(28 — 33)

Model 34X69 and 34X70
Throttle position

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
0,

—>

O2

O2

—>

03

Full throttle

51 — 60
(32 — 37)

94 — 102
(58 — 63)

Half throttle

30 — 38
(19 — 24)

52 — 60
(32 — 37)

0,

O2

03

—>

O.

O.

—>

03

03

—>

O2

O2

—>

0,

12

—>

1,

136 — 144
(85 — 89)

85 — 93
(53 — 58)

40 — 48
(25 — 30)

48 — 56
(30 — 35)

97 — 105
(60 — 65)

67 — 75
(42 — 47)

42 — 50
(26 — 31)

8 — 16
(5 — 10)

48 — 56
(30 — 35)

Model 34X80
Throttle position

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
—>

O2

—>

03

Full throttle

52.60
(32 — 37)

100 — 108
(62 — 67)

Half throttle

30 — 38
(19 — 24)

53 — 61
(33 — 38)

0,

O2

03

—>

O.

103 — 111
(64 — 69)

O.

—>

03

03

—>

O2

O2

—>

0,

12

—>

1,

145 — 153
(90 — 95)

90.98
(56 — 61)

40 — 48
(25 — 30)

49 — 57
(30 — 35)

69 — 77
(43 — 48)

42 — 50
(26 — 31)

8 — 16
(5 — 10)

49 — 57
(30 — 35)

Model 34X81
Throttle position

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
—>

O2

—>

03

Full throttle

58.66
(36 — 41)

107.115
(66 — 71)

Half throttle

33 — 41
(21 — 25)

57 — 65
(35 — 40)

03

—>

O.

O.

—>

03

03

—>

O2

O2

—>

0,

12

—>

1,

160. 168
(99 — 104)

96 — 104
(60 — 65)

39 — 47
(24 — 29)

48 — 56
(30 — 35)

105.113
(65.70)

69 — 77
(43 — 48)

45 — 53
(28 — 33)

8. 16
(5 — 10)

48 — 56
(30 — 35)

AT-165

SERVICE OATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING
LOCK-UP

Model 34X81

Model 34X68

Throttle position

Vehicle speed
km/h (MPH)

Gear position

Lock-up «ON»
Throttle position

Vehicle speed
km/h (MPH)

Gear position

105 — 113

Half throttle

(65 — 70)

Lock-up «ON»
102 — 110

Half throttle

(63 — 68)

STALL REVOLUTION
Stall revolution
rpm

Engine

Model 34X69 and 34X70
GA15DE
Throttle position

Gear position

Half throttle

D4

Vehicle speed
km/h (MPH)

Model 34X69

2,400 — 2,700

Model 34X70, 34X80

2,550 — 2,850

Model 34X68, 34X80

2,450 — 2,750

Model 34X81

1,850-2,150

GA16DE

Lock-up «ON»

Lock-up «OFF»

112 — 120
(70 — 75)

97 — 105
(60 — 65)

SR20DE

THROTTLE WIRE ADJUSTMENT
Model 34X80
Throttle position

Unit: mm (in)

Gear position

Half throttle

D4

Throttle wire stroke

Vehicle speed
km/h (MPH)
Lock-up «ON»

Lock-up «OFF»

116 — 124
(72 — 77)

97 — 105
(60 — 65)

40 — 42 (1.57 — 1.65)

LINE PRESSURE
Model 34X68, 34X69 and 34X70
Engine speed
rpm

Line pressure kPa (bar, kg/em’, psi)
R position

D position

2 position

1 position

Idle

883 (8.83, 9.0, 128)

637 (6.37, 6.5, 92)

1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

Stall

1,765 (17.65, 18.0,256)

1,275 (12.75,13.0,185)

1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

1,275 (12.75,13.0,185)

Model 34X80
Line pressure kPa (bar, kg/em?, psi)

Engine speed
rpm

R position

D position

2 position

1 position

Idle

883 (8.83, 9.0, 128)

637 (6.37, 6.5, 92)

1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

Stall

1,765 (17.65, 18.0, 256)

1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

Model 34X81
Engine speed
rpm

Line pressure kPa (bar, kg/em’, psi)
R position

D position

2 position

1 position

1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

Idle

883 (8.83, 9.0, 128)

637 (6.37, 6.5, 92)

Stall

1,765 (17.65, 18.0,256)

1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

AT-166

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
CONTROL VALVES
Control valve return springs
Unit: mm (in)
Part No.

Free length

Outer diameter

31742-31X64

2502 (0.9850)

79 (0.311)

31742-31 X03

40.5 (1.594)

9.0 (0.354)

34X80

31742-31X04

51.14 (2.0134)

17.0 (0.669)

34X69, 34X70, 34X68,
34X81

31742-31X63

50.8 (2000)

17.0 (0.669)

3-2 timing valve spring

31736-21 XOO

26.3 (1.035)

7.2 (0.283)

Parts

Model
Pressure

modi-

34X69, 34X70, 34X68,
34X80, 34X81

d) lier valve
spring

@)

Kickdown

@

1-2 accumulator valve spring

@

Upper
body

modulator

~

1st reducing valve spring

31835-21X08

22.6 (0.890)

7.3 (0.287)

@

Torque converter

31742-31X06

23.5 (0.925)

7.4 (0.291)

Throttle modulator valve
spring

34X68, 34X81

31742-31X07

29.5 (1.161)

5.5 (0.217)

(J)

34X69, 34X70, 34X80

31742-31X18

29.5 (1161)

5.5 (0.217)

34X69, 34X70, 34X80

31736-01X02

21.7 (0.854)

6.65 (0.2618)

34X68

31756-21X02

22.6 (0.890)

7.3 (0.287)

34X81

31835-21X02

23.2 (0913)

6.2 (0.244)

@

4th speed cut
valve spring

relief valve spring

@

Lock-up control valve spring

31742-31X08

39.5 (1.555)

50 (0.197)

@

4-2 sequence valve spring

31742-31X09

39.5 (1.555)

51 (0.201)

Oil cooler relief valve spring

31872-31XOO

17.02 (0.6701)

8.0 (0.315)

34X81

31802-31 X06

32.0 (1.260)

10.0 (0.394)

34X69, 34X70, 34X68,
34X80

31802-31X07

33.0 (1.299)

10.0 (0.394)

31742-31XOO

5224 (2.0567)

15.0 (0.591)

34X68

31762-31XOO

52.0 (2.047)

8.0 (0.315)

34X69, 34X70, 34X80

31762-31 X 13

52.0 (2.047)

7.45 (0.2933)

Throttle valve

d) and detent
valve spring

Lower
body

valve spring

(2)

Pressure

@

3-4 shift valve
spring

31762-31X11

52.0 (2.047)

80 (0.315)

@

2-3 shift valve spring

31762-31X01

52.7 (2.075)

7.0 (0.276)

cID

1-2 shift valve spring

31762-31X02

45.9 (1.807)

5.3 (0.209)

@

Overrun clutch control valve spring

31742-31X60

48.9 (1.925)

7.0 (0.276)

regulator

valve spring

34X81

AT-167

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
CLUTCH AND BRAKES

34X68,

Model
34X68,

Model

34X69,

34X81

34X70, 34X80

I Forward

IReverse clutch I
Number of
drive plates

2

Number of
driven plates

2

5

Number of driven plates

5

1.8 (0.071)

Wear limit

1.6 (0.063)

2.0 (0.079)

Wear limit

Clearance

1.8 (0.071)

mm (in)

Standard

0.45 — 0.85 (0.0177 — 0.0335)
1.85 (0.0728)

Allowable limit

Standard

0.5 — 0.8 (0.020 — 0.031)

Allowable
limit

1.2 (0.047)
Thickness mm (in)

Part number

4.4 (0.173)

31537-31XOO

4.6 (0.181)

31537-31X01

4.8 (0.189)

31537-31X02

5.0 (0.197)

31537-31X03

5.2 (0.205)

31537-31X04

IHigh clutch I

Thickness of retaining plate

IOverrun clutch

Number 01
drive plates

3

4

Number 01
driven plates

5

6+1

Thickness
mm (in)

Part number

3.6 (0.142)

31537-31X60

3.8 (0.150)

31537-31X61

4.0 (0.157)

31537-31X62

4.2 (0.165)

31537-31X63

4.4 (0.173)

31537-31X64

4.6 (0.181)

31537-31X65

I

Number of drive plates

3

Number of driven plates

4

Drive plate thickness

Drive plate
thickness
mm (in)

mm (in)

Standard

2.0 (0.079)

1.6 (0.063)

Wear limit

1.8 (0.071)

1.4 (0.055)

1.6 (0.063)

Standard

1.4 (0.055)

Wear limit
Clearance

Clearance
mm (in)

mm (in)

Standard

1.0 — 1.4 (0.039 — 0.055)

1.4 — 1.8 (0.055 — 0.071)

Standard

Allowable limit
2.4 (0.094)

2.6 (0.102)

Thickness mm (in)

Part number

3.8 (0.150)
4.0 (0.157)
4.2 (0.165)
Thickness 01
retaining
plates

I

Standard

Clearance
mm (in)

Allowable
limit

cl utch

Number of drive plates

mm (in)

Standard

34X81

Drive plate thickness

Drive plate
thickness
mm (in)

Thickness 01
retaining
plates

34X69,

34X70, 34X80

4.4 (0.173)
46 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)

3153731X11

3153731X12

3153731X13

3153731X14

3153731X15

3153731X16

3.8 (0.150)
4.0 (0.157)
4.2 (0.165)
4.4 (0.173)
4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)

31537-

2.0 (0.079)
Thickness
mm (in)

Part number

3.6 (0.142)

31567-31X72

31X11

Thickness 01 retaining plate

3153731X12

.

3153731X13

3153731X14

3153731X15

3153731X16

3153731X17

AT-168

3.8 (0.150)

31567-31X73

4.0 (0.157)

31567-31X74

4.2 (0.165)

31567-31X75

4.4 (0.173)

31567-31X76

SERVICE OATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
OIL PUMP

34X68,
34X69,
34X70, 34X80

Model

ILow & reverse

of drive

Number

of driven

Oil pump side clearance

I

brake

Number

34X81

Inner gear

5

plates

Thickness

Drive plate thickness
mm (in)
Standard

2.0 (0.079)

Wear limit

1.8 (0.071)
mm (in)

Allowable

Thickness

1.4 — 1.8 (0.055 — 0.071)

Standard

2.8 (0.110)

limit

plate

I

Brake

Anchor

9.98 — 9.99
(0.3929 — 0.3933)

31346-31 X01

9.97 — 998
(0.3925 — 0.3929)

31346-31X02

and outer gears

Outer gear

.

Thickness

36 (0.142)

31667-31X10

38(0150)

31667-31X11

4.0 (0 157)

31667-31X12

4.2 (0.165)

31667-31X13

4.4 (0.173)

31667-31X14

Clearance

4.6 (0.181)

31667-31X15

pump housing

Part number

between

9.99 — 10.00
(0.3933 — 0.3937)

31347-31XOO

9.98 — 9.99
(0.3929 — 0.3933)

31347-31X01

9.97 — 9,98
(0.3925 — 0.3929)

31347-31X02

oil

and

outer gear

I

band

31346-31 XOO

Part number

mm (in)

of retaining

gears

of inner

9.99 — 10.00
(0.3933 — 0.3937)

mm (in)

Thickness

Thickness

Part number

mm (in)

5

plates

Clearance

0.02 — 0.04 (0.0008 — 0.0016)

mm (in)

mm (in)

end bolt tighten-

008 — 0 15 (0.0031 — 0.0059)

Standard

39 — 5.9 (0.4 — 06, 35 — 52)

ing torque
N’m (kg-m,
Number

of returning

olutions

for anchor

Allowable

in-Ib)

Oil pump cover

revend

015 (0.0059)

limit
seal

ring clearance

2.5:1e0125

mm (in)

bolt

0.10 — 0.25 (0.0039 — 0.0098)

Standard

Lock nut tightening
torque

N’m (kg-m,

ft-Ib)

31 — 36 (3.2 — 3.7, 23 — 27)
Allowable

Clutch and brake return springs

0.25 (0.0098)

limit

INPUT SHAFT
Unit: mm (in)
Input shaft seal ring

Return
Forward
(Overrun

spring

clutch

Free length
Inner

263 (1.035)

Outer

diameter

clearance
mm (in)

77 (0.303)

clutch)

0.08 — 0.23 (0.0031 — 0.0091)

Standard
Outer

(16 pes)

266 (1.047)

10.6 (0.417)

18.6 (0.732)

80 (0.315)

197 (0.776)

11.1 (0.437)

Allowable
Reverse

clutch

High clutch

(16 pes)

(12 pes)

0.23 (0.0091)

limit

PLANETARY CARRIER
Clearance
carrier

between

and pinion

planetary
washer
mm (in)

0.15 — 0.70 (0.0059 — 0.0276)

Standard
Allowable

AT-169

limit

080 (0.0315)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
FINAL DRIVE
Differential

side gear clearance

Clearance between side gear
and differential ease with
washer
mm (in)

Differential
34X69)

Differential side bearing adjusting shims
(Except model 34X81)
Thickness mm (in)

0.1 — 0.2 (0.004 — 0.008)

side gear thrust washers (Model

Thickness mm (in)

Part number

0.75 — 0.80 (0.0295 — 0.0315)

38424-31 XOO

0.80 — 0.85 (0.0315 — 0.0335)

38424-31X01

0.85 — 0.90 (0.0335 — 0.0354)

38424-31 X02

0.90 — 0.95 (0.0354 — 0.0374)

38424-31 X03

0.95 — 1.00 (0.0374 — 0.0394)

38424-31X04

Part number

0.75 — 0.80 (0.0295 — 0.0315)

38424-02111

0.80 — 0.85 (0.0315 — 0.0335)

38424-02112

0.85 — 090 (0.0335 — 0.0354)

38424-02113

090 — 0.95 (0.0354 — 0.0374)

38424-02114

0.95 — 1.00 (0.0374 — 0.0394)

38424-02115

Differential
34X81)

0-015

(0 — 0.0059)

Bearing preload (Model 34X81)
Oifferential side bearing preload ‘T’
mm (in)

004 — 009 (00016 — 0.0035)

Turning torque (Model 34X81)
Turning torque of final drive
assembly
Nm (kg-em, in-Ib)’

049 _ 1 08 (
_ 11 4
.
5.0
.0,.3

38454-M8001

0.56 (0.0220)

38454-M8003

0.64 (0.0252)

38454-M8005

0.72 (0.0283)

38454-M8007

0.80 (0.0315)

38454-M8009

0.88 (0.0346)

38454-M8011

0.96 (0.0378)

38454-M8013

1.04 (0.0409)

38454-M8015

Thickness mm (in)

case end play (Except model

Differential case end play
mm (in)

0.48 (0.0189)

Differential side bearing adjusting shims
(Model 34X81)

Differential side gear thrust washers
(Except model 34X69)
Thickness mm (in)

Part number

_

5)
9.

AT-170

Part number

0.40 (0.0157)

31499-21X07

0.44 (0.0173)

31499-21X08

0.48 (00189)

31499-21X09

0.52 (0.0205)

31499-21X10

0.56 (0.0220)

31499-21X11

0.60 (00236)

31499-21X12

0.64 (0.0252)

31499-21X13

068 (00268)

31499-21 X14

0.72 (00283)

31499-21X15

076 (0.0299)

31499-21X16

0.80 (0.0315)

31499-21X17

0.84 (0.0331)

31499-21X18

0.88 (0.0346)

31499-21X19

0.92 (0.0362)

31499-21X20

1.44 (00567)

31499-21X21

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
Table for selecting differential
adjusting shim(s)

side bearing

Bearing preload (Model 34X81)
Reduction pinion gear bearing
preload
mm (in)

Unit: mm (in)
Dial indicator deflection

Suitable shim(s)

0.31 — 0.35 (0.0122 — 0.0138)

040 (0.0157)

035 — 0.39 (0.0138 — 0.0154)

0.44 (0.0173)

0.39 — 043 (0.0154 — 0.0169)

048 (0.0189)

043 — 047 (0.0169 — 0.0185)

0.52 (0.0205)

047 — 0.51 (0.0185 — 0.0201)

0.56 (0.0220)

0.51 — 0.55 (0.0201 — 0.0217)

0.05 (0.0020)

Reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting
shims
Thickness mm (in)

Part number

1.74 (0.0685)

31438-31X16

060 (0.0236)

1.78 (00701)

31438-31X17

055 — 059 (0.0217 — 0.0232)

0.64 (0.0252)

1.82 (0.0717)

31438-31X18

0.59 — 0.63 (0.0232 — 0.0248)

0.68 (0.0268)

1.86 (0.0732)

31438-31X19

0.63 — 0.67 (0.0248 — 00264)

0.72 (0.0283)

1.90 (0.0748)

31438-31 X20

1.92 (0.0756)

31439-31 X60

1.94 (0.0764)

31438-31X21

0.67 — 0.71 (0.0264 — 0.0280)

076 (0.0299)

071 — 075 (0.0280 — 0.0295)

0.80 (0.0315)

1.96 (0.0772)

31439-31X61

075 — 079 (0.0295 — 0.0311)

084 (0.0331)

1.98 (0.0780)

31438-31 X22

0.79 — 083 (0.0311 — 0.0327)

0.88 (0.0346)

2.00 (0.0787)

31439-31 X62

0.83 — 0.87 (0.0327 — 0.0343)

0.92 (00362)

202 (0.0795)

31438-31 X23

087 — 0.91 (0.0343 — 0.0358)

048 (0.0189) + 048 (0.0189)

+

2.04 (0.0803)

31439-31X63

206 (0.0811)

31438-31X24

2.08 (0.0819)

31439-31X64

0.91 — 095 (0.0358 — 0.0374)

048 (0.0189)

095 — 099 (0.0374 — 0.0390)

0.52 (0.0205) + 052 (0.0205)

2.10 (00827)

31438-31X60

0.99 — 1.03 (0.0390 — 0.0406)

052 (0.0205) + 056 (0.0220)

2.12 (0.0835)

31439-31X65

103 — 1.07 (0.0406 — 0.0421)

056 (00220)

+ 0.56 (0.0220)

2.14 (0.0843)

31438-31X61

056 (0.0220) + 060 (0.0236)

2.16 (00850)

31439-31 X66

2.18 (0.0858)

31438-31X62

2.20 (0.0866)

31439-31 X67

1.07 — 1.11 (0.0421 — 0.0437)
1.11 — 1.15 (0.0437 — 00453)

052 (0.0205)

0.60 (0.0236) + 0.60 (0.0236)

+

1.15 — 1.19 (0.0453 — 0.0469)

060 (00236)

2.22 (0.0874)

31438-31X63

119 — 1.23 (0.0469 — 0.0484)

064 (0.0252) + 0.64 (0.0252)

2.24 (0.0882)

31439-31 X68

1.23 — 1.27 (0.0484 — 0.0500)

0.64 (0.0252) + 0.68 (0.0268)

226 (0.0890)

31438-31X64

1.27 — 1.31 (0.0500 — 0.0516)

068 (0.0268) + 0.68 (0.0268)

2.28 (0.0898)

31439-31 X69

1.31 — 1.35 (0.0516 — 0.0531)

0.68 (0.0268)

+

2.30 (0.0906)

31438-31 X65

234 (0.0921)

31438-31X66

238 (0.0937)

31438-31 X67

31438-31 X68

064 (0.0252)

0.72 (0.0283)

135 — 139 (00531 — 0.0547)

144 (0.0567)

139 — 143 (0.0547 — 0.0563)

0.72 (0.0283) + 0.76 (0.0299)

242 (0.0953)

143 — 147 (0.0563 — 0.0579)

076 (0.0299) + 0.76 (0.0299)

246 (0.0969)

31438-31X69

147 — 151 (0.0579 — 0.0594)

0.76 (0.0299) + 0.80 (0.0315)

250 (0.0984)

31438-31 X70

151 — 155 (00594 — 0.0610)

0.80 (0.0315) + 080 (0.0315)

2.54 (0.1000)

31438-31X71

2.58 (0 1016)

31438-31 X72

1.55 — 159 (0.0610 — 00626)

0.80 (0.0315) + 0.84 (0.0331)

1.59 — 163 (0.0626 — 0.0642)

084 (0.0331)

163 — 1.67 (0.0642 — 0.0657)

0.84 (0.0331) + 088 (0.0346)

1.67 — 1.71 (0.0657 — 0.0673)

088 (0.0346) + 0.88 (0.0346)

1.71 — 1.75 (0.0673 — 0.0689)

088 (0.0346)

i

1.75 — 1.79 (0.0689 — 0.0705)

092 (00362)

+ 0.92 (0.0362)

1.79 — 183 (0.0705 — 0.0720)

044 (0.0173) + 144 (0.0567)

1.83 — 187 (0.0720 — 00736)

048 (0.0189) + 144 (0.0567)

1.87 — 191 (0.0736 — 0.0752)

052 (0.0205) + 144 (0.0567)

1.91 — 195 (0.0752 — 0.0768)

0.56 (0.0220) + 144 (0.0567)

REDUCTION

j-

084 (0.0331)

092 (0.0362)

GEAR

Bearing preload (Model 34X68, 34X69,
34X70, 34X80)
Reduction pinion gear bearing
011 — 069 (11 — 70, 095 — 6.08)
preload
Nm (kg-em, in-Ib)

AT-171

262 (0.1031)

31438-31 X73

266 (0.1047)

31438-31 X74

SERVICE OATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
Table for selecting reduction pinion gear
bearing adjusting shim

Bearing preload (Except model 34X81)

Unit: mm (in)
Dimension’T’

Output shaft bearing preload
Nm (kg-em, in-Ib)

0.25 — 0.88 (2.5 — 9.0, 2.2 — 7.8)

Suitable shim(s)

1.77 — 1.81 (0.0697 — 00713)

1.74 (0.0685)

1.81 — 1.85 (0.0713 — 0.0728)

1.78 (0.0701)

1.85 — 1.89 (0.0728 — 0.0744)

1.82 (0.0717)

1.89 — 1.93 (00744 — 0.0760)

1.86 (0.0732)

1.93 — 1.96 (0.0760 — 0.0772)

1.90 (0.0748)

1.96 — 1.98 (0.0772 — 0.0780)

1.92 (0.0756)

1.98 — 2.00 (0.0780 — 0.0787)

1.94 (0.0764)

2.00 — 2.02 (0.0787 — 0.0795)

1.96 (00772)

2.02 — 2.04 (0.0795 — 0.0803)

1.98 (0.0780)

2.04 — 2.06 (0.0803 — 0.0811)

2.00 (0.0787)

2.06 — 2.08 (0.0811 — 0.0819)

Output shaft bearing adjusting spacers
(Except model 34X81)
Thickness mm (in)

Part number

6.26 (0.2465)

31437-31X16

6.30 (0.2480)

31437-31X17

6.34 (0.2496)

31437-31X18

6.38 (0.2512)

31437-31X19

6.42 (0.2528)

31437-31X20

6.46 (0.2543)

31437-31X21

2.02 (0.0795)

6.50 (0.2559)

31437-31X22

2.04 (0.0803)

6.54 (0.2575)

31437-31X23

2.10 — 2.12 (0.0827 — 0.0835)

206 (0.0811)

658 (0.2591)

31437 -31X24

2.12 — 2.14 (0.0835 — 0.0843)

2.08 (0.0819)

2.08 — 2.10 (0.0819 — 0.0827)

6.62 (0.2606)

31437-31X60

6.64 (0.2614)

31437-31X78

666 (0.2622)

31437-31X61

2.14 — 216 (0.0843 — 0.0850)

2.10 (0.0827)

2.16 — 2.18 (0.0850 — 0.0858)

2.12 (0.0835)

2.18 — 2.20 (0.0858 — 00866)

2.14 (0.0843)

2.20 — 2.22 (0.0866 — 0.0874)

2.16 (0.0850)

6.72 (0.2646)

31437-31X80

2.22 — 2.24 (0.0874 — 0.0882)

218 (0.0858)

6.74 (02654)

31437-31X63

2.24 — 2.26 (0.0882 — 00890)

2.20 (0.0866)

6.76 (0.2661)

31437-31X81

2.26 — 2.28 (0.0890 — 0.0898)

2.22 (0.0874)

6.78 (0.2669)

31437-31X64

2.28 — 2.30 (0.0898 — 0.0906)

2.24 (0.0882)

6.80 (0.2677)

31437-31X82

2.30 — 2.32 (0.0906 — 0.0913)

226 (00890)

6.82 (0.2685)

31437-31X65

2.32 — 234 (0.0913 — 0.0921)

2.28 (0.0898)

6.84 (0.2693)

31437-31X83

234 — 237 (0.0921 — 00933)

2.30 (0.0906)

6.86 (02701)

31437-31X66

2.37 — 2.41 (0.0933 — 0.0949)

2.34 (0.0921)

6.88 (0.2709)

31437-31X84

2.41 — 2.45 (0.0949 — 0.0965)

238 (0.0937)

690 (0.2717)

31437-31X67

6.92 (0.2724)

31437-31X46

2.45 — 2.49 (0.0965 — 0.0980)

2.42 (0.0953)

2.49 — 2.53 (0.0980 — 0.0996)

2.46 (0.0969)

253 — 2.57 (0.0996 — 0.1012)

2.50 (0.0984)

2.57 — 2.61 (0.1012 — 0.1028)

254 (0.1000)

261 — 2.65 (0.1028 — 0.1043)

6.68 (0.2630)

31437-31X79

6.70 (0.2638)

31437-31X62

694 (0.2732)

31437-31X68

696 (0.2740)

31437-31X47

6.98 (0.2748)

31437-31X69

7.00 (0.2756)

31437-31X48

258 (0.1016)

702 (0.2764)

31437-31X70

265 — 269 (0.1043 — 0.1059)

2.62 (0.1031)

706 (0.2780)

31437-31X71

2.69 — 273 (0 1059 — 0.1075)

266 (0.1047)

7.10 (0.2795)

31437-31X72

7.14 (0.2811)

31437-31X73

OUTPUT SHAFT
Seal ring clearance
Output shaft seal ring clearance
mm (in)
0.10 — 0.25 (0.0039 — 0.0098)

Standard
Allowable limit

025 (00098)

End play (Model 34X81)
Output shaft end play

mm (in)

o — 0.5 (0 — 0.020)

AT-172

7.18 (0.2827)

31437-31X74

7.22 (0.2843)

31437-31X75

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
Table for selecting output shaft bearing
adjusting spacer

BEARING RETAINER

Unit: mm (in)
Dimension «T»

Suitable spacer

6.29 — 6.33 (0.2476 — 0.2492)

6.26 (0.2465)

6.33 — 6.37 (0.2492 — 0.2508)

6.30 (0.2480)

6.37 — 6.41 (0.2508 — 0.2524)

634 (0.2496)

6.41 — 6.45 (0.2524 — 0.2539)

6.38 (0.2512)

6.45 — 6.49 (0.2539 — 0.2555)

6.42 (0.2528)

6.49 — 6.53 (0.2555 — 0.2571)

6.46 (0.2543)

6.53 — 657 (0.2571 — 0.2587)

6.50 (0.2559)

6.57 — 6.61 (0.2587 — 0.2602)

654 (0.2575)

6.61 — 6.65 (0.2602 — 0.2618)

6.58 (0.2591)

6.65 — 668 (0.2618 — 0.2630)

6.62 (0.2606)

6.68 — 670 (0.2630 — 0.2638)

6.64 (0.2614)

Seal ring clearance
Bearing retainer seal ring
clearance
mm (in)
Standard

0.10 — 0.25 (0.0039 — 0.0098)

Allowable limit

0.25 (0.0098)

TOTAL END PLAY
Total end play

mm (in)

0.25 — 0.55 (0.0098 — 0.0217)

Bearing races for adjusting total end play
Thickness mm (in)

Part number

0.6 (0024)

31435-31X01

6.70 — 6.72 (0.2638 — 0.2646)

6.66 (0.2622)

0.8 (0.031)

31435-31X02

6.72 — 674 (0.2646 — 0.2654)

6.68 (0.2630)

1.0 (0.039)

31435-31X03

6.74 — 6.76 (0.2654 — 0.2661)

6.70 (0.2638)

1.2 (0.047)

31435-31X04

6.76 — 6.78 (0.2661 — 0.2669)

6.72 (0.2646)

1.4 (0.055)

31435-31 X05

6.78 — 6.80 (0.2669 — 0.2677)

6.74 (0.2654)

1.6 (0.063)

31435-31X06

1.8 (0.071)

31435-31X07

2.0 (0.079)

31435-31X08

6.80 — 6.82 (0.2677 — 0.2685)

676 (0.2661)

6.82 — 684 (0.2685 — 0.2693)

6.78 (0.2669)

6.84 — 6.86 (0.2693 — 0.2701)

6.80 (0.2677)

6.86 — 6.88 (0.2701 — 0.2709)

6.82 (0.2685)

6.88 — 6.90 (0.2709 — 0.2717)

6.84 (0.2693)

6.90 — 6.92 (0.2717 — 0.2724)

6.86 (0.2701)

6.92 — 6.94 (0.2724 — 0.2732)

6.88 (0.2709)

6.94 — 696 (0.2732 — 0.2740)

690 (0.2717)

6.96 — 698 (0.2740 — 0.2748)

6.92 (0.2724)

6.98 — 7.00 (0.2748 — 0.2756)

6.94 (0.2732)

7.00 — 702 (0.2756 — 02764)

696 (0.2740)

7.02 — 7.04 (0.2764 — 0.2772)

6.98 (0.2748)

7.04 — 7.06 (0.2772 — 0.2780)

7.00 (0.2756)

7.06 — 7.09 (0.2780 — 0.2791)
7.09 — 7.13 (0.2791 — 0.2807)
7.13 — 7.17 (0.2807 — 0.2823)
7.17 — 7.21 (0.2823 — 0.2839)

REVERSE CLUTCH END PLAY
Reverse clutch end play
mm (in)

0.65 — 1.00 (0.0256 — 0.0394)

Thrust washers for adjusting reverse clutch
end play
Thickness mm (in)

Part number

0.65 (0.0256)

31508-31XOO

0.80 (00315)

31508-31X01

7.02 (0.2764)

0.95 (0.0374)

31508-31 X02

7.06 (0.2780)

1.10 (0.0433)

31508-31X03

1.25 (0.0492)

31508-31X04

1.40 (0.0551)

31508-31X05

7.10 (0.2795)
7.14 (0.2811)

7.21 — 7.25 (0.2839 — 0.2854)

7.18 (0.2827)

7.25 — 7.29 (0.2854 — 0.2870)

7.22 (0.2843)

ACCUMULATOR
O-ring
Unit: mm (in)
Inner diameter
(Small)

Inner diameter
(Large)

SIR accumulator

26.9 (1.059)

44.2 (1.740)

N-D accumulator

34.6 (1.362)

39.4 (1.551)

Accumulator

AT-173

.SERVICE OAT A AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
Return spring
Unit: mm (in)
Accumulator

Free length

Outer diameter

spring

56.4 (2.220)

21.0 (0.827)

N-D accumulator spring

43.5 (1.713)

28.0 (1.102)

SIR accumulator

BAND SERVO
Return spring
Unit: mm (in)
Return spring

Free length

Outer diameter

2nd servo return spring

32.5 (1.280)

25.9 (1.020)

00 servo return spring

31.0 (1.220)

21.7 (0.854)

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter

Except model 34X81
21.1 mm (0.831 in) or more
Model 34X81
15.9 mm (0.626 in) or more

AT-174

BRAKE SYSTEM

SECTION

BR

CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS

AND PREPARATION

Precautions
Special

Service

Commercial

Tools

Service

Tools

CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

3

Inspection

Caliper

22

3

Inspection

Rotor

23

4

Assembly

4

Installation

5

‘» .23
24

REAR DRUM BRAKE

25

Removal

25

Checking

Brake

Fluid Level

5

Checking

Brake

Line

5

Inspection

Changing

Brake

Fluid

5

Wheel Cylinder

6

Inspection

Drum

27

6

Inspection

Lining

27

AIR

BLEEDING

Bleeding

Procedure

BRAKE HYDRAULIC

LINE

7

Wheel Cylinder

26

Overhaul

27

Installation

27

Removal

8

REAR DISC BRAKE

29

Inspection

8

Pad Replacement

29

Installation

8

CONTROL VALVE

9

~~s:~::~’~I~’:::::::::::’:::
::.::::::::.::
::::.:::::::
:::.:::::
:.::::::::~~•••

Proportioning

9

Inspection

Caliper

32

11

Inspection

Rotor

33

11

Assembly

33

Installation

35

Valve

BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET
Removal

and Installation

Inspection

11

Adjustment

11

MASTER

CYLINDER

12

PARKING

BRAKE CONTROL

36

and Installation

36

Removal

12

Inspection

Disassembly

12

Adjustment

Removal

36

Inspection

13

ANTI-LOCK

Assembly

13

Purpose

Installation

14

Operation

15

ABS Hydraulic

BRAKE BOOSTER

37
38
38
Circuit

15

System

Components

Removal

15

System

Description

Inspection

16

Removal

Installation

16

Wiring

On-vehicle

VACUUM

Service

HOSE

Removal

and Installation

Inspection
FRONT DISC BRAKE

17

Diagram

TROUBLE

38
39
39

and Installation

.40

ABS —

.45

52

DIAGNOSES

17

Contents

17

Component

19

Location

Pad Replacement..

19

Removal

22

General

Disassembly

22

Inspection

SERVICE

38

BRAKE SYSTEM

52
Parts and Harness

Connector
64

DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
and Adjustment

(SDS)

86
86
88

CONTENTS

(Cont’d.)

When you read wiring diagrams:
• Read GI section, «HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS» .
• See El section, «POWER SUPPLY ROUTING» for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnoses, read GI section, «HOW TO FOllOW FLOW CHART
IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES» and «HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN
ELECTRICAL INCIDENT».

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Precautions
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) «AIR BAG»
(DUAL AIR BAG SYSTEM)
The Supplemental Restraint System «Air Bag» used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the
driver and front passenger in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint System consists of air bag modules (located
in the center of the steering wheel and on the instrument panel
on the passenger side), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp,
wiring harness and spiral cable. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:

To avoid rendering the SRS inoperatiYe, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.

Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the
harness connectors or for the complete harness, for easy identification.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) «AIR BAG»
(SINGLE AIR BAG SYSTEM)
The Supplemental Restraint System «Air Bag» and used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk
or severity of injury to the driver in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint System consists of
an air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp,
wiring harness and spiral cable. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the
RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:

To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.

Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the
Service Manual.

BR-3

risk of personal injury or death
maintenance must be performed
of the SRS, can lead to personal
SRS unless instructed

to in this

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Precautions (Conl’d)
BRAKE SYSTEM

For tightening flare nut




GG94310000 or
commercial equivalent
SBR820BA

Recommended fluid is brake fluid «DOT 3» or «DOT 4».
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Do not mix different types of brake fluids (DOT 3, DOT 4).
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may
cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted
areas, wash it away with water immediately.

To clean master cylinder parts, disc brake caliper parts or
wheel cylinder parts, use clean brake fluid.

Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They
will ruin rubber parts of hydraulic system.

Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake
tubes.

Always torque brake lines when installing.
WARNING:

Clean brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize risk
of health hazard from powder caused by friction.

Special Service Tools
Tool number
Tool name

Description

GG9431 0000
Flare nut torque wrench

Removing and installing each brake piping

a: 10 mm (0.39 in)
~:

NT406

Commercial
Tool name

CD

16.2 N’m (1.65 kg-m, 11.9 f1-lb)

Service Tools

Description
Removing and installing each brake piping

Flare nut crows foot

@ Torque wrench

a: 10 mm (0.39 in)

NT360

Brake fluid pressure

Measuring brake fluid pressure

gauge

NT151

BR-4

CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
Checking Brake Fluid Level
Max. line

Min. line
OK



Check fluid level in reservoir tank. It should be between
Max. and Min. lines on reservoir tank.
If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks.
If brake warning lamp comes on, check brake fluid level
switch and parking brake switch.

MIN

SBR418C

Checking Brake Line
CAUTION:
If leakage occurs around joints, retighten or, if necessary,
replace damaged parts.
1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts.
2. Check for oil leakage by fully depressing brake pedal while
engine is running.

ABR159

Changing Brake Fluid

SBR419C

CAUTION:

Refill with new brake fluid «DOT 3» or «DOT 4».

Always keep fluid level higher than minimum line on reservoir tank.

Never reuse drained brake fluid.

Do not mix different types of brake fluids (DOT 3, DOT 4).

Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may
cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted
areas, wash it away with water immediately.
1. Clean inside of reservoir tank, and refill with new brake
fluid.
2. Connect a vinyl tube to each air bleeder valve.
3. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing
brake pedal.
4. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder
valve.
Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to
refill brake fluid.
Refer to «Bleeding Procedure», BR-6.

BR-5


: •

AIR BLEEDING
Bleeding Procedure

SBR995

CAUTION:

Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during
bleeding operation.

If master cylinder is suspected to have air inside, bleed air
from master cylinder first. Refer to «Installation»,
«MASTER
CYLINDER», BR-12.

Fill reservoir with new brake fluid «DOT 3» or «DOT 4».
Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding air out of
system.

Do not mix different types of brake fluids (DOT 3, DOT 4).

Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage of
brake fluid.

For models with ABS, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator connector or battery cable.

Bleed air in the following order:

I

RHO models

I

Left rear brake-+Right
front brake
LAD models

I
SBR419C

front brake-+Right

rear brake-+Left

I

Right rear brake-+Left front brake-+Left rear brake-+Right
front brake.
1. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to air bleeder valve.
2. Fully depress brake pedal several times.
3. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to
release air.
4. Close air bleeder valve.
5. Release brake pedal slowly.
6. Repeat steps 2. through 5. until clear brake fluid comes out
of air bleeder valve.
7. Tighten air bleeder valve.
~: 7 — 9 N.m (0.7 — 0.9 kg-m, 61 — 78 in-Ib)

BR-6

BRAKE HYDRAULIC LINE
Without anti-lock brake system
(Models with dual proportioning valve built into master cylinder)
(built-in type)

Proportioning valve
(Do not disassemble.)

With anti-lock brake system

ASS actuator

= .Primary

L Master cylinder

~

line

. Secondary line
0 : Flare nut
15 — 18 (1.5 — 1.8, 11 — 13)
• : Connecting bolt
17 — 20 (1.7 — 2.0, 12 — 14)
~ : N.m (kg-m. ft-Ib)

SBR086D

BR-7

BRAKE HYDRAULIC

LINE

Removal

SBR419C

CAUTION:

Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may
cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted
areas, wash it away with water immediately.

All hoses must be free from excessive bending, tWisting and
pulling.
1~ Connect a vinyl tube to air bleeder valve~
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing
brake pedal.
3. Remove flare nut securing brake tube to hose, then withdraw lock spring.
4. Cover openings to prevent entrance of dirt whenever
disconnecting hydraulic line.

Inspection
Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration
other damage. Replace any damaged parts.

or

Installation

For tightening flare nut

~GG94310000
or
commercial equivalent
SBR820BA

CAUTION:

Refill with new brake fluid «DOT 3» or «DOT 4».

Never reuse drained brake fluid.

Do not mix different types of brake fluids (DOT 3, DOT 4).
1. Tighten all flare nuts and connecting bolts.
Flare nut:
.
~: 15 — 18 N’m (1.5 — 1.8 kg-m, 11 — 13 ft-Ib)
Connecting bolt:
~: 17 — 20 N’m (1.7 — 2.0 kg-m, 12 — 14 ft-Ib)
2. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder
valve.
3. Bleed air. Refer to «Bleeding Procedure», BR-6.

BR-8

CONTROL VALVE
Proportioning Valve
INSPECTION
CAUTION:

Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder.

Use new brake fluid «DOT 3» or «DOT 4».

Do not mix different types of brake fluids (DOT 3, DOT 4).

Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may
cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on paint
areas, wash it away with water immediately.

Depress pedal slowly when raising front brake pressure.

Check rear brake pressure 2 seconds after front brake pressure reaches specified value.

For models with ABS disconnect harness connectors from
ABS actuator relay before checking.
1. Connect Tool to air bleeders of front and rear brakes on
either LH or RH side.
2. Bleed air from the Tool.
3. Check rear brake pressure by depressing
brake pedal
(increasing front brake pressure).
Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2,

psi)

I

With ABS

GA14DE, GA16DE, CD20

GA16DE’

SR20DE

Applied pressure
(Front brake)

7.355
(73.6, 75, 1,067)

6.375
(63.7, 65, 924)

5,394
(53.9, 55, 782)

Output pressure
(Rear brake)

5,100 — 5,492
(51.0 — 54.9, 52 — 56, 739 — 796)

3,432 — 3,825
(34.3 — 38.2,
35 — 39,
498 — 555)

Without ABS
Applied models

2,452
(245
25
356

— 2,844
— 28.4,
— 29,
— 412)

* Models for Australia

4.

If output pressure is out of specifications, replace dual proportioning valve (separated type) or master cylinder assembly (built-in type).
Bleed air after disconnecting the Tool. Refer to «Bleeding
Procedure», BR-5.

BR-9

•••

CONTROL VALVE
Proportioning
Valve (Co nt’ d)
REMOVAL (Separated type)
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may
cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted
areas, wash it away with water immediately.
• All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and
pulling.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to air bleeder valve.
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing
brake pedal.
3. Loosen flare nut.
4. Remove proportioning valve mounting bolt, then remove
flare nut.

INSTAllATION (Separated type)
CAUTION:
• Refill with new brake fluid «DOT 3» or «DOT 4».
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Do not mix different types of brake fluids (DOT 3, DOT 4).
1. Temporarily fit flare nut to proportioning valve.
2. Tighten proportioning valve mounting bolt, then tighten flare
nut with wooden block placed between proportioning valve
and dash panel.
Flare nut:
15 — 18 N’m (1.5 — 1.8 kg-m, 11 — 13 ft-Ib)
Mounting bolt:
11]: 5.1 — 8.8 N’m (0.52 — 0.9 kg-m, 45.1 — 78.1 in-Ib)
3. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder
valve.
4. Bleed air. Refer to «Bleeding Procedure», BR-6.

tDJ:

REMOVAL AND INSTAllATION (Built-in type)
Always replace together with master cylinder as an assembly.
• Refer to «MASTER CYLINDER», BR-12.

BR-10

BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET
Removal and Installation
SEC. 465

Slop lamp sWitch

iii : N’m
~

(kg-m, in-Ib)

: N’m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

SBR205D

Inspection
Check brake pedal for following items:

Brake pedal bend

Clevis pin deformation

Crack of any welded portion

Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper

o

SBR997

Adjustment
Check brake pedal free height from dash reinforcement panel
(RHD) and dash lower panel (LHD). Adjust if necessary.
H:
Free height
Refer to 50S (BR-SS).
0:
Depressed height
Refer to 50S (BR-SS).
Under force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 Ib)
with engine running
1. Loosen lock nut and adjust pedal free height by turning
brake booster input rod. Then tighten lock nut.
2. Check pedal free play.
Make sure that stop lamps go off when pedal is released.
3. Check brake pedal’s depressed height while engine is running.
If lower than specification, check for leaks, air in system or
damage to components (master cylinder, wheel cylinder,
etc.). Then make necessary repairs.

SBR034D

BR-11

MASTER CYLINDER
Removal
CAUTION:

Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may
cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted
areas, wash it away with water immediately.

In the case of brake fluid leakage from the master cylinder,
disassemble the cylinder. Then check piston cups for deformation or scratches and replace necessary parts.

1. Connect a vinyl tube to air bleeder valve.
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve, depressing
brake pedal to empty fluid from master cylinder.
3. Remove brake pipe flare nuts.
4. Remove master cylinder mounting nuts.
SEC. 460

Reservoir cap

—-g

___Reservoir tank

Seal~
Oil strainer —-.

~

L——- Cylinder body

Models with ASS

o

jJ’JD~—-

C’9 —~

Stopper cap ~

Secondary piston
assembly ~f]

‘~
T@»

. .-:’J

N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)
N.m (kg-m. ft-Ib)
Brake fluid point

l-~

‘V/O-ring~(Models with ABS only)

~

11.7 — 14.7

(1.2 — 1.5, 8.7 — 10.8)

Disassembly
1. Bend claws of stopper cap outward.

BR-12

/’
~

Valve stopper
1.5.2.9
(0.15.0.3,
13.0 • 26.0)
SBR019DB

MASTER CYLINDER
Disassembly (Cont’d)
2.

Remove valve stopper while piston is pushed into cylinder
(Models with ASS only).

SBR435B

3. Remove piston assemblies.
If it is difficult to remove secondary piston assembly,
apply compressed air through fluid outlet.
4. Draw out reservoir tank.

gradually

SBR939A

Inspection
Check master cylinder
Replace if damaged.

inner wall for pin holes or scratches.

Assembly
Secondary piston

1.

Primary piston

Insert secondary piston assembly. Then insert primary piston assembly.
Pay attention to direction of piston cups in figure at left.
Also, insert pistons squarely to avoid scratches on cylinder
bore.
Pay attention to alignment of secondary piston slit with
valve stopper mounting hole of cylinder body (For models
with ABS only).

SBR012A

Models with ABS
Secondary piston

Primary piston

_-rnIJ

SBR221BA

BR-13

MASTER CYLINDER
Assembly (Cont’d)
2. Install stopper cap.
Before installing
stopper cap, ensure that claws
inward.
3. Push reservoir tank seals into cylinder body.
4. Push reservoir tank into cylinder body.

5.

Install valve stopper while
(Models with ABS only).

piston

is pushed

are

bent

into cylinder

SBR435B

Installation
CAUTION:

Refill with new brake fluid «DOT 3» or «DOT 4».

Never reuse drained brake fluid.

Do not mix different types of brake fluids (DOT 3, DOT 4).
1. Place master cylinder
onto brake booster and secure
mounting nuts lightly.
2. Torque mounting nuts.
~: 11.7 — 14.7 N’m (1.2 — 1.5 kg-m, 8.7 -10.8 ft-Ib)
3. Fill up reservoir tank with new brake fluid.
4. Plug all ports on master cylinder with fingers to prevent air
suction while releasing brake pedal.
5. Have driver depress brake pedal slowly several times until
no air comes out of master cylinder.
6. Fit brake lines to master cylinder.
7. Tighten flare nuts.
~: 15 — 18 N’m (1.5 — 1.8 kg-m, 11 — 13 ft-Ib)
8. Bleed
air from
brake
system.
Refer
to «Bleeding
Procedure», BR-6.»

BR-14

BRAKE BOOSTER
On-vehicle Service
OPERATING

CHECK

Depress brake pedal several times with engine off. After
exhausting vacuum, make sure there is no change in pedal
stroke.
Depress brake pedal, then start engine. If pedal goes down
slightly, operation is normal.

AIRTIGHT CHECK

SBR002A

OK

NG

Start engine, and stop it after one or two minutes. Depress
brake pedal several times slowly. Booster is airtight if pedal
stroke is less each time.
Depress brake pedal while engine is running, and stop
engine with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not
change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds.

SBR365AA

Removal
CAUTION:

Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may
cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted
areas, wash it away with water immediately.

Be careful not to deform or bend brake pipes, during
removal of booster.

SEC. 465.470

Gasket

~

: N.m (kg-m. ft-Ib)
SBR223BB

BR-15

BRAKE BOOSTER
Inspection
OUTPUT ROD LENGTH CHECK
1. Supply brake booster with vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-667 mbar,
-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) using a hand vacuum pump.
2. Check output rod length.
Specified length:
M195, S205 or C205
10.275 — 10.525 mm (0.4045 — 0.4144 in)

Installation
Approx.

125 mm (4.92 In)

CAUTION:

Be careful not to deform or bend brake pipes during installation of booster.

Replace clevis pin if damaged.

Refill with new brake fluid «DOT 3» or «DOT 4».

Never reuse drained brake fluid.

Do nol mix different types of brake fluids (DOT 3, DOT 4).

Due to the angle of installation, thread can be damaged by
the dash panel.
1. Before fitting booster, temporarily adjust clevis to dimension shown. (Does not apply to vehicles fitted with ABS.)
2. Fit booster, then secure mounting nuts (brake pedal bracket
to booster) lightly.
3. Connect brake pedal and booster input rod with clevis pin.
4. Secure mounting nuts.
Specification:
~: 13 — 16 N’m (1.3 — 1.6 kg-m, 9 — 12 ft-Ib)
5. Install master cylinder. Refer to BR-12.
6. Bleed air. Refer to «Bleeding Procedure», BR-6.

BR-16

VACUUM HOSE

—-a

Removal and Installation

More Ih ..
(0.94 In)

24 mm

———-r:~
———~~~———-

CAUTION:
When installing vacuum hoses, pay attention to the following
points.

Do not apply any oil or lubricants to vacuum hose and check
valve.

Insert vacuum tube into vacuum hose as shown.

Connect hose until it contacts
protrusion on vacuum tube.
SBR225B

Intake manifold

Install check valve, paying attention to its direction.
TYPE 1

Brake booster

; C::::::::’::::~:d

q

SBR498A

CAUTION

TYPE 2

~

ENG.

Inspection
HOSES AND CONNECTORS
Check vacuum
lines,
connections
and check valve for
airtightness, improper attachment, chafing and deterioration.

BR-17

VACUUM HOSE
Inspection (Cont’d)
CHECK VALVE
Check vacuum with a vacuum pump.
~
Booster side

Connect to
booster side

Vacuum should exist.

Connect to
engine side

Vacuum should not exist.

SBR943A

Booster side
Engine side
Arrow indicates
engine side

SBR826B

VACUUM WARNING SWITCH (Diesel engine models)
Test continuity through vacuum warning switch with an ohmmeter and vacuum pump.
Vacuum condition

Continuity

Less than 26.7 kPa
(267 mbar, 200 mmHg, 7.87 inHg)

Yes

33.3 kPa
(333 mbar, 250 mmHg, 9.84 inHg) or
SBR007A

No

more

VACUUM PUMP
1. Install vacuum gauge.
2. Run engine at 1,000 rpm or more.
3. Check vacuum.
Specified vacuum:
86.6 kPa (8~6 mbar, 650 mmHg, 25.59 inHg) or more

BR-18

FRONT DISC BRAKE
Pad Replacement
WARNING:
Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION:

When cylinder body is open, do not depress brake pedal or
piston will pop out.

Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on rotor.
Always replace shims when replacing pads.

If shims are rusted or show peeling of the rubber coat,
replace them with new shims.

It is not necessary to remove connecting bolt except for
disassembly
or replacement of caliper assembly. In this
case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch
. brake hose.

1.
2.

Remove master cylinder
Remove lower pin bolt.

3.

reservoir

cap.

Open cylinder body upward. Then remove pad retainers,
return spring (Except AD22VF brake model) and inner/ol,lter
shims.
Standard pad thickness:
CL22VD and CL22VE
11 mm (0.43 in)
CL22VF
10 mm (0.39 in)
Pad wear limit:
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will
return to reservoir when pushing back piston.

~

0

tJ
L:{SR020D

BR-19

FRONT DISC BRAKE
SEC. 440

CL22VD AND CL22VE

~

~

~

(0.33 • 0.44, 28.6 — 38.2)

Bracket

m

iii ~ci~3;~’~.44,

II] 3.2

28.6 _ 38.2)

/ 3.2 .4.3 (0.33 • 0.44, 28.6 — 38.2)

• 4.3 (0.33 • 0.44′,28.6 — 38.2)

Ill: N.m

(kg-m, In-Ib)

~:

(kg-m, ft-Ib)

N.m

SBR028DA

Removal and Installation
1.
2.
3.

4.

To remove parking brake cable, first remove center
sole.
Disconnect warning lamp connector.
Remove bolts, slacken off and remove adjusting nut.

con-

Remove lock plate and disconnect cable (disc brake only).
For drum brake models, refer to BR-25.

Inspection
1.
2.
3.
4.

Check control lever for wear or other damage. Replace if
necessary.
Check wires for discontinuity
or deterioration.
Replace if
necessary.
Check warning lamp and switch. Replace if necessary.
Check parts at each connecting portion and, if deformed or
damaged, replace.

BR-36

PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Adjustment
Toggle lever
Stopper

Before or after adjustment, pay attention to the following points.
a. For rear disc brake be sure that toggle lever returns to
stopper when parking brake lever is released.
b. There is no drag when parking brake lever is released.

Front

V
SBR029D

1. Adjust clearance between shoe and drum/pad and rotor as
follows:
a. Release parking brake lever and loosen adjusting nut.
b.- Depress brake pedal fully at least 10 times with engine running.
2. Pull control lever 4 — 5 notches. Then adjust control lever by
turning adjusting nut.

SBR042D

3.

Pull control lever with specified amount of force.
lever stroke and ensure smooth operation.
Number of notches:
Drum brake: 7 — 8
Disc brake: 8 — 9

4.

Bend warning lamp switchplate to ensure following. Warning lamp comes on when lever is pulled «A» notches and
goes out when fully released.
Number of «A» notches: 1 or less

196 N (20 kg, 44 Ib)

/

Check

SBR073D

BR-37

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
Purpose
The Anti-Lock Brake
trol of braking force
The ABS:
1) Improves proper
2) Eases obstacles
3) Improves vehicle

System (ABS) consists of electronic and hydraulic
so that locking of the wheels can be avoided.

components.

It allows for con-

tracking performance through steering wheel operation.
to be avoided through steering wheel operation.
stability by preventing flat spins.

Operation

When the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6 MPH) this system does not work.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) has self-test capabilities. The system turns on the ABS warning
light for 1 second after turning the ignition switch ON. The system performs another test the first time
the vehicle reaches 6 km/h (4 MPH). A mechanical noise may be heard as the ABS performs a selftest. This is a normal part of the self-test feature. If a malfunction is found during this check, the ABS
warning light will come on.
During ABS operation, a mechanical noise may be heard. This is a normal condition.

ABS Hydraulic Circuit

)(

@

SBR918C

G)
@

Inlet solenoid valve
Outlet solenoid valve

@

Reservoir
Pump

@)

@
@
(J)
@

Motor
Inlet valve
Outlet valve
Bypass check valve

BR-38

@

Check valve

@)

Damper
Gradient switch

@

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
System Components

Dual proportioning
valve

Rear wheel sensors

For LHD models, control unit
is located on the opposite side.

SBR048DB

System Description

Control unit

s::’;o~’~W.

Magnetic flux ~
I

Tooth~
/

r

Ll-l

—-

1
1
I
I
I….

,.

CONNECTOR

GNO

12.81 12.91 13•91
B
B
B
R

JOINT

GNO 1

SPEED

SENSOR
FRONT RH
(E 11)

em), @ill)

<..!J.g) GY

GY

Refer to last page
(Foldoutpage).

~(Eli[9)

IIlIITl.IIillJ

GY

HBR004

BR-47

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — ABS —

(Cont’d)

BR-ABS-04
ASS
CONTROL
UNIT
~

SENSOR
FR-LH
H
~

t

L

‘EEL
SENSOR SPEED
FRONT LH

rv

1
I
I

)

——

M
R

L

(eUO)

~~(@
56 iBl91

(lli)

I

I:

?
I@ ~@

UQ)

~~

GY

~B

m•

G/R

rrf1iJ

@
~

)

@>

@)
~

MOTOR
RELAY

I@

ABS
RELAY
BOX
UQ)
~)

Refer to last page
(Foldout page) .

I

(411’3)

t

Y

n=f3n

@

~———————-~
I
I

m

Y

——<

SOLENOID
VALVE
RELAY

:

t Lt

~———————-~

HBRDDa

BR-51

• :.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Contents
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate
Self-diagnosis
CONSULT
CONSULT Inspection Procedure
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Preliminary Check
Ground Circuit Check
Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check
Diagnostic Procedure 1 Warning lamp does not come on
Diagnostic Procedure 2 Warning lamp stays on
Diagnostic Procedure 3 ABS actuator solenoid valve
Diagnostic Procedure 4 Wheel sensor or rotor
Diagnostic Procedure 5 Motor relay or motor
Diagnostic Procedure 6 Solenoid valve relay
Diagnostic Procedure 7 Power supply
Diagnostic Procedure 8 Control unit
Diagnostic Procedure 9 Pedal vibration and noise
Diagnostic Procedure 10 Long stopping distance
Diagnostic Procedure 11 Unexpected pedal action
Diagnostic Procedure 12 ABS does not work
Diagnostic Procedure 13 ABS works frequently
Electrical Component Inspection

Repair

SR-52
SR-53
BR-58
BR-59
BR-64
BR-65
BR-66
BR-67
BR-68
BR-69
BR-72
BR-74
BR-76
BR-79
BR-81
BR-82
BR-82
BR-83
BR-83
BR-84
B R-84
BR-85

How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
and Accurate Repair
INTRODUCTION

SEF233G

SEF234G

The ABS system has an electronic control unit to control major
functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors
and instantly drives the actuators. It is essential that both kinds
of signals are proper and stable. It is also important to check
for conventional problems: such as air leaks in booster lines,
lack of brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs
intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or faulty wiring.
In this case, careful checking of suspicious circuits may help
prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems, so
a road test should be performed.
Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to
talk with a customer who approaches with a ABS complaint. The
customer is a very good source of information on such problems; especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the
customer, find out what symptoms are present and under what
conditions they occur.
Start your diagnosis by looking for «conventional»
problems
first. This is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS controlled vehicle.

BR-52

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Self-diagnosis (For Europe)
FUNCTION

When a problem occurs in the ABS, the warning lamp on the
instrument panel comes on.

A maximum of three malfunctions are stored in the memory
of the ABS control unit.
Erase the self-diagnosis results stored in the control unit after
malfunctions are repaired (See next page).

The self-diagnosis
results are identified by CONSULT or
warning lamp.

SELF-DIAGNOSIS

PROCEDURE

Start engine.
Dr.ive vehicle over 15 km/h (9 MPH) for at least one minute .

.=J

MPH

-~s:: ~
Stop vehicle with engine running.

~~

___ — warnin:1

Make sure thai the ASS warning

lamp activates.

SBR875CA

Verify the location of the malfunction with the malfunction code chart.
Then make necessary repairs following the diagnostic procedures.

After the malfunctions are repaired, erase the self-diagnostic results
stored in the control unit.
Disconnect

connectors

for ASS control unit or the battery negative

termi-

nal for at least one minute.

Check warning lamp for deactivation after driving vehicle over 15 km/h (9
MPH) for at least one minute.

Test the ASS in a safe area to verify that it functions properly.

BR-53

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Self-diagnosis (For Europe) (ConI’ d)
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

RESULTS (Malfunction

codes)

Determine the code No. by counting the number of times the warning
The malfunction code chart is given on the next page.

lamp flashes on and off.

Example
Malfunction code No. 12 and 23

Warning lamp ON
a
b
c

Warning lamp OFF

3 seconds (Clearance between code No.)
0.6 second (Ten digits)
0.3 second (One digit)

c
SBR877CA

HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

RESULTS (Malfunction

codes)

Disconnect ASS control unit connectors or battery negative terminal for at least one minute.
When using CONSULT, touch «ERASE» on the CONSULT screen with self-diagnostic
results mode.

BR-54

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Self-diagnosis (For Europe) (Cont’d)
MALFUNCTION
Code No.
(No. of warning lamp flashes)

CODE/SYMPTOM

Malfunctioning part

CHART
Diagnostic procedure

45

Actuator front left outlet solenoid valve

3

46

Actuator front left inlet solenoid valve

3

41

Actuator front right outlet solenoid valve

3

42

Actuator front right inlet solenoid valve

3

51

Actuator rear right outlet solenoid valve

3

52

Actuator rear right inlet solenoid valve

3

55

Actuator rear left outlet solenoid valve

3

56

Actuator rear left inlet solenoid valve

3

25

Front left sensor (open-circuit)

4

26

Front left sensor (short-circuit)

4

21

Front right sensor (open-circuit)

4

22

Front right sensor (short-circuit)

4

35

Rear left sensor (open-circuit)

4

36

Rear left sensor (short-circuit)

4

31

Rear right sensor (open-circuit)

4

32

Rear right sensor (short-circuit)

4

18

Sensor rotor

4

61

Actuator motor or motor relay

5

63

Solenoid valve relay

6

57

Power supply (Low voltage)

7

71

Control unit

8

Control unit power supply circuit
Warning lamp bulb circuit

Warning lamp stays on when igniControl unit or control unit connector
tion switch is turned on
Solenoid valve relay stuck
Power supply for solenoid valve relay coil
Warning lamp stays on, during
self-diagnosis

Control unit

Warning lamp does not come on
when ignition switch is turned on

Fuse, warning lamp bulb or warning lamp circuit
Control unit

Warning lamp does not come on
during self-diagnosis

Control unit

2

1

Unexpected pedal action

11

ABS does not work

12

ABS works frequently

13

Pedal vibration and noise
Long stopping distance

BR-55

9

10

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Self-diagnosis

(Except Europe)

FUNCTION

When a problem occurs in the ASS, the warning lamp on the
instrument
panel comes on. To start the self-diagnostic
results mode, ground the self-diagnostic
(check) terminal
located on «Data Link Connector for CONSULT». The location of the malfunction
is indicated by the warning lamp
flashing.

SELF-DIAGNOSIS

PROCEDURE

Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (20 MPH)
for at least one minute.

~
Turn ignition switch «OFF».

m

L

Ground terminal «L» of «DATA LINK
CONNECTORfor CONSULT» with a
suitable harness.

L
Turn ignition switch «ON» while
grounding terminal «L».
Do not depress brake pedal.

m

~

After 3.6 seconds, the warning lamp
starts flashing to indicate the malfunction code No (See NOTE.)

~

[i

s~’~»

Verify the location of the malfunction
with the malfunction code chart. Refer
to BR-57. Then make the necessary
repairs following the diagnostic procedures.

~/»’:~~
~/\l—u~

L
After the malfunctions are repaired,
erase the malfunction codes stored in
the control unit. Refer to BR-57.

DATA LINK CONNECTOR (D’.

ct the harness)

!/717) ‘)

SBR054D

for CONSULT

~

/

~Isconne

~
Rerun the self-diagnostic results mode
to verify that the malfunction codes
have been erased.

1

~

Disconnect the check terminal from
the ground. The self-diagnostic results
mode is now complete.

,

BR-56

NOTE: The indication terminates
after five minutes.
However, when the ignition
switch is turned from
«OFF» to «ON», the indication starts flashing again.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Self-diagnosis (Except Europe) (Cont’d)
@

Check warning lamp for deactivation
after driving vehicle over 30 km/h (20
MPH) for at least one minute.

After making certain that warning
lamp does not come on, test the ASS
in a safe area to verify that it functions
properly.

HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

RESULTS (Malfunction

codes)

Determine the code No. by counting the number of times the warning lamp flashes on and off.
When several malfunctions occur at one time, up to three code numbers can be stored; the latest
malfunction will be indicated first.
The indication begins with the start code 12. After that a maximum of three code numbers appear in
the order of the latest one first. The indication then returns to the start code 12 to repeat (the indication will stay on for five minutes at the most).
The malfunction code chart is given on the next page.

Example: Code No. 32 REAR SENSOR SHORT-CIRCUIT
CODE NO. 32

Start code: 12
Tens digits
Units digits
Warning
lamp

Tens digits

Units digits

ON
OFF
3.6

0.4

1.6

0.4 0.4

0.4

3.6

Unit: Second

ON
IGN
OFF

SBR441C

Self-diagnosis

completed
«I

~~

i

::J1IU

1
i
!

p;eck~IJi
Open -._.Idlsconnect)

10—+1

Ground

I

__. __… _—.J.. ~9rt’_ !~~_1.~:’:.
;

L

12.5

see

LJ

j
Malfunction code
memory erased

HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
(Malfunction codes)

RESULTS

1.

Disconnect the check terminal from ground (ASS warning
lamp will stay lit).
2. Within 12.5 seconds, ground the check terminal 3 times.
Each terminal ground must last more than 1 second. The
ASS warning lamp goes out after the erase operation has
been completed.
3. Perform self-diagnosis again. Refer to SR-56. Only the start
code should appear, no malfunction codes.

ABR256

MALFUNCTION
Refer to SR-55.

BR-57

CODE/SYMPTOM

CHART

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
CONSULT
CONSULT APPLICATION

TO ASS
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS

DATA MONITOR

ACTIVE TEST

Front right wheel sensor

X

X

Front left wheel sensor

X

X

Rear right wheel sensor

X

X

Rear left wheel sensor

X

X

Stop lamp switch

X

Front right inlet solenoid valve

X

X

X

Front right outlet solenoid valve

X

X

X

Front left inlet solenoid valve

X

X

X

Front left outlet solenoid valve

X

X

X

Rear right inlet solenoid valve

X

X

X

Rear left inlet solenoid valve

X

X

X

Rear right outlet solenoid valve

X

X

X

Rear left outlet solenoid valve

X

X

.X

Actuator solenoid valve relay

X

X

Actuator motor relay
(ABS MOTOR is shown on the Data Monitor
screen.)

X

X

X

X

X

ITEM

ABS warning lamp
Battery voltage

X

X: Applicable
-; Not applicable

ECU part number mode
Ignore the ECU part number displayed
the ECU.

in the ECU PART NUMBER MODE. Refer to parts catalog to order

BR-58

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
CONSULT Inspection Procedure
SELF-DIAGNOSIS

m

PROCEDURE

1) Turn ignition switch OFF.
2) Connect CONSULT to Data Link Connector for CONSULT.

1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle over 30 km/h (20 MPH)
for at least one minute.

Ii)
NISSAN

CONSULT

.

EE940.

(;)

~

START

I

I

I,

SUB MODE

SEF253Q

@]


(!]

r
1) Stop vehicle with engine running
and touch «START» on CONSULT screen.
Program card
AE950: For Australia
EE940: Except Australia
2) Touch «ASS».

lP]

~

0

SELECTSYSTEM

ENGINE

3) Touch «SELF-DIAG RESULTS».
• The screen shows the detected malfunction and the times of ignition
switch ON and OFF after it occurred.

AfT
AIRBAG
Make the necessary repairs following
the diagnostic procedures.

ABS
IVMS
SBR104D

@]

I ~ SELECTDIAG MODE 01
,
I SELF-DIAGRESULTS
I DATA MONITOR
I
I ACTIVETEST
I ECU PARTNUMBER
I
I

II
After the malfunctions are repaired,
erase the self-diagnostic results stored
in the control unit by touching
«ERASE».

Check warning lamp for deactivation
after driving vehicle over 30 km/h (20
MPH) for at least one minute.

SST412B

II

• SELF-DiAGRESULTS.
FAILURE DETECTED
FR RH SENSOR
[OPEN)

ERASE

II

0

Test the ASS in a safe area to verify
that it functions properly.

TIME
0

Note: «SELF.DlAG RESULTS» screen shows the detected malfunction and
the times of ignition switch ON and OFF after it occurred.

PRINT
SBR950C

BR-59

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
CONSULT Inspection Procedure (Conl’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

RESULTS MODE

Diagnostic item
FR RH SENSOR
[OPEN]
FR LH SENSOR
[OPEN]

Diagnostic item is detected when …

RR RH SENSOR
[OPEN]
RR LH SENSOR
[OPEN]

• Circuit for front
(An abnormally
• Circuit for front
(An abnormally
• Circuit for rear
(An abnormally
• Circuit for rear
(An abnormally

right wheel sensor is open.
high input voltage is entered.)
left wheel sensor is open.
high input voltage is entered.)
right sensor is open.
high input voltage is entered.)
left sensor is open.
high input voltage is entered.)

FR RH SENSOR
[SHORT]
FR LH SENSOR
[SHORT]

• Circuit for front
(An abnormally
• Circuit for front
(An abnormally

right wheel sensor is shorted.
low input voltage is entered.)
left wheel sensor is shorted.
low input voltage is entered.)

RR RH SENSOR
[SHORT]
RR LH SENSOR
[SHORT]

FR LH IN ABS SOL
[SHORT]

• Circuit for rear right sensor is shorted.
(An abnormally low input voltage is entered.)
• Circuit for rear left sensor is shorted.
(An abnormally low input voltage is entered.)
• Teeth damage on sensor rotor or improper installation of wheel sensor.
(Abnormal wheel sensor signal is entered.)
• Circuit for front right inlet solenoid valve is open.
(An abnormally low output voltage is entered.)
• Circuit for front left inlet solenoid valve is open.
(An abnormally low output voltage is entered.)
• Circuit for rear right inlet solenoid valve is open.
(An abnormally low output voltage is entered.)
• Circuit for rear left inlet solenoid valve is open.
(An abnormally low output voltage is entered.)
• Circuit for front right inlet solenoid valve is shorted.
(An abnormally high output voltage is entered.)
• Circuit for front left inlet solenoid valve is shorted.
(An abnormally high output voltage is entered.)

RR RH IN ABS SOL
[SHORT]

• Circuit for rear right inlet solenoid valve is shorted.
(An abnormally high output voltage is entered.)

RR LH IN ASS SOL
[SHORT]
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
[OPEN]
FR LH OUT ASS SOL
[OPEN]
RR RH OUT ASS SOL
[OPEN]

• Circuit for rear
(An abnormally
• Circuit for front
(An abnormally
• Circuit for front
(An abnormally
• Circuit for rear
(An abnormally
• Circuit for rear
(An abnormally
• Circuit for front
(An abnormally
• Circuit for front
(An abnormally
• Circuit for rear
(An abnormally
• Circuit for rear
(An abnormally

ABS SENSOR
[ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
FR RH IN ABS SOL
[OPEN]
FR LH IN ABS SOL
[OPEN]
RR RH IN ABS SOL
[OPEN]
RR LH IN ABS SOL
[OPEN]
FR RH IN ABS SOL
[SHORT]

RR LH OUT ABS SOL
[OPEN]
FR RH OUT ASS SOL
[SHORT]
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
[SHORT]
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
[SHORT]
RR LH OUT ASS SOL
[SHORT]
ABS ACTUATOR RELAY
[FAILURE]
ABS MOTOR
[FAILURE]
BATTERY VOLT
[VB-LOW]
CONTROL UNIT

left inlet solenoid valve is shorted.
high output voltage is entered.)
right outlet solenoid valve is open.
low output voltage is entered.)
left outlet solenoid valve is open.
low output voltage is entered.)
right outlet solenoid valve is open.
low output voltage is entered.)
left outlet solenoid valve is .open.
low output voltage is entered.)
right outlet solenoid valve is shorted.
high output voltage is entered.)
left outlet solenoid valve is shorted.
high output voltage is entered.)
right outlet solenoid valve is shorted.
high output voltage is entered.)
left outlet solenoid valve is shorted.
high output voltage is entered.)

Diagnostic
procedure
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

• Actuator solenoid valve relay is ON, even control unit sends off signal.
• Actuator solenoid valve relay is OFF, even control unit sends on signal.

6

• Circuit for actuator motor is open or shorted.
• Actuator motor relay is stuck.

5

• Power source voltage supplied to ABS control unit is abnormally low.

7

• Function of calculation in ASS control unit has failed.

8

BR-50

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
CONSULT Inspection Procedure (Cont’d)

m

DATA MONITOR

PROCEDURE

NISSAN

CONSULT
EE940

1) Turn ignition switch OFF.

+

2) Connect CONSULT to Data Link Connector for CONSULT.
3) Turn ignition switch ON.

fDU

II

START

I
I

SUB MODE

SEF253Q

Iil

~

01

SELECT SYSTEM

ENGINE

m 1) Touch

«START» on CONSULT screen.
«A8S».
3) Touch «DATA MONITOR».

Iil 2) Touch
t!J

~

I!l
(I

AfT

1

I!l

1) Touch «SETTING» on «SELECT MONITOR ITEM» screen.
2) Touch «LONG TIME» on «SET RECORDING COND» screen.
3) Touch «START» on «SELECT MONITOR ITEM».

AIRBAG
ABS
IVMS
SBR104D

t!J

I ~ SELECTDIAG MODE
I SELF-DIAG RESULTS

I
I

I

01

DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
ECU PART NUMBER

I
I

I

I
I

I

I
I

SST412B

I!l

I~

SELECT MONITOR ITEM
ALL SIGNALS

SELECTION FROM MENU

SETTING

II

START
SBR936C

AUTO TRIG
LONG TIME

SBR937C

BR-61

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
CONSULT Inspection Procedure (Coni’ d)
ACTIVE TEST PROCEDURE

Fa

NISSAN


CONSULT
EE940

+

rBU

1) Turn

START

I
I

When conducting Active test, vehicle must be stationary.
When ASS warning lamp stays on, never conduct Active
test.

I

ignition

2) Connect
3) Start

switch

CONSULT

OFF.
to Data Link Connector

I

SUB MODE

l

SEF253Q

Fa

m

D

SELECT SYSTEM

~

ENGINE

m

1) Touch

«START»

2) Touch

«ASS».

[!)

3) Touch

«ACTIVE

£!1

1) Select

active

on CONSULT

~

AIRBAG

II 2) Touch

ASS

test item

by touching

~

I

Carry

out the active

SBR104D

OJ

~ SELECT DIAG MODE
SELF.DIAG

RESULTS

DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
ECU PART NUMBER

SST412B

0

SELECT TEST ITEM

FR RH SOLENOID
FR LH SOLENOID
RR RH SOLENOID
RR LH SOLENOID

I
I

ASS MOTOR

SBR976C

II

~

FR RH SOL TEST

SELECT

MONITOR

ITEM

MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION

screen.

«START».

IVMS

~

screen.

TEST».

AlT

£!1

for CONSULT.

engine.

FROM

MENU

START
SBR934C

BR-62

test by touching

screen

key.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
CONSULT Inspection Procedure (Cont’d)
DATA MONITOR MODE
MONITOR ITEM

CONDITION

SPECIFICATION

FR RH SENSOR
FR LH SENSOR
REAR RH SENSOR

Drive vehicle.
(Each wheel is rotating.)

Almost the same speed as speedometer.

Brake is depressed.

Depress the pedal: ON
Release the pedal: OFF

Engine is running.

Operating conditions for each solenoid valve are indicated.
ABS is not operating: OFF

REAR LH SENSOR
STOP LAMP SW
FR RH IN SOL
FR RH OUT SOL
FR LH IN SOL
FR LH OUT SOL
RR RH IN SOL
RR RH OUT SOL
RR LH IN SOL
RR LH OUT SOL

.

Ignition switch ON (Engine stops): OFF
Engine running: ON

ACTUATOR RLY

MOTOR RELAY

ABS is not operating: OFF
ABS is operating: ON

Ignition switch is ON or
engine is running.

WARNING LAMP

Warning lamp is turned on: ON
Warning lamp is turned off: OFF

BATTERY VOLT

Power supply voltage for control unit

ACTIVE TEST MODE
TEST ITEM

CONDITION

JUDGEMENT
Brake fluid pressure control operation

FR RH SOLENOID
FR LH SOLENOID
RR RH SOLENOID
RR LH SOLENOID

ABS MOTOR

Engine is running.

UP (Increase):
KEEP (Hold):
DOWN (Decrease):

IN SOL

OUT SOL

OFF
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON

ABS actuator motor
ON: Motor runs
OFF: Motor stops

Note: Active test will automatically stop ten seconds after the
test starts. (LIMIT SIGNAL monitor shows ON.)

BR-63

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Component Parts and Harness Connector
Location
RHO models
Dual proportioning
valve

DABS

warning lamp

1.1 ABS relay box

X

~

Rear wheel sensors

Ii Rear right

wheel
sensor connector

[i1 Rear

left wheel
sensor connector

Brake master cylinder

For LHD models, control unit
is located on the opposite side.

SBR047DA

BR-64

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Preliminary Check
Max line

m
Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank.

Min line

Low fluid level may indicate brake pad

OK

wear or leakage from brake line.

SBR418CB

Check brake line for leakage.

NG

Repair.

NG

Replace.

NG

Replace.

NG

Fill up brake fluid.

NG

Check fuse, warning
lamp bulb and warning

OK

t

Check brake booster for operation and
air tightness. Refer to BR-15.
OK

Check brake pads and rotor. Refer to
SBR389C

BR-19,29.
OK

Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank.
OK

-,/»

iii,A’,.!.,

SBR058C

Check warning lamp activation.
When ignition switch is turned on,
warning lamp turns on.
OK

-~—

ASS ,:»arnlng

/~
/

/
/’

(‘)

/>Jf,

»

,J

lamp

,/~

I

i
/

) 003

-..,J

C

Check warning lamp for deactivation.
When ignition switch is turned on,
warning lamp turns on, then deacti.

(-ji=o

‘-,—_

..

NG

Go to Self-diagnosis,
BR-56.

vates after 1 second.
OK

~—

lamp circuit.

[—,-SBR051DA

Drive vehicle at 30 km/h (20 MPH) for at
least one minute.

Ensure warning lamp remains off while

NG

Go to Self-diagnosis,
BR-56.

driving.
OK

END

BR-65

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Ground Circuit Check
ACTUATOR MOTOR GROUND
• Check resistance between actuator motor ground terminal
and body ground.
Resistance:

on

SBR055D

[(

CONTROL UNIT GROUND
• Check resistance between the terminals and ground.

p~

C/UNIT CONNECTOR
28 . 29 . 39

15

Resistance:

on

SBR237D

~ABS

relay box 6-pin connector (body side)

EtiD r:tt °i5

T

ABS RELAY BOX GROUND
• Check resistance between ASS relay box harness 6-pin connector (body side) terminal @ and ground.
Resistance:

[ill

SBR931CB

BR-66

on

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Circuit Diagram for Quick Pinpoint Check
C!l

Z

H

zo.

W
Ul

(fJITL:
CDW>a:

@

II
0
I-

II
W
lI-

W
Ul

~

LL

::II:J
ZOUl
HI-Z
-lUO
WU
securi-ng bumper lower side to bumper fascia.
@) Remove clips ~
securing rear panel upper to bumper fascia.
@ Extract bumper fascia assembly.

rn
~\\\\\\\\\\\

I

1f;

omm~
(0 in)

,

«-

Opener cable
‘ ‘—

adju~~m~nl

l
[O.J :
~

N.m (kg-m, Il-Ib)

: N’m (kg-m, in-Ib)
SBT041

B1-9

BODY END
Body Rear End and Opener (Cont’d)
SEC. 850-900-905
Back door hinge adjustment

(!J

Opener handle

Back door stay installation

Fuel filler lid control

m

Gl

fi!I

I
I
I

I
@!@~

*

I

*

! <@Y

*
Bumper fascia assembly@

*:

Bumper assembly

mounting clips and bolls.

SBT042

B1-10

DOOR
Front Door

For removal of door trim, refer to «Door Trim» in «INTERIOR TRIM» for details, 8T-22.
After adjusting door or door lock, check door lock operation.
SEC. 800-803-805

Bell crank adjustment

Striker
adjustment

..

~

=:-/~
g3-

c1 ..
@~

.1~.6,

9 — 12)

Outside
handle
escutcheon

—: __

/~

‘. ‘
~~
~

,

~

Outside handle adjustment
(Turn holder as the clearance between
holder & rod is specified value.)

~

: N’m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

Ii] : N’m

(kg-m, in-Ib)

SBT044

BT-11

DOOR
Rear Door
SEC. 820-823-825

Outside

handle adjustment

m

Inside handle installation

Door-hinge

adjustment

r.:.1

-‘;;;;Tau@
()Q

~

,===W

.

m
~J'»,*

~’-

~

L!il4.3 — 5.9
(0.44 • 0.60, 38.1 • 52.2)

Amll.e
m

!ilS.2

r.:.1 Door-hinge

1[0.]21

_ 28 (2.1 — 2.9, 15 — 21)

— 7.0 (0.53 • 0.71, 46.0 • 62.0)

m

adjustment

Outside handle ~6)
escutcheon
/ ~:~ _
,

_t

6) ~

r

/

.»..,..-

0.5 — 2.4 mm ~
(0.020 • 0.094 in)

I

Release

I
ever

Holder

~
Outside handle adjustment
(Turn holder as the clearance between
holder & rod is specified value.)

Striker
adjustment

~

cI

=-/~13

ill

~

~’~3

— 16

1~;'»

: N’m (kg-m, ft-lb)

iii :N’m

(kg-m, in-Ib)

88T045

BT-12

INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION:

Disconnect both battery cables in advance.

Disconnect air bag system line in advance.

Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely

Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts.

REMOVAL —

affect air bag performance.

Instrument panel assembly

Instrument panel assembly

Audio & AIC control

Console box

Remove air bag module (driver’s) and steering wheel.
Refer to «SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM» in RS section for details.

CD

Steering column cover and combination switch
• Remove screws.

l6l

Instrument lower panel on driver side
• Remove screws.

@ Cluster lid C
• Remove screws and disconnect harness connectors.

@ Cluster lid A
• Remove screws.

@ Combination meter
• Remove screws and disconnect harness connectors.

cID

Audio and AIC control unit
• Remove screws from the instrument panel.

(J) Glove box assembly
• Remove glove box pin .
• Then disconnect passenger air bag module
connector.

@ Passenger air bag module
• Refer to «SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM» in RS section for details.

@ AIT finisher or MIT shift lever boot

@ Rear console box
• Remove console mask and screws.

@ Front console box
• Remove screws and bolts.

@ Instrument mask
• Disconnect harness connector.

@ Front pillar garnish
• Refer to «Side and Floor Trim» in «INTERIOR TRIM» for details, 8T-16.

@ Instrument panel and pads
• Remove bolts and nuts.
• Remove door mirror switch and disconnect
the connector.

II

8T-13

INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEC. 248-251-272-487-680-685-969
8

Metal clip

rn

* : Instrument

bolts & nuts.
panel assembly mounting
.

SBT046

8T-14

INSTRUME NT PANEL

SBT047


8T-15

INTERIOR TRIM
Side and Floor Trim
CAUTION:
Wrap the tip of flat-bladed

REMOVAL —

screwdriver

with a cloth when removing

metal clips from garnishes.

Body side trim

4-door sedan

CD

Remove
@ Remove
@) Remove
@ Remove
@) Remove
@ Remove
tD Remove
@ Remove
@ Remove
@) Remove
@ Remove
@ Remove

front and rear seats. Refer to «SEAT» for details, BT-35.
front and rear seat belts. Refer to «SEAT BELTS» in RS section for details.
front and rear kicking plates.
dash side lower finishers.
front and rear body side welts.
front pillar garnishes.
center pillar lower garnishes.
center pillar upper garnishes.
rear pillar garnishes.
rear parcel shelf finisher.
welt.
seatback finisher.

SEC. 678-749-769-799

(!] Metal

clip

(ilHook

Metal clip~

X : Metal clips

SBT048

8T-16

INTERIOR TRIM
Side and Floor Trim (Cont’d)

m

To instrument

panel

8BT049


8T-17

INTERIOR TRIM
Side and Floor Trim (ConI’ d)
REMOVAL —

Body side trim

5-door hatchback
• Remove tonneau board before removing body side trim.
CD Remove front and rear seats. Refer to «SEAT» for details, BT-35.
@ Remove front and rear seat belts. Refer to «SEAT BELTS» in RS section for details.
@) Remove front and rear kicking plates.
@ Remove dash side lower finishers.
CID Remove front and rear body side welts.
@) Remove front pillar garnishes.
(f) Remove center pillar lower garnishes.
@ Remove center pillar upper garnishes.
@ Remove rear parcel shelf side finishers.
@) Remove rear pillar finishers.
@ Remove rear wheelhouse finishers.
@ Remove luggage room rear plate.
@ Remove luggage room rear finisher.
@ Remove luggage room side lower finishers.
SEC. 678-749-769-799
Metal cliPGl

~:

Velcro
X : Metal clip
88T050

8T-18

INTERIOR TRIM
Side and Floor Trim (Cont’d)

To instrument

panel

SBT051


8T-19

INTERIOR TRIM
Side and Floor Trim (Conl’d)
REMOVAL —

Body side trim

3-door hatchback
• Remove tonneau board before removing body side trim.
CD Remove front and rear seats. Refer to «SEAT» for details, BT-35.
@ Remove front and rear seat belts. Refer to «SEAT BELTS» in RS section for details.
@) Remove kicking plate.
@ Remove dash side lower finishers.
@ Remove body side welts.
@ Remove front pillar garnishes.
(j) Remove rear parcel shelf side finishers.
@ Remove rear side finishers.
@ Remove rear pillar garnishes.
@) Remove luggage room rear plate.
@ Remove luggage room rear finisher.
@ Remove luggage room rear side lower finishers.
SEC. 678-749-769-799

~:

Velcro
X : Metal clips
SBT052

8T-20

___________

s~rcN~T~E~R*IO~R~~T~RI~M~~CO’:;j;;j),Side an

d Floor Trim (Cont d)

1

Metal clip

To instrument

panel

SBT053


8T-21

INTERIOR TRIM
Door Trim
REMOVAL —

Door trim

3-door hatchback
(j) Remove inside handle escutcheon.
@ Remove arm rest finisher from power window switch assembly and disconnect the connector.
@ Remove bolts, screws and clips @ securing door finisher.
@ Lift out door finisher.
SEC. 809

«»J

@

r

@

a

~’

SBT054

8T-22

INTERIOR TRIM
Door Trim (Coni’ d)
REMOVAL —

Door trim

4-door sedan and 5-door hatchback
G) Remove inside handle escutcheon.

CID Remove arm rest finisher from power window switch assembly and disconnect the connector.
@
@
@
@

Remove screw securing pull handle and remove pull handle.
Remove window regulator handle (Manual window models).
Remove bolts, screws and clips ~
securing door finisher.
Lift out door finisher.

SEC. 251-267-809-828

:

Hook

~ Manual
Removal

(j)

window

regulator

~?
~
{}

@~l

handle

.P»h
Flat-bladed
screwdriver

Squeeze the regulator handle clip in place with a
screwdriver and remove the regulator handle from
the regulator shaft.
Set the regulator handle clip as shown in figure CD

.

Installation

Push the regulator handle to install it onto the regulator
shaft.
Install the regulator handle in place as shown in the figure
with the window completely closed.
88T055

8T-23

INTERIOR TRIM
Roof Trim
REMOVAL —

Headlining

4-door sedan

CD
@
@)
@
@
@
([)

@
@
@)
@

Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove

front and rear seats. Refer to «SEAT» for details, BT-35.
front and rear seat belts. Refer to «SEAT BELTS» in RS section for details.
body side trim. Refer to «Side and Floor Trim» for details, BT-16.
sunroof switch. (Models equipped with sunroof)
sunroof welt. (Models equipped with sunroof)
inside mirror assembly.
sun visors.
interior lamp assembly.
assist grips.
clips @ securing headlining.
headlining.

SEC. 264-738-963-964

9

Pawl’

Pawl

SBT056

BT-24

INTERIOR TRIM
Roof Trim (Cont’d)
REMOVAL —

Headlining

3-door and 5-door hatchback

CD

Remove front and rear seats. Refer to «SEAT»

for details,

BT-35.

@ Remove front and rear seat belts. Refer to «SEAT BELTS» in RS section for details.
@) Remove body side trim. Refer to «Side and Floor Trim» for details, BT-16.
@ Remove sunroof switch. (Models equipped with sunroof)

cID

Remove sunroof welt. (Models equipped with sunroof)

@ Remove inside mirror assembly.
(f) Remove sun visors.
@ Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove
Remove

@
@)
(j]
@

interior lamp assembly.
assist grips.
clips @ securing headlining.
roof rear garnish.
headlining.

SEC. 264-738-963-964

Pawlm

Metal clip

l!1

m
Pawl


SBT05?

8T-25

_

__________

-:~N~T~E~R~IO~R~T~R~IM~——Trun k Room Trim

SEC. 849

Front

Trunk room rear plate

Trunk roo m floor trim

SBT05B

BT-26

INTERIOR TRIM
Back Door Trim
REMOVAL —

CD

Remove
CID Remove
@) Remove
@ Remove

Back door trim

back door side finisher.
handle escutcheon.
back door finisher.
high-mounted stop lamp.

SEC. 909

x
x

><

Me'» ‘UP~


G’,»‘~
SBTOS9

BT-27

EXTERIOR

SBT060

8T-28

EXTERIOR

CD ~

CID Windshield upper molding

Hood front sealing rubber

SEC. 720

SEC. 650
Hood front sealing rubber

1
2.
3.

Cut off sealant at glass end.
Clean the side on which panel was mounted.
Set molding fastener and apply primer to body
panel, and apply sealant to body.

58T061

(ID @ Cowl top seal and cowl top grille
SEC. 660

4.

Install molding by aligning the molding mark
located on center with vehicle center.
Be sure to install tightly so that there is no gap
around the corner.

@lJ

SBF342H

Cowl top seal

(f) Drip weatherstrip

58T062

CID Windshield side molding
Mounted with screws,

Door panel


SEC. 720

SBT063

8T-29

EXTERIOR
@ Door outside molding

@ Body side welt

III

Front door

SEC. 769

SEC. 800

Screw’

g.@~

~/CIiP

Door outer molding

d;!)de

~

__

~»..-/f’yoor

Rear door

~

c:?

~J

s,,~,~)
SEC. 820

: Front door only
SBT043

CID Door weatherstrip

.~

outer panel

~’

«‘,,

mold'»

SEC. 800.820
CIIP~~
Door panel ~

—~

0
SBT067

@ Sunroof lid weath erstnp.
SEC.736

Sun roof lid
weatherstrip
Roof panel

SBF455EA

r

@ Front doo r parting
.
seal

Sun roof rail
assembly

l
Front

(

@

\@

SBF349H

\

~~

@

::€t)£j
I.

II

.~) I

……… \

@

\

@

II

@

u

SBT065

8T-30

EXTERIOR
@J

@ Trunk lid weatherstrip

Side guard molding

SEC. 766
4-door and 5-door

SEC. 843

3-door
Bonding portion

SBT069

@ Back door side sealing rubber
SEC. 909

; Double-faced adhesive tape

——~

~~~~
~.:

..

..

.

~-o

«—-‘

~.

-.-/

‘Heat gun
SBT06B

With a vehicle coated with Hard Clear Coat,
use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product
No. 4210 or equivalent, after priming with 3M
primer Product No. N-200 or C-100 or equivalent.

SBT070

@

Back door window molding

SEC. 900
Back door window molding

@ Rear window upper molding and side
molding

Basically the same as windshield upper molding.
Refer to @ Windshield upper molding.

@

Rear window lower molding

Mounted with screws.

Removal: Remove molding by cutting around its perimeter.
Installation: Refer to «Back door window.»
MBF13BAA

8T-31

@l

Back door weatherstrip

SEC. 900

Vehicle center

Bonding portion
SBT072

@ Rear combination

lamp.
d ith nuts and butyl sealant.
Rear com b’Ination lamps are Installe w

SEC. 265

BT-32

EXTERIOR
@

Front air spoiler

SEC. 960

8BT074

@

Front strut tower bar assembly

SEC. 401

[OJ :

N.m (kg-m, ft-lb)
8BT099

CAUTION:
Do not remove front strut tower bar assembly while vehicle is jacked up with wheels on.

8T-33

EXTERIOR
@

Rear air spoiler
When installing,
Before installing

make sure that there are not gaps or waves at ends of air spoiler.
spoiler, clean and remove oil from surface where spoiler will be mounted.

4-door sedan
SEC. 960

Sealing rubber

SBT075

3-door and 5-door hatchback
Double-laced

SEC. 960

adhesive lape

SBT076

8T-34

SEAT

*

When removing

or installing

For Wiring Diagram,

the seat trim, carefully

handle it to keep dirt out and avoid damage.

refer to «POWER SEAT» in EL section.

Front Seat
SEC. 870

l»l 43 • 55 (4.4 • 5.6, 32 . ~

~4.4
t»J :’ — -555.6,
~~@~.

~

iTiln>__

~
32 • 41)

L

m

I:
tOJ

~

/
m

~

43 — 55
~’}
(4.4 — 5.6, 32 • 41)

21 — 26 (2.1 — 2.7, 15 . 20)

~,


~

: N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

SBT077

8T-35

SEAT
Heated Seat


When handling seat, be extremely careful not to scratch heating unit.
To replace heating unit, seat trim and pad should be separated.
Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, gasoline,

etc. to clean trims.

Seatback heating unit removal & installation
Seat back trim

Heating
unit

Trim temperature
0C (OF)

Thermostat
operation

Increasing to

Decreasing to

35 — 45
(95 — 113)

15 — 25
(59 — 77)

OFF

ON
SBF424H

*

For Wiring Diagram, refer to «HEATED SEAT» in EL section.

8T-36

SEAT
Rear Seat
4-door sedan
SEC. 880

Rear seat hinge

[!J

~

: N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

if
I

Bushing

~

13 — 16

l ~’;’

«tD-1

~

(1.3 — 1.6,
9 — 12)

..

Ol

-=—-,
/ t

SBT078


8T-37

SEAT
Rear Seat (Cont’d)
Hatchback
Type-l
SEC. 880

Rear seat hinge

~

m

; N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)
SBT079

Type-2
SEC. 880

Rear seat back striker

r.i.1

Rear armrest h’mge~r-‘I

Bushing

,

N7I

l

~~-~
~13

-I’ ‘)
.—!
)

-16~
(1.3 — 1.6,
9 • 12)
~

~

BT-38

~

~

; N’m (kg-m, fHb)

SBT080

SUNROOF
ADJUSTMENT
Install motor & limit SW assembly and sunroof rail assembly in the following sequence:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Arrange equal lengths of link and wire assemblies on both sides of sunroof opening.
Connect sunroof connector to sunroof switch and positive (+) power supply.
Set lid assembly to fully closed position
by operating OPEN switch and TILT switch.
Fit outer side of lid assembly to the surface of roof on body outer panel.
Remove motor, and keep OPEN switch pressed until motor pinion gear reaches the end of its rotating range.
Install motor.
Check that motor drive gear fits properly in wires.
Press TILT-UP switch to check lid assembly for normal tilting.
Check sunroof lid assembly for normal operations (tilt-up, tilt-down, open, and close).

m

9 Rear

ri1

FrontQ

/

Tilting

up & down range

;::

u

Outer body panel

~

Closing & opening

~

Closing & opening

range

range

SBF920F


81-39

SUNROOF
REMOVAL

After any adjustment, check sunroof operation and lid alignment.
Handle finisher plate and glass lid with care so not to cause damage.
It is desirable for easy installation to mark each point before removal.

CAUTION:
Always work with a helper.
Link and wire
assembly

Sunroof frame
assembly

Shade assembly

~
~

8T-40

Lid assembly

Motor assembly

SUNROOF

*

For Wiring Diagram,

refer to «ELECTRIC

SUNROOF»

in EL section.

SEC. 736

@Rear

drain assembly


@Motor

assembly

7 Sunroof switch bracket

SBT081

81-41

SUNROOF

m

Using flat-bladed screwdriver, pry shade assembly holder
off rail. Then pull shade assembly forward to remove it from
rail.

I]IIDisengage
holder.

pawls from rail, then remove window deflector

mUsing
flat-bladed screwdriver, pry stopper spring off rail
groove. Then slide rear guide backward to remove it from
rail.

Link assembly

mRemove
wire and link assembly from rail while pushing
link back with flat-bladed screwdriver.,

MBF493B

81-42

WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS
REMOVAL

Cutting sealant

After removing moldings, remove glass,
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch glass when removing.

INSTALLATION

Use genuine Nissan Sealant kit or equivalent.
Follow
instructions furnished with it.

After installing the glass, the vehicle should remain stationary until the sealant hardens.
WARNING:
Keep heat and open flames away as primers are flammable.
CAUTION:
Advise user not to drive the vehicle on rough roads until sealant has properly vulcanized.
•. Do not use sealant which is past its usable term.

Do not leave cartridge unattended with its cap open.

Keep primers and sealant in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they
should be stored in a refrigerator.

Molding must be installed securely so that it is in position
and leaves no gap.

SBF034B

Windshield and Rear Window
Body side

Glass side

Install spacer to panel.
Windshield

Rear window

Install dam
rubber.
Windshield
8 (0.31)

Vehicle center

8 (0.31)

‘@8(0.31)1:@

447.2 (17.61)

fj

8 (0.31)

Joint portion

:~’
h¥ •

Joint
portion

G,,,,

O,m ,»bb»~
Double-laced
adhesive tape

markmg po»II»

8 (0.31)

»

Rear window

t==

(J

8 (0.31)

Apply sealant evenly.
Windshield and rear window

400 (15.75)

7 • 8 (0.28 • 0.31)

Install molding fastener.
When installing it, heat body panel and
fastener to approx. 30 to 40°C
(86 to 104°F).

0;-.

Upper & side molding lasteners

V

Fastener

12 — 15
(0.47 — 0.59)

P'»»~
Unit: mm (in)
Double-laced adhesive

tape

S8T083

REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR WINDSHIELD
Leaks can be repaired

without removing

and reinstalling

glass.

If water is leaking between caulking material and body or glass, determine
can be determined by applying water while pushing glass outward.
To stop the leak, apply primer and then sealant to the leak point.

81-43

the extent of leakage. This

WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS
Back Door Window

SEC. 900

.:

Locating pin

: Spacer

Primer portion (Body side)

Spacer portion

Ii

Spacer in;ltallation
marking

pacer

S

pacer

:t

Spacer installation
marking

Back door molding

Back door molding
joint portion

Apply sealant evenly.
More than
7 (0.28)

Locating pin

8 mm
(0.31 in)
primer~
607.6 (23.92)

611.3 (24.07)
Unit: mm (in)

Back door mOld~

Back door window molding
Unit: mm (in)
SBT098

BT-44

WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS
Rear Side Window

Sealant quantity

1

12 — 15
(0.47 — 0.59)

17 -8
Unit: mm (in)

locating

(0.28 — 0.31)

pin
58T084

Sealant quantity
12 — 15
(0.47 — 0.59)

7 -8
(0.28 — 0.31)
Unit: mm (in)

88T085

8T-45

MIRROR
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch door rearview

*

For Wiring Diagram,

REMOVAL —

Door Mirror
mirror body.

refer to «POWER

DOOR MIRROR»

in EL section.

Door mirror

CD

Remove door trim. Refer to «Door Trim» for details, BT-22.
~ Remove inner cover from front corner of door.
~ Disconnect door mirror harness connector.
@ Remove bolts securing door mirror, then remove door mirror assembly.
SEC. 963

Removal:
• Wrap flat-bladed of screwdriver with a cloth to prevent
scratching rear of door mirror. Do not insert screwdriver

too far.

Pawl

Cloth

Flat-bladed
screwdriver

58T086

8T-46

BODY ALIGNMENT





All dimensions indicated in figures are actual ones.
When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and
gauge itself to make sure there is no free play.
When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the
other side is symmetrically the same value.
The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of
«X», «Y» and HZ».
2

~r
(+)

I
y

/H

v

L»oo»

~

b.~

Ii»‘

«2»: Imaginary base line
[200 mm below datum line
(«02» at design plan)]

Front axle center
(0)
SBF874GB

Engine Compartment

MEASUREMENT


SBT087

8T-47

BODY ALIGNMENT
Engine Compartment (Cont’d)
MEASUREMENT

POINTS
Unit: mm

SBT088

Front side

Radiato~ COrf~ —.!upport lo~er

-~-

l’l

J

«c

::::>

1,017

@@
@@
0
Itl
CD

(J)
(II

CD

Itl
CD

.,.
..,.

..,.

(J)

(J)

Itl
O.

.,.»,

@@

CXlItl
CXlC!-

(II

(J)

CXl

(j
£

~

(J)

0:

-l

0
Itl
Itl

@)@

@»I

@@
500

~{>

~{>

88T096

BT-49

BODY ALIGNMENT
Underbody (Cont’d)
MEASUREMENT

POINTS
Rear

{t

Front
coordinates:

Rear
coordinates:

@.@

@.@

@

X : 393.5
Y : 1,460
Z : 126.9

X : 475
Y : 3,082
Z : 336.8

X : 250
Y : -632
Z : 224.8

@.@
X : 492
Y : -450
Z : 355

@.@
X : 406
Y : 64
Z : 172

@.@

••

Q

Q

II

CD

X : 600
Y : 2,035
Z : 235.2

Q)

@

X : 432
Y : 338
Z : 128

X : 300
Y : 2,480
Z : 381.8

CD

X : -542
Y : 3,082
Z : 336.8

@
X : -300
Y : 2,480
Z : 405.8

@. @)
RH side

If

Q).

(g),@

@

LH side

Bottom
view of
vehicle

@

X : 150
Y : 2,442.9
Z : 241

X : 395
Y : 515
Z : 129.2

dia.@.

@

X : 572
Y : 1,940
Z : 200

X : 352.7
Y : 69
Z : 240

CEJ,

12

@,

X : 393
Y : 2,560
Z : 365

@
X : 470
Y : 2,911
Z : 339.6

@
X : -539
Y : 2,911
Z : 339.6
Unit: mm

Front and rear strut tower centers
I

~-t~

Coordinates:

@.0
X : 522.2
Y : 18.1
Z : 571.7

Front

@,

076 dia.

Rear

@,

@62

dia.

@,@
X : 465
Y : 2,456.4
Z : 522
Front
SBT097

BT-50

CLUTCH

SECTION

CL

CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION

2

Operating

Precautions

2

Clutch

Preparation

2

CLUTCH SYSTEM — Hydraulic Type
CLUTCH SYSTEM — Mechanical Type
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting

Clutch

Bleeding

Procedure

Pedal

Master

Cylinder

Clutch

Disc

5

Clutch

Cover

type

9
11
11

and Flywheel

12

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

13

5

General

6

Inspection

6

7
8

CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANiSM
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER

4
5

Hydraulic

HYDRAULIC CLUTCH CONTROL..
Clutch

3

Cylinder

Damper

Specifications
and Adjustment

13
14

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Precautions





Recommended fluid is brake fluid «DOT 3″.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
When removing and installing clutch piping, use Tool.
Use new brake fluid to clean or wash all parts of master
cylinder, operating cylinder and clutch damper.
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. It will
ruin the rubber parts of the hydraulic system.

SBR820B

WARNING:
After cleaning clutch disc, wipe it with a dust collector.
use compressed air.

Do not

Preparation
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Tool number
Tool name

Description

GG94310000
Flare nut torque wrench

Removing and installing clutch piping

a: 10 mm (0.39 in)

NT406

New

KV30101600 (New)

Installing clutch cover and clutch disc:

KV30101000 (Former)
Clutch aligning bar

a: 15.9 mm (0.626 In) dia.
b: 17.9 mm (0.705 in) dia.
c: 40 mm (1.57 in)

NT645

ST20050240
Diaphragm spring
adjusting wrench

Adjusting unevenness of diaphragm spring
of clutch cover
a: 150 mm (5.91 in)
b: 25 mm (0.98 in)

NT404

COMMERCIAL
Tool name

SERVICE TOOLS

Description

Equivalent to
GG94310000
CD Flare nut crows foot
@ Torque wrench

Removing and installing clutch piping

a: 10 mm (0.39 in)

NT360

CL-2

CLUTCH SYSTEM —

Hydraulic Type

m (bl : Apply

lithium-based grease including
molybdenum disulphide.

G)

Clutch pedal bracket

@

Withdrawal lever

@

Clutch master cylinder
Assist spring
Bushing
Pin
Stopper rubber
Operating cylinder
Air bleeder screw

@J

@

Release bearing
Clutch hose
Operating cylinder support
bracket
Clutch lever
Spring pin

@

Operating cylinder bracket

@
@
@
@
(J)

@

@
@
@

CL-3

~

: N.m (kg-m. ft-Ib)

~

: N.m (kg-m. in-Ib)

@
@

@
@
@
@

Clutch cover
Clutch disc
Clutch pedal
Clevis pin
Pedal stopper
Fulcrum pin

SCL667

CLUTCH SYSTEM —

Mechanical Type

SEC. 300’307.465
~

r»»

@m

~~~

~

,/
/

<
@

~

~JO

~,
to.J 16 — 22

12 — 16)~
model)

,-0

{l

I

~;,

~

a ,
be

i,:

c

I

‘,@/
c

‘~d’

_1 L~—-

@

~

.~

J

• 22 (1.6 — 2.2, 12 • 16)

@

~m

..—…….

to.J13-16
(1.3 • 1.6, 9 — 12)

~

C1J.~,

.Jl

@m

(

.~.

,
I

~

@

I

d ~~
v,~

1

@

to.J 16 — 22 (1.6 — 2.2, 12 — 16)

@ to.J 16

I’

a!’,~~

,

~

to.J 13 — 16 (1.3 • 1.6, 9 • 12)

~~

‘:,

/~

~’

be .~’:~

:’ ~’

‘m
@

r ‘;,

~

1r

~

01Q’?0’J:l’e..——

~

(1.6 — 2.2, 12 — 16)

Of ~

@m

~

M

~

0~~

‘»l(0.8-1.1,69-95)

<:.~
‘I

¥:11)

/l~~

m (Q

~

~I!C!

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

Radiator Core Support (Partial Replacement)
Hoodledge (Partial Replacement)
Front Side Member (Partial Replacement)
Front Pillar ..~

33
34
35
36

Center Pillar (Sedan -5-door Hatchback)
Outer Sill (Sedan -5-door Hatchback)
Outer Sill (3-door Hatchback)
Rear Fender (Sedan)
Rear Fender (5-door Hatchback)
Rear Fender (3-door Hatchback)
Rear Floor Rear

37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Rear Side Member Extension (Sedan)

44

Rear Side Member Extension (3-door and 5-door Hatchback)

45

_

~~~~~~~~_GENERALJNFORM~ION~~~~~~~~_

REPLACEMENT

Rear Side Member Extension

Identification Number
Vehicle identification

Emission

control information

number

Vehicle identification

OPERATIONS

Service

plate

Joint

label

SGI908

VEHICLE

IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER

/
/

ARRANGEMENT

JN1

B

A

A

N15

U

T

T

xxxxxx.

0

—c::

0: Stopgap

/~

——-

~ ~>~

‘——-

For Europe

Sedan

,,

I

serial number

(no meaning)

Destination
U: Europe

Model
A: 2-wheel

drive

Engine type
A: GA 14DE engine
C: GA 16DE engine
E: SR20DE engine
F: CD20 engine

111

Body type
B: 4-door Sedan
F: 5-door Hatchback
E: 3-door Hatchback
Manufacturer

114

J N 1: Nissan, Passenger vehicle

2-spot welds

3-spot

welds

M. I. G plug weld
For
d

-1-

r;==

GTJ

(

3 panels plug weld method

dA~

dB~

-44-

~

)

M. I. G seam weld/
Point weld

/

c-

________

REPLACEM ENT OPERATIONS

GENERAL INFORMATION

Rear Floor Rear
(Work

_

Identification Number (Cont’ d)

after rear panel have been removed.)

Except for Europe

Service Joint

IN 1

. B

CAN

15

0

A

XXXXXX

T
—c:::
T

111

0: Stopgap

serial number

(no meaning)

Destination
A: Australia and New Zealand
Z: Except for Europe, Australia,

~

and New Zealand

Model
A: 2-wheel

drive

Engine type
B: GA 15DE engine
C: GA 16DE engine
E: SR20DE engine-For

Australia

and New Zealand only

Body type
B: 4-door Sedan
F: 5-door Hatchback
Manufacturer
IN 1: Nissan, Passenger vehicle

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

PLATE

Europe

Expect Europe
NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. APAN

NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. JAPAN

I

~

I

~

CNHOA»SIS

~

o

&
1-

kgO

&
&

2TYPE
TTP

~(:l &

~ tt

~~~sg~
~~~~~o

COlOR. TRIM
FARBE. POlST

&

kg
kg

~

~

&

o ~0:ggtg~ ~~~RNICION ~ &.
~~~~~~~
& £
;

; ~)~

/

~~~~~’.

AE~~

PLANT
PlANTA

&
El ii: 13 IJJ

if[

** it ~ *1

FR

3D
5D

HI
HI

_2

B : 3door hatchback
B : 5door hatchback

2-spot welds

3-spot welds

M. I. G plug weld

.

For

• GTJrr=-

(

3 panels plug weld method

• A ===-=

-43-

.’S ~
~

)

A1 L11

F

M I G seam weld/
weld
P:
.L.LLL

-2-

MADE IN JAPAN

o
cc

1 Type approval number
2 Vehicle identification
number(Chassis number)
3 Gross vehicle weight
4 Gross combination weight
Gross vehicle weight
+ Gross trailing capacity
(Weight)
5 Gross axle weight(Front)
6 Gross axle weight(Rear)
7 Type approval number
8 Body color code
9 Trim color code
10 Model Specification No.
11 Engine model
12 Engine displacement
13 Transaxle model
14 Axle model

REPLACEMENT’

Rear Fender

Underbody Component Parts

~

:i

J:

..J

et:

~

>-

:i
..J

:i ~

:c

a: .

Q)

-~

c:

0
0)(3

c:

Q)

~Q)

+-‘

c:

Q)

J:
..J

Q)
+-‘

x

Q)

’00 +-‘c: +-‘c: ~
co
0 0

~Q)

~
J:

E
Q)

u
~

c:

+-‘
Q)

’00

«t-

Q)
+-‘

~

c:
‘0)

c:

Q)
~ Q)
~ .0 cC Q)x
U
~Q) ~Q) Q)~ Q)~ E
Q)
~Q) ~Q)
Q)
.0 .0 .0 .0 E .0
.0
.0
en

+-‘
Q)

:i (5~
~
~ cou
c:

«t-

Jo,;.

E E E E en E E E
0
~
E E E E u
E E E
m ~
m

..J

+-‘

~

0

‘+-

112

~
u E .0
~
:i, c: Q) 0
Q)

.0

0

«t-

c:
‘0)

~
~

.0 Q)
0).0

c:

+-‘

c:

Q)

‘,p
:J

0

..c:
u

co
Cl)

c:

+-‘

c:

,~-

co

— — — -«»

~ 0
~ Q5
0 E m E Q) «t- .0
a:
c:
+-‘
Q)
’00
Q)
Q)
Q)
m Q) co ~co l0- +-‘
+-‘
Q)
Q)
O
en
co
«‘0 «‘0 «‘0 «‘0 co
m Q) ~ 0 Q)
«‘0 «‘0 0
~ 0
’00 ’00 ’00 ’00 Q) ’00
~0 0) en .0 i:i=0 m
’00 u i:i= ’00 ‘E u
en
Cl)
+-‘
~
+-‘
+-‘
+-‘
+-‘
(0
~
~ ~ ~ ~ +-‘c: Q) c:
looc: «‘0
c: c: c: c: co
c: co co
«‘0 .0
co co co
0 0
~ co Q) Q)
~ Q) Q) Q) Q) ~0 c: co~ c: ~ 0
~ 0
~ ~ 0
u.. :t: CC CC
u.. u.. u.. u.. cc CC CC CC «t- ..= l- N
,…… CO m
q- LO co ,…… CO 0’) 0
CV)
N CV) q- LO CO
Q)

Q)

Q)

Q)

Q)

Q)

Q)

0

+-‘

Cl)

«

N N N N N N

+-‘
Q)

~

u

~

t::
0
a.
a.
:J
en

~

u

co
.0
+-‘

co

Q)

~

Q)

cc

‘,p

co
«‘0

~

c:

E

Q)

«‘0
co
~ ’00 ~:J (3
~ ~ E
0 0
~
‘,p
Q)

Q)

0

+-‘

0

~ co~

:J

co

Cl)

Q)

co
..c:

x

CV)

CV)

CV)

CV)

:i

e8

~

‘,p

a:

:J

or-

c:
0

+-‘

c:
Q)

:c :a
E E

u

co
J
LO

Q)

Q)

Cl)
Cl)

Cl)
Cl)

co

co

Q)

Q)

~ ~

.0 .0

+-‘
Q)

~

u

E ~

N

>- >-

E
~ ~
co

or

116

J:

c:

qq- q- q- q- q- qN

0

CV)

..J

Q)

a.
cc cc w c.n
Q)

CV)

~

:J

co

CV)

CV)

«\

Q)

+-‘
Q)

~ +-‘Q)
u ~
:i 0 .0co~ uco
a: E~ 0..0~
0)
Q)

~

en ‘+= ‘+=
co

c:

CV)

CV)

e

co
-:- .0
J: 0)

..J

N

CV)

Q)

c:
Q)

~

0

0)

0

‘,p

c:

c: c
‘0) ::::J
~ 0

Q)

U

Q)

«t-

E
«t-

u

..0

~

+-‘

~ ~ E
Q)

Q)

c: .0 .0
‘0) E E

c:

0
EQ) ~ Q) Q) ’00
E
Q)
>E E co E E Cl)c:

@3

or

112

e5

or

114

+-‘
Q)
Q)
m Q) Q) a.
«‘0
«‘0 «‘0
’00 ’00 ~Q) ’00 ’00 :J
a.+-, +-‘ +-‘
+-‘
+-‘
Cl)

«‘0

Cl)

ui
c

ui
c:

‘f

‘f

0

0

0

0

Q.

E

c:

c:

0
~

0
~

u.. u.. CO

C C
0
‘u.. LJ-

,……

CO

0

:J

0’)

e

C
0
~

u..

N
N N N

Q.

Q)

tJ)
tJ)

…,CD
tJ)

ui J:
c: «C
c
m ‘f ca

«C
CD

…,

0
CJ
CD

cs.

CD

:>

‘;;

e

0

0
Q.

en
tJ)

;.

tJ)

:>

‘;;
6

E

~

C)

m

…,!

CD
«C

c:
tJ)

.J::.

‘;;
6

C)

tJ)

tJ)

tJ)

m

m

m

CJ

CJ

~ ~ ~

.5 .5 .5

0I
~

114

113

..J

t:: t::
0
t:: 0
0 a. a.
a.
a. a.
:J
:J
t:: a.
0 :J Q) Q)
a.
~ ~
a. Q)
~ 0 0

…,~ :.c …,~
…,CD …,CD …,CD
CJ

J:

:c

tJ)

CD
«C

>-

e

Q)

Unit:mm

CD

0 …,CD 0
~
~
‘+:i
‘+:i .J::.
c …, c:
m

114

CD

…,CD
‘;;

2-spot welds

3-spot welds

M, I. G plug weld

Q)

m
m
co

Cl)

a:
:c

Cl)

:J

0

Cl)

u

Q)

~

0

u

~

0
+-‘
co

:.cco
CC

«~

0
co

+-‘

U

U

0
+-‘
co

0
+-‘
co

~

~

>-

co

~ ~

Q)

~

Q)

1’1’

«‘0
0
0
J:

U5

…J

a.
a.
::::>

N

CV)

q- LO

Q)

«‘0

Q)
Cl)

Cl)

.Q

~

0

Q)
0)

«‘0

=0

(

3 panels plug weld method

.A~

• B~

0
0

~~..c:

:.cco :.cco ~u «’05>

:.cco ~ ~

Q)

E

+-‘

• G@rr=

Q)

.g

>-

«‘0
0
0

Q)..c:»t-

+-‘

C

e

=0 CD CD
o a. ~

~gs
co,……

00

-42-

-3-

F:~~m

M I G

For

J:

Cl)

1 or 11 1

E
Q)
~u

E
Cl)
c:
~ ‘0)
U
~
co
~ .:t:

0

0

@

Q)

+-‘

0

1 or 11 1

112
111

Q)

u
~

@

c:

+-‘

en +-‘
c: cc
en co 0
co -a. ._
c:
en
Q)
0) c: 0
+-‘
Q)
’00
co c: +-‘
a. ’00 x c:

(3

3-door hatchback

Service Joint

J:
..J

E
Q)

OPERATIONS

~

)

P:
..u..u.

Id/

we

___________

________

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Rear Fender

BODY COMPONENT

5-door hatch back

Body Component

PARTS
Parts

_
Sedan
5-door Hatchback

Service Joint
~

o
o

@ 1 or 111

113

‘»C

1 or 11 1
112
111

iD

@

111
_ 7 orll5

112

~
c

[IJ

…….

co

:I:

«0

«en

1IIl.

(]J

[J

ID

~~f~

@90r1l7
_50r1l4
_ 5 orll4

c

«»

co

_ 4 orll3

«0
(]J

~

en

_ 3 orll2

c
co

@ 1 or 111

«0
[IJ
…….

111

_ 12 orll 9

(]J

en

:I:
0
LO

@ 5 orll 4
1IIl.
(length: 10mm)
@ 4

or 11 3

Rear pillar inner
reinforcement

_ 200r 11 15
Unit:mm

116

@ 1 or 111

c
co

«0
(]J

2-spot welds

3-spot

welds
M.1. G plug wel(d

·r

For 3 panels plug weld method

)

M.I. G seam weld/
Point weld

en

.A===-= .B~

-41-

-4-

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

~~~~~~~_BODYCOMPONENTPAR~~~~~~~~_

Rear Fender

Sedan

Body Component Parts

Sedan

5-door Hatchback

Service Joint

..an

(length

: 10mm)

Unit:mm
Cut off
@

1 orll 1

113A

o~
(

e3
@

FR

orll2

13 orll10

116
I I
..J ..J

t
0

I
..J

…..,

~

(])

cc:

Cl)

~

~

..J

I

I

~

er: er:

— -er: a;
E
c

(])
Cl)

o.:i
0.
»
:::J

..an
:i

(])
Co)

«-

I

(])

Cl)

C
:::J
>- co
0.
.c .c
a; a; E «:::J

0

0

:c

0
.c ‘+(])
0
«- Ci5
Co)
~Co) ~.c
…..,
c (]) .c(])
0
$
0
co «m .c
«‘C
0 0 0 0 0 -c
co
co
S «- …..,
-c -c -c -c -c
-c 0.- (]) 0. «- S «»»‘+- ‘+- ‘+- ‘+- ‘+- ‘+- …..,
«»0 c
Co)
co
co
0 0 0 0 0 0 co co «- ~
0 0
(])
~ (]) «»(])
(])
co
0 0 0
0 0
‘+»‘C
«»»»- …..,
«»0. «0.. «0.. «- «- …..,
«»Q)
(])
CV) q- LO
«»»»(])
(])
….., c …..,
co co (])
co N c
0 :::J
0 co
C
C «‘C
(])
(])
(])
:::J
ci ci ci (]) ci «»cc: c US cc: cc: E 0 u. 0
z z z cc: Z u.

s s

s s s

e

to I'»

ex)

en

‘+-

Cl)
Cl)

:-::

e4

orll3

e3

orll 2

Cl)

@

e

Cl)

1 orll 1

12 orll 9

N CV) q- LO to I'» ex) en 0
N N N N N N N N N N CV)

0

e 20

I
..J

~

:i
..J

~
I
..J

~
I

er:

:i

er:

…..,
(])

~Co)

co
«-

-C

0
0

I

..J

I
..J

~

~

er:
>-

I

I

E

c I

E

(])
Co)

«-

‘+-

>- «~
(])

er:

E

«-

«co»- co
«-

-C
(])
Cl)
Cl)

0
«-

~

‘+-

«(])

Q)

«‘C

«‘C

C

(])

(])

‘+-

‘+-

0

0

«-

~

«0..

….., …..,
c c c

…..,

«-

«-

0

0

«‘+»(])

S

0

(])
Co)

-C

«-

«co»-

(])

‘+-

«‘C

«00
Q)
C
C

-er:»co
«-

‘+-

0
0
«(])

0 «‘C
0 «00
«-

:c
(])

Cl)
Cl)

co

«-

«-

C
(])
Co)

C

ex)

«-

«-

«-

q- LO to I'»

«-

«0..

:::J

N CV)

~

(])
Co)

«-

0

~

«0.. «0..
C

(])
…..,

(])

2-spot welds

(])

(])

c c
C

(])

3-spot welds

M. I. G plug weld

«-

(])
Co)

0

u. u.

«-

C

(])
c …..,

«U.

..J

~

(])
…..,

~

@

114

:i

(])
…..,

«-

…..,

«U.

…J

~

116

I

(])

«0.. 0
co ….., 0

c c

«‘C

…..,

orll15

«~

(])

S

0.
0. 0

.E: ::::> …J
en 0 ~

er:
«-

c

(])
Co)

• G@rr=

I
..J

co ~
«0..
Q)
…..,

M I G seam weld/

.A=-= .B~

For

I

:i

er:

~- «co

~

-C

E
(])

«00

(

3 panels plug weld method

Cl)
Cl)

«‘+-

0
0

«co …..,
«(])
….., ‘+…..,
0 c
s…
(])

:::J

:::J

0

0

«-

0 0 cc: u.
N CV) q- LO

-5-

-40-

)

P..an.~i~t
(Fweld

1 orll 1

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Outer Sill

Body Component Parts

3-door hatch back

3-door Hatchback

Service Joint

112
—:-~
_ I

:i~

0

0

~ ~
~ I
:r: cC
cC

:r: :r: -:r:
~ ~ :i~ ~:i:i~
~ ~ c2S ~ ~
:r: :r: ~ :r:o:r: :r: :r:
cC cC :r: 0::
~
0:: cC
-cC
—c2S
CD

+-‘

CD

0

en

CD

::J

en

0

0

::J

..c ..c
Q5 Q5

->-

Q5 >- c
c
:0 0 I
:0 co
0.. E 00 cC
c
E
CD
CD
CD
0 en +-‘
en 0 en >< CD
en
co CD .:::£
co «‘C
°C+-‘
+-‘
CD
CD
C
O
«‘C «‘C en
0

lo-

CD
$ co .:::£C,) ..c
CD
co $ ..c
0
.0. .0
;g
$
..0
a;
‘+- ‘+O c
0 C C
co
0 0 co CD co
0
0 co
CD
CD «‘C ‘+~
CD
0 0 CD -0
CD
CD
«‘C 0.00
‘+- ‘+C «i=
+-‘
+-‘
~C,) co
CD
°co
N
c Q; co +-‘CD CD C +-‘
Q5
co
co
+-‘
0 0 c CD ::J c 0 ::J CD CD CD ::J co CD
C
C
u. 0 0:: 0:: 0:: u. 0) CC
0:: 0
Z u.

r/

$

lo-

0
..0

=

l0-

lo-

l0-

lo-

lo-

lo-

lo-

lo-

lo-

lo-

11 11

lo-

lo-

c.o

lo-

I.-

lo-

lo-

I»‘- 00

~

lo-

lo-

lo-

111

l0-

l0-

lo-

lo-

lo-

~

(j)

~

0
N

N

N
N

CV)

N

~

N

LO
N

c.o
N

I»‘N

00
N

(j)

N

:r:
cC—:-:r:
.co ~

112A

I.-

~o

114

‘+-

0
0
lo-

o
l-

t:

@-~~~»:::.~
o
,-

.~

~
~.~.~..
~:

.an.

2-spot

welds

3-spot

welds

(CNerlap cutting)

Mol. G plug weld

• G@r;=::::.

(

p:;m
M I G

For

3 panels plug weld method

A

:=::A:=:

8~

~

).

Id/
we

.u.u.

-6-39-

lo-

«‘C

~

Unit:mm

~-

:r: ..0 .co
cC CDE ‘+-0

CD
en
en
.00 .00 co

::J

en

111

c2S

~~

lo-

l0-

CD
+-‘
::J

CD
+-‘
::J

0 0
00

~-<0h ~

(j)

‘+-

o

0

0
l0-

+-‘

C
0
lo-

$ $ $ $

0
..0

0
..0

.c

0

0
..0

‘+-

‘+-

‘+-

‘+-

0
0
lo-

CV)

0

0
0
lo-

~

0

0
0
lo-

LO

0

0:: u. Z Z Z
0

N

CV)

~

0

o
lo-

lo-

co
CD

cc
LO

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Outer Sill

Description
To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following

anti-corrosive

measures have been implemented in

Sedan
5-door hatchback

Service Joint

_4A

our production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use these same anti-corrosive
measures.

FR

ANTI-CORROSIVE
PRECOATED STEEL
(DURASTEEL)
To improve repairability and corrosion

Zn-Ni alloy

resistance, a

new type of anti-corrosive precoated steel sheets have
been adopted taking the place of conventional zinccoated steel sheets.
This durasteel is electroplated, zinc-nickel alloy under

Steel sheet

organic film, which provides excellent corrosion resisOne-side precoated

tance.

119
Durasteel is classified as either one-side precoated
steel or two-side
precoated

precoated

steel provides

steel. The two

excellent corrosion

side
resis-

tance.

~

Outside

117

_4

Two-side precoated
Nissan Genuine Service Parts are fabricated from durasteel sheets. Therefore, it is recommended that

(OIerlap

112A

GENUINE NISSAN PARTS be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance
built into the vehicle at the factory.

.cm

11 12

111A
111

114

112A

114

113

PHOSPHATE COATING TREATMENT AND
CATIONIC ELECTRODEPOSITION
PRIMER
A phosphate coating treatment

and a cationic electrodeposition

primer, which provide an excellent anti-

corrosion effect, are employed on all body components.
Caution:
Confine paint removal in the welding operation to the absolute minimum.
Cationic electrodeposition

_4

primer

Unit:mm

111
2-spot welds

3-spot welds

M. I. G plug weld

(

Nissan Genuine Service Parts also are treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended tbat

3 panels plug weld method

=6=___

GENUINE NISSAN PARTS be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built
into the vehicle at the factory.

-38-

-7-

;=::

M I G seam weld/

·r .A
For

.8=:=

)

P.an.0int

V

cutting)

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

________

Center Pillar

Sedan
5-door hatch back

CORROSION PROTECTION

_

Anti-corrosive Wax
To improve corrosion resistance, anti-corrosive wax is applied inside the body sill and inside other closed

Service Joint

sections. Accordingly, when replacing these parts, be sure to apply anti-corrosive wax to the appropriate areas
of the new parts. Select an excellent anti-corrosive wax which will penetrate after application and has a long
shelf life.

111
117
112

117
FR

A

FR

E

.cm.

Hatchback

111A

111A

( Overl ap cutt ing)
Upper center pillar hinge brace

Seat belt ancher
reinforcement

114

113

113

:

Indicates anti-corrosive wax coated portions.

112
FR

Lower center pillar

114

Section C-C:

Section A-A:

Section 8-8:

Section 0-0: SEDAN

Section E-E: Hatchback

For Australia model

For Australia model

hinge brace

116

o

Unit:mm
2-spot welds

3-spot welds

M. I. G plug weld
For

• G1Jrr=

(

3 panels plug weld method

==-= •

• A —

-37-

B~
~

)

F

M I G seam weld/
weld
P:
..LLLL

-8-

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Front Pillar

Undercoating
(Work

The undersides of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone

after hoodledge

reinforcement

has been removed.)

Service Joint

chipping.
Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoating with
the following properties: rust preventive, soundproof, vibration-proof,

<:=i

shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable.

FR

Precautions in undercoating
1.

Do not apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and catalytic

1lIl.. ( Dri p channel)

converter which are subjected to heat).
2.

Do not undercoat the exhaust pipe, other parts which become hot, and rotary parts.

3.

Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating.

~I!!!!!!!!iiii!!!!!i!II

:

an

(Outer)

112

Indicates undercoated portions

1lIl..
( Inner)

112
~

113

:::::——

116

112
112

FR

Unit:mm
2-spot

welds

3-spot

welds
M. I. G plug wel(d

For 3 panels plug weld method

• rr= • A ==-=.
GTJ

-9-

116

c;;;;?

-36-

B~ ~

)

.. ~:

G(F:~dm weld/

.LLLL

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

________

CORROSION

Front Side Member (Partial Replacement)
(Work

after radiator

core support

PROTECTION

_

Stone Guard Coat

has been removed.)

To prevent damage caused by stones, the lower outer body panels (fender, door, etc.) have an additional layer

Service Joint
(This figure show right front

side member)

of Stone Guard Coat over the ED primer coating. Thus, when replacing or repairing these panels, apply
undercoat to the same portions as before. Use a coat which is rust preventive, durable, shockresistant and has

a long shelf life.
~mm1111i : Indicates stone guard coated portions

114

111

8

115

«» » »
Patch
(Thickness:

1mm)

117

118

111

hoodledge panel
Section A-A

—r’:»:’

Section B-B

114
Patch

Unit:mm
2-spot welds

3-spot

welds

M.1. G plug weld

.A=-= .B~

For

• G1Jrr=

(

3 panels plug weld method

)

F

M I G seam weld/
weld
P1ID.~irit

Section C-C

~

-35-10-

————

BODY CONSTRUCTION

_

————

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Hoodledge (Partial

Body Consb»uction.

(Work

after radiator

core support

_

Replacement)

has been removed.)

Service Joint
(This figure show right side hoodledge)

Sedan

Before installing
hoodledge reinforcement.
117

3-d oar Hatchback

114A

Unit:mm
2-spot
5-door Hatchback

welds

3-spot

welds

M.1. G plug weld

·r

)

For
(

3 panels plug weld method.

.A~

.B~

-34-11-

M.I. G seam weld/
Point weld

.an.F

————Radiator

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Core Support (Partial

_

————

Replacement)

BODY CONSTRUCTION

_

Body Construction

* indicates

Service Joint

that there is an equivalent wel~ing. portion
with the same dimensions on the opposite Side.

(

Section A-A:

Section 8-8:

Section C-C:

Section D-D:

Section E-E:

Section F-F:

Section G-G:

Section H-H:

Section I-I:

Section J-J:

Section K-K:

Section L-L:

Section M-M:

. Section N-N:

Section 0-0:

Section P-P:

_1
o

*e

3 or 11 2

FR

e4

orll3

FR

Section 0-0:
2-spot

welds

3-spot

welds

M.1. G plug weld
Point For 3 panels plug weld m.ethod

·r ·==’*=
(

A

• B ===:=

)

Section R-R:

M.I. G seam weld/
weld

.an

F

-33-12-

_________

BODY ALIGNMENT

_

________

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Body Center Marks

Description
The indentification of the cutting and the welding/brazing

A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing parts damaged

following

_

SYMBOLS FOR CUITING AND
WELDING/BRAZING OPERATIONS

symbols used throughout

this guide is given in the

pages

by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.) more accurate, effective repair will
be possible by using these marks together with body alignment data.

Portion G

Saw cut or
air chisel cut

Portion D-Sedan

Portion C

Portion E
-Sedan

Portion B

..J

••••

Portion A

2-spot
welds
Spot
weld
Porton H
3-Door Hatchback
and 5-Door Hatchback

Portion F

0000
3-spot
welds

2-SDOt welds
(2-panel overlapping portions)

3-spot welds
(3-panel overlapping portions)

•• •

M.LG. plug weld

Unit: mm

Portion A

Portion C

Portion 8

(ItIlI)
M.LG. seam weld/
Point weld

Hole(4 dial

Brazing

• Cowl top

• Upper radiator core support

• Front roof

Portion F

Portion E

Portion D

Soldering

~

Slot(7X 11)

/~/
• Rear waist panel slot

• Rear roof

Portion G

• Second cross member

Portion H
3-door and 5-door Hatchback

3-door and 5-door Hatchback

Sealing

Lozenge
mark

• Rear roof

• Rear panel

-13-

-32-

__________

PRECAUTIONS

_

_

BODY ALIGNMENT

Precautions For Handling High Strength Steel

Follow

established

specifications

for

_

Panel Parts Matching Marks
A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the panel parts matching positions. When repairing

the

Welding

Pressure

parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.) more accurate,

current

appropriate pressure level, current level and

effective repair will be possible by using these marks together wi~h body alignment data.

weld time.

Follow

the

specifications

for

the

proper

welding pitch.

~
Unit: mrr
Thickness

(t) Minimum

0.6 (0.024)
0.8 (0.031)

~71)

After

welding,

welding

strength

must

be

tested.

J

I

(C

pitch ( Q

3-Door Hatchback
and 5-Door Hatchback


)

10 (0.39) or over
12 (0.47) or over

1.0 (0.039)

18 (0.71) or over

1.2 (0.047)

20 (0.79) or over

1.6 (0.063)

27 (1.06) or over

31

11.221 or over

Type W:

@——

Type V:

~—— ~

~

Et

View A

ViewS

ViewC

View D-1

View D-2

ViewE

Sedan and 5-door Hatchback

3-door Hatchback and 5-door Hatchback

3-door Hatchback

/w-..IE
+-W

II

(-

‘-r

-31-

ViewE

)

-14-

o

__________

BODY ALIGNMENT

_

_

PRECAUTIONS

Description





_

Precautions For Handling High Strength Steel

All dimensions indicated in figures are actual ones.
When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge
itself to make sure there is no free play.
When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other
side is symmetrically the same value.
The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of «X», «V»
and «Z».

The spot ungget on HSS panel is harder than
that of an ordinary steel panel.
Therefore, for spot cutting HSS panel, a high
torque drill of a low speed (1,000 to 1,200
rpm) may be used to maintain its durability
and facilitate the operation.

HSS panels with a tensile strength of 785 to 981 N/mm2 (80 to 100 kg/mm2,

114 to 142 klb/sq in),

used as reinforcement in the door guard bar and in the bumper, is too high in tensile strength to use
for general repairs. When these panels are damaged, the outer panels also sustain consequential
damage; therefore, these panels are never remedied without replacing the door assembly or bumper
assembly.
2.

Precautions in spot welding
This work should be performed under standard work conditions. However, work control must be exercised
as folloows:

«Z»: Imaginary base line
[200 mm below datum line
(«OZ» at design plan)]

/

y (_)

• The electrode tip diameter must be reformed

Front axle center

(0)

properly according to the panels thickness.

SBF8?4GB

Engine Compartment
____

MEASURMENT

D=2T+3
D=2T+O.12

_

D==Tip+diameter

(mm)
(in)

T

,::=T====p=la::t_e=-=-_t_h=i_C=k=_n=_e_s=s=
__,-~

The panel surfaces must be fitted to each
other, leaving no gaps.

Correct

SBT08?

-15-

-30-

Incorrect

Incorrect

__________

PRECAUTIONS

_

__________

BODY ALIGNMENT

_

Engine Compartment

Precautions For Handling High Stregth Steel
__

MEASURMENT

POINTS __

Unit: mm

Special consideration for HSS must be given to the following points:
1. Additional points to consider

The repair of reinforcements

(such as side

Not recommended

members) by heating is not recommended
since it involves the risk of lowering strength.
When heating is unavoidable, do not heat
such parts at temperatures above 550°C (1,
022°F)
Heating temperature should be verified with
a thermometer.

(A crayon-type

and other

SBT088

thermometer are available.)

Front side

When straightening body panels, use caution

Traction direction: …

in pulling any HSS panel. Because it is very
strong, this may cause deformation in adjacent portions

of the body. In this case,

increase the number of measuring points,
and carefully pull the HSS panel.

In cutting

HSS panel, avoid gas cutting

Radiator core support lower

if

possible. Instead, use an air saw or a hand
cutter to avoid decreasing the strength of
surrounding portions due to the influence of
heat. In case gas cutting
minimum

is inevitable, a

allowance of 50 mm (1.97 in)

must be given.


(b) 11

SBT090

In welding

HSS panel, use spot welding

whenever possible in order to minimize any
decrease in strength of surrounding portions

GOOD

-================

N.G.
Never use acetylene .gas

Radiator core support upper center

welding.

due to the influence of heat.
If spot welding

is impossible, use M.LG.

welding. Donot use acetylene gas welding
because it is inferior in welding strength.

SBT091

-29-

-16-

dia.
SBT094

__________

BODY ALIGNMENT

_

__________

PRECAUTIONS
Precautions For Handling High Strength Steel

Underbody
____

MEASURMENT

_

_
High strength steel has been used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight.
(ij

Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below:

Q)

er:

E
E

iJ

HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES

———

Tensile strength

Major applicable parts

Nissan designation

• Side member
N
CD

• Hoodledge

o

en

It)

373N/mm2

CD

It)

CD
IIIlI:t’

(38 kg/mm2,

en

54 klb/sq in)

• Pillar

NP130

• Hood

It)

C!. N
~ en

.Trunk

co

CD
It)
It)

235
~200

CD
It)

C!.

~

..
~
It)

785-981

N/mm2

(80-100

kg/mm2

114-142

• Bumper reinforcement

NP150

• Door guard beam

klb/sq in)

ee
@@

N
..
CD
00
N ~

In Nissan vehicles, HSS plates of 373 N/mm2 (38kg/mm2,

54 klb/sq in) (NP130) are most commonly

utilized, and those with a tensile strength of 785 to 981 N/mm2 (80 to 100 kg/mm2,

CD

in) (NP150) are used only on parts requiring much more strength.

..
CD

en~
0)

..o
..

0)

o

127

@>@)

129

@8

..0

CD

~

@@

.,

@)@)

It)
It)

I’

225

SBT096

-17-

lid outer

-28-

114 to 142 klb/sq

______

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS

_

_

BODY ALIGNMENT

Location Of Plastic Parts

Underbody
__

Roof spoilar(FRP)

Side wind molding(PVC)

_

MEASURMENT

POINTS __

Side wind molding(PVC)
Rear

High mounted stop lamp
Lens: PMMA )
( Housing: ABS

(f

Front
coordinates:

Rear
coordinates:

@,@

@,@

@

X : 393.5
V : 1,460
Z : 126.9

X : 475
V : 3,082
Z : 336.8

(8), @

@

X : 572
V : 1,940
Z : 200

X : -542
V : 3,082
Z : 336.8

X : 250
V : -632
Z : 224.8

@,@
X : 492
V : -450
Z : 355

@,@
X : 406
V : 64
Z : 172

@,@
Back door finisher(ABS)

3-door Hatchback

5-door Hatchback

Cluster lid A(PPC)

Front pillar garnish(PPC)
Center pillar upper garnish(PPC)

@, @

@

X : 432
V : 338
Z : 128

X : 300
V : 2,480
Z : 381.8

CD

Instrument

panel(PPC)

RH side

Q

Q

X : -300
V : 2,480
Z: 405.8

X : 393
Y : 2,560
Z : 365

@
X : 470
Y : 2,911
Z : 339.6

,1

Rear pillar garnish(PPC)

@

@, @)

@

LH side

Bottom
view of
vehicle

Q)
X : 150
V : 2,442.9
Z : 241

X : 395
V : 515
Z : 129.2

Center pillar lower garnish(PP)

X : 600
V : 2,035
Z : 235.2

X : 352.7
V : 69
Z : 240

(f),

••

CD, CD

@
X : -539
Y : 2,911
Z : 339.6

Cluster lid C(PPC)

Unit: mm

Front and rear strut tower centers
I

~t-~

Glove box(PPC)

Coordinates:

Console box(PPC)

@,0
X : 522.2
V : 18.1
Z : 571.7

~—-_/
Kicking plate(PP)

Front

@,

Rear

@, @ 62

076 dia.
dia.

@,@
X : 465

V : 2,456.4
Z : 522
Front
SBT097

-27-

-18-

__________

BODY ALIGNMENT

_

._ MEASURMENT

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS

Sedan
5-door Hatchback

Passenger Compartment
,

_

Location Of Plastic Parts

_
Point
@-@

Side turn signal lamp lens
Lens:
AS )
( Housing: ASS

Dimension

1228
1374
@-@
1366
(8)-{6)
1159
1387
CD—cD
Q)-{J)
1367
1156
@—@
(b)—{[) 1385
1370
~-4iV
1364
@~
1364
@~
C’e)—@
1598
@—@
989*
@-{E)
918*
1156*
@~
@—{[)
917*
@~@
975*
@~(b)
757*
1004*
@~
723*
@—@

CB- : Front roof flange end at center
Positioning

mark

~~

~ } Outer front pillar joggle

Rear spoiler(PPO)
-for Sedan

Door outside
handle
Handle: POM
)
( Escutcheon: POM

Rear Windowmolding
(PVC)
-for Sedan

High mounted stop lamp
(In Rear SpoilerType)
(Lens: PMMA ) -for Sedan
Housing: ASS
(Fixed Trunk Lid Tipe)

Side guard

molding

Lens:
PC ) -for Sedan
( Housing: PP

@@ : Dash upper flange

end corner

CBCD:
}
~@:

Outer front pillar indention

(f3),Cfi),Q),CD,@,@,CD,CD,~,@

:

Trunk

Outer center pillar indention

CDCD :

Outer center pillar standard
center

lid finisher(pp)
-for Sedan

hole
License
lamp
Lens: PC
)
( Housing: PP

Rear bumper

fascia

(PP)

Mud guard

-19-

(TPR)

-26-

Rear combination
lamp
Lens: PMMA)
( Housing: PP

(PVC)

______

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS

_

_________

BODY ALIGNMENT

Handling Precautions For Plastics

Heat resisting
Abbreviation

Material

name

temperature

Resistance to gasoline

PE

PET

80 (176)

Polyethylene

Polyethylene

180 (356)

terephthalate

Passenger Compartment
____

and

Gasoline and most solvents
are harmless.

MEASURMENT

Unit: mm
~@

: Rear fender standard hole center

Flammable

(Q)@ : Rear fender indention
(B@ : Door switch

Gasoline and most solvents

installing

80 (176)

chloride

are harmless

if applied for a

very short time (wide up

when

burned.

~

quickly).

pp

ABS

AES

styrene

butadiene

resin

Acrylonitrile

ethylene

styrene
Polymethyl

PUR

Polyurethane

methacrylate

Acrylonitrile

acrylic

acid.

80 (176)

Avoid

gasoline

and solvents.

80 (176)

Avoid

gasoline

and solvents.

85 (185)

Avoid

gasoline

and solvents.

90 (194)

ru bber styrene

Same as above.
Also avoid battery

Gasoline and most solvents
are harmless.

85 (185)

Avoid

gasoline

and solvents.

85 (185)

Avoid

gasoline

and solvents.

110 (230)

Avoid

gasoline .and solvents.

AS

Styre ne-a c rylo n itri Ie

PPO

Polyphenylene

POM

Polyacetal

120 (248)

PC

Polycarbonate

120 (248)

PA

Polyamide

140 (284)

FRP

Fiber reinforced

PPC

Polypropylene

PBT

Polybutylene

TPR

Thermoplastic

rubber

80 (176)

Avoid

gasoline

and solvents.

TPE

Thermoplastic

elastomer

80 (176)

Avoid

gasoline

and solvents.

80 (176)

Avoid

gasoline

and solvents.

TPUR

1.

Acrylonitrile

PMMA

AAS

90 (194)

Polypropylene

(Nylon)

Thermoplastic
polyurethane

oxide

plastics

170 (338)

composite

115 (239)

terephthalate

140 (284)

Gasoline and solvents
are harmless.
Avoid

@([):

gasoline

Flammable

Avoid

battery

acid.

Avoid

battery

acid.

Avoid

immersing

Avoid

battery

Rear floor harness installing

(D<

~

~~ ‘—-

~

(7diajj \1

~;.

~

~

J

O»~Wiaol

D

Gasoline and most solvents

Gasoline and most solvents
are harmless.
Gasoline and most solvents
are harmless.

k@(fdiaol»,

-Z

~

in water.

acid.

Flammable

Gasoline and most solvents
are harmless.

When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic parts, consider their characteristics
(influence of heat and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable measures to protect them. _

2.

Plastic parts should be repaired and painted using methods suiting the materials.

-25-

)

. · C’)U—

and solvents.

are harmless.

hole

center (8 dia.)

~~

Poison gas is emitted

hole
mark

(8 dia.)
hole cen-

ter

are harmless.

standard

center at center positioning

(20 dia.)

Polyvinyl

@ : 2nd crossmember

(7dia)

Gasoline and most solvents
PVC

_

Other cautions

solvents

QC rF)

_

-20-

Sedan
5-door Hatchback

__________

BODY ALIGNMENT

_

Rear Body
____

MEASUREMENT

(Q : Roof flonge

_

Point Dimension
@~(E)
189*
@~CD
1213*
@~(8)
608*
(E)~@
1110*

Unit: mm

~

mark

MEASUREMENT

_

positioning

at

end at center

(Q@:

Unit: mm
Rear fender corner joggle

(6)@ : Rear fender extension

CD :

Rear panel trunk lid lock installing
hole flange end at center position-

Q):

Rear

suspension

center (9 dia.)

installing

hole

~@

: Rear suspention

joggle

installing

hole

center (9 dia.)

ing mark

-21-

@ : Rear
door

mark

~
CE)@ : Rear fender joggle
(8(f) : Front roof flange end at center
Positioning

mark

~~

~ } Outer front pillar joggle

Rear spoiler(PPO)
-for Sedan

Door outside
handle
Handle: POM
)
( Escutcheon: POM

Rear Windowmolding
(PVC)
-for Sedan

High mounted stop lamp
(In Rear SpoilerType)
(Lens: PMMA ) -for Sedan
Housing: ASS
(Fixed Trunk Lid Tipe)

Side guard

molding

Lens:
PC ) -for Sedan
( Housing: PP

@@ : Dash upper flange

end corner

CBCD:
}
~@:

Outer front pillar indention

(f3),Cfi),Q),CD,@,@,CD,CD,~,@

:

Trunk

Outer center pillar indention

CDCD :

Outer center pillar standard
center

lid finisher(pp)
-for Sedan

hole
License
lamp
Lens: PC
)
( Housing: PP

Rear bumper

fascia

(PP)

Mud guard

-19-

(TPR)

-26-

Rear combination
lamp
Lens: PMMA)
( Housing: PP

(PVC)

______

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS

_

_

BODY ALIGNMENT

Location Of Plastic Parts

Underbody
__

Roof spoilar(FRP)

Side wind molding(PVC)

_

MEASURMENT

POINTS __

Side wind molding(PVC)
Rear

High mounted stop lamp
Lens: PMMA )
( Housing: ABS

(f

Front
coordinates:

Rear
coordinates:

@,@

@,@

@

X : 393.5
V : 1,460
Z : 126.9

X : 475
V : 3,082
Z : 336.8

(8), @

@

X : 572
V : 1,940
Z : 200

X : -542
V : 3,082
Z : 336.8

X : 250
V : -632
Z : 224.8

@,@
X : 492
V : -450
Z : 355

@,@
X : 406
V : 64
Z : 172

@,@
Back door finisher(ABS)

3-door Hatchback

5-door Hatchback

Cluster lid A(PPC)

Front pillar garnish(PPC)
Center pillar upper garnish(PPC)

@, @

@

X : 432
V : 338
Z : 128

X : 300
V : 2,480
Z : 381.8

CD

Instrument

panel(PPC)

RH side

Q

Q

X : -300
V : 2,480
Z: 405.8

X : 393
Y : 2,560
Z : 365

@
X : 470
Y : 2,911
Z : 339.6

,1

Rear pillar garnish(PPC)

@

@, @)

@

LH side

Bottom
view of
vehicle

Q)
X : 150
V : 2,442.9
Z : 241

X : 395
V : 515
Z : 129.2

Center pillar lower garnish(PP)

X : 600
V : 2,035
Z : 235.2

X : 352.7
V : 69
Z : 240

(f),

••

CD, CD

@
X : -539
Y : 2,911
Z : 339.6

Cluster lid C(PPC)

Unit: mm

Front and rear strut tower centers
I

~t-~

Glove box(PPC)

Coordinates:

Console box(PPC)

@,0
X : 522.2
V : 18.1
Z : 571.7

~—-_/
Kicking plate(PP)

Front

@,

Rear

@, @ 62

076 dia.
dia.

@,@
X : 465

V : 2,456.4
Z : 522
Front
SBT097

-27-

-18-

__________

BODY ALIGNMENT

_

__________

PRECAUTIONS
Precautions For Handling High Strength Steel

Underbody
____

MEASURMENT

_

_
High strength steel has been used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight.
(ij

Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below:

Q)

er:

E
E

iJ

HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES

———

Tensile strength

Major applicable parts

Nissan designation

• Side member
N
CD

• Hoodledge

o

en

It)

373N/mm2

CD

It)

CD
IIIlI:t’

(38 kg/mm2,

en

54 klb/sq in)

• Pillar

NP130

• Hood

It)

C!. N
~ en

.Trunk

co

CD
It)
It)

235
~200

CD
It)

C!.

~

..
~
It)

785-981

N/mm2

(80-100

kg/mm2

114-142

• Bumper reinforcement

NP150

• Door guard beam

klb/sq in)

ee
@@

N
..
CD
00
N ~

In Nissan vehicles, HSS plates of 373 N/mm2 (38kg/mm2,

54 klb/sq in) (NP130) are most commonly

utilized, and those with a tensile strength of 785 to 981 N/mm2 (80 to 100 kg/mm2,

CD

in) (NP150) are used only on parts requiring much more strength.

..
CD

en~
0)

..o
..

0)

o

127

@>@)

129

@8

..0

CD

~

@@

.,

@)@)

It)
It)

I’

225

SBT096

-17-

lid outer

-28-

114 to 142 klb/sq

__________

PRECAUTIONS

_

__________

BODY ALIGNMENT

_

Engine Compartment

Precautions For Handling High Stregth Steel
__

MEASURMENT

POINTS __

Unit: mm

Special consideration for HSS must be given to the following points:
1. Additional points to consider

The repair of reinforcements

(such as side

Not recommended

members) by heating is not recommended
since it involves the risk of lowering strength.
When heating is unavoidable, do not heat
such parts at temperatures above 550°C (1,
022°F)
Heating temperature should be verified with
a thermometer.

(A crayon-type

and other

SBT088

thermometer are available.)

Front side

When straightening body panels, use caution

Traction direction: …

in pulling any HSS panel. Because it is very
strong, this may cause deformation in adjacent portions

of the body. In this case,

increase the number of measuring points,
and carefully pull the HSS panel.

In cutting

HSS panel, avoid gas cutting

Radiator core support lower

if

possible. Instead, use an air saw or a hand
cutter to avoid decreasing the strength of
surrounding portions due to the influence of
heat. In case gas cutting
minimum

is inevitable, a

allowance of 50 mm (1.97 in)

must be given.


(b) 11

SBT090

In welding

HSS panel, use spot welding

whenever possible in order to minimize any
decrease in strength of surrounding portions

GOOD

-================

N.G.
Never use acetylene .gas

Radiator core support upper center

welding.

due to the influence of heat.
If spot welding

is impossible, use M.LG.

welding. Donot use acetylene gas welding
because it is inferior in welding strength.

SBT091

-29-

-16-

dia.
SBT094

__________

BODY ALIGNMENT

_

_

PRECAUTIONS

Description





_

Precautions For Handling High Strength Steel

All dimensions indicated in figures are actual ones.
When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge
itself to make sure there is no free play.
When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other
side is symmetrically the same value.
The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of «X», «V»
and «Z».

The spot ungget on HSS panel is harder than
that of an ordinary steel panel.
Therefore, for spot cutting HSS panel, a high
torque drill of a low speed (1,000 to 1,200
rpm) may be used to maintain its durability
and facilitate the operation.

HSS panels with a tensile strength of 785 to 981 N/mm2 (80 to 100 kg/mm2,

114 to 142 klb/sq in),

used as reinforcement in the door guard bar and in the bumper, is too high in tensile strength to use
for general repairs. When these panels are damaged, the outer panels also sustain consequential
damage; therefore, these panels are never remedied without replacing the door assembly or bumper
assembly.
2.

Precautions in spot welding
This work should be performed under standard work conditions. However, work control must be exercised
as folloows:

«Z»: Imaginary base line
[200 mm below datum line
(«OZ» at design plan)]

/

y (_)

• The electrode tip diameter must be reformed

Front axle center

(0)

properly according to the panels thickness.

SBF8?4GB

Engine Compartment
____

MEASURMENT

D=2T+3
D=2T+O.12

_

D==Tip+diameter

(mm)
(in)

T

,::=T====p=la::t_e=-=-_t_h=i_C=k=_n=_e_s=s=
__,-~

The panel surfaces must be fitted to each
other, leaving no gaps.

Correct

SBT08?

-15-

-30-

Incorrect

Incorrect

__________

PRECAUTIONS

_

_

BODY ALIGNMENT

Precautions For Handling High Strength Steel

Follow

established

specifications

for

_

Panel Parts Matching Marks
A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the panel parts matching positions. When repairing

the

Welding

Pressure

parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.) more accurate,

current

appropriate pressure level, current level and

effective repair will be possible by using these marks together wi~h body alignment data.

weld time.

Follow

the

specifications

for

the

proper

welding pitch.

~
Unit: mrr
Thickness

(t) Minimum

0.6 (0.024)
0.8 (0.031)

~71)

After

welding,

welding

strength

must

be

tested.

J

I

(C

pitch ( Q

3-Door Hatchback
and 5-Door Hatchback


)

10 (0.39) or over
12 (0.47) or over

1.0 (0.039)

18 (0.71) or over

1.2 (0.047)

20 (0.79) or over

1.6 (0.063)

27 (1.06) or over

31

11.221 or over

Type W:

@——

Type V:

~—— ~

~

Et

View A

ViewS

ViewC

View D-1

View D-2

ViewE

Sedan and 5-door Hatchback

3-door Hatchback and 5-door Hatchback

3-door Hatchback

/w-..IE
+-W

II

(-

‘-r

-31-

ViewE

)

-14-

o

_________

BODY ALIGNMENT

_

________

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Body Center Marks

Description
The indentification of the cutting and the welding/brazing

A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing parts damaged

following

_

SYMBOLS FOR CUITING AND
WELDING/BRAZING OPERATIONS

symbols used throughout

this guide is given in the

pages

by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.) more accurate, effective repair will
be possible by using these marks together with body alignment data.

Portion G

Saw cut or
air chisel cut

Portion D-Sedan

Portion C

Portion E
-Sedan

Portion B

..J

••••

Portion A

2-spot
welds
Spot
weld
Porton H
3-Door Hatchback
and 5-Door Hatchback

Portion F

0000
3-spot
welds

2-SDOt welds
(2-panel overlapping portions)

3-spot welds
(3-panel overlapping portions)

•• •

M.LG. plug weld

Unit: mm

Portion A

Portion C

Portion 8

(ItIlI)
M.LG. seam weld/
Point weld

Hole(4 dial

Brazing

• Cowl top

• Upper radiator core support

• Front roof

Portion F

Portion E

Portion D

Soldering

~

Slot(7X 11)

/~/
• Rear waist panel slot

• Rear roof

Portion G

• Second cross member

Portion H
3-door and 5-door Hatchback

3-door and 5-door Hatchback

Sealing

Lozenge
mark

• Rear roof

• Rear panel

-13-

-32-

————Radiator

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Core Support (Partial

_

————

Replacement)

BODY CONSTRUCTION

_

Body Construction

* indicates

Service Joint

that there is an equivalent wel~ing. portion
with the same dimensions on the opposite Side.

(

Section A-A:

Section 8-8:

Section C-C:

Section D-D:

Section E-E:

Section F-F:

Section G-G:

Section H-H:

Section I-I:

Section J-J:

Section K-K:

Section L-L:

Section M-M:

. Section N-N:

Section 0-0:

Section P-P:

_1
o

*e

3 or 11 2

FR

e4

orll3

FR

Section 0-0:
2-spot

welds

3-spot

welds

M.1. G plug weld
Point For 3 panels plug weld m.ethod

·r ·==’*=
(

A

• B ===:=

)

Section R-R:

M.I. G seam weld/
weld

.an

F

-33-12-

————

BODY CONSTRUCTION

_

————

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Hoodledge (Partial

Body Consb»uction.

(Work

after radiator

core support

_

Replacement)

has been removed.)

Service Joint
(This figure show right side hoodledge)

Sedan

Before installing
hoodledge reinforcement.
117

3-d oar Hatchback

114A

Unit:mm
2-spot
5-door Hatchback

welds

3-spot

welds

M.1. G plug weld

·r

)

For
(

3 panels plug weld method.

.A~

.B~

-34-11-

M.I. G seam weld/
Point weld

.an.F

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

________

CORROSION

Front Side Member (Partial Replacement)
(Work

after radiator

core support

PROTECTION

_

Stone Guard Coat

has been removed.)

To prevent damage caused by stones, the lower outer body panels (fender, door, etc.) have an additional layer

Service Joint
(This figure show right front

side member)

of Stone Guard Coat over the ED primer coating. Thus, when replacing or repairing these panels, apply
undercoat to the same portions as before. Use a coat which is rust preventive, durable, shockresistant and has

a long shelf life.
~mm1111i : Indicates stone guard coated portions

114

111

8

115

«» » »
Patch
(Thickness:

1mm)

117

118

111

hoodledge panel
Section A-A

—r’:»:’

Section B-B

114
Patch

Unit:mm
2-spot welds

3-spot

welds

M.1. G plug weld

.A=-= .B~

For

• G1Jrr=

(

3 panels plug weld method

)

F

M I G seam weld/
weld
P1ID.~irit

Section C-C

~

-35-10-

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Front Pillar

Undercoating
(Work

The undersides of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone

after hoodledge

reinforcement

has been removed.)

Service Joint

chipping.
Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoating with
the following properties: rust preventive, soundproof, vibration-proof,

<:=i

shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable.

FR

Precautions in undercoating
1.

Do not apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and catalytic

1lIl.. ( Dri p channel)

converter which are subjected to heat).
2.

Do not undercoat the exhaust pipe, other parts which become hot, and rotary parts.

3.

Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating.

~I!!!!!!!!iiii!!!!!i!II

:

an

(Outer)

112

Indicates undercoated portions

1lIl..
( Inner)

112
~

113

:::::——

116

112
112

FR

Unit:mm
2-spot

welds

3-spot

welds
M. I. G plug wel(d

For 3 panels plug weld method

• rr= • A ==-=.
GTJ

-9-

116

c;;;;?

-36-

B~ ~

)

.. ~:

G(F:~dm weld/

.LLLL

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

________

Center Pillar

Sedan
5-door hatch back

CORROSION PROTECTION

_

Anti-corrosive Wax
To improve corrosion resistance, anti-corrosive wax is applied inside the body sill and inside other closed

Service Joint

sections. Accordingly, when replacing these parts, be sure to apply anti-corrosive wax to the appropriate areas
of the new parts. Select an excellent anti-corrosive wax which will penetrate after application and has a long
shelf life.

111
117
112

117
FR

A

FR

E

.cm.

Hatchback

111A

111A

( Overl ap cutt ing)
Upper center pillar hinge brace

Seat belt ancher
reinforcement

114

113

113

:

Indicates anti-corrosive wax coated portions.

112
FR

Lower center pillar

114

Section C-C:

Section A-A:

Section 8-8:

Section 0-0: SEDAN

Section E-E: Hatchback

For Australia model

For Australia model

hinge brace

116

o

Unit:mm
2-spot welds

3-spot welds

M. I. G plug weld
For

• G1Jrr=

(

3 panels plug weld method

==-= •

• A —

-37-

B~
~

)

F

M I G seam weld/
weld
P:
..LLLL

-8-

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Outer Sill

Description
To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following

anti-corrosive

measures have been implemented in

Sedan
5-door hatchback

Service Joint

_4A

our production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use these same anti-corrosive
measures.

FR

ANTI-CORROSIVE
PRECOATED STEEL
(DURASTEEL)
To improve repairability and corrosion

Zn-Ni alloy

resistance, a

new type of anti-corrosive precoated steel sheets have
been adopted taking the place of conventional zinccoated steel sheets.
This durasteel is electroplated, zinc-nickel alloy under

Steel sheet

organic film, which provides excellent corrosion resisOne-side precoated

tance.

119
Durasteel is classified as either one-side precoated
steel or two-side
precoated

precoated

steel provides

steel. The two

excellent corrosion

side
resis-

tance.

~

Outside

117

_4

Two-side precoated
Nissan Genuine Service Parts are fabricated from durasteel sheets. Therefore, it is recommended that

(OIerlap

112A

GENUINE NISSAN PARTS be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance
built into the vehicle at the factory.

.cm

11 12

111A
111

114

112A

114

113

PHOSPHATE COATING TREATMENT AND
CATIONIC ELECTRODEPOSITION
PRIMER
A phosphate coating treatment

and a cationic electrodeposition

primer, which provide an excellent anti-

corrosion effect, are employed on all body components.
Caution:
Confine paint removal in the welding operation to the absolute minimum.
Cationic electrodeposition

_4

primer

Unit:mm

111
2-spot welds

3-spot welds

M. I. G plug weld

(

Nissan Genuine Service Parts also are treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended tbat

3 panels plug weld method

=6=___

GENUINE NISSAN PARTS be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built
into the vehicle at the factory.

-38-

-7-

;=::

M I G seam weld/

·r .A
For

.8=:=

)

P.an.0int

V

cutting)

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Outer Sill

Body Component Parts

3-door hatch back

3-door Hatchback

Service Joint

112
—:-~
_ I

:i~

0

0

~ ~
~ I
:r: cC
cC

:r: :r: -:r:
~ ~ :i~ ~:i:i~
~ ~ c2S ~ ~
:r: :r: ~ :r:o:r: :r: :r:
cC cC :r: 0::
~
0:: cC
-cC
—c2S
CD

+-‘

CD

0

en

CD

::J

en

0

0

::J

..c ..c
Q5 Q5

->-

Q5 >- c
c
:0 0 I
:0 co
0.. E 00 cC
c
E
CD
CD
CD
0 en +-‘
en 0 en >< CD
en
co CD .:::£
co «‘C
°C+-‘
+-‘
CD
CD
C
O
«‘C «‘C en
0

lo-

CD
$ co .:::£C,) ..c
CD
co $ ..c
0
.0. .0
;g
$
..0
a;
‘+- ‘+O c
0 C C
co
0 0 co CD co
0
0 co
CD
CD «‘C ‘+~
CD
0 0 CD -0
CD
CD
«‘C 0.00
‘+- ‘+C «i=
+-‘
+-‘
~C,) co
CD
°co
N
c Q; co +-‘CD CD C +-‘
Q5
co
co
+-‘
0 0 c CD ::J c 0 ::J CD CD CD ::J co CD
C
C
u. 0 0:: 0:: 0:: u. 0) CC
0:: 0
Z u.

r/

$

lo-

0
..0

=

l0-

lo-

l0-

lo-

lo-

lo-

lo-

lo-

lo-

lo-

11 11

lo-

lo-

c.o

lo-

I.-

lo-

lo-

I»‘- 00

~

lo-

lo-

lo-

111

l0-

l0-

lo-

lo-

lo-

~

(j)

~

0
N

N

N
N

CV)

N

~

N

LO
N

c.o
N

I»‘N

00
N

(j)

N

:r:
cC—:-:r:
.co ~

112A

I.-

~o

114

‘+-

0
0
lo-

o
l-

t:

@-~~~»:::.~
o
,-

.~

~
~.~.~..
~:

.an.

2-spot

welds

3-spot

welds

(CNerlap cutting)

Mol. G plug weld

• G@r;=::::.

(

p:;m
M I G

For

3 panels plug weld method

A

:=::A:=:

8~

~

).

Id/
we

.u.u.

-6-39-

lo-

«‘C

~

Unit:mm

~-

:r: ..0 .co
cC CDE ‘+-0

CD
en
en
.00 .00 co

::J

en

111

c2S

~~

lo-

l0-

CD
+-‘
::J

CD
+-‘
::J

0 0
00

~-<0h ~

(j)

‘+-

o

0

0
l0-

+-‘

C
0
lo-

$ $ $ $

0
..0

0
..0

.c

0

0
..0

‘+-

‘+-

‘+-

‘+-

0
0
lo-

CV)

0

0
0
lo-

~

0

0
0
lo-

LO

0

0:: u. Z Z Z
0

N

CV)

~

0

o
lo-

lo-

co
CD

cc
LO

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

~~~~~~~_BODYCOMPONENTPAR~~~~~~~~_

Rear Fender

Sedan

Body Component Parts

Sedan

5-door Hatchback

Service Joint

..an

(length

: 10mm)

Unit:mm
Cut off
@

1 orll 1

113A

o~
(

e3
@

FR

orll2

13 orll10

116
I I
..J ..J

t
0

I
..J

…..,

~

(])

cc:

Cl)

~

~

..J

I

I

~

er: er:

— -er: a;
E
c

(])
Cl)

o.:i
0.
»
:::J

..an
:i

(])
Co)

«-

I

(])

Cl)

C
:::J
>- co
0.
.c .c
a; a; E «:::J

0

0

:c

0
.c ‘+(])
0
«- Ci5
Co)
~Co) ~.c
…..,
c (]) .c(])
0
$
0
co «m .c
«‘C
0 0 0 0 0 -c
co
co
S «- …..,
-c -c -c -c -c
-c 0.- (]) 0. «- S «»»‘+- ‘+- ‘+- ‘+- ‘+- ‘+- …..,
«»0 c
Co)
co
co
0 0 0 0 0 0 co co «- ~
0 0
(])
~ (]) «»(])
(])
co
0 0 0
0 0
‘+»‘C
«»»»- …..,
«»0. «0.. «0.. «- «- …..,
«»Q)
(])
CV) q- LO
«»»»(])
(])
….., c …..,
co co (])
co N c
0 :::J
0 co
C
C «‘C
(])
(])
(])
:::J
ci ci ci (]) ci «»cc: c US cc: cc: E 0 u. 0
z z z cc: Z u.

s s

s s s

e

to I'»

ex)

en

‘+-

Cl)
Cl)

:-::

e4

orll3

e3

orll 2

Cl)

@

e

Cl)

1 orll 1

12 orll 9

N CV) q- LO to I'» ex) en 0
N N N N N N N N N N CV)

0

e 20

I
..J

~

:i
..J

~
I
..J

~
I

er:

:i

er:

…..,
(])

~Co)

co
«-

-C

0
0

I

..J

I
..J

~

~

er:
>-

I

I

E

c I

E

(])
Co)

«-

‘+-

>- «~
(])

er:

E

«-

«co»- co
«-

-C
(])
Cl)
Cl)

0
«-

~

‘+-

«(])

Q)

«‘C

«‘C

C

(])

(])

‘+-

‘+-

0

0

«-

~

«0..

….., …..,
c c c

…..,

«-

«-

0

0

«‘+»(])

S

0

(])
Co)

-C

«-

«co»-

(])

‘+-

«‘C

«00
Q)
C
C

-er:»co
«-

‘+-

0
0
«(])

0 «‘C
0 «00
«-

:c
(])

Cl)
Cl)

co

«-

«-

C
(])
Co)

C

ex)

«-

«-

«-

q- LO to I'»

«-

«0..

:::J

N CV)

~

(])
Co)

«-

0

~

«0.. «0..
C

(])
…..,

(])

2-spot welds

(])

(])

c c
C

(])

3-spot welds

M. I. G plug weld

«-

(])
Co)

0

u. u.

«-

C

(])
c …..,

«U.

..J

~

(])
…..,

~

@

114

:i

(])
…..,

«-

…..,

«U.

…J

~

116

I

(])

«0.. 0
co ….., 0

c c

«‘C

…..,

orll15

«~

(])

S

0.
0. 0

.E: ::::> …J
en 0 ~

er:
«-

c

(])
Co)

• G@rr=

I
..J

co ~
«0..
Q)
…..,

M I G seam weld/

.A=-= .B~

For

I

:i

er:

~- «co

~

-C

E
(])

«00

(

3 panels plug weld method

Cl)
Cl)

«‘+-

0
0

«co …..,
«(])
….., ‘+…..,
0 c
s…
(])

:::J

:::J

0

0

«-

0 0 cc: u.
N CV) q- LO

-5-

-40-

)

P..an.~i~t
(Fweld

1 orll 1

___________

________

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

Rear Fender

BODY COMPONENT

5-door hatch back

Body Component

PARTS
Parts

_
Sedan
5-door Hatchback

Service Joint
~

o
o

@ 1 or 111

113

‘»C

1 or 11 1
112
111

iD

@

111
_ 7 orll5

112

~
c

[IJ

…….

co

:I:

«0

«en

1IIl.

(]J

[J

ID

~~f~

@90r1l7
_50r1l4
_ 5 orll4

c

«»

co

_ 4 orll3

«0
(]J

~

en

_ 3 orll2

c
co

@ 1 or 111

«0
[IJ
…….

111

_ 12 orll 9

(]J

en

:I:
0
LO

@ 5 orll 4
1IIl.
(length: 10mm)
@ 4

or 11 3

Rear pillar inner
reinforcement

_ 200r 11 15
Unit:mm

116

@ 1 or 111

c
co

«0
(]J

2-spot welds

3-spot

welds
M.1. G plug wel(d

·r

For 3 panels plug weld method

)

M.I. G seam weld/
Point weld

en

.A===-= .B~

-41-

-4-

REPLACEMENT’

Rear Fender

Underbody Component Parts

~

:i

J:

..J

et:

~

>-

:i
..J

:i ~

:c

a: .

Q)

-~

c:

0
0)(3

c:

Q)

~Q)

+-‘

c:

Q)

J:
..J

Q)
+-‘

x

Q)

’00 +-‘c: +-‘c: ~
co
0 0

~Q)

~
J:

E
Q)

u
~

c:

+-‘
Q)

’00

«t-

Q)
+-‘

~

c:
‘0)

c:

Q)
~ Q)
~ .0 cC Q)x
U
~Q) ~Q) Q)~ Q)~ E
Q)
~Q) ~Q)
Q)
.0 .0 .0 .0 E .0
.0
.0
en

+-‘
Q)

:i (5~
~
~ cou
c:

«t-

Jo,;.

E E E E en E E E
0
~
E E E E u
E E E
m ~
m

..J

+-‘

~

0

‘+-

112

~
u E .0
~
:i, c: Q) 0
Q)

.0

0

«t-

c:
‘0)

~
~

.0 Q)
0).0

c:

+-‘

c:

Q)

‘,p
:J

0

..c:
u

co
Cl)

c:

+-‘

c:

,~-

co

— — — -«»

~ 0
~ Q5
0 E m E Q) «t- .0
a:
c:
+-‘
Q)
’00
Q)
Q)
Q)
m Q) co ~co l0- +-‘
+-‘
Q)
Q)
O
en
co
«‘0 «‘0 «‘0 «‘0 co
m Q) ~ 0 Q)
«‘0 «‘0 0
~ 0
’00 ’00 ’00 ’00 Q) ’00
~0 0) en .0 i:i=0 m
’00 u i:i= ’00 ‘E u
en
Cl)
+-‘
~
+-‘
+-‘
+-‘
+-‘
(0
~
~ ~ ~ ~ +-‘c: Q) c:
looc: «‘0
c: c: c: c: co
c: co co
«‘0 .0
co co co
0 0
~ co Q) Q)
~ Q) Q) Q) Q) ~0 c: co~ c: ~ 0
~ 0
~ ~ 0
u.. :t: CC CC
u.. u.. u.. u.. cc CC CC CC «t- ..= l- N
,…… CO m
q- LO co ,…… CO 0’) 0
CV)
N CV) q- LO CO
Q)

Q)

Q)

Q)

Q)

Q)

Q)

0

+-‘

Cl)

«

N N N N N N

+-‘
Q)

~

u

~

t::
0
a.
a.
:J
en

~

u

co
.0
+-‘

co

Q)

~

Q)

cc

‘,p

co
«‘0

~

c:

E

Q)

«‘0
co
~ ’00 ~:J (3
~ ~ E
0 0
~
‘,p
Q)

Q)

0

+-‘

0

~ co~

:J

co

Cl)

Q)

co
..c:

x

CV)

CV)

CV)

CV)

:i

e8

~

‘,p

a:

:J

or-

c:
0

+-‘

c:
Q)

:c :a
E E

u

co
J
LO

Q)

Q)

Cl)
Cl)

Cl)
Cl)

co

co

Q)

Q)

~ ~

.0 .0

+-‘
Q)

~

u

E ~

N

>- >-

E
~ ~
co

or

116

J:

c:

qq- q- q- q- q- qN

0

CV)

..J

Q)

a.
cc cc w c.n
Q)

CV)

~

:J

co

CV)

CV)

«\

Q)

+-‘
Q)

~ +-‘Q)
u ~
:i 0 .0co~ uco
a: E~ 0..0~
0)
Q)

~

en ‘+= ‘+=
co

c:

CV)

CV)

e

co
-:- .0
J: 0)

..J

N

CV)

Q)

c:
Q)

~

0

0)

0

‘,p

c:

c: c
‘0) ::::J
~ 0

Q)

U

Q)

«t-

E
«t-

u

..0

~

+-‘

~ ~ E
Q)

Q)

c: .0 .0
‘0) E E

c:

0
EQ) ~ Q) Q) ’00
E
Q)
>E E co E E Cl)c:

@3

or

112

e5

or

114

+-‘
Q)
Q)
m Q) Q) a.
«‘0
«‘0 «‘0
’00 ’00 ~Q) ’00 ’00 :J
a.+-, +-‘ +-‘
+-‘
+-‘
Cl)

«‘0

Cl)

ui
c

ui
c:

‘f

‘f

0

0

0

0

Q.

E

c:

c:

0
~

0
~

u.. u.. CO

C C
0
‘u.. LJ-

,……

CO

0

:J

0’)

e

C
0
~

u..

N
N N N

Q.

Q)

tJ)
tJ)

…,CD
tJ)

ui J:
c: «C
c
m ‘f ca

«C
CD

…,

0
CJ
CD

cs.

CD

:>

‘;;

e

0

0
Q.

en
tJ)

;.

tJ)

:>

‘;;
6

E

~

C)

m

…,!

CD
«C

c:
tJ)

.J::.

‘;;
6

C)

tJ)

tJ)

tJ)

m

m

m

CJ

CJ

~ ~ ~

.5 .5 .5

0I
~

114

113

..J

t:: t::
0
t:: 0
0 a. a.
a.
a. a.
:J
:J
t:: a.
0 :J Q) Q)
a.
~ ~
a. Q)
~ 0 0

…,~ :.c …,~
…,CD …,CD …,CD
CJ

J:

:c

tJ)

CD
«C

>-

e

Q)

Unit:mm

CD

0 …,CD 0
~
~
‘+:i
‘+:i .J::.
c …, c:
m

114

CD

…,CD
‘;;

2-spot welds

3-spot welds

M, I. G plug weld

Q)

m
m
co

Cl)

a:
:c

Cl)

:J

0

Cl)

u

Q)

~

0

u

~

0
+-‘
co

:.cco
CC

«~

0
co

+-‘

U

U

0
+-‘
co

0
+-‘
co

~

~

>-

co

~ ~

Q)

~

Q)

1’1’

«‘0
0
0
J:

U5

…J

a.
a.
::::>

N

CV)

q- LO

Q)

«‘0

Q)
Cl)

Cl)

.Q

~

0

Q)
0)

«‘0

=0

(

3 panels plug weld method

.A~

• B~

0
0

~~..c:

:.cco :.cco ~u «’05>

:.cco ~ ~

Q)

E

+-‘

• G@rr=

Q)

.g

>-

«‘0
0
0

Q)..c:»t-

+-‘

C

e

=0 CD CD
o a. ~

~gs
co,……

00

-42-

-3-

F:~~m

M I G

For

J:

Cl)

1 or 11 1

E
Q)
~u

E
Cl)
c:
~ ‘0)
U
~
co
~ .:t:

0

0

@

Q)

+-‘

0

1 or 11 1

112
111

Q)

u
~

@

c:

+-‘

en +-‘
c: cc
en co 0
co -a. ._
c:
en
Q)
0) c: 0
+-‘
Q)
’00
co c: +-‘
a. ’00 x c:

(3

3-door hatchback

Service Joint

J:
..J

E
Q)

OPERATIONS

~

)

P:
..u..u.

Id/

we

________

REPLACEM ENT OPERATIONS

GENERAL INFORMATION

Rear Floor Rear
(Work

_

Identification Number (Cont’ d)

after rear panel have been removed.)

Except for Europe

Service Joint

IN 1

. B

CAN

15

0

A

XXXXXX

T
—c:::
T

111

0: Stopgap

serial number

(no meaning)

Destination
A: Australia and New Zealand
Z: Except for Europe, Australia,

~

and New Zealand

Model
A: 2-wheel

drive

Engine type
B: GA 15DE engine
C: GA 16DE engine
E: SR20DE engine-For

Australia

and New Zealand only

Body type
B: 4-door Sedan
F: 5-door Hatchback
Manufacturer
IN 1: Nissan, Passenger vehicle

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

PLATE

Europe

Expect Europe
NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. APAN

NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. JAPAN

I

~

I

~

CNHOA»SIS

~

o

&
1-

kgO

&
&

2TYPE
TTP

~(:l &

~ tt

~~~sg~
~~~~~o

COlOR. TRIM
FARBE. POlST

&

kg
kg

~

~

&

o ~0:ggtg~ ~~~RNICION ~ &.
~~~~~~~
& £
;

; ~)~

/

~~~~~’.

AE~~

PLANT
PlANTA

&
El ii: 13 IJJ

if[

** it ~ *1

FR

3D
5D

HI
HI

_2

B : 3door hatchback
B : 5door hatchback

2-spot welds

3-spot welds

M. I. G plug weld

.

For

• GTJrr=-

(

3 panels plug weld method

• A ===-=

-43-

.’S ~
~

)

A1 L11

F

M I G seam weld/
weld
P:
.L.LLL

-2-

MADE IN JAPAN

o
cc

1 Type approval number
2 Vehicle identification
number(Chassis number)
3 Gross vehicle weight
4 Gross combination weight
Gross vehicle weight
+ Gross trailing capacity
(Weight)
5 Gross axle weight(Front)
6 Gross axle weight(Rear)
7 Type approval number
8 Body color code
9 Trim color code
10 Model Specification No.
11 Engine model
12 Engine displacement
13 Transaxle model
14 Axle model

_

~~~~~~~~_GENERALJNFORM~ION~~~~~~~~_

REPLACEMENT

Rear Side Member Extension

Identification Number
Vehicle identification

Emission

control information

number

Vehicle identification

OPERATIONS

Service

plate

Joint

label

SGI908

VEHICLE

IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER

/
/

ARRANGEMENT

JN1

B

A

A

N15

U

T

T

xxxxxx.

0

—c::

0: Stopgap

/~

——-

~ ~>~

‘——-

For Europe

Sedan

,,

I

serial number

(no meaning)

Destination
U: Europe

Model
A: 2-wheel

drive

Engine type
A: GA 14DE engine
C: GA 16DE engine
E: SR20DE engine
F: CD20 engine

111

Body type
B: 4-door Sedan
F: 5-door Hatchback
E: 3-door Hatchback
Manufacturer

114

J N 1: Nissan, Passenger vehicle

2-spot welds

3-spot

welds

M. I. G plug weld
For
d

-1-

r;==

GTJ

(

3 panels plug weld method

dA~

dB~

-44-

~

)

M. I. G seam weld/
Point weld

/

c-

___________

REPLACEMENT OPERATIONS

_

Rear Side Member Extension

3-door hatch back
5-door hatch back

Service Joint
(This figure show left side member extension)

LH : Left side
RH : Right side

—_ 4 (LH)

_ 6 (RH)

FR

11 1 (LH)

FR

11 2 (RH)

~

~

/

111 (LH)

2-spot

welds

3-spot

welds
M. I. G plug weld(

For 3 panels plug weld method

·r ·===-=
A

-45-

• B:::::C=

)

M. I. G seam weld/
Point weld

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

EC

SECTION

CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Special

Service

Supplemental
BAG»

4

Tools

4

Restraint

System

Supplemental

Restraint

BAG»

Air Bag System)

(Single

System

(SRS) «AIR

(Dual Air Bag System)

7

System

(SRS) «AIR
7

Diagnosis

8
8
of

Engine

9

Precautions

9

c=

~

GA

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
SYSTEM
Circuit

Diagram

Circuit

Diagram

System

Diagram

Europe

and Israel

System

Diagram

System

Diagram

Europe,

Israel

System

ECCS Component
ECCS Component
except

for Europe,

ECCS Component
ECCS Component

(at no load & high engine
28

GA15DE

GA 16DE except

Inspection

29

Parts Location

31

Inspection

32

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure

Release

Fuel Pressure

Check

Fuel Pressure

Regulator

Parts Location
Parts Location

GA15DE

Malfunction
CONSULT

33
Check

33

and Installation

34

Timing/ldle

Mixture

Ratio

,

35

Indicator

Lamp

(MIL)

.44
44
.48

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

General Description

58

15

Introduction

58

16

Work Flow

59

17

Diagnostic

Description
18

Diagnostic
Fail-Safe

19

Basic

for Work Flow

60

Worksheet

61

Trouble

62

Code (DTC) Chart

Chart

64

Inspection

65

Fast Idle Cam (FIC) Inspection

GA 16DE
20

Parts Location

33
33

Adjustment

14

GA 16DE

and Australia

Parts Location

Removal

13

GA 14DE,

and Israel

31

Description

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

for

GA 16DE for Australia

29

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION

12

Hose Drawing

28

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

For Australia

for Austral ia
Vacuum

27

Cut Control

Idle Speed/lgnition

Israel

24

(01) System

Fuel Cut Control

Injector

ECCS Component

(MFI) System

Air Conditioning

11

GA 14DE, GA 16DE for

GA 16DE for Europe

Ignition

11

23

Fuel Injection

Except for Australia

and Australia

Diagram

Multiport

speed)

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
for ECCS Trouble

23

Chart..

Distributor

GA,SR

Precautions

ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL
SYSTEM DESCRiPTION

Adjustment

For Europe

and Israel

21

Fast Idle Cam (FIC) Inspection

22

Adjustment
Symptom

Matrix

Except
Chart

and
68

and

for Europe

and Israel.

68
71

CONTENTS
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
74
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data
Monitor Mode
76
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
88
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..
88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 11
94
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS)
94
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 12
101
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS)
101
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 13
108
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)
108
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 21
113
Ignition Signal
113
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 34
119
Knock Sensor (KS)
119
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 41
124
Intake Air Temperature Sensor (IATS)
124
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
ITEMS
,
‘» .128
Throttle Position Sensor
128
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
133
Start Signal
138
Injector
141
Fuel Pump
145
Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
Control (AAC) Valve
150
Cooling Fan Control
156
Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch
169
Park/Neutral Position Switch
173
EVAP Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve
179
EGR Valve and EVAP Canister Purge Control
Solenoid Valve
183
Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S)
189
Oxygen Sensor (02S)
194
Valve Timing Control (VTC)
198
IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve
204
Electrical Load Signal
211
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
219
MIL & Data Link Connectors
223
SR

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
SYSTE M
Circuit Diagram
System Diagram
ECCS Component Parts Location
Vacuum Hose Drawing
System Chart…

226
226
227
228
231
232

(Cont’d.)

ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL
SYSTEM DESCRiPTION
Multipart Fuel Injection (MFI) System
Distributor Ignition (01) System
Air Conditioning Cut Control
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed)
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Description
Inspection
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Description
Inspection
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Release
Fuel Pressure Check
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check
Injector Removal and Installation
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
CONSULT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
Introduction
Work Flow
Description for Work Flow
Diagnostic Worksheet
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
Fail-Safe Chart
Basic Inspection
Symptom Matrix Chart.
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data
Monitor Mode
ECM»Terminals and Reference Value
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 11
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 12
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 13
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 21
Ignition Signal
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 34
Knock Sensor (KS)

233
233
235
236
237
238
238
238
240
240
240
241
241
241
242
242
243
..250
250
254
264
264
265
266
267
268
270
271
274
277
279
281
286
286
289
289
293
293
297
297
301
301
306
306

CONTENTS
TROUBLE

DIAGNOSIS

FOR DTC 43

Throttle Position Sensor
TROUBLE

DIAGNOSIS

309
309

FUEL SYSTEM

314
314
317

CRANKCASE

FOR NON-DETECTABLE

ITEMS

Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Start Signal
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve and
EVAP Canister Purge Control
Injector
Fuel Pump
Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-Air Regulator
Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
Control (AAC) Valve
:
Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-FICD Solenoid
Valve
‘»
Cooling Fan Control
Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch
Park/Neutral Position Switch
Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S)
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) & Data Link
Connector (DLC) for CONSULT

(Cont’d.)
381
381
381
382
382

CHECK

Priming Pump Check
Fuel Cut Solenoid Valve
VENTILATION

SYSTEM

Ventilation Hose
ENGINE

AND EMISSION

CONTROL

OVERALL

SYSTEM

319
324
327
332

Component Parts Location
System Diagram
Circuit Diagram
System Chart.
TROUBLE

335
339
343
354
357
362
367
370

,

DIAGNOSES

ECM Terminals and Reference Values
Quick-glow System
Partial Load Advance (PLA) Control
Cooling Fan Control
Air Conditioner Cut Control
Fuel Cut Control

383
383
384
385
386
387
387
390
399
404
413
416

GA
SERVICE

DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

(505)

.417
417
417

(505)

.418
418
.418

(505)

.419
419
419

General Specifications
Inspection and Adjustment..

CD
INJECTION
VE.TYPE

SYSTEM
INJECTION

PUMP

Removal
Installation
Adjustment
INJECTION

NOZZLE

Removal and Installation
Disassembly
Inspection
Cleaning
Assembly
Test and Adjustment

371
372
372
373
374
376
376
376
377
377
378
379

SR
SERVICE

DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

General Specifications
Inspection and Adjustment..

CD
SERVICE

DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

VE-type Injection Pump
Injection Nozzle

When you read wiring diagrams:
• Read GI section, «HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS» .
• See El section, «POWER SUPPLY ROUTING» for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnoses, read GI section, «HOW TO FOllOW FLOW CHART IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES» and «HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT».

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Engine
Tool number
Tool name

application

Description

EG11140000
Ignition coil adapter
harness

SR

GA

x

x

Measuring engine speed

NT338

KV10117100
Heated oxygen sensor
wrench

Loosening or tightening
heated oxygen sensor

x
NT630

KV10114400
Oxygen sensor wrench

Loosening or lightening
heated oxygen sensor

x
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)

NT636

FOR CD ENGINE VE- TYPE INJECTION
Adjusting

PUMP

device on vehicle

Tool number
Tool name

Description

KV11229352
Measuring device
CD KV11229350
Holder
@ KV11229360
Nut
@ KV11229370
Pin
@ KV11254410
Dial gauge

Measuring set length of plunger spring

NT570

KV11102900
Pulley puller

Removing injection pump sprocket

NT647

EC-4

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
FOR CD ENGINE INJECTION NOZZLE
Tool number
Tool name

Description

KV11289004

Nozzle cleaning kit

CD

KV11290012

Box

@

KV11290110

Brush
@ KV11290122

Nozzle oil sump
scraper
@ KV11290140
Nozzle needle tip
cleaner

@

KV11290150

Nozzle seat scraper
@ KV11290210
Nozzle holder
!J) KV11290220
Nozzle hole cleaning
needle

NT296

KV11292010

Nozzle centering device

NT293

KV11100300

Nozzle holder socket

NT563

EC-5

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
NOTE

EC-6

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
BAG» (Dual Air Bag System)
The Supplemental Restraint System «Air Bag», used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or
severity of injury to the driver and front passenger in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint
System consists of air bag modules (located in the center of the steering wheel and on the instrument
panel on the passenger side), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:

To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.


Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.

Do not use electrical test equipment ~n any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the
harness connectors or for the complete harness, for easy identification.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
BAG» (Single Air Bag System)
The Supplemental Restraint System «Air Bag», used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or
severity of injury to the driver in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint System consists of an
air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp,
wiring harness and spiral cable. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the
RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:

To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.

Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the
Service Manual.

EC-7

risk of personal injury or death
maintenance must be performed
of the SRS, can lead to personal
SRS unless instructed

to in this

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION

I GA,

SR

Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
ECM
• Do not disassembly
module).

EGM (EGGS control

• Do not turn diagnosis
forcibly.

BATTERY
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power
source.

mode selector

• If a battery terminal is disconnected,
the memory will return to the ECM
value.
The ECM will now start to self-control
at its initial value. Engine operation can
vary slightly when the terminal is
disconnected. However, this is not an
indication of a problem. Do not replace
parts because of a slight variation.

• Do not attempt to disconnect battery
cables while engine is running.

WIRELESS EQUIPMENT
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a
mobile phone, be sure to observe the
following as it may adversely affect
electronic control systems depending
on its installation location .
1) Keep the antenna as far as possible
away from the EGM.
2) Keep the antenna feeder line more than
20 em (7.9 in) away from the harness
of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long
distance.
3) Adjust the antenna and feeder line so
that the standing-wave ratio can be
kept smaller.
4) Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle
body.

INJECTOR
• Do not disconnect injector harness
connectors with engine running .
• Do not apply battery
injectors.

power directly to

ECCS PARTS HANDLING
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully
avoid damage.
• Do not disassemble mass air flow
sensor.

to

• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with
any type of detergent.
• Do not disassemble
• Even a
system
• Do not
position

IACV-AAC valve.

slight leak in the air intake
can cause serious problems.
shock or jar the camshaft
sensor.

WHEN STARTING
• Do not depress accelerator
starting.

pedal when

• Immediately after starting, do not rev up
engine unnecessarily .
• Do not rev up engine just prior to
shutdown.

FUEL PUMP
• Do not operate fuel pump when there
is no fuel in lines.
• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the
specified torque.
ECCS HARNESS HANDLING
• Securely connect EGGS harness
connectors.
A poor connection can cause an
extremely high (surge) voltage to
develop in coil and condenser, thus
resulting in damage to ICs .
• Keep ECGS harness at least 10 em (3.9
in) away from adjacent harnesses, to
prevent an EGGS system malfunction
due to receiving external noise,
degraded operation of IGs, etc .
• Keep EGCS parts and harnesses dry .
• Before removing parts, turn off ignition
switch and then disconnect battery
ground cable.

SEF320R

EC-8

I

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION

I GA, SR I

Precautions for ECCS Trouble Diagnosis of
Engine
CAUTION:

Be sure to turn the ignition switch «OFF» and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause malfunction.

Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause malfunction due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt,
bent terminals, etc.)

Be sure to route and clamp the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause malfunction due to the short circuit.

Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube •
may cause malfunction.

Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) in the ECM before
returning the vehicle to the customer.

Precautions

Before connecting
or disconnecting
the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned off.

When connecting ECM harness connector, tighten securing
bolt until red projection is in line with connector face.

When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.

SEF289H

SEF725H

Bend

Break
SEF291H

EC-9

PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Precautions (Cont’d)

»

/

‘~/»

/

Before replacing ECM, perform Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-281 for SR engine model and EC-78 for GA
engine model.

After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
«OVERALL FUNCTIONCHECK» or «DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATIONPROCEDURE».
The DTC should not be displayed in the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE»if the repair is completed. The «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» should be a good result if the
repair is completed.

When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.

MEF040D

I /
CHECK-

/

,

I GA, SR I

…….

SEF051P

NG

@~

~K
Circuit tester

)

.1
SEF34BN

EC-10

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram —

Except for Australia
H
OJ

L
:J….
WI:.
Ol
L’~
OH

.~::
«L
LOJ

OJOJ
DDD
ooc
EE- OJ OJ
‘-co
:::E:.rlO
OlL
OJC:J

~ OJ

-D

~.~

OJ….
D>0- ….

r—.

~

.-I~(I)W

….

-11

.. ..

:s

~L-

@@

H
~

a:
w

IO~

L.:-:.:.-J

~

….u«

>4
CD—‘
ZW

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Ha:

RELAY@)

—‘
OZ

j):Ji

06
:>:([
lIt-.
LUZo..

~ LtBf- .
~m

u.

OJ
~DU
4Cx
CD.

G)


I
U
IH
X
Ul
Z
4
LL

.~Q)W

UJ4
‘-..::lE+J
4: 0 QJ 0. OCDo
I:. …. OJ LlJ

I
U
IUH
‘-X
ffJH
WOX
ZIl-ffJ

04~
,»0

~
~

I

2

a::

=0:00

ow

~

~

~([

~~

[!J ffi@~ 0
o..-.J

~8itJJ I

UJO —HI
_

U
I-

t-Z
(J)WO
H> U

:3

0-

:>:
4

Z—‘
o

Ha:
>-0

~’::(0)
::>U

~—‘0-4

LLH

:>:H

~r;

«,a:::>
ZOffJ
HI-Z

W
::>
LL
I’

l

I

«H

GJ~ ffi~
~c5 tn~
~Ul
20

wo

-.J….J
<£0

5~

I

>
U
4
H

:3
0

Z
W
U…J
>-0
>ffJ

([

O-I
IU
—‘>4H
::>X
OUl

@

co
~ ~ ~

~

~

CJ

0
Z

0
Z

°

CD
Z
H

@)

L-jl’

>-@—

CJI
([

…J 0
OZI040
ULL:>:

—ll’

~

»
L

CD

~

Z
H

I
([

…J 0
OZI-

~

040

ULL:>:

@

~~~~

:;;

LlJ-

~en

«»»

@ @@

~

!,;l

‘»0 0′»
Z

II
([

~0[~

»

L

la=

:J

uo
HH
LLO
IZ
>w
U—‘
40
HffJ

,..J

@

[ft(‘»~

04
ULL

@w

Z

a:

@@

ECM (ECCS CONTROL MODULE)

‘»;’!;
~

UO

ll!

U

…J

ffJ
ffJ
w

I

I0

—‘
oz

~

~s:

@e

co

r—

II OJ

0
lHI
alU
HIIH
ZX
HffJ

W

I
>4
CD—‘
ZW
H([

illS Gj@

UJU

4Z

«H

~~ ~~

~~

—‘UO

>-Za:
400
OULL

Q.

b:~
~
u8

mil
w
>
—‘
4
>

([

a:
CJ

w

U>~@
O-O::>~

lD'»

«»»

«- co ‘»

~

—‘

2:

UJ:>:—‘
::>::>w
LLIl-([

—‘0
4Z

~: w
::J
0-

=

Ii!>

([
::J

HW(J)
IWZ

I’

>-

0
>U
W

-,

3

L

I
I
I
I

Z

II I

!

@

@

@

@

hi

r;:;;s

«‘en
~~

_

{;) @R)

CD

‘»‘»

«‘-

o-J

I’

.:—1

itJ

,
I
I
I
I

iY

II
I

@

I

~

EI

bJ ~~

I’

CD
Z
HUJ

([([

»

I’

I’

([

H
4
a:
0
ffJXffJ
ffJOZ
4—‘UJ
:>:LLffJ

~g@)

UffJ UJ
OZ
ZUJ
«‘Ul

0([
0::>
UI4
wa:a:
ZUJO
HIl-ffJ
«‘:>:z
ZUJw
Wl-Ul

WZ
—‘0
I-Ha:
1-1-0
OHffJ
a:UlZ
IOUJ
I-Il-Ul

oza:
wUJO
….
CDffJ
4>-Z
WXW
IOffJ

UJ::>
WffJ
I-ffJ
ffJUJ
([I
([Il-U
w IX..JH
OHX
O-OUl

H

‘»-

ffJ- >i
H
LL
Z LL
CD 0
H

~

—<..r

~

—<..r

Cl

0

1’

1

‘»

::>
…J
I’ Il-

‘»4
([

I’

ll-

ffJ

~

—u

W

~~
E~

W

ll>

(I)
H

ll>

D

D

0

0

E
l-

E

I-

(I)

H
ll>

D
0
E
0
I

»4 :>: ([

ll>
0

co

L
C
:J W;:)
UJ
ro
L OlL,;;;-,W!H

0

~
0

«tJ

C

~.~
~

~

Ul

u

H

5

L

U

….

>-

uULuU+J
L U …….
0 x
00l
U
I ….. X
…J..-t lLJ

I’

BATTERY

HEC060

EC-11

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERAll
Circuit Diagram ~
~

~
3:

H
I-L

H

HO
Z

H

g:

«-.3:

—II’

3:a:

f-

ZZ
00

Zfou:>

I
U
f-

UH

W

H

:nu:>a:
«

For Australia

a:

U
f-

H

SYSTEM

U ‘»

f-

‘»

Z »
«
IL ~

‘—

~
I

tnU1

u:>0

I

—jl’

>-

@

«

«

_J[l-

W:>:…J
::J:OW
ILa-a:

J(

-jl’~

I’

«‘
4′-

…JaW:>:
::J::J

ILa-

I

lcil’
«,a::o
:J

»

lD

;s

lD

ru

Z
H
…J

OZf-

I

a:
0

0«0

HI
COU
HfIH
Z3:

1

H(/)

:

II

tn~I
a:a-u
W f3:…JH
OH3:
a-O(/)

@
I’
Ha:
…J 0
OZf0«0
UIL:>:

lD

tn

ZOu:>
Hf-Z
…JUO

lD

~~~

ECM (ECCS CONTROL MOOULE)

«00
DUlL

o~

tnLD

I
1″‘1

aZ

ru
0

Z

(T)

~

Q

0

Z

J

z

DJDJDJDJ

(<<

ffi

I

Z
W

o
Z
o

fU

!!j

~

KfB-g

f-Z
ILO
«Ha:
If-O
(/)H(/)
:>:(/)Z

~ntJ];

>-

(/)«
U…J

uw

~~

is

er

«ow
ua-(/)

Z

I ~
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I

II
II
II
II
II
II

(/)

a:
o

I
U
IH tii
3:
u:>

,,.J

a:
«‘0

g~
ZUJ

«‘CfJ

H

:IL(/)
L
QJ

H

a:(/)

C

WZ
3:«
oa:
a-I-

~ :.i
U

0

.~

…,
.~

«c

I-

H
Z

u-

~

8 i5

QJ

~~~~~

‘»
~
…J

L
QJ

…,
QJ

UJ

E

…J
H
u:>
::J
IL
CD

~~

~

o
~
u

~~

…,'»

~ffi
o
f-

l-

::J

u:>
H
(/)
W

CD
H
a:

er

~

f-

o

OJ)
rl
QJ

0
U

L
.~

» » ‘»
~
…,
0

0

E

E

f- f»-. «-. .~
« :>: 3:

.. ..

.,

@@@

o

BATTERY

f-

HEC061

EC-12

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Diagram Europe and Israel
.c

.B

.~

GA14DE, GA 16DE for

II

If)

Q;

n.

c:

0
:;:;

:0

c:

0
()

~

c

o

+:

~

u 0

c-

o2 ~ a.

o;i’iE
:! -!; .!!!

ClI

>

0;

>

«0

-0

C
ClI

0

III

0

0

u ~
ClI

£’

~>
~
«0

6

c
>.!!’
Q)

~

0
III

UO

«0

ClI

>

~
‘(5

0;

III 0
III III

.:x

‘» c

>

U
ClI

:! ~

«u:
>-‘=
o .’=’

~~

III

a;
«0
o
E
f-

:t

-‘=
U

a;
:;]

lJ..

Q;
a..,
« —

>

c

w rl

SEF450QA

EC-15

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
System Diagram —

GA 16DE for Australia

(;
oo
C
Q)

oo
-0

«-

Q)
Q)

0.
rJl
Q)

u

:c
Q)

>

c:

.r::

:2 .g
~
0 oo
0.
~
.8
~ :0
‘5 :c
’00

Q)

z

Ol

Q;

C

C

.~

~

Q)

Q)

:;

‘5

t5

0

~ 0..,8j;
0

c:
.r::
u .B

(5
(ij oo
>
UO

(ij
>

UJ
Q;
‘0
0

>.r::

U ,-:::
0

~~

~u

oo
C
Q)

oo

Q)
.r::

Q)

u

2

Q;

~

:J

U.

Q)

0.

E

2]

~E
!!2fQ)~
‘O.
Q)
oo x
0

C-o
Q)

‘co

oo

Q)

Ol_

>.ro
x Q)

OI

SEF121R

EC-16

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
ECCS Component Parts Location GA 16DE for Europe and Israel
Fast idle cam

EGR valve & EVAP canister

GA 14DE,

purge control solenoid valve

Mass air flow sensor
Throttle

position sensor

Power steering oil
pressure switch

Engine coolant temperature
sensor
IACV-FICD solenoid valve
IACV-AAC

Distributor with built-in camshaft position
sensor, power transistor and ignition coil

valve

Throttle

position sensor

SEF122R

EC-17

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
ECCS Component Parts Location EGR valve & EVAP canister
(Only M/T models)

Mass air flow sensor
Throttle

position

f

sensor

Engine coolant temperature
sensor
IACV-AAC valve
(with FICD
solenoid valve)

GA 15DE

purge control solenoid

valve

EGR valve (Only M/T models)

Oxygen sensor

Fuel filter
EVAP canister

Distributor with built-in camshaft position
sensor, power transistor and ignition coil

Mass air flow sensor

Throttle position

sensor

SEF123R

EC-18

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
ECCS Component Parts Location — GA 16DE
except for Europe, Israel and Australia
Throttle position sensor

Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Power steering oil

,,,,,»to

‘WI»h~~>- __

EVAP canister purge
control solenoid valve
(Only M/T models)

«7-_

VTC solenoid valve
Oxygen sensor

Engine coolant temperature sensor
VTC solenoid valve

Throttle position sensor

SEF451QA

EC-19

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
ECCS Component Parts Location Australia

Engine coolant temperature
sensor

VTC solenoid

EGR valve & EVAP
canister purge
control solenoid valve

Throttle position

GA 16DE for

sensor

IACV-AAC valve (with FICO solenoid

valve)

valve
Heated oxygen sensor
(AfT models)
Oxygen sensor
(MfT models)

Distributor with built-in camshaft position
sensor, power transistor and ignition coil

Engine coolant temperature sensor
VTC solenoid valve

Throttle

position sensor

SEF124R

EC-20

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM

[]K]

ECCS Component Parts Location

Behind the center console


SEF452Q

EC-21

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Vacuum Hose Drawing
GA 14DE, GA 16DE for Europe

~.
Throttle body

10

1—«~

EGR valve

z:

~L/
1
5

0

~

I t~:::L

4

~

8

To EVAP canister ¥

EGR valve & EVAP canister purge

control solenoid

GA15DE

»

BPT valve

W

EGR valve & EVAP
canister purge
control solenoid
valve

3-way connector

valve

MIT models

AIT models

AIT models

Pressure

regulator

SEF125R

(1)
@
@
@
@

@

Pressure regulator to intake
manifold
EGR valve to 3-way connector
3-way connector to 3-way connector
BPT valve to 3-way connector
3-way connector to EVAP canister
EGR valve & EVAP canister
purge control solenoid valve to
3-way connector

(j)

@

@

@l

EGR valve & EVAP canister
purge control solenoid valve to
air cleaner
EGR valve & EVAP canister
purge control solenoid valve to
throttle body
Pressure regulator to throttle
body
EGR valve & EVAP canister
purge control solenoid valve to
air duct

EC-22

@

@
@
@
@

Throttle body to EVAP canister
EVAP canister purge control
valve to throttle body
EVAP canister purge control
valve to EVAP canister
EVAP canister purge control
valve to resonator
Throttle body to EVAP canister

ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
System Chart

I Camshaft position sensor
Fuel injection & mixture
‘1

Injectors

ratio control

Knock sensor
Distributor ignition system

Power transistor

Mass air flow sensor
*4

Engine coolant temperature

Idle air control system

sensor

Ignition switch

IACV-AAC valve (With FICD
solenoid valve)

Fuel pump control

Fuel pump relay

2
Throttle position sensor

Oxygen sensor monitor
& On-board diagnostic system

Malfunction indicator lamp
(On the instrument panel)

Neutral positionllnhibitor
switch

Air conditioner switch

5
ECM
Torque converter clutch can(ECCS
cel solenoid valve control
control
module) (A/T models)

‘5
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Battery voltage

Power steering oil pressure
switch

I

Cooling fan control

Cooling fan relay

Air conditioner cut control
during acceleration

Air conditioner relays

Vehicle speed sensor
*6

6
*2

I Oxygen sensor

Valve timing control
7

EVAP canister purge control

*3

Intake air temperature sensor

EVAP canister purge control
solenoid valve

‘8

8
Electrical load
• Rear defogger switch
• Lighting switch

VTC solenoid valve

EGR & EVAP canister purge
control

*1: Except for Europe and Israel
*2: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and Israel, and Australia A/T models)
Oxygen sensor (Except for Europe and Israel, and Australia A/T models)
*3: For Australia
*4: IACV-AAC valve and IACV-FICD solenoid valve (For Europe and Israel)
IACV-AAC valve (with FICD solenoid valve) (Except for Europe and Israel)
‘5: Except for Europe
*6: GA16DE except for Europe and Israel
*7: GA 16DE MIT models except for Europe, Israel and Australia
*8: For Europe and Israel and Australia, and GA15DE MIT models

EC-23

EGR valve & EVAP canister
purge control solenoid valve

ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multipart Fuel Injection (MFI) System
INPUT/OUTPUT

SIGNAL LINE

Camshaft position sensor

Engine speed and piston position

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

*1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

Oxygen sensor

Throttle position

Throttle position sensor

Throttle valve idle position
Neutral position/Inhibitor

switch

Vehicle speed sensor

~gnition

switch

Gear position

ECM
(ECCS
control
module)

Injector

Vehicle speed

Start signal

Air conditioner switch

Air conditioner operation

Power steering oil pressure switch

Power steering load signal

Battery

Battery voltage

*1: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and Israel, and Australia A/T models)
Oxygen sensor (Except for Europe and Israel, and Australia A/T models)

BASIC MUL TIPORT FUEL INJECTION
SYSTEM

VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION
INCREASE/DECREASE
COMPENSATION

The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector
is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the
length of time the valve remains open (injection
pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a
program value in the ECM memory. The program
value is preset by engine operating conditions.
These conditions are determined by input signals
(for engine speed and intake air) from both the
camshaft position sensor and the mass air flow
sensor.

In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under
various operating conditions as listed below.
< Fuel increase>

During warm-up

When starting the engine

During acceleration

Hot-engine operation

When selector lever is changed from «N» to
«D» (AfT models only)

High-load, high-speed operation
< Fuel decrease>

During deceleration

EC-24

ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ill
Multipart Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cant’ d)
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP
CONTROL)

CLOSED LOOP
CONTROL

Feedback signal

MEF025DC

The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel
mixture ratio for driveability
and emission control. The three
way catalyst can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions.
This system uses an oxygen sensor*1 in the exhaust manifold
to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of
stoichiometric
(ideal air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition .

OPEN LOOP CONTROL
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects
any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order
to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.

Deceleration and acceleration

High-load, high-speed operation

Engine idling

Malfunction of oxygen sensor*1 or its circuit

Insufficient activation of oxygen sensor*1 at low engine
coolant temperature

High-engine coolant temperature

After shifting from «N» to «D»

During warm-up

When starting the engine

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING

CONTROL

The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture
ratio signal transmitted from the oxygen sensor*1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic
mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing
differences
(i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic changes
during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture
ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical
mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of «injection
pulse duration»
to automatically
compensate for the difference between the two ratios.
* 1: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and Israel, and Australia AIT models)
Oxygen sensor (Except for Europe and Israel, and Australia
AIT models)

EC-25

ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
@K]
Multipart Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
No.1 cylinder

—r:T

/

Injection pUlse

_

No.2 cylinder

rL

No.3 cylinder

n…. _

n….
__

No.4 cylinder
~

1 engine cycle

Sequential multiport fuel injection system

No. 1 cylinder jl
No.2 cylinder jl

FUEL INJECTION TIMING
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential

multiport fuel injection system

Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle
according to the firing order. This system is used when the
engine is running.

—-j
MEF522D

n
n

nn-

No. 3 cylinder

.n

n

rL-

No.4 cylinder

j1~

n….

rL-

f—

1 engine cycle

-l

Simultaneous

multiport fuel injection system

Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each
engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width
are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for
each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if
the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.

Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system

FUEL SHUT-OFF
MEF523D

Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation
of the engine and the vehicle at excessively high speeds.

EC-26

ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Distributor Ignition (DI) System
INPUT/OUTPUT

SIGNAL LINE

Engine speed and piston position

Camshaft position sensor

Amount of intake air

Mass air flow sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Throttle position

Throttle position sensor

Throttle valve idle position
Vehicle speed

Vehicle speed sensor

Start signal

Ignition switch

*1

ECM
(ECCS
control
module)

Power
transistor

Engine knocking

Knock sensor
Gear position

Neutral position/Inhibitor switch

Battery voltage

Battery
*1: Except for Europe and Israel

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Tp
(msec)

1.75
A

~ 1.50
.~

~ 1.25
«S

0.

1.00
o
.~ 0.75
C

E
600

1,000
Engine

1,400 1,800 2,200
speed

(rpm)

N

SEF742M

The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best
air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine.
The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms
the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width
and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor .
e.g.,
N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
AOBTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by
the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.

At starting

During warm-up

At idle

Hot engine operation

During acceleration

During high-load operation (VTC on) — GA 16DE except for
Europe and Israel
Except for Europe and Israel
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the antiknocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions.
If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM (ECCS control module). The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.

EC-27

ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

~

Air Conditioning Cut Control
INPUT/OUTPUT

SIGNAL LINE
Air conditioner «ON» signal

Air conditioner switch

Neutral position/Inhibitor switch

Neutral position

Throttle valve opening angle

Throttle position sensor

Engine speed

Camshaft position sensor

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

ECM
(ECCS
control
module)

Air conditioner
relay

Start signal

Ignition switch

Vehicle speed

Vehicle speed sensor

Power steering oil pressure switch

Power steering load signal

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves acceler8.tion when the air conditioner is used.
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the air conditioner is turned off for a few seconds.

Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
speed)
INPUT/OUTPUT

SIGNAL LINE
Vehicle speed

Vehicle speed sensor

Neutral position/Inhibitor

switch

Throttle position sensor

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Camshaft position sensor

Neutral position

Throttle position

ECM
(ECCS
control
module)

Injectors

Engine coolant temperature

Engine speed

If the engine speed is above 2,500 rpm with no load (for
example, in neutral and engine speed over 2,500 rpm) fuel will
be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut
off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm,
then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different than deceleration control listed under
«Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System» on EC-24.

EC-28

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
r— — — —- — — —— ———,
To EGR I

Throttle valve

‘1 EVAP canister
purge control
solenoid valve
or
‘2 EGR valve &
EVAP canister
purge control
solenoid
valve

~
I

————,

I
I

I
I

Intake manifold

I

I

,

valve

I
1

1
I

I
I

Vacuum
signal line

:
I
I
I
I
I

I
I

I
I
I
I

Fuel check valve

‘-

I
I

——

__

….J

‘1 : GA 16DE M/T models except for Europe,
Israel and Australia
‘2 : For Europe, Israel and Australia,
and GA 15DE M/T models
~

: GA 15, 16DE AlT models except for
Europe, Israel and Australia
..

Fuel filler cap
with vacuum
relief valve

: Air

Q : Fuel

vapor

EVAP canister

SEF126R

The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This
reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor from sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister when the engine is off. The fuel vapor is then stored in the
EVAP canister. The EVAP canister retains the fuel vapor until
the EVAP canister is purged by air.
When the engine is running, the air is drawn through the bottom of the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor will then be led to the
intake manifold.
When the engine runs at idle, the EVAP canister purge control
valve is closed. Only a small amount of vapor flows into the
intake manifold through the constant purge orifice.
As the engine speed increases and the throttle vacuum rises,
the purge control valve opens. The vapor is sucked through
both main purge and constant purge orifices.

Inspection
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Blow air in port @ and ensure that there is no leakage.
2. Apply vacuum to port @. [Approximately -13.3 to -20.0 kPa
(-133 to -200 mbar, -100 to -150 mmHg, -3.94 to -5.91 inHg)]
3. Cover port CID with hand.
4. Blow air in port @ and ensure free flow out of port CID .

@Q

@

AEC664

EC-29

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Inspection (Cont’d)

..

FUEL CHECK VALVE
Check valve operation

«?

Fuel tank side

1.

QAir

Fuel vapor

..

2.

EVAP canister side

3.

LEAN -> RICH
2 limes: RICH -> LEAN -> RICH ->LEAN ->
RICH

SEF909P

OR

Set «Oxygen sensor monitor» in diagnostic
test mode II.
(See page EC-47.)
2. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2
minutes under no-load.
3. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under
no-load, check that the malfunction indicator
lamp on the instrument panel goes ON and
OFF more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

OK
SEF217M

END

EC-40

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle
Adjustment (Cont’d)

II For Australia

II

ECM

~

CONNECTORII

CD

~
DISCONNECT

46

18

II
Check oxygen sensor*1 harness:
1) Turn off engine and disconnect battery

~

ground cable.
2) Disconnect ECM harness connector from
ECM.
3) Disconnect oxygen sensor*1 harness connector. Then connect harness side terminal for

SEF056PA

II

Except for Australia

II

19’

ECM

CONNECTOR

oxygen sensor*1 to ground with a jumper
wire.
4) .Check for continuity between terminal No. 46
or No. 19 of ECM harness connector and
body ground.

II

19

Continuity exists ………………………………………… OK
Continuity does not exist ……………………………. NG
OK

ACTIVE TEST.

COOLANTTEMP

0

lNG

I

SEF194R

Repair or replace harness .

Connect ECM harness connector to control unit.

20°C

===MONITOR===
CMPS.RPM (REF)
INJ PULSE
IGN TIMING

~

Orpm
O.7msec
5BTDC

III

00
AEC681

DISCONNECT

10

!;j:~:~~’~»;»‘»
Engine coolant
temperature

@

2.5 k n resistor

1) Connect battery ground cable.
2) Select «ENG COOLANT TEMP» in
«ACTIVE TEST» mode.
3) Set «COOLANT TEMP» to 20°C (68°F)
by touching «au»
«UP», «DWN».

~

00

~
Mixture Ratio

and «ad»

and

OR
1) Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
2) Connect a resistor (2.5 kQ) between
terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.

[+]
SEC242BA

Start engine and warm it up until water temperature indicator points to middle of gauge.

~
@

SEF455Q

EC-41

*1: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and
Israel, a nd Australia
AIT mod els)
Oxygen sensor
(Except for Europe
and Isra el, and Australia AI T models)

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timinglldle
Adjustment (Cont’d)

~\~\\»»1″‘1///1.

#’

7

~

{2{

6~
7-=1
84

?1

:;::.
~o

@

5 ~

~

1

Ii

Race engine two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle
speed.

.;f

xl000 rlmin

~
Mixture Ratio

1
Check «CO»%.

SEF248F

Idle CO: Less than 10%

[!J
After checking COOJo,
1) Touch «BACK».

00
@

1) Disconnect the resistor from terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor h.arness connector.
2) Connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector
to engine coolant temperature sensor.

SEF913J

OK

NG
1;:( MONITOR

1;:( NO FAIL

0
Replace oxygen sensor’1.

CMPS.RPM(REF)
MIR FIC MNT

2000rpm
RICH

m

00
__

R_E_C_O_R_D __

I
SEF515Q

1. See «M/R FIC MNT» in «Data monitor» mode.
2. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load
(engine is warmed up sufficiently.), check that
the monitor fluctuates between «LEAN» and
«RICH» more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 time : RICH -> LEAN -> RICH
2 times: RICH -> LEAN -+ RICH -> LEAN ->
RICH
OR

Ii)

@

1. Set «Oxygen sensor monitor» in diagnostic test
.mode II.
(See page EC-47.)
2. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load,
check that the malfunction indicator lamp on the
instrument panel goes ON and OFF more than 5

SEF987K

times during 10 seconds.

I NG

OK

~~~~N

l~~i~V-=~
(gJ~

@

-~

Data link connector for CONSULT
(Connect CHK and IGN terminals
with a suitable harness.)

@
‘1: Heated oxygen
and Israel, and
els)
Oxygen sensor
and Israel, and
els)

SEF909P

EC-42

sensor (For Europe
Australia AIT mod(Except for Europe
Australia AIT mod-

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle
Adjustment (Cont’d)

[]KJ
Mixture Ratio

@

Connect oxygen sensor harness connector to oxygen
sensor.

Check fuel pressure regulator.
(See page EC-33.)

.
Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit.
(See page EC-107.)

Check injector and its circuit.
(See page EC-141.)
Clean or replace if necessary.

Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit.
(See page EC-112.)

Check ECM function* by substituting another known
good ECM.

*. ECM may be the caus e of a problem,
but this is rarely the c ase.

EC-43

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator lamp (Mil)

‘e/’

1. The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is
a bulb check.

If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to
EL section («WARNING LAMPS AND CHIME») or see

I /

CHECK-

/

…….

/

EC-223.

I

2. When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp
should go off.

Malfunction indicator
lamp
SEF051PA

Condition

Diagnostic
Test Mode I

Diagnostic
Test Mode II

BULB CHECK

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS

Engine
stopped
Ignition
switch in
«ON» position

~
Engine
running

ID

~

MALFUNCTION
WARNING

*1

OXYGEN SENSOR
MONITOR

*1: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and Israel, and Australia AIT models)
Oxygen sensor (Except for Europe and Israel, and Australia AIT models)

EC-44

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator lamp (Mil) (Cont’d)
Turn ignition switch «ON».
(Do not start engine.)

Diagnostic Test Mode I —

HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES

BULB CHECK

Diagnostic Test Mode I
— MALFUNCTION WARNING

o,~yr;;~N

~-~
Data link connector for CONSULT
(Connect CHK and IGN terminals
with a suitable harness.)

(Turn diagnostic test mode
selector on ECM fully clockwise.)

Wait at least 2 seconds.

O,~/~N
~-~
Data link connector for CONSULT
(Disconnect CHK and IGN terminals
with a suitable harness.)

(Turn diagnostic test mode
selector fully counterclockwise.)

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II
— SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Q~

~
ON

~

Diagnostic Test Mode II
— OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR*1

S art engine.

0′

~~~~~
~~r
~!~~:V
[gJ~
-~

Data link connector for CONSULT
(Connect CHK and IGN terminals
with a suitable harness.)

Wait at least 2 seconds.

1

Ol

or

g2g~E;V
~~~;::

~~

W:jr

-~

Data link connector for CONSULT
(Disconnect CHK and IGN terminals
with a suitable harness.)

EC-45

• Switching the modes is not possible when the engine is running.
• When ignition switch is turned off
during diagnosis, power to ECM
will drop after approx. 5 second.
The diagnosis will automatically
return to Diagnostic Test Mode I.
• Turn back diagnostic test mode
selector to the fully counterclockwise position whenever vehicle is
in use.
*1: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and Israel,
and Australia AfT models)
Oxygen sensor (Except for Europe and tsrael,
and Australia AfT models)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator lamp (Mil) (Cont’d)

@KJ

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I-BULB
CHECK
In this mode, the MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains
OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EL section («WARNING LAMPS AND CHIME») or see EC-223.
DIAGNOSTIC

TEST MODE I-MALFUNCTION

WARNING

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

Condition
Engine coolant temperature

ON

OFF

sensor circuit malfunction

or overheating

is detected, or

the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning.
No malfunction.

These Diagnostic Trouble Code Numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS).

DIAGNOSTIC

TEST MODE II-SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

RESULTS

In this mode, a diagnostic trouble code is indicated by the number of blinks of the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP as shown below.
Example: Diagnostic trouble code No. 12 and No. 43
0.6

03

111-‘1

ON

0.3

0.6

II

OFF

~

j

~~

Q9

O~

-I.

—.1
-4—1-21
OB

‘———v——~

‘———v—-‘

Diagnostic trouble code No. 12

Q9

2.1

Diagnostic trouble code No. 43

Unit: second
AEC490

Long (0.6 second) blinking indicates the number of ten digits, and short (0.3 second) blinking indicates
the number of single digits. For example, the malfunction indicator lamp blinks 4 times for about 2.5
seconds (0.6 sec x 4 times) and then it blinks three times for about 1 second (0.3 sec x 3 times). This
indicates the DTC «43» and refers to the malfunction of the throttle position sensor.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their diagnostic trouble code numbers. The
DTC «55» refers to no malfunction. (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART, refer to EC-62.)
HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (Self-diagnostic results)
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased from the backup memory in the ECM when the diagnostic
test mode is changed from Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to «HOW TO
SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES» on previous page.)

If the battery terminal is disconnected,
memory within 24 hours.

Be careful not to erase the stored memory
• SELF-DIAG RESULTS.
FAILURE DETECTED
NATS MALFUNCTION

0

TIME
0

I

ERASE

II

PRINT

I
SEF288Q

the diagnostic

trouble

code will be lost from the backup

before startin~ trouble diagnoses.

If the MIL blinks or «NATS MALFUNCTION»
is displayed on
«SELF-OIAG
RESULTS»
screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT using NATS program card
(NATS-E940). Refer to EL section.
Confirm no self-diagnostic
results of NATS is displayed
before touching «ERASE» in «SELF-DIAG RESULTS» mode
with CONSULT.
When replacing ECM, initialisation of NATS V2.0 system and
registration of all NATS V2.0 ignition key 10s must be carried out with CONSULT using NATS program card (NATSE940).
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.
Regarding the procedures of NATS initialisation and NATS
ignition key 10 registration,
refer to CONSULT operation
manual, NA TS V2.0.

EC-46

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator lamp (Mil) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II-OXYGEN

[QKJ

SENSOR*1 MONITOR

In this mode, the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP displays
rich) which is monitored by the oxygen sensor*1.

the condition

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas

ON

Lean

OFF

Rich

*2 Remains ON or OFF

Any condition

of the fuel mixture

(lean or

Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
Closed loop system
Open loop system

*2: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.

To check the oxygen sensor*1 function, start engine in Diagnostic Test Mode II. Then warm it up until
engine coolant temperature indicator points to middle of gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Make sure that the
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running
at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
.
*1: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and Israel, and Australia AfT models)
Oxygen sensor (Except for Europe and Israel, and Australia AfT models)

EC-47

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT
CONSULT INSPECTION

PROCEDURE

1. Turn off ignition switch.
2. Connect «CONSULT» to data link connector for CONSULT.
(Data link connector for CONSULT is located behind the fuse
box cover.)

for CONSULT

E3==/

3. Turn on ignition switch.
4. Touch «START».

NISSAN

CONSULT
EE940

+: Program

card

AE930: For Australia
EE940: Except for Australia

+

!DiI

II

START
SUB MODE

I

I

SEF253Q

~

I

SELECT~S_Y_S_T_EM

5. Touch «ENGINE».

ENGINE—-~

SEFS95K

~

SELECT

DIAG MODE

WORK SUPPORT
SELF-DIAG

RESULTS

lill

I

6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure.
For further information,

I

DATA MONITOR

I
I
I

ACTIVE TEST
ECM PART NUMBER
FUNCTION

TEST
SEF136P

EC-48

see the CONSULT Operation

Manual.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
ECCS COMPONENT

PARTS/CONTROL

SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC

Item

WORK
SUPPORT

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS

lll:

<
~
IZ
UJ

ACTIVE

MONITOR

TEST

FUNCTION
TEST

X

X

Mass air flow sensor

X

X

Engine coolant temperature sensor

X

X

Oxygen sensor’1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Intake air temperature sensor.’2

X

X

Knock sensor’3

X

Throttle position sensor

I/)

DATA

Camshaft position sensor

Vehicle speed sensor

INPUT

TEST MODE

X

X

Ignition switch (start signal)

X

X

Closed throttle position

X

X

Air conditioner switch

X

Park/Neutral position switch

X

X
X

z
~

Power steering oil pressure switch

X

Electrical load signal

X

0

Battery voltage

X

I/)

Injectors

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Valve timing control solenoid valve

X

X

X

Air conditioner relay

X
X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

0

:E

u
u
u
UJ

OUTPUT

Power transistor (Ignition timing)

X

IACV-AAC valve

X

X

Fuel pump relay
Cooling fan
EVAP canister purge control solenoid
valve’4
EGR valve & EVAP canister purge control
solenoid valve’5

X: Applicable
‘1: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and Israel, and Australia AIT models)
Oxygen sensor (Except for Europe and Israel, and Australia AIT models)
‘2: For Australia
‘3: Except for Australia
‘4: GA16DE MIT models except for Europe and Israel, and Australia
‘5: For Europe and Israel and Australia, and GA15DE MIT models

EC-49

X (Ignition
signal)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode

Function
A technician can adjust some devices
faster and more accurately by following

Work support

indications
Self-diagnostic

Self-diagnostic results can be read and
erased quickly.

results

Data monitor

Active

on CONSULT.

Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
CONSUL T drives some actuators apart
from the ECM’s and also shifts some
parameters in a specified range.

test

ECM part numbers

ECM part numbers can be read.

Function test

Conducted by CONSULT instead of a technician to determine whether each system
is «OK» or «NG».

WORK SUPPORT MODE
WORK ITEM
THRTL POS SEN ADJ

CONDITION
CHECK THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL.
ADJUST iT TO THE SPECIFIED VALUE BY ROTATING
THE SENSOR BODY UNDER THE FOLLOWiNG CONDITIONS .
• IGN SW «ON»
• ENG NOT RUNNING

USAGE
When adjusting throttle position
sensor initial position

• ACC PEDAL NOT PRESSED
IGNITION TIMING ADJ

IACV-AAC VALVE ADJ

• IGNITION TIMING FEEDBACK CONTROL WILL BE
HELD BY TOUCHING «START». AFTER DOING SO,
ADJUST IGNITION TIMING WITH A TIMING LIGHT BY
TURNING THE CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR.

When adjusting

initial ignition

timing

SET ENGINE SPEED AT THE SPECIFIED VALUE UNDER
THE FOllOWING CONDITIONS .
• ENGINE WARMED UP
• NO-LOAD

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

• FUEL PUMP Will
DURING IDLING.

STOP BY TOUCHING «START»

CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.

EC-50

When releasing
from fuel line

fuel pressure

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (ConI’ d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

MODE

Regarding items detected
Chart» (Refer to EC-62.)

DATA MONITOR
Monitored item
[Unit]

MAS AIR/FL SE [V]
COOLAN TEMP/S
[‘C] or [‘F]

02 SENSOR [V]

Main
signals

THRTL POS SEN [V]
INT/A TEMP SE [‘C]
or [‘F]*2

START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]
CLSD THLIPOSI
[ON/OFF]

AIR COND SIG
[ON/OFF]
PIN POSI SW
[ON/OFF]
PW/ST SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]

NOTE:
Any monitored
matically.

Trouble

Code (DTC)

Description

Remarks

• Indicates the engine speed computed
from the REF signal (180′ signal) of
the camshaft position sensor.

• Accuracy becomes poor if engine
speed drops below the idle rpm.
• If the signal is interrupted while the
engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated .

0

0

0

• The signal voltage of the mass air
flow sensor is displayed .

• When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.

0

0

• The engine coolant temperature
(determined by the signal voltage of
the engine coolant temperature sensor) is displayed.

• When the engine coolant temperature
sensor is open or short-circuited,
ECM enters fail-safe mode. The
engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed .

0

0

• The signal voltage of the oxygen sensor*1 is displayed .

0

• Display of oxygen sensor signal during air-fuel ratio feedback control:
RICH … means the mixture became
«rich», and control is being affected
toward a leaner mixture.
LEAN … means the mixture became
«lean», and control is being affected
toward a rich mixture .

0

BATTERY VOLT [V]

mode, refer to «Diagnostic

0

M/R F/C MNT
[RICH/LEAN]

VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]

RESULTS»

MODE
ECM
input
signals

CMPS.RPM
(REF) [rpm]

in «SELF-DIAG

0
0
0

0
0
0

0

0

0

0
0

0
0

0

• The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed sensor signal is displayed .
• The power supply voltage of ECM is
displayed .
• The throttle position sensor signal
voltage is displayed.
• The intake air temperature determined by the signal voltage of the
intake air temperature sensor is indicated.

0
0

• After turning ON the ignition switch,
«RICH» is displayed until air-fuel mixture ratio feedback control begins.
• When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
clamped, the value just before the
clamping is displayed continuously.

0

• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
starter signal.

• After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal.

• Indicates the closed throttle position
[ON/OFF] determined by the throttle
position sensor signal.
ON: Closed throttle position
OFF:Other than closed throttle position
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the
air conditioner switch as determined
by the air conditioning signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the
power steering oil pressure switch
determined by the power steering oil
pressure signal.

item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed

*1: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and Israel, and Australia A/T models)
Oxygen sensor (Except for Europe and Israel, and Australia A/T models)
*2: For Australia

EC-51

is deleted from the display auto-

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Coni’ d)
Monitored item
[Unit]

ECM
input
signals

Main
signals

Description

0

• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
rear defogger signal and/or lighting
switch.
ON: Rear defogger is operating
and/or lighting switch is on.
OFF: Rear defogger is not operating
and lighting switch is not on.

0

• Indicates the actual fuel injection
pulse width compensated by ECM
according to the input signals.

0

• Indicates the ignition timing computed
by ECM according to the input signals.

0

• Indicates the idle air control valve
(AAC valve) control value computed
by ECM according to the input signals.

LOAD SIGNAL
[ON/OFF]

0
INJ PULSE [msec]

IGN TIMING [BTDC]

IACV-AACIV [%]

A/F ALPHA [%]

AIR COND RLY
[ON/OFF]
COOLING FAN*2
[ON/OFF] or [LOW/
HI/OFF]

FUEL PUMP RLY
[ON/OFF]

0

• Indicates the mean value of the airfuel ratio feedback correction factor
per cycle.

0

• Indicates the air conditioner relay
control condition (determined by ECM
according to the input signal).

0

• Indicates the control condition of the
cooling fans (determined by ECM
according to the input signal).
ON … Operating
LOW … Operates at low speed
HI … Operates at high speed
OFF … Stopped

0

• Indicates the fuel pump relay control
condition determined by ECM according to the input signals.

VALVE TIM SOL*1
[ON/OFF]

• The control condition of the valve timing solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
ON … VTC operating
OFF … VTC not operating

EGRC SOLIV (EVAP
canister purge control solenoid valve
or EGR & EVAP canister purge control
solenoid valve)
[ON/OFF]

• Indicates the control condition of the
EVAP canister purge control solenoid
valve or EGR valve & EVAP canister
purge control solenoid valve (determined by ECM according to the input
signal).
ON ‘» EVAP canister purge operation
cut-off
OFF … EVAP canister purge operation
not cut-off

0

VOLTAGE
[V]

• Voltage measured by the voltage
probe.

PULSE
[msec] or [Hz] or
[%]

• Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle
measured by the pulse probe.

Remarks

• When the engine is stopped, a certain
computed value is indicated.

• When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
• This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.

• Only «#» is displayed if item is
unable to be measured .
• Figures with «#»s are temporary
ones. They are the same figures as
an actual piece of data which was just
previously measured.

*1: GA16DE except for Europe and Israel
*2: GA16DE engine A/T models for Europe without heavy duty kit have a 2- step control [ON/OFF] system. «LOW» and «HI»
are shown on CONSULT screen to represent «ON» condition.

EC-52

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
ACTIVE TEST MODE
TEST ITEM

CONDITION

• Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
FUEL INJECTION
• Change the amount of fuel
injection using CONSULT.

JUDGEMENT

CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

If trouble symptom disappears,
see CHECK ITEM.

• Harness and connector
• Fuel injectors
• Oxygen sensor*1

IACV-AACIV
OPENING

• Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
• Change the IACV-AAC valve
opening percent using CONSULT.

Engine speed changes according
to the opening percent.

• Harness and connector
• IACV-AAC valve

ENG COOLANT
TEMP

• Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
• Change the engine coolant .
temperature indication using
CONSULT.

If trouble symptom disappears,
see CHECK ITEM.

• Harness and connector
• Engine coolant temperature
sensor
• Fuel injectors

• Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
If trouble symptom disappears,
IGNITION TIMING • Timing light: Set
see CHECK ITEM.
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT.

• Adjust initial ignition timing

POWER
BALANCE

• Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
• A/C switch «OFF»
Engine runs rough or dies .
• Shift lever «N»
• Cut off each injector signal one
at a time using CONSULT.






Harness and connector
Compression
Injectors
Power transistor
Spark plugs
Ignition coils

COOLING FAN*3

• Ignition switch: ON
• Turn the cooling fan «ON» and
«OFF», or «LOW» and «HI»
and «OFF» using CONSULT.

Cooling fan moves and stops.

• Harness and connector
• Cooling fan motor

FUEL PUMP
RELAY

• Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
• Turn the fuel pump relay «ON»
and «OFF» using CONSULT
and listen to operating sound.

Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound.

• Harness and connector
• Fuel pump relay

EGRC SOLENOID
VALVE
(EVAP canister
• Ignition switch: ON
purge control
• Turn solenoid valve «ON» and
solenoid valve or
«OFF» with the CONSULT and
EGR valve &
listen to operating sound.
EVAP canister
purge control
solenoid valve)

Solenoid valve makes an operating sound.

• Harness and connector
• Solenoid valve

VALVE TIMING
SOL*2

• Ignition switch: ON
• Turn solenoid valve «ON» and
«OFF» using CONSULT and
listen to operating sound.

Solenoid valve makes an operating sound.

• Harness and connector
• Solenoid valve

SELF-LEARNING
CONT

• In this test, the coefficient of self-learning control mixture ratio returns to the original coefficient by
touching «CLEAR» on the screen.

*1: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and Israel, and Australia A/T models)
Oxygen sensor (Except for Europe and Israel, and Australia A/T models)
*2: GA16DE except for Europe and Israel
*3: GA16DE engine A/T models for Europe without heavy duty kit have a 2- step control [ON/OFF] system. «LOW» and «HI»
are shown on CONSULT screen to represent «ON» condition.

EC-53

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
FUNCTION TEST MODE
FUNCTION TEST
ITEM

SELF-DIAG
RESULTS

CONDITION
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)

• Closed throllle position is
tested when throttle is
opened and closed fully.

PARK/NEUT POSI
SW CKT

Throttle valve: opened

Objective system

OFF

• Harness and connector
• Throllle position sensor
• Throllie position sensor
adjustment

ON

• Throttle linkage
• Verify operation in DATA
MONITOR mode.

Range (Throllle valve fully
opened — Throllle valve
fully closed)

More than
3.DV

• Harness and connector
• Throttle position sensor
• Throllle position sensor
adjustment
• Throllie linkage
• Verify operation in DATA
MONITOR mode .

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopoed)

Out of NIP positions

OFF

• Inhibitor/NelJlral position
switch circuit is tested
when shift lever is manip-

In NIP positions

ON

(Closed throllie position is
selected by throttle position sensor.)

THROTTLE POSI
SEN CKT

CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

• Displays the results of onboard diagnostic system .
• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)

CLOSED THROTTLE
POSI

JUDGEMENT

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Throllle position sensor
circuit is tested when
throllie is opened and
closed fully.

Throttle valve: closed

• Harness and connector
• Neutral position switch or
inhibitor switch
• Linkage or inhibitor switch
adjustment

ulated .

FUEL PUMP
CIRCUIT

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Fuel pump circuit is tested
by checking the pulsation
in fuel pressure when fuel

There is pressure pulsation on the fuel
feed hose.

tube is pinched .

EGRC SOllV
CIRCUIT (EVAP canister purge control
solenoid valve or

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve or EGR

EGR valve & EVAP
canister purge control solenoid valve)

valve & EVAP canister
purge control solenoid
valve circuit is tested by
checking solenoid valve
operating noise .

VALVE TIMING SIV
CKT*1

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Valve timing SIV circuit is
tested by checking solenoid valve operating
sound





Harness and connector
Fuel pump
Fuel pump relay
Fuel filter clogging
Fuel level

• Harness and connector
The solenoid valve makes an operating
sound every 3 seconds.

The solenoid valve makes an operating
sound periodically.

‘1: GA16DE except for Europe and Israel

EC-54

• EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve or EGR
valve & EVAP canister
purge control solenoid
valve

• Harness and connector
• Valve timing solenoid
valve

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Conl’d)
FUNCTION TEST
ITEM

CONDITION

JUDGEMENT

CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

COOLING FAN
CIRCUIT

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Cooling fan circuit is
tested when cooling fan is
rotated .

The cooling fan rotates and stops every
3 seconds.

• Harness and connector
• Cooling fan motor
• Cooling fan relay

START SIGNAL
CIRCUIT

• Ignition switch: ON -.
START
• Start signal circuit is
tested when engine is
started by operating the
starter. Before cranking,
battery voltage and engine
coolant temperature are
displayed. During
cranking, average battery
voltage, mass air flow
sensor output voltage and
cranking speed are displayed .

Start signal: OFF -. ON

• Harness and connector
• Ignition switch

PW/ST SIGNAL
CIRCUIT

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine running)
• Power steering circuit is
tested when steering
wheel is rotated fully and
then set to a straight line
running position .

Locked position

ON

Neutral position

OFF

• Harness and connector
• Power steering oil pressure switch
• Power steering pump

VEHICLE SPEED
SEN CKT

• Vehicle speed sensor circuit is tested when vehicle Vehicle speed sensor input signal is
is running at a speed of 10 greater than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
km/h (6 MPH) or higher .

• Harness and connector
• Vehicle speed sensor
• Electric speedometer

IGN TIMING ADJ

• After warming up, idle the
engine.
• Ignition timing adjustment
is checked by reading
ignition timing with a timing light and checking
whether it agrees with
specifications.

• Adjust ignition timing (by
moving camshaft position
sensor or distributor)
• Camshaft position sensor
drive mechanism

MIXTURE RATIO
TEST

The timing light indicates the same
value on the screen.

• Air-fuel ratio feedback circuit (injection system, ignition system, vacuum
Oxygen sensor’1 COUNT: More than 5
system, etc.) is tested by
times during 10 seconds
examining the oxygen
sensor’1 output at 2,000
rpm under non-loaded
state.

‘1: Heated oxygen sensor (For Europe and Israel, and Australia AIT models)
Oxygen sensor (Except for Europe and Israel, and Australia A/T models)

EC-55

• INJECTION SYS (Injector,
fuel pressure regulator,
harness or connector)
• IGNITION SYS (Spark
plug, power transistor,
ignition coil, harness or
connector)
• VACUUM SYS (Intake air
leaks)
• Oxygen sensor’1 circuit
• Oxygen sensor’1 operation
• Fuel pressure high or low
• Mass air flow sensor

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
FUNCTION TEST
ITEM

POWER BALANCE

CONDITION
• After warming up, idle the
engine .
• Injector operation of each
cylinder is stopped one
after another, and resultant change in engine rotalion is examined to evaluate combustion of each
cylinder. (This is only dis-

JUDGEMENT

CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

• Injector circuit (Injector,
harness or connector)
Difference in engine speed is greater
than 25 rpm before and after cutting off
the injector of each cylinder.

played for models where a
sequential multi port fuel

• Ignition circuit (Spark
plug, power transistor,
ignition coil, harness or
connector)
• Compression
• Valve timing

injection system is used.)

IACV-AACIV
SYSTEM

• After warming up, idle the
engine.
• IACV-AAC valve system is
Difference in engine speed is greater
tested by detecting change
than 150 rpm between when valve openin engine speed when
ing is at 80% and at 20%.
IACV-AAC valve opening
is changed to 0%, 20%
and 80%.

EC-56

• Harness and connector
• IACV-AAC valve
• Air passage restriction
between air inlet and
IACV-AAC valve
• IAS (Idle adjusting screw)
adjustment

[]K]

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE

CONSULT has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching «SETTING»
in «DATA
MONITOR» mode.
1. «AUTO TRIG» (Automatic trigger):

The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT screen in real time.
In other words, DTC and malfunction item will be displayed at the moment the malfunction is
detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously until a malfunction is detected. However, DATA
MONITOR cannot continue any longer after the malfunction detection.
2. «MANU TRIG» (Manual trigger):

DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT screen even though
a malfunction is detected by ECM.

DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected.
Use these triggers as follows:
1. «AUTO TRIG»

While trying to detect the DTC by performing the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE», be sure
to select to «DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)» mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the
moment it is detected.

While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT should be set in «DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)» mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
Inspect the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) suspicious connectors, components and harness
in the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE». The moment a malfunction is found the DTC will be
displayed. (Refer to GI section, «Incident Simulation Tests» in «HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT
DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT».)
2. «MANU TRIG»

If the malfunction is displayed as soon as «DATA MONITOR» is selected, reset CONSULT to
«MANU TRIG». By selecting «MANU TRIG» you can monitor and store the data. The data can be
utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.

I~

SELECT

MONITOR

ITEM

ECM INPUT SIGNALS

SETTING

II

FROM

SET RECORDING

AUTO TRIG
HI SPEED

MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION

I~

I
I

COND

MANU TRIG

MANU TRIG
LONG TIME

HI SPEED

MENU

START

___
«SETTIN-G»

1__
«AUTO TRIG»

1
«MANU

TRIG»

A malfunction can be

A malfunction

displayed on «DATA

displayed on «DATA

MONITOR» screen

MONITOR»

automatically

automatically

if detected.

can not be

screen
even if

detected.

SEF674Q

EC-57

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

General Description

Introduction
Sensors
~

ECM

Actuators

~~.~

MEF036D

The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper
and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no
problems such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other
problems with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs
intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may
help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A
road test with CONSULTor a circuit tester connected should be
performed. Follow the «Work Flow» on the next page.
Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to
talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such
problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms
are present and under what conditions they occur. A «Diagnostic Worksheet» like the example on EC-61 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for «conventional» problems
first. This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an
electronically controlled engine vehicle.

SEF234G

EC-58

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

General Description

Work Flow
CHECK IN

Listen to customer complaints.

(Get symptoms.)

…………………………………………

Check, print out or write down, and erase Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
Symptoms
collected.

STEP I

..

STEP II

No symptoms, but
Malfunction Code
exists at STEP II.

Verify the symptom by driving in the conditiOn the
customer described.
Normal Code
(at STEP II)

……………………………………………………………………………..

*1

STEP III

Malfunction Code
(at STEP II)

Verify the DTC by performing

Choose the appropriate

the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».

..

.

action.

*1 STEP IV

STEP V

*2

Malfunction

Code (at STEP II or IV)

Normal Code (at both STEP II and IV)
BASIC INSPECTION
SYMPTOM BASIS (at STEP I or III)

Perform inspections
according to Symptom
Matrix Chart.

STEP VI

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.

REPAIR/REPLACE

NG

FINAL CHECK
Confirm that the incident is completely fixed by performing BASIC INSPECTION
and DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (or OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK).

……………………………………

STEP VII

CHECK OUT

*1: If the incident cannot be duplicated, refer to GI section («Incident Simulation Tests», «HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT»).
*2: If the on-board diagnostic system cannot be performed, check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to «TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY», EC-88.

EC-59

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

General oescrip_ti_on

I_G_A_’

Description for Work Flow
STEP
STEP I

DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred
using the «DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET» as shown on the next page.

STEP II

Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT) the Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC), then erase the code. The DTC can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
(The «Symptom Matrix Chart» will be useful. Refer to EC-72.)

STEP III

Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The «DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET» is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT to the vehicle in DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. Refer to GI section.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.

STEP IV

Try to detect the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) by driving in (or performing) the «DTC CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE». Check and read the DTC by using CONSULT.
During the DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)
mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. Refer to GI section.
In case the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» is not available, perform the «OVERALL FUNCTION
CHECK» instead. The DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified «check» is an effective alternative.
The «NG» result of the «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is the same as the DTC detection.

STEP V

Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. Refer to EC-65. Then perform inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. Refer to EC-72.
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes.
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) «Harness

STEP VI

STEP VII

Layouts».
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT set in «DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)» mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with
CONSULT. Refer to EC-74.
The «DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE» in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A
short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. For details,
refer to GI section («HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT», «Circuit
Inspection’ ‘).
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
Perform the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» and confirm the normal code (Diagnostic trouble code No.
55) is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different
method from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) DTC in ECM.
Refer to EC-46.

EC-60

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

General Description

Diagnostic Worksheet
KEY POINTS
WHAT …..
WHEN
WHERE
HOW

Vehicle & engine model
Date, Frequencies
Road conditions
Operating conditions,
Weather conditions,
Symptoms

There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can
make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It
is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for
a customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one shown below in
order to organize all the information for troubleshooting.

SEF907L

WORKSHEET
Customer name
Engine

SAMPLE
MR/MS

#

Incident Date

Model & Year

Mileage

Manu!. Date

In Service Date

o

Startability

Idling

Symptoms

o

Driveability

[.J Engine stall

Incident occurrence
Frequency
Weather conditions
Weather
Temperature

Engine conditions

VIN

Trans.

o
o

.

o
o
o
o

o No combustion
Impossible to start
o Partial combustion
o Partial combustion affected by throttle position
LJ Partial combustion NOT affected by throttle position
Possible but hard to start
o Others [
o

No fast idle
Others [

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Driving conditions

Lack of power

1

o While idling
o While decelerating
o While loading
Just after delivery
o Recently
In the morning
o At night
o In the daytime
o Under certain conditions
All the time
o Sometimes
Not affected

o

Fine

DRaining

Hot

o Warm
o During

Cold

I

o

In town

o

o

Snowing

warm-up
I

I

I

o

OF

I

I

4,000

2,000

In suburbs

1

Others [

o Cold
o Humid
o After warm-up

Cool

I

I

6,000

o

Highway

Off road (up/down)

Not affected
At starting
o While idling
o At racing
While accelerating
o While cruising
o While turning (RH/LH)
While decelerating

,

I

0

o

o

At the lime of start
While accelerating
Just after stopping

Vehicle speed

Malfunction indicator lamp

1

Low idle

1

Engine speed

o
o
o
o
o

o

High idle

Stumble
o Surge
o Knock
i.J Intake backfire
o Exhaust backfire
o Others [

0
Road conditions

o

Unstable

Turned on

I

10

o

I

I

20

Not turned on

EC-61

I

I

30

I

I

40

I

I

50

I

I

60 MPH

I
8,000 rpm

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

General Description

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
ENGINE RELATED ITEMS
Detected items
Diagnostic
trouble code
No.

Malfunction is detected when …

(Screen terms for CONSULT,
«SELF-DIAG RESULTS» mode)

11

Camshaft position sensor circuit
(CAMSHAFT POSI SEN)

• Either l’ or 180′ signal is not detected by the ECM for the first few
seconds during engine cranking .
• Either l’ or 180′ signal is not detected by the ECM often enough
while the engine speed is higher than the specified rpm .
• The relation between l’ and 180′ signals is not in the normal range
during the specified rpm .

12

Mass air flow sensor circuit
(MASS AIR FLOW SEN)

• An excessively high or low voltage is entered to ECM.
• Voltage sent to ECM is not practical when compared with the camshaft position sensor signal and throttle position sensor signal.

13

Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
(COOLANT TEMP SEN)

• An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is detected by
the ECM.

21

Ignition signal circuit
(IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY)

• The ignition signal in the primary circuit is not detected by the ECM
during engine cranking or running .

28*1

OVER HEAT

• The engine coolant temperature sensor output voltage is below
0.35V.

34″2

Knock sensor circuit
(KNOCK SENSOR)

• An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is detected by
the ECM.

41*3

Intake air temperature sensor circuit
(INT AIR TEMP SEN)

• An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is detected by
the ECM.
• Voltage sent to ECM is not practical when compared with the engine
coolant temperature sensor signal.

55

No failure

• No malfunction is detected by the ECM.

(NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE
INDICATED…)
«1: Except for Australia
*2: Except for Europe and Israel
«3: For Australia
*4: This is Quick Reference of «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».
Details are described in each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX
Abbreviations are as follows:
IGN: ON : Turning the ignition switch ON is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).
RUNNING: Running engine is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).
*5: • The «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is a simplified and effective way to inspect a component or circuit.
In some cases, the «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is used rather than a «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».
When no DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is available, the «NG» result of the OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK can be
considered to mean the same as a DTC detection .
• During an «NG» OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK, the DTC might not be confirmed.

EC-62

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
mJ
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart (Cont’d)
X: Applicable
-:
*4

«DTC

*5

Check Items

CONFIRMATION

«OVERALL FUNC-

Fail

(Possible Cause)

PROCEDURE»

TION CHECK»

Safe

Quick Ref.

Quick Ref.

System

• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Camshaft position sensor

RUNNING

• Starter motor
• Starting system circuit (EL section)

Not applicable

Reference Page

EC-94

X

EC-101

• Dead (Weak) battery
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Mass air flow sensor
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
• Harness or connectors
(The ignition primary circuit is open or shorted.)
• Power transistor unit
• Camshaft position sensor
• Camshaft position sensor circuit
• Harness or connector
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Knock sensor
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Intake air temperature sensor

.
RUNNING

RUNNING

IGN: ON

X

EC-108

RUNNING

EC-113

EC-108

IGN: ON
(after warming up)

RUNNING

EC-119

IGN: ON

EC-124

• No failure

EC-63

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

General Description

Fail-Safe Chart
The ECM enters fail-safe
Detected

DTC No.
12

Mass

mode, if any of the following

items

air flow

sensor

Engine
Engine

speed

will

DTCs is recorded due to the open or short circuit.
operating

not rise more

than

condition

in fail-safe

3,000 rpm*1

mode

due to the fuel cut.

circuit
13

Engine
perature

coolant
sensor

cuit

temcir-

Engine

coolant

temperature

switch

«ON»

Except

for Europe

will

be determined

based

on the time

Engine coolant temperature

Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start

BO’G (176’F)

and Israel
Condition

Engine coolant temperature

More than 4.5 minutes after ignition ON or
Start

BO’G (176’F)
35 — BO’C (95 — 176’F)
(Depends on the time)

Except as shown above
the fail-safe

fan operates

sensor

position
circuit

Throttle

system

for engine

engine

is running.

while

position

will

be determined

coolant

based

temperature

sensor

on the injected

fuel amount

acceleration

will

the cooling

and the engine

be poor.

Driving condition

Condition

Normal

When engine is idling

Poor acceleration

When accelerating

ECM

is activated,

speed.
Therefore,

decided

35’C (95’F)

Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start

Throttle

decided

30 — BO’C (B6 — 176’F)
(Depends on the time)

Except as shown above

43

ignition

30’C (B6’F)

More than 5 minutes after ignition ON or Start

When

turning

and Israel
Condition

For Europe

after

or «START».

Fail-safe system activating condition when ECM is malfunctioning
The computing
When

function

the fail-safe

the CPU of ECM),
warn

of the ECM was judged

system

activates

(i.e.,

the MALFUNCTION

to be malfunctioning.

if the ECM detects

INDICATOR

LAMP

a malfunction

condition

on the instrument

panel

in
lights

to

the driver.

Engine control, with fail-safe system, operates when ECM is malfunctioning
When

the fail-safe

operation,
tain

system

IACV-AAC

valve

is operating,
operation

fuel injection,
and cooling

ignition

fan operation

timing,

fuel pump

are controlled

under

cer-

limitations.

Operation
Engine speed will not rise more than 3,000 rpm

Engine speed

Simultaneous

Fuel injection

system

Fuel pump’ relay is «ON» when engine is running and «OFF» when engine
stalls
Full open

IACV-AAG valve
Cooling fans

fuel injection

Ignition timing is fixed at the preset valve

Ignition timing
Fuel pump

multipart

Cooling fan relay «ON» when engine is running, and «OFF» when engine
stalls

EC-64

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

General Description

Basic Inspection
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical loads
applied;

Headlamp switch is OFF,

Air conditioner switch is OFF,

Rear defogger switch is OFF,

Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.

\
~

m

~
SEF1421

~use

box

~-~

vll-JIData link connector~’

BEFORE STARTING
1. Check service records for any recent
repairs that may indicate a related
problem, or the current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. 9pen engine hood and check the fol.
lowing:
• Harness connectors for improper connections
• Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, or
improper connections
• Wiring for improper connections,
pinches, or cuts

CONNECT CONSULT TO THE VEHICLE.
Connect «CONSULT» to the data link
connector for CONSULT and select
«ENGINE» from the menu. Refer to
EC-36

DOES ENGINE START?

CHECK IGNITION TIMING.
1. Warm up engine sufficiently.
2. Stop engine and disconnect throttle
position sensor harness connector.
3. Start engine.
4. Check ignition timing at idle using
timing light.
Ignition liming:

Refer to EC-36.
OK

(Go to @ on next page.)

EC-65

No

NG

Go to

(J.

Adjust ignition timing by
turning distributor.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
Basic Inspection (Coni’ d)
@

1

(;]

CHECK IDLE ADJ. SCREW INITIAL SET
RPM.
Base idle speed: Refer to EC-36.

t

NG

~

Adjust engine speed by
turning idle adjusting
screw.

K

II

CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
IDLE POSITION.
1. Perform »THRTl POS SEN
ADJ» in «WORK SUPPORT»
mode.
2. Check that output voltage of
throttle position sensor is
approx. 0.35 to 0.65V (Throttle
valve fully closes.) and «ClSD
THlIP SW» stays «ON».
OR
Measure output voltage of throttle position sensor using
voltmeter, and check that it is
approx. 0.35 to 0.65V. (Throttle
valve fully closed.)

00

NG

~

Adjust output voltage to
0.50 :l: 0.1V by rotating
throttle position sensor
body.

00

OK

• THRTl POSSEN ADJ.

***

ADJ MONITOR

THRTLPOSSEN

==========

RESET IDLE POSITION
MEMORY.
1. Warm up engine sufficiently.
2. Turn ignition switch
«OFF» and wait at
least 5 seconds.
3. Disconnect throttle
position sensor harness connector.
4. Start engine and wait
at least 5 seconds in
«N» position .
5. Reconnect throttle
position sensor harness connector while
running engine.

0

***

0.52V

==========

@

MONITOR
CMPS.RPM (REF) Orpm
CLSD THLIPOSI
ON

(Go to next page)

SEF516Q

SEF12BR

EC-66

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
CID
CHECK IDLE SPEED
Check idle speed. Refer to EC-36.

NG

Adjust idle speed. Refer
EC-35.

OK

After this inspection, unnecessary diagnostic trouble code No. might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM.
OK

INSPECTION END

EC-67

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

*

MONITOR

*

NO FAIL

ENG TEMP SEN

General Description

Fast Idle Cam (FIC) Inspection and Adjustment
— For Europe and Israel

o

1. Start engine and warm it up.
2. See «ENG TEMP SEN» or «COOLAN TEMP/S» in
~
«DATA MONITOR» mode with CONSULT.
3. When engine coolant temperature is 80:l: 5°C
(176:l:9°F), make sure that mark @ is aligned with
mark ~ as shown in the figure.

80°C

(ij

RECORD
SEF214N

Cam follower
lever

SEF147N

2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector and check resistance as shown in
the figure.
3. When the resistance of engine coolant temperature
sensor is 0.26 to 0.39 kQ, make sure that mark @ is
aligned with mark @ as shown in the figure.
If NG, adjust by turning adjusting screw .
Adjusting serew tightening torque:
0.98 — 1.96 N.m (10 — 20 kg-em, 8.7 — 17.4 in-Ib)

SEF536H

Fast idle earn

Cam follower
lever

4. Stop engine.
5. Turn ignition switch «ON» and see «ENG TEMP
~
SEN» or «COOLAN TEMP/S» in «DATA MONITOR»
mode with CONSULT.
6. When engine coolant temperature is 25:l: 5°C
(77:l: 9°F), make sure that mark CID is aligned with
mark @ as shown in the figure.
~
5. When the resistance of engine coolant temperature
~
sensor is 1.65to 2.40 kQ, make sure that mark CID is
aligned with mark @ as shown in the figure.
• If NG, replace thermo-element and perform the above
inspection and adjustment again.

rF.i

Thermoelement

SEF148N

Fast Idle Cam (FIC) Inspection and Adjustment
— Except for Europe and Israel
1. Remove throttle body from engine.
2. Wait for at least 3 hours.
(This step is necessary to bring the temperature of the
thermo-element to the room temperature

EC-68

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
~
Fast Idle Cam (FIC) Inspection and Adjustment
— Except for Europe and Israel (Cont’d)
3.
4.

Thermo-element

Measure thermo-element
stroke (L) and room temperature.
Check thermo-element
stroke (L) as shown in the figure.
L: Thermo-element

stroke

Go to step
17
(0.669)
16
C (0630)

1645
1(0.6476)

«» 15
~ (0591)

15.35
: (06043)

::J 14
-; (0.551)

‘14.24
: (05610)

t5
fJi

I

13
(0.512)

2**

5*

*: Thermo-element

is normal. Adjust first idle cam only.

**: Thermo-element

is malfunctioning.
inspection beginning with step 2.

Replace thermo-element,

and perform

I

12
11.05
(0472) (0435)
11
(0433)
10
(0.394) 9.95
(0.392)

: 1290 :
I (0.508) I
I
I
I

I
I
I

:

I

I

r

I

r

r

I

I
I
-20
0
20 25
40
HI
(32)
(68) (77)
(104)
Thermo-element temperature °C (OF)

SEF0810

Adjust clearance
@ between
adjusting screw to specification
(8).

5.

GA15DE
Adjusting
screw (s)
Lock nut

Engine models

Fast idle
carn

GA15DE

throttle stopper and throttle
by turning adjusting screw

Clearance

@ mm (in)

M/T

0.40 — 0.75 (0.0157 — 0.0295)

A/T

0.61 — 0.95 (0.0240 — 0.0374)

M/T

0.72 — 1.18 (0.0283 — 0.0465)

A/T

0.95 — 1.43 (0.0374 — 0.0563)

GA16DE
SEF0820

GA16DE

6.

Z
*.
Clearance

@

SEF0830

Rotate adjusting
screw (8) clockwise
or counterclockwise
by Z turns according to the following equation, then tighten
the adjusting screw lock nut.
L (mm) —

= ——-~

Value of
element
Y = 0.5
0.8

Direction
(1) Positive
(2) Negative

L8* (mm)

Y (mm)

L (in) —

/ Z = ———

Y (in)

the specified line (Ls) at the temperature
actually measured.
(GA 15DE)
(GA 16DE)
of adjusting screw (8) rotation
(+) Z: Counterclockwise
( — ) Z: Clockwise

EC-69

L8* (IN)
of thermo-

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
[]A]
Fast Idle Cam (FIC) Inspection and Adjustment
— Except for Europe and Israel (Cont’d)
For example:

Thermo-element
.C l»F)
temperature

Case I

Case II

25 (77)

40 (104)

14.0 (0.551)

15.35 (0.6043)

14.5 (0.571)

14.60 (0.5748)

Thermo-element
specified stroke (Ls)
mm (in)
Thermo-element
stroke (L)
mm (in)
Revolutions of
adjusting screw (Z)
mm/in
Direction of revolution

EC-70

14.5. 14.0
=0.63 I
0.80
0.571 — 0.551
= 0.63
0.0315

Z =

Counterclockwise

14.60 — 15.35
= -0.94 I
0.80
0.5748.0.6043
= -0.94
0.0315

Z =

Clockwise

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

General Description

Symptom Matrix Chart
SYMPTOM

~

Cl.

en

~
~

~

0::

<{

0
Z

2i

0::
I

Fuel pump circuit
Fuel pressure regulator system
Injector circuit
Evaporative emission system

Air

Positive crankcase ventilation system
Incorrect idle speed adjustment
IACV-AAC valve circuit
IACV-FICD solenoid valve circuit

Ignition

Incorrect ignition timing adjustment
Ignition circuit

EGR

(EGR valve &) EVAP canister purge
control soienoid valve circuit
EGR system

Main power supply and ground circuit
Cooling

I Cooling

tan circuit

Air conditioner circuit

u..

<{

~

>
U5
en

W

0

>
U5
en

W

>0::
w

~
~

0

:c

0::

en

0

w

W

III

AE

AF

AG

AH

AJ

AK

AL

AM

HA



0

• •
• •

0

()

0

0

()

(~)

C)

C)

(~,

()

r)

()

0

0

()

:.’-1

U

()

(,)

‘,)

C)

()

Co

u

()

CJ

U

U

t)

,

0

EC-145
EC-33
EC-141
EC-29

U

()

EC-31

0

0

EC-35

Ci

»

<{

0

U
C:

0

EC-150

0

EC-204

EC-35


(,)

()

X

0

0

()

<.)

X



0

(,
~)

()

<.)

<{

w

:J

-I

Reterence
page

0

Q

0

0

• ; High Possibility Item
(), Low Possibility Item

0

=’

CJ

• •
0
0
• •
• • • • 0•
0
• •
• •
• •
• •


• • 0
0

w

Cl.

W

z

EC-113
EC-179,183
EC-179. 183

0

~

EC-88

()

0

(

n

(J

0

EC-156

~,

()

HA section

u

(continued on next page)

EC-71

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM
:I:
C)

Z

~

:I:

c.:

I-

0

u

ll.

X

(f)

~

I-

I-

a:
SYSTEM
— ECCS system

«
I-

UJ

a:

«

I(f)

(f)

aa::

z

az

0

UJ

c;

«
z

c;

lUJ
Cl

:J

a:
0
0

ll.

ii:

0

«

::.::
::.::

u.
0

«
ll.

u

I-

in

a::

UJ
—l

«

0

z

a:

u

l2

0
i=

I-

«

U

Z

U

:J

UJ
—l
UJ

UJ

(f)

UJ

a:

~

ll.

::.::

9
w
—l
9

C)

i=

z

~

:J
:I:

—l

UJ
—l

0

W

—l

9
:I:
C)

0

Z

I-

z

0
i=

«

9

a::
[])
;;

:I:

C)

C)

z

:J

:J

z

a:

:J

IUJ

a::
0

z

~

0

Z

0
i=

UJ
ll.

ll.

:2

:J

:2

[ij’

z

0
i=
ll.

:2

UJ
I-

(f)

a:

0

z

I-

—l
UJ

—l

w

«
~

en
I-

«

UJ

:I:

a::
UJ

Z

u

:J

u.

w
>

in
(f)

:J

(f)

0

U

(5
W

>

in
(f)

C)

a:

«

:I:
U

a:
UJ
Cl

z
2Cl

«

>a::

U
X

U
X

UJ

UJ
II-

UJ

«

z

UJ

:I:

(f)

«
—l

i

0

a::

9

(f)

0

UJ

UJ

[])

AA

AS

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

AH

AJ

AK

AL

AM

HA



0

()

0

0



• •
• •

• •

Incorrect throttle position sensor
adjustment






0
0
0




Vehicle speed sensor circuit

0

C)

()

0
0

Camshaft position sensor circuit
Mass air flow sensor circuit
(Heated) oxygen sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature sensor
circuit
Throttle position sensor circuit

w

Knock sensor circuit
ECM
Start signal circuit

0
0


0

()

()

>

• •
• • •
• • •
0
0

()

0
0

0
()

0

()

()

0

0

(J

0

()

0

EC-94
EC-101
EC-189,194
EC-108
EC-128

()

EC-65

0
0
0

EC-133
EC-119
EC-64
EC-138

0

Park/Neutral position switch circuit
Power steering oil pressure switch circuit


—l

Reference
page

UJ
Cl

«

:I:

ECCS

—l
—l

«
l-

0

Z

0
i=

a:

i==:

a::

z

«
—l
u.

(f)

I

0
i=
«
a:

0

• ; High Possibility Item
0; Low Possibility Item

0

0

EC-173
EC-169
(continued on next page)

EC-72

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM
J:
CJ

Z

~

i=
«
a:

J:

cL

I-

><

D..

0

~

Z

LU
I-

«
5:

D..

:2

Z

0
LU

«

>

(ij

~

0

0

LU

LU

CD

AK

AL

AM

HA

a:

9

C/J

AF

AG

AH

AJ

0

0

0

0

><

0

0

0

0

0

0

C)

0

0

()

0

0

0

Air duct

0

0
0

0

0

0
0

0

Air cleaner

0

0
0

(J

()

0

0

Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — throttle body)

()

Throttle body, Throttle wire

• • •

0
()

0

><

LU
II-

«

)

C’

FE section

C;

U

0

(~)

Battery

0

U

()

(J

Alternator circuit

()

0

0

0

0

0

• • • • •

Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket

tJ

U

0
0
(J

0

0
0

0

‘:J
(J


Clutch interlock switch

0

Inhibitor switch

()

AT section

0

0

• •
U

0

()

()

()

0

(J

()

(J

()

()

0
()

U

0

0

0

U

()

U

U

()

0
0

Piston ring
Connecting rod

(‘

0

0

0

0

)

Bearing

(i

0

()

0

()

U

0

C

Crankshaft

Cl

(~)

0

0

()

()

0

0

n

()

C’
0
0
()

HydraUlic lash adjuster

• • • CJ0 0•
• • •
• 0 00 • 0
• 0 0 0 0

()

()

0

Exhaust manifoldlTube/Muffler/Gasket

C)

c:

()

()

0

U

()

U

Three way catalyst

• •

0

U

0

0

()

0

Ci

0

0

0

• •

()

0

()

0

()

()

()

(J

0

U

()

()

0

0

()

()

C)

U

()

0

()

Ci

Timing chain
Camshaft
Intake valve

C)

Exhaust valve

pump/Oil filter/

Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
filler cap

U

0

0

0

0

C)

u

0

U

0

0

Water gallery

U

()

0

()

0

Cooling fan

0

()

CJ

U

0

U

0

0

0

0

cool-

• ‘:J•

()

Thermostat

• ; High Possibility Item
U; Low Possibility Item

EC-73

(‘

0

()

()

Water pump

Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
ant

EL section

CL section

• • • • •
• • 0

0

• •

Cylinder head

Radiator/Hose/Radiator

LU

0

>a:

0

0

a:
LU
>

Reference
page

20
«

C/J
C/J
LU

J:

0

Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil
Oil gallery

LU

C/J
LU

CJ
Z

0

0

(5

J:
CJ
::J

«

0
Z

::J

LU

9

0
-‘

a:

C/J

LU

LU

«

:2

LL

J:
CJ
J:

:J

D..

en

I-

0

~

J:
0

a:

0

Piston

Cooling

0
0

i=

LU
D..

:2

0

Cylinder head gasket

Lubrication

0:

CJ

LU

-‘

UJ
a:

z

0

i=

Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low
octane)

Cylinder block

Exhaust

«

0

Valve deposit

Flywheel

Valve
mechanism

0

0

0
0

Z

U

Starter circuit

Engine

Z

~

«

I-

LU

Z

Vapor lock

Air

«

C/J

0

-‘

(3

«

Fuel tank

-‘
-‘

«

0

::J

z

0

Fuel

a:

0

LU

a:

LU

IC/J
LU

0

I

0

0

U

0

l~’

u

()

0

0

U

I)

U

0

0

0

()

U

()

0
C)

U

Cl

0

U

CJ

(i

()

)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

General Description

CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode
Remarks:
• Specification data are reference values .
• Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
(Le., Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING. Specification data might
be displayed even when ignition timing is not adjusted to specification. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the input signals from the camshaft position
sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.)
• If the real-time diagnosis results are NG, and the on-board diagnostic system results are OK, when
diagnosing the mass air flow sensor, first check to see if the fuel pump control circuit is normal.
MONITOR ITEM

SPECIFICATION

CONDITION

CMPS.RPM (REF)

• Tachometer: Connect
• Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT value .

MAS AIRIFL SE




COOLAN TEMPIS

Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: OFF
Shift lever: «N»
No-load

Idle

1.0 — 1.7V

2,000 rpm

1.5 — 2.1V
More than 70°C (158°F)

• Engine: After warming up

0- 0.3V

02 SEN
Maintaining
rpm

• Engine: After wflrming up
MIR FIC MNT

VHCL SPEED SE

• Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer
value

SA TTERY VOLT

• Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

THRTL POS SEN

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)

START SIGNAL

• Ignition switch: ON

CLSD THLIPOS

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)

AIR COND SIG

PIN POSI SW

Almost the same speed as the CONSULT value .

—>

START

—>

0.6 — 1.0V

LEAN <-+ RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds .

indication with the CONSULT

Almost the same speed as
the CONSULT value
11 — 14V

Throttle valve fully closed

0.35 — 0.65V

Throttle valve fully opened

Approx. 4.0V
OFF

ON

• Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine

<-+

engine speed at 2,000

Throttle valve:
Idle position

ON

Throttle valve:
Slightly open

OFF

AIC switch «OFF»

OFF

AIC switch «ON»
(Compressor operate&)

ON

Shift lever «P» or «N»

ON

Except above

OFF

• Ignition switch: ON

EC-74

—>

ON

—>

OFF

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
@KJ
CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode (Cont’d)
CONDITION

MONITOR ITEM

PW/ST SIGNAL

• Engine: After warming up. idle the
engine

IGNITION SW

• Ignition switch: ON

LOAD SIGNAL

INJ PULSE

—>

SPECIFICATION

Steering wheel in neutral position
(forward direction)

OFF

The steering wheel is turned

ON

OFF

ON

—>

Rear window defogger is operating
and/or lighting switch is on

ON

Rear window defogger is not operating and lighting switch is not on

OFF

Idle

2.4 — 3.2 msec.

2.000 rpm

1.9 — 3.2 msec.

Idle

6 _10′ BTDC

• Ignition switch: ON




Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: OFF
Shift lever: «N»
No-load

.

ditto

IGN TIMING

2.000 rpm

More than 25′ BTDC

Idle

20 — 40%

2.000 rpm

Maintaining engine speed at 2.000
rpm

75 — 125%

ditto

IACV-AACIV

A/F ALPHA

• Engine: After warming up

AIR COND RLY

• Air conditioner switch:

ON

FUEL PUMP RLY

• Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds)
• Engine running and cranking
• When engine is stopped (stops in 1.0 seconds)
• Except as shown above

OFF

• When cooling fan is stopped

OFF

• When cooling fan operates at low speed

LOW

• When cooling fan o!Jerates at high speed

HI

COOLING FAN

VALVE TIM SOL’1

EGRC SOLIV
(EVAP canister
purge control solenoid valve or EGR
valve & EVAP canister purge control
solenoid valve)

OFF

OFF

• Engine: After warming up




Engine: After warming up
Air conditioner switch: OFF
Shift lever: N
No-load

—>

OFF

ON

Idle

OFF

Racing engine quickly from idle to
4.000 rpm

ON

Idle

ON

Racing engine from idle to
3.000 rpm in 1st position

OFF

*1: GA16DE except for Europe and Israel

EC-75

—>

ON

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

I_G_A_’

General Descrip_ti_o_n

Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in «DATA MONITOR» mode.
(Select «HI SPEED» in «DATA MONITOR» with CONSULT.)

THRTL POS SEN, CLSD THLIPOSI
Below is the data for «THRTL pas SEN» and «CLSD THLIPOSI» when depressing the accelerator pedal
with the ignition switch «ON».
The signal of «THRTL pas SEN» should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after «CLSD
THLIPOSI» is changed from «ON» to «OFF».
CLSD THUPOSI
10:22
OFF
Full

Release

THRTL POS SEN
10:22
XO.1V
o
13
26

-00″09
+02″69
ON

~

I

{ ~

-00’09
+02’69
38

51,

..

Full
Depress {
SEF673Q

CMPS,RPM (REF), MAS AIR/FL SE, THRTL POS SEN, 02 SENSOR, INJ PULSE
Below is the data for «CMPS.RPM (REF)», «MAS AIR/FL SE», «THRTL pas SEN», «02 SENSOR» and
«‘NJ PULSE» when revving quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.

:

./

E

0-

..

.•.•…..•.,

C5 CJ LL~C?
wX
a:
~ co_
a..
a:

ci>

………..

o «CMPSoRPM(REF)» should increase gradually
while depressing the accelerator pedal and
should decrease gradually after releasing
the pedal without any intermittent drop or rise.

………

……………………………… _ ……. __ ._….

1l)

.,_,.

a..CJ

;:a»

L.-r… ——————

(.)~o

CO»

OCOIt)

gg
, +

CDC’)

…/ ….

>
… co

.’:

~CJ

W

C/)
-J

~

,.. …. —

~-

… _ ••,. •••• •••• ,.. _ ……

~

.. _

… _-

…… «¥’.,. … «»»»»‘… _ …. _ .. _ …

_ .. —

…. ‘

…. _.

o «MAS AIRIFL SE» should increase when
depressing the accelerator pedal and should
decrease at the moment «THRTL POS SENu is
closed (accelerator pedal is released).

z ~

• «THRTL

re

pas SEN»

depressing

w

should increase while

the accelerator

pedel and should

decrease while releasing it.

en
en

M

0

0..

-‘

b:
:r:

-‘

ll)

Cl

t-

o

a;

0

cD
0

….
cD

ll)

b ~
9 0+

A

cD

Cl

Cl
C1l

>
<3
ci
><

IX)

Cl

v
cD

z

w
en
Cl

0
cD
0

ll)

Cl

a;
0

….
cD

b ~
9 0+

—._——

.~.
0

A

• »02 SEN» may increase immediately
depressing

the accelerator

after

pedel and may

decrease after releasing the pedal.

…….

0
Cl

ll)

u
w
en

:!

w
en

-‘
::>

a.
..,

z

:~.

0

• «INJ PULSE» should increase when depressing

ll)

j

‘.

ll)

Cl

a;
0

0

I

.»»»

~—

the accelerator

pedal and should decrease

when the pedal is released.

A

SEF259QA

EC-77

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

General Description

ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1.

ECM is located behind the center console panel. For this
inspection, remove the center console under cover.

2.

Remove ECM harness protector.

3.

Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.

MEF140D

~~

Tester probe

MEC4868

ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR

TERMINAL

LAYOUT

For Australia
~

101 102 03

104 105 106

107 lOB 09

110 111 112

113 114 115

116 117 lIB

1~~~~.41i i5~
@]8
~9
.
~1
3

1

4950

51

70

SEF130R

Except for Australia

SEF131R

EC-78

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
@K]
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Conl’d)
ECM INSPECTION
Specification
TERMINAL
NO.

TABLE —

GA16DE for Australia

data are reference

values and are measured

WIRE
COLOR

ITEM

between each terminal

and @ (ECCS ground).

CONDITION
[Efl9ine is running.

DATA

I
0.3 — 0.6V

1

WIB

Ignition signal

L

Idle speed

IEngine is running. I
L

IEngine is running.
2

GYIR

Ignition check
Idle speed

[Engine is running.
LIB

I
Approximately 12V

L
3

Approximately 0.9V

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

I

Tachometer

Approximately 0.9V
L

Idle speed

IEngine is running.

I

Ilgnition switch «OFF’.’
4

WIG

ECCS relay (Self-shutoff)

L

For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch «OFF»

Ilgnition switch «OFF»
L

8

BIP

Fuel pump relay

Engine ground
Idle speed

IEngine is running.

LG

Cooling fan relay
(High speed: For AIT
models)

~

Cooling fan is not operating.
Cooling fan is operating at low speed.

Cooling fan relay
(Low speed)

L

Cooling fan is not operating.

L
Y

Air conditioner relay

Approximately OV
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V)
0.07 — 0.30V

Cooling fan is operating.

I Engine
15

I

IEngine is running. I
L_

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V) .

Cooling fan is operating at high speed.

IEngine is running.
LGIR

I

I Engine is running. I
L

14

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V)

I

ECCS ground
L

13

I

More than 5 seconds after turning ignition
switch «ON»

IEngine is running.
BIW

0.07 — 0.20V

I

Ilgnition switch «ON»

10

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

I

For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
«ON»

IEngine is running.

L

I

A few seconds passed after turning ignition
switch «OFF»

Ilgnition switch «ON»
L

0- 1V

is running.

I

Both AIC switch and blower switch are
«ON».

IEngine is running.
LAIC

I

switch is «OFF».

EC-79

0.08 — 0.2V

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
~
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAl
NO.

WIRE
COLOR

18

OR/l

Malfunction indicator
lamp

19

BIW

ECCS ground

/’gnition switch «ON'»

Approximately 50mV

IEngine is running. I
L Idle speed

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11.14V)

IEngine is running. I

L

BIY

Engine ground

Idle speed

I’gnition switch «ON»
20

I

Start signal
I’gnition switch «5T ART»

Approximately OV

I

IEngine is running. I
L Both air conditioner
21

G

DATA

CONDITION

ITEM

switch and blower
switch are «ON» (Compressor operates)

Air conditioner switch

IEngine is running.

L

t

I

Air conditioner switch is «OFF»

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V)

Approximately OV

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

I’gnition switch «ON'»

22

G/OR

Neutral position switch
(M/T models)
Inhibitor switch (A/T
models)

Ge., po,»‘on » «Ne»».1 po,ltlon» (MIT
models)
Gear position is «N» or «P» (A/T models)

Except the above gear position

Ilgnition switch «ON»
23

Y

Throttle position sensor

AIT models:
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

llgnition switch «ON'»

L
L

M/T models:
Approximately 5V

I
0.35 — 0.65V

Accelerator pedal released

!’gnition switch «ON»

L

Approximately OV

I

Approximately 4V

Accelerator pedal fully depressed

/Engine is running.1
25

Pu/W

Power steering oil pressure switch

L

IEngine is running.1

L

26

PUIR

Vehicle speed sensor

Approximately OV
Steering wheel is being turned
Approximately 5V
Steering wheel is not being turned

IEngine is running. I
L Front of vehicle

raised and front wheels are

Approximately
1.8 — 2.4V (AC voltage)

rotating

30

PIB

Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve
(A/T models only)

IEngine is running. I
L Idle speed
IEngine is running. I (Warm-up condition)
L

Vehicle speed is 64 km/h (40 MPH) or more
in «D» position

Approximately OV

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V)

I,gnition switch «ON» ,
35

lG/B

Blower fan switch

L

Approximately OV
Blower fan switch is «ON»

EC-80

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
~
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.

38

WIRE
COLOR

BIR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA

Ilgnition switch «OFF»1

OV

llgnition switch «ON»!

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

Ignition switch

IEngine is running. I
39

B

ECCS ground

40

l

Camshaft position sen-

44

l

sor (Reference signal)

L

Engine ground
Idle speed

IEngine is running. I

L

(AC voltage)

Idle speed

i’gnition switch «ON'»
42

PUlW

IACV-AAC valve (Close)

I

IEngine is running. (Warm-up condition)

L

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

IEngine is running. I
43

B

ECCS ground

41
45

B/W
B/W

Camshaft position sensor (Position signal)

46

W

Oxygen sensor

L

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)
Engine ground
(Probe this terminal with

e

Idle speed

IEngine is running. I
L

Approximately OV

tester probe when
measuring.)

Idle speed

IEngine is running.1

L

Approximately 2.7V

After warming up sufficiently and engine
speed is 2,000 rpm.

Approximately 2.7V
(AC voltage)

o — Approximately

1.0V
(periodically change)

IEngine is running. I (Warm-up condition)
47

OR

Mass air flow sensor

L

I Engine

L
48

W

Mass air flow sensor
ground

49

P/l

Throttle position sensor
power supply

50

B

Sensors’ ground

1.0 — 1.7V
Idle speed
1.5 — 2.1V
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

I Engine

L

is running.! (Warm-up condition)

is running. I (Warm-up condition)
0.005 — 0.02V

Idle speed

j!gnition switch «ON»I

IEngine is running. I (Warm-up condition)

51

BRIY

Engine coolant temperature sensor

L

Approximately 5V

0.001 — 0.02V

Idle speed

1Engine is running.

I

0- 4.84V
Output voltage varies
with engine coolant temperature.

I Engine
54

W

Knock sensor

L

is running.!
2.0 — 3.0V

Idle speed

Ilgnition switch «ON'»
55

LlR

Rear defogger relay

L

Ilgnition switch «ON»I

L
56
61

W/R
W/R

Power supply for ECM

Approximately OV
Rear defogger is «OFF».

Rear defogger is «ON».

Ilgnition switch «ON»I

EC-81

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
~
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Conl’d)
TERMINAL
NO.

60

WIRE
COLOR

RIG

63

RIY

64

GIR

65

GY/L

68

GIW

70

W/L

ITEM

CONDITION

ILighting switch «ON»I

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

ILighting switch «OFF»I

Approximately OV

IEngine is running. I

0- 5.0V
Output voltage varies
with intake air temperature.

IEngine is running. I

Approximately OV

Headlamp switch

Intake air temperature
sensor

Data link connector for
CONSULT

Power supply (Back-up)

L

Idle speed (CONSULT is connected and
turned on)

I,gnition switch «OFF»

I

SS

IACV-AAC valve
(Open)

RIB

Injector No.1

104

GIS

Injector No.3

107

YIB

Injector No.2

109

LIB

Injector No.4

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)
0- 4V

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

103

106

P

BIY

ECCS ground

~

L

BIY

ECCS ground

models: Jack up front wheels and drive
wheels at 16 kmlh (10 mph)
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

IEngine is running.

L

Idle speed

L

Idle speed

YIR

VTC solenoid valve

L
L

is running.

OR

L

I

I

SlY

ECCS ground

Engine ground

.

is running.

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

I

Approximately OV

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

I

Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm.

IEngine is running.

I

L

Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.

L

Idle speed

IEngine is running. I
118

Approximately OV

Engine ground

Idle speed

IEngine is running.
115

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

Idle speed

IEngine
L

Heated oxygen sensor
heater ground
(A/T models)

I (Warm-up condition)

IEngine is running. I

IEngine is running.
114

I (Warm-up condition)

MIT

IEngine
112

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

Engine is running

IEngine is running.
EGR valve & EVAP can.ister purge control solenoid valve

Approximately 3.5V

IEngine is running. I (Warm-up condition)
L

102

Approximately 4 — 9V

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

Ilgnition switch «ON»I
101

DATA

EC-82

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)
Approximately OV

Engine ground

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
@K]
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Conl’d)
ECM INSPECTION

TABLE —

Except GA 16DE for Australia

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and @ (ECCS ground).
TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE
COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA

IEngine is running.1
1

WIB

Ignition signal

L

0.2 — 0.3V
Idle speed

IEngine is ru~

L
Tachometer
2

LIB

(Models with tachometer)

Approximately 0.7V
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

IEngine is running.1

L

0.7 — 0.9V
Idle speed

jEngine is running.1
3

GYIR

Ignition check

Approximately 13V

L

Idle speed

Engine is running.’

I

Ignition switch «OFF»I
4

WIG

ECCS relay (Self-shutoff)

L

0- 1V

For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch «OFF»

llgnition switch «OFF»I

L

A few seconds after turning ignition

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V)

switch «OFF» and thereafter
IEngine is running.1
9

LGIR

Cooling fan relay (Low
speed)

L

Cooling fan is not operating.

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V)

IEngine is running.1

L

Approximately OV
Cooling fan is operating.

IEngine is running.1

10

LG

Cooling fan relay (High
speed)

t

BATTERY VOLTAGE
Cooling fan is not operating.
Cooling fan is operating at low speed.

(11 — 14V)

IEngine is running.1

L

Approximately OV
Cooling fan is operating at high speed.

IEngine is running.1

L
11

Yor G

Both AIC switch and blower fan switch
are «ON».

Air conditioner relay

IEngine is running.1
LAIC

switch is «OFF».

IEngine is running.1

12

YIR

VTC solenoid valve
(GA16DE engine models except for Europe
and Israel)

Approximately OV

L

Idle speed

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

IEngine is running.1

L

Engine is racing quickly from idle to 4,000
rpm at 1st position.

EC-83

Approximately OV

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
rnJ
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE
COLOR

ITEM

CONDITION

DATA

IEngine is running./ (Warm-up condition)
16

OR or G Mass air flow sensor

L

1.2 — 1.8V
Idle speed

IEngine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

L
18

BR/Yor

Engine coolant temper-

GY

ature sensor

1.7-2.3V
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0- 5.0V
Output voltage varies
with engine coolant

IEngine is running.’

temperature.
19

W

Oxygen sensor (Except
for Europe and Israel)

IEngine is running.1

L

o — Approximately

1.0V

After warming up sufficiently

Ilgnition switch «ON»I (Warm-up condition)
20

Y

Throttle position sensor

L

0.40 — 0.60V
Accelerator

pedal released

jlgnition switch «ON»I

L

Approximately
Accelerator

4V

pedal fully depressed
For Israel

22
30

L

Camshaft position sensor (Reference signal:
Except for Europe)

1.5 — 3.0V
IEngine is running.1
Except for Israel
0.1 — 0.4V
Ilgnition switch «ON'»

24

ORIL

Malfunction
lamp

Approximately

1.5V

indicator
BATIERY VOLTAGE

IEngine is running.1

(11 — 14V)
27

W

L

Knock sensor (Except
for Europe and Israel)

IEngine is running.1

L

Approximately

2.5V

Idle speed

Camshaft position sensor (Reference signal:

1.5 — 3.0V

For Europe)
31
40
B/W

Camshaft position sensor (Position signal:
Except for Europe and
Israel)

IEngine is running.1
2.0 — 3.0V

t

Ilgnition switch «ON»I
32

PUIR

Vehicle speed sensor

‘S «Neu-

Eog’oe stopped aod gea, posit;oo
tral position».
While rotating drive wheel by hand

Varies from 0 to 5V

IEngine is running.1

t

33

R

BA TIERY VOLTAGE
Rear window defogger switch is «ON».
Lighting switch is «ON».

(11 — 14V)

Electric load switch
IEngine is running.1

t

Rear window defogger switch is «OFF».
Lighting switch is «ON».

EC-84

OV

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
@K]
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Conl’d)
TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE
COLOR

CONDITION

ITEM

Ilgnition switch «ON»I
34

BIY

DATA

Approximately OV

Start signal
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

pgnition switch «ST ART»I

pgnition switch «ON»I

t

35

G/OR

Neutral position switchl
Inhibitor switch

«N» or «P» position (A/T)
Neutral position (M/T)

OV

For Europe and Israel
Approximately 5V
llgnition switch «ON»1

.L Except the above gear position

Except for Europe and
Israel
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

Ilgnition switch «OFF»!
36

B/R

Ignition switch (Except
for Europe)

OV
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 • 14V)

!Ignition switch «ON»I

37

P/L

Throttle position sensor
power supply

Ilgnition switch «ON»I

38
47

W/R

Power supply for ECM

Ilgnition switch «ON»I

Approximately 5V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

IEngine is running.1

L
41

Both air conditioner switch and blower

Approximately OV

fan switch are «ON».

G or GY Air conditioner switch

!Engine is running.1

L Air conditioner

switch is «OFF».

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

IEngine is running.!
43

PU/W

OV

L

Steering wheel is being turned.
Power steering oil pressure switch
IEngine is running.1

L Steering
44

B/R

Ignition switch
(For Europe)

Approximately 5V
wheel is not being turned.

jlgnition switch «OFF»I

OV

pgnition switch «ON»I

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V)

IEngine is running.1

44

R/L

Thermo control amp.
(Except for Europe and
Israel)

L Both air conditioner

switch and blower fan Approximately OV

switch are «ON».
IEngine is running.1

L Air conditioner

switch is «OFF».

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

IEngine is running.1
45

LG/B or
G/Y

Blower fan switch

L

Approximately OV
Blower fan switch is «ON».

IEngine is running.!

L

Approximately 5V
Blower fan switch is «OFF».

EC-85

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
mJ
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE
COLOR

ITEM

46

WIL

Power supply (Back-up)

101

RIB

Injector No. 1

103

GIB

Injector No.3

110

Y/B

Injector NO.2

112

LIB

Injector NO.4

CONDITION

Ilgnition switch «OFF'»

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

IEngine is running./

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V)

IEngine is running.1
Heated oxygen sensor
102

OR

heater ground
(For Europe and Israel)

DATA

L

BATTERY VOLTAGE

Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm.

(11 — 14V)

IEngine is running.1

L

Approximately OV
Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.

jlgnition switch «ON»I

L
104

B/P

Fuel pump relay
(Except for Europe)

For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
«ON»

Approximately OV

/Engine is running.1

Ilgnition switch «ON»I

L
EVAP canister purge
control solenoid valve
(GA16DE MIT models

105

P

5 seconds after turning ignition switch
«ON» and thereafter

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

IEngine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

L

Approximately OV
Idle speed

except for Europe &
Israel)
EGR valve & EVAP canIEngine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)
ister purge control solenoid valve (For Europe
Engine is racing from idle to 3,000 rpm in
and Israel, and GA15DE
1st position.
MIT models)

L

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V)

jlgnition switch «ON»I

L
106

SIP

Fuel pump relay

For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
«ON»

IEngine is running.1

(For Europe)

0.7 — 0.9V

Ilgnition switch «ON»I

L

5 seconds after turning ignition switch
«ON» and thereafter

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14V)

IEngine is running.1

L
IACV-AAC valve (Open111

5B

ing signal: Except for
Europe and Israel)

10 — 13V
Idle speed

l

IEngine is running.1
51..»»
wheel t, be'» I,med
Air conditioner is operating.
Rear window defogger switch is «ON».
Lighting switch is «ON».

EC-86

Approximately 5.0V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — General Description
[ill
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL
NO.

WIRE
COLOR

CONDITION

ITEM

DATA

IEngine is running.1

L

PU/W

IACV-AAC valve (Closing signal: Except for
Europe and Israel)

t

~gine

7 — 13V
Idle speed
is running.1

Stee,'», wheel’, be'», t,med
Air conditioner is operating.
Rear window defogger switch is «ON».
Lighting switch is «ON».

11 — 14V

113
IEngine is running.1

L
5B

IACV-AAC valve
(For Europe and Israel)

11 — 14V
Idle speed

I~ngine is running.1

~

Steee'», wheel » be'», t,med
Air conditioner is operating.
Rear window defogger switch is «ON».
Lighting switch is «ON».

1 — 10V

IEngine is running.1

115

P/B

Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve
(A/T models except for
Europe and Israel)

L

Approximately OV
Idle speed

IEngine is running

L

I (Warm-up

condition)

Vehicle speed is 60 km/h (37 MPH) or
more in «0» position.

EC-87

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11-14V)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit

7.5A

‘iIi’

Refer to EL-POWER.

30A

OJ

[ill
W~L

<:MID

~

0-<0- W!L ~

G

W/L —

m

…..

Refer to EL-POWER.
ST IGNITION

~

W!L

SWITCH

IE7n7

OF

d::,~

I~I

~

EC-MAIN-01

/

I

I

W/L

B/R

B/R

-:

i

LHD mode1s
RHO models
For Europe and Israe 1
Except@

@:

L

_.

Detectable
line
for DTC
Non-detectable
line
for DTC

-:

W!L
d= (EI0l)
I~I CHID
/
~RL

JUNCTION BOX NO.2
(JOINT CONNECTORS)

‘T’

0-<:0-

I

q—~

~
W/L

W!L

W/R

@)@

O-

  • 4D-

    W/L ~

    W/L ~

    W/L ~

    W/L

    ~cm

    I

    MASS AIR
    FLOW SENSOR

    I

    T-,

    t

    W!L W!L

    lbiJ~
    OR

    W

    »
    ….1

    (

    n

    IT~I

    ECCS
    RELAY

    U (IT)

    ~~

    WIG W!R

    .I—_.

    I’
    1
    1
    1
    1
    1
    1
    1
    I

    1
    1
    1
    1

    »

    WIG W!R W!R

    ~!

    t

    I

    I
    I

    I
    1
    1
    I
    I

    I
    I
    I

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR

    em

    …..—u1

    ~….

    ,

    1—-

    I

    OR

    ~

    W

    1rf6il~

    IFh~Wfl
    SSOFF V8

    I

    W!R

    W!L

    V8

    QA+

    QA-

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    8

    I

    l!jj CEID
    W

    +
    2

    1

    8

    t…J 1
    ffi

    ~I
    45678

    II

    8

    ill

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    (IT)
    L

    ~em

    ~rn>

    ill]]]D

    8R

    5

    UI.ill.I.ITIIII

    GY

    HEC031

    EC-103

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OTC 12
    Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Conl’d)
    GA16DE for Australia

    EC-MAFS-01
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    -:
    -:

    W/L

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    I
    W /L

    tETt’i7

    r=b~
    I~I@)

    W/R

    W/L

    11iJ,@

    W

    3MASS
    AIR

    =r@
    W/L

    I

    OR

    W/L

    t

    ECCS
    ~ RELAY

    I
    I
    I

    I
    I
    I
    1

    »

    JOINT

    I
    I
    I

    CONNECTOR-6
    @

    —.~=-

    I

    I …

    r,

    I

    -=~I—«»

    OR

    W/R

    mlf5’sil~
    SSOFF VB

    I.

    I

    W/R

    W/R

    ,

    (

    .I—_ …
    WIG

    W

    I’
    I
    I

    I~~I
    ~U:jJJ@
    WIG

    SENSOR

    4=!Ilbj:Jlrn>

    T.

    W/L

    FLOW

    W

    II}; 1 14-81
    QA+

    VB

    QA-

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    B

    11
    B

    8

    t…l 1
    ~

    ~

    Refer to last page

    11[iJ
    3456

    ~I

    @
    W

    (Foldout

    ~@

    ~~

    IIIIlII.IIIITJ

    ~BR

    page) .

    GY

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC064

    EC-104

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 12
    Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Conl’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    For Europe ~ GA15DE engine
    and Israel

    I~

    «,,~~)rl


    /JJ~
    ‘ Mass air flow sensor

    PROCEDURE

    INSPECTION START

    connector
    1 _ harness
    ==—,

    I-

    1

    I

    I

    ~ Mass air flow sensor

    d.-

    I

    ;~

    ~(~lr~~

    SEF138R

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminal @
    and ground with CONSULT or tester.
    Voltage: Battery positive voltage

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    OK

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    3. Loosen and retighten engine ground
    screws.
    4. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and ECM terminal @ or
    @ or engine ground.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    Check harness continuity between terminal CD and ECM terminal @ or @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    Repair harness or connectors.

    *1
    For Europe and Israel, and GA15DE engine
    *2 : GA16DE engine models except for
    Europe and Israel
    SEF139R
    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Mass air flow sensor).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    on page EC-107.

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuits. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    or the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    ,~

    INSPECTION END

    C/

    Power steering’
    tluic! reservxr ..—

    W~

    /,

    ‘»

    Meo,»»»

    EC-105

    NG

    Replace mass air flow
    sensor.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 12
    Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
    Ii)

    For Europe and Israel, and
    GA15DE engine

    ~i5
    cill1D
    GA16DE engine models except for
    Europe and Israel

    ~15
    1=’

    =E=CM==:!iH

    CONNECTOR

    17

    @ :
    @ :
    [!J

    II

    48

    Except for Australia
    For Australia

    For Europe and Israel, and
    GA15DE engine models

    ~i5
    II

    SEF140R

    ECM

    Ef

    CONNECTOR

    ~i5
    II

    c:illli:>

    16

    @a
    GA16DE engine models except for
    Europe and Israel

    II

    ~io
    ECM

    El’CONNECTORII
    16

    @:

    ~i5
    ULffhD

    47

    Except for Australia

    47 : For Australia

    SEF141R

    EC-106

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 12
    Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
    COMPONENT

    INSPECTION

    Mass air flow sensor
    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    2. Start engine and warm it up sufficiently.
    3. Check voltage between terminal CD and ground.
    Conditions

    *

    1 : For Europe and Israe( and GA 15DE engine
    models
    *2 : GA 16DE engine models except for
    Euro e and I rael
    SEF142R

    4.

    Voltage V

    Ignition switch «ON» (Engine stopped.)

    Less than 1.0

    Idle (Engine is warmed-up sufficiently.)

    1.2 — 1.8

    If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot
    wire for damage or dust.

    SEF154N

    EC-107

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 13
    Engine Coolant Temperature

    Sensor (ECTS)

    The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
    engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as
    the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The
    electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

    SEF594K

    < Reference data>

    20

    18

    Engine coolant temperature
    ‘C (‘F)

    Voltage
    (V)

    Resistance
    (kQ)

    -10 (14)

    4.4

    7.0 — 11.4

    0.4

    20 (68)

    3.5

    2.1 — 2.9

    0.2

    50 (122)

    2.2

    0.6 — 1.0

    90 (194)

    0.9

    0.23 — 0.26

    6

    9

    4

    B
    Iii

    2
    10
    1ii 0.8

    ‘0

    £

    0.1

    -20 0
    20 40 60 80 100
    (-4) (32) (68)(104)(140)(176)(212)
    Temperature ‘C (OF)

    Diagnostic
    Trouble Code
    No.
    13

    SEF012P

    Check Items
    (Possible Cause)

    Malfunction is detected when …

    • An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor • Harness or connectors
    is entered to ECM.

    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Engine coolant temperature sensor

    DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
    PROCEDURE
    (F.i 1) Turn ignition switch «ON».
    ~
    2) Select «DATA MONITOR» mode with CONSULT.
    3) Wait for at least 5 seconds.

    ————OR————fU 1) Turn ignition switch «ON» and wait for at least 5 sec~
    2)
    3)

    onds.
    Turn ignition switch «OFF», wait for at least 5 seconds
    and then turn «ON».
    Perform «Diagnostic Test Mode II» (Self-diagnostic
    reSUlts) with ECM.

    EC-108

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 13
    Engine Coolant Temperature
    (Cont’d)

    ~
    Sensor (ECTS)

    EC-ECTS-01

    ENGINE COOLANT
    TEMPERATURE
    SENSOR

    m

    @:

    For Europe and
    Israel
    @: Except@
    *1″,@

    -:
    -:

    t

    B

    GY, @BR!Y

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    B

    ~

    ~

    GND

    GND

    -A

    -A

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    lZlfll)
    :

    LHD models
    (8): RHO models
    @: For Europe and Israel
    @: Except @
    Detectable line
    -:
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    -:
    line for DTC

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    30A

    OJ
    G

    m
    OFF

    ST

    ‘e-

    ACC

    IGNITION
    SWITCH
    @

    4J
    B/R

    ~

    t

    4>1>
    m~
    B/R

    B/R

    CONDENSER
    DISTRIBUTOR

    IGNITION
    COIL

    POWER
    TRANSISTOR

    B/R

    ~@

    B/R

    B/R

    1>J
    4-‘

    ~

    ~~

    W/B B/W

    G

    I

    B/R

    II

    t

    II

    .-

    G

    B/R

    IctJ,

    IrtJl
    @
    =r CEID

    (H) 9F

    B/R

    B/R

    W

    RESISTOR

    SPARK PLUG
    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    ~———————~

    GY/R

    nB

    W/B

    rn
    IGN

    m
    IGN

    B/Y B

    f.J
    1
    m

    CK

    I

    ,
    I
    L

    I
    I
    j

    W

    fIll I II~

    (H)
    W

    4567BI

    ~I

    ffi)

    r———————,

    I

    W

    To ECM
    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    ~

    (IT)

    :~@R@

    @g)

    BR

    ~oo
    LL.@y B

    ~cw

    I1IIIITITDII

    GY

    HEC034

    EC-120

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 34
    Knock Sensor (KS) (Cont’d)
    GA 16DE for Australia

    EC-KS-01
    -:
    -:

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    em

    KNK

    5 4
    1 • 1

    w
    f .——

    I
    I
    I
    I

    I
    I
    I
    I

    I
    I

    I
    I

    1’:- •

    w

    …..

    rshort.
    OK

    @:
    @:

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.

    For Australia
    Except for Australia

    SEF232R

    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    or the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    EC-140

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    (ID,@
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM
    and fuse block
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Injector

    EC-INJECT-01
    Refer to EL-POWER.
    (b):
    @:
    @:
    @:

    G

    rh
    OFF

    ST

    ‘e-

    IGNITION
    SWITCH

    -:

    ~

    ACC

    -:

    4J
    SIR

    LHO models
    RHO models
    For Europe and Israel
    Except for Europe and
    Israle
    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    I

    ~$

    SIR
    m r=b

    <:BID

    SIR

    t=

    I~I

    ~

    SIR

    SiR

    (EiOt)

    <:BID

    1;>-1>

    .——‘.——.—-I
    I
    I

    ~.
    I

    SIR

    ~m
    ernl4=Jl
    SIR

    SIR

    t

    SIR IG7’A

    rn~
    l!::i=Jl@
    SIR

    BIR

    BIR
    2

    INJECTOR
    INJECTOR
    INJECTOR
    NO.1
    NO.2
    NO.3
    2(EJ])
    ~2rn rn
    fi1=i1 ~
    rn

    rn4=B

    4=B
    Y/B

    RIS

    U

    BIR

    I

    4JJ
    GIB

    I

    I

    4=B
    LIB

    (F21)

    I

    RIB

    Y/B

    G/B

    LIB

    rmru

    In10iJ

    11~31

    11~21

    INJ
    #2

    INJ
    #3

    INJ
    #4

    INJ
    #1

    INJECTOR
    NO.4

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    ill)

    ~——————~
    ,
    ,

    ‘FITm
    ~
    :rnrnID@~@@:
    :

    L

    W

    rn’3456I ‘fil ernW

    W

    I

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page;J .

    1&1 (EJ]),rn,@,~
    @B

    B

    B

    B

    <:BID ~

    :

    ~

    I

    ~I
    ,1f.I)@
    87654
    W

    HEC039

    EC-141

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Injector (Cont’d)

    ITEMS

    GA16DE for Australia

    EC-IN0ECT-01
    -:

    Detectable line
    for OTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    -:

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    IGNITION
    SWITCH

    ‘e-

    tEi7A

    AGG

    ON

    ~

    ~

    BIR

    1r$1~
    BIR <:BID

    4J@
    B/R@

    I

    e—-e—-e—-I
    I
    I
    I

    BIR

    BIR

    ( ~ :1 No.1
    INJECTOR

    OCI NO.2
    INJECTOR

    ~

    @

    L4J
    RIB

    I

    4J
    Y/B

    I

    m
    BIR

    I4=!J

    m
    BIR

    INJECTOR
    No.3
    @

    GIB

    I

    L4J
    LIB

    Y/B

    GIB

    LIB

    ~

    11~71

    11~41

    h1~1

    INJ

    INJ

    INJ

    INJ

    #2

    #3

    m

    I

    RIB
    #1

    INJECTOR
    NO.4

    #4

    ECM
    (EGGS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    (ED

    ~~

    rmrn

    W

    101 102 103

    104 105 106

    107 108 109

    110 111 112

    113 114 115

    116 117 118

    (![~lifilCIT>
    ~
    3456
    W
    ~

    ~,m,@,m
    B
    B
    B
    B

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    HEC071

    EC-142

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Injector (Cont’d)
    COMPONENT

    ITEMS

    DESCRIPTION

    The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the
    ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the
    injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve
    back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake
    manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the
    injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse
    duration based on engine fuel needs.
    SEF596K

    ACTIVE TEST.

    DIAGNOSTIC

    D

    ==

    INSPECTION START

    ••• POWER BALANCE •••

    ===

    PROCEDURE

    =

    MONITOR
    CMPS.RPM(REF)
    737rpm
    MAS AIR/FL SEN
    098V
    IACV-AAC/V
    41%

    CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
    1. Start engine.
    ~
    2. Perform «POWER BALANCE»
    in «ACTIVE TEST» mode with
    CONSULT.
    3. Make sure that each circuit
    produces a momentary engine
    speed drop.

    OK

    INSPECTION END

    (F.I

    110Q]Q]~

    DDDDc:J

    MEF354F

    OR

    ~7~

    ~

    fff
    )drJ
    At idle

    /~~

    ~

    Click

    Ct.
    ‘~.+

    /I

    SEF730L

    Fuel injector harness
    connector
    II

    1. Start engine.
    2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
    Clicking noise should be
    heard.

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Stop engine.
    2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminal @
    and ground with CONSULT or tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage

    AEC872

    AEC755

    EC-143

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    @,@or@,
    @
    • Harness connectors

    @,CillD
    • Harness for open or
    short between injector
    and ignition switch
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Injector (Cont’d)
    For Australia

    r.ii3I

    @

    ~ ~15
    1=’

    =E=CM=Ef

    .102 • 107.

    CONNECTOR
    104.

    1

    II

    CHECK

    109,

    Except for Australia

    ~io
    ‘g

    ECM

    .101.110.

    CONNECTOR

    OUTPUT

    SIGNAL

    CIRCUIT.

    NG

    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    injector harness connector terminal
    QLand ECM terminals GID, @,
    @, CTID or 00, CIID, Gill, @).
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    (@:No.1 cylinder @:No.3cylinder
    @: No.2cylinder @: No.4cylinder

    II

    ITEMS

    Check the following.
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM and
    injector
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK
    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Injector).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    below.

    II

    103.112 ,

    NG

    Replace injector.

    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.

    @ :NO.1cylinder @: No.3cylinder
    @:No.2cylinder

    @:No.4cylinder

    Trouble is not fixed.

    SEF148R

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage or
    the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector
    and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    COMPONENT

    INSPECTION

    Injector
    1.
    2.

    Disconnect injector harness connector.
    Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
    Resistance: 10 — 140 [at 25°C (77°F)]
    If NG, replace injector.

    AEC559

    EC-144

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Fuel Pump
    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Engine speed
    Camshaft position sensor

    ECM
    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    Start signal
    Ignition switch

    The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to
    improve engine startability. If the ECM receives
    a 180 signal from the camshaft position sensor,
    it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes
    the pump to perform. If the 180 signal is not
    received when the ignition switch is on, the
    engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation
    and
    prevents
    battery
    discharging,
    thereby
    improving
    safety. The ECM does not directly
    drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel
    pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
    0

    Condition
    Ignition switch is turned to ON.
    Engine running and cranking

    Fuel
    pump
    relay

    Fuel pump operation
    Operates for
    5 seconds
    Operates

    0

    When engine is stopped

    Stops in 1 second

    Except as shown above

    Stops

    COMPONENT

    DESCRIPTION

    A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.

    AEC801

    EC-145

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Fuel Pump (Co nt’ d)

    ITEMS

    EC-F/PUMP-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    15A

    ITZJ

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    @: For Europe
    @: Except for Europe

    ~

    B/P

    ACMD
    T

    FUEL
    PUMP

    ~@

    rnrn

    ~~

    ~~

    W

    B

    ~

    w.g;

    rQ,~
    L!J.gj

    GY

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    page) .

    HEC040

    EC-146

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Fuel Pump (Conl’d)

    ITEMS

    GA 16DE for Australia

    EC-F/PUMP-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START

    -:

    Detectable line
    for oTC
    Non-detectable
    line for oTC

    -:
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (J/B)

    ~

    UN•51 I ~51

    slL

    B/W

    II!’I~In (UEL

    PUMP
    U RELAY

    ~1bi=Jl@)
    s/P s/Y

    1

    s/Y

    -if] r

    s/Y

    ——1

    (@ ([D

    s/Y

    ITil
    ~~
    S
    1

    M

    s/P~
    r=:b~

    ~

    I

    FUEL
    TANK
    GAUGE
    UNIT
    ~

    ~

    s

    ITil~

    S/P

    ~

    m

    ,.
    B

    FPR

    I

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    (ill

    L

    PUMP

    ~

    ‘Ill’
    CEID
    B/P

    AQID
    T

    FUEL

    ~(@

    tmJ

    W

    @

    ~
    GY

    ~~

    J.l.SI

    rQ,~

    W£.J

    B

    S

    -:!:

    ..L..

    (J311)

    @
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC072

    EC-147

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Fuel Pump (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    ITEMS

    PROCEDURE

    INSPECTION START

    m
    CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».

    AEC884

    ~

    INSPECTION END

    2. Pinch fuel feed hose with fingers.
    Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt
    on the fuel feed hose for 5 seconds
    after ignition switch is turned «ON».

    Driver’s dash lower

    NG

    Ii)

    MEC266B

    ~

    NG Check the following.
    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    —+
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    • 15A fuse
    • Harness for open or
    2. Disconnect fuel pump relay from relay
    short between fuse and
    box.
    fuel pump relay
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminals G),
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.
    @ and ground with CONSULTor
    tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage

    DISCONNECT

    ~ E~D

    OK

    [!]
    CHECK POWER GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».

    SEF479P

    NG

    —..

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    @,CID

    2. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and body ground, terminal G) and fuel pump relay connector

    • Harness connectors

    @,@)
    • Harness for open or
    short between fuel
    pump and body ground
    • Harness for open or
    short between fuel

    terminal CID.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    pump and fuel pump
    relay
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors .

    OK

    .

    IE
    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

    Fuel pump harnessconnector

    0111

    ~

    MEC267BA

    2. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @, @ or @ and
    fuel pump relay connector terminal

    @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK

    SEF4B7Q

    EC-148

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    CID,@
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM and
    fuel pump relay
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Fuel Pump (Cont’d)

    ~i5
    II

    8

    @

    Ej’coNNECTORII

    ECM

    ITEMS

    CHECK

    104 108

    COMPONENT

    1

    NG

    Replace fuel pump relay.

    NG

    Replace fuel pump.

    (Fuel pump relay).
    Refer to «Component Inspection» below.
    OK
    104

    :

    Except for Europe and Australia

    106

    :

    For Europe
    SEF149R

    8 : For Australia

    Ii

    • ACTIVE

    D

    TEST.

    FUEL PUMP RELAY

    ON

    = = = MONITOR

    —Orpm

    CMPS.RPM(REFj

    I ON

    I_I

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Fuel pump).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    below.

    OFF

    OK

    Di!?connect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.

    I

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage or
    the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector
    and retest.

    MEF309F

    INSPECTION END

    COMPONENT

    =

    INSPECTION

    Fuel pump relay
    Check continuity between terminals CID and CID.
    Conditions
    12V direct current supply
    between terminals CD and @
    No current supply

    Continuity

    Yes
    No

    If NG, replace relay.
    SEF511P

    -Fuel pump
    1. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector.
    2. Check resistance between terminals CD and @.
    Resistance: 0.2 — 5.0n [at 25°C (77°F)]
    If NG, replace fuel pump.

    EC-149

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) Control (AAC) Valve

    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

    Auxiliary Air

    Engine speed

    Camshaft position sensor

    Amount of intake air

    I Mass air flow sensor

    I

    Engine coolant temperature

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    ~

    I

    Start signal

    Ignition switch
    I

    Throttle position

    Throttle position sensor

    ~

    I

    Inhibitor switch (A/T models)/
    Neutral position switch (M/T models)

    Air conditioner operation

    Air conditioner switch

    Vehicle speed sensor

    Cooling fan relay

    Load switch’

    Blower fan switch

    ECM
    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    !

    IACV-AAC valve

    I

    Power steering load signal

    Power steering oil pressure switch

    I Battery

    Park/Neutral position

    ~

    Battery voltage

    Vehicle speed

    Cooling fan operation

    Electrical load

    Blower fan operation

    ‘: Rear window defogger switch and headlamp switch.

    This system automatically
    controls engine idle speed to a specified level. Idle speed is controlled
    through fine adjustment of the amount of air which bypasses the throttle valve via IACV-AAC valve. The
    IACV-AAC valve opens and closes (except for Europe and Israel), or repeats ON/OFF operation (for
    Europe and Israel), according to the signal sent from the ECM. The camshaft position sensor detects
    the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the IACV-AAC valve so
    that engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the
    lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warm up, deceleration, and
    engine load (air conditioner,
    power steering and cooling fan operation).

    COMPONENT

    DESCRIPTION

    IACV-AAC valve —

    Except for Europe and Israel

    The IACV-AAC valve is moved by open and close signals from
    the ECM. When the open signal is sent to the valve, the amount
    of air that will flow through the valve increases. The more air
    that flows through the valve, the higher the idle speed. When
    the close signal is sent to the valve. the amount of air
    decreases.

    EC-150

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    ~
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
    Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d)
    IACV-AAC valve —

    For Europe and Israel

    The IACV-AAC valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM.
    The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of air that will
    flow through the valve. The more air that flows through the
    valve, the higher the idle speed.

    EC-151

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    [EJ
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
    Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d)

    EC-AAC/V-01

    10A

    1251
    IIN~91

    FUSE

    Refer

    to EL-POWER.

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    ~

    @: For Europe and Israel
    @: Except for @

    BR
    I

    ~——-~
    BR

    -:

    Detectable
    line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line
    for DTC

    -:

    BR

    ~T

    T@

    @~

    ~@
    BR

    BR

    m

    IACVAAC
    VALVE

    ~

    flQ): @

    BR

    BR

    3

    IACVAAC
    VALVE

    QID:@

    ~1!4J

    ~

    SB

    SB

    Ii1t3n
    I5C

    PU/W

    5B

    PU/W

    5B

    Ii1t3nffiru
    ISC

    ISC

    -C

    -0

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    (IT)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    rn’ 11fi] @
    3456

    W

    (ill II~
    4567B

    @
    W

    ~rn

    @ BR

    ~@
    ~BR

    HEC043

    EC-152

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NO~-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    []K]
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
    Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d)
    GA 16DE for Australia

    EC-AAC/V-01

    FUSE
    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    lOA

    1251

    Refer

    to EL-POWER.

    ~

    IIN;91
    BR

    .I

    _.

    Detectable

    line

    for DTC
    -:

    BR

    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    IrfJl@

    em

    BR

    I

    BR
    3

    IACVAAC

    VALVE

    CEID

    4=Uli4=ll

    ~

    PU/W

    58

    PU/W

    58

    ~~
    ISC

    ISC

    -c

    -0

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    fIjl I I~ (IT)
    3456

    W

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~CEID
    ~8R

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 lOB 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 l1B

    HEC075

    EC-153

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    ffiJ
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
    Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE

    INSPECTION START

    CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
    1. Start engine and warm it up sufficiently.
    2. Check idle speed.
    If NG, adjust idle speed.
    ~
    3.• Perform «AAC VALVE
    ~
    ADJ» or «IACV-AACIV
    ADJ» in «WORK
    SUPPORT» mode with
    CONSULT.
    • Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.
    4. Make sure that idle speed drops.

    ~

    SEF142NC

    Ii)

    ~i5~i5
    dfu

    CillffuID

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Stop engine.
    2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness
    connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminal @
    or G) and ground.
    Voltage: Battery voltage

    OK

    NG

    CD :

    For Europe and Israel
    for Europe and Israel

    SEF233R

    • IACV-AACNSYSTEM.
    LET ENGINEIDLE
    THEN
    TOUCHSTART
    (AiC SW-UGHT SW OFF)

    OR

    ~

    I

    I

    MEF176E

    o

    M
    ~

    3. Perform «IACV-AACIV
    OPENING» in «ACTIVE TEST»
    mode with CONSULT.
    OR
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connectar.
    3. Check harness continuity
    between ECM terminal (ill)
    or @ and terminal @, ECM
    terminal
    or @ and
    terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    GID

    IACV-AACN
    34%
    OPENING
    MONITOR
    CMPS-RPM(REF)
    712rpm
    MASAIRIFLSE
    1.13V
    COOLANTEMPtS
    92°C

    ==========

    (ij

    (F.I

    !:::=====mul===
    NEXT»
    START

    • ACTIVETEST.

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Reconnect IACV-AAC valve
    ~
    harness connector and then
    start engine.
    3. Perform «IACV-AACIV
    SYSTEM» in «FUNCTION
    TEST» mode with CONSULT.

    ==========

    OK
    @

    illU—illU

    ~[]fl[OOWN][Qill
    SEF484Q

    EC-154

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    QD,@orQD,
    @
    • 10A fuse
    • Harness for open or
    short between IACV-AAC
    valve and fuse
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    @ : Except

    INSPECTION END

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    [ill
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
    Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d)
    [!J For Europe and Israel

    ~io
    1=1

    =E=CM=19’CONNECTORII

    ~io
    cffu

    @

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (IACV-AAC valve).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    below.

    113

    NG

    Replace IACV-AAC valve.

    OK

    Except for Europe and Israel

    ~io

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.

    II

    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    or the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    SEF150R

    COMPONENT

    INSPECTION

    IACV-AAC valve —

    Except for Europe and Israel

    Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
    • Check resistance between terminals @ and
    @.
    Resistance:
    50 — 1000 [at 25°C (7rF)]

    AEC845

    IACV-AAC VALVE —

    For Europe and Israel

    Check IACV-AAC valve resistance.
    Resistance:
    Approximately 100 [at 25°C (77°F))

    Check plunger for seizing or sticking.

    EC-155

    CID, CID and

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Cooling Fan Control
    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Vehicle speed

    Vehicle speed sensor

    EGM
    Engine coolant temperature

    Air conditioner

    (EGGS
    control
    module)

    Engine coolant temperature

    sensor

    Air conditioner

    switch

    Gooling
    fan
    relay(s)

    «ON» signal

    MIT MODELS
    The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature,
    air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 2-step control [ON/OFF].

    and

    Operation
    For Europe with daytime light system
    E~
    ::J

    Air conditioner switch Is «OFF».

    0

    ~Z;
    2io
    E
    ~
    ~

    ~ iL

    /,

    :v ()
    0.0

    E

    ~

    95 (203)

    95 (203)

    o
    Gl

    c

    w

    /’/»

    !~~ 11’l1/1~~~

    100 (212)

    ‘0
    o

    c
    ‘0>

    Air conditioner switch Is «ON».

    r

    r

    20

    80

    .~

    (12) (50)
    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
    D :Cooling fans do not operate.

    20
    80
    (12) (50)
    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

    ill

    EZ2l : Cooling

    fans operate.
    SEF902P

    For Europe without daytime light system and Australia
    Gl_

    2~
    ., :v0.0()

    E

    ~
    ~

    ‘0
    o
    o

    Air conditioner switch Is «OFF»,

    Air conditioner switch Is «ON»,

    105 (221)
    95 (203)

    100 (212)

    91 (196)

    Gl

    c
    ‘0>
    c

    w

    20
    (12)

    80
    (50)

    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

    D :Cooling

    20

    80

    (12)

    (50)

    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

    fans do not operate.

    EC-156

    ~

    : Cooling fans operate.

    SEF649MB

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)
    AIT MODELS
    The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to thevehicle speed, engine coolant temperature,
    air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF],

    and

    Operation
    For Europe with daytime light system
    Air conditioner switch Is «OFF».

    ~ iL
    ::J

    e;-

    105 (221)

    Air conditioner switch Is «ON».

    0

    105 (221)

    ~o

    100 (212)

    C

    95 (203)

    E

    ~

    100 (212)

    C

    95 (203)

    c

    i

    ~

    ~
    00
    00
    (12)
    (50)
    tD
    (12)
    (50)
    UJ
    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
    Cooling fans do not operate. ~:
    Cooling fans operate at «Low» speed. ~:
    Cooling fans operate at «High» speed.

    o:

    SEF904P

    For Europe without daytime

    light system and Australia

    Air conditioner switch Is «OFF».

    ~~
    ::J

    ~

    ‘0
    o
    ()
    Q)

    c

    Air conditioner switch is «ON»,

    0

    105 (221)

    (;j….
    0 105 (221)
    ~o

    100 (212)

    E
    2

    100 (212)

    95 (203)

    C

    95 (203)

    91 (196)

    ‘0
    o
    ()

    c

    o:

    SEF905P

    EC-157

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)

    EC-COOL/F-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START

    BATTERY (Via
    fusible
    link)

    FUSE
    BLOCK
    (JIB)
    (E106)

    10A

    1251

    (1):

    (8):

    Refer
    to
    EL-POWER.

    30A

    @:

    IT]

    IQ~OI

    @:

    LHD models
    RHO models
    LHD AIT models
    for Europe without
    daytime
    light
    system
    Except @

    GY

    t:}
    9-I—@————I!’ ‘$1
    I ——0—<])———-

    BR

    GY

    BR

    SR

    Next

    page

    ~

    GY

    nU

    FAN
    COOLING
    RELAY-1

    lki=U~rn>

    LG/R

    I

    00 L~

    G/B

    ‘ ———0—<1»——..

    1I1¥J1

    -I9>}

    -~@———-_

    •..
    LG

    RFRL

    RFRH

    ldoll

    B

    LG

    -:

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    -:

    Ne x t page

    E

    Detectable
    line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line
    for DTC

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    +
    1

    @:@

    B

    I
    ————CED

    2

    COOLING
    FAN
    MOTOR-2

    ll4JI

    B

    LG/R

    m

    m
    COOLING
    FAN
    MOTOR-1

    m:@

    I

    LG/R~g
    r:::!::, ‘l:!::!3’

    page

    G!B

    rFh

    I~I
    LG/R

    -i9> Next

    T—

    1$
    ~

    G/B

    @

    L

    @)
    W

    5

    @

    @~
    GY ,

    GY

    I ~

    —-0——0-‘.
    B
    -!~

    B

    -!(E51)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    lmf

    2

    57

    3 6

    rn
    BR

    ~

    mJ

    @
    GY ,

    @Z)
    GY ,

    (E303)

    GY ,

    (E304)

    :

    ::t}

    Next page

    GY

    n

    u

    FAN
    COOLING

    RELAY-1

    ~~~

    I ..’———0—<:£)——-

    LG/R G/B

    2rL CHID

    (~II (il
    G/B

    LG1/R

    G/B

    FAN
    COOLING
    MOTOR-1
    ~:

    5

    110 111 112
    116 117 118

    :

    G/OR

    I¥J’@

    <:A>:

    G/OR

    @:
    @:
    @:

    :

    ~

    I

    G/OR

    1$1 ~~~1) 1$1~~~1)

    -:

    G/OR

    *_.I _T
    O—: <:A>

    2

    l4=Jl
    B

    NEUTRAL

    POSITION
    SWITCH
    OTHER — ~

    @:

    4J
    B

    A
    (E20f) ~

    I———(H)-O-

    B

    ~

    B

    ,.
    B

    ~

    B

    ~

    @rn
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    ~
    ~

    (E20t)
    B

    ~

    (E222)

    ~

    GY

    —O—‘-,
    B
    ~
    ~

    B
    ~
    @D
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~

    (222)

    ~

    GY

    fTIffiI

    EVAP canister
    purge control

    DESCRIPTION

    The EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve responds to
    signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground)
    signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will
    then move to cut the vacuum signal (from the intake manifc,ld
    to the EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve).
    When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the vacuum signal passes
    through the solenoid valve. The signal then reaches the EVAP
    canister purge control solenoid valve.

    SEF240PG

    EC-179

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    ~
    EVAP Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve
    (Cont’d)
    MIl models except for Europe and Israel

    EC-PGC/V-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START
    10A

    1251

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    ~

    _.
    -:

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    BR

    IlIDl

    W

    F -;

    tl

    I
    I
    I
    I

    W.~-~In
    I
    I

    :

    OR
    ~
    02H

    mn
    02S

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-6

    @

    ECM

    B

    8

    I

    (Eg~iROL
    MODULE)

    (IT)

    Bjl
    Illjj @
    3456
    W

    ~

    ~GY

    ~cw

    [I[I]1]I[ill]

    ..J

    …1..
    __

    1
    8

    (ffi)(ffi)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    GY

    HEC048

    EC-189

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) (Co nt’ d)
    GA16DE for Australia

    (A/T models)

    EC-H02S-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START
    10A

    rnJ

    FUSE
    BLOCK
    (J/B)

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    ~

    IN~OI
    BR/Y

    -:

    Detectable

    I

    -:

    Non-detectable

    BR/Y

    for DTC

    line

    line for DTC

    I$I~
    @

    BR/Y

    I

    BR/Y

    rn

    ~

    OR

    HEATEO
    OXYGEN
    SENSOR

    <0

    Ibi=ll
    W

    ~

    ;

    tl

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    W.~~~
    :

    OR

    uil5il

    rr16il

    02H

    02S

    JOINT

    CONNECTOR-6

    CW

    ECM

    In

    B B B

    ,_I.J

    (~g~¥ROL
    MODULE)

    1_

    -L

    ~

    (IT)

    Refer to last page

    ~III’ti}
    3456

    @
    W

    ~cw
    IIITIIII[ll!]

    (Foldout

    page) .

    GY

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118
    HEeDBD

    EC-190

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) (Cont’d)
    The heated oxygen sensor is placed into the exhaust manifold.
    It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared
    to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor has a closed-end
    tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
    from approximately 1V in richer conditions to
    in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM.
    The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the
    ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to

    av

    L

    av.

    Healer pad
    Zirconia
    tube

    Isolalion
    bearing

    SEF406H

    2:
    :>

    1

    Q)

    Ol

    ~

    0
    >

    ::;
    c.
    ::;
    0

    ,,»-0

    Rich-

    Ideal ratio

    _

    Lean

    Mixlure ratio
    SEF288D

    m

    DIAGNOSTIC

    INSPECTION START

    ACCELERATE TO 2000
    RPM AND HOLD THEN
    TOUCH START

    I£J

    1800

    2200

    2000

    II

    NEXT

    START

    ~J
    SEF815L

    m *

    PROCEDURE

    MIXTURE RATIO TEST.

    CHECK OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT.
    1) Start engine and warm it up sufficiently.
    (F.i 2) Perform «MIXTURE RATIO
    ~
    TEST» in «FUNCTION TEST»
    mode with CONSULT.
    OR

    MONITOR

    *

    NO FAIL

    CMPS.RPM (REF)
    MIR FIC MNT

    (F.i

    D

    ~

    2000rpm
    RICH

    fti>
    ~

    I

    RECORD

    SEF522Q

    ……..
    e»,/

    I /

    CHECK-

    «,/

    2) Make sure that «M/R FIC
    MNT» in «DATA MONITOR»
    mode indicates «RICH» and
    «LEAN» periodically more
    than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm.
    OR

    2) Stop engine and set ECM
    Diagnostic Test Mode /I
    (Heated oxygen sensor monitor).
    3) Restart engine and run it at
    about 2,000 rpm for about 2
    minutes under no-load.
    4) Keep engine speed at 2,000
    rpm and make sure that the
    malfunction indicator lamp on
    the instrument panel goes on
    and off more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
    NG

    ……..

    /

    I

    @

    Malfunction indicator
    lamp
    SEF051PA

    EC-191

    OK

    INSPECTION END

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) (Cont’d)
    @

    1

    I;)

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Stop engine.
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector
    and heated oxygen sensor harness
    connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ or @ and terminal

    ~
    ~

    ~i5
    Il

    46

    @:
    @:

    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    ~i5
    cilltD

    ‘QcoNNECTORII

    ECM

    19

    For Australia NT models
    SEF181R

    For Europe and Israel

    Repair harness or connectors.

    @.

    SEF180R

    I;)

    NG

    —.

    1

    0K

    CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
    HEATER CIRCUIT.
    1. Reconnect harness connectors.
    2. Start engine.
    3. Check voltage between ECM terminal
    @ (For Europe and Israel) or @
    (For Australia AfT models) and
    ground with CONSULTor tester
    under the following conditions.
    Voltage:
    Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm
    Approximately OV
    Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm
    Battery voltage

    OK

    —.

    Go to «CHECK
    COMPONENT».

    NG

    [!J

    SEF646P

    For Europe and Israel, and GA15DE.L.J
    engine models
    Engine ground @, @
    ~
    ~

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Stop engine.
    2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor
    harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminal @
    and ground.
    Voltage: Battery voltage

    ——

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    aD,@
    • 10A fuse
    • Harness for open or
    short between heated
    oxygen sensor and
    fuse
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    ‘1

    .~

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    3, Check harness continuity between
    terminal G) and ECM terminal @
    (For Europe and Israel) or Gill (For
    Australia AfT models) .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    t

    OK

    ,~

    NG

    ~

    C/

    Power steering»,
    fluid reservoir __

    W~

    ~

    :’C»»,,
    EC-192

    NG

    ——…

    Repair harness or connectors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) (Cont’d)
    @

    Loosen and retighten engine ground
    screws.
    OK

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Heated oxygen sensor heater).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    below.

    NG

    Replace heated oxygen
    sensor.

    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness conne~tors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    or the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Replace heated oxygen sensor.

    COMPONENT

    INSPECTION

    Heated oxygen sensor heater

    DISCONNECT

    I~J

    00
    SEF586Q

    Check resistance between terminals
    @ and CD.
    Resistance: 2.3 — 4.3Q at 25°C (77°F)
    Check continuity between terminals
    @ and CD, @ and @.
    Continuity should not exist.
    If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensor.
    CAUTION:

    Discard any oxygen sensor which has been dropped from
    a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface
    such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

    EC-193

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Oxygen Sensor (02S)
    Except for Europe and Israel

    EC-02S-01
    _.

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    line

    for DTC
    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    em

    02S

    ~

    Detectable

    w

    ~,——….

    (-

    1
    1
    I

    I
    I
    1
    1

    I
    I
    I
    1
    1
    I

    1
    I
    I
    1
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    rn

    JOINT

    CONNECTOR-6
    @

    1

    I
    I
    1

    I
    I

    _I
    -)

    w

    rn

    8

    OXYGEN
    SENSOR
    @

    n

    8

    8

    i.J
    1
    m m

    ~@

    rn:II.ITIIillJ

    GY

    HEC049

    EC-194

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Oxygen Sensor (02S) (Coni’ d)
    GA16DE for Australia

    (M/T

    models)

    EC-02S-01

    Detectable line
    for OTC
    Non-detectable
    line for OTC

    -:

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    -:

    Q)

    OJ

    .!!1

    ~
    ‘5

    0-

    ‘5

    o

    ,’—

    o
    Rich

    _

    Ideal ratio
    Mixture

    Lean

    ratio
    SEF288D

    m

    DIAGNOSTIC

    INSPECTION START

    ACCELERATETO 2CXXJ
    RPM AND HOLD THEN
    TOUCH START

    ~

    2CXXJ 2200

    1800

    II

    NEXT

    START

    ~J
    SEF815L

    m

    PROCEDURE

    • MIXTURE RATIOTEST.

    1;{

    MONITOR

    1;{

    NO FAIL

    CMPS.RPM (REF)
    MIR FICMNT

    ..!!J

    D

    2000rpm
    RICH

    I

    RECORD

    SEF522Q

    ‘~/’

    /

    CHECK OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT.
    1. Start engine and warm it up sufficiently.
    (F.i 2. Perform «MIXTURE RATIO
    ~
    TEST» in «FUNCTION TEST»
    mode with CONSULT.
    OR
    (F.i 2. Make sure that «M/R FIC
    MNT» in «DATA MONITOR»
    mode indicates «RICH» and
    «LEAN» periodically more
    than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm.
    OR
    ~
    2. Stop engine and’set ECM
    ~
    Diagnostic Test Mode II (Oxygen sensor monitor).
    3. Restart engine and run it at
    about 2,000 rpm for about 2
    minutes under no-load.
    4. Keep engine speed at 2,000
    rpm and make sure that the
    malfunction indicator lamp on
    the instrument panel goes on
    and off more than 5 times during 10 seconds.

    I /
    CHECK-

    I I

    Malfunction
    lamp

    NG

    «-

    @

    indicator
    SEF051PA

    EC-196

    OK

    INSPECTION END

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Oxygen Sensor (02S) (Conl’d)
    @

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Stop engine.
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector
    and oxygen sensor harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ or @ and terminal

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    CD.

    II

    ~Io
    19′

    ECM

    46

    CONNECTOR

    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    II

    ~iV
    @

    19

    OK

    Loosen and retighten engine ground
    screws.
    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.

    @:

    For Australia M/T models

    @:

    Except for Europe and Israel

    Trouble is not fixed.
    SEF182R

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    or the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Replace oxygen sensor.

    CAUTION:

    Discard any oxygen sensor which has been dropped from
    a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface
    such as a concrete floor; use a new one.

    EC-197

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Valve Timing Control (VTC)
    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Mass air flow sensor

    Amount of intake air

    Camshaft position sensor

    Engine speed

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    Engine coolant temperature

    Throttle position sensor

    Throttle position

    ECM
    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    Valve timing
    control solenoid
    valve

    The valve timing control system is utilized to increase engine performance. Intake valve opening and
    closing time is controlled, according to the engine operating conditions, by the ECM.
    Engine coolant temperature signals, engine speed, amount of intake air, throttle position, vehicle speed
    and gear position are used to determine intake valve timing.
    The intake camshaft pulley position is regulated by oil pressure, which is controlled by the valve timing
    control solenoid valve.
    Valve timing control ~

    ‘o'»»oid ,,’,»

    »

    Ii
    Intake air signal (From mass air flow sensor)
    EGM (EGGS
    control
    module)

    Engine speed signal (From camshaft position sensor)
    Engine coolant temperature (From engine coolant temperature sensor)
    Throttle valve idle position (From throttle position sensor)
    Vehicle speed (From vehicle speed sensor)

    Drain ..
    Piston

    «‘- Camshaft (Intake side)

    /
    Return spring

    /

    Camshaft sprocket
    MEF572DA

    EC-198

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Valve Timing Control (VTC) (Co nt’ d)
    OPERATION

    Engine

    operating

    Engine

    coolant

    Valve

    condition

    timing

    solenoid

    control

    Intake

    valve

    valve

    opening

    and closing

    time

    Valve

    overlap

    Engine

    torque

    curve

    temperature

    is 70″C (158″F) or more .

    Engine

    load

    Engine

    speed

    is high .
    is between

    ON

    Advance

    Increased

    @

    OFF

    Normal

    Normal

    CD

    1,500 rpm and 5,100 rpm .

    Engine

    speed

    is 6,800 rpm or

    more.
    Those

    other

    than

    above

    CD Valve

    (VTC) solenoid valve is OFF.

    @

    Valve timing control

    (VTC) solenoid valve is ON.

    f __~

    t

    Effr
    Torque

    timing control

    ~

    L__

    _

    Engine speed

    —+-

    Except for Australia
    Overlap

    (18°)

    Intake valve
    open lime

    Exhaust valve
    open time
    Intake closes

    BOC

    @

    CD
    For Australia
    I~

    TOC

    Overlap (-12°)

    , Intake opens

    Intake valve
    open time

    Exhaust valve
    open time
    intake cioses

    BOC

    CD

    @

    EC-199

    SEF183R

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Valve Timing Control (VTC) (Cont’d)
    GA16DE engine models except for Europe and Israel

    EC-VTC-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START
    10A

    1251

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    Next

    L/A

    + (Aefer
    to
    HA-A/C.)

    page

    L/Y

    1_~_1

    I~_!_~I~~~TIONER

    dJ

    ~~

    Y

    L/R

    •1

    I

    I
    O—

    o~
    ..

    ~L

    k

    l

    ():100
    (MID ~

    I~I

    Y

    Y

    tElOO

    CMID

    ~

    To compressor

    (HOt)

    CHID


    L

    5

    page) .

    CHID , (~fo})

    ,

    :
    *1 …
    -:

    THERMISTOR

    L
    ~

    G

    ~

    (El0l)
    G

    ~

    G

    CHID
    G

    ~

    ~@

    ~

    Ir———

    L

    L

    THERMO
    CONTROL
    AMPLIFIER
    <8[D

    L/R

    I

    m

    THERMISTOR

    ~

    … …….

    LOW

    HIGH

    ~

    NORMAL

    DUALPRESSURE
    SWITCH

    m

    ~

    G.Y

    L/R

    r=!:::,@

    IqJlcm

    I
    ,

    To A/C

    I

    switch

    _

    HA-A/C.)

    r.:::b,@

    ….

    G

    ….

    d=~

    ~

    RIL

    GY

    14.41

    Ii4TI

    THAMP

    ARCON

    —-

    T
    2

    5

    1

    L

    B

    tt—-

    I

    cgw
    W

    ~3

    B/Y +

    r-1

    B/Y B

    1~C~~M
    control
    module)

    B

    t…l
    1
    m

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    2

    IACVFICO
    SOLENOID
    VALVE

    ~CfID

    @)

    I~I

    ill)

    U])

    m
    L/R

    GY

    Ir~’Rll(Elan
    ~

    I

    L/R

    It I

    Y

    r=b~

    Il4Jl <£[)
    Y

    ~CHID

    d:,~

    ICiJI <£[)
    G

    Y

    IDilt

    Irfffil

    ARCON

    ACRLY

    FICO
    lACVSOLENOID
    VALVE

    ~@

    I

    G

    B

    •1-

    B/Y

    I n

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    (IT)

    —————— I
    L

    i-

    IqJ’cru
    L/R

    1r!R1I CE101)

    T

    ~12~~~VIONER
    ~…….
    I@

    L/R
    •1 —1
    L!R

    OUALPRESSURE
    SWITCH

    lk¥J
    G

    A,@

    AIR

    ——-I

    To A/e
    SWitch
    + (Refer to
    HA-A/C .J

    I

    L!Y

    ~G/R
    ~

    THERMO
    CONTROL
    AMPLIFIER
    ~

    LOW

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (J/B)

    B/Y

    B

    t-J
    ill

    +~~CE~M
    control
    module)

    B

    1
    —l
    *3

    I Q(E106)
    3
    1

    FUSE

    l4dJ
    B

    *2 .. ‘@RIL

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    RIG
    RIG

    ‘@W/R

    *3 …
    R

    DIODE-2 ~
    R

    {#Jjf{I}

    RIG
    RIG

    ..J
    LG/B
    6

    I
    R

    rn~ rn~
    O~

    LG/BIGA»?i
    r=b~

    I

    It

    LG/B

    rI

    1@5J1
    H/FAN

    LOAD

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    (IT)

    ——————- I
    ~———————~
    ~@
    ~w

    F1Tffi~
    L

    l4=!J
    B

    LG/B

    I
    IT3n

    W

    ~

    IU/JI@

    R

    rn:rn:rn

    FAN
    SWITCH
    ~

    ON
    OFF—

    ~R em I!4=lJ
    @
    R

    ~

    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    -:

    B B

    I

    B B

    L~ L~
    -!-

    (M68)

    -!-

    I

    B

    1

    (M60) CM28)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page’) .
    ~

    , (E106)

    ~

    HEC056

    EC-213

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Electrical Load Signal (Cont’d)
    GA 16DE for Australia

    EC-LOAD-01
    lOA

    FUSE

    1361

    m
    20A

    BIR

    I

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    ~

    ~

    LIB

    I

    BIR

    LIB

    rrffil

    l

    2ND LIGHTING
    SWITCH

    ~

    OFF …._1ST

    l1JJ
    ON

    :

    AIT models for Australia
    @: AlT models except for Europe
    and Israel, and Australia

    SEF189R

    Voltage:
    Accelerator pedal is depressed
    [Vehicle speed is above
    58 km/h (36 MPH).]
    Battery voltage
    Accelerator pedal is fully
    released
    ApprOXimately OV
    NG

    MEC279BA

    EC-221

    OK

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Torque converter clutch
    solenoid valve).
    Refer to «Electrical Components Inspection» in
    AT section.
    If NG, replace torque
    converter clutch solenoid
    valve.
    OK

    INSPECTION END

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    @]
    Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
    @

    ~i5
    ~
    SEF513Q

    II

    115

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal (ill) or @ and terminal (D.
    Continuity should exist.
    » OK, check harness for short.

    30

    @ : AIT
    @:

    NG
    —.—..

    Check the fol/owing.
    • Harness connectors

    @),-

    0.

    A

    -@—11′

    OD~~O

    ::E
    -Z
    WXW
    IO(f)

    W-‘
    0
    «‘0:
    fWZ
    >0
    -‘U
    UW
    >WW
    cll->
    «‘>
    0::::>—1 0:0:-‘
    O—l
    wo.>
    wo
    f-H
    0:0
    WZ
    >w
    Z-‘
    00
    U(f]

    ILH
    -‘0

    ‘»…

    N

    r

    I

    :::

    ;;

    ~

    II)

    ‘»
    Q)

    wu

    ECM (ECCS CONTROL MODULE)

    (f]
    —I

    Z
    H

    U
    ::>
    u.o.

    r—:l

    l::’:.J

    ~

    ~~

    f-

    (f]

    «(!)

    -u-

    I’~

    -u
    I

    W:;,:

    II

    (1

    0:

    «‘0

    g~
    ~ij!

    zw
    «,(f]

    0::>
    Uf

    om

    ‘»c

    ~
    -u
    ~
    ~
    -u
    ~

    O:(f]

    ~I’

    II
    II

    L

    ~I~~g

    f-

    H

    H

    -‘
    m

    ) -J
    >:::J
    U(!)

    -‘0
    I-Ha:
    I-f-O
    OH(f)
    a:(/)Z
    IOW
    f-o.(/)

    f-Z
    u.o

    N

    II

    a:
    o

    ru

    I
    II
    II
    II

    I
    I

    I

    I
    I
    I

    I

    I-

    i

    II. I ~D

    -,

    0

    c.-U U J

    j

    L

    0
    fU
    W

    I
    U
    I-

    :;:;

    (T)(T)

    11 I

    I

    I

    o~

    ~tO~Ri

    ……
    ~8:::

    >
    U

    u.

    «‘

    U

    «(/)o-<
    W03:
    Zo.(/)

    :::>
    (f]

    -‘
    o

    U
    IU

    (!) ru
    Z
    I
    H
    0:
    -‘ 0

    I

    o

    ij!

    o

    H

    .c

    -@—11’

    HO:
    —I
    OZ
    o
    W(f]
    f-(f]
    (f]W
    o:I
    o:o.u
    fW
    3-‘H
    OH3:
    0.0(f]

    !~

    II)

    ‘!l

    ru
    r—

    L

    ‘»‘»‘»

    >u

    H
    ::E

    II

    O:Z-‘
    HOW

    ‘»

    » a:

    Ctl

    ~
    CD
    Ql

    .c
    f-

    Qi
    ::J

    LL

    SEF306R

    EC-227

    ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
    ECCS Component Parts Location
    IACV.air regulator

    EGR valve
    EGRC-BPT

    valve

    Injector
    IACV.AAC valve
    IACV.FICD

    Pressure
    regulator

    solenoid valve

    Engine coolant temperature

    sensor
    Knock sensor

    Heated oxygen
    sensor

    Camshaft position sensor,
    ignition coil and power
    transistor built into distributor

    SEF307R

    EC-228

    ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
    ECCS Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
    Engine coolant temperature

    ~

    sensor

    IACV.FICD

    solenoid valve

    IACV.air regulator

    Knock sensor

    SEF308R

    EC-229

    ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
    ECCS Component Parts Location (Cont’d)

    L

    Camshaft
    position
    sensor

    Metal tip of ignition coil tower
    (Terminal of secondary coil circuit)

    Terminal for ignition coil

    NOTE: Power transistor, camshaft position sensor,
    and ignition coil have to be replaced as a
    distributor assembly.
    SEF853NA

    EC-230

    ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
    Vacuum Hose Drawing

    EGR valve

    Pressure

    regulator

    VIEW A

    VIEW B
    /-

    Vacuum gallery

    A
    Throttle body ~

    EGR valve

    5
    EGR valve & EVAP canister
    purge control solenoid valve

    SEF309R

    (1)

    @
    @
    @

    Pressure
    gallery

    regulator

    Air duct to vacuum

    to vacuum

    Throttle body to EGR valve &
    EVAP canister
    purge control
    solenoid
    valve

    @

    EGR valve & EVAP canister
    purge control solenoid
    valve
    vacuum gallery

    to

    EGR valve & EVAP canister
    purge control solenoid
    valve
    vacuum gallery

    to

    gallery

    EVAP canister
    (vacuum
    vacuum gallery
    EVAP canister
    intake manifold

    @

    line) to

    (purge line) to
    collector

    (J)

    EC-231

    @

    @
    @
    @

    Intake manifold
    vacuum gallery

    collector

    to

    EGRC-BPT

    valve

    to EGR tube

    EGRC-BPT
    gallery

    valve

    to vacuum

    EGR valve

    to EGRC-BPT

    valve

    ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
    System Chart
    Camshaft position sensor

    Mass air flow sensor

    Fuel injection
    control

    I

    Idle air control system

    Throttle position sensor

    Air conditioner switch

    Power steering oil pressure
    switch

    Vehicle speed sensor

    IACV-AAC valve and
    IACV-FICD solenoid valve

    ~—..j

    IACV-air regulator

    Fuel pump relay

    Fuel pump control

    ~-+

    .

    ECM
    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    Heated oxygen sensor
    monitor & on-board diagnostic system

    ~-+

    Malfunction indicator lamp
    (On the instrument panel)

    EGR valve & EVAP canister
    purge control

    1—+

    EGR valve & EVAP canister
    purge control solenoid valve

    t~
    …..

    Knock sensor

    Battery voltage

    I

    I

    Neutral position/Inhibitor
    switch

    I

    ~1Power transistor

    I
    IACV-air regulator control

    I

    r

    .

    Engine coolant temperature
    sensor

    Ignition switch

    Injectors

    I
    Distributor ignition system

    Heated oxygen sensor

    • I

    & mixture ratio

    I

    .

    ~

    .

    Cooling fan control

    …..

    Front heated oxygen sensor
    heater

    Front heated oxygen sensor
    heater control

    Air conditioning cut control

    EC-232

    Cooling fan relay

    Air conditioner relay

    I

    ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System
    INPUT/OUTPUT

    SIGNAL LINE
    Engine speed and piston position

    Camshaft position sensor

    Amount of intake air

    Mass air flow sensor

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    Front heated oxygen sensor

    Throttle position sensor

    Neutral position/lnhibitor

    I Vehicle speed sensor
    Ignition switch

    Air conditioner switch

    Battery

    BASIC MULTIPORT
    SYSTEM

    switch

    Engine coolant temperature

    Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

    Throttle position

    ECM

    Throttle valve idle position

    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    Gear position

    Injector

    I Vehicle speed
    Start signal

    Air conditioner operation

    Battery voltage

    VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION
    INCREASE/DECREASE
    COMPENSATION

    FUEL INJECTION

    The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector
    is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the
    length of time the valve remains open (injection
    pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a
    program value in the ECM memory. The program
    value is preset by engine operating conditions.
    These conditions are determined by input signals
    (for engine speed and intake air) from both the
    camshaft position sensor and the mass air flow
    sensor.

    In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under
    various operating conditions as listed below.
    < Fuel increase>

    During warm-up

    When starting the engine

    During acceleration

    Hot-engine operation

    When selector lever is changed from «N» to
    «0» (AfT models only)

    High-load operation
    < Fuel decrease>

    During deceleration

    EC-233

    ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    [][]
    Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
    MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP
    CONTROL)

    CLOSED LOOP
    CONTROL

    Feedback signal

    MEF025DD

    The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel
    mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three
    way catalyst can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions.
    This system uses a heated oxygen sensor in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
    adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about the heated oxygen
    sensor, refer to EC-362. This maintains the mixture ratio within
    the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
    This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
    OPEN LOOP CONTROL
    The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects
    any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order
    to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
    • Deceleration and acceleration
    • High-load, high-speed operation
    • Engine idling
    • Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor or its circuit
    • Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor at low
    engine coolant temperature
    • High-engine coolant temperature
    • After shifting from «N» to «0»
    • During warm-up
    • When starting the engine
    MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
    The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture
    ratio signal transmitted from the heated oxygen sensor. This
    feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the
    basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as
    possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences
    (Le., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes
    during operation (Le., injector clogging) directly affect mixture
    ratio.
    Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical
    mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of «injection pulse duration» to automatically
    compensate for the difference between the two ratios.

    EC-234

    ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    ~
    Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
    ..—./
    NO.1 cylinder

    FUEL INJECTION TIMING

    Injection pulse

    —1 0/1

    _

    Two types of systems are used.

    Sequential

    rL

    No.2 cylinder

    ~n~
    _
    ~n~ _

    NO.3 cylinder

    NO.4 cylinder
    ~

    multiport fuel injection system

    Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle
    according to the firing order. This system is used when the
    engine is running.

    —-j

    1 engine cycle

    Sequential multiport fuel injection system

    MEF522D

    Simultaneous
    rL-

    No. 2 cylinder jl

    n
    n

    No. 3 cylinder ]l

    n

    rL-

    n

    fL-.

    No. 1 cylinder jl

    NO.4 cylinder

    D
    ~-

    1 engine cycle

    multipart fuel injection system

    Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each
    engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width
    are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
    The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for
    each engine cycle.
    This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if
    the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.

    rL-

    —1

    Simultaneous multi port fuel injection system

    FUEL SHUT-OFF
    MEF523D

    Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration
    of the engine at excessively high speeds.

    or operation

    Distributor Ignition (DI) System
    INPUT/OUTPUT

    SIGNAL LINE

    Engine speed and piston position

    Camshaft position sensor

    Amount of intake air
    Mass air flow sensor
    Engine coolant temperature

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    Throttle position

    Throttle position sensor

    I Vehicle speed sensor
    Ignition switch

    Knock sensor

    Neutral position/Inhibitor switch

    Battery

    I

    Throttle valve idle position
    Vehicle speed

    Start signal

    Engine knocking

    Gear position

    Battery voltage

    EC-235

    ECM
    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    Power
    transistor

    ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Distributor Ignition (01) System (Cont’d)
    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

    Tp
    (msec)
    1.75
    ~

    A

    1.50

    .~

    3l

    :;
    a.

    1.25

    c: 1.00
    .Q

    ~ 0.75

    E
    600

    N
    1,000 1,400 1,800 2,200
    Engine speed (rpm)
    SEF742M

    The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best
    air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine.
    The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms
    the map shown.
    The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width
    and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this
    information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
    e.g.,
    N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
    AOBTDC
    During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by
    the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
    • At starting
    • During warm-up
    • At idle
    • Hot engine operation
    • During acceleration
    The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the antiknocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions.
    If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM (ECCScontrol module). The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the k.nocking condition.

    Air Conditioning Cut Control
    INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL LINE
    Air conditioner switch

    Throttle position sensor

    Camshaft position sensor

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    Ignition switch

    Air conditioner «ON» signal

    Throttle valve opening angle

    Engine speed

    ECM
    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    Air
    conditioner
    relay

    Engine coolant temperature

    Start signal

    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    This system improves acceleration when the air conditioner is used.
    When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the air conditioner is turned off for a few seconds.
    When engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the air conditioner is turned off. This continues until the coolant temperature returns to normal.

    EC-236

    ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine
    speed)
    INPUT/OUTPUT

    SIGNAL LINE
    Vehicle speed

    Vehicle speed sensor

    Neutral position/lnhibitor

    switch

    Throllle position sensor

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    Neutral position

    Throllle position

    ECM
    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    Injectors

    Engine coolant temperature

    .
    Camshaft position sensor

    Engine speed

    If the engine speed is above 3,950 rpm with no load (for
    example, in neutral and engine speed over 3,950 rpm) fuel will
    be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut
    off varies based on engine speed.
    Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,150 rpm,
    then fuel cut is cancelled.

    NOTE:
    This function is different than deceleration control listed under
    «Multipart Fuel Injection (MFI) System» on EC-233.

    EC-237

    EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
    Description
    EGR valve & EVAP canister purge control
    solenoid valve

    Vapor vent line

    t

    Fuel filler cap
    with vacuum
    relief valve
    Fuel tank

    EVAP canister

    yAir
    ..

    Fuel vapor
    MEF609DC

    The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This
    reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
    The fuel vapor from sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister when the engine is off. The fuel vapor is then stored in the
    EVAP canister. The EVAP canister retains the fuel vapor until
    the EVAP canister is purged by air.
    When the engine is running, the air is drawn through the bottom of the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor will then be led to the
    intake manifold.
    When the engine runs at idle, the purge control valve is closed.
    Only a small amount of vapor flows into the intake manifold
    through the constant purge orifice.
    As the engine speed increases and the throttle vacuum rises,
    the purge control valve opens. The vapor is sucked through
    both main purge and .constant purge orifices.

    Inspection
    EVAP CANISTER
    Check EVAP canister as follows:
    1. Blow air in port @ and ensure that there is no leakage.
    2.

    Apply vacuum to port @. [Approximately -13.3 to -20.0 kPa
    (-133 to -200 mbar, -100 to -150 mmHg, -3.94 to -5.91 inHg)]

    Cover port CID with hand.

    Blow air in port @ and ensure free flow out of port @.
    SEF312N

    EC-238

    EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
    Inspection (Conl’d)
    FUEL CHECK VALVE
    +

    Check valve operation

    0:>

    Fuel lank side

    1.

    QAir
    ..

    Fuel vapor

    ..

    2.

    EVAP canister side

    3.

    Engine not running
    or backfiring

    Idling or
    decelerating

    Fresh air
    Blow-by gas

    -~—

    Blow-by gas during
    high-load operation

    Cruising

    .0

    .~

    Acceleration or
    high load

    AEC923

    Inspection
    PCV (Positive Crankcase

    Ventilation)

    With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker
    cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air
    passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately
    when a finger is placed over the valve inlet.

    AEC911

    VENTILATION

    HOSE

    1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
    2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed
    hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.

    ET277

    EC-240

    air. If any

    BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE

    ~U5e

    Fuel Pressure Release

    box

    Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
    line to eliminate danger.
    ~
    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    J!I} 2. Perform «FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE» in «WORK
    SUPPORT» mode with CONSULT.
    3. Start engine.
    4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to
    release all fuel pressure.
    5. Turn ignition switch «OFF».

    ~~~

    ~11~1-

    Data link connector ~»

    for CONSULT

    t=====/
    • FUEL PRES RELEASE.

    D

    FUEL PUMP Will STOP BY
    TOUCHING START DURING
    IDLE.
    CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER
    ENGINE STALL

    —S-T~-RT-SEF823K

    Remove fuse for fuel
    @ ~: Start
    engine.
    3.
    4.

    pump.

    After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to
    release all fuel pressure.
    Turn ignition switch off and reconnect fuel pump
    fuse.

    SEF921P

    Fuel Pressure Check





    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.

    When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
    Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent
    parts.
    Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
    Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
    Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating.
    Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
    Release fuel pressure to zero.
    Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube
    (engine side).
    Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube.
    Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
    Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
    At idling:
    With vacuum hose connected
    Approximately 235 kPa (2.35 bar, 2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
    With vacuum hose disconnected
    Approximately 294 kPa (2.94 bar, 3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
    If results are unsatisfactory, perform Fuel Pressure Regulator Check.

    SEF034K

    EC-241

    BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
    Fuel Pressure Regulator Check
    Vacuum

    Fuel pressure

    ….
    LTo

    pressure regulator

    1. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum
    hose from intake manifold.
    2. Plug intake manifold with a rubber cap.
    3. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator.
    4. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as
    vacuum is changed.
    Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases.
    are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator.

    If results

    SEF718B

    Injector Removal and Installation
    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.

    Release fuel pressure to zero.
    Disconnect vacuum hose from pressure regulator.
    Disconnect fuel hoses from fuel tube assembly.
    Disconnect injector harness connectors.
    Remove injectors with fuel tube assembly.


    Push injector tail piece.
    Do not pull on the connector.

    ‘nsu’a,or~7

    a-ring~1~OJ’

    ~>

    ~

    InsUlalor~7

    Om~riJ$

    _.
    ~lnjeCIOr
    SEF310R

    Insulator

    6. Install injectors.
    • Clean exterior of injector tail piece.
    • Use new O-rings.

    kJ
    11+-

    1

    ‘I»

    •.
    a-ring

    .

    ~

    FuellUbe~i
    assembly

    ,

    ‘.

    I

    Locale plate
    on this side.

    .

    ~’nsulator
    I

    SEF616N

    7. Install injectors with fuel tube assembly to intake manifold.
    8. Install fuel hoses to fuel tube assembly.
    9. Reinstall any parts removed in reverse order of removal.
    CAUTION:
    After properly connecting fuel hose to injector
    assembly, check connection for fuel leakage.

    MEC710B

    EC-242

    and fuel tube

    BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
    Idle Speedllgnition
    Adjustment

    PREPARATION

    Make sure that the following parts are in
    good order.
    (1) Battery
    (2) Ignition system
    (3) Engine oil and coolant levels
    (4) Fuses
    (5) ECM harness connector
    (6) Vacuum hoses
    (7) Air intake system
    (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
    (8) Fuel pressure
    (9) Engine compression
    (10) Throttle valve





    Timinglldle

    Mixture Ratio

    On models equipped with air conditioner,
    checks should be carried out while the air
    conditioner is «OFF».
    On
    models
    equipped
    with
    automatic
    transaxle, when checking idle speed, ignition
    timing and mixture ratio, checks should be
    carried out while shift lever is in «N» position.
    When measuring «CO» percentage, insert
    probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
    Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear
    defogger.
    Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
    Make the check after the cooling fan has
    stopped.

    Overall inspection sequence
    INSPECTION

    Perform diagnostic test mode II
    (Self-diagnostic results).

    NG

    Repair or replace.

    NG

    Check heated oxygen sensor
    harness.

    OK

    Check & adjust ignition timing.

    Check & adjust idle speed.

    Check heated oxygen sensor
    function.
    OK

    NG

    Repair or replace harness.

    OK

    Replace heated oxygen sensor.

    NG

    Check heated oxygen sensor

    OK

    Check CO%.
    NG

    Check emission control parts
    and repair or replace if necessary.

    INSPECTION END

    EC-243

    function.

    OK

    BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
    Idle Speedllgnition Timinglldle
    Adjustment (Cont’d)

    Em
    Mixture Ratio

    START

    Visually check the following:
    • Air cleaner clogging
    • Hoses and duct for leaks
    • Electrical connectors
    • Gasket (intake manifold, cylinder head, exhaust system)
    • Throttle valve and throttle position sensor operation
    SEF455Q

    ‘~,,/

    m

    I /

    Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator
    points to the middle of gauge.
    Ensure engine speed stays below 1,000 rpm.

    CHECK-

    ,,/

    1

    ……..

    /

    I

    Open engine hood and run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes
    under no-load.

    Malfunction indicator
    lamp
    SEF051PA

    Ii]
    Perform the Diagnostic Test Mode 1 (Self-diagnostic results).
    OK

    ~NG
    Repair or replace components as necessary.

    [!J
    SEF248F

    Ii]

    IGN TIMING ADJ.

    D

    IGNITION TIMING FEEDBACK
    CONTROL WILL BE HELD BY
    TOUCHING START.
    AFTER DOING SO, ADJUST
    IGNITION TIMING WITH A
    TIMING LIGHT BY TURNING
    THE CAMSHAFT POSITION
    SENSOR.

    I

    START

    Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
    Rev engine two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle
    speed for about 1 minute .

    li]1!I

    I

    00
    00

    1. Select «IGNITION TIMING ADJ» in WORK SUPPORT mode.
    2. Touch «START» . .
    OR
    1. Turn off engine and disconnect throttle position sensor harness
    connector.
    2. Start engine.

    SEF546N

    Rev engine (2,000 — 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no-load, then run engine
    at idle speed.

    t
    @

    Throttle position sensor
    harness connector
    SEF785KA

    EC-244

    []K]

    BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
    Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle
    Adjustment (Cont’d)

    Ii

    Mixture Ratio

    @

    Ii

    L

    Check ignition timing with a timing light.
    M/T: 15°::l:2° BTDC
    A/T: 15°::l:2° BTDC (in UN» position)
    NG
    Adjust ignition timing to the specified value by turning
    distributor after loosening bolts which secure distributor.

    AEC804

    0

    IGN TIMING ADJ.

    IGNITION TIMING FEEDBACK
    CONTROL WILL BE HELD BY
    TOUCHING START
    AFTER DOING SO, ADJUST
    IGNITION TIMING WITH A
    TIMING LIGHT BY TURNING
    THE CAMSHAFT POSITION
    SENSOR

    M/T: 15°::l:2° BTDC
    A/T: 15°::l:2° BTDC (in UN» position)

    .

    @

    ~IIJ

    00

    START

    @

    SEF546N

    ~
    1. Select «IGN TIMING ADJ» in «WORK
    SUPPORT» mode.
    2. Touch «START».
    OR
    1. Stop engine and disconnect throttle position
    sensor harness connector.
    2. Start engine.

    0
    Check idle speed.

    @

    Read idle speed in «IGN TIMING ADJ» in
    «WORK SUPPORT» mode.
    OR
    Check idle speed.

    @

    M/T: 750::l:50 rprn
    A/T: 750::l:50 rprn (in UN» position)
    OK

    o


    I- —

    IGN TIMING ADJ.

    0

    CONDITION SETIING —

    IGN/T FEEDBACK

    NG
    Rev engine (2,000 — 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under
    no-load, then run engine at idle speed.

    1.1

    HOLD

    Adjust idle speed by turning idle speed adjusting
    screw.

    ===

    ===

    MONITOR
    CMPS.RPM (REF)
    762rpm
    IGN TIMING
    15BTDC
    CLOSED TH/POS
    ON

    M/T: 750::l:50 rpm
    A/T: 750::l:50 rprn (in UN» position)

    SEF548N

    II

    00
    @

    Touch «BACK».
    OR
    1. Turn off engine and connect throttle position
    sensor harness connector.
    2. Start engine.

    L
    /

    /

    Rev engine (2,000 — 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under
    no-load, then run engine at idle speed.

    I

    -.

    Throttle position sensorharness connector / I

    SEF788LA

    EC-245

    BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
    Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle
    Adjustment (Cont’d)

    mJ
    Mixture Ratio

    @

    1

    II
    Check idle speed.

    00
    SEF913J

    II

    ~MONITOR
    CAS-RPM

    ~NO

    0

    FAIL

    (REF)

    @

    Read idle speed in «DATA
    MONITOR» mode with CONSULT.
    OR
    Check idle speed.

    M/T: 800:l: 50 rpm
    A/T: 800:l: 50 rpm (in uN» position)

    825rpm

    ~NG

    OK

    Check IACV-AAC valve and replace if necessary.

    ~
    Check IACV-AAC valve harness and repair
    if necessary.

    RECORD
    SEF135K

    1<

    MONITOR

    1<

    NO FAIL

    ~
    Check ECM function- by substituting
    another known good ECM.

    D

    CMPS.RPM (REF)

    2000rpm

    MIR FIC MNT

    RICH

    — ECM may be the
    cau se of a
    pro blem, but this
    is r arely the case

    1II111[!]

    (j)
    I

    RECORD

    MEC7118

    ~
    ~~r
    ~~V
    @~
    -~

    Data link connector for CONSULT
    (Connect CHK and IGN terminals
    with a suitable harness)

    SEF909P

    I /

    (j)

    1. See «M/R FIC MNT» in «DATA
    MONITOR» mode.
    2. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm
    for about 2 minutes under
    no-load.
    3. Maintain engine at 2,000 rpm
    under no-load (engine is warmed
    up sufficiently). Check that the
    monitor fluctuates between
    «LEAN» and «RICH» more than 5
    times during 10 seconds.
    1 cycle: RICH -> LEAN -> RICH
    2 cycles: RICH -> LEAN -> RICH
    ->LEAN -> RICH
    OR
    1. Set «Heated oxygen sensor
    monitor» in the Diagnostic Test
    Mode II.
    (See page EC-252.)
    2. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm
    for about 2 minutes under
    no-load.
    3. Maintain engine at 2,000 rpm
    under no-load. Check that the
    malfunction indicator lamp goes
    on and off more than 5 times during 10 seconds.

    ……… ~/»

    CHECK-

    /

    ~OK
    END

    ……

    /

    I
    SEF051P

    EC-246

    NG

    ~@

    BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
    Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle
    Adjustment (Cont’d)
    Heated oxygen sensor
    harness connector

    [][]
    Mixture Ratio

    @

    Check heated oxygen sensor harness:
    1. Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground
    cable.

    MEF031DB

    4. Check for continuity between terminal @ of ECM
    harness connector and body ground.

    ~io
    II

    ECM

    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector from ECM.
    3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor harness connector. Then connect harness side terminal for
    heated oxygen sensor to ground with a jumper
    wire.

    Continuity exists
    Continuity does not exist

    TIcoNNECTORl1
    19

    LEn

    OK

    Repair or replace harness.

    MEC712B

    Connect ECM harness connector to ECM.

    0

    ACTIVE TEST.

    COOLANT TEMP

    20°C

    1. Connect battery ground cable.
    2. Select «ENG COOLANT TEMP» in
    «ACTIVE TEST» mode.
    3. Set «COOLANT TEMP» to 20″C (68″F) by
    touching «Qu» and «Qd» and «UP»,
    «DWN».

    ===MONITOR===
    CMPS.RPM (REF)
    INJ PULSE
    IGN TIMING

    OK
    NG

    Orpm
    O.7msec

    5BTDC

    OR

    Disconnect engine coolant temperature
    sensor harness connector.
    2. Connect a resistor (2.5 kQ) between termi-

    AEC681

    DISCONNFCT

    10

    nals of engine coolant temperature sensor
    harness connector.
    3. Connect battery ground cable.

    Engine coolant
    temperature sensor
    harness connector

    ~

    00
    ‘—

    Ii
    ~
    2.5 k 0 resistor
    A_E_C6_8-l2

    Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant
    temperature indicator points to middle of gauge.
    (Be sure to start engine after setting «COOLANT
    TEMP» or installing a 2.5 kQ resistor.)

    Ii

    SEF455Q

    EC-247

    BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
    Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/ldle
    Adjustment (Cont’d)

    mJ
    Mixture Ratio

    CID

    1

    m

    Rev engine two or three times under no-load, then run
    engine at idle speed.

    m
    SEF248F

    Check «CO»%.
    Idle CO: Less than 10% and engine runs smoothly.
    After checking CO%.
    1. Touch «BACK».

    00
    (j)
    SEF913J

    *

    MONITOR

    *

    NO FAIL

    D

    CMPS.RPM (REF)

    2000rpm

    MIR F/C MNT

    RICH

    OR
    1. Disconnect the resistor from terminals of engine
    coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
    2. Connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature
    sensor.

    1

    NG

    0K

    Replace heated oxygen sensor.

    fa

    an

    00
    I

    RECORD

    MEC7118

    ~~:?_-~

    .

    w=jr

    ~~~~»v

    ~~ -~

    (j)

    Data link connector for CONSULT
    (Connect CHK and IGN terminals
    with a suitable harness)

    SEF909P

    1. See «MIR FIC MNT» in «Data
    monitor» mode.
    2. Maintain engine at 2,000 rpm under
    no-load (engine is warmed up sufficiently.). Check that the monitor fluctuates between «LEAN» and «RICH»
    more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
    1 cycle: RICH —> LEAN -. RICH
    2 cycles: RICH —> LEAN —> RICH
    —>LEAN —> RICH
    OR
    1. Set «Heated oxygen sensor monitor»
    in the Diagnostic Test Mode II.
    (Refef’to EC-253)
    2. Maintain engine at 2,000 rpm under
    no-load. Check that the malfunction
    indicator lamp goes ON and OFF
    more than 5 times during 10 seconds.

    I NG

    ……… ~/’

    I /
    CHECK-

    /

    …….

    /

    I
    SEF051P

    EC-248

    OK

    ,$

    BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
    Idle Speedllgnition Timinglldle
    Adjustment (Cont’d)

    []K]
    Mixture Ratio

    CD

    1
    Connect heated oxygen sensor harness connector to heated oxygen sensor.

    Check fuel pressure regulator.
    (Refer to EC-242.)

    Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit.
    Refer to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 12.
    (Refer to EC-293.)

    Check injector and its circuit.
    Refer to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON
    DETECTABLE ITEMS.
    (Refer to EC-324.)
    Clean or replace if necessary.

    Check engine coolant temperature sensor and
    its circuit. Refer to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
    DTC 13.
    (Refer to EC-297.)

    Check ECM function’
    known good ECM

    by substituting

    another

    •. ECM may be the c ause of a problem, but
    It1IS

    EC-249

    IS

    rarely the case.

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Malfunction Indicator lamp (Mil)

    ‘~/’

    1. The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is
    a bulb check.
    • If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to
    EL section («WARNING LAMPS AND CHIME») or see

    I /
    CHECK-

    /

    EC-370.

    …….

    /

    I

    2. When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp
    should go off.
    SEF051P

    Diagnostic
    Test Mode I

    Condition
    Engine
    stopped
    Ignition
    switch in
    «ON» position

    0
    Engine
    running

    ID

    ~

    EC-250

    BULB CHECK

    MALFUNCTION
    WARNING

    Diagnostic
    Test Mode II

    SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
    RESULTS

    HEATED OXYGEN
    SENSOR MONITOR

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
    HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC

    ~

    Turn

    ignition

    ~

    start

    engine.)

    switch

    «ON».

    TEST MODES

    (Do not

    ~

    Diagnostic

    Test Mode

    I-

    BULB

    CHECK

    Diagnostic
    I

    1

    Start

    engine.

    Test

    MALFUNCTION

    Mode

    I —

    WARNING

    ~yW~r
    ~-~

    Data link connector for CONSULT
    (Connect CHK and IGN terminals
    with a suitable harness.)

    Wait at least

    2 seconds.

    CHK

    IGN

    ~J/~l
    ~-~
    Data link connector for CONSULT
    (Disconnect CHK and IGN terminals
    with a suitable harness.)

    DIAGNOSTIC

    TEST MODE

    SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

    II

    Diagnostic

    RESULTS

    :~~-~
    l~mv
    f!i~
    Start

    ~

    engine.

    Test

    Mode

    HEATED

    OXYGEN

    SENSOR

    MONITOR

    II

    w;ir

    -~

    Data link connector for CONSULT
    (Connect CHK and IGN terminals
    with a suitable harness.)

    Wait at least

    2 seconds.

    ~

    • SWitching the diagnostic test mode is not possible when
    the engine is running.
    • When ignition switch is turned off during diagnosis, power
    to ECM will drop after approx. 1 second.
    The diagnosis will automatically return to Diagnostic Test
    Mode I.

    ~/~~N
    ~-~

    Data link connector for CONSULT
    (Disconnect CHK and IGN terminals
    with a suitable harness.)

    EC-251

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I-BULB

    ~

    CHECK

    In this mode, the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains
    OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EL section («WARNING LAMPS AND CHIME») or see EC-370.

    DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I-MALFUNCTION

    WARNING

    MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

    Condition

    ON

    Engine coolant temperature
    is malfunctioning.

    OFF

    No malfunction.

    sensor circuit malfunction

    is detected, or the ECM’s CPU

    These Diagnostic Trouble Code Numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS).

    DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II-SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

    RESULTS

    In this mode, a diagnostic trouble code is indicated by the number of blinks of the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP as shown below.
    Example: Diagnostic trouble code No. 12 and No. 43
    0.6

    0.3

    0.3

    0.6

    1111

    ON

    OFF

    ~
    0.9

    0.3

    —I~
    2.1

    Unit: second

    0.9

    0.6

    Diagnostic trouble code No. 43

    Diagnostic trouble code No. 12

    AEC490

    Long (0.6 second) blinking indicates the number of ten digits, and short (0.3 second) blinking indicates
    the number of single digits. For example, the malfunction indicator lamp blinks 4 times for about 2.5
    seconds (0.6 sec x 4 times) and then it blinks three times for about 1 second (0.3 sec x 3 times). This
    indicates the DTC «43» and refers to the malfunction of the throttle position sensor.
    In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their diagnostic trouble code numbers. The
    DTC «55» refers to no malfunction. (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART, refer to EC-268.)

    HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (Self-diagnostic

    results)

    The diagnostic trouble code can be erased from the backup memory in the ECM when the diagnostic
    test mode is changed from Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to «HOW TO
    SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES» on previous page.)
    • If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost from the backup
    memory within 24 hours.
    • Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting- trouble diagnoses.
    • If the MIL blinks or «NATS MALFUNCTION» is displayed on
    • SELF-DIAG RESULTS. 0
    «SELF-OIAG RESULTS» screen, perform self-diagnostic
    FAILURE DETECTED
    TIME
    results mode with CONSULT using NATS program card
    NATS MALFUNCTION
    0
    (NATS-E940). Refer to EL section.
    • Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed
    before touching «ERASE» in «SELF-DiAG RESULTS» mode
    with CONSULT.
    • When replacing ECM, inltialisation of NATS V2.0 system and
    registration of all NATS V2.0 Ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT using NATS program card (NATSPRINT
    ERASE
    E940).
    SEF288Q
    Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.
    Regarding the procedures of NATS initialisation and NATS
    ignition key 10 registration, refer to CONSULT operation
    manual, NATS V2.0.

    I

    II

    I

    EC-252

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Malfunction Indicator lamp (Mil) (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II-HEATED

    []K]

    OXYGEN SENSOR MONITOR

    In this mode, the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or
    rich) which is monitored by the heated oxygen sensor.
    MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

    Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas

    ON

    Lean

    OFF

    Rich

    Remains ON or OFF

    Any condition

    Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
    Closed loop system
    Open loop system

    To check the heated oxygen sensor function, start engine in Diagnostic Test Mode II. Then warm it up
    until engine coolant temperature indicator points to middle of gauge.
    Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Make sure that the •
    MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running
    at 2,000 rpm under no-load.

    EC-253

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    CONSULT
    CONSULT INSPECTION

    PROCEDURE

    1.
    2.

    Turn off ignition switch.
    Connect «CONSULT» to Data link connector for CONSULT.
    (Data link connector for CONSULT is located behind the fuse
    box cover.)

    3.
    4.

    Turn on ignition switch.
    Touch «START».
    Program card
    AE930: For Australia

    5.

    Touch «ENGINE»,

    for CONSULT

    t======/
    NISSAN

    +:

    CONSULT
    EE940

    +

    ~

    START

    I

    I

    SUB MODE

    I

    I

    SEF253Q

    ~

    SELECT~S=Y=S=TE=M====

    ENGINE

    SEF895K

    ~

    SELECT

    DIAG

    MODE

    [i]

    WORK SUPPORT
    SELF-DIAG

    6.

    Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure.
    For further information, see the CONSULT Operation Manual.

    RESULTS

    DATA MONITOR
    ACTIVE TEST
    ECM PART NUMBER
    FUNCTION

    TEST
    SEF136P

    EC-254

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    CONSULT (Coni’ d)
    ECCS COMPONENT

    PARTS/CONTROL

    SYSTEMS APPLICATION
    DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

    Item

    WORK
    SUPPORT

    SELF.
    DlAG.
    NOSTIC
    RESULTS

    DATA
    MONITOR

    Camshaft position sensor

    X

    X

    Mass air flow sensor

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Engine coolant temperature

    sensor

    ACTIVE
    TEST

    FUNCTION
    TEST

    X

    Heated oxygen sensor

    X

    X

    Vehicle speed sensor

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Ignition switch (start signal)

    X

    X

    Air conditioner

    X

    Throttle position sensor

    X

    X

    INPUT
    X

    Knock sensor
    lJ)

    ~
    a:
    <
    0~
    z
    w
    z

    switch

    X

    X

    Power steering oil pressure switch

    X

    X

    0
    0

    Battery voltage

    X

    lJ)

    Injectors

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Cooling fan

    X

    X

    X

    EGR valve & EVAP canister purge
    control solenoid valve

    X

    X

    X

    Park/Neutral

    0

    0-

    :!

    0
    0

    w

    position switch

    Power transistor

    (Iynition timing)

    X

    IACV-AAC valve
    OUTPUT

    Air conditioner

    X

    X

    relay

    Fuel pump relay

    X (Ignition
    signal)

    X

    X: Applicable

    EC-255

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    CONSULT (Cont’d)
    FUNCTION
    Diagnostic test mode

    A technician can adjust some devices
    faster and more accurately by following
    indications on CONSULT.

    Work support

    Self-diagnostic

    Function

    results

    Self-diagnostic results can be read and
    erased quickly.

    Data monitor

    Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.

    Active test

    CONSULT drives some actuators apart
    from the ECM’s and also shifts some
    parameters in a specified range.

    ECM part numbers

    ECM part numbers can be read.

    Function test

    Conducted by CONSULT instead of a technician to determine whether each system
    is «OK» or «NG».

    WORK SUPPORT MODE
    WORK ITEM

    CONDITION

    USAGE

    THRTL POS SEN ADJ

    CHECK THE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL.
    ADJUST IT TO THE SPECIFIED VALUE BY ROTATING
    THE SENSOR BODY UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS .
    • IGN SW «ON»
    • ENG NOT RUNNING
    • ACC PEDAL NOT PRESSED

    When adjusting throttle position
    sensor initial position

    IGNITION TIMING ADJ

    • IGNITION TIMING FEEDBACK CONTROL WILL BE

    When adjusting
    timing

    initial ignition

    HELD BY TOUCHING «START». AFTER DOING SO,
    ADJUST IGNITION TIMING WITH A TIMING LIGHT BY
    TURNING THE CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR.
    IACV-AAC VALVE ADJ

    SET ENGINE SPEED AT THE SPECIFIED VALUE UNDER
    THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS .
    • ENGINE WARMED UP
    • NO-LOAD

    When adjusting

    idle speed

    FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

    • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING «START»
    DURING IDLING.

    When releasing
    from fuel line

    fuel pressure

    CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS

    EC-256

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    CONSULT (Cont’d)
    SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

    MODE

    Regarding items detected in «SELF-DiAG
    Chart». (See page EC-268.)

    DATA MONITOR
    Monitored item
    [Unit]

    Main
    signals

    CMPS.RPM
    (REF) [rpm]

    0

    0

    0

    0

    COOLAN TEMP/S
    rOC]or rF]

    02 SEN [V]

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    VHCL SPEED SE
    [km/h] or [mph]

    SATTERY VOLT [V]

    THRTL POS SEN [V]

    0

    0

    0

    0
    0

    0
    0

    Code (DTC)

    Remarks

    • Indicates the engine speed computed
    from the REF signal (180′ signal) of

    • Accuracy becomes poor if engine
    speed drops below the idle rpm.
    • If the signal is interrupted while the
    engine is running, an abnormal value
    may be indicated .

    the camshaft position sensor.

    • The sig~al voltage of the mass air
    flow sensor is displayed.

    • When the engine is stopped, a certain
    value is indicated .

    • The engine coolant temperature
    (determined by the signal voltage of
    the engine coolant temperature sensor) is displayed.

    • When the engine coolant temperature
    sensor is open or short-circuited,

    0

    0

    ECM enters fail-safe mode. The
    engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed .

    • The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor is displayed.

    «rich», and control is being affected
    toward a leaner mixture.
    LEAN … means the mixture became
    «lean», and control is being affected
    toward a rich mixture .

    • After turning ON the ignition switch,
    «RICH» is displayed until air-fuel mixture ratio feedback control begins.
    • When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
    clamped, the value just before the
    clamping is displayed continuously.

    • The vehicle speed computed from the
    vehicle speed sensor signal is displayed .
    • The power supply voltage of ECM is
    displayed .
    • The throttle position sensor signal
    voltage is displayed.
    • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

    • After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal.

    starter signal.

    • Indicates the closed throttle position

    CLSD THLIPOSI
    [ON/OFF]

    0
    NOTE:
    Any monitored
    matically.

    Trouble

    Description

    • Display of heated oxygen sensor signal during air-fuel ratio feedback control:
    RICH … means the mixture became

    M/R F/C MNT
    [RICH/LEAN]

    START SIGNAL
    [ON/OFF]

    mode, refer to «Diagnostic

    MODE
    ECM
    input
    signals

    MAS AIR/FL SE [V]

    RESULTS»

    0

    [ON/OFF] determined by the throttle
    position sensor signal.
    ON: Closed throttle position
    OFF: Other than closed throttle
    position

    item that does not match the vehicle

    being diagnosed

    EC-257

    is deleted from the display auto-

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    CONSULT (Conl’d)
    Monitored item
    [Unit]
    AIR COND SIG
    [ON/OFF]
    PIN POSI SW
    [ON/OFF]
    PW/ST SIGNAL
    [ON/OFF]

    INJ PULSE [msec]

    IGN TIMING [BTDC]

    ECM
    input
    signals

    Main
    signals

    0

    0

    • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the
    air conditioner switch as determined
    by the air conditioning signal.

    0

    0

    • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
    park/neutral position switch signal.

    0

    • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the
    power steering oil pressure switch
    determined by the power steering oil
    pressure signal.

    0

    • Indicates the actual fuel injection
    pulse width compensated by ECM
    according to the input signals.

    0

    • Indicates the ignition timing computed
    by ECM according to the input signals.

    0

    • Indicates the idle air control valve
    (AAC valve) control value computed
    by ECM according to the input signals.

    0

    IACV-AACIV [%]

    A/F ALPHA [%J

    0
    AIR COND RLY
    [ON/OFF]
    FUEL PUMP RLY
    [ON/OFFJ

    Description

    • Indicates the mean value of the airfuel ratio feedback correction factor
    per cycle.

    0

    • Indicates the air conditioner relay
    control condition (determined by ECM
    according to the input signal).

    0

    • Indicates the fuel pump relay control
    condition determined by ECM according to the input signals.

    0

    • Indicates the control condition of the
    cooling fans (determined by ECM
    according to the input signal).
    HI … High speed operation
    LOW … Low speed operation
    OFF … Stopped

    0

    • Indicates the control condition of the
    EGR valve & EVAP canister Purge
    control solenoid valve (determined by
    ECM according to the input signal).
    ON … EGR and EVAP canister purge
    operation cut-off
    OFF … EGR and EVAP canister purge
    operation not cut-off

    COOLING FAN
    [HI/LOW/OFFJ

    EGRC SOLIV
    [ON/OFFJ

    VOLTAGE
    [V]

    • Voltage measured by the voltage
    probe.

    PULSE
    [msec] or [Hz] or
    [%]

    • Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle
    measured by the pulse probe.

    EC-258

    Remarks

    • When the engine is stopped, a certain
    computed value is indicated.

    • When the engine is stopped, a certain
    value is indicated.
    • This data also includes the data for
    the air-fuel ratio learning control.

    • Only «#» is displayed if item is
    unable to be measured.
    • Figures with «#»s are temporary
    ones. They are the same figures as
    an actual piece of data which was just
    previously measured.

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    CONSULT (Conl’d)
    ACTIVE TEST MODE
    TEST ITEM

    CONDITION

    • Engine: Return to the original
    trouble condition
    FUEL INJECTION
    • Change the amount of fuel

    JUDGEMENT

    CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

    If trouble symptom disappears,
    see CHECK ITEM.

    • Harness and connector
    • Fuel injectors
    • Heated oxygen sensor

    Engine speed changes according
    to the opening percent.

    • Harness and connector
    • IACV-AAC valve

    If trouble symptom disappears,
    see CHECK ITEM.

    • Harness and connector
    • Engine coolant temperature
    sensor
    • Fuel injectors

    • Engine: Return to the original
    trouble condition
    If trouble symptom disappears,
    IGNITION TIMING • Timing light: Set
    see CHECK ITEM.
    • Retard the ignition timing using
    CONSULT.

    • Adjust initial ignition timing

    injection using CONSULT.

    IACV-AACIV
    OPENING

    • Engine: After warming up, idle
    the engine.
    • Change the IACV-AAC valve
    opening percent using CONSULT.

    ENG COOLANT
    TEMP

    POWER
    BALANCE

    COOLING FAN

    FUEL PUMP
    RELAY

    • Engine: Return to the original
    trouble condition
    • Change the engine coolant .
    temperature indication using
    CONSULT.

    • Engine: After warming up, idle
    the engine.
    • AIC switch «OFF»
    • Shift lever «N»
    • Cut off each injector signal one
    at a time using CONSULT.
    • Ignition switch: ON
    • Turn the cooling fan «ON» and
    «OFF» using CONSULT.
    • Ignition switch: ON (Engine
    stopped)
    • Turn the fuel pump relay «ON»
    and «OFF» using CONSULT

    Engine runs rough or dies.






    Cooling fan moves and stops.

    • Harness and connector
    • Cooling fan motor

    Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound.

    Harness and connector
    Compression
    Injectors
    Power transistor
    Spark plugs
    Ignition coils

    • Harness and connector
    • Fuel pump relay

    and listen to operating sound .
    EGRC
    SOLENOID
    VALVE
    SELF-LEARNING
    CONT

    • Ignition switch: ON
    • Turn solenoid valve «ON» and
    «OFF» with the CONSULT and

    Solenoid valve makes an operating sound.

    • Harness and connector
    • Solenoid valve

    listen to operating sound .
    • In this test, the coefficient of self-learning control mixture ratio returns to the original coefficient by
    touching «CLEAR» on the screen.

    EC-259

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    CONSULT (Conl’d)
    FUNCTION

    TEST MODE

    FUNCTION TEST
    ITEM

    SELF-DIAG
    RESULTS

    CONDITION

    JUDGEMENT

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)
    • Displays the results of on-

    CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

    Objective system

    board diagnostic system .
    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)
    • Closed throttle position is
    CLOSED THROTTLE
    POSI

    Throttle valve: opened

    OFF

    Throttle valve: closed

    ON

    tested when throttle is
    opened and closed fully.
    (Closed throttle position is
    selected by throttle position sensor.)

    THROTTLE POSI
    SEN CKT

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)
    • Throttle position sensor
    circuit is tested when
    throttle is opened and
    closed fully.

    PARK/NEUT POSI

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)
    • Inhibitor/Neutral position
    switch circuit is tested
    when shift lever is manip-

    SW CKT

    FUEL PUMP
    CIRCUIT

    by checking the pulsation
    in fuel pressure when fuel
    tube is pinched .

    Range (Throttle valve fully
    opened — Throttle valve
    fully closed)

    More than
    3.QV

    Out of N/P positions

    OFF

    • Harness and connector
    • Neutral position switch or

    In N/P positions

    ON

    There is pressure pulsation on the fuel
    feed hose.

    • EGR valve & EVAP canister purge control solenoid
    valve circuit is tested by

    The solenoid valve makes an operating
    sound every 3 seconds.

    .

    checking solenoid valve
    operating noise .

    COOLING FAN
    CIRCUIT

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)
    • Cooling fan circuit is
    tested when coaling fan is
    rotated.

    inhibitor switch
    • Linkage or inhibitor switch
    adjustment

    • Harness and connector
    • Fuel pump
    • Fuel pump relay
    • Fuel filter clogging
    • Fuel level

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)
    EGRC SOLIV
    CIRCUIT

    • Verify operation in DATA
    MONITOR mode.
    • Harness and connector
    • Throttle position sensor
    • Throttle position sensor
    adjustment
    • Throttle linkage
    • Verify operation in DATA
    MONITOR mode .

    ulated .
    • Ignition. switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)
    • Fuel pump circuit is tested

    • Harness and connector
    • Throttle position sensor
    • Throttle position sensor
    adjustment
    • Throttle linkage

    The cooling fan rotates and stops every
    3 seconds.

    EC-260

    • Harness and connector
    • EGR valve & EVAP canister purge control solenoid
    valve

    • Harness and connector
    • Cooling fan motor
    • Cooling fan relay

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    CONSULT (Cont’d)
    FUNCTION TEST
    ITEM

    CONDITION
    • Ignition switch: ON
    START

    START SIGNAL
    CIRCUIT

    JUDGEMENT

    CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

    ->

    • Start signal circuit is
    tested when engine is
    started by operating the
    starter. Before cranking,
    battery voltage and engine
    coolant temperature are
    displayed. During
    cranking, average battery
    voltage, mass air flow

    Start signal: OFF

    ->

    • Harness and connector
    • Ignition switch

    ON

    sensor output voltage and
    .
    cranking speed are displayed .

    PW/ST SIGNAL
    CIRCUIT

    VEHICLE SPEED
    SEN CKT

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine running)
    • Power steering circuit is
    tested when steering
    wheel is rotated fully and
    then set to a straight line
    running position .

    Locked position

    ON

    Neutral position

    OFF

    • Vehicle speed sensor circuit is tested when vehicle Vehicle speed sensor input signal is
    is running at a speed of 10 greater than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
    km/h (6 MPH) or higher .
    • After warming up, idle the
    engine.

    IGN TIMING ADJ

    • Ignition timing adjustment
    is checked by reading
    ignition timing with a tim-

    • Harness and connector
    • Power steering oil pressure switch
    • Power steering oil pump

    • Harness and connector
    • Vehicle speed sensor
    • Electric speedometer

    • Adjust ignition timing (by
    The timing light indicates the same
    value on the screen.

    ing light and checking
    whether it agrees with

    moving crankshaft position
    sensor or distributor)
    • Camshaft position sensor
    drive mechanism

    specifications.

    MIXTURE RATIO
    TEST

    • Air-fuel ratio feedback circuit (injection system, ignition system, vacuum
    system, etc.) is tested by
    Heated oxygen sensor COUNT: More
    examining the heated oxy- than 5 times during 10 seconds
    gen sensor output at 2,000
    rpm under non-loaded
    state.

    • INJECTION SYS (Injector,
    fuel pressure regulator,
    harness or connector)
    • IGNITION SYS (Spark
    plug, power transistor,
    ignition coil, harness or
    connector)
    • VACUUM SYS (Intake air
    leaks)
    • Heated oxygen sensor circuit
    • Heated oxygen sensor
    operation
    • Fuel pressure high or low
    • Mass air flow sensor

    EC-261

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    CONSULT (Cont’d)
    FUNCTION TEST
    ITEM

    CONDITION

    JUDGEMENT

    • After warming up, idle the
    engine.
    • Injector operation of each
    cylinder is stopped one

    POWER BALANCE

    after another, and resultant change in engine rotation is examined to evaluate combustion of each
    cylinder. (This is only displayed for models where a
    sequential multi port fuel
    injection system is used.)

    • Injector circuit (Injector,
    harness or connector)
    Difference in engine speed is greater
    than 25 rpm before and after cutting off
    the injector of each cylinder.

    • Ignition circuit (Spark
    plug, power transistor,
    ignition coil, harness or
    connector)
    • Compression
    • Valve timing

    • After warming up, idle the
    engine.
    • IACV-AAC valve system is
    IACV-AACIV
    SYSTEM

    CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

    Difference in engine speed is greater
    tested by detecting change
    than 150 rpm between when valve openin engine speed when
    ing is at 80% and at 20%.
    IACV-AAC valve opening
    is changed to 0%,20%
    and 80%.

    EC-262

    • Harness and connector
    • IACV-AAC valve
    • Air passage restriction
    between air inlet and
    IACV-AAC valve
    • IAS (Idle adjusting screw)
    adjustment

    ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    CONSULT (Cont’d)
    REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE
    CONSULT has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching «SETTING»
    in «DATA
    MONITOR» mode.
    1. «AUTO TRIG» (Automatic trigger):
    • The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT screen in real time.
    In other words, DTC and malfunction item will be displayed at the moment the malfunction is
    detected by ECM.
    DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously until a malfunction is detected. However, DATA
    MONITOR cannot continue any longer after the malfunction detection.
    2. «MANU TRIG» (Manual trigger):
    • DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT screen even though a
    malfunction is detected by ECM.

    DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected.
    Use these triggers as follows:
    1. «AUTO TRIG»
    • While trying to detect the DTC by performing the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE», be sure to
    select to «DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)» mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment
    it is detected .
    • While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT should be set in «DATA MONITOR (AUTO
    TRIG)» mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
    Inspect the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) suspicious connectors, components and harness
    in the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE». The moment a malfunction is found the DTC will be
    displayed. (Refer to GI section, «Incident Simulation Tests» in «HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT
    DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT».)
    2. «MANU TRIG»
    • If the malfunction
    is displayed as soon as «DATA MONITOR» is selected, reset CONSULT to
    «MANU TRIG». By selecting MANU TRIG you can monitor and store the data. The data can be
    utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.

    I~

    SELECT

    MONITOR

    ECM INPUT

    I

    I

    ITEM

    1

    FROM

    SET RECORDING

    AUTO TRIG

    SIGNALS

    HI SPEED

    MAIN SIGNALS
    SELECTION

    I~

    I
    I

    COND

    MANU

    MANU TRIG

    TRIG

    LONG TIME

    HI SPEED

    MENU

    _

    1========
    __
    l-SE-TI-IN-G

    ll—S-T.-AR-T—

    «SETIING»

    1__
    «AUTO TRIG»

    J
    «MANU

    TRIG»

    A malfunction can be

    A malfunction

    displayed on «DATA

    displayed on «DATA

    MONITOR» screen

    MONITOR»

    automatically

    automatically

    if detected.

    can not be

    screen
    even if

    detected.

    SEF6740

    EC-263

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    Introduction
    Sensors
    ~

    ECM

    Actuators

    ~~.~

    MEF036D

    The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
    control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
    accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper
    and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no
    problems such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other
    problems with the engine.
    It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs
    intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may
    help prevent the replacement of good parts.
    A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A
    road test with CONSULTor a circuit tester connected should be
    performed. Follow the «Work Flow» on the next page.
    Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to
    talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such
    problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms
    are present and under what conditions they occur. A «Diagnostic Worksheet» like the example on EC-267 should be used.
    Start your diagnosis by looking for «conventional» problems
    first. This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an
    electronically controlled engine vehicle.

    SEF234G

    EC-264

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    Work Flow
    CHECK IN

    Listen to customer complaints.

    (Get symptoms.)

    ………………………………………..

    Check, print out or write down, and erase Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
    Symptoms
    collected.

    STEP I

    ..

    STEP II

    No symptoms but
    Malfunction Code
    exists at STEP II.

    Verify the symptom by driving in the condition the
    customer described.
    Normal Code
    (at STEP II)

    ‘1

    ……………………………….

    STEP III

    Malfunction Code
    (at STEP II)

    Verify the DTC by performing

    Choose the appropriate

    ‘1
    …… STEP IV

    the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE»

    .
    ‘2

    action.

    Malfunction Code
    (at STEP II or IV)

    STEP V

    Normal Code (at both STEP II and IV)
    BASIC INSPECTION
    SYMPTOM BASIS (at STEP I or III)

    Perform inspections
    according to Symptom
    Matrix Chart.

    STEP VI

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XXX.

    REPAIR/REPLACE

    NG

    FINAL CHECK
    Confirm that the incident is completely fixed by performing BASIC INSPECTION
    and DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (or OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK).

    ………………………………..

    STEP VII

    OK

    CHECK OUT

    *1: If the incident cannot be duplicated, refer 10 GI section («Incident Simulation Tesls», «HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL
    *2: If the on-board
    DIAGNOSIS

    diagnostic

    INCIDENT»).

    system cannot be performed,

    FOR POWER SUPPLY»,

    check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer 10 «TROUBLE

    EC-286.

    EC-265

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    Description for Work Flow
    DESCRIPTION

    STEP
    STEP I

    STEP II

    STEP III

    Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom
    using the «DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET» as shown on the next page.

    occurred

    Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT) the Diagnostic Trouble
    Code (DTC), then erase the code. The DTC can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP 1/1 & IV.
    Study the relationship between the cause, specified by DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
    (The «Symptom Matrix Chart» will be useful. Refer to EC-274.)
    Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
    The «DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET» is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT to the vehicle in DATA
    MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
    If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. Refer to GI section.
    If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
    Try to detect the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) by driving in (or performing) the «DTC CONFIRMATION
    PROCEDURE». Check and read the DTC by using CONSULT.
    During the DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)
    mode and check real time diagnosis results.

    STEP IV

    If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. Refer to GI section.
    In case the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» is not available, perform the «OVERALL FUNCTION
    CHECK» instead. The DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified «check» is an effective alternative.
    The «NG» result of the «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is the same as the DTC detection.

    STEP V

    Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
    If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.
    If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. Refer to EC-271. Then perform inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. Refer to EC-274.

    STEP VI

    Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes.
    Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) «Harness
    Layouts».
    Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT set in «DATA MONITOR
    (AUTO TRIG)» mode.
    Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with
    CONSULT. Refer to EC-277.
    The «DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE» in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A
    short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. For details,
    refer to GI section («HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT», «Circuit
    Inspection»).
    Repair or replace the malfunction parts.

    .

    Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
    Perform the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» and confirm the normal code (Diagnostic trouble code No.
    STEP VII

    55) is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different
    method from the previous one.
    Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) DTC in ECM.
    (Refer to EC-252.)

    EC-266

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    Diagnostic Worksheet
    There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can
    make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
    In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It
    is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for
    a customer complaint.
    Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one shown below in
    order to organize all the information for troubleshooting.

    KEY POINTS

    WHAT
    WHEN

    ….. Vehicle

    & engine model
    Date, Frequencies
    Road conditions
    Operating conditions,
    Weather conditions,
    Symptoms

    WHERE
    HOW

    SEF907L

    WORKSHEET
    Customer name
    Engine

    SAMPLE
    MR/MS

    #

    Incident Date

    Model & Year

    VIN

    Trans.

    Mileage

    Manuf. Date

    In Service Date

    o
    o

    Startability

    [J Idling

    Symptoms

    o

    Driveability

    o

    Engine stall

    Incident occurrence
    Frequency
    Weather conditions
    Weather
    Temperature

    Engine conditions

    o
    o
    o

    Impossible to start
    o No combustion
    o Partial combustion
    o Partial combustion affected by throttle position

    o Partial combustion NOT affected by throttle position
    Possible but hard to start
    o Others [
    o

    No fast idle
    Others [

    Driving conditions

    Engine speed

    o
    o
    o
    o
    o

    In town

    Low idle

    I

    I

    I

    o

    I

    4,000

    o

    In suburbs

    I

    0

    o

    I

    I

    2,000

    o

    Highway

    I
    6,000

    Turned on

    o

    I

    I

    10

    I

    I

    20

    Not turned on

    EC-267

    I

    I

    30

    I

    I

    40

    I

    ]

    of

    I

    Off road (up/down)

    Not affected
    At starting
    o While idling
    o At racing
    While accelerating
    o While cruising
    While decelerating
    o While turning (RH/LH)

    Vehicle speed

    Malfunction indicator lamp

    o

    High idle
    ]

    [J Stumble
    o Surge
    o Knock
    o Lack of power
    o Intake backfire
    o Exhaust backfire
    o Others [
    ]
    o At the time of start
    o While idling
    o While accelerating
    o While decelerating
    o Just after stopping
    o While loading
    o Just after delivery
    o Recently
    o In the morning
    o At night
    o In the daytime
    o All the time
    o Under certain conditions
    o Sometimes
    o Not affected
    o Fine
    DRaining
    o Snowing
    o Others [
    o Hot
    o Warm
    o Cool
    o Cold
    o Humid
    o During warm-up
    o Cold
    o After warm-up

    0
    Road conditions

    o

    Unstable

    ]

    I

    50

    I

    I

    60 MPH

    I

    8,000 rpm

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
    ENGINE RELATED ITEMS
    Diagnostic
    trouble code
    No.
    MIL
    11

    Detected items
    Malfunction is detected when …

    (Screen terms for CONSULT,
    «SELF-DIAG RESULTS» mode)
    Camshaft position sensor circuit
    (CAMSHAFT POSI SEN)

    0

    • Either 1 or 180 signal is not detected by the ECM for the first few
    seconds during engine cranking .
    • Either 1 or 180 signal is not detected by the ECM often enough
    while the engine speed is higher than the specified rpm .
    • The relation between 1″ and 180″ signals is not in the normal range
    during the specified rpm .
    0

    0

    12

    Mass air flow sensor circuit
    (MASS AIR FLOW SEN)

    0

    • An excessively high or low voltage is entered to ECM.
    • Voltage sent to ECM is not practical when compared with the camshaft position sensor signal and throttle position sensor signal.

    13

    Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
    (COOLANT TEMP SEN)

    • An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is detected by
    the ECM.

    21

    Ignition signal circuit
    (IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY)

    • The ignition signal in the primary circuit is not detected by the ECM
    during engine cranking or running.

    34

    Knock sensor circuit
    (KNOCK SENSOR)

    • An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is detected by
    the ECM.

    43

    Throttle position sensor circuit
    (THROTTLE POSI SEN)

    • An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is detected by

    No failure
    (NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE
    INDICATED…)

    • No malfunction related to OBD system is detected by either ECM or
    AIT control unit.

    55

    the ECM.
    • Voltage sent to ECM is not practical when compared with the mass
    air flow sensor and camshaft position sensor signals .

    *1: This is Quick Reference of «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».
    Details are described in each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.
    Abbreviations are as follows:
    IGN: ON : Turning the ignition switch ON is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).
    RUNNING: Running engine is required for the ECM to detect a malfunctiQn (if one eXists).

    EC-268

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    ill]
    Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart (Cont’d)

    x:

    -:
    *1

    «DTC

    Applicable
    Not applicable

    *2

    Check Items

    CONFIRMATION

    «OVERALL FUNC-

    Fail

    (Possible Cause)

    PROCEDURE»

    TION CHECK»

    Safe

    Quick Ref.

    Quick Ref.

    System

    Reference Page

    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Camshaft position sensor
    • Starter motor
    • Starting system circuit (EL section)
    • Dead (Weak) battery
    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Mass air flow sensor
    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Engine coolant temperature sensor
    • Harness or connectors
    (The ignition primary circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Power transistor unit
    • Camshaft position sensor
    • Camshaft position sensor circuit

    RUNNING

    EC-289

    RUNNING

    RUNNING

    X

    EC-293

    IGN: ON

    X

    EC-297

    RUNNING

    EC-301

    RUNNING

    EC-306

    IGN: ON

    X

    EC-309

    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Knock sensor
    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Throttle position sensor
    • No failure

    *2: • The «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is a simplified and effective way to inspect a component or circuit.
    In some cases, the «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is used rather than a «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».
    When no DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is available, the «NG» result of the OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK can be
    considered to mean the same as a DTC detection .
    • During an «NG» OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK, the DTC might not be confirmed.

    EC-269

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    Fail-Safe Chart
    The ECM enters fail-safe

    mode, if any of the following

    DTCs is recorded due to the open or short circuit.

    DTC No.
    MIL

    Detected items

    Engine operating condition

    in fail-safe mode

    12

    Mass air flow sensor
    circuit

    Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

    13

    Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit

    Engine coolant temperature
    switch «ON» or «START».

    will be determined

    Condition

    based on the time after turning ignition

    Engine coolant temperature decided

    Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start

    30’C (86’F)

    More than 4 minutes after ignition ON or Start
    Except as shown above

    43

    Throttle position
    sensor circuit

    80’C (176’F)
    30 — 80’C (86 — 176’F)
    (Depends on the time)

    Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the engine
    speed.
    Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
    Condition

    Driving condition

    When engine i$ idling

    Normal

    When accelerating

    Start signal circuit

    Poor acceleration

    If the ECM always receives a start signal, the ECM will judge the start signal «OFF»
    when engine speed is above 1,000 rpm.
    This prevents extra enrichment.
    After the engine speed is below 200 rpm, start-up enrichment
    engine speed reaches 1,000 rpm.

    ECM

    will be allowed until the

    Fail-safe system activating condition when ECM is malfunctioning
    The computing function of the ECM was judged to be malfunctioning.
    When the fail-safe system activates (i.e., if the ECM detects a malfunction condition in
    the CPU of ECM), the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP on the instrument panel lights to
    warn the driver.
    Engine control, with fail-safe system, operates when ECM is malfunctioning
    When the fail-safe system is operating, fuel injection, ignition timing, fuel pump
    operation, IACV-AAC valve operation
    tain limitations.

    and cooling fan operation

    are controlled

    under cer-

    Operation
    Engine speed

    Engine speed will not rise more than 3,000 rpm

    Fuel injection

    Simultaneous multi port fuel injection system

    Ignition timing

    Ignition timing is fixed at the preset valve

    Fuel pump

    Fuel pump relay is «ON» when engine is running and «OFF» when
    engine stalls

    IACV-AAC valve
    Cooling fans

    Full open
    Cooling fan relay «ON» (High speed condition) when engine is
    running, and «OFF» when engine stalls

    EC-270

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General

    Descrip_ti_on

    1

    S_R_’

    Basic Inspection
    Precaution:
    Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical loads
    applied;

    Headlamp switch is OFF,

    Air conditioner switch is OFF,

    Rear defogger switch is OFF,

    Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.

    \
    ~

    m

    ~
    SEF1421

    BEFORE

    STARTING

    1. Check service records for any recent
    repairs that may indicate a related
    problem, or the current need for
    scheduled maintenance.
    2. Open engine hood and check the following:
    • Harness connectors for improper connections
    • Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, or
    improper connections
    • Wiring for improper connections,
    pinches, or cuts

    IGN TIMING ADJ.

    0
    CONNECT

    IGNITION TIMING FEEDBACK
    CONTROL WILL BE HELD BY
    TOUCHING START
    AFTER DOING SO, ADJUST
    IGNITION TIMING WITH A
    TIMING LIGHT BY TURNING
    THE CAMSHAFT POSITION
    SENSOR.

    CONSULT

    TO THE VEHICLE.

    Connect «CONSULT» to the data link
    connector for CONSULT and select
    «ENGINE» from the menu. Refer to
    EC-254.

    DOES ENGINE

    START

    START?

    No

    Go to

    (I.

    Yes

    SEF555N

    CHECK

    (ij
    ~

    IGNITION

    TIMING.

    1. Warm up engine sufficiently.
    2. Select «IGN TIMING ADJ» in
    «WORK SUPPORT» mode.
    3. Touch «START».
    4. Check ignition timing at idle
    using timing light.
    Ignition timing:
    15°::f:2° BTDC

    ~

    ~

    1 Warm up engine sufficiently.
    Stop engine and disconnect
    throttle position sensor harness connector.
    3. Start engine.
    4. Check ignition timing at idle
    using timing light.

    2:

    Ignition timing:
    15°::f:2° BTDC
    OK

    (Go to @ on next page.)

    EC-271

    Adjust ignition timing by
    turning distributor.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
    I!]

    IGN TIMING ADJ.

    IGNITION TIMING FEEDBACK
    CONTROL WILL BE HELD BY
    TOUCHING START
    AFTER DOING SO, ADJUST
    IGNITION TIMING WITH A
    TIMING LIGHT BY TURNING
    THE CAMSHAFT POSITION
    SENSOR

    I
    Ii

    @

    0
    I!]

    CHECK IDLE ADJ. SCREW INITIAL SET
    RPM.
    1. Select «IGN TIMING ADJ» in

    00
    I

    START

    • THRTL POS SEN ADJ .0

    00

    ADJ MONITOR •••

    THRTL POS SEN

    ========

    MONITOR

    CMPS.RPM(REF)
    CLSDTHUP

    NG

    Adjust engine speed by
    turning idle adjusting
    screw.

    NG
    —..

    Adjust output voltage to
    0.50V by rotating throttle
    position sensor body.

    «WORK SUPPORT» mode.
    2. When touching «START»,
    does engine speed fall to
    750:!: 50 rpm (AfT in «N» position)?

    SEF546N

    •••

    —..

    OR
    Does engine run at 750:!: 50 rpm
    (AfT In «N» position)?

    O,52V

    OK

    ========
    Reconnect throttle position sensor har-

    Orpm
    ON

    ness connector.

    SEF165P

    Ii
    CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
    IDLE POSITION.
    1. Perform »THRTL POS SEN
    ADJ» in «WORK SUPPORT»

    00

    mode.
    2. Check that output voltage of

    00

    throttle position sensor is
    approx. 0.35 to 0.65V (Throttle
    valve fully closes.) and «CLSD
    THLIPOSI» stays «ON».
    OR
    Measure output voltage of throttie position sensor using
    voltmeter, and check that it is
    approx. 0.35 to O.65V.(Throttle
    valve fully closed.)
    OK •

    ~

    ,
    CID
    (Go to next page)

    EC-272

    1
    RESET IDLE POSITION
    MEMORY.
    1. Warm up engine sufficiently.
    2. Turn ignition switch
    «OFF» and wait at
    least 5 seconds.
    3. Disconnect throttle
    position sensor harness connector.
    4. Start engine and wait
    at least 5 seconds in
    «N» position.
    5. Reconnect throttle
    position sensor harness connector while
    running engine.

    1

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    Basic Inspection (Conl’d)
    @

    CHECK

    (ij
    ~

    fiY
    ~

    IDLE SPEED
    Read the engine idle speed in
    «DATA MONITOR» mode with
    CONSULT.
    MfT = 800:1: 50 rpm
    AfT = 800:1: 50 rpm
    (in uN» position)
    OR
    Check idle speed.
    MfT = 800:1:50 rpm
    AfT = 800:1: 50 rpm
    (in uN» posillon)
    OK

    After this inspection,
    unnecessary
    diagnostic trouble code No. might be displayed.
    Erase the stored memory in ECM.
    OK
    INSPECTION

    EC-273

    END

    NG

    Adjust idle speed.
    to EC-243.

    Refer

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    Symptom Matrix Chart
    SYMPTOM

    z

    0

    i=

    i=’

    SYSTEM
    — Basic engine control system

    l/)

    6′ 0
    ;S
    ….J

    0

    S?III:

    0
    II:

    ….J
    ….J

    :::
    0

    w l/)
    l/)
    w z
    0

    Q

    :r:
    Q
    :r:

    (9

    -l

    Z

    Q
    0

    :>:::

    iJJ

    IZ
    II:

    ::>

    I-

    w

    II:

    0

    z

    ill

    Z

    w

    z

    a

    ~

    II:

    z

    0

    0
    Z
    :>:::
    :>:::

    9W

    W
    II:

    z

    ::>

    ….J

    w

    (!)

    Z

    0::

    w

    l/)

    0

    z

    0
    0

    (!)

    z

    -l

    U.

    (5

    W

    W

    l/)

    l/)

    l/)

    I-

    l/)

    ….J

    B

    II:

    > :::
    O’
    ~ B 0 0 w w w
    u.. Z >< >< > > >
    II:
    w

    r:

    en

    i=’

    is’

    ;:::

    0

    ~
    0 ….
    ~ 0::

    Z

    0::

    Z

    ::.:::

    0::

    w en
    en z
    w 0

    5
    z
    e;
    W
    Z
    ..J

    :r:

    s: ….0
    0

    Q.

    z

    I
    CJ

    W

    9-

    Z

    0
    W

    0::

    w

    0::

    z

    ::::>
    0::

    ()

    ..J
    W

    ::::>

    Camshaft position sensor circuit
    Mass air flow sensor circuit
    Heated oxygen sensor circuit
    Engine coolant temperature sensor
    circuit
    Throttle position sensor circuit
    Incorrect fhrottle position sensor
    adjustment



    • • • •
    • •
    • • • •
    • •
    0

    0

    0

    0

    Vehicle speed sensor circuit
    Knock sensor circuit
    ECM
    Start signal circuit
    Park/Neutral

    position switch circuit

    Power steering oil pressure switch circuit

    0
    0

    0

    0

    0






    0

    0


    • •

    0

    ()

    :2

    0::

    ::::>

    w

    en

    0
    Z

    z

    0

    U

    CJ

    ..J

    ….

    (/)

    u: u:
    w en
    0:: z
    0:: 0:: 0::
    w
    W
    w e;
    u u w w w 1=
    ….
    > > >

    11 18 1C 1F 1H 1R 1S 1M 1J 1L 1K 1T
    ECCS

    W

    Z

    W
    ..J

    0
    0 0

    1V 1N 1P 1X 1Y

    0

    EC-289




    0

    EC-293
    EC-362
    EC-297
    EC-309

    0

    0

    EC-272

    EC-306

    0

    0
    0
    0

    0

    0

    EC-314

    0

    EC-270
    EC-317

    0
    0

    0
    0

    • ; High Possibility Item
    0; Low Possibility Item

    0

    0

    EC-357
    EC-354
    (continued on next page)

    EC-275

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Descrip_tio_n
    Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)

    1

    s_R_1

    SYMPTOM

    z

    0
    i=

    «

    i=’

    w
    a:
    ::J
    en

    ~

    f:::.
    0

    CJ

    Q 0
    ….J

    SYSTEM
    — Engine mechanical & other

    0

    S:?I-

    a:

    «

    a:

    «

    I-

    ~

    en

    a:

    0

    0

    Z

    Z

    Ci Ci
    a: a:
    « «

    :I:

    :I:

    w

    ….J

    ….J
    ….J

    «

    I-

    9 en
    :I:

    CJ
    :J

    0

    a:

    W

    Z

    u.

    Z

    0
    i=

    «

    I-

    a wen

    z
    w

    w

    «

    :I:

    (.)
    (.)

    a:

    9
    CJ

    8
    z

    8

    :I:

    0

    0..

    u..

    0

    0

    e-

    (.)

    0

    w
    :J
    u..

    Z

    0

    :J
    l-

    :.:::

    «

    0

    ….J

    a:
    w

    z

    w
    a:

    (.)

    :2

    z

    Z

    :.:::
    :.:::
    a:

    W

    a:

    ii:

    :.:::

    «

    (.)

    en

    (l)

    0..

    «

    a:

    ii:

    a:
    w
    Iu..

    «

    :J

    a:
    w

    z

    a

    Z

    w

    en

    0

    ….J

    W

    >

    Fuel tank
    Fuel piping
    Vapor lock
    Valve deposit

    Air

    Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline. Low
    octane)
    Air duct

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    Cranking

    0

    0 0

    0

    Throttle body. Throttle wire

    • • • • •

    0 0

    0

    0 0

    0 0
    0 0

    0
    0

    0
    0

    0 0
    0 0

    Air leakage from intake manifoldl
    Coliector/Gasket
    Battery
    Alternator circuit

    0

    0

    Inhibitor switch
    Cylinder head
    Cylinder head gasket

    Connecting rod
    Bearing
    Crankshaft
    Timing chain

    0
    0

    Exhaust

    Exhaust manifoldlTube/Mulfler/Gasket
    Three way catalyst

    0 0 0
    0 0 0
    0 0
    0
    0 0 0
    0 0 0
    0 0
    0 0 0 0
    0 0

    Lubrication

    Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filterl
    Oil gallery
    Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil




    Camshaft
    Intake valve
    Exhaust valve
    Hydraulic lash adjuster

    Radiator/Hose/Radiator
    Thermostat

    filler cap

    Water pump
    Water gallery
    Cooling fan
    Coolant level (low)/Contaminated coolant

    0

    0
    0

    0

    0
    0
    0
    0
    0
    0

    0
    0
    0
    0

    0
    0
    0
    0
    0
    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0 0

    • ; High Possibility Item
    0; Low Possibility Item

    EC-276

    0
    0
    0
    0
    0
    0

    ~

    0

    0
    0
    0
    0
    0
    0

    0
    0
    0
    0
    0
    0

    0

    0

    0

    0 0
    0 0
    0 0
    0 0
    0 0
    0 0

    0

    «
    > > > (l)

    FE section

    0

    0
    0
    0
    0
    0
    0

    0

    >-

    a:
    w

    0

    0

    0
    0
    0
    0
    0
    0

    0 0

    0

    0 0

    a:
    w

    0
    0
    0
    0
    0

    :I:

    a:
    w

    (.)

    «

    Cl

    0
    0
    0
    0
    0
    0
    0

    0

    0

    0

    0
    0

    0 0
    0 0

    0
    0
    0
    0

    «

    (.)

    Cl

    w

    1V 1N 1P 1X 1Y

    0
    0
    0
    0
    0 0
    0
    0
    0
    0
    ‘0 0
    0 0 0
    0 0 0

    • • 0•

    0
    0

    a
    a:

    Reference
    page

    0
    0 EL section
    AT section

    • • 0•

    x

    ….J

    0
    0

    ()

    Piston
    Piston ring

    Cooling

    0

    ()

    Cylinder block

    Valve
    mechanism

    0

    • •
    •0 00
    • 00 • • 0• •
    • 0 0• 0 0•

    • 00 00 0• 00 00

    0 0 0 0 0 0

    Flywheel

    w

    en

    z
    2-

    0
    0

    Air leakage from air duct
    (Mass air flow sensor — throttle body)

    Starter circuit

    Engine

    0 0
    0 0

    «

    0

    0

    0 0
    0 0

    I-

    w

    0

    Air cleaner

    W

    en

    (.)

    0

    0 0

    CJ
    Z

    ….J

    0

    (.)

    x

    0 0

    0

    (.)

    w

    0

    0

    Cl

    z

    w
    :I:
    a:
    w

    0 0
    0
    0 0 0 0 0 0
    0
    0
    0 0 0 0 0 0
    0

    :J

    en enen>

    en
    w

    1A 1B 1C 1F 1H 1R 1S 1M 1J 1L 1K 1T
    Fuel

    «

    :I:

    en

    0

    z

    0
    i=

    z

    :.:::

    a:

    :2

    :J

    I-

    W

    0..

    (.)

    w
    en
    w

    (.)

    i=

    CJ

    Z
    0..

    :J

    0
    0

    ~

    W
    a:

    z

    0

    ….J

    :E z
    az
    en 0.. W
    ….J
    l9
    ii.
    ~
    « w
    ….J
    0..

    I-

    a:
    w
    ….J
    w

    0

    0

    0

    0
    0

    0
    0

    0
    0 0
    0
    0
    0 0
    0

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
    Mode
    Remarks:
    • Specification data are reference values .
    • Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
    * Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
    (Le., Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING. Specification data might
    be displayed even when ignition timing is not adjusted to specification. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the input signals from the camshaft position
    sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.)
    • If the real-time diagnosis results are NG, and the on-board diagnostic system results are OK, when
    diagnosing the mass air flow sensor, first check to see if the fuel pump control circuit is normal.
    CONDITION

    MONITOR ITEM
    CMPS.RPM (REF)

    • Tachometer: Connect
    • Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT value.

    MAS AIR/FL SE




    COOLAN TEMPIS

    Engine: After warming up
    Air conditioner switch: OFF
    Shift lever: «N»
    No-load

    SPECIFICATION
    Almost the same speed as the CONSULT value .

    Idle

    1.3 — 1.7V

    2,000 rpm

    1.7 — 2.1V
    More than 70°C (15S0F)

    • Engine: After warming up

    0- 0.3V …..0.6 — 1.0V

    02 SEN
    Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
    rpm

    • Engine: After warming up
    MIR FIC MNT

    LEAN +—> RICH
    Changes more than 5 times
    during 10 seconds.

    VHCL SPEED SE

    • Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CONSULT
    value

    Almost the same speed as
    the CONSULT value

    BATTERY VOLT

    • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

    11 — 14V

    THRTL

    pas

    SEN

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)

    START SIGNAL

    • Ignition switch: ON

    CLSD THLIPOSI

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)

    AIR COND SIG

    PIN POSI SW

    ->

    START

    ->

    Throttle valve fully closed

    0.35 — 0.65V

    Throttle valve fully opened

    Approx. 4.0V
    OFF

    ON

    • Engine: After warming up, idle the
    engine

    Throttle valve:
    Idle position

    ON

    Throttle valve:
    Slightly open

    OFF

    Air conditioner switch: OFF

    OFF

    Air conditioner switch: ON
    (Compressor operates)

    ON

    Shift lever «P» or «N»

    ON

    Except above

    OFF

    • Ignition switch: ON

    EC-277

    ->

    ON

    ->

    OFF

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
    Mode (Cont’d)
    MONITOR ITEM

    PW/ST SIGNAL

    INJ PULSE

    CONDITION

    • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine




    Engine: After warming up
    Air conditioner switch: OFF
    Shift lever: «N»
    No-load

    IGN TIMING

    SPECIFICATION
    Steering wheel in neutral
    position
    (forward direction)

    OFF

    The steering wheel is
    turned

    ON

    Idle

    2.5 — 3.7 msec .

    2,000 rpm

    1.9 — 2.8 msec .

    Idle

    13 — 15° BTDC

    2,000 rpm

    More than 25° BTDC

    Idle

    20 — 40%

    2,000 rpm

    Maintaining engine speed
    at 2.000 rpm

    53 — 155%

    ditto

    IACV-AACIV

    ditto

    A/F ALPHA

    • Engine: After warming up

    AIR COND RLY

    • Air conditioner switch:

    ON

    FUEL PUMP RLY

    • Ignition switch is ~urned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds)
    • Engine running and cranking
    • When engine is stopped (stops in 1.0 seconds)
    • Except as shown above

    OFF

    COOLING FAN

    EGRC SOLIV

    OFF

    -+

    ON

    OFF

    • After warming up engine. idle the engine.
    • Air conditioner switch: OFF
    • Vehicle stopped




    Engine: After warming up
    Air conditioner switch: OFF
    Shift lever: «N»
    No-load

    EC-278

    []K]

    -+

    Engine coolant temperature
    is 94°C (201°F) or less for
    AfT models. and 99°C
    (210°F) or less for M/T models

    OFF

    Engine coolant temperature
    is between 95°C (203°F) and
    104°C (219°F) for A/T models only

    LOW

    Engine coolant temperature
    is 105°C (221°F) or more for
    A/T models. and 100°C
    (212°F) or more for M/T
    models

    HIGH

    Idle

    ON

    2.000 rpm

    OFF

    ON

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
    Mode
    The following are the major sensor reference graphs in «DATA MONITOR» mode.
    (Select «HI SPEED» in «DATA MONITOR» with CONSULT.)

    THRTL POS SEN, CLSD THLIPOSI
    Below is the data for «THRTL pas SEN» and «CLSD THLIPOSI» when depressing the accelerator pedal
    with the ignition switch «ON».
    The signal of «THRTL pas SEN» should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after «CLSD
    THLIPOSI» is changed from «ON» to «OFF».
    -00″09
    +02″69

    CLSD THUPOSI
    10:22

    ON

    OfF
    Full
    {
    Release

    I

    ~

    THRTL
    10:22

    .

    o
    ~

    POS SEN
    xO.1V

    13

    -00″09
    +02″69

    38

    2,6

    51,

    Full
    Depress {
    SEF673Q

    CMPS.RPM

    (REF), MAS AIR/FL SE, THRTL POS SEN, 02 SEN, INJ PULSE

    Below is the data for «CMPS.RPM (REF)», «MAS AIR/FL SE», «THRTL pas SEN», «02 SEN» and «INJ
    PULSE» when revving quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
    Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary .

    ….

    ,

    .
    …..

    E

    c.

    ‘»

    -8~
    u..~

    • «CMPS’RPM{REF)»

    ,… …»» ..
    ,

    w><

    should increase gradually

    the accelerator

    the pedal without any intermittent

    co_

    o:

    <‘,••»»», ..,..’

    ~
    lO

    pedal and

    should decrease gradually after releasing

    …………

    0:

    ~
    Q.

    en

    while depressing

    ,

    ,

    d

    _

    drop or rise,

    .

    ….. ,..

    Q.Cj

    :EOio

    ()o

    /

    >
    w

    :;re><

    (J)


    !o!::
    0:

    ….

    .0″

    .’:

    • «MAS AIRIFL SE» should increase when
    depressing

    ….•

    «‘-

    «, ••’o,

    «»

    ,

    .».

    ~

    _ ••••_

    _

    .

    the accelerator

    pedal and should

    decrease at the moment «THRTL POS SEN» is

    C’)_

    ~

    closed (accelerator

    pedal is released),

    C{LO
    (J)Cj
    0
    «,,0

    It.

    SEF059P

    EC-279

    m:J
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
    Mode (Cont’d)
    <0

    0

    ,…
    <0

    0 ~
    9 0
    +

    ..lO

    ..z

    w

    0
    x

    pedel and should

    l’)

    ~

    …J

    0

    SEN» should increase while

    the accelerator

    a..

    <0

    pas

    depressing

    decrease while releasing it.

    en
    en
    0
    I0:
    :I:
    I-

    • «THRTL

    <0
    Cl

    lO
    Cl

    Oi

    0

    ,…

    m.

    0

    <0

    ~ ~+

    A

    Cl

    Cl
    0>

    >
    0
    ci

    X

    to

    Cl

    .—-v-.
    <0
    «»»

    z

    w

    en
    Cl

    _…:——.

    lO
    Cl

    0

    Oi

    <0

    ,…

    0

    0

    <0

    9

    0

    b ~

    0

    —….

    I-A

    • »02 SEN» may increase immediately
    depressing

    the accelerator

    after

    pedel and may

    decrease after releasing the pedal .

    0
    Cl

    +
    II)

    c..>
    w
    en ;!~

    :~.
    • «INJ PULSE» should increase when depressing

    w

    II)

    en

    …J

    ::>

    a..

    ~
    z

    j

    ‘.

    lO
    Cl

    Oi

    0

    0

    .

    .-‘

    ~-

    the accelerator

    pedal and should decrease

    when the pedal is released .

    A

    SEF259QA

    EC-280

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    ECM Terminals and Reference Value
    PREPARATION
    1. ECM is located behind the center console.
    For this
    inspection,
    remove the front passenger center console
    panel.

    2.

    Remove ECM harness protector.

    3.

    Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests eas-

    MEF505D

    ily.

    !~
    Thin wire

    Tester probeJ

    SEF3671

    ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR

    TERMINAL

    LAYOUT

    SEF877K

    EC-281

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    [![]
    ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
    ECM inspection table
    *Data are reference values.
    TERMINAL
    NO.

    WIRE
    COLOR

    ITEM

    CONDITION

    ‘DATA

    [Engine is runninQ]
    0.2 — 0.3V
    L
    1

    W/B

    Idle speed

    Ignition signal
    IEngine is running.1
    Approximately 0.7V
    L

    Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

    IEngine is running]
    2

    LlOR

    Tachometer

    Approximately 0.9V
    L

    Idle speed

    !Engine is running.1
    3

    GY/R

    Ignition check

    Approximately 13V
    L

    Idle speed

    IEngine is running.1

    I

    Ilgnition switch «OFF»I
    4

    WIG

    ECCS relay (Self-shutoff)

    L

    0- 1V

    For a few seconds after turning ignition
    switch «OFF»

    Ilgnition switch «OFF»I
    L

    A few seconds after turning ignition switch
    «OFF» and thereafter

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1
    6

    B/W

    ECCS ground

    Engine ground
    L

    7

    G/B

    14

    G/W

    15

    GY/L

    23

    G/R

    Idle speed
    Approximately 13.5V

    Data link connector for
    CONSULT

    IEngine is running.1
    L

    Idle speed

    LG/R

    Approximately 2.5V
    Approximately OV

    IEngine is running.1
    9

    Approximately OV

    Cooling fan relay (Low
    speed)

    L

    Cooling fan is not operating.

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1
    Approximately OV
    L

    Cooling fan is operating.

    IEngine is running.1

    10

    LG

    Cooling fan relay
    (High speed)

    t

    Cooling fan is not operating.
    Cooling fan is operating at low speed.

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1
    Approximately OV
    L

    Cooling fan is operating at high speed.

    IEngine is running.1
    L
    11

    Y

    Air conditioner relay

    Both A/C switch and blower fan switch are
    «ON».

    IEngine is running.1
    LAIC

    switch is «OFF».

    Approximately OV

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1
    13

    B/W

    Engine ground

    ECCS ground
    L

    Idle speed

    EC-282

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    [ill
    ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Conl’d)
    *Data are reference values.
    TERMINAL
    NO.

    WIRE

    ITEM

    COLOR

    *DATA

    CONDITION
    IEngine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    16

    OR

    Mass air flow sensor

    L

    1.3 — 1.7V
    Idle speed

    IEngine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    L
    17

    W

    Mass air flow sensor
    ground

    1.7-2.1V
    Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

    IEngine is running.!

    L

    Approximately OV
    Idle speed
    0- 5.0V

    18

    BRIY

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    19

    W

    Heated oxygen sensor

    IEngine is running.!

    Output voltage varies
    with engine coolant
    temperature.

    IEngine is running.1

    L

    0- Approximately

    1.OV

    After warming up sufficiently

    Ilgnition switch «ON»I (Warm-up condition)
    20

    Y

    Throttle position sensor

    L

    0.35 — 0.65V
    Accelerator pedal released

    Ilgnition switch «ON»I

    L

    Approximately 4V
    Accelerator pedal fully depressed

    IEngine is running.1
    21

    22
    30

    B

    Sensor’s ground

    L

    Approximately OV
    Idle speed

    Camshaft position
    L

    sensor (Reference
    signal)

    IEngine is running.1

    jlgnition switch «ON»!
    24

    ORIL

    0.1 — O.4V

    Approximately 1.5V

    Malfunction indicator
    lamp

    IEngine is running.1

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1
    27

    W

    Knock sensor

    L

    Approximately 2.5V
    Idle speed

    IEngine is running.1
    29

    31
    40

    B

    S/W

    Sensor’s ground
    Camshaft position
    sensor (Position sig-

    L

    Approximately OV
    Idle speed

    IEngine is running.!

    2.0 — 3.0V

    nal)

    t

    Ilgnition switch «ON»I
    32

    PUIR

    Vehicle speed sensor

    Eng;ne «opped and ge., po,;!;on ;, «Neotral position».
    While rotating drive wheel by hand

    Ilgnition switch «ON»!
    34

    BIY

    Varies from 0 to 5V

    Approximately OV

    Start signal
    Ilgnition switch «START»I

    EC-283

    SATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    []:KJ
    ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
    *Data are reference values.
    TERMINAL
    NO.

    WIRE
    COLOR

    ITEM

    *DATA

    CONDITION
    /Ignition switch «ON'»

    35

    G/OR

    t

    Neutral position
    switch/lnhibitor

    «N» or «P» position (A/T)
    Neutral position (M/T)

    switch
    I’gnition switch «ON»I

    L

    Except the above gear position

    I’gnition switch «OFF»I
    36

    B/R

    OV

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)
    OV

    Ignition switch
    BATTERY VOLTAGE

    Ilgnition switch «ON»I

    (11 — 14V)
    37

    P/L

    Throttle position sensor power supply

    pgnition switch «ON»I

    38
    47

    W/R

    Power supply for ECM

    Ilgnition switch «ON»I

    39

    B

    ECCS ground

    Approximately

    5V

    BATTERY VOL TAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1

    L

    Engine ground
    Idle speed

    IEngine is running.!

    L
    41

    G

    Air conditioner

    switch

    Both air conditioner
    switch are «ON».

    switch and blower fan

    IEngine is running.1

    L

    Air conditioner

    switch is «OFF».

    Approximately

    OV

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1
    43

    PUlW

    Power steering oil
    pressure switch

    L

    IEngine is running.1

    L
    46

    W/L

    Power supply
    (Back-up)

    48

    B

    ECCS ground

    OV
    Steering wheel is being turned.
    7 — 9V
    Steering wheel is not being turned.

    I’gnition switch

    «0FFj

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1

    109

    W/L

    Current return

    101

    RIB

    Injector No. 1

    103

    G/B

    Injector No.3

    110

    Y/B

    Injector NO.2

    112

    LIB

    Injector NO.4

    L

    Engine ground
    Idle speed

    Ilgnition switch «OFF»I

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    EC-284

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    []K]
    ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
    ‘Data are reference values.
    TERMINAL
    NO.

    WIRE
    COLOR

    CONDITION

    ITEM

    ‘DATA

    Ilgnition switch «ON»I

    L

    For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
    «ON»

    Approximately OV

    !Engine is running.1
    104

    B/P

    Fuel pump relay
    Ilgnition switch «ON»I

    L 5 seconds

    after turning ignition switch

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    «ON» and thereafter
    IEngine is running.1
    105

    P

    EGR valve & EVAP
    canister purge control
    solenoid valve

    . L Engine speed

    0.6 — 0.8V
    is 4,000 rpm.

    IEngine is running.1

    L

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    Idle speed

    IEngine is running.j

    107
    B/Y

    ECCS ground

    108

    L

    Engine ground
    Idle speed

    !Engine is running.1
    111

    OR

    Heated oxygen sensor
    heater

    L

    Approximately 0.2V
    Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.

    IEngine is running.1

    L Engine speed

    is above 3,200 rpm.

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.

    L

    11 — 14V
    Idle speed

    lEngine is running.1
    113

    SB

    IACV-AAC valve
    ~

    Sle«;ng wheel ;, be;ng I»med
    Air conditioner is operating.
    Rear window defogger switch is «ON».
    Lighting switch is «ON».

    2 — 11V

    !Engine is running.1

    115

    P/B

    Torque converter
    clutch solenoid valve
    (A/T models)

    L

    Approximately OV
    Idle speed

    IEngine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    L Vehicle

    speed is 60 km/h (37 MPH) or
    more in «D» position

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1
    116

    BIY

    ECCS ground

    L

    Engine ground
    Idle speed

    EC-285

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPL V
    Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit

    EC-MAIN-01
    7.5A

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    30A

    OJ

    [ill
    W!L
    d:::. (E10n
    I~I (MS)

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    W!L

    *@

    ST IGNITION
    SWITCH

    ~@
    W!L

    ~

    I

    e—-‘—,

    ~

    W/L

    B/R

    W/L

    I

    IT ]1

    B/R

    ECCS
    ~ RELAY

    Ibi=Jl

    Ibi=Jl

    WIG

    W/R

    I

    ‘—I
    W/L

    W/L

    WIG

    14’61

    h1~1

    BATT

    CRTN

    m

    SSOFF

    d:::.(llii)
    I~I(]ID

    B/R

    @

    +—~

    ICDI@
    =r@

    B/R

    I

    W/R

    W/R

    B/R

    ‘;sl

    171

    ~

    VB

    VB

    IGN
    SW

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL

    GNO

    GNO

    GND

    GND

    GND

    GND

    GND

    -C

    -C

    -E

    -E

    -E

    -I

    -I

    13.91 I~SI
    B

    B

    11~71 1I1~1

    11~61

    ~

    B/Y

    B/Y

    B/W

    B/Y

    MODULE)

    em

    ~
    B/W

    L , I—i ‘-e-e-=e—-lI
    I

    I

    I

    .~
    L,
    +
    *
    B

    B

    ill

    CF13)

    Acrn
    ~IIIllij @ T
    3456

    W

    L

    B B/Y

    I

    I

    -:
    -:

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    ~

    [mJID

    (E114)
    W

    em
    L

    HEC002

    EC-286

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
    []K]
    Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Co nt’ d)

    ~i)
    Il

    ECM

    Er

    CONNECTOR

    INSPECTION START

    II

    36

    No

    Start engine.
    Is engine running?

    —+

    CHECK
    PL V-I.

    POWER

    SUP-

    1. Turn ignition switch
    «ON».

    Yes

    2. Check voltage between
    ECM terminal @ and
    ground with CONSULT
    or tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage
    If NG, check the following .
    • Harness connectors

    MEC746B

    ~i)
    II

    ECM

    @,@

    EfCONNECTORI!

    • Harness connectors

    ~$

    Lwt

    OO,@l)
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM
    and ignition switch
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.
    MEC714B

    ~OK

    III

    Go to
    «CHECK
    GROUND CIRCUIT» on
    next page.

    Il

    ECM

    ~

    CONNECTOR

    II

    38′ 47

    CHECK

    «—.—‘

    POWER

    SUPPL V.II.

    1. Stop engine.
    2. Check voltage between ECM terminals
    @l , (ill) and ground with CONSULT
    or tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage
    MEC747BI

    MEC748B

    • Harness connectors

    @,@
    • Harness connectors

    OO,@l)
    • 7.5A fuse
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM
    and battery
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    CHECK

    @

    NG

    —+ Check the following.

    POWER

    SUPPL V-III.

    1. Turn ignition switch «ON» and then
    «OFF».
    2. Check voltage between ECM terminals
    @, @ and ground with CONSULT
    or tester.
    Voltage:
    After turning ignition switch «OFF»,
    battery voltage will exist for a few
    seconds, then drop to approximately
    QV.

    OK

    —+ Go to

    III

    «CHECK
    GROUND CIRCUIT» on
    next page.

    Case-1: Battery voltage
    does not exist.
    Case-2: Battery voltage
    exists for more than
    a few seconds.

    NG

    Case-2
    Case-1

    EC-287

    Go to [it «CHECK ECCS
    RELA Y» on next page.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
    [gJ
    Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)
    @

    Ie

    ~IV
    ECM

    ~i5

    E!’CONNECTORI!

    +3

    38.47

    1
    5

    ~

    SEF460Q

    I!]
    CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN ECCS RELAY AND ECM
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Disconnect ECCS relay harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminals @, @ and terminal
    @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    @,@

    OK

    ts
    2

    CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECCS
    RELAY AND GROUND.
    Check voltage between terminals (!),
    @ and ground with CONSULT or
    tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage

    1

    5

    3

    Ii

    ~i5
    ECM

    JO[CONNECTOR

    II

    4

    AEC492

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    Check harness continuity between ECM
    terminal @ and terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    CHECK ECCS RELAY.
    1. Apply 12V direct current between
    relay terminals (!) and @.
    2. Check continuity between relay terminals @ and @.
    12V «(!) . @) applied:
    Continuity exists.
    No voltage applied:
    No continuity

    COO, GID

    SEF090M

    II

    ECM

    .

    ~

    OK
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector.

    II

    CONNECTOR

    6’13’39048’107’108’116

    INSPECTION END

    .

    LEn

    @,

    B

    …»‘J.

    CEID

    WIG W!R

    .I—_.
    I

    »

    WIG W!R

    @

    l'» — ….

    rT

    L

    W!R

    rhU3’sn~
    SSOFF VB

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-6

    VB

    L

    »

    B!W

    ~==~—•
    B!W

    12~1 13.01

    Ii3’n1 1:0 I

    REF REF

    POS POS

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    (Ill I I~
    3456

    @
    W

    T
    ~5

    1

    CF

    3)

    L

    ~

    (112134156)

    rn>
    ~@
    GY
    ITIIIIIIIillI

    B

    B

    B

    1..1
    J
    m m
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    GY

    em
    L

    HEC003

    EC-290

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OTC 11
    Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE

    (DETECTABLE

    [][]

    CIRCUIT)

    INSPECTIONSTART

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».

    NG

    2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor
    harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».

    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    4. Check voltage between terminal @
    and ground with CONSULT or tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage

    SEF524Q

    ~i5

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
    screws.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and engine ground.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    Repair harness or connector.

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

    NG

    Repair harness or con-

    @a

    ( 1121’ij151~

    SEF463Q

    nectors.

    2. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and ECM terminals @,
    @l, terminal @ and ECM terminals
    @,@.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    [!J

    ~15
    II

    Check the following.
    • Harness for open or
    short between camshaft
    position sensor and
    ECCS relay

    ECM
    31.40
    ‘-.,-J

    ECONNECTORII

    f

    ~15

    mmJili)
    ~Q~

    OK

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Camshaft position sensor).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    on next page.

    ~

    OK

    .—

    [fiJ

    .. —

    SEF462Q

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTIONEND

    EC-291

    NG

    Replace camshaft position
    sensor.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 11
    Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (Cont’d)
    COMPONENT

    ~i)ID

    [][]

    INSPECTION

    Camshaft position sensor
    1. Start engine.
    2. Check voltage between camshaft position sensor terminals
    CID, @ and ground with AC range.

    dID

    AEC689

    Condition

    Terminal

    Voltage (AC range)

    Engine running at idle

    @and ground
    @and ground

    Approximately
    2.7V’

    *: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed
    by oscilloscope.)

    3. If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position
    sensor.
    4. Remove distributor cap. Visually check signal plate for damage or dust.
    After this inspection, diagnostic trouble code No. 11 might be
    displayed with camshaft position sensor functioning properly.
    Erase the stored memory.

    SEF887K

    EC.292

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OTe 12
    Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS)

    SEF781K

    Diagnostic
    Trouble
    Code No.
    12

    The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air.
    It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the
    entire intake flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with
    electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire
    is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated
    by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The
    more air, the greater the heat loss.
    Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
    ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change .

    Check Items

    Malfunction is detected when …

    (Possible Cause)

    • An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor • Harness or connectors
    is sent to ECM.
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Mass air flow sensor

    DIAGNOSTIC
    PROCEDURE

    fiii

    1)

    ~
    2)
    3)

    Turn ignition switch «ON», and wait at least 6 seconds.
    Select «DATA MONITOR» mode with CONSULT.
    Start engine and wait at least 3 seconds.

    ———-

    rR

    TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

    OR ———-

    1)

    ~
    2)
    3)
    4)

    Turn ignition switch «ON», and wait at least 6 seconds.
    Start engine and wait at least 3 seconds.
    Turn ignition switch «OFF», wait at least 7 seconds
    and then turn «ON».
    Perform «Diagnostic
    Test Mode II» (Self-diagnostic
    results) with ECM.

    EC-293

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 12
    Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Coni’ d)

    [][]

    EC-MAFS-01
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    -:

    Oetectable line
    for DTG
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    -:
    W!L

    I

    W!L

    iETtITI

    1Fst11~
    ~@

    W!R

    W/L

    ,ctJ,@

    W

    3MASS
    AIR
    FLOW
    SENSOR

    =r(ffi

    W!L

    I

    T-,

    lbjdJlbj:Jlm
    OR

    W!L W!L

    W

    t

    EGGS
    ~ RELAY

    »

    …1

    I!~I
    1ki=JI1’=i=!’@
    WIG W!R

    .I—_….
    I

    »

    JOINT
    CONNEGTOR-6

    ( ….-m=_ ~=P:1
    @

    WIG W!R W!R

    OR

    wtilli1Bnd7n
    SSOFF VB

    W

    w=IT5il~

    VB

    QA+

    QA-

    ECM
    (EGCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    B

    t…J 1

    ~III’fil em
    3456

    W

    ~

    cn.g:oo

    CDODDDJDJJJD

    (ffi)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~@

    BR

    11
    B

    B

    GY

    em
    L

    HEC004

    EC-294

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OTC 12
    Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE

    INSPECTION START

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminal @
    and ground with CONSULT or tester.
    Voltage: Battery positive voltage

    ~i5~0

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    c:u:ffiD

    MEC749B

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF»
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    3. Loosen and retighten engine ground
    screws.
    4. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and ECM terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK. check harness for short.

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    Check harness continuity between terminal CD and ECM terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    if OK, check harness for short.

    ~I() ~Io
    1=’

    II

    =E=CM=B

    CONNECTOR

    CIIfJ1D

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Mass air flow sensor).
    Refer to «COMPONENT iNSPECTION»
    on next page.

    17

    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuits. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.

    MEC751B

    ~i()
    II

    ECM

    ‘ECONNECTORII

    ~io
    (TIffiJ::J

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    16

    INSPECTION END

    MEC752B

    EC-295

    NG

    NG

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    Repair harness or connectors.

    Replace mass air flow
    sensor.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 12
    Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
    ,

    COMPONENT

    INSPECTION

    Mass air flow sensor
    1, Turn ignition switch «ON»,
    2, Start engine and warm it up sufficiently,
    3, Check voltage between terminal CD and ground,
    Conditions

    MEC753B

    Voltage V

    Ignition switch «ON» (Engine stopped.)

    Less than 1.0

    Idle (Engine is warmed-up sufficiently.)

    1.3 — 1.7

    4, If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot
    wire for damage or dust.

    SEF881K

    EC-296

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OTC 13
    Engine Coolant Temperature

    Sensor (ECTS)

    The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the
    engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as
    the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The
    electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

    SEF594K

    < Reference data>

    20

    19
    9

    6
    4

    ~

    2

    ~

    1.0
    0.8

    1ij

    ‘w

    8!

    Engine coolant temper-

    Voltage
    (V)

    Resistance
    (kQ)

    -10 (14)

    4.4

    7.0-11.4

    20 (68)

    3.5

    2.1 — 2.9

    ature
    ‘C («F)

    .

    04
    0.2
    0.1

    .20 0
    20 40 60 80 100
    (-4) (32) (68) (104)(140)(176)(212)
    Temperature ‘C (OF)

    Diagnostic
    Trouble Code

    Malfunction

    50 (122)

    2.2

    0.68 — 1.00

    90 (194)

    0.9

    0.236 — 0.260

    SEF012P

    Check Items
    (Possible Cause)

    is detected when …

    No.
    13

    • An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor
    is sent to ECM.

    DIAGNOSTIC
    PROCEDURE

    rF.i

    1)
    2)
    3)
    ———1)
    ~
    2)
    ~

    rm

    3)

    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Engine coolant temperature sensor

    TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

    Turn ignition switch «ON».
    Select «DATA MONITOR» mode with
    Wait at least 5 seconds.
    OR ———Turn ignition switch «ON» and wait at
    Turn ignition switch «OFF», wait at
    and then turn «ON».
    Perform «Diagnostic Test Mode II»
    results) with ECM.

    EC-297

    CONSULT.

    least 5 seconds.
    least 7 seconds
    (Self-diagnostic

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 13
    Engine Coolant Temperature
    (Cont’d)

    ~
    Sensor (ECTS)

    EC-ECTS-01

    ~ENGlNE

    COOLANT
    TEMPERATURE
    SENSOR
    @lID

    4=U

    Il:j.JJ
    BR/Y

    B

    I I

    BR/Y ~

    _.

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    -:

    B

    $—1—$
    B

    BR/Y U])


    t
    BR/Y

    Ii1’sH
    TW

    B

    B

    ~

    12-91

    GND
    -A

    GND
    -A

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    ~

    ~~

    @

    L

    ~

    GY

    em
    L

    HEC005

    EC-298

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 13
    Engine Coolant Temperature
    (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    mJ
    Sensor (ECTS)

    PROCEDURE

    INSPECTIONSTART

    m
    MEC7188A

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».

    NG

    4. Check voltage between terminal @
    and ground with CONSULT or tester.
    Voltage:
    . Approximately 5V

    ~io
    ~
    SEF518Q

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Check harness continuity between
    terminal CD and engine ground.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    ~i5

    OK

    ~

    Check the following.
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM
    and engine coolant
    temperature sensor
    • Harness connectors

    @D,@)
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM
    and engine coolant
    temperature sensor
    • Harness connectors

    @D.@)
    If NG. repair harness or
    connectors.

    CHECK COMPONENT

    Replace engine coolant

    (Engine coolant temperature sensor).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    on next page.

    temperature sensor.

    SEF519Q

    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuits. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTIONEND

    EC-299

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 13
    Engine Coolant Temperature
    (Cont’d)
    COMPONENT

    ~
    Sensor (ECTS)

    INSPECTION

    Engine coolant temperature sensor
    Check resistance as shown in the figure.

    SEF152P

    Temperature °C (OF)

    Resistance kQ

    20 (68)

    2.1 — 2.9

    50 (122)

    0.68 — 1.00

    90 (194)

    0.236 — 0.260

    If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

    EC-300

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 21
    Ignition Signal
    COMPONENT

    DESCRIPTION

    Ignition coil & power transistor (Built into distributor)
    The ignition coil is a small molded type. The ignition signal from
    the ECM is sent to the power transistor. The power transistor
    switches on and off the ignition coil primary circuit. As the primary circuit is turned on and off, the proper high voltage is
    induced in the coil secondary circuit.

    Diagnostic
    Trouble
    Code No.
    21

    Malfunction is detected when …

    Check Items
    (Possible Cause)

    • The ignition signal in the primary circuit is not sent • Harness or connectors
    to ECM during engine cranking or running.
    (The ignition primary circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Power transistor unit.
    • Resistor
    • Camshaft position sensor
    • Camshaft position sensor circuit

    DIAGNOSTIC
    PROCEDURE

    TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

    Note: If both DTC 11 and 21 are displayed, perform TROUBLE
    DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 11 first. Refer to EC-289.
    (F.I 1) Turn ignition switch «ON».
    ~
    2) Select «DATA MONITOR» mode with CONSULT.
    3) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition
    switch to «START» for at least 5 seconds.)
    ———OR ———~
    1) Turn ignition switch «ON».
    ~
    2) Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition
    switch to «START» for at least 5 seconds.)
    3) Turn ignition switch «OFF», wait at least 7 seconds
    and then turn «ON».
    4) Perform «Diagnostic Test Mode II» (Self-diagnostic
    results) with ECM.

    EC-301

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 21
    Ignition Signal (Co nt’ d)

    EC-IGN/SG-01
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    30A

    -:

    OJ

    Detectable line
    for OTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    -:

    G

    OFF

    m
    ‘ ….

    ST

    IGNITION
    SWITCH

    ~GY

    ~@

    I.IIIIIIII1lII

    GY

    em
    L

    HEC007

    EC-307

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 34
    Knock Sensor (KS) (Cont’d)

    rr~ // AY

    ,,~n~(

    ..(«‘~Inlake

    DIAGNOSTIC

    manifold

    PROCEDURE

    INSPECTION START

    ~

    ~
    Loosen and retighten engine ground
    screws.

    fa
    CHECK

    INPUT SIGNAL

    Repair harness or connectors.

    CIRCUIT.

    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector
    and knock sensor harness connector.
    3. Disconnect sub-harness connectors

    @,@D.
    4. Check harness continuity between
    terminal CD and ECM terminal @ .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for shorl.
    OK

    m
    CHECK

    MEC7568

    fa

    II

    ~15 ~15
    ..

    ECM

    BCONNECTORII
    27

    ~

    SUB.HARNESS

    Repair harness or connectors.

    CIRCUIT.

    1. Disconnect knock sensor harness
    connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    knock sensor harness connector terminal @ and knock sensor sub-harness connector terminal CD.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for shorl.

    ili:tV

    OK
    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Knock sensor).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    below.

    NG

    Replace knock sensor.

    OK

    MEC757B

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.

    ~~

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest,

    tiiliJ

    INSPECTION END

    COMPONENT

    INSPECTION

    Knock sensor
    • Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MO.
    1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
    2. Check resistance between terminal @ and ground.
    Resistance: 500 — 620 kO [at 25°C (77°F))
    CAUTION:

    Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
    AEC719

    EC-308

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 43
    Throttle Position Sensor
    The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal
    movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the
    voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, the sensor detects the
    opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the
    voltage signal to the ECM.
    Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM
    receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This one
    controls engine operation such as fuel cut.
    SEF089K

    VI

    ~

    .~

    Supply voltage:
    4.55V (Applied be~VoIee~_terminalsNO.1 and 3)

    2

    ~L
    [f~..
    L
    1

    ~

    Throttle position sensor

    &c

    ~M

    g -g
    :; ~ 0.5

    8~
    0.

    00

    -~—_.

    90

    Throttle valve opening angle (deg.)

    Diagnostic
    Trouble
    Code No.

    43

    Malfunction is detected when …

    SEF520Q

    Check Items
    (Possible Cause)

    • An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor • Harness or connectors
    is sent to ECM.
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Throttle position sensor

    EC-309

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 43
    Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)

    «*

    *

    MONITOR

    THRTL pas SEN

    I-

    0

    NO FAIL

    0.48V

    I~——..l

    ~-R-E-CO-R-D-~I
    SEF477Q

    THFm.

    NG data
    pos SEN

    ‘~U.’3

    00″00

    ~v

    ~:’

    OK data
    pos SEN

    ~~~’3. 1

    •…•..•..• 1
    THRTl
    ~~~

    THRTL
    15:38

    ~~~
    (V)

    (V)
    00″36
    00″37
    00″38
    00″39
    00″41
    00″42
    00″43

    OO~

    ‘g;v :»:’

    …………….. 1

    «)

    15:38

    THRTL

    214
    2.20
    2.26
    2.32
    2.26
    2.20
    2.58

    00″46
    00″47
    00″48
    00″49
    00″50
    00″51
    00″52

    2.88
    3.00
    3.12
    3.24
    3.34
    3.46
    3.56

    SEF267Q

    ~i)

    II

    LelJ

    ECM

    El’coNNEcTORII

    OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
    Use this procedure to check the overall function of the throttle
    position sensor. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
    rij 1) Turn ignition switch «ON».
    ~
    2) Select «MANU TRIG» and «HI SPEED» in «DATA
    MONITOR» mode with CONSULT.
    3) Select «THRTL POS SEN» in «DATA MONITOR» mode
    with CONSULT.
    4) Press RECORD on CONSULT SCREEN at the same
    time accelerator pedal is depressed.
    5) Print out the recorded data and check the following:
    • The voltage when accelerator pedal fully released
    is approximately 0.35 — 0.65V .
    • The voltage rise is linear in response to accelerator pedal depression .
    • The voltage when accelerator pedal fully depressed
    is approximately 4V.
    ———OR ———1) Turn ignition switch «ON»,
    2) Check the voltage between ECM terminals @J and
    @, @ (ground) and check the follOWing:
    • The voltage when accelerator pedal fully released
    is approximately 0.35 — 0.65V.
    • The voltage rise is linear in response to accelerator pedal depression.
    • The voltage when accelerator pedal fully depressed
    is approximately 4V,

    (9″oodl

    MEC7228

    EC-310

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 43
    Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)

    EC-TPS-01

    THROTTLE
    POSITION
    SENSOR
    @

    -:

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    1I

    (

    I

    t

    I~
    I

    ~

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    I

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    I

    I

    I

    ‘::::

    t
    P/L

    .i~.

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-6
    @
    ~

    ~

    ~

    Y

    B

    B

    13-71 12.01

    ~

    12-91

    AVCC

    GND
    -A

    GND
    -A

    TVO

    B

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    CED

    tJ m1

    0:13)

    ~@

    ~@

    SR

    1[~]1 @

    =r=
    BR

    -:

    Detectable

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    for DTC

    em

    line

    I

    1!1~~~p
    v~k~iS~EA
    BR

    PURGE CONTROL
    SOLENOID

    II 111VALVE

    =r=
    • Harness for open or
    short between injector
    and ignition switch
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Injector (Cont’d)

    ITEMS

    @

    ~i5
    II

    ECM

    -g

    CONNECTOR

    II

    ~i5
    illb

    101’110:103’112,

    @: NO.1 cylinder @ :No.3cylinder
    <::DQ): No.2cylinder @): No.4cylinder

    1

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    injector harness connector terminal
    G) and ECM terminals @. Gill,

    Repair harness or connectors.

    GID. Gill.
    SEF485Q

    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK

    NG

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Injector).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    below.

    Replace injector.

    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    ~ Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    COMPONENT

    INSPECTION

    Injector
    1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
    2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
    Resistance: 10 — 140 [at 25 (77°F)]
    If NG, replace injector.
    0

    AEC559

    EC-326

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Fuel Pump
    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

    I Camshaft position sensor

    I Engine speed

    ~
    ECM
    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    Start signal
    !,gnition

    switch

    I

    The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to
    improve engine startability.
    If the ECM receives
    a 180 signal from the camshaft position sensor,
    it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes
    the pump to perform. If the 180 signal is not
    received when the ignition switch is on, the
    engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation
    and
    prevents
    battery
    discharging,
    thereby
    improving
    safety. The ECM does not directly
    drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel
    pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
    0

    Fuel
    pump
    relay

    Condition

    Fuel pump operation

    Ignition switch is turned to «ON»

    Operates for
    5 seconds

    Engine running and cranking

    Operates

    0

    When engine is stopped

    Stops in 1 second

    Except as shown above

    Stops

    COMPONENT

    DESCRIPTION

    The fuel pump with a fuel damper is an in-tank type (the pump
    and damper are located in the fuel tank).

    AECB01

    EC-327

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Fuel Pump (Cont’d)

    []K]

    ITEMS

    EC-F/PUMP-01
    IGNITION
    SWITCH
    ON 01″‘ START

    -:

    Detectable
    line
    tal»‘ DTC
    Non-detectable
    line
    tal»‘ DTC

    -:

    15A

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    IJI)

    ReteI»‘

    to

    EL-POWER.

    (JIB)
    (M15)

    UN•61 I N.61

    II!]I(UEL
    B/L

    B/W

    n

    U

    PUMP
    RELAY

    Ibi=JlIbiJCHD
    B/P

    B/Y

    1

    B/Y

    ~

    ~ B/Y

    —-_1

    (@ (]I)
    B/Y

    m
    ~@
    B

    1

    M

    B/P
    r=b~
    ~

    ~

    B/P

    m@
    B

    I

    B/P

    ~

    ,-,
    B

    ~
    FPR

    I

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    (ffi

    L

    TANK

    GAUGE
    UNIT
    (B17)

    ~

    I~I@

    A

    =CMPS.RPM(REFj
    = = MONITOR —

    ~

    Orpm

    Refer to «COMPONENT
    INSPECTION» on next page.
    OK

    _o_N_I_’

    OFF

    I

    MEF309F

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Fuel pump).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    on next page.
    OK
    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    EC-330

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Fuel Pump (Conl’d)
    COMPONENT

    =

    ITEMS

    INSPECTION

    Fuel pump relay
    Check continuity

    between terminals
    Conditions

    CID and @.).
    Continuity

    12V direct current supply
    between terminals G) and @

    Yes

    No current supply

    No

    If NG, replace

    relay.

    SEF511P

    Fuel pump
    1. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector.
    2. Check resistance between terminals CD and @.
    . Resistance: 0.2 — 5.0n [at 25°C (77°F)]
    If NG, replace fuel pump.

    EC-331

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-Air Regulator
    SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION
    Engine speed

    Camshaft

    position sensor
    ECM
    (ECCS
    control
    module)

    Start signal
    Ignition switch

    The IACV-air regulator is controlled by the ECM
    at the same time as fuel pump ON-OFF control.

    Condition

    IACV-air regulator
    operation

    Ignition switch is turned to «ON»

    Operates for 5
    seconds

    Engine running and cranking

    COMPONENT
    Bimetal

    Air flow

    IACV-air regulator

    Operates

    When engine is stopped

    OFF in 1 second

    Except as shown above

    OFF

    DESCRIPTION

    IACV-air regulator provides an air bypass when the engine ;s
    cold for a fast idle during warm-up.
    A bimetal, heater and rotary shutter are built into the IACV-air
    regulator. When the bimetal temperature is low, the air bypass
    port opens. As the engine starts and electric current flows
    through a heater, the bimetal begins to turn the shutter to close
    the bypass port. The air passage remains closed until the
    engine stops and the bimetal temperature drops.

    SEF095K

    EC-332

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-Air Regulator
    (Cont’d)

    []:[]

    EC-AIRREG-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START
    15A

    [ill

    <:E>:
    :

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    AIT models
    MIT models
    … : Detectable line
    for DTC
    —: Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    ~

    B/W

    B/W

    n PUMP
    I~IIFCEL
    U RELAY

    B/Y

    r=b@})

    B/Y

    r-!-,

    I~ICHID

    ~(E203)

    ~(E20t)

    B/Y

    B/Y

    B/Y

    IbJdlIbiJlCBD
    B/P B/Y

    t

    B/Y

    @

    ,..-!-,

    @

    t_f
    I

    B/Y

    BIP

    rn
    B

    I

    IllJl C£[)

    B

    1$1(ffi)

    B/P

    (E227)

    I

    B

    B/P
    ~

    FPR

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    (ill

    ffiill@W

    ~(E203)
    L

    rnrn:tzlID

    Clli:4)

    1

    ~

    tG»Ai’\

    d:::,~

    ACBD
    T

    IACV-AIR
    REGULATOR

    GY

    ~B

    In
    fJ
    1
    mm
    B B B

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    .r.’T;:;,.. (Eli 4)
    LJ…1J£p GY

    CHID , (EJon
    ~

    ~@
    ~GY

    em
    L

    HEC013

    EC-333

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-Air Regulator
    (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    ~

    PROCEDURE

    INSPECTION START

    I

    CHECK CONTROL FUNCTION.
    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    2. Pinch fuel feed hose with fingers.
    Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt
    on the fuel feed hose for 5 seconds
    after ignition switch is turned «ON».

    1

    NG

    ~

    Check fuel pump control
    circuit.
    (See page EC-327.)

    0K

    I;)

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect IACV-air regulator harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminal G)
    and ground.
    Battery voltage should exist for 5 sec.
    onds after ignition switch is turned
    «ON».

    I

    NG

    ~

    @,@})
    • Harness connectors
    @D,
    (M/T models)
    • Harness connectors
    @, @ (A/T models)
    • Harness for open or
    short between IACV-air
    regulator and fuel pump
    relay
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    (E201)

    @:

    AlT models
    MIT models
    … : Detectable line
    for DTC
    —:
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    :

    *_1
    BR

    SR

    I

    ~I
    BR

    IACV-AAC
    VALVE

    (E213)

    ~
    SB

    I
    SB

    14J1

    (E227)
    (F12)

    SB

    I
    SB

    ~
    ISC

    ~

    ~ u:

    switch is «OFF».

    C

    o'»o

    I

    o

    20
    80
    (12)
    (50)
    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

    0: COOling fans

    95 (203)

    OJ

    c
    0,

    c

    ill

    m:

    do not operate.

    EC-343

    20

    80

    (12)
    (50)
    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

    Cooling fans operate at «High» speed.

    MEC773B

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)

    M/T models

    ~

    EC-COOL/F-01
    BATTERY (Via
    fusible link)
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    30A

    o

    (JIB)
    (El06)

    IIQ~OI
    BR

    I

    GY

    1—

    II!]1
    BR

    I

    GY

    n

    @: Models with air conditioner
    … : Detectable line
    for DIC
    -:
    Non-detectable
    line for Ole

    COOLING
    FAN

    u 1 RELAY-1

    1biJ1bi=Jl@
    LG/R G/B

    I

    1—-0-1

    LG/R

    r=::!=

    @D

    B

    em

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    +
    2

    1

    L

    @ , (El0t)

    ~@~
    lJ.l.g)

    GY , GY

    (El06)

    5

    em
    L

    HEC016

    EC-344

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)

    AIT models

    [][]

    EC-COOL/F-02

    IGNITION
    SWITCH
    ON or STAAT

    i0A

    ~.jffil

    FUSE

    ~~9~f

    I 25 I

    (El06)

    30A

    30A

    IT]

    IT]

    GY

    @:

    Models with air
    conditioner
    … : Detectable line
    for DTC
    -:
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    Refer to
    EL-POWEA.

    G/W

    •—1

    -~-,-I-FO~=-_I I
    SR

    COOLINGII:!:I
    ~~~AY-i

    (ffi)

    GY

    :!i’

    ~

    ~

    ~

    ~

    LG/R

    G/8

    G/A

    LG ~LG/R
    r:::::k,{jQj;r:::::k,

    SR

    ‘I :}:’

    :]JII COOLING

    ~

    I~ 114.J I~-

    G/W

    rn

    LG/S

    ~

    ~

    ~ lbiJ U+!J

    -tr=- !-.JI
    LG

    G/Y

    8

    _I

    — — -l13.J II

    SA

    ~~~AY-3

    ~

    ~iC8)

    lbiJ ~

    ~

    @

    LG

    RFRL

    S

    I—~t

    _

    ~~~LING

    MOTOR-1
    ~

    ~)

    t

    COOLING
    FAN

    MOTOR-2

    rn

    t t

    @

    LG/R

    AFAH

    G/OR

    wT1

    I I
    1t!J~CEID
    -F6- ~cPl
    I~ 1 ~
    rrToi1
    rm
    LG/R

    ~

    G/R

    LG (M49) LG/R

    LG

    G/W LG/R

    ‘:f]1 I:[]II COOLING/I:!:I 1:f]1 ‘:[]II

    ~~~AY-2

    LG ~LG/R

    LG

    GY

    ____r~-,

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL

    MODULE)
    (IT)

    S

    S

    -!-

    -!-

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    ~
    ~

    (Ei2),
    SR

    (Ei7),
    SR

    (Ei8)
    SR

    ~

    t::mJ

    (E40),
    GY

    (E46)
    GY

    ~

    , (El0!)

    (El06)

    em
    L

    HEC017

    EC-345

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)
    • COOLING FAN CIRCUIT.

    M/T models

    DOES
    INSPECTION START
    COOLING FAN
    ROTATE AND STOP
    EVERY3 SECONDS

    NEXT

    II

    II

    NO

    ===

    I

    YES

    MEF311F

    0

    • ACTIVE TEST.
    COOLING FAN

    7

    OK

    INSPECTION END

    (ij

    rij

    J!V

    OFF

    MONITOR

    CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    ~
    2. Perform «COOLING FAN
    CIRCUIT» in «FUNCTION
    TEST» mode with CONSULT.
    OR
    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    2. Select «COOLING FAN» in
    «ACTIVE TEST» mode with
    CONSULT.
    OR

    ===

    COOLAN TEMP/S

    I With air

    HI

    k

    With air conditioner

    C
    00lin9fan

    I

    conditioner
    1. Start engine.
    2. Set temperature lever at full cold
    position.
    3. Turn air conditioner switch «ON».
    4. Turn blower fan switch «ON».
    5. Run engine at idle for a few minutes
    with air conditioner operating.
    6. Make sure that cooling fan operates.
    Without air conditioner
    1. Start engine.
    2. Keep engine speed at about 2,000
    rpm until engine is warmed up sufficiently.
    3. Make sure that cooling fan begins to
    operate during warm-up.

    I

    Q
    ~ID~

    I

    NG

    MEF277G

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn air conditioner switch «OFF».
    2. Turn blower fan switch «OFF»
    (Step 1 and 2 are only performed for
    models with air conditi.oner.)
    3. Stop engine.
    4. Disconnect cooling fan relay.
    5. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    6. Check voltage between terminals G),
    @ and ground.
    Voltage: Battery voltage
    OK

    @

    EC-346

    NG

    Check the following.
    • 30A fusible link
    • 10A fuse
    • Harness for open or
    short between fuse and
    cooling fan relay
    • Harness for open or
    short between battery
    and cooling fan relay
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)
    @

    SEF777P

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan
    motor-2 harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal G) and terminal @, terminal @ and body ground.
    Continuity should exist.

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    (!]
    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ and terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    (]D,@
    • Harness connectors

    @,@D
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM
    and cooling fan relay
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK
    MEC775B

    ~io

    1=1

    =EC=M=W CONNECTOR

    ~i5
    II

    ~

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Cooling fan relay).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»,
    EC-353.

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    NG

    Replace cooling fan
    relay.

    OK

    SEF332Q

    CHECK COMPONENTS
    (Cooling fan motors).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»,
    EC-353.

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    EC-347

    NG

    Replace cooling fan
    motors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)
    AlT models

    INSPECTION START

    CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED
    OPERATION.
    1. Disconnect cooling fan re/ays-2 and
    -3.
    2. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    3. Perform «COOLING FAN
    CIRCUIT» in «FUNCTION

    00

    • COOLING FAN CIRCUIT.
    DOES

    TEST» mode with CONSULT.
    OR

    COOLING FAN

    2. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    3. Perform «COOLING FAN» in
    «ACTIVE TEST» mode with
    CONSULT.

    ROTATE AND STOP
    EVERY 3 SECONDS

    I

    OR

    NEXT

    II

    II

    NO

    YES

    0

    • ACTIVE TEST.
    COOLING FAN

    ===

    OFF
    ===

    MONITOR

    COOLAN TEMPjS

    88°C

    ==H=I=11 L~W

    I

    With air conditioner
    lCOOtingfan

    @l

    JF311F

    (j)
    I With

    air conditioner
    2. Start engine.

    I

    3. Set temperature lever at full cold
    position.
    4. Turn air conditioner switch «ON».
    5. Turn blower fan switch «ON».
    6. Run engine at idle for a few minutes
    with air conditioner operating.
    7. Make sure that cooling fan operates
    at low speed.
    Without air conditioner 1
    2. Start engine.
    3. Keep engine speed at about 2,000
    rpm until engine is warmed up sufficiently.
    4. Make sure that cooling fan begins to
    I

    operate at low speed during warmup.
    OK

    ~ID~

    EC-348

    NG

    Check cooling fan low
    speed control circuit.
    (Go to

    I

    PROCEDURE A
    EC-350.)

    I,

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)
    • COOLING FAN CIRCUIT.
    DOES

    Ii

    COOLING FAN
    ROTATE AND STOP
    EVERY 3 SECONDS

    II

    NEXT

    Ii

    II

    NO

    ACTIVE TEST.

    COOLING FAN

    ===

    «I

    I

    YES

    MEF311F

    D

    CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED
    OPERATION.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and
    -3.
    3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
    4. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    ~
    5. Perform «COOLING FAN

    (ij

    CIRCUIT» in «FUNCTION
    TEST» mode with CONSULT.

    OFF

    MONITOR

    fiii

    ~
    COOLAN TEMP/S

    clTJI
    Ii

    LOW

    1.1-

    MEF314F

    Cooling fan

    OR

    4. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    5. Perform «COOLING FAN» in
    «ACTIVE TEST» mode with
    CONSULT.
    OR
    4. Turn air conditioner switch
    and blower fan switch «OFF»
    (Models with air conditioner).
    5. Disconnect engine coolant
    temperature sensor harness
    connector.
    6. Connect 150Q resistor to
    engine coolant temperature
    sensor harness connector.

    150(1 resistor

    7. Restart engine and make sure
    that cooling fan operates at
    higher speed than low speed.
    OK

    MEC475B

    INSPECTION END

    EC-349

    NG

    Check cooling fan high
    speed control circuit.
    (Go to

    I

    PROCEDURE B
    EC-351.)

    I.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)
    PROCEDURE A
    INSPECTION START

    IJ;

    3

    ~

    7 5

    2

    I CHECK
    POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».

    1

    Cooling fan
    relay-1

    SEF725QB

    NG

    2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminals CD,
    @, @ and ground with CONSULT or
    tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage
    OK

    Check the following.
    • 10A fuse
    • 30A fusible link
    • Harness for open or
    short between cooling
    fan relay-1 and fuse
    • Harness for open or
    short between cooling
    fan relay-1 and battery
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    Repair harness or connectors.

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan
    rnotor-2 harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    cooling fan relay-1 terminal @ and
    cooling fan motor-1 terminal CD, cooling fan relay-1 terminal (J) and cooling fan motor-2 terminal CD.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    4. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and body ground.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    / 0

    ~io~io~io.-fT1
    3

    .~

    7 5

    ~21.

    .
    C00 ,Ing
    f an re Iay- 1

    ~
    ~
    Cooling
    Cooling
    fan motor-1 fan motor-2

    ~
    SEF723QA

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ and terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Cooling fan relay-1).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»,
    EC-353.

    @

    S S

    lliJ

    Cooling fan
    ~motor-2

    SEF727QA

    EC-350

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    @D,@
    • Harness connectors

    @,QD
    • Harness for open or
    short between cooling
    fan relay-1 and ECM
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    OK

    Cooling.fan
    motor-1

    NG

    NG

    Replace cooling fan relay.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)

    o

    ~15
    II

    ECM

    ~CONNECTORII
    9

    ~

    INNEer

    @

    ~

    Cooling

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Cooling fan motors-1 and -2).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»,
    EC-353.

    fan
    relay-1

    illi

    3

    7 5

    2

    1

    Replace cooling fan
    motors.

    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.

    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harne&s connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    [

    INSPECTION END

    PROCEDURE B
    INSPECTION START

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF»
    2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and
    -3.

    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between cooling fan
    relay-2 terminals CD, @ and ground,
    and between cooling fan relay-3 terminals CD, @ and ground with CONSULT or tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage

    ~i5
    ~-

    clf:tb

    Coolingfan
    relay-2

    OK

    ~-

    @

    ffi:b
    Coolingfan
    relay-3

    SEF781P

    EC-351

    NG

    Check the following.
    • 10A fuse
    • 30A fusible link
    • Harness for open or
    short between cooling
    fan relays-2, -3 and fuse
    • Harness for open or
    short between cooling
    fan relays-2, -3 and battery
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON’;DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)
    @

    1

    ~
    iiO

    Cooling
    fan
    relay-2

    6 3
    7 5

    2

    1

    1f,

    2

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan
    motor-2 harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and terminal @, terminal @ and terminal @, terminal CV and body ground.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    4. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and terminal @, terminal @ and terminal @, terminal CV and body ground.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    Ia

    3 4

    Cooling fan
    motor-1
    harness
    connector

    II

    111
    SEF782PA

    II

    ~ iifO

    6 3
    7 5

    2

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @J and terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    Cooling
    fan
    relay-3

    CID.@
    • Harness connectors

    @,@
    • Harness for open or
    short between cooling
    fan relays-2. 3 and ECM
    If NG. repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    1

    tllii

    It

    Cooling fan
    motor-2
    harness
    connector

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Cooling fan relays-2, 3).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    on next page.

    NG

    Replace cooling fan
    relays.

    OK

    CHECK COMPONENTS
    (Cooling fan motors).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    on next page.
    OK

    SEF783PA

    II

    ~15 I ~Io
    f,:j!

    ECM

    ElCONNECTORI
    10

    Cooling
    fan
    relay-2, -3

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectars in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    ~

    [?Ffu
    INSPECTION END

    MEC7788

    EC-352

    Replace cooling fan
    motors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)
    COMPONENT

    MIT models

    INSPECTION

    Cooling fan relay (M/T models)

    =

    Check continuity

    between

    terminals

    @ and

    Continuity

    Conditions
    12V direct

    current

    supply

    terminals

    CD

    @

    No current

    and

    CID.

    between

    Yes

    No

    supply

    SEF511PA

    If NG, replace

    relay.

    Cooling fan relays-1, -2 and -3 (A/T models)
    Check continuity between terminals
    @ and CID, @ and (j).

    AlT models

    Continuity

    Conditions
    12V direct

    current

    terminals

    CD

    No current

    supply

    between

    Yes

    and @

    No

    supply

    If NG, replace

    relay.

    SEC202BA

    Cooling fan motors-1 and -2

    For AIT Models

    1.
    2.
    Cooling fan motor
    harness connector

    Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
    Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage
    check operation.
    Terminals
    Speed

    Low
    (A/T
    AEC715

    Cooling

    fan

    High
    (A/T

    motor
    For MIT models

    models)

    models)

    High
    (M/T models)

    Cooling fan motor should operate.
    If NG, replace cooling fan motor.

    AEC,81

    EC-353

    (Ee)

    (8)

    CD

    @

    CD,@

    @,@

    CD

    @

    and

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    ~

    Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch

    EC-PST/SW-01
    ECM

    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    PWST

    -:

    Detectable

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    for DTC

    1~31

    line

    PU/W

    IIrnl

    PU/W

    CfID

    =r@

    PU/W

    I

    PU/W

    I$J’C~MID

    pu/w

    I
    POWER STEERING
    OIL PRESSURE
    SWITCH

    ON
    OFF…..—

    (g)
    ~
    B

    I
    ,-,
    B

    B

    -L

    -L

    @

    <1;51)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~@
    U@ GY

    CHID ,m

    em
    L

    HEC018

    EC-354

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    [][]
    Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch (Cont’d)
    COMPONENT

    DESCRIPTION

    The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power
    steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
    When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The
    ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and
    adjust for the increased load.

    Hoodledge RH ~
    MEC730B

    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE

    • PW/ST SIGNAL CIRCUIT.

    INSPECTION START
    HOLD STEERING WHEEL
    IN A FULL

    LOCKED

    POSITION

    THEN

    CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
    1. Start engine and warm it up sufficiently.

    TOUCH START

    II

    NEXT

    START
    MEF023E

    -crMONITOR

    0

    -crNO FAIL

    PW/ST SIGNAL

    00
    @

    OFF

    2. Perform «PW/ST SIGNAL
    CIRCUIT» in «FUNCTION
    TEST» mode with CONSULT.
    OR
    2. Check «PW/ST SIGNAL» in
    «DATA MONITOR» mode with
    CONSULT.
    Steering is in neutral
    position:
    OFF
    Steering is turned:
    ON

    RECORD
    SEF5911

    m

    1=’

    =EC=M

    =.,~

    CONNECTORII ~

    43

    is

    00

    When steering wheel is
    turned quickly.
    Approximately OV
    Except above
    Approximately 8 — 10V

    [Y]
    +

    @

    OR
    2. Check voltage between ECM
    terminal @ and ground.
    Voltage:

    ~NG

    .». MEF315F

    EC-355

    ~

    INSPECTION END

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch (Co nt’ d)

    mJ

    @

    1
    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector.

    —..

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and engine ground.
    Continuity should exist.

    AEC760

    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK

    ~i5
    II

    ECM

    ~CONNECTORII

    ~i5
    dIb

    43

    [!J
    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ and terminal CD.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    —..

    CID,@
    • Harness connectors

    @,@D
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM and
    power steering oil pressure switch
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK
    SEF501Q

    NG

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Power steering oil pressure switch).

    Replace power steering
    oil pressure switch.

    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    below.
    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    COMPONENT

    ~ to ID

    INSPECTION

    Power steering oil pressure switch
    1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector then start engine.
    2. Check continuity between terminals CD and @.
    Conditions

    ~
    AEC762

    Continuity

    Steering wheel is being turned

    Yes

    Steering wheel is not being turned

    No

    If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch.

    EC-356

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Park/Neutral

    ITEMS

    ~

    Position Switch

    EC-PNP/SW-01
    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    ill)

    NEUT

    (A): A/T models
    @: MlT models
    Detectable line
    -:
    for DTC
    -:
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    13•51

    G/OR

    I

    G/OR

    I$I@
    @
    G/OR

    1$1 CMID
    ~

    G/OR

    I

    O—a>—

    t

    ~~Qr

    G/OR.j

    G/OR —

    G/OR

    IdJl~
    =r (£201)

    P …..
    R

    G/OR

    ..
    N-D

    INHIBITOR
    1 SWITCH
    2
    (W):(A)

    I

    G/OR

    m

    OTHER —

    NEUTRAL
    POSITION
    SWITCH
    @ID: @

    tIDIDZIID
    ~

    tgJ

    (E220)

    ~

    «222)

    B

    ~

    GY

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    fITilll~

    ~~

    GY

    ~

    (][)

    B

    ,(E10t)

    (IT)
    L

    HEC019

    EC-357

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Park/Neutral Position Switch (Cont’d)

    [ill

    When the gear position is in «P» (A/T models only) or «N»,
    park/neutral
    position is «ON».
    ECM detects the position
    because the continuity of the line (the «ON» signal) exists.

    m

    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE

    • PARKINEUTPOSI SW CKT •

    Neutral position switch (M/T models)

    SHIFT

    NIP -POSITION

    OUT OF

    INSPECTION 8T ART

    THEN
    TOUCH START

    I NEXT II

    I

    START

    MEC731B

    m * MONITOR * NO FAIL 0

    CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
    1 Turn ignition switch «ON».

    (Iii'»
    ~

    ON

    PIN POSI SW

    (F.i

    J!J

    RECORD

    2. Perform «PARK/NEUT POSI
    SW CKT» in «FUNCTION
    TEST» mode with CONSULT.
    OR
    2. Select «PIN POSI SW» in
    «DATA MONITOR» mode with
    CONSULT.
    3. Check «PIN POSI SW» signal
    under the following conditions.
    Neutral position: ON
    Except neulral posllion: OFF
    OR

    SEF963N

    m ~

    CONNECT

    ~

    ~
    ~

    ~

    lAID£)~~
    II

    ECM

    EcoNNECTORl1
    35

    2. Check vo~ge between ECM
    terminal ~ and ground under
    the following conditions.
    Voltage:
    Neutral position
    Approximately OV
    Excepl neutral position
    Ballery voltage
    NG

    MEC779B

    EC-3S8

    OK

    INSPECTION END

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Park/Neutral Position Switch (Cont’d)
    @

    1

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect neutral position switch
    harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and body ground.
    AEC750

    NG

    —..

    (ill1), (ill)
    • Harness for open or
    short between neutral
    position switch and
    body ground
    If NG, repair harness or

    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    connectors.

    OK

    II

    ~Io
    ECM

    Ef

    CONNECTOR

    II

    ~Io
    illDJ

    35

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    [!] .
    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ and terminal CD.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    f——

    • Harness connectors

    @,@
    • Harness connectors

    @,@D
    • Harness connectors

    @),@

    OK

    SEF503Q

    Check the following.

    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM and
    neutral position switch
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.
    NG

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Neutral position switch).
    Refer to MT section.
    OK
    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    EC-359

    ~

    Replace neutral position
    switch.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Park/Neutral Position Switch (Cont’d)

    m

    I Inhibitor switch

    PARKINEUTPOSI SW CKT •
    SHIFT

    (AIr

    models)

    J

    INSPECTION START

    OUT OF NIP-POSITION
    THEN
    TOUCH START

    CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.

    fiii
    I

    NEXT

    II

    I

    START

    ~

    SW CKT» in «FUNCTION
    TEST» mode with CONSULT.

    MEC7318

    m * MONITOR * NO FAIL
    PIN POSI SW

    0

    ON

    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    2. Perform «PARK/NEUT POSI

    rif1
    ~

    OR

    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    2. Select «PIN POSI SW» in
    «DATA MONITOR» mode with
    CONSULT.
    3. Check «PIN POSI SW» signal
    under the following conditions.
    «N» or «P» position: ON
    Except above position: OFF

    RECORD

    OR
    SEF963N

    m~i)~0
    II

    ECM

    ~CONNECTORII

    1. Make sure that inhibitor switch
    circuit functions properly.
    (Refer to AT section.)
    2. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    3. Check voltage between ECM
    terminal @ and ground under
    the following conditions.
    Voltage:
    UN» or uP» position

    30

    Approximately OV
    Except above position
    Battery voltage
    MEC7798

    NG

    EC-360

    OK

    INSPECTION END

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Park/Neutral Position Switch (Cont’d)
    @

    1

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect inhibitor switch harness
    connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    terminals CD and body ground.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    f—-+

    @ill,@
    • Harness for open or
    short between inhibitor
    switch and body ground
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    MEF791EA

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    [i

    ~i5

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Gheck harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ and terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    @B

    NG

    —-.

    QD,@
    • Harness connectors

    @,@[!)
    • Harness connectors

    @,@

    OK

    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM and
    inhibitor switch
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    MEC780B

    ECM

    ~CONNECTORI
    35

    NG

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Inhibitor switch).
    Refer to AT section.

    ~.
    :lliJ

    OK
    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    MEC781B

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    EC-361

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    Replace inhibitor switch.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    []K]

    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S)

    EC-H02S-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START
    10A

    [l[J

    FUSE

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    ~

    IN:OI
    BR!Y

    -:

    I

    -:

    BR/Y

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    ,cID,@

    =r@

    BR/Y

    I

    BR/Y

    m

    I4=!J

    OR

    HEATED
    OXYGEN
    SENSOR

    ~

    W

    F 4

    tl

    I
    I
    I

    I
    I

    I

    I

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-6

    em

    W .~…..—~

    OR

    urtru

    u=f9l1

    02H

    025

    ECM

    (~g~~ROL
    MODULE)

    cw.

    !Il’ I’I~
    3456

    @
    W

    ~
    U@..@)

    GY

    In

    8

    B

    ,_I

    -I

    -L

    m~

    ~em

    CDODJDJDJDJD

    1
    8

    Refe~ to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    GY

    CED
    L

    HEC020

    EC-362

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) (Cont’d)
    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Heated oxygen sensor heater control
    ECM
    (ECCS
    ~
    control
    module)

    I Engine speed

    I Crankshaft position sensor

    The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated
    oxygen
    sensor
    heater
    corresponding
    to the
    engine speed.

    Heated

    ~ oxygen
    sensor
    heater

    OPERATION

    —~-

    COMPONENT

    Engine speed rpm

    Heated oxygen sensor
    heater

    Above 3,200

    OFF

    Below 3,200

    ON

    DESCRIPTION

    The heated oxygen sensor is placed into the front tube. It
    detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared
    to
    the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor has a closed-end
    tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage
    from approximately
    1V in richer conditions to
    in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor signal is sent to the ECM.
    The ECM adjusts the injection
    pulse duration to achieve the
    ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to

    av

    i

    Heater pad
    Zirconia
    tube

    Isolation
    bearing

    i

    av.

    SEF406H

    2
    ::>

    1

    «5
    c.
    «5

    0

    0

    Rich —

    :’-Ideal ratio

    _

    Lean

    Mixture ratio
    SEF288D

    EC-363

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    INSPECTION START

    ACCELERATE TO 2000
    RPM AND HOLD THEN
    TOUCH START.

    II=]
    1800

    2000

    II

    NEXT

    ij
    J

    2200

    START

    MONITOR

    *

    NO FAIL

    CMPSoRPM(REF)
    M/RFIC MNT

    CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
    CIRCUIT.
    1. Start engine and warm it up sufficiently.
    2. Perform «MIXTURE RATIO
    TEST» in «FUNCTION TEST»
    mode with CONSULT.

    OK

    INSPECTION END

    rF.i

    SEF815L

    *.

    PROCEDURE

    MIXTURE RATIO TEST.

    0

    J!J

    OR

    rF.i

    J!J

    2. Make sure that «M/R FIC
    MNT» in «DATA MONITOR»
    mode indicates «RICH» and
    «LEAN» periodically more
    than 5 times during 10 seconds at 2,000 rpm.

    ~
    ~

    2. Stop engine and set ECM
    Diagnostic Test Mode II
    (Heated oxygen sensor monitor).
    3. Restart engine and run it at
    about 2,000 rpm for about 2
    minutes under no-load.
    4. Keep engine speed at 2,000
    rpm and make sure that the
    malfunction indicator lamp on
    the instrument panel goes on
    and off more than 5 times during 10 seconds.

    2000rpm
    RICH

    OR

    I

    RECORD

    MEC782B

    ‘~/’

    I /
    CHECK-

    /

    ……

    /

    NG

    I

    Malfunction indicator
    lamp
    SEF051PA

    ‘——————-‘

    ~
    Heated oxygen ‘ ~~
    sensor harness connector
    ij ~I
    1-»—

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor
    harness connector and ECM harness
    connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ and terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    4. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ (or terminal @)
    and ground.
    Continuity should not exist.
    if OK, check harness for short.

    OK
    SEF089PA

    ~i5
    II

    ECM

    -er

    CONNECTOR

    @

    ~i5
    II

    ~

    19

    MEC735B

    EC-364

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) (Cont’d)
    @J

    ~i)~ID
    II

    J9″

    ECM

    CONNECTOR

    @

    II

    111

    MEC783B

    SEF646P

    ~i5
    ECM

    J9″ CONNECTOR II

    CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
    HEATER CIRCUIT.
    1. Reconnect harness connectors.
    2. Start engine.
    3. Check voltage between ECM terminal
    Gill and ground with CONSULT or
    tester under the following conditions.
    Voltage:
    Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm
    Approximately OV
    Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm
    Battery voltage

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Stop engine.
    2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor
    harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminal @
    and ground.
    Voltage: Battery voltage

    ~i5

    OK

    Go to «CHECK
    COMPONENT».


    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    aD,@
    • 10A fuse
    • Harness for open or
    short between heated
    oxygen sensor and
    fuse
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    cillID

    111

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal G) and ECM terminal Gill.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    MEC784B

    OK

    Loosen and retighten engine ground
    screws.

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Heated oxygen sensor heater).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    on next page.
    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    EC-365

    NG

    Replace heated oxygen
    sensor.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) (Cont’d)
    COMPONENT

    INSPECTION

    Heated oxygen sensor heater
    Check resistance between terminals CD and
    Resistance: 3.3 • 6.30 [at 25°C (77°F)]
    If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensor.

    AEC745

    EC-366

    CID.

    [][]

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    ~

    Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve

    EC-LKUP-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START

    10A

    []]

    FUSE
    SLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    -:

    Detectable
    for DTC

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    (J/S)

    line

    …..

    U
    IH
    3:
    UJ

    soL
    -0

    I
    U
    IH
    3:
    Ul

    ~

    U

    «‘4

    >-ill

    IT …..
    WD
    I—rl
    I-Ul
    4::J

    Z
    4
    LL

    ‘»

    L
    0
    Ul
    Ul

    (T)

    -.J
    00
    :LIT
    ITIWZOIO:L
    I-U4

    ill

    N

    L

    ~

    D.

    E
    0

    LL
    LL
    0

    ~)~
    ~~

    I-

    U

    0
    I-

    I

    CO-.-

    —-y-

    L

    ‘—11’

    0 0

    Ql

    C

    0
    -rl
    ….,

    >-

    -rl

    D
    C
    0

    4
    U-.J
    «‘-W
    4IT

    u

    =

    L

    GLI,

    I~Ivvv

    -rl

    ro

    L::::::::::J

    .c
    ….,

    0

    uo

    0-

    :L
    4
    -.J

    lIT
    OW
    WI-

    IT
    0
    I-

    8Q 0

    0
    Z
    H

    —11’

    81t5 ==0
    ;:
    ‘—

    LO

    r-0’1

    ~

    LO

    0-

    :L
    ::J

    WW

    0-

    Z
    0
    H
    IU
    W
    J
    Z
    H

    W
    -.J IT
    UOO
    HWUl
    IWZ
    WO-W
    >Ulul

    3:
    0
    -.J
    CD

    ~

    IZ
    4
    -.JW
    OIT
    O::J
    UI4
    WITIT
    ZWO
    HO-Ul
    CD:LZ
    ZWW
    WI-Ul

    .-1-0
    =>H
    UO
    ZW
    -.JW>
    W-.J-.J
    ::J04
    LLUl>

    0
    H
    0
    ZIT

    W

    -.J:L
    OH
    Ull-

    HWUJ
    CDWZ
    ZO-W
    WUlUl

    zoo

    ww

    ,-11′

    IT

    I’

    ~

    ~

    ….

    ~

    s:

    ECM(ENGINE

    Ul

    …..

    .c

    Ql
    TI

    ….,

    :L

    u
    ro

    0
    ,-

    0

    IU
    4

    V

    r—

    OJ

    ~

    Ql

    0

    I

    ….

    (D

    rl

    Ql
    ….,

    E

    W
    IT
    ::JI
    lUlU
    -.JUlI4 WI-<
    =>IT3:
    OO-ul

    U

    ~

    (

    L

    HH
    LLO
    IZW
    >W>
    U-.J-.J
    404
    HUl>

    0’1

    (D

    0’1

    (j

    ….

    OJ

    0’1

    r-(j

    ….I

    T
    LO

    S S

    H

    CONTROL MODULE)

    (j
    (D

    OJ

    0

    0’1

    (j

    ….
    0

    OJ
    0’1

    010

    (D
    (j

    I

    ….

    01
    0’1

    j

    CD
    I
    Z
    H
    >-.J -1-<

    U
    -.J —

    3:4
    O-.J
    -.JW
    CD IT

    ~

    6
    6
    6

    ~

    =
    ~

    W

    -.J
    ill
    H

    Ul

    ::J
    LL

    ~~

    ~

    ~~

    >-

    ~

    ~

    «-‘

    L..:..’J

    IT:

    W
    I’lI4

    I’
    CD
    ::J
    -.J

    I’

    0-

    I’

    3:
    0
    -.J
    19

    I’

    2:

    ~~
    -f-o
    = 0- ~I’
    — f-o
    ~=
    (Y]
    CD
    I
    Z
    H
    >-.J

    Leaving key in
    ON position

    Repeating key IN
    and OUT
    T’o ~ 80% of To
    when T. 5′: 3 sec.

    < T,

    Glow plugs

    Glow relay

    I

    11
    I !

    I

    ONe

    ECM
    (Engine
    control
    module)

    1iI
    ~

    I HTL

    I-l T’L

    ~

    ~

    1r;,1
    ,

    I

    Repeating key ON
    and OFF
    T’,

    T’,

    =.

    =.

    T,

    T,

    ;a; To
    SEC550B

    When the ignition key is inserted into the key
    cylinder, the engine control module turns on the
    relay and the «high-level»
    electric current flows
    through the glow plugs and heats them up
    quickly. When the ignition switch is turned on, the
    control module turns on the indicator. After T1
    seconds have passed from key in, the control
    module turns off the indicator.

    While cranking, the relay remains on. The relay
    automatically
    turns off after T4 seconds have
    passed from the engine start.

    Engine coolant temperature sensor
    Second

    To

    3.1 — 3.9
    5.0 — 7.0

    T,

    1.8 — 3.2

    Engine coolant tempera-‘
    ture ‘C (‘F)
    -25(-13)

    Remarks
    Resistance (kQ)

    19.7

    20 (68)

    2.5

    0.8 — 2.2

    60 (140)

    0.6

    17.0 — 23.0

    Lower than 60 (140)

    More than 0.6

    Higher than 60 (140)

    Less than 0.6

    255 — 345

    Lower than 60 (140)

    More than 0.6

    Less than 10

    Higher than 60 (140)

    Less than 0.6

    15 — 25

    Lower than 60 (140)

    More than 0.6

    3 — 7

    Higher than 60 (140)

    Less than 0.6

    0.1 — 0.9

    T3
    40

    — 6.0

    T4

    (T4)

    T5

    EC-390

    When alternator
    working
    When alternator
    working

    is

    is not

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Quick-glow System (Cont’d)
    DESCRIPTION
    Engine coolant temperature

    sensor (ECTS)

    The engine coolant temperature sensor detects engine coolant
    temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
    Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to
    the temperature rise.

    Key-in switch
    The key-in switch is built into the key cylinder. The ECM detects
    the key position and controls the key-in glow system.

    SEF938P

    EC-391

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Quick-glow System (Co nt’ d)

    EC-GLOW-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    START

    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START

    7.5A

    10A

    10A

    1261

    1251

    IT]

    IN.41
    B/Y

    1Ni91

    1Ni91

    1I~11

    BR

    BR

    Y

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    @:ID

    :
    <£D:

    LHD models
    RHO models

    I

    I!i

    (GLOW LAMP)

    113•31

    @

    Y

    METER
    COMBINATION

    OR

    I

    B/Y

    BR

    BR

    ~
    START

    ~
    IGN

    ~
    IGN

    GNO-A
    11~11
    B

    GNO-A
    11~51
    B

    GNO-C
    12.6I
    B

    GNO-C
    113•9 I
    B

    I—-.-_-.-I

    I

    OR

    m
    GIL

    ECM
    (ENGINE
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    @

    TW
    ~
    G/B

    I

    __ 1.I

    .-o-ee-°l
    I
    ——-..

    I

    <;

    B

    -!-!

    A

    To engine coolant
    temperature
    sensor
    (Refer to EC-COOL/F.)

    ;>

    1—.1
    .

    B

    -!-

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    HEC088

    EC-392

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Quick-glow System (Cont’d)

    I

    EC-GLDW-02

    .——.

    BATTERY

    I

    Refer

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    7.5A

    1241

    (JIB)
    (106)

    ~ffij

    10.91

    W!L

    KEY-IN

    ~

    SWITCH

    @

    OUT—

    ~

    W/R

    +f ~1

    BR/Y
    ~
    (EiOf)

    I~I

    R

    I

    ~~

    BR/Y

    B/R

    ~

    I

    CHID I~I

    m W/L

    CHID

    CHID I~I

    I~I

    W/L

    BR/Y

    W/R

    W/L
    ~(E10f)

    rA,

    ~~~~:
    I

    ~

    [IIg]

    (E115)
    W

    LHD models
    RHO models

    1!:i=Jll!:i=!J~

    BR/Y

    BR/Y
    (E10f) . ~

    (b):

    :

    11!11~II~e~y
    ~m>

    1
    IN

    B/R

    1—~ I

    I
    P

    EL-POWER.

    IT]

    W/L

    P

    to

    75A

    :rnJ
    ,

    G

    @J

    W

    l.9J

    ——————

    W

    I

    R

    ctJ@
    ~~
    R

    I

    R

    Q
    GLOW
    PLUG

    (E213)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    :
    ,

    HEC089

    EC-393

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Quick-glow System (Cont’d)
    -«-…..

    ‘y;——…

    Connectingplate nut:J
    ~1.0
    • 1.5 N.mr»(0.1 • 0.15 kg-m,8.7 — 13.0 in-Ib)

    «»
    ~

    .

    INSPECTION START
    «»‘-

    ‘——~

    Check fuel level, fuel supplying
    starter motor, etc.

    system,

    ~

    Correct.

    ~

    Install properly.

    OK

    m
    Check that all glow plug connecting
    plate nuts are installed properly.
    OK
    CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
    Check entire quick-glow system. (Refer
    to «System Operation Check» on next

    OK

    —..

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Glow plug).
    See page EC-397.

    NG
    —..

    Repair harness or connector.

    NG
    —..

    Check the following.

    page.)
    NG

    SEF939P

    (!]

    ~io

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
    CIRCUIT.
    (Refer to «Power Supply and ground
    circuit for ECM», EC-396).
    OK

    (!]
    CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN GLOW
    RELA Y AND GROUND.
    1) Check voltage between terminals
    G), @ and ground with tester.

    • Harness continuity
    between glow relay

    Voltage: Battery voltage

    ~

    II

    ECM

    and fuse
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    SEF940P

    • 7.5A fuse
    • 75A fusible link

    [!1

    E1

    CONNECTOR

    II

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1) Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ and terminal @.

    106

    NG

    —+

    Repair harness or connectors.

    Continuity should exist.

    ill]

    OK

    Ii]

    ~
    SEF941P

    Ii]

    ~i5
    Eill~
    @]Q]

    2

    CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN GLOW RELAY AND GLOW
    PLUG.
    1) Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2) Disconnect glow relay.
    3) Check harness continuity between
    glow relay terminal @ and glow

    Glow
    plug

    0

    plug.
    Continuity should exist.

    [ill

    ~OK

    ~
    SEF942P

    EC-394

    NG

    —+

    Repair harness or connectors.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Quick-glow System (Cont’d)
    @

    CHECK COMPONENTS

    NG

    (Glow relay, Glow plug, Engine coolant
    temperature sensor, Key-in switch, Ignition switch).
    Refer to «Component Inspection» (EC-

    Replace malfunctioning
    component(s).

    397).
    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage or
    the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector
    and retest.

    SYSTEM OPERATION
    Set voltmeter

    ON

    key

    IN [
    OUT

    BATIERY [
    Voltage

    OV

    between glow plug and engine body.

    1. Key-in glow system

    Read voltage when ignition key is inserted
    switch.
    Voltage:
    Battery voltage for about 3 seconds

    START [
    Ignition

    CHECK

    ,,
    ,
    I
    ,

    into ignition

    JL

    SEC5558

    2. Quick-glow (Pre-glow) system
    1) Turn ignition switch «ON» 3 or more seconds after key-in.
    2) Read voltage.
    Voltage:
    Battery voltage for about 20* seconds
    * Coolant temperature is lower than 60°C (140°F).
    * Repeating ignition key «ON» and «OFF» may
    change the time.

    Ignition

    key

    BATIERY [
    Voltage

    OV
    SEC5568

    EC-395

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Quick-glow System (Cont’d)

    J

    F:
    vo,,:TIERYlJlfr
    START[

    Ignition

    ON

    key

    IN r-

    j

    L

    :

    OUT

    I
    I
    I

    oV

    SEC557B

    r:JL

    STA:~[
    Ignition
    key

    3. Quick-glow (Cranking) system
    1) Disconnect «S» terminal for starter motor to prevent engine
    from cranking.
    2) Read voltage when ignition key is turned to «8T ART».
    Voltage:
    Battery voltage *
    * For about 20 seconds after returning ignition switch
    to «ON».

    IN

    :

    Engine running

    !

    OUT [

    I
    I

    4. After-glow system
    1) Connect «8» terminal to starter motor.
    2) Start engine and read voltage.
    Voltage:
    Battery voltage for 5* minutes
    * Coolant temperature is lower than 60°C (140°F).

    Jlfi=
    ,

    ,
    I

    votta;ATIERY

    [

    oV

    II

    SEC558B

    POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM

    ~i5
    ECM

    1.

    E

    CONNECTOR

    II

    2.
    3.

    26-39101-105

    Disconnect «S» terminal for starter motor to prevent engine
    from cranking.
    Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    Check terminals @, @. Gill. @ for ground continuity.
    Continuity should exist (On).
    If NG, check ground harness.

    SEF943P

    ~i5
    (D

    II

    ECM

    B

    CONNECTOR

    •5-25-28-30-37-38-106,

    4.

    II

    Check voltage
    chart.
    Terminal

    at each terminal

    No .

    Ignition switch position

    @

    GID

    according

    to the following

    Voltage

    OFF (Not inserted)

    .

    Battery voltage
    OFF (Not inserted)
    OFF (Not inserted)

    OV

    OFF (Inserted)

    Battery voltage

    OFF

    OV

    @

    @,@
    ON

    START
    OFF

    Battery voltage
    OV

    @
    ON

    START

    Battery voltage

    OFF

    ON

    OV

    @
    START

    EC-396

    Battery voltage

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Quick-glow System (Cont’d)

    ~

    If NG. check component parts and their
    according to the following chart.

    related

    harness

    Parts which should be checked
    Terminal
    No.

    Battery

    Fuse
    IFusible
    link

    @

    X

    X

    Glow
    relay

    Key-in
    switch

    Ignition
    switch

    Harness

    X

    @

    X

    X

    @

    X

    X

    @,@

    X

    X

    X

    @

    X

    X

    X

    @

    X

    X

    X

    COMPONENT

    Glow indicator
    bulb

    X

    X
    X

    X
    X
    X

    X

    INSPECTION

    Glow relay
    1.
    2.

    Check relay for coil continuity.
    Continuity should exist.
    Check relay for proper operation.
    Coil voltage

    Continuity

    Contact point

    OV

    No

    OFF

    12V

    Yes

    ON

    Ohmmeter
    SEC5648

    Glow plug
    1.
    2.

    Remove glow plug connecting plate.
    Check each glow plug for continuity.
    Continuity should exist:
    Approximately 0.650
    If NG, replace glow plug.

    SEF630K

    EC-397

    X

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Quick-glow System (Cont’d)
    3.

    ~GIOwnut

    Install glow plug connecting

    plate securely.

    Glow harness
    Connecting
    plate

    Spring washer

    SEC5658

    Engine coolant temperature

    sensor

    Check engine coolant temperature
    Coolant temp. °C (‘F)
    -15

    sensor resistance.
    Resistance kfl
    11.5

    (5)

    0(32)

    5.6

    10 (50)

    3.7

    40 (104)

    1.2

    Key-in switch
    Check continuity

    between terminals

    of key-in switch connector.

    Ignition key

    Continuity

    Not inserted

    No continuity

    Inserted

    Continuity should exist.

    Alternator
    Refer to «CHARGING

    EC-398

    SYSTEM» in EL section.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Partial Load Advance (PLA) Control
    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    Engine speed sensor

    Engine coolant temperature

    Engine speed

    ECM
    (Engine
    control
    module)

    Solenoid timer

    This system switches the solenoid timer on and off corresponding to the engine coolant temperature and
    engine speed. The solenoid timer operation advances and retards the fuel injection timing as follows:

    The injection timing advances when the timer is ON, while it retards when the timer is OFF.

    When the engine stalls or the ignition switch is in the START position, the solenoid timer is set to
    OFF.

    When the engine coolant temperature is lower than 10°C (50°F), the timer is set to ON.

    DESCRIPTION
    Solenoid timer
    The solenoid timer switches on and off in accordance with a
    signal from the ECM. This timer operation changes the pressure in the injection pump, thereby controlling the fuel injection
    timing.

    Engine speed sensor
    The engine speed sensor detects engine speed by monitoring
    the rotation of drive shaft gear in the injection pump. The sensor sends a signal of 37 pulses per drive shaft rotation to the
    ECM.

    EC-399

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    ~
    Partial Load Advance (PLA) Control (Cont’d)
    LHD models

    EC-PLA-01

    ~~~~K

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    …LL
    :J

    Air conditioner switch Is «OFF».

    ~LL
    :J

    0

    ~~

    eZ;

    100 (212)

    E
    2

    95 (203)

    c

    90 (194)

    E

    95 (203)

    C

    90 (194)

    2

    ‘»

    ‘»

    ‘0
    o

    ‘0
    o

    U

    U

    Q>

    Q>

    o:

    100 (212)

    ~o

    ~o

    c
    ‘5>
    c:
    w

    Air conditioner switch Is «ON».

    0

    c
    ‘5>
    c
    w

    20
    80
    (12) (50)
    Vehicle speed kmfh (MPH)

    Cooling fans do not operate.

    1222l:

    Cooling fans operate at «Low»

    speed.

    20
    80
    (12) (50)
    Vehicle speed kmfh (MPH)
    ~
    : Cooling fans operate at «High»

    speed.
    SEF953P

    EC-404

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)

    EC-COOL/F-01

    IGNITION
    SWITCH
    ON or START

    FUSE
    BLOCK
    10A

    1251

    Refer

    (JIB)

    to

    :

    EL-POWER.

    -O-_ ….
    _.

    LG

    -@>:
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~

    ~~

    ~B

    ~B

    ~~

    tW

    GY

    HEC092

    EC-405

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)

    EC-COOL/F-02

    iJ

    _

    ENGINE COOLANT
    TEMPERATURE
    SENSOR
    ~

    (6): LHD models
    (B): RHO models

    lLj:U
    GIS

    S/W

    It

    S/W ~

    IciJl

    S/W

    d!b:. ~
    d!b:.
    Icpt (ES-) — -1~1

    S/W

    I

    I
    <:BID

    L

    GIS ~

    t’ETr’i

    db ~

    I

    I

    S/W
    I~I@QD

    S/W
    ,.,.b

    ;,:@

    1~~-M8—~
    GIS @
    S/W

    I~I

    GIS

    t

    L

    o

    o

    I

    iTlJ

    t

    S/W

    GIS

    I@I

    S/W

    100′

    1l@1

    GND-S

    TW

    GND-S

    I

    (ENGINE
    EeM

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    @

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~
    @GY

    ~(E203)

    rnmz:mI

    ~~
    GY

    ~GY

    HEC093

    EC-406

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)

    EC-COOL/F-03

    rt~30A
    LVffi ~[]]
    GY

    G/W

    I

    ~g,COOL/F ~

    8R

    GY

    I

    ,1=

    e

    =,-I-F

    BA

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    G/W

    GY LG/8

    COOLING
    I I:!:’ I:!r
    FAN
    n 1:1]1n ~OOLINGI:~:I
    FAN
    RELAY-1
    U
    U RELAY-2

    IJjI n 1:1]1n

    COOLING

    lbi=Jl ~

    U

    1

    IbjJJ lbj.JJ ~

    (ill)

    LG/R G/8

    To

    EC-COOL/F
    -01

    I

    8R

    {~LG/R:J
    * _—I~~

    ….

    LG

    :

    BR

    LHO mode Is
    RHD models

    SR

    liJ~
    1!:iJl@

    ~@)

    ~m»
    BR

    BR

    t
    o

    I

    BR

    m

    INJECTION
    PUMP
    FUEL CUT
    SOLENOID
    VALVE

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~
    ~S

    ~~

    m:zm

    ~~

    GY

    IDZJ

    EC-416

    GY

    HEe09?

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    (SOS)

    General Specifications
    PRESSURE REGULATOR
    Regulated pressure
    kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)

    299 (2.99, 3.05, 43.4)

    Inspection and Adjustment
    Idle speed’1

    rpm

    No-load’2

    GA14DE, GA16DE for Europe and
    Israel
    AIT: 800:1:50
    Models with daytime light system
    MIT: 800:1:50
    Models without daytime light system
    M/T: 700:1:50
    GA15DE
    M/T: 630:1:50
    A/T: 750:1:50
    GA16DE for Australia
    M/T: 675:1:50
    A/T: 800:1:50
    GA16DE except for Europe and Israel,
    and Australia
    M/T: 650:1:50
    A/T: 800:1:50

    Ignition timing

    GA 14DE, GA 16DE for Europe and
    Israel and GA16DE except for Australia
    10′:1:2′ BTDC
    GA15DE
    6′:1:2′ BTDC
    GA16DE for Australia
    8′:1:2′ BTDC

    Throttle position sensor
    idle position’3
    V

    Temperature

    ‘c

    (‘F)

    Resistance kn

    20 (68)

    2.1 — 2.9

    90 (194)

    0.24 — 0.26

    110 (230)

    0.14-0.15

    FUEL PUMP
    Resistance [at 25’C (77’F)]

    n

    Approximately

    0.2 — 5

    IACV-AAC VALVE

    900 or more

    Air conditioner: ON

    ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
    SENSOR

    Resistance [at 25’C (77’F))

    n

    Approximately 10 (For Europe
    and Israel)
    50 — 100 (Except for Europe and
    Israel)

    INJECTOR

    0.40. 0.60

    ‘1: Feedback controlled and needs no adjustments
    ‘2: Under the following conditions:
    • Air conditioner switch: OFF
    • Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater, fan & rear defogger)
    • A/T models: in «N» position
    ‘3: Engine is warmed up SUfficiently.

    Resistance [at 25’C (77’F))

    n

    Approximately

    10. 14

    RESISTOR
    Resistance [at 25’C (77’F)]

    kn

    Approximately

    2.2

    IGNITION COIL
    Primary voltage
    Primary resistance
    [at 20’C (68’F)]
    Secondary resistance
    [at 20’C (68’F)]

    V

    12

    n

    Approximately 0.5 — 1.0

    kn

    Approximately

    THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

    12

    Accelerator pedal conditions
    Completely released
    Partially released
    Completely depressed
    ‘: Engine is warmed up sufficiently.

    MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
    Supply voltage

    V

    Battery voltage

    Output voltage

    V

    1.2 — 1.8’

    ‘: Engine is warmed up SUfficiently and idling under no-load.

    EC-417

    Resistance kn [at 25’C (77’F))
    Approximately

    0.5′

    0.5 — 4
    Approximately

    4

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    (SOS)

    General Specifications
    PRESSURE REGULATOR
    Fuel pressure at idling
    kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
    Vacuum hose is connected

    Approximately
    235 (2.35. 2.4. 34)

    Vacuum hose is disconnected

    Approxi mately
    294 (2.94, 3.0, 43)

    Inspection and Adjustment
    Idle speed’1

    FUEL PUMP

    rpm

    Resistance [at 25’C (77’F)]

    No-load’2

    Air conditioner: ON
    (in «N» position)

    Approximately

    0.2 — 5.0

    850 or more

    IACV-AAC VALVE

    Ignition timing

    15′:1:2’ BTDC
    Resistance [at 25’C (77’F)]

    Throttle position sensor idle
    position

    V

    COIL

    Approximately

    10.0

    INJECTOR
    Resistance [at 25’C (77’F))

    n ‘

    1_0_-_1_4

    _

    RESISTOR

    Primary voltage

    V

    12
    Resistance [at 25’C (77’F))

    Primary resistance
    [at 25’C (77’F))

    kn

    ApproXimately 2.2

    0.5 — 1.0

    Secondary resistance
    [at 25’C (77’F))

    Approximately 25

    kn

    THROTTLE

    POSITION SENSOR

    Throttle valve conditions

    MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

    Completely closed

    Supply voltage

    V

    Battery voltage (11 — 14)

    Output voltage

    V

    1.3 — 1.7’

    Partially open
    Completely open

    ‘: Engine is warmed up sufficiently and idling under no-load.

    ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
    SENSOR
    Temperature

    n

    0.35 — 0.65

    ‘1: Feedback controlled and needs no adjustments
    ‘2: Under the following conditions:
    • Air conditioner switch: OFF
    • Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear defogger)

    IGNITION

    n

    800:1:50

    (in «N» position)

    ‘c

    (‘F)

    Resistance kn

    20 (68)

    2.1-2.9

    50 (122)

    0.68 — 1.00

    90 (194)

    0.236 — 0.260

    HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER
    Resistance [at 25’C (77’F)]

    n

    I

    3.3 — 6.3

    EC-418

    Resistance kn
    [at 25’C (77’F)]
    Approximately

    1

    1 — 10
    Approximately

    10

    SERVICE OATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    (SOS)

    VE-type Injection Pump
    Pump numbers

    GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
    Unit:
    Engine

    rpm

    CD20

    Idle speed

    FICO: OFF

    700~~O

    FICO: ON

    800

    Dash pot touch speed

    1,300

    Maximum

    5,400

    engine speed

    INSPECTION

    Engine

    Part number

    Pump assembly
    number

    CD20

    16700-75J01

    104740-2610

    Pump data is not yet available.
    (Pump data will be given by Technical Bulletin, or
    refer to CALIBRATION STANDARD published by
    ZEXEL.)

    AND ADJUSTMENT

    Installation of injection pump
    Engine
    Plunger lift
    (Injection timing)

    CD20
    mm (in)

    0.79 — 0.85
    (0.0311 — 0.0335)
    (equivalent to 8′ BTDC)

    Injection Nozzle
    INSPECTION

    AND ADJUSTMENT

    Adjusting shims

    Injection nozzle assembly

    Thickness
    Unit: kPa (bar, kg/em’, psi)

    Initial injection pressure
    New

    Used

    12,749 — 13,534 (127.5 — 135.3,
    130 — 138,1,849 — 1,962)
    12,259 — 13,239 (122.6 — 132.4,
    125 — 135, 1,778 — 1,920)

    EC-419

    mm (in)

    Parts No.

    0.50 (0.0197)

    16613-V0700

    0.54 (0.0213)

    16613-V0702

    0.58 (0.0228)

    16613-V0704

    062 (0.0244)

    16613-V0706

    0.66 (0.0260)

    16613-V0708

    0.70 (0.0276)

    16613-V0710

    0.74 (0.0291)

    16613-V0712

    0.78 (0.0307)

    16613-V0714

    0.82 (0.0323)

    16613-V0716

    0.86 (0.0339)

    16613-V0718

    0.90 (0.0354)

    16613-V0720

    0.94 (0.0370)

    16613-V0722

    0.98 (0.0386)

    16613-V0724

    1.00 (0.0394)

    16613-V0760

    ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

    SECTION

    EL

    When you read wiring diagrams:
    • Read GI section, «HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS».
    When you perform trouble diagnos.es, read GI section, «HOW TO FOllOW
    FLOW CHART
    IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES»
    and «HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN
    ELECTRICAL INCIDENT».

    CONTENTS
    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» (Dual Air Bag System)
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» (Single Air Bag System)
    HARNESS CONNECTOR
    Description
    STANDARDIZED RELAy
    Description
    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — POWER Fuse
    Fusible Link
    Circuit Breaker
    GROUND DISTRIBUTION
    BATTERy
    How to Handle Battery
    Battery Test and Charging Chart..
    Service Data and Specifications (SOS)
    STARTING SySTEM
    Wiring Diagram — START Trouble Diagnoses
    Construction
    Removal and Installation
    Magnetic Switch Check
    Pinion/Clutch Check
    Brush Check
    Yoke Check
    Armature Check
    Assembly
    Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
    CHARGING SYSTEM
    Wiring Diagram — CHARGE Trouble Diagnoses

    4

    4
    4
    5

    5
    6
    6
    8

    8
    10
    19
    19
    19
    20
    25

    25
    28
    32
    33
    33
    35
    36
    .45
    .46
    46
    46
    47
    48
    .49
    50
    52

    52
    54

    Construction
    Removal and Installation
    Disassembly
    Rotor Check
    Brush Check
    Stator Check
    Diode Check
    Assembly
    Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
    COMBINATION SWITCH
    Combination Switch/Check
    Replacement
    HEADLAMP — Without Daytime light System Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP Trouble Diagnoses
    HEADLAMP — Daytime light System Operation (Daytime light system)
    System Description
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — DTRL Trouble Diagnoses (Daytime Light)
    HEADLAMP
    Bulb Replacement…
    Aiming Adjustment.
    HEADLAMP — Headlamp Aiming ControlWiring Diagram — AIM Description
    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Schematic
    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TAILIL Stop Lamp/Wiring Diagram — STOP/L Back-up Lamp/Wiring Diagram — BACK/L Front Fog Lamp/Wiring Diagram — F/FOG Front Fog Lamp Bulb Replacement

    55
    57
    57
    57
    58
    58
    59
    60
    61
    62
    62
    64
    65
    65
    67
    68
    68
    69
    70
    71
    74
    75

    75 •
    75
    77
    77
    81
    82

    82
    83
    92
    94
    96
    101

    CONTENTS
    Front

    Fog Lamp

    Aiming

    Adjustment..

    Rear Fog Lamp/Wiring
    Turn Signal

    Diagram

    and Hazard

    R/FOG —

    Warning

    Rear Wiper

    102

    and Hazard

    Lamps/Wiring

    Diagram

    Turn Signal

    and Hazard

    Lamps/Trouble

    Warning

    TURN —

    107

    Warning

    Flasher

    Bulb Specifications

    INTERIOR LAMP
    Illumination/Schematic
    Illumination/Wiring

    Diagram

    Spot, Trunk

    Room

    Rear Wiper

    ILL —

    114

    Headlamp

    Wiper

    Motor

    115

    Headlamp

    Wiper

    Installation

    115

    Headlamp

    Washer

    116

    Check Valve

    Schematic
    Wiring

    Meter

    127

    Tachometer,

    Gauges/Wiring

    Diagram

    Inspection/Fuel

    Gauge

    Temperature

    Temp.

    129

    Gauge

    Inspection/Tachometer
    and Vehicle

    Unit Check

    Transmitter

    Vehicle

    Speed

    Signal

    Warning

    Lamps/Schematic

    Warning

    Lamps/Wiring

    Check

    Switch

    Check

    Fuel Warning

    Lamp

    Sensor

    137
    138

    WARN —

    Check

    151
    151

    Buzzer

    Warning

    Buzzer/System

    Warning

    Buzzer/Wiring

    BUZZER

    Components

    Unit…

    151
    Description

    152

    154
    Inspection

    Warning

    Buzzer

    Front Wiper

    and Washer/Wiring

    Description

    Amplifier

    Front Wiper

    Installation

    Front Wiper

    Check
    and Adjustment..

    Linkage
    Nozzle

    Front Washer

    Tube Layout

    Adjustment…

    and Washer/System

    179

    washer)

    179
    180
    183

    WINDOW —

    185

    Diagnoses

    197
    198

    Description

    198
    200

    Diagram

    Diagnoses

    202

    Type 1 (For Europe

    Type 2 (Except

    and
    212

    Diagnoses

    Europe

    and Australia)

    216

    POWER DOOR MIRROR

    220

    Wiring

    Diagram

    MIRROR

    for

    220

    ELECTRIC SUN ROOF
    Wiring

    Diagram

    224
    SROOF —

    224

    HORN, CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND CLOCK
    Wiring

    Diagram

    HORN —

    226

    REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR
    MIRROR DEFOGGER
    System

    Description

    (For models

    light system)
    Filament

    Check

    Fi lament

    Repai

    Diagram

    230

    with daytime
    230

    DEF —

    231
    235

    r

    236

    AUDIO AND ANTENNA
    Audio/System

    226

    237

    Description

    237

    AUDIO —

    238

    162

    Radio

    166

    Location

    of Antenna

    243

    166

    Antenna

    Rod Replacement..

    243

    168
    168
    Description

    D/LOCK

    Trouble

    Wiring

    167

    Front Washer
    Rear Wiper

    160

    Diagram

    WIPER —

    Front Wiper

    157
    160

    and Washer/System

    179

    Tube Layout..

    180

    Wirin.g Diagram

    Diagram

    WIPER AND WASHER
    Front Wiper

    139
    151

    Check

    Warning

    179

    Austral ia)

    138
    Diagram

    Oil Pressure

    Trouble

    137

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER

    Diode

    Wiring

    137

    Check

    Sensor

    Check

    (For headlamp

    Diagram

    System

    133

    135

    Fuel Tank Gauge

    177

    Description

    Trouble

    134
    Speed

    Sensor
    Thermal

    Diagram

    Schematic

    and Water

    Inspection/Speedometer

    and Washer/Wiring

    POWER DOOR LOCK

    and Fuel

    METER —

    Wiper

    POWER WINDOW

    127

    Combination

    176
    176

    HLC —

    126

    Speedometer,

    Layout..

    Headlamp

    Bulb Specifications

    INT/L —

    175

    (for rear washer)

    METER AND GAUGES

    Tube

    175

    Adjustment

    113

    and Luggage

    Diagram

    Nozzle

    175

    and Adjustment..

    113

    System

    Lamps/Wiring

    Check

    Installation

    Rear Washer

    122

    Room

    171

    Check Valve

    Unit Check

    Diagram

    WIP/R —

    Rear Washer

    Diagnoses

    Combination

    and Washer/Wiring

    Rear Wiper Amplifier
    106

    Turn Signal

    Interior,

    101

    Lamps/

    Schematic

    (Conl’d.)

    169

    Fuse Check

    243

    HEATED SEAT
    Wiring

    Diagram

    245

    245

    NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System)

    H/SEAT

    247

    System

    Description

    247

    System

    Composition

    247

    CONTENTS
    Component Parts Location
    Wiring Diagram — NATS Trouble Diagnoses
    LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL UNITS
    Engine Compartment
    Passenger Compartment
    HARNESS LAyOUT
    How to Read Harness Layout…
    Outline
    Engine Control Harness
    Engine Room Harness
    Main Harness ‘»
    Body Harness
    Body No.2 Harness
    Engine Harness

    :

    248
    249
    251
    266
    266
    267
    269
    269
    270
    271
    274
    280
    284
    292
    294

    (Cont’d.)

    Air Bag Harness
    Room Lamp Harness
    Back Door Harness
    Front Door Harness (LH side)
    Front Door Harness (RH side)
    Rear Door Harness
    SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)
    Terminal Arrangement
    FUSE BLOCK — Junction Box (JIB)
    Terminal Arrangement
    ELECTRICAL UNITS
    Terminal Arrangement
    JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)
    Terminal Arrangement

    297
    298
    299
    300
    302
    304
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout

    WIRING DIAGRAM REFERENCE CHART
    COOLING SYSTEM
    ECCS (Ignition syslem)
    AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CONTROL SYSTEM
    ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
    SRS «AIR BAG»
    HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

    LC SECTION
    EC SECTION
    AT SECTION
    BR SECTION
    RS SECTION
    HA SECTION

    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» (Dual Air Bag System)
    The Supplemental Restraint System «Air Bag», used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or
    severity of injury to the driver and front passenger in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint
    System consists of air bag modules (located in the center of the steering wheel and on the instrument
    panel on the passenger side), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
    Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
    WARNING:

    To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
    by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

    Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
    injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.

    Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the
    harness connectors or for the complete harness, for easy identification.

    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» (Single Air Bag System)
    The Supplemental Restraint System «Air Bag», used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or
    severity of injury to the driver in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint System consists of an
    air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp and
    spiral cable. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this
    Service Manual.
    WARNING:

    To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
    by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

    Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
    injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.

    Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS.

    EL-4

    HARNESS CONNECTOR
    Description
    HARNESS CONNECTOR

    All harness connectors have been modified to prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
    The connector can be disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking section.

    CAUTION:
    Do not pull the harness when disconnecting

    the connector.

    [Example]

    Packing
    (Water-proof

    LIFT

    type)

    PUSH

    PUSH

    PUSH

    PUSH
    (For combination

    (For relay)

    meted

    SEL769D

    EL-5

    STANDARDIZED

    RELAY

    Description
    NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS
    Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
    NORMAL OPEN RELAY

    NORMAL CLOSED RELAY

    MIXED TYPE RELAY

    Flows.

    U.

    Flows .

    Does not
    flow.

    u.

    e:> =

    Does note:>
    flow.

    9

    ~

    (J)

    =0

    I
    BATIERY
    Flows .

    BATIERY

    Does not
    flow. Q

    =

    0

    :s:

    I

    0

    SW 1

    BATIERY

    Does not
    flow. Q

    Z

    (J)

    =

    I

    SW 1

    Flows.

    L

    t

    SW 1

    SW 1

    BATIERY

    L

    I

    BATIERY

    BATIERY
    SEL881H

    TYPE OF STANDARDIZED

    r~~-~.~_._-

    -~—_.-_..»..__ ._-~-

    RELAYS
    1M

    1 Make

    2M

    2 Make

    1T

    1 Transfer

    1M.1B ………………

    1 Make 1 Break

    _.. ————

    ——-~.-

    -.—-.——~—-

    2M

    1M

    (ftj
    r—~—.————-~~-~.
    —-.—….
    r
    1M

    ,

    ..

    ;

    ,

    »

    iM.1B

    1T

    1T

    (/

    2M

    -‘,

    ~.. — -__~- ~—-

    I

    1B

    I

    j
    SEL882H

    EL-6

    51 ANDARDIZED RELAY
    Description (Cont’d)

    Type

    Outer view

    Circuit

    Connector symbol
    and connection

    1T

    Case color

    BLACK

    =
    2M

    BROWN

    1M.1B

    GRAY

    =

    1M

    BLUE

    The arrangement of terminal numbers on the actual relays may differ from those shown above.

    SEL661TA

    EL-7

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Schematic
    CHARGE
    75A

    [ill

    >-

    a:
    w

    25A

    I-I—

    m

    CIRCUIT
    BREAKER
    ILL, WINDOW, D/LOCK, SROOF

    «

    CD

    30A

    30A

    0

    I COOl/F,

    A/C

    I

    lliJ
    COOl/F, A/C
    7.5A@Q]

    FICO, A/CCUT, A/C
    7.5A@I]

    CHARGE
    UJ

    ..J

    30A

    ITJ

    IGNITION
    OFF ACC

    SWITCH
    ON

    ST

    MAIN, IGN/SG, INJECT
    START
    7.5A~

    7.5A~

    S/SIG, GLOW, PlA, DTRl

    AAC/V
    15A

    @ill
    H/lAMP, DTRl, R/FOG

    15A

    @Q]
    H/LAMP,DTRl

    7.5A0J

    MAIN, CMPS, MAFS, GLOW, NATS

    LIGHTING

    SWITCH

    OFF

    2ND

    1ST

    ABC ABC ABC

    10A ~
    HORN
    7.5A@]

    R/FOG

    10A

    FRONT FOG
    lAMP SWITCH

    00
    DR

    10A

    LE

    mI

    CD

    DAYTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT

    DL

    HEL001

    EL-8

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Schematic (Cont’d)

    l5A ~
    F/FOG

    @J

    20A

    LOAD, DEF
    lOA

    [8J

    lOA

    [ill

    ABS, SToP/L
    TURN
    7.5A@Q]

    FICO, A!CCUT,
    HEATER, A!e

    INT/L
    GLOW, AIM, BUZZER,
    HORN, AUDIO, NATS
    ILL, AUDIO
    lOA

    @]

    HEATER, A!e

    WIP/R
    l5A

    [ill

    20A

    [ill

    HORN
    WIPER
    lOA

    ACCESSORY
    RELAY

    ~

    MIRROR, DEF
    l5A ~
    HLC
    20A []]

    @

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    @)

    RHO models
    eo engine
    SR engine
    SR engine A/T models
    and CO engine
    For Europe and Israel
    Except @
    LHD models without
    daytime light system
    Except @
    LHo models with
    daytime light system
    Without daytime light system
    With single air bag system
    With dual air bag system

    LOAD, DEF

    n IGNITION
    U RELAY

    LOAD, MIL, BUZZER, WINDOW,
    SROOF, DEF, NATS
    LKUP, AIT, BACK/L,
    METER, WARN
    TURN
    7. 5A [ill

    ABS
    lOA

    [ill
    H/SEAT

    lOA

    [ill

    l5A

    @]

    H02S

    F/PUMP, AIRREG

    TAIL. F/FoG
    3A

    IE]

    LOAD, AIM, TAIL, F/FO~
    ILL, BUZZER

    SRS
    lOA ~

    SRS
    PGC/V, EGRC/V, AAC/V, VTC,
    COOL/F, LOAD, GLOW, PLA,
    FCUT, A/C, START, DTRL, DEF

    HEL096

    EL-9

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram ~

    EL-POWER-01

    BATTERY

    FUSIBLE LINK AND
    RELAY BOX
    ~

    W/R
    ~

    POWER —

    ~

    t

    W/R~

    @:
    30A

    I

    W

    @:
    B/R

    Jt

    BR

    t

    rn

    _-I:::::::

    A

    Wt

    !
    1

    ABS
    GLOW

    Next page

    75A

    W

    BYR :}
    B/R +

    FUSIBLE LINK
    AND FUSE BOX
    ~
    ~
    ~

    []]

    Il:jdI

    daytime light system
    SR engine AT models
    and CD engine

    Y

    1_-_-_-_-

    o

    W/R

    CD engine

    @: LHD models without

    GY

    CIRCUIT
    BREAKER
    (102)

    G/W

    L!Y

    RIB

    I

    1

    ———

    RIB +

    CHARGE

    L/Y +

    FICO, A/CCUT,

    G/W

    ~

    ~

    GY

    W!L

    I

    .————-1——0———1._.- __ —

    W/L

    ~

    W
    W

    +}

    COOL/F,A/C

    +
    + 57tb~R~~2~bF
    +CHARGE
    JB—- To EL -POWER

    ~:—. -f9>
    W

    A/C

    ~

    -04

    Next page

    ~————————————,
    CE57>
    FRONT»

    ~
    FRONT

    t

    ————————————~
    HEL002

    El-10

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER —

    Preceding
    page

    —19~

    (Cont’d)

    EL-POWER-02

    W

    @: AHO models

    :

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH

    00):

    LHO models
    without
    daytime
    light
    system
    Except

    1451
    @
    A/Y

    BIA

    BA

    +

    ~

    I

    0

    ~

    R

    1l12J1
    ~R/l

    BIA ~

    ~

    ~:

    ~Ol
    ~

    LE

    ~H/lAMP.

    BA ..

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH
    OFF….

    R

    01—

    LE

    AAC/V
    TAIL. F/FOG. ILL

    TAIl/l
    FUSE

    DAYTIME
    LIGHT

    TAIL/l

    UNIT

    SW

    (E119):

    @

    TAIL/L
    OUTPUT

    * 1 .JE-.
    ~

    0-0-

    DTRl. AIFOG

    AIL ..

    To El -POWER
    -09

    TAIL, F/FOG

    r———————————,
    ~g6EL-POWER
    +

    B/R
    MAIN.IGN/SG.INJECT
    W/L ~
    ~g5EL-POWER

    r——————-~

    1
    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1

    @

    ~

    B

    I

    I

    R

    B

    B


    ..

    B

    ..

    B

    If-II
    ~~

    … ——

    —-

    __

    LIB +}
    LG/R +

    FICO. A/CCUT•
    A/C

    LG/R +

    HEATER, A/C

    LG/R +

    A/CCUT. A/C

    LG/R+}
    L/W

    @

    HEATER.A/C

    +

    r————————————————————,


    +
    2

    5

    1

    CIGN2)

    (ACC2)

    r————————-UITIIIIIIIIIill

    @

    ~BR

    ———————————~
    HEL009

    EL-17

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER —

    .

    e0
    Q)

    a;
    <;;
    >,

    1.22
    1.20
    1.18

    =5

    ‘»0,

    1.16

    .g
    U
    Q)

    1.14

    000

    1.12
    1.10
    -30
    (-22)

    -20
    (-4)

    -10
    (14)

    0
    (32)

    10
    (50)

    20
    (68)

    Electrolyte temperature °C (OF)

    30
    (86)

    40
    (104)

    50
    (122)
    SELOO7Z


    EL-27

    BATTERY
    Battery Test and Charging Chart
    Chart I

    VISUAL INSPECTION
    • Check battery case for cracks or bends .
    • Check battery terminals for damage .
    • If the difference between the max. and min. electrolyte level in cells is within 10 mm (0.39 in), it is OK.

    t

    OK

    NG

    Replace
    battery.

    CHECKING SPECIFIC GRAVITY
    Refer to «Specific Gravity Check».

    I
    Below 1.100

    SLOW CHARGE
    Refer to «A: Slow
    Charge».

    1.100 — 1.220

    .
    STANDARD CHARGE
    Refer to «B: Standard
    Charge».

    CAPACITY TEST
    Refer to «Chart
    II».

    Ready for
    use

    CAPACITY TEST
    Refer to «Chart II».

    QUICK CHARGE
    Refer to «C: Quick Charge».

    r

    Ready for use
    • Mount battery again
    and check loose terminals. Also check other
    related circuits.

    NG

    OK

    G

    Replace
    battery.

    NG

    K

    CAPACITY TEST
    Refer to «Chart II».

    t t
    K

    Above 1.220

    Ready for
    use

    CHECKING SPECIFIC
    GRAVITY
    Refer to «Specific Gravity
    Check».

    QUICK CHARGE
    Refer to «C: Quick Charge».
    • Time required: 45 min.

    1
    RECHARGE
    Refer to «C: Quick Charge» .
    • If battery temperature rises above 60°C (140°F),
    stop charging. Always charge battery when its
    temperature is below 60°C (140°F).

    OK

    Ready
    for use

    OK

    Ready for use

    CAPACITY TEST
    Refer to «Chart II»

    t

    CAPACITY TEST
    Refer to «Chart II».

    t

    NG

    Replace
    battery.

    * «STANDARD CHARGE» is recommended if the vehicle is in storage alter charging.

    EL-28

    NG

    Replace
    battery.

    BATTERY
    Battery Test and Charging Chart (Cont’d)
    • Check battery type and determine the specified current
    using the following table.
    Fig. 1 DISCHARGING CURRENT

    Chart II

    (Load Tester)
    CAPACITY TEST

    Test using load tester.

    Follow manufacturer’s
    instructions to check and
    determine if battery is serviceable,
    OK

    Ready for use

    Read load tester voltage
    when specified discharging
    current (Refer to Fig~ 1.)
    flows through battery for 15
    seconds.

    NG

    Go to next
    step.
    Above 9.6
    volts
    OK
    Ready for use

    Type

    Current (A)

    28B19R(L)

    90

    34B19R(L)

    99

    46B24R(L)

    135

    55B24R(L)

    135

    50D23R(L)

    150

    55D23R(L)

    180

    65D26R(L)

    195

    80D26R(L)

    195

    75D31R(L)

    210

    95D31R(L)

    240

    115D31R(L)

    240

    95E41R(L)

    300

    130E41R(L)

    330

    ~m

    Below 9.6
    volts
    NG

    o~

    Go to next
    step.

    SEL008Z


    EL-29

    BATTERY
    Battery Test and Charging Chart (Cont’d)

    I

    A: SLOW CHARGE

    Determine initial charging current Irom specilic gravity
    relerring to Fig. 2.
    Fig. 2 INITIAL CHARGING CURRENT SETTING (Slow charge)
    • Charge battery.
    • Check charging voltage 30 minutes after starting the
    battery charge.

    BATTERY TYPE
    CONVERTED
    SPECIFIC
    GRAVITY

    2
    r:r:
    en

    ~
    CD

    <0
    N

    Below
    1.100

    ::J

    if
    en
    CD

    er:0>

    (‘)

    L!)
    L!)

    L!)

    er:-

    ::J

    er:to

    a

    L!)

    (‘)

    L!)

    :J

    er:;:;:;
    D

    ~
    ~
    L!)

    :J

    a:

    :;
    UJ
    L!)

    OJ

    ~
    a:
    :;
    UJ

    a

    ~

    1.100 — 1.130

    4.0 (A)

    5.0 (A)

    60 (A)

    7.0 (A)

    8.0
    (A)

    90 (A)

    130
    (A)

    1.130 — 1160

    30 (Al

    4.0 (Al

    5.0 (A)

    6.0 (A)

    7.0
    (A)

    8.0 (A)

    11.0
    (A)

    1.160 — 1.190

    2.0 (A)

    3.0 (Al

    4.0 (A)

    5.0 (Al

    6.0
    (A)

    7.0 (A)

    9.0
    (A)

    1.190 — 1.220

    2.0 (A)

    2.0 (A)

    3.0 (A)

    4.0 (A)

    5.0
    (A)

    5.0 (A)

    7.0
    (A)

    • Check battery type and determine the specified current using the table shown
    above .
    • After starting charging, adjustment of charging current is not necessary.
    Fig. 5 ADDITIONAL CHARGE (Standard charge)

    Conduct additional charge as per Fig.
    5, if necessary.

    Go to «CAPACITY TEST».

    Below 1.150

    1.150 — 1.200

    1.200 — 1.240

    Charge for 3.5
    hours at initial

    Charge for 2.5
    hours at initial
    charging current setting.

    Charge for 1.5
    hours at initial
    charging current setting.

    charging current setting.

    Above 1240

    I

    Go to «CAPACITY TEST».

    CAUTION:

    Do not use standard charge method on a battery whose specific gravity is less than 1.100.

    Set charging current to value specified in Fig. 4. If charger is not capable of producing specified
    current value, set its charging current as close to that value as possible.

    Keep battery away from open flame while it is being charged.

    When connecting charger, connect leads first, then turn on charger. Do not turn on charger first, as
    this may cause a spark.

    If battery temperature rises above 60°C (140°F), stop charging. Always charge battery when its temperature is below 60°C (140°F).

    EL-31

    I

    BATTERY
    Battery Test and Charging Chart (Cont’d)
    C: QUICK CHARGE
    Fig. 6 INITIAL CHARGING CURRENT SETTING AND CHARGING TIME (Quick
    charge)
    :::J

    Determine initial charging current setting and
    charging time from specific gravity, referring to
    Fig. 6.

    SATTERY TYPE

    I

    Charge battery.

    :::J

    «» «»
    CD

    C’)

    10 (A)

    :::J

    :::J

    :::J

    C’)

    C’)

    CI

    N

    CD
    CI

    Cl
    0

    Cl

    Cl

    L()
    L()

    L()

    ~ ~ ~ ~
    CI

    CURRENT [A]

    >I-

    :::J

    co co «»D:l «»
    D:l
    to
    N

    :>

    :::J

    ~
    ~
    0>
    0>

    N
    L()
    L()

    L()

    15 (A)

    ~

    CD

    :::J

    d d d ~ :::J
    a: a: a: ;;:; ~
    ;;:; ;;:; Cl ~
    W
    Cl
    Cl
    Cl
    CD
    N

    L()

    0
    to

    L()

    L()

    t-

    O>

    20 (A)

    ;:

    L()

    0>

    2.5 hours

    1.130 — 1.160

    2.0 hours

    1.160 — 1.190

    1.5 hours

    1.190 — 1.220

    1.0 hours

    Above 1.220

    0.75 hours (45 min.)

    0

    ~
    40
    (A)

    30 (A)

    1.100 — 1.130

    :::J

    ~
    ~
    W

    z

    0
    0

    • Check battery type and determine the specified current using the table
    shown above .
    • After starting charging, adjustment of charging current is not necessary.

    CAUTION:

    Do not use quick charge method on a battery whose specific gravity is less than 1.100.

    Set initial charging current to value specified in Fig. 6. If charger is not capable of producing specified current value, set its charging current as close to that value as possible.

    Keep battery away from open flame while it is being charged.

    When connecting charger, connect leads first, then turn on charger. Do not turn on charger first, as
    this may cause a spark.

    Be careful of a rise in battery temperature because a large current flow is required during quickcharge operation.
    If battery temperature rises above 60°C (140°F), stop charging. Always charge battery when its temperature is below 60°C (140°F).

    Do not exceed the charging time specified in Fig. 6, because charging battery over the charging time
    can cause deterioration of the battery.

    Service Data and Specifications (SOS)
    GA engines

    Applied model
    Type
    Capacity

    V-AH

    EL-32

    CD20

    SR20DE

    26S19L

    55D23L

    65D26L

    95D31L

    34S19L

    12 — 30

    12 — 60

    12 — 65

    12 — 80

    12 — 33

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Wiring Diagram —

    START —

    MIl MODELS

    EL-START-01

    :J Refer to EL-POWEA.
    (1):
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    ~:

    LHOmode1s
    RHOmodels
    GAeng ine and SR eng ine
    CD engine
    For Europe and Israe 1
    Except@
    Gasoline engine models for
    Europe, Israel and Australia
    @: Except~
    *1″‘(1)1
    , @4

    ST IGNITION

    SWITCH

    ON

    OFF

    ‘e- …..

    ~

    ACC

    U:i=ll
    B/W

    ~~

    O~

    B/W ~

    B/W ~Ol

    B/W

    -(Q

    LB/W~B/W.J

    SA

    ~H»‘@3
    @4
    *2 …

    AW

    GY

    HEL195

    EL-34

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Trouble Diagnoses
    If any abnormality

    is found, immediately

    disconnect battery negative terminal.

    Replace magnetic switch.

    Starter does not stop.

    Engine does not start.

    Does engine turn by cranking?

    Check ignition/fuel system.

    Does engine turn normally?
    No (Turns slowly.)

    No

    OK

    Check battery as follows:
    • Charging condition
    • Terminal connections
    • Terminal corrosion

    Repair starter motor.

    NG

    @
    Does starter motor turn?

    Yes

    Does gear shaft turn?

    No

    Check pinion clutch.

    No
    Check reduction gear, armature
    and gear shaft.

    Check fuse and fusible link.

    Replace.

    OK
    Check battery as follows:
    • Charging condition
    • Terminal connections
    • Terminal corrosion

    @
    NG

    OK
    Check starting system wiring.

    • Charge battery .
    • Repair connections and corrosian of battery terminals.

    Repair.

    OK
    Does magnetic switch operation
    sound occur?

    No

    Replace magnetic switch

    Yes
    Check condition of pinion and
    ring gear mesh.

    OK

    Does starter turn under no load
    by connecting wires as follows?

    Yes

    Replace magnetic switch.

    NG

    • Adjust pinion movement.
    • Check pinion moving mechanism .
    • Check ring gear.

    Repair starter motor .

    SELOO9Z

    EL-35

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Construction
    SEC. 233
    S114-766A

    r.ii1
    III 7.4 — 9.8 (0.75 — 1.00, 65.1 • 86.8) ~

    ~6.4.
    8.3
    (0.65 — 0.85, 56.4 • 73.8)

    ~:

    @
    @
    @
    @

    iii(0.17
    1.7 • 2.4
    _ 0.24,

    14.8 • 20.8)

    (0.50 — 0.65, 43.4 • 56.4)

    N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    a @: High-temperature
    G)

    4.9 _ 6.4

    grease point
    MEL779DA

    @

    Gear case
    Pinion assembly
    Shift lever
    Adjusting plate
    Magnetic switch assembly

    SEC. 233

    @
    @

    Pinion shaft
    Planetary gear
    Internal gear

    @

    @

    Yoke

    @

    @

    Armature

    (J)
    @

    -Magnetic

    Adjusting plate ~
    Plate thickness:
    0.25 (0.0098)
    0.50 (0.0197)

    MIT72087A

    Brush spring
    Brush H
    Brush holder
    Rear cover

    switch assembly
    ~10

    • 12 (1.0 — 1.2, 87 — 104)
    -Planetary

    Packing
    Plate

    0

    gear

    m

    @

    paCking

    KJo
    ~4.4

    o

    — 7.1
    (0.45 — 0.72, 39.1 — 62.5)

    ~

    ~

    Brush holder

    ~m@

    L

    Internal g~ar

    0

    m@
    Pinion stopper

    Ii!2.5

    — 4.4
    (0.25 — 0.45,
    21.7 — 39.1)

    Yoke
    Unit : mm (in)

    m

    Ii! : N’m

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    @ : High-temperature

    grease point

    MEL234F

    EL-36

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Construction (Cont’d)
    SEC. 233
    M1T77281
    :;

    ,o42 •

    0:

    [Magnetic

    SWitrChas:~::~ry

    365 • 66.’}

    gear

    paCking

    m@
    ~4.4

    -7.1

    (0.45 — 0.72,
    39.1 • 62.5)

    ~

    /’

    ~;:/

    ~o

    ~

    C)~G

    ~

    Gear case metal
    Brush holder

    m@
    Brush spring

    ~2.5

    — 4.4
    (0.25

    ~:

    m@:

    . 0.45,

    21.7 . 39.1)

    Unit: mm (in)
    N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)
    lligh-temperature grease point

    SEL151SA

    SEC. 233

    Adjusting plate

    S114-769A

    T::~~nc::~~g~p,a~~£~~~~~fr:
    Shift lever

    ),

    Gear case assembly

    0″

    o

    ~

    02,

    m@

    ‘:

    Magnetic switch assembly

    ;P

    I!E!l~

    ~

    p;o;o~,,~

    (J

    , (

    Qo

    ~

    ~~~

    I!E!@I.’

    ~

    l]J

    Center bracket (A)

    «‘;0′.5’..

    m

    I!E!(flJ

    P,»,oo ,.,.

    ~»»»
    Planetary gear (x3)

    /_
    _
    Ollll!

    Through bolt (x2)
    ~
    1i’iI14.9 • 6.4 (0.50 • 0.65, 43.4 . 56.4)

    3J

    ~m@R»i’7m,::

    ~.

    ‘0.17 .0.24,14.’.

    ~oo

    Yoke assembly

    ~

    7~0 I]

    Pinion stopper clip
    Pinion stopper

    ~cp

    p

    Connector stay

    0

    Center br

    ~

    ~., Jtlj)~
    I~~~

    IOI!Ei!@

    EIl@
    6

    87.104)

    .
    <,

    ,

    \:~’

    .
    ,,,’

    U;it: mm (in)

    [iJ:
    B(8J:
    Q)
    @

    @
    @
    @
    @
    (j)

    Sleeve bea ring
    .
    Gear case
    Stopper cr
    P’
    Ip
    p~n!on stopper
    mlon assembl
    Internal
    g ear Y
    ,
    ShIft lever

    N.m (k
    Hi h- g.m, in-Ib)
    9 temperature grease pOint
    .

    @
    @
    @)
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Plate
    Packing
    PI~netary gear
    Adjusting plate
    Magnetic swit h
    Packing
    c assembly

    Armature
    Bush (+)
    Brush spring
    Brush holder
    Bearing
    Rear cover

    Yoke

    SEC. 233
    S114-806

    m iji:
    tj:f» N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)
    !:y’

    Hlgh-temp,erature
    greas

    e POint

    MEL675EA

    EL-42

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Construction (Cont’d)
    SEC. 233
    S114-800A

    Magnetic switch assembly

    Brush
    spring

    ‘.

    t

    Brush H

    Ij] 1.7

    — 2.4
    (0.17 — 0.24, 14.8 — 20.8)

    Brush (+)

    Armature

    Ij]:
    @:

    m

    Ij] 6.4 — 8.3 (0.65 — 0.85, 56.4 — 73.8)

    N.m (kg-m, in-Ibl
    High-temperature grease point
    SEL027UA

    SEC. 233

    o:l
    l

    Planetary
    gearm@

    Magnetic switch assembly

    MOT80281
    MOT80281ZC

    .G::f
    5hifll’.’,

    ~4.1-7..

    ~~

    ~4.4

    — 7.1
    (0.45 — 0.72, 39.1 — 62.S)

    ~~

    ~19

    (0.42 • 0.77, 36.5 • 66.8)

    l..-

    44
    (0.25 — 0.45,
    21.7 — 39.1)

    Brush holder
    Armature

    m@
    m

    ~:
    @:

    N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)
    High-temperature grease point

    Yoke
    SEL026UA

    EL-43

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Construction (Cont’d)
    SEC. 233
    M2T49282

    @Plate thickness:
    0.25 (0.0098)
    0.50 (0.0197)

    SEL526QB

    CD
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Gear case metal
    Gear case

    @

    Stopper clip
    Pinion stopper
    Pinion assembly

    @
    @

    (J)

    @)

    SEC. 233
    S114-570B
    ~

    onnector

    stay set

    Torsion sprrng
    Dust cover

    ~

    0Jl

    0

    )

    Dust cover (Adjusting Plate
    Plate thickness:
    0.5 (0.020)
    0.8 (0.031)

    6.4 — 7.8
    (0.65 — 0.80, 56.4 . 69.4)

    @
    @
    @
    @

    Shift lever
    Holder
    Armature
    Adjusting plate
    Magnetic switch assembly

    1

    @

    Yoke
    Brush (+)
    Brush spring
    Brush (-)
    Rear cover

    Magnetic switch assembly
    r~7.4

    — 9.8 (0.75 — 1.00,65.1

    .86.8)

    0 0

    0

    ~4.9

    — 6.4
    (0.50 — 0.65, 43.4 — 56.4)
    E-ring

    Gear case metal

    m@

    Rear cover metal

    m@

    Unit : mm (in)

    ~:

    Brush

    N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    m (8J: High.temperature

    H

    Brush (+)

    grease point

    MEL674E

    EL-44

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Construction (Cont’d)
    SEC. 233

    Adjusting plate
    Plate thickness:
    0.25 (0.0098)
    0.50 (0.0197)

    M2T48681

    Magnetic switch assembly
    ~

    ~

    4.4 .7.1

    4.1 • 7.6 (0.42 — 0.77, 36.5 — 66.8)

    (0.45 — 0.72. 39.1 — 62.5)
    ~2.5

    — 4.4
    (0.25 — 0.45. 21.7-

    39.1)

    J
    Rear cover

    Brush

    ~

    H

    Brush spring
    Brush (+)

    Unit : mm (in)
    ~:

    m@:

    N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)
    High-temperature grease point
    MEL673E

    ~

    ~

    . N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    31 — 42 (3.2 — 4.3, 23 — 31)

    Removal and Installation

    SEL909T


    EL-45

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Magnetic Switch Check

    Type 1


    Before starting to check,

    Disconnect «M» terminal
    1. Continuity test (between

    No continuity … Replace.
    2. Continuity test (between

    No continuity … Replace.

    disconnect battery ground cable.
    of starter motor.
    «S» terminal and switch body).
    «S» terminal

    and «M»

    terminal).

    Type 2

    Type 3

    W4

    Pinion/Clutch Check
    1.

    2.

    3.

    Type 3

    Type 2

    Type 1

    Inspect pinion teeth.
    Replace pinion if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check
    condition of ring gear teeth.)
    Inspect reduction gear teeth.
    Replace reduction gear if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also
    check condition of armature shaft gear teeth.)
    Check to see if pinion locks in one direction and rotates
    smoothly in the opposite direction.
    If it locks or rotates in both directions, or unusual resistance
    is evident. … Replace.
    Type 4

    Type 5

    SEL011Z

    Brush Check
    BRUSH

    — Vernier

    Check wear of brush.
    Wear limit length:
    Refer to 50S (El-SO).

    Excessive wear … Replace.

    caliper

    SEL014Z

    EL-46

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Brush Check (Conl’d)
    BRUSH SPRING PRESSURE

    /

    Brush spring

    Check brush spring pressure with brush spring
    brush.
    Spring pressure (with new brush):
    Refer to SOS (EL-50).
    e Not within the specified values … Replace.

    detached from

    Brush

    SEL015Z

    BRUSH HOLDER

    Type 1

    1.

    Perform insulation test between brush holder (positive side)
    and its base (negative side).
    e. Continuity exists …. Replace.
    2. Check brush to see if it moves smoothly.
    e If brush holder is bent, replace it; if sliding surface is dirty,
    clean.
    Type 2

    Type 3

    SEL016Z

    Yoke Check

    Type 1

    Magnet is secured to yoke by bonding agent. Check magnet to
    see that it is secured to yoke and for any cracks. Replace malfunctioning parts as an assembly.
    Holder may move slightly as it is only inserted and not bonded.
    CAUTION:
    Do not clamp yoke in a vice or strike it with a hammer .

    Type 2

    SEL018Z

    EL-47

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Armature Check
    1.

    2.

    Continuity test (b
    No continuit
    etween two segm
    .
    Insulation t Y … Replace.
    ents sIde by side)
    C
    . . est (between
    .
    eplace. commutato r bar and shaft).
    ontlnulty exists …. Reach

    SEL019Z

    •3. Check
    Rough comm
    S ut a~or surface.
    … and lightly with N0.500 — 600 emery paper.

    4. Check diameter of
    Commutator ml» «commutator.

    mmum dia
    meter:
    R e f er to SOS (EL
    Less than spe CI’f’led value
    -50) . … Replace.

    Vernier caliper

    SEL021Z

    5. Check depth of .
    • Less than 0 2 Insulating mold from
    (0.020 to 003’1
    ~m)
    commutator
    .
    In (0.008 in) … Undercut
    to 0.5 tosurface
    0.8 m’m

    Round

    0.5 — 0.8 ,;,;;

    ~»»I
    Correct

    ~File

    ~

    Commutator

    SEL022Z

    EL-48

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Assembly
    Apply high-temperature
    grease to lubricate the bearing, gears
    and frictional surface when assembling the starter.
    Carefully observe the following instructions.

    PINION PROTRUSION

    LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

    With pinion driven out by magnetic switch, push pinion back to
    remove slack and measure clearance»£»
    between the front
    edge of the pinion and the pinion stopper.
    Clearance «-E»:
    Refer to 50S (EL-SO).

    [
    ,,

    «T»

    I

    -L.

    Clearance »

    !2 »

    SEL026Z

    ,.

    Type 1

    ~»‘ti»g

    Type 2

    Not in the specified

    value .., Adjust by adjusting

    plate.

    pl.»

    ~

    ~o’IJ
    III III

    ~ A:iusting

    Type 3

    plate

    ,.~
    ~.Adjusting

    plate

    SEL029Z

    EL-49

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Service Data and Specifications (SDS)
    STARTER
    S114-766A
    Type

    M1T72087A

    HITACHI

    M1T77281

    S114-769A

    MITSUBISHI

    S114-630

    M3T37783

    HITACHI

    M2T62071A

    S13-305

    HITACHI

    MITSUBISHI
    Non-reduction

    Reduction

    S13-331

    M2T61871A
    MITSUBISHI

    Reduction

    Europe
    Applied model

    GA engines
    CD20
    A/T

    System voltage

    MIT

    12

    V

    No-load
    Terminal

    voltage

    11.0

    V

    11.0

    115
    Less than
    105

    Less than 140

    Less than
    110

    More than
    4,030

    More than 3,900

    More than
    4,100

    A

    Less than
    85

    50 — 75

    Less than
    85

    rpm

    More than
    2,950

    3,000 — 4,000

    More than
    2,950

    More
    than
    7,000

    Minimum diameter of
    commutator
    mm (in)

    28.0
    (1,102)

    28.8 (1.134)

    28.0
    (1,102)

    39.0
    (1.535)

    31.4 (1.236)

    35.5 (1.398)

    31.4
    (1236)

    Minimum
    of brush

    10.5
    (0.413)

    12.0 (0.472)

    10.5
    (0.413)

    11.0
    (0.433)

    11.5 (0.453)

    11.0 (0.433)

    11.5
    (0.453)

    Brush spring tension
    N (kg, Ib)

    16.2
    (1.65,
    3.64)

    13.7 — 25.5
    (1.4 — 2.6, 3.1 — 5.7)

    14.7 — 17.7
    (1.5 — 1.8,
    3.3 — 4.0)

    17.7 21.6
    (1.8 — 2.2,
    4.0 — 4.9)

    13.7 — 25.5
    (1.4 — 2.6, 3.1 — 5.7)

    28.4 — 34.3 (2.90 3.50, 6.38 — 7.71)

    13.7 — 25.5
    (1.4 — 2.6,
    3.1 — 5.7)

    Clearance between
    bearing metal and
    armature shaft mm (in)

    Less than
    0.2 (0.008)

    Less
    than 0.2
    (0.008)

    Clearance ‘T’
    between pinion front
    edge and pinion
    mm (in)
    stopper

    0.3 — 2.5
    (0.012 0.098)

    Current

    Revolution

    length
    mm (in)

    Movement ‘T’ in
    height of pinion
    assembly
    mm (in)

    Less
    than 0.2
    (0.008)

    0.5 — 2.0
    (0.020 — 0.079)

    Less than 60

    0.3 — 2.5
    (0.012 — 0.098)

    More than
    6,500

    0.5 — 2.0
    (0.020 0.079)

    0.5 — 2.0
    (0.020 0.079)

    EL-50

    0.3 — 2.0 0.3 — 0.8
    (0.012 — (0.012 0.079)
    0.031)

    0.3 — 1.5
    (0.012 0.059)

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Service Data and Specifications (SOS) (Co nt’ d)
    M1T72985A

    S114-806

    MITSUBISH I

    Type

    S114-800A

    MOT80281ZC

    HITACHI

    I MOT80281

    M2T49282

    S114-568A

    MITSUBISHI

    I S114-570B

    M2T48681
    MITSUBISHI

    HITACHI
    Non-reduction

    Reduction

    RHD Except Europe and Australia

    Australia

    GA engines

    Applied model
    SR20DE
    A/T
    System voltage

    I

    M/T

    AIT

    12

    V

    No-load
    Terminal

    voltage

    Current

    11.5

    11.0

    V

    Less than
    53

    Less than 90

    Less than 60

    Less than
    53

    A

    50 — 75

    rpm

    3,000 4,000

    Minimum diameter of
    commutator
    mm (in)

    28.8
    (1.134)

    280 (1.102)

    28.8 (1.134)

    314
    (1.236)

    28.0 (1.102)

    314
    (1236)

    Minimum
    of brush

    12.0
    (0472)

    10.5 (0413)

    7.0 (0.276)

    11.5
    (0453)

    90 (0.354)

    11.5
    (0453)

    13.7 — 25.5
    (14 — 2.6,
    3.1-5.7)

    12.7 — 17.7
    (1.3 — 1.8, 2.9 — 4.0)

    11.77 — 23.53
    (1.2 — 24, 2.6 — 5.3)

    13.7 — 25.5
    (14 — 2.6,
    3.1 — 5.7)

    9.8 — 13.7
    (1.0 — 14, 2.2 — 31)

    137 — 25.5
    (1.4 — 2.6,
    3.1 .5.7)

    0.3 — 2.5 (0.012 — 0.098)

    0.5 — 2.0
    (0.020 0.079)

    Revolution

    length
    mm (in)

    Brush spring tension
    N (kg, Ib)

    More
    than
    2,700

    .

    Clearance between
    bearing metal and armature shaft
    mm (in)
    Clearance» C»
    between pinion front
    edge and pinion
    mm (in)
    stopper

    More than 2,750

    Less than 0.2 (0.008)

    0.5 — 2.0
    (0.020 0.079)

    0.3 — 25
    (0.012 — 0.098)

    05 — 2.0 (0.020 — 0.079)

    Movement ‘T’ in
    heigh. at pinion
    assembly

    More than 6,000

    mm (in)


    EL-51

    CHARGING SYSTEM
    Wiring Diagram
    GASOLINE

    CHARGE —

    ENGINE MODELS

    EL-CHARGE-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START

    FUSIBLE
    Refer to
    LINK AND EL-POWER.
    FUSE BOX
    7.5A

    mJ

    lOA

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    []]

    (JIB)

    ~

    1~11

    ~
    ~

    I~
    Y

    METER
    COMBINATION
    (CHARGE
    WARNING
    LAMP)

    RIB

    (M30)

    ~

    1*.31
    Y/R

    2

    ~

    Y/R

    -ee-~

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-l~

    ()~

    ~

    (0:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:

    ()-ID-I
    Y/R

    In-‘

    Irku@

    RIB
    ~
    ~
    ~ @D

    IJ¥!I

    RIB

    R/B@@

    LHD models
    RHO models
    AIT models
    MIT models
    For Europe
    Except@

    ~
    ~

    ~
    Y/R

    ~

    {(100

    I

    J~

    Y/R

    ~—~

    Y/R

    1

    Y/R
    ,c:r
    eMB)
    l /

    Fix ring into groove in rear bearing so that it is as close to
    the adjacent area as possible.

    CAUTION:
    Do not reuse rear bearing

    groovy

    after removal.

    Rear bearing
    SEL044Z

    REAR COVER INSTALLATION
    (1) Fit brush assembly, diode assembly, regulator assembly
    and stator.
    (2) Push brushes up with fingers and install them to rotor.
    Take care not to damage

    SEL048Z

    SEl049Z

    EL-60

    slip ring sliding surface.

    CHARGING SYSTEM
    Service Data and Specifications (SOS)

    ALTERNATOR
    A5T06891

    LR170-746E

    LR170-504B

    A2T82491A

    Type
    MITSUBISHI

    HITACHI

    GA engines

    Applied model
    V-A

    Nominal rating

    12-70

    SR20DE
    12-80

    Negative

    Ground polarity
    Minimum revolutions
    under no-load
    (when 13.5V is applied)
    rpm
    Hot output current
    (When 13.5V is applied)

    .

    Less than
    1,300

    21/1,300
    50/2,500

    A/rpm
    Regulated output
    voltage

    Less than 1,000

    More than
    More than
    More than

    Minimum
    brush

    MITSUBISHI
    CD20

    27/1,300

    More than

    More than
    56/2,500

    More than
    67/5,000

    More than

    More than
    22/1,300

    More than
    65/2,500

    66/5,000

    14.1 — 14.7

    V

    length of
    mm (in)

    More than

    22/1,300
    50/2,500

    Less than
    1,300

    6.0 (0.236)

    50(0.197)

    5.0 (0.197)

    Brush spring pressure
    N (g, oz)

    4.609 — 5.786
    (470 — 590,
    16.58 — 20.81)

    1.0 — 343
    (102 — 350,
    3.60 — 12.34)

    0.92 — 328
    (94 — 334,
    332 — 11.78)

    4.609 — 5.786
    (470 — 590,
    16.58 — 20.81)

    Slip ring minimum
    diameter
    mm (in)

    221 (0.870)

    26.0 (1.024)

    31.6 (1.244)

    221 (0.870)

    2.5 — 2.9

    258

    48

    24 — 29

    Rotor coil resistance
    20’C (68’F)

    at

    n


    EL-61

    COMBINATION

    SWITCH

    Combination Switch/Check
    FOR EUROPE AND ISRAEL

    REAR WIPER
    AND WASHER
    ON
    WIPER

    WASH~INT
    ….

    6

    ,»»

    OFF INT

    13 0
    14 6
    15
    16
    17
    18

    LO

    HI

    REAR WIPER AND
    WASHER SWITCH

    WASH

    WASH OFF INT ON WASH

    21

    22
    23
    0

    6

    24
    0

    6

    INTERMITTENT
    WIPER VOLUME

    TURN SIGNAL
    SWITCH

    II

    HORN SWITCH
    (Without air bag)

    HEL012

    EL-63

    COMBINATION

    SWITCH

    Replacement
    For removing/installing air bag module and spiral cable, refer
    to RS section.

    Wiper and washer switch

    Each switch can be replaced without removing
    switch base.

    To remove combination
    screw.

    ~I!!.t:~
    ~~

    .~

    combination

    Switch base

    MEL612D

    MEL613D

    EL-64

    switch base. remove base attaching

    HEADLAMP -, Without Daytime Light System Wiring Diagram —

    H/LAMP —

    EL-H/LAMP-01

    I

    BATTERY

    I
    Refer

    ~

    4-11391
    R

    m

    to

    EL-POWER.

    15A
    ~

    15′

    R/W

    rrtil

    —2NO—-

    2ND

    OFF’-.- ….

    1ST
    HIGH

    PASS
    PASS
    — -PASS — PASS
    ,LOW ..
    ,LOW»
    , LOW
    , LOW
    …. HIGH …. HIGH -.-….
    HIGH -.- ….

    HEADLAMP RH

    ~~

    ~

    HIGH

    R/G P!L

    a- R/G.:JJ
    ~B

    LOW
    ~P/L

    LOW

    HEADLAMP LH

    ~

    lbi=IJ~

    R/B R/Y

    .-

    ~~ R/y-I
    B-. ,..-.,
    i]- R/B-

    HIGH

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH
    (EtO])

    B

    B

    ~
    (ffil

    ~
    @!)

    R/B ~

    Next

    page

    @: For Europe and Israe 1
    @: Except @

    r———————,

    J3L:

    I

    LHD models

    @: RHO models

    e-o-ee-o—,

    @: With tachometer

    I <:

    @:

    Without tachometer
    JU.»@
    14 , @ 38
    *2.»@
    15 , @ 37

    8

    R

    :>

    8

    I
    B

    1 t-~
    1

    @@

    r———————————~

    ITITIilllIIIIIl

    8

    I

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    @

    ~BR

    HEL014

    EL-66

    HEADLAMP -. Without Daytime Light System Trouble Diagnoses
    Symptom
    LH headlamps do not operate.

    1. Bulb
    2. LH headlamp ground
    3. 15A fuse
    4. Lighting switch

    RH headlamps do not operate.

    1. Bulb
    2. RH headlamp ground
    3

    15A fuse

    4. Lighting switch
    LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb
    .
    but LH low beam operates.
    2. Open in LH high beam circuit
    3. Lighting switch
    LH low beam does not operate, 1. Bulb
    but LH high beam operates.
    2. Open in LH low beam circuit
    3. Lighting switch
    RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb.
    but RH low beam operates.
    2. Open in RH high beam circuit
    3. Lighting switch.

    _.

    RH low beam does not operate, 1. Bulb
    but RH high beam operates.
    2. Open in RH low beam circuit

    does

    1. Check bulb.
    2. Check LH headlamp ground. (Terminal @)
    3. Check 15A fuse (No. @ill , located in fusible link and
    fuse box).
    4. Check lighting switch.
    1. Check bulb.
    2. Check RH headlamp ground. (Terminal @)
    3. Check 15A fuse (No. ~ , located in fusible link and
    fuse box).
    4. Check lighting switch.
    1. Check bulb.
    Check RIB wire between lighting switch and LH
    head lamp for an open circuit.
    3. Check lighting switch.

    r,

    L.

    1. Check bulb.
    2. Check R/Y wire between lighting switch and LH
    headlamp for an open circuit.
    3. Check lighting switch.
    1. Check bulb.
    2. Check RIG wire between lighting switch and RH
    headlamp for an open circuit.
    3. Check lighting switch.
    1. Check bulb.
    2. Check P/L wire between lighting switch and RH
    head lamp for an open circuit.
    3. Check lighting switch.

    3. Lighting switch
    High beam indicator
    work.

    Repair order

    Possible cause

    not 1. Bulb
    2. High beam indicator ground
    3. Open in high beam circuit

    1. Check bulb in combination meter.
    2. Check combination meter ground. [Terminal @
    (with tachometer) or @ (without tachometer)]
    3. Check RIB wire between lighting switch and combination meter for an open circuit.


    EL-67

    HEADLAMP —

    Daytime Light System —

    Operation (Daytime light system)
    The headlamps’ low beam and clearance, license, tail and illumination lamps automatically turn on after starting the engine
    with lighting switch in «OFF» position.
    Lighting switch operations other than the above are the same
    as conventional light systems.
    With engine stopped

    Engine
    OFF

    1ST

    With engine running
    OFF

    2ND

    1ST

    2ND

    Lighting switch
    High beam

    A

    B

    C

    A

    B

    C

    A

    B

    C

    A

    B

    C

    A

    B

    C

    A

    X

    X

    0

    X

    X

    0

    0

    X

    0

    X

    X

    0

    X

    X

    0

    0

    X

    X

    X

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    Headlamp
    Low beam
    Clearance and tail lamp
    License and instrument illumination lamp

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    0

    X

    0

    ()

    X

    X

    X

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    X

    0

    0

    0

    0

    X

    X

    0: Lamp «ON»
    X: Lamp «OFF»
    Added functions

    o:

    EL-68

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    B

    C

    0

    X

    0

    X

    ()

    X

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    ()

    0

    0

    HEADLAMP —

    Daytime Light System —

    System Description
    The headlamp system on vehicles for North Europe contains a daytime light unit. The unit activates the
    following whenever the engine is running with the lighting switch in the OFF position:

    Low beam head lamps

    Clearance, license, tail and illumination lamps
    Power is supplied at all times

    through 15A fuse (No. @ill , located in the fusible link and fuse box)

    to daytime light unit terminal @ and

    to lighting switch terminal @.
    Power is also supplied at all times

    through 15A fuse (No. ~ , located in the fusible link and fuse box)

    to daytime light unit terminal CID and

    to lighting switch terminal CID.
    Power is also supplied at all times

    through 10A fuse (No. ~ , located in the fusible link and fuse box)

    to daytime light unit terminal CD and

    to lighting switch terminal @.
    With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied

    through 10A fuse (No. ~ , located in the fuse block)

    to daytime light unit terminal (]).
    With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied

    through 7.5A fuse (No. l2~ , located in the fuse block)

    to daytime light unit terminal @.
    Ground is supplied to daytime light unit terminal @ through body grounds @ and @D.

    HEADLAMP

    OPERATION

    (Daytime light cancel operation)

    Power is supplied at all times

    through 10A fuse (No. ~ , located in the fuse and fusible link box)

    to lighting switch terminal @.
    When the lighting switch is turned to the 1st or 2nd position

    through lighting switch terminal @,

    to daytime light unit terminal @.
    Then daytime light will be canceled. And the lighting system operation will be the same as no daytime
    light system.

    DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION
    With the engine running and the lighting switch in the OFF position, power is supplied

    from alternator terminal CI>

    to daytime light unit terminal @

    to daytime light unit terminal @

    through daytime light unit terminal CID

    to terminal @) of LH headlamp

    to daytime light unit terminal CID

    through daytime light unit terminal @

    to terminal @) of RH headlamp

    to daytime light unit terminal CD

    through daytime light unit terminal @)

    to tail lamp and illumination.
    Ground is supplied to terminal @ of each headlamp through body grounds @ and @D.
    Ground is also supplied to terminal @ of daytime light unit through body grounds @ and @D.

    EL-69

    HEADlAMP

    Daytime light System —

    Schematic

    HEADLAMP RH
    High

    Low
    HIGH BEAM
    INDICATOR

    HEADLAMP LH
    High

    Low

    ill

    UJ
    ::J

    ..,;

    ..,;

    Ul

    ‘J

    0
    ..,;

    .c

    LL

    WO
    (fl …..

    C+’

    w-

    IT

    ..-1.rl

    UJ
    ::J

    ,…,E

    LL

    W»‘»

    .::J

    ill
    II-

    u.-.
    c …..

    «

    m

    <0

    IH
    Z
    ::J

    ill

    UJ
    ::J
    LL

    LD

    Z

    «

    0

    H
    1-1HIT

    (91HUJ

    (fl

    u,…,0.

    l-

    0

    IJJ
    UJ
    ::J

    01

    LL

    aJ

    I
    U

    IH

    ill

    3:1-

    ::J
    LL

    UJIT
    «
    ZIOUJ
    H
    I-L
    HO
    Z
    (9Z
    HO

    IT
    0

    UJ

    I-

    «
    Z
    IT
    IJJ

    (9
    IJJZ
    (9H
    ITZCL
    «IT::E
    I««

    I—l

    «

    U3:—l

    HEL015

    El-70

    HEADlAMP

    Daytime Light System —

    Wiring Diagram —

    DTRl —

    EL-DTRL-01

    I BATTERY I

    rr::-J;::-‘Jl
    W~I
    ~I~
    B/R

    10A

    IT]

    15A

    Y

    ••

    R~W :}

    1

    —-B/R~

    ~
    GS
    ~

    COMBINATION
    METER
    (CHARGE
    WARNING
    LAMP)
    ~
    ~

    ~

    Y IR

    rn

    I ~g~~~CTOR

    B/Y

    IfWlJCMID
    11:1~
    B/Y

    -1

    @

    ~
    Y IR

    .

    II~IQID
    1

    T-‘ (EiQD
    Y IR
    ~
    .’——

    m

    TAIL
    FUSE

    Next page

    Y

    GS

    B/R

    Next

    page

    @ 30
    @
    @ 40 ‘@
    ,

    40

    3

    DA YTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT
    (El1B)

    Next

    page

    RIB ~

    PIL

    I

    lit>

    m

    t

    DIMMER
    LAMP
    OUTPUT

    DIMMER
    LAMP
    OUTPUT

    RH

    LH

    RIL

    wf1]
    TAIL
    LAMP
    SW

    DAYTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT
    ~

    (ffiID

    ALTERNATOR
    ~

    Ffm~
    ffi GY

    ~~
    ~B

    r———————,
    I

    (~)

    I

    @lID

    :

    ~

    GY

    I

    ~

    I
    L

    @ID

    GY

    ~
    llLt:W

    CAUTION:
    Be sure aiming switch is set to «0» when performing aiming
    adjustment on vehicles equipped with head lamp aiming control.

    to

    3 2 1 0
    ~ nOD

    o

    SEL226P

    EL-75

    HEADLAMP
    Aiming Adjustment (Cont’d)
    LOW BEAM
    1. Turn headlamp low beam on.
    2. Use adjusting screws to perform aiming adjustment.

    First tighten the adjusting screw all the way and then make
    adjustment by loosening the screw.

    Up and down adjusting screw
    ,

    «H»:

    ,

    MEL614D

    I /

    Adjust headlamps so that main axis of light is parallel to
    center line of body and is aligned with point P shown in
    illustration.

    Figure to the left shows head lamp aiming pattern for driving on right side of road; for driving on left side of road,
    aiming pattern is reversed.

    Dotted lines in illustration show center of head lamp.
    «H»:
    Horizontal center line of headlamps
    «WL»:
    Distance between each head lamp center
    «l»:
    5,000 mm (196.85 in)
    «e»:
    65 mm (2.56 in)

    Horizontal
    center line
    of headlamps

    Vertical centerline
    ahead of headlamps —

    Height of
    lamp centers

    f

    P

    I

    /~

    d

    = ACCEPTABLE RANGE
    SEL2541

    EL-76

    HEADLAMP —

    Headlamp Aiming Control Wiring Diagram —

    AIM —

    LHD MODELS

    EL-AIM-01
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)
    CE106)

    (HOD

    …..

    .I-.I=.I=.I~:.:—==—~=I-I 1-»
    P

    WIG

    HEAOLAMP
    AIMING
    BIR B/L RIW MOTOR LH

    mmmrnm~

    ~

    A:tW

    J

    RIL

    TAIL
    FUSE

    (f@

    k:i,

    (E107)

    ~

    rn

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    ~

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH

    -QJ;>—.l4-

    ……
    D
    0
    E

    cD

    Cl
    0
    L
    :J
    l1J

    .c.

    QJ

    Cfl L
    0

    CD
    L
    Ul
    H

    .+oJ
    :J
    0

    .c.

    LICENSE PLATE LAMP LH

    QJ

    >-

    co >-

    II

    ……

    .c.

    .c.

    ~

    II

    TAIL LAMP LH(INNER)

    ~@

    II

    TAIL LAMP RH(OUTER)

    II

    TAIL LAMP LH(OUTER)

    a:

    t}j@)
    ::>0

    >([

    W

    LL

    W

    CLEARANCE LAMP RH

    -‘

    ff-

    0

    «

    CD

    ::E:
    Hff-If>-C!lH

    CLEARANCE LAMP LH

    «HZ

    0-.1::>
    UJ

    -‘

    W
    -.I

    UJ

    -‘

    UJ
    UJ

    UJ

    -‘

    CD

    l1J

    HY:

    Ul

    UlZ

    ::>

    ::>H

    LL

    LL..J

    =
    f-

    Z

    I
    U

    QfOC!l::E:H

    ([0«3:
    LLLL-.lUl

    HEL032

    EL-82

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TAIL/L LHD MODELS WITH DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM

    EL-TAIL/L-01

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    BIR

    r

    2ND LIGHTING
    SWITCH
    (E107>

    .-

    @1) @)
    AIL ~

    AIL

    AIL ~}

    Next
    Page

    RIB ~

    A/Y …—BLOCK
    (JIB) (106)(@

    ~SE
    AIL

    I

    ………..

    L

    A/L~-[]

    ……..

    AIB

    RIL

    IrITil

    IFfon

    TAIL
    FUSE

    TAILIL
    SW

    TAILIL
    OUTPUT

    m

    L-

    —‘

    r
    .-.

    -0

    I……..
    A/L~~

    t

    BIR

    B

    DAYTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT
    (E119)

    A/Y

    -@>

    CLEARANCE
    LAMP AH

    CLEAAANCE
    LAMP LH

    BoO

    I

    ~

    I

    B
    ..I..

    B
    ..I..

    (37) $51>

    Aefer to last page
    ~

    @: Sedan models

    @: Hatchback

    ~

    r.

    B
    …..

    models

    TAIL

    B-o
    P!L

    -D

    p/L •

    (j])

    @

    ~

    R!L~

    e-

    AEAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP RH
    (OUTER)

    -D

    R/L ~~
    B

    TAIL

    STOP

    AEAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP LH
    (OUTER)

    (R)

    To a-STOP!L

    B
    …..

    (f1D) . (f11)

    ~@
    ~W

    ~(R)

    ~w’

    (j])

    w

    [Q] (Th)
    [I[g] w ‘

    CID
    w

    HEL024

    EL-84

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)

    EL-TAIL/L-03
    Preceding

    -iJI-

    page

    ~

    R/Y

    R/Y ..rr=1
    -ud

    REAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP RH
    (OUTER)

    B-o
    ..

    Preceding

    ~

    page

    ~

    ———-

    ~
    RIL -.-

    .-

    _

    @QD

    R/L ~

    B

    ~

    P/L ~

    RIL

    .~

    B

    @@W

    ._
    -.—

    It
    .—

    -1———11—

    .-1———1—

    R/L~
    B
    RIL

    -(Q

    ~C~~~SE
    LAMP RH
    (fj109)

    ~

    -(Q~

    @QZl

    B»1li

    R/L ~
    B

    TAIL

    ~4
    ~
    STOP

    B

    ~

    $11)

    45678I~

    @!QD
    W

    REAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP LH
    (OUTER)

    i~~~~~~~~~~
    ..
    ~~~
    :::
    ‘I

    ~TO

    rflII’ I

    ~C~~~SE
    LAMP LH

    ..rr=::

    a-STOP/L

    ~

    B

    ~
    (32)

    ~~~

    ~w’

    [Q] @QZl CD 109)

    w

    IIf.g]

    w

    w

    HEL025

    EL-85

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TAIL/L — (Conl’d)
    LHD MODELS WITHOUT DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM

    EL-TAIL/L-04

    Aefer to EL-POWEA.

    2ND LIGHTING

    SWITCH

    r

    ~
    ~

    W/A

    I

    i-‘

    W/A

    W/A

    ~I’;I

    ~t:1

    A/V

    AIL

    L

    A/Y ~

    AIL ~

    AIL ——-

    _—B~
    L

    t

    AIL ~~

    … -..

    A/L~~

    «B~1

    AI,

    ~

    Next
    Page

    …..
    I

    I
    B

    B

    $37> $51)

    ~@)

    ~w

    F.=r=t
    l..!.@

    rn
    B

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    @Q)

    ,

    B

    HEL026

    EL-86

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TAIL/L — (Conl’d)

    EL-TAIL/L-05
    Preceding
    page

    —f1-……cr

    R/Y

    -O~

    R/Y ~

    R/Y

    ~

    _

    R/Y

    ~1(iJ])

    RIL —

    -O~
    :

    LICENSE
    PLATE
    LAMP
    @ RH

    R/L

    L::-

    Next

    R/L «1!:J
    B ~

    B

    .-e—

    REAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP RH
    (OUTER)

    GID

    PIL ~

    i

    TAIL

    B-{Gl

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    PreCeding……..a
    page
    ~

    (J

    S

    models

    ~

    B

    ~

    aiD) aiD

    rTI2I»QIID (ill)
    ~w

    ~<:lID

    ~w’

    GID
    w

    [Ql

    [I[gJ

    GID CID

    w ‘

    w

    HEL027

    EL-87

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TAIL/L — (ConI’ d)

    EL-TAIL/L-06
    Preceding
    page

    4

    R/Y

    R/Y £1
    ~

    ~

    REAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP RH
    (OUTER)

    B~

    ~

    P/L ~

    Preceding
    page

    ~

    * -e- —

    fHiI’ I IIjl
    4567B

    @QD
    W

    ~@~
    ~

    W

    ‘ W

    [QJ @W (0109)
    [I[g] w ‘ w

    HEL028

    EL-88

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TAIL/L — (Conl’d)
    RHO MODELS

    EL-TAIL/L-07
    lOA

    Aefer

    to

    @:
    @:

    EL-POWEA.

    1361

    For Europe
    Except for

    Europe

    BIA

    0—-.
    I

    ~

    B IA
    FAONT
    FOG LAMP
    SWITCH

    (fill): @

    I~I

    BIA

    tE1iA

    ‘E!QJ;
    ..!i’1 CHID

    m
    S/A

    rr=illJ
    ~
    » 1ST
    OFF,_

    2ND LIGHTING
    SWITCH

    ~

    ~

    AIL

    l
    EE

    FUSE BLOCK
    (JIB)

    (fill) (106) (]V

    AIL ~3

    T~

    AIL ——

    AIL ~8

    Q~

    AIL ….

    AIL

    tt… A/L~ ~
    -s(j

    r

    -{t>

    Next

    Page

    CLEAAANCE
    LAMP AH

    @

    LAMP LH

    BoiO

    ~

    tt-tt

    I

    I

    B

    8

    -!-

    -!-

    ~~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    r———————,
    J

    f2TIffi~
    tmm:I S

    Fa ~

    l1.l.£.J

    S

    @ID

    ,

    S

    HEL029

    EL-89

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TAIL/L — {Cont’d}

    EL-TAIL/L-OB
    ~CID
    Preceding
    page

    -…-‘f1.
    ~

    R/L

    «‘_1.

    -O~

    R/L .IFf
    «‘1!::::!

    RIL ~ :k!!» R/L —.—

    HB

    B

    ,,’1—R/L

    R/L ~
    B

    RIL

    .-

    B

    RIL~

    .-

    B

    O~
    0- _ ~

    ~

    R/L

    :

    Hatchback
    models
    for Europe
    Australia

    @: Except

    ,.

    and

    ~ill)

    ~w’

    ill)

    w

    …..B

    …..B

    (fi0)

    (fit)

    ~cm

    ~w’

    ~

    -fQ~
    -[?

    ~C~~~SE
    LAMP RH

    -fQ
    -[?

    ~C~~~SE
    LAMP LH

    B

    -0

    em

    aID

    PIL

    + To

    CID
    w

    TAIL

    ~

    PIL ~

    @: Sedan models

    CONBINATION
    LAMP RH
    ~~~ER) (TAIL)

    RIL~ ~~~~~INATION
    LAMP LH
    B ~
    ~~~ER) (TAIL)

    t:
    I._1_____
    .1
    l::..

    ill)

    PIL ~

    I
    .’—I
    I
    I .—I
    I

    JJ-. Next

    ~

    REAR

    O~
    0- _ ~

    ~Page

    REAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP RH
    (OUTER)

    REAR
    COMBI~~~~O~H

    STOP

    (OUTER)

    ill)

    EL-STOP/L

    [Q] CI[)
    II[g] w ‘

    em
    w

    HEL030

    EL-90

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TAIL/L — (Conl’d)

    EL-TAIL/L-09
    Preceding
    page

    ~
    ~

    RIL _.

    RIL ..IF»!
    «‘b!

    REAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP RH
    (OUTER)

    TAIL

    8~

    ..

    ———-

    F
    -0—

    STOP

    -«)

    PIL

    RIL~
    E
    ~

    .-.—

    ~

    (824) (0101)
    _

    RIL ~

    R/L —

    -0—II
    ~

    8

    ~

    ~

    8

    (0102)

    0—

    .1-1::
    GE

    8

    ~5~~INATION
    LAMP RH
    (INNER) (TAIL)

    ~

    (0111)

    RIL ~~
    B

    ~C~~~SE
    LAMP RH

    ~

    «hOg)

    RIL ~

    8

    ~C~~~SE

    ~~~::

    LH

    R/L ~

    O~

    CONBINATION
    LAMP LH
    (INNER) (TAIL)

    B.rrs
    ~

    _1

    11

    ____

    i.

    ~I

    45678

    I

    II~w

    @QD

    (1311)

    (1332)

    Fn
    (1)102)
    W W

    ~
    ~

    REAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP LH
    (OUTER)

    8~

    —.P/L~

    i
    B
    ~

    ID103)

    R/L -[1

    .-1——-11—-

    B
    ~

    @

    ~

    PIL •

    To EL-STOP/L

    @: Except

    for

    Europe

    and

    Australia

    @) (1328)
    W

    ‘W

    ~

    @

    ~

    W

    @ill)
    ‘W

    [Q] @QZ)
    []Jg] W’

    (1)109)
    W

    HEL031

    EL.91

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Stop Lamp/Wiring

    Diagram —

    STOP/L —

    SEDAN MODELS

    EL-STOP/L-01
    (b):

    FUSE

    BLOCK Refer

    to

    LHD modeIs
    RHO models
    Models with high-mounted
    stop lamp
    *1 … (b) R/Y, R/L

    :
    :

    EL-POWER.

    (J/8)

    ~

    To

    DEPRESSEDSTOP LAMP
    SWITCH

    EL-TAIL/L

    + *1
    {• R/L

    ~

    RELEASED

    ~
    @ (@

    P!L

    O~

    P!L ~3i1

    +

    P/L .,
    P!L

    ‘V

    ctJ~

    m

    Pt,

    ~tP!L(IT)

    JlJ’
    ~W

    HEL033

    EL-92

    HATCHBACK

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Stop Lamp/Wiring Diagram (Cant’ d)

    MODELS

    STOP/L —

    EL-STOP/L-02
    (1): LHD models
    (8): RHO mode1s
    @: Models with high-mounted

    FUSE
    BLOCK Refer to EL-POWER.

    stop lamp on rear window
    Models with high-mounted
    stop lamp in rear air spoiler
    ~t1… (1) R/Y,(8) RIL

    (J/B)

    G/W

    O-::E— …..
    ——-,

    I

    O~

    ~ern

    G/W ~

    G/W -,..

    L

    <]=>

    c @@ ~

    .r:-
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~

    rn:tilllID

    ~
    ~B

    B

    cf]:g)

    @D
    GY

    mi~
    ~

    GY

    ~WV
    ~W

    (E23O)

    HEL035

    EL-94

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Back-up Lamp/Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    BACK/L —

    EL-BACK/L-02
    ~

    G/w-eb

    Preceding
    page

    I

    (MID@

    ~

    HB

    G/W

    G/W

    »
    B

    Iffi

    I~i

    W

    ~

    ~

    ~

    @ill): @

    ~

    LAMP
    LH
    C~INATION
    (INNER)
    (BACK-UP
    LAMP)

    c:IID:

    I!II

    G/W REAR

    @

    COMBINATION
    LAMP
    RH
    (INNER)
    (BACK-UP
    LAMP)

    ~
    B

    I

    I•

    I•

    B

    B

    I

    (0103)
    W’

    QlliD
    W

    ~lllllml
    45678

    @QD

    W

    rr:r:g:@fi,mtIZIID

    aID:

    @

    I

    ~
    1m~

    en:> GID

    (IT)

    B

    (MID

    ~

    G/W

    B

    I

    ~

    m:z:IID

    REAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP RH
    (INNER)
    (BACK-UP
    LAMP)

    B

    m@

    G/W

    •I

    G/W

    COMBINATION
    LAMP LH
    (INNER)
    (BACK-UP
    LAMP)
    ([)103): @

    ••

    B

    ~@)

    I

    G/W REAR

    r

    ~@

    f—.t

    I•I

    B

    G/W

    @

    ~(O101)

    B ~

    I

    0

    ~t

    G/W~
    ~
    24

    @Qg)

    LHO models
    RHO models
    @: Sedan models
    @: Hatchback models

    0

    ~G/W~G/W~G/W

    ~

    :

    U

    FOG LAMP
    RELAY

    GYIL
    B

    I

    e—-e

    I

    I

    B

    B

    ~

    ~

    Refer ta last page
    (Faldaut page) .

    ~

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~

    ~

    [[l[[ID B

    IIIIJJTIIIIIITI

    ~

    @
    BR

    ~:~~

    PU/R.

    REAR
    FOG
    LAMP
    SWITCH

    ~
    ~

    i—l
    B

    ,..,
    a

    ILL

    OFF

    ~ -BUZZER

    B

    ~

    B

    ~

    RIG

    INO

    ~

    W/PU

    RIG .~~-ILL

    m m m

    W/PU

    L

    r-

    ~Ot

    Ibi=U Ibi=JI ~
    B

    LHO models
    RHO models

    m CHID

    P

    m

    to

    I JOINT

    a

    a

    -I

    1

    B
    ~

    rn
    ~

    5g~~~CTOR-3 @: (b)
    CONNECTOR-4@: (8)

    B ~

    ~

    r———————,

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    I

    L

    ~

    IIIIIillJIlIIil ~: I’001

    <1):

    w/pu
    w/pu
    r::::b (illZ)
    (EfO!)
    I~I@)
    ~@
    w/pu
    ~CMID
    I~I(@
    ~
    w/pu

    LHO models

    :

    RHO models

    @:
    @:

    Sedan

    models

    Hatchback

    models

    r.l.

    O~

    I

    .

    f~—I

    ~——~

    w/pu

    w/pu

    IciJl @

    ~
    @lQD
    w/pu

    t——.~

    IrtJl ~

    wf@>wf

    em

    w/pu

    I!II

    ~~

    w/pu
    ~INATION
    LAMP LH

    i!11

    ~~~INATION
    LAMP RH

    (INNER)
    1 8 1 (REAR FOG)

    =r@:@

    (INNER)
    1 8 1 (REAR FOG)

    =r

    8

    GID:@

    B

    1>

    (INNER)
    1 8 1 (REAR FOG)

    *

    (INNER)
    1 8 1 (REAR FOG)

    =r(D103):@

    =r

    ~~INATI~
    LAMP LH

    B

    ~__ 5J>

    ‘-I
    …..
    8

    I!I

    w/pu

    W/pu

    ~~INATION
    LAMP RH

    @ill):@

    B

    1

    I

    B

    B

    ~

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~W1),(f1g)
    ~W

    ~

    W

    fil’ I’~
    45678

    @QD
    W

    ~
    ~

    (U), GID,(0103),
    W

    W

    W

    (DiU)

    W

    HEL045

    EL-105

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lampsl
    Schematic

    FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP LH

    SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP LH

    REAR COMBINATION

    COMBINATION

    LAMP LH

    METER (TURN LH)

    FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP RH

    SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP RH

    REAR COMBINATION

    fZH
    OZ
    H::::>
    f-

    (Y)

    <((I

    COMBINATION

    LAMP RH

    METER (TURN RH)

    nJ

    ZW
    HI
    rJ)(f)
    ~

    u…

    ([

    W
    (f)
    ::::>

    u…

    W
    ff Next

    page

    12•41 JUNCTION BOX
    NO.2 (JOINT
    G/Y CONNECTORS)
    ~
    G/Y

    IriJ~—-~$1
    ___ t.GI» ~ GIV ,

    WID

    G/Y

    -@>

    — G/Y~}
    _
    .-

    G/B ~

    ~

    B

    Next
    page

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    F1i21~
    ‘»TIT

    B

    page) .

    c:I:Q]] (E110)
    ~W

    HEL046

    EL-107

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TURN — (Cont’d)

    EL-TURN-02
    @;

    GA engine without dual
    air bag system and ABS
    @; Except@

    preCeding{~
    page
    ~
    ~

    ……….
    1

    :~
    G/B

    —I——Ie——.
    ~o

    I$I::+B
    G/Y

    ~O

    G/Y

    G/B

    1!lfQ2~

    TURN
    I!ISIDE
    SIGNAL

    SIGNAL
    LAMP RH
    1I111@:

    G.’Y••

    G/Y

    t

    1__

    _

    G/B

    •.

    S

    ~—————————,
    W

    I

    ~

    lID»‘

    mm:ITI1lIIIIJJi ~
    ~BR

    (M20)
    B

    -06

    G/Y ~

    G/Y~}
    1
    -@>
    1——————

    B

    54213

    page

    «»iF «»iF

    ~g~~~CTOR-1

    fIrn’ ,’IIl~

    Next

    G/B~

    Ibi=Jl
    G/B

    LG

    -u>}

    B

    G/B ~

    ~G/B-

    I

    COMBINATION
    FLASHER
    UNIT

    B

    1_-

    ~G/B~

    LG

    ~

    II 2 II

    B

    1r211~

    eMS) ~

    LGt

    G/R

    ~

    L~JOINT
    ~
    I../B CONNECTOR G/Y
    db
    -4

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1

    I

    I:TIIJ

    : @OI[g]

    (E110) : @
    W

    I
    L

    —.CQ»l ~

    rmm

    :@
    W

    I

    Next

    page

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    I

    :
    ~I

    IIDIillIillIITi ~
    ~P

    HEL049

    EL-110

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram — TURN — {ConI’ d)

    EL-TURN-05
    -@: GA engine without dual
    ~
    Preceding
    page

    air bag system and ASS

    GIS

    @: Except <@)

    Q)

    +J
    ::J
    0

    D

    .c

    E
    0

    .c

    .c
    +J

    m

    .rl

    .rl

    +J

    3E

    3E
    Q)

    Q)

    (J)+J

    (J)+J

    r-l(/)

    r-1(J)

    OJ>
    D(J)
    0
    E+J

    OJ>
    D(J)
    0
    E+J

    .c

    COMPACT DISK DECK ILLUMINATION

    U

    +J

    .c

    e

    .c

    +J

    (J)

    W
    -!

    EI

    REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH
    ILLUMINA TION

    +J

    .rl

    3

    DL

    Q..-;

    OJ

    OOlOOlU

    X

    I.r-l

    I-rl

    X

    lLJ

    —1.—1

    —1.—1

    W

    @@@)~

    FAN SWITCH ILLUMINATION

    Q)

    ra

    Q

    0
    L
    ::J
    lLJ

    D

    (J)

    ra

    +J
    >

    OJ
    D
    0
    L:

    HEADLAMP WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
    ILLUMINA TION

    e ~@

    HAZARD SWITCH ILLUMINATION
    II

    GLOVE BOX LAMP

    GLOVE BOX
    LAMP SWITCH

    REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
    ILLUMINA TION
    RADIO ILLUMINATION
    I
    U
    f-

    lLJ

    UJ

    ~

    H

    3:
    UJ

    ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION

    LL
    Z

    ZO

    o

    HL

    AIT INDICATOR

    f-O

    ILLUMINATION

    H

    ZU

    cc:JU

    COMBINATION

    METER

    CLOCK
    METER
    METER

    >a:
    lLJ
    f-

    f-

    «
    m

    lLJ

    ILLUMINA TION

    L:

    HfI-If-

    EE

    >-cc:JH

    «HZ
    O-!~

    lLJ

    UJ

    ~

    LL

    ILLUMINATION
    CONTROL SWITCH

    FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH
    ILLUMINATION

    I

    IZ

    U
    Ilf-

    Occ:JL:H

    a:O«3:
    LLLL-!UJ

    HEL060

    EL-115

    INTERIOR LAMP
    Illumination/Wiring

    Diagram —

    ILL —

    EL-ILL-01

    I

    I

    BATTERY

    ~

    ::.

    Refer to EL-PDWER.

    75A

    1361

    W

    BIR

    W

    I
    O~——I.•

    DL

    BIR ~

    Next page

    BIR

    rr=m

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH

    ~:@)

    ~:@

    :

    o

    L

    BIR

    @:

    RIL

    @):

    rmwfnJ

    TAIL TAIL/L
    FUSE SW
    TAILIL
    OUTPUT

    @:
    DAYTIME
    LIGHT

    @:
    @:

    R

    UNIT

    Next

    page

    r————————~
    ~:
    :

    @:

    @:
    @:
    @:

    .OR/B

    LHO modeIs
    RHO models
    LHO models without
    daytime
    light
    system
    Models with
    daytime
    light
    system
    For Europe and Israe 1
    Except
    @

    if! . ..

    *2′»

    :

    :

    I
    .-O~O…,
    I <:
    :>

    LHO models
    RHOmodels

    I

    R

    B

    B

    B

    B

    If-II
    ~~

    ~@

    ~

    [IgJ

    ~W

    ITIillIilllIITI

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    (M44)

    W

    @

    ~BR

    HEL056

    EL-119

    INTERIOR LAMP
    Illumination/Wiring

    Diagram —

    ILL —

    (Coni’ d)

    EL-ILL-05
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Preceding
    page

    : LHD mode 1s

    :

    (JIB)

    RHD models
    Models with daytime
    light system
    *9 … 13 , @ 3

    @

    DEFOGGER
    REAR
    WINDOW
    SWITCH
    (ILLUMINATION)
    ~

    IN.BI
    RIG

    IN.BI
    RIG

    I
    RIG

    Ii!9TI

    i~i

    Next
    page

    RIG

    ~o

    RIG •

    I

    RIG

    ~:

    RIG

    2

    GLOVE
    BOX LAMP
    ;

    l!4Jl
    RIW

    II!’I

    ~

    SWITCH
    HAZARD
    (ILLUMINATION)

    ~~
    B

    rn
    CLOSED

    ~:

    P

    HEL057

    EL-120

    INTERIOR LAMP
    Illumination/Wiring

    Diagram —

    ILL —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-ILL-06
    JUNCTION

    ~3~I~~.2

    ~~-ILL-03

    ~

    (

    RIG

    ~~~~ed1ng

    ~!r

    B

    I
    B

    B

    1 1—1 i…J

    ,@ 3

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~

    Ww

    IIIIlII:illIill ~: : Hatchback models
    @: Models with sun roof
    @: Models without sun roof

    ~

    CID
    IIT.31
    IIN~31
    RIB RIB

    I •
    O~

    ~

    CRD

    RIB ~

    t

    0

    RIB

    ,

    +

    RIB

    iLUGGAGE
    ROOM

    RIB

    RIB

    IFh

    IFh

    LAMP

    lbi=JI~

    1~ITRU~
    ROOM
    LAMP

    R

    R

    I

    n=h

    I!:iJIcm
    R

    dJ

    ~

    TRUNK
    ROOM
    LAMP
    SWITCH

    B

    B

    4=ll
    B

    2

    W’

    W

    m

    ~QID
    1 234

    ITIII:illITIIIT

    @

    nB

    B

    B

    I.J

    1-

    !

    @

    ~

    12

    W

    (O101)

    W

    ~

    R/W

    J

    W’

    R/W

    ..sa—.

    Next
    ~page

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~am@)(][)

    I:HiII
    I Iii]
    45678
    ~BR

    B

    ~
    @

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1

    ~

    I
    ,…,

    B

    ~

    (1)

    ~

    f.

    (0105)

    R/W

    ~

    I

    @

    rnA’

    1[jJ1~

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-4

    .

    B

    (‘[@

    R/W

    r=:b..B.1..l

    4

    B

    ~

    CRD

    B


    m@QD
    [jJ~
    B

    =

    m
    qJ~

    ••

    @

    CLOSED

    OFF C8!): @
    …..(][):@
    DOOR
    ~

    B

    @llQ)

    CLOSED

    ON

    @

    ~

    LUGGAGE
    ROOM
    OPEN LAMP
    SWITCH

    c!J@

    aID:

    ON
    OFF…..

    R

    R

    INTERIOR
    LAMP

    SPOT
    LAMP

    c!:I~
    1biJI@QD

    U:jJI~

    ~@~

    ~

    RIB

    W ‘ W

    n-.,….c, (0110)

    Cffi
    rk-O
    lli!.@
    B

    l..!..l2@

    B

    ITIII:illITIIIT ~

    ~

    BR
    HEL063

    EL-124

    INTERIOR LAMP
    Interior, Spot, Trunk Room and Luggage Room
    Lamps/Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)

    EL-INT/L-04
    Preceding -Bl- R/W
    page
    ~

    @: Sedan and 5-door
    Hatchback models

    R/W

    t»»TIE

    r4:,~

    I~I(@

    R/W

    I

    i—O—s -H—°:l
    R/W

    R/W

    m

    IT=h
    CLOSED

    FRONT
    DOOR
    OPEN SWITCH
    (DRIVER’
    SIDE)

    OPEN
    CLOSED

    @)

    REAR
    DOOR
    SWITCH

    REAR
    DOOR
    SWITCH

    LH
    CLOSED

    FRONT
    DOOR
    SWITCH
    (PASSENGER
    SIDE)
    @

    RH

    @)

    CLOSED

    ~

    =

    rill»lcm:>
    ‘TIT S

    A~~~

    lJJ

    SR ‘

    SR ‘

    SR

    HEL064

    EL-125

    INTERIOR LAMP
    Bulb Specifications
    Wattage (W)
    Interior lamp

    10

    Spot lamp

    10

    Turn room lamp

    3,4

    Luggage room lamp

    3,4

    EL-126

    METER AND GAUGES
    Combination Meter
    WITH TACHOMETER
    Gasoline engine
    Diesel engine

    o
    RESISTOR
    (Gasoline engine)

    DIODE


    ~=S=I

    o

    ~

    =======~

    ,-,——,

    1 8

    2 9
    310
    411
    12
    13

    @
    @

    1

    514
    615
    716
    6

    z

    27

    z

    34

    0

    0

    ~
    Z
    ~

    ~
    Z
    ~

    ~
    Z
    ~

    ::J

    —J

    —J

    :::!

    :::!

    ::J

    —J

    :::!

    ~
    ~

    Diesel engine

    @D

    For Australia

    @

    Except for Australia

    37 36 28

    12 10

    30

    14

    I
    —J

    I

    a:

    ~

    Z

    Z

    0

    a:

    a:
    ::J

    ::J

    l-

    I-

    a:
    0

    LlJ
    ILlJ

    ()

    ~

    ~
    ()

    I
    ()

    is

    0

    —J
    ()

    ~
    >—

    ~
    ()

    @

    a:

    z

    0

    ::J

    Gasoline engine

    @J
    u.
    u.

    ~

    —J

    Z

    0

    0

    a:
    0
    0
    Cl

    0
    Cl

    0

    LlJ

    ~

    ….J

    :::!

    6

    33 15

    40

    38

    UJ

    z

    0
    Z

    14 12

    CJ

    UJ

    ~
    ~

    I
    ….J

    z
    a:

    :::>

    :::>

    ….J

    :::!

    l-

    ~

    I

    a:
    z
    a:

    :::>

    :::>

    ~

    —ffi>—

    a:

    ….J

    u

    0

    [D

    [D

    0

    u

    a:

    :::>

    CJ

    z

    0
    0
    0

    UJ

    ~

    u..

    u

    :::>

    u..
    ….J

    [f]

    I

    PU/W

    ~CMID

    CD

    L/OR~
    ~
    49

    R

    ~~~

    I

    t

    R

    ~

    PU/W

    G

    0

    1~~_~8_i$/
    ~

    4=U
    G

    ~

    L/OR

    R

    B/R

    LI

    PU/W

    TACHO

    B

    ~

    ECM(ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    @

    l.L

    [[

    W
    ff

    FUEL
    TANK
    GAUGE
    _
    UNIT
    HIGH (B18)

    AIR BAG
    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR
    UNIT
    (Refer to
    RS-SRS .)

    ~~
    ~

    P/L ~

    G/R

    SPIRAL
    CABLE

    I

    P /L

    iE=’iA’

    HIGH

    OIL
    PRESSURE
    SWITCH
    ~

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~Q:ID
    5 6 J8I9IDH

    ~~

    ~~

    ~B

    ~B

    12

    W

    CHID

    (E1OD

    HELon

    EL-140

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER
    Warning Lamps/Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    WARN —

    EL-WARN-03
    ~:
    ~:

    Gasoline engine
    Diesel engine

    COMBINATION METER ~
    Preceding
    page

    B

    FILTER

    BRAKE

    4=U

    ~

    YIB

    r
    ~

    20

    ~ I 2..a I

    @
    GY

    I
    I ,.hh (E206)
    Ilh,@
    IL.

    GY

    ~
    ~

    I
    I

    (E233)
    -‘

    1
    I

    HEL073

    EL-141

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER
    Warning Lamps/Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    WARN —

    EL-WARN-04
    @:

    5-door Hatchback and
    Sedan models

    COMBINATION METER ~
    Preceding
    page

    C
    DOOR

    WASHER

    ~

    ~

    RIW

    (!J~NCTI~

    alP

    BOX NO.2
    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)

    ~~

    luiEll (MS)

    RIW

    SIP ~

    [IJ(]g)

    I

    0

    ~

    SIP

    ;h@

    WASHER
    FLUID
    LOW LEVEL
    SWITCH
    HIGH-~
    OPEN

    _CLOSED
    ……

    REAR
    DOOR
    SWITCH
    LH

    OPEN

    _CLOSED
    ……

    ~:@

    REAR
    DOOR
    SWITCH
    RH
    ~:@

    OPEN

    _CLOSED
    ……

    OPEN

    FRONT
    DOOR
    SWITCH
    DRIVER’S
    smE

    (@)

    @)

    56TII91Q1112

    a

    _CLOSED

    I

    ……

    FRONT
    DOOR
    SWITCH
    PASSENGER
    SIDE

    &~GID

    ~

    W

    ~@
    l.1.@

    f.
    S

    B

    -!-

    -!-

    ~

    @D

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    B

    CMID

    ~

    .1

    ~

    Y/R
    ~

    Y/8

    ffi
    O~

    Y 18

    EU

    ~

    » __

    .Ji1

    II~

    YIR

    ~

    ~4

    EU

    ~

    JOINT
    ~gNNECTOR
    IU»‘i’A

    IWI~:~
    =r’

    JOINT

    A’i»E’..

    Y/R

    ~:@

    4

    Y/8

    1..«-0

    1$1 @
    Y/8

    T

    I

    Y/8

    () EU

    CHID

    Y18

    ORIL

    It~———-i$1
    $100

    @)

    -1

    WL

    1

    1

    PARKING
    PULLED ~~~~~H
    ~

    ‘-HIGH

    8RAKE
    FLUID
    LOW LEVEL
    SWITCH

    I4J
    8

    @: Gasoline engine
    @: Diesel engine
    @: For Australia
    @: For Europe
    @: Except for Europe

    ~~6J(][)
    ~

    m

    ffl

    W

    11111

    RELEASED

    Y’R

    @

    Y/R

    I~I ~

    HIGH

    LOW’—

    ~

    ~8

    FUEL
    FILTER

    YIR

    ~

    rn ‘:’ I

    SWITCH
    @:@

    ALTERNATOR

    E

    11—1;
    I
    I

    ~

    8

    8

    8

    -!-

    …..

    ~

    CE2(6) ~

    =

    CE51)

    CE205)

    r———————————~
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    <:BID

    8

    ~

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    @

    ~

    rfi2l (89)
    BR’ BR

    m

    B

    HEL078

    EL-146

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER
    Warning Lamps/Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    WARN —

    WITHOUT TACHOMETER

    EL-WARN-09
    FUSE
    8LOCK
    (J/8)

    :

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    LHD models
    RHO models

    @:

    ~

    MALFUNCTION
    INDICATOR

    ;

    NATS
    SECULITY
    INDICATOR

    4=Jl
    OR

    ORIL

    P/L

    I

    I

    I

    ~01>
    0

    P IL f’UCi»
    ~~
    III7FII
    T»‘ ~

    ORIL Illii’n

    1i1’9il~
    ~@

    ~

    ~
    G/R

    ~

    ~

    P

    FUEL

    OIL

    P /L

    P/L

    ORIL

    f’UCi»

    ~~
    ‘9F (El0n

    G/R ~

    G/R ~

    IlJdjl

    1c!J1@ 1$1

    P/L

    G/R

    t…oJ>

    ~O~
    I

    I

    G/R

    m

    P/L~

    c!J1illI

    FUEL TANK
    GAUGE UNIT
    LOW (818)

    ~(E202)

    P/L

    IFh

    INO LAMP NATS IMMU
    OUTPUT (Refer to
    EL-NATS.)
    L-

    __

    m

    ORIL

    OR

    —‘

    @>

    0
    LEO -R

    4 (ECCS
    ECM
    HI~H-CONTROL
    MODULE)
    (Refer to
    EC-MIL.)

    (@

    G/R

    OIL
    LOW PRESSURE
    SWITCH

    HIGH

    ~

    ~

    r.ni.Jln
    888

    B

    2
    ill)

    ~——————————-~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~@
    5 6 j819iO

    1112

    W

    CHID

    (E10!)

    ill)

    IIIII~
    128

    ~~@
    l21U091V

    ([j])

    ~(E202)
    6 5

    W

    rn::rn:rz::tm

    <:lliTI) GY

    8

    HEL079

    EL-147

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER
    Warning Lamps/Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    WARN —

    EL-WARN-10
    G

    COMBINATION
    METER
    @)@>

    ~
    BR/W

    ~

    t-:l•

    Y/R

    o~

    DiAA

    It

    B/R

    BR/W

    ~
    : I
    I

    .J

    HEL080

    EL-148

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER
    Warning Lamps/Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    WARN —

    EL-WARN-11
    Preceding
    page

    H

    COMBINATION
    METER
    ~

    BRAKE

    ~

    Y/B

    …. I

    :

    o

    +Y::
    NR

    NR

    Y/B~:

    ~

    .,…
    ~
    Y/B

    m

    LOW

    ,-HIGH

    BRAKE
    FLUID

    ctJ

    ~~~~EH ‘-~

    BRAKE
    FLUID

    n

    ~

    Y/S

    ——D-O

    I

    O-.
    (LHD models with daytime light system)

    from lighting switch terminal @

    to daytime light unit terminal @

    through daytime light unit terminal @>

    to warning buzzer unit terminal @>
    (RHD models)

    from lighting switch terminal @

    to warning buzzer unit terminal @> (Except for Australia) or @ (For Australia).
    Ground is supplied

    from driver side door switch terminal G)

    to warning buzzer unit terminal @ (Except for Australia) or (J) (For Australia).
    Driver side door switch terminal @ is grounded through body grounds (!ill and @.
    Rear fog lamp switch warning

    buzzer (For Europe models)

    With ignition switch OFF, driver’s door open, and rear fog lamp switch ON, warning
    A battery positive voltage is supplied

    EL-152

    buzzer will sound.

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER
    Warning Buzzer/System Description (Cont’d)
    • from rear fog lamp switch terminal @
    • to warning buzzer unit terminal @.
    Ground is supplied
    • from driver side door switch terminal (1)
    • to warning buzzer unit terminal @.
    Driver side door switch terminal CID is grounded through body grounds (ill) and @.


    EL-153

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER
    Warning Buzzer/Wiring

    Diagram —

    BUZZER —

    LHD MODELS

    EL-BUZZER-01

    I BATTERY I

    ~-17-5A-~’

    m

    W

    FUSE
    to
    BLOCK Refer
    (JIB) EL-POWER.

    10.
    1361

    7.5A

    B/R

    @: With daytime light system
    G1@:WithoutdaytimelightsYstem
    *1″.@B/R
    W
    ,@
    G
    *2 …@ RIL @
    W/R
    • @R/Y
    ~
    *3″.@R/B


    ! ~~1)
    I.-«, 1$1

    L

    1I1DI

    P

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH
    ~

    m

    IN~41

    P

    *1

    will

    ~

    1431

    IGN
    SW
    RR FOG
    SW

    WARNING
    BUZZER
    UNIT

    DOOR
    SW (DR) @

    lbjdJ

    ~

    PU/R

    I!JjJJ

    ttl

    ‘]’t4IJUNCTION
    BOX NO.2
    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)
    [
    ~——1I~41

    I

    BR/Y

    i.

    B

    @

    8

    8

    -!-

    -!-

    (811)

    (832)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    CHID , (E101)

    ..J>
    I__
    ~-

    —————-

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-3
    ~

    LG ~

    ~

    @ ~

    ~
    1

    0

    LG…..
    :_:__ ~G__

    _

    ~_H_…O-

    B

    ~

    <0>

    Ibi=Jl

    t

    O.R

    ~O——-..———IO~——-..
    ~o————-O~:—

    t&

    «);..

    <0>

    @ill) ~

    OR ~

    OR

    ~

    O~

    4

    ~

    @ill) ~

    ~

    ‘);..

    OR ~

    @ill) ~
    .
    LG/B ~
    LG/B

    <0>

    ~O—

    fij’
    I If]] @ill)
    45678
    W

    ~W

    Next
    page

    ~

    ‘1;;.. LG/R -{Q II LG/R

    ffil2fTI@)

    LG/B-(9-

    LG/R-(g>

    ITIIIIl1lIITITI ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~BR

    ~~:@)
    ~

    (8105):

    @

    GY

    HEL086

    EL-162

    WIPER AND WASHER
    Front Wiper and Washer/Wiring
    — WIPER — (Cont’d)

    Diagram

    EL-WIPER-02
    INT
    VR

    WIPER
    MOTOR

    INT
    SW

    OR

    ~
    Y/G

    ~~
    PU

    Preceding
    page

    ~

    OR

    ~

    LG

    ~LG/B~

    WASH
    SWITCH

    OFF and
    INT SW

    ~

    FRONT
    WIPER
    AMPLIFIER
    ~

    ~
    P

    SR

    .:.—J
    — —-1.——1

    =il

    /

    1

    -….Qr- LG R —

    t

    LG

    ~1

    FRONT

    M WASHER
    MOTOR

    PU

    @

    Y/G

    LG/R LG/S

    Y/G

    LG/R LG/S

    IriJ~— —- ~ciJ~~~~~EiJI
    PU ~

    1

    ~

    (E28)

    P

    I

    111,-‘

    Y/G

    LG/R LG/S

    Irf5n

    IT=f4i1 rr=f6ft

    P

    ~

    P

    CHID

    SR

    P

    ~

    SR

    I~~—~ciJl

    I

    SR

    rF!3n
    FRONT WIPER
    AND WASHER
    SWITCH

    I
    LG
    Iftu

    ~
    ~

    ~
    B

    I

    I’ n
    B

    IbjJl

    0: t

    ~

    B

    B

    It-ll
    (M60)

    8

    ~

    ~O——-..———lO~..——.O~

    <1ftp
    ~

    .. —

    ~

    OR

    ~

    :L

    O~

    ~

    ~@)

    .LG/B~O—-LG/B

    ~

    -€>
    ~

    Next
    page

    ,

    ‘;»LG/R-MO.LG/R~O—————LG/R-e>

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~@>

    rn:rz:tm:I

    W

    ~~:@
    m

    page

    L/W

    ~—-$
    LIB (ffiZ) L/w

    LG/B@

    ~

    @)

    GND

    B6

    ~(ffiZ)

    LG/B

    I

    I

    If
    LG/B

    .Jwf
    It

    ~

    _

    L/W

    -@:> Next
    page

    12.21

    ‘:31
    REAR WIPER
    AND WASHER
    SWITCH
    ~

    f,

    B
    ~
    ~~

    1Tl~

    rgJ

    G

    ~@

    ~(El17)

    ~W

    ~W

    i~
    2422

    B
    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    BR

    HEL090

    EL-171

    WIPER AND WASHER
    Rear Wiper and Washer/Wiring
    — WIP/R — (Cont’d)

    Diagram

    EL-WIP/R-02
    ~

    Preceding
    page

    ~

    (0101)

    SB~SB

    SB

    {
    ~

    SB

    —-.
    B

    m
    ~
    Y!L

    I It
    ~—-$
    OR

    ~

    Y!L

    OR @) Y!L

    I

    I

    OR @) Y!L

    I$~~1-iclJl
    OR ~
    Y!L

    ..-J
    111!:i=Jl1biJl4Jl
    ~~rEAR
    SB

    1—

    1

    OR

    1

    t

    WIPER

    RELAY

    L7;——‘ I
    L/W

    Preceding
    —15lpage
    ~

    B

    ~

    fIlii’ I ‘~
    45678

    ~

    L/W

    I

    B

    ffi@

    +@
    B

    If.
    B

    B

    ~

    ~

    ~

    Y/L

    B

    rn

    45678

    t

    I
    f.
    B

    B

    fH!/’ I Ill!

    1—

    OR

    WIPER
    RELAY

    ~L~

    Y/L

    r—I

    SB

    Preceding
    page

    i~1

    ~

    @D

    B

    …..

    mD@~
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    @QD
    W

    ~

    ~

    <[l106)
    W

    ~@

    T

    B

    HEL093

    EL-174

    WIPER AND WASHER
    Rear Wiper Amplifier Check

    ~~:;»f1.’

    1.
    2.

    Connect as shown in the figure at left.
    If test lamp illuminates when connected to terminal
    @ and battery ground, wiper amplifier is normal.

    CD

    or

    ~

    C!E:TIJ
    !II8EITJ
    SEL846T

    Rear Wiper Installation and Adjustment
    Clearance

    «E»

    1.
    2:

    3.
    4.
    GEL014

    Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it «OFF» (Auto Stop).
    Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface. Set
    the blade center to clearance «E» immediately before tightening nut.
    Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper
    motor and then turn it «OFF».
    Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance «E».
    Clearance «E»: 20 mm (0.79 in)
    Tighten windshield wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
    ~: 13 — 18 N.m (1.3 — 1.8 kg-m, 9 — 13 ft-Ib)

    Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as
    illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness.

    SEL024J

    Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment

    0.9 (0.035)

    ~

    OJ

    O.9
    (0.035)

    Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure at left.
    Adjustable range: ::l:: 10° (In any direction)

    Unit: mm (in)

    GEL015

    EL-175

    WIPER AND WASHER
    Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment (Cont’d)
    Unit: mm (in)
    *1

    40 (1.57)

    *3

    35 (1.38)

    *2

    95 (3.74)

    *4

    35 (1.38)

    Rear Washer Tube Layout

    GEL017

    Check Valve (for rear washer)

    From
    reservoir
    tank

    ..0

    ~fo0″
    To

    c~

    ….

    A check valve is provided in the washer fluid line. Be careful not to connect check valve to washer tube in the wrong
    direction.

    nozzle

    SEL411H

    EL-176

    WIPER AND WASHER
    Headlamp Wiper and Washer/Wiring
    -HLC-

    Diagram

    EL-HLC-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ACC or ON
    15A

    1291

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (J/B)

    (fi06)

    —Ie———-..

    L/Y

    (~IIHEA~A~

    WASHER
    MOTOR
    ~
    IIII———-II——PU/R~}

    M

    Ibj:U

    I

    L’R

    L/Y

    m

    L/R

    I.._

    PU/R

    m

    L/Y

    m

    IFh

    Next page

    ~

    IFh
    HEADLAMP
    WIPER
    MOTOR LH
    MOVE

    ffi

    STOP

    STOP

    ~
    L/W

    IbjdJ
    B

    B

    L,.

    1

    el’

    B

    ~
    ~

    ~GY

    ~
    L

    L

    HEADLAMP
    WIPER
    MOTOR RH
    ~

    MOVE

    ~ffi.

    MANUAL

    OPERATION

    Driver’s door
    Ground is supplied

    to front power window main switch terminals CID and @

    through body grounds @, @D and @!D.
    WINDOW UP
    When a driver side switch in the power window main switch is pressed
    power is supplied

    to driver side power window regulator terminal @

    through power window main switch terminal
    Ground is supplied

    to driver side power window regulator terminal CD

    through power window main switch terminal cID.
    Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
    WINDOW DOWN
    When a driver side switch in the power window main switch is pressed
    power is supplied

    to driver side power window regulator terminal (‘t’

    through power window main switch terminal cID.
    Ground is supplied

    to driver side power window regulator terminal ~)

    through power window main switch terminal
    Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is releas.ed.

    in the up position,

    em.

    in the down position,

    em.

    Except dr’ver’s door
    Ground is supplied

    to power window main switch terminal CID

    through body grounds @, @D and @D.
    PASSENGER’S DOOR
    NOTE:
    Figures in parentheses ( ) refer to terminal
    power window switch is pressed.

    Nos. arranged

    Operation by main switch
    Power is supplied

    through power window main switch (CID, @)

    to passenger side power window sub-switch (@,

    CID).

    El-180

    in order when the UP or DOWN section of

    POWER WINDOW
    System Description (Cont’d)
    The subsequent
    operations
    are the same as those outlined under «Operation
    Operation by sub-switches
    Power is supplied

    through passenger side power window sub-switch
    (@, CD)

    to passenger side power window regulator (@, CD).
    Ground is supplied

    to passenger side power window regulator (CD, @)

    through passenger side power window sub-switch
    (CD, @)

    to passenger side power window sub-switch
    (CID, @)

    through power window main switch (@, @)).
    Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.
    REAR DOOR LH

    by sub-switches».

    NOTE:
    Figures in parentheses ( ) refer to terminal
    power window switch is pressed.

    Nos. arranged

    in order when the UP or DOWN section of

    Operation by main switch
    Power is supplied

    through power window main switch (@, @)

    to rear power window sub-switch
    LH (@, CID).
    The subsequent
    operations
    are the same as those outlined under «Operation
    Operation by sub-switches
    Power is supplied

    through rear power window sub-switch
    LH (@, CD)

    to rear power window regulator LH (@, CD).
    Ground is supplied

    to rear power window regulator LH (CD, @)

    through rear power window sub-switch
    LH (CD, @)

    to rear power window sub-switch
    LH (CID, @)

    through power window main switch LH (@, @).
    Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.
    REAR DOOR RH

    by sub-switches».

    NOTE:
    Figures in parentheses ( ) refer to terminal
    power window switch is pressed.

    Nos. arranged

    in order when the UP or DOWN section of

    Operation by main switch
    Power is supplied

    through power window main switch (@J, @)

    to rear power window sub-switch
    RH (@, CID).
    The subsequent
    operations
    are the same as those outlined under «Operation
    Operation by sub-switches
    Power is supplied

    through rear power window sub-switch
    RH (@, CD)

    to rear power window regulator RH (@, CD).
    Ground is supplied

    to rear power window regulator RH (CD, @)

    through rear power window sub-switch
    RH (CD, @)

    to rear power window sub-switch
    RH (CID, @)

    through power window main switch (@, @)
    Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.

    by sub-switches».

    AUTO OPERATION
    The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open or close the driver’s
    ing the window switch in the respective
    position.
    When the AUTO switch in the main switch is pressed and released, the driver’s
    the fully open or closed position.

    EL-181

    window

    without

    hold-

    window

    will travel

    to

    POWER WINDOW
    System Description (Cont’d)
    POWER WINDOW LOCK
    The power window lock is designed to lock-out window operation to all windows except the driver’s door
    window.
    When the lock switch is pressed to lock position, ground of the passenger side switch, rear RH switch
    and rear LH switch in the power window main switch is disconnected. This prevents the power window
    motors from operating.

    EL-182

    POWER WINDOW
    Schematic
    LHD MODELS AND RHO MODELS EXCEPT FOR EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA
    ~

    ~

    o

    0
    L
    Z([W
    HOOJ
    ~I-C
    <{W_
    ([-1 Ul OJ
    W:::JUlD
    ~r.9 ro.»»
    OW[LUl
    [L([-

    .—

    I
    U
    IH
    ~I(J)([
    <{
    ZIO(J)
    H
    I-L
    HO
    Z
    r.9Z
    HO
    ‘—

    W
    (J)
    ::J
    LL

    ~

    -0

    I

    OJ

    D
    .,..,

    ~

    W
    -1

    0
    OIL
    ZUOJ
    HI- OJ Z
    ~HC
    ~W
    ([(J)Ol ::J
    WIOl
    0>~CD
    ro
    O:::JO[L(J)-

    CD

    H:><:
    (J)Z
    :::JH
    .r-t.ri
    > ……LL-1
    :>t.
    roc

    ~

    r=l

    ([0>WO<{
    ~Z…J
    OHW
    [L~a:

    o

    I

    0
    OI
    ZU_
    HI-I
    ~H…J

    ~

    0
    Z

    ([(J)([

    WI<{
    ~(J)W
    O::J([
    [L(J)-

    .

    0
    Z([_
    HOI
    ~I-([
    <{
    ([-1([
    W::J<:
    U<{
    (IW
    H([
    UCD

    ~

    o

    0
    Z([_
    HOI
    ~1—1
    <{
    ([-1([
    W::J

    …..
    L

    9
    I
    U
    IH

    ~

    (J)
    Z
    H
    <{

    Z

    ~

    0
    0
    Z
    I-<

    ~

    ([

    m

    >Z<{
    ~-1

    ,

    ~

    ~

    v_

    V

    ow

    0([

    .——

    -f-t……

    I

    …J
    (I
    <{
    W

    ~

    o-f-L…

    1_1-

    Z

    IV

    ~

    ([

    ::J
    (I
    W
    r.9
    Z
    W
    (J)W
    (J)O
    <{I-<
    [L(J)

    ‘v v

    10

    0

    Z
    ::J

    (J)
    (II
    WU
    >::J
    I-<0_
    (I 1-0
    o I+’
    W:J
    Z<{
    -1
    O-W
    ::J([

    10
    ‘V

    W

    0
    [L

    co

    000

    Ie

    ~

    ~

    0-

    10-10

    0

    ::E

    <{

    Z

    0
    l-

    0

    :::J
    <{

    fa

    ::J

    (Y]

    @

    ~

    [‘-‘

    0

    ::E

    .,

    rv

    (T)

    Ol
    Ul

    L
    0
    0
    D
    I

    ~

    Z
    1’-‘
    ([(J)(I
    WI<{
    ~(J)W
    ::J
    O:::J([
    01.:::
    [L(J)-

    I

    ::J

    …..

    .c
    w

    ‘-‘

    ~>-

    ………. «‘»

    lD(o~

    I
    (I

    +’
    ro
    I

    v

    10 fa

    1

    0

    D

    0

    I-

    ,

    ru

    ro

    I

    ~

    0
    OI
    ZU_
    HI-I
    ~H(I

    I
    f’1

    =

    ~.~

    W

    0
    0
    Z([Ul
    HO~I-L
    OJ
    W:::J,»»D
    ~r.9 L»»’
    OWOUl
    [L([-

    ~II

    >-OJ
    (I ……
    W.o
    1-.»»
    I-Ol
    <{:J

    :>t.

    ~

    ~

    ‘v

    1’-‘

    I.’:l

    ~

    Z
    ::J

    HEL097

    EL-183

    POWER WINDOW
    Schematic (Cont’d)
    RHO MODELS FOR EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA
    3:

    3:

    o

    o
    0

    ZO:OJ
    HO
    OJ
    3:f—C
    t.

    coe

    1—0:
    HW
    :J~
    UwoOJ
    W:J’M D
    3:CDL’M
    oWOUJ
    QO:-

    I

    I

    3:
    0
    10- 10_
    0
    OI
    ‘J
    ZU_
    HI—I
    01- D
    3:HO:
    Z
    3:
    10-10
    0:(f)0:
    WI-OJ
    0:…-<
    WD
    I—‘M
    I—If)

    ‘M
    L

    0:
    t.

    C

    .rl

    …-<

    >-

    .—<
    .—<

    co

    u

    .rl

    C

    co

    .c
    y.

    u

    co
    .c
    .0

    u

    u
    OJ
    E

    (f)

    OJ
    D

    I

    E

    L
    0
    0

    D
    I
    (T)

    ..

    0

    Q

    :J
    1
    0
    +’

    :J
    :J-

    0

    10

    o

    Z

    :J

    I-:J
    :

    With

    rear

    power

    window

    ~~
    II..!QJI

    =rQ1ID

    G

    W!L

    n
    II!I~II
    U

    PWINDOW
    OWER
    RELAY

    1biJl1bjdI~
    B

    L/W

    ! 1

    —-I

    1
    L1JI ~J~;JCTOR-1

    crJ
    =r
    I

    °1——,—::~ .. —

    L/W ~

    Next

    page

    L/W ~

    To EL-WINDOW-03

    L/W -@>TOEL-WINDOW-04

    B

    I

    i.

    B
    ~
    ~

    B
    ~
    ~

    I:IIITill1IIill

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    @

    ~BR

    HEL099

    EL-185

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    Preceding ~
    page
    ~

    L!W

    WINDOW —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-WINDOW-02

    _

    I
    ‘::’QID
    I~I

    rr=rr’I

    LlW&1..J
    QB):
    @:

    :

    I

    3-door Hatchback models
    With rear power window
    Without rear power window

    L/W
    ~~

    rr+n

    m

    AUTO AMP

    AUTO

    MANUAL

    N

    N
    D

    UP

    RELAY
    ILL

    U

    @D:

    Ibi=Jl

    ~

    L

    B

    I
    I$ICQD
    QID

    G

    It

    It

    B

    L

    G

    m

    i-,
    B

    DOWN

    ~——————————,
    CIJ:JQITJ @)

    :~
    :
    L

    CAUTION:

    W

    rrh

    B

    ~
    ~

    ~
    ~

    I

    ~

    B

    I

    I

    POWER
    WINDOW
    MAIN
    SWITCH
    CQID:@

    ~@D

    …g.,@
    W£J

    W:

    @)

    Refer to last page

    I

    I

    ~
    CQD:@

    Preceding
    page

    To EL-WINDOW-01 <@-L/W

    ~
    R/W

    ~
    RIB

    R~J

    R~J

    L/W @) R/W

    RIB

    —-I

    1$~t~{fi~1

    ~1iJ~— ~tJl

    IriJ~4J~1)
    L/W

    R/W

    RIB

    ~~~ I

    L/W

    L/W

    m

    I

    R/W

    RIB

    mm

    m
    POWER WINDOW
    SUB-SWITCH
    (FRONT PASSENGER
    SIDE)

    @£)

    4=U
    G

    t

    ~
    QH): 3-door Hatchback models
    @: With rear power window
    : Without rear power Window

    DOWN

    I

    I

    I~CQID
    :~
    :

    ~(gl)1

    W

    L

    [I]QID~
    ~W

    CAUTION:

    UP

    POWER WINDOW
    REGULATOR
    (FRONT PASSENGER
    SIDE)
    ~

    ~:W

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    I
    I

    J

    ~@
    l..!@

    B

    Don’t attempt to repair. splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC) . If the FFC is damaged. replace with
    a new one.
    HEL101

    EL-187

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW —

    (Co nt’ d)

    EL-WINDOW-04
    precedin9{

    page

    F

    U

    POWER
    WINDOW
    MAIN
    SWITCH

    D
    U
    ——REAR RH

    CQZ):

    <8£>

    SWITCH

    ~

    To

    U¥Jl

    G/W

    EL- WINDOW
    -01

    ~

    GIS

    Y/R

    ~

    Y/S

    111)~

    @

    POWER
    WINDOW
    REGULATOR
    (REAR RH)

    POWER
    WINDOW
    REGULATOR
    (REAR LH)
    @

    <8£> : With rear

    power window

    DOWN

    ~@)

    qm)

    ~lllfij@

    ~

    3456

    ~W

    CIJQIID @ @g)
    ~

    UP

    W’W

    W

    ‘ W

    DOWN

    ~

    ‘W

    ~@

    ~

    UP

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    W

    aID , CQD

    rR,@~

    l.!.LEJ

    B

    B

    HEL102

    EL-188

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW —

    (Conl’d)

    RHO MODELS EXCEPT FOR EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA

    EL-WINDOW-05
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    FUSE

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    Cill>

    W
    1

    CIRCUIT
    BREAKER
    ~

    ~
    ~

    .

    W /L
    ~~

    G

    tfiii’i

    IUJlICBID
    W/L

    II!I4=JI~~~!
    !II
    n

    U

    B

    POWEA

    WINOOW
    RELAY

    L/W

    ! 1

    ——

    1 ——

    R;:CTOR-l

    W

    1
    ——

    L/W

    -e> Next page

    L/W

    -fi:> To

    EL-WINDOW-07

    L/W

    -G> To

    EL-WINDOW-OB

    B

    I

    ‘I
    n
    1 t-l J
    B

    B

    B

    B

    @~

    ~

    IIIillIIIIl1Iil ~

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    BR

    HEL103

    EL-189

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW —

    (ConI’ d)

    E.L-WINDOW-06

    ~~~~eding <@!L/W

    I

    L/W

    ~~

    tn:i»‘

    I~I

    L/W CQD

    I
    rn
    L/W

    AUTO AMP

    AUTO
    N

    MANUAL
    N
    U

    0

    POWER
    WINDOW
    MAIN
    SWITCH

    UP

    RELAY

    @)

    ILL

    U

    «f

    I6i=J1
    L

    4=Jl
    G

    a

    ,$,@)
    aCID

    I

    J

    ~

    a

    a

    I..J

    -!

    :

    W/L

    With rear

    power window

    n
    ~IIPOWEA
    U

    WINDOW
    RELAY

    ~1bi=JI~
    B

    L/W

    ! 1

    L/W ~

    m~~CTOO-1 !I——

    W

    ._~~::—

    Next

    page

    L/W ~

    To EL-WINDOW-11

    L/W ~

    To EL-WINDOW-12

    B

    I

    ‘I
    n
    1 t.J 1
    B

    ~@

    B

    B

    B

    ~

    ITI:illTIIIIill ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~BR

    HEL 107

    EL-193

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW —

    Preceding ……-p1. L/W
    page
    —……q'»

    QB):

    :

    Q!P):

    (Cont’d)

    EL-WINDOW-10

    _

    3-door Hatchback models
    With rear power window
    Without rear power window

    AUTO AMP

    S

    SOLENOID

    Next
    page
    POWER
    WINDOW
    MAIN
    SWITCH

    0

    ILL

    (][):@
    CQI):
    T

    ll:jdJ

    I!::jJ

    ~

    ~

    L

    G

    B

    L

    G

    I

    n=h

    n=h

    O~

    I!!)ICQD
    QID

    » n
    B

    B

    B

    1 t..J 1

    ~(8W

    .DOWN

    ~

    UP

    ~——————————~
    I

    I~(][)

    :~~
    I

    L

    I

    CAUTION:

    ~

    L1.@

    W

    Next
    page

    I~I~

    B

    B

    (05)

    POWER WINDOW
    REGULATOR
    (FRONT DRIVER’S
    SIDE)
    @)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    B

    ~

    Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged, replace With
    a new one.
    HEL 108

    EL-194

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW —

    (Conl’d)

    EL-WINDOW-11
    Preceding
    page

    PASSENGER SIDE SWITCH
    5

    LOCK.—— UNLOCK

    N

    POWER
    WINDOW
    MAIN
    SWITCH

    N

    CQID:@

    Preceding
    page

    CQZ):

    T

    To EL-WINDOW-09~

    I

    L/W

    lbj:JJ

    ~

    R/W

    RIB

    R~J R~Bt

    ‘$~t~~fi$1
    R/W
    RIB
    I$~-~j~i
    ~riJ~
    — ~~I
    L/W

    L/W

    R/W

    I

    ..-@>-~…

    L/i

    m

    L!W RIW

    mm

    RIB

    I

    RIB

    m
    POWER WINDOW
    SUB-SWITCH
    (FRONT PASSENGER
    SIDE)

    U

    @: 3-door Hatchback models
    @: With rear power window
    @: Without rear power window

    @

    DOWN

    UP

    POWER WINDOW
    REGULATOR
    (FRONT PASSENGER
    SIDE)

    @

    ~——————————,

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    I

    I~CQID

    :~@
    :

    W

    L

    ~

    ~~
    ~W

    CAUTION:

    Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged, replace with
    a new one.
    HEL 109

    EL-195

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-WINDOW-12
    preceding{
    page

    U
    N

    N

    D
    U
    ——REAR RH
    SWITCH
    To

    EL-WINDOW

    POWER
    WINDOW
    SUBSWITCH
    (REAR LH)
    @

    @

    @: With rear
    power window
    POWER
    WINDOW
    REGULATOR
    (REAR RH)

    DOWN

    ~W’W

    H

    :J(f)

    ([

    0

    t

    «
    :::J
    I-

    U Q.r1

    «

    W

    Q.

    ‘»
    «»

    «0
    L

    t

    «

    C
    OJ
    L
    L
    :J
    U

    C

    :J

    ‘»
    U

    U
    0

    ~
    C

    :J

    0


    :::J
    I-

    U

    «

    ‘»

    U

    ‘»
    3:

    C
    OJ
    L
    L
    :J
    U

    «
    W
    ([

    0
    …J


    :::J
    I-

    L

    ‘»
    «»

    t

    0

    U

    U
    0

    C

    -J

    ~
    :J

    C
    OJ
    L
    L
    :J

    ‘»

    U
    0

    «

    ‘»

    U
    0

    U
    0

    C

    -J

    ~
    :J

    ([

    I- E :J.:i

    a:

    o ro.r-j
    I— E:J~

    o

    HWLW

    HWLW

    Ol-u.o

    Ol-u.o

    n.-

    U

    ‘»
    «»

    a:r-l-+-J’Z

    ill

    0
    0
    0

    a:…-i., …/L’

    Oro.rlQ)

    0
    0


    :::J
    I-

    0

    ([

    0
    0
    0

    ([

    c-

    ([

    0
    …J

    3:

    u

    0
    0
    0

    HWc…W
    (f)..c.rl

    ([

    ‘»

    3:

    «‘U

    «0
    L

    ..,

    «

    3:

    «
    W

    «0
    L

    ([

    -J

    OOc…uro

    ([
    ([

    (Irl-I-JL

    Ot-u.o

    I

    OQ.r-!

    «0″0

    «‘u

    u

    ..,

    0

    -J

    «»»U

    :JLOJ
    ….,IDL

    I

    -J

    0″0

    0

    3:

    0 ……….
    ….,….,….,

    ([

    Z
    W

    0
    …J

    «0
    L

    ….,

    ~

    «

    :JLID
    …., OJL

    ([

    «‘u

    U

    «»»u

    (f)
    ([

    ‘»

    3:

    0
    …J

    0
    l-

    H

    (f)
    (f)

    «‘u

    «‘U

    ([

    a ……
    r-t
    ….,….,….,

    0

    (!J
    «0
    L

    OlC
    LCO

    OlC
    LCO

    W

    o eu.r-f Q)
    l—E:J~

    (J)c…uro

    (J)e-urn

    Ulr.-Me….
    n.-

    (J).c. ……L

    n.-

    (f)
    I

    ({J

    Q.l

    D
    0

    E

    C

    co

    D
    lJ.)

    «3»

    In

    (f)

    «3»
    In
    ….
    ….

    D
    C

    1-([

    10’-«‘.
    ….. C

    > …..

    ~ ……
    >-W

    ([
    ……

    WD

    1- …..

    I-({J
    «:J
    [J),+-

    ….

    lD

    HW
    :::J'»

    a:W
    H([
    U[J)

    a:

    II

    u

    W
    2:

    co
    D

    H

    .c

    I-

    ….
    ….

    co

    ‘-«‘.

    …,u

    (f)

    ‘»

    co
    I

    I([

    U
    0
    —l

    UW
    ([I->W

    OHHO
    03:([H
    O(f)O(f)

    ([

    0
    0
    0
    OJ

    =

    II

    L
    0
    0
    D
    I
    In

    @

    HEL114

    EL-200

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Schematic (Cont’d)
    TVPE-2 (Except for Europe and Australia)

    OlC
    LCO
    0»»’.0-1

    +’+’+’

    rorou

    :JLW
    +,WL
    ua.rl

    t>
    L

    u

    3:

    ro

    +’

    t
    ….
    t>
    W
    L

    ‘»ua
    ro
    3:

    ‘»

    u

    a
    ~
    C
    :J

    ((r-1+-JL

    o

    A) . ..-i

    Q.l

    I— E~…:i:
    (J)LUro

    HQ)LCU
    (f).c.r-t

    L

    Oi-u.o

    u 0-..-1

    Z
    W
    (J)
    (J)
    «
    0-

    t>
    L

    t

    >-W
    a:.-.
    WD
    f- -….
    f-lf)
    «:::J
    cD’l-

    ro
    3:

    ‘»ua
    -J

    a:
    0

    ::J
    fU
    «

    t>
    L

    ro

    +’
    C
    W
    L
    L
    :J

    Y:
    U
    0
    -I

    ‘»
    U

    a
    ~
    C
    :J

    Q)

    I-E::J.::i
    {f)LUro
    1-fQ)»-W
    (J).c..r-!

    0

    C
    +’

    u

    a:
    0

    ::J
    fU
    «

    W

    ….L

    t

    t>

    ro
    3:

    ‘»ua
    -J

    3:

    ~
    ….
    +’
    C
    W
    L
    L
    :J

    Y:
    U
    0
    -I

    t>
    L

    ro

    I
    a:
    a:
    «
    W
    a:
    IT
    0

    ::J
    fU
    «

    3:

    ‘»
    u
    a

    ~
    C
    :J

    U

    Y:
    U
    0
    -I
    IT
    0
    0
    0

    a:r-t.f-lL

    oro.riQ.l
    I- E :l.~

    U’lLUl’O
    HWLW

    L

    (f).c.’rl

    OJ-UD

    L

    Ol-un

    CL-

    f-a:
    HW
    ::JY:

    a:W
    HIT
    UcD

    t>
    L

    .~

    a:
    0
    0
    0

    a:r»»1+JL

    o m-rt

    a:
    0
    0

    a:
    «
    W
    a:

    3:

    U

    ‘»
    10-»
    …..C

    rorou

    :JLW
    +’WL
    u n.r-!

    I
    -I

    CL-

    >- ….
    -.-.

    0 ……….

    +’+’+’

    rorou

    :JLW
    +,WL

    a:
    W

    -J

    t>
    L

    OlC
    LCO

    O.rl.1″»t

    +’+’+’

    CD

    C

    ….a

    +’
    C
    W
    L
    L
    :J
    u

    OlC
    LCO

    W

    0

    H
    (J)

    CL-

    CJ

    CD

    a:
    W
    ::;:
    H
    f-

    m

    Y:
    U
    0
    -I

    II

    a:
    0
    0
    0

    to

    @
    oS:

    co

    0
    Z
    Y:I
    U
    Y:fUH
    03:
    -I(J)

    ‘»u

    ~
    C

    :J

    ‘»ua
    -J

    ZU
    3:
    «fH
    OI
    OUY:3:
    Zf-UUJ
    HHO
    3:3:-IY:
    (J) U
    a:o
    a:
    WZO-l
    3:HOZ
    O«O::J
    0-::;:-

    If)

    .-.
    w
    a

    D

    E
    0
    I
    a:

    @

    HEL115

    EL-201

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Wiring Diagram —

    D/LOCK —

    TVPE-1 (LHD models for Europe)

    EL-D/LOCK-01
    Refer

    to EL-POWER.

    CIRCUIT
    BREAKER (102)

    }

    Next page

    ~

    R/W

    m
    OPEN

    FRONT DOOR
    SWITCH
    DRIVER’S
    SIDE
    @

    i-,
    B

    CLOSED

    B

    ! !
    ~

    ~
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    HEL116

    EL-202

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK

    (Cont’d)

    EL-O/LOCK-02
    DOOR
    LOCK
    DOOR
    LOCK
    OUTPUT

    DOOR
    UNLOCK
    OUTPUT

    ~
    RIL

    ~
    W/R

    @

    UNLOCK
    SENSOR
    (PASS)

    ~

    TIMER

    ~

    Y/R

    @: 5-door Hatchback
    and Sedan models

    lbi=JJ

    …..
    ~I—I~»— …..
    It t

    W

    UNLOCKED
    DOOR
    UNLOCK
    SENSOR

    4=U
    8

    CQD

    ——

    I 111

    LOCK

    I~I CMD

    8-~=~~
    8
    »
    @

    preCeding{~
    page

    DOOR
    UNLOCK
    SENSOR

    4J
    8

    ~
    LOCKED

    UNLOCKED

    LOCK

    SIDE

    ,

    GY

    I.1IillTIIillIT ~ ,(f@)

    ~8R

    CAUTION:

    8R

    Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged, replace with
    a new one.
    HEL 117

    EL-203

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —

    (Conl’d)

    EL-D/LOCK-03

    preCeding{~
    page

    .I

    R/L
    ~

    ~W/R—

    __

    eM)

    W/R CM2)

    RIL

    W/R@

    rciJl
    R/L <]I)

    QJ1

    I.—1

    1

    r

    -,

    R/L @IQ)

    W/R

    R/L ~

    W/R

    $—~
    f

    page

    i-,ri

    SIDE

    @)

    B

    CLOSED

    B

    B

    B

    1 Lf 1

    ~

    I II Isl fiRiil

    41

    116 15 14

    1I

    1 111

    I

    (M34)
    W

    @~

    rfi2l(]ID
    ‘N B

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    HEL119

    EL-20S

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-D/LOCK-05
    DOOR
    LOCK
    DOOR
    LOCK
    OUTPUT

    DOOA
    UNLOCK
    OUTPUT

    ~
    AIL

    ~
    W/A

    UNLOCK
    SENSOR

    UNLOCK
    SENSOR
    (PASS)

    (DR)

    ~

    ~
    @: 5-door Hatchback
    and Sedan models

    ~

    Y/R

    ~—I~

    TIMER

    Y/8

    -..

    I

    HS

    t t

    -..

    ~

    -..
    -..

    I

    i

    CBD

    I

    I

    W/A

    YIA

    AIL CQD W/A


    AIL
    W/A

    Y18

    Y18

    AIL

    m

    G

    W/R

    H

    I

    W/R

    Y18

    W/R

    W/A

    Y/8

    I~~@])
    —~lil——~riJl

    ItiJ~—~I$I——~$I

    m

    @)
    GY

    IIITIIIIIIillII

    @

    ~BR

    HEL 122

    EL-208

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —

    (Conl’d)

    EL-D/LOCK-08
    DOOR
    LOCK
    OUTPUT

    DOOR
    LOCK
    TIMER

    DOOR
    UNLOCK
    OUTPUT

    ~

    ~

    RIL

    W/R

    CM35)

    It It
    it

    It

    R/L

    I’TIA

    ~.

    W/R ~

    ~~
    ([D ICiJI

    ~~

    I[}II (@

    R/L

    W/R

    R/L ~

    W/A

    I &——,-I
    , I
    AIL ~

    $—~
    R/L @ W/A

    W/A

    W/A

    RIL

    AIL

    W/R

    W/A

    m m

    UNLOCK LOCK

    UNLOCK LOCK

    AEAR DOOR LOCK
    ACTUATOR LH

    REAR DOOR LOCK
    ACTUATOR RH

    FRONT DOOA LOCK
    ACTUATOR
    (PASSENGEASIDE)

    fIij1@

    tmI
    &Fl @Q)
    W

    AIL ~

    UNLOCK LOCK

    ~

    [[[]

    W/R

    I.~ — — — ~1iJ1

    A/L@

    $—~
    RIL <:

    ?
    (,)

    (,)

    0>

    .s:::.

    (,)

    ::J
    (,)

    ‘(,)

    u
    c

    ‘0

    en

    ‘0

    «l
    ::J

    U

    .2-

    u
    c

    .2-

    ‘-

    2-

    0

    >-

    en
    (,)

    c

    (,)

    0
    0

    ~

    N
    ::J
    U

    Q)

    0>
    ‘::J
    U
    0>

    3:

    (,)

    (,)

    0

    0

    n.

    n.

    ::J

    en
    ‘0

    n.

    and driver

    (,)

    .><:

    a.
    0-

    lock does not operate

    .s:::.

    (,)

    Ol

    ctl

    Power door

    0>

    ctl
    .::£

    e

    side lock knob switch

    0>

    (,)

    C
    0>

    ::J

    SYMPTOM

    Procedure

    ‘-

    ~

    <1l

    ‘-

    with driver’s
    door key cylin-

    @

    Q)

    der.
    Power door
    and unlock

    lock does not operate
    switch

    on power

    with door lock

    window

    main

    Q)

    @

    @

    switch.
    Specific

    door

    lock actuator

    Q)

    does not operate.

    Perform Diagnostic Procedures
    in numerical order shown in the symptom chart. Carry out functional tests whenever
    step is finished. If the trouble remains after performing
    all Diagnostic Procedures,
    replace the door lock timer.

    EL-212

    each

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Trouble Diagnoses Australia) (Cont’d)
    CONNECT

    Door lock timer
    connector ~

    ‘b,’1W

    ~12lEt11 I I II

    Power supply check
    Ignition switch operation

    I I

    11

    POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

    ~

    SJ’

    ~

    Type 1 (For Europe and

    Terminals
    OFF

    W/L

    @ — Ground

    I

    ACC

    I

    ON

    I

    START

    Battery voltage

    SEL469U

    Ground circuit check
    CONNECT

    Door lock timer
    connector @1)

    L’,

    ‘b,’I~

    SJ’

    ~

    111111~k2J
    I I

    Terminals

    Continuity

    @ — Ground

    Yes

    16

    B

    SEL470U


    EL-213

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Trouble Diagnoses Australia) (Cont’d)
    CONNECT

    If!:,

    .03

    Door lock timer
    connector @)

    YIR

    ,,
    I

    Y/B

    «»/~

    ~

    Type 1 (For Europe and

    s..J

    PROCEDURE

    1

    (Unlock sensor check)

    m

    B

    UNLOCK SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK

    ,,
    ,
    ,
    ‘..

    Measure voltage between door lock
    timer harness terminals @ and @,
    @ and @.

    I
    I
    I

    SEL473U

    OK

    Unlock sensor signal is
    OK.

    NG

    Replace door lock actuator.

    Condition of unlock
    sensor and voltage

    Terminals

    ~iv

    —..

    [V]

    Door lock actuator
    connector~

    EEl

    e

    @

    @

    (ID

    @

    Lock
    0

    Driver’s side @
    Front passenger
    side@
    SEL474U

    Unlock
    Approx.
    12

    NG

    Iil
    UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK
    Check continuity between door lock
    actuator connector terminals @ and
    @

    Terminals

    Condition of
    door lock
    actuator

    Continuity

    Lock

    Yes

    Unlock

    Yes

    @ and (g)

    OK
    Check the following.
    1) Harness between door lock timer
    and door lock actuator for open/short
    circuit
    2) Door lock actuator ground circuit

    EL-214

    ~

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Trouble Diagnoses Australia) (Cont’d)
    Door lock timer
    connector @

    CONNECT

    «»I~
    ~

    II!l,

    ‘Wi…I

    PROCEDURE

    Type 1 (For Europe and

    2

    (Door lock actuator check)

    m
    DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CHECK

    ~

    Replace door lock timer.

    NG

    Replace door lock actuator.

    Measure voltage between door lock
    timer harness terminals @ and @.
    SEL471U

    Condition
    of door
    lock &
    unlock
    switch

    Terminals

    e

    $

    .
    Door lock actuator
    connector

    _.~~—-, .
    ~

    o

    @

    @)

    Neutral
    —>Unlock

    @

    Neutral
    —>Lock

    R/L

    W/R

    Voltage
    [VI

    Driver’s side @

    —>12
    —>0
    (Approx.
    1.0 sec.)

    o

    Front passenger
    side~

    @)

    —>12
    —>0
    (Approx.
    1.0 sec.)

    • The voltage values are approximate.
    OK

    m
    DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK
    Apply 12V direct current to terminals
    and check operation.

    FUSE

    ~

    —1

    W/R

    Rear LH @
    Rear RH @E>

    ! !3—u-‘
    R/L
    SEL472U

    Door lock
    actuator
    operation

    ~

    Terminals
    $

    e

    Lock

    @)

    d)

    Unlock

    d)

    @)

    OK
    Check harness between door lock timer
    and door lock actuator for open/short
    circuit.


    EL-215

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Trouble Diagnoses and Australia)
    SYMPTOM

    Type 2 (Except for Europe

    CHART

    PROCEDURE
    REFERENCE PAGE

    Diagnostic Procedure
    EL-217

    EL-217

    EL-218

    EL-219

    2
    0
    Q)

    .r:
    0

    ~0
    Q)

    2

    .r:

    0

    0

    ….

    .r:

    ::J
    0

    .r:

    Q)

    0

    B

    B

    .~

    .8

    c
    ::J

    III

    cd

    ::J

    .0

    OJ

    ~c
    ~0

    «C

    c
    CIl

    >-

    a.
    a.
    ::J
    III

    0

    d-

    ….


    Q)

    Q)

    0

    ~0

    .~

    …0

    0

    III

    0

    0

    2
    .r:

    «C

    c

    SYMPTOM

    .r:

    ~0

    ..2

    …0
    0


    0

    CIl
    ::J

    ti
    tIl

    ~0

    0

    0
    0

    e.

    0

    Cl

    C’)

    ~

    Q)

    ::J
    «C

    Q)

    Q)

    Q)

    Q)

    ?;
    0

    0

    0

    a..

    …0
    a..

    e
    a..

    …0
    a..

    G)

    @

    ::J
    «C

    ::J
    «C

    0

    Power door lock does not operate with driver’s
    side lock knob switch and driver door key cylinder.

    @

    Power door lock does not operate with door lock
    and unlock switch on power window main
    switch.

    G)

    @

    @

    G)

    Specific door lock actuator does not operate.

    Perform Diagnostic Procedures in numerical order shown in the symptom chart. Carry out functional tests whenever each
    step is finished. If the trouble remains after performing all Diagnostic Procedures, replace the door lock timer.

    EL-216

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Trouble Diagnoses — Type 2 (Except for Europe
    and Australia) (Cont’d)
    POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
    Door lock timer
    connector@

    Power supply check

    rElB

    Ignition switch operation
    Terminals
    OFF

    W/L

    I

    ACC

    @ — Ground

    I

    ON

    I

    START

    Battery voltage

    SEL458U

    Ground circuit check

    ~i5

    Door lock timer
    connector@

    Terminals

    Continuity

    G) — Ground

    Yes

    mill
    B

    SEL459U

    PROCEDURE

    ~i5

    (Lock knob switch check)

    Door lock timer
    connector @

    m

    mm

    B

    1

    LOCK KNOB SWITCH SIGNAL CHECK
    Measure voltage between door lock
    timer harness terminals @ and G).

    YIR

    SEL460U

    Condition of lock
    knob switch

    Voltage IV]

    Lock

    Approx. 12

    Unlock

    0

    ~

    Lock knob switch is OK.

    NG
    Lock knob
    switch connector @Qg)

    (;)

    ill

    LOCK KNOB SWITCH CHECK
    Check continuity between lock knob
    switch terminals G) and @.

    SEL461U

    Condition of lock
    knob switch

    Continuity

    Lock

    No

    Unlock

    Yes
    OK

    Check the following.
    1) Harness between door lock timer
    and lock knob switch for open/short
    circuit
    2) Lock knob switch ground circuit

    EL-217

    NG

    —+

    Replace lock knob
    switch.

    m

    POWER DOOR LOCK
    Trouble Diagnoses — Type 2 (Except for Europe
    and Australia) (Cont’d)

    ~i5

    PROCEDURE

    Door lock timer
    connector @
    B

    (Door lock & unlock switch check)

    m

    B

    DOOR LOCK & UNLOCK SWITCH SIGNAL CHECK
    Measure voltage between door lock
    timer harness terminals CID and Q).
    @ and Q).

    tGY

    PU

    2

    II][]
    I

    OK
    —…

    Door lock & unlock
    switch is OK.

    NG

    Replace door lock &
    unlock switch.

    SEL462U

    Door lock & unlock
    switch connector @

    EB

    e

    Condition
    of door
    lock &
    unlock
    switch

    ~71

    Y/R JJ>

    V/B

    Next
    page

    PU/W~

    B

    1 f.J 1

    (82B)

    ~

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~

    Y IR

    L/R

    PU/W

    CMD

    Y IS

    LIS

    PU/W @

    Y IR

    L/R

    PU/W

    CQD

    Y IS

    LiS

    PU/W

    1l?)J~— — — ~$~
    —~I$I

    I$~—-~$~
    —~~I

    DOOR

    M

    ~e~~2~OR

    LEFT»:- RIGHT WARD
    WARD

    M
    DOWN»:- uPLH
    WARD
    WARD @)

    RIGHT WARD

    DOOR
    MIRROR
    ACTUATOR
    RH

    ….
    _
    DOWNUPWARD
    WARD @)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    ~

    GE..I.ID

    CAUTION:

    (03)

    @

    SR • SR

    ~~
    ~OR

    Don’t attempt to repair. splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC) . If the FFC is damaged. replace with
    a new one.
    HEL 129

    EL-223

    ELECTRIC SUN ROOF

    * For removal

    and adjustment

    of sun roof, refer to «SUN ROOF» in 8T section.

    Wiring Diagram —

    SROOF —

    EL-SROOF-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    7.5A

    m

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    (J/B)

    CM15)

    W
    1

    HP

    ([102)

    PH

    ~

    ~

    ~ -O-o~
    +I
    ….

    t
    G

    I

    W!L

    G

    II: I~IIn
    U

    B

    W/L

    CHID ~
    W/L ~

    ….
    W/L

    W/L

    -ee-OJ

    I

    QID lElQj)

    ~

    W!L ~

    W/L ~

    n
    II!»~II

    SROOF
    UN
    RELAY

    U:;JJ Ibi=JI ~:

    CIRCUIT
    BREAKER

    U

    WINDOW
    POWER
    RELAY

    U:;JJ Ibj:JJ ~:

    @

    L/W

    B

    I

    .—-.~

    @

    L/W

    ~

    -0-

    @CB»D
    L/W (fi L/W

    ———B:>

    Next page

    PH
    HP

    0- L/W ~

    B

    B

    I

    1 !•

    ~

    :>

    ……..

    ~

    <8W

    B

    1

    -W/B~

    Next page

    ‘I-B/W~
    II-B/Y~

    f.
    B

    ~
    <[il)

    B

    ~
    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    HEL 145

    EL-245

    HEATED SEAT
    Wiring Diagram —

    H/SEAT —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-H/SEAT-02
    ~W

    <@-

    Preceding
    page

    W/B ——-

    ….

    ~B/W—.

    &~~
    1211JOSIV

    6 5

    B

    LJ
    ,-.., I
    ..
    1 f.J
    B

    NATS
    ANTENNA
    AMP

    ~

    B

    B

    B

    @: With tachometer
    @: Without tachometer
    *1″,@
    30 @ 40
    *2″,@
    32 •, @ 8

    ~~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    W

    :

    ::J :
    c.. : >:

    o
    0,
    C1l

    c:
    00,
    c:
    UJ

    o
    o

    LL

    @
    ~
    ~
    o~

    a:

    @

    @@@@@@

    L-

    —‘

    @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
    HEL165

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Control Harness (Cant’ d)
    SR20DE ENGINE

    @


    @@@@@@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@
    HEL 166

    EL-273

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness
    ENGINE COMPARTMENT —

    LHD models
    CI

    u.

    @
    @ @
    @
    @ @
    @ @

    w

    Cl

    o

    OJ

    «

    L{)

    CI

    HEL154

    EL-274

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness (Conl’d)
    E
    ~en

    E

    1:

    1:

    <1l

    ~

    <1l

    en>en

    ,’2′

    Cii
    «tJ
    o
    E

    mm
    c c

    t::
    <1l

    C

    C

    Q)

    <1l

    Ol

    c

    E

    Q)

    ‘;;::

    >

    en
    Cii

    ~
    «tJ

    ~

    ‘g (;
    OJ 0
    1i E

    a:

    ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
    WWOOWWWWW[IJ

    ~

    «5
    o
    :5

    ~

    <1l

    I

    «tJ

    :5

    Q)

    «6>

    ~ ~

    c

    Q)

    Q)

    «

    o

    u

    CJ

    I

    a:

    c-

    .c
    ()

    S «~
    ~

    (J)

    Cii Qi
    c >
    Ol~

    «m

    -0

    c «5

    .a ;:;::
    Q)

    11

    -0

    ~

    i:7i co

    (0

    ii
    co

    CI
    N N Cl
    UOOWWWULL

    N

    @@@@@ @ @@@@@@@@@@
    (J

    T-

    T-

    CJ

    N

    co U

    (J

    U

    N N
    U «

    (J

    N N

    (J

    « « « «

    HEL 157

    EL-277

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness (Coni’ d)
    PASSENGER

    (0

    CI

    COMPARTMENT

    LHO models


    c::
    .Q Q)
    (;j
    c:: Q)
    .~

    .s::

    £

    -E
    ~

    (5

    ~
    :;
    ~

    .s:: .s::

    ~

    a:

    «< If~Cl

    .~
    c::

    .s::

    £

    .~
    (/)

    c::

    If

    0

    £

    .~
    (/)

    ‘0 ()
    Q)

    (.)

    Cii

    -«»

    c::
    Q)

    Qi
    (/)
    Q)

    e.
    c::

    o
    _a; ~c::

    .s:: -Ol

    E
    ==

    = ~
    Q)

    :::: >-

    ~ ~

    LU

    8
    en

    o
    o
    ~Ql
    :2:~

    o

    LU

    0

    E

    E
    Q)

    tl

    Q)

    >-

    c.
    7
    u
    .2

    Q;
    CD
    E
    o

    (/)

    2
    ::>

    ~

    LU

    ltl

    .c
    u

    Q)

    .;g

    Q.
    (/)

    (:;


    >..
    «0

    o

    co

    en>..

    E
    en>..

    Q)

    :E

    :E

    I/)

    Q)

    E

    Ql

    Q)

    E

    en

    en

    g

    en>.. g
    .gl
    Q)

    en

    -0;

    Ol
    «0

    .~

    £

    0;

    -0

    coo.
    ~ E

    .r:

    :;::

    >-0>
    Ol :=

    ~Ol

    TI

    «0

    ~ ~

    ~
    .~

    I

    ~ ~
    -0
    I

    I
    .r:

    Q)

    £ E

    ~
    …J

    en

    .-E .r:

    E £
    $,

    «0
    .0;

    *

    >..

    Q)

    :E E
    Q)

    E

    .r:

    ~

    .~

    .~

    a: £

    ~ ~

    .r:

    .~
    en

    …J

    I

    a:

    Q)
    20l
    en «0

    c -0 «0

    @@@)~
    ~ ~ ~

    ::l

    U.

    ~
    Q)

    a:

    C

    0

    u:

    >0″0
    0

    Ql

    Q)

    «0
    o

    ——_

    co

    ~~

    «5 :;

    -~
    00
    I

    ..J

    Q)

    «0

    ’00

    I

    a:


    HEL 171

    EL-285

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)
    SEDAN —

    LHD models
    N

    LO

    u.

    u.

    w

    w

    «

    LO

    HEL 172

    EL-286

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Coni’ d)

    CD

    ~

    «5 c

    Q.:S
    I

    I

    -‘ -‘

    t3
    ~ ~ ~
    c. c.
    E E

    :!:

    ceO.
    .Q 0

    E

    :0 :0

    E

    enc ~c ~
    E E

    0

    8 8 e
    (ij

    Co

    OJ

    OJ

    a:a:~

    ~
    ::l

    00

    u::

    iJj

    II)
    II)
    G)

    …co
    c:

    .c:
    >-

    ‘tl

    o

    m

    C’?C»‘)C»‘)CJCJCJCJCJCJ

    ooooouwu..u..u..uow

    __

    NN

    HEL173

    EL-287

    LAYOUT
    HARNESS
    (Cont’d)
    Body Harness
    SEDAN —

    RHO models
    CI

    Cl

    «
    .,….

    CI

    LO

    HEL 174

    EL-288

    HARNESS LAYOUr
    Body Harness (Cont’d)

    w w
    0l0l
    0l0l

    .E
    .E
    Ql Ql
    «0

    «0

    «0 «0

    c

    :;)

    o

    en

    c

    :;)

    0

    OJ

    >- >-

    «0 «0
    o 0
    IDID

    III
    III
    CIl

    ..

    c:

    cu

    s::

    >-

    «0

    o

    m

    N ~ N M ~ N N M ~ M ~ N
    CJ LL CJ CJ LL LL woo
    0
    WOlD

    ~ N N N N
    (,)

    ID

    ID

    W

    N N

    ~

    LL 0

    0

    HEL 175

    EL-289

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Conl’d)
    5-DOOR HATCHBACK

    LHD models

    ~~
    a; CD

    Ql

    «0
    ‘(jj

    ‘5 «5
    00
    ~~
    :c :c
    ..J a:

    Qi

    Ol

    c
    Ql

    0.0.

    :c
    ..J

    ..c :c

    B

    ..J

    . -C

    C

    E

    :c
    a:

    !E

    c :c ..c
    0

    tIl
    0.

    Qi

    ..c

    0
    0.

    B

    a:

    c

    ~

    o~

    oo@
    ~~~
    ig
    0 0 g ~ ~ ~ ~
    ~

    0

    E

    0
    «0

    VJ

    0

    0

    0

    U

    Ql

    0-

    ‘=——~

    e

    ;~

    aiL

    _


    HEL 177

    EL-291

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body No. 2 Harness
    LHD MODELS

    HEL 178

    EL-292

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body No.2 Harness (ConI’ d)
    RHO MODELS

    I

    ….J

    >
    Oi Oi Cii eo
    > > eo < 15
    0 E

    (; I

    !/l

    <:
    — >0 0

    ::5 ::5

    CI1
    ::l

    Cii

    eo

    c:

    Ql
    ()

    x

    (])

    (])

    «~
    (/)

    Qi

    «~

    ~

    «0
    0

    ~
    tii

    w

    o

    ~

    ~w

    ~~

    0
    It)

    ::J

    E <: <:

    «0 C9
    tii I- c:
    ::J ~
    Cll 0.
    (])
    a. <:
    0 ~ Ql Qi ()
    c: Cll x
    (])
    :s
    E «5> u;
    W
    (/)
    c:
    (/)
    Ql

    Ql

    a.

    e
    ::J

    ill

    E m
    «0
    0
    0.
    E
    (])
    ()

    0 x

    Ql

    ill

    0
    CD

    ~

    ~

    C9

    :- Z’l i»‘

    ;’!»

    LL

    W

    Ql

    Qi

    0.»0

    o 0
    5 E
    w

    .E

    t:

    :ii

    ~

    HEL 167

    EL-294

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Harness (Corlt’d)
    SR ENGINE

    5
    en
    c
    Ql
    en

    -g 0
    ~
    en

    (5

    B

    0

    E E

    HEL168

    EL-295

    HARNESS LAYOUr
    Engine Harness (Co nt’ d)
    CD ENGINE

    <5
    (J)

    c
    Q)
    (J)

    ~
    :>
    ‘@
    Q)

    c.

    ~

    ~
    «~

    /

    ctIl ~
    C

    g ~
    u

    Q) Oi
    c E
    «5> Q;

    c .c
    I-

    W

    «0
    C

    :>

    eOl
    Q)

    c
    «5>
    c
    W

    HEL 169

    EL-296

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Air Bag Harness

    LHD MODELS
    (ill

    GD
    GD
    GD

    Y/24

    Air bag diagnosis

    Y/6

    Spiral cable

    sensor unit

    Y/12

    To(~)

    Y/2

    Air bag module (Passenger

    side)

    HEL180

    RHO MODELS
    (ill

    GD
    GD
    GD

    Y/24

    Air bag diagnosis

    Y/6

    Spiral cable

    sensor unit

    Y/12

    To (~)

    Y/2

    Air bag module (Passenger

    side)


    HEL181

    EL-297

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Room Lamp Harness

    ‘0
    o ~
    ~ ‘0
    c:
    ::J
    1Il

    -::J

    o

    0
    ~

    c:
    ::>
    1Il

    £ :5

    ~~

    @@@@@

    @
    @

    HEL182

    EL-298

    __________

    …!H~A~R=N~E~S~S~LA~VY!OQ.U!!T!….———Back Door Harness

    «0

    c

    ::>

    o
    0,
    >-

    «0

    o

    CD

    ~

    «0

    c
    ::>
    o
    0,

    ~o
    CD

    en
    en

    Cll


    c

    C’ll
    J:

    ~

    CD

    T»‘»‘

    .,.-

    iii iii I

    I

    .c
    :J

    Cf)

    00000000


    HEL 183

    EL-299

    HARNESS LAYOUT

    LHD MODELS (Standard type)
    @
    @
    @

    BR/3

    Door mirror actuator

    @

    GY/2

    Door mirror defogger

    @

    B/2

    SMJ

    TO@

    BR/2

    Door speaker

    Front Door Harness (LH side)
    Power window main switch

    @W/12

    (With front door power window)

    Power window regulator

    Power window main switch

    @W/16

    (With front and rear door power window)
    @GY/4

    Door lock actuator

    @

    Lock knob switch (With power door lock lype-2)

    GY/2

    (With power door lock type-1)

    HEL 184

    LHD MODELS (FFC type)

    @
    @
    @
    @

    SMJ

    TO@

    @

    BR/2

    Door speaker

    @W/12

    Power window main switch

    BR/3

    Door mirror actuator

    @GY/4

    Door lock actuator

    GY/2

    Door mirror defogger

    B/2

    Power window regulator

    (With power door lock type-1)

    I

    CAUTION : Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged,

    replace

    with a new one.

    HEL 185

    EL-300

    HARNESS LAYOUr
    Front Door Harness (LH side) (Cont’d)
    RHO MODELS (Standard type)
    @
    @
    @

    SMJ

    To(~)

    @

    W/8

    Power window sub-switch

    BR/2

    Door speaker

    (~)

    GY/4

    Door lock actuator

    (With power door lock type-1)

    BR/3

    Door mirror actuator

    (~)

    W/4

    Door lock actuator

    (With power door lock type-2)

    @

    B/2

    Power window regulator

    HEL186

    RHO MODELS (FFC type)

    SMJ

    To(~)

    BR/2

    Door speaker

    BR/3

    Door mirror actuator

    GY/2

    Door mirror defogger

    @
    @
    @

    8/2

    Power window regulator

    W/8

    Power window sub-switch

    GY/4

    Door lock actuator
    (With power door lock type-1)

    l.


    CAUTION

    : Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged,

    replace

    with a new one.

    HEL 187

    EL-301

    HARNESS LAYOUT

    LHD MODELS (Standard

    type)

    Front Door Harness (RH side)

    To(~)

    @

    B/2

    Power window regUlator

    (032) BR/2

    Door speaker

    (~)

    W/8

    Power window sub-switch

    (033)

    BR/3

    Door mirror actuator

    (~)

    GY/4

    Door lock actuator

    (With power door lock type-1)

    (~4)

    GY/2

    Door mirror defogger

    (~)

    W/4

    Door lock actuator

    (With power door lock type-2)

    @

    SMJ

    HEL 188

    LHD MODELS (FFC type)

    @
    @

    SMJ

    TO(~)

    @

    B/2

    Power window regulator

    BR/2

    Door speaker

    (~)

    W/8

    Power window sub-switch

    (~)

    BR/3

    Door mirror actuator

    (~)

    GY/4

    (034)

    GY/2

    Door mirror defogger

    Door lock actuator
    (With power door lock type-1)

    J

    CAUTION : Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit

    (FFC). If the FFC is damaged, replace

    with a new one.

    HEL189

    EL-302

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Front Door Harness (RH side) (Cont’d)
    RHO MODELS (Standard type)
    @
    @
    @
    @

    SMJ

    TO@

    BR/2

    Door speaker

    BR/3

    Door mirror actuator

    B/2

    Power window regulator

    Power window main switch

    @W/16

    (With front and rear door power window)

    @
    @

    GY/4

    Door lock actuator

    GY/2

    Lock knob switch (With power door lock type-2)

    (With power door lock type-1)

    Power window main switch

    @W/12

    (With front door power window)

    HEL 190

    RHO MODELS (FFC type)

    @
    @
    @
    @

    SMJ

    To@

    BR/2

    Door speaker

    BR/3

    Door mirror actuator

    GY/2

    Door mirror defogger

    @
    @
    @

    B/2

    Power window regulator

    W/12

    Power window main switch

    GY/4

    Door lock actuator
    (With power door lock type-1)

    ~————=======

    CQDCQD

    —~

    j


    CAUTION : Don’t attempt to repair. splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged,

    replace

    with a new one.

    HEL191

    EL-303

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Rear Door Harness

    LH SIDE

    @)
    @)

    W/6

    TO@

    WIB

    Power window sub-switch

    (~)

    B/2

    Power window regulator

    @)

    W/4

    Door lock actuator

    HEL 192

    RH SIDE
    @ill

    W/6

    To@)

    (07~) WIB

    Power window sub-switch

    (:QE)
    (024)

    B/2

    Power window regulator

    W/4

    Door lock actuator

    HEL193

    EL-304

    ENGINE MECHANICAL

    EM •

    SECTION

    CONTENTS
    PRECAUTIONS
    Parts Requiring
    Liquid

    Gasket

    Angular

    Tightening

    Application

    Procedure

    PREPARATION
    Special

    3
    3

    4

    Service

    Commercial

    SR

    3

    Tools

    Service

    4
    Tools

    8

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    COMPRESSION PRESSURE
    Measurement

    of Compression

    59

    62
    Pressure

    62

    OIL PAN

    63

    Removal

    63

    Installation
    GA

    TIMING CHAIN

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    COMPRESSION PRESSURE
    Measurement

    of Compression

    OIL PAN

    ,

    9
    Pressure

    Inspection

    15

    Installation

    16

    68

    Removal

    15

    66
    69
    73

    ,

    OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
    ACCEL-DRUM UNIT
    CYLINDER HEAD

    73
    82
    84

    Removal

    16

    installation

    17

    TIMING CHAIN

    18

    Removal

    86

    Removal.

    20

    Disassembly

    86

    Inspection

    23

    Inspection

    88

    Installation

    23

    Assembly

    30

    Installation

    OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
    CYLINDER HEAD

    32

    Removal

    34

    Disassembly

    34

    Inspection

    34

    Assembly
    Installation

    VALVE CLEARANCE

    ENGINE REMOVAL

    40

    Assembly

    .44

    Removal
    Ins ta IIat ion

    CYLINDER BLOCK

    45
    »

    Installation

    41
    41

    46
    47

    Disassembly

    48

    Inspection

    48

    Assembly

    55

    98
    99
    »

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection

    Adjusti ng

    97

    RemGval

    40

    41

    93
    ,

    ENGINE REMOVAL

    Disassembly

    Checking

    85

    100
    101
    102

    ,

    102
    109
    CD

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    COMPRESSION PRESSURE
    OIL PAN

    113
    115
    118

    Removal

    118

    Installation

    118

    CONTENTS
    TIMING BELT
    Camshaft Timing Belt
    Injection Pump Timing Belt
    OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
    CYLINDER HEAD
    Removal
    Disassembly
    Inspection
    Assembly
    Installation
    ENGINE REMOVAL
    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Preparation
    Disassembly
    Inspection
    Assembly

    120
    120
    124
    126

    (Conl’d.)
    GA

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (505)
    General Specifications
    ,
    Inspection and Adjustment.

    155
    155
    156

    128

    129
    129
    130
    136
    137
    140
    143
    144
    144
    145
    152

    SR

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (505)
    General Specifications
    Inspection and Adjustment.

    163
    163
    163

    CD
    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Inspection and Adjustment..

    171
    171

    PRECAUTIONS
    Parts Requiring Angular Tightening

    Use an angle wrench for the final tightening of the following engine parts:
    (1) Cylinder head bolts
    (2) Main bearing cap bolts (SR engine only)
    (3) Connecting rod cap nuts (SR and CD engine)

    Do not use a torque value for final tightening.

    The torque values for these parts are for a preliminary step.

    Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with
    engine oil.

    Liquid Gasket Application Procedure
    a.

    Inner
    side

    SEM164F

    Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from
    mating surfaces and grooves. Also, completely clean any oil
    from these areas.
    b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surfaces.
    (Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent.)

    For oil pan, be sure liquid gasket diameter is 4.0 to 5.0
    mm (0.157 to 0.197 in) for SR engine. Be sure liquid
    gasket diameter is 3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in) for
    GA and CD engine.

    For areas except oil pan, be sure liquid gasket diameter is 2.0 to 3.0 mm (0.079 to 0.118 in).
    c. Apply liquid gasket to inner surface around hole perimeter
    area.
    d. Assembly should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
    e. Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil and
    engine coolant.

    EM.3

    PREPARATION
    Special Service Tools
    Tool number
    Tool name

    Engine
    application

    Description
    GA

    SR

    CD

    X

    X

    X

    When overhauling engine

    ST0501S000
    Engine stand assembly
    G) ST05011000
    Engine stand

    @ ST05012000
    Base

    NT042

    KV10106500

    When overhauling engine

    Engine stand shaft
    X

    ~

    NT028

    When overhauling engine

    KV10115300
    Engine sub-attachment

    X

    ~

    NTOO8

    When overhauling engine

    Engine attachment
    assembly
    G) KV10106500
    Engine attachment
    @ KV10113300
    Sub-attachment

    X

    NT029

    G) KV10108101
    Engine attach-

    When overhauling engine

    ment
    KV10106500
    Engine stand

    1
    X

    shaft
    or

    ~

    @ KV10102500
    Engine stand
    shaft

    NT366

    ST10120000
    Cylinder head bolt
    wrench

    Loosening and tightening

    b

    cylinder head bolt
    a; 13 (0.51) dia.
    b: 12 (0.47)

    NT583

    ~~

    c: 10 (0.39)

    Unit: mm (in)

    C

    EM.4

    X

    X

    PREPARATION
    Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
    Tool number
    Tool name

    Engine
    application

    Description

    KV10116200
    Valve spring
    compressor
    CD KV10115900
    Attachment

    GA

    SR

    X

    X

    CD

    Disassembling and
    assembling valve
    mechanism

    NT022

    KV101092S0
    Valve spring

    Disassembling and
    assembling valve

    compressor
    CD KV10109210
    Compressor
    @ KV10109220
    Adapter

    mechanism

    0
    0

    X

    NT021

    KV10115600

    Installing valve oil seal

    Valve oil seal drift

    -HaP
    c

    e

    d

    Side A

    a

    f

    Side A

    Side B

    a: 20 (0.79)

    20 (0.79)

    b: 13 (0.51)

    14.2 (0.559)

    c: 10.3 (0.406)

    11 (0.43)

    d: 8 (0.31)

    8 (0.31)

    e: 10.7 (0.421)

    10.7 (0.421)

    f: 5 (0.20)

    5 (0.20)

    X

    X

    (Side (Side
    A)
    A)

    Unit: mm (in)

    NT603

    KV10107902
    Valve oil seal puller
    CD KV10116100
    Valve oil seal
    puller adapter

    Removing valve oil seal

    X
    I

    ~

    ~
    ./

    ‘…:_.~—/

    NT605

    KV10115700
    Dial gauge stand

    Adjusting shims

    0

    X

    NT012

    KV101151SO
    Lifter stopper set

    Changing shims

    @t as l

    CD

    KV10115110
    Camshaft pliers
    @ KV10115120
    Lifter stopper

    F

    :~
    &)

    J

    NT041

    EM-5

    X

    X

    X

    PREPARATION
    Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
    Engine
    Tool number
    Tool name

    application

    Description
    GA

    SR

    CD

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Installing piston assembly
    into cylinder bore

    EM03470000
    Piston ring compressor

    ~

    NT044

    Disassembling and
    assembling piston pin

    KV10107400
    Piston pin press
    stand
    G) KV10107310
    Center shaft
    @ ST13040020
    Stand

    @ ST13040030
    Spring

    @ KV10107320
    Cap
    @ ST13040050
    Drift

    NT013

    KV10109300*
    Pulley holder

    0

    Removing and installing
    camshaft sprocket
    X

    a
    a: 68 mm (2.68 in)
    NT628

    b

    b: 8 mm (0.31 in) dia.

    Measuring compression
    pressure

    ED19600000*
    Compression gauge
    set

    X

    p’
    NT626

    Loosening and tightening

    KV11100300*

    (J

    Nozzle holder socket

    injector nozzle
    X

    NT563

    KV10111100

    Removing oil pan

    Seal cutter

    NT046

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    ~

    WS39930000
    Tube presser

    Pressing the tube of liquid
    gasket

    NT052

    *: Special tool or commercial equivalent

    EM-6

    PREPARATION
    Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
    Tool number
    Tool name

    Engine
    application

    Description
    GA

    SR

    x

    x

    CD

    Tightening bolts for bearing cap, cylinder head,
    etc.

    KV10112100

    Angle wrench

    NT014

    Removing pilot bushing

    ST16610001*

    Pilot bushing puller

    x

    X

    NT045

    Removing injection pump
    pulley

    KV11102900*

    Pulley puller

    X

    NT647

    Preventing crankshaft
    from rotating

    KV101056S0*

    Ring gear stopper
    G) KV10105630

    a: 3 (0.12)

    Adapter

    @

    b: 6.4 (0.252)

    KV10105610

    c: 2.8 (0.110)

    Plate assembly

    d: 6.6 (0.260)

    e: 107 (4.21)
    f: 14 (0.55)

    g: 20 (0.79)
    h: 14 (0.55) dia.

    Unit: mm (in)

    NT617

    *: Special tool or commercial equivalent

    EM-7

    x

    PREPARATION
    Commercial Service Tools
    Engine
    Tool name

    application

    Description

    Spark plug wrench

    0

    Q

    16 mm
    (0.63 In)

    GA

    SR

    CD

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Removing and installing
    spark plug

    NT047

    Finishing valve seat

    Valve seat cutter set

    dimensions

    ~

    NT048

    Piston ring expander

    Removing and installing
    piston ring

    ~
    NT030

    Valve guide drift

    Removing and installing
    valve guide

    ‘~

    SR

    a =
    b =
    GA
    a =
    b =

    NT015

    Valve guide reamer

    Intake
    9.5 mm
    5.0 mm
    Inlake
    9.5 mm
    5.5 mm

    & Exhaust
    (0.374 in)
    (0.197 in)
    & Exhaust
    (0.374 In)
    (0.217 in)

    dia.
    dia.
    dla.
    dla.

    Reaming valve guide G)
    or hole for oversize valve
    guide @

    d,

    ~

    J

    SR
    Intake & Exhausl
    d, = 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia.
    d, = 10.175 mm (0.4006 in)
    dia.
    GA
    Intake & Exhausl
    d, = 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia.
    d, = 9.685 mm (0.3813 in)
    dia.

    @

    NT016

    Front oil seal drift

    Installing front oil seal

    a = 75 mm (2.95 In) dla.
    b = 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.

    NT049

    Rear oil seal drift

    Installing rear oil seal

    a = 110 mm (4.33 In) dla.
    b = 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.

    NT049

    EM-8

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    GA16DE WITHOUT VTC, 14DE AND 15DE
    SEC. 140.150.210.211.220.221.253


    CIDco:J

    19.6 • 29.4 (2.00 .3.00,

    14.46 • 21.69)~

    l

    -Q;Jj

    Si
    ~

    ~
    ~

    ~ff?~~

    15.7 • 20.6 (1.60 • 2.10,11.58 — 15.19)

    1ii]•. 28 • ‘.34
    [jJ : N.m

    ‘0.’»

    «»~ /4J 0/)’

    • 0.851, 55.’ • 73.9)/

    ijJ’.28

    — ‘.34 (0.'»

    • 0.851, 55.’ • 73.9)

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    : N.m (kg-m, fHb)
    : Apply liquid gasket.
    SEM060FA

    G)

    @
    @

    Oil pressure switch
    Distributor
    Spark plug

    @
    @

    @

    Thermal transmitter
    Intake manifold
    Intake manifold supports

    EM-9

    (J)
    @
    @

    Oi I filter
    Thermostat
    Water pump

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    GA16DE WITHOUT VTe, 14DE AND 15DE
    SEC. 140-147-163-164
    GA15DE

    tOJ : N.m
    iii : N’m

    (kg-m, ft-Ib)
    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    * Throttle

    body bolts tightening procedure
    1) Tighten all bolts to 9 to 11 N. m (0.9 to 1.1 kg-m, 6.5 to 8.0 fl-Ib)

    2) Tighten all bolts to 18 to 22 N’m (1.8 to 2.2 kg-m, 13 to 16 ft-Ib)

    Engine A
    Iront y

    Tighten in numerical order.

    Tighten in numerical order.

    SEM220F

    CD
    @
    @

    @
    @

    Throttle position sensor

    @

    Mass air flow sensor
    IACV-AAC valve
    IACV-FICD solenoid valve

    IJ)

    Throttle body

    @

    @

    Engine coolant temperature
    sensor
    Air relief plug

    @l

    Injector
    Injector tube

    @
    @

    EM-10

    @

    Pressure regulator
    EGR valve (GA15DE
    M/T model only)
    Intake manifold
    IACV-AAC valve (GA15DE
    engine models only)

    OUTER COMPONENT

    PARTS

    GA16DE WITH VTC
    SEC. 130.140.150.210.211.221.226.253

    ~

    ~ ,… -26.5

    {2.1′ — ‘.70,

    :5.19_19.5Sl-,,4

    r

    COJ

    15.7 — 20.6

    7

    ~

    COJ

    15.7 — 20.6 (1.60 — 2.10, 11.58 — 15.19)

    * : Refer to «Tightening
    ~:

    N.m (kg-m. ft-Ib)

    ~:

    N.m (kg-m. in-Ib)

    ~

    : Apply liquid gasket.

    9

    ~~~/~

    Order».

    ->

    .f’
    ~

    6.28.8.34

    !il6.28

    _ 8.34 (0.641 — 0.851, 55.6 — 73.9)

    (0.641 — 0.851, 55.6 — 73.9)-.1

    SEM223F

    G)
    @

    @

    Oil pressure switch
    Knock sensor
    Distributor

    @
    @
    @

    VTC solenoid valve
    Intake manifold gasket
    Intake manifold assembly

    EM-11

    (J)
    @
    @

    Water pump
    Thermostat housing
    Thermostat

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    GA16DE WITH VTC
    SEC. 140.163.164

    ~

    1st. 7.85 • 10.8
    (0.8. 1.1, 5.8.8.0)

    SEM064FB

    G)
    @
    @

    Intake manifold collector
    Gasket
    Throttle body

    @

    Collector gasket

    (J)

    Pressure regulator

    @
    @

    Fuel gallery assembly
    Insulator

    @
    @

    Intake manifold gasket
    Intake manifold

    EM-12

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    Tightening order

    * Intake manifold collector bolts tightening order

    *Intake manifold bolts and nuts tightening order

    Tighten in numerical order.

    Tighten in numerical order.

    *Throttle body bolts tightening procedure
    1)
    2)

    Tighten all bolts to 8.8 to 10.8 N.m (0.90 to 1.10 kg-m, 6.5 to 8.0 ft-Ib)
    Tighten all bolts to 17.7 to 21.6 N.m (1.81 to 2.20 kg-m, 13.06to 15.93 ft-Ib)
    Make sure the direction of the gasket is as shown in figure.

    o

    o

    ,,-0
    Gasket

    Tighten in numerical order

    SEM066FB

    EM-13

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    SEC. 120-140-147-210

    Front

    5

    4

    For Australia

    Except for Australia
    SEC. 140-208-226

    P::~

    40 • 50 (4.1 • 5.1, 30 • 37)

    ~29-34

    ‘r • ,

    t::~

    L Ji
    f’~~~
    I’!

    ~

    c

    r

    (3.0 — 3.5, 22 — 25)

    r.e.t

    ~

    ~

    tf ——~

    J

    r

    -____

    ~l

    ~37’~

    (0.38 — 0.51,
    330 — 443)
    — 21

    _ y-‘

    —,-»

    _

    ~~~I

    r
    »

    ,,+ · <1J1′>:t;)
    — —

    !il’,0

    J)

    O’-rlng~L»‘}.

    ~

    (1.6 — 2.1, ~
    12 • 15)

    330-4431

    ~Q;f;~

    ~

    [O;J 16

    (0.92 -1.2,

    3.7 — 5.0
    (0.38 • 0.51,

    .

    79.9 _ 104.2)…/

    to.] 16

    ~-~ 29 — 34 (3.0 • 3.5, 22 • 25)

    Tighten in
    numerical order.

    (1.• — 2.1, 12 — 15)

    ~1iI3.7

    rrTl

    — 21

    — 5.0
    (0.38 • 0.51,
    33.0 • 44.3)

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    1iI

    : N’m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    a:

    Apply liquid gasket.

    G)

    Crankshaft pulley

    @

    Water outlet

    @
    @

    Gusset

    IJ)

    Gasket
    Exhaust manifold
    EGR tube

    @

    Water drain plug
    • Heated oxygen sensor
    (Australia AIT models and
    Europe models)

    @
    @

    EM-14

    @

    SEM242F

    • Oxygen sensor
    (Except Australia AIT models
    and Europe models)
    Three-way catalyst

    COMPRESSION

    PRESSURE

    Measurement

    of Compression Pressure

    1. Warm up engine.
    2. Turn ignition switch off.
    3. Cut fuel line.
    Release fuel pressure.
    Refer to «Releasing Fuel Pressure» in EC section.
    4. Remove all spark plugs.
    5. Disconnect distributor center cable.
    6. Attach a compression tester to NO.1 cylinder.
    7. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep throttle valve wide
    open.
    8. Crank engine and record highest gauge indication.
    9. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above.

    Always use a fully-charged
    battery to obtain specified
    engine revolution.
    Compression pressure:

    20 mm (O.79 In) dls.

    Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)/rpm
    Use compressor tester whose end (rubber
    portion) is less than 20 mm (0.79 in) dia.
    Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder
    head during removal.

    Compression
    ratio
    Refer to SOS
    (EM-155).

    Standard

    Minimum

    9.5

    1,324 (13.24,
    13.5, 192)/350

    1,128 (11.28,
    11.5, 164)/350

    9.8

    1,353 (1353,
    13.8, 196)/350

    1,157 (11.57,
    11.8, 168)/350

    9.9

    1,373 (13.7, 14,
    199)/350

    1,177 (11.8,12,

    Difference limit
    between cylinders

    SEM387C

    98 (0.98, 1.0, 14)/
    350

    171)/350

    10. If compression in one or more cylinders is low:
    a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through
    spark plug holes.
    b. Re-test compression,

    If adding oil helps compression, piston rings may be worn
    or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston.

    If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating
    improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. Refer
    to SOS (EM-156, 159). If valve or valve seat is damaged
    excessively, replace them.

    If compression stays low in two cylinder that are next to
    each other:
    The cylinder head gasket may be leaking, or
    both cylinders may have valve component damage.
    Inspect and repair as necessary.

    EM-15

    OIL PAN
    SEC. 110

    SEM070FA

    Removal
    1. Remove undercovers.
    2. Drain engine oil.
    3. Remove front exhaust tube. Refer to «Exhaust system»
    section.
    4. Remove center member.

    5.
    6.

    in FE

    Remove engine front and rear gussets.
    Remove engine lower rear plate (AfT models).

    7.
    (1)

    Remove oil pan.
    Insert Tool between cylinder block and oil pan.
    Be careful not to damage aluminum mating face.
    Do not insert screwdriver,
    or oil pan flange will be
    deformed.
    (2) Slide Tool by tapping its side with a hammer, and remove
    oil pan.

    EM-16

    Oil PAN
    Installation
    1.

    Before installing oil pan, remove all traces of liquid gasket
    from mating surface using a scraper.
    Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of
    cylinder block.

    SEM295C

    2.


    7 mm (0.28 in)

    -1 ~

    Be sure liquid gasket is 3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in)
    wide.
    Apply liquid gasket to inner sealing surface as shown in
    figure.
    Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.

    3.


    4.

    Install oil pan.
    Tighten oil pan bolts in the numerical order.
    Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil.
    Install other removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

    Cut here.

    liquid

    gasket

    Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface
    of oil pan.
    Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent.

    Inner
    side

    Q Engine
    @

    @
    ~

    front

    CV

    @

    @o~L-J~

    I

    ~~C:;;;}Oc=J/

    ~ =:J

    ([Do

    @

    ==O=O=O~o

    I

    Of

    :=JODI

    ~I
    ~

    =

    (j)

    JL.-=o=o

    0 ~—

    CID

    CD

    W

    _/o@
    %

    i

    ~

    I

    o@
    0

    <:::::==

    @
    SEM072F

    EM-17

    TIMING CHAIN
    WITH VTC
    SEC. 111.120.130.135

    ~~

    £It»J

    132.’ .152 .• (13….

    15…. 97.&6.112.12)

    SEM069FB

    CD

    (J)

    @

    Upper timing chain
    Upper timing chain tensioner
    VTC camshaft sprocket (Intake)

    @

    Gasket

    @

    Crankshaft sprocket
    Oil pump drive spacer
    Front cover

    @
    @
    @

    Camshaft sprocket (Exhaust)
    O-ring
    Idler shaft

    @)

    Slack side timing chain guide
    Timing chain tension guide
    Lower timing chain

    @
    @
    @

    Oil seal
    Crankshaft pulley
    Cylinder head front cover

    @

    @

    @
    @

    Idler sprocket
    Lower timing chain tensioner

    EM-18

    @
    @

    TIMING CHAIN
    WITHOUT VTC
    SEC. 111.120.130.135

    ~:
    ~
    ~

    N.m (kg-m, in-lb)
    : N’m (kg-m, ft-Ib)
    : Apply liquid gasket.

    fJ : Lubricatewith new
    engineoil.
    SEM068FA

    G)
    @

    @
    @
    @)
    @

    Upper timing chain

    (j)

    Upper chain tensioner
    Camshaft sprocket (Intake)
    Camshaft sprocket (Exhaust)
    a-ring
    Idler shaft

    @

    @
    @
    @

    @

    Idler sprocket
    Lower chain tensioner
    Gasket
    Slack side timing chain gUide
    Timing chain guide
    Lower timing chain

    EM-19

    @
    @
    @)

    @
    @
    @

    Crankshaft sprocket
    Oil pump drive spacer
    Front cover
    Oil seal
    Crankshaft pulley
    Cylinder head front cover

    TIMING CHAIN
    CAUTION:

    After removing timing chain, do not turn crankshaft and
    camshaft separately, or valves will strike piston heads.

    When installing camshafts, chain tensioner, oil seals, or
    other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new
    engine oil.

    Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when
    installing cylinder
    head, camshaft
    sprocket, crankshaft
    pulley, and camshaft brackets.

    Removal
    1.

    Drain engine coolant from radiator and cylinder block.
    Be careful not to spill coolant on drive belts.
    2. Release fuel pressure.

    Refer to «Releasing Fuel Pressure» in EG section.
    3.. Remove the following belts.

    Power steering pump drive belt

    Alternator drive belt
    4. Remove power steering pulley and pump with bracket.
    5. Remove air duct to intake manifold collector.
    6. Remove front right-side wheel.
    7. Remove front right-side splash cover.
    8. Remove front undercovers.
    9. Remove front exhaust tube.
    10. Remove cylinder

    Without

    VTC

    11.
    12.
    13.
    14.

    Remove
    Remove
    Remove
    Remove

    head front mounting

    bracket.

    rocker cover.
    distributor cap.
    all spark plugs.
    intake manifold support.

    15. Set NO.1 piston at TOG on its compression

    EM-20

    stroke.

    TIMING CHAIN
    Removal (Cont’d)

    @KJ

    Make sure No.1 cylinder is at TDC by looking at distributor
    rotor position.
    16. Remove distributor.
    17. Remove cylinder head front cover.
    18. Remove water pump pulley.


    19. Remove thermostat

    housing.

    20. Remove lower chain tensioner.

    21.
    22.
    23.
    24.
    25.

    Remove upper chain tensioner.
    Loosen idler sprocket bolt.
    Remove camshaft sprocket bolts.
    Remove camshaft sprockets.
    Remove camshaft brackets and camshafts.
    These parts should be reassembled in their original positions.

    Bolts should be loosened in two or three steps.
    26. Remove idler sprocket bolt.

    Loosen in numerical order.
    SEM546D

    27. Remove cylinder head with manifolds.

    Head warpage or cracking could result from removing in
    incorrect order.

    Cylinder head bolts should be loosened in two or three
    steps.
    28. Remove idler sprocket shaft from rear side.
    29. Remove upper timing chain.
    30. Remove center member.
    31. Remove oil pan. Refer to «Removal» in «OIL PAN» (EM-16).
    32. Remove oil strainer.
    33. Remove crankshaft pulley.
    34. Support engine with a suitable hoist or jack.

    EM-21

    TIMING CHAIN
    Removal (Coni’ d)
    35. Remove engine front mounting.

    36. Remove engine front mounting

    37. Remove
    *1: Located
    *2: Located
    *3: Located

    front cover bolts and front cover as shown.
    on engine front mounting bracket
    on water pump
    on power steering pump adjusting bar

    38.
    39.
    40.
    41.
    42.

    idler sprocket.
    lower timing chain.
    oil pump drive spacer.
    chain guides.
    crankshaft sprocket.

    SEM081F

    Slack side
    chain gUide

    bracket.

    Remove
    Remove
    Remove
    Remove
    Remove

    EM-22

    TIMING CHAIN
    Inspection
    Check for cracks and excessive
    necessary.

    wear at roller links. Replace

    if


    SEM1190

    Installation

    No. 1 cylinder at TDC

    1.
    a.

    b.

    Position crankshaft so that No. 1 piston is at TOC and key
    way is at 12 o’clock.
    Install crankshaft sprocket.
    Make sure mating marks on crankshaft sprocket face front
    of engine.
    Install oil pump drive spacer.

    SEM377CC

    2.
    3.

    /

    Same number link


    ///

    40 rollers-

    —40 rollers

    : Mating mark (different color)

    Install chain guide.
    Install crankshaft sprocket and lower timing chain.
    Set timing chain by aligning its mating mark with the one on
    crankshaft sprocket.
    Make sure sprocket’s mating mark faces engine front.
    The number of links between alignment marksare the same
    for the left and ri.Qht sides. Either side can be used during
    alignment with the sprocket.

    SEM127F

    EM-23

    TIMING CHAIN
    Installation (Cont’d)
    4.

    ~

    Before installing front cover, remove all traces of liquid
    gasket from mating surface using a scraper.
    Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of
    cylinder block.

    SEM083F

    5.
    6.



    Front cover
    SEM110F

    Position
    for
    O-ring

    7.
    8.
    9.
    10.
    11.

    Apply liquid gasket to front cover.
    Install front cover.
    Check alignment of mating marks on chain and crankshaft
    sprocket.
    Align oil drive spacer with oil pump.
    Place timing chain to the side of chain guide. This prevents
    the chain from making contact with water seal area of front
    cover.
    Make sure two O-rings are present.
    Be careful not to damage oil seal when installing front
    cover.
    Install
    Install
    Install
    Install
    Install

    engine front mounting bracket and mounting.
    oil strainer.
    oil pan. Refer to «Installation»
    in «OIL PAN» (EM-16).
    crankshaft pulley.
    center member.

    SEM122D

    12. Set idler sprocket by aligning the mating mark on the larger
    sprocket with mating mark on the lower timing chain.
    13. Install upper timing chain and set it by aligning mating
    marks on the smaller sprocket with mating mark on upper
    timing chain.

    Make sure sprocket’s mating mark faces engine front.
    14. Install idler sprocket shaft from the rear side.

    Idler
    sprocket

    Lower
    timing chain
    Upper
    timing chain
    •.

    Mating mark (different color)
    SEM126F

    EM-24

    []K]

    TIMING CHAIN
    Installation (Cont’d)

    15. Install cylinder head with new gasket.

    Be sure to install washers between bolts and cylinder head.

    Do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately, or valves
    will strike piston heads.

    Apply new engine oil to cylinder head bolt threads and seat
    surfaces.

    Cylinder head bolt washer

    0__0

    Cylinder head side

    SEM877A

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    CD
    Tighten in numerical order.

    Tightening procedure
    Tighten bolts to 29.4 N’m (3 kg-m, 22 ft-Ib).
    Tighten bolts to 58.8 N’m (6 kg-m, 43 ft-Ib).
    Loosen bolts completely.
    Tighten bolts to 29.4 N’m (3 kg-m, 22 ft-Ib).
    Turn bolts 50 to 55 degrees clockwise or if angle wrench is
    not available, tighten bolts to 58.8:1:4.9 N’m (6:1:0.5 kg-m,
    43.4:1:3.6 ft-Ib).
    Tighten bolts (@ — @) to 6.3 to 8.3 N’m (0.64 to 0.85 kg-m,
    55.6 to 73.8 in-Ib).

    SEM124D

    Tightening

    @

    @

    torque

    @

    N’m

    (kg-m,

    ft-Ib)

    @

    @,CD
    50 — 55

    ~ 58.8 (6, 43)

    degrees

    Ol

    «»

    Bolts

    z

    ((1) — @»)

    E

    29.4 (3, 22)

    58.8 (6, 43)

    0(0,0)

    29.4 (3, 22)

    ~ 29.4 (3, 22)

    or

    58.8:1:4.9
    (6:1:0.5,
    43.4:1: 3.6

    E!»
    2

    ft-Ib)

    Ol

    6.3 — 8.3

    c

    ‘c

    Bolts

    QJ

    o

    .E

    Cl

    i=

    SEM614EA

    (@ — @)

    (0.64 0.85,55.6
    73.8 in-Ib)

    16. Install idler sprocket bolt.

    Intake

    17. Install camshaft.

    Make sure camshafts are aligned as shown in figure.

    Exhaust

    SEM547D

    EM-25

    TIMING CHAIN
    Installation (Cont’d)

    ~
    ~

    ~NO.5~

    L
    ~V~NO’

    ~No.

    4 ~

    ~

    «‘DNo. 3» ~

    «J;;

    No. 2

    ~~FronOt
    Front

    mark

    ~

    …….,
    Exhaust side

    SEM549D

    Distributor

    bracket

    I~

    Apply liquid gasket.

    @ @@

    ),i
    ~

    @

    marks are present on camshafts.

    18. Install camshaft brackets and distributor bracket.

    Make sure camshaft brackets are aligned as shown in figure.

    Intake side

    o~

    Identification

    Apply liquid gasket to distributor
    figure.

    bracket as shown in the


    Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surface.

    Tighten camshaft bracket bolts in the following steps.
    (Bolt @> is applied only for GA16DE)
    @ Tighten bolts @ — @>, then CD — @).
    ~:
    2.0 N’m (0.204 kg-m, 17.7 in-Ib)
    @ Tighten bolts CD — @>.
    ~:
    5.9 N’m (0.60 kg-m, 52.1 in-Ib)
    @ Tighten bolts CD — @.
    ~:
    9.8 — 11.8 N’m (1.00 — 1.20 kg-m, 86.8 — 104.2 in-Ib)
    Tighten bolt @>.
    ~:
    6.3 — 8.3 N’m (0.64 — 0.85 kg-m, 55.6 — 73.8 in-Ib)

    If any part of valve assembly or camshaft is replaced, check
    valve clearance according to reference data.
    After completing assembly check valve clearance. Refer to
    «Checking» and» Adjusting» in «VALVE CLEARANCE» (EM-

    rl~FL~~I~~~~
    0l1..0) (

    o)(oo~-.’..@
    /~
    cID

    0

    o'(!l@

    CD~cID

    oc1)

    10

    @

    Tighten in numerical order.
    SEM550D

    41).
    Reference data valve clearance (Cold):
    Intake
    0.25 — 0.33 mm (0.010 — 0.013 in)
    Exhaust
    0.32 -0.40 mm (0.013 — 0.016 in)

    EM-26

    @K]

    TIMING CHAIN
    Installation (Cont’d)

    19. Assemble camshaft sprocket with chain.

    Set timing chain by aligning mating marks with those of
    camshaft sprockets.

    Make sure sprocket’s mating marks face engine front.
    20. Install camshaft sprocket bolts.

    Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surface .
    16 rollers

    : Mating mark (different color)

    SEM129F

    21. Install upper chain tensioner.

    Before installing chain tensioner, insert a suitable pin into
    pin hole of chain tensioner.

    After installing chain tensioner, remove the pin.

    22. Install lower chain tensioner.
    CAUTION:

    Check no problems occur when engine is rotated.

    Make sure that No. 1 piston is set at TOC on its compression stroke.

    SEM657D

    2.0.3.0 mm
    (0.079 — 0.118 In)

    Make sure of the direction
    lower chain tensioner.

    23.

    24.
    25.

    Apply liquid gasket to thermostat housing.
    Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent.
    Install thermostat housing.
    Install water pump pulley.

    EM-27

    of the gasket before installing

    TIMING CHAIN
    Installation (Cont’d)

    rru

    ~Groove

    26. Install distributor.

    rI~~~-»

    ~~r

    Make sure that position of camshaft

    is as shown in figure.

    of ~ams~~

    J;;! ~
    o’

    ~

    -il{~

    j ~1~1M
    =,-fDistributor

    ~~~

    I

    SEM087F

    27. Install cylinder head front cover.
    • Apply liquid gasket to cylinder head front cover.
    • Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent.

    Without VTC

    SEM597EA

    With VTC

    SEM088F

    Without
    VTC

    Tighten bolts and nuts in numerical order as shown in the
    figure.

    @o
    @

    @

    cID

    o

    o

    o

    SEM089F

    Without VTC
    I
    Cylinderhea~
    Ci

    2.0 _ 3.0 mm (0.079.0.118

    $

    In)

    Without VTC
    28. Apply liquid gasket to cylinder head.

    HI
    Rocker cover gasket

    ======;;::::::/::J
    o
    gi

    SEM090F

    EM-28

    TIMING CHAIN
    Installation (Cont’d)
    29. Apply liquid gasket to rocker cover gasket.

    Without VTC

    ~(0.39)

    * —

    ~1-J—10
    Engine front

    (0.39)

    Z~ Liquid

    3 (0.12)

    gasket

    Unit: mm (in)

    SEM59BEA

    With VTC
    Cylinder head

    With VTC

    ‘l:tJ

    ~
    /
    Cylinder head front cover

    28. Apply liquid gasket to mating surfaces of the cylinder
    and cylinder head front covers shown in the figure.

    head

    2.0-3.0mm
    (0.079 — 0.118 In)

    SEM091F

    29. Apply liquid gasket to rocker cover gasket.

    With VTC

    7~’
    …..
    -4′

    ~-‘?

    ~’0391

    *

    ~10
    Engine front

    3 (0.12)

    (0.39)

    Zr.a—1
    liquid
    gasket

    Unit: mm (in)

    Without
    VTC

    With VTC

    SEM111F

    30. Install rocker cover and tighten in numerical order as shown
    in the figure.
    31. Install all spark plugs and leads.
    32. Install engine front mounting bracket and mounting.
    33. Install front exhaust tube.
    34. Install front undercover.
    35. Install front right.splash cover.
    36. Install front right wheel.
    37. Install air cleaner.
    38. Install power steering pulley and pump with bracket.
    To check power steering fluid, refer to MA section («Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines», «CHASSIS AND BODY
    MAINTENANCE»).
    39. Drive belts.
    For adjusting drive belt deflection,
    refer to MA section
    («Checking Drive Belts», «ENGINE MAINTENANCE»).

    EM-29

    OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
    VALVE Oil SEAL
    1. Remove rocker cover.
    2. Remove camshaft.
    3. Remove valve spring. Refer to «CYLINDER HEAD».
    4. Remove valve oil seal with a suitable tool.
    Piston concerned should be set at TOC to prevent valve from
    falling.

    KV10l07902

    5.

    Apply engine oil to new valve oil seal and install it with Tool.

    SEM136D

    10.5 mm
    (0.413 In)

    SEM137D

    FRONT Oil SEAL

    Engine
    inside

    /’,

    Y

    Oil seal lip

    1.




    2.
    Be

    Remove the following parts:
    Engine undercover
    Right-side splash cover
    Alternator and power steering drive belts
    Crankshaft pulley
    Remove front oil seal from front cover.
    careful not to damage oil seal portion.

    Install new oil seal in the direction

    ~
    Engine
    Youtside
    Dust seal lip

    SEM715A

    EM-30

    shown.

    OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
    3.

    Apply engine oil to new oil seal and install
    able tool.

    it using a suit-


    REAR OIL SEAL

    /’

    Engine
    inside

    /’-l_
    Y

    Oil seal lip

    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    Be

    Remove flywheel or drive plate.
    Remove rear oil seal retainer.
    Remove traces of liquid gasket using scraper.
    Remove seal from rear oil seal retainer.
    careful not to scratch rear oil seal retainer.

    Install new oil seal in the direction

    5.

    Apply engine oil to new oil seal and install
    able tool.

    SEM096F

    shown.

    _ ~ Engine
    LV outside
    Dust seal lip

    SEM715A

    SEM097F

    EM-31

    it using a suit-

    CYLINDER HEAD

    WITH VTC
    SEC. 111.130

    7

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    ~

    (kg-m, ft-Ib)
    : Apply liquid gasket.

    A : N.m

    f] :Lubricate

    with new
    engine oil.

    SEM099FB

    G)

    @
    @

    @
    @
    @
    (J)

    @

    Oil filler cap
    Rocker cover
    Rocker cover gasket
    Oil seal
    Camshaft bracket
    Intake camshaft
    Exhaust camshaft
    Distributor bracket

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Cylinder head bolt
    Shim
    Valve lifter
    Valve
    Valve
    Valve
    Valve

    cotter
    spring retainer
    spring
    spring seat

    EM-32

    @
    @
    @
    @)
    @)

    @
    @

    Valve oil seal
    Valve guide
    Cylinder head
    Cylinder head gasket
    Valve seat
    Valve
    Cylinder head front cover

    CYLINDER HEAD
    WITHOUT VTC
    SEC. 111-130

    Ij] . N.m

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    ~

    : Apply liquid gasket.

    f) : Lubricate

    with new engine oil.

    SEM244F

    G)
    @

    @
    @

    @
    @
    (J)
    @

    Oil filler cap
    Rocker cover
    Rocker cover gasket
    Oil seal
    Camshaft bracket
    Intake camshaft
    Exhaust camshaft
    Distributor bracket

    @

    Cylinder head bolt

    @)
    @
    @

    Shim
    Valve
    Valve
    Valve
    Valve
    Valve

    @
    @
    @

    lifter
    cotter
    spring retainer
    spring
    spring seat

    EM-33

    @
    @

    @
    @

    @
    @
    @

    Valve oil seal
    Valve guide
    Cylinder head
    Cylinder head gasket
    Valve seat
    Valve
    Cylinder head front cover

    CYLINDER HEAD
    CAUTION:

    When installing camshaft, oil seals or other sliding parts,
    lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil.

    When tightening cylinder head bolts, camshaft sprocket
    bolts and camshaft bracket bolts, lubricate thread portions
    and seat surfaces of bolts with new engine oil.

    Attach tags to valve lifters so as not to mix them up.

    Removal

    This removal is the same procedure as those for timing
    chain. Refer to «Removal» in «TIMING CHAIN» (EM-20).

    Disassembly
    1. Remove valve components with Tool.
    2.. Remove valve oil seal with a suitable tool.

    Inspection
    CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION
    Clean surface of cylinder head.
    Use a reliable straightedge and a feeler gauge to check the
    flatness of cylinder head surface.
    Check along six positions shown in figure.
    Head surface flatness:
    Standard:
    Less than 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
    Limit:
    0.1 mm (0.004 in)

    If beyond the specified limit, replace it or resurface it.
    Resurfacing limit:
    The resurfacing limit of cylinder head is determined
    inder block resurfacing in an engine.
    Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is «A».
    Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is «8».
    The maximum limit is as follows:
    A + 8 = 0.2 mm (0.008 in)

    by the cyl-

    After resurfacing cylinder head, check that camshaft rotates
    freely by hand. If resistance is felt, cylinder head must be
    replaced.
    Nominal cylinder head height:
    117.8 — 118.0 mm (4.638 .4.646

    in)

    CAMSHAFT VISUAL CHECK
    Check camshaft for scratches, seizure and wear.

    EM-34

    CYLINDER

    HEAD

    Inspection

    (Cont’d)

    CAMSHAFT

    RUNOUT

    1.

    2.

    Measure camshaft runout at the center journal.
    Runout (Total indicator reading):
    Standard:
    Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
    Limit:
    0.1 mm (0.004 in)
    If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.

    SEM154D

    CAMSHAFT
    1.

    CAM HEIGHT

    Measure camshaft cam height.
    Unit: mm (in)

    Engine model

    GA14DE

    Intake
    SEM549A

    39.380 39.570
    (1.5504 1.5579)

    Standard
    cam height
    Exhaust

    2.

    3.

    4.

    39.380 39570
    (1.5504 1.5579)

    40.056 40.246
    (1.5770 1.5845)

    39.880 40.070
    (1.5701 1.5776}

    GA16DE
    with VTC
    except for
    Australia

    40.610 — 40.800
    (1.5988 — 1.6063)

    39.910 40.010
    (1.5713 1.5752)

    40.056 40.246
    (1.5770 1.5845}

    If wear is beyond the limit, replace camshaft.

    CAMSHAFT
    1.

    39.880 40.070
    (1.5701 1.5776)

    GA16DE
    with VTC
    for Australia

    0.20 (O.0079)

    Cam wear limit

    2.

    GA15DE

    GA16DE
    without
    VTC

    JOURNAL CLEARANCE

    Install camshaft bracket and tighten bolts to the specified
    torque.
    Measure inner diameter of camshaft bearing.
    Standard inner diameter:
    No. 1 bearing
    28.000.28.021
    mm (1.1024.1.1032
    in)
    No. 2 to No. 5 bearings
    24.000 • 24.021 mm (0.9449 . 0.9457 in)

    Measure outer diameter of camshaft journal.
    Standard outer diameter:
    No.1 journal
    27.935.27.955
    mm (1.0998 .1.1006 in)
    No.2 to No.5 journals
    23.935 — 23.955 mm (0.9423 • 0.9431 in)
    If clearance exceeds the limit, replace camshaft and/or cylinder head.
    Camshaft journal clearance:
    Standard
    0.045 • 0.086 mm (0.0018 • 0.0034 in)
    Limit
    0.15 mm (0.0059 in)

    EM-3S

    rnJ

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Inspection (Conf’d)
    CAMSHAFT
    1.
    2.

    END PLAY

    Install camshaft in cylinder head.
    Measure camshaft end play.
    Camshaft end play:
    Standard
    For Europe 0.070 — 0.143 mm (0.0028 — 0.0056 in)
    Except for Europe 0.115 • 0.188 mm (0.0045 — 0.0074
    in)
    Limit
    0.20 mm (0.0079 in)

    SEM157D

    CAMSHAFT
    1.
    2.

    3.

    SPROCKET

    RUNOUT

    Install sprocket on camshaft.
    Measure camshaft sprocket runout.
    Runout (Total indicator reading):
    Limit 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
    If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.

    SEM158D

    VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE
    1.

    Measure valve deflection in a parallel direction with rocker
    arm. (Valve and valve guide mostly wear in this direction.)
    Valve deflection limit (Dial gauge reading):
    Intake & Exhaust
    0.2 mm (0.008 in)

    2.
    a.

    If it exceeds the limit, check valve to valve guide clearance.
    Measure valve stem diameter and valve guide inner diameter.
    b. Check that clearance is within specification.
    Valve to valve guide clearance:
    Unit: mm (in)
    Standard
    0.020 — 0.050

    Intake

    (0.0008 — 0.0020)

    SEM938C

    0.040 — 0.070

    Exhaust

    c.

    (0.0016 — 0.0028)

    Limit
    0.1 (0.004)

    0.1 (0.004)

    If it exceeds the limit, replace valve or valve guide.

    EM-36

    []KJ

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
    1.

    To remove valve guide, heat cylinder
    (230 to 248°F).

    head to 110 to 120°C

    SEM008A

    2.

    Drive out valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2 ton, 2.2
    US ton, 2.0 Imp ton) pressure] or hammer and suitable tool.

    3.

    Ream cylinder head valve guide hole.
    Valve guide hole diameter
    (for service parts):
    Intake & Exhaust
    9.685 . 9.696 mm (0.3813 — 0.3817 in)

    4.

    Heat cylinder head to 110 to 120°C (230 to 248°F) and press
    service valve guide into cylinder head.
    Projection «l»:
    11.5 — 11.7 mm (0.453 — 0.461 in)

    5.

    Ream valve guide.
    Finished size:
    Intake & Exhaust
    5.500 — 5.515 mm (0.2165 — 0.2171 in)

    MEM09SA

    EM-37

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    VALVE SEATS
    Check valve seats for pitting at contact surface.
    replace if excessively worn.

    Resurface

    or

    Before repairing valve seats, check valve and valve guide
    for wear. If they have worn, replace them. Then correct
    valve seat.
    Cut with both hands to uniform the cutting surface.

    REPLACING VALVE SEAT FOR SERVICE PARTS
    I

    Recess 1 diameter

    I

    1.

    2.

    Bore out old seat until it collapses. Set machine depth stop
    so that boring cannot contact bottom face of seat recess in
    cylinder head.
    Ream cylinder head recess.

    Reaming bore for service valve seat
    Oversize [0.5 mm (0.020 in)]:
    Unit: mm (in)
    Engine model

    SEM795A

    GA16DE without VTC,
    14DE and 15DE
    30.500 — 30.516
    (1.2008 — 1.2014)

    Intake

    Exhaust

    GA 16DE with VTC

    31.500 — 31.516

    31.500 — 31.516
    (1.2402 — 1.2408).

    (1.2402 — 1.2408)

    25.500 — 25.516
    (1.0039 — 1.0046)

    26.500 — 26.516
    (1.0433 — 1.0439)

    .: GA 16DE without VTC

    Use the valve guide center for reaming to ensure valve seat will
    have the correct fit.

    EM-38

    CYLINDER

    HEAD

    Inspection (Conl’d)
    3.
    4.

    Heat cylinder head to 110 to 120°C (230 to 248°F).
    Press fit valve seat until it seats on the bottom .


    5.
    6.
    7.

    SEM8928

    Cut or grind valve seat using suitable tool at the specified
    dimensions as shown in SOS (EM-159).
    After cutting, lap valve seat with abrasive compound.
    Check valve seating condition.
    Seat face angle «a»:
    45°15′ — 45°45′ deg.
    Contacting width «W»:
    Intake
    1.06 — 1.34 mm (0.0417 — 0.0528 in)
    Exhaust
    1.20 — 1.68 mm (0.0472 — 0.0661 in)

    VALVE DIMENSIONS

    T (Margin thickness)

    —1,-

    Check dimensions in each valve. For dimensions, refer to SOS
    (EM-156).
    When valve head has been worn down to 0.5 mm (0.020 in) in
    margin thickness, replace valve.
    Grinding allowance for valve stem tip is 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or
    less.

    ml
    III’ ~
    a

    o

    d

    I

    ~-

    -L

    .
    SEM188A

    VALVE SPRING
    Squareness
    1.

    2.

    Measure «S» dimension.
    Out-of-square:
    Less than 1.80 mm (0.0709 in)
    If it exceeds the limit, replace spring.

    SEM288A

    Pressure
    Check valve spring pressure.
    Pressure: N (kg, Ib) at height mm (in)
    Standard
    344.42 (35.12, 77.44) at 25.26 (0.9945)
    Limit
    More than 323.73 (33.01, 72.79) at 25.26 (0.9945)
    If it exceeds the limit, replace spring.

    EM113

    EM-39

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    VALVE LIFTER AND VALVE SHIM
    1. Check contact and sliding surfaces for wear or scratches.

    SEM160D

    2. Check diameter of valve lifter and valve lifter guide bore.
    Valve lifter diameter:
    29.960 • 29.975 mm (1.1795 • 1.1801 in)

    SEM161D

    Lifter guide bore diameter:
    30.000 — 30.021 mm (1.1811 .1.1819 in)
    Clearance between valve lifter and valve lifter guide
    0.025 — 0.061 mm (0.0010 — 0.0024 in)
    If it exceeds the limit, replace valve lifter or cylinder head
    which exceeds the standard diameter tolerance.

    SEM162D

    Assembly
    1. Install valve component parts.

    Wide pitch



    Narrow pitch

    o

    Cylinder head side

    Always use new valve oil seal. Refer to OIL SEAL
    REPLACEMENT (EM-30).
    Before installing valve oil seal, install valve spring seat.
    After installing valve components, tap valve stem tip with a
    plastic hammer to assure a proper fit.
    Install uneven pitch type spring with its narrow pitch end
    toward cylinder head. (Identification
    color side down, if
    present.)

    SEM638B

    Installation

    This installation is the same procedure as those for timing
    chain. Refer to «Installation» in «TIMING CHAIN» (EM-23).

    EM-40

    VALVE CLEARANCE
    Checking
    Check valve clearance while engine is warm and not running.
    1. Remove rocker cover.
    2. Remove all spark plugs.
    3. Set NO.1 cylinder at TOC on its compression stroke.

    Align pointer with TOC mark on crankshaft pulley .

    Check that valve lifters on NO.1 cylinder are loose and valve
    lifters on NO.4 are tight.
    If not, turn crankshaft
    above.
    1

    1

    2

    one revolution

    (360°) and align

    as

    4.

    Check only those valves shown in the figure.

    Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve
    lifter and camshaft.
    Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of
    specification.
    They will be used later to determine the
    required replacement adjusting shim.
    Valve clearance for checking (Hot):
    Intake
    0.21 — 0.49 mm (0.008 . 0.019 in)
    Exhaust
    0.30. 0.58 mm (0.012 — 0.023 in)

    2

    5.
    6.

    7.


    2

    2

    4

    Turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align mark on
    crankshaft pulley with pointer.
    Check those valves shown in the figure.
    Use the same procedure as mentioned in step 4.
    If all valve clearances are within specification,
    install the
    following parts.
    Rocker cover
    All spark plugs

    4
    SEM140D

    Adjusting

    «-

    Tool (A} KV10115110

    ,

    Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold.
    1. Turn crankshaft, to position cam lobe on camshaft of valve
    that must be adjusted upward.
    2. Place Tool (A) around camshaft as shown in figure.
    Before placing Tool (A), rotate notch toward center of cylinder
    head (See figure.), to simplify shim removal later.
    CAUTION:
    Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (A).
    SEM141D

    EM-41

    [QKJ

    VALVE CLEARANCE
    Adjusting (Cont’d)
    3.

    Rotate Tool (A) (See figure.)
    down.

    4.

    Place Tool (8) between
    valve lifter.

    so that valve

    camshaft

    and valve

    lifter is pushed

    lifter to retain

    CAUTION:

    ‘Tool (B) must be placed as close to camshaft bracket
    possible.

    Be careful not to damage cam surface with’Tool (B).
    5. Remove Tool (A).

    6.

    as

    Remove adjusting shim using a small screwdriver
    and a
    magnetic finger.
    7. Determine replacement
    adjusting shim size following formula.

    Using a micrometer determine thickness of removed shim.

    Calculate thickness of new adjusting shim so valve clearance comes within specified values.
    R = Thickness of removed shim
    N = Thickness of new shim
    M = Measured valve clearance
    Intake:
    N = R + [M — 0.37 mm (0.0146 in)]
    Exhaust:
    N = R + [M — 0.40 mm (0.0157 in)]
    Shims are available in 50 sizes from 2.00 mm (0.0787 in) to 2.98
    mm (0.1173 in), in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in).

    Select new shim with thickness as close as possible to calculated value.

    SEM145D

    Shim
    Type A

    Indicate
    T = 2.68 mm (0.1055 In)
    Type B

    SEM104F

    EM-42

    []K]

    VALVE CLEARANCE
    Adjusting (Cont’d)
    8.

    Install new shim using a suitable tool.
    Install with the surface on which the thickness
    facing down.

    is stamped


    9. Place Tool (A) as mentioned
    10. Remove Tool (B).
    11. Remove Tool (A).
    12. Recheck valve clearance.
    Valve clearance:

    in steps 2 and 3.

    Unit: mm (in)
    For adjusting
    Hot

    For checking
    Cold’

    (reference data)
    0.25 — 0.33

    Hot

    Intake

    0.32 — 0.40
    (0.013 — 0.016)

    (0.010 — 0.013)

    0.21 — 0.49
    (0.008 — 0.019)

    Exhaust

    0.37 — 0.45
    (0.015 — 0.018)

    0.32 — 0.40
    (0.013 — 0.016)

    0.30 — 0.58
    (0.012 — 0.023)

    ‘: At a temperature of approximately 20″C (68″F)
    Whenever valve clearance are adjusted to cold specifications, check that the
    clearances satisfy hot specifications and adjust again if necessary.

    EM-43

    ENGINE REMOVAL

    ffit»J

    SEC. 112

    u~

    44 — 54 (4.5 — 5.5. 33 — 40)

    d

    GA 15DE and GA 16DE with VTe
    except for Australia

    5

    to.J

    44 • 54 (4.5 • 5.5, 33 • 40)

    MIT models

    ~44.

    ~
    I

    10

    )-<~

    ~;:J
    o

    9

    54
    (4.5 . 5.5, 33 . 40)

    to.J

    44 — 54
    (4.5 — 5.5,
    33 • 40)

    (‘.~

    V~)
    ‘v1( ./'»/$1L[OJ
    » /

    @(For

    44 • 54
    (4.5 • 5.5,
    33 — 40)

    Europe)

    to.J :

    N’m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    * : Located

    at front cover.

    (1)

    Engine front mounting

    @

    Transaxle mounting

    @

    Center member

    @

    @

    Transaxle mounting bracket

    (f)
    @

    Engine rear mounting
    Dynamic damper (AfT models)

    @J
    @

    Buffer rod bracket
    Buffer rod

    @

    Cylinder head front mounting
    bracket
    Engine front mounting bracket

    @

    Engine rear mounting bracket

    EM-44

    SEM237F

    ENGINE REMOVAL
    WARNING:
    a. Situate vehicle on a flat and solid surface.
    b. Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels.
    c. Do not remove engine until exhaust system has completely
    cooled off.
    Otherwise, you may burn yourself and/or fire may break out
    in fuel line.
    d. For safety during subsequent steps, the tension of wires
    should be slackened against the engine.
    e. Before disconnecting fuel hose, release fuel pressure from
    fuel line.
    Refer to «Releasing Fuel Pressure» in EC section.
    f. Be sure to hoist engine and transaxle in a safe manner.
    g. For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach
    proper slingers and bolts described in PARTS CATALOG.
    CAUTION:

    When lifting engine, be sure to clear surrounding parts.
    Take special care for accelerator wire casing, brake lines
    and brake master cylinder.

    In hoisting the engine, always use engine slingers in a safe
    manner.

    In removing drive shaft, be careful not to damage grease
    seal of transaxle.
    Engine cannot be removed separately from transaxle.
    engine with transaxle.

    Remove

    Removal
    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.

    Drain water.
    Remove hood.
    Remove battery.
    Remove reservoir tank and bracket.
    Remove drive belts.
    Remove alternator,
    compressor
    and power steering
    oil
    pump from engine.
    Power steering pump does not need to be disconnected from
    power steering tubes.
    7.



    Remove the following parts:
    Right and left front tires
    Under covers
    Splash covers
    Brake caliper assembly
    ~: 72 — 97 N’m (7.3 • 9.9 kg-m, 53 • 72 ft-Ib)
    Brake hose does not need to be disconnected from brake caliper assembly.
    Never depress brake pedal.

    Disconnect tie-rod ball joint (RH & LH).
    ~: 29 — 39 N’m (3.0 — 4.0 kg-m, 22 — 29 ft-Ib)

    RH & LH drive shaft
    When removing drive shaft, be careful not to damage transaxle
    side grease seal.

    EM-45

    mJ

    ENGINE REMOVAL
    Removal (Cont’d)

    Disconnect control rod and support rod from transaxle.
    models)
    Control rod:
    14 — 18 N.m (1.4 — 1.8 kg-m, 10 — 13 ft-Ib)
    Support rod:
    35 — 47 N.m (3.6 — 4.8 kg-m, 26 — 35 ft-Ib)
    Disconnect control cable from transaxle. (A/T models)





    Center member
    Front exhaust tube
    Stabilizer
    Cooling fan
    Radiator

    Cylinder

    (M/T

    to:J:

    to:J:

    head front mounting

    bracket

    Remove air duct and disconnect wires, harness, pipes,
    hoses and so on.
    8. Lift up engine slightly and disconnect or remove all engine
    mountings.
    When lifting engine, be careful not to hit it against adjacent
    parts, especially against brake tubes and brake master cylinder.
    9. Remove engine with transaxle as shown.

    Installation
    When installing the engine, adjust the height of buffer rod as
    shown. (For M/T)

    Installation is the reverse order of removal.

    EM-46

    CYLINDER BLOCK

    SEC. 110.120

    ij] 6.3

    • 8.3
    (0.641 • 0.851, 55.6 — 73.9)

    I] to;J

    f] to.J

    83.5 • 93.3
    (8.51 — 9.51,
    61.6 • 68.8)

    93.3 • 103.1 (9.51 — 10.51, 68.8 — 76.0)

    to;J :

    N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    ~

    : Apply liquid gasket.

    f] :Lubricate with new engine oil.

    SEM238F

    CD

    @

    Drain plug

    @

    @)

    @
    @
    @
    @

    @
    @

    Buffer plate
    Top ring
    2nd ring (Only Europe models*)
    Oil ring
    Piston
    Snap ring
    Piston pin

    Oil level gauge guide

    Cylinder block
    Rear oil seal retainer
    Rear oil seal
    Rear plate
    Flywheel
    (J) Rear lower plate
    @
    Drive plate
    *: Applies to GA 16DE without VTC, 14DE.

    @

    @
    @

    @

    EM-47

    @
    @
    @)

    @l
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Connecting rod
    Connecting rod bearing
    Connecting rod cap
    Key
    Main bearing
    Thrust bearing
    Crankshaft
    Main bearing cap

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    CAUTION:

    When installing sliding parts (bearings, pistons, etc.), lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil.

    Place removed parts such as bearings and bearing caps in
    their proper order and direction.

    When installing connecting rod nuts, and main bearing cap
    bolts, apply new engine oil to threads and seating surfaces.

    Disassembly
    PISTON AND CRANKSHAFT
    1.
    2.
    3.

    Place engine on a work stand.
    Drain coolant and oil.
    Remove timing chain.
    Refer to «Removal»
    in «TIMING

    CHAIN» (EM-20).

    4

    Remove pistons with connecting rods.
    When disassembling
    piston and connecting rod, remove
    snap ring first, then heat piston to 60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F)
    or use piston pin press stand at room temperature.

    5.

    Loosen main bearing cap in numerical order as shown in
    the figure.
    Remove bearing caps, main bearings and crankshaft.
    Before removing bearing caps, measure crankshaft end
    play.
    Bolts should be loosened in two or three steps.

    6.

    Inspection
    PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE
    1.

    Measure inner diameter of piston pin hole «dp».
    Standard diameter «dp»:
    18.987 — 18.999 mm (0.7475 — 0.7480 in)

    AEM023

    EM-48

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Conl’d)
    2.

    3.

    ~

    Measure outer diameter of piston pin «Op».
    Standard diameter «Op»:
    18.989 — 19.001 mm (0.7476 — 0.7481 in)
    Calculate piston pin clearance.
    dp — Op = -0.004 to 0 mm (-0.0002 to 0 in)
    If it exceeds the above value, replace piston assembly
    pin.

    with

    I
    Micrometer
    AEM024

    PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
    NG

    Side clearance:
    Top ring
    0.040 — 0.080 mm (0.0016 — 0.0031 in)
    2nd ring (Only Europe models)
    0.030 — 0.070 mm (0.0012 — 0.0028 in)
    Max. limit of side clearance:
    0.2 mm (0.008 in)
    If out of specification, replace piston and/or piston ring assembly.

    PISTON RING END GAP
    Feeler
    gauge

    Ring

    Measuring point
    SEM8228

    End gap:
    Top ring
    0.20 — 0.35 mm (0.0079 — 0.0138 in)
    2nd ring (Only Europe models)
    0.37 — 0.52 mm (0.0146 — 0.0205 in)
    Oil ring
    0.20 — 0.60 mm (0.0079 — 0.0236 in)
    Max. limit of ring gap:
    1.0 mm (0.039 in)
    If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap exceeds maximum limit with new ring, rebore cylinder and use oversize
    piston and piston rings.
    Refer to SOS (EM-161).

    When replacing the piston, check the cylinder block surface
    for scratches or seizure. If scratches or seizure is found,
    hone or replace the cylinder block.

    CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION
    Bend:
    Limit 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
    per 100 mm (3.94 in) length
    Torsion:
    Limit 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
    per 100 mm (3.94 in) length
    If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting

    EM-49

    rod assembly.

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Co nt’ d)

    SEM003F

    CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION

    Straightedge

    AND WEAR

    1. Clean upper face of cylinder block and measure the distortion.
    Limit:
    0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
    2. If out of specification, resurface it.
    The resurfacing limit is determined by cylinder head resurfacing in engine.

    Feeler gauge

    Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is «A».
    Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is «B».
    The maximum limit is as follows:
    A + B = 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
    Nominal cylinder block height
    from crankshaft center:
    213.95 — 214.05 mm (8.4232 . 8.4271 in)
    3. If necessary, replace cylinder block.

    SEM102F

    ,,
    ,

    I

    I

    !
    A

    X-V
    B
    Unit: mm (In)
    SEM166DA

    PISTON- TO-BORE CLEARANCE
    1. Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, outof-round and taper.
    Standard inner diameter:
    GA16DE 76.000 — 76.030 mm (2.9921 — 2.9933 in)
    GA14, 15DE 73.600 — 73.630 mm (2.8976 — 2.8988 in)
    Wear limit:
    0.2 mm (0.008 in)
    If it exceeds the limit, rebore all cylinders. Replace cylinder
    block if necessary.
    Out-of-round (X — Y) standard:
    0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
    Taper (A — B) standard:
    0.01 mm (0.0004 in)

    EM-50

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    2.
    Cylinder bore
    grade number
    No. 4

    []K]

    Check for scratches and seizure. If seizure is found, hone
    it.
    If cylinder block or piston is replaced, match piston grade
    with grade number on cylinder block lower surface.

    Cylinder block
    SEM426C

    3.

    Measure piston skirt diameter.
    Piston diameter «A»:
    Refer to SDS (EM-161).
    Measuring point «a» (Distance from the bottom):
    Refer to SDS (EM-161).
    4. Check that piston-to-bore clearance is within specification.
    Piston-to-bore clearance «B»:
    0.015 — 0.035 mm (0.0006 — 0.0014 in)
    5. Determine piston oversize according to amount of cylinder
    wear.
    Oversize pistons are available for service. Refer to SDS (EM161).
    6. Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore
    clearance to piston diameter «A».
    Rebored size calculation:
    D=A+B-C
    where,
    0: Bored diameter
    A: Piston diameter as measured
    B: Piston-to-bore clearance
    C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
    7. Install main bearing caps and tighten bolts to the specified
    torque. This will prevent distortion of cylinder bores.
    8. Cut cylinder bores.

    When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must
    also be bored.

    Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only
    0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter at a time.
    9. Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance.
    10. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper.

    Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools
    down.

    EM-51

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Cont’d)

    ~

    CRANKSHAFT
    1. Check crankshaft main and pin journals for score, wear or
    cracks.
    2. With a micrometer, measure journals for taper and out-ofround.
    Out-of-round (X — V):
    Less than 0.005 mm (O.0002 in)
    Taper (A — B):
    Less than 0.002 mm (O.0001 in)

    A B

    y

    Taper: A — B
    Out-at-round: X — y
    SEM316A

    3. Measure crankshaft runout.
    Runout (Total indicator reading):
    Less than 0.05 mm (O.0020 in)

    BEARING CLEARANCE

    Use Method A or Method B. Method A is preferred because
    it is more accurate.
    Method A (Using bore gauge & micrometer)

    Main bearing
    1. Set main bearings in their proper positions on cylinder
    block and main bearing cap.
    Oil groove

    SEM366E

    2. Install main bearing cap to cylinder block.
    Tighten all bolts in correct order in two or three stages.
    3. Measure inner diameter «A» of each main bearing.

    4. Measure outer diameter «Om» of each main journal in
    crankshaft.
    5. Calculate main bearing clearance.
    Main bearing clearance = A — Om
    Standard:
    0.018 . 0.042 mm (O.0007 . 0.0017 in)
    Limit: 0.1 mm (O.004 in)
    6. If it exceeds the limit, replace bearing.
    7. If clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard of any
    bearing, grind crankshaft journal and use undersized bearing.

    EM-52

    [ill

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Conl’d)
    When grinding crank pin and crank journal:
    a. Grind until clearance is within specified standard
    clearance.
    b. Fillets should be finished as shown in the figure.
    R: 2.3 — 2.5 mm (0.091 — 0.098 in)

    Main journal and pin journal

    bearing

    R

    SEM588A

    8.
    ~

    Front

    a.
    No. 5
    Main journal
    grade number

    If crankshaft, cylinder block or main bearing is reused
    again, measure main bearing clearance. If the above parts
    are all replaced, select thickness of main bearings as follows:
    Grade number of each cylinder block main journal is
    punched on the respective cylinder block. These numbers
    are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals.

    Cylinder
    block
    SEM427C

    b.

    Crank journal
    grade number

    Grade number of each crankshaft main journal is punched
    on the respective crankshaft. These numbers are punched
    in either Arabic or Roman numerals.
    c. Select main bearing with suitable thickness according to the
    following table.
    Main bearing grade color:
    Main journal
    grade number

    SEM436C

    i1hOle
    Front

    o,.»,,!f0

    Q

    ~

    0

    1

    2

    0

    Black

    Brown

    Green

    1

    Brown

    Green

    Yellow

    2

    Green

    Yellow

    Blue

    Crankshaft
    journal grade number

    For example:
    Main journal grade number: 1
    Crankshaft journal grade number: 2
    Main bearing grade number = 1 + 2

    ~

    I}:J

    Yellow

    Identification color ~
    SEM194C

    Connecting rod bearing (Big end)
    1. Install connecting rod bearing to connecting rod and cap.
    2. Install connecting rod cap to connecting rod.
    Tighten bolts to the specified torque.
    3. Measure inner diameter «C» of each bearing.

    )=====
    .-:::::::======_ ..

    ;::..—-

    AEM027

    EM-53

    . @K]

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    4.
    5.

    6.
    7.

    Measure outer diameter «Op» of each crankshaft
    pin journal.
    Calculate connecting
    rod bearing clearance.
    Connecting rod bearing clearance = C — Dp
    Standard:
    0.014 — 0.039 mm (0.0006 • 0.0015 in)
    Limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
    If it exceeds the limit, replace bearing.
    If clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard of any
    bearing, grind crankshaft journal and use undersized
    bearing. Refer to step 7 of «BEARING
    CLEARANCE
    Main
    bearing»
    (EM-52).

    8.

    If bearing, crankshaft
    or connecting
    rod is replaced with a
    new one, select connecting
    rod bearing according
    to the
    following table.
    Connecting rod bearing grade number:
    Grade numbers are punched in either Arabic or Roman numerals.
    Connecting rod bearing
    grade color

    Crank pin grade color

    a
    Brown
    Green

    1
    SEM437C

    2

    Method B (Using plastigage)
    CAUTION:

    Do not turn crankshaft or connecting rod while plastigage is
    being inserted.

    When bearing clearance exceeds the specified limit, ensure
    that the proper bearing has been installed. Then if excessive bearing clearance exists, use a thicker main bearing or
    undersized bearing so that the specified bearing clearance
    is obtained.

    CONNECTING
    1.

    Measure

    ROD BUSHING CLEARANCE

    inner

    EM-54

    diameter

    «C»

    of bushing.

    (Small end)

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (ConI’ d)

    ~

    2.
    3.

    Measure outer diameter lOOp» of piston pin.
    Calculate connecting rod bushing clearance.
    Connecting rod bushing clearance = C — Dp
    Standard:
    0.005 • 0.017 mm (0.0002 • 0.0007 in)
    Limit:
    0.023 mm (0.0009 in)
    If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly
    necting rod bushing andlor piston pin.


    or con-

    AEM030

    REPLACEMENT
    end)

    OF CONNECTING

    ROD BUSHING (Small

    1.

    Drive in small end bushing until it is flush with end surface
    of rod.
    Be sure to align the oil holes.
    2. Ream the bushing so that clearance with piston pin is within
    specification.
    Clearance between connecting rod bushing and piston
    pin:
    0.005 — 0.017 mm (0.0002 — 0.0007 in)
    SEM062A

    FLYWHEEL RUNOUT
    Runout (Total indicator reading):
    Flywheel (MIT model)
    Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
    Drive plate (AIT model)*
    Less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
    *: Measuring points
    Approximately
    115 mm (4.53 in) from
    center

    crankshaft

    SEM291C

    Assembly
    PISTON
    1.

    Install new snap ring on one side of piston pin hole.

    2.

    Heat piston to 60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F) and assemble piston,
    piston pin, connecting rod and new snap ring.
    Align the direction of piston and connecting rod.
    Numbers stamped on connecting rod and cap correspond to
    each cylinder.
    After
    assembly,
    make
    sure
    connecting
    rod swings
    smoothly.



    SEM367E

    EM-55

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Assembly (Coni’ d)
    Punch mark side up
    (if mark is present.)

    @KJ

    3. Set piston rings as shown.
    CAUTION:
    • When piston rings are not replaced, make sure that piston
    rings are mounted in their original position.
    • When piston rings are being replaced and no punch mark
    is present, piston rings can be mounted with either side up.

    For Europe and Israel models

    SEM965E

    Oil ring

    Engine
    front


    tf V

    expander

    ~

    ;l

    Top ring
    Oil ring
    upper rail

    Q
    /’)
    ~

    IJ
    ~

    Oil ring
    lower rail
    SEM160B

    Except for Europe and Israel models

    Top and second ring
    Punch mark side up
    (if mark is presen!.)

    .::::::::J

    c::

    SEM208F

    Oil ring
    expander

    Engine
    front

    *c:
    il

    Top ring
    Oil ring

    ~ It upper

    rail

    ~

    !J
    ~.Oil

    ring
    lower rail
    SEM200F

    #4
    Oil hole #3

    ~-

    ~»)~

    CRANKSHAFT

    #5
    ~
    ‘U

    1. Set main bearings in their proper positions on cylinder
    block and main bearing cap.
    • Confirm that correct main bearings are used. Refer to
    «Inspection» (EM-52).
    • Apply engine oil to bearing surfaces.

    ~

    ~~

    Oil groove

    SEM366E

    EM-56

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Assembly (Cont’d)
    Identification No.

    ca

    p

    t.:?

    Engine front

    NO.1

    SEM420C

    2.


    Front


    3.

    Install crankshaft and main bearing caps and tighten bolts
    to the specified torque.
    Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surface.
    Prior to tightening bearing cap bolts, place bearing cap in
    its proper position by shifting crankshaft in the axial direction.
    Tighten bearing cap bolts gradually in two or three stages.
    Start with center bearing and move outward sequentially.
    After securing bearing cap bolts, make sure crankshaft
    turns smoothly by hand.

    Measure crankshaft end play.
    Crankshaft end play:
    Standard:
    0.060 — 0.180 mm (0.0024 — 0.0071 in)
    Limit:
    0.3 mm (0.012 in)
    If beyond the limit, replace thrust bearing

    with a

    new one.

    4.


    5.
    a.

    Piston ring compressor

    Install connecting rod bearings in connecting rods and connecting rod caps.
    Confirm
    that correct
    bearings
    are
    used.
    Refer
    to
    «Inspection» (EM-52).
    Install bearings so that oil hole in connecting rod aligns with
    oil hole of bearing.
    Apply engine oil to bolt threads and bearing surfaces.

    Install pistons with connecting rods.
    Install them into corresponding cylinders with Tool.
    Be careful not to scratch cylinder wall by connecting rod.
    Arrange so that front mark on piston head faces toward
    front of engine.
    Apply engine oil to piston rings and sliding surface of piston.

    SEM293C

    EM-57

    [ill

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Assembly (Cont’d)

    b. Install connecting rod caps.
    Tighten connecting rod cap nuts to the specified torque.

    tD.J:

    Connecting rod cap nuts
    (1) Tighten to 13.72 to 15.68 N’m (1.399 to 1.599
    kg-m, 10.120 to 11.566 ft-Ib).
    (2) Turn nuts to 35° to 40° degrees clockwise with an
    angle wrench. If an angle wrench is not available tighten nuts to 23 to 28 N’m (2.3 to 2.9 kg-m,
    17 to 21 ft-Ib).

    6. Measure connecting rod side clearance.
    Connecting rod side clearance:
    Standard:
    0.200 — 0.470 mm (0.0079 — 0.0185 in)
    limit:
    0.52 mm (0.0205 in)
    If beyond the limit, replace connecting
    and/or crankshaft.

    rod

    7. Install rear oil seal retainer.
    a. Before installing rear oil seal retainer, remove all traces of
    liquid gasket from cylinder block and retainer with a
    scraper.
    b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to rear oil seal
    retainer.
    • Apply around inner side of bolt holes.

    Rear oil seal retainer
    SEM736D

    EM-58

    OUTER COMPONENT

    PARTS

    SEC. 130-140-150-210-211-221

    ~ __to:J

    13 • 16 (1.3 — 1.6, 9.

    12)

    to:J 20

    • 29
    (2.0 • 3.0,
    14 . 22)

    to:J

    16 • 21 (1.6.

    2.1, 12.

    to:J

    15)

    41 — 52 (4.2 — 5.3, 30 — 38)

    ~—D_?
    ~~~

    . ‘J ~
    -t::;-…..~

    0

    /

    ,

    to:J 21

    — 26
    (2.1. 2.7,

    to:J
    to:J

    18.

    21

    to:J

    (1.6 — 1.9,
    12 — 14)

    /’

    19

    to:J

    ,

    (1.8 • 2.1,
    13 — 15)

    16 • 19

    ./»
    ,./»~

    fs
    ~

    12 — 1~)

    0

    to:J

    45 _ 60
    (4.6 • 6.1,
    33 • 44)

    16 • 21

    to:J

    (1.6 — 2.1,

    -~~7

    16 • 21
    (1.6 — 2.1,

    1

    Q

    Ii] 6.3

    0

    12 • 15)

    _ 8.3

    (0.64 • 0.85,

    16 • 21
    12 • 15)

    t»J

    f» -~

    16 • ,.

    Jr

    ~~’. ‘1~

    1il3.7 — 5.0
    (0.38 _ 0.51,
    33.0 • 44.3)

    A~

    Y

    J~

    ~

    —A)

    to:J : N’m

    (kg-m, fl-Ib)
    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    16 — 21
    (1.6.2.1,

    to:J

    G)

    Oil filler cap
    Rocker cover
    PCV valve
    Camshaft position sensor, ignition coil and power transistor
    built into distributor
    Intake manifold supports

    ~Q.

    1,

    ~1

    12 • 15)…,//

    1V>/
    ~to:J

    /-:f~l

    &’

    /¥i-;:

    —‘Il

    20.29

    to:J

    (2.0 — 3.0, 14 — 22)

    20 • 26 (2.0 • 2.7, 14 — 20)

    16 — 21 (1.6 — 2.1, 12 — 15)~/

    : Apply liquid gasket.

    @
    @
    @

    Knock sensor
    Oil filter bracket

    to:J

    Ii] : N’m
    ~

    @
    @
    rJ)

    ~~’..,:;

    H …—-4lJ

    r::! *

    t»J 15 • 21

    *:

    Refer to LC section
    («Thermostat», «ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM»).

    SEM231F

    @
    @

    Oil catcher
    Oil filter

    @
    @

    Thermostat
    Water inlet

    @

    @
    @

    @

    Water pipe assembly
    Thermal transmitter
    Engine coolant temperature
    sensor
    Thermostat housing

    Starter motor
    Power steering oil pump
    adjusting bar
    Power steering oil pump
    bracket

    @

    Air relief plug

    @
    @

    EM-59

    @

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    SEC.
    ~

    2.9.3.8
    (0.30 — 0.39,
    26.0 — 33.9.)

    1

    I {O.,’OgO

    J{«ogO

    ?

    Tighten in numerical order.

    G)

    @
    @
    @
    @

    Injector
    Pressure regulator
    Intake manifold
    EGR tube
    EGR valve

    to 18 to 22 N’m
    (1.8 to 2.2 kg-m,
    13 to 16 ft-Ib).

    @
    (J)

    EGRC-BPT valve
    Intake manifold collector

    @
    @
    @)

    Rod
    Accel-drum unit
    Throttle position sensor

    EM-60

    ~

    ; N’m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    @

    Throttle body

    @
    @
    @

    IACV-air regulator
    IACV-AAC valve

    SEM232F

    IACV-FICD solenoid valve

    OUTER COMPONENT

    PARTS

    SEC. 118-140-230-275


    tc.J

    tc.J
    ~

    40.50

    37 • 48
    (3.8 • 4.9, 27 . 35)

    (4.1 — 5.1, 30 — 37)

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    tc.J : N’m

    D : Apply

    (kg-m, ft-Ib)
    liquid gasket.
    SEM233F

    (})

    Oil level gauge

    @

    Alternator adjusting bar
    Compressor bracket
    Alternator bracket

    @
    @

    @
    @
    (J)

    Water outlet
    Drain plug
    Crankcase ventilation oil separator

    EM-61

    @

    Exhaust manifold

    @

    Heated oxygen sensor
    Exhaust manifold cover

    @

    COMPRESSION

    PRESSURE

    Measurement of Compression
    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.

    Pressure

    Warm up engine.
    Turn ignition switch off.
    Release fuel pressure.
    Refer to «Releasing
    Fuel Pressure»
    in EC section.
    Remove all spark plugs.
    Disconnect distributor
    coil connector.

    6.
    7.

    Attach a compression
    tester to NO.1 cylinder.
    Depress accelerator
    pedal fully to keep throttle valve wide
    open.
    8.’ Crank engine and record highest gauge indication.
    9. Repeat the measurement
    on each cylinder as shown above.

    Always use a fully-charged
    battery to obtain specified
    engine speed.
    Compression pressure: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm
    Standard
    1,226 (12.26, 12.5, 178)
    Minimum
    1,030 (10.30, 10.5, 149)
    Difference limit between cylinders
    98 (0.98, 1.0, 14)

    20 mm (0.79 In) dls.

    Use compressor tester whose end (rubber
    portion) is less than 20 mm (0.79 in) dia.
    Otherwise. it may be caught by cylinder
    head during removal.
    SEM387C

    10. If compression
    in one or more cylinders
    is low:
    a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders
    through
    spark plug holes.
    b. Retest compression.

    If adding oil helps compression, piston rings may be worn
    or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston.

    If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating
    improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. Refer
    to 50S. If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively,
    replace them.

    There is leakage past the gasket surface if the following is
    observed. Compression in two adjacent cylinders is low and
    adding oil does not improve compression. If so, replace
    cylinder head gasket.

    EM-62

    OIL PAN

    SEC. 110
    ~

    ~I

    ReIer to «Installation».

    ~

    1.9 — 2.5
    (0.19 — 0.25,
    16.5 — 21.7)


    CD

    6

    Side gallery baffle plate
    Aluminum 011 pan
    @ Rear cover plate
    @l DraIn plug
    @ Steel 011 pan

    W

    SEM142FA

    Removal

    @

    @

    1.
    2.

    Remove engine under cover.
    Drain engine oil.

    3.

    Remove steel oil pan bolts.

    4.
    a.

    Remove steel oil pan.
    Insert Tool between aluminum oil pan and steel oil pan.
    Be careful not to damage aluminum mating surface.
    Do not insert screwdriver,
    or oil pan flange will be
    deformed.

    @ojooEE~CD
    ~o

    ~

    o~

    ~]DOCn[l[ ~ CID
    JCJC)Ol~CI / i
    ~ ~ l[lCJLL ~

    @o

    ~:~~ne

    @ ~

    ~’llrrlriQ)

    @

    =0

    Q]J
    Loosen in numerical order.

    5
    SEM040D

    SEM602E

    EM-53

    OIL PAN
    Removal (Coni’ d)

    [][]

    b. Slide Tool by tapping on the side of the Tool with a hammer.
    c. Remove steel oil pan.

    SEM603E

    d. Remove baffle plate.

    SEM717E

    5. Remove front tube.
    6. Set a suitable transmission jack under transaxle and hoist
    engine with engine slinger.
    7. Remove center member.
    8. Remove AIT shift control cable. (A/T only)

    9. Remove compressor gussets.

    EM-64

    OIL PAN
    Removal (Cont’d)
    11. Remove aluminum oil pan bolts.

    Loosen in numerical order.
    SEM044D

    12. Remove the two engine-to-transaxle bolts and install them
    into open bolt holes shown. Tighten the bolts to release
    aluminum oil pan from cylinder block.

    13. Remove aluminum oil pan.
    a. Insert Tool between cylinder block and aluminum oil pan.

    Be careful not to damage aluminum mating surface.
    Do not insert screwdriver, or oil pan flange will be damaged.

    b. Slide Tool by tapping on the side of the Tool with a hammer.

    KV10111100

    r

    SEM047D

    14. Remove the two engine-to-transaxle
    installed in aluminum oil pan.

    EM-65

    bolts

    previously

    OIL PAN
    Installation
    1. Install aluminum oil pan.
    a. Use a scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from
    mating surfaces.
    • Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of
    cylinder block and front cover.

    SEM050D

    b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface
    of aluminum oil pan.
    • Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent.
    • Be sure liquid gasket diameter is 4.0 to 5.0 mm (0.157 to
    0.197 in).
    • Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.

    Cut here.
    ~

    7 mm (0.28 In)

    liquid gasket

    —j.~

    oruu
    Groove

    Bolt hole
    SEM357E

    For areas marked with «*», apply liquid gasket to the outer
    side of the bolt hole.

    SEM065D

    c. Install aluminum oil pan.
    • Install bolts in the reverse order of removal.
    CD • @) bolts:
    ~: 16 — 19 N’m (1.6 — 1.9 kg-m, 12 — 14 ft-Ib)
    @, @ bolts:
    ~: 6.4 — 7.5 N’m (0.65 • 0.76 kg-m, 56.4 — 66.0 in-Ib)

    2. Install the two engine to transaxle bolts.
    For tightening torque, refer to MT or AT section («REMOVAL
    AND INSTALLATION»).
    3. Install rear cover plate.

    EM-66

    OIL PAN
    Installation (Cont’d)
    4.
    5.
    6.
    7.
    8.

    _ 4)

    compressor gussets.
    AfT shift control cable. (AfT only)
    center member.
    front tube.
    baffle plate.

    ,_

    Valve spring seat
    Valve spring
    Valve spring retainer
    Valve collet
    Spark plug
    Cylinder head bolt

    CYLINDER HEAD
    CAUTION:

    Apply new engine oil to the sliding surfaces when installing
    sliding parts. Sliding parts include rocker arms, camshafts,
    oil seal, etc.

    Apply new engine oil to bolt thread and seat surfaces when
    tightening the following: Cylinder head bolts, camshaft
    sprocket bolts and camshaft bracket bolts.

    OK


    ~

    @

    If a hydraulic lash adjuster is kept on its side, there is a risk
    of air entering it. After removal, always set hydraulic lash
    adjuster straight up, or keep it soaked in new engine oil.
    . Do not disassemble hydraulic lash adjusters.
    Attach tags to lash adjusters so as not to mix them up.

    Removal

    This removal procedure
    Refer to EM-69.

    is the same as for timing

    chain.

    SEM878CA

    Disassembly

    Rocker~arm guideRocker arm

    i

    1.

    Remove rocker arms, shims, rocker arm guides and hydraulic lash adjusters from cylinder head.
    CAUTION:
    Keep parts in order so that they can be installed in their original positions during assembly.

    Shim
    Hydraulic

    o,h .dJ»»~

    I

    !

    ‘!

    SEM202D

    2.
    3.
    4.

    Remove crankcase ventilation oil separator.
    Remove exhaust manifold cover.
    Remove exhaust manifold.

    5.

    Remove water outlet.

    EM-86

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Disassembly (Cont’d)
    6.

    Remove intake manifold

    supports.


    7.

    Intake manifold
    collector
    Loosen in numerical order.

    8.

    Remove fuel tube assembly.
    Refer to «Injector Removal and Installation»
    Remove intake manifold.

    9.

    Remove intake manifold collector

    in EC section.

    SEM607E

    10. Remove thermostat

    from intake manifold.

    housing with water pipe.

    — Thermostat housing

    SEM785E

    11. Remove valve components

    EM-87

    with Tool.

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Disassembly (Cont’d)
    12. Remove valve oil seal with a suitable tool.

    Inspection
    CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION
    .

    Head surface flatness:
    Standard
    Less than 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
    Limit
    0.1 mm (0.004 in)

    If beyond the specified limit, replace or resurface.
    SEM925C

    Resurfacing limit:
    The resurfacing limit of cylinder head is determined
    inder block resurfacing in an engine.
    Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is «A».
    Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is «B».
    The maximum limit is as follows:
    A + B = 0.2 mm (0.008 in)

    by the cyl-

    After resurfacing cylinder head, check that camshaft rotates
    freely by hand. If resistance is felt, cylinder head must be
    replaced.
    Nominal cylinder head height:
    136.9 — 137.1 mm (5.390 — 5.398 in)

    CAMSHAFT

    VISUAL CHECK

    Check camshaft for scratches, seizure and wear.

    CAMSHAFT

    RUNOUT

    1. Measure camshaft runout at the center journal.
    Runout (Total indicator reading):
    Standard
    Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
    Limit
    0.1 mm (0.004 in)

    2. If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.

    EM-88

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    CAMSHAFT
    1.

    2.

    2.

    CAM HEIGHT

    Measure camshaft cam height.
    Standard cam height:
    Intake
    38.408 — 38.598 mm (1.5121 . 1.5196 in)
    Exhaust
    37.920 • 38.110 mm (1.4929. 1.5004 in)
    Cam wear limit:
    Intake & Exhaust
    0.2 mm (0.008 in)
    If wear is beyond the limit, replace camshaft.

    CAMSHAFT
    1.

    ~

    JOURNAL CLEARANCE

    Install camshaft bracket and tighten bolts to the specified
    torque.
    Measure inner diameter of camshaft bearing.
    Standard inner diameter:
    28.000 — 28.021 mm (1.1024 — 1.1032 in)

    Measure outer diameter of camshaft journal.
    Standard outer diameter:
    27.935 . 27.955 mm (1.0998 — 1.1006 in)
    If clearance exceeds the limit, replace camshaft and/or cylinder head.
    Camshaft journal clearance:
    Standard
    0.045 — 0.086 mm (0.0018 . 0.0034 in)
    Limit
    0.15 mm (0.0059 in)

    CAMSHAFT
    1.
    2.

    CAMSHAFT
    1.
    2.

    3.

    END PLAY

    Install camshaft in cylinder head.
    Measure camshaft end play.
    Camshaft end play:
    Standard
    0.055. 0.139 mm (0.0022 — 0.0055 in)
    Limit
    0.20 mm (0.0079 in)

    SPROCKET

    RUNOUT

    Install sprocket on camshaft.
    Measure camshaft sprocket runout.
    Runout (Total indicator reading):
    Limit 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
    If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft

    SEM929C

    EM-89

    sprocket.

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Inspection (Cont’d)

    [][]

    VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE
    1.

    Measure valve deflection in a parallel direction with rocker
    arm. (Valve and valve guide mostly wear in this direction.)
    Valve deflection limit (Dial gauge reading):
    Intake & Exhaust
    0.2 mm (0.008 in)

    2.
    a.

    If it exceeds the limit, check valve to valve guide clearance.
    Measure valve stem diameter and valve guide inner diameter.
    Check that clearance is within specification.
    Valve to valve guide clearance:
    Standard
    Intake
    0.020 — 0.053 mm (0.0008 — 0.0021 in)
    Exhaust
    0.040 — 0.073 mm (0.0016 — 0.0029 in)
    Limit
    Intake
    0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
    Exhaust
    0.1 mm (0.004 in)
    If it exceeds the limit, replace valve or valve guide.

    b.

    SEM938C

    c.

    VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
    1.

    To remove valve guide,
    (230 to 266°F).

    2.

    Press out valve guide or use a hammer

    EM-gO

    heat cylinder

    head to 110 to 130°C

    and suitable

    tool.

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    3.

    Ream cylinder head valve guide hole.
    Valve guide hole diameter
    (for service parts):
    Intake & Exhaust
    10.175 — 10.196 mm (0.4006 — 0.4014 in)


    4.

    Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) and press
    service valve guide onto cylinder head.
    Projection «L»:
    14.0 — 14.2 mm (0.551 — 0.559 in)

    5.

    Ream valve guide.
    Valve guide inner diameter:
    Intake & Exhaust
    6.000 — 6.018 mm (0.2362 — 0.2369 in)

    SEM083D

    VALVE SEATS
    Check valve seats for any evidence of pitting at valve contact
    surface. Reset or replace if it has worn out excessively.

    Before repairing valve seats, check valve and valve guide
    for wear. If they have worn, replace them. Then correct
    valve seat.

    Cut with both hands to uniform the cutting surface.

    REPLACING VALVE SEAT FOR SERVICE PARTS

    r

    I

    I

    Recess diameter

    I
    SEM795A

    Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat recess in cylinder
    head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this.
    2. Ream cylinder head recess.
    Reaming bore for service valve seat
    Oversize [0.5 mm (0.020 in)]:
    Intake
    35.500 — 35.516 mm (1.3976 — 1.3983 in)
    Exhaust
    31.500.31.516
    mm (1.2402 — 1.2408 in)
    Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center.
    This will enable valve seat to fit correctly.
    1.

    EM-91

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    3. Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F).
    4. Press fit valve seat until it seats on the bottom.

    5. Cut or grind valve seat using a suitable tool at the specified
    dimensions as shown in SDS (EM-165).
    6. After cutting, lap valve seat with abrasive compound.
    7. Check valve seating condition.

    SEM892B

    Seat face angle «u»:
    44°53′ — 45°07′
    Contacting width «W»:
    Intake
    1.05 — 1.35 mm (0.0413 — 0.0531 in)
    Exhaust
    1.25 — 1.55 mm (0.0492 — 0.0610 in)

    VALVE DIMENSIONS

    T (Margin thickness)

    ~Ir

    Check dimensions in each valve. For dimensions, refer to SDS
    (EM-164).
    When valve head has been worn down to 0.5 mm (0.020 in) in
    margin thickness, replace valve.

    nw

    a

    III’ ~

    Grinding
    less.

    allowance

    for valve stem tip is 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or

    d

    D

    L
    -l
    SEM188A

    VALVE SPRING
    Squareness

    1. Measure «S» dimension.
    Out-of-square:
    Less than 2.2 mm (0.087 in)

    2. If it exceeds the limit, replace spring.

    SEM288A

    Pressure

    Check valve spring pressure.
    Pressure: N (kg, Ib) at height mm (in)
    Standard
    578.02 — 641.57 (58.94 — 65.42,
    129.96 — 144.25) at 30.0 (1.181)
    Limit
    More than 549.2 (56.0, 123.5) at 30.0 (1.181)

    If it exceeds the limit, replace spring.
    EM113

    EM-92

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Inspection (Cont’d)

    HYDRAULIC
    1.

    LASH ADJUSTER

    Check contact and sliding

    surfaces for wear or scratches .

    SEM935C

    2.

    Check diameter of lash adjuster.
    Outer diameter:
    16.980 — 16.993 mm (0.6685 — 0.6690 in)

    3.

    Check lash adjuster
    Inner diameter:

    guide inner diameter.

    17.000 — 17.020 mm (0.6693 — 0.6701 in)
    Standard clearance between lash adjuster and
    adjuster guide:
    0.007 — 0.040 mm (0.0003 — 0.0016 in)

    Rocker arm

    ROCKER ARM, SHIM AND ROCKER ARM GUIDE
    Check contact and sliding surfaces of rocker arms, shims and
    rocker arm guides for wear or scratches.

    SEM694D

    Assembly
    1.

    Intake manifold
    collector
    Tighten in numerical order.

    Install intake manifold collector

    SEM609E

    EM-93

    to intake manifold.

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Assembly (Cont’d)
    2.
    3.

    Intake manifold
    collector
    Tighten in numerical order.

    Install intake manifold.
    Install fuel tube assembly.
    Refer to «Injector Removal and Installation»

    [][]

    in EC section.

    SEM610E

    Thermostat housing

    4.

    1)
    2)
    3)
    4)

    Install thermostat housing with water pipe.
    Tightening procedure:
    Tighten bolt @ to 2 — 5 N’m (0.2 — 0.5 kg-m, 1.4 — 3.6 ft-Ib).
    .Tighten bolt @ to 16 — 21 N’m (1.6 — 2.1 kg-m, 12 — 15 ft-Ib).
    Tighten bolt @ to 16 — 21 N’m (1.6 — 2.1 kg-m, 12 — 15 ft-Ib).
    Tighten bolt CID to 16 — 21 N’m (1.6 — 2.1 kg-m, 12 — 15 ft-Ib).

    SEM786E

    5.
    6.

    Install exhaust manifold.
    Install exhaust manifold cover.

    7.
    a.

    Install water outlet.
    Before installing water outlet, remove all traces of liquid
    gasket from mating surface using a scraper.
    Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of
    cylinder head.
    Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface
    of water outlet.
    Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent.

    8.
    9.

    Install intake manifold supports.
    Install crankcase ventilation oil separator.

    SEM594D


    b.

    ~

    Liquid gasket
    SEM086D

    EM-94

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Assembly (Cont’d)
    10. Install valve component parts.

    Install valves with larger diameter

    ill]
    head on the intake side .




    .’

    Wide pitch


    Narrow pitch

    Always use new valve oil seal.
    Refer to OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT.
    Before installing valve oil seal, install valve spring seat.
    Install valve spring (uneven pitch type) with its narrow
    pitched side toward cylinder head side (paint mark).
    After installing valve component parts, tap valve stem tip
    with plastic hammer to assure a proper fit.

    Paint mark
    Cylinder head side

    SEM085D

    11. Check hydraulic lash adjusters.
    a. Push rocker arm at hydraulic lash adjuster location, and see
    if rocker arm moves. If it moves at least 1 mm (0.04 in), it
    indicates that there is air in the high pressure chamber.
    Noise will be emitted from hydraulic lash adjuster if engine
    is started without bleeding air.

    SEM093D

    b.

    Proper rod

    rEngine

    oil

    — — , t-=1=i

    Remove hydraulic lash adjuster and dip in a container filled
    with engine oil. While pushing plunger as shown in figure,
    lightly push check ball using a thin rod. Air is completely
    bled when plunger no longer moves.
    Air cannot be bled from this type of lash adjuster by running the
    engine.

    SEM772C

    12. Install rocker arms, shims, rocker arm guides and hydraulic lash adjusters.
    CAUTION:
    Install all parts in their original positions.

    Rocker arm 9UVide
    Rock~rarm
    Shim
    Hydraulic
    I

    .,h .dj»‘»

    i\
    j

    SEM202D

    EM-95

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Assembly (Cont’d)
    1!!i1*Shim
    ~
    Rocker arm guide
    Ij9
    ~
    ~
    Valve collet

    ~ I:::
    /

    l!I

    I!1!i!
    ~

    ~~

    j

    ~

    ‘Valve
    ~Valve
    Valve

    Valve spring

    retainer
    spring

    ~

    13. Select a suitable shim when replacing any of the following
    parts with a new one: Cylinder head, shim, rocker arm guide
    and valve seat. Proceed as follows to select the shim of
    correct thickness.
    a. Install valve component
    parts to cylinder head (Except
    shim).

    Always replace rocker arm guide with a new one.

    spring seat
    oil seal ~

    Valve
    SEM364D

    Dial gauge

    b.
    c.

    Remove hydraulic lash adjuster.
    Install Tool* into hydraulic lash adjuster fixing hole.
    * Tool (KV10115700) is screwed into magnetic stand
    used with dial gauge.

    rod

    Rod
    KV10115700

    SEM365DA

    SEM899D

    d.

    Make sure that the following parts are installed to the cylinder head: Valve, valve spring, collet, retainer and rocker
    arm guide (except shim). Measure difference (T1) between
    sliding surface of rocker arm gUide and valve stem end on
    shim side.
    When measuring, lightly pull dial indicator rod toward you to
    eliminate play in Tool (KV10115700).

    e.

    Select proper shim.
    Shim thickness (T):
    T1 :l: 0.025 mm (0.0010 in)
    Shims are available in different thicknesses from 2.800 mm
    (0.1102 in) to 3.200 mm (0.1260 in) in increments of 0.025 mm
    (0.0010 in).

    .

    /~/

    Indicate

    shim

    T = 2.800 mm
    (0.1102 In)

    L

    SEM096D

    EM-96

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Installation

    This installation is the same procedure as those for timing
    chain. Refer to «Installation»
    in «TIMING CHAIN» (EM-73) .

    EM-97

    ENGINE REMOVAL

    ~~.’/,
    ~

    44 — 54

    ~V/~

    (4.5 • 5.»)
    33.40)

    /

    ~,

    )

    ~~~

    ~»,

    ~v)~.
    .

    ~»-

    Y )

    /’

    ~

    Front

    Z:::.~

    I~
    MIT models

    t

    [OJ

    l»J 44.»
    [OJ

    64.

    [OJ

    74 — 91
    (8.0 — 9.~~,,,

    !

    74

    …/

    ,~

    rf:{l»A,

    ;&6
    I

    ~—W
    c~

    ___

    [OJ
    [OJ

    .• ~~

    0

    ’64 — 74
    (6.5 — 7.5, 47.

    I

    Rear engine slinger

    ~:5- _5~.5, 33 — 40)

    [OJ

    ~Ol

    ~I~,
    I

    ,

    t?

    r~

    44 _ 54

    ~

    (4.5 — 5.5, 33 • 40)

    ~
    !

    ~,»7 ~~

    44 • 54 (4.5 • 5.5,33.40)

    0

    ~

    V

    Front engine mounting
    Mounting bracket

    ~~

    44 — 54
    (4.5 — 5.5, 33 — 40)

    @>

    G)

    ~

    54)

    «SR» marked direction

    @
    @

    I ‘.

    I

    /’

    »

    44 — 54
    (4.5 • 5.5,
    33 • 40)

    /1.;’0

    ~A1k
    «‘~’

    58 — 67)

    o

    [OJ

    >

    .~.

    /~ /[(1 ~

    ;~

    ~

    (4.5 • 5,5, 33 • 40)

    40)

    ~

    Ill.~,

    0

    (4.5. 5.5,33′

    l»J 44.»
    ~

    (6.5 — 7.5,
    47 • 54)

    (4.5 — 5.5,
    33 — 40)

    1~

    44 — 54
    (4.5 — 5.5,
    33 — 40)

    (2.2 • 3.0, 16 • 22)

    22 • 29 (2.2 • 3.0, 16.22)

    44 • 54

    ol~

    [OJ

    ~l»J 22.29

    ,

    Y…. 2
    Determined
    gasket th ick-

    +

    0.05 (0.0020)

    =

    0.605 (0.0238)

    1.20 (0.0472) (Grade 8)’2

    ness (Finally)

    *1: II the average value 01 projections lor all pistons is, lor example, 0.553 (7) 5, as shown in the table above, it should be rounded oil as follows:
    II the digit in the forth decimal place (which is enclosed by a circle in this case) is smaller than 5, the average value should be regarded
    as 0.553 mm (0.0218 in); il it is larger than 5, the average value should be regarded as 0.554 mm (0.0218 in).
    *2: II X < Y, then the thicker grade C gasket must be used.

    EM-139

    ENGINE REMOVAL
    SEC. 112
    ~44
    ~

    ~
    . 54 (4.5 . 5.5, 33 . 40)

    44 • 54 (4.5 . 5.5, 33 • 40)»

    -~1J.

    ~
    ~~’

    44.54

    ~~

    ~1

    ~64.74
    (6.5 . 7.5,
    47.54),/’
    ~

    2

    ~
    54 (4.5.5.5,33

    — 40)
    ‘»

    .ttJJ 44 — 54 (4.5 • 5.5, 33 — 40)

    7

    ~-

    I

    ~44.
    54
    ~@
    (4.5 — 5.5, 33 • 40)

    ——

    (6.5 • 7.5, 47 • 54)

    ~
    I…»,;S'»
    ~l

    —.

    ~

    II!~o’

    ~2

    40)
    44 • 54

    ~

    -‘~

    @

    ~’o

    75 (6.5 .7.5,47.54)..1″»»-../
    54 (4.5 — 5.5, 33.

    !

    ~

    ~

    y~

    ~ ~l

    1.
    ‘l

    ..J’-;:7o

    ft

    .Vi

    o.o~

    ~

    -.»~

    ~

    6

    ttJJ 44 . 54 (4.5 . 5_5, 33 . 40)

    8

    ,.’~
    °

    >

    ~-/A.~/

    ~’@

    ~35’-4~.)5’~

    I~.

    j~~~1

    /
    rJ44.

    ,0

    7

    54 (4.5.5.5,33.40)

    ttJJ 44 • 54 (4.5 • 5.5, 33 • 40)

    ttJJ 44 . 54 (4.5 • 5.5, 33 • 40)

    ‘LrJ

    44 • 54 (4.5 — 5.5, 33 • 40)

    N.m (kg-m. ft-Ibl

    SEM050F

    G)

    Engine front mounting

    @

    @

    Engine mounting bracket
    Gusset
    Buffer rod bracket

    @

    Buffer rod
    Center member

    (J)
    @

    Transaxle mounting
    Transaxle mounting bracket

    @
    @

    ….

    (4.5 . 5.5,

    ~

    5~’

    rJ

    rJ64.

    ttJJ44.
    ti

    ,9

    ~ ~f;fi~~~’~i’:-l~»

    ttJJ 64.75

    2

    ~~~44.54

    (‘.5 • 7.5, 4~’

    ~~.~~
    /’Oolk..,

    ,
    /

    ttJJ 64 . 75

    @—.»

    k(j’

    — 40)

    ~

    _’
    rJ44.

    (4.5.5.5,33

    @
    @)
    @
    @

    Roll damper
    Engine rear mounting
    Engine rear mounting bracket
    Dynamic damper

    WARNING:

    Situate vehicle on a flat and solid surface.

    Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels.

    Do not remove engine until exhaust system has completely
    cooled off. Otherwise, you may burn yourself and/or fire
    may break out in .the fuel line.

    For safety during subsequent steps, the tension of wires
    should be slackened against the engine.

    Before removing front axle from transaxle, place safety
    stands under designated front supporting points. Refer to GI
    section for lifting points and towing.

    Be sure to hoist engine and transaxle in a safe manner.

    For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach
    proper slingers and bolts described in PARTS CATALOG.
    CAUTION:

    When lifting engine, be sure to clear surrounding parts.
    Take special care for accelerator wire casing, brake lines
    and brake master cylinder.

    In hoisting the engine, always use engine slingers in a safe
    manner.

    In removing drive shaft, be careful not to damage transaxle
    oil seal.

    EM-140

    ENGINE REMOVAL
    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.
    7.
    8.
    9.
    10.

    Drain plug (Radiator)

    11.
    12.
    13.
    14.

    Remove engine undercovers and splash covers.
    Remove front exhaust tube.
    Drain coolant and disconnect lower water hose from radiator.
    Drain transaxle oil.
    Disconnect electrical wiring from cooling fan.
    Remove power steering mounting bolt.
    Drain coolant from cylinder block.
    Disconnect water hoses and remove radiator.
    Disconnect fuel tubes and vacuum tubes.
    Release power steering belt adjusting nut and remove
    power steering pump from engine.
    Bind pump properly to the vehicle.
    Disconnect or remove electrical wiring where necessary.
    Release clutch lever cable and accelerator cable.
    Remove speedometer pinion connector from transaxle.
    Remove front wheels.

    15. Remove brake caliper mounting bolts and bind caliper properly to vehicle (coil spring) LH & RH.

    SFA110A

    16. Remove lower ball joint nuts and release the upper hub
    mounting bolts.
    17. Release steering
    arm ball joint using a suitable tool.
    Remove drive shafts from transaxle.
    1) RH: Split drive shaft center thrust bearing.
    2) RH & LH: Remove hub mounting bolts and remove drive
    shaft carefully from transaxle.

    SFA 1538

    18. Mount suitable slingers to cylinder head. Fit hoist with
    studge and hoist engine to release force on engine mountings.

    SEM534D

    EM-141

    ENGINE REMOVAL
    19. Remove engine mounting bracket.

    SEM535D

    20. Release transaxle shift linkages.

    SEM536D

    21. Release transaxle mounting.

    22. Remove center member from chassis.

    23. Remove engine with transaxle as shown.

    EM-142

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    SEC. 110-120

    (]~ •

    l

    83 — 93
    (8.5 — 9.5
    61 — 69)

    ~

    o

    o

    @f]-

    @~~
    (]

    ~

    76 — 78 (7.8 — 8.0, 56 — 58)

    ~

    !~

    l»J R,t» I.

    ~

    f] : Lubricate

    SEM227F

    Piston ring

    (J)

    @
    @

    Piston
    Piston pin
    Connecting rod bearing
    Connecting rod
    Main bearing cap

    @

    @
    @

    with new engine oil.

    «A,~mbly».

    CD
    @

    : N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    @
    @)

    @
    @

    Rear plate
    Flywheel
    Rear oil seal
    Rear oil seal retainer
    Gusset
    Cylinder block

    EM-143

    @
    @

    @
    @
    @
    @

    Main bearing
    Crankshaft
    Main bearing
    Gusset
    Drain plug
    Pilot bushing

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Preparation

    Unit: mm (in)

    183.0 (7.205)

    Drill a hole into the attachment (KV10108101).

    SEM707D

    Disassembly
    PISTON AND CRANKSHAFT
    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.
    7.

    Place engine on a work stand.
    Drain coolant and oil.
    Remove timing belt.
    Remove water pump.
    Remove oil pan and oil pump.
    Remove cylinder head.
    Remove pistons with connecting rods.

    When disassembling piston and connecting rod, heat piston to
    60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F) or use piston pin press stand at room
    temperature.

    Heater

    SEM360D

    8. Remove bearing cap and crankshaft.
    Place the bearings and caps in their proper order.
    Upper bearings (cylinder block side) have oil groove.

    Loosen in numerical order.

    SEM564A

    9. Remove piston rings with a tool.

    SEM291

    EM-144

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection
    PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE
    1.

    Measure outer diameter of piston pin and inner diameter of
    piston pin hole.
    2. Calculate piston to piston pin clearance.
    Pin diameter:

    24.994 • 25.000 mm (0.9840 — 0.9843 in)
    Pin hole diameter:
    24.991 — 24.999 mm (0.9839 — 0.9842 in)
    Clearance:
    -0.004 to 0 mm (-0.0002 to 0 in)
    (Interference fit)
    Service parts are available as a set of piston and piston pin.

    PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
    Side clearance:
    Unit: mm (in)

    Standard

    Limit

    Top ring

    0.060 — 0.095
    (0.0024 — 0.0037)

    0.10 (0.0039)

    2nd ring

    0.040 — 0.075
    (0.0016 — 0.0030)

    0.10 (0.0039)

    Oil ring

    0.030 — 0.070
    (0.0012 — 0.0028)

    0.10 (0.0039)

    If out of specification,
    bly.

    EM-145

    replace piston and/or piston ring assem-

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    PISTON RING END GAP
    Feeler
    gauge

    End gap:
    Unit: mm (in)
    Standard

    Limit

    Bore grade 1, 2, 3
    Top ring

    SEM599A

    0.20 — 0.30 (0.0079 — 0.0118)
    Bore grade 4, 5
    0.12 — 0.22 (0.0047 — 0.0087)

    1.0 (0.039)

    2nd ring

    0.38 — 0.53 (0.0150 — 0.0209)

    0.7 (0.028)

    Oil ring

    0.30 — 0.55 (0.0118 — 0.0217)

    0.6 (0.024)

    If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap exceeds
    maximum limit with new ring, rebore cylinder and use oversize piston and piston rings.
    Refer to SOS (EM-174).
    • When replacing the piston, check the cylinder block surface
    for scratches or evidence of seizure. If scratches or evidence of seizure is found, hone or replace the cylinder
    block.

    MAIN BEARING CLEARANCE
    1. Install main bearings to cylinder block and main bearing
    cap.
    2. Install main bearing cap with bearing to cylinder block.
    Tighten all bolts in two or three stages.
    ~: 44 — 54 N’m (4.5 — 5.5 kg-m, 33 — 40 ft-Ib)
    3. Measure inside diameter» A» of main journal.

    4. Measure outside diameter «Om» of main journal of crankshaft.
    Journal diameter:
    Refer to SOS (EM-174).
    5. Calculate main bearing clearance.
    Main bearing clearance = A — Om
    Standard:
    0.039 — 0.065 mm (0.0015 — 0.0026 in)
    • If it exceeds the limit, replace the bearing.
    SEM506A


    If crankshaft main journal is worn or shows any
    abnormality, regrind crank journal and use undersized
    bearings to maintain the specified oil clearance.
    Refer to SOS for regrinding crankshaft journal diameter and
    available service parts (EM-174).
    When regrinding crankshaft journal, do not grind fillet-roll.

    Main jOUrnal~

    Maintain more than 0.13 mm (0.0051 In)
    SEM566B

    EM-146

    @[]

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Cont’d)

    If either bearing, crankshaft or cylinder block is replaced
    with a new one, select main bearing according to the following table. These numbers are punched in either Arabic
    or Roman numerals.

    Crankshaft main journal grade number

    NO’1

    Identification

    main journal grade number
    NO.2
    «»

    No.4
    No. 3 /

    ~’S»bci~

    ~

    0000

    »

    0
    1
    2

    Main bearing housing grade number
    1
    0
    2
    Main bearing grade number
    2
    0
    1
    1
    2
    3
    2
    4
    3

    color:

    Grade 0

    Yellow

    Grade 1

    Green

    Grade 2

    Brown

    Grade 3

    Black

    Grade 4

    Blue

    No. 5

    «‘)

    ~

    N

    1

    o.
    Counterweight

    /i

    SEM706DA

    No. 1 journal grade number
    ~No. 5

    Q
    Front

    For example:
    Main journal grade number: 1
    Crankshaft journal grade number: 2
    Main bearing grade number = 1 + 2
    Main bearing thickness:
    Refer to SOS (EM-175).

    3

    0

    SEM706A

    CONNECTING

    ROD BEARING CLEARANCE

    (Big end)

    1. Install connecting rod bearing to connecting rod and cap.
    2. Install connecting rod cap with bearing to connecting rod.
    Apply oil to the thread portion of bolts and seating surface of
    nuts.
    37 — 45 N’m (3.8 — 4.6 kg-m, 27 — 33 ft-Ib)
    3. Measure inside diameter «C» of bearing.

    toJ:

    SEM507A

    EM-147

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    4.
    5.

    Pin jOUrnal~

    Maintain more than 0.13 mm (0.0051 in)


    SEM361D

    NO’

    1 pin journal grade number
    NO’ 2 No.3
    __
    NO.4
    ,/

    ~

    o

    ~

    J

    0 0 ~
    ~

    NO.1
    C,»»’ffl.;ghl

    [][]

    Measure outside diameter «Dp» of crankshaft pin journal.
    Calculate connecting rod bearing clearance.
    Connecting rod bearing clearance = C — Op
    Standard:
    0.031 — 0.055 mm (0.0012 — 0.0022 in)
    If it exceeds the limit, replace the bearing.
    If crankshaft pin journal is worn or shows any abnormality,
    regrind crank pin and use undersized bearings to maintain
    the specified oil clearance.
    Refer to SOS for regrinding diameter of crankshaft pin and
    available service parts (EM-174).
    When regrinding crankshaft pin, do not grind fillet-roll.

    Selective connecting rod bearing

    If either bearings or crankshaft are being replaced with new
    ones, select connecting rod bearings according to the following table. Grade numbers are punched in either Arabic
    or Roman numerals.
    Crankshaft pin journal grade number

    Connecting rod baring grade number

    0

    1

    2

    0

    1

    2

    SEM705D

    Identification
    Grade 0:
    Grade 1:
    Grade 2:

    color
    Black
    Yellow
    Blue

    CONNECTING ROD AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE
    (Small end)
    Clearance

    (0 — d):

    0.025 — 0.044 mm (0.0010 — 0.0017 in)

    Clearance

    =0

    If clearance exceeds the specifications,

    — d
    SEM575B

    EM-148

    replace the bearing.

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    Bearing replacement
    1. Remove bearing with a suitable tool.
    Do not scratch inner surface of connecting

    rod .


    2.
    3.

    Install new bearing with oil holes aligned correctly.
    Ream bore using a suitable tool.
    Ream bore:
    25.025 — 25.038 mm (0.9852 — 0.9857 in)

    CONNECTING

    ROD BEND AND TORSION

    Bend and torsion [per 100 mm (3.94 in) length]:
    Bend Less than 0.025 mm (0.0010 in)
    Torsion Less than 0.025 mm (0.0010 in)

    A

    CRANKSHAFT

    B

    1.
    2.

    y

    Taper:

    A — B

    Check crankshaft journals and pins for score, bias, wear or
    cracks. If faults are minor, correct with fine crocus cloth.
    Check journals and pins with a micrometer for taper and
    out-of-round.
    Out-of-round (X — V):
    Less than 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
    Taper (A — B):
    Less than 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)

    Out-ot-round: X — y
    SEM316A

    3.

    Check crankshaft runout.
    Runout (Total indicator reading):
    Less than 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)

    EM-149

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    CYLINDER

    Measuring points

    BLOCK DISTORTION

    Clean upper face of cylinder block and measure the distortion.
    Limit:
    0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
    If out of specification,
    resurface it.
    The resurfacing limit of cylinder block is determined by cylinder head resurfacing in an engine.

    Warpage of surface:
    Less than 0.1 mm (0.004 in)

    SEM655A

    Amount of cylinder head resurfacing is «A».
    Amount of cylinder block resurfacing is «B».
    The maximum limit is as follows:
    A + B = 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
    If necessary, replace cylinder block.

    SEM008D

    CYLINDER
    ~
    //p’

    Moving the bore gauge
    as shown, take the
    minimum reading.

    1.
    2.

    BORE

    Check for scratches or seizure. If seizure is found, hone
    bore.
    Using a bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, outof-round or taper.
    Standard bore diameter:
    84.500 — 84.550 mm (3.3268 — 3.3287 in)
    Unit: mm (in)

    Bore wear limit
    Out-aI-round (X — Y) standard

    0.015 (0.0006)

    Taper (A — B) standard

    0.010 (0.0004)

    If it exceeds the limit, rebore all four cylinders. Replace cylinder block if necessary.
    If cylinder block or piston is replaced, match piston grade with
    grade number on cylinder block upper surface.

    y

    Unit mm (in)

    0.2 (0.008)

    SEM704DA

    EM-150

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Cont’d)

    Front

    0000
    SEM1768

    Reboring

    62 mm
    (2.44 in)
    SEM904-A

    1. The size to which cylinders must be honed, is determined
    by adding piston-to-cylinder
    clearance to the piston skirt
    diameter» A».
    Dimension «a»:
    Approximately 62 mm (2.44 in)
    Rebored size calculation
    o = A + B — C = A + [0.03 to 0.05 mm
    (0.0012 to 0.0020 in)]
    where,
    o
    Honed diameter
    A
    Skirt diameter as measured
    B
    Piston-to-wall clearance
    Machining allowance
    C
    0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
    2. Install main bearing caps and tighten bolts to the specified
    torque. This will prevent distortion of cylinder bores.
    3. Cut cylinder bores in the order of 2-4-1-3.
    Do not cut too much out of the cylinder bore at a time. Cut only
    0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter at a time.
    4. Hone the cylinders to the required size referring to SOS
    (EM-173).
    5. Measure the finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and
    taper.
    Measurement of a just machined cylinder bore requires utmost
    care since it is expanded by cutting heat.

    PISTON- TO-BORE CLEARANCE
    Using micrometer
    1.

    2.

    Measure piston and cyl inder bore diameter.
    Piston diameter «A»:
    Refer to SDS (EM-174).
    Measuring point «a» (Distance from the bottom):
    Approximately 62 mm (2.44 in)
    Bore diameter «0»:
    Refer to SDS (EM-173).
    Measuring point (Distance from the top):
    Approximately 70 mm (2.76 in)
    Check that piston clearance is within the specification.
    Piston clearance (0 — A):
    0.025 — 0.045 mm (0.0010 — 0.0018 in)

    EM-151

    @[]

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Inspection (Cont’d)
    Using feeler
    1.
    2.

    gauge

    Set piston and feeler gauge with spring scale.
    Measure extracting force while pulling up scale slowly.
    Feeler gauge used:
    0.05 — 0.07 mm (0.0020 — 0.0028 in)
    Extracting force:
    7.8 — 14.7 N (0.8 — 1.5 kg, 1.8 — 3.3 Ib)

    SEM550

    Assembly
    PISTON

    Numbers stamped on connecting rod and cap correspond to
    each cylinder. Care should be taken to avoid a wrong combination including bearing and connecting rod direction.


    Install new snap ring on one side of piston pin hole.
    When assembling piston and connecting rod with piston pin,
    heat piston to between 60 and 80°C (140 and 176°F) and
    install piston pin with a suitable tool.
    Install new snap ring.
    After assembling, ascertain that piston swings smoothly.

    SEM703D


    KV101070S0

    EM156

    ~r~~
    ~ ,0
    Punch mark side up

    ~


    Install piston rings with a suitable tool.
    Selective top ring; When installing new top ring or replacing
    cylinder block, select top ring to adjust ring gap.

    Tetl~n tube set position

    Ql

    0

    Cylinder bore grade

    Top ring grade No.

    1,2,3

    4, 5

    No mark

    S

    SEM251D

    CRANKSHAFT
    1. Set main bearings in the proper position on cylinder block
    and main bearing caps.

    If either crankshaft, cylinder block or main bearing is reused
    again, it is necessary to measure main bearing clearance.

    Upper bearings (cylinder block side) have oil groove.

    Apply new engine oil to bearing surfaces.

    SEM617

    EM-152

    [ill

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Assembly (Cont’d)
    2.

    Apply engine oil to main bearing surfaces on crankshaft
    journal side.
    3. Install crankshaft and main bearing caps.
    Main bearing cap bolt:
    ~:
    44 — 54 N’m (4.5 — 5.5 kg-m, 33 — 40 ft-Ib)
    4. Tighten main bearing cap bolts.

    Arrange the parts so that the indicated numbers on bearing
    caps are in a row from the front of engine.

    Tighten bearing cap bolts gradually in two or three stages
    and outwardly from center bearing in sequence.

    After securing bearing cap bolts, ascertain that crankshaft
    turns smoothly.
    • Apply new engine oil to threads of bearing cap bolts.

    Engine front

    t;J

    1

    SEM230F

    5.

    Measure crankshaft free end play at center bearing.
    Crankshaft free end play:
    Standard
    0.05 — 0.18 mm (0.0020 — 0.0071 in)
    Limit
    0.30 mm (0.0118 in)

    PISTON WITH CONNECTING
    1.

    ROD

    Install connecting rod bearings in the connecting rods and
    connecting rod caps.

    Confirm that correct size of bearings is used.
    Refer to «Inspection» (EM-147).

    Install the bearings so that the oil hole in the connecting rod
    aligns with the oil hole of the bearing.

    Apply engine oil to connecting rod bearing surfaces on the
    crankshaft journal side.

    Set piston rings as shown.

    ~~~:::~»
    IJ
    ~

    2nd ring
    SEM909

    EM-153

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Assembly (Conl’d)
    EM03470000 or suitable tool

    2.



    lliJ

    Install pistons with connecting rods.
    Install them into corresponding cylinder using Tool.
    Be careful not to scratch cylinder wall with connecting rod.
    Apply engine oil to cylinder wall, piston and bearing.
    Arrange so that the front mark on piston head faces to the
    front of engine.

    3. Install connecting rod bearing caps.

    Apply engine oil to the thread of connecting rod bearing nut.
    (1) Tighten connecting rod bearing nut to 15:1:1 N’m (1.5:1:0.1
    kg-m, 10.8:1:0.7 ft-Ib).
    (2) Then tighten an additional 60 +_~’.turns with an angular tightening wrench.
    ~:
    15:1:1 N’m (1.5:1:0.1 kg-m, 10.8:1:0.7 ft-Ib) plus
    60+’::;. or
    ~: 37 — 45 N’m (3.8 — 4.6 kg-m, 27 — 33 ft-Ib)

    4.

    Measure connecting rod side clearance.
    Connecting rod side clearance (Big end play):
    Limit
    0.3 mm (0.012 in)

    FLYWHEEL

    RUNOUT

    Runout (Total indicator reading):
    Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)

    EM-154

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    (SOS)

    General Specifications
    GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
    GA14DE

    Engine

    GA15DE

    Classification

    Gasoline

    Cylinder arrangement

    4, in-line
    cm3 (cu in)

    Displacement
    Bore x stroke

    mm (in)

    GA16DE

    1,392 (84.94)

    1,498 (91.41)

    1.597 (97.45)

    73.6 x 81.8 (2.898 x 3.220)

    73.6 x 88.0 (2.898 x 3.465)

    76.0 x 88.0 (2.992 x 3.465)

    Valve arrangement

    DOHC

    Firing order

    1-3-4-2

    Number of piston rings
    Compression

    1’2,2

    .

    1

    Oil

    5

    Number of main bearings
    Compression

    ratio

    9.9

    95

    9.8’1, 9.9’2

    Valve timing

    ~-r-y’
    f

    ~U&l’
    0,0
    ~J}&

    BOC
    EM120

    Unit: degree
    a

    b

    c

    d

    e

    GA14DE

    214″

    214°

    34°

    _4°

    38°

    GA15DE

    222°

    222°

    0″

    42°

    -40

    46°

    GA16DE without
    VTC

    222°

    214°

    34°

    42°

    GA16DE with VTC
    for Australia

    222″

    236°

    _12°

    68°

    42″

    GA16DE with VTC
    except for Australia

    222°

    248°

    2″

    66°

    -4″

    46″

    ‘1: For Europe and Israel
    ‘2: Except for Europe and Israel

    EM-155

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    (50S)

    Inspection and Adjustment
    ENGINE COMPRESSION PRESSURE
    Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2,
    Compression
    ratio
    Refer to SDS
    (EM-155).

    Standard

    Minimum

    9.5

    1,324 (13.24,
    13.5, 192)/350

    1,128 (11.28,
    11.5, 164)/350

    9.8

    1,353 (13.53,
    13.8, 196)/350

    1,157 (11.57,
    11.8, 168)/350

    9.9

    1,373 (13.7,14,
    199)/350

    1,177 (11.8,12,
    171)/350

    CYLINDER HEAD
    Unit: mm (in)

    psi)/rpm

    Difference
    limit between
    cylinders

    Head surface
    flatness
    Height

    Standard

    Limit

    Less than
    0.03 (0.0012)

    0.1 (0.004)

    117.8 — 118.0
    (4.638 — 4.646)

    98 (0.98, 1.0,
    14)/350

    VALVE
    Unit: mm (in)

    —L
    SEM188-b

    Valve head diameter

    GA14DE and GA15DE

    GA16DE

    Intake

    28.9 — 29.2
    (1.138 — 1.150)

    29.9 — 30.2
    (1.177 — 1.189)

    Exhaust

    23.9 — 24.2
    (0.941 — 0.953)

    23.9 — 24.2 (0.941 — 0.949): without VTC
    24.9 — 25.2 (0.980 — 0.992):
    with VTC

    «0»

    Intake

    92.00 — 92.5 (3.6220 — 3.6417)

    Exhaust

    92.37 — 92.87 (3.6366 — 3.6563)

    Intake

    5.465 — 5.480 (0.2152 — 0.2157)

    Exhaust

    5.445 — 5.460 (0.2144 — 0.2150)

    Valve length «L»

    Valve stem diameter

    «d»

    Valve face angle «u»

    .

    Valve margin ‘T’ limit
    Valve stem end surface grinding

    Less than 0.2 (0.008)

    limit

    Valve clearance
    Unit: mm (in)
    For adjusting

    For checking

    Hot

    Cold*

    Hot

    Intake

    0.32 — 0.40
    (0.013 — 0.016)

    0.25 — 0.33
    (0.010 — 0.013)

    0.21 — 0.49
    (0.008 — 0.019)

    Exhaust

    0.37 — 0.45
    (0.015 — 0.018)

    0.32 — 0.40
    (0.013 — 0.016)

    0.30 — 0.58
    (0.012 — 0.023)

    *: At a temperature

    of approximately

    45°15′ — 45°45′
    0.9 — 1.1 (0.035 — 0.043)

    20°C (68°F)

    Whenever valve clearances are adjusted to cold specifications,
    check that the clearances satisfy hot specifications and adjust again
    if necessary.

    EM-156

    SERVICE OATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
    Inspection and Adjustment (Cont’d)
    Available

    shims

    Thickness

    mm (in)

    Shim

    2.00 (0.0787)

    200

    2.02 (0.0795)

    202

    2.04 (0.0803)

    204

    2.06 (0.0811)

    206

    2.08 (0.0819)

    208

    210 (0.0827)

    210

    2.12 (00835)

    212

    2.14 (0.0843)
    216 (0.0850)

    216
    218

    2.20 (0.0866)

    220

    2.22 (00874)

    222

    224 (00882)

    224

    2.26 (0.0890)

    226

    2.28 (0.0898)

    228

    2.30 (0.0906)

    230

    2.32 (0.0913)

    2.32

    2.34 (0.0921)

    234

    2.36 (0.0929)

    236

    2.38 (0.0937)

    238

    240 (0.0945)

    240

    2.42 (0.0953)

    242

    2.44 (0.0961)

    244

    2.46 (0.0969)

    246

    2.48 (0.0976)

    248

    2.50 (00984)

    250

    2.52 (0.0992)

    252

    2.54 (0.1000)

    254

    2.56 (01008)

    256

    2.58 (0.1016)

    258

    2.60 (0.1024)

    260

    262 (0.1031)

    262

    2.64 (0.1039)

    264

    2.66 (0.1047)

    266

    2.68 (0.1055)

    268

    2.70 (0.1063)

    270

    2.72 (0.1071)

    272

    2.74 (0.1079)

    274

    2.76 (0.1087)

    276

    278 (0.1094)

    278

    2.80 (0 1102)

    280

    282 (0 1110)

    282

    284 (0.1118)

    284

    286

    286

    2.88 (0 1134)

    Indicate
    T = 2.68 mm (0.1055 In)
    Type B

    SEM104F

    214

    2.18 (0.0858)

    (0.1126)

    Type A

    Identification mark

    288

    290 (0.1142)

    290

    2.92 (0.1150)

    292

    294 (0.1157)

    294

    296 (0.1165)

    296

    2.98 (0.1173)

    298

    EM-157

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Inspection and Adjustment (Cont’d)
    Valve guide
    Unit: mm (in)
    Exhaust

    Intake
    Standard

    Service

    Standard

    Service

    9.523 — 9.534
    (0.3749 — 0.3754)

    9.723 — 9.734
    (0.3828 — 03832)

    9523 — 9.534
    (0.3749 — 0.3754)

    9.723 — 9.734
    (0.3828 — 0.3832)

    Valve gUide
    Outer diameter
    Valve guide
    Inner diameter
    [Finished size]

    5500 — 5.515 (0.2165 — 0.2171)

    5.500 — 5.515 (0.2165 — 0.2171)

    Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter

    9.475 — 9.496
    (0.3730 — 0.3739)

    9.685 — 9.696
    (0.3813 — 0.3817)

    9.475 — 9.496
    (0.3730 — 0.3739)

    9.685 — 9.696
    (0.3813 — 0.3817)

    Interference

    0.027 — 0.059
    (0.0011 — 0.0023)

    0.027 — 0.049
    (0.0011 — 0.0019)

    0.027 — 0.059
    (0.0011 — 0.0023)

    0.027 — 0.049
    (0.0011 — 0.0019)

    fit 01 valve guide

    Stem to guide clearance

    0.020 — 0.050 (0.0008 — 0.0020)

    0.040 — 0.070 (0.0016 — 0.0028)

    0.2 (0.008)

    0.2 (0.008)

    Valve deflection limit
    (Dial gauge reading)
    Projection

    length

    11.5 — 11.7 (0.453 — 0.461)

    Valve spring
    Free height

    mm (in)

    41.19 (1.6217)

    Standard

    344.42 (35.12, 77.44)
    at 25.26 (0.9945)

    Limit

    32373 (33.01. 72.79)
    at 25.26 (0.9945)

    Pressure N (kg, Ib) at
    height mm (in)

    Out-aI-square

    mm (in)

    Less than 1.80 (0.0709)

    Valve lifter
    Unit: mm (in)
    Valve lifter outside diameter

    29.960 — 29.975 (1.1795 — 1.1801)

    Lifter guide inside diameter

    30000 — 30.021 (1.1811 — 1.1819)

    Clearance between lifter and
    lifter guide

    0.025 — 0.061 (0.0010 — 0.0024)

    EM-158

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Inspection and Adjustment (Cont’d)
    Valve seat
    Unit: mm (in)
    EXHAUST

    INTAKE

    Standard

    Standard

    5.65 (0.2224)

    Oversize.

    5.65 (0.2224)

    @dia.
    ~dia~.-‘—

    -~—~

    BR~P

    p

    P

    1r$1 (E]Q)
    U+U
    CHID +
    P
    P
    CM70)

    t__
    !
    I
    p

    r::::!:::,~

    IUjlI CEID
    p

    I

    p

    rrrnn

    ECM

    EVAP

    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    Refer to last page

    ~

    ~

    W

    @

    (FoIdout

    «W —

    BIR ~

    BIR

    —-

    I

    L/R

    It I

    ~
    G

    I

    ~
    __ —

    -:

    Detectable

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line
    for DTC

    G

    -@> Next

    page

    line

    (F207)

    y

    for DTC

    A~
    T

    lbf=JJ

    FICO
    IACVSOLENOID
    VALVE

    L.

    y

    .1f:’-. Next
    ~page

    Refer to last page
    L

    ~
    2
    ~3

    ~ffi
    W

    ~GY

    (Foldout

    CHID , (E101)
    ~

    .Aa.

    Ql.5)

    B

    1&1

    Q)

    Air conditioner

    0

    …..
    C

    95 (203)

    100 (212)
    95 (203)

    ctS

    ctS
    (5

    «0
    o

    o
    o

    20

    Q)

    c:

    o

    80

    «0

    c:
    W

    D:

    Q)

    20

    ‘a’
    c

    (12)
    (50)
    Vehicle speed km/h

    c

    (12)
    (50)
    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

    w

    Cooling fans do not operate.

    EC-82

    80
    (MPH)

    : Cooling fans operate at «Low» speed.

    MEC773BA

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)

    []K]

    ITEMS

    EC-COOL/F-01

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    FUSE
    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    (E106)

    GY

    —_I

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line

    for

    OTC

    -….——~—-I

    @:

    (3113) ~

    O—

    B

    ~

    B

    B

    @)

    ~==~ l
    ,—,
    8

    :

    CED

    NEUT
    13•51

    -:

    G/OR

    Detectable line
    for OTe
    Non-detectable
    line for Ole

    -:

    I

    A/T models
    MIT models

    G/OR

    I$’@
    @
    G/OA

    ~CMID

    1~lm
    G/OR

    I

    O——

    t

    ~~G-

    G/OR.f

    G/OR—

    G/OR

    IdJl~

    P ..

    ‘=t=’~

    R

    G/OR

    I
    m

    »
    N4Q

    INHIBITOR
    1 SWITCH

    ~:<:D

    2

    G/OR

    NEUTRAL

    OTHER—»

    NEUTRAL
    POSITION

    SWITCH
    CE22Q):

    ~
    ~GY

    ~
    ~

    CE2@)

    ~

    (gg1)

    ~

    B

    Refer to last page
    (FaIdout

    page) .

    (E222)
    GY

    <:ED
    L

    HEC233

    EC-90

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS

    FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    [![]

    Park/Neutral Position Switch (Cont’d)
    When the gear position is in neutral position, neutral position
    switch is «ON». ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the «ON» signal) exists.

    m

    II

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
    _ PARKINEUT POSI SW CKT _

    INSPECTION START
    SHIFT
    OUT OF NIP-POSITION
    THEN
    TOUCH START

    CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    2. Perform «PARK/NEUT POSI
    ~
    SW CKT» in IIFUNCTION
    TEST» mode with CONSULT.

    (ij’

    I NEXT I!
    m *

    I

    START

    MEC7318

    MONITOR

    *

    NO FAIL

    D

    fiii
    ~

    ON

    PIN POSI SW

    OR

    2. Select IIP/N POSI SW» in
    «DATA MONITOR» mode with
    CONSULT.
    3. Check «PIN POSI SW» signal
    under the following conditions.
    Neutral position: ON
    Except neutral position: OFF
    OR

    fG>
    RECORD

    ~
    SEF963N

    m ~

    CONNECT

    ~

    ~

    ~£)~~
    II

    ECM

    E[CONNECTORII
    35

    2. Check voltage between ECM
    terminal @ and ground under
    the following conditions.
    Voltage:
    Neutral position
    Approximately OV
    Except neutral position
    Approximately 5V
    NG

    @

    MEC7798

    EC-91

    OK

    INSPECTION END

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Park/Neutral Position Switch (Cont’d)
    @

    1

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».

    NG

    ~

    2. Disconnect neutral position switch

    AEC750

    harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and body ground.
    Continuity should exist.

    • Harn~ss for open or
    short between neutral

    If OK, check harness for short.

    position switch and

    • Harness connectors
    @W, @) (RHO)

    body ground

    OK

    Il

    ~iv
    ECM

    ‘]9″CONNECTORII

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors
    (ill!), @ (LHD)

    If NG, repair harness or

    ~iD

    connectors.

    ,

    [i

    Cffi)

    35

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ and terminal G).
    SEF503Q

    NG

    —-..

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    aD,@
    • Harness connectors

    @,@D

    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    • Harness connectors
    @,@!) (LHD)

    OK

    • Harness connectors
    @), @!D (RHD)
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM and
    neutral position switch
    If NG, repai r harness or
    connectors.
    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Neutral position switch).
    Refer to MT section.

    NG

    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION

    EC-92

    END

    Replace neutral position
    switch.

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS

    FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ill]

    ITEMS

    Electrical Load Signal

    EC-LOAD-01
    15A
    )40

    (b):

    Aefe~ to EL-POWER.

    I

    R/W

    9-:

    ———PASS

    DIMMER
    LAMP
    OUTPUT LH

    PASS (~

    DAYTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT
    (Refer to
    EL-OTRL.)

    (~):@

    lbjdJ

    , __
    LOW»JI HIGH , __
    L»:»

    R/V

    ~~

    R/B A/Y

    DL

    1—_———0— +}
    T—- I————-+
    I

    ii
    I
    R/B

    To

    R/B

    LH

    head lamp

    A/Y

    OIODE-2

    ~

    m DIODE-3
    W)

    «=i=JJ

    «=i=JJ

    A

    A

    ——c

    I

    R/Y

    I

    (E101)

    R

    ~

    «({[1)
    R

    CMID

    ~

    R

    CMID
    R

    :r-

    R

    ~Next
    ~page

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    page) .

    ~$.}J8)
    ~GY

    HEC235

    EC-93

    [![]

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Electrical Load Signal (Conl’d)

    EC-LOAD-02

    .—————

    FUSE

    20A

    []]
    I Pl21

    ON
    OFF—

    r

    Glow relay

    Cooling fan relays
    Glow plugs

    Throttle control
    solenoid valve
    Neutral position switch

    EGRC-solenoid valve A
    EGRC-solenoid valve B

    Cooling fan motor
    EGR valve

    SEF546S

    EC-104

    ENGINE AND EMISSION

    CONTROL

    OVERALL SYSTEM

    ECCS Component

    I

    CD20E

    I

    Parts Location (Cont’d)

    II
    ‘Injection timing control valve

    ~

    Accelerator pedal

    j

    SEF547S

    EC-105

    ENGINE AND EMISSION

    CONTROL

    I CD20E I

    OVERALL SYSTEM

    System Diagram
    II
    >.

    2

    Q)

    >
    >

    Cti

    (ij

    CD

    «0

    ‘0

    c:

    Q)

    0
    CI)

    eE

    CD

    0

    u

    Q)

    >
    >

    Q)

    (ij

    ‘:;:;

    ‘0

    II

    .c….

    «0

    ‘0
    c
    Q)

    <5
    (/J
    0.

    «

    E

    ~
    0

    (ij
    >
    «0

    =0
    .~

    ‘0
    c:

    c:

    0
    (f)

    Q)

    0

    a:
    w
    C!J

    0

    <>

    0
    a:

    2

    C!J

    w

    (ij

    ~

    0

    C

    ~
    c.

    Q)

    nc:

    0

    c.

    E

    0

    E

    ~~
    u
    ~

    CI)

    c:

    Q)
    CI)

    c

    0

    0
    :.;:;

    CI)

    N
    N
    0

    c::
    c:
    0

    :;:;

    (/J

    Q)
    CI)

    ~

    Q)

    Q.

    >-

    ;:

    eE

    +-»

    2
    ~

    Q)

    0.

    ct1

    0

    a.

    Cl

    E
    !E

    ~

    Ow

    c:

    (1)

    e

    ‘@
    ..c:
    CI)
    .:x
    c:
    ct:l

    0

    0

    a

    o
    ()

    ~o

    o
    ch

    00

    w~

    0

    Q)

    > (/J
    c:

    Q)
    Q)

    Q)
    (/J

    U5

    e

    c:

    Q)

    >

    .2

    (ij

    g~

    >

    e

    08.

    c0
    u

    0>

    Q)

    :;

    oc:

    Q;
    >
    0

    B
    VJ

    «00

    ~

    C

    Cl

    u

    «L:

    0.

    E

    !E
    Q5

    ~

    u..

    0

    (f)

    c::

    Q)
    (/J

    t>
    Q)

    W

    Q)

    ~

    ct:l

    TIO’+Q)

    ~

    :>(/)o

    .~

    o

    o

    c

    0

    0
    :;:;

    u

    Q)

    Q)

    VJ

    E

    (/J

    c::

    c

    0
    :;:;

    ’00
    0
    c..
    ..c:

    E

    (/J

    en

    E

    ct1

    ::::3

    :.c:(/JCl

    :J

    ‘;

    Q)

    c::

    e:-

    «E
    ~

    (l;
    CD

    EL
    ~

    c

    ~
    «

    ()

    V

    SEF548S

    EC-107

    ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM

    I CD20E I

    Vacuum Hose Drawing
    Throttle

    control valve

    Vacuum pump
    3-way connector

    EGRC-solenoid

    valve A

    EGRC-solenoid

    valve B

    SEF549S

    (1)
    @

    CID
    @

    EGRC-solenoid valve A to
    3-way connector
    EGRC-solenoid valve 8 to
    3-way connector
    3-way connector to EGRC-solenoid valve B
    EGRC-solenoid valve A to
    3-way connector

    Refer to «System

    Diagram»,

    @
    @

    (j)
    @

    EGR valve to 3-way connector
    EGRC-solenoid valve A to
    3-way connector
    Vacuum pump to 3-way connector
    Throttle control valve to Throttle
    control solenoid valve

    EC-107 for vacuum control system.

    EC-108

    @
    @)

    Air duct to 3-way connector
    Throttle control solenoid valve
    to 3-way connector

    @

    Throttle control solenoid valve
    to 3-way connector
    3-way connector to 3-way connector

    @

    ENGINE AND EMISSION

    CONTROL

    OVERALL SYSTEM

    I CD20E I

    System Chart

    Camshaft position sensor (PUMP)

    Fuel injection control

    Electric governor

    Fuel injection timing control

    Injection timing control valve

    Fuel cut control

    Fuel cut solenoid valve

    Glow control system

    Glow relay & glow lamp

    On board diagnostic system

    Malfunction indicator lamp
    (On the instrument panel)

    EGR valve & throttle control
    valve control

    EGRC-solenoid valve A, B &
    throttle control solenoid valve

    Cooling fan control

    Cooling fan relays

    Air conditioning cut control

    Air conditioner relay

    Crankshaft position sensor (TOC)

    Control sleeve position sensor

    Fuel temperature sensor

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    Needle lift sensor

    Accelerator position sensor
    ECM
    (ECCS-D

    control
    module)
    Accelerator position switch

    Accelerator switch (F/C)

    Neutral position switch

    Ai r conditioner switch

    Ignition switch

    Battery voltage

    Vehicle speed sensor

    EC-109

    II

    ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

    -I CD20E

    I

    Fuel Injection System
    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Three types of fuel injection control are provided to accommodate engine operating conditions; normal
    control, idle control and start control. The ECM determines the appropriate fuel injection control. Under
    each control, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance. The ECM performs duty control on the electric governor (built into the fuel injection pump) according to sensor signals to compensate the amount of fuel injected to the preset value.
    START CONTROL
    Input/output

    signal line
    Engine coolant temperature

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    Engine speed

    Crankshaft position sensor (TOC)

    ECM
    Start signal

    Ignition switch

    Control sleeve position

    Control sleeve position sensor

    }I
    CD

    .2

    o
    C

    Electric
    governor

    Engine coolant
    temperature lower

    /

    :::J

    o
    E

    «
    Engine rpm —+

    When the ECM receives a start signal from the ignition switch,
    the ECM adapts the fuel injection system for the start control.
    The amount of fuel injected at engine starting is a preset program value in the ECM. The program is determined by the
    engine speed and engine coolant temperature.
    For better startability under cool engine conditions, the lower
    the coolant temperature becomes, the greater the amount of
    fuel injected. The ECM ends the start control when the engine
    speed reaches 400 rprn and shifts the control to the normal or
    idle control.

    SEF648S

    EC-110

    ENGINE AND EMISSION

    BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Fuel Injection System (Cont’d)

    I CD20E I

    IDLE CONTROL
    Input/output signal line
    Engine coolant temperature

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    Engine speed

    Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)

    Air conditioner operation

    Air conditioner switch

    Gear position

    Neutral position switch

    ECM

    Battery voltage

    Battery

    Electric
    governor

    Control sleeve position

    Control sleeve position sensor

    Idle position

    Accelerator position switch

    Vehicle speed

    Vehicle speed sensor

    When the ECM determines that the engine speed is at idle, the fuel injection system is adapted for the
    idle control. The ECM regulates the amount of fuel injected corresponding
    to changes in load applied to
    the engine to keep engine speed constant. The ECM also provides the system with a fast idle control in
    response to the engine coolant temperature.

    NORMAL CONTROL
    Input/output signal line
    Engine speed

    Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)

    Control sleeve position

    Control sleeve position sensor

    ECM

    Accelerator position

    Accelerator position sensor

    Electric
    governor

    Vehicle speed

    Vehicle speed sensor

    The amount of fuel injected under normal driving conditions is
    determined according to sensor signals. The crankshaft position sensor (TDC) detects engine speed and the accelerator
    position sensor detects accelerator
    position. These sensors
    send signals to the ECM.
    The fuel injection data, predetermined
    by correlation
    between
    various engine speeds and accelerator positions, are stored in
    the ECM memory, forming a map. The ECM determines
    the
    optimal amount of fuel to be injected using the sensor signals
    in comparison with the map.

    Engine rpm —.
    SEF649S

    EC-111

    I

    ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    Fuel Injection System (Cont’d)
    FUEL TEMPERATURE

    I CD20E I

    COMPENSATION

    Input/output signal line
    Fuel temperature sensor

    Crankshaft position sensor (TOC)

    Control sleeve position sensor

    Fuel temperature

    Engine speed

    ECM

    Electric
    governor

    Control sleeve position

    The amount o»ffuel leaking at or around high-pressure parts inside fuel injection pump varies with fuel
    temperature and engine speed. This will result in a difference between the target amount of fuel injected
    and the actual amount. The ECM compensates for the actual amount depending on the signal from the
    fuel temperature sensor which detects fuel temperature.
    DECELERATION

    CONTROL

    Input/output signal line
    Accelerator switch (F/C)

    Accelerator position
    ECM

    Camshaft position sensor (PUMP)

    Engine speed

    Electric
    governor

    The ECM cuts power supply delivery to the electric governor during deceleration for better fuel efficiency. The ECM determines the time of deceleration according to signals from the accelerator switch
    (F/C) and camshaft position sensor (PUMP).

    EC-112

    ENGINE AND EMISSION

    BASIC CONTROL

    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

    ICD20E I

    Fuel Injection Timing System
    SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
    The fuel injection timing system provides the optimal fuel injection timing for the target amount of fuel
    injected according to engine speed. The timing is compensated when the vehicle is being driven or when
    starting depending on the engine coolant temperature.
    The ECM performs duty control on the timing control valve, allowing the valve to provide optimal fuel
    injection timing. The ECM also performs feedback control on the timing control valve using the signal
    from the needle lift sensor which detects the actual fuel injection timing.

    BASIC CONTROL
    Input/output

    signal line
    Engine speed

    Crankshaft position sensor (TOC)

    ECM

    Injection timing

    Needle lift sensor

    BTDC
    (degree)

    .~i

    The optimal fuel injection timing data, predetermined
    in proportion to engine speeds and amount of fuel injected, are stored
    in the ECM memory. The ECM uses the data to control the fuel
    injection timing.

    Amount of fuel
    injected

    i

    ~

    Injection
    timing
    control
    valve

    Engine rprn—+
    SEF650S

    ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION
    Input/output

    (When starting)

    signal line
    Engine speed

    Crankshaft position sensor (TOC)

    Engine coolant temperature

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    ECM

    Ignition timing

    Needle lift sensor

    Start signal

    Ignition switch

    For better startability
    under cool engine conditions,
    the fuel
    injection timing is compensated according to the engine coolant temperature.

    .~t
    Cii
    (J)

    C

    c:
    Q.>

    o 0:;:; E

    .~

    0

    c:
    .-

    0>

    n, «Incident Simulation Tests» in «HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT
    DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT».)
    2. «MANU TRIG»

    If the malfunction
    is displayed as soon as «DATA MONITOR» is selected, reset CONSULT to
    «MANU TRIG». By selecting «MANU TRIG» you can monitor and store the data. The data can be
    utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.

    I~

    SELECT

    MONITOR

    ITEM

    ECM INPUT SIGNALS
    MAIN SIGNALS
    SELECTION

    SETIING

    II__

    I~

    SET RECORDING COND

    AUTO TRIG
    HI SPEED

    I

    I

    MANU TRIG
    LONG TIME

    MANU TRIG
    HI SPEED

    FROM MENU

    S_T:_’A_R_T __

    _____
    «SETTING»

    1
    «AUTO TRIG»

    1
    «MANU TRIG»

    A malfunction can be

    A malfunction can not be

    displayed on «DATA

    displayed on «DATA

    MONITOR» screen

    MONITOR» screen

    automatically if detected.

    automatically even if
    detected.

    SEF529Q

    EC-135

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    Introduction

    I CD20E I

    Introduction
    Sensors

    ~

    .~.
    o

    Injection
    pump

    ECM

    ~

    SEF858S

    SEF233G

    The engine has an ECM to control major systems svch as fuel
    injection control, fuel injection timing control, glow control
    system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and
    instantly drives electronic fuel injection pump. It is essential
    that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
    same time, it is important that there are no problems such as
    vacuum leaks, or other problems with the engine.
    It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs
    intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may
    help prevent the replacement of good parts.
    A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A
    road test with CONSULT or a circuit tester connected should be
    performed. Follow the «Work Flow» on the next page.
    Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk
    with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint.
    The customer can supply good information about such
    problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms
    are present and under what conditions they occur. A «Diagnostic Worksheet» like the example on next page should be used.
    Start your diagnosis by looking for «conventional» problems
    first. This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an
    electronically controlled engine vehicle.

    SEF234G

    EC-136

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    I CD20E I

    Introduction

    Diagnostic Worksheet
    There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can
    make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
    In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It
    is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for
    a customer complaint.
    Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one shown below in
    order to organize all the information for troubleshooting.

    KEY POINTS
    WHAT
    WHEN
    WHERE
    HOW

    Vehicle & engine model
    Date, Frequencies
    Road conditions
    Operating conditions,
    Weather conditions,
    Symptoms
    SEF907L

    I

    WORKSHEET SAMPLE
    Customer
    Engine

    name

    MR/MS

    #

    Incident Date

    Model & Year

    VIN

    Trans.

    Mileage

    Manuf. Date

    In Service

    D Impossible

    o
    o

    D Startabi Iity

    Symptoms

    Idling

    D Driveability

    o

    Engine stall

    Incident occurrence
    Frequency
    Weather

    conditions
    Weather
    Temperature

    o

    when engine

    is warm

    Partial combustion

    when engine

    is cool

    o

    o

    Surge

    conditions

    o While
    o While

    Just after stopping

    D While loading

    At the time of start

    o

    Just after del ivery

    o

    In the morning

    o

    All the time

    lamp

    Fine

    idling
    decelerating

    Recently

    o

    At night

    Under certain

    o

    DRaining

    o

    Hot

    o

    Warm

    o

    During

    In the daytime

    o

    conditions

    In town

    o
    o

    At starting

    Snowing

    Sometimes

    I

    I

    I

    I

    o

    of

    Humid

    I

    I

    D Off road (up/down)

    Highway

    Not affected
    D While idling

    D At racing

    D While accelerating

    o

    o

    D While turning

    While decelerating
    speed

    I

    Turned

    on

    o

    I

    I

    10

    While cruising

    I

    J

    20

    Not turned on

    EC-137

    I

    I

    30

    (RH/LH)

    I

    I

    6,000

    4,000

    2,000

    In suburbs

    ]

    D Others [

    o
    o Cold
    o After warm-up

    Cool

    warm-up

    I

    o

    o

    o

    Lack of power

    Not affected

    0
    indicator

    o

    Knock

    While accelerating

    Vehicle

    Malfunction

    D Low idle

    ]

    0

    Driving

    High idle

    [

    Engine speed

    Road conditions

    o

    D Unstable

    ]

    [

    ]

    D Cold
    Engine conditions

    Others

    [

    D Stumble
    Others

    o

    but hard to start

    No fast idle

    D Others

    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o

    D Partial combustion

    D No combustion

    Partial combustion

    D Possible

    o

    to start

    Date

    I

    40

    ,

    I

    50

    I

    I

    60 MPH

    f

    8,000 rpm

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    I CD20E I

    Work Flow

    Work Flow
    CHECK IN

    Listen to customer complaints.

    (Get symptoms.)

    …………………………………………

    STEP I

    Check, print out or write down, and erase Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
    .

    STEP II

    No symptoms, except MIL
    lights up, or Malfunction

    Symptoms
    collected.

    Code exists at STEP II.
    Verify the symptom by driving in the condition the
    ……………………………………………………………………………..

    customer described.
    Normal Code
    (at STEP II)

    *1

    STEP III

    Malfunction Code
    (at STEP II)

    Verify the DTC by performing

    Choose the appropriate

    the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».

    .

    .

    action.

    *1 STEP IV

    STEP V

    *2

    Malfunction

    Code (at STEP II or IV)

    Normal Code (at both STEP II and IV)
    BASIC INSPECTION
    SYMPTOM BASIS (at STEP I or III)

    ……………………………………………………. ~
    Perform inspections
    according to Symptom
    Matrix Chart.

    STEP VI

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.

    REPAIR/REPLACE

    NG

    FINAL CHECK
    Confirm that the incident is completely fixed by performing BASIC INSPECTION
    and DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (or OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK).
    Then, erase the unnecessary

    CHECK

    ……………………………………

    STEP VII

    (already fixed) DTCs in ECM.

    OUT

    *1: If the incident cannot be duplicated, refer to GI section («Incident
    NOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT»).
    *2: If the on board diagnostic system cannot be performed,
    DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPL V», EC-162.

    Simulation Tests», «HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAG-

    check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer 10 «TROUBLE

    EC-138

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS
    Description

    STEP

    Work Flow

    I CD20E I

    for Work Flow

    DESCRIPTION

    STEP I

    Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom
    using the «DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET» as shown on the next page.

    occurred

    STEP II

    Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT) the Diagnostic Trouble
    Code (DTC), then erase the code. Refer to EC-125.
    Study the relationship between the cause, specified by DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
    (The IISymptom Matrix Chart» will be useful. Refer to EC-148.)

    STEP III

    Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
    The «DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET» is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT to the vehicle in DATA
    MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
    If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. Refer to GI section.
    If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.

    STEP IV

    Try to detect the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) by driving in (or performing) the «DTC CONFIRMATION
    PROCEDURE». Check and read the DTC by using CONSULT.
    During the DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)
    mode and check real time diagnosis results.
    If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. Refer to GI section.
    In case the «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» is not available, perform the «OVERALL FUNCTION
    CHECK» instead. The OTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified «check» is an effective alternative.
    The liNG» result of the «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is the same as the DTC detection.

    STEP V

    Take
    If the
    If the
    tions

    STEP VI

    Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes.
    Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) «Harness
    Layouts».
    Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT set in IIDATA MONITOR
    (AUTO TRIG)» mode.
    Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with
    CONSULT. Refer to EC-151.
    The IIDIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE» in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A
    short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. For details,
    refer to GI section (‘ICircuit Inspection», IIHOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL
    INCIDENT»).
    Repair or replace the malfunction parts.

    STEP VII

    Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
    Perform the IIDTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» and confirm the normal code (Diagnostic trouble code No.
    55) is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different
    method from the previous one.
    Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) DTC in ECM.
    (Refer to EC-125.)

    the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
    malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.
    normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. Refer to EC-140. Then perform inspecaccording to the Symptom Matrix Chart. Refer to EC-148.

    EC-139

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

    Basic I»sp_ec_t_io_»

    ,

    C_D_2_0E_1

    Basic Inspection
    Precaution:
    Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical loads
    applied;

    Headlamp switch is OFF,

    Air conditioner switch is OFF,

    Rear defogger switch is OFF,

    Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc .

    SEF1421

    BEFORE

    STARTING

    1. Check service records for any recent
    repairs that may indicate a related
    problem, or the current need for
    scheduled maintenance.
    2. Open engine hood and check the following:
    • Harness connectors for improper connections
    • Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, or
    improper connections
    • Wiring for improper connections,
    pinches, or cuts
    3. Using priming pump, bleed air from
    fuel system. Refer to «Fuel Filter
    Check» in MA section.

    CONNECT CONSULT TO THE VEHICLE.
    Connect IICONSULT» to the data link
    connector for CONSULT and select
    «ENGINE» from the menu. Refer to
    EC-130.

    DOES ENGINE

    START?

    Yes

    No

    Turn ignition switch OFF,
    wait 5 seconds and then
    start engine. If engine
    fails to start, check diagnostic trouble code
    (DTC).

    Run engine for 10 minutes.

    CHECK

    «*

    MONITOR

    *

    CKPS-RPM (TDC)

    NO FAIL

    D

    IDLE SPEED.

    Read engine idle speed in
    «DATA MONITOR» mode with
    CONSULT.

    725rpm

    OR

    Check idle speed using tachometer tester.
    725::i:25

    __

    R_E_C_O_R_D __

    rpm

    I
    SEF690S

    (Go to @ on next page.)

    EC-140

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection
    Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
    @

    If]

    a

    ~(~l@)YE~S

    CHECK INJECTION TIMING.
    1. Set No. 1 piston at TDC on its compression stroke.
    TOC: Without painted mark
    2. Remove injection tubes and air
    bleeder on the back of injection
    pump.
    3. Set dial gauge so its indicator points
    to somewhere
    between 1.0 and 2.0
    mm (0.039 and 0.079 in) on the scale.
    4. Turn crankshaft
    1 turn clockwise and
    check that dial gauge indicates the
    same value again.
    5. Turn crankshaft counterclockwise
    about 100 degrees, then turn crankshaft clockwise slowly, and set dial
    gauge indicator to 0 mm at the position it stops.
    6. Turn crankshaft clockwise
    and set
    the pump timing mark to the mark on
    the crankshaft
    pulley.
    Pump timing mark:
    Yellow painted mark
    7. Read plunger lift.
    Plunger lift:
    0.38 :l: 0.03 mm (0.0150 :l: 0.0012 in)
    at pump timing mark
    • When repeating the checking, start
    with step 5.

    .OK

    • Bleed air from fuel system.
    • After this inspection,
    unnecessary
    diagnostic
    trouble code No. might
    be displayed.
    Erase the stored memory in ECM.
    Refer to «ON BOARD
    DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
    DESCRIPTION»
    (EC125) and «HOW TO
    ERASE DTC» (EC-125).
    OK

    INSPECTION

    NG

    Adjusting
    1. If plunger lift is not within the specified value, adjust by turning injection
    pump .
    • If indication is smaller than the specified value, turn pump body away from
    engine .
    • If indication is larger than the specified value, turn pump body towards
    engine.
    2. Tighten injection pump securing bolts
    and nuts.
    Nut:
    ~:
    13 -18 N.m

    (1.3 — 1.8 kg-m, 9 — 13 ft-Ib)
    Boll:
    ~:

    49 — 59 N.m

    (5.0 — 6.0 kg-m, 36 — 43 ft-Ib)
    3. Remove dial gauge and install
    bleeder with new washer.
    4. Install injection tubes.
    Flare nut:
    ~:
    22 — 25 N.m

    air

    (2.2 — 2.5 kg-m, 16 — 18 ft-Ib)
    5. Bleed air from fuel system.
    Refer to «Water Draining, Fuel Filter
    Check and Replacement»
    of «ENGINE
    MAINTENANCE» in MA section.

    Go to

    m

    END

    II

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    I CD20E I

    Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
    ENGINE RELATED ITEMS
    Diagnostic
    trouble
    code
    No.
    11

    Detected items
    Malfunction is detected when …

    (Screen terms for
    CONSULT, IlSELF-DIAG
    RESULTS» mode)
    Camshaft position sensor
    (PUMP) circuit

    • An improper signal from the sensor is detected by the ECM during engine running.

    [CAM POS SEN (PUMP))
    13

    Engine coolant tempera-

    • An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is detected by the ECM.

    ture sensor circuit
    (COOLANT TEMP SEN)
    14

    Vehicle speed sensor circuit
    ‘(VEHICLE SPEED SEN)

    15

    when vehicle is being driven.

    Control sleeve position

    • An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is detected by the ECM.

    sensor circuit

    • An improper voltage signal from the sensor is detected by the ECM during

    (CONT SLEEV POS SEN)
    17

    • The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from the sensor is detected by the ECM even

    Adjustment resistor circuit

    engine running.
    • An excessively high or low voltage from the resistor is detected by the ECM.

    (ADJ RESISTOR)

    18

    Fuel injection feedback 2
    (F/INJ FIB 2)

    • The fuel injection feedback system (consists of the ECM, electric governor and
    control sleeve position sensor) does not operate properly.

    Abbreviations for Quick Reference of cCDTCCONFIRMATION PROCEDURE»
    IGN: ON : Turning the ignition switch ON is required for checking the function of the sensor, switch, solenoid and circuit.
    RUNNING : Running engine is required for checking the function of the sensor, switch, solenoid and circuit.
    LIFTING : Lifting up the vehicle, running engine and spinning wheels are required.
    DRIVING : Driving the vehicle in the specified pattern is required.
    Abbreviations for Quick Reference of cCOVERALLFUNCTION CHECK»
    IGN: ON : Turning the ignition switch ON is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).
    RUNNING: Running engine is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).
    LIFTING : Lifting up the vehicle, running engine and spinning wheels are required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if
    one exists).
    DRIVING : Driving the vehicle in the specified pattern is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).

    EC-142

    TROUBLE

    General Description
    I CD20E
    Diagnostic Trouble Code (Ole) Chart (Cont’d)

    DIAGNOSIS

    -:

    *1

    DTC
    Check Items
    (Possible

    Cause)

    • Harness

    Not applicable

    *2

    Confirmation

    Overall

    MIL

    Reference

    Procedure

    Function

    Illumination

    Page

    Quick Ref .

    Check

    or connectors

    (The sensor
    • Camshaft

    circuit

    position

    • Harness

    is open or shorted.)
    sensor

    RUNNING

    Lighting

    up

    EC-167

    IGN: ON

    Lighting

    up

    EC-171

    LIFTING

    RUNNING

    Lighting

    IGN: ON

    Lighting

    (PUMP)

    or connectors

    (The sensor
    • Engine

    circuit

    coolant

    • Harness
    • Vehicle

    circuit

    speed

    • Harness

    sensor

    is open or shorted.)

    EC-175

    sensor

    or connectors

    (The sensor
    • Control

    is open or shorted.)

    temperature

    or connectors

    (The sensor

    circuit

    sleeve

    • Harness

    is open or shorted.)

    position

    up

    EC-178

    sensor

    or connectors

    (The resistor

    circuit

    • Adjustment

    resistor

    • Main

    supply

    power

    is open or shorted.)

    circuit

    (ECM terminals

    EC-183

    @, @)

    and fuse
    • Harness
    (Electric

    or connectors
    governor

    and control

    cuit)
    • Electronic

    sleeve

    position

    sensor

    cir-

    RUNNING
    (DRIVING)

    fuel injection

    up

    EC-187

    pump

    • ECM
    • Electric

    I

    governor

    *1: • This is Quick Reference of «DTC CONFIRMATION
    PROCEDURE».
    Details are described
    in each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.
    *2: • The COVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is a simplified
    and effective way to inspect a component
    or circuit.
    In some cases, the «OVERALL
    FUNCTION CHECK» is used rather than a «DIAGNOSTIC
    TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».
    When no OTC CONFIRMATION
    PROCEDURE is available,
    the liNG» result of the OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK can be
    considered
    to mean the same as a OTC detection .
    • During an «NG» OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK, the DTG might not be confirmed .
    • This is Quick Reference of «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK».
    Details are described
    in each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.

    EC-143

    II

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Descrielion
    CD20E
    Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart (Cont’d)
    ENGINE RELATED ITEMS
    Diagnostic
    trouble
    code
    No.
    21

    Detected items

    Fuel injection timing feedback
    (F/INJ TIMG FIB)

    22

    23

    Malfunction is detected when …

    (Screen terms for
    CONSULT, «SELF-DIAG
    RESULTS» mode)

    • The fuel injection timing feedback system (consists of the ECM, injection timing
    control valve and needle lift sensor) does not operate properly.

    Fuel injection feedback
    (F/INJ FIB)

    • The fuel injection feedback system (consists of the ECM, electric governor and
    control sleeve position sensor) does not operate properly.

    Accelerator switch (Fuel

    • The OFF (short) signal is sent to the ECM for a certain period of time even when
    the accelerator pedal is not being depressed.

    cut) circuit
    [ACCEL SW (F/C)]

    25

    Electric governor circuit
    (ELECTRIC GOV)

    • Electric governor circuit is shorted.

    27

    ECM1
    (ECM1)

    • ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.

    28

    Cooling fan
    (OVER HEAT)

    • Cooling fan does not operate properly. (Overheat)
    • Cooling system does not operate properly. (Overheat)
    • Engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method .

    31

    ECM2
    (ECM2)

    • ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.

    Abbreviations for Quick Reference of «OTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE»
    IGN: ON : Turning the ignition switch ON is required for checking the function of the sensor, switch, solenoid and circuit.
    RUNNING: Running engine is required for checking the function of the sensor, switch, solenoid and circuit.
    LIFTING : Lifting up the vehicle, running engine and spinning wheels are required.
    DRIVING : Driving the vehicle in the specified pattern is required.
    Abbreviations for Quick Reference of «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK»
    IGN: ON : Turning the ignition switch ON is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).
    RUNNING: Running engine is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).
    LIFTING : Lifting up the vehicle, running engine and spinning wheels are required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if
    one exists).
    DRIVING : Driving the vehicle in the specified pattern is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).

    EC-144

    I

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS

    Diagnostic

    I CD20E I

    General Description

    Trouble

    Code (DTC) Chart (Cont’d)
    -:

    DTC
    *1
    Confirmation
    Overall
    Procedure
    Function
    Quick Ref.
    Check

    Check Items
    (Possible Cause)

    Not applicable

    *2
    MIL
    Illumination

    Reference
    Page

    • Harness or co.nnectors
    (Injection timing control valve, Needle lift sensor and
    Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) circuit]
    • Injection timing control valve
    • Needle lift sensor
    • Crankshaft position sensor

    RUNNING
    (DRIVING)

    EC-192

    • Main power supply circuit (ECM terminals @, Gill)
    and fuse .
    • Harness or connectors
    (Electric governor and control sleeve position sensor circuit)
    • Electric governor
    • Electronic fuel injection pump
    • ECM

    RUNNING
    (DRIVING)

    Lighting up

    EC-187

    IGN: ON

    Lighting up

    EC-196

    RUNNING
    (DRIVING)

    Lighting up

    EC-187

    IGN: ON

    Lighting up

    EC-2OO

    IGN: ON
    (RUNNING)

    Lighting up

    EC-202

    Lighting up

    EC-200

    • Harness or connectors
    (The switch circuit is shorted.)
    • Accelerator switch (F/C)
    • Harness or connectors
    (Electric governor circuit is shorted.)
    • ECM
    • ECM
    • Harness or connectors
    (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Cooling fan
    • Radiator hose
    • Radiator
    • Radiator cap
    • Water pump
    • Thermostat
    • Fan belt
    • Engine coolant temperature sensor
    For more information, refer to «MAIN 12 CAUSES OF
    OVERHEATING». (EC-210)
    • ECM

    IGN: ON

    *1: • This is Quick Reference of «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».
    Details are described in each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.
    *2: • The «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is a simplified and effective way to inspect a component or circuit.
    In some cases, the «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is used rather than a «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».
    When no DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is available, the «NG» result of the OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK can be
    considered to mean the same as a DTC detection .
    • During an «NG» OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK, the DTC might not be confirmed .
    • This is Quick Reference of «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK».
    Details are described in each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.

    EC-145

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    I CD20E I

    Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart (Cont’d)
    ENGINE RELATED ITEMS
    Diagnostic
    trouble
    code
    No.
    34

    Detected items
    Malfunction

    (Screen terms for

    is detected when …

    CONSUL T, «SELF-DIAG
    RESUL TS» mode)
    Needle lift sensor circuit
    (NEEDLE LIFT SEN)

    • An improper signal from the sensor is detected by the ECM during engine running.

    Fuel cut solenoid valve 1

    • Fuel cut solenoid valve circuit is shorted.

    (FUEL CUT S/V 1)

    • Fuel cut solenoid valve does not operate properly.

    37

    Fuel cut solenoid valve
    short
    (FCV SHORT)

    • Fuel cut solenoid valve circuit

    38

    Fuel cut solenoid valve 2
    (FUEL CUT S/V 2)

    • Fuel cut solenoid valve circuit is broken.

    42

    Fuel temperature sensor
    circuit
    (FUEL TEMP SENSOR)

    • An excessively

    high or low voltage from the sensor is detected by the ECM.

    43

    Accelerator position sensor circuit
    (ACCEL POS SENSOR)

    • An excessively

    high or low voltage from the sensor is detected by the ECM.

    47

    Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
    [CRANK pas SEN (TDC)]

    • An improper signal from the sensor is detected by the ECM during engine running and cranking.

    48

    Governor cut circuit
    (GOV CUT CIRCUIT)

    • Accelerator

    No failure
    (NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
    FAILURE INDICATED)

    No malfunction

    36

    55

    is shorted.

    • Fuer cut solenoid varve does not operate properly.

    switch is shorted.

    • Camshaft position sensor (PUMP) or ECM does not operate properly.

    is detected by the ECM.

    Abbreviations for Quick Reference of IIDTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE»
    IGN: ON : Turning the ignition switch ON is required for checking the function of the sensor, switch, solenoid and circuit.
    RUNNING : Running engine is required for checking the function of the sensor, switch, solenoid and circuit.
    LIFTING
    : Lifting up the vehicle, running engine and spinning wheels are required.
    DRIVING : Driving the vehicle in the specified pattern is required.
    Abbreviations for Quick Reference of «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK»
    IGN: ON : Turning the ignition switch ON is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).
    RUNNING : Running engine is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).
    LIFTING
    : Lifting up the vehicle, running engine and spinning wheels are required for the ECM to detect a malfunction
    one exists).
    DRIVING : Driving the vehicle in the specified pattern is required for the ECM to detect a malfunction (if one exists).

    EC-146

    (if

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    I CD20E
    Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart (Cont’d)
    -:
    DTC
    *1
    *2
    Confirmation
    Overall FuncMIL
    Procedure
    tion Check
    Illumination
    Quick Ref.

    Check Items
    (Possible Cause)

    Not applicable

    Reference
    Page

    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Need Ie Iift sensor

    RUNNING

    EC-212

    • Harness or connectors
    (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Fuel cut solenoid valve

    RUNNING

    Lighting up

    EC-215

    RUNNING

    Lighting up

    EC-215

    RUNNING

    Lighting up

    EC-215

    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Fuel temperature sensor

    IGN: ON

    EC-219

    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Accelerator position sensor
    • Accelerator position switch
    • Accelerator switch (FIG)

    IGN: ON

    Lighting up

    EC-223

    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)

    RUNNING

    Lighting up

    EC-227

    • Harness or connectors
    [Accelerator switch and camshaft position sensor (PUMP)
    circuit]
    • Accelerator switch (FIG)
    • Camshaft position sensor (PUMP)
    • ECM

    RUNNING

    Lighting up

    EC-231

    • Main power supply circuit (ECM terminals @,
    and fuse.

    Gill)

    • Main power supply circuit (ECM terminals @,
    and fuse.
    • ECM

    Gill)

    • No failure

    *1: • This is Quick Reference of «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».
    Details are described in each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.
    *2: • The «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is a simplified and effective way to inspect a component or circuit.
    In some cases, the «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK» is used rather than a «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».
    When no DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is available, the liNG» result of the OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK can be
    considered to mean the same as a DTC detection .
    • During an liNG» OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK, the DTC might not be confirmed .
    • This is Quick Reference of «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK».
    Details are described in each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XX.

    EC-147

    I

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    I CD20E I

    General Description

    Symptom Matrix Chart
    SYMPTOM

    ~
    :r:

    a.:
    ()

    x

    ~

    t-

    a:

    «

    t-

    en
    w
    cr:

    j:::

    a:

    -J
    -J

    «
    t-

    0
    -J
    0

    I—

    en
    w
    z

    0

    z

    aa:

    w

    (,)

    a:

    w

    ::>

    a

    «
    J:

    SYSTEM
    — Basic engine
    control system

    a:

    «

    en

    ~
    ~(fJ

    I—

    «
    a:

    z

    w

    0

    w

    a.
    0
    -J

    0
    ()

    ~
    w

    Z

    Ol

    c:
    .;:

    c:
    ‘;:

    :;:

    ;:

    «:;:

    …..

    ~

    W

    u; z
    w

    J:

    «5 ~
    0

    :5

    t0

    I—

    a:

    :5

    I—

    a.

    I—

    «
    .J

    W

    u.

    z
    ::r:
    ~

    (!’

    w

    z

    (!)

    t-

    z

    a:

    a:

    I—

    a:

    0
    I-0

    « I-«
    ….
    en en
    0
    Z

    a:

    0

    I—

    C1

    a:

    «
    «
    J: J:

    0
    Z

    :>

    9
    I—

    «

    UJ

    a:

    .J
    ill
    ()

    (!)

    UJ
    0
    Z

    0
    W
    -J

    i=
    «
    o:

    Z

    a:
    ::>

    0

    w
    ::c

    ~

    az

    a
    a:
    ::>

    en

    z
    0

    z

    0

    W
    -J

    i=
    «
    z

    z

    0
    I—

    w

    0

    0:

    ~

    w

    0

    0
    au.
    0

    ()

    z

    ~

    0

    Z

    I—

    i=
    «
    a:
    w

    i=
    z
    ::>
    :r:

    0

    ill

    U
    U

    -J

    cr:

    ….J
    ill

    w

    Q

    :r:

    (!)

    ::>
    0

    a:

    z

    i=

    «

    z

    0

    0

    a-

    w

    ::>

    ~

    aZ

    z

    (J)

    0

    ()

    w

    i=

    ~
    en
    ()

    a..

    ::>

    0

    ….J

    ()
    -J

    a:
    0

    ::>
    u.

    j:::

    6

    W

    W

    W

    J:

    w

    W

    ~
    ~
    en
    ~

    0

    CD
    :> z w« >
    en en>
    :r: en
    a: w w ()
    z ~
    w u () «
    :J 0
    -J
    -J
    (!)

    Q

    (J)

    en

    >
    0

    X

    w

    X

    w

    1ac:

    co

    w

    ~
    ~
    en

    0
    w

    C1>

    ()

    E

    a:

    .-

    0

    a.

    w

    z

    J:

    z
    m

    Z

    0
    0

    9 z

    (!)

    0

    ~
    « w ..J
    « ~
    9
    -J
    ….. a:
    ~ a: Q
    0
    enw a.« (,)« 0
    ~
    0
    J: en
    a- J: -I
    ….J
    i=

    ce

    z
    «
    -J

    0

    en

    ~

    I-I-Z

    :c

    ~
    w
    z

    « «
    tI !. enI-en

    t-

    «

    W

    az az

    Ol

    -J

    :E

    ::J

    z E
    2.- ~
    0
    >a:
    W

    11i
    ()

    l:
    « .~

    =0

    co

    c:

    …. 0
    :c W« :gc:
    ~

    0

    0

    Injection
    timing

    AA

    Advanced
    Retarded

    Electric injection
    pump mainframe
    Injection

    nozzle

    Glow system
    Engine body

    • •
    0 0
    • •
    • • • •

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    • •
    • •

    0

    AC AD

    0
    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    AG AH AJ AK AL ~M

    AF

    0

    0

    AE

    0

    0

    0



    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0
    0

    0

    • •

    EGR system
    Air cleaner
    ducts

    AB

    and

    • •

    ; High Possibility Item
    Possibility Item
    *1: Insufficient or excess amount. Governor malfunction may be the cause.
    *2: Depends on open-valve pressure and spray pattern.
    *3: Caused mainly by insufficient compression pressure,
    *4: Symptom varies depending on off-position of air duct, etc.

    o ; Low

    EC-148

    0

    0

    0

    0

    • •
    • •
    • •

    AP

    HA


    0

    0

    0

    0

    ::>

    ~

    Z

    .r::.

    en

    ()

    C1>

    0

    ()

    ()

    E0

    >-

    .0
    «0

    C1>

    2

    0>

    as

    ()

    Co

    C1>

    Q)
    «0

    C1>

    C1>

    :;
    ()

    c

    Q)

    ~

    «’
    ()


    0

    ..J

    .0


    0

    c:

    I-

    .2

    ii

    New CT/CS

    +J

    .0
    a.

    (‘0.

    0

    ::J

    u.

    ()

    c:

    C1>

    «-

    ~C1>

    ex:

    0

    EC-140

    0

    EC-140

    0


    0

    0.
    E
    >(J)

    ‘0
    C1>

    :;

    tii
    C1>

    LL

    *1

    EC-117

    *2

    EC-233
    EM section

    EC-238

    MA section

    0

    *3

    *4

    TROUBLE

    I CD20E I

    DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
    -c::

    C:
    0

    ,~

    «OQ)

    .2

    Feature of symptom
    Check point

    UQ)e:

    ro ….

    (0

    .Q~

    «ig2

    2
    Q)

    ~u.:

    g

    5-fi

    en:::
    e: 3:

    ~()o
    Q)Q)e:
    o.e:

    U

    E’o

    Ii

    ….ro

    ~

    Oe:o
    OQ)»o

    «….,

    E

    <0

    Reference
    page

    2en

    e:

    LO
    «….,

    w

    0

    0
    w

    w

    0

    Can be detected by CONSULT?

    0 0

    0

    0

    Malfunction

    0 0

    0

    Fuel cut

    co
    «….,

    C’)

    0
    w

    0
    w

    e:

    <0
    0>

    0
    w

    0
    w

    w

    0

    0

    0 0 0

    0

    0 0

    0

    e:

    E~~
    C«S»O

    ~~~

    «S»»:J

    enu

    CQ)«S
    Q).-.

    ….
    ~

    o.,~

    ~

    E-

    E

    8.22

    CJ

    LO

    0′>

    C’)

    «….,

    N
    0
    w

    N
    0
    w

    N
    0
    w

    CJ
    CJ

    CJ
    CJ

    0
    w

    0
    w

    0

    0
    0 0 00

    0

    e:

    w.~

    CJ
    0>

    0

    e:

    c,Q
    .o;t::

    co

    «….,

    co

    Q)

    :J

    «S~

    ~oen

    «So

    ‘E

    e:oe:
    :J ….

    o 0>E.S (5

    -u..

    e:

    0

    E

    lamp illuminates.

    ro

    0>

    +:i

    ..c:

    indicator

    .a

    U

    0

    c’C+:i

    E

    0
    e:
    e:

    SE.

    e:

    ‘E

    .0

    ~

    ….-t>

    e:

    Q)

    0>2

    e:

    .Q
    13

    -Q)o
    o
    :J’-

    0>

    U

    B~

    0

    0 0

    0

    0

    00

    0

    00

    0

    ..c:
    en

    C

    0

    Q)

    0.
    0

    en

    e:0en
    e:
    Q)

    Cii

    e:

    SYSTEM
    ECCS system

    :2
    ‘en

    0
    0.

    C/’)

    0

    ~0

    (ij
    ..c: ….
    en»-

    EG
    «S~

    0″(3

    :J

    0.

    E

    2
    C
    «S

    (5
    0
    U
    Q) …..

    «~’:;
    OlU

    ill’~

    0

    0
    +:i

    en

    e:
    Q)

    en
    «0
    Q)
    Q)

    0.

    en

    Q)

    (3

    :c
    Q)

    Q)

    >

    >

    «i

    .3

    ‘en

    0
    0.

    ‘3

    0

    ‘u

    «en

    ~

    >

    Q)
    Q)

    c

    en

    Q)

    Sen

    g
    ….

    >

    f:
    .u
    U;

    Q)

    e:

    :J

    8’~ ::0«

    f:

    0
    C

    Cii
    >

    0
    0>
    U

    ‘L:

    13
    Q)
    W

    e»E

    EC-149

    C

    ..c:

    Q)

    en

    cn

    c:

    Q)

    Q)

    0.
    0

    0.
    0

    0.
    0

    ‘3

    ‘S

    ‘3
    ‘3

    6’

    ‘u

    ~
    .u
    0

    e

    c

    «3

    ‘u
    Q)

    ~
    ‘(3

    0

    ~

    (;
    en
    C
    Q)

    ..c:

    .u

    0

    ‘=-

    >
    Cii
    >

    en
    c
    Q)
    en

    U

    .B
    .~

    0en

    «0

    Q)

    en

    Q)

    e:
    Q)

    Cii

    0
    C.

    (5

    Cii

    0

    Ol
    e:

    :~
    e:

    0

    «»B
    Q)

    E
    EGCS

    3:

    Q)

    z

    c:

    C

    0 0

    ..c:
    en

    Q)

    ~

    .3 e:
    Q)
    f: en
    e:

    0,

    .c:
    en

    ‘0
    e:

    0.
    0

    ‘u

    0
    en

    ‘u

    0

    .c:
    en

    ‘3

    .u

    e:
    Q)

    ~
    ~

    en

    0

    en

    :2
    ::>

    (;

    e:
    :J

    Q)

    0.
    0

    CL

    ..c:
    en

    «0

    0

    Cii

    Cii
    Q)
    U
    U

    .S

    ci.

    Q;

    (f)

    ~ g-

    (5
    c

    o

    o

    «0

    LO

    ow

    ‘»Oc

    00

    ~~

    co
    (‘i)

    (‘i)

    o

    CI

    ow

    CI

    co

    M
    CJ

    ow

    o
    o

    by CONSULT?

    indicator

    lamp illuminates.

    IWHITE SMOKE

    I

    BLACK SMOKE

    EXCESSIVE Oil

    o

    oUJ

    o
    o

    LC)
    CI

    ow

    W

    CI

    ow

    o

    0

    00

    0

    00

    o
    o
    o

    «
    I

    DEAD BATTERY (UNDER CHARGE)
    SMOKE COLOR

    ~

    CI
    <0

    M

    o

    Can be detected

    ABNORMAL

    8~

    CJ
    <0

    W

    Fuel cut

    Malfunction

    c:

    c c
    en en
    Q) Q)
    o 0

    UJ

    ~CJ

    Q;
    o
    ;eO,

    en

    ‘0 «5

    Q)

    c:
    ‘0>
    c:

    page

    ‘»0

    ~E

    (/)
    Q)

    Reference

    c
    en
    Q)
    o

    n;

    B
    Feature of symptom
    Check point

    ‘0

    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o

    o

    0-

    «

    o

    o

    CONSUMPTION

    EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
    OVERHEAT/HIGH

    ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

    SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

    «
    J:

    IDUNG VIBRATION

    (!)

    :E ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING

    ~

    00

    «

    LOW IDLE

    «

    POOR ACCELERATION

    w

    «

    LACK OF POWER

    SPOT

    DURING DRIVING

    «

    o

    0

    o
    o

    0

    o

    o
    o
    o

    o

    co

    «

    o

    AT IDLE
    HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS HOT
    HARD/NO START/
    RESTART (EXCP. HA)

    0

    «
    ()

    WHEN DECELERATING
    ENGINE STALL

    o
    o

    o

    SPAR K KNOCK/DETONATION
    HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT

    HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS COLD

    «

    NO START (without first firing)

    «

    o
    o
    o

    o

    o

    0

    o
    o
    o

    o

    NO START (with first firing)

    Malfunction

    o
    .c
    o.c ~c
    c: e
    (f)

    Q)

    ::J

    CJ)

    g. c

    o

    .c
    (f)

    c

    Q)
    Q.

    C

    o

    Q)
    Q.

    ‘0
    Q)

    >

    (U

    >

    «0

    ‘0
    C
    Q)

    £

    >0.

    Q.
    ::J

    o
    (f)

    ec
    0
    U

    (f)

    Q)

    Q;

    E

    ~o

    Cl.

    ECCS

    EC-150

    (f)

    o

    .c
    (f)

    C
    Q)
    Q.

    o

    SYSTEM
    ECCS system

    o

    .c

    o

    o

    Q)
    Q.

    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o
    o

    o

    u.

    ~ HI IDLE

    o
    o

    00

    «

    o

    h:

    ..,

    ‘:;

    ~

    ‘0
    co

    «i
    >
    «0

    ‘0
    C
    Q)

    (5
    (f)

    e.-=:

    oa:

    …..u

    w

    .c::J

    CJ

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS

    CONSULT
    Mode

    General
    Reference

    I CD20E I

    Description

    Value in Data Monitor

    Remarks:
    • Specification data are reference values .
    • Specif-ication data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
    * Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
    MONITOR ITEM

    CONDITION

    SPECIFICATION

    CKPS.RPM (TDC)
    CKPS.RPM (REF)

    • Tachometer: Connect
    • Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT value.

    Almost the same speed as the CONSULT value.

    CKPS.RPM-PUMP
    COOLAN TEMP/S

    • Engine: After warming up

    More than 70°C (158°F)

    VHCL SPEED SE

    • Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CONSULT
    value

    Almost the same speed as
    the CONSULT value

    FUEL TEMP SEN

    • Engine: After warming up

    More than 40°C (104 OF)

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)

    Accelerator

    ACCEL POS SEN

    Accelerator pedal: depressed

    Approx. 4.0V

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)

    Accelerator

    ON

    Except above

    OFF

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)

    Accelerator pedal: released

    CLOSE

    Accelerator

    pedal: slightly open

    OPEN

    • Ignition switch: ON
    (Engine stopped)

    Accelerator

    pedal: released

    Accelerator pedal: slightly open

    FULL ACCEL SW

    ACCEL SW (FC)

    OFF ACCEL SW

    pedal: released

    pedal: depressed

    0.40 — 0.60V

    ON
    OFF

    C/SLEEV POS/S

    • Engine: After warming up

    1.0 — 3.5V

    SATTERY VOLT

    • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

    11 — 14V

    PIN POSI SW

    • Ignition switch: ON

    START SIGNAL

    • Ignition switch: ON -. START -. ON

    AIR COND SIG

    • Engine: After warming up, idle the
    engine

    Shift lever: Neutral

    ON

    Except above

    OFF
    OFF -. ON -. OFF

    Air conditioner

    IGNSW

    • Ignition switch: ON -. OFF

    ACT INJ TIMG




    INJ TIMG C/V

    DECELER F/CUT

    Engine: After warming up
    Air conditioner switch: ..OFF»
    Shift lever: «N»
    No-load

    switch: «OFF»

    Air conditioner switch: «ON»
    (Compressor operates.)

    ON
    ON

    -+

    OFF

    Idle

    -9.5 to -12.0°

    2,000 rpm

    -10.0 to -15.5°

    • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine.

    • Engine: After warming up

    OFF

    Approx. 50%

    Idle

    OFF

    When accelerator pedal is released
    quickly with engine speed at 3,000
    rpm or more .

    ON

    FUEL CUT S/V

    • Ignition switch: ON -. OFF

    ON ~ OFF

    AIR COND RLY

    • Air conditioner

    OFF -. ON

    GLOW RLY

    • Refer to EC-xx.

    switch: OFF -. ON

    EC-151

    II

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    I CD20E I

    General Description

    CONSULT Reference Value in Data Monitor
    Mode (Cont’d)

    COOLING FAN

    • When coofing tan is stopped.

    OFF

    • When cooling

    at low speed.

    lOW

    at high speed .

    HI

    fan operates

    • When cooling fan operates

    EGRC SOL/V A

    EGRC SOL/V B

    THROT RLY

    SPECIFICATION

    CONDITION

    MONITOR ITEM




    Engine: After warming up
    Air conditioner switch: «OFF»
    Shift rever: IIN»
    No-load




    Engine: After warming up
    Air conditioner switch: «OFF»
    Shift lever: «N»
    No-load




    Engine: After warming up
    Air conditioner switch: «OFF»
    Shift lever: IIN»
    No-load

    Idle

    ON

    2,800 rpm

    OFF

    Idle

    ON

    2,800 rpm

    OFF

    Idle

    ON

    Racing engine from idle to 2,500 rpm

    OFF

    EC-152

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS

    General

    Description

    Major Sensor Reference
    Mode
    The following are the major sensor reference graphs in «DATA
    (Select «HI SPEED» in «DATA MONITOR» with CONSULT.)

    ACCEL POS SEN, C/SLEEV POS/S,

    I CD20E I

    Graph in Data Monitor

    MONITOR»

    mode.

    ACT INJ TIMG

    Below is the data for «ACCEL pas SEN», «C/SLEEV POS/S» and «ACT INJ TIMG» when revving
    quickly up to 3,000 rprn under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
    Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.

    0>

    f:>

    LO

    0>

    engine

    II

    .,..

    an-

    a ~0

    9 +

    z >
    w

    C/)

    0
    x

    ~~-

    :

    (J)

    0

    a..

    ~-

    -l

    w
    0
    0

    «

    0>

    9

    • «ACCEL POS SEN» should increase
    while depressing the accelerator
    pedal and should decrease while
    releasing it.

    :.:—:

    co
    0

    LO

    u;-

    9>

    ——-

    :

    0

    cD

    a ~0

    9 +

    >
    (J)

    en

    0
    x

    ~-

    ~-

    ..
    ……

    •••

    -.—

    ………

    M …….

    …………………………….

    ~.-.,,»
    »’-»-‘-

    :»1″‘

    …»_.-….

    0

    a..

    :

    -l
    (J)

    «‘-_

    co
    0

    0>

    LO

    9

    9>

    N-

    (:)

    0-


    _._—_ __ _-_

    ..

    ..

    ……

    ……. _..

    —.._._—- —

    —.-..-…….-

    • «ACT INJ TIMG» should increase
    when depressing the accelerator
    pedal and should decrease when
    the pedal is released.

    ~-I

    CJ

    ~
    ~

    ~-

    J

    ~

    «

    :

    C»)

    ~0

    9 +

    t0

    …….. -..

    0

    cD

    0

    …… -..

    ~-

    >

    W
    W

    • «C/SLEEV POS/S» should increase
    when depressi ng the accelerator
    pedal and should decrease when
    the pedal is released.

    I

    co

    0

    cD

    co
    Q)
    I


    SEF663S

    EC-153

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    General Description

    I CD20E I

    ECM Terminals and Reference Value
    PREPARATION

    t

    1. ECM is located beneath heater unit. For this inspection:
    • Remove foot duct and floor duct No.1 .
    • Remove instrument lower cover.

    Floor~
    No. 1

    SEF664S

    2. Remove ECM harness protector.

    3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector connected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
    • Open harness securing clip to make testing easier .
    • Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
    • Data is for comparison and may not be exact.

    SEF3671

    Be sure ECM unit is properly grounded before checking.
    ECM harness

    protector

    SEF665S

    EC-154

    TROUBLE

    General Description
    I CD20E
    ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

    DIAGNOSIS

    I

    ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT

    ~0
    ~

    ‘—_

    …..

    SEF064P

    ECM INSPECTION TABLE
    Specification
    TERMINAl

    data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and @ (ECCS ground).

    WIRE
    COLOR

    ITEM

    CONDITION

    NO.

    I Engine
    l

    Throttle control solenoid
    valve

    L

    is running.’ (Warm-up condition)
    Approximately

    0.4V

    Idle speed

    I Engine

    L

    DATA
    (DC Voltage and Pulse
    Signal)

    is running.l (Warm-up condition)

    Racing engine from idle to 2,500 rpm

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    IEngine is running.1
    I,gnition switch «OFF»I
    4

    WIG

    L
    ECCS relay (Self-shutoff)

    °-

    1V

    For a few seconds after turning ignition
    switch «OFF»

    /Ignition switch «OFF»I

    L

    A few seconds passed after turning ignition
    switch IIOFF»

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)
    Approximately

    I Engine

    L

    is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    Idle speed

    0.9 — 1.3V

    (V)
    10
    5

    o

    : :~:’1(;~; ::: : :~:: :~:: :~:: :
    SEF550S

    5

    L/OR

    Tachometer
    Approximately
    (V)

    10

    IEngine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    L

    Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

    .

    . .
    — .. :.,

    0.9 — 1.3V
    .

    ,,

    .

    .

    .
    .

    :.. ‘: .

    5

    o
    .. :.~:
    .. ‘.. to.ms, ,:

    :.. ‘:’ .. :..
    :.. ,:.. :, ..
    SEF551S

    0.6 — 5V

    10

    ORIB

    Fuel temperature sensor

    I Engine

    is running.1

    EC-155

    Output voltage varies
    with fuel temperature.

    ,

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    I CD20E
    ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Conl’d)
    TERMINAL
    NO.

    WIRE

    ITEM

    COLOR

    IEngine
    13

    LG

    DATA
    (DC Voltage and Pulse
    Signal)

    CONDITION

    Cooling fan relay (High
    speed)

    t

    is running.’

    Cooling fan is not operating.
    Cooling fan is operating at low speed.

    ‘Engine is running.

    L

    f

    Approximately
    Cooling fan is operating

    LG/R

    Cooling fan relay (Low
    speed)

    L

    O.5V

    at high speed.

    ‘Engine is running.’
    14

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    Cooling fan is not operating.

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 …14V)

    IEngine is running.1

    L

    Approximately

    0.4V

    Approximately

    0.4V

    Cooling fan is operating.

    IEngine is running.’

    L
    15

    G

    Air conditioner

    relay

    Both Ale switch and blower switch are
    liON».

    IEngine is running.’

    L

    Ale switch is «OFF».

    I’gnition switch «ON»
    16

    OR

    L

    Glow lamp

    18

    OR/L

    indicator

    Approximately

    I

    Glow lamp is «OFF».

    I’gnition switch «ON»
    Malfunction
    lamp

    I

    I

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 …14V)
    Approximately

    !Engine is running.’

    L

    1.4V

    Glow lamp is «ON».

    I’gnition switch liON»

    L

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    1.4V

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    Idle speed

    0.6 …5.0V
    19

    GIS

    Engine coolant temperature sensor

    /Engine is running.’

    I,gnition switch «ON»
    20

    SlY

    Output voltage varies
    with engine coolant temperature.

    I

    Start signal
    I,gnition switch ·’START»

    Approximately

    I

    OV

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 …14V)

    IEngine is running.1

    L
    21

    R/L

    Ai r cond itioner switch

    Both air conditioner switch and blower
    switch are «ON» (Compressor operates).

    IEngine is running.1

    L

    Air conditioner

    pgnition switch «ON»

    22

    G/OR

    Neutral position switch

    L

    switch is «OFF».

    OV

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 …14V)

    I
    Approximately

    OV

    Gear position is «Neutral».

    I,gnition switch «ON»I

    L

    Approximately

    Except the above gear position

    EC-156

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    I

    TROUBLE

    TERMINAL
    NO.

    WIRE
    COLOR

    General Description
    I CD20E
    ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

    DIAGNOSIS

    ITEM

    CONDITION

    I

    DATA
    (DC Voltage and Pulse
    Signal)

    Ignition switch «ON»
    23

    G

    Accelerator position
    sensor

    L Accelerator

    0.4 — 0.5V
    pedal released

    /Ignition switch «ON»

    L Accelerator

    I
    Approximately

    4.0V

    pedal fully depressed

    o — Approximately
    (V)

    IEngine is running.1
    26

    PUIR

    Vehicle speed sensor

    E

    4.2V

    Lift up the vehicle.
    In 1st gear position
    Vehicle speed is 40 km/h.

    4rlIUllifl
    ~ ::~’: :’!:: »: ::.»:::
    … :… :… :…
    ..~. .50ms
    . . .:…
    . :… :… :…

    .. ~~:

    SEF552S

    28
    33

    BIW

    Camshaft position sensor (PUMP) ground

    IEngine is running.’ (Warm-up condition)

    L

    Approximately

    I,gnition switch «ON»

    29

    PU

    Accelerator switch (F/C)

    L Accelerator

    l/Y

    Accelerator position
    switch (Idle)

    /Ignition switch «ON»

    32

    Y

    L

    OV

    I

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    Approximately

    OV

    Approximately

    OV

    Accelerator pedal depressed

    I

    Accelerator pedal released

    I’gnition switch «ON»

    L

    I

    pedal released

    llgnition switch «ON»
    Accelerator position
    switch (Full)

    I
    Approximately

    L Accelerator
    L

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    Accelerator pedal depressed

    I,gnition switch «ON»
    31

    I

    pedal released

    I,gnition switch «ON»

    L

    OV

    Idle speed

    I

    Accelerator pedal fully depressed

    EC-157

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    II

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —

    ECM Terminals
    TERMINAL

    I CD20E I

    General Description

    and Reference Value (Cont’d)
    DATA

    WIRE
    ITEM

    COLOR

    (DC Voltage and Pulse

    CONDITION

    Signal)

    NO.

    Approximately

    0.06 —

    0.07V

    I Engine

    L

    (V)

    is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    .

    10 .. …….
    _.. _.. : :
    5 » ~.. ~ -: :

    Idle speed

    :.. ‘:… :…
    :.. ,:.. -:’..

    …….

    o

    .. ~~:’
    .. :.. ‘:
    . . :— ~Ol1Js .: … :… :
    ….
    . . . . . .

    34

    w

    :…
    : .,
    .

    SEF553S

    Needle lift sensor
    Approximately

    0.07 —

    O.08V

    I Engine

    L

    is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    (V)
    10

    :

    -0

    •••

    5

    Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

    o

    SEF554S

    I’gnition

    38

    SR

    switch «OFF»

    I

    OV

    Ignition switch

    BATTERY VOLTAGE

    (Ignition switch «ON»I

    39
    43

    IEngine
    B

    ECCS ground

    L

    (11 — 14V)

    Engine ground
    is running.1

    (Probe this terminal

    e tester

    Idle speed

    measuring.)
    Approximately
    (V)

    IEngine is running. I (Warm-up
    L Idle speed

    condition)

    …..

    .

    .

    .

    OV
    .

    44

    w

    Crankshaft

    .

    10 .. ~.. ~.. :… :… :… :… :…
    ……
    5
    .
    ,

    o

    …….

    .. ~~:
    .. :. .10ms
    .:
    .. . . .

    …..

    40

    with

    probe when

    :

    :

    :..

    : :
    ..,

    :..

    SEF555S

    position sen-

    sor (TDC)

    Approximately
    (V)

    I Engine

    L

    is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

    .

    . .
    . .
    …….
    .

    OV
    .
    .

    .
    .

    10 .. ~.. ~.. :… :… :… :.. ‘» ..
    5

    o
    .~

    «:’

    .

    ‘fdrTi’s ‘:» ‘:»
    .

    .

    .

    .

    .

    , .., ..
    SEF556S

    EC-158

    TROUBLE

    TERMINAl
    NO.

    WIRE
    COLOR

    General Description
    I CD20E
    ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Conl’d)

    DIAGNOSIS

    ITEM

    CONDITION

    DATA
    (DC Voltage and Pulse
    Signal)
    Approximately

    I Engine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    L

    I

    OV

    (V) .
    4 ……………………..

    o …… , ……..
    .
    . . .
    …. ~~

    Idle speed

    ,

    ……………………….

    2

    »

    .

    : ‘.

    .

    .

    ……….

    .
    ,

    :… :. 1Oms. ~.. ~.. ~.. ~..

    41
    45

    L

    Camshaft position sensor (PUMP)

    I

    SEF557S

    Approximately

    I Engine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    L

    Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

    OV

    (V) .
    ‘4 ………………………
    2 :… :… :.. ~.. ~.. ~.. : .. : ..

    :A:

    o :

    A

    :A:A:

    Y

    :

    V:

    ~:A

    v: v: :V

    :

    ,

    .. : .. : .. ~ ..
    .:… .:..10ms.;
    . . . .. ;. .. :. .. :. ..

    …. ~:

    SEF558S

    42

    G/R

    64

    GIB

    65

    GV/L

    I Engine is running.1
    Data link connector for
    CONSULT

    L

    Idle speed (CONSULT is connected and
    turned on)

    I

    46

    PIS

    Adjustment resistor

    I’gnition switch liON»

    47
    52

    Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) ground

    I Engine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    OR

    48

    VIR

    Accelerator position
    sensor power supply

    50

    B/W

    Sensors’ ground

    L

    I Engine

    51

    53
    57

    BR

    R

    Accelerator position
    sensor ground

    Control sleeve position
    sensor power supply

    OV

    Approximately

    OV

    Approximately

    4 — 9V

    Approximately 0.6 — 4.6V
    (Voltage varies with
    numbers of adjustment
    resistors.)
    Approximately

    OV

    Approximately

    5V

    Approximately

    OV

    Approximately

    OV

    Approximately

    2.6V

    Idle speed

    Ilgnition switch liON»

    L

    Approximately

    J

    is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    Idle speed

    I Engine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    L

    Idle speed

    I Engine

    L

    (V) .
    .

    . . . .
    10 ………………….
    .
    ..
    5

    is running.1

    »

    ••

    0

    •••

    0

    ••

    II

    ••

    ~

    .

    …..

    .

    …..

    •••••

    o :… :… :… :.. ~.. : .. : .. : ‘ .

    Idle speed

    : … :~~
    :… :. O:2~s

    .. : .. : .. :.
    ~.. ~.. ~.. : ..
    SEF559S

    56
    61

    R

    Power supply for ECM

    I Ignition

    switch liON»

    EC-159

    I

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    I CD20E
    ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
    TERMINAl

    WIRE
    COLOR

    DATA
    ITEM

    CONDITION

    NO.

    (DC Voltage and Pulse
    Signal)
    Approximately

    2.6V

    (V)

    62
    66

    W

    Control sleeve position

    IEngine is running.,

    L

    sensor ground

    .

    10 : : : :.. ~.. : .. : .. : ..
    5 :»..; : :.. : .. : .. : .. : ..

    o :… : : :.. ~.. : .. :.. : ..

    Idle speed

    :

    :~:

    :

    :. O:2~s

    ..

    : .. : .. : ..

    ~.. ~.. ~.. ~ ..
    SEF560S

    Approximately

    2.6V

    (V)

    63
    67

    B

    Control sleeve position
    sensor

    I Engine

    L

    .

    1 0 :»’:»’:»’;»

    is running.,

    ~.. : .. : .. : ..

    5 : ; :-..:.. : .. : .. : .. : ..

    o : ; :… :.. ~.. : .. :.. : ..

    Idle speed

    :
    :.

    .

    :~

    .. :.. : .. : ..
    :.O.2ms.;
    . . . . .. ; .. : .. ; ..
    .

    .

    .

    .

    .

    .

    .

    SEF561S

    70

    W/l

    Power supply (Back-up)

    101
    107

    OR/l

    Electric governor

    Ilgnition switch «OFF»

    I Engine

    L

    I

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    is running.,

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    Idle speed

    Approximately

    8.6 — 8.8V

    IEngine is running.1

    L
    102
    108

    Idle speed

    :… :.~:
    .. :.. : .. : ..
    . » ?m~ ; .. ; .. : .. : ..
    . . .
    SEF562S

    BR/R

    Electric governor ground
    Approximately

    I Engine

    L

    7.8 — 9.8V

    is running.,

    Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

    :

    :~:

    :.

    :.
    2ms
    .
    .

    .

    .. :.. : .. : ..
    ; .. ; .. : .. : ..

    . . . .

    SEF563S

    103

    GY

    EGRC-solenoid

    valve A

    IEngine is running.1 (Warm-up
    L Idle speed
    IEngine is running. I (Warm-up
    L

    condition)
    Approximately

    condition)

    Engine speed is 2,800 rpm

    EC-160

    0.4V

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    f

    TROUBLE

    TERMINAL
    NO.

    WIRE
    COLOR

    I CD20E
    DIAGNOSIS — General Description
    ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
    CONDITION

    ITEM

    I

    DATA
    (DC Voltage and Pulse
    Signal)
    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)
    (V) ,

    I Engine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    L

    40 ;»’;’,,;’..;»:»:»:»:-‘

    2~~

    Idle speed

    …. :.~~
    …..

    104
    110

    SB

    ………..
    5ms

    ,

    ••

    »

    ••

    Injection timing control
    valve

    #

    1

    ••

    SEF564S

    Approximately

    9 — 14V

    (V) .

    I Engine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    L

    Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

    40: … ;… ;… ;.. : .. : .. : .. : ..

    2~~::~::::
    ~:: ::: ~~.~~.: 1: : ;, : ;: : ~:
    SEF565S

    106
    112
    118

    IEngine is running.1
    SlY

    ECCS ground

    L

    Approximately

    OV

    Approximately

    0.4V

    Idle speed

    I Engine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    L
    109

    P

    Idle speed

    EGRC-solenoid valve B

    I Engine is running.1 (Warm-up condition)

    L
    111

    W/R

    Glow relay

    113
    115

    P/W

    Fuel cut solenoid valve

    116
    117

    SIP

    Engine speed is 2,800 rpm

    Refer to IlGlow Control System».

    I

    llgnition switch «OFF»

    Power supply for ECM

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    Approximately

    OV

    Ilgnition switch «ON» I

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    I

    BATTERY VOLTAGE
    (11 — 14V)

    !’gnition switch «ON»

    EC-161

    I

    I CD20E

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
    Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit

    I

    BAT.ERY

    EC-MAIN-01

    I

    IGNITION SWITCH
    or START

    ON

    fb

    ~I~~j
    W/L

    FUSE
    10A

    1~5AI

    1251

    W/L

    ~

    1~1(~~1~

    1~~~~1~

    ~W/B

    I~I:~

    W/8

    ~$1

    *__
    1>
    *__
    1>
    ~-O-:

    L

    B

    (1): LHD models
    (8): RHO models
    -:
    -:

    Detectable line
    for DTe
    Non-detectable
    line for DTe

    B/Y

    I$~~~—————i4J1
    s

    I

    B

    S/Y

    I

    I

    B

    B

    1..J

    I

    S/Y

    L1

    J:.

    J:.

    (~

    (~)

    Refer to last page
    (Fa Idaut

    EillITIIIillIil ~BR

    ~I

    II~~

    4 5 6 7 8

    W

    page) .

    fTIililW)
    GY

    ~

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC241

    EC-163

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
    I CD20E
    Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)

    m
    II

    ECM

    ~

    CONNECTORII

    is

    ~

    38

    INSPECTION START

    Start engine.
    Is engine running?

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY-I.
    1. Turn ignition switch
    «ON».
    2. Check voltage between
    ECM terminal @ and
    ground with CONSULT
    or tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage
    If NG, check the following .
    • 10A fuse
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM
    and ign ition switch
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    Yes

    SEF065P

    ~i)@a
    II

    ‘l9CONNECTORII

    ECM

    70

    ~OK

    III

    Go to
    «CHECK
    GROUND CIRCUIT» on
    next page .

    • SEF056R

    .,

    ~i)
    II

    ECM
    ,

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II.
    1. Stop engine.
    2. Check voltage between ECM terminal

    HCONNECTORII

    NG

    r—-.-

    @,

    20

    1R

    Engine coolant temper-

    Voltage

    Resistance

    (V)

    (kQ)

    -10 (14)

    4.4

    7.0 — 11.4

    20 (68)

    3.5

    2.1 — 2.9

    50 (122)

    2.3

    0.68 — 1.00

    90 (194)

    1.0

    0.236 — 0.260

    6

    9

    4

    C1l

    2

    u

    ~

    ature
    °C (OF)

    Acceptable

    1.0

    0.8
    ‘en
    ~ 0.4
    1;)

    0.2
    0.1

    -20

    0

    20

    40

    60

    80

    100

    (-4) (32) (68)(104)(140)(176)(212)
    Temperature

    Diagnostic
    Trouble Code
    No.
    13

    °C (OF)

    SEF012P

    Malfunction

    • An excessively

    is detected when …

    high or low voltage from the sensor

    is entered to ECM.

    Check Items
    (Possible Cause)
    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Engine coolant temperature

    sensor

    DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

    PROCEDURE

    M

    1) Turn ignition switch «ON».
    2) Select «DATA MONITOR» mode with CONSULT.
    3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
    ———OR
    ———~
    1) Turn ignition switch «ON» and wait at least 5 seconds.
    ~
    2) Turn ignition switch «OFF», wait at least 5 seconds
    and then turn «ON».
    3) Perform diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic
    results).
    ~

    EC-172

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS

    I CD20E

    FOR DTC 13

    J

    Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
    (Cont’d)

    EC-ECTS-01
    ENGINE COOLANT
    TEMPERATURE
    SENSOR
    ~

    ~

    l!4=ll

    GIB

    B/W

    It

    Irfll W)

    _.

    8/W

    -:

    If

    GIB

    (b):

    :

    B/W

    ffi ~)
    CIJ~
    GIB

    +@

    I

    LHD models
    RHO models

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    I

    +—~ ~t
    L

    G/8

    I~I

    GIB

    (Elan

    .CMID

    GIB

    B/W

    It~ ~!oPil$’l
    CMID
    GIB

    B/W

    B/W

    1r&1 (EIb!)
    ~@
    B/W

    t—) ~J
    L

    It

    If

    GIB

    B/W

    rm

    rrf9n
    TW

    GND
    -A

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    @

    Ffi2T3l(~)

    ~~

    (llg)

    GY

    l3lIDID

    GY

    Refer to last page

    ~«231)
    ~GY

    (Fa ldout

    page) .

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC244

    EC-173

    II

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 13
    I CD20E
    Engine Coolant Temperature (ECl) Sensor
    {Coni’ d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE

    INSPECTION START

    m

    m

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn ignition switch ClOFF».
    2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminal @
    and ground with CONSULT or tester.
    Voltage:
    Approximately 4.9V

    ~io
    G1v
    ~
    SEF541P

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Check harness continuity between
    terminal G) and engine ground.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    @,@D
    @),@ID
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM
    and engine coolant
    temperature sensor
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    NG

    @,@D
    @,@ID
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM
    and engine coolant
    temperature sensor
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    ~

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Engine coolant temperature sensor).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    on next page.
    OK
    SEF542P

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble

    is not fixed.

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    EC-174

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors
    • Harness connectors

    OK

    ~i5cUb

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors
    • Harness connectors

    OK

    x3
    I!l

    NG

    NG

    Replace engine coolant
    temperature sensor.

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DlC 13
    I CD20E
    Engine Coolant Temperature (Eel) Sensor
    (Cont’d)

    I

    COMPONENT INSPECTION
    Engine coolant temperature sensor
    Check resistance

    as shown in the figure.

    Temperature

    SEF152P

    20

    Q)

    50 (122)

    0.68 — 1.0

    90 (194)

    0.236 — 0.260

    If NG, replace
    Acceptable

    (J

    ~ i>:g

    ‘Ci)

    ~

    0.4

    0.2
    0.1

    kQ

    2.1 — 2.9

    6

    4
    2

    Resistance

    20 (68)

    1B
    ~

    °C CF)

    -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
    (-4) (32) (68)(104)(140)(176)(212)
    Temperature °C (OF)
    SEF012P

    EC-175

    engine coolant temperature

    sensor.

    II

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR Ole 14
    Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)

    The vehicle speed sensor is installed
    in the transaxle.
    It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal
    to the speedometer.
    The speedometer
    then sends a signal to

    Vehicle speed
    sensor

    the ECM.

    AEC110

    Diagnostic
    Trouble Code
    No.
    14

    Malfunction

    Check Items
    (Possible Cause)

    is detected when ….

    • The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle
    speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is
    being driven.

    *

    ‘tl

    MONITOR

    VHCL SPEED SE
    PIN POSI SW

    NO FAIL

    D

    OVERALL

    20kmlh

    OFF

    • Harness or connector
    (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or
    shorted.)
    • Vehicle speed sensor

    FUNCTION CHECK

    Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle
    speed sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be
    confirmed.
    Jack up drive wheels.
    Start engine.
    3) Read vehicle
    speed
    sensor
    signal
    in «DATA
    MONITOR» mode with CONSULT.

    00 ~~
    ___

    RE_C_O_R_D __

    I

    The vehicle speed on CONSULT should be able to
    exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
    suitable gear position.

    SEF941N

    ~

    I!Pn ~

    CONNECT

    lA1 £)
    II

    ECM

    ~ ~

    19

    CONNECTOR

    r:::t
    (0/'»‘1

    II

    26

    ———-

    @

    1)
    2)
    3)
    4)

    OR ———Jack up drive wheels.
    Start engine.
    Rotate drive wheel by hand.
    Check voltage
    between
    ECM
    ground with tester.

    terminal

    @

    Voltage should vary between approx. 0 — 4.2V.

    «:» SEF811R

    EC-176

    and

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTe 14
    Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Conl’d)

    EC-VSS-01

    FUSE

    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWEA.

    (JIB)
    ~

    (6):
    (8):

    LHD models
    AHO models

    -:

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    -:

    COMBINATION
    METER
    (SPEEDOMETER)
    @
    @)

    1~

    A

    1~

    R/Y

    ~

    B/R

    0

    I

    ~

    R/Y

    R

    R/Y

    R

    R/Y

    ~ IIJl

    B/R

    PUlA

    I

    -:!:@

    R

    I~~<—~)

    L
    ~
    PIS

    P/8

    II?)I (~lQ.1)
    2C

    CHID

    PIS

    It~~:W>itl
    CHID

    )

    S/W

    L

    -:
    -:

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    ~t

    8/W

    PIS


    0

    (b): LHD models
    (8): RHO models

    B/W

    ‘!ill CHID
    12A

    ~101)

    S/W

    kJ

    P/S

    It

    B/W

    l:sl

    15.01

    QADJ

    GND
    -A

    I~
    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    ~

    Refer to last page
    ~

    ~

    OAIL

    BAIA

    (~)

    I~

    OR/L

    I

    o

    ~~—‘

    ~

    It

    W/B

    (ELECTRIC
    GOVERNOR)

    BR/R

    ~
    CE234)
    ~
    ICiJ~ill—-iCiJI

    A

    OA/L

    BAIA

    Iii(~~)
    ~1>
    ~~3~I~~· luIm~~~il 1c!J~~ -lrtJl I.~ (&~~tl 1$1::
    rni~:(b) ~i t—-) t ) tJ
    0

    I JUNCTION

    W/L

    Ifiii

    ~

    L

    W/B

    W/B

    W/B

    W/B

    IEM:i

    ~

    ~

    A

    OAIL

    OA/L

    BAIA

    BAIA

    OR/L

    OR/L

    BR/R

    BR/R

    2

    CONNECTORS)

    W/L

    A

    L

    I

    I

    WIL

    (b):

    _.

    m

    ~

    LHD models

    @: RHO models

    -:

    I

    GAIL

    BA/R

    rn

    ~4!-

    m

    ~ ECCS
    AELA Y

    ~ ~

    m

    SSOFF

    ~JOINT
    CONNECTOR

    I :=1 1$……
    ‘—1-;=1

    IkiJl ~~5)

    GR/L

    OR/L

    BR/R

    BR/R

    It It I I

    BIP

    I

    WIG

    I

    W/8

    I _I'»

    WIG

    Detectable
    line
    for OTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    ~

    A

    BIP

    BIP

    GAIL

    OA/L

    BR/R

    BA/R

    IfiIBn

    IfiT7n

    11~11

    11~71

    11~21

    11~81

    REV

    REV

    GE+

    GE+

    GE-

    GE-

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    @)

    ~

    :

    :

    LHO models
    RHO models

    _.

    Detectable

    line

    for DTG

    IQ~OI

    -:

    SR

    Non-detectable

    line for OTC

    I

    BR

    IlfJ,@Zl
    ‘9F (E234)
    BR

    I

    SR

    m

    ~~
    5B

    INJECTION PUMP
    (INJECTION TIMING
    CONTROL

    Itl~I$I~

    VALVE)

    S8 (MID

    (E244)

    t

    ~
    58

    I

    S8
    S8 (MID

    t—i
    I
    i.

    S8

    r=I::, (@o)

    »ll’@
    58

    58

    S8

    11~41

    11~O I
    TCV

    TeV

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    (M]g)

    ~~

    ~

    ~GY

    ~

    B

    ~

    :

    I

    @:

    PU

    m

    -:

    ACCELERATOR
    DEPRESSED SWITCH

    …..

    _-

    LHD models
    RHO models

    Detectable
    line
    for Ole
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    -:

    (FC)

    @

    RELEASED

    JOINT

    ~

    CONNECTOR-10
    ~

    B

    1_____

    B

    ~=_=_~ —10
    B

    t
    B

    I~I

    B

    IciJl ;~:

    ~~~

    8

    8

    : RHO models
    @: Models with air
    conditioner

    -:
    -:

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for OTC

    if,
    S

    S

    -!- -!~C~)

    Refer to last page

    !iBf

    2

    5 7
    3 6

    ~,
    SR

    m, CE18)
    SR

    SR

    ~m,~

    ~

    (FaIdaut

    GY

    page) .

    GY

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 10B 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 11B

    HEC266

    EC-205

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 28
    Cooling Fan (Overheat) (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    I CD20E I

    PROCEDURE

    INSPECTION START

    CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED
    OPERATION.

    NG Check coolin,9 fan low
    —.
    speed cOl1trol circuit.
    (Go to

    1. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2 and
    cooling fan relay-3.
    2. Turn ign ition switch «ON».
    3. Perform «COOLING FAN» in
    «ACTIVE TEST» mode with

    I PROCEDURE A

    ,.)

    00
    I

    I

    ACTIVE TEST

    CONSULT.

    OFF

    COOLING

    FAN

    = ==

    MONITOR

    @

    = = =:.

    COOLAN TEMP/S

    ==H ‘=11

    D

    88°C

    3. Set temperature lever at full
    cold position.
    4. Turn air conditioner switch
    «ON».
    5. Turn blower fan switch «ON».
    6. Run engine at idle for a few
    minutes with air conditioner
    operating.

    I

    L~W

    OR
    2. Start engine.

    7. Make sure that cooling fan
    operates at low speed.

    Cooling fan

    t

    OK

    I!J

    CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED
    OPERATION.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Reconnect cooling fan relay-2 and
    cooling fan relay-3.
    SEC163BA

    I!J

    ACTIVE TEST.

    COOLING

    ==

    =

    COOLAN

    ~~I

    FAN

    D

    3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
    4. Turn ignition switch «ON».

    00

    OFF

    MONITOR

    CONSULT.
    OR

    ——

    00

    TEMP/S

    LOWI~

    5. Perform «COOLING FAN» in
    «ACTIVE TEST» mode with

    MEF314F

    4. Turn air conditioner switch and
    blower fan switch «OFF».
    5. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
    6. Connect 1500 resistor to
    engine coolant temperature
    sensor harness connector.
    7. Restart engine and make sure
    that cool ing fan operates at
    higher speed than low speed.
    ~OK
    @
    (Go to EC-210.)

    MEC4758

    EC-206

    NG

    ~

    Check cooling fan high
    speed control circuit.
    (Go to’ PROCEDURE B ,.)

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DlC 28
    Cooling Fan (Overheat) (Cant’ d)

    I

    ~IV0~
    1t

    PROCEDURE

    A

    INSPECTION START

    3

    7 5

    2

    1

    SEF596S

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between terminals
    G)
    @ @ and ground with CONSULTor
    tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage

    NG

    ~

    I

    I

    OK

    Check the following.
    • 10A fuse
    • 30A fusible links
    • Harness for open or
    short between cooling
    fan relay-1 and fuse
    • Harness for open or
    short between cooling
    fan relay-1 and battery
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors .

    ..
    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan
    motor-2 harness connector.
    Ii] 3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and terminal G)
    (motor-1), terminal (J) and terminal G) (motor-2).
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    ~
    4. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ (motor-1, 2) and body
    ground.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    Repair harness
    nectors.

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    or con-

    OK

    Ii

    ~Iv

    ~15
    11

    3

    7 5

    2-

    EOO~lvnTh
    Cooling

    fan

    1

    Cooling

    ~iWfan

    motor-1

    SEF599S

    ~ ~Iv~iv
    fan
    motor-1

    3 4

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Cooling fan relay-1).
    Refer to «COMPONENT
    EC-212.
    OK

    @

    COOlingEffij
    1 2

    fan
    motor-2

    @!D,@
    • Harness for open or
    short between cooling
    fan relay-1 and ECM
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    motor-2

    ~

    coolingEOO
    1 2

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal
    @ and terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    3 4

    SEF862S

    EC-207

    NG
    INSPECTION»,

    Replace

    cooling

    fan relay.

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DlC 28
    Cooling Fan (Overheat) (Cont’d)
    CID

    fiI&5@a~e5
    II

    ECM

    ~CONNECTORII
    14

    I CD20E I

    ~
    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Cooling fan motors).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»,
    EC-212.

    ~
    ~

    Replace cooling fan
    motors.

    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    SEFeOoS

    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    [i1

    I

    flIiv 0~

    PROCEDURE

    B

    Cooting fan

    re’ai;_

    INSPECTION START

    ctFf-b

    [i1

    Cooling fan
    relay-3

    Jl

    3

    7 5

    2

    1

    SEF601S

    CHECK POWER SUPPL V.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2 and
    cooling fan relay-3.
    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Check voltage between cooling fan
    relay-3 terminals G), @ and ground,
    and between cooling fan relay-2 terminals (!), @ and ground with CONSULT or tester.
    Voltage: Battery voltage
    OK

    EC-208

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness for open or
    short between cool ing
    fan relay-2, 3 and 30A
    fusible link
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    TROUBLE

    I CD20E I

    DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 28
    Cooling Fan (Overheat) (Cont’d)
    @

    1
    CHECK GROUND

    3
    Cooling fan
    relay-2

    &
    7 5

    2 —

    1

    CIRCUIT.

    NG

    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan
    motor-2 harness connector.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and terminal @, terminal @ and terminal @, terminal (J) and body ground.

    Repair harness or connectors.

    1:1

    a1B

    ltn.

    Cooling
    fan motor
    -1 harness
    connector

    D

    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    I

    4. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and terminal @, terminal @ and terminal @, terminal (J) and body ground.
    Continuity

    should exist.

    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK

    II
    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    SEF602S

    D

    NG

    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ and terminal @.

    @!D,@
    • Harness for open or
    short between cooling
    fan relay-2, 3 and ECM
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    Continuity should exist.

    If OK, check harness for short.

    ~8)~~iv

    OK

    3Cooling fan
    relay-3

    &
    7 5
    2 — 1

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Cooling fan relay-2, 3).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»,
    EC-212.

    2

    3 4
    ~

    Cooling
    fan motor
    -2 harness
    connector

    CHECK COMPONENTS
    (Cooling fan motors).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»,
    EC-212.

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.

    ~Oi8T
    II

    ECN
    13

    ‘ff CONNECTORII

    ~Oi8T

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    3
    7 5
    ~2

    1

    Cooling fan
    relay-2, 3

    NG

    Replace cooling fan
    relays.

    NG

    Replace cooling fan
    motors.

    OK

    OK

    SEF603S

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    INSPECTION END

    SEF125PA

    EC-209

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC’ 28
    Cooling Fan (Overheat) (Cont’d)

    I CD20E I

    @
    Hose adapter

    II

    ~

    CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK.
    Apply pressure to the cooling system
    with a tester, and check if the pressure
    drops.
    Testing pressure:
    157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
    Pressure should not drop.
    CAUTION:
    Higher than the specified pressure may
    cause radiator damage.

    II

    Check the following for
    leak .
    • Hose
    • Radiator
    • Water pump
    Refer to LC section
    («Water Pump»).

    NG

    Replace radiator cap.

    NG

    Replace thermostat

    OK

    II

    CHECK RADIATOR CAP.
    Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
    Radiator cap relief pressure:
    78 — 98 kPa (0.78 — 0.98 bar, 0.8 — 1.0
    kg/cm2, 11 — 14 psi)
    OK

    III
    SLC755AB

    NG

    CHECK THERMOSTAT.
    1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
    It should seat tightly.
    2. Check valve opening temperature and
    valve lift.
    Valve opening temperature:
    88°C (190°F) [standard]
    Maximum valve lift:
    10 mm/100°C (0.39 in/212°F)
    3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F)
    below valve opening temperature.
    For details, refer to LC section
    («Thermostat»).
    OK

    SLC343

    Check engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to «COMPONENT
    INSPECTION», EC-175.

    Replace engine coolant
    temperature sensor.

    OK
    If the cause can not be isolated, go to
    IIMAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING»
    on next page.

    INSPECTION END

    Perform FINAL CHECK by the following procedure after repair
    is completed.
    1. Warm up engine. Run the vehicle for at least 20 minutes. Pay
    attention to engine coolant temperature gauge on the instrument panel. If the reading shows an abnormally high
    temperature, another part may be malfunctioning.
    2. Stop vehicle and let engine idle. Check the intake and
    exhaust systems for leaks by listening for noise or visually
    inspecting the components.
    3. Allow engine to cool and visually check for oil and coolant
    leaks. Then, perform «OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK».

    EC-21 0

    TROUBLE

    I CD20E I

    DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 28
    Cooling Fan (Overheat) (Cont’d)

    MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING
    Inspection item

    Engine

    Step

    OFF

    1




    2

    Blocked
    Blocked
    Blocked
    Blocked

    radiator
    condenser
    radiator grille
    bumper

    Equipment

    Condition

    Reference page

    • Visual

    No blocking

    • Coolant mixture

    • Coolant tester

    50 — 500/0coolant mixture

    See «RECOMMENDED
    FLUIDS AND
    LUBRICANTS» in MA
    section

    3

    • Coolant level

    • Visual

    Coolant up to MAX level
    in reservoir tank and
    radiator filler neck

    See «Changing Engine
    Coolant», «ENGINE
    MAINTENANCE» in MA
    section

    4

    • Radiator cap

    • Pressure tester

    59 — 98 kPa
    (0.59 — 0.98 bar, 0.6 — 1.0
    kg/cm2, 9 — 14 psi)

    See «System Check»
    «ENGINE COOLING
    SYSTEM» in LC section

    ON*2

    5

    • Coolant leaks

    • Visual

    No leaks

    See «System Check»
    «ENGINE COOLING
    SYSTEM» in LC section

    ON*2

    6

    • Thermostat

    • Touch the upper and
    lower radiator hoses

    Both hoses shou Id be
    hot

    See «Thermostat» and
    «Radiator», «ENGINE
    COOLING SYSTEM» in
    LC section

    ON*1

    7

    • Cooling fan

    • CONSULT

    Operating

    See «TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 28»,
    EC-203.

    OFF

    8

    • Combustion gas leak

    • Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer

    Negative

    ON*3

    9

    • Coolant temperature
    gauge

    • Visual

    Gauge less than 3/4
    when driving

    • Coolant overflow to
    reservoir tank

    • Visual

    No overflow during driving and idling

    See «Changing Engine
    Coolant», «ENGINE
    MAINTENANCE» in MA
    section

    OFF*4

    10

    • Coolant return from
    reservoir tank to radiator

    • Visual

    Should be initial level in See «ENGINE
    MAINTENANCE» in MA
    reservoir tank
    section

    OFF

    11

    • Cylinder head

    • Straight gauge feeler
    gauge

    0.1mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping)

    See «Inspection», «CYLINDER HEAD» in EM
    section

    12

    • Cylinder block and
    pistons

    • Visual

    No scuffing on cylinder
    walls or piston

    See «Inspection», «CYLINDER BLOCK» in EM
    section

    *1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
    *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
    *3: Drive at 90 km/h (55MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
    *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
    For more information, refer to «OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS» in LC section.

    EC-211

    II

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

    I CD20E I

    FOR DlC 28

    Cooling Fan (Overheat) (Cont’d)
    COMPONENT INSPECTION
    Cooling fan relays-1, -2, -3
    Check continuity between terminals

    @ and

    00, @

    Conditions

    Continuity

    12V direct current supply betweenterminals

    Yes

    G) and @

    No current supply

    SEC2028

    and (J).

    No

    If NG, replace relay.

    Cooling fan motors-1 and -2
    1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
    2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
    check operation.
    Cooling fan motor-2
    harness connector

    Terminals
    Speed
    (:

    @)

    NLS
    13•41

    -:

    w

    -:

    f

    I
    I
    «»

    Wh1

    ~

    o

    LHO models
    RHO mode Is

    Detectable line
    for Ole
    Non-detectable
    line for Ole

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR
    -10
    (M85)

    l4=!J
    B

    CHID

    7J

    I

    ~
    ~~

    B

    B

    Iltml (MID Iftn @

    +

    ‘=r=’ (Ei0i)
    B

    (Ei24)

    B

    t—f
    I

    B

    IltJl~

    ‘=r=’ CE234)
    B

    Irl

    B

    SENSOR
    (E240)

    4 5 6 7 8

    JStl~

    w.g)

    W

    m:m:IillIillITI

    @
    BA

    B

    t..J 1

    NEEDLE
    LIFT

    fIli)l I II~ @

    B

    (E242)

    ~

    ~

    $230)
    B

    FIT;ffil ~

    ~

    ~

    GY

    Refer to last page
    (FoIdout page) .

    SR

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC251

    EC-214

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR Dle 34
    Needle Lift Sensor (NLS) (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
    INSPECTION

    START

    CHECK FOR AIR IN FUEL FILTER.
    1. Move priming pump up and down to
    purge air from fuel filter.
    2. Perform «DIAGNOSTIC
    TROUBLE
    CODE CONFIRMATION
    PROCEDURE».

    Loosen

    and retighten

    engine

    II

    ground

    screws.

    NG
    -.-

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».

    Check the followi ng.
    • Harness connectors

    00, :

    LHD models
    RHO models

    -:

    Detectable

    line

    for OTC

    lki=JJ

    ,.

    -:

    B/P

    I

    SIP

    (Elan


    o

    I
    W/B

    m

    VALVE)
    ~

    P/W

    0

    I
    W/L

    SOLENOID

    P/W

    W/L

    W/L ~

    PUMP
    (FUEL CUT

    I
    o

    o

    W/L

    ; I JUNCTION

    INJECTION

    P/W

    R

    Non-detectable

    line for DTC

    itlt

    SIP

    rrIT6ilrfi17il
    REV
    REV

    P/W

    P/W

    11T31

    11751

    FCV

    FCV

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    @)

    V

    57
    ~
    3 6 2 SR

    rn!17~~
    45678

    Refer to last page
    ~(E201)

    W

    tmlID

    ~@4~)
    S

    (Foldout

    page) .

    ~8

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC252

    EC-217

    I

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 36, 37, 38

    Fuel Cut Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE

    INSPECTION START

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    Check power supply. Refer to EC-162.

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    J!} 2. Select «FUEL CUT SOL/V» in

    NG

    ri

    ~i5@a~15
    II

    ECM

    E!’coNNEcTORII

    @,@!!}

    «ACTIVE TEST» mode with

    • Harness connectors

    CONSULT.
    3. Touch «ON» and «OFF» alter-

    • Harness for open or

    @,@ID
    short between ECM
    and fuel cut solenoid
    valve
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    nately.
    4. Check that operating sound is

    113 • 115

    ‘—v-I

    emitted.
    OR
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    SEF668S

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and electronic injection
    pump harness connector.

    I

    ACTIVE TEST

    FUEL CUT SOL/V

    ==========

    MONITOR

    CKPS.RPM (TDC)

    I

    D

    3. Check harness continuity
    between terminal G) and

    ON

    ECM terminals @, GID.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    ==========
    Orpm

    OK

    EIIIION/OFFI!

    OFF

    I

    SEF860S

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Fuel cut solenoid valve).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    on next page.
    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION

    EC-218

    END

    NG

    Replace fuel cut solenoid
    valve.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DlC 36, 37, 38
    Fuel Cut Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)

    I CD20E I

    COMPONENT INSPECTION
    Fuel cut solenoid valve
    1.
    2.

    Remove fuel cut solenoid valve.
    Check shaft to see if it is lifted when applying
    current to terminals.
    If NG, replace fuel cut solenoid valve.

    12V direct

    SEF859S

    I

    EC-219

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR Ole 42
    Fuel Temperature

    Sensor (FTS)

    The fuel temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature in the injection pump. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as
    the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which
    is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
    *: The sensor cannot
    be removed from
    injection pump.

    Fuel temperature

    sensor.
    SEF666S

    < Reference data>

    20

    1R

    Engine coolant temper-

    6

    ~

    4

    (I)

    ature

    Acceptable

    °C rF)

    2

    Voltage
    (V)

    Resistance
    (kQ)

    (J

    fa

    1.0

    -20 (-4)

    4.6

    13.6 — 16.3

    ~ 0.4

    20 (68)

    3.5

    2.3 — 2.5

    0.2

    25 (77)

    3.3

    1.9 — 2.1

    50 (122)

    2.2

    0.75 — 0.86

    60 (140)

    1.8

    0.538 — 0.624

    80 (176)

    1.2

    0.289 — 0.344

    en 0.8
    ‘w

    0.1 -20 0
    20 40 60 80 100
    (-4) (32) (68)(104)(140)(176)(212)
    Temperature °C (OF)

    SEF012P

    Diagnostic
    Trouble Code

    Malfunction

    is detected when …

    No.
    42

    • An excessively

    high or low voltage from the sensor

    is detected by ECM.

    Check Items
    (Possible Cause)
    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Fuel temperature sensor

    DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
    PROCEDURE
    1) Turn ignition switch «ON».
    2) Select «DATA MONITOR» mode with CONSULT.
    3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
    ———OR
    ———1) Turn ignition switch «ON» and wait at least 5 seconds.
    2) Turn ignition switch «OFF», wait at least 5 seconds
    and then turn «ON».
    3) Perform «Diagnostic Test Mode II» (Self-diagnostic
    results).

    EC-220

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS

    I CD20E I

    FOR DTC 42

    Fuel Temperature Sensor (FTS) (Cont’d)

    EC-FTS-01
    INJECTION PUMP
    (FUEL TEMPERATURE
    SENSOR)

    ~
    ~

    ~

    B/W

    DRIB

    It

    If

    (D: LHO models
    (8): RHO models

    IEP@!)

    DRIB

    B/W

    m@9)

    -:

    1@
    B/W

    ~@

    DRIB

    I

    -:

    I

    0

    L


    DRIB

    ~

    ~t

    DRIB

    B/W

    DRIB

    B/W

    1$1
    (E]Q)
    1C CHID It~~WP-i.1
    CHID

    DRIB

    )


    0

    L

    It

    Detectable line
    for DIC
    Non-detectable
    line for OIC

    B/W

    II$JI
    (E1Of)
    12A CHID
    B/W

    ~.J
    If

    DRIB

    B/W

    rmru

    15″0 I

    TF

    GND
    -A

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    ~

    Refer to last page

    ~@4)

    ~CE230)

    ~B

    ~

    (Fa Idout

    ~

    B

    page) .

    ‘GY

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC253

    EC-221

    II

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 42
    Fuel Temperature Sensor (FTS) (Cont’d)

    I CD20E I

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
    INSPECTION START

    CHECK

    POWER

    NG

    SUPPLY.

    1. Turn ignition switch «0FF».
    2. Disconnect fuel temperature

    Check the following.
    • Harness connectors

    00, @ID

    sensor

    harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch nON».
    4. Check voltage between terminal

    • Harness connectors

    00, @ID
    @

    • Harness for open or

    and ground with CONSULT or tester.

    short between ECM

    Voltage:

    and fuel temperature

    Approximately

    sensor

    4.9V

    If NG, repair harness or

    OK

    connectors.

    (;]
    CHECK

    SEF610S

    GROUND

    • Harness connectors

    2. Check harness continuity between
    terminal @ and ECM terminal @.

    • Harness connectors

    00, @ID

    aD, @ID

    should exist.

    • Harness for open or

    If OK, check harness for short.

    ~15@a~15

    II

    ECM

    short between ECM

    OK

    ‘EfCON NECTOR

    Check the following.

    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».

    Continuity

    (;]

    NG

    CIRCUIT.

    and fuel temperature
    sensor

    II

    If NG, repair harness or

    50

    connectors.

    NG

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Fuel temperature
    SEF611S

    sensor).

    Refer to «COMPONENT

    INSPECTION»

    on next page.
    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect
    nectors in the circuits.

    harness con-

    Then retest.

    Trouble is not fixed.

    Check ECM pin terminals

    for damage

    and check the connection

    of ECM har-

    ness connector.
    ness connector

    Reconnect ECM harand retest.

    INSPECTION END

    EC-222

    Take proper action.

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS

    I

    FOR DTC 42

    Fuel Temperature

    CD20E

    I

    Sensor (FTS) (Cont’d)

    COMPONENT INSPECTION
    _~~~~tion

    pump

    ___ !. harness connectors
    :=- ; ~ue,1 te~er
    …a~IU~ sensor)

    »

    ~

    ~

    I..m

    IDISCO~

    Ci..I

    Fuel temperature sensor
    Wait until fuel temperature sensor reaches room temperature.
    Check resistance as shown in the figure.

    ~

    Temperature

    °C rF)

    Resistance

    20 (68)

    2.3 — 2.5

    25 (77)

    1.9-2.1

    50 (122)

    kQ

    0.75 — 0.86

    SEF612S

    20

    18
    Q)

    0.538 — 0.624

    80 (176)

    0.289 — 0.344

    If NG, take proper action.

    6

    9

    60 (140)

    4

    2

    (.)

    ~ 6:g

    ‘(i)

    ~

    0.4

    0.2
    0.1 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
    (-4) (32) (68)(104)(140)(176)(212)
    Temperature °C (OF)

    SEF012P

    EC-223

    I

    I CD20E

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR Ole 43

    f

    Accelerator Position Sensor
    The accelerator position sensor is installed on the upper end of
    the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM uses
    the signal to determine the amount of fuel to be injected.

    .

    r
    t :6/
    5

    t.:.-..o 4

    1}
    2

    E

    3

    Supply voltage: 5V
    (Applied between terminal
    No.1 and 3)

    ~
    Off

    cry

    accelerator
    position
    switch

    ~

    6.0

    CJ

    0

    FUII
    accelerator.~ ~
    position

    E

    switch
    Thr~~tle
    position
    sensor

    2
    ~
    ~Q)

    Output voltage between
    terminal No. 2 and 3)
    4.0

    2.0

    .0
    Q)

    en

    ~

    (5

    >

    :;
    c.
    :;
    o

    o

    o

    45
    Throttle

    90

    135

    valve opening angle (deg)

    SEF861S

    Diagnostic
    Trouble

    Malfunction

    Check Items

    is detected when …

    (Possible Cause)

    Code No.
    43

    • An excessively

    low or high voltage from the sensor

    is detected by the ECM.

    • Harness or connectors
    (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
    • Accelerator position sensor
    • Accelerator position switch
    • Accelerator

    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE
    M 1) Turn

    switch (F/C)

    TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

    ignition switch «ON».
    Select «DATA MONITOR» mode with CONSULT.
    Wait at least 2 seconds.
    ———OR ———~
    1) Turn ignition switch «ON» and wait at least 2 seconds.
    ~
    2) Turn ignition switch «OFF», wait at least 5 seconds
    and then turn «ON».
    3) Perform «Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
    results)» with ECM.
    ~

    2)
    3)

    EC-224

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSIS

    I CD20E I

    FOR OlC 43

    Accelerator Position Sensor (Cont’d)

    EC-APS-01
    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    TVO+

    TVO

    ItSI

    12•31

    VIR

    G

    f
    (

    t

    TVQ-

    _.

    (b): LHD models
    @: RHO models

    ~

    ~

    BR

    ,-

    t

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTe

    -:

    J,
    1

    I

    JOINT

    CONNECTOR
    -10
    ~

    l4=lJ
    8
    I
    ~~
    8

    ~

    ~

    B

    B

    m

    I
    I~

    BR

    t

    m

    B~

    I

    B

    ACCELERATOR

    POSITION
    SENSOR

    (~

    —‘&L

    @
    SR

    m::rr:ITITilIII ~

    SR

    lIIil’ I l(ij@
    456

    1
    *
    • …J

    ~

    ~

    r1B

    B

    7 8

    W

    ~

    fffilll~
    ~

    GY

    Refer to last
    (Foldout

    CMID ,

    page

    page) ·

    m

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC254

    EC-225

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

    I CD20E I

    FOR DlC 43

    Accelerator Position Sensor (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
    INSPECTION START

    SEF613S

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect accelerator position sensor harness connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch liON».
    4. Check voltage between terminal @
    and ground with CONSULT or tester.
    Voltage: Approximately 5.12V

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    OK

    ~iO.~0
    GfilD

    SEF034S

    CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
    screw.
    3. Check harness continuity between
    terminal G) and engine ground.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Harness for open or
    short between ECM
    and accelerator position sensor
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
    2. Check harness continuity between
    ECM terminal @ and terminal @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    NG

    Repair harness or connectors.

    OK

    CHECK COMPONENT
    (Accelerator position sensor).
    Refer to «COMPONENT INSPECTION»
    on next page.

    ~15@a

    OK

    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.

    affu)

    Trouble is not fixed.

    SEF035S

    II

    ~i5
    ECM

    19r CONNECTOR

    ~i5
    II

    Check ECM pin terminals for damage
    and check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    «=r’ CE234)

    @D OR
    — — — ….

    W

    (,

    1$1

    y

    I

    :

    E

    :;:;

    0)

    c

    ~
    J::

    ch

    a.
    «520…————.

    8o

    I
    75 (OC)
    (167) (OF)
    Coolant temperature

    SEF676S

    1. Quick-glow (Pre-glow) system
    a. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    b. Read voltage.
    Voltage:
    Battery voltage for about 20* seconds
    * Engine coolant temperature is lower than 75°C
    (167°F). [It is lower than 55°C (131°F) after warmup.]
    * Repeating ignition switch «ON» and «OFF» may
    change the time.
    2. Quick-glow (Cranking) system
    a. Disconnect «8» terminal for starter motor to prevent engine
    from cranking.
    b. Read vortage when ignition switch is turned to «START».
    Voltage:
    Battery voltage*
    * For about 20 seconds after returning ignition switch
    to «ON».

    EC-238

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES

    FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    I CD20E I

    Glow Control System (Cont’d)
    3. After-glow system
    a. Connect «8» terminal to starter motor.
    b. Start engine and read voltage.
    Voltage:
    Battery voltage for 5* minutes
    * Engine coolant temperature is lower than 10°C
    (50°F).

    300
    cJ
    Q)
    (/)

    ;200

    ~
    ?:
    .Q 100

    ~ 60
    2

    «

    6

    -40
    0-

    ~

    -!,
    Coolant temperature

    °C (OF)

    SEF677S

    COMPONENT INSPECTION

    I

    Glow relay
    1. Check relay for coil continuity.
    Continuity should exist.
    2. Check relay for proper operation.
    Coil voltage

    Continuity

    Contact point

    OV

    No

    OFF

    12V

    Yes

    ON

    .,-

    ,
    t

    J
    Ohmmeter
    SEC564B

    Glow plug
    1. Remove glow plug connecting plate.
    2. Check each glow plug for continuity.
    Continuity should exist:
    Approximately 0.5Q [at 25°C (77°F)]

    If NG, replace glow plug.

    SEF630K

    3.

    ~GIOwnut

    Glow

    harness
    Connecting
    plate

    Washer


    Spring washer
    Glow plug

    Install glow plug connecting plate securely.
    Do not bump glow plug heating element. If it is bumped,
    replace glow plug with new one. (If glow plug is dropped
    from a height of 10 cm (3.94 in), replace with new one.)
    If glow plug installation hole is contamin~ted with carbon,
    remove using a reamer or suitable tool.
    Hand-tighten glow plug by turning it 2 to 3 times, then
    tighten using a tool to specified torque.
    15 — 20 N.m (1.5 — 2.0 kg-m, 11 — 14 ft-Ib)

    A:

    SEC565B

    EC-239

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    I CD20E I

    EGRC-Solenoid Valve A, B and Throttle Control
    Solenoid Valve
    SYSTEM
    Camshaft

    Accelerator

    DESCRIPTION
    Engine speed

    position sensor (TDC)

    position

    Accelerator

    sensor

    Engine coolant temperature

    ECM
    (ECCS-D
    control
    module)

    position

    Engine coolant temperature

    sensor

    EGRC-solenoid

    valve A

    EGRC-solenoid

    valve B

    Throttle control

    solenoid

    valve

    The ECM receives signals sent from the engine coolant temperature sensor, crankshaft position sensor (TDC) and accelerator
    position sensor to determine engine speed and operating conditions. Based on these signal~, the ECM controls EGR control
    solenoid valve (A and B) operation and throttle control solenoid
    valve operation.
    Engine coolant
    temperature
    °C (OF)

    Load

    Below 70 (158)

    EGRC-solenoid

    valve
    B

    Throttle control
    solenoid valve

    EGR valve

    A

    Throttle control
    valve

    Amount of EGR
    gas

    Any

    OFF
    (Closed)

    OFF
    (Closed)

    OFF
    (Closed)

    Fully closed

    Fully open

    Low load

    ON
    (Open)

    ON
    (Open)

    ON
    (Open)

    Fully open

    Closed

    Large

    Medium

    load-1

    ON
    (Open)

    ON
    (Open)

    OFF
    (Closed)

    Fully open

    Fully open

    Medium

    Medium

    load-2

    ON
    (Open)

    OFF
    (Closed)

    OFF
    (Closed)

    Half open

    Fully open

    Small

    OFF
    (Closed)

    OFF
    (Closed)

    OFF
    (Closed)

    Fully closed

    Fully open

    Above 70 (158)

    High load

    COMPONENT

    Vacuum
    signal

    DESCRIPTION

    The EGRC-solenoid valves A and B control vacuum pressure
    acting on the EGR valve. The EGR control valve will then be
    fully opened, half-opened or fully closed, as required .
    The throttle control solenoid valve controls vacuum pressure
    acting on the throttle chamber. Thus, intake air passages are
    opened or closed in relation to exhaust gas and intake air. Utilizing the relationship between exhaust gas pressure and intake
    air pressure control, the amount of EGR (exhaust gas recirculated) is regulated in three stages — large, medium, small.

    SEF240PH

    EC-240

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    , CD20E
    EGRC-Solenoid Valve A, B and Throttle Control
    Solenoid Valve (Coni’ d)

    I

    EC-EGRC/V-01
    FUSE

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    BLOCK
    (J/B)

    -:

    m)

    -:

    IQ:11

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    W/R

    e————— …..
    I

    I

    I

    W/R

    ,ctJ,m
    ~

    (E201)

    W/R

    I

    ‘——1

    W/R

    It I

    W/R

    It I

    SOLENOID
    EGRC-

    SOLENOID
    EGRC-

    VALVE A

    VALVE 8

    l4=Jl ~

    I4=’J

    GY

    @)

    P

    I

    It
    W/R

    I CONTROL
    SOLENOID

    l4=Jl

    THROTTLE

    VALVE
    (Q9)

    L

    I

    GY

    P

    Irlh~~Q———4rlhl
    L..j-J (E23)

    ,….

    GY

    P

    I

    I

    GY

    P

    L

    1~~[~~———1~~————i~1
    GY

    P

    I

    L

    I

    GY

    I

    P

    ~

    IT169il

    EGR

    EGR

    -A

    L

    m

    TH/C

    -B

    -1

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    ‘———————….,j@
    F1i2T3l (~)
    ~

    B

    ~

    C!IID

    (E70)

    G

    Refe~ to last page

    (E238) (~)

    B

    (FaIdout

    BR

    page) .

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC264

    EC-241

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    EGRC-Solenoid Valve A, B and Throttle
    Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)

    Control

    EC-EGRC/V-02
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    -:

    Detectable

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    cYQ6)
    I Q:ll
    W/A

    line

    for DTe

    e—————-.
    I
    I

    W/A
    1$1(E:g3)
    (E201)

    W/R

    ,——~I
    I

    W/A

    W

    I4=ll

    W

    SOLENOID

    I4=ll

    $239)

    W/A

    W/A
    2 EGRC-

    EGRC~
    SOLENOID

    VALVE A
    —O-.—,
    ) *I
    W/L

    L:j=’

    W/L

    R

    .,=’

    W/8

    W/8

    (

    W/8

    BOX No.2
    (JOINT

    CONNECTORS)

    ~~:

    t

    OFF

    m

    l!:i=ll
    G/Y

    THERMO
    CONTROL
    AMP.

    THERMISTOR

    m JUNCTION
    BOX No.2

    (M[i)

    LOW

    HIGH

    …….

    ~

    NORMAL

    ~

    G/V

    m

    rn>

    @

    4JJ

    t

    ~(M8)

    B

    R/L

    G

    rrf5ll

    Ji2’nl

    AC
    RLY

    AACON

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    @

    .Earn>B

    FAN
    SWITCH

    ON
    OFF—

    ~~

    T

    ~

    ON

    LG/R

    4J
    RIL

    A/e
    SWITCH

    ON

    (M[i)

    K)1112131 w

    J:Ql ~

    lIIml w

    ~

    ~

    n I
    1 ~—I
    B

    B

    @)

    ON

    l4=ll
    G

    OFF—

    G

    B

    AIL

    02TI

    rFf5i1

    ARCON

    AC

    RLY
    ‘—————‘

    L

    FAN
    SWITCH
    ~

    l4=JJ

    t

    r.:::b (Et01)

    I~ICMID

    A
    C!J.g) 8

    K>1112131

    a:
    w
    …..

    ~

    WINDOW,D/LOCK, S/LOCK, SROOF

    :

    CD engine
    SR engine for Australia
    Models with daytime
    light
    system
    Models without
    daytime
    light
    system

    B/R

    .~

    2ND

    ~

    -_.

    OFF’,-1ST

    @:
    @:

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH

    (~)

    @:

    Except@

    *1 … :

    Models with daytime light
    system
    Models without
    daytime light
    system

    18″41
    Next page
    Preceding

    page

    {

    L

    o }
    p

    To EL -POWER
    -08

    FUSE BLOCK
    (JIB)
    (M15)
    (~105)

    (E106)

    CID

    ~————————————————————~

    +
    2

    II

    (IGN1)

    1

    5

    HEL499

    EL-11

    POWER SUPPL V ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-PDWER-07
    @: CD engine
    @: With single air bag system
    @: With dual air bag system

    ~a~O~R~3~~L————~1
    B/L

    IQ-51
    N

    FUSE BLOCK
    (J/B)

    ~
    (106)

    CD

    SA

    BR
    SR •

    S/LOCK, NATS

    BA •

    MAIN, PGC/V,
    EGRC/V, AAC/V,
    VTC

    S/W.}

    F/PUMP,AIRREG

    B/L.
    SR/V.

    H02S

    W/R •

    EGRC/V

    r————————————————-,

    HEL500

    EL-12

    POWER SUPPL V ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-POWER-OB
    To EL-POWER ~
    -03

    B/P ~

    I

    ~

    ~g5EL-POWER ~

    (b):

    B

    ____

    I

    B

    1 i-II

    ——

    _—

    +}

    LG/R.

    FICO. A/CCUT.
    A/C

    + HEATER. A/C
    LG/R + A/CCUT. A/C
    LG/R+} HEATER. Ale
    LG/R

    L/W.

    ~

    ~————————————————————,

    I

    +
    2

    5

    1

    CIE)

    (@)

    ~————————-~
    SR

    ———————————~
    HEL009

    EL-13

    POWER SUPPL V ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-POWER-09
    To EL-POWER ~

    -02

    *1

    1

    LHD models
    engine
    Except for Europe
    and Israel

    (0:
    @:
    @:

    GA

    @:

    Models with daytime
    light system

    @>:

    Models without

    daytime

    light system
    @: Models with tachometer
    *1… @R/B , @>R/L
    *3. · · (b)R/G , @R/L

    ~————————————————-,

    HEL501

    EL-14

    BATTERY
    Service Data and Specifications (SOS)
    SR20DE and GA engines
    Applied model

    Type
    V-AH

    Capacity

    Optional for
    LHD model

    CD20

    Standard
    55D23L

    80D26L

    95D31L

    12-60

    12-65

    12-80

    I

    EL-15

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Wiring Diagram

    START —

    MIl MODELS

    EL-START-01
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:

    G

    I

    G

    rrTI
    ST
    ON
    OFF’e-…—

    CD engine
    For Europe and Israel
    Except @

    @: Gasoline engine models for
    Europe, Israel and Australia

    IGNITION
    SWITCH

    @:

    (E1{4)

    ACC

    LHD models with SR engine
    Gasoline engine except @

    Except @

    lbjdJ
    B/W

    CE64) (E237)

    O~B/W~B/W

    IO~

    ~

    (E201)

    8/W ~

    8/W

    (IT)

    B/W

    -cID-O—-

    B/W

    -c.

    (E229)

    .q) B/W
    BATTERY
    STARTER MOTOR
    ~:@
    (E219):

    r———————,
    I

    :~@
    I

    ~

    :

    W

    Fmn@~:
    rnrnm
    W

    @

    I

    I

    8 ~,~,@ID
    ..!J1 GY

    GY

    GY

    :

    Ffim1~
    ~8

    HEL507

    EL-16

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Construction
    SEC. 233
    MOT80285

    Magnetic switch assembly

    Planetary gear a

    ‘V

    ~
    ~

    0

    @

    ~4.4-7.1
    (0.45 — 0.72, 39.1 • 62.5)

    ~*
    (iJ4.1 • 7.6
    (0.42 • 0.77, 36.5 • 66.8)

    l2.5 —

    4.4
    (0.25 • 0.45,
    21.7 • 39.1)

    Brush holder

    Ii):

    Armaturea@

    N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    iii:! CE): High-temperature

    grease point

    Yoke
    SEL026UB

    SEC. 233
    M2T49283

    Adjusting plate
    Plate thickness:
    0.25 (0.0098)
    0.50 (0.0197)

    Gear case metal a
    CE)
    fjJ 4.1 — 7.6 (0.42 — 0.77, 36.5 • 66.8)
    Holder

    ~

    aCE)

    2.5 • 4.4 (0.25 — 0.45, 21.7 — 39.1)
    fjJ4.4 — 7.1
    Magnetic switch
    (0.45 — 0.72, 39.1 — 62.5)
    assembly

    Plate

    I
    m

    r

    Brush spring

    Brush (+)

    Unit: mm (in)
    (j1: N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)
    CE): High-temperature grease point

    SEL152SB

    EL-17

    S1 AR11NG SYSTEM
    Construction (Conl’d)
    SEC. 233
    M2T61871B

    fiJ 4.9

    — 6.9
    (0.50 — 0.70,
    43.4 — 60.8)

    fiJ: N.m (kg-m, in-lb)

    m (B):

    High-temperature

    grease point

    SEL554PB

    CD
    @

    @
    @
    @

    @

    Pinion stopper
    Pinion assembly
    Gear case
    Pinion shaft assembly
    Shift lever
    Spring

    (J)

    Holder

    @

    Yoke

    @

    Reduction gear
    Washer

    @

    @
    @)

    Brush (+)
    Brush spring
    Brush (-)

    @
    @

    Brush holder
    Rear cover

    @
    @

    @

    Center bracket
    Magnetic switch assembly

    @

    Armature

    EL-18

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Construction (Cont’d)
    SEC. 233
    M2M62071

    (j) 4.9

    — 6.9
    (0.50 • 0.70, 43.4 • 60.8)

    {jJ 3.9

    — 7.8
    (0.40 — 0.80, 34.7 — 69.4)

    (j):

    N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)
    MEL780DA

    CD
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Pinion stopper
    Pinion assembly
    Gear case
    Pinion shaft assembly
    Shift lever
    Spring

    (J)
    @
    @
    @)
    @
    @

    Holder
    Reduction gear
    Washer
    Center bracket
    Magnetic switch assembly
    Armature

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Yoke
    Brush (+)
    Brush spring
    Brush (-)
    Brush holder
    Rear cover

    I

    EL-19

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Construction (Cont’d)
    SEC. 233
    813.531

    8

    iii 6.4 — 7.8 (0.65 — 0.80, 56.4 — 69.4)

    4
    3

    iii :N.m
    m :

    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:

    Y/A

    I~I~
    9F

    I
    Y/R

    m

    @:
    *1
    *2

    rm

    AL TERNATOR ~

    ~

    LHD models
    RHO models
    AIT models
    MIT models
    With tachometer

    Without
    @: Gasoline

    (E202)

    Y/R
    RIB

    B

    I

    1—-1
    ~

    tUE»

    tachometer

    engine
    A/T models
    and CD engine
    Gasoline
    engine
    MIT models
    @30
    ,@40
    @40
    ,@
    3

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Faldaut

    page) .

    CHID , (E101)

    ~~
    ~

    fmT3l41~
    B

    rnmzrnJ

    ~

    r——————~
    B

    :Q@ID

    ~~

    I ~
    L
    I

    ~

    @Z),

    (E5~)

    Q~:
    GY

    l5J

    I
    I

    ~

    HEL508

    EL-23

    I

    CHARGING SYSTEM
    Wiring Diagram -. CHARGE —

    (Cont’d)

    LHD MODELS WITH SR ENGINE

    EL-CHARGE-02

    FUSIBLE
    LINK AND
    FUSE BOX
    7.5A

    m
    iOA

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    FUSE

    BLOCK
    (JIB)
    (Mi5)

    Refer to

    EL -POWER.

    IN~ll

    ~

    [ill~

    Y

    I

    RIB

    Y

    113’0 I

    COMBINATION
    METER
    (CHARGE

    WARNING
    LAMP)

    JI~OIl

    i-,
    W

    Y/R

    W

    (ill

    It

    I

    R/B~

    ctJ

    ctJ CE22) E!l
    ~—ibiJ1
    w

    Y/R

    69

    1bi=U@

    W

    1UJ11 (E101)

    AIB

    Y/R

    I

    Y/R

    IcJlIU:~
    I

    w

    I

    I

    Y/A

    e

    Y/R

    RIB

    ~

    m

    B

    IUO

    r=:!:,~

    It

    W

    @

    rrt=n

    AL TERNATOR

    eM) @

    @

    Refe~ to last page
    (Faldout

    ptI(ill
    tgj B

    ~@

    rnrn

    page) .

    (]ID , (E101)

    GY

    CM15)

    ~

    ,

    IT
    W

    LL

    I-

    Uri

    (J

    C.ri

    I<{

    CD

    I-

    W

    H

    :::>

    Z
    ::>

    (J)

    L….—

    LL

    ~

    co

    L.-o

    roc

    QJCO

    en

    rl

    UriC.

    .riE
    OCOCO
    l-4Jrl

    II
    (9

    (T)

    ~

    H

    ….J

    U

    I-

    W

    H
    3:

    W
    2:

    ({J

    ::>

    (J)

    H

    lJ…

    Z

    I-

    >-

    to

    0
    H
    1-1Ha:
    Z

    0:
    0
    I

    Y

    rf*1JI

    COMBINATION

    METER

    (CHARGE

    WARNING
    LAMP)

    @
    ~

    @: With tachometer
    @: Without
    tachometer
    *1 … @ 30 , @ 40
    *2 … @ 40 , @ 3

    B/Y

    r=&:,{]ID
    111[1I~
    B/Y

    Y/A

    u1fFl1
    aID
    L:j-‘ m

    e—-•

    Y/R
    I

    S/R

    JFI=iJ
    TAIL
    FUSE

    B/Y

    R/W

    R

    m

    rm

    ~

    RH

    LH

    FUSE

    FUSE

    ST

    SR

    Y/R

    IGN

    ALT-L

    m

    Y/R -@>Next

    page

    rrtn
    DAYTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT

    —2NO—@:
    @:

    GA engine
    CD engine
    SR engine

    and

    rF11=n

    0

    11

    Y/R

    — —

    PASS — — — — -PASS- — — .!tHIGH

    Y/R

    ~

    R/L

    .-

    I

    c!Jm24
    l!:iJ1~
    Y/R

    69

    e

    It


    0

    m
    RIY

    P!L

    I

    Y/A

    ffi

    IcOl

    DIMMER
    LAMP
    OUTPUT

    ALTERNATOR

    @
    aID:@
    (E2Q6):

    PASS

    » LOW

    …..-‘ HIGH …..
    ..—‘ HIGH …..
    ..—‘

    e

    Y/R

    ~@

    -PASS — —

    » LOW

    AIB R/Y

    RIG P/L


    Y/R~

    «LOW.!t

    lbi=U~

    lbi=J1~

    0

    2ND

    OFF …..

    1ST

    P

    WIG

    SiR

    B/l

    RIW

    HEADlAMP

    AIMING

    MOTOR RH

    Refer to last page

    ffffu
    ~

    @

    ~

    GY

    , GY

    (Foldout page) .

    HEL019

    EL-31

    II

    HEADLAMP —

    Headlamp Aiming Control Wiring Diagram — AIM — (Cont’d)

    EL-AIM-02
    r————_

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    I

    SIR

    IN:I
    RIG

    I
    0

    DL

    I

    ~1’31

    JUNCTION
    BOX No.2

    BIR

    rrm

    FUSE

    BLOCK
    (JIB)
    ~
    (g106)

    @:

    Models with
    daytime light

    @:

    Models without
    daytime light

    system

    (JOINT

    CONNECTORS)
    (t3n)

    ~

    LIGHTING

    RIG

    2ND SWITCH

    OFF,~ST

    JFTil

    t

    (EiOn

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    system

    *1 … @ RIB

    ,@

    RIL

    ~

    RIL

    HEADLAMP
    AIMING

    I
    O~O—-»

    ill

    C

    (f)

    H

    Q)

    4J
    J::..
    OJ

    m m
    ‘(f)
    rl
    D
    C

    ro

    m
    ‘(f)
    H

    Q)

    ai

    0.
    0

    0.
    0

    L

    L
    ::J
    W

    (J)

    >-

    (J)

    +J
    J::..
    Ol
    .rl
    r-f

    .rl
    r-1

    Q)

    E
    .rl

    Q)

    E
    .rl

    +J

    >-

    m

    >ro

    L

    J::..
    +J

    0

    0

    .rl

    .rl

    4-

    4-

    3

    3

    4J
    0.

    +J
    0.

    (f)

    (J)

    L

    D

    Q)

    Q)

    r-1
    Q)

    r-f
    Q.)

    U
    X

    U
    X

    D
    0

    D

    W

    W

    2:

    .. .. ..

    LICENSE PLATE LAMP LH

    +J
    lJ
    +J
    :J
    0
    J::..
    +J

    :J

    W

    LICENSE PLATE LAMP RH

    (f)

    GE

    TAIL LAMP RH(INNER)

    0
    2
    o

    GE

    TAIL LAMP LH(INNER)

    @)@~@

    TAIL LAMP RH(OUTER)

    TAIL LAMP LH(OUTER)

    ED

    CLEARANCE

    LAMP RH

    CLEARANCE

    LAMP LH

    w

    (f)

    >-

    IT
    W

    ~

    LL

    -‘
    o

    ~
    ~

    «
    ro

    W
    2:
    H~

    r-Ir>-CDH
    «HZ

    DL

    O-.J~

    1.U
    IJ.J

    1.U
    1.U

    I

    I

    ~
    U
    Z Q.rOCD2H
    ([0«3:
    LLLL…JU1

    HEL643

    EL-33

    EXTERIOR LAMP

    Clearance, License and Tail Lamps/Wiring
    Diagram —

    TAIL/L —

    EL-TAIL/L-01

    Refer to EL-POWER.
    ~:
    ~:

    BIR

    Models with daytime light system
    Models without daytime light system
    RIB , ~

    *1″‘@

    R/L

    0

    I

    BIR

    FUSE BLOCK

    rrffil

    (JIB)
    2ND

    ~

    OFF, __1ST

    *1 ~

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH
    (W

    ~

    R/L

    I

    ~

    o
    RIL

    TAIL

    TAIL/L

    rn

    FUSE

    ([l)
    RIL ——

    l$f
    R/L
    I
    4t……….

    R/L~ ~

    8-(0

    0

    BIR

    page

    L

    ~
    AIL

    @

    (fi

    AIL

    Page

    —-e-

    AIL ~

    __

    B
    __

    @:

    :

    Sedan models
    Hatchback
    models

    -_

    ~4
    -u:;

    GID

    STOP

    AIL …1A~
    Lbd

    LICENSE
    PLATE
    LAMP AH

    B

    I

    e- AIL
    e- — — B

    ~

    e-

    em

    ~~

    ~C~¥~SE
    LAMP LH

    ~

    GID

    AIL ~

    TAIL

    8~
    STOP

    e—P/L~

    ___

    REAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP RH
    (OUTER)

    PIL ~

    e- — —

    I

    TAIL

    P/L

    + To

    REAA
    COMBINATION
    LAMP LH
    (OUTER)

    @

    EL-STOP/L

    I.
    8

    8

    -II…

    -II…

    :

    ~

    DEPRESSED

    LHD mode Is
    RHO models
    Models with

    :

    STOP LAMP
    SWITCH

    high-mounted

    stop lamp

    + AIL -e

    To EL-TAIL/L

    ~

    RELEASED
    ~

    <:BID

    P/L

    O~•

    @

    P/L ~

    ~

    P/L __
    P/L

    1c!J1 (21)
    CII)

    ‘V
    P/L

    ~

    ~UNCTION

    ~
    P/L

    <;>P/L

    BOX No.2
    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)
    ~:(b)

    A

    0
    L

    r.::!::w (][)
    I~I~
    P/L

    ~
    P/L
    I……. P/L~~
    I52Q’ ~

    0
    ~

    m

    P/L

    ~1

    P/L

    AIL

    Y

    t

    e-•

    1

    ~

    I

    R/L

    P/L

    m

    ~

    HIGH-

    CiJ
    B

    MOUNTED
    STOP LAMP

    TAIL

    CIID

    STOP

    ~

    .1

    TAIL

    REAR

    B COMBINATION
    LAMP LH

    t

    M

    (OUTER)

    0

    CI[)

    STOP

    ~

    REAR

    B COMBINATION
    LAMP RH

    1

    (OUTER)

    @

    O~PIL~PIL~

    o-e——.

    ‘t

    P/L

    ~

    JUNCTION
    BOX No.2
    (~g~~~CTORS)

    ~~:(b)

    L

    c!J ~

    IbiJI
    (PiOt)
    P/L

    t

    P/L

    i

    P’L

    1$1
    ~:: ~
    P/L

    I

    I~I
    P/L

    ~STOP
    6~~TED
    LAMP
    <0108): ~

    TAIL

    ~~:@

    STOP

    ~REAR

    I
    8

    8

    I

    e-

    B

    I

    ~

    B

    (0102) ~

    TAIL

    E2~~I~~ TION

    TION

    -e——e

    I

    f.
    a
    a

    ~

    -:!:-

    <1[11)

    ~I

    B

    ~~@
    5 6)[‘»1112

    45678

    W

    [Q] (0108)
    [ITg] 8R

    ~@

    IE2~~I~~

    (OUTER)@

    <0105)

    L.!J.gJ

    ~REAR
    B

    (OUTER)~

    8

    ~~

    STOP

    I

    ‘Ill ~w

    ~
    (832)

    Refer to last page

    ~ffi alio$
    w

    (Faldout

    page) .

    ~~~

    !@

    GY

    ~

    W’

    W

    HEL645

    EL-38

    EXTERIOR

    LAMP

    Back-up Lamp/Wiring Diagram —

    BACK/L —

    EL-BACK/L-01
    FUSE

    BLOCK

    10A

    rn

    Refer to EL-POWEA.
    (b):

    (J/B)
    (E~)

    :

    <:D:

    IQ.51

    :

    Y

    I

    ~

    E

    Y

    ~

    m
    y

    @:
    @:

    (E236)

    ~,

    (~2)

    Y

    ~

    I——-.E-O~
    R

    m

    BACK-UP
    LAMP
    SWITCH

    INHIBITOR
    SWITCH

    ~:<:D

    ~:

    OTHERS
    ~
    G/W

    ~

    ~

    G/W

    O~—«»I
    @

    O~

    L

    I

    (E65)

    G/W ~

    s ~

    SR engine

    t

    Y

    ~

    LHD models
    RHO models
    AIT models
    MIT models
    LHD models with
    Except @

    G/W ~

    Y

    (E24)

    G/W ~

    G/W

    r-:—

    t

    ~O—O-
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    F1i2T3T4I

    (E202)

    ~B

    ~

    @

    (E221)

    ~

    0
    0

    ~
    G/W~

    liJ

    G/W

    G/W
    24

    ~~

    ~@QD
    G/W

    G/W

    II:!JI~ClD

    ~

    G/W

    t
    0
    I

    e

    I

    Irtu REAR

    COMBINAnON
    LAMP LH
    (INNER)

    ~

    (BACK-UP

    ~

    LAMP)
    (0103):

    ~

    r

    »

    (0102)

    8 ~

    B

    I

    G/W

    G/W

    ~

    IIrtu

    e

    @

    G/W

    REAR
    COMBINA nON
    LAMP RH
    (INNER)

    Irtu REAR

    ~

    COMBINA nON
    LAMP
    LH
    (INNER)

    (BACK-UP

    ~

    LAMP)
    (Oji1):

    B

    B

    I
    -e

    I

    I

    @

    I
    ffi
    G/W

    ~

    (BACK-UP

    ~

    LAMP)
    B

    I

    @:

    C(10)

    (T11)

    (][)
    W

    ~
    ~

    @

    aID

    fEill I Ill)
    45678

    (0101)

    w

    aID:
    ~W

    (0103) (0111)

    W’w’W’W

    HEL513

    EL-40

    EXTERIOR

    LAMP

    Front Fog Lamp/Wiring Diagram —

    F/FOG —

    WITH DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM

    EL-F/FOG-01

    I

    BATTERY

    I

    I
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    ~10A

    l4J 1361

    (JIB)
    (E10S)

    BIR

    (@»

    I

    •I

    BIR

    FRONT
    FOG LAMP
    RELAY

    rf11=n

    Next

    ——-e—- ..
    I
    i~’1 I~II

    ~

    R/L

    DRIB

    B/R

    rFTil

    rf11=n

    TAIL/L

    TAIL/L

    FUSE

    t

    ~

    (52)

    B

    LIGHT
    UNIT

    B

    -:!:-

    (ID

    ~@ID

    ~~~

    .!.JE}

    RH

    @

    ~

    B

    I
    I
    e—-e
    I
    I

    ~

    ~GY

    LAMP

    LH

    TAIL/L DAYTIME

    OUTPUT

    FFOG
    RONT

    LAMP

    rr=fo1l

    SW

    DRIB

    FOG
    FRONT

    RIB

    R/L

    page

    GY’

    GY

    A~
    T

    B

    ~

    (~)
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    L

    HEL646

    EL-41

    II

    EXTERIOR LAMP
    Front Fog Lamp/Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    F/FOG —

    EL-F/FOG-02
    Preceding
    page

    ~
    ~

    GY/A

    _

    ………………. A/Y ~To

    _——

    B

    ~To

    EL-R/FOG

    EL-R/FOG

    RIG ~To

    EL-ILL

    RIG

    MIILL

    FRONT
    FOG

    LAMP
    OFF—

    SWITCH

    I!:jdI

    lbi=ll

    B

    8

    (M!Q)

    1
    ……1
    I
    B

    (j1JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1
    ~

    lbi=JJ

    ,.
    B

    I

    B

    B

    ~
    ~

    ~
    ~

    Refer to last page

    2
    376
    ~ -4

    (Foldout

    :

    GY/L

    ~

    R/L

    I

    r~

    GY/L

    1$1

    GY/L

    GY/L

    ~

    e

    GY/L

    Ir;~ul(El0l)

    m

    W

    t

    FRONT

    FOG
    LAMP
    SWITCH
    ~

    LH

    B

    I
    —O-ec-°l
    I~
    B

    B

    1

    e

    ~

    B B

    11

    (M28)

    (El03)

    DRIB

    FOG
    FOG
    I!I LAMP
    FRONT I!IFRONT
    LAMP

    ~

    R

    A
    TL

    DRIB

    1 JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1
    @

    I

    GY/L

    I

    B

    -!

    -x>I

    P~P~

    ~

    p

    (E10?)

    ~:(1)

    p

    SA

    HEL514

    EL-44

    EXTERIOR

    LAMP

    Rear Fog Lamp/Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
    Preceding

    4

    page

    ~

    w/pu

    R/FOG —

    EL-R/FOG-04

    -a~

    I

    w/pu
    db,

    (b):

    LHO models
    @: RHO models
    @: Sedan models
    @: Hatchback models
    qJ): RHO models with high-mounted
    stop lamp and LHD models

    w/pu

    w/pu

    w/pu

    w~
    ~CID

    I
    a-ea>—e

    W/PU

    E1J (824)

    I$I@
    w/pu

    @

    w/pu

    I

    W/PU

    II!’,

    4>….. —1

    i!i

    W/PU

    w/pu

    ~LAMP
    5~~INATION
    LH

    (INNER)
    S II (REAR FOG)

    ~@:@
    B

    ~5~~INATION
    LAMP RH

    (INNER)
    ILS II (REAR FOG)

    ~

    aID:@

    B

    LaI 1>
    B

    I!’I

    W/PU
    ~5~~INATION
    LAMP LH

    (INNER)
    n 8 II (REAR FOG)
    ~(Oi03):@
    8

    i!’1
    ILeJl
    ~
    B

    ~5~~INATION
    LAMP RH
    (INNER)
    (REAR FOG)
    (Qi1i):@

    t——I
    I

    ,—-~

    ~

    (0101)

    I

    I

    w/pu

    n

    ~

    8

    B

    ~

    ~

    (~)

    ~

    ~w’w

    r-t

    ro

    e..
    (f)
    H

    (f)

    4J

    (J)
    .M

    (f)

    .!:

    r-t

    ro

    OJ
    0.
    0

    e..

    0
    1.L

    e..

    OJ

    r-t

    E

    (1)

    .M

    co

    4J

    OJ

    4J

    (1)

    OJ

    .n

    co

    E

    0.4-‘

    e..

    :J
    W

    e..

    0

    4-

    L

    ::::J
    W

    COMPACT DISK DECK ILLUMINATION

    Ol

    .r’

    1J
    C

    0

    «0
    C

    EE

    r:.

    Q)

    co
    e..
    H
    r-t
    ill

    4J

    4J
    0.
    ill

    >co

    REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH ILLUMINATION

    E
    0

    .r::.
    U
    co

    «0
    4-‘

    «0

    :J

    .!:

    .r::. .r::.

    +J

    4J
    .r-t

    OL

    HEADLAMP WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
    ILLUMINATION

    4-‘

    0

    .n

    4J

    .n

    ~ ~

    ~

    (f)

    (f)

    U)

    r-t
    ill

    r-1

    r-1

    u «0

    X

    W

    ~

    EI

    0
    :2:

    OJ
    «0
    0
    L

    HAZARD SWITCH ILLUMINATION

    ill

    «0
    0
    :2:

    GLOVE BOX LAMP

    GLOVE BOX
    LAMP SWITCH

    @)@)~@)@
    REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
    ILLUMINATION
    RADIO ILLUMINATION
    I
    U

    ~H
    3:

    (f)

    w

    (J)

    ::>

    ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION

    LL

    Z
    ZO

    o

    He..

    AfT INDICATOR ILLUMINATION

    ~O

    H

    ZU

    COMBINATION METER

    (!)U

    METER
    METER ILLUMINATION

    ED

    w
    (f)
    >a:
    w

    w

    ::>
    LL
    -l
    0

    ~
    ~

    «
    ED

    @

    ILLUMINATION

    ::E
    H~

    DL

    ~I»‘»
    r(!)H
    «HZ
    O-.J::>

    EE

    l1J
    l1J

    ILLUMINATION
    CONTROL SWITCH

    ~
    Z

    FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH
    ILLUMINATION

    I

    U
    CL»-

    O(!)2:H
    0:0«3:
    ll..ll..-J(f)

    HEL648

    EL-46

    INTERIOR

    LAMP

    Illumination/Wiring

    Diagram —

    ILL —

    EL-ILL-01

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    BIA

    I

    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

    SiR ~Next

    page

    I
    BIR

    rrITIl
    LIGHTING
    SWITCH
    (E107)

    BIA

    rFilll

    TAIL

    TAIL/L

    FUSE

    SW

    TAIL/L
    OUTPUT

    DAYTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT

    Models with daytime light
    system
    Models without
    daytime light
    system

    @:

    Except

    For Europe and Israe 1
    @
    *1 … @ RIB , @ R/L

    AIL

    rn

    @:
    @:
    @:

    ED

    ..;:. 0

    ..,

    @: For Europe and Israe 1
    Except @
    @: Models with tachometer
    @: Models without
    tachometer
    *3 · .. @ 27. @ 11
    *4 · .. @ 34. @ 5
    *5 · .. @ 29. @ 10
    *6 … @ B.@BR/Y

    rw-: —,

    page

    1*.91

    RIG

    RIG

    I

    LAMP
    REAR FOG

    SWITCH

    I:31

    @:

    Preceding
    page

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-4

    @:

    :
    :

    @:-., ~

    I’ ……….
    ,,~

    ,

    g»:

    @
    @
    @)

    @

    6

    27

    34

    37 36 28

    Gasoline engine
    Diesel engine

    ~
    ~

    For Australia
    Except for Europe
    and Australia

    30

    12 10

    14

    @J
    @
    .-J

    w
    :::>

    Cf)

    en

    LL

    c:(

    5

    29

    17

    13

    16

    18

    1

    9 38 15

    32

    40 42 39 26

    2

    4

    7

    8

    ~

    ….J
    (!)

    33

    0:
    w

    @~

    I

    ffi ~W
    c:(

    ~

    31

    en

    3

    @

    HEL521

    EL-53

    METER AND GAUGES
    Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel
    Gauges/Wiring Diagram — METER LHD MODELS WITH TACHOMETER

    EL-METER-01
    @: Gasoline engine
    @: Diesel engine
    @: GA engine and CD engine
    @: SR engine

    FUSE

    BLOCK Refer to EL-POWER.
    (JIB)

    ….
    1——

    ~

    PU/R

    +

    To EC-VSS

    PUIR

    rFf3u
    COMBINATION
    METER
    @
    ~

    @
    ~
    R

    I

    I

    R/Y@

    I~~

    _M_B _

    R

    t

    4r&u

    L:jj-‘

    <00> ,…

    AIV

    R

    o

    t

    ~~GC~~

    R/Y~

    R/Y~

    R

    R

    ~

    J~iciJl rrp ~

    IrZJl~

    ICZJ~

    R/V

    AIV

    R

    CD

    L/ORIU7n

    Iifoil~

    R

    ~@

    LIOR

    I

    ~~GC~~

    I

    I

    R/V

    R

    BIR

    L1
    -!

    m SPEED

    n=h

    BIR

    VEHICLE

    SENSOR
    ~

    ~

    LiaR

    m

    TACHO

    LIOR

    m

    ECM

    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    «»—_ …….CED : @

    ECM

    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    TACHO
    ~_

    …….
    @):@

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout
    L

    ~

    page) .

    rnrmJID

    ~~
    B

    ~

    ~
    GY

    lID

    CED

    @ffi)
    GY

    CM39)

    HEL522

    EL-54

    METER AND GAUGES
    Speedometer, Tachometer,
    Gauges/Wiring
    Diagram —

    Temp. and Fuel
    METER — (Cont’d)

    EL-METER-02
    @:
    @:

    GA engine
    SR engine

    page

    COMBINATION
    METER
    @

    WATER
    TEMP.
    GAUGE

    FUEL
    GAUGE

    Preceding

    and CD engine

    (~)
    3 8

    1 • 1

    ~
    G

    PU/W

    I

    PU/W

    I

    mOO)
    +@
    G

    ~(]ID
    ~

    I
    ~o

    (B18)

    I

    8

    In

    B

    B

    PU/W

    m

    B

    i..l 1
    ~

    @)

    L

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    (]ID , <(iQj)

    ~

    ~~GID

    W

    ~

    TRANSMITTER
    CE211)

    ~(E65)
    ~GY

    [ID[I7J8 J 9I1OJTIlIg]

    THERMAL

    ~

    RCE21t)

    ~~
    GY

    IIDm1ID

    B

    L!.J

    B

    HEL523

    EL-55

    I

    METER AND GAUGES

    Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel
    Gauges/Wiring Diagram — METER — (Cont’d)
    LHD MODELS WITHOUT TACHOMETER

    EL-METER-03
    FUSE
    BLOCK Aefer to EL-POWER.
    (JIB)

    >([

    l.L

    w

    .-.-

    NATS

    IMMU

    :

    GA engine and CD engine
    SR

    engine

    Models with
    Models with

    dual air bag system
    single air bag system

    Preceding

    @:

    Models with dual air

    bag system for Europe
    Models with dual air
    bag system except for Europe

    A

    page

    COMBINATION
    METER
    @

    @

    AIR
    BAG
    ~

    ~

    B/R

    …..

    P/L

    I

    JUNCTION
    BOX NO.2

    P/L

    (JOINT

    _—.BR/W~2

    l!JI~

    P/L

    ~~

    BR/W
    B/R
    ~

    IIfJ (HOt)
    BR/W
    I
    BR/W

    BR/W

    t
    ~~

    I
    BR/W I»mi»‘
    1FttiJ~

    1~1(:3)

    I»mi»‘

    ~~

    CONNECTORS)

    BR/W~

    ~

    I

    P/L ~

    ~

    P/L

    r:::!b, ~

    P/L ~

    P/L ~

    II:JlI

    fbi=JJ

    4>

    mJCE10S)

    IEEC

    r-I-, ~

    I

    O~
    I

    P/L

    SPIRAL
    CABLE
    BR/W

    rFf5i1
    W/L

    AIR BAG
    DIAGNOSIS

    AlA BAG
    DIAGNOSIS

    SENSOR

    UNIT

    (Refer

    ‘—_

    .’—

    to

    OIL
    LOW PRESSURE

    SWITCH
    ~

    HIGH

    SENSOR

    UNIT

    AS-SAS.)

    aD:

    m

    (Refer to
    RS-SRS.)

    @

    …..
    @:@)

    @:@

    ~————————————————~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    CHID

    page) .

    (E101)

    ~

    ~

    ~@

    ~@@

    ~:
    @:

    EL-WARN-03

    GA engine and CD engine
    Diesel engine
    SR engine

    Preceding
    page

    COMBINATION

    ~

    Y/S

    LIB

    :OI
    JUNCTION

    r t

    BOX NO.2

    Y/B ~O

    I 2.0

    ~

    Y/a

    ~

    ABS

    ~

    ~

    IrtJl~

    METER ~

    B

    BRAKE

    Y 18

    WARN —

    Y IB

    lUE’

    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)
    (tilll)

    J

    fUCi

    Y IR

    I~ I I (BU5)

    1rdF11~
    a.:r ~

    IiJ @)

    I~I~

    ~

    LIB

    ~
    ~
    Y/S

    Y/R

    L B

    I

    I

    0——1

    ~O~

    Y/S

    Y/R

    Y/R

    Ibj:JI (gQ?)

    I!:i=!J @

    lliJ W)

    CD

    rrtn

    PARKING
    BRAKE
    SWITCH

    PULLED
    ‘—

    ,—

    (m)

    RELEASED

    HIGH ‘—

    @>

    PRESSURE

    CW

    ~ I~I
    LIB

    IALTERNATOR
    (E2(IS) (~3) : @
    @@:@

    E

    rf31ru
    FAIL
    LAMP

    f.

    ~

    Y/R

    SWITCH

    I

    BRAKE
    LOW
    VACUUM
    PRESSURE SWITCH

    Y/R

    I

    LOW LEVEL

    lbiJJ
    B

    rrtn

    ~O~

    BRAKE
    FLUID

    HIGH
    Y/8

    r:tI (E6~)

    Y/R

    Y/S

    rrtn

    fUCi

    B

    (Refer to
    SA-ASS.)

    8

    ~

    (@)

    ~

    (E37)

    ASS
    CONTROL
    UNIT

    ~U
    S

    -!
    (E2Q.5): @

    (~)

    @:@

    ~——————————-,
    ~~(B115)
    5 6

    Refer to last page

    j8191Q1112

    W

    (Foldout

    QID

    page) .

    II

    (~wJ)

    (M19)

    R(BI~~1) @)

    LiJ

    B

    &@
    tgj
    GY

    ~~CMID
    5 6 j819101112

    B

    ~@

    tml

    W

    I

    I

    L

    rnIIDIIID

    8

    (Bill)

    I

    : ~(~)
    I

    ~(~2)

    GY

    ~

    GY

    @
    ,

    GY

    ~(E233)

    l£J

    @

    :
    I

    I

    ~

    HEL530

    EL-61

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER

    Warning Lamps/Wiring Diagram (Conl’d)

    WARN —

    EL-WARN-04
    @:

    5-door Hatchback and
    Sedan models
    Preceding

    C

    page

    DOOA

    FUEL

    COMBINATION
    METER
    ~
    @)

    ~

    R/W

    fi2’ru

    JUNCTION

    BOX NO.2
    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)

    ~~
    R/W

    @

    G/R

    Iqp~-~~—————-~qpl
    R/W

    i~O

    ~

    G/R

    A/W

    R/W

    m

    m

    REAR
    DOOR

    OPEN SWITCH
    RH
    @:@

    JFtn

    REAR
    DOOR

    _CLOSED

    OPEN

    ……

    ……

    SWITCH
    DRIVER’S
    SIDE

    LOW__

    ceID

    lbiJ
    B

    DOOR

    _CLOSED

    LH

    ……

    ~:@

    HIGH (B18)

    In
    t.J 1

    FRONT

    OPEN

    SWITCH

    B

    SWITCH

    PASSENGER
    SIDE
    ~

    (B11)

    ~———————————,

    UGY
    rff2lceID
    SA ‘

    SR

    W

    S

    &~@
    j819ID
    5 6

    B

    B

    @

    Refer to last page
    ~

    UJ ~~~SR’

    FUEL
    TANK
    GAUGE
    UNIT

    DOOA

    R/W

    R/W

    JFtn

    FRONT

    OPEN
    _CLOSED

    _CLOSED
    ……

    I

    I

    ……
    I

    1112

    (Foldout

    page) .

    ~

    W

    HEL531

    EL-62

    WARNING

    LAMPS AND BUZZER

    Warning Lamps/Wiring Diagram (ConI’ d)

    WARN —

    RHO MODELS WITH TACHOMETER

    EL-WARN-05
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:

    Gasoline
    engine
    Diesel engine
    Gasoline
    engine

    @:

    GA

    (JIB)

    Y/R

    Y/S

    EU

    EU

    Diesel

    1

    engine

    @:ForAustralia_ ,
    l
    @>: For Europe
    @: Except for Europe

    ……
    __

    SWITCH
    ~4
    :/C»‘D

    HIGH

    PRESSURE

    B

    B

    ~

    (~)

    (~)

    LOW
    BRAKE
    PRESSURE VACUUM
    ~

    ~

    ~

    B

    ~

    ~

    ~—-~——~—~——-~———-,
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    CHID

    (~)

    (B111)

    @)
    OR

    m
    B

    8

    L!J

    @
    GY

    m@
    m
    GY

    ~(~

    ~8

    : ~
    :~B
    L

    (~)

    {02 (E233) :
    (gj
    8
    :
    -‘

    HEL534

    EL-65

    I

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER
    Warning Lamps/Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    WARN —

    EL-WARN-OB
    COMBINATION

    Preceding
    page

    FUEL

    ~

    ~

    R/W

    Except for Europe and
    Australia

    @:

    5-door Hatchback

    ffi JOINT

    I
    ItlCMID
    m

    ~

    S/P

    ~

    R/W ~

    G/R

    Iqp~-~~—————-~~I
    R/W ~

    R/W

    R/W
    DOOR

    ,—

    …..

    OPEN

    _CLOSED

    SWITCH
    ~:@

    B

    _-

    SWITCH

    DRIVER’S
    SIDE

    R/W

    m

    REAR
    DOOR

    …..

    LOW LEVEL

    ,-HIGH

    (]ID

    R/W

    m

    WASHER
    FLUID

    DOOR

    CLOSED

    ~:~

    n=tiI

    FRONT

    OPEN

    SWITCH

    AH

    I

    S/P

    ~

    n=tiI

    REAR

    CLOSED

    I

    G/R

    i~o—, ….I
    OPEN

    B/P

    a/p

    CONNECTOR-1

    and

    WASHER

    ~

    G/R

    Sedan models

    IFtiI

    @)

    ~

    F
    DOOR

    @:

    METER

    FRONT
    DOOR

    _CLOSED

    OPEN

    SWITCH

    LH

    …..

    ~:@

    f.

    SWITCH

    PASSENGER
    SIDE

    a

    m

    ~
    ~

    ~—~~~—~-~——~~—————,

    Refer to last page
    (FoIdout

    L_~_~

    ~~~

    __

    ~

    ~

    B

    ~
    CE51)

    ~

    page) .

    :

    RHO models

    <[@

    MALFUNCTION
    INDICATOR

    ~

    ~

    OR/L

    ~

    P/L

    G/R

    I

    I

    ~01>

    ~0

    p

    m

    FUEL

    OIL

    P/L

    NATS

    SECULITY
    INDICATOR

    I~ICEID

    ~

    P/L

    P/L

    ~~

    IL.LJ.JI
    L:::jF’

    P/L

    I’U»O

    G/R ~

    OR

    CaDi)

    1c%J1C@ 1$1
    G/R

    I

    I

    rm

    ,….., (E24)

    ~P/L
    I
    ..-

    Europe

    _HIGH
    ……

    Y IB

    BRAKE
    FLUID
    LOW LEVEL
    SWITCH
    @

    rFh

    B

    I

    B

    ‘~O

    ~

    m

    ~

    PARKING
    BRAKE
    SWITCH

    PULLED

    f,

    CiJ
    B

    lbI=ll

    tI

    RELEASElJ

    ~

    B

    ~

    ern)
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    @

    page) .

    , e~)

    CM19)

    m@:@

    ~
    OR

    m

    GY

    ~@:

    tgj

    (b)
    GY

    m

    8

    L..!J

    S

    HEL538

    EL-69

    WARNING LAMPS AND BUZZER
    Warning Lamps/Wiring Diagram —

    WARN —

    (Conl’d)

    EL-WARN-12
    Preceding

    I

    page

    COMBINATION
    DOOR

    METER

    @
    (b):

    LHD models
    RHO modeIs
    @: 5-door Hatchback and
    Sedan models
    *6 … (b)
    21 ,

    5 6 TII~1112

    ‘TIT

    B

    L!J

    page) .

    ~

    BR ‘ SR ‘ 8R

    HEL 198

    EL-70

    WARNING

    LAMPS AND BUZZER

    Warning

    I

    Buzzer/Wiring

    Diagram —

    BUZZER —

    EL-BUZZER-01
    BATTEAY

    I

    ~-I~.~A.,—~
    I~~I
    B/R

    W

    P

    IN.81

    I

    1

    LIGHT
    SW

    ~

    CQ@)

    *1 …@ RIB

    G

    IFffil

    rrTIru

    P

    @

    IGN
    SW
    RR FOG

    0—-I

    :1_1

    rrf1i1

    [

    BOX NO.2
    I]~4IJUNCTION
    (JOINT

    m

    R/L

    I
    0

    ~

    BIA

    AIL

    tt

    rrI11

    rrf1i1

    rrf5n

    TAIL/L
    OUTPUT

    B
    J

    rn

    SWITCH
    …….

    DAYTIME

    JOINT

    CONNECTOR-3

    _I
    I

    ~

    ~

    B

    B

    ~
    -=—=-

    U)»o
    3: c.9CO.ri
    OWo..(f)
    n.([‘-‘

    -I
    U
    t-

    W

    c.n

    H

    :J
    LL

    3:t(/)0:
    «
    Zt-

    a

    z

    W
    .-J
    (1)

    ~

    H~
    UlZ
    :::>H
    LL…J

    roc
    .ri.ri

    ,2:r-f
    >-ID
    a:r-1

    w.o

    t-a:
    HW
    :::>~

    u<{
    O:W
    HD:

    um
    ~II

    ~
    I:-.:J

    ~

    ([~ ~:J
    W I (f)
    3: CO CO
    o:::>n.
    O-(f)’-‘

    3:
    ([0>wo«
    3:2—1
    OHW
    n.3:D:

    ~

    «

    D:.-JD:
    W:J«
    3:(!)W
    OWO:

    I

    ZO:..-.
    HOI
    3:1-([
    «
    O:.-JO:
    W:::>«
    3:c.9W
    OWO:
    n.a:’-‘

    cf)

    zO

    I

    3:
    0

    .ri
    0(f) °iO
    — ~OO

    OIL
    ZUID
    HI- 01
    3:HC

    t9Z
    HO

    Z([ __
    HOI
    3:1-.-J

    0..([‘-‘

    «0

    3:

    o

    0

    0

    cf)

    ID

    —0

    OU)

    H
    t-L
    HO

    3:

    o

    L

    0

    OI
    00
    ZU..-.
    HI-I
    3:H—I zO

    O~0

    3:

    ([(J1([

    0-

    0—00
    10-0

    ~k)

    -k)

    3:
    0
    0

    Za:(f)
    HO~
    3:I-L
    «Q)([…J>Q)
    W:::>.ri»0
    3: t9 L.ri
    OWO(f)
    n.a:—

    I

    3:

    o~o

    WI«
    3: COW
    :JO 00:::>0:
    -0
    o..(f)’-‘

    cf)

    0
    OI

    zu_

    HI-I
    3:HO:
    3:
    ([(/)0:
    WI«
    3:ffiW
    0:::>0:
    n.Ul’-‘

    0-

    00

    — :::0

    zO

    O~{)

    cf)

    01-0
    =>0 -fa

    I
    (T)

    ~

    ~

    …….

    c:=:=::J

    t- .ri
    t-oo
    «:J
    CD~

    ‘-f—

    I
    I

    ~

    ‘—-

    ,

    CJ

    I

    ~

    lDlO

    «
    W

    ID

    a:

    u

    .ri

    0

    °0

    °0

    z

    0

    00

    ::>

    °0

    0

    0- -0

    (f)
    (f)

    I

    L
    Q)

    0:

    «

    0:

    ([

    tH
    3:

    0- -I—

    Z

    enw
    enD

    «H
    o..(f)

    u

    ~

    ro

    I
    L
    0
    0

    «0

    I

    (Y)

    ..

    @

    I

    U
    ~tUH

    0

    Z
    H
    3:
    0:
    W
    3:
    0
    0-

    Do

    po

    4~

    -t……—.

    ::>

    .()

    ‘-/0

    -~

    0

    0O ~~

    Z

    Of-

    fa-

    OD

    —I
    —I

    Of- 1—0

    ::>

    >-

    «

    .-J
    n.w
    :J([

    ~
    ‘V

    vVV

    k)
    10

    ~

    3:

    a

    ro
    .c.

    ~

    (.!)

    Z
    W

    Z
    H
    «
    L

    .0

    >Z«
    3:…1
    OW
    oa:

    ~
    r.

    W

    (J)

    m

    .——

    I

    u

    CD

    — —L….-

    w

    9

    u

    ~~

    —I

    >
    .ri
    L

    ~

    (T)

    ([

    0:

    S~

    ~~

    03:

    IU

    ZO
    :::>…1

    00

    A

    A

    vvv

    ~

    —I(f) U0
    .-J
    —I

    «
    W ::>
    0 z
    «
    (J)
    H

    ~

    0

    z

    0

    I:::>

    ::>

    of{)

    Wu
    >:::>

    0

    0- -fa

    ~ 0.-

    z

    c.n
    CI:I

    o

    t- 0
    I+J
    W:J

    0’-‘

    I

    n.
    L
    «

    O-fO

    «

    r;;l

    ~

    => 0—0

    HEL097

    EL-73

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW —

    RHO MODELS

    EL-WINDQW-05
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    FUSE
    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    ~

    :

    power window

    -(B>

    e

    L/W

    0

    L/W ~

    To EL-WINDOW-11

    L/W ~

    To EL-WINOOW-12

    I

    J

    ~

    With rear

    ~

    Next page

    8

    I

    T, n
    B

    B

    B

    B

    1 &…1 1
    ~

    ~

    ~

    2

    CEl02)
    W

    ~

    ~

    +~
    5

    Refer to last page
    (Faldaut page) .
    ~

    L

    BR

    (]ID , (E101)
    ([@

    HEl543

    EL-74

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-WINDOW-06
    Preceding

    ~

    page

    I

    L/W ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

    ~

    ~CMD
    I~I
    tn»‘:I
    L/W &!.J

    Q]):

    3-door

    @:

    With rear power window
    Without rear power window

    :

    Hatchback

    I

    models

    L/W

    I

    O~

    m

    rn

    AUTO AMP
    POWER
    AUTO

    MANUAL

    N

    N

    D

    «=jJ~
    o

    U

    D

    WINDOW

    UP

    MAIN
    SWITCH
    @:@

    RELAY
    U

    ILL

    CQZ):

    lbidJ
    L

    3H

    ~
    G

    I

    B

    ItlCQD
    B

    CMD

    I

    »
    1
    B

    ~

    B

    G

    POWER WINDOW

    B

    &..1

    !-

    L

    ~
    R/W
    ~
    To EL -WINDOW-05

    ~

    L/W

    —I

    ~
    R/B

    I$~
    t~;~itl
    R~Wt

    R~J

    L/W @ R/W

    RIB

    L/W

    R/W

    RIB

    R/W

    RIB

    11iJ~ID~ 1)~~~ — — — ~4J1
    I
    I I

    ~O..,
    m

    mm

    m
    POWER WINDOW
    SUB-SWITCH
    (FRONT PASSENGER
    SIDE)

    @

    lbi=H

    t
    m
    G

    ~:

    3-door Hatchback models
    : With rear power .window
    @: Without rear power window

    POWER WINDOW

    REGULATOR
    .DOWN

    ~
    UP

    (FRONT PASSENGER
    SIDE)

    @

    ~——————————~

    Refer to last page

    I

    (FaIdaut

    I~@)

    :~@
    I
    I

    L

    W

    page) .

    J

    ~@)
    ~W

    CAUTION:

    Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC) . If the FFC is damaged. replace with
    a new one.
    HEL545

    EL-76

    POWER WINDOW

    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW —

    (Conl’d)

    EL-WINDOW-08
    preceding{

    page

    M

    POWER
    WINDOW

    MAIN
    SWITCH
    @):<8f)

    D
    U
    _.-._—

    REAR RH
    SWITCH
    To
    EL -WINDOW
    -09

    ~
    G/W

    ~
    G/B

    ~

    ~

    VIR

    VIB

    G/W

    G/B

    VIR

    ViS

    It~<.PI
    ~ it~—————-i*~—i$l
    CMI)

    GND

    ~
    B

    R/W

    I

    i~.1
    R/W

    ~

    fIl

    FRONT
    DOOR

    ,—

    OPEN

    PASSENGER

    ……

    SIDE

    _-

    CLOSED

    I

    il ri

    REAR

    DOOR
    OPEN

    ,—

    CLOSED

    DOOA
    OPEN

    SWITCH

    ,—

    DRIVER’S
    SIDE

    CLOSED

    @

    B

    RH

    A/W

    rrh

    ~LNext
    page

    SWITCH
    ~:@

    @

    FRONT

    r~
    e- -€>f

    REAR
    DOOR

    OPEN SWITCH

    CLOSED

    R/W

    B

    B

    B

    B

    1 Ll 1

    SWITCH

    LH
    @:@

    }

    ~
    W/R ~

    ~

    I

    I

    YIA

    RIL ~

    W/A

    Y/S

    Iu)~- — — ~.I- —-~~I
    RIL ~
    I
    RIL

    ACTUATOR
    I DRIVER’S
    Y18 SIDE

    mCQ[)

    m

    W/A
    I
    W/R

    m

    DOOR LOCK
    ACTUATOR
    I PASSENGER
    Y18 SIDE
    Y/8

    m@

    LOCKED

    LOCKED
    UNLOCKED

    UNLOCKED

    DOOR

    UNLOCK LOCK

    DOOR

    UNLOCK

    UNLOCK LOCK

    SENSOR

    4J1
    B

    .q_==-~

    s…
    ~

    :

    Door lock knob
    Door knob rod
    Lever B

    Door lock actuator

    assembly
    Door lock actuator

    assembly

    SEL831U

    OPERATION
    Power door lock/unlock

    and super lock set/release

    operation by door key cylinder

    With the key inserted into door key cylinder on driver or passenger door, turning it to LOCK will lock
    all doors and set super lock while all doors are closed or one or more door is open.
    With the key inserted into door key cylinder on driver or passenger door, turning it to UNLOCK will
    unlock all doors and release super lock.

    Power door lock and super lock release operation (by NATS IMMU signal)

    With the key inserted in ignition key cylinder and turning it to ON for about 5 — 6 sec. will unlock all
    doors and release super lock.

    Power door lock/unlock

    operation by lock knob

    With lock knob on driver or passenger door setting to LOCK while all doors are closed will lock all
    doors.
    When one or more door is opened, with lock knob on passenger door setting to LOCK will lock passenger door only. (Power door lock system will not operate.)
    • With lock knob on driver or passenger door setting to UNLOCK while all doors are closed will unlock
    all doors.
    Lock knob operation cannot control super lock.

    EL-82

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock System Description (Cont’d)
    Key reminder system

    If the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and any door is open, setting the lock & unlock switch
    and lock knob on driver door to «LOCK» locks the door once but then immediately unlocks it.

    System initialisation

    System initialisation is required when battery cables are reconnected.
    — insert the key into ignition key cylinder and turn it to ON.
    — LOCK/UNLOCK operation using door key cylinder.

    Conduct one of the followings;

    I

    EL-83

    POWER DOOR LOCK —

    Super Lock —

    Schematic
    Y:
    ua:r
    00-1
    -1l-ffi
    «L
    CI::lW
    Ol-(f)
    OU(f)I
    0««([

    Y:
    ua:r
    00-1
    -1l-rn
    «L
    CI::lW
    Ol-(f)
    OU(f)I
    0««-1

    ~

    ~

    u

    ..JI<:(
    a:=:>

    0:<:(

    ou

    0..1:JU
    (f)<:(

    UO:
    00

    UO:
    00

    IlLJ=:>

    01-

    0<:(

    ~u

    ~

    00:
    ..-10

    00:
    ..-10

    ..-II<:(
    a:=:>

    IlLJ=:>

    0:<:(

    01OU
    0<:(

    ~cc

    0..1:JU
    (f)<:(

    ~a:
    uo

    uo

    o(()

    O(f)

    ..-IZ
    ZlLJ
    :J(()

    :::i.

    ~cu

    u
    a
    ..J

    :::L
    U
    0

    :::i.

    .:::L.
    U
    0

    2:

    ~

    u
    ..J

    Z

    …JZ
    …J
    ::>0
    LLZ

    ~

    (f)

    en

    2:

    …J

    U

    H

    l-

    Q)

    0

    (()

    2:

    …J

    I

    ..JZ
    ZlLJ
    =:>(()

    W
    ([0
    LUH

    2:

    OU)
    :::L
    U

    Z

    ::;t.

    u

    c

    co

    0
    C

    :J

    ~

    :::i.

    ::>

    r-i

    co

    0

    r([

    Q)
    r-i
    Q)

    C

    =:>

    a:

    HU)
    …J~

    Q)
    (J)

    u

    c

    Q)
    r-1
    Q)

    r-i

    ::>

    U

    Q)
    (J)

    ::;t.

    .8

    UW
    >
    rH
    Wa:
    Y:O

    a:

    ~
    UJUJ

    1-

    LL(I)

    I

    z

    U

    IH

    3:
    (J)W
    0

    ([H

    wen

    0
    Z([
    HW

    …J(!)

    rZ
    UW
    (f)

    ren

    …JZ
    …J
    ::>0
    LLZ

    ~

    «

    UJUJ
    UJ~
    3:0
    I-CI:
    UJI-

    men

    ~UJ

    …JO
    …Ja:
    ::>1-


    Y:Q. LLen

    1-([

    HW

    :JY:

    a:w
    H([
    urn

    CO.::i

    .r-t
    C
    >.r-t

    ‘l»

    ‘-‘I»»‘»f

    LD

    Lf)

    ‘l»

    ~

    ~

    (‘Y’)

    ~

    ~~

    rID
    ([I»»‘»f

    ~

    I-.rl
    I-(f)
    «:J
    rn~
    0

    ([a:
    WI-Io..ZH
    :JOZ
    enu:J

    W~
    Y:(I)

    I-


    CD

    to
    I

    H

    ~I-

    m([
    «
    ZIoen
    H
    I-L
    HO

    Z
    (!)Z

    HO

    W

    0

    ([
    W

    W
    (f)
    ::l

    ([

    -1-1

    >-H

    >-

    II

    Y:
    U

    I
    U

    I-

    u

    ~

    to

    W.n

    I-

    CD

    01

    (!)

    Z
    CD

    II

    W
    (f)W

    (1)0
    «H
    Q.(f)

    I
    U
    lH

    ~

    (f)

    Cf)

    ([

    ([

    W
    >W
    HO
    a:H
    O(f)

    0
    0

    0

    LL

    :J
    L
    L
    H

    (f)

    Z

    HEL550

    EL-84

    POWER DOOR LOCK —

    Super Lock —

    Wiring Diagram —

    S/LOCK —

    EL-S/LOCK-01

    FUSE

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    ~
    W

    (~)

    I

    W

    1

    KEY

    INSERTED

    SWITCH

    GY

    @

    (FaIdout

    page) .

    GY

    ~
    SR

    CAUTION: Don’t attempt to repair. splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged, replace with
    a new one.
    HEL552

    EL-86

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-S/LOCK-03
    DOOR
    LOCK
    OUTPUT

    ANTI THEFT
    CANCEL

    DOOR
    SW

    SUPER LOCK
    CONTROL
    UNIT

    DOOR
    UNLOCK
    OUTPUT

    ~

    ~

    ~

    ~

    ~

    R/W

    G/R

    R/L

    W/R

    I

    t

    R/W

    rm
    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1
    ~
    ~

    G/A

    R/W

    rrfoil

    I
    R/W

    m@
    [j]@

    e
    NATS
    IMMU
    (Refer to
    EL-NATS.)
    ~

    R/W

    Im
    DOOR

    SWITCH
    _
    PASSENGER
    SIDE
    @

    W/A

    AIL

    (]I)

    W/A

    It

    R/L

    R/W

    R/W

    OPEN

    CMD

    m

    m

    AIL@

    W/A

    AIL ~

    W/A

    I~~ — i1- ~riJl

    IliJ~~~- ~liJl

    I

    e

    ,-CLOSED

    AIL

    It

    It

    W/R

    RIL

    m

    m

    It

    W/R

    m

    OPEN

    ,-CLOSED

    UNLOCK

    DOOR

    SWITCH
    DRIVER’S
    SIDE
    @)

    UNLOCK

    LOCK

    DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
    ASS’Y LH
    (DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR)

    DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
    ASS’Y

    LOCK

    RH

    (DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR)

    ‘-

    ()

    0

    L-

    a..

    0
    0

    £

    V

    a>
    L:J
    -0

    a>

    .r.
    ()

    «0
    co
    ~()
    .2

    to

    ‘-

    «‘C

    Q)

    ()

    Q)

    a.

    0 :J
    a..
    _
    L- (/J

    .c
    ()
    a> =:

    ~

    L..

    =’

    (/)

    Q)

    L-

    0

    0
    0

    0

    ‘- 0
    a..
    _

    .c

    L..

    :J
    ‘»C

    ,…..,

    Q)

    a>
    L..
    ::s

    a>

    ()

    0
    L-

    ‘-

    en

    .-«

    a.. ~

    .c

    en

    co

    a>

    a>

    9

    .B
    .~

    a>

    (/)
    (0

    z

    (,)

    c

    .~en

    «‘C
    Q)
    ()

    o

    ~
    a>

    ~

    c
    0

    .c
    :;::

    C)

    L-

    0- :::::,..

    B

    .~

    ex;)

    a>

    ‘-

    ::s
    «0

    Q)
    ()

    X

    X
    X
    X
    X
    X

    X: Applicable
    *: Make sure the power door lock system operates properly.

    EL-90

    X

    c

    0

    :E

    a. :::::,..

    X

    X

    en

    0 c
    La>

    X

    X

    inders.

    8

    £

    a>
    L-

    «i
    ::J
    «0
    «S
    ~()

    ~

    £
    ()

    ‘0

    X

    Super lock cannot be set by one of door key cyl ..

    *Super lock cannot be released by one or both
    door key cylinders.

    0
    0

    a>
    L-

    X

    X

    X

    7

    N

    ‘-

    (,)

    ‘-

    a>
    ..c.

    (,)

    0

    0

    c

    (/)

    Power door lock does not operate with any
    switch of driver side.

    6

    «‘C

    ~()
    ~
    Q)
    ~

    en

    2

    Super lock cannot be set by both door key cylin-

    a>

    ~(.)
    .2

    a>
    L-

    ~

    ders.

    ‘-

    .r:.

    (,)

    (,)

    ‘-

    :J

    £
    (.)

    Q)

    a>
    ..c.

    a>
    .c

    Q)

    0:J
    ‘-

    5

    en

    C

    ~

    Power door lock does not operate using any

    (,)

    ‘-

    (/)

    c

    switch.

    ..c.

    .B
    .~

    …..

    ~()

    ~(,)

    ~(,)

    .r:.

    0

    1:)

    1

    (.)

    Q)

    :J

    SYMPTOM

    .c

    ~(,)

    1:)

    Q)

    (,)

    Q)

    «u

    C.

    Q)

    .c

    0

    (,)

    X

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
    POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
    Main power supply circuit check

    Super lock control unit
    connector @)

    Terminals

    [I I I f K)l I I I I II
    1Q11 I 1 I I I I »
    W/L

    Ignition switch position

    EB

    e

    OFF

    ACC

    ON

    @

    Ground

    Battery
    voltage

    Battery
    voltage

    Battery
    voltage

    SEL811U

    Ground circuit check
    Super lock control unit
    connector @

    IIIIII

    Terminals

    Continuity

    @ — Ground

    Yes

    1£59
    I 1fa I 116
    B

    SE1812u

    II

    EL-91

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Conl’d)
    ~

    CONNECT

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
    (Door unlock sensor check)

    ~

    ~’I)~
    Super lock control
    connector @9

    1ITU415K~ 1 I I I
    mll
    [II»
    VIR

    m

    unit

    II

    CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT
    SIGNAL.

    ~

    Go to the next procedure.

    ~

    Replace door lock actuator assembly.

    Check voltage between control unit ter-

    VIS

    minals @ or @ and ground.
    Terminals
    ‘=»

    Iil

    DISCONNECT

    ~
    Door lock actuator

    IV

    assembly

    ~

    SEl:813U

    connectors

    Front RH:~

    Driver
    side

    @

    Passenger
    side

    (ID

    Condit;on

    e

    Locked

    Ground

    Voltage
    (V]
    Approx.

    5

    Unlocked
    Locked

    Ground

    0
    Approx.

    5

    Unlocked

    0

    Front LH: ~
    NG

    ~

    SEL814U

    CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR.
    1) Disconnect door unlock sensor connector.
    2) Check continuity between door
    unlock sensor terminals.

    Terminals

    Condition

    Continuity

    Locked

    No

    Unlocked

    Yes

    OK

    Check the following .
    • Door unlock sensor ground circuit
    • Harness for open or short between
    control unit and door unlock sensor

    EL-92

    POWER DOOR LOCK —

    Super Lock —

    Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
    (Door key cylinder switch check)

    m

    Super lock control unit
    connector

    [11 I I I d I I I I

    lb

    I I I

    T

    II

    CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
    INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK SIGNAL).
    Check voltage between control unit terminal G) and ground.

    I I I ..

    58

    Key cylinder switch operation

    Go to the next procedure.

    Voltage [V]

    o

    Between neutral and lock
    Unlock/neutral

    ~

    Approx.5

    NG

    CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH. ~
    1) Disconnect door key cylinder switch
    connector.
    2) Check continuity between door key
    cylinder switch terminals.

    Replace key cylinder
    switch.

    RH side
    SEL815U

    Terminals
    Key cylinder switch
    Driver side: ~
    Passenger side: ~

    DISCONVNECT

    ~I
    ‘ill

    ffib

    Key position
    Neutral

    Continuity
    No

    Between
    neutral and
    lock

    Yes

    Unlock/
    neutral

    No

    OK

    SEL816U

    Check the following.
    • Door key cylinder switch ground circuit
    • Harness for open or short between
    control unit and door key cylinder

    I

    EL-93

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
    (Door lock actuator check)
    Super lock control
    connector @

    IIIIIII I 11~51

    @

    unit

    m
    CHECK

    III
    I III I

    DOOR

    LOCK

    ACTUATOR

    CIR-

    NG

    Go to next procedure.

    CUIT.

    Check voltage for door lock actuator.
    W/R

    R/L
    Terminals

    Knob lock
    switch condition
    SEL817U

    EB

    e

    Unlock ~ Lock

    @

    Ground

    Lock ~ Unlock

    @

    Ground

    Voltage
    (V)
    Approx. 12
    (Approx.5
    seconds)

    Before operating passenger side knob

    ~EItH~

    lock switch, close all doors.
    OK
    Door lock actuator
    assembly connector
    Passenger side: ~

    [;][!]
    CHECK

    DOOR

    LOCK

    OK

    ACTUATOR.

    1. Disconnect door lock actuator connector.
    SEL818U

    ~i5

    actuator.

    2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock
    actuator and check operation.

    Door lock actuator

    ~EI}j~

    operation

    Terminals

    EB

    e

    ~ Locked

    (ID

    CID

    Locked ~ Unlocked

    CID

    (ID

    Unlocked
    Door lock actuator
    assembly connector
    Driver side: ~

    Check harness between
    control unit and door lock

    NG

    Replace door lock actuator assembly.
    SEL827U

    EL-94

    POWER DOOR LOCK —

    Super Lock —

    Trouble Diagnoses (Coni’ d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4
    [Super lock actuator (in door lock actuator assembly)
    check]

    Super lock control unit
    connector @

    B:S

    m

    I Id 1 I I IJ

    13/

    T [

    SRIW

    I

    118

    CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT.
    Check voltage for super lock actuator.

    GR/L

    Door

    key cylin-

    der switch
    SEL819U

    Terminals

    con-

    Lock

    (Set)

    Unlock
    (Released)
    Door lock actuator
    assembly connector

    Door lock actuator
    assembly connector

    Driver sde: ~

    Passenger

    ~EHB~

    sde:~

    release

    OK

    Check harness between
    control unit and door lock
    actuator assembly.

    (V)

    @

    Ground

    @

    Ground

    Approx.

    Put the system in set condition
    checking

    Go to next procedure.

    Voltage

    e

    EB

    dition

    NG

    12

    before

    signal.
    OK

    ~~~

    (;J
    CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR.
    1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly connector.
    2. Set lever A in Lock position.
    3. Apply 12V direct current to door lock
    actuator assembly and check operation.
    Front

    Front

    <=J

    t::>

    Super

    lock actu-

    ator operation

    loor ~:Ck
    actuator
    assembly

    Released

    ~

    Set

    Set —+ Released

    Terminals

    Connection
    lever

    (f)

    e

    CD

    @

    Disconnect

    @

    : CD engine
    @: GA engine
    @: SR engine
    With tachometer
    @: Without tachometer

    EL-POWER.

    :

    1~11

    *2. · · @ 30
    @ 40
    *3 … @ 32 ,’ @ 8

    y

    I

    *4 …@ LCHKR , @ LED-R

    y

    ‘:21

    COMBINATION

    METER

    NATS

    (MIL)

    ‘*.31

    1MMU

    @@

    @

    OR/L

    OR/L

    f

    t

    BR/y

    U5’5i1

    ~

    LED-A

    1M
    LINE

    ECM

    ECM

    (ECCS

    (ECCS

    CONTROL

    CONTROL

    MODULE)

    ‘——~@:@>

    MODULE)

    ________

    ~CED:@

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~———————————~
    ~~@
    1211109181

    6 5

    W

    HEL567

    EL-102

    NAYS (Nissan Anti-Theft System)
    Wiring Diagram — NATS —

    (Conl’d)

    RHO MODELS

    I

    BATTERY

    EL-NATS-03

    I

    1705A

    7.5A

    10A

    BLOCK

    ~[ill

    1241

    1251

    c
    Q)

    E

    E

    Q)

    en

    1i)

    s:: >-

    >-

    en

    en

    «0

    ~c

    Q)g.E

    s::

    o

    CJ)

    Q)

    05

    £; E

    o

    ()

    «~

    «0

    E

    ~

    …..

    (i)’Q)»O

    c.c..c.

    J:

    ~~~

    ~

    ….J

    Q)

    Q)

    o

    0

    J:

    «0»0

    ~

    a:

    Q)

    (i)1i)
    «0,

    a:

    ~ E a:
    ~~
    B
    ~ ~ ~
    o 0
    <5 <5

    Ci>

    E E c.
    «~

    Q)

    c.

    o
    :s
    w

    I(j)
    ….J

    s::

    (5 «g>
    en

    s::

    Q)

    Q)

    en
    «0
    Q)
    Q)

    a.
    cn

    I

    HEL573

    EL-123

    HARNESS LA Y~~~ness
    Engine Room

    ENGINE C OMPARTMENT

    RHO
    CI

    (Cont’d)

    models

    HEL574

    EL-124

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)

    CD

    CJ

    ~~
    (!J(!J

    I

    CD

    II
    CD

    @@@)@J@@B@@@@
    T’-

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (t)

    (J

    ooowowoowuu..

    (J

    (J

    CJ

    ,.-

    @@@@@
    @~ @@@@@@@@@@@@@
    ~~~~~
    (!Jm~~~~~~~~~~~

    HEL575

    EL-125

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
    PASSENGER

    COMPARTMENT

    LHD models

    ‘Z
    0)

    @)
    a.

    e

    :c
    -J

    .c:

    B
    «i
    UJ

    0)

    ‘i’
    0
    d.
    :r:

    —I

    a.
    E

    .5

    a.
    E

    =ato

    :.J

    =0

    Q)

    -0
    0

    (1)

    CD

    :I:

    J:

    00
    Q)

    ~

    ctJ

    .E
    0)

    ctJ

    to

    0

    :::J

    w

    <5

    ~

    (I’)

    co ,-

    ~~CD

    OOOO~

    HEL576

    EL-126

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness (Conl’d)
    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT —

    RHO models

    CD
    enS

    u-g
    ~

    ~~
    ()

    o

    (5

    (1)

    8

    «i
    0

    :c

    2:c

    0-

    C)
    C

    …J

    ~

    ‘»C
    0

    c:

    °i
    00

    ~
    E

    ~

    w

    -.,.r.

    :2
    C)

    00

    E

    -0

    cD

    «‘C

    =0
    eu
    Q)
    :c

    .B

    E

    0)

    ::J

    …J

    0-

    E

    ~
    =a~
    Q)

    J:

    0

    CD
    0o

    :5

    ill

    E
    Q)

    00

    ~

    <00

    0’>

    ~

    ..c

    I
    HEL577

    EL-127

    HARNESS LA YOUr

    Main Harness
    LHD MODELS

    LL

    LL

    w

    o

    o

    u

    u

    «

    CJ
    HEL578

    EL-128

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Main Harness (Cont’d)

    eQ)

    (i)

    en>-

    o
    :5
    w

    ~ctJ

    c.

    rn

    Q)

    c.
    rn

    eO
    ,-

    d>
    o

    «‘0

    i:S

    c:

    ,2

    Cli
    c:

    ‘E
    ~

    I

    HEL579

    EL-129

    HARNESS LA YOUr

    Main Harness (Cont’d)
    RHO MODELS

    u..

    u..

    w

    w

    o

    o

    u

    ()

    «
    ,….

    LO

    CI

    HEL580

    EL-130

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Main Harness (Cont’d)
    en
    co
    «

    0000
    CJ

    eO
    o

    en

    «0

    o

    (i)
    «‘0

    ..c:

    0

    .B E

    .~
    (/)

    Q)

    .~

    0l0l

    c:: c:

    .-

    Q)

    .-…J_CJ

    I

    HEL581

    EL-131

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness
    SEDAN —

    RHO models

    EL-132

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (ConI’ d)

    (‘)CJ(‘)(‘)(‘f)CJ(‘f)(‘f)(‘)(‘t)(‘)

    O««alcn

    en
    1:)

    CD
    CD
    0.

    (/)

    en

    LL
    -CD

    Q)

    Q)

    :;E

    ‘-

    0

    ~@@j

    >- ~
    1:)

    a:

    Q)

    .c

    ::

    co

    a;

    eE

    (i)
    0.
    0

    :;

    0

    W

    Q)

    .E

    u
    E
    :J

    Q)
    C

    (5

    06>

    Q)

    Q)

    > c

    ~o:
    0.
    ::J __
    (f)

    m

    Q)

    Ci5
    .c

    >
    «S
    >

    a..

    c

    co «0
    u .0
    Q)

    ~
    cr w ‘0
    VJ
    Q)

    I

    HEL588

    EL-135

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Control Harness
    SR20DE ENGINE (For Europe)

    In

    Q)
    «C

    o

    ~O

    a:

    @

    CD
    «3
    «‘0

    o
    E

    HEL589

    EL-136

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Harness
    SR ENGINE —

    LHD models

    o

    I
    HEL590

    EL-137

    HARNESS LAYOUT

    Engine Harness (Cont’d)
    SR ENGINE —

    RHD models

    o

    HEL591

    EL-138

    HARNESS

    LAYOUT

    Engine Harness (Conl’d)
    CD ENGINE

    oo

    C

    o

    (;

    (/)

    C

    (/)
    C

    Q)
    (/)

    Q)

    ~

    Q)

    en

    C

    > (;

    .g

    5

    ~
    .(/)0- «0
    Q)
    C
    cena.::l::l::S::lQ.

    «0

    .0

    «0

    0.

    0.

    E

    c E E ~

    ~~~~~0.Q._

    o =a
    en

    ffiw

    Q)

    {ij

    ~

    Q)

    c

    Q)

    c

    .~

    .~

    ~

    …….. en

    z~ o~ .~ .~ .91 .9i
    wwEEo

    ~

    oen

    c
    Q)
    en

    ~ 0 0

    Q) (5 (5
    ~ E E

    I
    CD

    00

    «0
    C
    ::l

    N

    coco co

    o

    en
    Q)

    c:

    .0,
    c:
    W

    HEL592

    EL-139

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Alternator Harness

    @ 8/2
    @ GY/4
    @@-

    Alternator

    @

    GY/2

    Alternator

    @
    @

    8/1

    TO@
    To@!)
    Body ground

    Alternator
    Compressor

    Body ground

    HEL605

    EL-140

    HARNESS

    LA YOUr

    Air Bag Harness

    LHD MODELS

    aD

    Y/24

    Air bag diagnosis sensor unit (Except for Europe)

    CB)

    Y/6

    Spiral cable

    GD

    Y/12

    To(~)

    (]D

    Y/2
    Y/22

    Air bag diagnosis sensor unit (For Europe)

    aD

    Air bag module (Passenger side)

    HEL593

    RHO MODELS

    aD

    Y/24

    CB)

    Y/6

    GD

    Y/12

    To (~)

    @

    Y/2
    Y/22

    Air bag diagnosis sensor unit (For Europe)

    GD

    Air bag diagnosis sensor unit (Except for Europe)
    Spiral cable
    Air bag module (Passenger side)

    I

    HEL594

    EL-141

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Front Door Harness (LH side)
    RHD MODELS (FFC type)

    CW

    SMJ

    To(~)

    (~)

    (~)

    BR/2

    Door speaker

    (!ffi) GY/4

    W/8

    (!if!)

    BR/3

    Door mirror actuator

    (~)

    GY/2

    Door mirror defogger

    @

    Power window regUlator

    (~)

    (m)

    8/2

    Power window sub-switch
    Door lock actuator
    (With power door lock type-1)

    CAUTION:

    B/6
    GY/2

    Door lock actuator assembly

    (With super lock)

    Key cylinder switch (With super lock)

    Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged,

    replace

    with a new one.

    HEL598

    EL-142

    HARNESS

    LA YOUr

    Front Door Harness (RH side)
    RHO MODELS (FFC type)
    @
    @

    @
    @
    @

    SMJ

    TO@

    @W/12

    Power window main switch

    BR/2

    Door speaker

    @

    GY/4

    Door lock actuator

    @!!)
    @

    B/6

    BR/3

    Door mirror actuator

    GY/2

    Door mirror defogger

    8/2

    Power window regulator

    (With power door lock type-1)
    GY/2

    Door lock actuator assembly (With super lock)
    Key cylinder switch (With super lock)

    CAUTION : Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit

    (FFC). If the FFC is damaged, replace

    with a new one.

    HEL602

    I

    EL-143

    ENGINE MECHANICAL

    II

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION NOTICE:
    GA engine
    • The timing chain guide bolts and tightening torque have been changed.
    SR engine

    • The intake manifold, collector and rocker cover have been changed .
    • The EGR system, crankcase ventilation oil separator and main bearing beam have been eliminated .
    • The main bearing cap bolts tightening method has been changed .
    • A roller rocker arm has been adopted.
    CD engine
    • The vacuum pump has been changed to a timing belt driven type .
    • The EGR system has been added .
    • The main bearing cap tightening torque has been changed.

    CONTENTS
    2

    PREPARATION
    Special

    Service

    Tool.

    CD

    2

    OUTER COMPONENT

    PARTS

    16

    TIMING BELT

    GA

    Camshaft

    SR
    OUTER COMPONENT
    OIL PAN

    PARTS

    8
    8

    Installation

    19
    22

    CYLINDER BLOCK

    23

    5R
    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
    General

    (505)

    Specifications

    Inspection

    10

    24
    24

    and Adjustment

    24

    10
    CD

    11

    CYLINDER HEAD

    13

    CYLINDER BLOCK

    14

    Assembly

    18
    Belt

    CYLINDER HEAD

    4

    Installation
    Removal

    Belt

    Pump Timing

    7

    TIMING CHAIN
    INTAKE MANIFOLD

    Timing

    Injection

    3

    TIMING CHAIN

    18

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    15

    EM-1

    General
    Inspection

    Specifications
    and Adjustment

    (SDS)

    26

    26
    26

    PREPARATION
    Special Service Tool
    Tool number
    Tool name

    Engine
    application

    Description
    GA

    SR

    CD

    Removing and installing
    injection nozzle assembly

    KV119E0010

    Nozzle holder socket

    x
    NT563

    EM-2

    TIMING CHAIN

    SEC. 111-120-130-135

    [j] 6.3

    — 8.3 (0.64 — 0.85, 55.6 — 73.8)

    I

    [j] 6.3

    — 8.3
    (0.64 — 0.85,

    lil : N.m
    f] [OJ

    [OJ :

    132.4 — 152.0 (13.50 • 15.50, 97.6 — 112.1)

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    D : Apply

    liquid gasket.

    f] : Lubricate

    with new engine oil.

    SEM340FA

    G)
    @
    @
    @
    @

    O-ring

    @

    Idler shaft

    Upper timing

    chain

    Upper chain tensioner
    Camshaft sprocket

    (Intake)

    Camshaft sprocket

    (Exhaust)

    (J)
    @
    @
    @)
    @
    @

    Idler sprocket
    Lower chain tensioner
    Gasket
    Slack side timing

    chain guide

    Timing chain guide
    Lower timing chain

    EM-3

    @
    @
    @)
    @)
    @
    @

    Crankshaft

    sprocket

    Oil pump drive spacer
    Front cover
    Oil seal
    Crankshaft
    Cylinder

    pulley

    head front cover

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    SEC. 130-140-150-210-211-221
    ~~

    tCJ

    i

    13 • 16 (1.3 — 1.6, 9 — 12)

    2

    <:),

    Refer to «Installation»
    «TIMING CHAIN».

    If
    ? r..

    C1

    Washer

    ~

    ~6.3

    ~

    — 8.3
    (0.64 — 0.85, 55.6 — 73.8)

    ‘—‘

    I

    in

    tCJ 41 • 52
    (4.2 — 5.3, ..
    30 • 38)

    (iJ6.3 — 8.3
    (0.64 • 0.85, 55.6 • 73.8)

    ‘cJ~

    16

    or: -/I~J

    r~

    9~

    / ~

    !16 -22
    (1.6 • 2.2,
    12 — 16)

    .

    .

    /’]

    0-‘»

    /~~
    tt’J16

    -~~5

    17
    tCJ 45 — 60
    (4.6 • 6.1,
    33 — 44)

    tCJ 16 — 21

    (1.6 • 2.1,
    12 — 15)
    tt’J

    7

    tCJ16-19
    (1.6 — 1.9,
    12 — 14)
    tCJ 16 • 19
    (1.6 • 1.9,’~
    12-14

    7

    ~

    /

    co

    ~Q;)

    _~

    9

    …..J~—oo
    I

    Oil seal

    C1

    Ii) : N-m

    D : Apply
    CD
    @

    @
    @

    liquid gasket.

    Oil filler cap
    Rocker cover
    PCV valve
    Camshaft position sensor, ignition coil and power transistor
    built into distributor
    Intake manifold supports
    Knock sensor

    (J)
    @
    @

    ~(0.38 — 0.51,j
    33.0 — 44.3)
    tCJ : N- m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    @
    @

    tCJ 16 — 21
    (1.6 • 2.1,

    .,.’

    :—.—…~~tCJ

    .~2
    (1.6 — 2.2,
    12 • 16)

    16 — 21 (1.6 — 2.1, 12 — 15)

    with new engine oil.

    Refer to LC section
    («Thermostat», «ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM»).

    Oil filter bracket
    Oil catcher
    Oil filter
    Water pipe assembly
    Thermostat housing
    Air relief plug
    Thermostat

    EM-4

    @

    @)
    @
    @

    SEM376F

    Water inlet
    Starter motor
    Power steering oil pump
    adjusting bar
    Power steering oil pump
    bracket

    OUTER COMPONENT

    PARTS

    SEC. 140-163-164
    • 6.4.

    7.5 (0.65 • 0.76, 56.4 • 66.0)

    ~

    .

    ~:><~

    3

    4 /~8.4

    ~——

    ,~

    — 10.8 (0.86.

    1.1,74.6.

    95.5)

    ‘QO:~

    ~GaSket~

    ~

    6.4 • 7.5 (0.65 — 0.76, 56.4 — 66.0)

    2.9.

    3.8 (0.30 • 0.39, 26.0 • 33.9)
    Insulator ~

    1

    ~

    «-

    ‘~

    lo-ring~
    Q

    [O-ring~

    «~I
    I

    ~

    15 • 20 (1.5 — 2.0, 11 — 14)

    tt’J 20

    9

    • 29 (2.0 — 3.0, 14 — 22)

    tt’J Refer to

    «Installation»
    in «INTAKE MANIFOLD».

    * Throttle body
    bolts
    1) Tighten
    to 9 to 11 N.m
    (0.9 to 1.1 kg-m,
    6.5 to 8.0 ft-Ib).
    2) Tighten
    to 18 to 22 N.m
    (1.8 to 2.2 kg-m,
    Tighten in numerical order.
    13 to 16 ft-Ib).

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    Ii) : N. m

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    SEM377F

    (!)
    @
    @
    @

    Injector
    Pressure

    regulator

    IACV-AAC

    valve

    IACV-FICD

    solenoid

    valve

    @
    @
    (J)
    @

    Intake manifold
    Throttle

    body

    Throttle

    position

    collector

    Intake manifold

    EM-5

    @
    @)

    sensor

    @

    Water pipe
    Engine
    sensor
    Thermal

    coolant

    temperature

    transmitter

    I

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    SEC. 118-140-230-275

    10

    [OJ

    37 — 48
    (3.8 • 4.9, 27 — 35)

    Gasket ~
    ~

    ~6.3-8.3

    U
    I

    ~

    ~

    55.6 • 73.8)

    /tt’.J

    ~@

    ~

    4

    ‘@~

    ~[OJ

    ~~
    ~’iifl/’>
    7r~~/»
    /r~r]»~

    ?

    16 — 22
    (1.6 • 2.2, 12 • 16)

    [OJ

    ~

    ~

    [OJ

    16 — 22
    (1.6. 2.2,12.

    45 • 60
    (4.6 — 6.1,33

    16)

    — 44)

    16 — 22 (1.6 — 2.2, 12 • 16)

    [OJ 40

    — 50 (4.1 • 5.1, 30 • 37)

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    tt’.J : N. m
    ~

    «‘— /
    ~

    ~~tC __~’

    3

    45 — 60
    (4.6 — 6.1, 33 • 44)

    ~

    ~~.~

    i[OJ
    ~

    ~

    0

    45 — 60
    (4.6 — 6.1,
    33 — 44)

    @~

    ~

    [OJ

    (0.64 — 0.85,

    5

    l’

    (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    : Apply liquid gasket.
    SEM378F

    G)
    @
    @
    @

    Oil level gauge
    Alternator adj usti ng bar
    Compressor bracket
    Alternator bracket

    @
    @
    (J)

    Water outlet
    Drain plug
    Exhaust manifold

    EM-6

    @

    Heated oxygen sensor

    @

    Exhaust manifold cover
    Blow-by hose

    @)

    OIL PAN
    SEC. 110
    ~

    Refer to «Installation».

    I
    fj]

    6.4 — 7.5 (0.65 — 0.76, 56.4 — 66.0)

    Loosen in numerical order.
    SEM014F

    Installation

    Engine front

    1.
    2.

    Install intake manifold.
    Install intake manifold supports.

    3.

    Install fuel tube assembly.
    Tighten bolts in two steps.
    1st: 9.3 — 10.8 N.m (0.95 — 1.1 kg-m, 6.9 — 8.0 ft-Ib)
    2nd: 21 — 26 N-m (2.1 — 2.7 kg-m, 15 — 20 ft-Ib)
    Connect harness connectors of engine coolant temperature
    sensor and thermal transmitter.

    9

    Tighten in numerical order.
    SEM015F

    4.

    SEM386F

    Engine front

    Q

    Tighten in numerical order.

    5.

    Install intake manifold

    SEM387F

    EM-11

    collector

    and collector

    supports.

    INTAKE MANIFOLD
    Installation (Cont’d)

    [][]

    6. Reinstall any parts removed in reverse order of removal.

    EM-12

    CYLINDER

    HEAD

    SEC. 111-130
    2

    II

    a

    *:

    Refer to LC section (UWater Outlet»,

    Refer to «Installation» in IlTIMfNG CHAIN».

    (j) : N.m

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    tCJ : N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    a:

    Apply liquid gasket.

    f1 : Lubricate

    with new engine oil.
    SEM388F

    G)
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    (j)

    Oil filler cap
    Rocker cover
    Rocker arm guide
    Rocker arm
    Shim
    Hydraulic lash adjuster
    Chain tensioner

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Camshaft sprocket
    Camshaft
    Camshaft bracket
    Water outlet
    Cylinder head
    Valve

    EM-13

    @
    @
    @)
    @
    @
    @

    Valve spring seat
    Valve spring
    Valve spring retainer
    Valve collet
    Spark plug
    Cylinder head bolt

    CYLINDER BLOCK

    SEC. 110-120-150

    tCJ

    16 • 22 (1.6 • 2.2, 12 — 16)

    «- fj) 6~3 —

    _~_~,3

    8.3

    (0.64 — 0.85,
    55.6 — 73.8)

    ~

    ~
    ~~~~

    ~~~~ Vf] tCJ

    Refer to «Assembly».

    SEM389F

    G)
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    (J)
    @

    Rear oil seal retainer
    Cylinder block
    Water pump
    Power steering oil pump
    adjusting bar
    Front cover with oil pump
    Oil strainer
    Thrust bearing
    Crankshaft

    @
    @)
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @)

    Connecting rod bushing
    Piston rings
    Piston
    Piston pin
    Connecting rod
    Connecting rod bearing
    Aluminum oil pan
    Rear cover plate

    EM-14

    @
    @
    @
    @)
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Drain plug
    Steel oil pan
    Baffle plate
    Main bearing cap
    Flywheel
    Pilot bushing
    Rear plate
    Main bearing

    CYLINDER BLOCK
    Engine front

    Assembly

    <;:::J





    a.
    b.

    Tighten in numerical order.

    KV10112100

    SEM391F

    c.
    d.
    e.

    Tightening procedure of main bearing cap bolts
    Apply new engine oil to thread of bearing cap bolts.
    Prior to tightening bearing cap bolts, shift crankshaft back
    and forth to properly seat the bearing cap.
    Tightening procedure
    Tighten all bolts to 7 to 13 N.m (0.7 to 1.3 kg-m, 5.1 to 9 ft-lb).1
    Turn all bolts 75 to 80 degrees clockwise with Tool or suitable angle wrench.
    Loosen all bolts completely.
    Tighten all bolts to 32 to 38 N.m (3.3 to 3.9 kg-m, 24 to 28
    ft-Ib).
    Turn all bolts 30 to 35 degrees clockwise with Tool or suitable angle wrench.
    If an angle wrench is not available, mark all bearing cap
    bolts on the side facing engine rear. Then, turn each bolt
    specified degrees clockwise. Confirm angle of degrees with
    a graduator, not by eye-measurement.
    After securing bearing cap bolts, make sure crankshaft
    turns smoothly by hand.

    EM-15

    OUTER COMPONENT PARTS
    Right side

    tCJ 24

    tCJ 16 • 21 (1.6 • 2.1,

    12 • 15)

    • 27

    17

    tCJ 16 • 21
    (1.6 • 2.1, 1)- 15)

    8
    ~~.

    /?
    ~

    6
    [CJ22 • 25 (2.2 • 2.5, 16 — 18)

    tCJ

    59 • 69
    ~
    (6.0 • 7.0, 43 • 51)}

    [CJ16 — 21

    @

    1

    @~

    (1.6 • 2.1, 12 • 15)~

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    tCJ : N. m (kg-m,

    ft-Ib)
    SEM396F

    CD
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    (J)

    Starter motor
    Injection pump
    Injection tube
    Thermostat housing
    Injection nozzle
    Spill tUbe
    Water outlet

    @
    @
    @)
    @
    @
    @

    @

    Belt cover
    Timing belt

    @)

    Injection pump sprocket
    Rear camshaft sprocket
    Tensioner
    Vacuum pump
    Rear back cover

    @

    EM-16

    @
    @
    @

    Oil cooler
    Gasket
    Bracket
    Power steering oil pump
    adjusting bar
    Gasket

    OUTER COMPONENT

    PARTS

    Left side
    SEC. 120-135-140-210-230
    ~3.8
    ~

    3 _ 5

    (0.39

    47

    (0.3 — 0.5, 26 —

    — 4.5
    • 0.46,

    ~@—ml
    ~JJ

    • 37

    f

    jD

    II

    Jl

    ‘b..-:r, ‘

    1

    tCJ 44 • 54

    33.9

    t’

    (4.5 — 5.5,

    0c

    33-4/~~_~

    b~
    IjJ ~O~; ~.:.86,

    I

    ~~[J

    t~Jf)~&t’l-/).

    56.4

    74.6Z

    r’~’ -~7fl1~J
    ..>-il

    ~—

    j

    ~~~«;~~

    ~ ~ ~)
    .~~

    r:~’)~ ~

    :;:

    IIF-

    ~.-~

    I}~

    ~.

    //

    «DO»
    01″

    2 ~(~),

    ~.’

    ~~~

    t

    ~

    J

    16 • 21
    (1.6 • 2.1, 12 • 15)

    /’

    J@

    ~
    1jJ3

    j tOJ

    ’00’,.-., vQ 7
    (l,,0″

    — 5
    (0.3 — 0.5,
    26 • 43)

    17

    ~
    ~
    ~~

    tOJ

    18 22
    (1.8.2.2,
    13 — 16)

    lJ’

    4

    • 4. 5
    (0.4 • 0.5,
    35 — 43)

    ~~

    J

    m

    Pm 142 _ 152
    LJ ~-..
    (14.5 — 15.5,
    105 — 112)

    tOJ 16

    • 21 (1.6 • 2.1,

    ~,.—@@~
    —@
    tCJ 18 — 22 (1.8 — 2.2, 13 — 16)

    12 • 17

    <,
    tCJ16 _ 21

    ~~

    (1.6 • 2.1,

    12 • 15)~~.

    <-

    ~
    0

    ~

    0″

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    tOJ : N.m

    (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    f] : Lubricate

    tOJ 62 • 75

    with new engine oil.

    (6.3 — 7.6, 46 • 55)
    SEM374F

    CD

    Belt cover upper

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Water pump pulley
    Belt cover lower
    Crankshaft

    pulley

    Alternator
    Alternator

    bracket

    (J)
    @
    @
    @)
    @
    @

    Exhaust manifold

    @

    EGR passage (To install, face
    EGR gas discharge port
    upward.)

    @
    @
    @)
    @

    Gasket

    Gasket
    Intake manifold
    EGR valve
    EGR tube
    Blow-by

    gas control

    EM-17

    valve

    Intake manifold
    Exhaust manifold
    Heat insulator

    collector
    cover

    TIMING BELT
    Camshaft Timing Belt
    SEC. 112.120-130.135

    SEM368FA

    CD
    @
    @
    @

    Front camshaft sprocket
    Idler
    Belt tensioner
    Crankshaft sprocket

    @
    @
    (J)

    Belt cover lower
    Belt cover center (Engine
    mounting bracket)
    Timing belt

    EM-18

    @
    @

    Belt cover upper
    Gasket

    @)

    Front camshaft sprocket plate

    TIMING BELT
    Injection Pump Timing Belt
    SEC. 130-135

    Refer to «VACUUM PUMP»
    in SR section.

    fJ

    [OJ

    Engine front

    I

    87 — 107
    (8.9 — 10.9,
    64 • 79)

    5

    fJ [OJ 59

    ~

    ~

    — 69 (6.0 — 7.0, 43 • 51)

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    [OJ :

    N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    fJ : Lubricate

    with new engine oil.
    SEM349F

    G)
    @
    @

    Timing belt
    Tensioner spring
    Tensioner

    @
    @
    @

    Rear camshaft sprocket
    Injection pump sprocket
    Vacuum pump

    (J)
    @

    Timing belt cover
    Grommet

    REMOVAL
    1.. Remove battery from engine room.
    2. Remove air cleaner case, air duct and resonator.
    3. Disconnect all piping connections from vacuum pump.
    Refer to «VACUUM PUMP» in SR section.
    4. Remove water pipe mounting bolt under injection pump timing belt cover, then remove water pipe.
    5. Remove timing belt cover.

    6.

    Set No.1 cylinder at TOG on its compression stroke. (TOG
    is indicated by crankshaft pulley notch without painted
    mark.)

    EM-19

    TIMING BELT
    Injection Pump Timing Belt (Cont’d)

    ~

    Make sure that alignment marks of rear camshaft sprocket
    and injection pump sprocket are positioned as shown.

    7.

    Apply alignment marks on the back of timing belt according
    to rear camshaft sprocket and injection pump sprocket
    alignment marks. Also apply a front mark on the back of
    timing belt.

    Alignment
    mark
    SEM350F

    8.

    Loosen tensioner mounting nut. Using a screwdriver,
    turn
    tensioner in direction» of arrow to release belt tension.
    9. Remove vacuum pump.
    10. Remove timing belt.

    SEM352F

    INST ALLATION
    1. Confirm that No.1 piston is set at TOC on its compression
    stroke. (TDC is indicated by crankshaft pulley notch without
    painted mark.)

    If injection pump sprocket was removed, confirm that it is
    re-installed as illustrated.
    Identification of alignment:
    Use mark «B»

    2.
    1)
    2)
    3)

    Install timing belt.
    Set timing belt with the front mark facing front of engine.
    Install vacuum pump.
    Position timing belt matching the alignment marks with rear
    camshaft sprocket and injection pump sprocket alignment
    marks.

    EM-20

    TIMING BELT
    Injection Pump Timing Belt (Cont’d)
    3. Adjust belt tension.
    1) Loosen tensioner lock nut to apply tension to timing

    Make sure that all sprocket and timing belt alignment
    are positioned as shown.

    Alignment

    mark

    ~

    belt.
    marks

    I
    SEM350F

    2) Rotate crankshaft clockwise two turns.
    Do not turn crankshaft by camshaft sprockets.
    3) Tighten tensioner lock nut while holding tensioner with a
    screwdriver.
    Belt tension:
    98:1:49 N (10:f: 5 kg, 22:i: 11 Ib)
    4. Install timing belt cover.
    5. Install remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.

    SEM353F

    EM-21

    CYLINDER HEAD
    SEC. 111.130.135

    f]~

    83
    6.3 «1 . (O.M — O.~. 5;

    :

    ~

    18 — 22 (1.8 • 2.2, 13 • 16)

    87 • 107 (8.9 • 10.9, 64 — 79)

    jJ

    tA~~.~’~

    ~f]~

    — -/1/l{~~.
    I. .•

    /’/ e

    @

    9-@f]

    aD;?:

    II] 6.3

    iNf]~
    I~

    • 8.3
    (0.64 • 0.85,
    55.6 • 73.8)

    !

    @~

    @f]
    /

    Swirl chamber
    (Combustion chamber)

    Valve seat

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)
    (kg-m, ft-Ib)
    : Lubricate with new engine

    t9 : N.m
    [J

    oil.

    SEM356FA

    CD
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    (J)

    @

    Camshaft
    Front oil seal
    Collar
    Grommet
    Front back cover
    Front camshaft sprocket plate
    Front camshaft sprocket
    Spring

    @
    @)
    @
    @

    @
    @
    @

    Selective cylinder head gasket
    Valve
    Spring seat
    Valve spring
    Valve oil seal
    Spring retainer (INT)/Valve
    rotator (EXH)
    Valve cotter

    EM-22

    @)

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    @
    @

    Hydraulic valve lifter
    Rear back cover
    Rear camshaft sprocket
    Grommet
    Collar
    Rocker cover gasket
    Cam bracket
    Rear oil seal

    CYLINDER

    BLOCK

    SEC. 110-120

    II

    o

    o

    (i)f]

    @f]

    6

    @f]ft
    ~

    I
    Piston

    ring

    Piston
    Piston

    pin

    Connecting

    rod bearing

    Connecting

    rod

    Main bearing

    cap

    — 78 (7.0 — 8.0, 51 — 58)

    [C;J :

    fJ[C;J

    G)
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    fJ [C;J 69

    @

    N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    fJ : Lubricate

    Refer to «Assembly»,

    with new engine oil.
    SEM397F

    (J)
    @
    @
    @)
    @
    @

    Rear plate
    Flywheel
    Rear oil seal
    Rear oil seal retainer
    Gusset
    Cyl i nder block

    EM-23

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Main bearing
    Crankshaft
    Main bearing
    Gusset
    Drain plug
    Pilot bushing

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
    General Specifications
    Valve timing

    Bce

    EM120

    Unit: degree

    c

    a

    e

    Inspection and Adjustment

    VALVE

    Valve spring
    Unit: mm (in)
    Free height

    T (Margin thickness)

    mm (in)

    47.53

    (1.8713)

    Pressure
    N (kg, Ib) at height mm (in)

    1L

    519 — 571
    (52.9 — 58.2,

    Standard

    116.7 — 128.4)
    at 27.0 (1.063)
    493.05

    Limit
    Out-ot-square

    SEM188A

    Valve head diameter 110″
    Intake

    34.0 — 34.3 (1.339 — 1.350)

    Exhaust

    30.0 — 30.3 (1.181 — 1.193)

    Valve length IlL»
    Intake

    98.19 — 98.61
    (3.8657 — 3.8823)

    Exhaust

    99.11 — 99.53
    (3.9020 — 3.9185)

    Valve stem diameter «d»
    Intake

    5.965 — 5.980 (0.2348

    — 0.2354)

    Exhaust

    5.945 — 5.960 (0.2341

    — 0.2346)

    Valve seat angle «a»
    Intake
    Exhaust
    Valve margin «T»
    Intake

    1.1 (0.043)

    Exhaust

    1.3 (0.051)

    Valve margin «T» limit

    More than 0.5 (0.020)

    Varve stem end surface
    grinding limit

    Less

    than

    0.2 (0.008)

    EM-24

    (50.291,

    110.838)

    at 27.0 (1.063)

    mm (in)

    Less

    than

    2.1 (0.083)

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Inspection and Adjustment (Cont’d)
    CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING

    PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN

    Unit: mm (in)
    Standard

    Limit

    Camshaft journal to
    bearing clearance

    0.045 — 0.086
    (0.0018 — 0.0034)

    0.15 (0.0059)

    Inner diameter of camshaft bearing

    28.000 — 28.021
    (1.1024 — 1.1032)

    Outer diameter of
    camshaft journal

    27.935 — 27.955
    (1.0998 — 1.1006)

    Camshaft runout [TIA*]

    Less than
    0.02 (0.0008)

    Camshaft sprocket
    runout [TIR*]

    Less than
    0.25 (0.0098)

    Camshaft end play

    0.055 — 0.139
    (0.0022 — 0.0055)

    Piston ring
    Unit: mm (in)
    Side clearance
    Top
    Standard
    Limit

    0.040 — 0.080
    (0.0016 — 0.0031)
    0.2 (0.008)

    2nd

    0.1 (0.004)

    Standard
    Limit

    0.030 — 0.070
    (0.0012 — 0.0028)
    0.2 (0.008)

    Ring gap

    0.20 (0.0079)

    Top
    Standard
    Limit

    0.20 — 0.30
    (0.0079 — 0.0118)
    1.0 (0.039)

    2nd
    Standard
    Limit
    EM671

    37.989 — 38.179
    (1.4956 — 1.5031)

    Exhaust

    37.309 — 37.499
    (1.4689 — 1.4763)

    Wear limit of cam
    height

    1.0 (0.039)

    Oil

    Cam height HAil
    Intake

    0.35 — 0.50
    (0.0138 — 0.0197)

    Standard
    Limit

    0.20 — 0.60
    (0.0079 — 0.0236)
    1.0 (0.039)

    Piston pin
    0.2 (0.008)

    Unit: mm (in)
    Piston pin outer diameter

    Valve lift
    Intake

    10.0 (0.394)

    Exhaust

    9.2 (0.362)

    Interference fit of piston pin
    to piston

    21.989 — 22.001 (0.8657 — 0.8662)
    0.002 — 0.006 (0.0001 — 0.0002)

    Piston pin to connecting
    rod bushing clearance

    *Total indicator reading

    Standard
    Limit

    0.005 — 0.017 (0.0002 — 0.0007)
    0.023 (0.0009)

    * Values measured at ambient temperatur»e of 20°C (68°F)

    EM-25

    II

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
    General Specifications
    Valve timing

    Boe

    EM120

    Unit: degree

    a

    e

    c

    Inspection and Adjustment
    CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING

    VALVE
    Unit: mm (in)

    Unit: mm (in)
    Standard
    Camshaft journal
    clearance

    (0.0018 — 0.0034)

    Inner diameter of
    camshaft bearing

    (1.1811

    Outer diameter of
    camshaft journal

    (1.1785 — 1.1793)

    Camshaft runout

    Camshaft end play

    Max. tolerance

    0.045 — 0.086

    T (Margin thickness)

    It

    0.1 (0.004)

    30.000 — 30.021
    — 1.1819)

    29.935 — 29.955

    Less than
    0.02 (0.0008)

    0.05 (0.0020)

    0.115 — 0.188
    (0.0045 — 0.0074)
    SEM188

    Valve head diameter liD»
    Intake

    39.0 — 39.3 (1.535 — 1.547)

    Exhaust

    32.0 — 32.3 (1.260 — 1.272)

    Valve length ilL»
    Intake
    EM671

    Exhaust

    99.53 — 99.97
    (3.9185

    — 3.9358)

    99.38 — 99.82
    (3.9126

    — 3.9299)

    eam height «A»
    Valve stem diameter lid»
    Intake

    48.70 — 48.75 (1.9173

    — 1.9193)

    Exhaust

    49.15 — 49.20 (1.9350

    — 1.9370)

    Intake

    Exhaust
    Valve seat angle «a»

    EM-26

    6.965 — 6.980
    (0.2742

    — 0.2748)

    6.945 — 6.960
    (0.2734

    — 0.2740)

    45°30′

    Valve margin liT» limit

    0.5 (0.020)

    Valve stem end surface grinding
    limit

    0.5 (0.020)

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SOS)
    Inspection and Adjustment (Cont’d)
    Valve spring
    Free height

    mm (in)

    Outer

    42.25 (1.6634)

    Inner

    36.57 (1.4398)
    Standard

    Assembled

    mm/N (mm/kg,

    in/lb)

    Outer

    35.1/164.76

    Inner

    31.6/71.98

    Out-ot-square

    II

    height

    (35.1/16.80,1.382/37.04)
    (31.6/7.34,

    1.244/16.18)

    «S»
    mm (in)

    Outer

    Less than 1.8 (0.071)

    Inner

    Less than 1.6 (0.063)

    EM-27

    ACCELERATOR CONTROL, FUEL &
    EXHAUST SYSTEMS

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION NOTICE:

    For CD engine, the accelerator control system has been changed.
    For SR engine, the exhaust system has been changed.

    I

    CONTENTS
    ACCELERATOR

    CONTROL SySTEM

    2

    FE-1

    EXHAUST SySTEM

    3

    ACCELERATOR

    CONTROL SYSTEM

    Accelerator pedal assembly
    Do not disassemble.

    CD engine models
    SEC. 180

    ~3-4N.m
    (0.3 — 0.4 kg-m, 26 — 35 in-Ib)

    * : Components of accelerator pedal assembly

    (Refer to EC section for inspection.)
    SFE435A

    CAUTION:
    • After reconnecting accelerator work unit harness connector
    (if previously removed), perform the following procedures:
    (ij’ Select «OFF ACCEL PO SIG» in «ACTIVE TEST» mode.
    ~
    Touch CLEAR.
    fG> Start and warm up engine. After engine has warmed up,
    ~
    idle for 10 minutes.
    • If MIL illuminates after engine has started, refer to «ON
    BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION» in EC section for instructions.

    FE-2

    EXHAUST

    SYSTEM

    SR engine models
    SEC. 200-208
    ~

    ~

    13 • 16 (1.3 • 1.6, 9 • 12)

    ~

    ~

    ~

    ~.J

    43 — 55
    ~
    (4.4.
    5.6, 32 — 41)~16’D…~’

    ~

    ;\
    C1 ~

    ~.

    ‘1.~
    i~

    60.70
    (6.1 • 7.1,
    44 • 51)

    ~

    ,~
    — {.

    I

    Gasket ~

    tCJ

    l.-~

    j

    asket~

    ~

    ~~

    Ii] 5.1
    <:>

    ~

    ~

    43 — 55 (4.4 — 5.6,32

    ~

    — 41)

    5.1 • 6.5 (0.52 • 0.66, 45.1 • 57.3)

    • 6.5 (0.52 — 0.66, 45.1 • 57.3)

    5.1 • 6.5 (0.52 — 0.66, 45.1 • 57.3)

    5.1 — 6.5 (0.52 — 0.66, 45.1 — 57.3)
    ~

    ~

    II

    30 — 39 (3.1 — 4.0, 22 — 29)

    ~

    4.9 • 6.9
    (0.50 • 0.70, 43.4 • 60.8)

    44 • 54 (4.5 — 5.5, 33 • 40)

    : N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    Ii] : N.m

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    20 — 26 (2.1 — 2.7, 15 • 20)
    SFE433A

    FE-3

    II

    GENERAL INFORMATION

    SECTION
    APPLIED

    FROM:

    +

    For Europe:.

    JN1BCAN15U0100001
    JN1BAAN15U0100001 .-.
    JN1 BFAN15U0100001 •
    -JN1FCAN15U0100001 .-.
    JN1FAAN15U0100001
    JN1FFAN15U0100001 •
    JN1ECAN15U0100001 •
    JN1EAAN15U0100001 •
    JN1EFAN15U0100001 •
    JN1EEAN15U0100001 •










    OUTLINE

    +
    AND.
    AND.
    AND.
    AND.

    JN1ECAN15U0515001
    JN1EAAN15U0530001
    JN1EFAN15U0503001
    JN1EEAN15U0500101

    .-.

    +
    41.-.

    OF MODIFICATIONS:

    Engine
    • SR20DE engine has been added to the 3-door Hatchback models .
    • The GD20 diesel engine has been replaced by the CD20E diesel engine that is controlled with an
    electronic concentrated engine control system (EGGS-D) .
    • NATS V2.0 (Nissan Anti-Theft System) has been adopted to the GD20E diesel engine models.
    Body
    • A super lock system has been adopted.

    CONTENTS
    2

    PRECAUTIONS
    Precautions

    for NATS V2.0

    2

    Precautions

    for Super Lock System

    2

    HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
    Wiring Diagram

    Codes (Cell Codes)

    3
    3

    GI-1

    CONSULT CHECKING SYSTEM

    4

    Function and System Application

    4

    Checking

    4

    Equipment

    IDENTIFICATION

    INFORMATION

    5

    Model Variation

    5

    Identification

    7

    Number

    PRECAUTIONS
    Precautions for NAT8 V2.0
    NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System)
    NATS V2.0 will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start
    it without the registered key of NATS V2.0.
    Both of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NATS
    registered.

    SGI916

    The NATS security indicator is located on the instrument panel.
    The indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in «OFF» or
    «ACC» position. Therefore, NATS warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
    • When NATS detects trouble, the malfunction indicator lamp
    (MIL) blinks.
    This blinking indicates that the anti-theft is not functioning,
    so prompt service is required.
    • When servicing NATS (trouble diagnoses, system initialisation and additional registration of other NATS ignition key
    IDs), CONSULT hardware and CONSULT NATS software is
    necessary.
    Regarding the procedures of NATS initialisation and ‘NATS
    ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT operation
    manual, NATS V2.0.
    Therefore, CONSULT NATS software (program card and operation manual) must be kept strictly confidential to maintain the
    integrity of the anti-theft function.
    • When servicing NATS V2.0 (trouble diagnoses, system initialisation and additional registration of other NATS ignition
    key IDs), it may be necessary to re-register original key
    identification. Therefore, be sure to receive all -keys from
    vehicle owner.
    A maximum of four key IDs can be registered into NATS.

    When failing to start the engine first-time using the key of
    NATS V2.0, start as follows.
    (1) Leave the ignition key in «ON» position for approximately five seconds.
    (2) Turn ignition key to «OFF».
    (3) Wait approximately five seconds.
    (4) Turn ignition key to «START» again while keeping the
    key apart from any others on key-chain.

    Precautions for Super Lock System
    Locking the driver’s or front passenger’s door with the key will
    lock all doors and activate the Super Lock System. The Super
    Lock System is designed to prevent theft as it can be released
    when a front door is unlocked using a key.
    This means, none of the doors can be operated from the inside
    using the door lock knob.

    GI-2

    HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS

    Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
    Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram
    stands for.
    Code
    AAC/V

    Wiring

    Section
    EC

    IACV-AAC

    Diagram

    SR

    Anti-lock

    ACL/SW

    EC

    Accelerator

    Position

    EC

    Adjustment

    A/C

    HA

    Manual

    A/CCUT

    EC

    Air Conditioner

    ACC/SW

    EC

    Accelerator

    AIM

    EL

    Headlamp

    APS

    EC

    Accelerator

    BACK/L

    EL

    Back-up

    Lamp

    BUZZER

    EL

    Warning

    Buzzer

    CHARGE

    EL

    Charging

    CKPS

    EC

    Crankshaft

    CMPS

    EC

    Camshaft

    COOL/F

    EC

    Cooling

    Fan Control

    CSPS

    EC

    Control

    Sleeve

    DTRL

    EL

    D/LOCK,

    EL

    ECTS

    EC

    FCUT

    EC

    Section

    Switch

    Speedometer,

    Name

    Tachometer,

    MIL

    EC

    NATS

    EL

    Nissan

    Anti-Theft

    NLS

    EC

    Needle

    Lift Sensor

    PGC/V

    EC

    PNP/SW

    Temp.

    and Fuel Gauges
    MIL, Data Link Connector

    For

    CONSULT

    Resistor
    System

    Air Conditioner
    Cut Control

    Switch
    Aiming

    (FC)
    Control

    Position

    Sensor

    System
    Position

    Sensor

    Position

    Headlamp

    Engine

    Diagram

    EL

    Sensor

    Position

    Sensor

    With Daytime

    Light

    Door Lock
    Coolant

    Temperature

    Sensor
    EGR and Canister

    Control

    Sole-

    EVAP Canister

    Purge Volume

    trol Solenoid

    Valve

    EC

    Park/Neutral

    Position

    POWER

    EL

    Power Supply

    PST/SW

    EC

    R/FOG

    EL

    Rear Fog Lamp

    Routing

    Power Steering

    Oil Pressure

    Switch

    SRS

    RS

    Supplemental

    EL

    Power

    Restraint

    S/SIG

    EC

    Start Signal

    START

    EL

    Starti ng System

    STOP/L

    EL

    Stop Lamp

    TAIL/L

    EL

    TCV

    EC

    Injection

    Timing

    Control

    TPS

    EC

    Throttle

    Position

    Sensor

    VSS

    EC

    Vehicle

    Speed Sensor

    WARN

    EL

    Warning

    WINDOW

    EL

    Power Window

    Door Lock —

    Clearance,

    License

    EL

    Front Fog Lamp

    FICO

    EC

    IACV-FICD

    F/PUMP

    EC

    Fuel Pump

    FTS

    EC

    Fuel Temperature

    GLOW

    EC

    Glow Control

    GOVNR

    EC

    Electric

    Governor

    H02S

    EC

    Heated

    Oxygen

    IGN/SG

    EC

    Ignition

    Signal

    ILL

    EL

    Illumination

    INJECT

    EC

    Injector

    KS

    EC

    Knock Sensor

    LOAD

    EC

    Load Signal

    MAFS

    EC

    Mass Air Flow Sensor

    MAIN

    EC

    Solenoid

    Valve

    Sensor

    System

    Sensor

    Main Power Supply

    Lamps

    Valve

    F/FOG

    and Ground

    Circuit

    GI-3

    System

    Super

    Lock

    and Tail

    Lamps

    noid Valve
    Fuel Cut Solenoid

    Con-

    Switch

    S/LOCK

    System
    Power

    Wiring

    METER

    Brake System

    ADJRES

    EC

    Code

    Valve

    ASS

    EGRC/V

    Name

    code

    Valve

    I

    CONSULT CHECKING SYSTEM
    Function and System Application
    Diagnostic

    Function

    test mode
    This mode enables
    faster

    Work support

    and more

    a technician

    accurately

    Air bag

    ASS

    NATS*1

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x *2

    x

    x

    ECCS

    to adjust

    by following

    some

    devices

    the indications

    on

    x

    *2

    CONSULT.
    Self-diagnostic

    Self-diagnostic

    results
    ECU discriminated

    Classification

    No.

    prevent

    Data monitor

    Input/Output

    number

    an incorrect

    Test Mode

    in a specified
    ECM part number

    Control

    being

    whether

    unit initiali-

    ECU can be read to
    installed.

    in which

    CONSULT

    check

    by CONSULT

    All registered

    some

    some actuaparameters

    ignition

    instead

    is «OK»

    of a technician

    to determine

    or liNG».

    key IDs in NATS components

    can be

    and new IDs can be registered.

    ECM checks

    x : Applicable
    *1: NATS: Nissan Anti-Theft
    *2: Not available
    for diesel

    drives

    can be read.

    each system

    initialised

    sation

    quickly.

    range.

    ECM part number
    Conducted

    test

    Self-function

    of a replacement
    ECU from

    tors apart from the ECMs and also shifts

    test

    Function

    can be read and erased

    data in the ECM can be read.

    Diagnostic
    Active

    results

    its own NATS communication

    interface.

    System
    engine model

    Checking Equipment
    When ordering

    the below equipment,

    contact your NISSAN

    distributor.

    Description

    Tool name

    NISSAN CONSULT

    G) CONSULT

    unit

    and accessories

    @ Program

    card (EE 940)

    (EE960)*1,
    (NATS-E940)*2

    NT004

    *1: Regarding
    diesel engine model a revised program card (EE960 released in the middle
    system.
    *2: An order for NATS program card must be placed only with NISSAN EUROPE N.V.

    GI-4

    of 1996) will be applicable

    to this

    IDENTIFICATION

    INFORMATION

    Model Variation

    II

    For Europe LHD
    Europe
    Engine

    GA14DE

    LHO

    GA16DE

    SR200E

    C020E

    SF

    SF

    AT

    5F

    5F

    RS5F30A

    RS5F31A

    RL4F03A

    RS5F32A

    RS5F31A

    Transaxle

    4-door

    L

    BAVALBF-EGA

    LX

    BAVALDF-EGA

    BAYALDF-EGA

    BA Y ALDA-EGA

    BVCALDF-NGA

    SLX

    BAVALFF-EGA

    BAYALFF-EGA

    BAYALFA-EGA

    BVCALFF-NGA

    EAYALOF-EGA

    EAYALDA-EGA

    EVCALOF-NGA

    EAYALFA-EGA

    EVCALFF-NGA

    Sedan

    SR

    3-door

    Hatchback

    BAYALQF-EGA

    L

    EAVALBF-EGA

    LX

    EAVALDF-EGA

    SLX

    EAVALFF-EGA

    EAYALFF-EGA

    SR

    EAVALQF-EGA

    EAYALQF-EGA

    GTI

    5-door

    EBY ALUF-EGA

    L

    FAVALBF-EGA

    LX

    FAVALOF-EGA

    FA YALOF-EGA

    FAYALDA-EGA

    FVCALOF-NGA

    SLX

    FAVALFF-EGA

    FAYALFF-EGA

    FAYALFA-EGA

    FVCALFF-NGA

    SR

    FAVALQF-EGA

    FAYALQF-EGA

    Hatchback

    For Europe RHO
    Europe
    Engine

    RHO
    SR20DE

    CD20E

    5F

    5F

    AT

    5F

    5F

    RS5F30A

    RS5F31A

    RL4F03A

    RS5F32A

    RS5F31A

    BA Y ARDF-EEA

    BAY ARDA-EEA

    BVCARDF-NEA

    BA Y ARFF-EEA

    BAYARFA-EEA

    BVCARFF-NEA

    GA140E

    GA16DE

    Transaxle

    4-door

    L

    BAVARBF-EEA

    LX

    BAVARDF-EEA

    SLX

    BAVARFF-EEA

    Sedan

    SR

    3-door

    Hatchback

    SA YARQF-EEA

    L

    EAVARBF-EEA

    LX

    EAVARDF-EEA

    SLX

    EAVARFF-EEA

    EAYARFF-EEA

    SA

    EAVAAQF-EEA

    EAYAAQF-EEA

    EAYAAFA-EEA

    EBYARUF-EEA

    GTI

    5-door

    L

    FAVAABF-EEA

    LX

    FAVARDF-EEA

    FA YARDF-EEA

    FA YAADA-EEA

    FVCARDF-NEA

    FAYARFA-EEA

    FVCARFF-NEA

    Hatchback
    SLX

    FAVAAFF-EEA

    FAYARFF-EEA

    SR

    FAVARQF-EEA

    FAYAAQF-EEA

    GI-5

    IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
    Model Variation (Cont’d)
    Prefix and suffix designations:
    B

    AV

    A

    L

    B

    F

    E

    N15

    G

    A

    T

    T

    A: Standard

    E: RHO models for Europe
    G: LHD models for Europe

    E: Multiport fuel injection
    N: Diesel engine
    Model
    A: 4-speed automatic transaxle
    F: 5-speed manual transaxle
    B: L
    D: LX
    F:SLX
    Q:SR

    U: GTI
    L: Left-hand drive
    R: Right-hand drive
    A: 2-wheeJ drive models
    AV:
    AY:
    BY:
    VC:

    GA14DE engine
    GA16DE engine
    SR20DE engine
    CD20E engine

    B: 4-door Sedan
    F: 5-door Hatchback
    E: 3-door Hatchback

    GI-6

    system engine

    IDENTIFICATION

    INFORMATION

    Identification
    Vehicle identification number

    Number

    Vehicle identification

    I

    plate

    Emission control information label

    SGI908

    VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ARRANGEMENT
    For Europe

    JN1

    B

    A

    A

    N15

    U

    0

    T

    T

    o : Stopgap

    Desti nation
    U : Europe

    Model
    A : 2-wheel
    Engine

    drive

    type

    A : GA14DE engine
    C : GA16DE engine
    E : SR20DE engine
    F : CD20E engine
    Body type
    B : 4-door

    Sedan

    F : 5-door

    Hatchback

    E : 3-door

    Hatchback

    Manufacturer
    JN1 : Nissan,

    Passenger

    XXXXXX

    vehicle

    GI-7

    ~ehiCle serial number
    (no meaning)

    IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
    Identification Number (Cont’d)
    ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
    GA14DE and GA16DE
    engines

    SR20DE engine

    CD20E engine

    Franta
    SG1912-A

    GI-8

    HEATER &
    AIR CONDITIONER

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION

    NOTICE:

    • For Europe, SR20DE engine has been added .
    • An ambient air temperature switch is added (For Europe SR20DE engine) .
    • The wiring diagram has been changed.

    CONTENTS
    DESCRIPTION
    Ambient

    Air Temperature

    Switch

    SR20DE engine)
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Circuit

    Diagram

    Air Conditioner

    Wiring

    Diagram

    AIC —

    Diagnostic

    Procedure

    3

    2

    SERVICE PROCEDURES

    2

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    Refrigerant

    (For Europe

    3

    General

    3

    Inspection

    21

    Lines

    21
    (SDS)

    Specifications
    and Adjustment

    22
    22
    22

    5
    17

    When you read wiring diagrams:
    • Read GI section, «HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS» .
    • See EL section, «POWER SUPPL V ROUTING» for power distribution circuit.
    When you perform trouble diagnoses, read GI section, «HOW TO FOLLOW FLOW CHART
    IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES» and «HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN
    ELECTRICAL INCIDENT».

    I

    HA-1

    DESCRIPTION
    Ambient Air Temperature
    SR20DE engine)

    Switch (For Europe

    OPERATION
    When the air conditioner is OFF, the ECM (ECCS control module) detects the load applied to the engine,
    and controls the IACV-AAC valve to adjust the engine idling speed to the appropriate rprn by supplying
    additional air from the IACV-AAC valve.
    When the air conditioner is ON (A/C relay is ON), and when the ambient air temperature switch is ON
    (this switch turns ON automatically when the ambient temperature rises to approx. 23.5°C (74°F) or
    higher), the IACV-FICD solenoid valve is energized and additional air is supplied to the engine.
    If the appropriate engine speed is not reached, the IACV-AAC valve supplies the additional air required
    to increase the engine rpm.
    If the ambient air temperature switch is OFF (this switch turns OFF when the ambient temperature is
    below 20.5°C (69°F) even when the air conditioner is ON (A/C relay is ON), the IACV-FICD solenoid valve
    is deenergized, and the idling speed is controlled so that the appropriate rpm can be achieved by operation of the IACV-AAC valve only.

    Ambient

    temperature
    °C rF)
    Below

    19.0 — 22.0 (66 — 72)
    Above

    22.0 — 25.0 (72 — 77)

    Ambient air
    temperature
    switch

    IACV-FICD
    solenoid
    valve

    OFF

    OFF

    ON

    ON

    Idle speed: (rpm) Refer to EC section

    a:

    o
    en
    en
    w
    a:

    ~
    ~

    o
    o
    RHA873CB

    HA-2

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES

    Circuit Diagram

    Air Conditioner

    0:

    o

    I(f)

    H

    2:
    0:
    W
    I
    I-

    AIC
    SWITCH

    THERMO
    CONTROL
    AMP.

    FAN
    RESISTOR

    GE

    C

    GA

    o

    FAN SWITCH
    OFF 1

    2

    3

    4

    INTAKE
    DOOR

    MOTOR
    a:
    o
    «u
    -II-

    2:W
    0:1-

    wo

    To illumination
    system

    Ia:
    1-0..

    RECIRCULATION
    SWITCH

    0:

    o

    (JJ

    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:

    (!)
    Z
    H

    CJ
    I

    >-

    (Y)
    I

    .-J <{
    OZ.-J

    .-J —

    .-J ~7

    .-J<{
    O.-J

    COOLING
    FAN
    RELAY-2
    @

    ow

    U([

    A

    A

    Z

    2

    LL

    LL

    (!)…..-t

    (!)(j

    «

    M

    B

    ZI

    «

    M

    H([

    H((

    .-JO

    -10
    0..00

    0..00

    U~

    COOLING COOLING
    FAN
    FAN
    MOTOR-1 MOTOR-2

    D

    21

    @

    @

    U~

    M
    COOLING
    FAN
    MOTOR-2
    @

    21 15 14

    13

    35 21 15

    ECM(ECCS
    CONTROL MODULE)

    13

    14

    ECM(ECCS
    CONTROL MODULE)
    L

    (CD20 engine)

    _

    (GA16DE engine for Australia)

    HHA064

    HA-4

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram —

    Ale —

    HA-A/C-01
    (b):
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    W

    @: For Europe and Israe 1
    @: Except@
    *1 …(b) G/Y , LG/8

    t

    FUSE

    15A BLOCK
    (JIB)

    FAN
    RESISTOR
    @

    :

    -B> To

    .. RIG ~

    *1

    To EL-ILL

    RIG

    m

    12″51

    BLOWER

    HA-A/C-03

    MOTOR

    8

    1Li iJ Li 1
    888

    @ ~/

    8

    8

    8

    ~

    8

    JOINT

    CONNECTOR-4

    ~~):~

    8

    ~B

    ~

    8

    ~

    ~NextPage

    r———————,
    I
    I
    L
    I

    8

    @ @/

    (b)

    : ~~

    ~

    W

    Refer to last page

    ~(f@:
    2

    Wi

    @

    (Faldaut

    page) .

    p

    I
    ~I

    HHA065

    HA-5

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram — A/C —

    (Cont’d)

    HA-A/C-02

    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON

    EE
    Refer to EL-POWER_

    FUSE
    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    :

    MOTOR

    :

    ~

    LHD models
    RHO models

    @: For Europe and Israe 1
    @: Except@
    *2- — — GIS ViS
    *3- — — G/Y ,, VIR

    LG/R

    m
    RECIRCULATION
    SWITCH

    INDICATOR

    ~

    lbjdJ
    8

    Preceding

    page

    -4
    ~

    8

    I

    ~O

    r——————-,
    I
    I~

    Refer to last page

    [gH[]I]

    w

    (Foldout

    I

    ~~I

    : ~

    :

    L

    :
    :

    ~~

    ~

    ~w

    page) .

    ,~)

    HHA003

    HA-6

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram — A/C —

    (Cont’d)

    HA-A/C-03
    Refer

    Preceding~
    page

    ~

    LIB

    to EL-POWER.

    0:

    1
    LIB

    LHD mode Is
    RHO mode Is
    GA engine

    GA engine for
    and Australia
    Except@

    Europe, Israel
    and SR engine

    G/Y Next

    *4

    -e:>

    *1

    -B> To HA-A/C-05

    page

    Next page

    A/C
    SWITCH
    ~

    INDICATOR

    I ‘l—ea;-I-OIII(b)~

    *1

    ~

    O~O-a:—

    I

    To HA-A/C-06

    *5

    ~

    _

    ~

    -@:>

    ~
    G/Y ~
    G/Y ~
    G/Y ~

    ~)II

    JUNCTION

    BOX No.2
    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)

    :
    T
    l

    (Foldout

    LQl~
    ~

    page) .

    I

    W

    HHA004

    HA-7

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Wiring Diagram —

    Preceding ~
    page
    ~
    To HA-A/C-02

    *5

    .~~~~~~~~~.~~~~~~~.I
    +
    rh
    0—,
    ~


    LG/A -,

    ~

    A/C —

    (Cont’d)

    HA-A/C-04

    GX

    ~

    LG/R

    THERMISTOR

    1

    THERMO

    CONTROL
    AMPLIFIER

    Y

    r:!:-.

    ~

    IE7i7

    n~ICMID

    *6

    oI

    ~

    ….

    I

    ~

    : ~

    U~I

    :

    ~

    Next page

    LHD models
    RHO models

    @:

    .

    HIGH

    GA engine for Europe, Israel
    and Australia and SR engine
    @: Except@
    @: Except fof’ Europe. ISf’ael
    and Australia

    O~
    DUALPRESSURE

    SWITCH

    ~

    ‘j-/

    R

    ~ G/B , GY
    *5- — -@ Y
    @ L
    *6’,,@
    58 ‘@
    AIL
    ,

    <:MID

    T»—J

    ~

    ~

    -…*7
    :

    <1>

    ~OL>

    page

    ~

    ~

    {>

    o~o—J

    58

    …,
    m:@
    NORMAL

    Preced ing ~

    I~AI CMID

    GX

    I

    LOW

    ~

    NOAMAL
    IWI

    Y

    58

    m

    ~Ci~~~AE

    ..»

    G

    1$1(OM)

    118Al11E7i7

    DUAL-

    *J .-!

    ~

    ~(~)

    11211

    ~1fEfAlJ’E!9j,

    Y

    —-oj)

    Y

    L

    ~O

    :

    AIL

    *8~}

    GY

    Next page

    -8>
    Refe~ to last page
    (Foldout

    page) .

    (]ID , ~

    HHA005

    HA-8

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram — A/C —

    (Cont’d)

    HA-A/C-05

    , @G

    *1

    .1

    0
    GX

    r~+
    I
    ~

    CD

    ~
    ~ ~ m
    ffi.m
    ‘u;I~{~)-t~t-~ — I4J — ~
    *1

    *1

    It
    *1

    GY

    GY

    It

    «*»

    R/L

    G

    R/L

    G

    It

    It

    RIL

    ~

    112111

    Irf511
    ACRLY

    If

    R/L

    I 4-41

    I *To 1

    I *-9 1

    H/F AN

    ARCON

    THAMP

    ARCON

    ACRL Y

    @

    @

    @

    @

    G
    ~

    ARCON

    *7

    GY

    ,*711

    G

    *7

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    @:@

    *7

    l~~cs
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    CED:@

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    page) .

    CED
    @)

    HHA066

    HA-9

    II

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram — A/C —

    (Conl’d)

    -.r..
    ——HA-A/C-06

    -&>

    L/R

    To HA-A/C-034t-

    Next

    page

    ‘O~O~

    L/R

    1>

    <0>
    L/R

    L/R

    11$1 (fl0t)

    :1~lm
    . ~CE202)

    L/R

    L/R

    rrTI
    …..__ …..

    UlfJ

    :
    @:
    @:
    @:

    I ~
    e-In

    LHO models
    RHO models
    GA engine
    GA engine
    and Israel
    GA engine
    SR engine

    for

    Europe

    @:
    except@
    @:
    @: Except@
    *1S
    .. @2 , @5

    ~B

    JQl

    2J

    O~

    y

    tt…..

    R/W
    m db
    m

    R/W

    i

    (ECCS

    _

    =

    FICO
    R/W
    SOLENOID ~
    VAL VE
    I~I

    To ECM

    (ID -1

    r;:=::j'»

    I

    COMPRESSOR

    ~

    for Europe

    ~COMPRESSOR
    ‘-.8b 2

    ffi ffi
    CiJ q:gQ?)

    ~

    For Australia
    RHO models

    HiTHERMAL
    temp PROTECTOR

    ,-_….

    L/R

    ~-2

    .!j£;J

    I

    L/R

    8

    ‘A2’

    LHD models
    RHO models

    m

    L/R

    • ~
    ~()

    (b):
    @:
    @:
    @:

    L~R

    IEiJI(i:)
    L/R

    It I

    L/R

    L~R

    .—-~O~

    L/R

    I$I~

    L/R

    ~I~

    HA-A/C-07

    L/R

    lit,@!)

    L/;:O~

    Preceding…..-NI-

    A/C —

    B

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~
    PU

    1
    L

    2

    5

    Refer to last page

    ~mm
    !l.5J

    GY

    (Foldout page) .
    ,

    GY

    eMS) (lliJ)

    ,

    (E10S)

    em

    HHA069

    HA-12

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram — A/C GA engine AIT models —

    (Cont’d)

    for Australia

    HA-A/C-09
    BATTERY

    (Via

    fusible

    link)

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.
    30A

    (JIB)
    (~)

    o
    GY

    IQ~OI

    1e—-

    SR

    I
    eI GY
    SR

    m rnn FAN

    COOLING

    t

    U RELAY-1

    ~

    IbiJI m

    I

    LG/R GIS

    I

    LG/R

    LG

    r=!:::, (@)

    ~

    I~~

    i~1

    (1m:) — — — — — — — — —

    LG/R

    COOLING
    FAN

    LG

    I

    MOTOR-1

    I

    LG/A

    LG

    Irlh~~2

    I

    LG

    rrf4n

    rrf3il

    RFRL

    RFRH

    I

    f,
    B
    B

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    ~

    (IT)

    +
    2

    5

    8

    I-I
    ———e

    LG

    LG/R

    m
    1
    L

    ~

    (-)

    LG/S

    ,….

    I

    MOTOR-2

    Hi
    ~

    —~~1

    ‘-ir’ CEID
    LG/A

    COOLING
    FAN

    ~

    @1)(~)

    Refer ta last page

    ~~,~

    ~

    if

    (Faldout

    2

    GY

    GY

    57
    3 6

    ,@,~
    !:mID BA BR

    M ~,(~)

    SR

    ]lY

    GY

    GY

    (FaIdout

    page) .

    CHID , (ff[n
    (~)

    em

    HHA072

    HA-15

    II

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram — A/C —

    (Cont’d)

    CD20 engine models

    HA-A/C-12

    Refer to EL-POWEA.
    30A

    (b): LHO models

    [li]

    :

    RHO models

    t t

    t t

    ——rl..,

    ECM
    (ECCS

    B

    CONTROL

    B

    -!- -!-

    MODULE)

    ~

    ~~
    Refe~ to last page

    Um,@,~
    ~SA

    SA

    SA

    ~m,~
    :mJ

    (FaIdaut
    GY

    GY

    page) .

    @ , COO)
    CEI06)

    ~

    HHA073

    HA-16

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES

    Diagnostic

    Procedure

    3

    SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when AIC
    switch and fan switch are ON. — For CD engine

    Compressor
    connector @-2

    0)

    m

    B

    RHA833F

    Perform PRELIMINARY CHECK 1 before referring to the following flow chart.
    Yes

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR.
    Disconnect compressor
    harness connector.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between compressor harness terminal
    G) and body
    ground?

    Check magnet

    clutch

    coi I.

    NG
    Replace magnet clutch.
    Refer to HA-77 in N15
    SERVICE MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15EO.

    No
    Thermal protector
    connector @-1

    [;)

    ~

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR THERMAL
    PROTECTOR.
    Discon nect thermal protector harness
    connector.
    Do approx. 12V exist between thermal
    protector harness terminal
    G) and body
    ground?

    0)
    UR

    RHA834F

    Yes

    CHECK THERMAL PROTECTOR.
    Check circuit continuity
    between thermal protector
    harness terminal
    G) and
    compressor
    harness terminal (j).

    Continuity should exist.

    No

    If OK, check
    short.

    harness

    for

    NG
    Thermal protector
    connector @-1

    Compressor
    connector @-2

    Disconnect

    I Replace thermal protector. I

    AIC relay.

    0)

    Note
    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN
    AIC RELAY HARNESS TERMINAL
    @
    AND THERMAL PROTECTOR HARNESS
    TERMINAL
    (j).

    B

    RHA835F

    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check

    harness

    for short.

    ~i5~

    Thermal
    protector
    connector @ID-1

    0)

    OK

    AIC relay
    connector (ill)

    ~
    L/R

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR AIC
    RELAY.
    Disconnect AIC relay.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between AIC
    relay harness terminals
    G), @ and
    body ground?

    No

    Yes

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY
    CIRCUIT AND 7.5A (No.
    ~
    and ~)
    FUSES AT
    FUSE BLOCK.
    Refer to EL section («Wiring Diagram»,
    «POWER
    SUPPLY ROUTING»).

    NG
    RHA836F

    CHECK AIC RELAY AFTER DISCONNECTING IT.
    Refer to HA-64 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication
    No. SM5E-ON15EO.

    Replace

    Ale relay.

    OK

    @
    (Go to next page.)

    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity, repair harness or
    connector.
    RHA358F

    HA-17

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)
    @
    ~

    CONNECT

    ~

    ~

    ~E)~@

    I

    ECM (ECCS control
    module) connector @

    II

    Ef

    ECM

    ~
    Reconnect Ale relay.

    l—

    iii

    II

    CONNECTOR

    15

    CHECK COIL SIDE CIRCUIT OF AIC
    RELAY.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM
    (ECCS control module) harness terminal @ and body ground?

    G

    II

    Dual-pressure
    switch connector

    ECONNECTORII

    ECM

    Disconnect ECM (EGGS
    control module) harness
    connector.
    Disconnect dual-pressure
    switch harness connector.

    Yes

    RH~~62F

    ECM (EGGS control
    module) connector @

    No

    [I

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN EGM (ECCS
    CONTROL MODULE) HARNESS TERMINAL @ AND
    DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH
    HARNESS TERMINAL G).
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for
    short.

    @)

    d’f:)

    15

    G
    OK

    G

    CHECK

    DUAL-

    RHA838F

    PRESSURE
    SWITCH.
    Refer to
    HA-64 in

    III
    Dual-pressure
    connector@

    switch

    NG

    Replace
    dualpressure
    switch.

    N15 SER-

    AlG relay
    connector@

    VICE
    MANUAL,
    Publication No.
    SM5E-

    ON15EO.

    III

    RHA837F

    o

    ~

    CONNECT

    ~

    ECM

    ECM (ECCS
    control module)
    connector @

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AIC RELAY
    HARNESS TERMINAL @
    AND DUAL-PRESSURE
    SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for
    short.

    (gl

    L4t£)~@

    II

    OK

    ~CONNECTORII
    21

    o

    R/L

    «:’
    RHA863F

    CHECK VOLTAGE FOR ECM (ECCS
    control unit).
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM
    (Engine control module) harness terminal No. @ and body ground?

    No

    CHECK ECM (ECCS control
    module). (Refer to EC section in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No.
    SM5E-ON15EO.)

    Yes
    Disconnect ECM (ECCS control module) harness connector.
    Disconnect thermo control amp. harness connector.

    +
    :
    ~—- — — — — — — — — — -1

    Reservoir

    tank

    Thermostat closed

    I

    SLC096B

    LC-4

    ENGINE LUBRICATION

    SYSTEM

    Oil Pump
    REMOVAL AND INSTALLA liON
    1.
    2.
    3.

    Drain engine coolant and engine oil.
    Remove upper radiator hose, drive belts, crank pulley, timing belt covers and timing belt.
    Remove exhaust front tube, timing belt pulley and rear
    engine gusset (bar type), then remove oil pan.

    SLC462A

    ~

    9.2 — 10.8 N- m
    (0.94 — 1.10 kg-m,

    position

    81.6 — 95.5 in~lb)

    sensor

    (TOC)
    o

    «.

    ~.~

    ~?~,
    ~12

    4.
    5.
    6.

    Crankshaft




    -~
    ~.

    Remove crankshaft position sensor (TOG).
    Remove oil pump assembly with oil strainer.
    Reinstall any part removed. Refill engine oil and engine
    coolant.
    Apply liquid gasket to oil pump.
    Apply liquid gasket to oil pan.
    Apply liquid gasket to both ends of oil pan oil seals.
    Install oil pan, fitting oil seals in the correct position.

    -16 N.m
    (1.2 — 1.6 kg-m,
    9 — 12 ft-Ib)

    SLC087B

    DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
    When installing oil pump, apply engine oil to inner and outer
    gears.
    SEC_ 150

    Ijj6

    — 8 (0.6 — 0.8, 52 — 69) -.
    Cover

    Spring

    g
    ~Inner

    gear

    Outer gear

    [‘OJ :

    (toJ

    N- m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    [j] : N-m
    16 — 19 (1.6 — 1.9, 12 — 14)

    LC-5

    (kg-m,

    in-Ib)
    SLC097B

    I

    ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
    Water Pump
    INSTALLATION
    • When installing water pump, replace the gasket with a new
    one.

    A

    22 — 25 H.m (2.2 — 2.6 kg-m, 16 — 19 ft-Ib)
    SLC0868

    LC-6

    I GA, SR, CD I

    ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
    Overheating

    Cause Analysis
    Check items

    Symptom
    Water pump malfunction

    Thermostat

    stuck closed

    Water control

    valve stuck

    closed
    Poor heat transfer

    Dust contamination
    Damaged

    Mechanical
    Clogged

    radiator

    High resistance
    Reduced

    radiator

    Improper
    Cooling

    sys-

    coolant

    tube

    Excess forei~n

    material

    I

    (rust,

    dirt, sand, etc.)

    to fan rota-

    Damaged
    Damaged

    cooling

    damage

    tion

    air flow

    or paper

    clogging

    fins

    fan blades

    shroud
    mixture

    ratio

    tern parts
    malfunction

    Poor coolant

    quality

    Loose clamp

    Cooling

    hose
    Cracked

    hose

    Poor seal i ng

    Water pump

    Loose
    Radiator
    Coolant

    cap
    Poor sealing

    leaks

    O-ring for damage,
    Insufficient

    coolant
    Radiator

    Reservoi r tank

    Overflowing

    reservoir

    tank

    Exhaust

    deteriora-

    tion or improper

    fitting

    Cracked

    radiator

    tank

    Cracked

    radiator

    core

    Cracked

    reservoir

    Cylinder

    head deterioration

    Cylinder

    head gasket deterio-

    tank

    gas leaks into cool-

    ing system

    ration
    High engine

    rpm under

    no

    load
    Abusive

    Driving

    driving

    extended
    Driving

    in low gear for
    time
    at extremely

    speed

    Overload

    on engine

    Powertrain

    system

    malfunc-

    tion
    Installed

    Except cool-

    wheels

    ing system
    parts malfunction
    Blocked

    bumper

    Blocked

    radiator

    Dragging

    brakes

    Improper

    ignition

    or restricted

    grille

    radiator

    Blocked

    condenser

    timing.

    large fog lamp

    LC-7

    or paper

    Installed

    car brassiere

    Mud contamination
    clogging

    ai r flow
    Blocked

    size

    Installed

    Blocked

    improper
    and tires

    high

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (5DS)
    Engine Lubrication System
    Oil pump inspection
    Unit: mm (in)
    Body to outer gear clearance
    Outer gear to inner gear clearance

    0.114 — 0.200
    (0.0045 — 0.0079)
    Less than 0.18 (0.0071)

    Housing to inner gear clearance

    0.05 — 0.09 (0.0020 — 0.0035)

    Housing to outer gear clearance

    0.05 — 0.11 (0.0020 — 0.0043)

    Inner gear to housing clearance

    0.045 — 0.091
    (0.0018 — 0.0036)

    LC-8

    MAINTENANCE

    I
    SECTION
    MODIFICATION NOTICE:
    Engine and Emission Control Service (For Europe)
    SR engine
    • The maintenance schedules for Europe have been revised in conjunction with the adoption
    SR20DE engine.

    The belt deflection adjustment and check point for deflection have been changed.

    The spark plug type has been changed.
    CD


    of

    engine
    The belt deflection adjustment has been changed.
    An injection nozzle with needle lift sensor has been adopted on No.1 cylinder.
    The idle speed inspection has been deleted.

    Chassis and Body Service (For Europe)

    The replacement

    interval of the ventilation

    air filter has been added.

    CONTENTS
    PREPARATION
    Special

    Tools
    (For Europe)

    3

    Engine Oil & Minor Service
    Engine and Emission

    Control

    3
    Service

    and Body Services

    Maintenance

    Spark Plugs

    Under Severe Driving

    4

    CD
    ENGINE MAINTENANCE

    5
    Conditions

    6

    Checking

    Drive Belts

    9

    Checking

    Drive Belt

    9

    Checking

    Injection

    9

    Nozzle
    SR,CD

    SR
    ENGINE MAINTENANCE

    8

    2

    PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

    Chassis

    Changing

    2

    Service

    7

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    7

    MA-1

    (SDS)

    11

    Engine Maintenance

    (SR)

    11

    Engine Maintenance

    (CD)

    11

    PREPARATION
    Special Service Tools
    Tool number
    Tool name

    Engine application
    Description
    GA

    SA

    CD

    Removing oil
    filter

    99545R2500
    (KV101060S0)
    Oil filter wrench

    x

    15 faces,
    Inner span: 92.5 mm (3.642 in)
    (Face to opposite corner)
    NT631

    Removing and
    installing injection nozzle
    assembly

    KV119E0010

    Nozzle holder socket

    NT563

    MA-2

    x

    PERIODIC MAINTENANCE (For Europe)
    The following tables show the normal maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric
    conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required.
    Periodic maintenance beyond the last period shown on the tables requires similar maintenance.

    Engine Oil & Minor Service
    GASOLINE ENGINE
    Abbreviation:

    R

    =

    Replace.
    MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

    MAINTENANCE OPERATION
    Perform either at number of kilometers (miles) or
    months, whichever comes first.

    km x 1,000

    15

    30

    45

    60

    75

    90

    105

    120

    (Miles x 1,000)

    (9)

    (18)

    (27)

    (36)

    (45)

    (54)

    (63)

    (72)

    12

    24

    36

    48

    60

    72

    84

    96

    Months

    Underhood

    and under vehicle

    Engine oil (API SG or SH oil)*

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    Engine oil filter*

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    DIESEL ENGINE
    Abbreviations:

    R = Replace,

    I

    Inspect and correct

    or replace

    as necessary

    MAINTENANCE OPERATION
    Perform either at number of kilometers (miles) or
    months, whichever comes first.

    km x 1,000
    (Miles x 1,000)
    Months

    Underhood

    10

    20

    30

    40

    50

    60

    70

    80

    (6)

    (12)

    (18)

    (24)

    (30)

    (36)

    (42)

    (48)

    6

    12

    18

    24

    30

    36

    42

    48

    and under vehicle

    Engine oil (Use API CD oil)*

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    Engine oil filter*

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    R

    Drive belts

    NOTE:

    * Maintenance

    items with
    Ing Conditions».

    «*» should

    be performed

    more frequenlly

    MA-3

    according

    to «Maintenance

    Under Severe

    Driv-

    I

    PERIODIC MAINTENANCE (For Europ_e)

    _

    Engine and Emission Control Service
    Abbreviations:
    MAINTENANCE

    I

    =

    Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R

    Replace.
    MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

    OPERATION
    km x 1,000

    Perform either at number of kilometers (miles)
    or months, whichever comes first.

    (Miles x 1,000)

    30

    60

    90

    120

    (18)

    (36)

    (54)

    (72)

    12

    24

    36

    48

    Months

    Underhood and under vehicle
    Engine anti-freeze coolant (Ethylene glycol base) (LLC)

    See NOTE (1)

    R

    Cooling system
    Fuel lines
    R

    Air cleaner filter (Viscous paper type)*

    W

    z
    az
    w

    Intake & exhaust valve clearance (GA series engine only)

    See NOTE (2)

    Drive belts

    See NOTE (3)

    R

    Fuel filter*
    R

    Spark plugs

    w

    z
    ::::;
    o
    en

    R

    R

    R

    R

    Ignition wires
    PCV filter*

    <
    (!)

    (GA series engine only)

    R

    R

    R

    R

    Vapor lines (Hoses, connections, etc.)
    (Heated) oxygen sensor
    -J

    W

    Fuel filter

    WZ

    fZ a

    Nozzles

    See NOTE (4)

    offi————————————————Timing belts for camshaft and injection pump

    Replace every 90,000 km (54.000 miles)

    NOTE: (1) Replace at the first 90,000 km (54,000 miles) or 60 months, then every 60,000 km (36,000 miles) or 24 months, whichever comes first.
    (2) If valve noise increases, check valve clearance.
    (3) After 60,000 km (36,000 miles) or 24 months, Inspect every 30,000 km (18,000 miles) or 12 months, whichever comes
    first.
    (4) If engine power decreases, black smoke Is emitted or engine noise Increases, check and, If necessary, adjust the
    fuel Injection nozzle’s starting pressure and the fuel spray pattern.
    Maintenance Items with
    should be performed more frequently according to «Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions».

    *

    «*»

    MA-4

    PERIODIC MAINTENANCE (For Europe)
    Chassis and Body Service
    Abbreviations: R = Replace. I
    MAINTENANCE

    Inspect, and correct or replace as necessary.
    MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

    OPERATION

    Perform either at number of kilometers (miles) or
    months, whichever comes first.

    km x 1,000
    (Miles x 1,000)
    Months

    CHASSIS

    AND

    Underhood

    BODY

    30

    60

    90

    120

    (18)

    (36)

    (54)

    (72)

    12

    24

    36

    48

    and under vehicle

    Brake & clutch oil (For level & leaks)*
    Automatic transaxle fluid (For level & leaks)*
    R

    Brake f1uid*

    R

    Brake booster vacuum hoses, connections & check valve
    Power steering fluid & lines (For level & leaks)
    Brake & clutch systems
    Manual transaxle oil (For leaks)*
    Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts & exhaust system*
    Drive shafts*

    Outside and Inside
    Wheel alignment (If necessary, rotate & balance wheels)
    Brake pads, disc & other brake components*
    Brake linings, drums & other components*
    Headlamp aiming
    Foot brake, parking brake & clutch (For free play, stroke & operation)
    See NOTE (1)

    Ventilation air filter*
    Body corrosion

    * Maintenance

    R

    R

    R

    Annually

    Air bag system

    NOTE:

    R

    See NOTE (2)

    «*»

    items with
    should be performed more frequently according to «Maintenance
    Under Severe Driving Conditions».
    (1) For replacement procedure of ventilation air filter, refer to page HA-83 In the model N15 Service Manual (Pub. No.
    SM5E-ON15GO).
    (2) Inspect at the first 10 years and then every 2 years.

    MA-5

    I

    PERIODIC MAINTENANCE (For Europ_e>

    _

    Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions
    The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the
    vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance
    must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.
    SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
    A — Driving under dusty conditions
    B — Driving repeatedly short distances
    C — Towing a trailer
    D — Extensive idling
    E — Driving in extremely adverse weather con..
    ditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either extremely low or
    extremely high

    B

    C

    G H —

    Driving in high humidity areas or in mountainous areas
    Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials
    Driving on rough and/or muddy roads or in
    the desert
    Driving with frequent use of braking or in
    mountainous areas

    Maintenance
    item

    Driving
    condition
    A

    F

    Maintenance
    operation

    Engine oil & oil filter

    D

    Gasoline engine

    Replace

    Every 7,500 km (4,500 miles)
    or 6 months

    Diesel engine

    Replace

    Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
    3 months

    Air cleaner fitter & PCV filter (GA series engine only)

    A
    E

    A

    F
    G

    C

    Replace

    Fuel filter

    Replace

    Brake fluid

    Replace

    H

    Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension
    system

    H

    Automatic

    & manual transaxle oil

    Replace

    parts & exhaust

    C

    G

    H

    Brake pads, discs & other brake components

    Check

    A

    C

    G

    H

    Brake lining, drums & other brake components

    Check

    H

    Drive shaft

    Check

    A

    Ventilation

    air filter

    Replace

    Maintenance operation: Check = Check. Correct or replace if necessary.

    MA-6

    Every 30,000 km (18,000 miles)
    or 12 months

    Check

    A

    C

    Maintenance
    interval

    Every 60,000 km (36,000 miles)
    or 24 months

    Every 15,000 km (9,000 miles)
    or 6 months

    More frequently

    ENGINE MAINTENANCE
    Checking Drive Belts

    I
    Alternator
    Alternator

    Power

    steering

    oil pump

    [OJ :

    Crankshaft
    pulley

    N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    T : Check

    point

    Without air conditioner

    Compressor

    With air conditioner

    SMA881C

    1.
    2.

    Inspect for cracks, fraying,
    wear or oil adhesion.
    If
    necessary, replace with a new one.
    Inspect drive belt deflections by pushing on the belt midway
    between pulleys.

    Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit.
    Belt deflection:

    Alternator drive belt fitting place
    (Models without air conditioner)

    Alternator drive belt

    r

    Unit: mm (in)

    Crankshaft
    pUlley

    Used belt deflection
    Deflection

    Drive belts

    Q

    Limit

    Engine

    Deflection

    after adjust-

    of

    new belt

    ment

    front
    Alternator
    Alternator
    drive belt

    With air conditioner

    com-

    pressor
    Without air conditioner

    9 (0.35)

    12 — 13
    (0.47 — 0.51)

    compressor

    <;:J
    Engine
    front

    Power steering
    Applied

    Set a belt in both crankshaft
    and alternator pUlleys shown
    in the figure.

    Alternator
    pUlley

    oil pump

    pushing force

    12 (0.47)

    5.5 — 6.5

    4.5 — 5.5

    (0.217 —

    (0.177 —

    0.256)

    0.217)

    8-9
    (0.31 — 0.35)
    8-9
    (0.31 — 0.35)
    98 N (10 kg, 22 Ib)

    Inspect drive belt deflections when engine is cold.

    SMA328C

    MA-7

    7 — 8
    (0.28 — 0.31)
    7 — 8
    (0.28 — 0.31)

    ENGINE MAINTENANCE
    ~
    OK

    Changing

    ~NG

    1.

    g

    Wrench with a magnet
    to hold spark plug

    Spark Plugs

    Disconnect ignition wires from spark plugs at boot.
    Do not pull on the wire.

    2. Remove spark
    Spark plug:
    Make

    16 mm
    (0.63 In)

    SEM294A

    plugs with spark

    plug wrench.

    NGK

    Standard type

    BKR5EY-11

    Hot type

    BKR4EY-11

    Cold type

    BKR6EY-11

    Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.
    The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling may occur with
    the standard type spark plug such as:

    frequent engine starts

    low ambient temperatures
    The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark
    occur with the standard type spark plug such as:

    extended highway driving

    frequent high engine revolution

    IIp

    Side electrode

    3.

    4.

    Check plug gap of each new spark plug.
    Gap: 1.0 • 1.1 mm (0.039 • 0.043 in)
    Use a wire brush for cleaning, if necessary.
    Install spark plugs. Reconnect ignition wires
    numbers indicated on them.
    Spark plug:
    20 • 29 N.m
    (2.0 — 3.0 kg-m, 14 — 22 ft-Ib)

    toJ:

    SMA476

    MA-8

    knock

    according

    may

    to

    ENGINE MAINTENANCE
    Checking Drive Belt

    Air conditioner compressor
    .. : Check point for deflection

    SMA880C

    WARNING:
    Inspect drive belt deflections when engine is cold. When engine
    is hot, check deflections at least 30 minutes after engine has
    been switched off.
    1. Inspect belts for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If
    necessary, replace with new ones.
    2. Inspect drive belt deflections by pushing on the belt midway
    between pulleys.
    3. Adjust belt deflection if it exceeds the limit.
    Belt deflection:
    Unit: mm (in)
    Used belt deflection
    Deflection of new
    belt

    Limit

    Deflection after
    adjustment

    Alternator

    17 (0.67)

    10.5 — 12.5
    (0.413 — 0.492)

    8.5 — 10.5
    (0.335 — 0.413)

    Air conditioner
    compressor

    17 (0.67)

    11.5 — 13.5
    (0.453 — 0.531)

    9.5 — 11.5
    (0.374 — 0.453)

    Power steering oil
    pump

    8 (0.31)

    5 — 7 (0.20 — 0.28)

    4 — 6 (0.16 — 0.24)

    8 (0.31)

    6 (0.24)

    Water pump
    without power
    steering
    Applied pushing
    force

    98 N (10 kg, 22 Ib)

    Inspect drive belt deflections when engine is cold.

    Checking Injection Nozzle
    1. Remove injection delivery tubes and fuel spill tube.
    2. Remove nozzle assembly with Tool.

    No. 1 injection nozzle should not be disassembled as it is
    provided with a needle lift sensor.

    W~RNING:
    Wh4!n using nozzle tester, be careful not to allow diesel fuel
    sprayed from nozzle to come into contact with your hand or
    body, and make sure that your eyes are properly protected.
    3. Clean and check nozzles.
    4. Install nozzle to injection nozzle tester and bleed air from
    flare nut.
    5. Check initial injection pressure by pumping tester handle
    one time per second.
    EF791A

    MA-9

    I

    ENGINE MAINTENANCE
    Checking Injection Nozzle (Cont’d)

    [][]

    6. Install injector to pressure tester.
    7. Check initial injection pressure by pumping tester handle
    slowly (one time per second).
    Injection pressure:
    12,749 kPa (127.5 bar, 130 kg/cm2, 1,849 psi)
    • Always check initial injection pressure before installing new
    nozzle.

    ABC

    ,»—-_.-/
    Good

    D

    ,——_/
    Wrong
    SEF079S

    8. Check spray pattern by pumping tester handle one full
    stroke per second.
    a. If main spray angle is within 30 degrees as shown, injection
    nozzle is good.
    b. It is still normal even if a thin stream of spray deviates from
    main spray (pattern B).
    9. If initial injection pressure or injection nozzle is not normal,
    adjust or clean injection nozzle or replace it.
    Refer to EC section for injection pressure adjustment, cleaning
    and replacement.
    10. Install all injection nozzles with Tool and securely connect
    fuel spill tube and delivery tubes.
    11. Bleed air from fuel system and check for fuel leakage with
    engine running.

    MA-10

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
    Engine Maintenance

    (SR)

    Spark plug

    INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
    Drive belt deflection

    Make
    Unit: mm (in)

    Used belt deflection
    Deflection
    after adjustment

    Deflection of
    new belt

    9 (0.35)

    5.5 — 6.5
    (0.217 — 0.256)

    4.5 — 5.5
    (0.177 — 0.217)

    12 — 13
    (0.47 — 0.51)

    8-9
    (0.31 — 0.35)

    7-8
    (0.28 — 0.31)

    12 (0.47)

    8-9
    (0.31 — 0.35)

    7-8
    (0.28 — 0.31)

    Limit

    I SR, CD I

    (SOS)

    Standard type

    BKR5EY-11

    Hot type

    BKR4EY-11
    BKR6EY-11

    Cold type
    Plug gap

    I

    NGK

    mm (in)

    1.0 — 1.1 (0.039 — 0.043)

    Alternator
    With ai r conditioner compressor
    Without air
    conditioner
    compressor
    Power steering
    oil pump
    Applied pushing
    force

    98 N (10 kg, 22 Ib)

    Engine Maintenance
    INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

    Engine oil capacity (Refill capacity)
    Unit:

    Drive belt deflection
    Unit: mm (in)
    Used belt deflection
    Limit

    Deflection
    after adjustment

    Deflection of
    new belt

    Alternator

    17 (0.67)

    10.5 — 12.5
    (0.413 — 0.492)

    8.5 — 10.5
    (0.335 — 0.413)

    Air conditioner
    compressor

    17 (0.67)

    11.5-13.5
    (0.453 — 0.531)

    9.5 — 11.5
    (0.374 — 0.453)

    Power steering oil pump

    8 (0.31)

    5-7
    (0.20 — 0.28)

    4-6
    (0.16 — 0.24)

    Water pump
    without power
    steering

    8 (0.31)

    6 (0.24)

    Appl ied pushing force

    (CD)

    98 N (10 kg, 22 Ib)

    MA-11

    Without oil filter

    4.7 (4-1/8)

    With oil filter

    5.2 (4-5/8)

    t

    (Imp qt)

    MANUAL TRANSAXLE

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION

    NOTICE:

    The RS5F32A transaxle

    has been adopted on SR20DE engine models.

    CONTENTS
    ON-VEHICLE

    2

    SERVICE

    Air Breather

    Hose

    2

    REMOVAL AND INSTAllATION
    Installation
    TRANSAXlE

    3

    RS5F32A

    RS5F30A

    7

    Case Components

    3
    GEAR CONTROL

    71

    MAJOR OVERHAUL
    Gear Components

    8

    4
    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    & RS5F31A

    General

    MAJOR OVERHAUL

    5

    Inspection

    Case Components

    5

    RS5F31 A

    Gear Components

    6

    MT-1

    (SOS)

    Specifications
    and Adjustment

    9
    9

    RS5F30A &
    10

    ON-VEHICLE

    SERVICE

    Air Breather Hose



    Air breather
    tube

    Refer to the figure below for removal and installation procedures of air breather hose.
    When re-installing air breather hose after removal, install it
    to the original position as shown in the figure below.
    The hose margin to insert air breather tube should be more
    than 17 mm (0.67 in). (Insert the hose to the R curve of air
    breather tube.)

    More than
    17 mm (0.67 in)
    SMT840C

    GA engine models

    £’

    Clutch cable

    Paint mark

    o(=J
    V
    [)/Rib

    Air breather

    hose

    C1iP

    I

    Clutch cable

    Front

    Paint mark
    Yellow: LHD models
    Strut housing
    Pink: RHO models
    (Make sure paint mark faces upward.)

    Clip
    Gray: LHD models
    Black: RHD models
    (LH)
    SMT841C

    SR engine models

    CD engine models

    fj] 3.9

    — 5.8 N.m
    (0.40 — 0.59 kg-m,

    Air duct
    Air duct assembly
    clip

    Paint mark: Red
    (Make sure paint
    mark faces upward.)

    Be sure to
    insert the hose
    up to the tUbe.

    ~

    Front

    34.5 — 51.3 in-Ib)

    Air breather
    hose
    Clip

    Front

    Clutch

    hose

    t:?
    Front

    MT-2

    Mark sure two paint marks
    face left side of vehicle.

    SMT842C

    REMOVAL

    AND INSTALLATION

    Installation
    Tighten bolts securing transaxle

    CD20E engine models

    CD

    SMT740A

    Bolt No.

    and install any part removed.

    Tightening torque
    N’m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    «e»

    mm (in)

    CD

    30 — 40 (3.1 — 4.1, 22 — 30)

    120 (4.72)

    @

    30 — 40 (3.1 — 4.1, 22 — 30)

    85 (3.35)

    @)

    75 — 85 (7.6 — 8.7, 55 — 63)

    75 (2.95)

    @

    16-21

    (1.6-2.1,12-15)

    30 (1.18)

    @

    16-21

    (1.6-2.1,12-15)

    25 (0.98)

    Front gusset to
    engine

    30 — 40 (3. 1 — 4. 1, 22 — 30)

    35 (1.38)

    Rear gusset to
    engine

    30 — 40 (3.1 — 4.1, 22 — 30)

    40 (1.57)

    I

    MT-3

    TRANSAXLE GEAR CONTROL

    SEC. 341

    4

    9

    tCJ

    (Except RS5F32A)

    tCJ 12 — 15
    (1.2 — 1.5, 9 • 11)

    35 — 47

    (3.6 — 4.8, 26 — 35)

    12

    13

    ,(?,7
    »

    o

    (1.0. 1.3,
    87 — 113)

    16

    19

    vtCJ
    ~~

    14 — 18 (1.4 • 1.8, 10 — 13)

    Ii] : N-m

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    tCJ : N-m

    (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    SMT837C

    G)

    Control lever knob

    @
    @
    @

    Boot
    Control lever socket

    @

    @
    (J)
    @

    Control lever
    Bearing seat spring
    (Except RS5F32A)
    Seat
    Bushing
    O-ring

    @
    @)

    @
    @
    @

    @
    @)
    @

    @

    Hand lever socket

    @

    Bushing

    Plate bolt
    Transaxle hole cover

    @
    @)

    Control rod
    Return spring

    Support rod

    @

    Return spring rubber

    Plate
    Collar

    @

    Holder bracket

    @

    Mass damper

    Bushing
    Support rod bracket
    Collar

    @
    @

    Seat bearing set
    Hand lever dust boot

    MT-4

    I RS5F30A

    MAJOR OVERHAUL

    & RS5F31 A

    I

    Case Components
    SEC. 320

    [OJ

    RS5F30A
    16 — 21
    (1.6 — 2.1, 12 — 15)

    5
    I

    ~

    (1.6 — 2.1,12

    J:

    — 15)~
    :+

    ———

    .. —

    [OJ

    (jJ
    3

    3.7 — 5.0
    (0.38 — 0.51,
    33.0 — 44.3)

    (RS5F30A)

    RS5F31A—-

    ~}W~

    16 — 21
    (1.6 — 2.1, 12 • 15)

    ~

    ~~mseaIIiP

    I
    14 [OJ

    ~/

    ~
    13
    11

    D Mating

    surface to transmission

    @[OJ

    26 — 30 (2.7 • 3.1, 20 — 22)

    ~mSealliP

    @ [OJ

    a

    a

    Thread of bolt

    20 — 29 (2.0 — 3.0, 14 — 22)
    Thread of bolt

    case

    20 • 29 (2.0 • 3.0, 14 — 22)

    D Thread

    [OJ

    25 • 34 (2.5 • 3.5, 18 — 25)

    of bolt

    ril : N.m
    [OJ :

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    D : Apply

    recommended sealant
    (Nissan genuine part: KP610-00250)

    D (b)

    :

    *:

    or equivalent.

    Apply locking sealant.
    Pay attention to its direction.
    SMT838C

    G)
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    (J)
    @

    Clutch housing
    Input shaft oil seal
    Oil pocket
    Bearing retainer
    Bearing retainer
    Torx screw
    Filler plug
    Air breather tube

    @
    @)
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Welch plug
    O-ring
    Case cover
    Back-up lamp switch
    Differential oil seal
    Drain plug
    Transmission case
    Oil gutter

    MT-5

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Reverse idler shaft
    Oil channel
    Striking rod oil seal
    Boot
    Neutral position switch
    Differential oi I seal
    O-ring
    Speedometer pinion assembly

    MAJOR OVERHAUL

    I RS5F30A

    & RS5F31 A

    Gear Components

    @*~

    SEC. 322

    i
    6

    ~

    j)~~

    45

    *

    r@
    47

    SMT686CA

    G)
    @

    @
    @
    @
    @
    (j)
    @

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Reverse idler gear
    Reverse idler
    bushing
    Reverse idler
    spacer
    Snap ring

    @
    @

    @
    @

    @

    Spacer
    Input shaft front
    bearing
    Input shaft
    Oil plug
    5th gear needle
    bearing
    5th input gear
    Coupling sleeve
    Baulk ring
    5th synchronizer
    hub

    @
    @)
    @

    Spread spring
    Shifting insert
    5th stopper
    Input shaft rear
    bearing

    @
    @

    C-ri ng holder
    Mainshaft rear
    bearing

    @

    Differential side
    bearing adjusting
    shim

    @)

    Spacer
    Mainshaft bearing
    adjusting shim

    @

    Differential side
    bearing

    @

    Mainshaft front
    bearing

    @

    4th bushing

    Mainshaft
    1st main gear

    @

    1st gear needle
    bearing

    @

    3rd & 4th synchronizer hub
    3rd main gear
    2nd main gear

    @

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Thrust washer

    @

    @

    Mainshaft C-ring

    @

    @

    Steel ball
    2nd & 3rd bushing
    4th main gear
    5th main gear

    @

    MT-6

    1st & 2nd synchronizer hub
    Reverse main gear
    (Coupling sleeve)
    Differential case
    Final gear

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    @
    @
    @

    Retaining pin
    Pinion mate thrust
    washer
    Speedometer drive
    gear
    Speedometer
    stopper
    Side gear
    Pinion mate gear
    Pinion mate shaft
    Side gear thrust
    washer

    I

    I RS5F32A I

    MAJOR OVERHAUL
    Case Components
    SEC. 320

    [jJ 3.7

    — 5.0 (0.38 — 0.51, 33.0 — 44.3)

    1 ~

    Mating surface to
    transmission case

    ,~

    @~mseallip

    5

    [OJ 16 — 21 (1.6 — 2.1, 12 — 15)

    I!B!I Seal

    lip

    ~

    (j)~ (b)Mating

    surface to
    transmission case

    @ [j] 10
    ~

    @~

    10

    I

    — 20 (1.0 — 2.0, 87 — 174)

    Thread of bolt

    *~

    Mating surface to
    transmission case

    (0.64 — 0.85, 55.6 • 73.8)

    ~(b)
    Mating surface
    to transmission
    case

    [jJ 6.4

    — 8.3
    (0.65 — 0.85, 56.6 • 73.8)

    ~~(b)
    (j] : N. m

    (.)

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    (.)

    ~~~

    ‘6.: -8.3

    ~[OJ26

    (0.64 • 0.85,
    55.6 — 73.8)

    @[OJ
    ~

    13

    Thread of bolt

    12 ~

    Thread of bolt

    m Seal

    [OJ : N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)
    ~

    — 30
    (2.7 • 3.1, 20 • 22)

    [OJ 25 — 34 (2.5 • 3.5, 18 • 25)
    ~

    20 • 29 (2.0 • 3.0, 14 • 22)

    ~<‘

    : Apply recommended sealant
    (Nissan genuine part: KP610-00250)
    or equivalent.

    ~ (b) : Apply

    * : Select

    locking sealant.
    proper thickness.
    to its direction.

    * : Pay attention

    lip
    SMT839C

    CD
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    (J)
    @
    @

    Clutch housing
    Reverse idler shaft
    Input shaft oil seal
    Oil pocket
    Bearing retainer
    Filler plug
    Ai r breather tube
    Welch plug
    O-ring

    @)
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @)
    @

    @

    Case cover
    Back-up lamp switch
    Differential oil seal
    Drain plug
    Transmission case
    Oil gutter
    Oil channel
    Bearing retainer
    Striking rod oil seal

    MT-7

    @
    @)
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    @
    @

    Boot
    Neutral position switch
    Differential oil seal
    a-ring
    Speedometer pinion assembly
    Baffle plate
    Hose clamp
    Connector hose
    Switch & hose bracket

    I RS5F32A

    MAJOR OVERHAUL
    Gear Components
    SEC. 322

    * : Pay attention

    to its direction.
    proper thickness.
    : Apply locking sealant.
    : Apply gear oil.

    * : Select

    D (b)

    (1)
    @

    SMT593CC

    Reverse idler bushing

    @
    @

    Reverse idler gear

    1st main gear

    @

    5th main gear

    Baulk ring

    @

    Spacer

    @

    Reverse idler spacer

    @

    1st gear needle bearing

    @

    @

    Snap ring

    @

    Reverse main gear
    (Coupling sleeve)

    @

    Mainshaft rear bearing
    Mainshaft C-ring

    Insert spring

    @
    @

    C-ring holder
    Snap ring

    @

    Spacer

    @

    Input shaft front bearing

    @

    (J)
    @

    Input shaft
    5th gear needle bearing

    @

    1st & 2nd synchronizer hub
    2nd outer baulk ring

    @
    !@)

    Snap ring

    @

    @

    5th input gear

    @

    2nd synchronizer cone

    @

    Speedometer stopper

    @
    @

    Baulk ring
    Coupling sleeve

    @

    2nd inner baulk ring

    @

    @

    2nd main gear

    Speedometer drive gear
    Differential case

    @

    Spread spring

    @

    2nd & 3rd bushing

    @

    Shifting insert

    @

    3rd main gear

    @
    @
    @

    @

    5th gear synchronizer hub

    @

    3rd inner baulk ring

    @

    @

    Spread spring

    @

    3rd synchronizer cone

    Differential side bearing
    adjusting shim

    Differential side bearing

    Final gear
    Differential side bearing

    @

    5th stopper

    @

    3rd outer baulk ring

    @

    Retaining pin

    @

    Snap ring

    @

    Coupling sleeve

    @

    Pinion mate thrust washer

    @
    @

    Input shaft bearing

    @

    3rd & 4th synchronizer hub

    @

    Pinion mate gear

    Mainshaft front bearing

    @

    Insert spring

    Thrust washer

    @

    Steel ball

    @

    Baulk ring

    @

    Mainshaft

    @

    4th main gear

    @)
    @
    @

    @

    4th bushing

    MT-8

    Side gear
    Pinion mate shaft

    ,

    SERVICE

    DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
    General

    (SOS)

    Specifications

    TRANSAXLE
    Europe
    GA14DE

    Applied model

    GA16DE
    With catalyzer

    RS5F30A

    Transaxle model

    RS5F31A

    Number of speeds

    5

    Synchromesh type

    Warner

    Shift pattern

    3

    1

    SR20DE

    CD20E

    RS5F32A

    RS5F31A

    5

    1

    1-II—2

    Gear ratio

    Number of teeth

    4

    R

    1st

    3.333

    3.063

    3.063

    3.333

    2nd

    1.955

    1.826

    1.826

    1.955

    3rd

    1.286

    1.286

    1.286

    1.286

    4th

    0.902

    0.975

    0.975

    0.902

    5th

    0.733

    0.810

    0.756

    0.756

    Reverse

    3.417

    3.417

    3.153

    3.417

    15

    16

    16

    15

    Input
    gear

    Main
    gear

    1st
    2nd

    22

    23

    23

    22

    3rd

    28

    28

    28

    28

    4th

    41

    40

    40

    41

    5th

    45

    42

    45

    45

    Rev.

    12

    12

    13

    12

    1st

    50

    49

    49

    50

    2nd

    43

    42

    42

    43
    36

    3rd

    36

    36

    36

    4th

    37

    39

    39

    37

    5th

    33

    34

    34

    34

    Rev.

    41

    41

    41

    41

    31

    30

    Reverse idler
    gear
    mm (in)

    Oil level
    Oil capacity
    (Reference)

    f (Imp pt)

    30
    58 — 66 (2.28 — 2.60)

    57 — 66 (2.24 — 2.60)

    40 — 45 (1.57 — 1.77)

    54 — 61 (2.13 — 2.40)

    2.8 — 3.0 (4-7/8 — 5-114)

    2.9 — 3.2 (5-1/8 — 5-518)

    3.6 — 3.8 (6-3/8 — 6-314)

    2.9 — 3.2 (5-1/8 — 5-518)

    2nd and 3rd double
    baulk ring type synchronizer

    Remarks

    FINAL GEAR
    GA14DE

    Engine

    SR20DE

    CD20E

    4.167

    4.167

    4.176

    3.650

    Final gearlPinion

    75/18

    75/18

    71/17

    73/20

    Side gear/Pinion
    mate gear

    14/10

    16/10

    14/10

    16/10

    Final gear ratio
    Number of
    teeth

    GA16DE

    MT-9

    I

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    (80S)

    Inspection and Adjustment RS5F31A
    AVAILABLE SHIMS
    MAINSHAFT AND DIFFERENTIAL SIDE
    BEARING PRELOAD AND ADJUSTING
    SHIM
    Bearing

    preload (Reused

    bearing)
    Unit: mm (in)

    Mainshaft bearing

    Differential side
    bearing

    RS5F30A

    0.18 — 0.23
    (0.0071 — 0.0091)

    0.24 — 0.32
    (0.0094 — 0.0126)

    RS5F31A

    0.18 — 0.27
    (0.0071 — 0.0106)

    0.24 — 0.32
    (0.0094 — 0.0126)

    MT-10

    RS5F30A &

    QUICK REFERENCE INDEX

    GENERAL INFORMATION

    GI

    MAINTENANCE

    MA

    ALMERA

    ENGINE MECHANICAL

    EM

    MODEL N15 SERIES

    ENGINE LUBRICATION &
    COOLING SYSTEMS

    LC

    ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

    EC

    ACCELERATOR CONTROL,
    FUEL & EXHAUST SYSTEMS

    FE

    FOREWORD

    CLUTCH

    CL

    This supplement contains information concerning necessary service
    procedures and relevant data for the
    model N15 series.

    MANUAL TRANSAXLE

    MT

    AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

    AT

    FRONT AXLE & FRONT SUSPENSION

    FA

    REAR AXLE & REAR SUSPENSION

    RA

    BRAKE SYSTEM

    BR

    STEERING SYSTEM

    ST

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM

    RS

    BODY & TRIM

    BT

    HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER

    HA

    ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

    EL

    ALPHABETICAL INDEX

    IDX

    All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this supplement are based on the latest product
    information available at the time of
    publication. If your NISSAN model
    differs from the specifications contained in this supplement, consult your
    NISSAN distributor for information.
    The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at
    any time without notice.

    Edition: April 1996
    Printing: April 1996 (01)
    Publication No. SM6E-N15SE0

    NISSAN EUROPE N.V.
    © 1996 NISSAN EUROPE N.V. Printed in THE NETHERLANDS
    Not to be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of Nissan Europe N.V., Amsterdam, The
    Netherlands.

    HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
    ~

    This Service Manual contains the new service procedures, service data and specifications
    face-lifted model N15 series which has been in production since April, 1996.

    ~

    This Service Manual does not contain
    former models*.
    Please use this manual in conjunction
    SM5E-ON15EO).

    ~

    Follow the instruction

    the service

    procedures,

    Manual (Pub. No.

    below when using this manual.

    ENGINf

    fNGINl

    ME CHANICAL
    LUBHICA liON
    SYS TF MS
    CONlROl

    &

    SYSHM

    ACCll!
    RA lOR CON I HOl
    EXHAUST
    SYSH MS

    White on black
    NISSAN
    MODEL N15

    SEAlES

    AUTOMATIC

    rUI L &

    TRANSAXU

    I

    FRONT AXLE & FRONT SUSPENSION

    i

    ._ .

    Specific section titles are printed white on a
    black background in the QUICK REFERENCE

    INDEX.
    Service procedures and
    service data are added
    or changed.
    Use this SUPPLEMENT
    MANUAL.
    Only the added or
    changed points are
    introduced in
    these chapters.

    models:

    etc. which are the same as those for

    with the NISSAN model N15 series Service

    ENGINl
    COOLING

    * Former

    for the

    Models before the model N15 series

    ..

    ._.___

    -• I
    I

    Black on white

    I

    —I~
    Ir=-:—

    Those sections which are printed black on a
    white background are not contained in this
    manual.

    Service procedures are
    the same as those for
    the former models*.
    Refer to the NISSAN
    model N15 series
    Service Manual
    (Pub. No.
    SM5E-ON15EO).

    introduced

    in April, 1996.

    IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
    The proper performance
    of service is essential for both the safety of the technician and the efficient
    functioning of the vehicle.
    The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a manner that the service may be
    performed safely and accurately.
    Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician and the tools and parts available.
    Accordingly,
    anyone using service procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically
    recommended
    by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be
    jeopardized
    by the service method selected.

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION

    NOTICE:

    Wiring diagrams

    have been changed.

    CONTENTS
    2

    PRECAUTION
    Supplemental
    BAG»

    Restraint

    System

    (Dual Air Bag System)

    Supplemental

    Restraint

    BAG»

    Air Bag System)

    (Single

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Restraint System (SRS) —

    System

    Diagram

    DIAGNOSES

    2

    Supplemental
    Single Air Bag

    7

    System
    Wiring

    (SRS) «AIR

    Diagram

    SRS —

    7

    2

    Supplemental
    Dual Air Bag System

    Schematic
    Wiring

    TROUBLE

    Restraint System (SRS) —

    (SRS) «AIR

    3
    3

    SRS —

    4

    I

    RS-1

    PRECAUTION
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» (Dual Air Bag System)
    The Supplemental Restraint System «Air Bag», used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or
    severity of injury to the driver and front passenger in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint
    System consists of air bag modules (located in the center of the steering wheel and on the instrument
    panel on the passenger side), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
    by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
    injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
    • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the
    harness connectors or for the complete harness, for easy identification.

    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» (Single Air Bag System)
    The Supplemental Restraint System «Air Bag», used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or
    severity of injury to the driver in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint System consists of an
    air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp,
    wiring harness and spiral cable.
    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
    by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
    injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
    • Do not use electrical test eqUipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual.

    RS-2

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES

    — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Dual Air Bag System
    Schematic

    DATA LINK
    CONNECTOR
    FOR CONSULT

    FUSE

    FUSE

    o

    COMBINATION
    METER
    (AIR BAG
    WARNING
    LAMP)

    15

    2120

    3

    5

    4

    6

    2

    AIR BAG
    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR UNIT
    17

    SPIRAL
    CABLE

    SQUIB

    AIR BAG
    MODULE
    DRIVER’S
    SIDE

    SQUIB

    AIR BAG
    MODULE
    PASSENGER
    SIDE

    DOOR SWITCH
    DRIVER’S SIDE
    HRS013

    I

    RS-3

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Dual Air Bag System
    Wiring Diagram —

    SRS —

    DUAL AIR BAG SYSTEM

    RS-SRS-02

    10A

    1221

    ~——«»—-I

    1~51

    BR/W

    R/L

    ~

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    ~

    RIL

    BR/W~
    JUNCTION

    1,*~(Z~)ieJJl

    BOX No.2
    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)

    BR/W
    ~
    1I1~1

    @:
    @:
    @:

    e-O

    0

    R

    I

    SPIRAL
    CABLE

    R

    rrh
    DOOR

    SWITCH
    DRIVER’S
    SIDE
    @ID

    OPEN

    AIR BAG
    MODULE

    AIR BAG
    MODULE

    SIDE

    SIDE

    DRIVER’S

    ,.

    lbi=H

    (SQUIB)

    B

    PASSENGER
    (SQUIB)

    I

    B

    ~

    (b):

    B

    ([):

    I

    LHD models
    RHO mode 1s

    ~

    m@
    Refer to last page
    y

    ~~@)
    5 6

    J81910 1112

    y

    rfi2l(]ID

    ‘TIT’

    W

    l1LQTI]@

    @

    aID

    8

    ~

    lfiI *6Y

    (Foldout

    page) .

    ~Y

    ~ill)
    iJE)

    Y

    CHID
    w

    HRS016

    RS-5

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)Dual Air Bag System
    Wiring Diagram — SRS — (Cont’d)

    RS-SRS-04
    AIR SAG
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    DIAGNOSIS

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    SENSOR
    UNIT

    (JIB)

    SSS

    SSS

    l!?J=!I

    I 2~ I
    GIS

    TX

    ~

    GY/L

    @

    RX

    I I
    IrtJ~t;~iciJl
    GIS
    I GISI

    GY/L@ GIS

    GY/L

    :

    LHD mode Is
    RHO models
    *7 … 10 ,
    *8 …
    9 ,

    :


    6
    3

    GY/L

    1*;1

    1:81 i~~i~~o~o~~~c~gR~)
    ~:
    JOINT CONNECTOR-5

    ‘*l’
    GY/L

    I

    GY/L

    G

    m

    m

    I *..a I ~:
    GIS

    I

    GIS

    rtl
    DATA LINK
    CONNECTOR
    FOR CONSULT
    ~

    Refer to last page

    @

    @

    Y

    y

    ~

    (Foldout

    page) .

    ~:

    ~GY

    OR

    HRS017

    RS-6

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Single Air Bag System
    Wiring Diagram —

    SRS —

    SINGLE AIR BAG SYSTEM

    RS-SRS-01
    FUSE

    BLOCK
    (JIB)
    :

    I

    @:
    @:

    BR/W

    Iif2n

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    QU):

    JUNCTION

    BOX No.2

    @ 30 @ 40
    @17’@31
    @ 16 ,’ @ 30

    *1

    (JOINT

    *2
    *3

    CONNECTORS)
    ~~

    LHO mode Is
    RHO models
    Wi th tachometer
    Without tachometer

    BR/W

    Y

    ~:f
    t

    BR1/W

    SPIRAL

    ~1*.31

    CABLE
    COMBINATION
    METER
    (AIR BAG

    WARNING
    LAMP)

    AIR BAG

    @
    @

    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR

    UNIT
    SQ+

    SQ-

    I

    1*.21
    BIR

    I
    BIR

    rt

    B

    AIR BAG
    MODULE

    ~

    ~

    m~

    (SQUIB)

    ~

    B

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Fa Idout

    page) .

    (0) , ~

    y

    ———1
    ~

    It I

    11!1 INDICATOR)

    METER
    (00 OFF .
    COMBINATION

    3

    ~

    ~

    G/OR

    00 CANCEL

    I~I~

    SOLENOID

    G/OR~

    I

    VALVE

    1I~41~

    ~~

    DRIB

    DRIB

    I

    ORIB

    ~$~

    1$1:~~

    _—.~/B

    ~

    -,g

    I
    m

    OR/B

    (0)

    II

    W)

    ~

    —I

    rm

    G/OR

    CM[) @@

    DRIB

    P ….
    R

    .:
    N~

    1

    p

    .:

    2

    R

    ~~

    INHIBITOR

    1 SWITCH
    2
    @Z)

    OVERDRIVE

    CONTROL
    OFF

    ~
    G/W

    SWITCH

    ON

    ~

    1L5J1
    ~

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1

    8

    .. G/W ~

    ~~-BACK/L

    ~(lT

    ~

    L.

    B

    ~»——

    ——«-~

    B

    -rl
    8

    8

    ~

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout
    L

    (0)

    ~

    ([!Q)
    ~

    ~~
    rn:rmm

    ~

    ~@!)
    B

    Ug@)

    ,

    (-::In
    [ [~llIJ

    @Q])
    (E106)

    l][Q))A

    em

    ~~
    SA

    page) .

    8

    ~
    GY

    8

    HAT047

    AT-3

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram —

    AT —

    RHO

    AT-A/T-02
    @>:

    For Europe
    Except for Europe
    GA engine

    @:
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer

    (JIB)

    ~
    ~

    1Ni51 n~61
    y

    y

    I f…. _

    I!’I

    Y

    Y

    m~

    Y

    112•41

    ~

    @:
    @:

    to EL-POWER.

    VALVE

    00 CANCEL
    SOLENOID
    .VALVE

    ~~:@>

    ORI/B

    rm

    ,

    DRIB

    -O~

    <5>

    O……..Jr

    l:

    @ ~$

    OVERDRIVE
    ON …..__

    CLUTCH

    NE

    DRIB

    @

    SOLENOID
    VALVE

    it!

    DRIB

    page

    TORQUE
    CONVERTER

    y

    ~
    @

    ~Next

    AIT CONTROL
    VALVE ~
    :

    Y

    EU

    00 CANCEL
    SOLENOID

    INDICATOR)

    DRIB ~

    Y

    I
    e—o~:—-,
    J
    rm

    METER (00nON
    OFF
    COMBINA

    .-

    engine

    SA

    CONTROL
    SWITCH
    ~

    ~

    ~-@

    P/B

    ~Next

    page

    Refer to last page
    (Fe Idout page) .

    ~W
    L

    ~

    F1f2T3l~

    ~
    SA

    ~~
    ~B

    ~e

    f1f2T3T4l
    ~

    CE202) ~
    e’GY

    ~
    (E224)
    u£.@ GY

    HAT048

    AT-4

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram — AT —

    RHD (Cont’d)

    AT-A/T-03

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    NEUT

    ~

    1*.21

    t

    PIS

    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    ~:
    @:

    MODULE)

    LKUP
    @

    (IT)

    IbjJt — — 49 — ~
    PIS

    ~

    G/OR

    ~CMIDdI:-,

    II~~——~
    PIS

    ~

    G/OR

    +—-<1>

    G/OR

    ~

    Preceding
    ~
    {
    page

    <:&

    PIS
    y

    G/OR

    Itl~

    ~

    G/OR

    engine

    *5… @4 , @8
    *6… @ 1 , @2

    G/OR

    Icfll~

    SR

    For Europe
    Except for Europe
    For Australia
    Except for Australia
    GA engine for Australia
    Except~
    *1 … ~
    30 , @ 115
    *2. · · @ 22 , @ 35
    *3 @ 1 @2
    *4
    @ 2 ‘@
    1
    ,

    G/OR

    ……,CEID~

    GA engine

    *7… @6

    ,@

    1

    ~

    t—-t

    ~
    —,

    I

    II

    G/OR

    1*-41

    P—.

    .:1

    AN-02

    11*.51

    INHIBITOR
    SWITCH
    @:~
    @:~

    1*.61

    1

    G/W

    B

    1

    O~
    ~

    G/W.

    B

    ~

    I-

    S@~:6)S

    S

    To EL-BACK/L

    ~O-.-‘!~
    ~

    ~~

    ~.

    E

    :0
    E

    ::J

    0.

    Q)
    CJ)
    CJ)

    co

    ,..
    ,..

    0.

    ~,..

    E

    :::J
    0.

    I

    If’:

    «,e

    in
    (0
    ic

    ~

    E

    Ll)

    :.c

    0

    CJ)

    en

    (J)

    .~

    if
    co

    @

    (J)

    ~

    rn

    (J)

    .0

    c

    (J)

    ~

    .0

    (0

    .~
    (J)

    I.t)
    Q)

    0

    en
    Ll)

    ~
    co

    ex)

    «C

    ‘en

    ~

    I.t)

    ~
    ex)
    ex)

    .S
    (J)

    «0

    ’00

    (ij
    Q)

    .0
    Q)

    «C

    en
    ::J

    ~
    0)
    ,~

    ~
    ,….

    ‘w

    ~

    C
    Q)

    ~

    (J)

    Q)

    ‘»0

    ’00

    .~

    en

    :J

    -:0,~ co

    C

    ~

    in
    ,..

    ,~ic

    2 (ij E
    Q)
    i:

    ~

    0.0

    is

    en

    M
    ,..

    ,..
    ,…N
    CI
    I

    ~
    ~

    I

    ~

    ~:s

    ~

    Q)
    Q)

    (J)

    .0

    2

    (ij

    c
    iI

    co

    u

    .0

    c

    -=

    Q)

    (ij

    ~

    .9-

    0

    »E
    Q)

    ~
    ~

    II

    C
    co
    .2

    Q)
    CJ)

    ~

    ‘»

    0

    (J)

    c

    «Ui

    ::J
    0

    ..c.

    ~

    Q)

    >

    c

    0

    0

    2
    Q;

    >
    c
    0
    u

    m

    ::J

    e;;-

    ~

    cr

    ~

    C»)
    C»)

    0
    ui

    ID

    Q)

    E

    o
    «0
    Q)
    Q)

    0(J)

    o

    N

    ,..
    C»)
    I

    «C

    ,…. m

    ~o :5_
    C»)

    «0

    I

    CO

    ~g

    ~L1
    SAT1991A

    AT-7

    r~nr

    SEC. 315

    a..
    a3
    c

    Cf)

    g>.
    -~

    Q)

    a..C6

    roc..
    c:
    (J)

    0>

    c:
    —c
    -«i

    Q)

    …..
    -ro
    a..
    …….
    Q)
    Q)
    >
    a: _~

    o

    SAT312J

    AT-8

    MAJOR OVERHAUL
    Except Model 34X81
    @[]
    SEC. 310-311-312-314-315-317-319

    III

    SAT313J

    AT-9

    MAJOR OVERHAUL
    Model 34X81
    SEC. 310-311-312-314-315-317-319

    SAT314J

    AT-10

    MAJOR OVERHAUL
    Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle
    Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings Except for Model 34X81
    Outer diameter

    and color of thrust

    Item
    number

    Outer diameter
    mm (in)

    15
    16

    72.0 (2.835)
    78.5 (3.091)

    Outer and inner diameter

    washers

    of needle

    bearings

    Color

    Item
    number

    Outer diameter
    mm (in)

    Inner diameter
    mm (in)

    7
    8

    47.0 (1.850)

    32.0 (1.260)

    Black

    35.0 (1.378)

    20.1 (0.791)

    @

    60.0 (2.362)

    42.0 (1.654)

    10
    11

    60.0 (2.362)

    45.0 (1.772)

    47.0 (1.850)

    30.0 (1.181)

    @
    @
    @

    @~

    42.6 (1.677)

    26.1 (1.028)

    48.0 (1.890)

    33.5 (1.319)

    59.0 (2.323)

    42.0 (1.654)

    l~l~l

    *

    II

    CD

    @ @

    *:

    Select

    @

    proper thickness.
    Outer diameter

    Outer & inner diameter of blearing races,
    adjusting shims and adjusting spacer
    Item
    number

    Outer diameter
    mm (in)

    Inner diameter
    mm (in)

    @
    @
    @
    @

    48.0 (1.890)

    33.0 (1.299)

    29.0 (1.142)

    25.0 (0.984)

    34.5 (1.358)
    79.5 (3.130)

    of snap rings

    Item
    number

    Outer diameter
    mm (in)

    (f’

    142.0 (5.59)

    ‘i:

    113.0 (4.45)

    (3’

    162.4 (6.39)

    26.1 (1.028)

    4)
    (‘5)

    126.0 (4.96)

    72.0 (2.835)

    ~6)

    162.3 (6.39)

    135.4 (5.33)

    SAT315J

    AT-11

    MAJOR OVERHAUL
    Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle
    Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings —

    Model 34X81
    Outer diameter

    and color of thrust

    Item
    number

    Outer diameter
    mm (in)

    17

    72.0 (2.835)

    18

    78.5 (3.091)

    Outer & inner diameter

    washers

    Item
    number

    Color
    Black

    of needle

    bearings

    Outer diameter
    mm (in)

    Inner diameter
    mm (in)

    47.0 (1.850)

    32.0 (1.260)

    35.0 (1.378)

    20.1 (0.791)

    60.0 (2.362)

    42.0 (1.654)

    60.0 (2.362)

    45.0 (1.772)

    47.0 (1.850)

    30.0 (1. 181)

    42.6 (1.677)

    26.1 (1.028)

    48.0 (1.890)

    33.5 (1.319)

    55.0 (2.165)

    40.5 (1.594)

    60.0 (2.362)

    40.1 (1.579)

    CD

    *: Select

    proper thickness.

    Outer & inner diameter
    and adjusting shims

    of bearing

    Item
    number

    Outer diameter
    mm (in)

    19
    20

    @
    22

    Outer diameter
    Item
    number

    race

    of snap rings

    Outer diameter
    mm (in)
    142.0 (5.59)
    113.0 (4.45)

    I~ner diameter
    mm (in)

    162.4 (6.39)

    48.0 (1.890)

    33.0 (1.299)

    135.4 (5.33)

    72.0 (2.835)

    61.0 (2.402)

    162.3 (6.39)

    34.5 (1.358)

    26.1 (1.028)

    126.0 (4.96)

    68.0 (2.677)

    60.0 (2.362)

    40.5 (1.594)
    SAT106EE

    AT-12

    REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
    Control Valve Upper Body
    SEC. 317

    W

    _
    Q)

    ~

    >
    >

    T»»»

    ~~-

    co

    a.x

    -r:::Wo

    Q)

    C

    cry

    _

    (ij

    L{)

    0

    «Ox
    0<0
    ~(‘)

    W

    >
    >

    (ij

    rn

    ~

    Q)

    >
    c: W
    o
    >
    u-m
    Q)
    >

    .~

    0.
    en

    ~

    ::3

    Q)

    ::J_

    O»w

    II

    rn

    .~
    0.

    .~~~

    en

    ~

    ::3

    rn

    Q)

    a:

    C

    «0
    Q)

    >.

    >

    «‘0

    (ij

    o

    >

    .D

    (J)

    W

    C

    a.

    ::3
    ‘U

    ~

    Q)

    en

    m

    y-~
    ,… >

    ~~~

    ~

    :~

    a.
    :J

    0)

    C
    «~

    en
    W

    C
    «(ij

    a;

    a:

    Q)

    ~

    =0
    o
    E

    ~

    ::J

    en
    en
    Q)

    et
    SAT316J

    Apply ATF to all components before their installation.

    Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in Spring Chart of SOS.

    AT-13

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    General Specifications
    Except Europe and
    Australia
    Applied model

    Except Europe and
    Australia

    Europe

    GA150E

    Australia

    Australia

    GA160E
    With catalyzer

    SR200E

    Without catalyzer

    Automatic transaxle model

    RL4F03A

    Automatic transaxle
    assembly
    Model code number

    36X04

    36X07

    1st

    2.861

    2.8611

    2.861

    2nd

    1.562

    1.5622

    1.562

    36X05

    34X81

    34Xll

    Transaxle gear ratio

    3rd

    1.000

    1.0000

    1.000

    4th

    0.697

    0.6979

    0.697

    Reverse

    2.310

    2.3103

    2.310

    Final drive

    3.827

    4.0721

    Recommended
    Fluid capacity

    3.827
    Genuine Nissan ATF or equivalent*

    oil

    e

    (Imp qt)

    7.0 (6-1/8)

    *Refer to MA section («Fluids and Lubricants»,

    «RECOMMENO

    FLUIO ANO LUBRICANTS»).

    Specifications and Adjustments
    VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS

    Model 36X07
    Throttle position

    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
    01

    ~

    O2

    O2

    ~

    03

    03

    ~

    04

    04

    ~

    03

    Full throttle

    48 — 56
    (30 — 35)

    88 — 96
    (55 — 60)

    133 — 141
    (83 — 88)

    Half throttle

    31 — 39
    (19-24)

    54 — 62
    (34 — 39)

    102 — 110
    (63 — 68)

    75 — 83
    (47 — 52)

    O2

    03

    03

    ~

    O2

    O2

    ~

    01

    12

    ~

    1,

    80 — 88
    (50 — 55)

    37 — 45
    (23 — 28)

    45 — 53
    (28 — 33)

    44 — 52
    (27 — 32)

    7 — 15
    (4 — 9)

    45 — 53
    (28 — 33)

    Model 36X04 and 36X05
    Throttle position

    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
    01

    ~

    O2

    ~

    03

    ~

    04

    04

    ~

    03

    03

    ~

    O2

    O2

    ~

    01

    12

    ~

    11

    136 — 144
    (85 — 89)

    85 — 93
    (53 — 58)

    40 — 48
    (25 — 30)

    48 — 56
    (30 — 35)

    52 — 60
    (32 — 37)

    97 — 105
    (60 — 65)

    67 — 75
    (42 — 47)

    42 — 50
    (26 — 31)

    8 — 16
    (5 — 10)

    48 — 56
    (30 — 35)

    O2

    03

    Full throttle

    51 — 60
    (32 — 37)

    94 — 102
    (58 — 63)

    Half throttle

    30 — 38
    (19 — 24)

    01

    Model 34X11
    Throttle position

    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
    ~

    O2

    ~

    03

    Full throttle

    52 — 60
    (32 — 37)

    100 — 108
    (62 — 67)

    Half throttle

    30 — 38
    (19 — 24)

    53 — 61
    (33 — 38)

    ~

    04

    04

    ~

    03

    03

    ~

    O2

    O2

    ~

    01

    12

    ~

    11

    145 — 153
    (90 — 95)

    90 — 98
    (56-61)

    40 — 48
    (25 — 30)

    49 — 57
    (30 — 35)

    103 — 111
    (64 — 69)

    69 — 77
    (43 — 48)

    42 — 50
    (26 — 31)

    8 — 16
    (5 — 10)

    49 — 57
    (30 — 35)

    Model 34X81
    Throttle position

    Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
    01

    ~

    O2

    02

    «-7

    03

    03

    ~

    04

    04

    ~

    03

    03

    ~

    O2

    O2

    ~

    01

    12

    ~

    1,

    Full throttle

    58 — 66
    (36 — 41)

    107 — 115
    (66 — 71)

    160 — 168
    (99 — 104)

    96 — 104
    (60 — 65)

    39 — 47
    (24 — 29)

    48 — 56
    (30 — 35)

    Half throttle

    33 — 41
    (21 — 25)

    57 — 65
    (35 — 40)

    105 — 113
    (65 — 70)

    69 — 77
    (43 — 48)

    45 — 53
    (28 — 33)

    8 — 16
    (5 — 10)

    48 — 56
    (30 — 35)

    AT-14

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
    VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING
    LOCK-UP

    Model 34X81

    Model 36X07

    Throttle position

    Vehicle speed
    km/h (MPH)

    Gear position

    Lock-up «ON»
    Throttle position

    Vehicle speed
    km/h (MPH)

    Gear position

    105 — 113
    (65 — 70)

    Half throttle

    Lock-up «ON»
    102 — 110
    (63 — 68)

    Half throttle

    STALL REVOLUTION
    Engine

    Model 36X04 and 36X05
    Throttle position

    Gear position

    Half throttle

    04

    GA150E
    Vehicle speed
    km/h (MPH)

    Stall revolution rpm

    Model 36X04

    2,400 — 2,700

    Model 36X05

    2,550 — 2,850

    Model 34X11, 36X07

    2,450 — 2,750

    Model 34X81

    1,850-2,150

    GA160E

    Lock-up «ON»

    Lock-up «OFF»

    112 — 120
    (70 — 75)

    97 — 105
    (60 — 65)

    SR200E

    THROTTLE WIRE ADJUSTMENT
    Unit: mm (in)

    Model 34X11

    40 — 42 (1.57 — 1.65)

    Throttle wire stroke
    Throttle position

    Gear position

    Half throttle

    04

    Vehicle speed
    km/h (MPH)
    Lock-up «ON»

    Lock-up «OFF»

    116 — 124
    (72 — 77)

    97 — 105
    (60 — 65)

    II

    LINE PRESSURE
    Model 36X04, 36X05 and 36X07
    Line pressure kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)

    Engine speed
    rpm

    R position

    Idle

    883 (8.83, 9.0, 128)

    637 (6.37, 6.5, 92)

    Stall

    1,765 (17.65, 18.0, 256)

    1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

    o

    position

    2 position

    1 position

    1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

    1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

    1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

    1,275 (12.75,13.0,185)

    Model 34X11

    [~TuJ

    Line pressure kPa (bar, kg/crn2, psi)

    Engine speed
    rpm

    R position

    Idle

    883 (8.83, 9.0, 128)

    637 (6.37, 6.5, 92)

    Stall

    1,765 (17.65, 18.0, 256)

    1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

    o

    position

    2 position

    1 position

    1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

    1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

    1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

    1,275 (12.75,13.0,185)

    Model 34X81
    Line pressure kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)

    Engine speed
    rpm

    R position

    Idle

    883 (8.83, 9.0, 128)

    637 (6.37, 6.5, 92)

    Stall

    1,765 (17.65, 18.0, 256)

    1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

    o

    position

    AT-15

    2 position

    1 position

    1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

    1,147 (11.47,11.7,166)

    1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

    1,275 (12.75, 13.0, 185)

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
    Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
    CONTROL VALVES
    Control valve return springs
    Unit: mm (in)

    Parts

    Upper
    body

    Free length

    Outer diameter

    31742-31X64

    25.02 (0.9850)

    7.9 (0.311)

    31742-31 X03

    40.5 (1.594)

    9.0 (0.354)

    34X11

    31742-31 X69

    51.14 (2.0134)

    17.0 (0.669)

    34X81,
    36X04, 36X05, 36X07

    31742-31 X70

    50.8 (2.000)

    17.0 (0.669)

    34X11, 34X81,
    36X04,36X05,36X07

    G)

    Pressure modifier valve spring

    (ID

    Kickdown modulator valve spring

    (ID

    1-2 accumulator
    valve spring

    @

    3-2 timing valve spring

    31736-21 XOO

    26.3 (1.035)

    7.2 (0.283)

    CID

    1st reducing valve spring

    31835-21 X08

    22.6 (0.890)

    7.3 (0.287)

    @

    Torque converter relief valve spring

    31742-31 X06

    23.5 (0.925)

    7.4 (0.291)

    Throttle modulator valve spring

    31742-31 X07

    29.5 (1.161)

    5.5 (0.217)

    (j)

    5.5 (0.217)

    @

    Lower
    body

    Part No.
    Model

    4th speed cut
    valve spring

    34X81,36X07
    34X11, 36X04, 36X05

    31742-31X18

    29.5 (1. 161 )

    34X11,36X04,36X05

    31756-24XOO

    30.0 (1. 181 )

    7.0 (0.276)

    36X07

    31756-21 X02

    22.6 (0.890)

    7.3 (0.287)

    34X81

    31835-21 X02

    23.2 (0.913)

    6.2 (0.244)

    CID

    Lock-up control valve spring

    31742-31 X08

    39.5 (1.555)

    5.0 (0.197)

    Oil cooler relief valve spring

    31872-31 XOO

    17.02 (0.6701)

    8.0 (0.315)

    Throttle valve
    and detent valve
    spring

    34X81

    31802-31 X06

    32.0 (1.260)

    10.0 (0.394)

    G)

    34X11,
    36X04, 36X05. 36X07

    31802-31 X07

    33.0 (1.299)

    10.0 (0.394)

    31742-31 XOO

    52.24 (2.0567)

    15.0 (0.591)

    36X07

    31762-31 XOO

    52.0 (2.047)

    8.0 (0.315)

    34X11,36X04,36X05

    31762-31 X13

    52.0 (2.047)

    7.45 (0.2933)

    34X81

    31762-31 X11

    52.0 (2.047)

    8.0 (0.315)

    52.7 (2.075)

    7.0 (0.276)

    (g)

    Pressure regulator valve spring

    (ID

    3-4 shift valve
    spring

    @

    2-3 shift valve spring

    31762-31 X01

    @

    1-2 shift valve spring

    31762-31 X02

    45.9 (1.807)

    5.3 (0.209)

    31742-31 X60

    48.9 (1.925)

    7.0 (0.276)

    @

    Overrun clutch control valve spring

    AT-16

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
    Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
    CLUTCH AND BRAKES

    34X 11, 36X04,
    36X05, 36X07

    Model
    34X11, 36X04,
    36X05, 36X07

    Model

    IReverse

    clutch

    34X81

    I Forward

    I

    Number of
    drive plates

    2

    Number of
    driven plates

    2

    I

    Number of drive plates

    5

    Number of driven plates

    5

    Drive plate thickness
    mm (in)

    Drive plate
    thickness
    mm (in)
    Standard

    2.0 (0.079)

    Wear limit

    Standard

    1.8 (0.071)

    Wear limit

    1.6 (0.063)
    mm (in)

    Clearance

    1.8 (0.071)

    0.45 — 0.85 (0.0177 — 0.0335)

    Standard

    Clearance
    mm (in)

    1.85 (0.0728)

    Allowable limit

    Standard

    0.5 — 0.8 (0.020 — 0.031)

    Allowable
    limit

    1.2 (0.047)

    Thickness of
    retaining
    plates

    clutch

    34X81

    Thickness mm (in)

    Part number

    4.4 (0.173)

    31537-31XOO

    4.6 (0.181)

    31537-31 X01

    4.8 (0.189)

    31537-31 X02

    5.0 (0.197)

    31537-31 X03

    5.2 (0.205)

    31537-31 X04

    Thickness of retaining plate

    I High clutch I
    Number of
    drive plates

    3

    Number of
    driven plates

    5

    IOverrun

    4
    6+1

    Drive plate
    thickness
    mm (in)

    clutch

    Thickness
    mm (in)

    Part number

    3.6 (0.142)

    31537-31 X60

    3.8 (0.150)

    31537-31 X61

    4.0 (0.157)

    31537-31 X62

    4.2 (0.165)

    31537-31 X63

    4.4 (0.173)

    31537-31 X64

    4.6 (0.181)

    31537-31 X65

    I

    Number of drive plates

    3

    Number of driven plates

    4

    Drive plate thickness
    mm (in)

    Standard

    2.0 (0.079)

    1.6 (0.063)

    Standard

    1.6 (0.063)

    Wear limit

    1.8 (0.071)

    1.4 (0.055)

    Wear limit

    1.4 (0.055)

    Clearance
    mm (in)

    Clearance

    Allowable
    limit

    2.4 (0.094)
    Thickness
    mm (in)

    Thickness of
    retaining
    plates

    Standard

    1.4 — 1.8 (0.055 — 0.071)

    Standard

    Part
    number

    Allowable limit

    2.6 (0.102)
    Thickness
    mm (in)

    mm (in)

    Part
    number

    3.8 (0.150)

    3153732XOO

    3.8 (0.150)

    3153732XOO

    4.0 (0.157)

    3153732X01

    4.0 (0.157)

    3153732X01

    4.2 (0.165)

    3153732X02

    4.2 (0.165)

    3153732X02

    4.4 (0.173)

    3153732X03

    4.4 (0.173)

    3153732X03

    4.6 (0.181)

    3153732X04

    4.6 (0.181)

    3153732X04

    4.8 (0.189)

    3153732X05

    4.8 (0.189)

    3153732X05

    5.0 (0.197)

    3153732X06

    Thickness of retaining plate

    AT-17

    1.0 — 1.4 (0.039 — 0.055)
    2.0 (0.079)
    Thickness
    mm (in)

    Part number

    3.6 (0.142)

    31567-31 X79

    3.8 (0.150)

    31567-31 X80

    4.0 (0.157)

    31567-31 X81

    4.2 (0.165)

    31567-31 X82

    4.4 (0.173)

    31567-31 X83

    II

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
    Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
    OIL PUMP

    34X 11, 36X04,
    36X05, 36X07

    Model

    I Low & reverse

    brake

    34X81
    Oil pump side clearance
    mm (in)

    I

    Number of drive plates

    5

    Number of driven plates

    5

    0.02 — 0.04 (0.0008 — 0.0016)
    Inner gear
    Thickness
    mm (in)

    Part number

    9.99 — 10.00
    (0.3933 — 0.3937)

    31346-31 XOO

    9.98 — 9.99
    (0.3929 — 0.3933)

    31346-31 X01

    9.97 — 9.98
    (0.3925 — 0.3929)

    31346-31 X02

    Drive plate thickness
    mm (in)
    Standard

    2.0 (0.079)

    Wear limit

    1.8 (0.071)

    Clearance

    mm (in)

    Standard

    1.4 — 1.8 (0.055 — 0.071)

    Allowable limit

    band

    Outer gear

    2.8 (0.110)

    Thickness of retaining plate

    I Brake

    Thickness of inner gears
    and outer gears

    Thickness
    mm (in)

    Part number

    3.6 (0.142)

    31667-31X16

    3.8 (0.150)

    31667-31 X17

    4.0 (0.157)

    31667-31 X18

    4.2 (0.165)

    31667-31 X19

    4.4 (0.173)

    31667-31 X20

    4.6 (0.181)

    31667-31 X21

    3.9 — 5.9 (0.4 — 0.6, 35 — 52)

    Number of returning revolutions for anchor end bolt

    2.5:t:0.125

    Lock nut tightening torque
    N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    31 — 36 (3.2 — 3.7, 23 — 27)

    Part number

    9.99 — 10.00
    (0.3933 — 0.3937)

    31347-31 XOO

    9.98 — 9.99
    (0.3929 — 0.3933)

    31347-31 X01

    9.97 — 9.98
    (0.3925 — 0.3929)

    31347-31 X02

    Clearance between oil
    pump housing and outer
    gear
    mm (in)

    I

    Anchor end bolt tightening
    torque
    N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    Thickness
    mm (in)

    Standard

    0.08 — 0.15 (0.0031 — 0.0059)

    Allowable limit

    0.15 (0.0059)

    Oil pump cover seal ring
    clearance
    mm (in)
    Standard

    0.10 — 0.25 (0.0039 — 0.0098)

    Allowable limit

    0.25 (0.0098)

    Clutch and brake return springs
    Unit: mm (in)
    Return spring

    Free length

    Outer diameter

    Inner

    26.3 (1.035)

    7.7 (0.303)

    Outer

    26.6 (1.047)

    10.6 (0.417)

    Reverse clutch (16 pcs)

    18.6 (0.732)

    8.0 (0.315)

    High clutch (12 pcs)

    19.7 (0.776)

    11.1 (0.437)

    Low & reverse clutch (20 pcs)

    25.1 (0.988)

    7.6 (0.299)

    Forward clutch (Overrun clutch)
    (16 pcs)

    INPUT SHAFT
    Input shaft seal ring
    clearance
    mm (in)
    Standard

    0.08 — 0.23 (0.0031 — 0.0091)

    Allowable limit

    0.23 (0.0091)

    PLANETARY CARRIER
    Clearance between planetary
    carrier and pinion washer
    mm (in)
    Standard
    Allowable limit

    AT-18

    0.15 — 0.70 (0.0059 — 0.0276)
    0.80 (0.0315)

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
    Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
    Differential side bearing adjusting shims
    (Except model 34X81)

    FINAL DRIVE
    Differential side gear clearance
    Clearance between side gear and
    differential case with washer
    mm (in)

    0.1 — 0.2 (0.004 — 0.008)

    Differential side gear thrust washers
    (Model 36X04)
    Thickness mm (in)

    Part number

    0.75 — 0.80 (0.0295 — 0.0315)

    38424-31 XOO

    0.80 — 0.85 (0.0315 — 0.0335)

    38424-31 X01

    0.85 — 0.90 (0.0335 — 0.0354)

    38424-31 X02

    0.90 — 0.95 (0.0354 — 0.0374)

    38424-31 X03

    0.95 — 1.00 (0.0374 — 0.0394)

    38424-31 X04

    Part number

    0.75 — 0.80 (0.0295 — 0.0315)

    38424-02111

    0.80 — 0.85 (0.0315 — 0.0335)

    38424-02112

    0.85 — 0.90 (0.0335 — 0.0354)

    38424-02113

    0.90 — 0.95 (0.0354 — 0.0374)

    38424-02114

    0.95 — 1.00 (0.0374 — 0.0394)

    38424-02115

    Differential case end play (Except model
    34X81)
    Differential case end play
    mm (in)

    o — 0.15

    Part number

    0.48 (0.0189)

    38454-M800 1

    0.56 (0.0220)

    38454-M8003

    0.64 (0.0252)

    38454-M8005

    0.72 (0.0283)

    38454-M8007

    0.80 (0.0315)

    38454-M8009

    0.88 (0.0346)

    38454-M80 11

    0.96 (0.0378)

    38454-M80 13

    1.04 (0.0409)

    38454-M80 15

    Differential side bearing adjusting shims
    (Model 34X81)

    Differential side gear thrust washers
    (Except model 36X04)
    Thickness mm (in)

    Thickness mm (in)

    (0 — 0.0059)

    Thickness mm (in)

    Part number

    0.40 (0.0157)

    31499-21 X07

    0.44 (0.0173)

    31499-21 X08

    0.48 (0.0189)

    31499-21 X09

    0.52 (0.0205)

    31499-21 X1 0

    0.56 (0.0220)

    31499-21X11

    0.60 (0.0236)

    31499-21 X 12

    0.64 (0.0252)

    31499-21 X13

    0.68 (0.0268)

    31499-21 X14

    0.72 (0.0283)

    31499-21 X15

    0.76 (0.0299)

    31499-21 X16

    0.80 (0.0315)

    31499-21 X17

    0.84 (0.0331)

    31499-21 X 18

    0.88 (0.0346)

    31499-21 X19

    0.92 (0.0362)

    31499-21 X20

    1.44 (0.0567)

    31499-21 X21

    II

    Bearing preload (Model 34X81)
    Differential side bearing preload
    «T»
    mm (in)

    0.04 _ 0.09 (0.0016 — 0.0035)

    Turning torque (Model 34X81)
    Turning torque of final drive
    assembly
    N.m (kg-cm, in-Ib)

    ~ll

    0.49 _ 1.08 (5.0 — 11.0, 4.3 — 9.5)

    AT-19

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
    Table for selecting differential side bearing
    adjusting shim(s)

    Bearing preload (Model 34X81)

    Unit: mm (in)

    Reduction pinion gear bearing
    preload
    mm (in)

    0.05 (0.0020)

    Dial indicator deflection

    Suitable shim(s)

    0.31 — 0.35 (0.0122 — 0.0138)

    0.40 (0.0157)

    0.35 — 0.39 (0.0138 — 0.0154)

    0.44 (0.0173)

    0.39 — 0.43 (0.0154 — 0.0169)

    0.48 (0.0189)

    0.43 — 0.47 (0.0169 — 0.0185)

    0.52 (0.0205)

    Thickness mm (in)

    Part number

    0.47 — 0.51 (0.0185 — 0.0201)

    0.56 (0.0220)

    1.74 (0.0685)

    31438-31 X 16

    0.51 — 0.55 (0.0201 — 0.0217)

    0.60 (0.0236)

    1.78 (0.0701)

    31438-31 X17

    0.55 — 0.59 (0.0217 — 0.0232)

    0.64 (0.0252)

    1.82 (0.0717)

    31438-31 X18

    0.68 (0.0268)

    1.86 (0.0732)

    31438-31 X 19

    1.90 (0.0748)

    31438-31 X20

    1.92 (0.0756)

    31439-31 X60

    1.94 (0.0764)

    31438-31 X21

    0.59 — 0.63 (0.0232 — 0.0248)

    Reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting
    shims

    0.63 — 0.67 (0.0248 — 0.0264)

    0.72 (0.0283)

    0.67 — 0.71 (0.0264 — 0.0280)

    0.76 (0.0299)

    0.71 — 0.75 (0.0280 — 0.0295)

    0.80 (0.0315)

    1.96 (0.0772)

    31439-31 X61

    0.75 — 0.79 (0.0295 — 0.0311)

    0.84 (0.0331)

    1.98 (0.0780)

    31438-31 X22

    0.79 — 0.83 (0.0311 — 0.0327)

    0.88 (0.0346)

    2.00 (0.0787)

    31439-31 X62

    2.02 (0.0795)

    31438-31 X23

    0.83 — 0.87 (0.0327 — 0.0343)

    0.92 (0.0362)

    0.87 — 0.91 (0.0343 — 0.0358)

    0.48 (0.0189) + 0.48 (0.0189)

    2.04 (0.0803)

    31439-31 X63

    2.06 (0.0811)

    31438-31 X24

    0.91 — 0.95 (0.0358 — 0.0374)

    0.48 (0.0189) + 0.52 (0.0205)

    2.08 (0.0819)

    31439-31 X64

    0.95 — 0.99 (0.0374 — 0.0390)

    0.52 (0.0205) + 0.52 (0.0205)

    2.10 (0.0827)

    31438-31 X60

    0.99 — 1.03 (0.0390 — 0.0406)

    0.52 (0.0205) + 0.56 (0.0220)

    2.12 (0.0835)

    31439-31 X65

    0.56 (0.0220) + 0.56 (0.0220)

    2.14 (0.0843)

    31438-31 X61

    2.16 (0.0850)

    31439-31 X66

    2.18 (0.0858)

    31438-31 X62

    2.20 (0.0866)

    31439-31 X67

    1.03 — 1.07 (0.0406 — 0.0421)
    1.07 — 1.11 (0.0421 — 0.0437)

    0.56 (0.0220) + 0.60 (0.0236)

    1.11 — 1.15 (0.0437 — 0.0453)

    0.60 (0.0236) + 0.60 (0.0236)

    1.15 — 1.19 (0.0453 — 0.0469)

    0.60 (0.0236) + 0.64 (0.0252)

    2.22 (0.0874)

    31438-31 X63

    1.19 — 1.23 (0.0469 — 0.0484)

    0.64 (0.0252) + 0.64 (0.0252)

    2.24 (0.0882)

    31439-31 X68

    0.64 (0.0252) + 0.68 (0.0268)

    2.26 (0.0890)

    31438-31 X64

    1.23 — 1.27 (0.0484 — 0.0500)
    1.27 — 1.31 (0.0500 — 0.0516)

    0.68 (0.0268) + 0.68 (0.0268)

    2.28 (0.0898)

    31439-31 X69

    2.30 (0.0906)

    31438-31 X65

    1.31 — 1.35 (0.0516 — 0.0531)

    0.68 (0.0268) + 0.72 (0.0283)

    2.34 (0.0921)

    31438-31 X66

    1.35 — 1.39 (0.0531 — 0.0547)

    1.44 (0.0567)

    2.38 (0.0937)

    31438-31 X67

    1.39 — 1.43 (0.0547 — 0.0563)

    0.72 (0.0283) + 0.76 (0.0299)

    2.42 (0.0953)

    31438-31 X68

    0.76 (0.0299) + 0.76 (0.0299)

    2.46 (0.0969)

    31438-31 X69

    0.76 (0.0299) + 0.80 (0.0315)

    2.50 (0.0984)

    31438-31 X70

    2.54 (0.1000)

    31438-31 X71

    1.43 — 1.47 (0.0563 — 0.0579)
    1.47 — 1.51 (0.0579 — 0.0594)
    1.51 — 1.55 (0.0594 — 0.0610)

    0.80 (0.0315) + 0.80 (0.0315)

    1.55 — 1.59 (0.0610 — 0.0626)

    0.80 (0.0315) + 0.84 (0.0331)

    1.59 — 1.63 (0.0626 — 0.0642)

    0.84 (0.0331) + 0.84 (0.0331)

    1.63 — 1.67 (0.0642 — 0.0657)

    0.84 (0.0331) + 0.88 (0.0346)

    1.67 — 1.71 (0.0657 — 0.0673)

    0.88 (0.0346) + 0.88 (0.0346)

    1.71 — 1.75 (0.0673 — 0.0689)

    0.88 (0.0346) + 0.92 (0.0362)

    1.75 — 1.79 (0.0689 — 0.0705)

    0.92 (0.0362) + 0.92 (0.0362)

    1.79 — 1.83 (0.0705 — 0.0720)

    0.44 (0.0173) + 1.44 (0.0567)

    1.83 — 1.87 (0.0720 — 0.0736)

    0.48 (0.0189) + 1.44 (0.0567)

    1.87 — 1.91 (0.0736 — 0.0752)

    0.52 (0.0205) + 1.44 (0.0567)

    1.91 — 1.95 (0.0752 — 0.0768)

    0.56 (0.0220) + 1.44 (0.0567)

    REDUCTION GEAR
    Bearing preload (Model 34X11, 36X04,
    36X05, 36X07)
    Reduction pinion gear bearing
    preload
    N’m (kg-em, in-Ib)

    0.11 — 0.69 (1.1 — 7.0, 0.95 — 6.08)

    AT-20

    2.58 (0.1016)

    31438-31 X72

    2.62 (0.1031)

    31438-31 X73

    2.66 (0.1047)

    31438-31 X74

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
    Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
    Table for selecting reduction pinion gear
    bearing adjusting shim

    Bearing preload (Except model 34X81)

    Unit: mm (in)
    Dimension «T»

    Suitable shim(s)

    1.77 — 1.81 (0.0697 — 0.0713)

    1.74 (0.0685)

    Output shaft bearing preload.
    N’m (kg-em, In-Ib)

    0.25 _ 0.88 (2.5 — 9.0 2.2 — 7.8)
    ,

    Output shaft bearing adjusting spacers
    (Except model 34X81)

    1.81 — 1.85 (0.0713 — 0.0728)

    1.78 (0.0701)

    1.85 — 1.89 (0.0728 — 0.0744)

    1.82 (0.0717)

    1.89 — 1.93 (0.0744 — 0.0760)

    1.86 (0.0732)

    1.93 — 1.96 (0.0760 — 0.0772)

    1.90 (0.0748)

    1.96 — 1.98 (0.0772 — 0.0780)

    1.92 (0.0’756)

    6.30 (0.2480)

    31437-31 X17

    1.98 — 2.00 (0.0780 — 0.0787)

    1.94 (0.0764)

    6.34 (0.2496)

    31437-31 X18

    2.00 — 2.02 (0.0787 — 0.0795)

    1.96 (0.0772)

    6.38 (0.2512)

    31437-31 X19

    2.02 — 2.04 (0.0795 — 0.0803)

    1.98 (0.0780)

    6.42 (0.2528)

    31437-31 X20

    Thickness mm (in)

    Part number

    6.26 (0.2465)

    31437 -31 X 16

    2.04 — 2.06 (0.0803 — 0.0811)

    2.00 (0.0787)

    6.46 (0.2543)

    31437-31 X21

    2.06 — 2.08 (0.0811 — 0.0819)

    2.02 (0.0795)

    6.50 (0.2559)

    31437-31 X22

    2.08 — 2.10 (0.0819 — 0.0827)

    2.04 (0.0803)

    6.54 (0.2575)

    31437-31 X23

    2.10 — 2.12 (0.0827 — 0.0835)

    2.06 (0.0811)

    6.58 (0.2591)

    31437-31 X24

    2.12 — 2.14 (0.0835 — 0.0843)

    2.08 (0.0819)

    6.62 (0.2606)

    31437-31 X60

    6.64 (0.2614)

    31437-31 X78

    6.66 (0.2622)

    31437-31X61

    2.14 — 2.16 (0.0843 — 0.0850)

    2.10 (0.0827)

    2.16 — 2.18 (0.0850 — 0.0858)

    2.12 (0.0835)

    2.18 — 2.20 (0.0858 — 0.0866)

    2.14 (0.0843)

    6.68 (0.2630)

    31437-31 X79

    6.70 (0.2638)

    31437-31 X62

    2.20 — 2.22 (0.0866 — 0.0874)

    2.16 (0.0850)

    6.72 (0.2646)

    31437-31 X80

    2.22 — 2.24 (0.0874 — 0.0882)

    2.18 (0.0858)

    6.74 (0.2654)

    31437-31X63

    2.24 — 2.26 (0.0882 — 0.0890)

    2.20 (0.0866)

    6.76 (0.2661)

    31437-31X81

    2.26 — 2.28 (0.0890 — 0.0898)

    2.22 (0.0874)

    6.78 (0.2669)

    31437-31X64

    2.28 — 2.30 (0.0898 — 0.0906)

    2.24 (0.0882)

    6.80 (0.2677)

    31437-31X82

    2.30 — 2.32 (0.0906 — 0.0913)

    2.26 (0.0890)

    6.82 (0.2685)

    31437-31 X65

    2.28 (0.0898)

    6.84 (0.2693)

    31437-31 X83

    6.86 (0.2701)

    31437-31 X66

    6.88 (0.2709)

    31437-31 X84

    6.90 (0.2717)

    31437-31X67

    2.32 — 2.34 (0.0913 — 0.0921)
    2.34 — 2.37 (0.0921 — 0.0933)
    2.37 — 2.41 (0.0933 — 0.0949)

    2.30 (0.0906)
    2.34 (0.0921)

    2.41 — 2.45 (0.0949 — 0.0965)

    2.38 (0.0937)

    2.45 — 2.49 (0.0965 — 0.0980)

    2.42 (0.0953)

    2.49 — 2.53 (0.0980 — 0.0996)

    2.46 (0.0969)

    2.53 — 2.57 (0.0996 — 0.1012)

    2.50 (0.0984)

    2.57 — 2.61 (0.1012 — 0.1028)

    6.92 (0.2724)

    31437-31 X46

    6.94 (0.2732)

    31437-31X68

    6.96 (0.2740)

    31437-31 X47

    6.98 (0.2748)

    31437-31X69

    2.54 (0.1000)

    7.00 (0.2756)

    31437-31 X48

    2.61 — 2.65 (0.1028 — 0.1043)

    2.58 (0.1016)

    7.02 (0.2764)

    31437-31X70

    2.65 — 2.69 (0.1043 — 0.1059)

    2.62 (0.1031)

    7.06 (0.2780)

    31437-31X71

    2.66 (0.1047)

    7.10 (0.2795)

    31437-31 X72

    7.14 (0.2811)

    31437-31X73

    2.69 — 2.73 (0.1059 — 0.1075)

    OUTPUT SHAFT
    Seal ring clearance
    Output shaft seal ring clearance
    mm (in)
    0.10 — 0.25 (0.0039 — 0.0098)

    Standard

    0.25 (0.0098)

    Allowable limit

    End play (Model 34X81)
    Output shaft end play

    mm (in)

    o — 0.5

    (0 — 0.020)

    AT-21

    7.18 (0.2827)

    31437-31X74

    7.22 (0.2843)

    31437-31 X75

    II

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
    Table for selecting output shaft bearing
    adjusting spacer

    BEARING RETAINER

    Unit: mm (in)
    Dimension ‘IT»

    Suitable spacer

    6.29 — 6.33 (0.2476 — 0.2492)

    6.26 (0.2465)

    6.33 — 6.37 (0.2492 — 0.2508)

    6.30 (0.2480)

    6.37 — 6.41 (0.2508 — 0.2524)

    6.34 (0.2496)

    6.41 — 6.45 (0.2524 — 0.2539)

    6.38 (0.2512)

    6.45 — 6.49 (0.2539 — 0.2555)

    6.42 (0.2528)

    6.49 — 6.53 (0.2555 — 0.2571)

    6.46 (0.2543)

    6.53 — 6.57 (0.2571 — 0.2587)

    6.50 (0.2559)

    6.57 — 6.61 (0.2587 — 0.2602)

    6.54 (0.2575)

    6.61 — 6.65 (0.2602 — 0.2618)

    6.58 (0.2591)

    6.65 — 6.68 (0.2618 — 0.2630)

    6.62 (0.2606)

    6.68 — 6.70 (0.2630 — 0.2638)

    6.64 (0.2614)

    6.70 — 6.72 (0.2638 — 0.2646)

    6.66 (0.2622)

    6.72 — 6.74 (0.2646 — 0.2654)

    Seal ring clearance
    Bearing retainer seal ring clearance
    mm (in)
    0.10 — 0.25 (0.0039 — 0.0098)

    Standard

    0.25 (0.0098)

    Allowable limit

    TOTAL END PLAY
    Total end play

    mm (in)

    0.25 — 0.55 (0.0098 — 0.0217)

    Bearing races for adjusting total end play
    Thickness mm (in)

    Part number

    0.6 (0.024)

    31435-31 X01

    0.8 (0.031)

    31435-31 X02

    6.68 (0.2630)

    1.0 (0.039)

    31435-31 X03

    6.74 — 6.76 (0.2654 — 0.2661)

    6.70 (0.2638)

    1.2 (0.047)

    31435-31 X04

    6.76 — 6.78 (0.2661 — 0.2669)

    6.72 (0.2646)

    1.4 (0.055)

    31435-31 X05

    6.78 — 6.80 (0.2669 — 0.2677)

    6.74 (0.2654)

    1.6 (0.063)

    31435-31 X06

    1.8 (0.071)

    31435-31X07

    2.0 (0.079)

    31435-31 X08

    6.80 — 6.82 (0.2677 — 0.2685)

    6.76 (0.2661)

    6.82 — 6.84 (0.2685 — 0.2693)

    6.78 (0.2669)

    6.84 — 6.86 (0.2693 — 0.2701)

    6.80 (0.2677)

    6.86 — 6.88 (0.2701 — 0.2709)

    6.82 (0.2685)

    6.88 — 6.90 (0.2709 — 0.2717)

    6.84 (0.2693)

    6.90 — 6.92 (0.2717 — 0.2724)

    6.86 (0.2701)

    6.92 — 6.94 (0.2724 — 0.2732)

    6.88 (0.2709)

    6.94 — 6.96 (0.2732 — 0.2740)

    6.90 (0.2717)

    6.96 — 6.98 (0.2740 — 0.2748)

    6.92 (0.2724)

    6.98 — 7.00 (0.2748 — 0.2756)

    6.94 (0.2732)

    7.00 — 7.02 (0.2756 — 0.2764)

    6.96 (0.2740)

    Thickness mm (in)

    REVERSE CLUTCH END PLAY
    Reverse clutch end play
    mm (in)

    0.65 — 1.00 (0.0256 — 0.0394)

    Thrust washers for adjusting reverse
    clutch end play
    Part number

    7.02 — 7.04 (0.2764 — 0.2772)

    6.98 (0.2748)

    0.65 (0.0256)

    31508-31 XOO

    7.04 — 7.06 (0.2772 — 0.2780)

    7.00 (0.2756)

    0.80 (0.0315)

    31508-31 X01

    7.06 — 7.09 (0.2780 — 0.2791)

    7.02 (0.2764)

    0.95 (0.0374)

    31508-31 X02

    7.09 — 7.13 (0.2791 — 0.2807)

    7.06 (0.2780)

    1.10 (0.0433)

    31508-31 X03

    7.13 — 7.17 (0.2807 — 0.2823)

    7.10 (0.2795)

    7.17 — 7.21 (0.2823 — 0.2839)

    7.14 (0.2811)

    7.21 — 7.25 (0.2839 — 0.2854)

    7.18 (0.2827)

    7.25 — 7.29 (0.2854 — 0.2870)

    7.22 (0.2843)

    1.25 (0.0492)

    31508-31 X04

    1.40 (0.0551)

    31508-31 X05

    ACCUMULATOR
    O-ring
    Unit: mm (in)
    Inner diameter
    (Small)

    Inner diameter
    (Large)

    SIR accumulator

    26.9 (1.059)

    44.2 (1.740)

    N-D accumulator

    34.6 (1.362)

    39.4 (1.551)

    Accumulator

    AT-22

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Specifications and Adjustments (Cont’d)
    Return spring
    Unit: mm (in)
    Free length

    Outer diameter

    SIR accumulator spring

    56.4 (2.220)

    21.0 (0.827)

    N-D accumulator

    43.5 (1.713)

    28.0 (1.102)

    Accumulator

    spring

    BAND SERVO
    Return spring
    Unit: mm (in)
    Return spring

    Free length

    Outer diameter

    2nd servo return spring

    32.5 (1.280)

    25.9 (1.020)

    00 servo return spring

    31.0 (1.220)

    21.7 (0.854)

    REMOVAL AND INSTAllATION
    Unit: mm (in)

    Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter

    Except model 34X81
    21.1 (0.831) or more

    II

    Model 34X81
    15.9 (0.626) or more

    [J[Q)~<

    AT-23

    BRAKE SYSTEM

    @j~

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION NOTICE:
    • The master cylinder has been changed for models with ASS.
    • The components of CL22VB front disc brake models and LT20S rear drum brake models have been introduced.
    • The anti-lock brake system has been changed.
    • The service data and specifications (SOS) have been changed.

    ~t
    [?~

    CONTENTS
    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    MASTER CYLINDER
    Removal
    Disassembly
    Inspection
    Assembly
    Installation
    FRONT DISC BRAKE
    REAR DRUM BRAKE
    PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
    ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
    Purpose
    Operation
    ABS Hydraulic Circuit
    System Components
    System Description
    Removal and Installation
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
    and Accurate Repair
    Preliminary Check
    Component Parts and Harness Connector
    Location
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — ABS Self -diag nosis

    2
    2
    3
    3
    3
    4
    4
    5

    6
    7
    8
    9
    9
    9
    9
    10
    10
    12
    17
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    28

    CO N S U LT
    CONSULT Inspection
    Ground Circuit Check
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    ITEM
    Diagnostic Procedure
    valve)
    Diagnostic Procedure

    Procedure

    ~[Tr

    38

    ~IA

    38
    40

    ~~

    45
    47
    47
    48

    : •

    FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
    1 (ABS actuator solenoid
    2 (Wheel sensor or rotor)

    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Motor relay or motor)
    Diagnostic Procedure 4 (Solenoid valve relay)
    Diagnostic Procedure 5 (Low voltage)
    Diagnostic Procedure 6 (Control unit)
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOM
    Diagnostic Procedure 7 (Warning lamp does not
    come on.)
    Diagnostic Procedure 8 (Warning lamp stays on.)
    Diagnostic Procedure 9 (Pedal vibration and
    noise)
    Diagnostic Procedure 10 (Long stopping
    distance)
    Diagnostic Procedure 11 (Unexpected pedal
    action)
    Diagnostic Procedure 12 (ABS does not work.)
    Diagnostic Procedure 13 (ABS works frequently.)
    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
    General Specifications
    Inspection and Adjustment

    BR-1

    31
    32
    37

    42II
    ~lr

    48
    50

    1Rl~

    53

    ~U

    54
    [}-{]~
    54
    55
    55
    56
    56
    58

    ~[L

    mQ)A

    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    The Supplemental Restraint System such as «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (Mechanically
    activated type)» used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
    passenger for certain types of collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL
    N15 is as follows (The composition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):

    For a frontal collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
    pre-tensioners (Mechanically activated type), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and
    spiral cable.

    For a side collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
    seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (which is one of components of air bags for a frontal collision),
    wiring harness, warning lamp (which is one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
    Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.

    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
    Bag Module, see the RS section.
    • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation either just before
    the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.

    BR-2

    MASTER CYLINDER
    SEC. 460
    Models with ASS

    @3~

    [KvA]~
    ~[M]

    ~~

    ~~

    ~~

    ~~

    [KvA]u
    ~u
    SBR230E

    G)
    @
    @

    Reservoir cap
    Oil filter
    Reservoir tank

    @

    Seal

    CID
    @
    (/)

    Cylinder body
    Spring pin
    Stopper pin

    @
    @

    Secondary piston assembly
    Primary piston assembly

    @

    Stopper cap

    Removal
    CAUTION:
    Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may
    cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted
    areas, wash it away with water immediately.
    1. Connect a vinyl tube to air bleeder valve.
    2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve, depressing brake
    pedal to empty fluid from master cylinder.
    3. Remove brake pipe flare nuts.
    4. Remove master cylinder mounting nuts.

    Disassembly
    1. Bend claws of stopper cap outward and remove stopper cap.

    BR-3

    ~~

    ~u
    ~~

    ~u
    ~~

    MASTER CYLINDER
    Disassembly (Cont’d)
    2.
    3.

    Drive out spring pin from cylinder body.
    Draw out reservoir tank and seals.

    SBR231E

    4. Remove stopper pin while piston is pushed into cylinder.
    5. Remove piston assemblies.
    If it is difficult to remove secondary piston assembly, gradually apply compressed air through fluid outlet.

    Inspection
    Stopper

    pin

    SBR232E
    Secondary

    Check for the following items.
    Replace any part if damaged.
    Master cylinder:
    • Pin holes or scratches on inner wall.
    Piston:
    • Deformation of or scratches on piston cups.

    piston

    Assembly

    Primary

    1. Insert secondary piston assembly. Then insert primary piston
    assembly.
    • Pay attention to alignment of secondary piston slit with
    valve stopper mounting hole of cylinder body.

    piston

    SBR233E

    2.
    3.
    4.

    Stopper

    Install stopper pin while piston is pushed into cylinder.
    Push reservoir tank seals and reservoir tank into cylinder body.
    Install spring pin.

    pin

    SBR232E

    5. Install stopper cap.
    Before installing stopper cap, ensure that claws are bent
    inward.

    SBR235E

    BR-4

    MASTER CYLINDER

    Installation
    CAUTION:
    • Refill with new brake fluid «DOT 3» or «DOT4».
    • Never reuse drained brake fluid.
    • Do not mix different types of brake fluids (DOT3, DOT4).
    1. Place master cylinder onto brake booster and secure mounting
    nuts lightly.
    2. Torque mounting nuts.

    ~:
    SBR236E

    12 — 15 N’m (1.2 — 1.5 kg-m, 9 — 11 ft-Ib)

    3.
    4.

    Fill up reservoir tank with new brake fluid.
    Plug all ports on master cylinder with fingers to prevent air
    suction while releasing brake pedal.
    5. Have driver depress brake pedal slowly several times until no
    air comes out of master cylinder.
    6. Fit brake lines to master cylinder.
    7. Tighten flare nuts.

    ~:
    8.

    15 — 18 N’m (1.5 — 1.8 kg-m, 11 — 13 ft-Ib)

    Bleecl air from brake system. Refer to «Bleeding Procedure»,
    «AIR BLEEDING».

    BR-5

    [L(Q;
    ~(Q;

    FRONT DISC BRAKE

    —:’7″-

    hub J

    rd9~

    .

    models

    ‘::=-0.

    .._~~~ ..

    (i) .~
    rotor
    Wheel

    Press

    ~~’

    l

    Pay attention to the dimension of rear sensor rotor as shown
    in figure.
    h: Rear disc brake models
    4.5 — 5.5 mm (0.177 — 0.217 in)
    Rear drum brake nl0dels
    22 — 23 mm (0.87 — 0.91 in)

    — ~~e_h

    ~

    Sensor

    rotor’L.
    Wheel hub

    SBR031E

    CONTROL UNIT
    Bracket~ABS

    control

    ~~

    ‘~»‘~’W
    -1 ~ ~

    Dash side ~
    lower finisher

    -‘

    ~~

    unit

    Location: Front passenger side dash side lower.
    • Make sure that the sensor shield ground cable is secured
    with mounting bolt.

    3.9 — 5.9 Nom
    (0.4 — 0.6 kg-m,
    35 — 52 in-Ib)
    SBR032DC

    BR-14

    ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
    Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
    ABS ACTUATOR
    RHO

    Actuator
    ground cable

    ASS relay box

    to.J

    11 — 15
    (1.1 — 1.5, 8 — 11)
    To rear wheel
    cylinder (LH)

    Front

    to.J

    22 — 28
    : (2.2 — 2.9, 16 — 21)

    Actuator

    bracket

    To rear wheel
    cylinder (RH)

    to.J : N. m

    (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    Ii] : N.m

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    r?/A

    SBR153EA

    LHO

    II

    From master cylinder
    secondary side

    To rear wheel
    cylinder (RH)

    to.J

    22 — 28
    Actuator

    (2.2 — 2.9, 16 — 21) «»

    Front

    to.J

    bracket

    11 — 15
    (1.1 — 1.5, 8 — 11)

    To rear wheel
    cylinder (LH)

    to.J :

    N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)
    SBR289E

    BR-15

    ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
    Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
    Removal
    1. Disconnect battery cable.
    2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to «Changing Brake Fluid», «CHECK
    AND ADJUSTMENT».
    3. Discharge air conditioner refrigerant. Refer to HA section
    [«HFC-134a
    (R-134a)
    Service
    Procedure»,
    «SERVICE
    PROCEDURES»].
    4. Disconnect all connectors from ASS relay unit.

    SBR290E

    5.
    6.

    Remove ABS relay box with bracket.
    Remove air conditioner low-pressure tubes. Refer to HA section
    («Refrigerant Lines», «SERVICE PROCEDURES»).
    7. Disconnect and separate brake line and move away control
    actuator.
    It is not necessary to remove these lines from vehicle.
    8. Remove ABS actuator.

    SBR291E

    Installation
    CAUTION:
    After installation, pay attention to the following points.
    • Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to «CHECK AND
    ADJUSTMENT» and «AIR BLEEDING».
    • Charge air conditioner refrigerant. Refer to HA section
    [«HFC-134a
    (R-134a) Service
    Procedure»,
    «SERVICE
    PROCEDURES»].
    • Installation procedure is basically the reverse order of removal.

    —==

    Motor relay

    r

    ABS RELAYS
    Removal and installation
    1. Disconnect battery cable.
    2. Remove ABS relay cover.

    SBR041D

    BR-16

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
    and Accurate Repair

    @~

    INTRODUCTION

    SEF234G

    The ABS system has an electronic control unit to control major
    functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and
    instantly drives the actuators. It is essential that both kinds of signals are proper and stable. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in booster lines, lack of brake
    fluid, or other problems with the brake system.
    It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
    caused by poor electric connections or faulty wiring. In this case,
    careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the
    replacement of good parts.
    A visual check may not find the cause of the problems, so a road
    test should be performed too.
    Before performing actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
    customer who approaches with an ABS complaint. The customer is
    a very good source of information; especially for intermittent problems. By talking to the customer, find out what symptoms are
    present and under what conditions they occur.
    Start your diagnosis by looking for «conventional» problems first.
    This is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an
    ASS controlled vehicle.

    [~&
    ~~

    [t~
    [~~

    ~J~

    ~~J

    [Milt

    IFIA

    II

    BR-17

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    «MAX» level

    Preliminary Check

    m
    Check brake fluid level in reservoir
    tank.
    Low fluid level may indicate brake pad
    wear or leakage from brake line.

    SBR225E

    ,

    Ii]

    Check brake line for leakage.

    NG

    Repair.

    NG

    Replace.

    NG

    Replace.

    NG

    Fill up brake fluid.

    NG

    Check fuse, warning lamp
    bulb and warning lamp cir-

    OK
    ~
    Check brake booster for operation and air
    tightness.

    OK

    SBR389C

    Check brake pads and rotor.

    OK

    m
    Check brake fluid level in reservoir tank.

    OK

    00
    Check warning lamp activation.
    When ignition switch is turned on, warning

    cuit.

    lamp turns on.
    SBR058C

    OK
    Check warning lamp for deactivation.
    When ignition switch is turned on, warning

    NG

    Go to Self-diagnosis,
    BR-28.

    NG

    Go to Self-diagnosis,

    lamp turns on, then deactivates after one
    second.

    OK

    Ii
    Drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at
    SBR049DA

    least one minute.

    Ii -Ensure that warning lamp remains off
    while driving.

    OK
    END

    SBR336C

    BR-18

    BR-28.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Component Parts and Harness Connector
    Location

    @~

    RHO models

    ~~
    Dual proportioning
    valve

    DABS

    IIABS

    ~[K{1]

    131 Rear wheel sensors
    IiRear right wheel

    warning lamp ){

    sensor connector

    relay box

    [i1Rear

    left wheel
    sensor connector

    Brake master cylinder
    /

    m

    <.’., ….

    Front wheel sensors

    Ii] Front

    right wheel sensor connector

    [i Front

    left wheel sensor connector
    *

    For LHD models. control unit
    is located on the opposite side.

    II

    SBR047DA

    BR-19

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Schematic

    >-

    W>«
    .-J_L.J

    ~o«w

    @J(f»a:

    @

    IT

    o

    =:l
    fU

    LL

    ,……..

    ru

    ,……..
    («Y1

    ~

    a

    (T»)
    («Y1

    («Y1

    ~

    LO
    CJ

    1!1

    LD

    ~

    LD
    CJ

    LO

    (‘Y»)

    R3

    RJ

    01

    Cl1

    <.D

    .-J
    0

    a:
    f-ftnZH
    CDOZ

    ~

    (])

    ~ ~

    ~

    to
    -.:::t

    ~

    (J)

    ~

    ~

    a:>

    («Y1

    ~

    ~

    (‘Y»)

    Cl.
    :L

    a:
    W
    ff«

    W

    en

    =>
    LL

    rn

    ~a:::>

    .-J

    ZOc.n
    Hf-Z
    ..JUO
    WU
    <{Z
    f-Za:
    <{DO

    co

    DULL
    ,……..

    I

    0

    C’l

    fH

    3..-

    UH[
    «
    Z..-

    oen

    H
    f-L
    HO

    W

    W
    W

    =>
    LL

    tn

    en

    Q..

    I

    a:

    II
    .-JO»W(f)Z
    WZO
    IWa:
    3(f)LL

    0
    W
    W
    Cl.

    (J)

    I
    -.J

    a:
    .-JOfW(f)Z
    WZO
    IWa:
    ~(f)LL

    0
    W
    W
    0..
    (f) I
    II II
    .-JO
    W(f)a:
    WZ

    II

    To BR-ABS-07

    I

    GY

    LIB

    14″a I

    rrh

    13.01

    STOP

    IGN
    SW

    FAIL
    LAMP

    LAMP

    LIB

    SW

    ASS
    CONTROL

    UNIT

    o

    r————————————,

    ~~

    L1J.gj

    B

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    fQ.

    Refe~ to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    @

    ‘-1-12-13—4 !ill*D-7—la—,g-‘1-01W

    ~————————————~

    E~~
    J81910111
    5 6

    W

    HBR061

    BR-21

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram — ABS —

    (Cont’d)

    BR-ABS-02
    ABS

    FUSE

    Refer to

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    EL-POWER.

    CONTROL
    UNIT
    DIAG

    L

    ~

    ~

    TXD
    1~61

    RXD
    ~

    ORIB ~

    GYIL

    GIB

    ORIB ~

    GYIL

    GIB

    ‘(8)
    ,

    6
    3

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    OR

    /
    ‘»

    ~~

    /’
    ,~-.

    ~~~
    5 ‘61819101112

    W

    HBR062

    BR-22

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram — ABS —

    (Cont’d)

    RHD MODELS

    BR-ABS-03
    A8S

    CONTROL
    SENSOR

    UNIT

    FR-RH

    ([ill)

    (-)

    GND2

    GND1

    GND

    12.8112.9113.91

    ~

    t

    8

    I

    ~t

    888

    ~.

    o

    ~~

    R

    R

    ),

    I
    1

    1
    1
    1

    I
    I

    I»,

    ~
    .-.

    _ …. —

    : RHO models

    I

    I

    ~

    G~~t~

    w CHID

    I»,

    ~lr

    — •

    I
    I
    I

    GY

    Refer to last page
    (Faldaut page) .

    ~@!QID

    lIIIIIIITillJ

    GY

    HBR004

    BR-23

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Wiring Diagram — ABS —

    (Cont’d)

    LHD MODELS

    BR-ABS-04
    ASS

    CONTROL

    UNIT

    SENSOR

    FR-LH
    (-)
    ~

    ~

    t
    I

    L

    o

    <:c:,

    ~~I

    (~

    CHECK WHEEL SENSOR.

    ~~

    OiF’D ‘
    ——

    SBR049DA

    1. Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connection.
    2. Perform wheel sensor mechanical
    check.
    Refer to (;] in Diagnostic Procedure 2,
    SR-41.
    OK
    Check control unit pin terminals for damage or the connection of control unit harness connector.
    Reconnect control unit harness connector.
    Then retest.

    BR-54

    NG

    Repair.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOM
    Diagnostic Procedure 12 (ABS does not work.)
    Does the ABS warning lamp activate?

    Yes

    Carry out Self-diagnosis.
    Refer to BR-28.

    No
    Go to
    BR-54.

    Ii1

    in Diagnostic Procedure 11,

    Note: ASS does not work when vehicle speed is under 10 km/h
    (6 MPH).

    Diagnostic Procedure 13 (ABS works
    frequently.)
    CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE.

    NG

    Perform Preliminary
    Check, BR-18.

    NG

    Repair.

    Check brake fluid pressure distribution.
    Refer to proportioning valve inspection.
    OK
    CHECK WHEEL SENSOR.
    1. Check wheel sensor connector for terminal damage or loose connections.
    2. Perform wheel sensor mechanical
    check.
    Refer to
    in Diagnostic Procedure 2,
    BR-41.

    II

    Ii1

    OK
    Check front and rear axles for excessive
    looseness. Refer to FA section («Front
    Wheel Bearing», «ON-VEHICLE
    SERVICE») and RA section («Rear Wheel
    Bearing», «ON-VEHICLE SERVICE»).
    OK
    Check control unit pin terminals for damage or the connection of control unit harness connector.
    Reconnect control unit harness connector.
    Then retest.

    BR-55

    NG

    Repair.

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    General Specifications
    BRAKE UNIT (Europe)
    With ABS

    Without ABS
    CD20E
    GA16DE

    Applied model

    GA14DE
    LHD

    RHD

    GA 14DE, GA 16DE,
    CD20E

    SR20DE

    Option

    Standard

    CL22VB

    AD22VF

    Standard
    Front brake
    CL22VE

    CL22VB

    Brake model
    Cylinder bore diameter

    54.0 (2.126)

    mm (in)
    mm (in)
    Pad
    length x width x thickness

    Rotor outer diameter x thickness
    mm (in)

    112.8 x 44.8 x
    10.0
    (4.44 x 1.764 x
    0.394)

    106 x 39.5 x 11.0 (4.17 x 1.555 x 0.433)

    112.8 x 44.8 x 10.0
    (4.44 x 1.764 x
    0.394)

    106.8 x 43.8 x
    10.0
    (4.20 x 1.724 x
    0.394)

    252 x 20
    (9.92 x 0.79)

    247 x 18
    (9.72 x 0.71)

    252 x 20
    (9.92 x 0.79)

    257 x 26
    (10.12 x 1.02)

    Rear brake
    LT18C

    CL9HC

    15.87 (5/8)

    33.96 (1-3/8)

    mm (in)
    Lining or pad
    length x width x thickness

    172.8x30x4
    (6.80 x 1.18 x 0.16)

    89.1 x 39.5 x 10.0
    (3.508 x 1.555 x 0.394)

    Drum inner diameter or rotor
    outer diameter x thickness
    mm (in)

    180 (7.09)

    258 x 9.0
    (10.16 x 0.354)

    22.2 (7/8)

    23.8 (15/16)

    Brake model
    Cylinder bore diameter
    mm (in)

    Master cylinder
    Cylinder bore diameter
    mm (in)
    Control valve
    Dual proportioning valve built into master cylinder

    Valve model

    Dual proportioning

    valve separated from master cylinder

    2

    Split point [kPa (bar, kg/cm
    psi)] x reducing ratio

    ,

    3,923 (39.2, 40, 569) x 0.4

    Brake booster
    M195T

    Booster model

    Primary: 205 (8.07)
    Secondary: 180 (7.09)

    Diaphragm diameter
    mm (in)
    Recommended

    brake fluid

    DOT 3 or DOT 4
    Never mix different type fluids (DOT3 and DOT4).

    BR.56

    1,961
    (19.6,20,284)
    0.2

    x

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
    General Specifications (Cont’d)
    BRAKE UNIT (Except for Europe)
    Except for
    Australia

    Australia

    Except for
    Australia

    Australia

    Without ABS

    Applied model

    With ABS

    GA 15DE, GA 16DE

    GA16DE

    GA 15DE, GA 16DE

    GA16DE

    SR20DE

    Standard

    Standard

    Option

    Option

    Standard

    CL22VD

    CL22VE

    CL22VD

    CL22VE

    AD22VF

    Front brake
    Brake model
    Cylinder bore diameter

    54.0 (2.126)

    mm (in)
    Pad
    length x width x thickness
    mm (in)
    Rotor outer diameter x thickness
    mm (in)

    106 x 39.5 x 11.0
    (4.17 x 1.555 x 0.433)
    247 x 18
    (9.72 x 0.71)

    106 x 39.5 x 11.0
    (4.17 x 1.555 x 0.433)

    106.8 x 43.8 x 10.0
    (4.20 x 1.724 x
    0.394)

    232 x 18
    (9.13 x 0.71)

    247 x 18
    (9.72 x 0.71)

    257 x 26
    (10.12 x 1.02)

    LT18C

    LT20B

    CL7HB

    CL9HC

    15.87 (5/8)

    15.87 (5/8)

    30.23 (1-1/4)

    33.96 (1-3/8)

    172.8x30x4
    (6.80 x 1.18 x 0.16)

    195x35x4.5
    (7.68 x 1.38 x
    0.177)

    94 x 29 x 10
    (3.70 x 1.14 x 0.39)

    89.1 x 39.5 x 10.0
    (3.508 x 1.555 x
    0.394)

    180 (7.09)

    203
    (7.99)

    234 x 7
    (9.21 x 0.28)

    258 x 9.0
    (10.16 x 0.354)

    22.2 (7/8)

    22.2 (7/8)

    23.8 (15/16)

    232 x 18
    (9.13 x 0.71)

    Rear brake
    Brake model
    Cylinder bore diameter
    mm (in)
    Lining or pad
    length x width x thickness
    mm (in)
    Drum inner diameter or rotor outer
    diameter x thickness
    mm (in)
    Master cylinder
    20.6 (13/16)
    Cylinder bore diameter

    22.2 (7/8)

    mm (in)

    Control valve

    Dual proportioning valve built into master
    cylinder

    Valve model
    Split point [kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)] x
    reducing ratio

    3,923
    (39.2,40, 569) x
    0.4

    3,923
    (39.2, 40, 569) x
    0.4

    Dual proportioning valve separated from master cylinder
    3,923
    (39.2, 40, 569) x
    0.4

    3,923
    (39.2, 40, 569) x
    0.4

    Brake booster
    S205 or C205

    M195T

    205 (8.07)

    Primary: 205 (8.07)
    Secondary: 180 (7.09)

    Booster model
    Diaphragm diameter
    mm (in)
    Recommended

    DOT 3

    brake fluid

    BR.57

    1,961
    (19.6, 20, 284) x
    0.2

    II

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Inspection and Adjustment
    DRUM BRAKE

    DISC BRAKE

    Unit: mm (in)

    Unit: mm (in)
    Front

    Rear

    Rear
    Brake model

    Brake model
    CL22VB

    CL22VD,
    CL22VE

    AD22VF

    CL7HB

    Lining wear limit

    Pad wear limit

    Minimum thickness

    Minimum thickness

    2.0 (0.079)

    1.5 (0.059)

    1.5 (0.059)

    Drum repair limit
    Maximum inner diameter

    Rotor repair limit
    Minimum thickness

    18.0
    (0.709)

    LT20B

    LT18C

    CL9HC

    16.0
    (0.630)

    24.0
    (0.945)

    Maximum
    runout

    0.07 (0.0028)

    Maximum
    thickness
    variation

    0.02 (0.0008)

    Out-of-round

    8.0
    (0.315)

    6.0
    (0.236)

    181 (7.13)

    204.5 (8.05)

    0.03 (0.0012) or less

    BRAKE PEDAL
    Unit: mm (in)
    RHO

    LHD

    M/T

    155.0 — 165.0 (6.10 — 6.50)

    148.0 — 158.0 (5.83 — 6.22)

    AlT

    164.0 — 174.0 (6.46 — 6.85)

    157.0 — 167.0 (6.18 — 6.57)

    Applied model
    Free height

    Depressed height
    Mil: 75 (2.95) or more
    AIT: 85 (3.35) or more

    [under force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 Ib) with
    engine running]
    Clearance between switches and pedal stopper
    bracket

    0.3 — 1.0 (0.012 — 0.039)

    PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
    Brake type

    Drum

    Control type

    Disc
    Center lever

    Number of notches
    [under force of 196 N
    (20 kg, 44 Ib)]
    Number of notches when
    warning switch comes on

    7-8

    8-9

    1 or less

    BR-58

    BODY & TRIM

    @~

    5
    5
    9
    9
    10

    Ik.lr

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION NOTICE:



    The door trim has been changed.
    The front and rear doors have been changed.
    A front seat with side air bag has been added.
    A rear seat with 3-point center seat belt has been added.

    CONTENTS
    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    DOOR
    Front Door
    Rear Door
    0.0

    0

    •••••••••••••••

    0

    •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

    0

    *

    ••••••••••••••••••

    •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

    2

    0 ••••

    0 •••••••••

    2
    3
    3
    4

    INTERIOR TRIM
    Door Trim
    SEAT
    Front Seat
    Rear Seat

    0

    •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

    0

    •••••••••••••••••••••••••

    0

    •••••••••••••••••••••••

    For wiring diagrams of body electrical systems, refer to EL section.

    II

    BT-1

    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    The Supplemental Restraint System such as «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (Mechanically
    activated type)» used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
    passenger for certain types of collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL
    N15 is as follows (The composition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):

    For a frontal collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
    pre-tensioners (Mechanically activated type), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and
    spiral cable.

    For a side collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
    seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (which is one of components of air bags for a frontal collision),
    wiring harness, warning lamp (which is one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
    Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.

    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
    Bag Module, see the RS section.
    • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation either just before
    the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.

    BT-2

    DOOR

    Front Door

    *

    For removal of door trim, refer to «Door Trim» in «INTERIOR TRIM» for details, BT-5.
    After adjusting door or door lock, check door lock operation.

    For details of Super Lock System, refer to «POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock -»

    @~

    in EL section.

    ~~

    SEC. 800-803-805

    m

    I

    I
    Door lock actuator assembly
    (RHO 3-door hatchback only)
    Striker
    adjustment

    Outside
    handle
    escutcheon

    ~ROd
    «) __
    /~;~

    ~~::’

    _t _

    II

    ~HOlder

    ~

    0.5 — 2.4 mm
    (0.020 — 0.094 in)
    Release

    lever

    ~

    : N.m

    (j] : N.m

    (kg-m, ft-Ib)
    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    SBT244-A

    BT.3

    DOOR

    Rear Door
    SEC. 820-823-825

    Inside handle installation

    ~~5.1

    — 6.5
    (0.52 — 0.66,
    45.1 — 57.3)

    ~

    Door-hinge

    adjustment

    a

    Locking sealant

    ~~-~~
    /
    —?

    .’

    ./
    ~ ~~

    0

    «‘—

    ~

    I

    I!i3!I

    !I!i3!I
    — ftt’J
    » 13 • 16 (1.3 — 1.6, 9 — 12)

    1

    -~~

    ~~

    a

    Door-hinge

    5.2 — 7.0 (0.53

    — 0.71,

    46.0

    ~~
    I!i3!I ,-

    ———= ~~::::::~:::l»~~

    I!i3!I —~ ~—~

    ;-1-

    4.3 — 5.9
    (0.44. 0.60, 38.2 • 52.1)

    ~~»
    0

    «—

    ~

    lJ ~

    C’

    ~

    ~’

    .~_==::’-J

    I!i3!I

    /tt’J 21 — 28 (2.1 — 2.9, 15 — 21)

    5.2 • 7.0 (0.53 — 0.71, 46.0 — 61.6)

    Door glass adjustment
    _ Adjust guide rail mounting

    — 61.6)

    position

    by rotating

    it.

    adjustment
    Outside handle
    escutcheon
    ~~
    ~: ..
    /

    ;

    /

    ~’:’

    Striker
    adjustment

    t=-/tt’J
    ~:3- _2~.1,

    c1 …
    @fl\

    9 — 15)

    tt’J : N. m (kg-m,
    ~

    ft-Ib)

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    88T590

    BT-4

    INTERIOR TRIM

    Door Trim
    REMOVAL —

    @~

    Door trim

    3-door hatchback
    ~~

    CD

    Remove inside handle escutcheon.
    ~ Remove power window switch, then disconnect the connector.
    CID Remove screw securing pull handle and remove pull handle.
    @ Remove window regulator handle (Manual window models).
    CID Remove screws and clips ~
    securing door finisher.

    tt1J 22 — 29 (2.2 — 3.0,16
    tt1J 30 — 40 (3.1 — 4.1, 22
    tt1J 13 — 16

    20 — 27 (2.0 — 2.8, 14 — 20)

    CL-2

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Operating cylinder bracket
    Clutch cover
    Clutch disc
    Clutch pedal
    Clevis pin

    @
    @

    Pedal stopper
    Fulcrum pin

    CLUTCH SYSTEM —

    Mechanical

    Type

    SEC. 300.307-465
    @~

    WJJ~
    ~[M]

    ~~

    ~~

    ~~

    @~

    II

    13 — 16 (1.3 — 1.6, 9 — 12)
    ~

    16 — 22 (1.6 — 2.2, 12 — 16)

    rM1Ju

    @

    @

    ~U
    [P&

    M
    ~[R1

    ~U
    ~~

    [~l1J
    Sel7g0

    (j)
    @
    @
    @
    (g)
    @

    Clutch pedal bracket
    Insulator
    Assist spring
    Withdrawal lever
    Clutch cover
    Clutch disc

    (f)

    Return spring

    @

    Bushing

    @
    @
    @

    Clutch lever
    Spring pin
    Release bearing

    @
    @
    @

    Pedal stopper
    Lock nut
    Fulcrum pin

    @
    @

    Stopper rubber
    Clutch pedal

    @

    Clutch cable

    CL-3

    ~b

    ~~lL
    ~[Q)A

    HYDRAULIC CLUTCH CONTROL

    Clutch Master Cylinder
    SEC. 305

    [j] 2.9

    • 5.9 (0.30 . 0.60, 26.0 • 52.2)

    6

    @ LHD
    (j) ~

    5

    models

    2.5 — 3.9
    (0.25 • 0.40, 21.7 — 34.7)

    @ m:i!l0

    Rubbing surface
    piston assembly

    to

    15

    ,<
    @~ •

    RHO models

    Apply brake fluid when assembling.

    I

    14

    ~

    m
    care of the bolt direction.

    f!fi!I @ :

    Apply

    m@

    Apply silicone

    f!fi!I

    :

    0 : Apply
    [j] : N.m

    (1)

    Piston assembly

    (2)
    @
    @

    Piston cup
    Return spring
    Reservoir tank

    CID

    Reservoir hose

    Contact

    rubber grease.

    rubber
    (kg-m,

    @
    @

    ~

    grease.

    10

    [j] 1.5

    (RHO models)

    — 11
    (0.8 — 1.1,
    69 — 95)

    m @ (RHO

    m@
    11 IE3!I

    * Take

    [j] 8

    models)

    (LHD models)

    Rubbing surface
    push rod

    to

    (LHD models)
    surface

    to piston assembly

    — 2.9 (0.15 — 0.30, 13.0 — 26.0)

    • Remove this stopper, when
    removing piston and return spring.

    lubricant.
    in-Ib)

    SCL791

    @
    (J)
    @

    Reservoir cap
    Reservoir band
    Cylinder body

    @

    Push rod

    @
    @

    Stopper
    Stopper ring

    @
    @

    Packing
    Valve stopper

    @
    @

    Dust cover
    Lock nut

    CL-4

    HYDRAULIC CLUTCH CONTROL
    Operating
    SEC. 306

    Operating

    cylinder

    Cylinder

    m:i!l0

    Piston spring
    Piston cup

    I!’fi!I @

    .
    ~
    16
    Piston r:.DJ 1

    }

    Always replace after every
    disassembly as a set.

    Push rod
    Bleeder

    screw

    [j] 5.9

    — 9.8 N-m
    (0.6 — 1.0 kg-m, 52.2 — 86.7 in-Ib)

    1!C!10:

    Apply rubber

    lubricant.
    Dust cover

    m @:

    Apply rubber

    II

    I!C!I @

    grease.
    SCL792

    Clutch Damper
    SEC. 306
    Bleeder
    ~5.9

    screw

    ~
    Cylinder body
    (LHD model)

    — 9.8
    (0.60 — 1.00, 52.2 • 86.7)

    I!C!I

    0 Rubbing

    surface
    piston assembly

    to

    Piston cup

    m0

    o

    Piston assembly

    surface

    to piston assembly
    Damper

    .

    rubber

    I’

    (LHD model)

    :QOf’~-Y

    Plate

    ~ 0 Contact

    5.1 — 6.5
    (0.52 — 0.66,
    45.1 — 57.5)

    Damper cover
    (RHD model)

    — -~’ , ‘ ?i
    ~fV _~-><«», .~
    ,’;J
    I

    I

    ~

    ,

    ‘~’

    ~

    2.9 • 5.9
    (0.30 — 0.60,
    25.7 — 52.2)

    1i15,1 — 6,5 (0.52 — 0.66, 45.1 — 57.5)

    m 0 :Apply
    ~

    : N.m

    rubber lubricant..

    iii 2.9

    ~
    — 5.9 (0.30 — 0.60, 25.7 — 52.2)

    (kg-m, in-Ib)

    SCL672-A

    CL-5

    CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM
    Withdrawal lever(Hydraulic clutch
    control)

    SEC. 321
    Except SR20DE engine models

    Withdrawal lever
    (Mechanical clutch
    control)

    Spring

    pin
    SCL793

    SEC. 321
    SR20DE engine model

    l!I9.3 — 10.8
    ~
    .(0.95 — 1.1, 82.5 — 95.5)

    I

    10

    C)

    Withd rawal leve r

    ~

    m

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    (b) :

    Apply lithium-based
    grease
    molybdenum disulphide.

    Clutch

    release

    bearing

    including
    SCL794

    CL-6

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    General Specifications
    CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER

    CLUTCH CONTROL SYSTEM
    Engine

    Except for CD20

    CD20

    Mechanical

    Hydraulic

    Type of clutch control

    Inner diameter

    mm(in)

    15.87 (5/8)

    CLUTCH OPERATING CYLINDER
    CLUTCH DAMPER
    mm (in)

    Inner diameter
    mm (in)

    Inner diameter

    17.46 (11/16)

    19.05 (3/4)

    CLUTCH DISC
    Unit: mm (in)
    Engine
    Facing size
    (Outer dia. x inner dia. x
    thickness)

    GA14DE

    GA15DE, GA16DE

    CD20

    SR20DE

    180 x 125 x 3.5
    (7.09 x 4.92 x 0.138)

    190 x 132 x 3.5
    (7.48 x 5.20 x 0.138)

    200 x 130 x 3.5
    (7.87 x 5.12 x 0.138)

    215 x 140 x 3.5
    (8.46 x 5.51 x 0.138)

    Thickness of disc assembly
    with load

    7.6 — 8.0 (0.299 — 0.315)
    with 3,923 N
    (400 kg, 882 Ib)

    8.0 — 8.4 (0.315 — 0.331) with 3,923 N (400 kg, 882 Ib)

    CLUTCH COVER
    Engine
    Full-load

    GA14DE
    N (kg, Ib)

    I

    GA15DE

    3,432 (350, 772)

    CL-7

    GA16DE

    CD20

    SR20DE

    3,825 (390, 860)

    3,481 (355, 783)

    4,413 (450, 992)

    III
    IRvAllf

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Inspection and Adjustment
    CLUTCH PEDAL
    Unit: mm (in)
    Except for CD20 engine models

    CD20 engine models

    Applied model
    Pedal height «H»

    RHO

    LHD

    RHO

    LHD

    159 — 169 (6.26 — 6.65)*1

    153 — 163 (6.02 — 6.42)*2

    156 — 166 (6.14 — 6.54)*1

    149 — 159 (5.87 — 6.26)*2

    Pedal free travel «A»
    (at pedal pad)
    Withdrawal lever play «8»

    11 — 15 (0.43 — 0.59)

    9 — 16 (0.35 — 0.63)

    2.5 — 3.5 (0.098 — 0.138)

    *1: Measured from surface of dash reinforcement panel to surface of pedal pad.
    *2: Measured from surface of dash lower panel to surface of pedal pad.

    CLUTCH DISC
    Unit: mm (in)
    Engine

    GA14DE

    I

    GA15DE, GA16DE

    Wear limit of facing surface to rivet head

    0.3 (0.012)

    Runout limit of facing

    1.0 (0.039)

    Distance of runout check point (from hub center)
    Maximum backlash of spline (at outer edge of
    disc)

    90 (3.54)

    85 (3.35)

    CD20

    SR20DE

    95 (3.74)

    102.5 (4.04)

    I

    0.7 (0.028)

    0.9 (0.035)

    0.8 (0.031)

    CLUTCH COVER
    Unit: mm (in)
    Engine
    Uneven limit of diaphragm spring toe height

    GA14DE

    GA15DE, GA16DE

    I

    CD20
    0.7 (0.028)

    0.7 (0.028)

    CL-8

    I

    SR20DE

    ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

    @~

    SECTION
    [L~

    MODIFICATION NOTICE:
    • The wiring diagram has been changed.
    • Distributor for the GA engine model has been changed. In accordance, TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTG
    11 and TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTG 21 have been changed.

    III
    [?~

    CONTENTS
    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»

    Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
    MIL & Data Link Connectors

    3

    53
    54

    3
    SR

    GA
    ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
    SySTEM
    Circuit Diagram — Except for Australia
    Circuit Diagram — For Australia
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
    Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit.
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 11
    Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS)
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 12
    Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS)
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 21
    Ignition Signal
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 34
    Knock Sensor (KS)
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    ITEMS
    Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
    Start Signal
    Injecto r
    Fuel Pump
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
    Control (AAC) Valve
    Cooling Fan Control
    EVAP Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve
    EGR Valve and EVAP Canister Purge Control
    Solenoid Valve
    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S)
    Valve Timing Control (VTC)
    IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve
    Electrical Load Signal

    4
    4
    5
    6
    6
    8
    8
    13
    13
    15
    15
    21
    21
    22
    22
    26
    27
    29
    31
    33
    37
    38
    40
    42
    44
    49

    ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
    SySTEM
    57
    Circuit Diagram
    57
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
    58
    Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit.
    58
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 11
    60
    Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS)
    60
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 12
    61
    Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS)
    61
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 13
    62
    Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)
    62
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 21
    63
    Ignition Signal
    63
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    ITEMS
    64
    Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
    64
    Start Signal
    65
    Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve and
    EVAP Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve ………. 66
    EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid
    Valve
    67
    Injecto r
    68
    Fuel Pump
    70
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Air Regulator
    71
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air
    Control (AAC) Valve
    72
    Idle Air Control Valve (IACV)-FICD Solenoid
    Valve
    73
    Cooling Fan Control.
    77
    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S)
    79
    Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
    80

    EC-1

    Gs/A

    ~u

    ~U

    [~lL

    I

    CONTENTS
    Electrical Load Signal
    Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) & Data Link
    Connector (DLC) for CONSULT

    I

    81
    83

    C020E

    ENGINE ANO EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
    SySTEM
    Circuit Diagram
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
    Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit.
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OTC 14
    Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 18,22,25
    Electric Governor

    85
    85
    86
    86
    88
    88
    89
    89

    (Cant’d)

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OTC 21
    Injection Timing Control Valve
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OTC 28
    Cooling Fan (Overheat)
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 36, 37, 38
    Fuel Cut Solenoid Valve
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR NON-DETECTABLE
    ITEMS
    G low Control System
    EGRC-Solenoid Valve A, B and Throttle Control
    Solenoid Valve
    Start Signal
    Accelerator Position Switch
    Air Conditioner Control
    MIL & Data Link Connectors

    EC-2

    90
    90
    91
    91
    92
    92
    93
    93
    94
    96
    98
    99
    101

    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    The Supplemental Restraint System such as «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (Mechanically
    activated type» used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
    passenger, for certain types of collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL
    N15 is as follows (The composition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):

    For a frontal collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
    pre-tensioners (Mechanically activated type), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and
    spiral cable.

    For a side collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
    seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (which is one of components of air bags for a frontal collision),
    wiring harness, warning lamp (which is one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
    Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
    Bag Module, see the RS section.
    • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation either just before
    the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.

    EC-3

    @~
    [M]~

    ~~

    [L~

    III
    [?[g

    ~[L

    [MJu

    ~u

    I

    ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
    Circuit Diagram ~

    J:
    t-

    t~t(J’UI:

    ~

    Z

    Zt-

    o

    ZZ
    00

    t-o

    t-

    ZO

    O(/)

    t-L.
    HO
    Z

    ZU

    Z

    (!)Z

    (!)U
    He{

    (!)
    H

    -HO

    a:~O(/)

    H

    H

    ………

    XL.
    OclJ
    «CE
    c ….
    .»‘+J
    X
    L.
    L.ClJ

    UJHUJ:J:

    …..

    He..

    H

    UH

    UJ
    :J:C!>J:
    OC!>U
    a:OOt«ZLLH

    (J’)

    (/)

    e{

    U
    t-

    a:

    …..

    ~

    H

    H

    I

    J:
    U
    t-

    U

    U

    Except for Australia
    ~

    «(/)

    J:
    U

    ~~

    ‘-=’

    L.,e
    OCLl
    t-«O

    ~
    ~

    …..

    f<‘

    O-

    CJ

    (/)

    ~~
    ~~

    1001
    QJO

    !O

    l»‘)

    z
    «

    0010

    LL

    ~

    II
    ~I

    r<1D

    W

    Z
    …JO

    (/)
    (/)

    CIt-U

    a:
    ::>

    REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
    RELAY @

    «HI
    t-Ht::>(/)H
    UJO~
    Z~(/)

    UJ

    a:

    Q.I
    IU

    …Jt-

    «H
    ::>~

    Do

    ….. ,….-

    a:
    o

    [[

    UJ

    tH:t:

    ….oI

    (DU
    Ht-

    IH
    Z~

    ~~~
    Q.

    L.

    W

    (/)

    …J

    …J

    …J

    >

    >
    o
    H
    o

    >

    lU
    L.
    0
    E

    UO

    0

    w
    >

    ~~~)
    ::>U

    «

    «
    I
    >

    e{Z
    ~H

    o

    HH
    lLO
    I Z

    Z
    UJ

    U…J
    t-o

    U

    ~
    ~a:::>

    «

    «

    U

    …JO

    >

    >

    «

    LLH

    a
    (/)

    W

    Z…J
    o
    Ha:

    >Ul

    ,…

    H(/)

    I:l.

    I’
    «»»
    ~

    l!>
    Z

    ~

    ~1

    (J

    crI

    H

    -~

    5z~
    0«0

    L…..

    ,……

    ULL~

    @

    ~::>
    ~

    U

    I

    0

    >w

    (/)

    t-

    -~

    U…J
    «0
    HUl

    t…J

    t-

    l»»)
    l»»)

    @@ ~

    ZO(/)

    Ht-Z
    …JUO
    UJU
    e{Z

    l»»)

    t-za:

    N

    e{OO
    DULL

    @

    ECM (ECCS CONTROL MODULE)

    @

    .~

    @@ @)
    -co

    N-

    …..
    0
    Z

    ~

    1-…….—

    a:

    CJ

    (T)

    «I:f

    a

    a

    0
    Z

    Z

    Z

    I~

    11

    I

    ,.-~~

    00

    -UI

    ,~
    I ~

    I ~

    II

    I

    I

    I

    I
    I

    I
    I

    t-L…….

    l- J

    «
    …JW
    ocr

    EU

    …..

    II

    U
    W
    J

    ~gjtW

    ~

    a:

    o

    (/)~(/)
    (/)OZ
    «….JW
    ~lL.Ul

    U(f)!:Yj
    OZ
    ZUJ
    ~(f)

    ~~

    II

    WZ
    …JO
    t-Hcr
    t-t-O

    Ut-

    a: a:
    W::>
    UJUl
    ~Ul

    OZCI
    UJWO

    t-t!)(/)

    UJa:a:
    ZWO

    a:Q.U

    OHen
    a:({)Z

    HQ.Ul

    «>Z

    UJXUJ
    IO(/)

    IOW

    t-z

    ~

    (J)

    ~

    (J’)

    Z
    0

    H
    t-

    …..

    Z

    ~

    en(/)

    Ul«
    U…J

    ~

    WCI

    ~

    ..J

    UJ
    …J
    ([)
    H
    (f)
    ::>
    LL

    C!>
    ::>

    L:.:.:.J

    ~

    …J
    -c:[p=H11 n.

    a:

    ~

    «QJ
    +J
    QJ
    E
    0

    ~

    .£:
    U
    lo

    +J

    rr:
    0

    t:J

    ~
    a:

    ~

    0

    t-

    ~

    -c:[p=H1′

    (/)

    n.
    Ul

    UJ

    ‘0
    0
    E

    ~

    ……..

    «

    cr

    -c:[p=H11

    t-

    ~

    ZUJUJ
    UJ~(/)

    OH3:
    (LO(/)

    lU

    E
    lU

    c.

    +J
    cn
    >cn

    0
    L.
    :J+J

    w.c

    +J
    t-lUClJ.£:
    ……..
    CO
    0

    ~

    ~

    .. .. .. .. ..

    @

    ~

    ,,-.»‘QJ:>/.

    ~

    ….

    .. ..

    @@@)@@ @)@

    0

    0

    BATTERY

    a:
    «

    ~ ~
    11l

    t!)~Z

    EE

    QJ

    -c:[p=H11

    UW

    enw
    a:I

    UJ
    t3:…JH

    +J
    0″-.'»
    +J
    Or-1…-1
    a
    clJ «OlU
    lU
    roo
    0 00
    ~ ….o ….
    lUQJC
    LU
    0 EO
    .
    …x
    cnE’O ….
    OL…-1
    L.
    L
    …-1
    ….
    IOlU
    X
    CLlC:J
    :J CLl:J
    QJ+J’c 0
    C lUW lU
    W
    .SW
    ‘0 >-+J +J
    .£:L
    E
    lU «- 0″ClUJ L ….~
    a ro…. ~
    +J lU
    e:o (.!) e:OO+J
    E’03:’O
    j ….
    e:
    a 0
    QJ 0
    lU~
    CLltO->-lU
    XO
    r-1
    t-+J
    10
    ‘0 «:JE…-1 +J (I)+J
    +J ……..
    0 :J +J W+J +J W«+J’O
    …-1
    ….
    Q
    «OlUlo
    0
    OC!>Q
    000
    E UJ 0
    QJ’O
    .£:+J+J
    11l
    QJ to QJ QJ tn
    QJ.£: lU
    U O+J(/)(I) U ‘OC
    -‘OU+J
    t- «- U -u
    U
    x …. x I ….>-C
    x 00
    x

    0

    «0’0

    en

    «OW
    UCl.(/)

    IL.

    z
    …..

    r-1r-1
    Q)QJ

    ~({)Z

    «

    ~I:l.(/)

    «Ha:
    I ….
    O
    (f)H(/)

    ~

    HUJ

    O:J

    lLO

    I
    U
    t-

    ~I’
    Z

    Z

    t-

    ~0

    .~

    I

    0

    ~~

    .~
    II
    I~

    B

    .. .. ..

    ~@)~

    ….

    .. ..

    @@

    t-

    HEC496

    EC-4

    ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
    Circuit Diagram ….-:I:
    U
    tH

    ..-:I:
    U
    tH
    ~t(/)0:
    «
    Z~
    O(/)
    H

    :I:
    ~ 1.-.1UOI<:>. TOIOT l<:>JOl
    H
    ~
    .»1-

    00
    H
    tH

    ~c..

    HO
    Z

    Z
    (!)

    (!)Z

    :,jOIQf

    10

    (!) t/UD
    T
    ~
    41
    r
    JlOIOI
    II ~mJ
    1

    t-

    «

    C)…J
    ZUJ

    Ha:

    @

    …J
    oz

    0«ULLI

    —,

    (!)

    CJ
    1

    Z

    F=0

    wtWUJ

    a.~
    ….. — enD

    [j

    ~

    8
    a:
    IZ

    D-

    t:J
    …J

    ~

    «
    z …J

    ~~)

    a:>
    W…J

    Z>
    0
    uo
    H
    II WO
    :::>Z
    …Ja..
    OUJ
    W~
    cr…J
    ::>::>
    00
    I-en
    LLa..

    L

    >…JQ..«

    :J U
    LL H
    …J
    0
    <:( Z
    H

    W~…J
    :::>:::>UJ
    LLa..a:

    ~

    I

    II
    I-

    …J
    ~z a::::>
    oen

    —-to

    ‘q’

    —- ~

    H I-Z
    uo
    …J
    UJU
    « Z
    t- za:
    « 00
    0 ULL.

    ~ ~

    HH

    «en

    UJ
    ~UJ

    ~

    0-

    meno

    ZO
    «Z
    uw
    …J
    0.0

    ~@

    1.—

    >
    W…J
    0
    ~a:
    Iwz
    >0
    …Ju

    a..
    I
    …J
    «
    ::>
    0

    ~

    W

    >

    >

    U
    «
    «

    0
    H

    «

    «

    >UJW
    (!»

    a:a:…J
    (!)::>«
    wa..>
    («I»)

    ~

    @

    (!)…J
    ZUJ
    Ha:
    …J

    X
    =oo=

    8~@

    uo

    HH
    LL.O
    IZ
    >UJ
    U…J
    «0
    H(/)

    w
    U…J
    1-0

    >en

    ~’

    …..
    OJ

    ~

    0
    IHI

    rou

    HIIH
    Z~
    Hen

    ~oo

    ~

    II

    [].

    I

    (!)

    cr
    0

    Z
    HW
    a:cr
    W:J
    W(/)

    ~

    OZI-

    0<:(0
    uLL.~

    tn~

    II

    a: J:
    cra. u
    IW
    ~…J H
    OH
    0.0 (J)

    @

    -iII

    ~

    (!)..-4

    ‘»
    L…

    ~
    ~~

    III(!)CJ
    Z
    H
    …J

    ‘»
    L…

    0

    0
    Z

    I

    >
    U
    «
    H

    UJ
    >
    …J
    «
    >

    >
    …J

    uu..~

    CJ
    I

    ODO

    UJ
    >
    …J

    «

    ~

    (D

    ~ ~

    Z

    I

    H
    …J

    OZI-

    0cr

    0«0
    uLL.~

    /’

    ~~

    ~glR

    ~

    OJ

    OJ
    OJ

    Kl

    @

    ECM (ECCS CONTROL MODULE)

    @@

    =~

    CD,…..
    ~’q’

    T

    aZ

    T

    0

    Z

    0

    Z

    ~~

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    II
    II
    II
    II
    II
    II

    0
    Z

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    t J

    loj

    ~

    to

    II
    II
    II
    II
    II
    II

    II
    II
    II
    II
    II
    II

    1::.1

    Ibf

    en
    ‘q’

    («I»)

    N

    .II

    ir

    II
    II
    II
    II
    II

    !J

    ~

    W

    I I

    J

    Z
    H

    [2]

    @

    i~)

    ~ lJ

    .~

    CJ

    ~ ~mOD
    W
    en
    ::>
    LL.

    ([

    0<:(0

    >(/)en

    a..

    U

    1

    :I:UJZ
    UJa..w

    HII

    W

    7
    L
    II~
    f5
    —@—1
    OZI-

    a:

    uoo
    HUJen

    Ia:
    OUJ

    a:

    ….~0

    (/)
    (/)

    ..-

    ~oo ~

    -cr ….. —

    UJ
    a:
    ::>

    0«0

    ULL.~
    UJ
    …J

    Z
    …Jo
    oClH I
    crt- U
    IH
    WO
    za.. (J)

    en

    115z~

    I

    II

    3:

    a:

    H

    ~

    I
    U
    tH

    Lfl’

    II

    ~~

    a:
    ~o
    uen

    oz
    zw

    ~en

    S
    «

    a:
    0

    (/)~en

    (/)OZ
    «…JUJ
    ~LL.en

    @
    ozcr

    WUJO
    I-(!)en

    «>-z

    WXUJ
    :I:oen

    -./IV’vUJ

    wz

    …JO
    t-Ha:
    t-t-o
    OHen
    cr(/)Z
    IOUJ
    I-a..en

    cra:
    H:::>
    «I-

    «

    ‘—

    IZ

    «

    …JW
    oa:
    0:::>
    UI-

    «

    UJa:a:
    wcrcr
    ~wo
    ZUJo
    oCla..(/) Ha..(/)
    t-~Z
    (!)~Z
    ZWW
    ZWUJ
    HI-(/)
    UJI-en
    c..

    Q)

    c
    .~

    — —c[J::P-J II

    ~

    (!)

    f

    c..

    Q)

    +I
    Q)

    E

    o
    .c

    u

    10
    +I

    r:::l
    L.:.:J a:
    a:
    a

    a

    ~en

    ~a:

    ([

    en

    I-

    w

    ~II

    ::>
    …J
    a..

    ~Il

    0:
    «
    a..

    ~

    l-

    (/)

    ::>

    ‘0

    ~ ~
    Q)

    Q)

    ‘0
    0

    ‘0
    0

    e E

    l-

    -c:[]:::Fl-111

    I-

    c:
    0
    u

    .~
    10

    .c

    ~ ~~

    I-

    ……. …….
    oCl

    .. .. ..

    H

    o

    @@@

    o

    BATTERY

    t-

    HEC497

    EC-5

    III

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY

    Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
    Except for Australia

    EC-MAIN-01
    Refer to EL-PDWER.
    W/L
    I

    Refer to EL-POWER.
    5T

    ~~

    W/L ~

    …..

    W/L ~

    OFF ‘
    ACC

    d::,~r:-b~

    I~I
    @ 11t¥J1 @
    W/L
    W/L

    ~

    !—3

    B/R
    I

    I

    ~

    ~

    W!L ~~

    :
    ~~
    B/R

    — W/L ~ ~

    W/L

    —-~
    I

    W/R
    I

    I

    114’7 I

    11~ I

    mffil

    VB

    CRTN

    I 3’8 I
    VB

    Non-detectable

    line for OTC

    B/R @

    I

    B/R

    W/R

    for OTC

    -:

    !—y

    W/R

    W/R

    LHO models

    @: RHO models
    @: For Europe
    @: Except@
    *1: @44
    @36
    -:
    Detectable
    line

    ::~ IciJl
    Irfll
    (F~
    B/R
    B/R

    ern

    I

    B/R

    B/R

    ~

    e-o~
    I

    ~~

    ~CMID
    BIR

    e-e— …..

    rmrm

    B/R

    ~d::,
    @I~I

    W/L ~

    ~rn

    I
    W/L

    IGNITION

    SWITCH

    CHID

    W/L

    W/L

    t—.t

    m

    ,-.

    DISTRIBUTOR
    (CAMSHAFT

    POSITION

    CEID

    SENSOR)

    I

    t

    W/L

    mrn

    ::

    I

    ….

    e—e

    I

    rm

    CONNECTOR-6

    I

    ~..r,~=—=~.
    ::

    e

    I

    I

    W/R

    W/A

    W/R

    If!sTI

    rf171l

    VB

    VB

    II1~ I
    CRTN

    SSOFF

    JOINT

    I

    ~
    W/A

    I

    B

    L

    F 1I

    @

    WIG

    ~@

    ~

    I

    ECCS

    ~ RELAY
    WIG

    Detectable
    line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for Ole

    W/R

    I$I@!)

    ~

    -:

    CHID

    I

    W/L

    LHD models
    RHO models

    -:

    W/L
    W/L

    :

    @

    L

    L

    II4.0 I

    ri3ll1

    REF

    REF

    ECM

    B

    t.J 1

    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    @
    ~GY

    +

    21@

    5

    L

    IIIiIiIim CEID
    45678

    W

    11
    B

    B

    ~

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Faldaut

    ~

    ~

    page) .

    @
    GY

    HEC499

    EC-8

    [g!J

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 11

    Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (Cont’d)
    Except for Europe and Australia

    EC-CMPS-02

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    -:

    Detectable

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for OTC

    for OTC

    @~

    line

    III

    W/R

    rn

    DISTRIBUTOR
    (CAMSHAFT

    POSITION
    SENSOR)

    l!,JJ~~
    L

    m

    B/W

    8

    t

    JOINT
    CONNECTOA-6
    @

    I

    »

    .~=_=-~—

    t—

    e
    WIG

    W/R

    W/R

    SSOFF

    VB

    VB

    m h3~114;1

    -,

    L

    nf2il
    REF

    __

    L

    B/W

    REF

    POS

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    ~cm

    IillIillIilll

    GY

    .,

    m~

    AcmL
    T

    ~
    W/L

    116E1I~

    I~I~

    fM8
    ..!:!2.J

    ..!:!2.J

    I

    W/R

    rn

    ~
    $3:
    I
    r-‘ __~,t
    -I ~

    W/l

    mm

    W/L

    MASS AIR

    FLOW SENSOR

    ~O

    ~

    4=JJ

    lhj:JJ
    B

    G

    t

    J

    W/L

    ~

    WIG

    I

    WIG

    SSOFF

    e—_-o~

    VB

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    It

    W/R
    I

    rm m

    I

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    ~

    W/R

    ~

    I

    ECCS
    ~ RELAY

    CEID

    lbi=JJ

    W/R

    I

    rm
    CRTN

    nt7n
    VB

    I
    __

    ~~
    8

    8

    G

    rF2ITI

    112’9 I

    rrf6il

    GND
    -A

    GNO
    -A

    QA+

    W/R

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR
    -6

    em

    CONTROL

    em

    GY

    A CEID
    T
    L

    fill
    I Ill]CEID
    45678
    W

    rn1
    B
    B
    I…J

    ECM
    (ECCS

    MODULE)

    ~em
    lTI!TIJIIIII)

    III

    fM8

    W/L

    @) CEID
    O-<@- W/L -I [iJ- W/L ~

    W/L

    Detectable
    line
    fo~ OTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    -:

    t—T
    I
    ~

    Fo~ Eu~ope
    Except@

    -:

    W/L
    ‘T
    W/L

    RHO models

    8

    e

    -!,
    BIR

    POWER
    TRANSISTOR

    BIR
    rere

    ECM

    rr=l=iJ

    (ECCS

    A

    ~

    VEHICLE

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    SPEED

    @

    ~

    SENSOR

    r——————————-,

    Refe~ to last page
    (FeIdout

    L

    page) .

    ~

    fTI2T314l~

    rmmIID

    ~~
    B

    lID

    GY

    HEC509

    EC-23

    III

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Cont’d)
    GA 16DE for Australia

    EC-VSS-03

    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START
    7.5A

    10A

    1241

    lJID

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    -:

    (J/B)

    B/Y

    B/Y

    B/Y

    -[J

    ~:(b)

    rrITil@)
    u;J:

    ~

    IIN:31

    BIR
    I

    .-.
    BIR

    ~I$I
    ~~~

    @S’B’B’B

    HEC512

    EC-27

    ~n
    LSlS

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Injector (Cont’d)
    GA16DE for Australia

    EC-INJECT-02
    -:
    10A

    1251

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer

    -:

    to EL-POWER.

    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTe

    (JIB)

    ~

    IIN~31
    BIR

    I

    BIR

    I~I@

    ‘1=4′

    B/R~

    j—j—j—-I
    BIR

    BIR

    BIA

    I:

    i::

    I!I

    t

    .1
    :1 No
    INJECTOR

    l4=JJ

    ~

    RIB

    I

    .2
    :1 No
    INJECTOR

    l4=JJ

    VIB

    I

    UID

    l4=JJ
    GIB

    I

    SiR
    No
    .3
    INJECTOR

    ~

    i: ~

    :1

    l4=JJ

    No
    .4
    INJECTOR

    ~

    LIB

    I

    RIB

    VIB

    GIB

    LIB

    11~21

    ~

    11~1

    h1~1

    INJ

    INJ

    INJ

    INJ

    #1

    12

    #3

    #4

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    Refer to last page

    11(i}@
    W

    ~I
    3456

    (Faldaut

    ~~~
    @S’B’S’S

    page) .

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC513

    EC-28

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    eM]

    ITEMS

    Fuel Pump
    @~

    EC-F/PUMP-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    ON or START

    ~~

    FUSE
    BLOCK
    (JIB)
    ([@

    15A

    [ill

    ~[MJ
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    @’>: For Europe
    @: Except for Europe
    106 , @ 104
    *1 : ~
    Detectable line
    -:
    for DTe
    Non-detectable
    -:
    line for DTC

    [L~

    III

    FUEL
    PUMP

    ~~

    t[L

    (0)
    B/Y ~

    CID
    ~ B/Y

    ~U

    I

    8/Y

    rm
    rm

    ~U

    ~~

    B

    m
    ~CEID

    49

    ~

    ~u

    ,-,
    B

    m=n
    FPR

    I

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)
    (ill

    @~
    12

    ~~

    rm~

    I

    8

    ~~

    B

    ~u

    -L
    ~
    ([ill @

    ~~

    +CHD
    5

    (817)

    B

    8/P

    W

    M

    ~

    B/P

    3 4

    FUEL
    TANK
    GAUGE
    UNIT

    FUEL
    PUMP
    ~

    B/P~

    (i)@

    ~~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    @
    I

    SR@

    -:

    III

    For Europe
    Except

    for

    @
    line

    Detectable
    for DTe
    Non-detectable
    line for OTC

    SR

    (F~

    I~I

    1$1:::;

    SR

    SR

    SR
    i IACV-

    W

    ~

    IACV-

    AAC

    AAC

    VALVE
    Next

    GIS

    i~——0-….

    LG/R~g

    m

    1

    GIB

    I

    I

    (EtOt) LG/R

    ~

    ~

    -:

    ECM
    (ECCS

    -:

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    -[9:>

    }

    ~

    LG y

    Ne xt page

    Detectable
    line
    for OTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTe

    ern

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    @ ~GY ,
    GY

    (0)

    , (EtOt)

    (Et06)

    HEC517

    EC-33

    I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Cooling Fan Control (Cont’d)
    Except for Australia

    EC-COOL/F-02
    Preceding
    page

    @:

    COOLING
    FAN
    RELAY-2

    @:

    LHD A/T mode Is for Europe
    without daytime light
    system (With dealer
    installed towing kit)
    Except@

    -:

    Detectable

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for DTe

    for DTC

    line

    UZ>:@

    Preceding
    page

    <:er

    {

    B

    LA

    0—-0———-0-‘_

    ~

    LG…..

    ~

    LA

    LA

    8

    8

    -!-

    -!-

    ~~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    2
    5 7

    36

    UZ>

    page) .

    :

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    FUSE

    BLOCK

    @:

    30A

    m

    (JIB)
    (El06)

    IIGil

    AIT models
    MIT models
    Models with

    air

    GY

    BR

    ‘~—
    LG/A GIS

    I

    -‘ ———O—
    ‘——1
    m
    m

    LG/R

    Iitm (EtOt)
    ¥ CHID

    GIS

    LG/R

    I

    COOLING

    1

    M

    FAN
    MOTOR-1

    M

    11211

    r:::!:,~

    1’+11 CEID
    LG/R

    I

    LG/R

    page

    GIS

    1

    LG/A

    -{B> Next

    GIS

    rn:

    11211

    T
    I

    T

    COOLING

    FAN
    MOTOR-2
    @:
    @

    •1-….c0~———I

    }
    B

    ~

    LG

    ~

    Next

    page

    LG

    rrf4i1

    rrI3i1

    AFRL

    RFRH

    ECM

    -:

    Detectable

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    ern

    for DTe

    line

    Refer to last page
    (FaIdaut page) .

    :

    M/T

    COOLING
    FAN

    models
    models
    @: Models with
    air conditioner
    -:
    Detectable
    line

    RELAY-2
    @:@

    -:

    for DTC

    Non-detectable
    line for DTe

    I

    LG

    (fWri4Jn
    CMID~

    LG

    I
    @m

    8

    I

    B

    <@-

    Hi
    (-)

    ~
    LG/B

    ~

    ePreceding
    page

    COOLING
    FAN
    MOTOR-2

    COOLING
    FAN
    MOTOR-1

    ,.
    I

    ~
    LG

    B

    B

    -!-

    -!-

    @1) (E51)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    W
    57

    36

    8R

    eID~~
    34

    GY’

    eM[)

    , (EtOt)

    GY

    HEC555

    EC-36

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    EVAP Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve
    MIl models except for Europe and Australia

    EC-PGC/V-01

    FUSE

    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    III

    ([@
    -:

    Detectab le line
    for DIC

    -:

    Non-detectable

    r2r2

    lJLS

    line for DTC
    SR

    I~I~
    SR

    I

    SR

    11:1 PURGE

    EVAP CANISTER
    CONTROL

    SOLENOID

    VALVE

    l4=JlCffi
    P

    I

    P

    rF155fl
    PURGE

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    oocmG

    ~
    GY

    HEC522

    EC-40

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) (Cont’d)
    GA16DE for Australia (AfT models)

    EC-H02S-02

    FUSE

    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (J/B)

    ~

    IIN!911
    BR/Y

    -:

    I

    -:

    BR/Y

    Detectable
    line
    for OlC
    Non-detectab.le
    line for DTC

    III

    ~@
    ~@
    BR/Y

    I

    BR/Y

    ffi
    HEATED
    OXYGEN
    SENSOR

    I4JI ~
    OR

    T

    L

    , (EtOt)
    , (EtOS)

    oom

    C!IID

    PU

    HECS26

    EC-44

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
    For Europe

    EC-FICD-02
    Preceding

    «‘I

    4LG/R ~
    ~

    page

    (6):
    @:

    LHD models
    RHO mode Is
    *1 .. -(6) G/S , @ GY

    LG/R

    rm

    THERMO

    -:

    Detectable

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    CONTROL

    THERMISTOR

    line

    for DTC

    AMPLIFIER

    III

    ~

    ……..
    To

    *1 ~

    Ale swi tch

    (Refer to HA-A/C.)

    DUAL-

    a……..

    LOW

    HIGH

    NORMAL

    ~

    PRESSURE

    SWITCH
    ~

    i

    -O-

    @ @)
    G

    ~

    G

    t

    -,
    G

    IT4Til
    ARCON

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    (IT)
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    ~
    2

    1Ql~
    W

    UJ

    X

    COOLING
    FAN RELAY-1

    E

    I»»
    u

    ….
    H

    ro
    .c

    D

    0

    .~

    Q)

    (1)

    rn
    rn

    d6
    r:. r:.
    u

    u

    ~

    +oJ

    +oJ

    .rl

    .rl

    ‘0

    0

    ~ ~ ~

    CJ)

    (/)

    000

    W
    Ul
    ::J

    .rl
    r-t

    .rl
    r-t

    o

    0
    ….

    ….

    COOLING
    FAN RELAY-3

    Q)Q)

    L+J

    ~

    (/)

    0:>…. U>

    ti.

    rf==;~IO

    c::=:::::J

    C;~)

    ~

    (/)
    (/)
    (1)

    (!)
    Z
    H
    .J
    oz

    +J

    +J
    .rl

    0

    ~H’

    =BrIO

    r:. r:. e..
    en en roE

    .c.
    u

    e..

    ~

    0
    ‘0

    .s .s .s~
    en en

    +J

    LL

    r-M

    COOLING
    FAN RELAY-2

    (1)

    «‘—.—

    ::>

    ~

    r:. e..

    ~

    (!) ……
    z I
    H
    a:
    .J 0
    oz ….
    0«0
    UlL~

    ru

    ………

    (g)

    :m=

    «

    u

    0
    ….
    «

    Sl1~

    U

    E
    0

    I

    a:

    Ul

    e..
    a
    a:
    W
    Z
    0
    H
    ….
    H>0«
    a:z…J
    HOW
    «ua:

    -jl’

    ….

    en

    O. ~o

    .J….
    «H
    ::J~
    OUl

    =::J

    ~~ 0 OJ

    W
    (!) f3

    c::::::=J

    I-

    z f3

    0.8
    ::Y
    «

    gj ~
    0.

    …JW
    wa:.J
    ……..
    HO
    zuo
    ww
    a:.J
    tlI:::> «
    0.>
    W
    >a:o
    .JWH

    o..::>w
    «.J.J
    >00
    W>(1)

    a:z.J
    (!)

    W(!»

    «….
    0

    uwo
    ~z

    >OOZ

    HW

    ___

    @

    L

    -n.

    (1)

    ~»‘!Y»

    a::
    wo
    ….
    H
    a:o

    +J
    Q)

    E

    a

    wz
    >UJ

    Z.J
    uen
    WI
    ::JUW
    cn—>
    a:::J.J
    O.J«
    00

    r:.

    8

    =0
    ~II

    C

    IWZ

    Wo.w
    u
    >en(f)

    Z

    0

    II

    W
    ….J
    0

    en

    10

    (!) ru
    I
    a:
    …Ja
    oz ….
    fU

    +J

    0

    0

    8

    ~

    ….

    LL

    IW
    »
    U.J
    ««
    H>

    j~

    8i1~:Y

    II

    ….
    u>

    ow
    w….

    .Jo
    «HI
    a: ….U
    ….
    Ht::>UlH
    WO~
    Zo.en

    0
    Z

    II

    u

    Z
    H

    rR

    ~

    (!)
    Z
    HW
    a:a:
    W::J
    WUl
    ….
    (1)
    (1)W
    a::c
    a:o.u
    ….
    W
    3:…JH
    OH3:
    0.0(1)

    a:

    oo
    ) Hwen

    &>~

    ww

    «

    .J

    a:

    I

    L..::.:.-J

    >-.
    OZ…J
    O«W
    ULLa:
    H

    W
    .J

    ..—

    I~

    ~
    (U4

    ~

    ….a

    W
    a:
    ::J

    0

    I~

    I

    ….

    OlO

    II

    …J
    ~a:: ::J
    ZO (1)
    Ht- Z
    …JU
    0
    UJ U
    «Z
    ….
    Z a:
    «0 0
    OU LL

    ECM

    (ECCS CONTROL

    ru

    ~

    to

    ol

    ‘»i:f

    ~

    ‘q»~~

    ……

    ~

    (T)

    8

    ~

    ‘q»
    («‘I»)

    ~

    ~ ~~

    ‘»i:fto

    :II
    ….—

    -.:;f

    MODULE)

    @@)

    (T’)

    @
    (T)

    -~8~~

    ……

    o
    z

    {J

    (T)

    ~

    0

    0

    0

    Z

    Z

    z

    I
    I
    I

    u
    -:>
    Z

    -11

    1

    U

    ~

    I
    ~

    IT
    W
    Ul

    ~

    o
    Z
    o
    u

    ~

    !

    I
    I
    I

    ~

    ,

    ‘—L-

    I
    I

    a:
    o
    en
    a:z

    I

    ….
    z

    cn3:

    (1)0
    «-.J
    ~LL

    .

    WZ
    .Jo

    «

    a:U>Z
    t-0.(J)

    ZWW
    W ….
    (/)

    CIa
    H ….

    e..
    (1)
    c
    a

    ««

    I …J
    >::>
    U(!)f3
    «wS

    .rl

    ~rB
    kJ

    ~(f)

    0::>

    U ….

    wa:a:
    ZWO
    Ho.oo
    (!)~Z

    ……..
    0

    :cow

    ~

    ~O
    az
    ZW
    U(f)

    …JW
    Oa:
    t-Ha:

    a:

    —a:

    «

    OH(f)

    >….Jo.. ::>W
    lLo.a:

    j

    J

    I
    ,

    «en

    «
    «
    I
    >
    U

    H

    I
    ,

    I
    I

    HW

    >

    w

    ll—

    I

    >

    .J
    —,
    ~

    W/L

    =t (fiOf)

    ~

    ~

    116.clI(]ID
    W/L

    ST

    [@~

    OFF’-‘-

    <:MID

    ACC

    IGNITION
    SWITCH
    ~

    ~

    +

    ~

    BIR

    L-….<8>-o

    I

    I

    ,.—.Q])-O
    ~@

    U:¥JJ (E)

    ~~
    B/R

    <$>
    WIL

    r:::b

    I~ICMID

    I$I@
    W/L CEID

    W/L

    <$>

    m B/R
    ~

    CE101)

    ~(]ID
    BIR

    B/R

    O~

    e—-I

    (b):
    @:
    @:

    RHO models

    -:

    Detectable
    for DIC

    -:

    Non-detectable

    LHO models

    For Australia
    @: For Europe
    line

    line for DTC

    I

    ~~

    B/R

    ECCS

    ,—,

    W/L

    W/L

    114’61

    11~1

    BATT

    CRTN

    B/R

    14J1@
    Irn,@
    em
    ,=’~

    BIR

    ~
    WIG

    I

    I
    W/R

    W/G

    rn

    SSOFF

    BIR

    t~
    I

    BIR

    14’71

    h3!61

    VB

    IGN
    SW

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    ern

    r~-~-.~;i;4)-:

    I
    L
    I

    536~

    426~

    W

    I
    ~I

    +3 i@ rnl
    5

    L

    II~@

    3456

    W

    fIml I ‘fij:

    LHD models

    @: RHOmodels
    @:

    W/L
    I

    0-<0—,
    ~

    ~~

    *3

    W/L

    *4
    *5

    I~ICMID

    W/L

    1I~1I

    ,—,

    (CAMSHAFT

    POSITION
    SENSOR)

    m

    O~

    t

    W/L

    W/L

    mrm

    ~
    ECCS

    ~ RELAY
    @
    W/R

    W/R

    rm~rr17TI

    SSOFF

    VB

    1

    I
    I

    I
    I
    I
    I

    ~

    I 1—.

    WIG

    »

    1—‘

    W/R

    *1

    VB

    .,,1″

    1

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I.»

    ~~
    WIG

    DISTRIBUTOR

    @

    W/L

    line for DTC

    W/R

    ~

    W/L

    Detectable
    line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable

    -:

    ….-

    W/L

    I$I~
    W/L M8

    W/L

    IllAl (101)

    @:

    RHO models

    -:

    Detectab Ie 1ine

    -:

    +

    ~@)
    W/L

    ~

    for DTe
    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    III

    L…-..-o

    ~O
    ~(E)

    ~~

    <$>
    W!L

    W/L

    I$I@

    <$>

    rrTI

    W/L <£[)

    O-@)—J

    ,—,

    W/L

    W/R
    AIR
    FLOW
    SENSOR

    t

    ~~:

    RHO mode 1s

    @:

    For Australia

    @: For Europe

    L

    L

    ~=
    GY

    *1

    8

    1$~-KE-i$1

    GY

    *1

    ~

    *1.’.@

    GY , @SR/Y

    *2′.,@

    2

    *3.’,@

    3

    ,@ 3
    ,@ 5

    -:

    Detectable
    for DTC

    line

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    8

    R

    (

    o

    0

    I

    e—t
    B

    *1

    wI8TI
    TW

    8

    ~

    112-91

    GND
    -A

    GND
    -A

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    ill)

    ~~

    -,

    DISTRIBUTOR

    t

    BIA

    BIR

    I~I@QD
    ~(BID

    I$I@QD
    (BID

    BIR

    BIR

    tJ
    I

    ~

    If

    IrtJl~CEID 1’=iJ1@
    B/R

    @

    Lt

    00

    B/W

    t If

    1

    BIR

    BIR

    W/8

    G

    SPARK PLUG

    ~

    ~~
    G

    +1>
    BIR

    m

    POWER
    TRANSISTOR

    RESISTOR

    SlY

    ~

    ~
    GY/R

    WIB

    ffi

    rrTI

    IGN

    To ECM

    eBIY + (ECCS control

    ~
    module)

    ECM

    IGN

    CK

    S/Y

    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    II8

    S

    t..J
    1
    m
    ID

    r———————,
    : ITI2A @) ~
    @> (fill)
    I

    I
    L
    I

    rnrnID

    ~

    W

    r———————,

    I

    : (1121341516)
    ~
    I
    I

    L

    ~

    GY

    ~~:
    :

    (J/B)

    -:

    ~

    -:

    LHD models
    RHO models
    Detectable line
    for DTe
    Non-detectable
    line for DIC

    COMBINATION
    METER
    UNIFIED METER CONTROL,UNIT(WITH

    SPEEDOMETER AND ODO/TRIP METER)

    ~
    ~

    @

    FPC CONNECTOR
    2•21

    1

    B/A

    ~

    PU/R
    ~~

    ~@

    PU/R

    PU/R
    ~

    B/R

    VSP

    ECM

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    VEHICLE
    SPEED
    SENSOR

    CED

    ~

    (ECCS

    -!~

    Refer to last page
    (Faldout

    ~@g)

    f1i2T3T4l~

    ~GY

    ~B

    ~

    tID

    page) .

    CE216)
    GY

    HEC456

    EC-64

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Start Signal

    EC-S/SIG-01
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    G

    m
    ST

    OF

    ‘e-~

    IGNITION
    SWITCH

    :

    ~

    ACC

    LHO models

    III

    @: RHO models
    @: For Australia
    @: For’ EUr’ope
    -:
    Detectable
    line

    for DTC

    -:

    Non-detectable

    line for OTC

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    7.5A

    1261

    (JIB)

    ~

    I

    B/Y

    BIY ~

    CONNECTORS)

    BIY ~

    ~:

    r:::b,@

    1u;J1@
    BIY
    ~
    ST

    ECM

    SW

    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    ~———————,
    I

    : rnrn:rnJ
    mm /EO’
    ~

    I

    L
    I

    ~

    ~

    I

    Refer to last page
    (FaIdout

    page) .

    /AD’ @B) :

    ~

    W

    I
    ~I

    HEC457

    EC-65

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve and
    EVAP Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve
    FOR AUSTRALIA

    EC-EGRC/V-01

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    <[@

    Irn,@
    ~@
    8A

    -:

    Detectable

    -:

    for DTC
    Non-detectable

    line

    line for DIC

    8R

    I

    SR

    iXi

    V~i~is~EA

    ~~~p
    PURGE

    CONTROL
    SOLENOID

    II 111 VALVE

    ~cm
    P

    I

    p

    ~
    EGR

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    ~lllfiJ@
    3456

    W

    ~cm
    :
    EVAP CANISTER PURGE
    VOLUME CONTROL
    SOLENOID VALVE

    LHD models
    RHO models

    … : Detectable line
    for DTC
    —:
    Non-detectable
    line for DTe

    ffi:

    L

    BR~P

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    Refer to last page
    ~

    @

    ~
    L’

    (Fo Idout

    (B118)
    L

    page) .

    CHID , (EtOt)
    @ , (E106)

    em
    L
    HEC459

    EC-67

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Injector
    FOR EUROPE

    EC-INJECT-01

    FUSE
    10A BLOCK

    1251

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    ~

    IIN~31
    B/R

    I

    B/R

    -:

    Detectable

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for DTC

    for DTC

    line

    IG7A

    ~~

    4=JJCEID
    B/R

    I

    B/R

    ffi@

    +

    W/R

    $2(1)

    I

    -.

    e—e—e—I
    I
    I
    I

    W/R

    W/R

    INJECTOR
    No.1
    0=2(3)

    2

    INJECTOR
    No.2
    (F204)

    ~2~

    ~

    l4=JJ

    W/R

    W/R

    rm INJECTOR ~
    No.3
    ~

    l4=JJ

    INJECTOR
    No.4
    CF206)

    l4=JJ

    l4=JJ

    1!fJ~- ~1_ — — — — iciJl

    Irnl ~

    I[~]I

    $

    ~(E201)

    :r
    B/Y

    B/Y

    SlY

    B/Y

    B/Y

    AIT models
    M/T models
    Detectable line
    for DTC
    Non-detectable
    line for OTC

    I

    B/Y

    rn

    m
    ~@

    B

    I
    8

    ctJ CE221)

    SIP

    ~~

    I

    B

    B/P

    I

    11~41
    FPR

    B

    ECM

    em

    IB
    SA

    $~

    1$1

    SA

    SA

    CE201)

    BR

    4>——T
    >
    do
    A

    @): For Europe

    d:::.. ~

    @:

    For Australia

    Icpl

    ….

    Detectable

    :

    SA

    SA

    I
    SR

    @:

    I

    $W>

    ~

    ~~1~

    I!IIACV-AAC
    VALVE

    @

    0:2(8):

    ~

    @)

    ~
    S8

    S8

    I

    I

    58

    58

    Iml @Z)

    Iml~
    ‘-=F~

    ‘-=F~

    58

    58

    I——@)-

    LG/R

    L/R

    —e-I

    I

    m

    THERMISTOR

    Y

    AMPLIFIER
    @

    .lA’-

    ~page

    Next

    S8

    I—

    G/B

    +

    To

    Ale switch

    (Refer to
    HA-A/C .)

    DTC

    To compressor

    L/R

    + (Refer
    to
    HA-A/C.)

    1$I~E~~1~

    L/R~

    I

    IctJl~~~
    L/A

    (E101)

    m

    I

    L/R
    DUAL-

    HIGH

    ….

    for

    L/R

    S8

    LOW

    1 ine

    L/R

    rrsiTICHID
    ~

    Non-detectable

    ·

    1m,@)
    ,….. ‘1=6′

    G/B

    t

    _.

    for OTC

    L/R
    I

    ~
    S8

    Detectab Ie 1ine

    L/R

    THERMO
    CONTROL

    I

    AIR

    _:

    ~I~~~~~TIONER

    -9

    ~

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    ……..

    IACV-

    PRESSURE

    SWITCH
    NORMAL (ffi)

    W
    ~

    lbidJ
    G

    1

    FICO
    SOLENOID
    VALVE
    (F201)

    Y

    _
    G

    -@> Next

    page

    L

    Y

    JC’-..Next
    ~page

    Refe~ to last page
    (FeIdout

    page) .

    CHID , CE10l)
    ~

    ..&i. ~

    C!J.g)

    ~
    8

    ~

    rn>
    GY

    , CE106)

    ~:

    RHO models

    @: Models with air

    COOLING

    FAN

    -:

    Detectable

    1bi=H~~
    LG/R

    f

    line

    -:

    Non-detectable

    for DTC

    U RELAY-1

    conditioner

    line for DTC

    G/B

    —~ 1——10—1

    ~

    LG/R
    U1!AU (fl0l)

    LG/R

    LG/R

    LG/R

    ~

    ~

    @

    G!S
    m

    II: II(£101)
    3J

    1

    @

    GIS
    r=b
    COOLING

    M

    FAN

    MOTOR-1

    ~
    G/8

    GY lG/S

    ffi

    COOLING

    ~~~
    lG/R

    G/B

    ffi
    Lo
    (+)

    G/Y

    m

    Hi
    (+)

    G/OR

    G/R

    m

    ffi

    COOLING

    Lo
    (+)

    FAN

    t t
    Hi

    (+)

    MOTOR-1
    ~

    COOLING

    FAN

    MOTOR-2
    (-) ~
    @
    La

    -F-6-

    LG

    line for OTe

    =

    -_…..
    —,-I-F
    COOLING

    Non-detectable

    G/W

    ~—IO
    —9—

    SA

    Models with air

    conditioner
    Detectable line
    for OTC

    ~

    LG/R

    LG/A

    8

    ___ L_l

    ECM
    (ECCS

    t t

    fi-,

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    em

    8

    8

    -!-

    -!-

    ~(E51)

    2
    57
    3 6

    Refer to last page

    @~
    SR’

    BR ‘

    SA

    ~~rn

    ~

    (Foldout page) .

    GY ,

    GY

    »

    em
    L

    HEC470

    EC-78

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S)

    EC-H02S-01
    IGNITION SWITCH
    or START

    ON

    10A

    [ill

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer

    to’ EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    ~

    I N~91

    II

    BR/Y
    I

    BR/Y~

    +~

    BR/Y~

    -:

    ~@

    BR/Y

    BR/Y

    -:

    ctJ~rn~
    ~CEID

    t~

    @:

    For Europe
    @: For Australia
    Detectable
    line
    for DTe
    Non-detectable
    line for DTe

    ~lu

    I

    BA/Y

    rrTI

    HEATED
    OXYGEN
    SENSOR

    I4Jl
    OR

    ~
    W
    (
    I
    I

    ::
    OR

    rm=rn
    02H

    @)

    -1

    t

    I

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-6

    @

    kw.~—~

    urn

    025

    I

    ECM

    B

    (~g~~ROL
    MODULE)

    _

    lIIIITIITITIl

    GY

    11]1
    I If!) CEID
    fEl
    I Iii)

    Refer to last page

    ~ ii I
    I!~~
    J JI~~~:y
    ~R:l i
    rn

    H/L

    FUSE

    H/B

    H/8

    f—f

    W/L

    W/L

    ~

    I~ICMID

    m

    0

    B/Y

    m@ffi
    ~
    —- ~
    B

    ~

    ~u

    0

    L
    ~

    !Au

    @:

    RHO models

    -:

    Detectable line
    for OTC
    Non-detectable
    line for DTe

    -:

    M

    I

    I

    B

    S/Y

    I$~~ —————1$1
    B

    S/Y

    I

    I

    B

    I

    ~
    B

    B

    ~[g1

    ~u

    B/Y

    L~

    ~-.J
    -!-

    ~~

    -!-

    ~u

    ~

    ~

    ~
    BR

    ~ffi

    ~III~@)
    45678

    W


    456

    ~ GY

    Refer to last page
    (FoIdout page) .

    ~ffi
    ~lL

    CHID , ~

    ~[Q)~
    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC241

    EC-87

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 14
    Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)

    EC-VSS-01
    :
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to
    EL -POWER ·

    Detectab Ie 1ine

    -:

    Non-detectable

    (J/B)

    ~

    LHD models
    RHO mode Is

    @:
    -:

    for DTC

    line for DTC

    UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT (WITH SPEEDOMETER AND ODD/TRIP METER)
    FPC CONNECTOR
    11

    2•21

    ~

    BIR

    PUlA

    A/Y

    COMBINATION
    METER
    @
    ~
    ~

    R

    1,¥~(~litl
    A/Y

    ~

    A

    PUlA
    ~
    VSP

    B/R

    -!~

    R

    ECM

    ~

    CONTROL

    ~:~

    MODULE)

    R/Y ~

    (ECCS

    ~

    R

    0

    R/Y

    ID

    VEHICLE
    SPEED
    SENSOR

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (FaIdaut

    page) .

    ~~
    ~B
    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC480

    EC-88

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 18, 22, 25
    Electric Governor

    EC-GOVNR-01

    I BAT;ERY I
    ~.7.1

    INJECTION
    PUMP
    Refer

    ~.~.i
    —-~

    I~:I

    W/L

    to

    EL -POWER ·

    L…..-..r~—-_~~

    t——~

    ~
    H/B

    ,$,~:1~IliJ~~
    H/L

    W/L

    IfiI1

    W/L

    W!L

    CHID

    ORIL

    BRIA

    If

    5S(RL :.’ LHD models
    ~
    RHO models

    «i I~m——~Iill -:

    OAIL

    ~
    W/B

    BR/R

    t ~ tt

    L
    If:’MA

    BR/R

    -:

    R

    GR/L

    GAIL

    BAIA

    line

    IcIJ~~ -1r=!J1 1r4fJ~
    ~~) ~$I

    I~I ~~:

    W/B

    BRIA

    I

    I

    W/B

    ~ m~ ~~E~Y

    ~

    ~

    ~

    WIG

    SIP

    OR!L

    for

    DTC

    BRIR

    t—) lJ

    L

    A

    I

    I

    OR/L

    BR/R

    ffiI

    ~4

    II:

    I

    OR/L

    I II

    OR!L

    line

    BAIA

    W/B

    W/L

    Itit

    I~-I—r~

    =11 CONNECTOA
    JOINT

    I

    1~~~5)

    OR/L

    BR/R

    BRIR

    If If

    WIG

    SIP

    BIP

    OAIL

    OA/L

    BRIA

    BRIA

    ~

    rrIT6n

    1I1~71

    ~

    ~

    ~

    ~

    AEV

    AEV

    GE+

    GE+

    GE-

    GE-

    SSOFF

    ~~~egigble

    Non-detectable

    ~$I

    M…-…—)
    rrI=n

    ~

    OR/L

    R

    ~

    l!4JJ

    It

    WIB

    (ELECTRIC
    GOVERNOR)

    ECM

    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    ~

    V

    2

    ~@)
    45678

    57

    W

    3 6

    f1i2i3l~

    ~
    BR

    ~

    Refer to last page
    GY

    (FaIdaut

    page) .

    ~~
    ~GY

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC481

    EC-89

    II

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 21

    Injection Timing Control Valve

    EC-TCV-01

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    (b): LHD models

    Refer to
    EL -POWER.

    :

    RHO models

    -:

    Detectable
    for DIC

    -:

    Non-detectable

    (JIB)

    (106)

    1I~41
    8A

    line

    line for OTC

    I

    BR

    1~1(0)
    ‘-=j=J ~

    BA

    I

    ~..,

    BR

    m

    S8

    Irtl CHID
    ~

    INJECTION PUMP
    (INJECTION TIMING
    CONTROL

    VALVE)

    1r.m,1 ~

    58

    ~

    S8

    CHID

    t—.t
    I

    ~

    t

    ~

    58

    S8

    I

    i-,

    S8

    $~
    S8

    SB

    S8

    h1~ I

    h1~O I

    TCV

    TCV

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    ~

    ~~
    ~B

    F1T2l3l~
    ~GY

    ~~

    ~Cill

    ~B

    (ill)B

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    101 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC482

    EC-90

    I CD20E I

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 28
    Cooling Fan (Overheat)

    I
    FUSE

    BLOCK

    EC-COOL/F-01

    I

    BATTERY

    I

    Refer to

    ~e

    EL-POWER.

    (J/B)

    ~

    [p~

    ~

    t~

    Ibi=ll l!:iJl ~
    LG/R

    G/8

    G/A

    I ~

    LG

    LG LG/R

    LG

    ~~~db~db
    IlmJ~ — — — ~l!!EJI 113Jl~- — — ~r4Jl1

    9F’

    LG/R

    CHID

    LG LG/R

    ~U

    t t

    mm
    f+l

    [Plk

    r+

    ~~~LING

    MOTOR-1
    ~

    LG

    COOLING

    FAN

    lbi=JJ

    LG/R

    LG/R

    rrf4n

    I

    LG

    RFRH

    M
    ~~

    B

    I-~——i.

    o
    rrf3TI

    RFRL

    MOTOR-2
    ~:@

    Hi
    (-)

    o

    I

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    ~

    (b): LHD models
    (8): RHO models
    @: Models with air
    conditioner

    -:
    -:

    Detectable line
    for OTC
    Non-detectable
    line for OIC

    »
    8

    B

    -!-

    -!-

    ,~,~
    SR

    SR

    SR

    ~~,~

    GIY

    IklJ

    G/Y

    1~6)

    ~

    W/B

    P/W

    L~Rt-i
    rm m
    ~

    P/W

    CHID ~CHID
    P/W

    t-i

    w/a

    W/L

    VALVE)

    ~

    m

    ECCS
    ~

    ~
    S/P

    I

    r.

    LHD models
    RHO models

    -:

    Detectab Ie 1ine
    for OTC

    -:

    Non-detectable
    line for OTC

    Ttlt

    S/P

    rffifsrrIDll
    REV

    :

    :

    ~ RELAY

    a/p

    CUT

    SOLENOID

    REV

    P/W

    P/W

    11T31

    11~51

    FCV

    FCV

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    ~

    V

    Refer to last page

    2

    ~III~@
    45678

    57

    W

    3 6

    ~
    SR

    ~~

    ~~

    ~B

    ~B

    (FaIdout

    page) .

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC484

    EC-92

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    ITEMS

    J

    CD20E

    I

    Glow Control System

    EC-GLDW-01

    I BATTERY
    I
    I

    IGNITION SWITCH
    or START

    ON

    10A

    [![]

    FUSE

    BLOCK

    75A

    ~7.5A

    LfJ@]

    (J/B)

    ~

    m
    B/R

    W/L

    I
    mm
    W/L

    B/Y

    JUNCTION

    BOX No.2
    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)

    ~:(b)

    O—

    I

    BIY

    m

    STSW

    B/Y

    iJ

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    @

    f1i2Fl~

    tmIID

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    page) .

    w

    101 102 103 104 105 106
    107 108 109 110 111 112
    113 114 115 116 117 118

    HEC488

    EC-96

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
    Start Signal (Cont’d)
    }::( MONITOR

    }::( NO FAIL

    I

    CD20E

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE

    D

    @l]

    INSPECTION START
    START SIGNAL

    I

    OFF

    m
    CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
    1. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    ~
    2. Check «START SIGNAL» in
    «DATA MONITOR» mode with
    CONSULT.

    OK

    INSPECTION END

    (ij

    RECORD

    I

    SEF625S

    m
    II

    ECM

    19

    IGN «ON»

    OFF

    IGN «START»

    ON

    II

    OR
    1. Turn ignition switch to «START».
    2. Check voltage between ECM
    terminal @ and ground.
    Voltage:
    Ignition switch «START»
    Battery voltage
    Except above
    Approximately OV

    CONNECTORII

    20

    NG

    SEF109P

    Check if 7.5A fuse is OK.

    NG

    Replace 7.5A fuse.

    NG

    Check the following.
    • Junction box NO.2
    • Harness for open or short
    between ECM and fuse
    block
    If NG, repair harness or
    connectors.

    OK

    CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and
    7.5A fuse.
    3. Check harness continuity between ECM
    terminal @ and fuse block.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    SEF066S

    OK
    Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in the circuit. Then retest.
    Trouble is not fixed.
    Check ECM pin terminals for damage and
    check the connection of ECM harness connector. Reconnect ECM harness connector
    and retest.

    INSPECTION END

    l~ll

    EC-97

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR NON-DETECTABLE

    I CD20E I

    ITEMS

    Accelerator Position Switch

    I BAT.ERY I

    EC-ACL/SW-01
    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    ~’4~1

    ~

    15A

    1351

    W/L

    W/B

    I
    0—-

    0

    {>

    ~

    I

    R

    W/L

    )

    R

    0—

    1’fJ1 @
    0

    I

    W/B

    t

    ACCELERATOR
    POSITION
    SWITCH
    eM??)

    ~1’BE4~Y

    OTHER

    ~
    ~
    B/P

    l4=JJ
    L/Y

    I

    R

    rn

    JOINT

    WIG’

    rm

    SSOFF

    -10

    Ii

    ~~

    rrIT6il rrTI7il

    ~

    B/P

    REV

    CONNECTOR

    B/P

    REV

    R

    L/Y

    Y

    IT31il

    13’21

    VB

    IDLE

    FULL

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    @ID

    IiJI I ‘III
    4 5 6 7 8

    @)
    W

    2
    57

    ~
    @

    QLg)B

    page) .

    A

    CONTENTS
    TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — TURN -/LHD Models
    Wiring Diagram — TURN -/RHD Models
    ILLUMINATION
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — ILL -/LHD Models
    Wiring Diagram — ILL -/RHD Models
    SPOT, TRUNK ROOM AND LUGGAGE ROOM
    LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram — INT/L INTERIOR ROOM LAMP — With Timer System Description
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L Trouble Diagnoses
    INTERIOR ROOM LAMP — Without Timer Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L METER AND GAUGES
    System Description
    Combination Meter/With Tachometer
    Combination Meter/Without Tachometer
    Wiring Diagram — METER -/LHD Models With
    Tachometer
    Wiring Diagram — METER -/LHD Models
    Without Tachometer
    Wiring Diagram — METER -/RHD Models With
    Tachometer

    Wiring Diagram — METER -/RHD Models
    Without Tachometer
    Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter
    Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode
    Flexible Print Circuit (FPC)
    Trouble Diag~oses
    Electrical Components Inspection
    WARNING LAMPS
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — WARN -/LHD Models With
    Tachometer
    Wiring Diagram — WARN -/RHD Models With
    Tachometer
    Wiring Diagram — WARN -/Without
    Tachometer
    WARNING BUZZER
    System Description
    Wiring Diagram — BUZZER -/LHD Models
    Wiring Diagram — BUZZER -/RHD Models
    Type A
    Wiring Diagram — BUZZER -/RHD Models
    Type B
    Wiring Diagram — BUZZER -/RHD Models
    Type C

    58
    58
    59
    63

    66
    66
    67
    71
    75
    75
    76
    76
    77
    78
    81
    82
    82
    83
    83
    84
    85
    86
    88
    89
    91
    92
    93
    94
    99
    101
    101
    102
    106
    110
    114
    114
    115
    116
    117

    (Cont’d)

    REAR WIPER AND WASHER/LHD MODELS
    System Description
    Wiring Diagram — WIP/R Trouble Diagnoses
    REAR WIPER AND WASHER/RHD MODELS
    System Description
    Wiring Diagram — WIP/R Trouble Diagnoses
    HEADLAMP WIPER AND WASHER
    Wiring Diagram — HUWIP HORN
    Wiring Diagram — HORN CIGARETTE LIGHTER
    Wiring Diagram — CIGAR CLOCK
    Wiring Diagram — CLOCK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
    Wiring Diagram — DEF -/LHD Models with
    Daytime Light System
    AUDIO
    Wiring Diagram — AUDIO -/LHD Models
    Wiring Diagram — AUDIO -/RHD Models For
    Europe
    Wiring Diagram — AUDIO -/RHD Models
    Except For Europe
    AUDIO ANTENNA
    Location of Antenna
    ELECTRIC SUNROOF
    Wiring Diagram — SROOF POWER DOOR MIRROR
    Wiring Diagram — MIRROR -/LHD Models
    Wiring Diagram — MIRROR -/RHD Models
    HEATED SEAT
    Wiring Diagram — H/SEAT POWER WINDOW
    System Description
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — WINDOW -/LHD Models
    Wiring Diagram — WINDOW -/RHD Models
    Trouble Diagnoses
    POWER DOOR LOCK/For Europe and Australia
    System Description
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK -/LHD Models
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK -/RHD Models
    Trouble Diagnosis
    POWER DOOR LOCK/Except ~or Europe and
    Australia
    System Description
    Wiring DiagrarTl — D/LOCK Trouble Diagnosis

    118

    EL-2

    119
    119
    120
    122
    123
    123
    124
    126
    127
    127
    129
    129
    130
    130
    131
    131
    132
    132
    134
    134
    136
    138
    139
    139
    140
    140
    142
    142
    144
    146
    146
    148
    148
    149
    150
    154
    158
    159
    159
    160
    161
    164
    167
    171
    171
    172
    174

    CONTENTS
    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock System Description
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK Trouble Diagnoses
    MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
    System Description
    Wiring Diagram — MULTI -/LHD Models
    Wiring Diagram — MULTI -/RHD Models
    Trouble Diagnoses
    ID Code Entry Procedure
    NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System)/LHD MODELS
    System Description
    System Composition
    Wiring Diagram — NATS -/Gasoline
    Engine
    Wiring Diagram — NATS -/Diesel
    Engine
    CONSU LT
    Trouble Diag noses
    How to Replace NATS IMMU
    NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System)/RHD MODELS
    System Description
    System Composition
    Wiring Diagram — NATS -/Gasoline
    Engine
    Wiring Diagram — NATS -/Diesel
    Engine

    178
    178
    180
    181
    185
    196
    196
    197
    198
    199
    201
    202
    202
    202
    203
    204
    205
    207
    216
    217
    217
    217
    218
    219

    (Cont’d)

    CONSU LT
    Trouble Diagnoses
    LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL UNITS
    Passenger Compartment/LHD Models
    Passenger Compartment/RHO Models
    HARNESS LAyOUT
    Engine Room Harness
    Main Harness
    Body H.arness
    Engine Control Harness
    Engine Harness
    Air Bag Harness
    Back Door Harness
    WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)
    SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)
    Terminal Arrangement.
    FUSE BLOCK — Junction Box (J/B)
    Terminal Arrangement.
    FUSIBLE LINK AND FUSE BOX
    Terminal Arrangement.
    ELECTRICAL UNITS
    Terminal Arrangement.
    JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)
    Terminal Arrangement.

    WIRING DIAGRAM REFERENCE
    ECCS (Ignition system, Cooling fan system)
    AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CONTROL SYSTEM
    ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
    SRS «AIR BAG»
    HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

    220
    222
    232
    232
    233
    234
    234
    240
    244
    256
    259
    260
    261
    262
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout
    Foldout

    @~

    Ib~

    [?~

    CHART

    ;…………

    EC
    AT
    BR
    RS
    HA

    SECTION
    SECTION
    SECTION
    SECTION
    SECTION

    III

    EL-3

    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    The Supplemental Restraint System such as «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (Mechanically
    activated type)» used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
    passenger for certain types of collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL
    N15 is as follows (The composition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):

    For a frontal collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
    pre-tensioners (Mechanically activated type), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and
    spiral cable.

    For a side collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
    seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (which is one of components of air bags for a frontal collision),
    wiring harness, warning lamp (which is one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
    Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.

    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
    Bag Module, see the RS section.
    • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation either just before
    the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.

    EL-4

    PRECAUTIONS
    NOTE

    III

    EL-5

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Schematic
    E
    E

    n
    ro c
    -M

    lU
    (f)

    (..
    +J
    (f)

    n

    :J

    4

    Q)

    C

    .rl

    Q)

    01
    C

    C
    -rl

    ‘+-

    Q)

    01
    C

    Q)

    Q)

    Q)

    C
    -..-i

    g@]

    r-t

    a

    (J)

    co
    (.!)

    (f)

    rl

    QJ

    0
    E

    c… …..

    a

    ««
    Q)Q)

    c cc

    oM

    -M

    E

    U>

    Q)

    >- +J E
    en en Q)
    en
    >- +J
    >- +J en en
    en .c.
    >01 01 U>
    -..-i
    +J
    ro
    Q)
    .c: rl .D 01
    0. 01
    ro
    Q)
    0 -..-i
    c… .!J
    c… rl E 0..-i
    -M
    ro c…
    :J
    -..-i
    Q)
    +J
    W
    E >- Q) ro
    oM
    Q)
    (..
    co rl
    Q a +J D en rl
    c ro
    0 ‘+>ro +J o..-i :J
    c…
    Q)
    +J

    rl

    ro

    Q)
    +J

    -..-i

    en

    010’1

    Q)

    Q)(lJ

    U

    :J
    0

    (J)

    3

    3

    :J
    W

    -..-i
    a: a:o
    0 (f) (f)U

    c…

    w .c. .c. .c. .c.
    +J
    +J
    +J
    +J
    U
    x -..-i -..-i o..-i -rl

    LL

    W

    Q)

    en

    C

    Q)

    a

    +J

    0.

    3

    0

    z

    H

    ~ CJ
    (f)

    -.J
    a:
    ~’-.t!)(.!)
    W
    N
    OH-100
    44HLLLL-.JN
    0″4′-.’-….J:::>
    -1I …..
    LLa::HCI)

    .-

    (.!)(f)

    Z~
    H

    …..
    I
    (.!)
    H

    U

    cc

    rl

    I
    U

    …..

    LL
    LL
    0

    …J

    3

    CO

    4

    @~@@

    g~

    @)~~@)@@)

    (f)

    CO

    4

    W

    ~

    Hr-

    ~~

    …..
    I …..

    (.!)

    ~

    a

    rc.!)H
    <{HZ

    ………..

    O.-J:::>

    LL

    0
    …J

    rr:

    (!)

    Z

    a:

    o

    0

    I

    u

    a:

    W

    (!)

    3
    (f)

    Z(f)(f)z …………….
    ~(f)
    HQ.LL>:::>…JOr

    ou
    UUU

    H»»»

    l.L.«:::>

    …J

    0
    0

    U
    …..
    a:
    HW
    :::>~
    U4
    a:W
    Ha:

    uro

    t6El

    g~

    o
    o
    :::>
    «
    H

    ~~~

    …J
    ‘-.l.L.OUU
    ~OOOO

    -1
    ‘-.
    Q.

    OOZ-.J-l

    (f)O

    Oa:H»»»
    a:(f)~O(f)

    CO …..

    4(f)

    LL
    ………..

    o

    -l
    0

    4LL
    OW
    …Jo

    0
    U
    W
    (.!)

    a:
    4
    I
    U

    ~
    a: (f)
    zz…..
    ‘»
    H>:::>…J

    (.!)

    40UU

    ………..

    ~(!)LLa:

    .-.UJ

    ~~

    a:

    .-Wa:
    CLa:
    ‘H
    u.. .0—‘
    Q.>ULL
    .’.,t-,.-c.n
    ZU
    .-1CL
    .c.n
    Ha:UOU(f)OZ

    (f)
    (!)

    Z
    0

    o~
    ~

    «
    LL’

    ~ITO~~

    [R1~

    ~U
    [g]~

    II

    en

    ,

    >
    enu
    ruIT
    Ot!)
    IW

    (f)

    ~

    a:
    0
    UJ
    (f)>w—‘Hu
    >

    I

    ~~~.~~~~._~~~~~~~~~~~

    @,ffi):

    Gasoline

    engine

    @): Diesel engine
    @:

    @)

    SR engine A/T models
    and CD engine

    ~/R ~

    ~~-POWER-03

    W~Rt

    m

    G/W

    GY

    L/Y

    7.5A

    30A

    [ill

    [I]

    I!4JJ

    R/B

    ite

    I

    e
    I

    ~~W

    To
    EL-ROOM/L.EL-SROOF
    EL-WINDOW.EL-D/LOCK
    EL-S/LOCK

    FUSIBLE
    LINK AND
    FUSE BOX
    ~
    ~
    ~

    G

    L
    ~
    ~

    W

    +}
    +

    W

    ~TO
    C

    G

    ~

    ~TO

    o

    To
    EL
    -POWER-05.
    EL-POWER-07

    EL-POWER-04
    EL-POWER-03

    To
    EC-FICD
    EC-A/CCUT
    HA-A/C

    ~———————————,
    *

    [D]~~ffi)

    ~

    W

    B’

    B ‘

    B

    FRONT.

    3)

    31

    ••

    ~

    36

    ~

    3B 39 40 41 42 43

    *: This

    connector

    in «HARNESS

    is not shown

    LAYOUT».

    HEL128A

    EL-8

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-POWER-02
    Next page

    15A

    10A

    1351

    1361

    W/B

    SiR

    CO

    0
    rITITI
    2ND

    ~T
    OFF ……
    ‘»

    TA~~/L

    ~~

    BIR

    1:ru- AIL


    ~

    .

    ~

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH
    ~

    R/L

    ~O

    TAIL/L 1Qi1-RIB ~.

    OUTPUT

    SA

    S/A

    EC-MAIN
    EC-GOVNA
    EC-FCUT
    EC-ACL/SW

    TAIL
    FUSE

    FUSE BOX
    ~


    To

    FUSIBLE
    LINK AND

    @:
    @:

    ~

    Y

    ~

    DAYTIME LIGHT
    UNIT W/R

    ~w/~
    ~~-POWER-01 {

    To
    EL-ILL
    EL-CLOCK
    To
    EC-VSS

    EC-GLOW
    EC-MIL/DL
    AT-A/T
    BR-ASS
    RS-SAS
    EL-CHAAGE
    EL-DTRL

    EL-ILL

    EL-METER
    EL-WARN
    EL-BUZZER
    EL-CLOCK
    EL-NATS

    To
    EL-H/SEAT

    To
    EL-S/LOCK
    EL-NAT S

    To
    EC-LKUP
    AT-A/T
    EL-BACK/L
    To
    EL-H/SEAT

    To
    EC- COOL/F
    EC- PGC/V
    EC- LOAD
    El-OTAl
    EL-OEF

    To
    EC-MAIN
    EC-PGC/V
    EC-EGRC/V
    EC-AAC/V
    EC-VTC

    To
    EC-F/PUMP
    EC-AIRREG

    To
    EC-TCV
    EL-START

    To

    RS-SRS

    To
    EC-F/PUMP
    EC-AIRREG

    Refer to last page
    (Faldaut page) .

    r—————,
    ~
    ,
    1
    6
    11
    16
    21
    24

    2
    7
    12
    17
    22
    25
    28

    3
    8
    13
    18
    23
    26
    29

    4
    9
    14
    19

    [f{]~

    5
    10
    15
    20

    HEL135A

    EL-15

    II

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-PDWER-09

    To
    EL-POWER
    -07

    OFF

    IGNITION
    SWITCH

    ….
    IGN2

    .ACC

    ~
    R

    5T

    ~

    ~

    B/W

    B/P

    +

    (b):

    ~

    :

    B/L

    @:
    @:

    I

    @: Gasoline
    @:

    B/P

    B/L

    rWs1

    1;51

    To
    EL-POWER
    -07

    LHD models
    RHO models
    For Europe
    Except for

    Europe

    engine

    With dual

    air

    system

    BLOWER
    RELAY

    FUSE BLOCK

    @

    bag

    (JIB)
    C(105)

    (106)

    7.5A

    1261
    IN.SI

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1~

    B

    L B~~]

    To
    HA-HEATER
    HA-A/C

    rO~O-.

    To
    EC- FICO
    HA- A/C

    I<:

    B

    To
    EC-FICD
    HA-HEATER
    HA-A/C

    To
    EC-INJECT

    r-~~——~———-‘

    : ~2

    I
    I
    L
    I

    536~

    /ETI’

    R]5 1
    426~

    /ijp

    B

    EC-S/SIG

    EL-DTRL

    1 —1 1
    ~~

    Refer to last page

    I

    (Faldout

    ,. ~15)

    I

    R

    B

    I
    I
    ~I

    1
    6

    11
    16
    21
    24

    ~
    8R

    page) .

    ~i1~.:
    @:

    G

    @:

    GA engine
    SR engine
    For Australia
    Except for Australia
    For Europe
    Except for Europe
    GA engine except
    for Europe
    Except@

    *1… @3
    *2
    *3

    INHIBITOR
    ~ RELAY

    , @4

    @ 1
    @> 6 ,’@ 1

    @2

    l!i!J~m
    G/OR B/Y
    ~

    B/Y ~

    B/Y ——————

    @:~I@[D:@
    @:~:~:@
    I

    G/OR~

    G/OR,
    G/OA

    ffi
    BATTERY
    INHIBITOR
    SWITCH

    ~

    ~:@

    P «e
    R

    STARTER MOTOR

    ,

    r-1
    It It

    ~:@

    ~
    ~B~B~O_,
    i.——O~
    CE201) ~

    B ~
    (E203) ~

    Am
    TL

    ~———————,
    I

    : ~
    I
    I

    /NE’

    ~~

    F1l2T9 /EO’
    rntIDID~

    I

    ~~

    GY

    W

    I
    I

    F1T2T31~

    tiIIDID

    !~

    m (51)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    I

    :

    ~

    B

    I

    L

    rnmrz:rm

    ~

    B

    ~

    8~
    !) GY

    ~~
    ~

    ~
    B

    GY

    HEL137A

    EL-18

    STARTING SYSTEM

    Construction
    SEC. 233
    S114-806A

    Internal

    gear
    Through-bolts

    ~

    [j] 4.9

    7.4 — 9.8

    Packing
    (0.75 — 1.00, 65.1 — 86.8)

    Magnetic

    — 6.4
    (0.50 — 0.65,

    43.4 — 56.4)

    switch assembly

    m@
    Center

    bracket

    (P)

    Dust cover kit
    Shift lever set

    ~
    ()()

    ~

    a~~

    Brush springjBrush (-)
    Brush

    ~6.4

    Brush assembly

    (+)——

    — 7.8

    [j] : N.m

    (0.65 — 0.80, 56.4 — 69.4)

    I!Ei!I @ :
    Center

    bracket

    (kg-m,

    in-Ib)

    Hight-temperature

    grease

    point

    (A)
    MEL675EB

    SEC. 233
    S114-8008

    Magnetic

    switch assembly

    [j] 4.9

    — 6.4
    (0.50 — 0.65,
    43.4 — 56.4)

    III

    Rear cover
    Brush spring

    Pinion assembly
    ~

    1.7 — 2.4
    (0.17 — 0.24, 14.8 — 20.8)

    Armature
    Gear case

    [j] : N.m

    (kg-m,

    in-Ib)

    [j] 6.4

    — 8.3

    Yoke

    I!jj!I

    @ : Hight-temperature

    grease

    point

    (0.65 — 0.85, 56.4 — 73.8)
    SEL027UC

    EL.19

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Construction (Cont’d)
    SEC. 233
    MOT80281A
    MOT80281AC
    MOT80285A

    ~4.1

    Magnetic

    switch assembly

    Planetary

    gear

    m (Ei)
    ~4.4

    — 7.1

    (O.45 — 0.72, 39.1 — 62.5)

    — 7.6

    (O.42 — 0.77, 36.5 — 66.8)

    ~

    D~
    ~

    /
    Internal

    gear

    ~

    Pinion assembly

    Pinion stopper

    1

    2.5 — 4.4
    (O.25 — 0.45, 21.7 — 39.1)

    Bearing

    Brush holder
    ~

    : N.m

    I!Ei! (Ei) :
    Gear case

    (kg-m,

    in-Ib)

    Hight-temperature

    grease

    point

    Yoke
    SEL026UE

    EL-20

    STARTING SYSTEM
    Service Data and Specifications (SOS)
    STARTER
    Sl14-8008

    Sl14-806A
    Type

    MOT80281AC

    I

    MOT80281A

    HITACHI

    MITSUBISHI

    Reduction

    Non-reduction

    MOT80285A

    GA engine
    SR20DE engine

    AIT

    Applied model

    M/T
    Standard

    Option

    V

    12

    Terminal voltage

    V

    11.0

    Current

    A

    Less than 90

    System voltage
    No-load

    Revolution

    rpm

    More than 2,700

    More than 2,750

    Minimum diameter of commutator

    mm (in)

    28.0 (1.102)

    28.8 (1.134)

    Minimum length of brush

    mm (in)

    10.5 (0.413)

    7.0 (0.276)

    Brush spring tension

    N (kg, Ib)

    12.7 — 17.7
    (1.3 — 1.8, 2.9 — 4.0)

    Clearance between bearing metal and armature shaft
    mm (in)
    Clearance»
    stopper

    between pinion front edge and pinion
    mm (in)

    11.8 — 23.5
    (1.2 — 2.4, 2.6 — 5.3)

    18.3 — 24.8
    (1.87 — 2.53,
    4.12 — 5.58)

    Less than 0.2 (0.008)

    0.3 — 2.5 (0.012 — 0.098)

    0.5 — 2.0 (0.020 — 0.079)

    II

    EL-21

    CHARGING SYSTEM
    Wiring Diagram —

    CHARGE -/For

    Europe

    Type A
    FOR EUROPE —

    Except LHD models with SR engine

    EL-CHARGE-01
    10A

    U[]

    FUSIBLE Refer to
    LINK AND EL-POWER.
    FUSE BOX

    [ill

    Refer to
    EL -POWER.

    7.5A

    FUSE
    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    y

    ~

    ITiITI

    RIB

    COMBINATION
    METER
    (CHARGE

    GS

    WARNING
    LAMP)
    (M30):

    GS

    I *.f I

    (MS9):

    @
    @

    Y/A

    ii +1
    W

    W

    14J~<5~t irfll
    W ~

    Itw

    I-~II

    W

    RIB

    RIB

    IcBJl :~;

    1$1

    RIB

    RIB

    t~

    Itw

    Y

    :n

    r-IR
    IR
    IUC»

    ~~

    Y

    ~

    7.5A

    Clli@
    RIB

    i-‘
    w ~

    W

    W

    W

    Itw

    Itw

    1c1J~~ — ~rtJl
    9F@9F

    RIB

    IECrn

    c1J~

    ~@

    RIB

    1—-1
    RIB

    ~

    m

    8

    E

    OCJI

    B

    .,

    B
    AL TEANATOR

    LQ.

    -‘1—12-[-31~-7″»-18—‘ 9-11-0)

    @

    @j

    W

    @rn

    B

    I

    I

    L

    1m

    ~

    GY

    (FaIdaut

    -,

    W

    RIB

    RIB

    IE!J~~ iciJl 1c!J1:~
    W

    W

    Iw tit

    CONNECTOR-5

    RIB

    ~
    ~

    I
    CHID
    U¥I :

    @:
    @:
    *1 …
    *2. ·

    LHD models
    RHOmodels
    With tachometer
    Without tachometer
    @ 37 @ 4
    . @ 36 ‘, @ 3

    I
    .-O— I
    1
    1 1— 1
    R

    B

    ~

    S

    8

    ~

    8

    ~

    Refe~ to last page
    (FeIdeut

    ~

    page) .

    SR

    r————————————,

    HEL142A

    EL.30

    HEADLAMP~DayUmeLi9_ht_S_y_s_te_m~~~~~~~~_
    Schematic
    @~
    I

    ()

    oU

    — {)

    U Z(!)

    ..- (J4

    H

    3:
    (f)
    (!)

    Z

    ..-I
    H

    0

    -0
    -0
    …..
    U

    -~
    0
    0

    [MJ~

    00

    ~[MJ

    (/)(!)

    ~4
    U

    LL
    LL(!)

    (!)
    H

    °4

    ..J

    j/

    00

    1O

    U)

    ,…..co cn~

    ~~
    HEADLAMP RH

    I

    ~~

    High
    (

    I
    I

    v

    Low

    ~~

    HIGH BEAM
    INDICATOR
    t::::
    v

    [p~

    I
    I

    ~~
    HEADLAMP LH

    ~U

    High
    I

    II
    I

    (

    Low

    v

    ~U

    W

    ~
    ~

    (f)

    ::>

    [p~

    I
    If)

    ‘q»

    ~

    0

    ~

    .c
    wo

    LL

    ~

    ~
    ~
    IT
    W

    wco
    ue

    W

    .rl .r-f

    (J)

    «»»»»E
    .::J

    ru

    CD

    W

    Cor-f

    .H

    Z

    (J)

    ::>

    ::>

    LL

    (T)

    ~

    ~U

    (f)

    .-

    -r-fE

    I
    (.!)

    ‘-+J»»»»»

    H

    I

    ~~

    w»»»»»
    ur-t
    cu
    L»‘D
    cue
    IDCU
    r-t
    u,……… a.
    ococo

    lL.

    ..-..-~
    ~

    C-I-J

    :::>

    >-

    ~

    (f)or-f

    ~~

    ..J

    ..-

    U

    W

    W

    :J
    lL.

    H

    en

    H

    ~

    en

    ~

    Z
    0

    to

    .-.H

    .>-

    ~U

    «
    0

    HC[


    (.!)..-

    ~~

    W

    H(f)

    (f)

    :::>

    rn

    lL.

    II

    r’-

    ~

    -I

    ..-

    I
    I

    OJ

    U
    H

    ~.-

    en a:
    «
    z..-

    O(f)
    H

    .-L
    HO

    Z
    (!)Z
    HO

    W

    a:
    0

    (f)

    ::J
    LL

    t::::
    v

    I-J

    I

    (9

    ~[Q)~

    I~ffi

    8~

    WZ
    (9H

    rrzo…
    «a:~
    I««

    HEL015

    EL-31

    HEADLAMP —

    Daytime Light System —

    Wiring Diagram —

    DTRL —

    EL-DTRL-01

    I

    I

    BATTERY

    I

    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    15A

    1~:1 ~1~5:1
    B/R

    I
    e

    ~

    1401

    (CHARGE

    rm JUNCTION
    BOX No.2

    A

    BIR

    Next page

    COMBINATION
    METER

    B/Y

    B/R

    ~

    Y IA

    -@> Next

    page

    YIR

    rm

    ALT-L

    DAYTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT

    R/G.It>

    Next page

    P/L ~
    —-

    R/B-(B>

    R/L

    rITTIl
    TAIL
    LAMP
    SW

    DAYTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT
    [UID

    F1i2l3T4I~
    ~B

    I

    ~

    t

    WID

    [lli]

    C@)

    _—

    R/Y

    rm

    Y/R

    AL TERNATOR

    …….

    ~~

    I

    I

    HIGH «‘.-

    RIG P/L


    o

    ~

    0

    HIGH «‘.-»

    PASS

    » LOW

    ~~

    Y/A

    Y/R

    «,»

    — -PASS — —

    » LOW

    l~~~~:
    I~GY

    II

    I

    ~GY

    L
    I

    I
    I

    ~

    HEL504

    EL-33

    HEADLAMP~DayUme

    U9_h_tS_y_s_te_m~~~~~~~~_
    Diagram ~ DTRL — (Cont’d)

    Wiring

    EL-DTRL-03
    DAYTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT

    lLi=JJ

    ~
    RIB

    B

    <@-

    B
    ~
    (E51)

    r——-~—~————————,

    ~

    Refe~ to last page
    (Foldout

    [[ITg]]

    page) .

    ~@ID

    ~—~~

    BA

    @: With tachometer
    @:
    Wi thout tachometer
    *3 …@ 37@ ,
    4
    3
    *4 …@ 36 , @

    B

    8

    ~GY

    HEL144A

    EL-34

    HEADLAMP —

    Headlamp Aiming Control Wiring Diagram —

    H/AIM -/LHD

    Models

    EL-H/AIM-01
    FUSE

    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWEA.

    (JIB)
    (f106)

    ~

    CHID

    ~

    WIG

    Jp

    BIR

    f>

    BIL ——

    8/L

    -{g>

    R/W ——

    R/W

    WIG ~

    WIG ——

    BIR •

    BIR ——

    BIL •

    R/W ~

    ~


    JB>
    re
    e-.—————~

    =…..
    ——-1 I
    mrnmmm~
    mrnmffim~
    _1—1=-1=
    P

    WIG

    BIR

    BIL

    R/W

    HEADLAMP
    AIMING

    MOTOR LH

    P

    WIG

    BIA

    8/L

    R/W

    Next page

    HEADLAMP
    AIMING

    MOTOR RH

    ~

    —————e

    8

    I

    I

    8

    ~
    ~

    1Tffu~

    ~

    GY

    Refe~ to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~

    ,GY

    HEL145A

    EL-35

    II

    HEADLAMP~Headla~pAi~ing~C~o~n~t_ro_I~~~~~~~_
    Wiring Diagram ~ H/AIM ~/LHD

    Models

    (Cont’d)

    EL-H/AIM-02
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.
    BIR

    I

    0

    DL

    (JIB)
    ~

    I

    I

    UG;OI
    *1

    UN;OI

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    en

    (/) .c

    (/)
    :J
    — +J

    4J

    co

    +J

    Ol

    .r-1
    M

    Q.)

    E

    .r-1

    W

    E
    .r-1

    >ro

    o 4J
    o >-

    D

    ‘-

    4J
    :J
    0

    :J

    W
    ‘-

    o

    ‘4-

    4J

    o

    ro

    U
    1::

    .c

    4J
    .r-1
    ~

    +J
    .r-1
    ~

    (/)
    ,-t

    en

    Q.)

    W

    D

    U

    X

    0

    ~

    LICENSE PLATE LAMP LH

    M

    Q)
    U

    W

    LICENSE PLATE LAMP RH

    +J

    0

    ~

    GE

    TAIL LAMP RH(INNER)

    GE

    TAIL LAMP LH(INNER)

    TAIL LAMP RH(OUTER)

    TAIL LAMP LH(OUTER)

    ED

    PARKING LAMP RH

    W
    (j)

    r
    (I
    W
    II

    HEL149A

    EL-39

    PARKING, liCENSE AND TAil lAMPS
    Wiring Diagram- TAIUL -/lHD

    Models

    EL-TAIL/L-01

    Refer to EL-POWER.
    BIA

    I

    QB):
    ~:
    ~:
    ~:
    *1

    3-door Hatchback models
    5-door Hatchback and Sedan models
    Models with daytime light system
    Models without daytime light system
    ~
    RIB ~
    R/L
    QB) AIL ,’ ~
    R/Y

    *2

    o
    I

    BIR

    rrTIil
    2ND

    ~

    LIGHTING

    SWITCH

    OF~ …..,-1ST

    FUSE BLOCK
    (JIB) (51)

    ~~~

    L.!.L£J

    Refe~ to last page

    ~.WID

    B

    B

    f!EtW

    (Foldout page) .
    GY

    HEL150A

    El-40

    PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram — TAIUL -/LHD
    (Cont’d)

    Models

    EL-TAIL/L-02
    Preceding.4
    page
    ~

    ~

    *2

    o~~

    L

    ~_~~~xt

    ~
    R/Y

    :
    ~:
    ~:

    Sedan models
    Hatchback modeIs
    3-dopr Hatchback models
    5-door Hatchback models
    5-door Hatchback and Sedan models

    *2. ·.QB> R/L ~
    *3 … QB> RIL ‘, ~

    __
    • ~

    AIL

    • __

    P/L

    a lb:f

    e~.-.

    LICENSE

    LAMP RH

    em

    a -u:l

    P/L

    BOX No.2

    R

    (JOINT

    ~

    CONNECTORS)

    ()

    @::

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    @:

    @:
    @:
    SR engine
    @: Except @
    @: A/T models for Australia
    @: A/T models except

    ~CE202)
    y

    LHD models
    RHO mode Is
    A/T models
    M/T models
    LHD models with

    , @3
    , @8

    *2… @3

    ~J —

    y

    I——-~O~

    ri*1ll

    y

    rn

    INHIBITOR
    SWITCH

    BACK-UP
    R
    …._-

    OTHERS

    LAMP
    SWITCH

    @

    ~:

    /-1

    p »
    R ………_._~

    N

    (222): @
    CE247): @

    0

    *.21

    ~

    11

    G/W

    G/W

    t~~—«»
    I

    —I

    m)@

    O~

    G/W ~

    L

    s CE2(2)

    G/W ~

    G/W -«.

    Y

    G/W

    r-:—

    ~@)G/W ~

    t

    ~O—O~

    (101)
    G/W ~

    G/W ~

    Next page

    CHID_
    G/W

    -@>
    Refer to last page
    (FaIdout

    ~~

    ~ :

    0

    G/W

    I

    LHO models
    RHO models
    Sedan models
    Hatchback models

    ~~

    ~~~

    0

    HB

    ~,{{Ii’~

    4>

    ~~

    +

    ~~

    0

    G/W

    G/W

    G/W~

    rfl2

    r!J~
    ~([!g)

    G/W

    G/W

    ~@Q!)

    [f]~

    ~[:J

    ~CID
    G/W

    t

    [~u

    0

    e

    I

    W

    Iffi
    W

    COMBINATION

    LAMP LH
    (INNER)

    r
    T,
    B

    B

    ~

    LAMP)

    (0103): <8])

    REAR
    COMBINATION

    LAMP RH
    (INNER)

    W

    G/W
    ffi
    REAR

    ~

    @ID: <8])

    ~

    8

    I

    I

    I

    e

    I
    B

    B

    ~

    ~

    ~

    (INNER)
    LAMP)

    8

    I

    ~

    COMBINATION
    LAMP
    LH

    I

    W

    (T10)

    ~

    ~l~

    G/W
    ffi
    REAR

    M

    COMBINATION

    LAMP RH
    (INNER)

    (BACK-UP

    (BACK-UP

    LAMP)

    B

    -e

    8

    8

    ~
    -~H
    <{

    IT

    L

    I

    11

    )

    ([

    w

    ~
    .

    ~ 7;:::-cnrn

    03:
    LL—

    ‘-~~~

    E

    co
    r-f

    00

    —-

    ~.rl

    (f)

    01
    0
    ‘+-

    ~

    C
    0

    c…

    ‘+-

    0

    ~

    HEL269A

    EL-52

    REAR FOG LAMP
    Wiring Diagram —

    R/FOG -/With

    Front Fog

    Lamp

    EL-R/FOG-01
    @: Models with daytime light

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    system
    system

    @: Models without daytime light
    *1 … @ RIB , @ R/L

    BIR

    I
    0
    I

    FUSE

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    (106)

    BIR

    IIQ~OI

    IQ;.O I

    *1

    AIL

    I

    rrfru

    R/L

    12-81

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH
    ~

    FRONT &
    OFF

    ~

    ‘ ……

    AIL

    FRONT

    0

    ~

    o

    9

    AIL

    AIB

    rFffil

    rrTIru

    TAIL
    FUSE

    TAILIL

    TAIL/L
    OUTPUT

    ON

    FOG LAMP
    SWITCH
    CE125)

    ‘ ……… ,…
    FRONT

    FOG ON

    12• 1

    112.[1

    GY/L

    R/Y

    L RiY ~

    Next page

    ———-Gy IL.~~

    L

    SW

    ON

    0

    BIR

    rm

    FRONT &
    REAR FOG

    FOG ON

    t

    REAR FOG

    — — — — — — — — — — OFF

    -F /FOG

    DAYTIME
    LIGHT
    UNIT

    HB

    $

    w/pu

    w/pu

    W/PU

    IciJl @
    C[g)

    1l!J1
    @)
    L::j=’ CTI)

    1E1J1~
    L::j=’ @QD

    w/pu

    w/pu

    W/PU

    ——1

    If
    w/pu

    I~I

    ~LAMP
    5~~INATION
    LH

    (INNER)
    1lJ:U1 (REAR FOG)

    L::j=’@:@

    8

    W/PU

    i~’1

    ~5~~INATION
    LAMP
    RH
    (INNER)
    (REAR FOG)

    ILJUI
    ~

    aID:@

    8

    LoI

    ~

    W

    ail III~@QD
    45678

    III

    W

    HEL162A

    EL-55

    REAR FOG LAMP
    Wiring Diagram Lamp

    R/FOG -/Without

    Front Fog

    EL-R/FOG-04

    I

    BATTERY

    I

    ~-t3.5:.I—-~
    I~~i
    A

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH

    2ND

    » 1ST

    OFF ………….

    ~

    REAR

    R/B

    FOG

    f

    2~

    __

    r

    It

    I
    ~

    ~

    ~~~~

    t

    @) @

    W~U (]ID

    W/PU

    W/PU ~HI-

    W/PU

    t

    :

    LIGHTING
    SWITCH
    CE101)

    2~

    SWITCH

    to EL-POWER.

    P

    rffill

    LAMP

    Refer

    W/PU

    t~
    I
    II

    -e- ….

    W/PU COMBINATION

    I(REAR
    * METER
    1

    FOG

    LAMP

    INDICATOR)

    11*.31

    ~,@g):

    S/R

    ~:@

    @

    I

    S/R
    ~
    ~

    ~————————————————,
    Refer to last page
    (FaIdout page) .

    ~————————————————~
    ~————————,

    I

    I
    ~~I

    ~W:

    A~~~
    TL

    ~————————~

    I

    ~W
    HEL163A

    EL-56

    REAR FOG LAMP
    Wiring Diagram Lamp (Cont’d)

    R/FOG -/Without

    Front Fog

    EL-R/FOG-05
    (D: LHO models
    (B): RHO models
    @: Sedan models
    @: Hatchback models
    @:

    RHO models

    $

    w/pu

    W/PU

    w/pu

    ,c!J1 ~
    9F~

    1[f)1 ~

    IctJl~
    9F@QD

    w/pu

    W/PU

    9FCTI)

    w/pu

    {>

    I
    I~
    I!II

    ..-

    o~e

    I
    11!1

    w/pu

    I

    4>——1

    w/pu

    ~5~~INATION
    LAMP LH

    (INNER)
    IWI (REAR FOG)
    9F aID:
    B

    ~5~~INATION
    LAMP
    RH

    (INNER)
    IWI (REAR FOG)
    9F @: @
    B

    0

    LU

    SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP LH

    REAR COMBINATION

    COMBINATION

    LAMP LH

    METER (TURN LH)

    FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP RH

    SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP RH

    REAR COMBINATION

    ..-

    COMBINATION

    ZH
    OZ
    H:::>

    LAMP RH

    METER (TURN RH)

    ..-

    «(I:

    ZW
    HI
    CDUJ


    O..J
    ULL

    I
    U

    to-

    H

    ~ B
    Ou..
    I

    U

    .~.(lHI:
    H

    «
    z.-

    w

    (f)

    :J

    ~ ~
    N

    «
    I

    a.>

    LL

    .+J

    o
    EE

    O(J)

    Q)Q)

    H

    L.+J

    ‘-L

    I(J)

    HO
    Z
    <..9Z
    HO

    .rl

    >-

    +J(J)

    ……

    ::Jr-1

    EO
    (j)

    L
    .!:.+J
    .+JC
    .rl 0

    :::>

    ~u

    w
    r
    IT
    W

    LL

    ..-..«

    CD

    HEL165A

    EL-58

    TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram —

    TURN -/LHD

    Models

    EL-TURN-01
    FUSE
    10A
    120 I

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    ~~-TURN-03

    B

    OUT GROUND

    COMBINATION
    FLASHER
    UNIT
    ~

    Imllll~~
    54213

    W

    Refer ta last page
    (Faldaut page) .

    F1i2l~

    m

    8

    HEL166A

    EL-59

    III

    TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram — TURN -/LHD Models
    (Cont’d)

    EL-TURN-02
    FLASHER

    MULTI-REMOTE
    CONTROL UNIT
    ~:@

    FLASHER

    lbjdJ

    JUNCTION BOX
    No.2 (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)
    ~
    ~

    ~

    2~

    G/Y

    GIB

    G/Y

    I—.~G/Y~4

    2~

    Preceding

    <&

    4r-

    1~

    GIS

    G/Y ~4

    2~

    G/Y

    GIS ~3

    1~

    G/8

    GIS ~3

    ~
    G/Y —~
    GIS —~
    LG

    G/Y

    t:>

    GIS

    -@>

    G/Y

    -{8>

    ~

    ——.~

    page

    G/Y

    ~

    ~

    ~Next

    ~

    ~

    I

    G/Y

    -,I

    G/Y

    ~

    GIS

    ~

    ~.. ·
    JOINT

    G/Y

    G/Y

    ~

    I.

    FLASHER

    -IQ

    I~I

    It~_M~_-i~1
    G/B
    G/Y

    -07
    REMOTE

    CONTROL

    IL2JI

    9F

    To
    EL-TURN

    MULTI-

    0-

    t ~

    FLASHER

    G/Y ~
    ~

    9FCONNECTOR-1

    tI

    : @

    ~~1~

    To

    ~G/Y ~
    ~

    ~~7 TURN

    ——e———~—-.

    FIT2l~

    lmllll~~
    54213

    B

    limlll~@
    87654

    r—————————,
    I

    : [IQIJ
    I [[[]TIg]
    I

    —-

    GIS

    :

    G/Y ~

    GS
    IS ~
    -@>NextPage

    .1

    W

    ~

    rn

    R

    I

    ….

    I

    I

    L

    page

    G/8 ~

    ~

    0

    JOINT

    CONNECTOR-1
    ~

    ~/Y

    TURN SIGNAL

    1

    GIS

    L

    LAMP SWITCH
    ~

    11211

    ffi
    I€i7n

    GIS

    9FG/8

    LG

    ~

    I ~….
    S -e>}
    ~
    Next

    ~

    ~

    LG

    COMBINATION

    8

    ~~~~~)TOR

    ~

    1

    ~

    ~

    G/Y

    GIS —

    It

    ~

    OUT

    B

    JOINT

    LG

    ~

    POWER

    ~

    G/8

    $37) $51)

    ~

    <.!J.g)

    :

    @: With tachometer

    To
    EL-TURN
    -05

    @:

    <& G/8

    ~

    ~G/B~

    ……

    <@-

    tachometer

    G/Y —.————~

    ~G/Y-

    ——

    ..

    -,

    GIS

    G/Y

    ff*1ll 11:21
    LH
    B/R

    Without

    COMBINATION
    METER(TURN)

    6/B @

    ~. @ :@
    @.~:@

    I~~

    RH

    ~3

    6/Y

    -:~ — — — — — — — — ~~I

    G/B@ID

    G/Y

    ..-.—————-~,
    I
    0
    1———1—l
    i
    H

    B)

    S

    GIS

    i

    (TURN SIGNAL)

    ~~

    BIR
    ~
    ~

    LQ.

    I

    G/B

    aD

    I!I,

    IL4JI (TURN SIGNAL)

    ~

    ~6~~INATION
    LAMP
    LH
    (OUTER)
    ~~~~N SIGNAL)

    2 REAR
    COMBINATION
    LAMP RH
    (OUTER)

    ~~

    B

    G/Y

    1c!J~-T~t— — — — — — — i~1

    G/Y

    EAR
    R
    2 COMBINATION
    LAMP LH
    (OUTER)

    IWI

    G/B~

    B

    I~I
    G/Y

    ~LAMP
    5~~INATION
    RH
    (OUTER)
    ~~~~N SIGNAL)

    ~

    B

    B

    I
    I
    e——e
    I
    I

    I
    I
    e——e
    I
    I

    ……

    ~

    B

    B

    (811)

    ~
    @

    1-1-‘ 2-‘-3 ffi[lID-7-IS-lg-‘1-01

    — L
    co en.c

    +J

    -0

    4J

    U1.rl
    U13

    +J

    ::J

    HAZARD SWITCH ILLUMINATION

    (f)

    a

    Q)

    .c

    «OD
    ero
    roL
    01

    +oJ
    .rl
    3

    +J
    .rl
    3

    00

    (/)
    r-t
    Q)

    ~([

    D
    0

    XD
    -1C
    U1ro

    OL

    HEADLAMP WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
    ILLUMINATION

    .,-i

    L

    x

    «0

    +J
    Q
    Q)
    U

    a

    >ro

    oo

    >-

    00

    W

    Q)
    +J
    (/)

    x

    rl

    Q)

    «0
    0

    2:

    2:

    <.!)(f)

    55

    GLOVE BOX LAMP

    @)@@@~@)@

    GLOVE BOX
    LAMP SWITCH

    REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
    ILLUMINATION
    RADIO ILLUMINATION

    AIT INDICATOR ILLUMINATION

    ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION

    ED

    W
    (f)

    >-

    0:

    W

    ::>
    ..J
    0

    W

    rr-

    -(.!)H

    ILLUMINATION
    CONTROL SWITCH
    I
    U

    ~

    H

    ~r-

    cnCI:

    w
    (f)
    =>

    COMBINATION

    METER

    LL

    w
    z

    : Models without
    daytime light
    system
    @: Models with
    tachometer
    @: Models without
    tachometer
    *1 …@R/B
    ,@> R/L
    *2 … @ 1 ,@ 22
    *3 … @ 11 ,@ 25

    rf~
    COMBINATION
    METER

    METER
    ILLUMI-

    NATION

    :

    NATION

    t

    M
    @

    ~:@
    ~[g1

    B/R

    rm

    R/L

    t
    RIB

    rrrru

    rmru

    ~lY

    TAIL/L DAYTIME
    OUTPUT LIGHT
    FUSE
    UNIT
    «»————-‘
    ~ :@
    TAIL

    TAIL/L
    SW

    Next
    page

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1

    ~~

    ~

    ~u

    r————————————————~
    Refe~ to last page
    (Faldout

    page) .

    III

    ([@ , (Ei06)

    ~————————————————~
    ~

    SR

    E;:002I

    ‘-1-‘1-‘-11-1 WfI2)2]-2op-l

    2—‘2—‘2-‘

    Next

    B. @ BR/Y

    Next
    page

    r————————————————,

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1
    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    ~,

    page) .

    III

    CE106)

    ~————————————————~
    r————————,
    ~
    SA
    L

    ~

    HEL178A

    El-71

    IllUMINATION
    Wiring Diagram —

    III

    -/RHO

    Models (Cont’d)

    EL-ILL-06
    FUSE

    Preceding
    page

    BLOCK

    F

    (JIB)

    ~

    UN~OIf
    AIG

    ————I—-~_
    1——1

    RIG ~page
    .J’f<‘- Next

    ..

    RIG
    ;

    ILLUMINATION
    CONTROL
    SWITCH
    (8g):@

    Preceding
    page

    NATION
    ~
    II2 II~
    ~

    B

    B

    I

    I

    8

    113JI

    ~~~ICATOR

    ILLUMINATION
    ~

    B

    m

    8

    m
    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1
    ~

    Except

    for

    Europe

    ~~~~~
    W

    (~II
    ~

    B

    J

    @:

    ~(8g)
    @ITI]lli

    ASHTRAY
    ILLUMI-

    ~

    ~~
    BR/Y

    pl»ecedin94BR/y-It
    page
    ~

    RIG

    SA

    ~

    W

    [TIg]

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    W

    HEL179A

    El-72

    IllUMINATION
    Wiring Diagram —

    III -/RHD Models (Cont’d)

    EL-ILL-07
    Preceding~
    page

    ~

    RIG

    .~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~_I
    RIG

    ~~-ILL -05 ~

    RIG

    ffi

    =-.——..

    Next
    page

    JOINT

    CONNECTOR-4
    @

    ~

    RIG
    RIG

    m RADIO

    ~

    2

    REAR
    WINDOW
    DEFOGGER
    SWITCH

    (ILLUMINATION)

    5
    *2
    820 ,’@ 821
    *3 … (b) T12 , @ T1

    FUSE BLOCK
    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (~/B)
    ~

    :

    CID
    IIT.41
    RIB

    CBD

    @
    RIB •

    I

    ,

    O~

    R

    ~

    R

    rm

    I
    A
    I$I@
    @)

    _CLOSED
    ……

    c!J
    OPEN

    IclJl~:~

    LUGGAGE
    ROOM
    LAMP
    SWITCH
    ([ITQ)

    B

    I

    o
    B

    B

    rm

    eI•

    (IT)

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1
    @>

    m@
    B

    ~

    ,.., ,..,
    B

    ~~

    I

    B

    I

    B

    B

    (llQ)

    (T11)

    Q)i05)

    ~

    B

    ~

    TRUNK
    ROOM
    LAMP

    SWITCH
    CLOSED

    B

    OPEN

    R

    SPOT
    LAMP
    (BID:@

    B

    8

    8

    B

    1 1—- 1
    1

    ~

    ~@

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    rh-f:l (IT)
    ~

    8

    m
    ~
    W
    ~

    ~
    ~

    caD
    W

    [Q] (BID
    ~

    W

    ~I45678I Ill)

    (0100

    W

    rk-O (0110)
    l.!J.QRJ

    8

    HEL187A

    EL-75

    III

    INTERIOR ROOM LAMP —

    With Timer —

    System Description
    Interior room lamp timer is applied to RHO models except for Europe and Australia as an option.
    Front interior room lamp timer is controlled by time control unit while interior room lamp switch is in the «DOOR»
    position.

    TIMER OPERATION
    Interior room lamp timer keeps interior room lamp illuminated for about 30 seconds when:
    • driver’s door is unlocked while key is out of ignition key cylinder,
    • key is withdrawn from ignition key cylinder while driver’s door is closed, and
    • driver’s door is opened and then closed while ignition switch is not in the «ON» position.
    The timer is cancelled, and interior room lamp turns off when:
    • driver’s door is locked, or

    ignition switch is turned «ON».

    ON-OFF CONTROL
    When the front driver side door, front passenger side door, rear LH door or rear RH door is opened, interior
    room lamp turns on.
    When driver side door is opened and then closed while ignition switch is not in the ON position, interior room
    lamp timer operates. (Timer does not operate when doors other than the driver side door is opened and
    closed.)

    EL-76

    INTERIOR ROOM LAMP —

    With Timer —

    Schematic
    @~

    [Mil~
    c

    ~

    ~[Mil

    co

    I
    U
    tH

    ~

    c…
    D
    .c.

    ~
    ~

    .ri

    >w

    ~

    [L~

    1J
    (1J

    U)

    CD

    D
    Q)

    a

    0
    ,……..

    )LI
    U
    )L»UH

    ~c

    Z

    ~

    c…
    Q)
    (J)

    C

    03

    —J(f)

    H

    ~u

    ~~

    D
    (1J

    ~u

    0

    [p~

    —J

    ~[L
    ru

    [Milu

    1-eI:

    ro

    ~

    HW

    :::>)L

    a:w
    HCI

    (ku

    urn

    r
    w

    a:

    ~
    ~

    tt-

    «

    ..-

    (])

    [P(k

    H

    Z

    ~
    ~

    a:

    a

    a

    IT

    ..-

    I-~

    a

    IT:

    H

    wo..
    Z<{

    H~

    W

    (f)

    :J
    U.

    u

    r’—

    W

    ~0

    L

    ..-

    M

    FRONT DOOR SWITCH
    DRIVER SIDE

    Z

    II

    ~~

    H

    Z

    a

    ~

    ~o

    ~u

    FRONT DOOR SWITCH
    PASSENGER SIDE

    0

    ~~
    I

    ~…….U

    w
    ({)
    :J

    ~I-

    (f)eI:

    «

    c::::::::J

    ~u

    REAR DOOR
    SWITCH LH

    U.

    ZI-

    [}:{)(k

    oen
    H
    I-c…

    …….
    0
    Z
    (9Z
    HO

    III

    REAR DOOR
    SWITCH RH

    ~[Q)lA

    HEL182A

    EL-77

    INTERIOR ROOM LAMP —

    With Timer —

    Wiring Diagram —

    ROOM/L-

    EL-ROOM/L-01

    I

    BATTERY

    I

    I


    25A

    7.5A

    7.5A

    OJ

    1241

    IT[]

    W

    ~

    I

    p

    7.5A

    rn

    IN;61

    IN.21

    R/B

    G

    I$I~(]I)

    W

    1

    CIRCUIT
    BREAKER
    ~

    ~

    ~

    W/L

    ‘—

    KEY
    SWITCH
    ~

    (J/B)
    (E10fD

    with sunroof
    without sunroof

    DOOR

    I

    BR/Y

    n~~
    (P~12- — — — — ~Iihl
    ~ eM[)
    ~

    ~

    =

    ~(]I)
    I~I~

    R/Y

    W/L

    BR/Y

    I

    BA/Y

    A/Y

    G

    rrI7ll

    rrf2TI

    SW

    ROOM/L
    OUTPUT

    IGN
    SW

    I

    m
    KEY

    rrITTI

    to

    ~

    @J>: Models
    @: Models

    INTERIOR
    LAMP
    OFF (M): @
    .,..-@: @J>

    ON

    ~
    BR/Y

    +BAT

    EL-POWER.

    m

    p

    WITHDRAWN

    W/L

    Refer

    BLOCK

    RIB

    I
    rm
    INSERTED

    W/L

    FUSE

    I

    ~~

    [TIg]

    W

    ~(]I)
    lIIm@]

    TIME
    CONTROL
    UNIT
    ~

    Refer to last page
    (FaIdout

    page) .

    w

    @JCW@)
    []]g]

    W

    W

    HEL184A

    EL-78

    INTERIOR ROOM LAMP — With Timer Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-ROOM/L-02

    DOOR SW

    DOOR SW

    (DR)

    (PASS)

    ~

    TIME
    CONTROL
    UNIT
    ~

    ~

    R/W

    R

    I

    R/W
    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1

    ro
    ~
    R/W

    R

    ~
    4

    Iqp~~~~~————~qpl
    R
    R/W

    I
    FRONT
    DOOR
    SWITCH
    (DRIVER
    SIDE)

    @)

    ,——‘
    ——1
    rm
    rn
    rm

    .-

    R/W

    R/W

    OPEN

    OPEN
    OPEN
    CLOSED
    CLOSEO~

    a

    OPEN

    _CLOSED
    …….

    FRONT

    REAR

    REAR

    DOOR

    DOOR
    SWITCH

    DOOR

    LH

    RH

    ~

    ~

    (PASSENGER
    SIDE)

    f.
    a
    a

    _CLOSED
    …….

    SWITCH

    I

    ~

    _CLOSED
    …….

    OPEN

    R/W

    ~

    SWITCH

    ~

    ([U)

    ~

    ~
    SR

    rfi2l@

    -rnr

    S

    L!J ~~~SA’

    SA ‘

    II

    SA

    HEL185A

    EL-79

    INTERIOR ROOM LAMP — With Timer Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-ROOM/L-03
    TIME
    CONTROL
    UNIT
    STATE SW
    (DR)

    GND

    ~

    ~

    ~

    B

    VIR

    ~CMD

    ~CQD

    VIR

    I

    VIR

    rm

    LOCK
    KNOB
    SWITCH(]ID

    LOCKED

    ~
    8

    I
    B

    I~ICQD

    ~CHI)

    ~OINT

    8

    CONNECTOR-1

    I_____ .1_ q=_-=~
    @

    B

    B

    _,

    T,
    8

    ~

    B

    n

    B

    B

    1 L.i 1
    ~@

    Refer to last page
    (FoIdout

    @

    @j)

    SR

    (]ID
    GY

    page) .

    CHI) , CQD

    HEL186A

    EL.80

    INTERIOR ROOM LAMP —

    With Timer —

    Trouble Diagnoses
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
    @~
    SYMPTOM: Interior room lamp does not turn on when any
    door is opened, or timer does not operate prop- WAJ~
    erly.

    Time control
    unit connector ~

    Irsg 1 91

    1

    1

    ~

    Check the following.

    Does room lamp turn on when room lamp
    switch is in «ON» position?

    • Bulb
    • 7.5A fuse [No. ~ ,
    located in the fuse block

    Yes
    SEL152VB

    (JIB)]
    • Harness for open or
    short between fuse and
    room lamp
    • Room lamp ground con-

    Time control
    unit connector~

    dition

    Irsg 19I I1~J

    ,
    Does key warning chime operate prop-

    R/W

    ~

    Check «WARNING
    CHIME» system.
    (Refer to EL-114.)

    ~

    Check «POWER DOOR
    LOCK» system.
    (Refer to EL-174.)

    ~

    Check harness for open or
    short between room lamp

    erly?
    Yes
    SEL153VB

    Does power door lock operate using driver
    side knob lock switch?
    Yes

    ,
    CHECK ROOM LAMP OUTPUT SIGNAL.
    1. Turn room lamp switch to «DOOR»

    and control unit.

    position.
    2. Disconnect control unit connector.
    3. Check voltage between control unit terminal @ and ground.

    Battery voltage should exist.
    OK

    CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL.
    1. Connect control unit connector.
    2. Check voltage between control unit terminal @ and ground.

    At least one door is
    opened.

    o

    All doors are closed.

    Approx. 12

    OK

    ,
    Replace control unit.

    EL-81

    Check the following.
    • Door switch
    • Door switch ground condition
    • Harness for open or

    Voltage [V]

    Condition

    NG
    -..

    short between control
    unit and door switch

    III

    INTERIOR ROOM LAMP —

    Without Timer —

    Wiring Diagram —

    ROOM/L-

    EL-ROOM/L-04
    FUSE
    7.5A

    BLOCK Refer
    (JIB)

    00

    to

    EL-POWER.

    ~z~

    @

    I

    ~ ~Ox

    0::>

    — — — FPC CONNECTOR

    22

    13

    28

    29

    30

    31

    32

    0
    9

    4

    0:

    0
    0
    0

    5

    0
    0

    0

    24

    ~a:

    00

    @

    Zt-:

    ~<:(

    ~

    LLO

    —l

    -l<:(0

    0
    -l

    W

    ~LL

    ~~

    C)

    8

    3

    39 40 34

    38 42

    HEL188A

    EL-84

    METER AND GAUGES
    Combination Meter/Without Tachometer

    @

    ,

    I

    o
    DIODE

    RESISTOR

    ~

    ,~

    I

    1—1
    1—1

    12

    ,—I

    I

    :c:::=sr=,’

    51

    I

    I

    1-‘

    I

    A

    @f~@@l

    o

    °OO@)

    o

    9

    g

    0

    Q

    o

    I

    »

    .:

    O~

    A

    g •g

    0

    c:::AJ gg

    g

    9

    o
    0

    g

    FPC connector
    4

    25

    16

    27

    24

    18

    22

    ~

    «5

    III

    .0

    ~
    ~
    FPC CONNECTOR

    a:
    w

    z

    z

    0

    0

    ~

    ~~

    a:~
    w~

    tu3
    ~::::!

    20

    ~

    8~
    ….J….J

    o::::!

    tuz

    ~o
    9::~

    a:z

    ~~

    03
    O::::!

    ~

    z

    ()

    ~

    I

    «
    w
    co

    ….J

    CD

    z

    u.

    I

    :J

    0

    a:

    ~co

    0

    ….J
    ()

    F

    Oa:

    a:

    «

    ~

    C)

    0

    C)

    FPC CONNECTOR

    I
    3

    28

    15

    52
    u.

    VEHICLE
    SPEED
    SENSOR

    B/R

    ~

    ~

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout
    L

    page) .

    ~

    ~m

    ~GY

    F1i2i3TiI~

    tm1IIID

    ~~

    8

    t?J

    GY

    HEL190A

    EL.86

    METER AND GAUGES
    Wiring Diagram — METER -/LHD
    Tachometer (Cont’d)

    Models With

    EL-METER-02
    ~

    FUEL
    ~
    GAUGE

    TACHOMETER

    ~
    ~
    — — — — — — — — — — — FPC CONNECTOR

    ~WATER
    ~
    TEMP.
    GAUGE

    — — — — — — — — — —

    COMBINATION

    METER
    @

    UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT (With
    speedometer
    and ado/trip meter)
    — — — — — — — — — — FPC CONNECTOR

    112’;1

    1~21

    ~

    LiaR

    pu/w

    G

    I

    I
    G

    t

    PU/W
    db (BID
    I~I~
    PU/W

    m(][)
    ‘iJ@
    G

    0

    GS

    — — — — — — — —

    G

    LIOR

    rm

    Ji21rn~
    ~@

    TACHO

    L/OR

    m

    ECM
    (ECCS
    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    I

    ——@: @)

    ~

    FUEL
    TANK
    GAUGE
    UNIT
    (B18)

    L/OR

    B/W

    m

    In
    i.J 1

    TACHO

    ECM

    (ECCS
    CONTROL

    B/W

    MODULE)

    —CED:@

    ~

    ~~(][)
    5 6 yal~1112

    Diesel

    engine

    Gasoline

    engine

    SR eng ine
    GA eng ine and
    CD engine

    I

    CD

    L/ORIGA’rn

    @>:
    @:
    @:
    @:

    B

    +1
    ~t

    PU/W~
    ~~
    ~~

    PU/W~
    ~~
    1Ci=l1:E

    PU/W

    PU/W~

    I

    PU/W

    m

    B

    THERMAL
    TRANSMITTER
    (E211)

    @
    Refer ta last page
    (Faldout page) .

    III

    W

    F1f2T3l41~

    ~~

    rnrnrmJ

    ~GY

    B

    HEL191A

    EL-87

    METER AND GAUGES

    Wiring Diagram — METER -/LHD
    Without Tachometer

    Models

    EL-METER-03
    FUSE

    7.5A

    Refer

    to

    BLOCK
    EL-POWER.
    (J/B)

    1241

    ~

    IIN~71

    1——

    p

    PU/R

    rr?su

    rrf71l

    PU/R

    ~

    +

    To EC-VSS

    WATER
    TEMP.
    GAUGE

    —FPC CONNECTOR —

    COMBINATION
    METER
    ~
    ~

    UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT (With
    speedometer and ado/trip meter)
    — — — — — — — — — — — — FPC CONNECTOR — — — — — — — — — — — 112•61

    ~

    ~

    m@
    CiJ@

    BIR

    G

    PU/W

    PU/W

    G

    IitlJ FUEL
    TANK

    GAUGE
    UNIT

    ~

    BIR

    ~

    (fgl)

    ffi

    THERMAL
    TRANSMITTER
    (E211)

    B

    i.J J

    SENSOR

    ~

    B

    ,…,~

    PU/W

    In

    B/W

    I

    PU/W~

    ~m>

    (B18)

    B/W

    VEHICLE
    SPEED

    ruo

    ~~
    I~I~

    ~

    @

    r——————————,

    Refer to last page

    ~CMID

    (Faldout

    page) .

    ~w

    L

    ~~

    rnmzmJ

    ~

    ~~
    B

    tgj

    GY

    e

    ~
    GY

    HEL192A

    EL-88

    METER AND GAUGES
    Wiring Diagram —

    METER -/RHD Models With

    Tachometer

    @~

    EL-METER-04
    FUSE
    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    Refer to
    EL -POWER.

    ~

    I—PU/A.

    To EC-VSS

    PU/R

    rrT3n
    COMBINATION
    METER
    UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT (With
    speedometer and odoltrip meter)

    @
    @)
    @

    FPC CONNECTOR

    112.81
    R/Y

    TACHO

    W
    In
    i.J 1
    (B18)

    B/W

    L/OR
    ~

    TANK
    GAUGE
    UNIT

    ~

    ECM

    (ECCS
    CONTROL

    B/W

    MODULE)

    ‘———’em : @

    @

    I
    I

    ,.J!L,~
    i FUEL

    ECM

    IUE»‘

    @>: Diesel engine
    @: Gasoline engine
    @: GA engine for
    Australia
    @: Gasoline engine
    except @
    *1.’.@2 , @3

    8

    B

    ~
    pu/w~

    pu/w

    rn TRANSMITTER
    THERMAL

    (E211)

    @

    Refer to last page
    (Faldaut

    ~~

    rnNIZlID

    B

    Gfm)

    page) .

    ([@
    GY

    HEL194A

    EL-90

    METER AND GAUGES
    Wiring Diagram — METER -/RHD
    Without Tachometer

    Models
    @~

    EL-METER-06
    FUSE Refer

    7.5A

    to

    BLOCK EL-POWER.
    (JIB)

    1241

    ~

    I

    IN~71
    p

    PUlA

    Iffafl

    rrffil

    PU/R~

    To EC-VSS

    WATER

    ~

    TEMP.

    GAUGE

    —FPC CONNECTOR —

    COMBINATION
    METER
    ~
    ~

    UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT (With
    speedometer and ado/trip meter)
    — — — — — — — — — — — — FPC CONNECTOR — — — — — — — — — — — 2•61

    lhl=ll

    11

    B/R

    ~

    R/V

    ~CBID~

    G

    rrI5i1@

    I~~—~~I

    I
    I
    R/Y

    I
    iCiJl
    R
    I
    A

    rrh

    ffi

    R/V

    ffi FUEL
    TANK
    GAUGE

    UNIT
    ~

    ~
    (f@

    (B18)

    B/W

    In

    B/W

    B

    8

    t..J 1

    VEHICLE
    SPEED
    SENSOR

    B/R

    pu/w

    G

    R

    ICZJ~~

    ~@D

    ~@)

    9F-

    (I

    W
    tt-

    NATS
    IMMU

    ~
    CD

    ASS

    ASS

    CONTROL
    UNIT
    OIL
    OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
    FUEL
    FUEL TANK GAUGE UNIT

    DOOR

    FRONT DOOR SWITCH
    (Driver

    side)

    FRONT DOOR SWITCH
    (f)

    (Passenger

    I

    I
    U

    …-

    w
    ({)

    ~t-

    u..

    H

    REAR DOOR SWITCH LH

    :J

    (J)a:
    «

    side)

    21-

    O(f)
    H

    REAR DOOR SWITCH RH

    …-c..

    HO
    Z

    SELT

    t9Z
    HO

    WARNING
    BUZZER

    AU

    UNIT

    (f)
    r-i

    Q)

    U
    0

    PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

    E
    c

    co

    u

    BRAKE VACUUM SWITCH

    Q)
    (J)

    u
    c

    co

    co

    .rl
    r-i

    Q)

    0.
    0
    L
    ::J

    O.>
    C
    Q)

    C

    .rl

    co

    OJ

    +-‘

    (1)

    c..
    ::J

    «

    L
    0

    L
    0

    u.. u..

    Ol
    C

    I

    .r-i

    OJ

    r-i

    0

    .c

    (1)

    r-i

    (f)
    (1)

    .0
    U
    +-‘

    C

    .r-i

    co

    w

    C

    (f)

    w

    .r-i

    0

    co

    c..

    0
    0

    (f)

    u

    (!)

    LD

    co

    ALTERNATOR

    .YU

    FUEL FILTER SWITCH
    MALFUNCTION
    INDICATOR

    I

    III

    ECM
    (ECCS

    CONTROL
    MODULE)

    GLOW

    AIR BAG
    AIR BAG
    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR
    UNIT

    HEL196A

    EL-101

    WARNING LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram Tachometer

    WARN -/LHD

    Models With

    EL-WARN-01
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    ……

    HIGH

    _-

    rm

    ~

    FLUID
    LOW LEVEL

    PRESSURE SWITCH
    HIGH ……
    _PRESSURE

    ~

    @)

    c!J~

    B

    a

    -!-

    -!-

    IEC’?\

    ~@
    Y/R

    I

    00
    wI1

    LIB

    I
    _II

    BRAKE
    VACUUM

    Y IR

    Y/R

    SWITCH

    B

    LOW

    ~O~

    BRAKE

    lbjJJ

    ViS

    ~

    ~~
    Y/R

    Y/a

    Y/e

    RELEASED

    ~

    I JUNCTION

    2.0

    ~

    A8S

    E

    IOOJ
    FAIL

    ABS
    CONTROL

    LAMP

    UNIT
    (Refer to
    BR-ABS.)

    ‘——….,j

    m m

    ([fID

    ALTERNATOR
    ~~:@
    (ID@:@

    ~~
    8

    !~:@
    @):@

    r———————————,

    I

    :

    ~

    II-1-,2-,-31~~7—,8—, 9-‘1-01

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Fa Idout

    W

    I

    @ , (E10!)

    ~—~——————————~

    CM19)

    &@
    ~
    GY

    ~CB[)~
    ~W’W

    page) .

    F.=I~
    ~
    GY

    ~
    , B

    ~~
    ~B

    ([fID

    r———————-,
    fIffi1
    Y/R

    ~~I

    ViS

    ……

    3 4

    Y/B

    uillCMID
    ~

    113•91

    2
    ALTERNATOR
    ~~

    ~

    ~:@

    8

    ~

    ~m

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    page) .

    m@

    m

    ~———————————~

    ~~

    f~~-~~-@i:

    rn:mtz:lID 8
    * : This connector
    I ~
    L
    I

    GY

    is

    E

    I
    ~I

    Uj ~~ B

    not shown in

    *
    ‘GY

    ~~~
    5

    6

    TII~

    GY

    1112

    W

    «HARNESSLAYOUT».

    HEL203A

    EL.108

    WARNING LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram — WARN -/RHD
    Tachometer (Cont’d)

    Models With

    EL-WARN-08

    Preceding
    page

    F

    COMBINATION

    METER
    DOOR

    FUEL

    ~

    ~

    1I~21

    ~
    R/W

    G/R

    ffi JOINT
    @:

    5-door Hatchback
    Sedan models

    CONNECTOR-1
    ~

    and

    ~
    R/W ~

    G/R

    R/W ~

    G/R

    IcjJ~-:~- — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ~$I

    i~~-‘

    I

    R/W

    uTI

    R/W

    rrtTI

    REAR

    OPEN

    _CLOSED
    …….

    FRONT

    FUEL

    DOOR

    DOOR
    OPEN

    SWITCH

    _CLOSED

    RH

    …….

    @:@)

    TANK

    SWITCH

    LOW

    DRIVER
    SIDE

    GAUGE
    UNIT

    HIGH

    (B18)

    CW
    ~

    B/W

    OPEN

    _CLOSED
    …….

    REAR

    FRONT

    DOOR

    DOOR
    OPEN

    SWITCH

    _CLOSED

    LH
    ~:@)

    In
    t.J 1

    B/W B

    SWITCH

    PASSENGER
    SIDE
    ~

    …….

    ~

    S

    ~

    ~
    SR

    III

    r———————————,
    rfi2lcw

    W

    B

    ~———————————~
    [1J

    ~@~
    SR’

    SR ‘

    SR

    HEL204A

    EL-109

    WARNING LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram Tachometer

    WARN -/Without

    EL-WARN-09
    FUSE

    Refer to

    BLOCK

    EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    :

    LHD models
    RHO models

    ~

    COMBINATION METER ~

    ~
    Next
    page

    p

    rm

    MALFUNCTION

    OIL

    INDICATOR
    NATS

    SECULITY
    INDICATOR
    ~

    1~31
    P/L

    ~
    G/R

    I

    I

    ~

    OR

    ~O~

    I

    ~:y
    OR

    OR/LIGAn

    ~~

    I~ICEID

    OA/L

    CHID

    OR

    ~J

    1$1~

    I~I

    P/L

    P/L

    P/L
    ,-!-,~

    m

    IMMU

    (Refer to

    ~

    LED-R

    EL-NATS.)

    ~(@

    G/R

    ~
    G/R

    tEi5A

    rm

    ECM(ECCS

    OIL
    LOW PRESSURE
    SWITCH

    HI~H—

    CONTROL

    ~

    MODULE)
    (Refer to
    EC-MIL. )

    ~:
    ~

    G/R

    G/R ~

    Iff6il .Mfu

    P/L ~

    GR/L
    NATS

    (fl0n

    G/R ~
    m
    ~
    ~CID

    ~

    OR

    ‘——

    PIL@

    I$I~
    I
    M1

    P/L@

    : (1)

    (ill
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    ~~:
    @:
    @:

    ~

    LHD models
    RHO models
    Models with dual
    air bag system
    Models with single
    air bag system

    @:@

    r——————————-,

    Refer to last page
    (FoIdout

    L

    page) .

    III

    ~

    r————-.,

    ~~

    rnJIDIOO

    ,m
    :

    8

    ~

    GY

    oW):

    ~

    I

    &._————~
    ~@
    ~w

    * : This

    connector

    is not shown

    I
    I

    *
    in «HARNESS

    LAYOUT».

    HEL206A

    EL-111

    WARNING LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram — WARN -/Without
    Tachometer (Cont’d)

    EL-WARN-11
    Preceding
    page

    ~

    H

    Next

    COMBINATION
    METER

    page

    ~

    BRAKE

    (b): LHD modeIs
    @: RHO mode Is

    ~

    Y/B

    oI

    R

    {>
    Y/B
    20

    2IDJ- Y18
    JUNCTION BOX NO.2
    ~
    112•0 I (JOINT CONNECTORS)
    Y/B ~:
    (b)

    I

    Y 18

    Vis

    rm:i»»

    BRAKE

    UJl~
    Y/S
    ffi

    FLUID

    SWITCH
    ~

    ~

    I

    L.j-J

    Y/S ~

    BRAKE
    LEVEL

    ‘-HIGH

    SWITCH
    ~

    L

    ~*
    B

    ..

    t
    0

    I

    ~

    8

    Irtu CHID
    ’83»

    1c;J1@
    ViS

    LOW FLUID

    LEVEL
    ‘-HIGH

    Y/S

    dbCBID

    ~~

    Y/B

    ffi
    PARKING
    BRAKE

    r,
    I

    s

    PULLED SWITCH

    AELEASElJ

    ~

    8

    ~

    ~

    ern> ffi
    Refe~ to last page

    ~(M5)

    (Foldout

    page) .

    ~W

    m@:@
    ~

    GY

    &@:(b)
    ~
    GY

    HEL207A

    EL-112

    WARNING LAMPS

    Wiring Diagram — WARN -/Without
    Tachometer (Cont’d)

    EL-WARN-12
    Preceding

    J

    page

    COMBINATION
    METER
    @

    DOOR

    B

    ~

    ~

    ~

    ~w

    ~w

    ID106)

    a

    a
    ~
    @QiJ)

    III

    ffi ~

    IDw

    HEL091

    EL-121

    REAR WIPER AND WASHER/LHD MODELS
    Trouble Diagnoses
    REAR WIPER AMP. INSPECTION TABLE
    (Data are reference values.)
    Terminal No.

    Voltage

    Condition

    Item

    (Approximate value)

    00
    1

    or

    Washer switch

    WASH

    Less than 1V

    OFF

    Approx. 12V

    INT

    Less than 1V

    OFF, ON or WASH

    Approx. 12V

    Rear wiper switch

    ~

    00
    or

    Intermittent switch

    2

    Rear wiper switch

    ~

    00

    or

    Power supply

    4

    Approx. 12V

    ~
    5

    00
    6

    or

    Wiper relay

    ~

    ~
    ~

    Ground

    Rear wiper switch
    should be placed in
    «WASH» or «INT» to
    inspect the value for
    wiper movement.

    Rear wiper amp.
    connector

    ~
    ~

    SEL589V

    EL-122

    Wiper is moving

    Less than 1V

    Wiper stop

    Approx. 12V

    REAR WIPER AND WASHER/RHO MODELS
    System Description
    WIPER OPERATION
    The rear wiper switch is controlled by a ring built into the combination switch.
    There are two wiper switch positions:
    • ON (LO speed)

    INT (Intermittent)
    With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
    • through 10A fuse (No. ~ , located in the fuse block)
    • to rear wiper motor terminal @ , and
    • to rear wiper amplifier terminal

    ~

    Next page

    ~

    B

    ~

    Refe~ to last page
    (FaIdaut

    page) .

    III

    ~ffim
    ~

    GY

    J

    GY

    HEL216A

    EL-127

    HEADLAMP WIPER AND WASHER
    Wiring Diagram — HUWIP —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-HL/WIP-02
    To EL-ILL+

    RIG

    m CMIDPU/R

    Preceding

    ~

    PU/R -t1~

    page

    ~

    ~

    ….

    ..

    PUIR

    rm

    ON

    ~

    lki=JJ

    L/OR

    ~

    L

    ~8~

    m,CBID
    I

    Preceding

    page

    ~

    ~

    L

    L

    ~

    HEADLAMP
    WIPER
    AND WASHER
    ILL .~ SWITCH

    ON
    ___e

    ~
    8

    ~

    L/W

    1……… —_

    rm

    OFF

    OFF

    OFF

    RIG

    8

    —-1
    I

    B

    ..

    ffi
    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-3

    L/OR -t75j’L- L/OR

    ¥!i

    ~

    I
    I

    ~

    L/W ~9~

    ~

    ,…,
    8

    L/W

    I

    8

    ~
    ~~

    a

    8

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    @
    G

    G/Y

    I

    G/Y

    ~JII

    G/Y

    ~

    ~O,

    G/Y

    1>

    (MID

    m

    G~Y

    I$I~CID

    SPIRAL
    CABLE
    (108)

    G/Y

    rF!ll

    8

    AIR

    8AG

    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR

    UNIT
    @

    i——I

    1
    QJ1
    QJ
    G

    G

    HORN

    HORN

    (LOW)

    (HIGH)

    -=-

    HORN
    SWITCH

    _-»

    RE- …….
    LEASED

    ~

    …….

    _-»

    HORN
    SWITCH

    RELEASED

    ([B)

    Refer to last page

    mrn>

    [ill]

    W

    R1~
    l2J

    :

    EL-PDWER.

    RHO models
    For Europe
    Except for Europe
    For Australia
    Except for Australia
    @: With tachometer
    @: Without tachometer
    *1
    @ 23 @ 18

    (JIB)

    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:

    ~

    COMBINATION
    METER

    DIGITAL

    *2
    @ 21 ‘@ 22
    *3
    @ 25 ‘@ 28
    *4 .. · @ B ,’@ BR/Y

    ~:@
    @ID:@

    CLOCK

    2•01

    11*.31

    11

    B/R

    *4

    I
    O~»——BR/Y+
    ~

    To illumination
    control
    switch

    (Refer to EL-ILL.)

    8

    m
    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1
    ~
    ~
    B

    1

    e-o~ol
    I <:
    R

    B/R

    ~

    8

    B

    :>

    B

    8

    1 1— 1

    1

    1

    ~@

    @

    Refer to last page

    ~

    (FaIdaut

    BR

    page) .

    r—————————————,
    L

    ~

    HEL220A

    EL-131

    II

    REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
    Wiring Diagram — DEF -/LHD
    Daytime Light System

    Models with

    EL-DEF-01

    FUSE

    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    ~
    (E106)
    (120)

    IIP•21

    @:
    @:

    LIB
    ~3
    If311

    n

    Gasoline engine
    Diesel engine

    REAR
    WINDOW

    DEFOGGER

    U RELAY
    ~

    ~

    L/R ~}

    ~

    Next page

    L/R ~

    RIG

    r-

    REAR
    WINDOW
    DEFOGGER
    TIMER

    + To

    .(S> Next

    B

    rn

    REAR

    t

    DEFOGGER
    SWITCH
    OFF-

    ~

    IL 1J1

    T

    ~

    i Ll_ »
    t

    Am>~

    T

    [ID]

    GY

    L

    W

    fTI2i3l~

    rn:rnrn

    B

    t I
    ~
    ~~

    B

    ~

    Refer to last page

    ~
    W

    B

    8

    e
    f4i3l~

    page

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR
    -3
    ~

    WINDOW

    ~~~

    r1TIT11~
    ITIIITl

    EL-ILL

    B

    GIS

    B

    —-

    .-.

    OUTPUT
    RR

    ~

    ——

    G/R

    G

    ~

    L/R —-

    (Foldout

    page) .

    SR

    L

    HEL221A

    EL.132

    REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
    Wiring Diagram — DEF -/LHD Models with
    Daytime Light System (Cont’d)

    EL-DEF-02
    FUSE

    EL-POWER.

    (J/B)

    Preceding

    ~

    page

    ~

    ~/R __

    ~

    @: Sedan models
    @) : Hatchback models

    Refer to

    BLOCK

    JUNCTION

    ,

    (JOINT

    BOX No.2

    CONNECTORS)

    ~
    G/R~G/R

    ~

    t
    1

    47/R
    ~

    Preceding

    page

    L/R

    L/R

    I~ICQD

    I~I@

    G/A

    G/R

    ,..I…, DOOR
    2MIRROR

    ,..I…, DOOR
    2MIRROR

    Irfll~

    •I

    ~~~

    L/R
    I.. L/R

    -(Q

    ~,~

    B

    -1

    i REAR

    W

    WINDOW
    DEFOGGER

    -I-

    -I~

    ~

    ~+
    W

    5

    r————,
    I

    ~

    B

    I

    rg)

    I

    ~I

    B

    ~————~
    CAUTION:

    L

    :
    I

    .cw ~
    GY

    <€)-

    .J

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-i
    ~

    f,
    B

    B

    1 1

    IC!JI~

    P

    GY/R

    I

    P

    L

    rttil

    rrfoTI

    BACK

    ACe

    I

    GY/R

    m
    ANT

    RRSP
    RH (+)

    ~

    RRSP

    RRSP

    RH (-)

    I

    LG

    ~

    BIY

    RIG

    I

    It

    OR (MID SIP

    LG

    SlY

    OR C@ SIP

    LG

    SlY

    l:-RIG: To

    IcjJ~-~:-tiJ~————~~~— tiJl

    I I

    I I

    B/P

    ~

    @:
    @:

    B/Y

    REAR
    SPEAKER
    RH

    ~

    REAR
    SPEAKER
    LH

    ~:@

    5 6

    ~:@I
    1112

    W

    W

    ~

    [IIg] BA • BA

    * : This

    Hatchback
    Models

    modeIs

    with

    4-speaker

    I
    I

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    page) .

    I
    ~I

    L

    [Q]~

    EL-ILL

    ~:@

    r————————,

    (E~@
    Jfil910

    ~

    SW

    ~

    J

    It

    LIGHTING

    LH (-)

    ~

    B/P

    J

    RRSP

    LH (+)

    ~

    OR

    RADIO
    @

    SIGNAL

    UP

    [i]~

    rn

    w

    *

    connector is not shown in «HARNESS LAYOUT».

    HEL223A

    EL-134

    AUDIO
    Wiring Diagram — AUDIO -/LHD

    Models

    (Cont’d)

    EL-AUDIO-02
    RADIO
    FRSP

    RH (+)

    RH (-)

    FRSP
    LH (+)

    LH (-)

    U4JJ

    lbiJ

    U::i=U

    lkjdJ

    FRSP

    BIR

    If

    SR

    B/W

    L

    If

    It
    BIR

    L

    B/W

    ff1=n

    rr1l1

    ff1=n

    rr1l1

    U4JJ

    t

    f

    @:

    Models with
    6-speaker

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR

    -3
    ~

    -1

    ~
    B/R

    SR

    [L(e;

    It

    SR

    lbiJ
    BIR

    ~

    FRSP

    ~
    S/W

    L

    t

    U4JJ

    t

    ~

    ~u

    B/W

    L

    t

    f

    [?~
    (e;[L

    ~
    ~

    ~(e;

    !Au
    ~!A
    L

    CMD

    B/W

    IriJ~
    -~:-~.I
    CQD
    L

    M

    B/W

    ~[ffi

    ~u
    [ffi~

    ~u
    ~!A
    Refer to last page
    (Faldaut page) .

    ~~
    SR

    ‘ BR

    W/L ~Dt-

    tlI..
    —-.~

    ~

    -0—

    CBD

    _

    L/W @L/W——-L/W-e>NextPage

    PW
    WP

    0-

    B

    ~

    ~

    B

    -.-O-ec-O~

    I <:

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-1 ~

    (b):
    @:
    @:
    @:

    8

    LHD models
    RHO models
    With power window

    Without

    8

    R

    :>
    1

    B

    B

    1 1— 1

    power window

    ~

    ~
    PU/W-@>

    i-,

    8
    ~
    ~~

    8

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Feldeut

    ~GID

    page) .

    ~

    ~GY

    8R

    HEL227A

    EL.142

    POWER DOOR MIRROR
    Wiring Diagram — MIRROR -/LHD
    (Cont’d)

    Models

    EL-MIRROR-02
    <& LIB
    <@-

    L/R

    Next
    page

    ~

    I

    Y/R ~

    ‘i n
    S

    -€>

    ~

    8

    B

    ~

    PU/W-Q>

    B

    1 1…11

    ~~

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Fa Idout

    ~CHID

    page) .

    ~
    SR

    ~GY

    HEL229A

    EL-144

    POWER DOOR MIRROR
    Wiring Diagram — MIRROR -/RHD
    (Cont’d)

    Models

    EL-MIRROR-04
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:

    —-.—

    W/B

    ——————.—

    s/w
    .—

    f.
    a
    ~
    ~~

    S/Y

    -@>
    -(9)
    -@>

    Next page

    8

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    HEL231A

    EL.146

    HEATED SEAT
    Wiring Diagram —

    H/SEAT —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-H/SEA T-02

    @~

    ~W

    Preceding
    page

    B/Y

    <0- W/B
    <€)OOD
    ~ (!)ro.rl
    OWCLoo
    CLa:-

    r—-

    I
    tH
    ~tUJa:
    <{
    U

    ztOU)

    W
    CJ)
    ::>
    LL

    ~

    0 -~
    010
    0

    .r-t
    (J)

    0

    HO

    t-a:
    HW
    ::>~

    a:w
    Ha:

    >-

    uro

    t-

    r;:;l

    ~<{

    °

    WO«
    ~Z-.J
    OHW
    CL~a:

    a: ::>0 Q.CJ)°

    Ht-I
    ~Ha:
    zO — 0
    3:
    0- 0
    a: en a:
    WI«
    0 — —0
    3:CDW
    ::>10o:Jer
    CLen°

    Q)
    1J
    .r-t

    Za:OO
    HO
    3:t-c…
    «0)
    a:-.J>
    W::> .r-t
    3:(!)c…
    CWO
    Q.a:-

    I

    ~

    10- 0Q
    OI
    zu_ 00

    1010OI
    zu_ 00

    ~
    a:Or

    ~II

    3:

    0

    ZCI:_
    HOI
    ~~a:
    <{
    a:-.Ja:
    W::><{
    3:t9W
    ower
    CLa:-

    0

    OIc…
    ZUO)
    zO — ~k)
    Ht- OJ
    0
    ~HC
    3:0)
    OQ
    0
    a:(f)OO
    ::>0 — 0
    WIOO
    ~CDro
    O:JQ.
    Q.CJ)—

    a:
    W

    I

    0)

    «‘D

    t-c…
    HO
    Z
    (!)Z

    <{
    ~t9W
    ower
    CLa:-

    °0

    .r-t

    L.

    9

    0

    -0

    °D

    z

    0

    00

    00

    0)

    D
    00

    0

    rl

    E

    D
    0

    0
    I

    Q.)

    E

    .Y

    -.J

    .Y

    a:
    W

    Z
    H
    «

    W
    (f)W
    CJ)O
    «H
    CLUJ

    ~

    3:
    0

    H

    u
    ro ro

    ~

    .0

    a:
    W
    3:

    u

    .0

    .c .c
    u

    +J

    u

    +J
    10

    ro
    I I
    c…L.

    o

    0
    «‘0
    1

    0
    0
    «‘0
    1

    (Y’)

    (T)

    .. ..

    @~

    Z

    10- 00

    :J

    10- -0

    0

    0

    Cl.
    W

    …J
    «
    :J
    Z
    Z

    0 «
    H :::E
    CJ)

    -.J

    a

    tI

    v’V

    v v

    10D

    Q.

    0 -fa

    2:
    0

    t:J

    :J

    100

    ••
    ~
    r;;,
    ~

    -0

    Z

    +oJ

    Z<{

    III

    <{

    W::J
    0-

    t::.H

    A A A

    <{

    a:
    WI
    0 0
    >u
    H:J
    a: 0 ……..

    o

    …J
    CLW
    ::>cr

    0 °

    :x::
    IU
    u ZO
    :x::t- :J…J
    UH
    :x::
    03:
    -.JCJ) U0
    …J

    z

    >-

    <{

    ….J

    I

    0

    »

    01010~k)

    0

    C!)
    Z

    ~

    -10— D-

    U

    tH
    ~
    (f)

    4~

    n

    ()

    :J

    I

    rl

    ()

    I

    L.

    ~

    .r-t

    00

    ~…J
    ow
    ocr

    — ~

    00
    V

    D

    (jl

    Z<{

    a:
    «
    W
    a:

    co

    >-

    I :0

    0

    I

    ~~

    If)tD

    :J 0 — -0

    HEL270A

    EL-149

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW -/LHD

    Models

    EL-WINDOW-01

    FUSE

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    ~
    W
    1

    CIRCUIT
    BREAKER

    [L~

    SWITCH

    ~

    ~

    G/W

    EL — WINDOW

    -01

    ~

    ~

    /t~(…o.! ~ i$l~—————-il$~—i$/

    To

    <::’Cl.~
    I

    Y/R

    G/B

    Y/B

    ~~

    Qtl)

    G/W

    L/W

    GIB

    dbQWdb@db

    Y/R

    Y/B

    db

    db

    VIR ~

    ViS

    ~~

    1l4J1(0) ICiJ~fS4 5″ iEi1~ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — il4J~ — — — i~1
    L/W

    ….

    _~—.-~—..

    ~

    L/W

    <[U)

    GIS

    Im~
    -~- ffi
    ~ <[U)

    I

    [
    L/W ~

    G/W ~

    hll~~o_ ~ml
    ,…. ~
    ,…

    t

    1t

    GIB

    L/W G/W

    ‘»»r

    G/W

    1

    G/B

    ~

    ~

    t

    L/W G/W

    mm

    ~

    G/W

    L/W ~

    m

    L/W

    POWER
    WINDOW
    SUBSWITCH
    (REAR RH)

    mm

    ~[L

    GIB

    [MiJu

    t

    !Au

    GIS

    m

    POWER
    WINDOW
    SUB-

    SWITCH
    (REAR LH)

    ~

    ~

    :

    With rear
    power window

    ~

    m
    G

    ~

    CQZ)
    W

    ~~

    ~

    W’

    W

    t

    -…

    DOWN

    W

    ~~~

    B

    (REAR LH)

    DOWN

    ~

    B@~@>
    l..!.@

    POWER
    WINDOW
    REGULATOR

    (REAR RH)

    UP

    3456

    ~~

    POWER
    WINDOW
    REGULATOR

    W

    W

    FIT2l@
    rmJ w

    UP

    ~

    Refe~ ta last page
    (FaIdout page) .

    ‘ B

    HEL102

    EL-153

    M

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram —

    WINDOW -/RHO

    Models

    EL-WINDOW-05

    FUSE

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    BLOCK
    (J/B)

    ~
    W
    1

    CIRCUIT
    BREAKER
    ~

    l!:j:n

    ~

    W/L

    IEin7

    ~’E!QY
    G

    @: With rear

    IUIII CHID
    W/L

    m mn

    power

    Window

    POWER

    WINDOW
    U RELAY

    ~~([@
    B

    !
    m

    L/W

    1

    —-I

    I._II(

    JOINT

    ()…- __

    L111 ~~~ECTOR-1

    ~I

    ,

    -{8>

    Next page

    … L/W ~

    ~

    To EL-WINDDW-07

    .. L/W ~

    To EL-WINDDW-OB

    L/W

    ~~_

    B

    I

    n
    1 t..J 1
    1-,
    B

    888

    @(MW

    ~

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    ~
    8R

    HEL234A

    EL-154

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    WINDOW -/RHD

    Models
    @~

    EL-WINDOW-06

    I

    ~~
    [g[MiJ

    L/W

    Ii8TIlCHD
    ~(]I)

    @: With rear power window

    L/W

    @: Without rear power window

    ~~

    I
    m
    L/W

    [g~

    AUTO

    MANUAL

    N

    POWER
    WINDOW
    MAIN
    SWITCH
    @:@

    UP
    RELAY

    N

    ILL

    U

    CQV:@

    ….
    ~

    ~
    B

    I
    B

    r, n
    B

    ~~

    G

    ~u
    POWER WINDOW
    REGULATOR
    (FRONT DRIVER
    SIDE)

    ..- ~
    DOWN UP

    W,gj

    8

    @)

    I

    CAUTION:

    ~U

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    :~W
    L.

    ~~

    ~

    I~@:(@)

    ~@)

    _.

    CHD , (]I)

    Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC) . If the FFC is damaged, replace with
    a new one.

    HEL235A

    EL-155

    !ku

    M

    r—————————————,

    I

    [MiJu

    ~!k

    G

    B

    1 t.J 1

    t[L

    ~

    L

    L

    I

    ~(MW

    Next
    page

    t
    m m

    B

    B

    L

    t

    I$ICQD
    CHD
    B

    ~~

    Next
    page

    AUTO AMP

    II

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram — WINDOW -/RHO

    Models

    (Cont’d)

    EL-WINDDW-07
    Preceding

    PASSENGER

    K

    SIDE SWITCH

    page

    POWER

    WINDOW

    LOCK .,—

    Preceding
    page

    N

    UNLOCK

    SWITCH
    @):@

    CQD:

    L
    ~

    :

    ~:

    3-door Hatchback models
    With rear power window

    @:

    Without

    rear

    t

    m
    G

    power window

    POWER WINDOW
    REGULATOR
    (FRONT PASSENGER

    .DOWN

    —.
    UP

    SIDE)
    ~

    ~——————————,

    Refer to last page

    I

    I~@)

    :~@

    I
    L
    I

    (FaIdout

    page) .

    W
    ~

    ~~
    ~W

    CAUTION:

    Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged, replace with
    a new one.

    HEL545

    EL-156

    POWER WINDOW
    Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    WINDOW -/RHO Models

    EL-WINDOW-OB
    Preceding {

    M

    page

    POWER
    WINDOW
    MAIN
    SWITCH
    D
    U
    ——REAR LH

    CQI):@

    SWITCH
    ~
    T

    .

    Ee -WINDOW
    -05

    4 ••

    ~
    G/8

    G/W

    ~

    Y IR

    Y 18

    Y/R

    Y/B

    It~
    (P~~ it~
    —————-1$~- — — 1$1
    CHI)

    L/W

    G/W

    L/1W

    ~@)

    GIS

    db,@db,GIDdb,
    I~I

    3

    ..J

    r-1

    ~
    ~

    co

    ~u
    L
    ro

    3

    U

    C

    u

    W

    OC
    LCO
    O.rl.rl
    +oJ+oJ+’

    H
    (f)

    :JLQ)
    +oJQ)L
    uo ….

    COCOU

    0

    a::

    «au

    a:

    ::x:::
    UO
    O(f)
    .-JZ
    ZUJ
    :JUJ

    W

    >

    H
    ([

    0

    U

    Q)

    .;.

    ~

    IT
    0
    t4
    :J
    tU

    U

    a
    ..J

    C
    Q)

    C
    ::::>

    L

    L

    o

    lU.rl

    OJ

    ~ E:J~
    c.nc…uco
    c… OJ
    (J)£:,.»»c…
    1»»»’4(1)

    +J

    U1

    /c:

    a: r-i….

    ….J

    a lO’rl (1J
    .-E:J.:x:
    Ulc…uro
    HWc…W
    Ulr:..rlc…
    a.-un

    a

    ..J

    …..

    0

    a::

    U

    r-1

    ro
    ~~

    t

    0

    ~
    U

    C

    :J

    ‘tJ
    L

    ‘0

    U

    U

    u

    0

    (f)

    a:

    0
    0

    a.-

    a::

    W

    a:
    ([

    .0

    t-

    ‘0

    r-1

    C

    ‘0
    L
    lO
    3
    ::Jl
    U
    ..J

    ~
    o
    +J

    ….J

    4

    0

    …..

    U) £:,.rl
    c…
    a~u.o

    0

    COlOU

    :JLlV
    +JQ)L
    uo ….

    I
    ….J
    4

    C

    ….0

    .-

    ….J

    a:r-i+JL

    «au

    a::

    0
    0
    0

    a: …..
    +JL
    o co.»»
    ~ E:J~
    UJLUIO
    HWc…W

    UJr:..,…

    OJ

    c…

    o.-u.o
    0.-

    (J)

    I

    (f)

    t-CI:
    HW

    ~

    :::>~

    LD

    ~~

    LO

    ~

    to

    ~

    U0:
    w
    II

    C

    FRONT DOOR SWITCH
    PASSENGER SIDE

    (f)

    I

    t-H
    02

    OJ

    c
    OJ

    a:

    CI:W
    OL
    OH
    ot-

    ru

    -4-J

    (f)

    0

    ~
    ~

    E

    OJ
    D
    0

    E

    ro

    ~
    u

    um

    r-1

    E

    .c
    .+J
    -rl

    ~

    ….J2
    ::>0

    2U

    @~

    HEL237A

    EL-160

    POWER DOOR LOCKIForEurope and Australia
    Wiring Diagram —

    D/LOCK -/LHD

    Models

    EL-D/LOCK-01
    @:

    5-door Hatchback
    and Sedan models
    Models with multi-remote
    control system

    @:

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    r———.
    W

    CIRCUIT
    BREAKER ~

    L

    m CHID
    W!L 1141~

    W ~

    LOCK
    REQUEST

    UNLOCK
    REQUEST

    ~
    R/L

    ~
    W/R

    W/L

    W!L

    r
    R/W

    R/W ~

    ~

    ~Lt

    SA T
    KEYLESS
    DR & PASS LOCK
    DOOR SW
    INPUT

    -@

    ;;

    M R w~t

    m

    rrffil

    JUNCTION BOX NO.2
    (JOINT CONNECTORS)
    ~

    MULTIREMOTE
    S~~fROL
    @: @

    rm

    KEYLESS
    UNLOCK
    INPUT

    DOOR

    LOCK
    TIMER
    ~

    IUE'»

    db~

    ‘lll’@
    R/W
    I

    i~.—I
    R/W

    FRONT
    DOOR
    SWITCH
    PASSENGER
    SIDE
    ~

    OPEN

    …….

    CLOSED

    OPEN

    _-

    CLOSED

    ~

    Next

    8

    ~

    EL-D/LOCK

    ~

    page

    R/W

    rn
    _-

    …….

    8

    FRONT
    DOOR
    SWITCH
    DRIVER
    SIDE

    rn
    _-

    OPEN

    …….

    CLOSED

    R/W

    rn
    OPEN

    …….

    _-

    CLOSED

    @)

    REAR
    DOOR
    SWITCH

    To
    -03

    RH

    ~
    @

    REAR
    DOOR
    SWITCH
    LH
    ~
    @

    B

    8

    !

    !
    ~

    ~
    Refer to last page

    ~~(]ID
    5 6

    TIliD01112

    (i)1111~~
    87654

    W

    rfi2l@)
    1[f

    8

    UJ

    (Faldout

    page) .

    III

    SR

    ~@~
    SR’

    SA ‘

    SA

    HEL238A

    EL~161

    POWER DOOR LOCK/For Europe and Australia
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK -/LHD
    (Cont’d)

    Models

    EL-D/LOCK-02
    DOOR
    LOCK
    OUTPUT

    DOOR
    UNLOCK
    OUTPUT

    ~

    DR DOOR
    STATE SW

    ~
    W/R

    R/L

    It ti~
    W/R

    RIL

    m
    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-8
    @

    ~

    llj=JJ

    ~
    W/R

    R/L

    ~CMI)

    rm

    rm

    Y/R

    -(9>

    R/L

    W/R-@>

    Next page

    -W/R~
    -R/L~

    AIL

    Y/R ~

    ~

    Y/R

    Y/R

    ~ _ _ _ ~~ _ _ _ _ ~~

    R/L CQD W/R

    ~

    ~

    …..
    …..
    …..
    …..

    I~

    I

    0

    DOOR
    LOCK
    TIMER

    JUNCTION BOX NO.2
    CONNECTORS)

    ~~~)n

    Y18

    m
    LOCKED
    UNLOCKED
    DOOR

    UNLOCK LOCK

    UNLOCK

    DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
    DRIVER SIDE
    @)

    SENSOR

    lhj:JJ
    B
    ~g~~~CTOR-1
    ~

    Preceding

    page

    ~
    ~

    ~

    1$1~~~~

    q==_~B.J

    8

    @: 5-door Hatchback
    and Sedan models

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    £@)

    liY

    GY

    CAUTION:

    Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged, replace with
    a new one.

    HEL239A

    EL-162

    POWER DOOR LOCK/For Europe and Australia
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK -/LHD
    (Cont’d)

    Models

    EL-D/LOCK-03
    DOOR

    LOCK

    TIMER
    PASS DOOR
    STATE SW

    ~

    ~

    Y/B

    ~
    ~

    R/L

    Preceding

    ~

    W/R

    page

    <@-

    W/R

    ~

    I

    ~

    W/R

    ~

    <& AIL

    ~(Hg)
    ICIJIC@
    W/R

    R/L IU7″‘
    ~~
    ICiJIOO)
    R/L

    e—.—….
    I

    AIL @

    W/A

    Y18

    DOOR LOCK

    AIL

    W/A

    Y18

    ~~~~~~~~R
    SIDE

    li~

    0

    ex:

    (3
    0

    2′
    U

    0

    ex:

    (9
    0

    z

    «

    W

    :::>~
    OU

    :::>~

    ex:

    CL
    CL

    ou
    O~

    O

    o~
    W c

    W~

    :::>

    CL

    ::J

    0
    W

    0-

    O~
    o:U

    0

    CL~

    OU
    — ..c
    t-u
    (j)~
    03:

    OC ::J
    t-~

    _

    CU

    (j)~

    (j)o

    OU

    0
    0
    Z-C

    zen

    Z..Q
    (9~

    (9c

    (9~

    ~
    ~

    -0
    0_

    -LL
    0_

    -0
    0_

    X

    X

    Z

    None of the doors lock/unlock when operating any switch.

    CJ-B

    W .~

    ex:_

    ~

    SYMPTOM

    ..c

    ,…..

    «8

    One or more doors are not locked and/or
    unlocked.

    «8

    «e

    X

    Door knob lock switch/key cylinder on
    driver’s door does not operate.

    X

    Door knob lock switch/key cylinder on passenger door does not operate.

    X

    X

    X

    POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

    Power
    Door lock timer connector

    supply

    circuit

    check

    Terminal

    @

    Ignition switch

    EB

    8

    OFF

    ACC

    ON

    @

    Ground

    Battery
    voltage

    Battery
    voltage

    Battery
    voltage

    11

    SEL860UD

    G_r_o_u_n_d_c_i_rc_u_i_t_c_h_e_c_k

    ~Ia IOlsco~
    V ~
    ~OFF

    Door lock
    timer connector @

    Terminals

    Continuity

    @ — Ground

    Yes

    B

    SEL595V

    EL-167

    POWER DOOR LOCK/For Europe and Australia
    Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
    (Door lock actuator check)

    m

    Door lock ti mer
    connector
    @

    letBi~5LEaJ
    W/R

    CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIR-

    Replace control unit.

    NG

    Replace door lock actuator.

    R/L

    SELS96V

    Door lock actuator

    1

    Terminals

    Door knob lock
    switch condition

    EB

    e

    Lock

    @

    ground

    Unlock

    @

    ground

    Voltage
    (V)
    Battery
    voltage

    OK

    connector

    ~

    ~3

    NG

    CUIT.
    Check voltage for door lock actuator.

    Driver:~

    ttfj~1

    3

    Passenger: ~

    ~

    CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR.
    1. Disconnect door lock actuator connector.
    2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock
    actuator and check operation.

    SEL434VB

    Door lock actuator operation

    ~i5

    Door lock actuator

    rn

    ~~3,1

    Unlocked
    Locked

    connector

    -7

    Terminals

    EB

    e

    Locked

    (3)

    CD

    Unlocked

    CD

    (3)

    -7

    OK

    1,3

    RearLH
    Rear RH

    Repair harness between control unit connector and door lock actuator.

    SELS91VA

    EL-168

    POWER DOOR LOCK/For Europe and Australia
    Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
    (Front door unlock sensor check)
    Door lock
    timer connector

    m

    @

    CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR
    VIR

    INPUT SIGNAL.
    Check voltage between control unit termi-

    VIS

    nal @ or

    SEL597V

    0
    0:

    <:3
    0

    2
    u

    :::>
    0
    0:

    ~u
    ~u

    z

    (1)

    C’

    ,-2
    w~
    o:~
    :::>u

    0

    wen
    0:.0
    :::>0
    o c
    w.::£
    0.::£

    w.8
    o «-

    o~

    O~

    OU

    :::>

    O~

    og

    a:

    0:.8
    0..

    a..

    00

    z

    C’~

    a..
    a..

    0:.::£
    o..e..>
    0

    (/)

    W

    Ot)

    O.g

    ~ .::£
    o u
    wf

    Z

    «8
    -0
    0_

    0″00

    z~
    C’~
    « «~
    -0
    0_

    0_

    X

    X

    One or more doors are not locked ,and/or
    unlocked.

    X
    X

    Door lock/unlock switch does not operate.
    Door knob lock switch/key cylinder on
    driver’s door does not operate.

    X

    POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
    Power supply circuit check
    Time control
    unit connector ~

    Terminal

    ~I

    Ignition switch

    E9

    8

    OFF

    ACC

    ON

    @

    Ground

    Battery
    voltage

    Battery
    voltage

    Battery
    voltage

    W/L

    SEL860UC

    Ground circuit check
    _____

    li_e_rm_in_a_ls
    @ — Ground

    Time control
    unit connector@

    ————_……

    I~
    B

    SEL854UE

    EL-174

    E

    Continuity
    Yes

    ————

    POWER DOOR LOCK/Except For Europe and Australia
    Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
    (Door lock/unlock switch check)

    m

    Time control
    unit connector@

    [5S~5¥,’
    PU

    CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK

    IIIIII

    SWITCH

    OK

    GY

    SEL 147VB

    Terminals

    @ — Ground

    PIW main switch
    connector

    CID — Ground

    Door lock!
    unlock switch
    condition

    Continuity

    Lock

    Yes

    N and Unlock

    No

    Unlock

    Yes

    N and Lock

    No

    Door lock/unlock switch is
    OK.

    INPUT SIGNAL.
    1. Disconnect control unit connector.
    2. Check continuity between control unit
    terminal @ or @ and ground.

    ~

    NG

    SEL590V

    CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH.
    1. Disconnect door lock/unlock switch con-

    NG

    Replace door lock/unlock
    switch.

    nector.
    2. Check continuity between power window main switch (Door lock/unlock
    switch) terminals.
    Terminals

    Condition

    14
    )

    Unlock
    No continuity

    N
    Lock

    OK
    Check the following .
    • Ground circuit for door lock/unlock
    switch
    • Harness for open or short between door
    lock/unlock switch and control unit connector

    III

    EL-175

    POWER DOOR LOCK/Except For Europe and Australia
    Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
    (Door lock actuator check)
    Time control
    unit connector

    I~m

    m

    @

    CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIR-

    NG

    CUIT.
    Check voltage for door lock actuator.

    R/L

    W/R

    PROCEDURE

    SEL863UC

    ~i5

    Door lock actuator

    rn

    3,1

    1,3

    ‘—.—‘

    ‘—.—‘

    Replace control unit.
    (Before replacing control
    unit, perform DIAGNOSTIC

    Terminals

    Door lock/unlock
    switch condition

    E9

    e

    Lock

    @

    ground

    Unlock

    @

    ground

    1.)

    Voltage
    (V)
    Battery
    voltage

    OK

    connector

    Passenger~
    RearLH

    ~

    RearRH

    ~

    CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR.
    1. Disconnect door lock actuator connector.
    2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock
    actuator and check operation.
    SEL591V

    Door lock actuator operation
    Unlocked
    Locked

    —7

    Terminals

    E9

    e

    Locked

    @

    CD

    Unlocked

    CD

    @

    —7

    OK
    Repair harness between control unit connector and door lock actuator.

    EL-176

    NG

    Replace door lock actuator.

    POWER DOOR LOCK/Except For Europe and Australia
    Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
    (Driver side door lock knob switch check)
    Time control
    unit connector

    m

    @

    CHECK DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH

    ~

    Driver side door lock knob
    switch is OK.

    ~

    Replace door lock knob
    switch.

    INPUT SIGNAL.
    Check voltage between control unit terminal @ and ground.

    VIR

    SEL861UC

    Driver side door lock
    knob switch condition

    Voltage
    (V)

    Lock

    Approx. 12

    Unlock

    o

    Door lock knob switch

    NG

    connector~

    dfu
    CHECK DOOR LOCK SWITCH.
    1. Disconnect driver side door lock knob
    switch connector.
    SEL435VA

    2. Check continuity between door lock
    knob switch terminals.
    Terminals

    Condition

    Continuity

    Locked

    No

    Unlocked

    Yes

    OK
    Check the following .
    • Ground circuit for door lock knob switch
    • Harness for open or short between door
    lock knob switch and control unit

    III

    EL-177

    POWER DOOR LOCK —

    Super Lock —

    System Description
    OUTLINE
    Power door lock system with super lock and key reminder is controlled by super lock control unit. Super lock
    has a higher anti-theft performance than conventional power door lock systems.
    When super lock is in released condition, lock knob operation locks or unlocks door.
    When super lock is in set condition, lock knob operation cannot lock nor unlock door.

    With super lock set

    With super lock released

    Door key cylinder
    UNLOCK

    LOCK

    <;::::;>

    Door lock knob
    Door knob rod
    Lever B

    Door lock actuator

    assembly
    Door lock actuator

    assembly
    Lever A

    SEL831U

    OPERATION
    Power door lock/unlock and super lock set/release operation by door key cylinder

    With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to LOCK will lock all doors and set super lock
    while all doors are closed or any door is open. (Super lock will not be set while key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.)
    With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to UNLOCK will unlock all doors and release
    super lock.

    Power door lock/unlock and super lock set/release operation by multi-remote controller (If
    equipped)

    Pressing multi-remote controller LOCK button will lock all doors and set super lock while all doors are
    closed and key is not inserted in the ignition key cylinder.
    Pressing multi-remote controller UNLOCK button will unlock all doors and release super lock with key not
    inserted in the ignition key cylinder.

    Power door lock and super lock release operation (by NATS IMMU signal)

    When the super lock is set, turning ignition key switch to ON will release super lock and unlock all doors.

    EL-178

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock System Description (Cont’d)
    Power door lock/unlock operation by lock knob

    With lock knob on driver or passenger door setting to LOCK while all doors are closed will lock all doors.

    @~

    When one or more door is opened, with lock knob on passenger door setting to LOCK will lock
    passenger door only. (Power door lock system will not operate.)

    With lock knob on driver or passenger door setting to UNLOCK while all doors are closed will unlock all
    doors.

    Lock knob operation cannot control super lock.

    Key reminder system

    If the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and any door is open, setting lock/unlock switch or lock
    knob on driver or passenger door to «LOCK» locks the door once but then immediately unlocks all doors.

    System initialisation

    [L~

    ~~

    System initialisation is required when battery cables are reconnected. Conduct one of the followings to
    release super lock once;
    — insert the key into ignition key cylinder and turn it to ON.
    — LOCK/UNLOCK operation using door key cylinder.

    EL-179

    [?~

    POWER DOOR LOCK —

    Super Lock —

    Schematic
    ~

    ~

    UCLr
    00-.J
    -.JI-al

    UCLr
    oO-.J
    -.JI-ffi

    CI::::>W

    a::::JW

    E
    Q)

    ~
    en
    ~

    «L

    «L

    Or-(f)
    OUCf)I
    o

    a:::::>
    otau
    O~

    a..t~u

    U>
    otou
    o

    .,-1

    ua

    O(/)

    ~u

    ..JZ

    ZW

    ::>U>

    -JZ
    zw

    .+J

    o

    -J

    .:;{.

    u

    :;{.

    :::>

    (f)

    ~
    a:o LULU
    WH
    O(f) LU::’::::
    ~o
    ~a:
    Z
    LU~
    H(J) m(/)
    ..J>-([
    lLJ

    L

    c:

    QJ

    r-4

    ::i:.

    r8

    ro

    :::>

    Q)

    u

    U>

    0

    ro

    r-i

    Q)
    r-i
    Q)

    C

    r-i
    Q)

    C

    ::>

    U
    0

    c:

    …JZ
    …J
    :::>0
    u.z

    ~

    UJ

    .:;{.

    ~

    u

    ,8

    Z

    H

    Q)

    0
    ..J

    L

    L

    .+J

    -J

    U>

    u
    0
    ..J

    u
    0

    Q)

    :;{.

    I
    U
    t-

    .::L

    ::;)U>

    ::>

    a:

    uw

    >

    >-H
    wa:

    0:

    Y:O

    ::.::::

    -JO

    ..Ja:

    :::> ……

    LL(fJ

    I
    U
    t-

    ~

    z

    ……

    ..Jz
    H
    …J
    ~
    :::>0
    (f)W u.z

    0
    C(H

    ~

    :J

    E

    ~~
    ~

    -z
    lLJ
    UW
    ::.::::
    ({)
    …JO
    ..Ja:
    >-(/) :::> ……
    W-H
    W3:

    U
    0

    ([

    ..J-.J
    0

    Y:UJ

    >-

    a:
    w
    rr-

    W
    (!)

    a: a:

    z
    w
    c.nW
    W
    HO
    ([H

    I

    u
    rH
    ~IU>CI:

    «

    W

    lD

    ({)

    :J

    Q)

    LL

    («J

    (T)

    LO

    (D

    a:

    0
    0

    0

    O(f)

    ZIO(J)
    H

    I-L
    HO
    Z
    l!:>Z
    HO

    :J
    :E:
    :E:
    H

    Wrr-H
    OZ
    L:J
    W
    a:-.J
    10

    (f)
    r-

    HIT

    Z

    ::>0
    LU

    «

    r-r—.JZ

    HEL251A

    EL-180

    Super Lock —

    POWER DOOR LOCK —

    Wiring Diagram —

    S/LOCK —

    EL-S/LOCK-01

    I

    I

    BATTERY

    I

    FUSE

    Refer to

    BLOCK

    7.5A

    25A

    (JIB)

    124f

    EL -POWER.

    OJ

    ~

    w

    (106)

    IIN;51
    BR

    I

    @:

    Models with

    multi-remote
    control system

    W

    KEY

    ~

    INSERTED SWITCH

    ~1

    ~

    WITHDRAWN

    ~
    ~
    BR/Y
    ~~
    I~~

    IEU1′

    eMs»5 — — — — — — — — —

    BR

    BR/Y

    IGN SW

    KEY SW

    rm

    I

    »
    B

    ~

    BAT

    ~

    B

    1

    Rll

    ffi

    B

    LOCK
    REQUEST

    B

    B

    !

    @ ~

    SUPER LOCK
    CONTROL

    KEYLESS
    UNLOCK
    INPUT
    ~

    f

    ~
    R/L

    n
    LI

    -l1lJl1

    rr1ru
    KEYLESS
    LOCK
    INPUT

    ~

    ~~
    W/L
    ~

    W/L

    m

    GND

    CIRCUIT

    BREAKER

    W/R

    M R

    UNIT
    ~

    f

    ~
    W/R

    rn

    UNLOCK
    REQUEST

    1

    MULTI-REMOTE
    CONTROL UNIT
    ~:@

    Refer to last page

    (ill IlfE~
    8 765

    4

    (Foldout

    page) .

    III

    ~.

    Q)

    _

    ~

    e

    .s=.

    ()

    «‘»».s=.

    -g(f)
    -z

    p

    ()

    Q)

    C/)

    ()

    Q);4:

    CJ)

    ~~

    o

    o>C 0
    Q)

    0

    «C

    ~ Q)
    E

    o

    -0:
    CL_

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X

    Super lock cannot be set by one of

    X

    X

    X

    *Super lock cannot be released by
    ignition key switch. (Signal from

    X

    NATS IMMU)
    9

    Specific super lock actuator does not
    operate.

    10

    *Key reminder system does not
    operate.

    11

    Super lock cannot be set/released
    by using multi-remote controller.

    X

    X

    X

    X

    X: Applicable
    *: Make sure the power door lock system operates properly.

    EL-186

    ()

    ::;2

    X

    door key cylinders.
    *Super lock cannot be released by
    one or both door key cylinders.

    1:5
    co

    «—5
    Q) 0
    ()
    Q) 0
    0

    0

    0

    ro:J

    -c
    .~

    Q)

    C/)

    Q)

    ()

    ()

    ()

    .

    .s=.

    ~

    ~

    Q)

    .s=.

    ()

    ~

    a.
    Q.

    ()

    ~

    :J

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
    POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
    Main power supply circuit check
    Super lock control
    connector @

    []

    lQ11

    I I I ~
    I I J

    unit

    Ignition switch position

    Terminals

    I I I I II
    I I I ..

    W/L

    63

    8

    @

    Ground

    OFF

    ACC

    ON

    Battery

    Battery

    Battery

    voltage

    voltage

    voltage

    SEL811UC

    Ground circuit check
    Super lock control
    connector @

    II

    I I I II II ~[

    I

    unit

    Terminals

    Continuity

    @ — Ground

    Yes

    £!l]

    116

    B

    SEL812UC

    III

    EL-187

    Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

    POWER DOOR LOCK —

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
    (Door unlock sensor check)

    ~i)@a
    Super lock control
    connector @

    m

    unit

    CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR
    INPUT SIGNAL.
    Check voltage between control unit termi-

    Qfi4i5Kj I I I I II

    ~_J

    III

    VIR

    ..

    VIS

    ~

    Door unlock sensor is OK.

    ~

    Replace door lock actuator
    assembly.

    nals @ or CID and ground.
    Terminals
    -SEL813UC
    Driver
    side

    Front door lock actuator

    assembly

    connectors

    @),~

    Passenger
    side

    Ee

    8

    @

    Ground

    @

    Condition

    Voltage
    [V]

    Locked

    Approx.
    5

    Unlocked

    0

    Locked

    Approx.
    5

    Unlocked

    0

    Ground

    NG

    SEL814UC

    CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR.
    1. Disconnect door unlock sensor connector.
    2. Check continuity between door unlock
    sensor terminals.
    Terminals

    Condition

    Continuity

    Locked

    No

    Unlocked

    Yes

    OK
    Check the following .
    • Door unlock sensor ground circuit
    • Harness for open or short between control unit and door unlock sensor

    EL-188

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
    (Door key cylinder switch check)
    Super

    lock

    connector

    control

    CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
    INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK SIGNAL).
    Check voltage between control unit termi-

    1 I I II

    [11 I 1 I Id
    ~ I I I

    m

    unit

    @B)

    T

    I I ..

    S8

    ~

    Door key cylinder switch is
    OK.

    ~

    Replace key cylinder
    switch.

    nal G) and ground.
    Voltage [V]

    Key cylinder switch operation
    Between neutral and lock

    o

    Unlock/neutral

    Approx. 5

    NG

    ~
    CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH.
    1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch
    connector.
    2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals.
    SEL815UC

    Terminals

    CD-(2)
    Door

    key

    connector~

    cylinder

    l?-.l!)

    switch
    .,

    ~

    Driver side: ~

    Key position

    Continuity

    Neutral

    No

    Between
    neutral and
    lock

    Yes

    Unlock/
    neutral

    No

    Passenger side : ~

    OK

    SEL594V

    Check the following .
    • Door key cylinder switch ground circuit
    • Harness for open or short between control unit and door key cylinder

    III

    EL-189

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
    (Door lock actuator check)
    Super lock control
    connector @

    III111 I

    I

    @IIIIII I

    114 151

    m

    unit

    NG

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR DOOR
    LOCK ACTUATOR.

    I

    Door lock actuator is OK.

    Check voltage for door lock actuator.
    W/R

    R/L

    SEL817UC

    1;]~15

    Terminals

    Knob lock switch
    condition

    EB

    8

    Unlock ~ Lock

    CW

    Ground

    Lock ~ Unlock

    @

    Ground

    Voltage
    (V)
    Approx. 12
    (Approx. 5
    seconds)

    Before operating passenger side knob
    lock switch, close all doors.

    ~Eit9~

    OK
    Door lock actuator
    assembly connector

    LH ~

    OK

    CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR.
    1. Disconnect door lock actuator connector.
    2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock

    SEL818UC

    actuator and check operation.
    Door lock actuator operation

    I;] [!J

    Door lock actuator operation

    Door lock actuator
    assembly connector

    Terminals

    EB

    8

    Unlocked ~ Locked

    @

    @

    Locked ~ Unlocked

    @

    @

    NG

    RH ~

    Replace door lock actuator assembly.
    SEL827UC

    EL-190

    Check harness between
    control unit and door lock
    actuator.

    I

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

    Super lock control
    connector @

    unit

    m

    ITllI~llllj

    m31 [
    SR/W

    I

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4
    [Super lock actuator (in door lock actuator assembly)
    check]

    I

    @

    11

    CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR SUPER

    SEL819UC

    Terminals

    Door key cylinder
    switch condition

    EB

    8

    Lock (Set)

    @

    Ground

    Unlock
    (Released)

    @

    Ground

    Door lock actuator
    assembly
    connector RH ~

    lock actuator
    assembly
    connector LH ~

    Super lock actuator is OK.

    OK

    Check harness between
    control unit and door lock

    LOCK ACTUATOR.
    Check voltage for super lock actuator.

    GR/L

    IilDoor

    NG

    Voltage
    (V)
    Approx. 12

    Put the system in set condition before
    checking release signal.
    OK

    Iil

    ~4
    1,4 ~
    ‘-or-‘

    4,1
    ‘-or-‘

    &)
    DISCONNECT

    1,4 ~
    ‘-or-‘

    4,1
    ‘-or-‘

    CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR.
    1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly
    connector.
    2. Set lever A in Lock position.
    3. Apply 12V direct current to door lock

    actuator assembly.

    actuator assembly and check operation.

    Front

    Front

    ~

    ~

    laor’,:ck

    Super lock actua- Terminals
    tor operation
    E9

    8

    Connection from
    lever 8 to lever A

    Released ~ Set

    CD

    @

    Disconnect

    Set ~ Released

    @

    CD

    Connect

    actuator
    assembly

    NG

    SEL820UC

    Replace door lock actuator assembly.

    III

    EL-191

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5
    (Door switch check)
    Super lock control
    connector @
    1111
    11

    a

    unit

    m

    59

    118

    CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL.

    I I I I I I

    OK

    Door switch is OK.

    NG

    Replace door switch.

    Check voltage between control unit termi-

    R/W

    nal @ and ground.
    Voltage [V]

    Condition

    SEL821UD

    Any door is opened.

    o

    All doors are closed.

    Approx. 12

    NG
    Door switch connector
    Driver side: ~

    CHECK DOOR SWITCH.
    1. Disconnect door switch connector.
    2. Check continuity between door switch

    @

    terminals.

    Driver side
    door
    switch
    Other door
    switches

    Door switch connector
    Passenger side: ~

    Terminals

    Condition

    Continuity

    (2)-

    Closed

    No

    ground

    Open

    Yes

    (1)-

    Closed

    No

    ground

    Open

    Yes

    LU
    OK
    Check the following .
    • Door switch ground condition
    • Harness for open or short between control unit and door switch
    SEL822UE

    EL-192

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

    ~

    I2D

    IDISCO~ ~OFF

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6

    (NATS release signal check)

    c:.J ~

    Does engine start properly?

    No

    Check NATS system.

    NG

    Repair harness.

    NG

    Check NATS system.

    Yes

    Short
    ‘:’

    SEL593V

    CHECK NATS SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
    1. Disconnect control unit connector and
    NATS IMMU connector.
    2. Check continuity between control unit
    terminal @ and NATS IMMU terminal
    @.
    Continuity should exist.
    3. Check continuity between control unit

    Super lock control
    connector @

    II

    terminal @ and ground.
    Continuity should not exist.

    unit

    I I I I Kj 1 1
    I I I J I I

    OK

    :9]

    19

    G/R

    CHECK NATS RELEASE SIGNAL.
    1. Connect control unit connector and
    NATS IMMU connector.
    2. Check voltage between control unit terminal @ and ground.

    tt100
    5V1

    OV

    Ignition switch condition
    msec.

    n n n n

    OFF
    More than 10 seconds after ignition
    switch turned ON

    I

    U U U U U

    ll100

    Voltage
    [V]

    For 10 seconds after ignition switch
    turned ON

    msec.
    SEL495VA

    5

    Pulse

    OK
    Replace super lock control unit.

    II

    EL-193

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

    ~i5

    Super lock control
    connector @

    IIIII

    I’

    ~~~.

    unit

    -~

    9 r£23] ~..~:

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
    (Key switch check)
    . Approx.
    12V

    ov

    BR/Y

    m
    CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL.
    Check voltage between control unit terminal (!) and ground.

    Key switch is OK.

    NG

    Check the following.

    Voltage [V]

    Condition of key switch
    Key is inserted.

    Approx.12

    SEL883UC

    o

    Key is withdrawn.

    ~i5~

    OK

    NG

    @

    Key switch connector

    ~

    CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY.
    1. Disconnect key switch connector.
    2. Check voltage between key switch harness terminal G) and ground.

    p

    • 7.5A fuse [No.l21] ,
    located in fuse block

    (JIB)]

    Battery voltage should exist.

    short between key
    switch and fuse

    OK

    SEL825U

    Key switch connector~

    • Harness for open or

    CHECK KEY SWITCH.
    Check continuity between key switch terminals.

    ~

    Terminals

    G)-(2)
    SEL752UH

    Condition

    Continuity

    Key is inserted.

    Yes

    Key is withdrawn.

    No

    NG

    Replace key switch.

    OK
    Check harness for open or short between
    control unit and key switch.

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8
    (Ignition switch «ON» circuit check)
    Super lock control
    connector @

    II.I I I II

    unit

    Ignition switch position

    Terminals

    I C!61 II I II

    EB

    8

    OFF

    ACC

    @

    Ground

    OV

    OV

    I I I I I ..
    SR

    If NG, check the following.
    • 10A fuse [No. ITill , located in the fuse block (JIB)]
    • Harness for open or short
    SEL829UC

    EL-194

    ON
    Battery
    voltage

    POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

    ~i)

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9
    (Remote controller signal check)

    ~..~

    m

    Super lock control unit
    connector@

    [12131 I R:;j I I I I

    6-

    1

    R/L

    I

    I

    I

    I

    I

    II
    ..

    W/R

    SEL051VB

    CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER INPUT
    SIGNAL.
    1. Withdraw key from ignition key cylinder.
    2. Check voltage between control unit terminal (2) or @ and ground.
    NOTE: The multi-remote control system
    does not activate with key inserted
    in ignition key cylinder.
    Terminals
    EB

    @

    ~

    8

    Condition of
    remote controller
    button

    Voltage
    [V]

    LOCK button is
    pressed

    o (Approx.
    0.5 seconds)

    LOCK button is
    released

    5

    UNLOCK button
    is pressed

    o (Approx.
    0.5 seconds)

    UNLOCK button
    is released

    5

    OK

    —-.

    Replace super lock control
    unit.

    Ground

    Ground

    lNG
    Check harness for open or short between
    super lock control unit and multi-remote
    control unit.


    EL-195

    MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

    System Description
    FUNCTION
    Multi-remote control system has the following function.

    Door lock (and set super lock)

    Door unlock (and release super lock)

    Hazard reminder

    LOCK OPERATION
    To lock door by multi-remote controller, the ignition switch must be ina position other than ON.
    When the LOCK signal is input to multi-remote control unit (the antenna of the system is combined with multiremote control unit), ground is supplied
    • through multi-remote control unit terminal
    ~ .-cu
    Q)

    -=
    ro

    Q)

    0

    ()
    Q)
    en

    c:

    ~:J ~

    I

    0

    .Q

    Q)
    Q)

    «0

    .~

    Q)

    :J

    o .c.t5

    .=:

    Q)

    ()

    en

    c

    >-

    C

    en

    o

    C

    «0

    «E

    .:?-cuu

    Q)

    ()

    c: :J Q)
    C
    ro a.
    o c..> 0
    c..>

    ro

    eu

    .::t:.

    0

    en
    ro

    ()

    en

    …J

    Q)

    .c.

    E

    o

    .2.g~
    «0

    ro —

    c:

    0

    Q)
    J:;.

    -c..>

    ~Q)

    Q)

    a.

    .2

    :J

    2 .~ o LL r:.

    ()

    ,.2>

    c..>

    .::t:.

    ()

    .8 0 .8
    Q)
    ~
    ~:J .-~ Q)E
    en

    eu _

    Q)

    a. en
    Q)
    >en

    co ~
    »

    it

    ca

    «

    «

    ,…..

    LO

    EL-234

    HEL278A

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
    Q)

    c
    ‘0,

    (j)
    c
    ‘0,
    c

    c
    Q)

    ~
    ~

    Q)

    £

    £

    «~

    «~

    a:
    (f)
    Q)

    Q)
    0.

    ~

    >

    Q)

    ~>

    0.

    ~

    «0

    -Q) ‘0
    C
    C

    Q)

    «En 0
    C
    Q)

    o

    ~~

    (f)

    e
    u
    Q)

    E
    :J

    o(j)

    > .~
    Q)

    CJ)

    CJ)

    C
    Q)

    ~

    0.0

    Q;~

    ~ ~
    ~
    «~

    U

    Q)

    :c
    ~ «w
    >
    :J
    W u..
    Q..

    @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@@@ @ @@@@@
    C»‘)C»‘)C»‘)C»‘)~~~~~~~~~~~CIC»‘)

    C»‘)C»‘)C»‘)C»‘)~~C»‘)et)et)

    oo~cococooooooooow~~

    CI

    oooowwwwwco

    m

    C’)CIC1C1C1

    moowo

    Q)
    0.

    o

    ~

    W

    II
    @@ @@@@@@@
    @@@@@ @@
    ….
    ..
    ..
    ~o

    N

    NNClNCI.,-C1

    oo«o~co~

    CIet)C’)et)C»)

    ~~~~~

    C»‘)N

    ~u..

    HEL279A

    EL.235

    HARNESS LAY~~;ness
    Engine Room

    EN

    GINE COMP ARTMENT —

    (Cont’d)

    RHO models

    N

    HEL280A

    EL-236

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
    @~
    u

    CD

    CD

    e

    o

    a.
    o

    CD
    a.
    o

    w

    w

    w

    a.

    CD

    a.

    ~

    ::J

    w

    C
    0’>

    ~~

    ~

    ::J

    -9

    Q)

    0

    u

    I

    a:

    CJ)

    0

    £;

    t5

    Q)

    C
    C

    — c

    .8 0 .8
    Q)

    ~

    ~

    .«1

    CJ)

    a.

    co ~
    Q)

    E

    ~u

    Q)

    en>CJ)

    /Au
    [PIA

    M
    (j)

    CD

    «

    ~~

    CD

    c
    00,

    OJ

    c
    .0
    c

    c
    Q)

    Q)

    ~u

    o

    o

    ~~

    ~u
    ~~

    <.0

    a:co

    (J

    CJ

    III

    C»)

    en en en

    @@@@)@@@@@@@
    ,…

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    ooowowoowou..

    C»)

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    ~[Q)~

    ,…

    HEL281A

    EL-237

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT —

    LHD models

    cD

    «0

    o

    (5

    00

    >:
    C)

    N

    CD

    00

    I ~~

    c .»t::
    0)

    ~

    ‘(i)

    (J)

    c::

    c

    ~ 0

    ~I

    HEL282A

    EL-238

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT —

    :2
    0)

    ~

    00

    I

    …..J

    2-

    00

    I

    «1

    E

    i5

    :.:J

    0)

    «1

    Q)

    Q)

    0

    …..J

    a.

    E

    «1

    i5

    «1
    Q)

    I

    0

    ~

    B
    c

    E

    «‘0

    .c.
    .~

    0)

    a.

    lID

    ‘»»‘-‘

    RHO models

    I

    0

    u

    ~0
    c

    Ol
    «1

    ~«1 ~
    «‘0
    >- ~
    CD 0
    :5

    U
    Q)
    00

    .0

    C

    0

    ‘u
    Q)

    Ci)

    C:

    «‘0

    Q)

    ‘s

    0

    00

    .-

    2
    (5 -£ ‘0
    Q)
    00
    c
    Q)
    c ~«1 Q)
    C U a.
    0
    0
    u >- c::

    u
    Q)

    «1

    -£ E

    ~u

    .Q
    «‘0
    C
    «1

    U
    Q)

    0
    00

    0
    «‘0

    .8
    Q)

    0

    u

    ~

    …..J

    ~
    Q)

    ~

    a.

    Ll.

    1:

    c ‘ct;
    C

    «1

    00

    .:i.

    III

    ~

    .Q>

    .8 <5 .8
    ::
    ~ …. E
    Q)

    00

    Q)

    CD

    ‘ct;

    ~

    ~

    >-

    a.

    00

    00

    HEL283A

    EL-239

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Main Harness
    LHD MODELS

    u.

    w

    Cl

    CI
    HEL284A

    EL.240

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Main Harness (Cont’d)

    0000
    CJ

    cb

    (j)

    «‘0

    o

    000000
    OO@
    • •

    ,…

    CJ

    u..

    v

    v

    wwo

    w

    CJ

    CJ et)

    wo

    o

    Q)
    «‘0

    .c: 0

    B E

    .~

    en

    Q)
    o~

    0)0>
    c: C

    0-

    Q)

    .E«

    .Ql C)

    …..J_

    CJ

    CJ

    a:

    a:CD

    CD

    I~
    u

    t;
    o

    c:

    et)

    o

    v
    W

    vvet)et)et)et)et)

    u..u..wu..u..wu..u.u..wow

    0)

    et)et)CJCJCJ

    CJ

    u..

    CJ

    u..

    1J =5 c
    ~

    «‘0

    ~~u

    0

    0 (1)
    :5 -‘? Q)
    u c: «‘0
    (1) 0
    en
    .S
    Q)

    (j)
    (5

    t>
    Q)

    ~ 1? ~

    o — °u
    t>(1)
    (l)
    en c:

    c:
    c:
    o

    u

    ,…
    c:

    o

    o

    U
    Q)

    ~c: gu

    :0

    E

    o

    o

    c
    0

    0

    -:>

    CD

    CD CD
    Q) CD CD
    E E E
    c:

    c:

    02 .2

    c:
    0

    7ii 7ii ~
    c:

    c:

    c:

    :0 :0 :0
    E E E

    000
    (JOO

    c: ~

    (l)

    o u

    0

    a.

    c:

    ~

    u

    >. c:

    Q)

    ~

    ~

    £ E en

    ~ g ~
    …..J
    .Q .g ~
    U

    -g

    B

    (l)

    ~

    (l)

    £

    ~c .~
    ~ gc:

    u.. 1::

    o .:i. ._Ql
    u
    .8 0 £

    ~ ~ E
    ~

    o~

    (l)

    en

    a. Ci5

    ~

    ~ ~

    HEL285A

    EL.241

    III

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Main Harness (Cont’d)
    RHD MODELS
    CJ

    LO

    u..

    LL

    w

    o

    ()

    ()

    «‘0

    c:

    «

    ::3

    o

    0,
    >o

    «‘0
    CD

    CJ

    HEL286A

    EL-242

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Main Harness (Cont’d)

    oen

    c:
    Q)
    en
    c:

    ~o
    ’00

    o

    Q)

    c:

    0.

    o .~

    co
    Ci>
    (i)

    u

    Q)

    (i)

    en
    Q)

    ~e.

    en
    .I::.

    (i)
    «‘0
    0

    .B E
    ‘~

    Q)

    en c:
    0)’0,
    c c:

    .-

    -J
    _
    .- (!)

    o
    (5

    en

    Q)

    .g,~

    cb

    «‘0

    CJ

    Q)
    0..

    o

    .Ew

    _ex:>

    ex:>

    :5

    .D

    ~

    CJ

    I’

    ~ ~

    0000
    OO@ 00 OOOOOOOO@@@@@@OOOO@

    CJ~

    ~~

    ~

    ~(‘f)(‘f)(«‘)C’t’)(‘f)(‘f)C’t’)C’t’)(‘f)CJCJT»»

    00

    00

    0

    OOOCDCDO

    CD

    CJ

    CJ

    iI

    iI

    en

    CD

    00 OOOO@OOOOOO 00

    (Ocococoouo

    CJ

    T»»CJCJ~»-T»»

    0

    OUUCOUO

    ~o

    CJ

    co

    Ci>

    «‘0

    Q)

    C

    ,.-

    CJ

    co

    CJ

    en CD

    ID

    Q)

    E E

    ‘~

    o 0
    .r=. .r=.
    u

    Ci>

    u

    ~ ~

    ~o

    0.

    III
    ex:>

    CJ

    (‘f)

    CJ
    W

    o

    HEL287A

    EL-243

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness
    3-DOOR HATCHBACK —

    ,…

    LHD models
    LO

    CJ

    u.

    u..

    UJ

    LU

    0

    «‘0

    c:
    :J

    0

    0,
    >-

    «‘0
    0

    CD

    0

    ()

    —-~——-«‘0

    c:
    :J

    o

    0,

    «

    >.
    «‘0

    o
    CD

    ,…

    LO
    HEL288A

    EL-244

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)

    «Oi
    ctl
    ..0

    C’?

    CJ

    CJ

    000

    CJ

    CJ

    woo

    CJ

    CJ CJ
    LJ.. U.

    -~CJCJCJCJC’?(‘t’)CJ

    cocococococooo

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    0000

    CJ

    C’? (‘t’) CJ CJ (J
    OOOWWWW(!}LJ..WW

    Ct)

    (‘t’)

    CJ

    (J

    CJ

    (J

    HEL289A

    EL-245

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)
    3-000R

    HATCHBACK

    RHO models
    CJ

    u…

    w

    LU

    o

    ()

    ()

    «

    «

    LO

    CJ

    HEL290A

    EL-246

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)

    N

    N

    >:

    N
    OJ

    >:

    N
    ()

    N

    0

    o

    N

    N
    W

    u..

    >: >:

    N
    W

    N

    III
    NNN(‘t)(‘t)N(‘t)(‘t)NT»»‘T»»»NN(‘t)(‘t)NN
    (!}
    u. u. 0 0 0 OJ

    u.. u..

    OJ CD CD

    CD ()

    0

    ()

    ()

    HEL291A

    EL-247

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Co nt’ d)
    SEDAN

    LHD models
    LO

    CJ

    u..

    LL

    w

    o

    o

    ()

    o

    CJ

    HEL292A

    EL-248

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)

    ~~

    ‘5

    -«i:'»

    c:

    :r :r
    Q.

    ….J

    Q.

    E E

    a:1 a:1

    c:

    0

    c:

    0

    Q)

    -::J

    ~Q,

    Q.~
    ….J

    ~

    Q)
    c:

    I

    n~

    3:

    (/)

    I

    ….J
    Q.

    E
    E ~

    Q.

    ~c ~c ~

    Q)

    E

    ~cr:

    I

    Q.

    0

    E

    en ~

    Q)

    c:

    0

    C,)

    C,)

    e

    Q)

    Q)

    ::J

    cr: cr: ~

    Q)

    Q)
    (/)

    Q)
    C,)

    ::i

    Q)
    CJ)

    0>

    Q)
    C,)

    0>
    0>
    0

    c:

    0

    ~c: ~

    C

    C,)

    C,)

    Q)

    Q)

    I

    ::i

    (J

    ~ ~
    ~ ~ ~

    cr: cr:

    «0

    «0

    ::J

    ::J

    c:

    c:

    e e
    C»C»@
    >- >- m

    «0
    0

    «0
    0

    CO

    0)

    CD
    (/)
    c:

    Q)
    ‘0

    c:

    0

    {?

    c:
    ~
    CO
    J:

    ~

    ~ ~
    ~~

    (J

    (J

    CD

    ~

    a:CO

    tn
    tn

    (‘I’)

    W

    LL(!)

    CJ

    (J

    (‘I’)

    (‘I’)

    (J

    (‘I’)

    (‘I’)

    (J

    (‘I’)

    (‘I’)

    LL

    (!)

    (!)

    (!)

    (!)

    LL

    LL

    (J

    (J

    et)

    CJ

    (J

    (J

    (J

    Q)

    «0

    «0

    :;:

    :;:

    0
    «0

    0
    «0

    c:

    .~

    Cl

    .~

    «0
    ::J

    c:

    C

    0

    >-

    ~ ~

    Q)

    «0
    0

    Q)

    ~ ~

    cu

    I ~


    c:

    CD CD CD

    CO

    @@@@)@@@@@@@
    (‘I’)

    0>
    0

    Q)

    cr: CO
    .. .. . . ..

    en

    (J

    0)

    0 a:

    .. .. .. . .
    fA
    fA
    G)

    CD

    CD

    ~ ~

    Q. —

    «i
    E -a:1 -c
    a. :0E :0E
    ::J
    E E 0 Q. 0
    0 0
    0 0
    ~c c: l::.E c:
    ~ ~
    ~ ~

    :0 :0

    ~I

    Q.

    E E

    Q.

    «0

    I

    cr: cr:

    Co

    .r:.

    OOOOOO~~

    I

    .c
    ::::J

    en

    CJ
    W

    0 0

    u:

    UJ

    fA

    en
    G)

    c:
    CO
    J:

    ~
    o
    m
    «C

    (J

    CO~~COCOCOCOOO()

    et)

    CJ

    00

    et)

    o

    (‘I’)

    (‘I’)

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (J

    ~

    (J

    CJ

    ~

    0

    0

    0

    0

    0

    W LL

    LL

    LL

    0

    0

    W CO0

    et)

    CJ

    et)

    et)

    et)

    0 0 0

    et)

    CJ

    (J

    W W W

    HEL293A

    EL-249

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)
    SEDAN —

    RHD models

    w

    w

    o

    ()

    CI

    HEL294A

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)

    %%
    c :5

    «i::'»Q)

    +-‘

    :J

    10-

    Q)
    C

    Q,2,
    I

    —l

    ~Q,
    I

    I

    —l

    a. a.n
    ~E ~E .~

    — c:

    c:

    0

    0

    @~~
    N

    m

    ~

    C,)
    10-

    Q)

    0
    C,)

    ~

    Q)

    a: a:

    ~

    0

    e

    Q)

    n;

    a.
    Q)

    «0

    Q)

    C

    a.

    0

    Q)

    (/)

    E

    c

    C
    Q)

    :J

    C,)

    l:.
    0′)

    .=

    ::J

    Q)

    n;

    :J

    .::&:.

    I

    II

    c.. a.

    CD

    E E
    a: (tj

    a. a. a. c:
    a. E 0 E 0
    E ~ en ~

    E

    I

    a: a:

    (/)

    ~c: ~c: ~
    :0 :0
    E

    I

    —l

    a.
    E I

    (/)

    C
    Q)
    C,)

    ::J

    0’)
    0)

    ~

    c:
    0

    ~ ~

    C

    «0

    «0

    :0 :0
    E E

    C
    :J

    c:
    :J

    0

    0

    C

    0
    C,)

    0

    C,)

    ~ ~

    Q)

    Q)

    a: a:

    c, c,

    tn
    tn

    c:

    m

    .!:

    ~

    co

    -q-

    -q-

    ~ ~ ~

    N

    N

    CD

    ~

    N

    a:

    CO

    N

    -q-

    N

    0 .
    «0
    0
    CO

    a: a:
    .. .. ..

    tn
    tn

    -q-

    CI)

    ~ ~ ~

    C»‘)

    Q)

    «0
    0

    0
    ()

    c:

    CO CO CO

    «-

    m

    @@@@@@@@@@@
    C»‘)

    0

    Q)

    «0
    CD «0
    c: c:
    (/)
    c: .~ .~
    «0

    >. >.
    «0 «0
    0 0
    CO CO

    .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
    CU

    CD

    0’)
    0)

    0

    C»‘)

    C»‘)

    C»‘)

    CO

    CO () CO

    .!:
    I

    .c

    :J

    C»‘)

    en

    CO

    00000000
    ,… ,…
    0 0 CO ()

    tn
    tn
    CI)

    …m

    CO,…NNN

    c:

    >a:a:>a:a:
    >COCO>COCD

    o

    N

    >:

    N

    CJ

    >:>:

    >:

    M M CJ
    W

    u.

    .!:

    ~
    o

    «C

    m

    CJ
    (!J

    ,…
    U.

    N
    (!J

    C’:>
    (!J

    CJ

    C»‘)

    u.

    0

    C»‘)

    woo

    C»‘)

    C»‘)

    ,…

    0

    W

    CJ
    0

    ,…
    CO

    CJ
    CO

    CJ
    CO

    N
    ()

    CJ
    W

    CJ

    u.

    CJ
    0

    CJ

    CJ

    ,…

    CJ

    M

    u. () () () wow

    M

    HEL295A

    EL-251

    I

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)
    5-DOOR HATCHBACK —

    LHD models
    CJ

    ~.

    u.

    LL

    w

    w

    o
    «‘0

    c
    :J

    o

    rn
    >-

    «‘0

    o
    co

    ()

    «‘0

    c

    :J

    e —

    f ~—~—=—

    «

    0)

    CJ

    «

    LO

    HEL296A

    EL-252

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)

    CJ

    C»)

    C»)

    Ct)

    Ct)

    ococooooww

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    I

    a:
    I

    .!:

    a: B
    Q5 .~
    ~
    en

    ~ 0
    0
    Q.

    en

    «‘C

    ro

    ro

    Q)

    Q)

    a: a:

    T»-

    CO

    CJ

    T»-

    « «

    CJ CJ CJ C») C»)
    CD CD CD CD CD

    Ct)

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    U 0 0 0 0

    CJ
    0

    Ct)

    Ct)

    Ct)

    0

    0

    0 0

    C’)

    T»-

    T»-

    C’)

    Ci)

    0

    ill

    0

    W

    CJ
    LL

    CJ
    LL

    CJ
    LL


    CJ
    W

    CJ
    W

    CJ
    W

    HEL297A

    EL-253

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)
    5-DOOR HATCHBACK —

    RHD models
    L{)

    LL

    w

    w

    o
    «0

    c:
    ::J

    o

    0,
    >o

    «0
    CD

    o

    «0
    c:

    __

    6 —

    «

    «

    ~

    «0

    o

    CD

    L{)

    CJ

    HEL298A

    EL-254

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness (Cont’d)

    0a;

    o~

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    OOOWWu.ww

    CJ

    C»‘)

    C»‘)

    C»‘)

    I

    a:
    I

    ..c

    a: B

    — 0;:

    ~

    en

    ~
    0
    a. 0
    (/)

    «‘0

    «i ~Q)
    (l)
    a: a:

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    C’)

    CJ

    C’t’)

    CJ

    C’t’)

    C’t’)

    CJ

    u.u.u.~u.owwoomm~~mmooooou.

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    C’t’)

    C’t’)

    CJ

    C’t’)

    III
    CJ

    CJ

    C’t’)

    HEL299A

    EL-255

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Control Harness
    GA14DE, 16DE ENGINE FOR EUROPE AND GA15DE ENGINE

    en
    Q)

    ‘t:J

    o
    E
    c
    J:

    ..I

    en
    CD

    «»C

    o
    E

    c

    :I:

    a:

    o

    CD
    «3
    «‘0

    o
    E

    e
    ~

    <7′

    Cf)

    1:5

    (,)
    0

    u
    u

    Q)

    20

    w

    (,)

    ~ c
    U
    0

    °

    W

    J

    «0

    c::
    ::J

    o

    en

    @@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@

    CD

    c
    0{5)
    c::
    W

    HEL300A

    EL-256

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Control Harness (Cont’d)
    GA16DE ENGINE EXCEPT FOR EUROPE

    «0
    C
    :J

    o

    C>
    (])

    c
    .~
    c
    W

    o

    ee

    E E ~

    880

    Cf)(f)U
    ()

    ()

    III

    Q.)

    () () E

    ~~8
    ~~ c
    () () .0
    w

    W

    o

    U5

    «00
    C’?

    Q.)

    to

    .E .2
    «~0::::’0
    8>=6
    «;::

    .’!::

    a:

    a:co a:
    co

    @ @@@@@@

    »

    …..c

    -:>

    @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
    HEL301A

    EL-257

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Control Harness (Cont’d)
    SR20DE ENGINE FOR EUROPE

    ‘»

    Gi
    o
    E

    «C

    c

    :J:
    ..J

    ‘»

    Gi
    «C
    o

    ~O
    a:

    @

    o
    ~»‘O
    LL .0
    I

    >

    C

    Q)

    0

    co

    ()~~

    HEL302A

    EL.258

    HARNESS

    LAYOUT

    Engine Harness
    @~

    GA ENGINE

    ~~

    ~~
    CJ)

    Q)

    c
    o~

    C

    CD

    «0
    0

    E

    Q)

    w

    0
    <.0

    ~
    «0

    c

    CJ

    ro

    £;
    o~

    Q)

    CJ)

    E

    I—

    ~

    ::J

    c
    0Cj)
    c

    0

    0>
    ‘»0

    0
    OJ

    010
    <.0

    a5
    W

    [g~

    >.

    Q)

    W

    o~

    Q)
    «0
    0

    «0
    C
    Q)

    T-

    «

    ~~

    I—

    ~

    ~~

    0 C)
    L.O

    «

    C)

    £;

    .~

    ~~

    cp t’
    D.
    u
    x
    Q)
    Q)

    c
    0Cj)
    C
    Q)

    .~

    Q)

    0.

    0

    :;

    w
    Q)

    0

    .E

    LL

    W

    0.

    w

    0

    ~ ~<.0
    (j)
    (9
    « £;
    ::J

    .E

    .~

    CJ)

    en

    Q)

    Q)

    o~

    (ku

    ~

    (j)

    t’

    ::J

    «
    ‘»0

    C

    ,?(p~

    ro
    Q)

    ro
    U5

    CJ)

    M

    cDQ)
    0.'»0

    ‘»0
    ‘»0
    o 0
    0
    0
    ~
    w D. E E w~ E
    u
    I-0 x I— lQ)

    ;- ;’J

    ~u

    @~~

    Q)

    ~ ~
    ~

    ;t

    ~~I/

    .E ~

    ~~

    If>

    ~tUJ
    :?
    ~
    ~~

    ::J

    «

    .E

    Q)

    ~w

    o

    Q)

    (0

    u

    x
    Q)

    (i)
    0.
    0

    ~

    CJ)

    (~
    «0

    .0
    c
    Q)

    0
    en

    ec
    0

    u
    l-

    .E

    D.
    Q)

    u
    x
    Q)

    en
    Q)
    «0

    0

    E
    I-

    Q)

    CD

    >

    ‘»0

    >

    E

    co

    <.0

    00

    (‘f)

    m

    0

    .c

    e

    .~

    .B

    en

    0 0

    CJ)

    c0

    Ci3 Ci3

    B

    I-

    2 2

    :.c

    >:

    CJ

    III

    ~

    c
    Q)

    (‘f)

    N

    I—

    .0

    u

    ~(k

    0

    «0

    ~ ~ ~

    m en en

    ~u

    a.

    W

    w

    ~~

    (j)

    Q)

    c
    .0,
    c

    c

    c

    ~ ~

    ~[Q))A

    E

    .E

    0

    en

    HEL303A

    EL-259

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Air Bag Harness

    LHD MODELS
    @
    @

    W
    GD

    Y/6
    Y/2

    Spiral cable
    Air bag module

    (Passenger

    Y/22

    Air bag diagnosis

    W/16

    To (~)

    sensor

    side)
    unit

    HEL304A

    RHD MODELS
    @

    Y/6

    Spi ral cable

    @
    QD

    Y/2

    Air bag module

    Y/22

    Air bag diagnosis

    GD

    W/16

    To

    (Passenger
    sensor

    side)
    unit

    (M62)

    HEL305A

    EL-260

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Back Door Harness

    ‘0
    C
    :J

    o
    0,
    >-

    ‘0

    o

    en

    CD

    C’>
    C’>

    CD

    o

    C’>
    C’>
    0

    ‘0

    «0

    CD CD

    :: :: ‘0

    ~ 0 0 c

    CD
    (J)

    ‘0

    «0

    :J

    ceO
    ~ .~ .~ 0,
    «‘0

    c

    o

    oa:

    ~
    ~
    >ctS
    ctS «‘0
    CD CD 0

    a: en

    III

    HEL306A

    EL-261

    WIRING D~..GRAM CODES (CELL CODES)
    Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code
    stands for.
    Code

    Section

    Wiring Diagram Name

    AAC/V

    EC

    IACV-AAC Valve

    ABS

    BR

    Anti-lock Brake System

    AlC

    HA

    Manual Air Conditioner

    A/CCUT

    EC

    Air Conditioner Cut Control

    ACUSW

    EC

    Accelerator Position Switch

    AlT

    AT

    Automatic Transmission

    AIRREG

    EC

    IACV-Air Regulator

    AUDIO

    EL

    BACK/L

    Code

    Wiring Diagram Name

    Section

    KS

    EC

    LKUP

    EC

    LOAD

    EC

    Load Signal

    MAFS

    EC

    Mass Air Flow Sensor

    MAIN

    EC

    Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit

    Audio

    METER

    EL

    Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp.
    and Fuel Gauges

    EL

    Back-up Lamp

    MIUDL

    EC

    MIL, Data Link Connectors

    BUZZER

    EL

    Warning Buzzer

    MIRROR

    EL

    Door Mirror

    CHARGE

    EL

    Charging System

    MULTI

    EL

    Multi-remote Control System

    CIGAR

    EL

    Cigarette Lighter

    NATS

    EL

    Nissan Anti-Theft System

    CLOCK

    EL

    Clock

    CMPS

    Camshaft Position Sensor

    PGCN

    EC

    EC

    EVAP Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve

    COOUF

    EC

    Cooling Fan Control

    POWER

    EL

    Power Supply Routing

    DEF

    EL

    Rear Window Defogger

    R/FOG

    EL

    Rear Fog Lamp

    D/LOCK

    EL

    Power Door Lock

    ROOM/L

    EL

    Interior Room Lamp

    DTRL

    EL

    Headlamp System

    S/LOCK

    EL

    Power Door Lock —

    SROOF

    EL

    Sunroof

    SRS

    RS

    Supplemental

    S/SIG

    EC

    Start Signal

    START

    EL

    Starting System

    STOP/L

    EL

    Stop Lamp

    TAIUL

    EL

    Parking, License and Tail Lamps

    TCV

    EC

    Injection Timing Control Valve

    TURN

    EL

    Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
    Lamps

    VSS

    EC

    Vehicle Speed Sensor

    VTC

    EC

    VTC Solenoid Valve

    WARN

    EL

    Warning Lamps

    WINDOW

    EL

    Power Window

    EL

    Rear Wiper and Washer

    With Daytime Light

    EC

    Engine Coolant Temperature
    Sensor

    EGRC/V

    EC

    EGR Valve and EVAP canister Purge
    Control Solenoid Valve

    FCUT

    EC

    Fuel Cut Solenoid Valve

    F/FOG

    EL

    Front Fog Lamp

    FICO

    EC

    IACV-FICD Solenoid

    F/PUMP

    EC

    Fuel Pump

    GLOW

    EC

    Quick-glow system

    GOVNR

    EC

    Electric Governor

    H/AIM

    EL

    Headlamp Aiming Control System

    H/LAMP

    EL

    Headlamp System

    H/SEAT

    EL

    Heated Seat

    HEATER

    HA

    Heater

    HUWIP

    EL

    Headlamp Wiper and Washer

    H02S

    EC

    Heated Oxygen Sensor

    HORN

    EL

    Horn

    IGN/SG

    EC

    Ignition Signal

    ILL

    EL

    Illumination

    INJECT

    EC

    Injector

    INT/L

    EL

    Spot, Trunk Room and Luggage
    Room Lamps

    ECTS

    Valve

    Knock Sensor
    Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
    Valve

    Super Lock

    Restraint System

    Without Daytime Light
    WIP/R

    EL-262

    -.

    FRONT AXLE &
    FRONT SUSPENSION

    @~

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION NOTICE:
    Grease capacity of drive shaft has been changed.

    CONTENTS
    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

    (50S)

    2

    Inspection and Adjustment

    2

    ~lL

    ~lu

    II

    [j[Q)A

    FA-1

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
    Inspection and Adjustment
    DRIVE SHAFT
    Applied model

    SR200E

    GA140E,
    GA150E

    GA160E,
    C020

    RH

    LH

    TS70C

    TS79C

    OS83

    TS83

    Joint type
    Transaxle side
    Wheel side
    Boot length

    ZF80

    I

    Boot length
    Wheel side

    BF83

    ZF90

    mm (in)

    Transaxle side L2
    Wheel side L1

    95.5 — 97.5
    (3.76 — 3.84)

    101.5 — l03.5
    (4.00 — 4.07)

    90.5 — 92.5
    (3.563 — 3.642)

    96 — 98
    (3.78 — 3.86)

    97 — 99
    (3.82 — 3.90)

    98 — 100
    (3.86 — 3.94)

    Transaxle side

    94 — 96 (3.70 — 3.78)

    Nissan genuine grease or equivalent

    Grease
    Capacity

    g (oz)

    Transaxle side

    110 — 120
    (3.88 — 4.23)

    155 — 165
    (5.47 — 5.82)

    Wheel side

    75 — 85
    (2.66 — 3.00)

    115 — 125
    (4.06 — 4.41)

    115 — 135
    (4.06 — 4.76)

    130 — 150
    (4.59 — 5.29)

    85 — 105 (3.00 — 3.70)
    SFA3968

    FA-2

    HEATER &
    AIR CONDITIONER

    @~

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION NOTICE:

    The circuit diagram and wiring diagrams for air conditioner and wiring diagram for heater have been
    changed.

    ~~

    CONTENTS
    PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    TROU BlE DIAGNOSES
    Circuit Diagram — Air Conditioner

    2
    2
    3
    3

    Wiring Diagrarn — A/C -/LHD
    Wiring Diagram — A/C -/RHD
    Wiring Diagranl — HEATER Diagnostic Procedure 3

    Models
    Models

    4
    10
    16
    18

    lMJu
    (ALlJ

    II

    HA-1

    PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    The Supplemental Restraint System such as «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (Mechanically
    activated type)» used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
    passenger for certain types of collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL
    N15 is as follows (The composition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):

    For a frontal collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
    pre-tensioners (Mechanically activated type), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and
    spiral cable.

    For a side collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
    seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (which is one of components of air bags for a frontal collision),
    wiring harness, warning lamp (which is one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
    Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by intentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
    Module, see the RS section.

    Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation either just before
    the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.

    HA-2

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Circuit Diagram —

    I

    I

    IGNITION SWITCH
    ACC or ON

    Lw

    o

    IGNITIOON SWITCH
    N

    ~

    o

    FUSE

    FUSE

    I

    Air Conditioner

    I BATTERY I

    FUSE

    FUSE

    I
    ~I
    CONDITIONER
    I~ RELAY
    AIR

    BLOWER
    M MOTOR

    ~

    a:

    ~([

    Q)
    ro-I—

    U1

    ~
    AIC
    SWITCH

    ~-(~

    :J

    ()

    FAN
    RESISTOR

    a:
    w

    Cl
    U

    THERMO
    CONTROL
    AMP.

    []

    I

    r-

    DUALPRESSURE
    SWITCH

    g
    Cl

    co

    u

    ECM
    15 (ECCS
    CONTROL
    21 MODULE)
    @)

    []

    DUALPRESSURE
    SWITCH

    ~t
    14

    15 ECM
    (ECCS
    21 CONTROL

    ‘—‘

    35

    . _It!)

    MODULE)

    @

    GE
    FAN SWITCH
    OFF12

    3

    o

    4
    0-

    GA

    I

    o
    o
    6

    ~

    L-tJ-

    01
    I I
    00-

    ~41

    11 (ECCS

    ~
    —@—45

    INTAKE
    DOOR
    MOTOR

    ) 6 6

    *1 ECM
    CONTROL

    MODULE)
    @

    To illumination~
    system

    RECIRCULATION
    SWITCH

    @

    a:
    =>

    @:

    For

    @:

    Except@

    @:

    For

    @:
    @:

    GA engine

    @:

    GA engine

    @:

    CD engine

    @:
    @:
    @:

    SA engine

    ~:

    *1 :

    Europe

    ‘[

    and Austra

    1 ia

    @

    control
    module)

    and SR engine
    for

    Europe

    GA engine

    for

    Australia

    GA engine

    except

    a:
    0

    U1

    Z([I

    ~D~

    wwu

    ~

    HCl..r-

    CD:EH
    :EW~
    <{r-UJ

    II

    w

    a:

    ::::>
    rr- To HA-A/C-03

    .. RIG ~

    G/Y

    To EL-ILL

    RIG

    FAN
    SWITCH
    ~
    ILL. ~

    r———————,

    :~~~~
    I~W

    I
    L
    I

    Refer to last page
    (FaIdaut

    2

    page) .

    W
    ~

    HHA115

    HA-4

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Wiring Diagram — AlC -/LHD Models (Cont’d)

    HA-A/C-02
    FUSE

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    @~

    Refe~ to EL-POWER.

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    ~

    L/Y

    (£106)

    ~
    LG/R

    @:

    I

    LG/R

    ~1~

    I

    It
    LIB

    JOINT

    _:

    C_O_NN_ECTOR-9~

    .

    LJ;—~

    engine and
    engine
    @:
    engine
    *1 … @ Y , @ L

    L/Y

    GA
    SA
    CD

    . n CONDITIONAEA
    ~IAIR
    U RELAY

    ~~m>

    LG/A

    LG/R

    LG/R

    LG/R

    *1

    L/R

    I..

    I

    LlR

    LG/R

    rm

    -@> To

    HA-A/C-05

    ~
    —-

    *1 ~
    ~

    INTAKE

    … ——-

    DOOR

    GIS

    page

    LG/R~

    ~
    G/Y

    I

    G/Y

    rmrm

    FRE

    Next

    ~

    MOTOR
    ~

    —I

    LG/R ~

    REC

    FRE

    RECIRCULATION
    SWITCH
    ~

    ~~
    ~W

    Refe~ to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~

    @lg[TIJ

    W

    HHA116

    HA-5

    II

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Wiring Diagram — AlC -/LHD Models (Cont’d)

    HA-A/C-03
    ~u ….
    -..

    ~

    IO~

    1

    /QL. LG/R

    Preceding
    page

    ~

    <@- LG/R ….

    GS

    L

    m

    LG/R

    ~

    rFTil

    THERMISTOR

    DUALHIGH PRESSURE
    • SWITCH

    LOW
    ~

    THERMO
    CONTROL
    AMPLIFIER

    ~

    NORMAL

    ~

    @:@)

    ~
    G

    I

    ~
    G/8

    ——_I

    y

    ~

    G

    It~—-itl
    (]ID
    Y

    ~

    Ale

    SWITCH
    @

    INDICATOR

    @:
    ‘@:

    ~
    G/Y
    To
    HA-A/C
    ~

    G/Y

    G/Y

    r:::!::,

    r:::!::,

    LOW

    ~

    NORMAL

    II1 IIII1 IIJUNCTION
    BOX No.2

    ~

    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)
    ~

    —‘

    engine

    CD

    engine

    *1″‘@
    Y @) L
    *2
    @ S8 ‘@) RIL
    *3
    @ y ‘@)
    G
    ,
    *4 .. · @ G , @) R/L

    DUALHIGH PRESSURE

    ,

    -01

    GA

    GA engine and
    SA engine

    @):

    11

    G/Y ,….

    G

    t~

    LG/R

    SWITCH

    @:@

    t

    G
    ~ ~
    I~I
    G @

    L~o-_»‘—————-~

    CD'»

    *3

    -t>

    *4

    ~

    G/Y

    Next page

    -B>

    Refer to last page
    (FeIdeut

    J:Ql@

    ~~

    ~’W

    ~

    page) .

    JSa To

    .. RIG ~

    LG/B

    HA-A/C-09

    To EL-ILL

    RIG

    ‘2~1

    BLOWER
    MOTOR

    (/ill)

    FAN
    SWITCH
    @
    ILL. ~

    ~
    LIB
    ~
    B

    1——1

    JOINT

    B

    CONNECTOR-4

    ~9)

    n r-t-=B ~
    B

    8

    B

    B

    B’:’

    B

    ~Next

    page

    B

    tJLt 1
    ~

    ~~

    ~———————,

    : ~~

    I
    I

    L
    I

    W

    ~

    2

    Wi

    (Foldout

    ~
    P

    I
    ~I

    ~

    1=21=4’=11;::::31

    OO~:

    Refer to last page

    ~f

    HA-10

    page) .

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    WiringOiagram — AlC -/RHO Models (Cont’d)

    HA-A/C-08

    @~

    Refer to EL-POWER.
    FUSE

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    ~

    TO

    *1 ~}

    -LG/R ~

    I
    LG/R

    HA-A/C-11

    Next
    page

    m
    RECIRCULATION
    SWITCH

    INDICATOR

    ~

    lki=JJ
    B

    Pr’eceding 4
    page
    ~

    ~~
    ~W

    8

    ….

    1
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~

    [gH[]I]

    W

    HHA122

    HA-11

    II

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Wiring Diagram — AlC -/RHD Models (Cont’d)

    ——————O~I
    -e——-.
    …..

    preCeding{~
    page

    HA-A/C-09

    *1 ……

    <& LG/R

    LG/R

    L

    rm

    rrTI

    THERMISTOR

    DUAL-

    THERMO
    CONTROL

    LOW

    HIGH PRESSURE

    a.

    AMPLIFIER
    ~

    ~

    NORMAL

    SWITCH
    ~

    ~

    ~
    G

    I

    lm
    r:l,
    I~~
    -;8- — ~~I

    LG/R

    rrf4TI

    *6

    ~

    INDICATOR
    ~
    LG/S
    To
    HA-A/C

    -07

    ~

    <& LG/S -0

    I

    GA

    @):
    @:

    G

    DUALHIGH PRESSURE

    LOW

    @:
    @:
    @:

    CBID

    t~

    AIC
    SWITCH

    GA engine
    GA engine and SR engine
    GA engine for Europe and
    Australia and SR engine
    CD engine
    Except for Europe
    and Australia

    ~

    NORMAL

    SWITCH

    ~

    @

    lkidJ

    rriu

    *8

    +;>

    Next
    page

    GY ~

    LG/B~

    Refer to last page
    (FaIdaut

    ~~
    ~W

    ~~

    fi]

    w

    JS4.~

    !.l5)

    page) .

    S

    HHA123

    HA-12

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Wiring Diagram — AlC -/RHD Models (Cont’d)

    HA-A/C-10

    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:
    @:

    @:
    @:

    Preceding
    page

    *5″.@
    Y
    *s @ Y
    *a @ G
    *9
    @ Y
    *10 .. @ 5

    GA engine
    CO engine
    GA engine for Australia
    Except@
    GA engine and SA engine
    Except for Europe and Australia
    GA engine for Europe and Australia
    and SR engine

    @

    ,,

    t Li 1

    1Li
    ~

    I

    J

    ~I
    <0

    B

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-4

    ~~59):@
    B

    ~

    B

    ~Next

    page

    @ ~I

    ~

    *1 …@> IGNITION
    ~
    IGNITION
    *2
    (0 GIS <1D
    *3
    (0 G/Y ,, <1D

    LG/R

    -«J

    ~
    LG/R

    @:

    Y/S

    Y/R

    JOINT

    CONNECTOR-9

    0-<1:

    For Europe

    -.

    R

    A

    0

    INTAKE
    DOOR
    Preceding

    page

    ~

    ~

    8

    MOTOR
    ~

    FRE
    RECIRCULATION
    SWITCH
    @

    ~~

    ~~

    ~W

    ~W

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    HHA127

    HA-17

    III

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Diagnostic Procedure 3

    ~i5~ID

    SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when
    switch and fan switch are ON. — For GA and SR
    engines, RHO models.

    Compressor
    connector@

    ~

    ~~

    Ale

    Perform PRELIMINARYCHECK 1 before referring to the
    following flow chart.

    UR

    Yes

    RHA354FB

    Check magnet clutch coil.

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR.
    Disconnect compressor harness connector.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between compressor harness terminal G) and body
    ground?

    NG

    No
    Thermal protector
    connector @
    -2

    Compressor
    connector @Q?)

    For GA14 engine, go tol;].

    Replace magnet clutch.
    (Refer to HA-77, 80 in N15
    SERVICE MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)
    L—

    —-‘

    For others, go to[;}.

    ~

    ~

    B

    RHA356FA

    NG

    CHECK THERMAL PROTECTOR.
    Check circuit continuity between thermal
    protector harness terminal G) and compressor harness terminal G) .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    Replace thermal protector.

    OK
    Compressor
    connector @)

    ~

    AlC relay
    connector

    Note

    (ill)

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN AlC RELAY HARNESS TERMINAL CID AND COMPRESSOR HARNESS
    TERMINAL G) .
    Disconnect AIC relay.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    ~
    L/R

    SHA090F

    OK

    ~
    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR AIC
    RELAY.
    Disconnect AIC relay.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between AlC
    relay harness terminals G) ,@ and body
    ground?

    No

    I&J

    Yes

    RHA358F

    CHECK AlC RELAY AFTER DISCONNECTING IT.
    (Refer to HA-64 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY
    CIRCUIT AND 7.5A (No.
    and @Q] ) FUSES AT
    FUSE BLOCK.
    Refer to EL section («Wiring
    Diagram», «POWER SUPPLY ROUTING»).

    NG

    Replace AlC relay.

    OK

    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity,
    connector.

    HA-18

    repair harness or

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)
    @
    EGM (EGGS control
    module) connector @

    II

    R

    lmJl

    ECM

    CONNECTOR II

    11

    *: GA engine for

    Australia : 15
    Others:
    11
    11, 15: GA engine (Europe and
    Australia), SR engine (Y)
    Others (G)

    AlG relay
    connector @

    -_
    SHA091 F

    ECM

    ~i5~~
    ECM

    RCON

    NECTOR

    II

    III

    21: GA engine for
    Australia (G)
    41: Others (G)
    RHA361FA

    ~8)@a

    Dualpressure
    switch
    connector@

    ECM (EGCS control
    module) connector@

    R

    ECM

    CONNECTOR

    41 or 21
    ‘—v—-J

    CHECK VOLTAGE FOR ECM (ECCS control module).
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM
    (ECCS control module) harness terminal
    @, or @ and body ground?

    No

    CHECK ECM (ECCS control
    module). Refer to EC section.

    Disconnect ECM (ECCS control module)
    harness connector.
    Disconnect dual-pressure switch harness
    connector.

    41 or 21
    ‘—-v—‘

    III

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AlC
    RELAY HARNESS TERMINAL @ AND ECM (ECCS
    CONTROL MODULE) HA~NESS TERMINAL @ or @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for
    short.

    Yes

    EGM (EGGS control
    module) connector @

    II

    Note

    ~

    : 15 Others : 11
    (Europe and Australia),
    (Y) Others (G)
    SHA092F

    Disconnect AlC relay.
    Disconnect ECM (ECCS
    control module) harness
    connector.

    Yes

    E!’CONNECTORII

    *: GA engine for Australia
    11, 15: GA engine
    SR engine

    No

    @: GA engine (for Europe and
    Australia) and SR engine
    @: Except above

    ~—-……i

    y

    ~

    CHECK COIL SIDE CIRCUIT OF AlC
    RELAY.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM
    (ECCS control module) harness terminal @
    or @ and body ground?

    ECM (ECCS control
    module) connector @

    II

    @a I

    ~

    t
    NC relay.

    (j

    ~15

    8)

    ~

    ~

    I Reconnect

    II

    ~

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN ECM (ECCS CONTROL MODULE) HARNESS TERMINAL @ or @
    AND DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL @ .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK
    NG

    CHECK DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH.
    (Refer to HA-64 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5EON15GO.)

    Replace dual-pressure
    switch.

    G

    OK
    21: GA engine for

    II

    Disconnect thermo control amp. harness
    connector.

    Australia (G)
    41: Others (G)
    RHA362FA

    D

    D
    Dualpressure
    switch
    connector

    Thermo
    control amp.

    COIjCIOf@
    @

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN
    DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH HARNESS
    TERMINAL (j) AND THERMO CONTROL
    AMP. HARNESS TERMINAL @ .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK

    ~

    Reconnect dual-pressure switch harness
    connector.

    S8
    S8
    RHA363F

    Go to @

    HA-19

    Note:
    If the result is NG or No
    after checking circuit
    continuity, repair harness or
    connector.

    [1[D)~<

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)

    ~i)~~

    IJ

    EGM (ECGS control
    module) connector@

    II

    R

    ECM

    II

    CONNECTOR

    No

    CHECK VOLTAGE FOR ECM (ECCS control module).
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM
    (ECCS control module) harness terminal @
    and body ground?

    41

    CHECK
    module).
    tion.

    ECM (ECCS control
    Refer to EC sec-

    Replace
    amp.

    thermo

    Replace

    AlC

    Yes

    GY

    SHA089F

    Disconnect
    ECM (ECCS control
    harness connector.
    Disconnect
    thermo control amp.
    connector.

    module)
    harness

    Note
    Thermo control
    amp. connector

    @)

    ~

    II

    ECM (ECeS control
    module) connector@
    ECM

    E[CON

    NECTOR II

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN
    ECM (ECCS CONTROL
    MODULE)
    HARNESS TERMINAL
    @ AND THERMO CONTROL AMP. HARNESS
    TERMINAL
    ~ .

    Continuity

    should exist.

    If OK, check

    41

    harness

    for short.
    OK

    GY

    GY
    Reconnect
    connector.

    thermo

    control

    amp.

    harness

    RHA745G

    Note
    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR THERMO
    CONTROL
    AMP.
    (Refer to HA-49 in N 15 SERVICE
    MANUAL,
    Publication
    No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    II
    CHECK BODY GROUND
    CIRCUIT FOR
    THERMO
    CONTROL
    AMP.
    Disconnect
    thermo control amp. harness
    connector.
    Does continuity
    exist between thermo control amp. harness terminal @ and body
    ground?

    -=-

    Yes

    control

    RHA364FA

    No

    ~i5@a
    Thermo control
    amp. connector

    @)

    AlC

    Disconnect

    Ale switch
    connector@

    ~
    ~

    GY
    GY

    switch

    harness

    connector.

    (I

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN
    THERMO
    CONTROL AMP. HARNESS
    TERMINAL
    @ AND AlC SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL
    @.

    Continuity

    should exist.

    If OK, check

    harness

    for short.
    OK
    NG

    RHA365FA

    CHECK AlC SWITCH.
    (Refer to HA-63 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL,
    Publication
    No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    switch.

    OK
    Disconnect

    connector.

    Note
    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN
    AlC SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL @
    AND FAN SWITCH HARNESS
    TERMINAL

    ~
    LG/B

    harness

    Fan switch
    connector@

    A/G switch
    connector@

    ~

    fan switch

    @.

    LG/B

    OK
    RHA366FA

    Go to @

    HA-20

    Note:
    If the result is NG or No
    after checking circuit
    continuity, repair harness or
    connector.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)
    @

    Ef

    ECM

    ~

    J

    EGM (EGGS control
    module) connector@

    Thermo control
    amp. connector@

    II

    CONNECTOR

    II

    21 or 41
    ‘—-,—‘

    21: GA engine for
    Australia (G)
    41: Australia and

    S8

    Europe

    (G)

    Others

    (GY)

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN
    ECM (ECCS CONTROL MODULE) HARNESS TERMINAL @ OR @ AND
    THERMO CONTROL AMP. HARNESS
    TERMINAL@ .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK

    SHA069F

    Reconnect thermo control amp. harness
    connector.
    Note
    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR THERMO
    CONTROL AMP.
    (Refer to HA-49 in N 15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    Ii
    «:'»

    [!1

    ~i5

    RHA364FA

    ~
    A/G switch
    connector@

    Thermo control
    amp. connector @

    Replace thermo control
    amp.

    CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
    THERMO CONTROL AMP.
    Disconnect thermo control amp. harness
    connector.
    Does continuity exist between thermo control amp. harness terminal @ and body
    ground?
    No
    Disconnect AIC switch harness connector.

    ~
    ~

    GY
    GY

    RHA365FA

    1:1

    ~iv

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN THERMO CONTROL AMP.
    HARNESS TERMINAL@
    AND AlC
    SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    ~

    OK
    NG
    Fan switch
    connector@

    A/G switch
    connector@

    ~

    [!1

    CHECK AlC SWITCH.
    (Refer to HA-49 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)
    OK

    ~
    LG/B

    Replace AlC switch.

    Disconnect fan switch harness connector.

    LG/B

    II

    Note

    RHA366FA

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN AlC SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL @ AND FAN SWITCH HARNESS
    TERMINAL@.
    OK
    Go to @
    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity,
    connector.

    HA-21

    repair harness or

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)
    @

    l

    Fan switch
    connector@

    Note

    CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
    FAN SWITCH.
    Does continuity exist between fan switch
    harness terminal @ and body ground?

    ~
    B

    Yes
    NG
    ~HA367F

    CHECK FAN SWITCH.
    (Refer to HA-62 in N 15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON 15GO.)

    Replace fan switch.

    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity,
    connector.

    HA-22

    repair harness or

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Diagnostic

    ~i5~ID

    Procedure

    3

    SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when
    switch and fan switch are ON. — For GA and SR
    engines, LHD models.

    Compressor
    connector *

    ~~

    Ale

    Perform PRELIMINARYCHECK 1 before referring to the
    following flow chart.
    Yes

    RHA354FC

    Check magnet clutch coil.

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR.
    Disconnect compressor harness connector.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between compressor harness terminal G) and body ground?

    NG
    Replace magnet clutch.
    (Refer to HA-77, 80 in N15

    No
    SERVICE MANUAL, PubliFor GA 14 engine, go to Ii]. cation No. SM5E-ON15GO.)
    For oth ers, go to ~.
    1..—

    Thermal protector
    connector @QZ) -2

    Compressor
    connector @QD

    CHECK THERMAL PROTECTOR.
    Check circuit continuity between thermal
    protector harness terminal G) and compressor harness terminal G) .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    ~

    ~

    B

    RHA356FA

    Compressor
    connector

    Exept for SR
    engine

    model

    SR engine

    ,R
    @2t) ~~j)

    @
    UR

    A/C relay
    connector

    (ill)

    ci
    L/R

    SHA093F

    ——‘

    NG

    Replace thermal protector.

    No

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY
    ~CUIT
    AND 7.5A (No.
    l£J and @Q] ) FUSES AT
    FUSE BLOCK.
    Refer to EL section («Wiring
    Diagram», «POWER SUPPLY ROUTING»).

    OK

    [!J

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN AlC RELAY HARNESS TERMINAL CID AND THERMAL PROTECTOR
    HARNESS TERMINAL G) .
    Disconnect AIC relay.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK

    I!]
    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR AIC
    RELAY.
    Disconnect AIC relay.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between AlC
    relay harness terminals G) , @ and body
    ground?
    Yes
    NG
    CHECK AlC RELAY AFTER DISCONNECTING IT.
    (Refer to HA-64 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON 15GO.)

    Replace AlC relay.

    II

    OK

    0:
    RHA358F

    GA engine (for Europe, Israel and Australia) and SR engine
    @: Except above

    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity,
    connector.

    HA-23

    l~[L~
    repair harness or

    ~[Q))A

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)
    (1)

    ~i)~~

    I Reconnect

    EGM (EGGS control
    module) connector @

    II

    iii

    19’coNNECTORII

    ECM

    ~
    NC relay.

    11
    y

    CHECK COIL SIDE CIRCUIT OF AlC
    RELAY.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM
    (ECCS control module) harness terminal
    @ and body ground?

    Ale relay

    ~

    II

    LI~

    ECM

    ErcoNNECTORl1
    11

    y

    [€I
    CHECK VOLTAGE FOR ECM (ECCS control module).
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM
    (ECCS control module) harness terminal
    @ and body ground?

    y

    SHA066F

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AlC
    RELAY HARNESS TERMINAL @ AND ECM (ECCS
    CONTROL MODULE) HARNESS TERMINAL@.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for
    short.

    EGM (EGGS control
    module) connectorCE)

    connector@

    Disconnect AlC relay.
    Disconnect ECM (ECCS
    control module) harness
    connector.

    Ii

    ~i5

    ~i5

    No

    Yes

    CHECK ECM (ECCS control module). Refer to EC
    section.

    Disconnect ECM (ECCS control module)
    harness connector.
    Disconnect dual-pressure switch harness
    connector.

    ~i)~~

    EGM (ECCS control
    module) connector@

    ECM

    No

    Yes

    SHA065F

    Ii

    1—

    E!coNNEcTORII

    III

    Note

    41

    G

    SHA067F

    III

    ~1D@a

    EGM (EGGS control
    module) connector@

    II

    ECM

    ErCONNECTORII

    Dualpressure
    switch
    connector@

    ~

    OK
    Replace dual-pressure
    switch.

    OK
    Disconnect thermo control amp. harness
    connector.

    G

    SHA068F

    o
    Dualpressure
    switch
    connector @

    NG

    CHECK DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH.
    (Refer to HA-64 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5EON15GO.)

    G

    41

    Thermo
    control amp.

    co~ctor@D

    0

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH
    HARNESS TERMINAL G) AND THERMO
    CONTROL AMP. HARNESS TERMINAL
    @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK

    ~
    5B

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN ECM (ECCS CONTROL MODULE) HARNESS TERMINAL @ AND
    DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH HARNESS
    TERMINAL@ .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    Reconnect dual-pressure switch harness
    connector.
    S8
    RHA363F

    @ (Go to next page.)

    HA-24

    Note:
    If the result is NG or No
    after checking circuit
    continuity, repair harness or
    connector.

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)

    Thermo control
    amp. connector

    @

    ECM

    ~

    Note

    ECM (ECCS control
    module) connector@

    II

    E[CON NECTOR

    II

    41
    G

    SB

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN ECM (ECCS CONTROL MODULE) HARNESS TERMINAL @ AND
    THERMO CONTROL AMP. HARNESS
    TERMINAL@ .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK

    II

    Reconnect thermo control amp. harness
    connector.

    ~85~~
    Thermo control
    amp. connector

    Note
    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR THERMO
    CONTROL AMP.
    (Refer to HA-49 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    @

    ~

    II
    -=-

    (I

    RHA364FB

    ~85~
    Thermo control
    amp. connector @

    ;

    Replace thermo control
    amp.

    CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
    THERMO CONTROL AMP.
    Disconnect thermo control amp. harness
    connector.
    Does continuity exist between thermo control amp. harness terminal @ and body
    ground?

    A/C switch
    No

    connector@

    elJ
    G/B

    Disconnect AIC switch harness connector.

    (I

    Note

    GIS

    RHA365FB

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN THERMO CONTROL AMP.
    HARNESS TERMINAL@ AND AlC
    SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK

    Fan switch
    connector@

    A/C switch
    connector@

    ~

    Replace AlC switch.

    OK

    ~
    G/Y

    NG

    CHECK AlC SWITCH.
    (Refer to HA-63 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    Disconnect fan switch harness connector.

    G/Y

    II

    Note

    RHA366FB

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN AlC SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL @ AND FAN SWITCH HARNESS
    TERMINAL@.
    OK
    @ (Go to next page.)
    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity,
    connector.

    HA-25

    repair harness or

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)

    ~15~

    @

    l

    Fan switch

    connector@

    Note

    CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
    FAN SWITCH.
    Does continuity exist between fan switch
    harness terminal @ and body ground?

    ~
    B

    Yes
    NG
    ~HA367F

    CHECK FAN SWITCH.
    (Refer to HA-64 in N 15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    Replace fan switch.

    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity,
    connector.

    HA-26

    repair harness or

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Diagnostic Procedure 3

    ~i5~ID
    ~
    @~

    SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when AlC
    switch and fan switch are ON. — For CD engine

    Compressor
    connector@

    Perform PRELIMINARYCHECK 1 before referring to the ~~
    following flow chart.

    m

    UR

    RHA354FB

    Yes
    Check magnet clutch coil.

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR.
    Disconnect compressor harness connector.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between compressor harness terminal (j) and body ground?

    OK
    Replace magnet clutch.
    (Refer to HA-77 in N15
    SERVICE MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    No

    Compressor
    connector @)

    Disconnect AlC relay.

    Ale relay
    connector

    (ffi)
    Note

    ~

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN AlC RELAY HARNESS TERMINAL CID AND THERMAL PROTECTOR
    HARNESS TERMINAL (j) .

    ~
    UR

    SHA090F

    [!J
    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR A/C
    RELAY.
    Disconnect A/C relay.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between AlC
    relay harness terminals (j) ,@ and body
    ground?

    Ale

    (ffi)

    UY

    et

    If OK, check harness for short.

    OK

    ~15~
    relay
    connector

    Continuity should exist.

    LIB

    No

    Yes

    CHECK POWER SUPPLY
    CIRCUIT AND 7.5A (No.
    [&] and [1Q] ) FUSES AT
    FUSE BLOCK.
    Refer to EL section («Wiring
    Diagram», «POWER SUPPLY ROUTING»).

    NG
    RHA358F

    CHECK AlC RELAY AFTER DISCONNECTING IT.
    (Refer to HA-64 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON 15GO.)

    Replace AlC relay.

    OK

    o
    (Go to next page.)

    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity, repair harness or
    connector.

    HA-27

    II
    ,

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)

    ~i3~@

    (1)

    I Reconnect

    ECM (Engine control
    module) connector @
    ECM

    t
    Ale

    relay.

    (!]

    ErCONNECTORII
    15

    1—

    CHECK COIL SIDE CIRCUIT OF AlC
    RELAY.
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM
    (Engine control module) harness terminal
    @ and body ground?

    No

    Disconnect ECM (Engine
    control module) harness connector.
    Disconnect dual-pressure
    switch harness connector.

    Yes

    ‘=»sHA071 F

    ~

    ECM (Engine control
    module) connector @
    ECM

    Dual-pressure
    switch connector

    Er CONNECTORII

    N~e
    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM
    (ENGINE CONTROL MODULE) HARNESS TERMINAL
    @ AND DUAL-PRESSURE
    SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL CD.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for
    short.

    @

    ~

    15
    G

    G

    OK
    CHECK
    DUALPRESSURE
    SWITCH.
    (Refer to
    HA-64 in
    N15
    SERVICE
    MANUAL,
    Publication No.
    SM5EON15GO.)

    SHA072F

    Ii

    ~i5~~

    Dual-pressure
    switch
    connector @

    A/C relay
    connector

    L

    @

    Replace
    dual-pressure
    switch.

    L

    Ii
    SHA094F

    Note

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AlC RELAY
    HARNESS TERMINAL CID
    AND DUAL-PRESSURE
    SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL CID .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for
    short.

    ~i3~@

    ECM (Engine control
    module) connector @
    ECM

    NG

    E!’CONNECTORII
    21

    ~

    -SHA073F

    CHECK VOLTAGE FOR ECM (Engine
    control unit).
    Do approx. 12 volts exist between ECM
    (Engine control module) harness terminal
    No. @ and body ground?

    No

    CHECK ECM (Engine control
    module). (Refer to EC section.)

    Yes
    Disconnect ECM (Engine control module)
    harness connector.
    Disconnect thermo control amp. harness
    connector.

    @
    (Go to next page.)
    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity,
    connector.

    HA-28

    repair harness or

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)
    Note
    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN ECM (ENGINE CONTROL
    MODULE) HARNESS TERMINAL @ AND
    THERMO CONTROL AMP. HARNESS
    TERMINAL@ .
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    R/L

    OK
    Reconnect thermo control amp. harness
    connector.

    Note
    CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR THERMO
    CONTROL AMP.
    (Refer to HA-49 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    LHD:

    GIS

    RHD: GY
    ‘:’

    Thermo control
    amp. connector

    @

    ;

    Ale switch
    connector

    RHA364F

    No

    @

    Disconnect AIC switch harness connector.

    ~
    Note

    GIS

    LHD:

    GIS

    RHD: GY

    RHO:

    GY

    LHD:

    Replace thermo control
    amp.

    CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
    THERMO CONTROL AMP.
    Disconnect thermo control amp. harness
    connector.
    Does continuity exist between thermo control amp. harness terminal @ and body
    ground?

    RHA365F

    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN THERMO CONTROL AMP.
    HARNESS TERMINAL @ AND AlC
    SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL @.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.
    OK
    NG

    Ale

    switch
    connector @

    ~

    Fan switch
    connector@

    CHECK AlC SWITCH.
    (Refer to HA-63 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    Replace AlC switch.

    OK

    ~

    Disconnect fan switch harness connector.

    LHD:

    G/Y

    LHD:

    G/Y

    RHO:

    LG/S

    RHO:

    LG/S
    RHA366F

    II

    Note
    CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
    BETWEEN AlC SWITCH HARNESS TERMINAL @ AND FAN SWITCH HARNESS
    TERMINAL@.
    Continuity should exist.
    If OK, check harness for short.

    []LQ))A

    OK
    @
    (Go to next page.)
    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity,
    connector.

    HA-29

    repair harness or

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    Diagnostic Procedure 3 (Cont’d)
    II

    @

    1

    Fan switch

    II

    connector@

    Note

    CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR

    ~

    FAN SWITCH.
    Does continuity exist between fan switch
    harness terminal @ and body ground?

    B

    Yes
    ~HA367F

    CHECK FAN SWITCH.
    (Refer to HA-62 in N15 SERVICE
    MANUAL, Publication No. SM5E-ON15GO.)

    NG

    Replace fan switch.

    Note:
    If the result is NG or No after checking circuit continuity, repair harness or
    connector.

    HA-30

    ALPHABETICAL INDEX
    SECTION

    @~

    ~~
    [L~

    ~~

    [?~
    (g;[L

    ~lJJ

    !P~u
    [?~

    M
    ~[g1

    ~u
    ~~

    ~u
    ~~
    ~[L


    IDX-1

    ALPHABETICAL INDEX
    COOUF — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    COOUF — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Coupling sleeve (M/T)

    A
    AAC/V — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    AAC/V — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    ABS (anti-lock brake system)
    ABS — Wiring diagram
    A/C trouble diagnoses (manual A/C)
    Ale, M — Wiring diagram
    A/CCUT — Wiring diagram (CD engine)
    ACUSW — Wiring diagram (CD engine)
    Air bag
    Air bag disposal
    Air bag precautions
    AIRREG — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Alternator
    Anti-lock brake system — Wiring
    diagram
    A/T — Wiring diagram
    AIT trouble diagnoses
    Audio
    AUDIO — Wiring diagram

    EC-31
    EC-72
    BR-9
    BR-21
    HA-3
    HA-4
    EC-99
    EC-98
    RS-8
    RS-17
    GI-3
    EC-71
    EL-27
    BR-21
    AT-3
    AT-3
    EL-134
    EL-134

    EC-33
    EC-77
    MT-5, 7

    D
    Daytime light system
    DEF — Wiring diagram
    Diagnosis sensor unit.
    Differential gear (FF MIT)
    Dimensions
    D/LOCK — Wiring diagram
    Dome light — See Interior lamp
    Door glass
    Door glass Fitting Adjustment.
    Door lock
    Door trim
    Door, front
    Door, rear
    DTRL — Wiring diagram

    EL-31
    EL-132
    RS-12
    MT-5, 7
    G 1-11
    EL-161
    EL-76
    BT-3
    BT-3
    BT-3
    BT-5
    BT-3
    BT-4
    EL-32

    E
    B
    Back-up lamp
    BACKIL — Wiring diagram
    Baulk ring (MIT)
    BUZZER — Wiring diagram

    EL-48
    EL-48
    MT-5, 7
    EL-115

    C
    Camshaft position sensor (CMPS)
    (GA engine)
    CHARGE — Wiring diagram
    Charging system
    CIGAR — Wiring diagram
    Cigarette lighter
    Clock
    CLOCK — Wiring diagram
    Clutch cable
    Clutch damper
    Clutch master cylinder
    Clutch operating cylinder
    Clutch pedal
    Clutch release bearing
    Clutch release mechanism
    Clutch withdrawal lever
    CMPS — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    CMPS — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Collision diagnosis
    Combination meter
    Combination switch
    CONSULT for ABS
    CONSULT general information
    Control lever (M/T)
    Control valve (A/T)
    COOUF — Wiring diagram (CD engine)

    EC-8
    EL-22
    EL-22
    EL-130
    EL-130
    EL-131
    EL-131
    CL-3
    CL-5
    CL-4
    CL-5
    CL-2
    CL-6
    CL-6
    CL-6
    EC-8
    EC-60
    RS-50
    EL-83
    EL-28
    BR-31
    GI-5
    MT-3
    AT-13
    EC-91

    IDX.2

    ECCS circuit diagram (CD engine)
    ECCS circuit diagram (GA engine)
    ECCS circuit diagram (SR engine)
    ECTS — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    EGRC/V — Wiring diagram (CD engine)
    EGRC/V — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    EGRC/V — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Electric sun roof
    Electrical unit
    Electrical units location

    EC-85
    EC-4
    EC-57
    EC-62
    EC-94
    EC-38
    EC-66
    EL-140
    Foldout
    EL-232

    F
    FCUT — Wiring diagram (CD engine)
    F/FOG — Wiring diagram
    FICO — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Final drive (FF MIT)
    Fog famp, front
    Fog lamp, rear
    Fork rod (M1T)
    F/PUMP — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    F/PUMP — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Front disc brake
    Front door
    Front fog lamp
    Front seat
    Front seat belt
    Fuel gauge
    Fuse block

    EC-92
    EL-50, 53
    EC-73
    MT-5, 7
    EL-50
    EL-52
    MT-6
    EC-29
    EC-70
    BR-6
    BT-3
    EL-50
    BT-9
    RS-4
    EL-83
    Foldout

    ALPHABETICAL

    INDEX

    KS — Wiring diagram (GA engine)

    G

    EC-21

    L
    Gauges
    Gear components (M/T)
    Glass
    GLOW — Wiring diagram (CD engine)
    GOVNR — Wiring diagrarn (CD engine)

    EL-83
    MT-5, 7
    8T-3
    EC-93
    EC-89

    Length (Dimensions)
    License lamp
    LKUP — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    LOAD — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Location of electrical units
    Lock, door
    Luggage room lamp

    H
    H/AIM — Wiring diagram
    Harness layout
    Hazard warning lamp
    Headlamp
    Headlamp aiming control
    Headlamp leveler — See Headlamp
    aiming control.
    Headlamp wiper
    Heated seat
    HEATER — Wiring diagram
    Height (Dimensions)
    H/LAMP — Wiring diagram
    HLC — Wiring diagram
    H02S — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    H02S — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Horn
    HORN — Wiring diagram
    HSEAT — Wiring diagram

    EL-35
    EL-234
    EL-58
    EL-29
    EL-35
    EL-35
    EL-127
    EL-146
    HA-16
    GI-11
    EL-29
    EL-127
    EC-40
    EC-79
    EL-129
    EL-129
    EL-146

    IACV-FICD solenoid valve (GA engine)
    IGN/SG — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    IGN/SG — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Ignition coil (GA engine)
    ILL — Wiring diagram
    Illumination
    Inhibitor switch
    INJECT — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    INJECT — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Input shaft (FF MIT)
    INT/L — Wiring diagram
    Interior
    Interior lamp

    EC-44
    EC-15
    EC-63
    EC-15
    EL-67
    EL-66
    AT-6
    EC-27
    EC-68
    MT-5, 7
    EL-75
    8T-5
    EL-76

    Joint connector (J/C)
    Junction box (JIB)

    MAFS — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    MAFS — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    MAIN — Wiring diagram (CD engine)
    MAIN — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    MAIN — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    Main drive gear (MIT)
    Mainshaft (MIT)
    Manual air conditioner — Wiring diagram
    Master cylinder (brake)
    Master cylinder (clutch)
    Meter
    METER — Wiring diagram
    MIUDL — Wiring diagram (CD engine)
    MIUDL — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    MIRROR — Wiring diagram
    Mirror defogger
    Model variation
    M/T major overhaul
    MULTI — Wiring diagram
    Multi-remote control system

    Keyless entry system — See Multi-remote control system

    EL-196

    ~~

    ~~
    EC-13
    EC-61
    EC-86 ~~
    EC-6
    EC-58
    MT-5, 7 [MllY
    MT-5, 7
    HA-4
    BR-3 ~lY
    CL-4
    EL-83
    EL-86 [?~
    EC-101
    EC-83
    EL-142 ~
    EL-132
    GI-6
    MT-4 ~[Rl
    EL-197
    EL-196

    N

    NATS (Nissan anti-theft system)
    NATS — Wiring diagram
    NATS precautions (For Europe)

    EL-202
    EL-203
    GI-4

    ~lY

    o

    p

    Foldout
    Foldout
    K

    ~~

    M

    Operating cylinder (clutch)
    Overdrive control switch

    J

    GI-11
    EL-39
    EC-80
    EC-81
    EL-232
    BT-3
    EL-75

    CL-5
    AT-6

    ,-

    Parking brake control
    8R-8
    Parking lamp
    EL-39
    PGC/V — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    EC-37
    PGC/V — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    EC-67
    POWER — Wiring diagram
    EL-8
    Power door lock
    EL-159, 171, 178

    IDX-3

    ~~

    ALPHABETICAL INDEX
    Power
    Power
    Power
    Power

    door mirror
    supply routing
    transistor (GA engine)
    window

    Supplemental Restraint System
    Supplemental restraint system — Wiring
    diagram
    Synchronizer (MIT)

    EL-142
    EL-6
    EC-15
    EL-148

    RS-20, 26
    MT-5, 7

    T

    R
    Radio — See Audio
    Rear axle
    Rear door
    Rear drum brake
    Rear fog lamp
    Rear seat
    Rear seat belt.
    Rear washer
    Rear window defogger
    Rear wiper
    Release bearing (clutch)
    Reverse idler shaft (MIT)
    Reverse main gear (MIT)
    Road wheel size
    Room lamp — See Interior lamp
    ROOM/L — Wiring diagram

    RS-7, 8

    EL-134
    RA-2
    BT-4
    BR-7
    EL-52
    BT-1 0
    RS-5
    EL-119
    EL-132
    EL-119
    CL-6
    MT-5, 7
    MT-5, 7
    GI-11
    EL-76
    EL-78

    Tachometer
    TaiI lam p.
    TAIUL — Wiring diagram
    TCV — Wiring diagram (CD engine)
    Throwout bearing — See Clutch release
    bearing
    Tire size
    Torque convertor clutch solenoid valve
    Transmission case (MIT)
    Tread-FR&RR (Dimensions)
    Trim
    Trunk room lamp
    TURN — Wiring diagram
    Turn signal lamp

    EL-83
    EL-39
    EL-40
    EC-90
    CL-6
    G 1-11
    AT-6
    MT-4
    GI-11
    BT-5
    EL-75
    EL-59
    EL-58

    v

    S
    Seat belt, front.
    Seat belt, rear
    Seat, front
    Seat, rear
    Shift control components (MIT)
    Shift fork (MIT)
    Side air bag
    S/LOCK — Wiring diagram
    Speedometer
    Spiral cable
    Spot lamp
    SROOF — Wiring diagram
    SRS — See Supplemental Restraint
    System
    SRS — Wiring diagram
    SRS Trouble diagnoses
    S/SIG — Wiring diagram (CD engine)
    S/SIG — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    S/SIG — Wiring diagram (SR engine)
    START — Wiring diagram
    Starter
    Starting system
    Stop lamp
    STOP/L — Wiring diagram
    Striking rod (MIT)
    Sun roof, electric
    Super lock
    Super lock system precautions

    RS-4
    RS-5
    ST-9
    BT-10
    MT-6
    MT-6
    RS-8
    EL-181
    EL-83
    RS-7, 14
    EL-75
    EL-140
    RS-7, 8
    RS-20, 26
    RS-20, 21
    EC-96
    EC-26
    EC-65
    EL-17
    EL-21
    EL-17
    EL-46
    EL-46
    MT-6
    EL-140
    EL-178
    GI-4

    Vehicle identification number
    Vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
    (GA engine)
    VSS — Wiring diagram (CD engine)
    VSS — Wiring diagram (GA engine)
    VSS — Wiring diagram (SR engine)

    GI-9
    EC-22
    EC-88
    EC-22
    EC-64

    W
    WARN — Wiring diagram
    Warning buzzer
    Warning lamps
    Washer, rear
    Water temperature gauge
    Wheel hub (rear)
    Wheel sensors (ASS)
    Wheel size
    Wheelbase (Dimensions)
    Width (Dimensions)
    WINDOW — Wiring diagram
    Window, door
    WIP/R — Wiring diagram
    Wiper, rear
    Wiring Diagram (Cell code) list.
    Wiring diagram — AT — LHD
    Wiring diagram — AT — RHO
    Withdrawal lever (clutch)

    IDX.4

    ~

    EL-102
    EL-.114
    EL-101
    EL-119
    EL-83
    RA-2
    BR-12
    GI-11
    GI-11
    GI-11
    EL-150
    ST-3
    EL-120
    EL-119
    EL-262
    AT-3
    AT-4
    CL-6

    ENGINE LUBRICATION &
    COOLING SYSTEMS
    SECTION

    @~

    MODIFICATION NOTICE:
    The radiator cap relief pressure has been changed.

    CONTENTS
    ________

    1

    CD

    ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
    System Check

    —‘
    2
    2

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
    Engine Cooling System

    LC-1

    (50S)

    3
    3

    t[L

    I

    ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

    I CD I

    System Check
    WARNING:
    Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot; serious
    burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from
    the radiator.
    Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully loosen it a quarter turn to release built-up pressure. Then remove the cap
    completely.

    CHECKING RADIATOR CAP
    To check radiator cap, apply pressure to cap with a tester.

    Radiator cap relief pressure:
    Standard
    98 — 118 kPa
    (0.98 — 1.18 bar, 1.0 — 1.2 kg/cm2, 14 — 17 psi)
    Limit
    59 — 118 kPa
    (0.59 — 1.18 bar, 0.6 — 1.2 kg/cm2, 9 — 17 psi)
    EG17650301
    SLC613-A

    Pull the negative pressure valve to open it. Check that it closes
    completely when released.

    SMA9678

    LC-2

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Engine Cooling System
    Radiator
    Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
    Cap relief

    Standard

    pressure

    Limit

    Leakage test pressure

    98 — 118 (0.98 — 1.18, 1.0 — 1.2, 14 — 17)
    59 — 118 (0.59 — 1.18, 0.6 — 1.2, 9 — 17)
    157 (1.57, 1.6, 23)

    III

    LC-3

    MANUAL TRANSAXLE

    @~

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION NOTICE:

    The service data and specifications (SOS) and parts components have been changed.
    Tightening torque of the transaxle gear control parts has been changed.

    CONTENTS
    ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
    Air Breather Hose
    TRANSAXLE GEAR CONTROL

    2
    2
    3

    I

    RS5F32A

    I

    MAJOR OVERHAUL
    Gear Components

    RS5F30A & RS5F31A
    MAJOR OVERHAU L
    Case Components
    Gear Components
    Shift Control Components

    I

    I

    II

    7
    7

    RS5F30A & RS5F31A & RS5F32A
    4
    4
    5
    6

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
    General Specifications
    Inspection and Adjustment — RS5F30A &
    RS5F31 A

    MT-1

    8
    8

    rfl&

    9

    M

    ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
    Air Breather Hose



    Air breather
    tube

    Refer to the figure below for removal and installation procedures of air breather hose.
    When re-installing air breather hose after removal, install it to
    the original position as shown in the figure below.
    The hose margin to insert air breather tube should be more
    than 17 mm (0.67 in). (Insert the hose to the R curve of air
    breather tube.)

    More than
    17 mm (0.67 in)
    SMT840C

    GA engine models

    Clutch cable

    ~paint

    mark

    p

    V

    Air breather

    hose

    C1iP

    01/-

    Rib

    I

    Clutch

    cable

    Front

    Paint mark
    Yellow: LH D models
    Pink: RHD models
    (Make sure paint mark faces upward.)

    SMT841C

    SR engine models

    CD engine models

    ~
    Air duct
    Be sure to
    insert the hose
    up to the tube.

    Paint mark: Red
    (Make sure paint
    mark faces upward.)

    ~

    3.9 — 5.8 N.m
    (0.40 — 0.59 kg-m,
    34.5 — 51.3 in-Ib)

    Air breather
    hose
    Clip

    Front

    Front

    Clutch

    hose

    t:?
    Front

    MT-2

    Mark sure two paint marks
    face left side of vehicle.

    SMT842C

    TRANSAXLE

    RS5F32A-

    ~——l
    ~
    1-

    @

    L!-

    ~
    ‘I~

    ~

    I

    G EAR CONTROL

    l

    ~-

    )

    ,

    i

    I

    l_

    L

    I

    I

    ‘——- /_
    ~L_—»

    11

    1328.5
    to.J

    fID
    ~,

    — 37.2

    (2

    to.J

    12 — 15 (1.2
    .9 _ 3 8 21
    .,
    -27)

    ~

    ~

    ~
    ~~

    _

    »

    ~~

    ~

    ~_~—-v

    16

    (1.0 • 1.3,~’
    87 _ 113)’
    __ //
    ~/
    ..,/ /

    . _/~/. /.-/

    ~~

    I

    ‘=_g.-It-:D-

    ‘-‘~I

    —-:—~-=-B….
    ————-

    23

    1.

    I,

    ——~

    ‘ ~~
    I

    «I

    )

    ~tOJ

    ~~

    (For Europe)

    ~

    (Except

    Europe)

    12 — 15

    ., 9 — 11)

    (1.2 — 1 5

    20

    /

    @

    to.J 15.7
    ~

    .’

    «‘»

    «.——‘

    I

    m~’ ~.

    10 _ 13

    ~~

    ‘.
    .5, 9 — 11)

    __X~’I1:
    .

    12 ////
    /;;///

    ‘» (@~

    L

    — 1

    _—-1

    tOJ 15.7

    — 20.5 (1 .6 • 2 . 1 , 12 — 15)

    — 20.5 (1 .6 — 2.1, 12 — 15)

    19

    _. __ ……..J

    ~:
    m’l

    ~

    ~P’m

    ~-~ : N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    ~-~ 13.7 — 17.7 (1 .4 — 1.8, 10 — 13)

    Control lever k
    Boot
    nob

    @
    rr

    gontrollever socket
    antral lever
    Bearing seat s .
    (Except RS5Ff~,ng
    Seat
    A)

    @
    @

    H and lever socket
    Plate bolt
    Transaxle hole co
    Support rod
    ver

    @

    Plate

    @
    @

    Collar
    Bushing

    ‘JY’

    Bushing

    @ Support rod brack t
    ?’

    O-ring

    WJ

    Collar

    N.m (k g-m, In-Ib)
    .

    e

    MT-3

    Bushing
    Control rod
    Return sp nng
    .
    :~:~rn spring rubber
    er bracket
    Mass damper
    Seat bearing set
    Hand Iever dust boot

    I RS5F30A

    MAJOR OVERHAUL

    & RS5F31A

    Case Components
    SEC. 320

    ~3.7

    — 5.0
    (0.38 — 0.51,
    33.0 — 44.3)

    24

    I
    (j) [j] 10
    ~

    — 20 (1.0 — 2.0, 87 — -~7~

    Thread

    of bolt

    I

    /

    19 ~

    ~/

    14

    ~

    to.J 26

    to.J 25

    — 34 (2.5 — 3.5, 18 — 25) ~

    • 30 (2.7 — 3.1, 20 — 22)

    @ to.J
    ~

    13 ~
    11 ~

    Mating

    surface

    @ to.J
    ~

    to transmission

    ~

    Thread

    m Seal

    lip

    of bolt

    20 — 29 (2.0 — 3.0, 14 • 22)
    Thread

    of bolt

    Seal lip

    case

    20 — 29 (2.0 — 3.0, 14 — 22)

    [j] : N.m

    Thread

    to.J : N. m (kg-m,

    of bolt

    ~

    (kg-m, in-Ib)
    ft-Ib)

    : Apply recommended
    sealant
    (Nissan genuine part: KP610-00250)

    ~ (b) :

    ‘* :

    or equivalent.

    Apply locking sealant.
    Pay attention

    to its direction.
    SMT838C

    G)

    Clutch housing

    CID

    Input shaft oil seal
    Oil pocket
    Bearing retainer
    Bearing retainer
    Torx screw

    @
    @
    @

    (J)

    Filler plug

    @

    Welch plug
    O-ring
    Case cover
    Back-up lamp switch
    Differential oil seal
    Drain plug
    Transmission case

    CID

    Air breather tube

    @

    Oil gutter

    @)
    @

    CID
    @

    @
    @
    @

    MT-4

    @

    Reverse idler shaft

    @
    @

    Oil channel
    Striking rod oil seal

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Boot
    Neutral position switch
    Differential oil seal
    O-ring
    Speedometer pinion assembly

    I

    MAJOR OVERHAUL

    I

    RS5F30A & RS5F31 A

    I

    Gear Components

    @*~

    SEC. 322

    5

    II
    Apply gear oil to gears, shifts, synchronizers
    and bearings when assembling.
    Apply locking sealant.
    Select proper thic,kness.
    -C:I : Pay attention to its direction.

    ~ CQ :

    *:

    ~[g1
    SMT686CA

    G)
    (g)

    Reverse idler gear
    Reverse idler
    bushing
    Reverse idler spacer
    Snap ring
    Spacer
    Input shaft front bearing
    Input shaft
    Oil plug

    @
    @
    @

    @

    @

    5th gear needle bearing
    5th input gear
    Coupling sleeve
    Baulk ring
    5th synchronizer hub

    5th stopper
    Input shaft rear bearing
    Mainshaft front bearing
    Mainshaft
    1st main gear
    1st gear needle bearing
    Steel ball

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    2nd & 3rd bushing
    4th main gear
    5th main gear
    Thrust washer
    Mainshaft C-ring

    @

    Spread spring

    @
    @

    CID
    CID
    (J)
    @
    @
    @
    @
    .@

    @
    @
    @
    @

    Shifting insert

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    MT-5

    C-ring holder
    Mainshaft rear
    bearing
    Spacer
    Mainshaft bearing
    adjusting shim
    4th bushing
    3rd & 4th synchronizer
    hub

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    3rd main gear
    2nd main gear
    1st & 2nd synchronizer hub
    Reverse main gear
    (Coupling sleeve)

    @
    @
    @

    Differential case

    @

    @

    Final gear
    Differential side bearing adjusting shim
    Differential side bearing
    Retaining pin
    Pinion mate thrust
    washer
    Speedometer drive
    gear
    Speedometer
    stopper
    Side gear
    Pinion mate gear
    Pinion mate shaft
    Side gear thrust
    washer

    ~U
    ~~

    ~U
    ~ffi
    ~[L

    mQ))A

    ~ RS5F30A & RS5F31 A

    MAJOR OVERHAUL
    Shift Control Components
    SEC. 328

    @*
    ~

    2~

    12 . 16
    (1.2 • 1.6, 9 — 12)

    ~ (b) Thread

    4

    ~-@

    of plug

    iA

    ~

    ~~~

    _A~

    lsL~~
    ‘=-‘~~

    /~

    ;; ./f?P)

    /

    ~»‘1!—jj] 6.3
    o~

    — 8.3
    (0.64 — 0.85, 55.6 — 73.8)

    @

    .~~~»~~18

    @

    ~
    14~

    ~/
    ~

    6.3 • 8.3
    (0.64 — 0.85, 55.6 • 73.8)

    16

    8

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, in-Ib)

    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    ~ (b) :

    *:

    Apply locking sealant.
    Select proper length.

    SMT592D

    (j)

    Reverse check spring

    @

    3rd & 4th shift fork

    @

    @
    @
    @

    Reverse check plug
    Check ball plug

    @
    @

    1st & 2nd shift fork
    Control bracket

    Shift check ball
    Shift check spring
    Fork shaft support spring
    Shifter cap
    Fork shaft
    5th shift fork

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Striking interlock
    Retaining pin
    Retaining pin

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Check sleeve
    O-ring
    Select return spring

    Yoke
    Striking rod

    @
    @

    Check plunger
    Stopper pin

    CID
    CID
    (J)

    CID
    @

    MT-6

    Striking lever
    Check ball (Large)
    Check ball (Small)

    I

    I

    MAJOR OVERHAUL

    RS5F32A

    I

    Gear Components
    @~
    SEC. 322

    [MJffi
    ~[MJ
    ~~

    ~~

    ~~

    ~~

    II
    ffilf

    *:

    *’ :

    ~ (b):

    ~/k
    Pay attention

    to its direction.

    Select proper thickness.

    M

    Apply locking sealant.
    : Apply gear oil.
    SMTS93D

    G)
    (2)
    @
    @
    @
    @
    (J)

    CID
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    Reverse idler gear

    @

    1st main gear

    Reverse idler bushing
    Reverse idler spacer
    Snap ring

    @

    Baulk ring
    1st gear needle bearing
    Reverse main gear
    (Coupling sleeve)
    Insert spring
    1st & 2nd synchronizer hub

    Spacer
    Input shaft front bearing
    Input shaft
    5th gear needle bearing
    5th input gear

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    ~

    2nd outer baulk ring
    2nd synchronizer cone

    Baulk ring
    Coupling sleeve

    @

    2nd inner baulk ring

    @

    @

    Spread spring
    Shifting insert

    @

    2nd main gear
    2nd & 3rd bushing

    @
    @

    3rd main gear
    3rd inner baulk ring
    3rd synchronizer cone

    @

    5th gear synchronizer hub
    Spread spring
    5th stopper
    Snap ring
    Input shaft bearing
    Mainshaft front bearing
    Steel ball
    Mainshaft

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    3rd outer baulk ring
    Coupling sleeve
    3rd & 4th synchronizer hub
    Insert spring
    Baulk ring
    4th main gear
    4th bushing

    MT-7

    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @
    @

    ~rR1

    5th main gear
    Spacer
    Mainshaft rear bearing
    Mainshaft C-ring
    C-ring holder
    Snap ring
    Snap ring
    Differential side bearing
    Speedometer stopper
    Speedometer drive gear
    Differential case
    Final gear
    Differential side bearing
    Differential side bearing
    adjusting shim
    Retaining pin
    Pinion mate thrust washer
    Pinion mate gear
    Thrust washer
    Side gear
    Pinion mate shaft

    ~lf
    ~~

    ~U
    ~ffi
    ~[L

    ~[Q)~

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    General Specifications
    TRANSAXLE

    Applied model

    Europe

    Except for
    Europe and
    Australia

    GA14DE

    GA15DE

    Except for
    Europe and
    Australia

    Europe and
    Australia

    Without
    catalyzer
    RS5F31A

    RS5F30A

    SR20DE

    CD20

    RS5F32A

    RS5F31A

    3.063

    3.333

    5

    Number of speeds
    Synchromesh

    Europe

    GA16DE

    With catalyzer
    Transaxle model

    Europe and Australia

    Warner

    type

    rii

    Shift pattern

    1

    3

    5

    l

    2

    3.333

    1st

    Gear ratio

    Number of
    teeth

    4

    R

    3.063

    3.333

    2nd

    1.955

    1.955

    1.826

    1.826

    1.955

    3rd

    1.286

    1.286

    1.286

    1.286

    1.286

    4th

    0.902

    0.926

    0.975

    0.975

    0.902

    5th

    0.756

    0.756

    0.810

    0.756

    0.756

    Reverse

    3.417

    3.417

    3.417

    3.153

    3.417

    Input
    gear

    Main
    gear

    1st

    15

    15

    16

    16

    15

    2nd

    22

    22

    23

    23

    22

    3rd

    28

    28

    28

    28

    28

    4th

    41

    41

    40

    40

    41

    5th

    45

    45

    42

    45

    45

    Rev.

    12

    12

    12

    13

    12

    1st

    50

    50

    49

    49

    50

    2nd

    43

    43

    42

    42

    43

    3rd

    36

    36

    36

    36

    36

    4th

    37

    38

    39

    39

    37

    5th

    34

    34

    34

    34

    34

    Rev.

    41

    41

    41

    41

    41

    Oil capacity
    (Reference data)

    f (Imp pt)

    mm (in)

    Oillevel*

    31

    30

    Reverse idler gear
    2.8 — 3.0 (4-7/8 — 5-1/4)

    2.9 — 3.2 (5-1/8 — 5-5/8)

    Europe
    3.6 — 3.8
    (6-3/8 — 6-3/4

    58 — 66 (2.28 — 2.60)

    57 — 66 (2.24 — 2.60)

    40 — 45
    (1.57 — 1.77)

    Remarks

    30
    Australia
    3.7 — 3.9
    (6-1/2 — 6-7/8)

    2.9 — 3.2
    (5-1/8 — 5-5/8)

    39 — 44
    (1.54 — 1.73)

    54 — 61
    (2.13 — 2.40)

    2nd & 3rd double baulk ring
    type

    *: Refer to MA section.

    FINAL GEAR
    GA14DE

    GA16DE

    SR20DE

    4.167

    3.789

    4.167

    4.176

    3.650

    Final gear/Pinion

    75/18

    72/19

    75/18

    71/17

    73/20

    Side gear/Pinion mate
    gear

    14/10

    14/10

    16/10

    14/10

    16/10

    Final gear ratio
    Number of
    teeth

    CD20

    GA15DE

    Engine

    MT-8

    SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (50S)
    Inspection and Adjustment RS5F31A

    RS5F30A &
    @l]

    AVAILABLE SHIMS
    — MAINSHAFT AND DIFFERENTIAL SIDE
    BEARING PRELOAD AND ADJUSTING
    SHIM
    Bearing preload (Reused bearing)
    Unit: mm (in)

    RS5F30A
    RS5F31A

    Mainshaft bearing

    Differential side bearing

    0.20 — 0.25
    (0.0079 — 0.0098)

    0.24 — 0.32
    (0.0094 — 0.0126)

    j

    II

    MT-9

    QUICK REFERENCE INDEX

    GENERAL INFORMATION

    GI

    MAINTENANCE

    MA

    ALMERA

    ENGINE MECHANICAL

    EM

    MODEL N15 SERIES

    ENGINE LUBRICATION &
    COOLING SYSTEMS

    LC

    ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

    EC

    ACCELERATOR CONTROL,
    FUEL & EXHAUST SYSTEMS

    FE

    FOREWORD

    CLUTCH

    CL

    This supplement contains information concerning necessary service
    procedures and relevant data for the
    model N15 series.

    MANUAL TRANSAXLE

    MT

    AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

    AT

    FRONT AXLE & FRONT SUSPENSION

    FA

    REAR AXLE & REAR SUSPENSION

    RA

    BRAKE SYSTEM

    BR

    STEERING SYSTEM

    ST

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM

    RS

    BODY & TRIM

    BT

    HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER

    HA

    ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

    EL

    ALPHABETICAL INDEX

    IDX

    All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this supplement are based on the latest product
    information available at the time of
    publication. If your NISSAN model
    differs from the specifications contained in this supplement, consult your
    NISSAN distributor for information.
    The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at
    any time without notice.

    Edition: January 1998
    Printing: January 1998 (01)
    Publication No. SM8E-N15SE0

    NISSAN EUROPE N.V.
    © 1998 NISSAN EUROPE N.V. Printed in THE NETHERLANDS
    Not to be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of Nissan Europe N.V., Amsterdam, The
    Netherlands.

    HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
    ~

    This Service Manual contains the new service procedures, service data and specifications for the
    face-lifted model N15 series which has been in production since January, 1998.

    ~

    This Service Manual does not contain the service procedures, etc. which are the same as those
    for former models*.
    Except for Europe:
    Please use this manual in conjunction with the NISSAN model N15 series Service Manual (Pub. No.
    SM5E-ON15GO).
    For Europe:
    Please use this manual in conjunction with the NISSAN model N15 series Service Manual (Pub. No.
    SM5E-ON15EO)and Supplement-I (Pub. No. SM6E-N15SEO).

    ~

    Follow the instruction below when using this manual.
    I~m;c~»

    ENGINt

    CONrROL

    ~IEM

    &

    ENGINE
    LUBRICATION
    COOLING SYSTEMS

    SYSHM

    CLUTCH
    MANUAL

    NISSAN
    MODEL

    N15

    AIJTQMA

    1RANSAXLt

    FRONT AXU

    SERIES

    ~

    lie

    -IFE-

    ACCELERATOR CONTROL,FUEL & __
    EXHAUST SYSTEMS

    White on black

    I RANSAXU

    & FRONT SUSPl NSION

    Black on white

    ~

    Specific section titles are printed white on a
    black background in the QUICK REFERENCE
    INDEX.

    Those sections which are printed black on a
    white background are not contained in this
    manual.

    Service procedures and
    service data are added
    or changed.
    Use this SUPPLEMENT
    MANUAL.
    Only the added or
    changed points are
    introduced in
    these chapters.

    Service procedures are the same as those for
    the former models*. Refer to the Service
    Manuals shown below.

    NISSAN

    N15
    SUPPLEMENT-II

    Item
    Service Manual
    Supplement I

    Publication No.

    Remarks

    SM5E-ON15GO or
    SM5E-ON15EO
    SM6E-N 15SEO

    For Europe

    SERVICE MANUAL
    _.-

    * Former models: Models before the model N15 series introduced in January, 1998.

    IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
    The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of the technician and the efficient
    functioning of the vehicle.
    The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a manner that the service may be
    performed safely and accurately.
    Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician and the tools and parts available.
    Accordingly, anyone using service procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended
    by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal safety nor the vehicle’s safety will
    be jeopardized by the service method selected.

    REAR AXLE &
    REAR SUSPENSION

    @~

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION NOTICE:
    Wheel bearing washer has been eliminated.

    CONTENTS
    REAR AXLE

    2

    Wheel Hub

    2

    ~[L

    II

    RA-1

    REAR AXLE
    Wheel Hub
    SEC. 430

    3

    5 ~

    186 — 255
    (19 — 26, 137 — 188)

    Disc brake

    6~
    7

    ~
    ~

    22 • 29 (2.2 • 3.0,16

    • 22)

    Front
    ~

    : N.m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    SRA868A

    G)

    Spindle

    @

    @
    @

    Baffle plate
    Back plate

    CID
    CID

    Wheel hub bearing
    Wheel bearing lock nut
    Cotter pin

    RA-2

    (J)
    @

    Hub cap
    ABS sensor

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM

    @~

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION NOTICE:



    Seat belt adjuster has been changed.
    Spiral cable has been changed.
    Side air bag is available as an optional equipment in specific areas.
    3-point rear center seat belt has been added.

    CONTENTS
    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    SEAT BELTS
    Front Seat Belt
    Rear Seat Belt
    SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) For Single Air Bag System
    Installation — Spiral Cable
    SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Except for Single Air Bag System
    Precautions for SRS «AIR BAG»
    Special Service Tools
    Description
    SRS Component Parts Location
    Maintenance Items
    Removal and Installation — Diagnosis Sensor
    Unit and Satellite Sensor
    Installation — Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable

    2
    2

    3
    4
    5
    7
    7
    8
    8
    8
    9
    10
    10
    12
    14

    Removal — Side air bag module
    Installation — Side air bag module
    Disposal of Air Bag Module
    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System (SRS) — For Single Air Bag
    System
    Wiring Diagram — SRS TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System (SRS) — Except for Single Air
    Bag System
    Trouble Diagnoses Introduction
    How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
    and Accurate Repair
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — SRS —

    15
    16
    17

    [MJu
    ~U

    20
    20

    r;;~
    M

    21
    21
    ~~
    23
    25
    26

    ~u

    co~~~:~~i~~;~:~~~~Ai.;.~:~~~:~~~~~~
    II
    Bag System

    RS-1

    50

    PRECAUTIONS

    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    The Supplemental Restraint System such as «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (Mechanically
    activated type)» used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
    passenger for certain types of collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N15 is
    as follows (The composition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):

    For a frontal collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
    pre-tensioners (Mechanically activated type), a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and
    spiral cable.

    For a side collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
    seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring
    harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).

    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
    • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation either just before
    the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.

    RS-2

    SEAT BELTS
    CAUTION:
    • For vehicles equipped with seat belt pre-tensioner, refer to «Removal and Installation — Seat Belt
    Pre-tensioner (Mechanical Type)» when removing seat belt. Refer to «SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
    SYSTEM (SRS)» in RS section of Service Manual Pub. No. SM5E-ON15GOor Pub. No. SM5E-ON15EO.
    • Do not disassemble buckle or seat belt assembly.
    • Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.
    • Never oil tongue and buckle.
    • If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt
    assembly.
    • If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.
    • When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine seat belt assembly.
    • After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached hardwares (i.e., guide rail set).

    @~

    ~~
    ~[M]

    [L~

    II

    RS.3

    SEAT BELTS
    Front Seat Belt
    4-DOOR SEDAN AND 5-DOOR HATCHBACK
    CAUTION:

    Before removing seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, be sure to lock safety lever to make seat belt pretensioner inoperative. Do not unlock safety lever before reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
    (1) Remove front seat. Refer to «SEAT» in 8T section for details.
    Remove floor anchor bolt.
    CID Remove adjuster cover.m
    @ Remove shoulder anchor bolt.
    @ Remove center pillar upper and lower garnishes. Refer to «INTERIOR TRIM» in 8T section for details.
    @ Remove second sash guide.
    (/) Remove the bolt securing seat belt pre-tensioner retractor, then remove seat belt and seat belt pre-tensioner retractor.
    CID Remove the bolts securing seat belt adjuster, then remove seat belt adjuster.

    Air bag module
    [KV99105300]

    bracket

    Unit: mm (in)

    SRS490

    2.
    Front side air bag module

    Firmly secure air bag module bracket [SST: KV991 05300] in a
    vise.
    3. Insert the stud bolts of side air bag module into the two holes
    in air bag module bracket (held in vise) and fix them with two
    M6 nuts.
    CAUTION:

    UP

    if

    Metal portion
    M6 nut

    Air bag module
    [KV991 05300]

    5ide air bag module should be secured to air bag module
    bracket [55T: KV99105300] in a vise with metal portion facing
    down.

    bracket
    SRS491

    4.

    Connect deployment tool adapter [SST: KV991 08300] to
    deployment tool [88T: KV991 06400] connector and connector
    on air bag module.

    RS-18

    SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
    -=-_E_x_ce_p_t_f_or_S_ingle
    Air Bag_S_y_s_te_m
    Disposal of Air Bag Module (Cont’d)

    ________

    _

    5.

    Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal
    and black clip to negative terminal.
    6. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked «deployment tool
    power», should glow green, not red.
    7. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
    the tool, marked «air bag connector voltage», will illuminate and
    the air bag module will deploy.

    Air bag module

    Deployment tool
    (KV991 06400)

    @~

    ~~

    CAUTION:
    ~~
    When deploying the air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft)
    away from the air bag module.
    SRS020-A

    DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE WHILE MOUNTED
    IN VEHICLE
    When disposing of a vehicle, deploy air bag modules while they are
    mounted in vehicle.

    CAUTION:
    When deploying air bag module ensure vehicle is empty.

    KV991 06400
    SRS006

    1. Disconnect both vehicle battery cables and wait 3 minutes.
    2. Disconnect air bag modules connector.
    3. Connect deployment tool [SST: KV991 06400] to air bag module.
    For front passenger air bag module, attach deployment tool
    adapter [88T: KV991 06580] to the tool connector.
    4. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal
    and black clip to negative terminal.
    5. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked «deployment tool
    power», should glow green, not red.
    6. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
    the tool, marked «air bag connector voltage», will illuminate and
    the air bag module will deploy.

    !Au
    W;~

    CAUTION:
    Activate only one air bag module at a time.

    DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE

    ~u

    Deployed air bag modules are very hot. Before disposing of air bag
    module, wait at least 30 minutes respectively. Seal them in a Plas-II
    tic bag before disposal.

    SBF276H

    CAUTION:
    • Never apply water to a deployed air bag module.
    • Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag
    module.
    • No poisonous gas is produced upon air bag module
    deployment. However, be careful not to inhale gas since it
    irritates throat and can cause choking.
    • Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module.
    • Air bag module cannot be reused.
    • Wash your hands clean after finishing work.

    RS-19

    ~u
    [}={]~

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System (SRS)
    ~ For Single Air Bag_S_y_s_te_m~~~~~~~~~~
    Wiring

    Diagram ~ SRS —

    SINGLE AIR BAG SYSTEM

    RS-SRS-01
    FUSE
    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    3A

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    ~

    [gI]

    (106)

    @~
    BR/W -t3~

    R

    BR/W

    :
    :

    LHD mode Is
    RHO mode Is

    @:
    @:

    With tachometer

    B
    ~

    ffi

    r————————————————,
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    page) .

    r—————-~
    -~~——-~-~~~—-~—-~~——~
    r—————-,
    :
    * ~3~1
    *:
    * : This
    connector is not shown in
    :~
    W
    4
    Y:
    «HARNESS LAYOUT»,EL section.
    I~~

    ~—————-~

    HRS027

    RS-20

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System (5R5)
    — Except for Single Air Bag_S_y_s_te_m~~~~~~~~
    Trouble

    Diagnoses

    Introduction

    CAUTION:
    • Do not use a circuit tester to check SRS harness connectors unless instructed to in this Service
    Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified with yellow harness protector or yellow insulation
    tape before the harness connectors.
    • Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged,
    replace it with a new one.
    • Keep ground portion clean.

    1J’J1J1;’~

    DIAGNOSIS

    LL~

    FUNCTION

    The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using «AIR BAG» warning lamp and/or CONSULT. The reading of these results is accomplished using one of two modes — «User mode» and «Diagnosis mode».
    The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system
    malfunction through the operation of the «AIR BAG» warning lamp.
    The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part.
    The mode applications for the «AIR BAG» warning lamp and CONSULT are as follows:
    User mode

    Diagnosis mode

    Display type

    «AIR BAG» warning lamp

    X

    X

    ON-OFF operation

    CONSULT

    X

    Monitoring

    «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]»
    A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis mode) is displayed on the CONSULT screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs.
    «SELF-DIAG [PAST]»
    Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory (also indicated by the warning lamp flashes in the
    Diagnosis mode) are displayed on the CONSULT screen. The stored results are not erased until memory
    erasing is executed.
    «TROUBLE DIAG RECORD»
    With «TROUBLE DIAG RECORD», diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT screen.

    II

    ECU DISCRIMINATED

    ECU

    No.

    II

    No.
    A2

    ~0′

    ~
    ~~
    lJlS

    ffi~u

    DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT

    r;1il~

    «ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.»
    The diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle model is assigned
    with its own, individual classification number. This number will
    be displayed on the CONSULT screen, as shown at left. When
    replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the part number for
    the compatibility. After installation, replacement with a correct
    unit can be checked by confirming this classification number on
    the CONSULT screen.

    For NISSAN model N15, the diagnosis sensor unit classification number assigned is A2.
    SRS520

    RS-21

    ~~

    M
    ~[R{

    ~u

    II

    ~u
    ~~

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System (SRS)
    — Except for Single Air Bag_S_y_s_te_m~~~~~~~~
    Trouble Diagnoses Introduction (Cont’d)

    HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

    MODE

    With CONSULT
    From User mode to Diagnosis mode
    After selecting AIR BAG on the «SELECT SYSTEM» screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis
    mode.

    I~
    I
    I

    SELECT SYSTEM

    0I

    I
    I

    ENGINE

    AfT
    AIRBAG

    I
    I

    I
    I

    ASS

    1

    «AI R BAG» warning
    indicates Diagnosis

    1

    lamp operation
    mode.
    SRS391

    From Diagnosis mode to User mode
    To return to User mode from diagnosis mode, touch «BACK» key of CONSULT until «SELECT SYSTEM»
    appears. Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode.
    ~

    SELECT SYSTEM

    ENGINE

    0

    ..

    AfT
    AIRBAG
    ASS

    «AI R BAG» warning lamp operation
    indicates User mode.
    SRS392

    Without CONSULT
    From User mode to Diagnosis mode
    Diagnosis mode activates only when a malfunction is detected, by
    pressing the driver’s door switch at least 5 times within 7 s~conds
    after turning the ignition «ON». SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode
    if no malfunction is detected.

    SRS306

    From Diagnosis mode to User mode
    After a malfunction is repaired, switch the ignition «OFF» for at least 1 second, then back «ON». Diagnosis
    mode returns to User mode. If switching Diagnosis mode to User mode is required while malfunction is being
    detected, switch the ignition «OFF», then back «ON» and press the driver’s door switch at least 5 times within
    7 seconds.

    RS-22

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    ________
    -=_E_x_c_e_p_t
    _fo_r_S_i_ngle
    Air Bag System
    Trouble Diagnoses Introduction (Cont’d)
    HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

    RESULTS

    With CONSULT

    @~

    «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]»
    A current Self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT screen in real time. After the malfunction is ~~
    repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]».

    II SELF-DIAG

    [CURRENT]

    • «SELF-DIAG [PAST]»
    Return to the «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]» CONSULT screen by
    pushing «BACK» key of CONSULT and select «SELF-DIAG
    [CURRENT]» in «SELECT DIAG MODE». Touch «ERASE» in
    «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]» mode.
    NOTE:

    IID

    FAILURE DETECTED

    * NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
    FAILURE INDICATED.
    FURTHER TESTING
    MAY BE REQUIRED.

    ERASE

    I

    If the memory of the malfunction in «SELF.DIAG [PAST]» is not
    erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the trL
    operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is
    repaired completely.

    **

    PRINT

    ~t

    I
    SRS357

    «TROUBLE DIAG RECORD»
    The memory of «TROUBLE DIAG RECORD» cannot be erased.

    Without

    CONSULT

    After a malfunction is repaired, return to User mode from Diagnosis mode by switching the ignition «OFF» for
    at least 1 second, then back «ON». At that time, the problem code is cleared.

    How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses
    and Accurate Repair

    for Quick

    A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
    In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms
    or conditions for a customer complaint.

    INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER
    WHAT

    Vehicle model

    WHEN

    Date, Frequencies

    WHERE

    Road conditions

    HOW…………..

    Operating conditions, Symptoms

    PRELIMINARY CHECK
    Check that the following parts are in good order.

    Battery [Refer to EL section («BATTERY»).]

    Fuse [Refer to EL section («Fuse», «POWER SUPPLY ROUTING»).]
    • System component-to-harness connections

    RS-23

    M
    ~~

    ~u

    II

    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    -_E_x_c_e_p_t
    _fo_r_S_i_ngle
    Air BaS_S…y_s_te_m
    _
    How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
    and Accurate Repair (Cont’d)

    ,TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

    ________

    WORK FLOW
    REFERENCE

    ACTION ITEM

    ITEM

    Check in

    Listen to customer complaints and requests.

    +—1

    Perform preliminary check.

    Preliminary check (RS-23)

    Check for any Service Bulletin.

    Perform self-diagnosis

    using «AIR BAG» warning lamp —

    Inspect malfunctioning

    part. —

    Perform self-diagnosis
    Perform self-diagnosis

    Diagnosis mode

    using CONSULT.
    OR
    using «AIR BAG» warning lamp.

    User mode

    DIAGNOSTIC
    (RS-3D)

    PROCEDURE

    1

    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE 2:

    Using CONSULT (RS-31)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3:
    Using «AIR BAG» warning lamp
    (RS-35)

    Repair/Replace

    NG

    Final check —

    DIAGNOSTIC

    Diagnosis mode and User mode

    PROCEDURE 4:

    Using CONSULT (RS-39)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5:
    Using «AIR BAG» warning lamp
    (RS-41 )

    OK

    Check out

    RS-24

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    ________
    -__ Ex_c_e
    ….
    p_t_fo_r_S_i
    __
    ngle Air Bas_S__
    y….
    s_te_m

    _

    Schematic
    EXCEPT FOR SINGLE AIR BAG SYSTEM

    Ol

    co

    L)

    c-

    ~w@)

    eo

    :::>

    :::>
    CJ

    m -1 (J)

    .,-i

    ro

    W

    QJ

    HHOI
    (J)

    W

    U

    0((0

    0

    ~

    HHOI
    (J)<{~-1

    (T)

    :::>

    CJ

    (J)

    (T)
    (T)

    ill
    (T)

    @)

    r- — — — — — — — — —

    ,

    I

    LD
    (T)

    ,

    I

    [I’

    I

    ru

    (T)

    «‘l»»4

    ———_

    (T)

    …..

    ([

    W

    (!)
    CD
    H
    <{WZ
    CD-1W
    =>
    :::>(J)W CJ
    (J)
    ([O(J)O
    HO<{H
    <{~Q.(J)

    (J

    CD

    ~

    ,
    I

    l-

    H
    Z

    -1
    <{W
    ((-1
    HCD
    Q.<{
    (J)U

    CD

    ::>

    l»(T)

    ([

    0
    (J)
    Z

    ‘-‘———ll’

    I

    I

    (T)

    H

    I<{
    Z
    H
    CD

    ~

    0
    U

    IW

    Q.

    ([

    <{

    H
    <{

    ~

    UO
    I-H
    HU1
    f’.

    ~

    II

    W
    0:>

    .-J
    t!)

    II

    Z
    H
    Z
    ([

    <{

    ~

    (!)

    <{
    CD
    ([

    LD

    ~

    H
    <{

    W

    =>

    1-‘-

    WU

    (J

    u..

    0
    (J

    I-1

    ZOU1
    HI-Z
    -1UO

    ~

    (j)

    IH
    ~IU1cr:
    <{
    ZIO(J)
    H

    ~

    U1cr:
    OH
    ocr:
    00

    ~((::>

    I
    U

    U1

    Z

    <{

    0

    @

    0

    CD

    ~

    U1~

    U1
    H

    t!)

    2

    ~

    (J)

    <{
    H
    0

    W

    «C»»1

    WI
    1—1
    H
    -1([
    -10
    W(J)
    I-Z

    (J)

    t!)

    cr:
    W
    I-

    (J)

    W

    ~

    H

    :J
    CJ
    (J)

    @

    LD
    (T)

    <{W([
    CD…JW
    :J>W
    ([OHO
    HO([H
    <{~OU1

    U1~

    (0

    (!)

    (!)

    WI
    1-([
    H
    -1([
    -10
    W(J)
    I-Z

    0

    <{Z
    I-Zcr:
    <{OO
    OULL

    W
    (f)

    =>

    LL

    HO
    Z
    <.92
    HO

    HRS028

    RS-25

    TROUBLE
    ________

    DIAGNOSES
    — Supplemental
    Restraint System
    -__ Ex_c_e_p_t
    _fo_r_S_i_»gleAir Bag_S_y_s_te_m
    Wiring

    Diagram

    (SRS)
    _

    SRS —

    EXCEPT FOR SINGLE AIR BAG SYSTEM

    RS-SRS-02

    FUSE

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    ~

    INi.11

    o

    R’L

    .—-

    R ~

    RIL

    BR/W

    R/L

    BR/W

    rrf7n

    rrTI

    rrBll

    DOOR

    IGN

    W/L

    1eJ=1~-z~ — — — — —

    R
    ~

    I

    t

    R

    R @
    JUNCTION

    BOX NO.2
    (~OINT

    CONNECTORS)
    111411~
    9F
    R
    R

    (1): LHO models
    ([): RHO models

    B

    8

    B

    I

    B

    1 i….l 1

    ~

    @

    @

    ~CM[)

    Refer to last page
    (FaIdout

    W

    ~W

    ~

    page) .

    ~: 26
    *3. · · @ 33 ‘, @ 15

    11*.21

    @ 1
    *2. · · @ 22
    *1 …

    B/R

    I

    II

    B/R

    -!~

    r——————————————-,
    ~:@
    W

    r————————~

    ——————-~

    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I

    Refer to last page
    (Faldout

    page) .

    I
    I
    I
    I

    HRS030

    RS-27

    ,TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System (SRS)
    ________
    -_E_x_c_e
    …p_t_fo_r_S_i_ngle
    Air Bag_S_y_s_te_m
    Wiring Diagram — SRS — (Cont’d)

    _

    RS-SRS-04
    AIR BAG

    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR

    UNIT
    SQ+

    SQ-

    SQ+

    SQ-

    (DR)

    (DR)

    (PASS)

    (PASS)

    ~

    ~

    *4

    ~

    TX

    RX
    2

    ~

    ~

    *6

    *5

    aID
    11 .°1
    GIB

    GY/L

    *7

    I I
    GIB

    GY/L@

    I$~

    *8 …
    *9 …

    Y
    Y/B

    <0
    <0

    10
    9

    , @ YIG
    , Y/R
    , 6

    ,

    DATA LINK
    CONNECTOR
    FOR CONSULT

    SIDE

    LHD models
    RHO models

    I I

    CABLE

    :

    ~:

    Y

    ij8l @*

    IllJ

    y

    connector is not shown in «HARNESS LAYOUT».EL section.

    HRS031

    RS-28

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    — Except for Single Air Bag System
    Wiring Diagram — SRS — (Cont’d)

    RS-SRS-05

    @:

    Models with
    side air bag

    AIR BAG
    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR

    SAT+

    SAT-

    SAT+

    SAT-

    LH

    LH

    RH

    113•81

    RH
    3 5
    11 • 1

    B/W

    8R

    113:

    I

    L

    —— —,

    ,
    ,

    UNIT
    @

    3 6

    11 • 1

    B/R

    !Au

    »

    t

    t
    1/’

    L

    B/W

    114-21

    ~

    SATELLITE
    SENSOR

    LH

    ——~:@

    I’i’l~@~@
    12

    ~This

    y’y’y’y

    ~

    *

    ,
    SR

    B/R

    rffiil

    113~1

    II

    SATELLITE
    SENSOR

    RH
    ‘———‘ ~

    :@

    ~

    *

    connector is not shown in «HARNESS LAYOUT». EL section.

    HRS032

    RS-29

    .TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    — Except for Single Air Bag System
    Self-diagnosis
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
    Checking SRSoperation by using «AIR BAG» warning lampUser mode
    1. After turning ignition switch from «OFF» to «ON», «AIR BAG»
    warning lamp operates.
    2. Compare «AIR BAG» warning lamp operation to the chart
    below.

    SRS304

    «AIR BAG» warning lamp operation —

    User mode —

    SRS condition
    No malfunction is
    detected.
    No further action is necessary.

    IGN ON

    ON
    OFF

    J•

    Reference item

    I

    ~—————

    MRS095A

    ,

    IGN ON
    ON

    The system has problem
    and needs to be repaired
    as indicated.

    Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 or 3 (RS-31 or
    35).

    Air bag is deployed.

    Go to COLLISION DIAGNOSIS (RS-50).

    Air bag fuse, diagnosis
    sensor unit or harness is
    malfunctioning and needs
    to be repai red.

    Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9 (RS-48).

    One of the following has
    occurred and needs to be
    repaired .
    • Meter fuse is blown .
    • «AIR BAG» warning
    lamp circuit has open or
    short.
    • Diagnosis sensor unit is
    malfunctioning.

    Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10 (RS-48).

    OFF

    MRS096A

    IGN ON
    ON
    OFF

    ~
    Jr——————-

    MRS097A

    IGN ON

    ON

    OFF ——————MRS098A

    NOTE:

    If «AIR BAG» warning lamp operates differently from the
    operations shown above, refer to «AIR BAG» warning lamp
    operation — Diagnosis mode -, DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
    (step 4), RS-35.

    RS-30

    TROUBLE
    ________

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System
    -__ Ex_c_e_p_t
    _fo_r_S_i_nQ_le_A_i_r
    _B_a
    .Q_Sllllliiiilly_st_e_m
    ..
    Self-diagnosis
    (Cont’d)

    (SRS)
    _

    (00

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2
    with CONSULT)
    Inspecting SRS malfunctioning parts by using CONSULT Diagnosis mode
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Connect «CONSULT» to Data link connector.

    @~

    ~~

    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Touch «START».

    NISSAN

    CONSULT

    I

    START

    I

    SUB MODE

    SRS046

    I~
    I

    I

    5. Touch «AIRBAG».

    01

    SELECT SYSTEM

    !Au

    I
    I

    ENGINE
    AfT
    AIRBAG

    I
    I

    I
    I
    I

    ASS

    I

    I~

    SELECT

    SRS074

    01

    DrAG MODE

    6. Touch «SELF-DIAG [CURRENTJ».

    II

    SELF.DIAG [ CURRENT]
    SELF-DIAG
    TROUBLE

    [ PAST]
    DIAG RECORD

    ECU DISCRIMINATED

    NO.

    SRS047

    II SELF-DIAG
    FAILURE
    CONTROL

    I

    [ CURRENT]

    7. Diagnostic codes are displayed on «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]».

    II 0

    DETECTED
    UNIT

    ERASE

    II

    PRINT

    I

    SRS048

    RS-31

    ~[L

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

    ________

    Restraint System (SRS)

    -:._E_x_ce
    …p_t_f_or_S_ingleAir Bag_S…y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis
    (Cont’d)

    II SELF-DIAG
    FAILURE

    Supplemental

    [ CURRENT]

    If no self-diagnostic
    failure is detected
    on «SELF-DIAG
    [CURRENT]» even though malfunction is detected in DIAGNOSTIC
    PROCEDURE 1, check the battery voltage. If the battery voltage
    is less than 9V, charge the battery. Then go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 for final checking, page RS-39. If the battery voltage is
    OK, go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6, page RS-43, to diagnose
    the following situations:
    • Self-diagnostic failure «SELF-DIAG[PAST]»(previously
    stored
    in the memory) might not be erased after repair.
    • The SRS system malfunctions intermittently.

    II 0

    DETECTED

    NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
    FAILURE

    INDICATED.

    FURTHER

    TESTING

    MAY BE REQUIRED .•

    ERASE

    _

    *

    1I__ p_RI_NT_
    SRS049

    8. Touch «PRINT».
    9. Compare diagnostic codes to the CONSULT DIAGNOSTIC
    CODE CHART, page RS-33.
    10. Touch «BACK» key of CONSULT until SELECT SYSTEM
    appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode,
    then turn off CONSULT.
    11. Turn ignition switch «OFF», then disconnect CONSULT and
    both battery cables.
    12. Repair the system as outlined by the «Repair order» in CONSULT DIAGNOSTIC CODE CHART, that corresponds to the
    problem code. For replacement procedure of component parts,
    refer to RS-12.
    13. After repairing the system, go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
    4 for final checking, page RS-39.

    RS-32

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System (SRS)
    — Except for Single Air Ba9~S~y~s~te~~~~~~~~~~
    Self-diagnosis
    (Cont’d)

    CONSULT DIAGNOSTIC CODE CHART («SELF-DIAG
    Explanation

    Diagnostic item

    NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
    FAILURE INDICATED

    [CURRENT]»)

    • Low battery voltage (Less
    than 9V)

    When malfunction is indicated
    by the «AIR BAG» warning lamp
    in User mode

    Repair order
    Recheck SRS at each
    replacement.
    • Go to DIAGNOSTIC

    DURE 4 (RS-39) after charg-

    ~[MJ

    • Go to DIAGNOSTIC
    DURE 6 (RS-43).

    PROCE-

    ~~

    • Intemittent problem has been

    ~~

    detected in the past.
    • Go to DIAGNOSTIC
    DURE 4 (RS-39).

    • No malfunction is detected.

    AIRBAG MODULE

    • Driver’s air bag module circuit is open. (including the spiral cable)

    AIRBAG MODULE
    [VB-SHORT]

    PROCE-

    • Driver’s air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply
    circuit. (including the spiral cable)

    AIRBAG MODULE
    [GND-SHORT]

    • Driver’s air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. (including the
    spiral cable)

    AIRBAG MODULE

    • Driver’s air bag module circuits are shorted to each other.

    [SHORT]

    [?[g

    1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has

    [OPEN]

    [MJ~

    PROCE-

    ing battery.
    • Self-diagnostic failure «SELFDIAG [PAST]» ( previously
    stored in the memory) might
    not be erased after repair .

    @~

    ~[L

    visible damage .
    3. Replace the spiral cable.
    4. Replace driver’s air bag module .
    (Before disposal of it, it must
    be deployed.)
    5. Replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit.

    [MJu
    /Au
    [?(k

    6. Replace the air bag harness.
    ASSIST A1B MODULE
    [VB-SHORT]

    • Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some power

    ASSIST A1B MODULE
    [OPEN]

    • Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.

    ASSIST A/B MODULE
    [GND-SHORT]

    • Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.

    supply circu it.

    ASSIST A1B MODULE
    [SHORT]

    • Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each

    DA

    • Side air bag module (LH) circuit is open.

    other.

    ness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage.
    3. Replace front passenger air
    bag module .
    (Before disposal of it, it must
    be deployed.)
    4. Replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit.
    5. Replace the air bag harness.

    (SIDE MODULE LH
    [OPEN])
    DB
    (SIDE MODULE LH
    [VB-SHORT])

    • Side air bag module (LH) circuit is shorted to some power supply

    DC

    • Side air bag module (LH) circuit is shorted to ground.

    circuits.

    (SIDE MODULE LH
    [GND-SHORT])

    DD

    1. Visually check the wiring har-

    • Side air bag module (LH) circuits are shorted to each other.

    (SIDE MODULE LH
    [SHORT])

    RS-33

    1. Visually check the wiring har-

    M
    ~~

    ~U

    II

    ness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage .

    ~U

    3. Replace front side air bag
    module (LH).

    [gJ(k

    (Before disposal, it must be
    deployed.)
    4. Replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit.
    5. Replace the harness .

    ~~
    ~[Q))A

    .TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    -_E_x_c….
    eP…t_f_o_r
    S_ingle Air BaS_S…y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)

    ________

    _

    Repair order
    Diagnostic item

    Explanation

    7A
    (SIDE MODULE RH
    [OPEN])

    • Side air bag module (RH) circuit is open.

    7B
    (SIDE MODULE RH
    [VB-SHORT])

    • Side air bag module (RH) circuit is shorted to some power supply

    7C

    • Side air bag module (RH) circuit is shorted to ground.

    circuits.

    (SIDE MODULE RH

    Recheck SRS at each
    replacement.
    1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage.
    3. Replace front side air bag
    module (RH).
    (Before disposal, it must be
    deployed.)
    4. Replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit.

    [GND-SHORT])
    70
    (SIDE MODULE RH
    [SHORT])

    • Side air bag module (RH) circuits are shorted to each other.

    5. Replace the harness .

    91,92
    (SATELLITE SENS LH
    [UNIT FAIL])

    • Satellite sensor (LH)

    1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage.
    3. Replace the satellite sensor
    (LH).

    93
    (SATELLITE SENS LH
    [COMM. FAIL])

    4. Replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit.
    5. Replace the harness.
    81,82
    (SATELLITE SENS RH
    [UNIT FAil])

    1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage.
    3. Replace the satellite sensor
    (RH).

    • Satellite sensor (RH)

    83
    (SATELLITE SENS RH
    [COMM FAil])

    4. Replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit.
    5. Replace the harness.
    CONTROL UNIT

    • Diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.

    1. Visually check wiring harness
    connections.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage.
    3. Replace diagnosis sensor
    unit.
    4. Replae the air bag harness.

    Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is eliminated
    using the air bag warning lamp or CONSULT each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still observed, proceed to the next
    step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required.
    * Diagnostic items enclosed by (
    ) appear on the screen of the EE980 CONSULT program card as self-diagnosis result.
    *

    RS-34

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    ________
    -__ Ex_c_e
    ….
    p_t_fo_r_S_i_ngle
    Air BaQ_S
    …y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)

    _

    (00

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3
    without CONSULT)
    Inspecting SRS malfunctioning parts by using «AIR BAG» @~
    warning lamp — Diagnosis mode
    NOTE:
    SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is [MJ~
    detected in User mode.
    1. Open driver’s door.
    2. Turn ignition switch from «OFF» to «ON».
    3. Press driver’s door switch at least 5 times within 7 seconds
    after turning ignition switch «ON».
    SRS is now in Diagnosis mode.
    4. «AIR BAG» warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows:

    SRS306

    ~~

    [L~

    NOTE:
    ~~
    If SRS does not enter Diagnosis mode even though malfunction is detected in User mode, go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 11, page RS-49.
    [?~

    «AIR BAG» warning lamp flash pattern —

    No.

    Diagnosis mode-

    SRS condition

    @ through @ are repeated.

    • Diagnosis
    results (previously
    stored in
    the
    memory)
    might not
    be erased
    after repair.
    • Intermittent
    problem
    has been
    detected in
    the past.
    Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
    (RS-43).

    @ through @ are repeated.
    @ — Driver and passenger air
    bag marker (For identifying
    driver and/or passenger air
    bag malfunctioning)
    @ — Indicates malfunctioning
    part. The number of flash
    varies with malfunctioning
    part (0.5 sec. ON and 0.5
    sec. OFF is counted as one
    flash.)

    The system
    has a problem
    and needs to
    be repaired.

    IGN ON
    ON
    OFF

    @@@@@@@@@@@@

    +

    bill.
    2 sec.

    SRS333

    IGN ON
    ON

    2

    @ @ @

    ~

    @

    @

    @

    OFF
    7 sec.

    3 sec.
    2 sec.

    2 sec.
    SRS341

    @ through
    @, @, @ —

    IGN ON
    ON

    3

    @@@@@

    +

    OFF

    I

    @@@@
    CD —

    I

    2 sec.

    7 sec.
    2 sec.
    1.5 sec.

    1.5 sec.
    0.5 sec.
    SRS342-A

    RS-35

    CD are

    repeated.
    Side air bag marker
    (For identifying side
    air bag malfunctioning)
    Indicates malfunctioning
    part. The number of flash
    varies with malfunctioning
    part (0.5 sec. ON and 0.5
    sec. OFF is counted as one
    flash.)

    II

    TROUBLE
    ________

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System
    -:.._E_xc_e_p_t_f_or_S_i_nQ_le_A_i_r
    _B_a

    Q_S…y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis
    (Cont’d)

    (SRS)
    _

    5.

    Malfunctioning part is indicated by the number of flashes (part
    @ or CD). Compare the number of flashes to AIR BAG WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART, page RS-36, and locate
    malfunctioning part.
    6. Turn ignition switch «OFF», and disconnect both battery cables.
    7. Repair the system as outlined by the «Repair order» in AIR BAG
    WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART that corresponds to
    the flash code. For replacement procedure of component parts,
    refer to RS-12.
    8. After repairing the system, go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
    5, page RS-41.

    AIR BAG WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART (DIAGNOSIS MODE)
    Flash pattern
    @ through @ are repeated .
    • Diagnosis results
    (previously stored in
    the memory) might
    not be erased after
    repair .
    • Intermittent problem

    IGN ON
    ON

    @@@@@@@@@@@@

    ~

    OFF

    has been detected in
    the past.

    SRS333

    Repair order
    • Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 (RS-43).
    Flash pattern
    @ through @ are repeated.
    @IGN ON
    ON

    @

    ~

    @

    @@@ @

    OFF

    The driver’s air bag
    module circuit is malfunctioning.

    7 sec.

    3 sec.
    2 sec.

    2 sec.
    SRS334

    (@: 2 flashes)
    Repair order («Recheck SRS at each replacement.»)
    1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
    3. Replace the spiral cable.
    4. Replace driver’s air bag module.
    (Before disposal, it must be deployed.)
    5. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
    6. Replace the air bag harness.

    RS-36

    Two flashes indicate
    malfunctioning driver’s
    air bag module circuit.

    TROUBLE
    ________

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    -__ Ex_c_e_p_t
    _fo_r_S_i_ngle
    Air Bas_S_y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)

    _

    Flash pattern
    @ through @ are repeated.
    @ — Seven flashes indicate
    IGN ON

    ~

    ON

    malfunctioning

    @@

    @@@

    diagno-

    sis sensor unit.

    OFF

    The diagnosis sensor
    unit is malfunctioning.
    (@: 7 flashes)

    @~

    ~~

    ~~
    7 sec.

    3 sec.
    2 sec.

    2 sec.

    [L~
    SRS335

    Repair order («Recheck SRS at each replacement.»)

    ~~

    1. Visually check the wiring harness connections.
    2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
    3. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.

    [?~

    4. Replace the air bag harness.
    Flash pattern
    @ through @ are repeated.
    @ — Eight flashes indicate
    malfunctioning front
    passenger air bag module circuit.

    IGN ON

    The front passenger air
    bag module circuit is

    @@@

    ~

    ON

    @

    @ @

    OFF

    ~~

    [MDu
    !Au

    7 sec.

    3 sec.
    2 sec.

    malfunctioning.

    2 sec.

    (@: 8 flashes)

    SRS336

    Repair order («Recheck SRS at each replacement.»)
    1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
    3. Replace front passenger air bag module.
    (Before disposal, it must be deployed.)
    4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
    Flash pattern

    IGN ON
    ON

    @ through CD are repeated.
    CD — One flash indicates
    malfunctioning side air
    bag module (RH) cir-

    @ @@@ @CV@ @@@

    +

    cuit.
    OFF

    The side air bag module
    (RH) circuit is malfunctioning.

    I
    7 sec.

    I

    2 sec.
    2 sec.
    1.5 sec.
    1 .5 sec . 0.5 sec.
    SRS338

    (CD: 1 flash)
    Repair order («Recheck SRS at each replacement.»)
    1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
    3. Replace side air bag module (RH).
    (Before disposal, it must be deployed.)
    4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
    5. Replace the harness.

    RS-37

    II

    TROUBLE
    ________

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    -__ Ex_c_e_p_t
    _fo_r_S_i_»gle
    Air Bag_S_y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis
    (Cont’d)

    _

    Flash pattern

    IGN ON

    CD

    @ @@@ @

    +

    ON

    (!) through CD are repeated.
    CD — Two flashes indicate

    @ @@@

    malfunctioning side air
    bag module (LH) circuit.

    OFF

    I.

    The side air bag module
    (LH) circuit is malfunc-

    7 sec.

    tioning.
    (CD: 2 flashes)

    SRS337

    Repair order («Recheck SRS at each replacement.»)
    1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
    3. Replace side air bag module (LH).
    (Before disposal, it must be deployed.)
    4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
    5. Replace the harness.
    Flash pattern

    IGN ON

    CD

    @@@@@

    +

    ON

    (!) through CD are repeated.
    CD — Three flashes indicate
    malfunctioning satellite
    sensor (RH) circuit.

    @ @@@

    OFF

    I.

    The satellite sensor
    (RH) is malfunctioning.

    7 sec.

    ~

    2

    sec.
    1.5 sec.

    (CD: 3 flashes)

    2I sec.I
    .. I- -I
    . sec.
    0.5 sec.

    1 5

    SRS340

    Repair order («Recheck SRS at each replacement.»)
    1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
    3. Replace the satellite sensor (RH).
    4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
    5. Replace the harness.
    Flash pattern
    (!) through CD are repeated.
    CD — Four flashes indicate

    IGN ON
    ON

    @@@@@

    +

    CD

    @@@@

    malfunctioning satellite
    sensor (LH) circuit.

    OFF

    The satellite sensor
    (LH) is malfunctioning.
    (CD: 4 flashes)

    7 sec.

    ~II

    2 sec.
    1.5 sec.

    2 sec.
    .. I- -I
    1.5 sec.
    0.5 sec.
    SRS342-A

    Repair order («Recheck SRS at each replacement.»)
    1. Visually check the wiring harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
    3. Replace the satellite sensor (LH).
    4. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
    5. Replace the harness.

    * Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning

    parts. Confirm whether malfunction is eliminated
    using the air bag warning lamp (in User mode) or CONSULT each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still observed,
    proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required.

    RS-38

    TROUBLE
    ________

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    -_E_x_c…-ieP
    …t_f_o_r_S_insleAir BaS_S….
    y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis
    (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4

    ((j)

    _

    with CONSULT)

    Final checking after repairing SRS by using CONSULT nosis mode
    1. After repairing SRS, connect both battery cables.
    2. Connect CONSULT to Data link connector.
    3. Turn ignition switch from «OFF» to «ON».

    Diag-

    @~

    [M]~

    4. Touch «START».
    NISSAN

    CONSULT

    START

    I

    SUB MODE

    SRS046

    I~

    5. Touch «AIRBAG».

    0I

    SELECT SYSTEM

    1

    ENGINE

    1

    1

    ~

    I

    AIRBAG
    ASS

    I

    1

    1

    1

    1=========1
    I~

    SELECT

    [ CURRENT]

    SELF-DIAG

    [ PAST]

    TROUBLE

    0I

    DIAG MODE

    SELF-DIAG

    SRS074

    6. Touch «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]».

    III

    DIAG RECORD

    ECU DISCRIMINATED

    NO.

    SRS047

    II SELF-DIAG
    FAILURE

    [ CURRENT]

    7. If no malfunction is detected on «SELF-DIAG

    [CURRENT]»,
    repair of SRS is completed.
    If any problem code is displayed on «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]»,
    the malfunctioning part is not repaired completely or another
    malfunctioning part is detected. Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2, page RS-31, and repair malfunctioning part completely.

    II 0

    DETECTED

    NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
    FAILURE INDICATED.
    FURTHER

    TESTING

    MAY BE REQUIRED .••

    I

    ERASE

    II

    PRINT

    I

    SRS049

    RS-39

    ~[L

    ~[g)~

    .TROUBLE
    ________

    IISELF-DIAG

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System (SRS)
    -=-_E_xc_e_p_t_f_or_S_in9_le_A_i_r_B_a_g_S_y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis
    (Cont’d)
    I

    [CURRENT]

    8. Touch «ERASE».
    NOTE:

    0

    Touch «ERASE» to clear the memory of the malfunction
    («SELF-DIAG [PAST]»).

    FAILURE DETECTED

    If the memory of the malfunction is «SELF-DIAG [PAST]» is not
    erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the
    operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is
    repaired completely.

    * NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
    FAILURE INDICATED.

    FURTHER TESTING
    MAY BE REQUIRED.

    I

    ERASE

    _

    **

    I

    PRINT

    .
    SRS357

    I~

    SELECT

    I

    01

    DIAG MODE

    SELF-DIAG

    [ CURRENT

    I

    1

    9. Touch «BACK» key of CONSULT to select «SELF-DIAG
    [PAST]» in the «SELECT DIAG MODE» screen. Touch «SELFDIAG [PAST]».

    SELF-DIAG [ PAST]
    TROUBLE

    I
    I
    I

    DIAG RECORD

    ECU DISCRIMINATED

    ____

    NO.

    ========1

    SRS050

    II

    SELF-DIAG

    FAILURE

    *

    [ PAST]

    1O. Check that no self-diagnostic
    DIAG [PAST]».

    failure is detected on «SELF-

    DETECTED

    NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
    FAILURE

    INDICATED.

    FURTHER

    TESTING

    MAY BE REQUIRED.

    ___

    II 0

    P_R_IN_T

    **

    I
    SRS062

    11. Touch «BACK» key of CONSULT until SELECT SYSTEM
    appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode,
    turn off CONSULT, then disconnect CONSULT.
    12. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    13. Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1, page RS-30 to check
    SRS operation by using «AIR BAG» warning lamp with User
    mode.

    RS-40

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    ________
    -__ Ex_c_e
    ….
    p_t_fo_r_S_i_ngle
    Air BaS_S….
    y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)

    _

    (@

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5
    without CONSULT)
    Final checking after repairing SRS by using «AIR BAG» warning lamp — Diagnosis mode and User mode
    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.

    After repairing SRS connect both battery cables.
    Open driver’s door.
    Turn ignition switch from «OFF» to «ON».
    «AIR BAG» warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows:

    @~

    [M]~

    ~[M]

    SRS306

    «AIR BAG» warning lamp flash pattern —

    No.

    SRS condition

    Diagnosis mode —

    o through

    @ are repeated.

    IGN ON
    ON

    @@@@@@@@@@@@

    ~

    OFF

    No malfunction is
    detected or
    repair is completed.
    No further
    action is necessary.

    SRS333

    o through

    @ are repeated.
    Driver and passenger air
    bag marker (For identifying
    driver and/or passenger air
    bag malfunctioning)
    Indicates malfunctioning
    part. The number of flashes
    varies with malfunctioning
    part (0.5 sec. ON and 0.5
    sec. OFF is counted as one
    flash.)

    @IGN ON
    ON

    2

    @ @

    ~

    @

    @

    @

    @
    @-

    OFF

    3 sec.

    7 sec.
    2 sec.

    2 sec.
    SRS341

    o through
    @,

    IGN ON
    ON

    3

    @@@@@

    OFF

    7 sec.

    ~LL.II.

    @@@@
    CD —

    Jse./

    2seC~ec.
    1.5 sec.

    0.5 sec.
    SRS342-A

    !Au

    CD

    are repeated.
    Side air bag marker
    (For identifying side
    air bag malfunctioning)
    Indicates malfunctioning
    part. The number of flashes
    varies with malfunctioning
    part (0.5 sec. ON and 0.5
    sec. OFF is counted as one
    flash.)

    CD,

    The system
    has a problem
    and needs to
    be repaired.

    @-

    II

    NOTE:

    When diagnosis sensor unit is replaced with new one, «AIR [g~
    BAG» warning lamp will operate in User mode. Checking «AIR
    BAG» warning lamp operation in Diagnosis mode is not
    required. Go to step 6.
    ~[Q))A

    RS-41

    TROUBLE
    ________

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    -__ Ex_c_e_p_t
    _fo_r_S_i_»gle
    Air Bag_S_y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis
    (Cont’d)
    5.

    _

    If «AIR BAG» warning lamp operates as shown in No.1 in chart
    above, turn ignition switch «OFF» to reset from Diagnosis mode
    to User mode and to erase the memory of the malfunction.
    Then go to step 6.

    lf «AIR BAG» warning lamp operates as shown in No.2 or No.
    3 in chart above, the malfunctioning part is not repaired
    completely, or another malfunctioning part is detected. Go to
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3, page RS-35, and repair malfunctioning part completely.
    6. Turn ignition switch «ON». «AIR BAG» warning lamp operates
    in User mode. Compare «AIR BAG» warning lamp operation to
    the chart below.
    NOTE:

    If switching Diagnosis mode to User mode is required while
    malfunction is being detected, turn ignition switch from «OFF»
    to «ON». Then press driver’s door switch at least 5 times
    within 7 seconds after turning ignition switch «ON».
    SRS is now in User mode.
    «AIR BAG» warning lamp operation —

    User mode —

    SRS condition

    Reference item

    No malfunction is
    detected.
    No further action is necessary.

    MRS095A

    IGN ON
    ON

    t

    The system has problem
    and needs to be repaired
    as indicated.

    Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 or 3 (RS-31 or
    35).

    Air bag is deployed.

    Go to COLLISION DIAGNOSIS (RS-50).

    OFF

    MRS096A

    IGN ON
    ON
    OFF

    ~
    Jr——————

    Air bag fuse, diagnosis

    Go to DIAGNOSTIC

    sensor unit or harness is
    malfunctioning and needs
    to be repaired.

    CEDURE 9 (RS-48).

    One of the following has
    occurred and needs to be
    repaired.
    • Meter fuse is blown.

    Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10 (RS-48).

    PRO-

    MRS097A

    IGN ON

    ON

    • «AIR BAG» warning

    OFF ——————MRS098A

    lamp circu it has open or
    short.
    Diagnosis sensor unit is
    malfunctioning.

    RS-42

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System (SRS)
    ~ Except for Single Air Bag~S~y~s~te~m~~~~~~~_
    Self-diagnosis
    (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 (Continued from
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)
    with CONSULT)

    (00

    @~

    Inspecting SRS malfunctioning record
    No

    Is it the first time for maintenance of

    ~

    SRS?

    Self-diagnostic failure
    «SELF-DIAG [PAST]» (previously stored in the
    memory) might not be

    Yes

    erased after repair.
    Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4, step 8 (RS39).

    ,
    GO TO DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE 8

    (RS-44).

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 (Continued from
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3)
    without CONSULT)

    (@

    Inspecting SRS malfunctioning record
    No

    Is it the first time for maintenance of

    ~

    SRS?
    Yes

    Diagnosis results (previously stored in the
    memory) might not be
    erased after repair.
    Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5, step 5 (RS41 ).

    ,
    GO TO DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE 8

    (RS-44). Further inspection cannot
    performed without CONSULT.

    be

    II

    RS-43

    .TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    — Except for Single Air Bag System
    Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)

    (00

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8
    with CONSULT)
    Inspecting SRS intermittent problem by using CONSULT Diagnosis mode
    1. Turn ignition switch «OFF».
    2. Connect «CONSULT» to Data link connector.

    3. Turn ignition switch «ON».
    4. Touch «START».

    NISSAN

    CONSULT

    START

    I

    SUB MODE

    SRS046

    I~

    5. Touch «AIRBAG».

    0I

    SELECT SYSTEM

    I

    ENGINE

    1

    I

    tvrr

    1

    AIRBAG

    I

    I

    ASS

    1

    1

    1=========1
    I~

    SELECT

    I

    01

    DIAG MODE

    SELF-DIAG

    [ CURRENT

    SELF-DIAG

    [ PAST]

    I

    TROUBLE

    1

    ECU DISCRIMINATED

    SRS074

    6. Touch «SELF-DIAG [PASn».

    I

    1

    I

    DIAG RECORD
    No.1

    I

    I

    1========1

    SRS050

    _

    SELF-DIAG

    FAILURE
    CONTROL

    ____

    [ PAST]

    _

    0

    7.

    If diagnostic codes are displayed on «SELF-DIAG [PASn»,
    to step 1O.

    DETECTED
    UNIT

    P_R_IN_T

    I

    SRS054

    RS-44

    go

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    — Except for Single Air Bag System
    Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
    II

    SELF-DIAG

    FAILURE

    *

    II

    [ PAST]

    If no self-diagnostic failure. is detected on «SELF-DIAG
    touch «BACK» and go back to «SELECT DIAG MODE».

    D

    [PAST]»,

    DETECTED

    NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
    FAILURE

    INDICATED.

    FURTHER

    TESTING

    MAY BE REQUIRED.

    ___

    **

    I

    P_RI_N_T

    SRS062

    I~

    I
    I

    SELECT

    DIAG MODE

    SELF-DIAG

    [ CURRENT]

    SELF-DIAG

    [ PAST

    TROUBLE

    I
    I

    DI

    I
    I

    1

    8. Touch «TROUBLE DIAG RECORD».

    NOTE:
    With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously
    erased by a reset operation can be displayed.

    DIAG RECORD

    ECU DISCRIMINATED

    NO.

    I
    I

    1=======1

    ~RS055

    IITROUBLE
    FAILURE

    DIAG RECORD

    liD

    9.

    Diagnostic code is displayed on «TROUBLE DIAG RECORD».

    IAlJ

    DETECTED

    ASSIST AlB MODULE

    [OPEN]

    —-P-R-‘-N-T—-..lsRS056
    10. Touch «PRINT».
    11. Compare diagnostic codes to the INTERMITTENT PROBLEM
    DIAGNOSTIC CODE CHART, page RS-46.
    12. Touch «BACK» key of CONSULT until SELECT SYSTEM
    appears, then turn off CONSULT.
    13. Turn ignition switch «OFF», then disconnect CONSULT and
    both battery cables.
    14. Repair the system as outlined by the «Repair order» in INTERMITTENT PROBLEM DIAGNOSTIC CODE CHART, that corresponds to the problem code. For replacement procedure of
    component parts, refer to RS-12.
    15. Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4, page RS-39, for final
    checking.

    RS-45

    ~u

    II

    ~u
    ~~

    ~[L

    ,TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

    ________

    — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    -=_E_x_c_e_p_t
    _fo_r_S_i_ngle
    Air BaQ_S_y_s_te_m
    Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)

    _

    INTERMITTENT PROBLEM DIAGNOSTIC CODE CHART (SELF-DIAG [PAST] or TROUBLE
    DIAG RECORD)
    Explanation

    Diagnostic item
    NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC
    FAILURE INDICATED.

    When malfunction is indicated
    by the «AIR BAG» warning
    lamp in User mode

    • Low battery voltage (Less
    than 9V)

    Repair order
    • Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (RS-39) after
    charging battery.
    • Go to DIAGNOSTIC

    • No malfunction is detected.

    PRO-

    CEDURE 4 (RS-39).
    AIRBAG MODULE
    [OPEN]

    • Driver’s air bag module circuit is open. (including the spiral
    cable)

    AIRBAG MODULE
    [VB-SHORT]

    • Driver’s air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply
    circuit. (including the spiral cable)

    AIRBAG MODULE

    • Driver’s air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. (including

    1. Visually check the wiring
    harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage.
    3. If the harness check is OK,
    replace the spiral cable,

    [GND-SHORT]
    AIRBAG MODULE

    the spiral cable)
    • Driver’s air bag module circuits are shorted to each other.

    [SHORT]
    ASSIST A/B MODULE
    [VB-SHORT]

    • Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some

    diagnosis sensor unit and
    driver air bag module.
    (Before disposing the driver
    air bag module, it must be
    deployed.)
    1. Visually check the wiring
    harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has

    power supply circuit.

    ASSIST A/B MODULE
    [OPEN]

    • Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.

    ASSIST A/B MODULE
    [GND-SHORT]

    • Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.

    ASSIST A/B MODULE
    [SHORT]

    • Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each

    DA
    (SIDE MODULE LH
    [OPEN])

    • Side air bag module (LH) circuit is open.

    DB
    (SIDE MODULE LH
    [VB-SHORT])

    • Side air bag module (LH) circuit is shorted to some power sup-

    DC
    (SIDE MODULE LH
    [GND-SHORT])

    • Side air bag module (LH) circuit is shorted to ground.

    module (LH). (Before dis-

    DO
    (SIDE MODULE LH
    [SHORT])

    • Side air bag module (LH) circuits are shorted to each other.

    posing the front side air bag
    module (LH), it must be
    deployed.)

    7A
    (SIDE MODULE RH
    [OPEN])

    • Side air bag module (RH) circuit is open.

    7B
    (SIDE MODULE RH
    [VB-SHORT])

    • Side air bag module (RH) circuit is shorted to some power

    7C
    (SIDE MODULE RH
    [GND-SHORT])

    • Side air bag module (RH) circuit is shorted to ground.

    70
    (SIDE MODULE RH
    [SHORT])

    • Side air bag module (RH) circuits are shorted to each other.

    other.

    ply circuits.

    visible damage.
    3. If the harness check is OK,
    replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit and passenger air bag
    module. (Before disposing
    the passenger air bag
    module, it must be
    deployed.)
    1. Visually check the wiring
    harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage .
    3. If the harness check is OK,
    replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit and front side air bag

    1. Visually check the wiring
    harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage .
    3. If the harness check is OK,
    replace the diagnosis sensor

    supply circuits.

    RS-46

    unit and front side air bag
    module (RH). (Before disposing the front side air bag
    module (RH), it must be
    deployed.)

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

    — Except for Single Air Bag_S_y_s_te_m~~~~~~~~
    Self-diagnosis (Cont’d)
    Diagnostic item
    91,92
    (SATElliTE
    SENS lH
    [UNIT FAil])
    93
    (SATElliTE

    Explanation
    • Satellite sensor (lH)

    1. Visually check the wiring
    harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage.

    SENS lH

    3. If the harness check is OK,

    [COMM FAIL])

    81,82
    (SATElliTE
    SENS RH
    [UNIT FAil])
    83
    (SATElliTE

    Repair order

    replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit and satellite sensor
    (lH).
    • Satellite sensor (RH)

    1. Visually check the wiring
    harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage.
    3. If the harness check is OK,

    SENS RH

    [COMM FAil])

    replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit and satellite sensor
    (RH).

    CONTROL UNIT

    • Diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.

    1. Visually check the wiring
    harness connection.
    2. Replace the harness if it has
    visible damage.
    3. If the harness check is OK,
    replace the diagnosis sensor
    unit.

    * Follow the procedures

    in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts, then make the final system check.
    * Diagnostic items enclosed by ( ) appear on the screen of the EE980 CONSULT program card as self-diagnosis result.

    II

    RS-47

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System. (SRS)
    — Except for Single Air Bag System
    Trouble Diagnoses for Air Bag Warning Lamp
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9
    SYMPTOM: «AIR BAG» warning lamp does not turn off .

    {}
    UP

    Refer to COLLISION DIAG-

    Is air bag deployed?

    T

    SIDE

    Ef3J

    AIRBAG

    NOSIS (RS-50).

    No
    Is SRS «Air Bag» fuse OK?

    Replace fuse.

    Yes
    MRS128A

    ~

    SELECT SYSTEM

    D

    00

    Connect CONSULT and touch
    «START».
    • Is «AIRBAG» displayed on
    CONSULT?

    ENGINE

    No

    —..

    Yes

    AfT

    Visually check the wiring
    harness connection of diagnosis sensor unit. If the harness connection check is
    OK, replace diagnosis sensor unit.

    ~

    AIRBAG

    Is harness connection between warning
    lamp and diagnosis sensor unit OK?

    ASS

    No

    —..

    nector properly. If warning

    Yes

    lamp still does not go off,
    replace harness .

    .,

    SRS180

    I Replace

    Connect warning lamp and
    diagnosis sensor unit con-

    diagnosis sensor unit.

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10
    SYMPTOM: «AIR BAG» warning lamp does not turn on.

    {}
    UP
    SIDE

    •Ef3J

    Is combination meter fuse OK?

    No

    Replace fuse.

    No

    Replace warning lamp LED.

    No

    Check the ground circuit of
    «AIR BAG» warning lamp.

    Yes

    METER

    Is warning lamp LED OK?
    Yes
    1. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit con-

    SRS521

    nector.
    2. Turn the ignition key to ON position.
    • Does warning lamp turn on?
    Yes

    I Replace

    diagnosis sensor unit.

    RS-48

    TROUBLE
    ________

    DIAGNOSES — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
    -_E_x_c_e

    p_tf_o_r_S_in_Sle
    Air B8S_S….
    y_s_te_m
    _
    Trouble Diagnoses for Air Bag Warning Lamp
    (Cont’d)
    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 11
    SYMPTOM: SRS does not enter Diagnosis mode using door
    switch.

    m

    Disconnect both battery cables and check

    No

    Charge battery.

    battery voltage using circuit tester .
    • Is battery voltage more than 9V?
    Yes
    SRS263

    Ii]
    Remove driver’s door switch and check

    ~15

    Driver’s

    door switch

    No

    (@)

    Replace driver’s door
    switch.

    continuity between driver’s door switch
    connector terminals (2) and @ under the
    following conditions.

    ~

    Continuity

    Condition
    Door switch is depressed
    (Door is closed).
    Door switch is released
    (Door is open).

    NO

    YES

    SRS264-D

    Yes

    ~15

    Driver’s

    door switch

    [!1
    Check harness continuity between driver’s

    No

    Replace or repair harness.

    door switch connector terminal @ and

    @

    body ground .
    • Does continuity exist?

    ~

    Yes
    Replace diagnosis sensor unit.

    SRS265-E

    Go to DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (RS-

    30).

    II

    RS-49

    COLLISION DIAGNOSIS —

    Except for Single Air BaS_S
    ….
    y_st_e_m

    _

    FOR FRONTAL COLLISION
    To repair the SRS for a frontal collision, perform the following steps.

    When SRS (except the side air bag) is activated in a collision:

    CD Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
    ~ Remove the air bag modules (except the side air bag module) and seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies.
    (3) Check the SRS components using the table shown below:
    • Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation).
    @ Install new air bag modules (except the side air bag module) and seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies.
    CID Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT, and «AIR BAG» warning lamps. Refer to «Self-diagnosis» for
    details (RS-3D). Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
    When SRS is not activated in a collision:

    CD

    Check the SRS components using the table shown below:
    • Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation).
    (ID Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT, and «AIR BAG» warning lamps. Refer to «Self-diagnosis»
    details (RS-3D). Ensure entire SRS operates properly.

    for

    SRS inspection
    Part

    SRS is NOT activated

    SRS (except the
    side air bag) is activated

    Air bag module
    (driver and passenger side)

    REPLACE
    Install air bag module with new bolts.

    1. Remove air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
    2-1. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment
    with the wheel.
    2-2. Install passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the
    instrument panel.
    3. No damage found, reinstall with new bolts coated with bonding agent.
    4. If damaged-REPLACE.
    Air bag must be deployed before discarding.

    Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly

    REPLACE
    Install seat belt pretensioner with new
    bolts.

    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.

    Remove seat belt pre-tensioners.
    Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
    Check retractor for smooth operation.
    If no damage is found, reinstall with new bolts coated with bonding agent.
    If damaged-REPLACE.
    Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new bolts coated
    with bonding agent. Seat belt pre-tensioners must be deployed before discarding.

    Diagnosis sensor
    unit

    REPLACE
    Install diagnosis sensor unit with new
    bolts.

    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.

    Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities.
    Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
    If no damage is found, reinstall with new bolts.
    If damaged-REPLACE.
    Install diagnosis sensor unit with new bolts coated with
    bonding agent.

    Steering wheel

    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.

    Visually check steering wheel for deformities.
    Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
    Install air bag module to check fit or alignment with steering wheel.
    Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
    If no damage is found, reinstall the steering wheel.
    If damaged-REPLACE.

    Spiral cable

    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.

    Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage.
    Check connectors, flat cable and protective tape for damage.
    Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation.
    If no damage is found, reinstall the spiral cable.
    If damaged-REPLACE.

    Harness and Connectors

    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.

    Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities.
    Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities.
    If no damage is found, reinstall harness and connectors.
    Damaged-REPLACE
    damaged section of harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS
    harness.

    Instrument panel

    Refer to the table on the next page.

    RS-50

    COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Part

    Instrument panel

    Except for Single Air Bag System

    SRS (except the
    side air bag) is activated

    SRS is NOT activated

    @~

    1. When passenger air bag inflates, check the following points for bending, deformities or cracks.
    • Opening portion for passenger air bag

    ~~

    ~~

    [L~

    ~~
    SRS522

    ~~

    • Passenger air bag module brackets
    Back face of instrument

    panel

    ~[L

    ~U
    ~U
    ~

    : Check points
    SRS415

    r¥~

    • The portions securing the instrument panel
    ~

    : Check points

    M
    ~[R1

    ~u
    SRS523

    2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel.
    3. If damaged-REPLACE
    the instrument panel with bolts.

    II
    ~U
    ~~

    ~[L

    ~[g))A

    RS-51

    COLLISION DIAGNOSIS —

    Except for Single Air BaQ._S
    ….
    y_st_e_m

    _

    FOR SIDE COLLISION
    To repair the SRS for a side collision, perform the following steps.
    When the side air bag is activated in the side collision:
    CD Replace the following components:
    — All parts of seat back with side air bag module (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
    — Diagnosis sensor unit
    — Satellite sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
    CID Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table shown below.
    • Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks,
    deformation) .
    (3) Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT, and «AIR BAG» warning lamp. Refer to «Self-diagnosis» for
    details (RS-3D). Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
    When SRS is not activated in the side collision:
    CD Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table shown below.
    • Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks,
    deformation).
    (2) Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT, and «AIR BAG» warning lamp. Refer to «Self-diagnosis» for
    details (RS-3D). Ensure entire SRS operates properly.

    In the case of the side collision
    Part

    SRS is NOT activated

    Side air bag is activated

    Side air bag module
    (LH or RH)

    REPLACE all parts
    of seat back with
    deployed side air
    bag module.

    1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on
    the collision side.
    2. If damaged-REPLACE
    the damaged seat parts with new bolts and remove the
    side air bag module.
    3. Check for visible signs of damage (tears etc.) of the side air bag module.
    4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
    5. If no damage is found, reinstall the side air bag module with new torx nuts coated
    with bonding agent.
    6. If damaged-REPLACE
    the side air bag module with new torx nuts coated with
    bonding agent. Air bag must be deployed before disposing of it.

    Satellite sensor (LH
    or RH)

    REPLACE the satellite sensor on the
    collision side with
    new nuts.
    (Repair the center
    pillar inner, etc.
    before installing new
    one if damaged.)

    1. Remove the satellite sensor on the collision side. Check harness connectors for
    damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
    2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the satellite
    sensor.
    3. Install the satellite sensor to check fit.
    4. If no damage is found, reinstall the satellite sensor with new nuts coated with
    bonding agent.
    5. If damaged-REPLACE
    the satellite sensor with new nuts coated with bonding
    agent.

    Diagnosis sensor
    unit

    REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit
    with the new bolts.

    1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities.
    2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
    3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new special bolts
    and ground bolt coated with bonding agent.
    4. If damaged-REPLACE
    the diagnosis sensor unit with new special bolts and
    ground bolt coated with bonding agent.

    Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly

    1. Check if the seat belt can be extended smoothly.
    If the seat belt cannot be extended smoothly.
    — Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
    — If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
    2. Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly on the collision side.
    3. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
    4. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new bolts coated with bonding
    agent.
    5. If damaged-REPLACE
    the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new bolts coated with bonding agent.
    The seat belt pre-tensioner assembly must be deployed before disposing of it.

    RS-52

    COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Part

    Except for Single Air Bag System
    SRS is NOT activated

    Side air bag is activated

    1. Visually check the seat on the collision side.
    2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and
    deformities.
    • Harness, connectors and terminals
    • Frame and recliner, and also adjuster and slides
    3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat.
    4. If damaged-REPLACE
    the damaged seat parts with new bolts.

    Seat with side air
    bag

    REPLACE all parts
    of seat back (including seat back frame)

    Center pillar inner

    1. Check the center pillar inner on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation).
    2. If damaged-REPAIR
    the center pillar inner.

    Trim

    1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side.
    2. If damaged-REPLACE
    the damaged trim parts.

    II

    RS-53

    ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

    @~

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION

    NOTICE:

    • Wiring diagram has been changed.

    CONTENTS
    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — POWER STOP LAMP
    Wiring Diagram — STOP/L -/Sedan
    Models
    Wiring Diagram — STOP/L -/Hatchback
    Models
    TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING
    LAMPS
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — TURN -/LHD
    Models
    INTERIOR ROOM LAMP — Without Timer Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L METER AND GAUGES
    Wiring Diagram — METER -/LHD
    Models
    With Tachometer
    Wiring Diagram — METER -/LHD
    Models
    Without Tachometer
    WARNING LAMPS
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — WARN -/LHD
    Models
    With Tachometer

    2
    2
    4
    4
    6
    15
    15
    16
    17
    17
    18
    22
    22
    23
    23
    25
    26
    26
    27

    EL-1

    Wiring Diagram With Tachometer

    WARN -/RHD

    IMlIr

    Models
    31

    Wiring Diagram Tachometer
    WARNING BUZZER

    WARN -/Without

    Wiring Diagram HORN
    Wiring Diagram AUDIO
    Wiring Diagram —

    BUZZER -/LHD

    ~’iJ
    35
    39
    Models

    HORN AUDIO -/LHD

    Models

    POWER DOOR LOCK/For Europe and
    Austral ia
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK -/LHD
    Models
    LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL UNITS
    Passenger CompartmentlLHD
    Models
    Passenger Compartment/RHD Models
    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Engine Room Harness/RHD
    Main Harness/LHD Models
    Main Harness/RHO Models
    Body Harness/LHD Models
    Body Harness/RHO Models

    Models

    39
    40
    40
    41
    41

    (f~

    M
    ~~

    43
    43.

    44
    47
    47
    48
    49
    49
    50
    52
    54
    60

    ~Ir
    ~~

    ~Ir
    [}{]ffi

    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    The Supplemental Restraint System such as «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» used along
    with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
    types of collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N15 is as follows (The
    composition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):

    For a frontal collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the
    steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side),
    seat belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.

    For a side collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of
    front seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision),
    wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
    Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.

    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
    Air Bag Module, see the RS section.
    • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation either just
    before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.

    EL-2

    PRECAUTIONS
    NOTE

    @~
    ~~

    ~I
    ~~

    ~~

    ~~

    ~[L

    III
    ~~

    ~~

    ~tr
    ~~

    ~IJ
    ~~


    EL-3

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Schematic
    E

    Q)
    +J
    ro

    .,…
    rl
    ro

    ‘-

    +J
    (/)

    :J

    4

    OJ

    c
    .,…
    OJ

    C
    OJ

    OJ

    en
    to

    cn
    CD

    4

    (!)

    Q)
    +J

    10

    en

    (/)

    (/)

    >rl
    Q)
    «0
    0

    E

    ,
    OJQ)

    -1″»1

    0

    (J)

    OJ
    Q

    OJ OJ

    0: 0:0
    (J)CJ

    .. .. .. ..

    Q

    .~

    ‘-

    cc
    0
    .~.~
    ‘0’10’1 :J
    cc W

    Q)

    1:

    :J
    UJ

    4

    ‘0

    u..

    +J

    Q)
    0

    ‘- t-

    C 0
    .,…
    ~

    0’1
    C OJ
    Q) Q) c
    .r-!
    C
    .r-! n
    0’1
    Q)
    rl
    C
    (/)
    0
    OJ

    g@]

    E

    u
    c

    rl

    E
    .,…

    C0

    +J
    Q
    Q)

    U
    X
    UJ

    Q)
    +J
    (/)

    +J
    >-

    E

    Q)
    +Jrl
    (/)ro
    >-:J
    (/)»0

    >+J
    l::
    0’1 0’1
    10
    n
    .cQ)

    en

    OIl::
    IO+J
    .c.r-!

    .,…

    0’1

    Q)

    ‘+-

    E

    >(/)

    (/)

    ‘-0

    ~z

    E
    roc
    OJ
    ro+J
    0)
    (/)
    nOJ>-

    (J)

    »- .~’O

    E .,…
    .,…
    1O:J
    +J
    >10
    «0

    ro +J
    «0 :J
    0
    t::. l::
    +J +J
    .1″»1 -1″»1
    3:
    3:

    @@@@ @)~~@)@

    UJ
    OJ
    rl’0’10

    .~c’+-

    en+J

    Q

    t::.OJ
    +JU
    .1″»1 X
    3:0)

    o

    ~

    Q

    OJ

    I
    U

    O’IQ(/)

    co

    .~ ‘- Ol
    (/):JIO
    UJD
    l::

    3:

    (!)cn

    Z~

    H
    I-u..
    Iu..
    (!)O
    H
    …J

    …J
    ~'(.!)(!)

    OH…JOO
    44Hu..u….JN
    0’4″…J::>
    …JII-LLO:Hm

    a:
    UJ

    N

    ….,’-‘.1″»10,1″»1
    3:~ro

    @

    (!)

    o
    ,
    a:
    LL

    Z

    a:
    a

    o

    :c

    u

    H

    Z.I-

    a:…J

    ::>::>
    I-~

    1-0:

    a

    HUJ

    ::>~

    H

    U4

    ::>

    o

    a:UJ
    H([
    CJm

    «

    ,

    …J

    Q.

    cno
    aH4en

    o

    «LL

    OUJ

    ..JO

    U.J
    C!)

    C!)

    o
    ,
    u..

    a:

    4
    I
    U

    LL

    >

    0:
    UJ
    lI-

    «
    m

    HEL510A

    EL.4

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Schematic (Cont’d)

    HEL548A

    EL-5

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram BATTERY POWER SUPPLY ~

    POWER —

    IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION

    EL-POWER-01

    BATTERY

    @:
    @):
    @:

    IT]

    ~~

    CIJm,ID:@)

    W/R

    W/R

    <0>

    I

    Gasoline
    engine
    Diesel engine
    SR engine A/T models

    and CD engine

    O~~.~—_._———~~~R~~~O~R

    W~Rt
    ffl

    FUSIBLE
    LINK AND
    FUSE BOX

    GY

    G/W

    L/Y

    R/B

    7.5A

    30A

    []I]

    [0
    ~

    ~
    ~
    ~

    G

    ite L ++}
    G

    -..

    W

    I

    e

    I

    O~W

    t
    To
    EL-ROOM/L.EL-SROOF
    EL-WINDOW.EL-D/LOCK
    EL-S/LOCK

    -.. -(9
    W
    C

    ~ JB>
    o

    To
    EL -POWER-05.

    EL -POWER-07
    To
    EL -POWER-04
    To -POWER-03
    EL

    To
    EC-FICD
    EC-A/CCUT
    HA-A/C

    r———————————,
    IiiI ~
    ~
    W B’
    8

    ~

    ID*

    8

    FRONT.

    3)

    31

    ~36 37 38 3940 4142 43

    *:This connector is not shown
    in

    IIHARNESS LAYOUT».

    HEL128A

    EL-6

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-POWER-02
    E

    15A

    10A

    1351

    1361

    Next page

    FUSIBLE

    LINK AND
    FUSE BOX

    m

    W/B
    CO

    BR

    To

    EC-MAIN
    EC-GOVNR
    EC-FCUT
    EC-ACL/SW

    2ND

    LIGHTING

    SWITCH
    ~

    ~e~~~
    TA~~/L

    ~
    R/L
    I

    B/R ~
    ….
    1:rn- R/L

    ~o

    TAIL/L 10″R/B ~-~

    DAYTIME LIGHT
    UNIT
    *1 .. ‘@ R/B @ R/L
    *2 … 41 ~ 43

    HEL130A

    EL.8

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-POWER-04
    To

    EL-POWER-01~

    ~

    W

    @:

    Models with daytime light

    system

    FUSE BLOCK
    (JIB)

    ~
    ~
    ~-,(g»l~)~’
    ,@
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    L.
    I

    2
    1
    6
    7
    11 12
    16 17
    21 22
    24 25
    28

    3
    8
    13
    18
    23
    26
    29

    4
    9
    14
    19

    5
    10
    15
    20

    _

    HEL131A

    EL-9

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER ACCESSORY

    I

    POWER SUPPLY —

    IGNITION SW. IN «ACC» OR «ON»

    I

    BATTERY

    I

    (Cont’d)

    EL-POWER-05

    rtLlJrn

    Refer to
    EL-POWER
    30A

    75A

    (b):

    :

    -01.

    @:
    @:
    @:

    [[]

    w

    G

    t

    .,

    *4 …

    ACC

    —-e~~

    I

    (b)

    Q9

    IGNITION
    SWITCH
    ~

    OFF

    W/L

    LHD models
    RHOmodels
    For Europe
    Except for Europe
    Models with daytime
    light
    system

    W/L ~page
    ~

    ,

    N4

    Next

    15″51
    FUSE

    BLOCK
    (J/B)

    ~
    ~

    m
    (106)

    ([D

    To
    EL-DEF

    To

    EL-AUDIO

    r——————-,

    I

    : ~2

    I
    I
    L
    I

    536~

    ~U

    .5

    426~

    1

    /NE’~

    To
    EL-WIPER

    To
    EL-WIP/R
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    I

    W

    To
    EL-WIP/R

    :I

    r ~

    15) ~i10i, (105) ~i1(;;),~

    ([D

    I
    ~I

    1
    6

    11
    16
    21
    24

    2
    7

    3
    8

    12

    13

    17

    18
    23
    26
    29

    22

    25
    28

    4
    5
    9 10
    14 15
    19 20

    HEL132A

    EL-10

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER —

    (Cont’d)

    EL-POWER-06

    Preceding
    page

    ~~

    (b): LHD models

    I

    W/L~

    @: RHO models
    @: For Europe

    W/L

    rrs1il
    FUSE BLOCK
    (J/B)

    ~
    ~
    (g106)

    IN.81
    8

    I

    S

    m

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR
    -1

    To
    HA-HEATE R
    HA-A/C

    To
    EC-A/CCUT
    EC-FICO
    HA-A/C

    ~
    To
    EC-A/CCUT
    EC-FICO

    HA-HEATER
    HA-A/C

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout

    ~

    r-

    SR

    page) .

    @15) ~i1~,(E106)1

    2

    3

    6

    7

    8
    13
    18

    11 12
    16

    17

    4
    9

    14
    19

    — — -,
    5
    10
    15

    20

    21 22 23
    24

    25

    26

    28 29

    HEL133A

    EL-11

    POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
    Wiring Diagram — POWER IGNITION POWER SUPPLY —

    I

    BATTERY

    I

    (Cont’d)

    IGNITION SW. IN «ON» AND/OR «START»

    I

    EL-PQWER-07
    Refer to

    EL-POWER
    ~

    30A

    75A

    LlJW

    To

    -01.

    EL-PDWER

    [[]

    W

    -09

    IGNITION
    SWITCH
    ~

    G

    t

    I

    To
    EC-MAIN
    EC-IGN/SG

    B/R

    IS.41
    K

    Next page
    FUSE

    L }TOEL-POWER

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    -09

    ~
    ~

    Next page

    P/L

    :

    P/L

    t62Q’

    ~

    ‘2EW

    ~

    HIGH-

    P/L ~

    P/L

    I:iJ

    MOUNTED
    STOP LAMP

    TAIL

    CiID

    STOP

    ~

    TAIL

    STOP

    .
    :
    ………..
    _1
    t
    B

    REAR

    ~

    B E~~~I~~TION

    REAR

    B E~~~I~~TION

    (OUTER)@I(OUTER)GID

    0

    ,.

    a
    ..L

    ~W

    HEL513A

    EL-15

    STOP LAMP
    Wiring Diagram Models

    STOP/L -/Hatchback

    EL-STOP/L-02
    <0:
    :

    FUSE

    BLOCK

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    ~:

    (JIB)

    ~:

    ~

    DEPRESSED

    ~~~~C~AMP
    (8E)

    RELEASED

    LHD models
    RHO models
    Models with high-mounted
    stop lamp on rear window
    Models with high-mounted
    stop lamp in rear air spoiler

    To EL-TAIL/L ~

    R/L

    -e

    R:;JJ

    P’L

    ~~~~
    -@>
    ~~-ru~~3

    B

    COMBINATION
    FLASHER
    UNIT
    @

    !mil 111lJ~
    54213

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    F1T2l@
    W

    m

    B

    HEL166A

    EL-18

    TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram — TURN -/LHD

    Models

    (Cont’d)

    EL-TURN-02

    FLASHER

    FLASHER

    4=U
    GIS

    lLiJl
    G/Y

    I

    I

    MULTI-REMOTE
    CONTROL UNIT
    ~:@

    page

    G/Y ~

    ~

    -.

    —~~G/Y~4

    -.
    G/S (!3

    4)-

    G/Y

    <@-

    G/S —-

    TO

    2~

    G/Y

    -_-.-

    G/Y

    -fB>

    1~

    G/8

    G/S

    -Q>

    -.

    ….,

    G/S (!3

    Next

    ~page

    ….

    EL-TURN
    -04

    -.

    LG

    I
    CMa)

    LG

    ~

    ~

    GIB

    Gf

    G/B

    G/Y

    I~~-~~——~~~—-~~I
    LG ~

    G/B

    @: With multi-remote
    control system

    G/Y

    I

    LG

    m
    L

    TURN

    SIGNAL
    LAMP

    R SWITCH

    WID

    e——.-

    ________

    -._

    G/Y

    G/S

    -&>}

    -b>

    Next

    page

    Refer ta last page
    (FaIdout

    Iimlll~~
    87654

    page) .

    ITQTI~
    SR

    @IJTIg]

    W


    HEL551A

    EL-19

    TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram — TURN -/LHD

    Models

    (Cont’d)

    EL-TURN-03
    To
    ~
    EL-TURN-01 ~

    ~
    B

    —————O~
    ~

    <@Preceding
    page

    G/Y

    ~
    ~

    G/Y ~

    I$I~

    ~

    GIS

    G/Y

    =-.—-I
    i!’1

    G/Y

    I

    ~~

    RONT
    l~tRONT i!t
    I!l

    GIS

    GIS

    TURN
    SIDE

    G/Y

    STUIGRNNAL

    SIGNAL
    LAMP LH

    ~em
    B

    ~~B

    G/Y

    TSUIRGN
    NAL

    LAMP LH

    0

    LAMP RH

    II 1

    ~~~~L
    SIDE
    LAMP RH
    II @ :
    ~w

    HEL515A

    EL-21

    INTERIOR ROOM LAMP —

    Without Timer —

    Wiring Diagram —

    ROOM/L —

    EL-ROOM/L-01
    FUSE

    BLOCK

    Refe~ to EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    :

    LHD models
    RHOmodels
    @: Models with sun~oof
    @: Models without sunroof
    ~:
    5-doo~ Hatchback and Sedan models

    :

    ~

    ~

    ~~

    G C

    R/Y~
    ~

    ~

    R/Y

    R/Y~

    65

    m>

    l1J 24
    ~—qdJ
    R/Y ~

    ~:

    GC
    SR

    A

    [tJ
    A

    ()

    :~
    ()

    I
    R/V

    I
    R

    m m

    R

    M

    A

    ~~

    rrn~
    [JJ~

    SR

    ~1r

    VEHICLE
    SPEED
    SENSOR

    B/R

    ~

    ~

    ~~

    ~

    ~1r
    Refer to last page
    (FoIdout page) .

    PU/W

    (818)

    B/W

    0
    TACHO

    IEiSA

    ~~

    i FUEL

    5

    L/OR

    +1
    ,….,~

    PU/W

    G

    L/OR

    B

    B

    I

    PU/W

    If1lJ THERMAL
    TRANSMITTER
    CE211)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~m

    ~~

    ~GY

    8~

    L!J

    ~B

    8

    HEL517A

    EL-24

    METER AND GAUGES
    Wiring Diagram — METER -/LHD
    Without Tachometer

    Models

    EL-METER-03
    FUSE

    7.5A

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    1241

    ~

    IN;71

    Refer

    to

    EL -POWER.

    1——~

    P

    PU/R

    rF!eTI

    rrf7n

    PU/R

    +

    To EC-VSS

    WATER

    ,……a-…..

    TEMP.

    GAUGE

    —FPC CONNECTOR —

    COMBINATION
    METER
    @
    ~

    UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT (With
    speedometer’ and ado/trip meter)
    — — — — — — — — — — — — FPC CONNECTOR — — — — — — — — — — — — 2•61

    1

    ~

    S/R

    ~
    G

    PU/WIUO

    If!=iIQID

    61~

    CiJ~
    G

    llJI~

    PU/W

    I

    i FUEL

    W
    ~

    TANK
    GAUGE
    UNIT
    (B18)

    VEHICLE
    SPEED
    SENSOR

    S/R
    ~
    ~

    ~

    In
    j..J 1

    m

    B

    ~2

    m

    PU/W~

    B/W

    B/W

    PU/W

    B

    m

    THERMAL

    TRANSMITTER
    CE211)

    @
    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    ~~

    rntmmJ

    8

    8~

    L!J

    ~~

    B

    tID

    GY

    HEL518A

    EL-25

    WARNING LAMPS

    Schematic
    w

    Cf)

    NATS SECURITY
    INDICATOR

    ::>
    u.

    >a:
    w

    ..-..~

    NATS
    IMMU

    CD

    ABS

    ASS

    CONTROL
    UNIT
    OIL
    OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
    FUEL
    FUEL TANK GAUGE UNIT
    DOOR
    FRONT DOOR SWITCH
    (Driver

    side)

    FRONT DOOR SWITCH
    Cf)

    (Passenger side)

    J:

    I

    U

    r-

    w
    Cf)
    ::>
    u.

    ~..-

    H

    (J)a:

    ~
    z..-

    REAR DOOR SWITCH LH

    OCf)
    H

    REAR DOOR SWITCH RH

    r-‘-

    HO
    Z

    BELT

    (!)Z

    HO

    WARNING
    BUZZER
    UNIT

    BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
    00
    r-t

    Q.)

    «‘0
    0
    E

    PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

    C

    ro

    «‘0

    BRAKE VACUUM SWITCH

    Q.)

    (J)
    ‘0
    C

    ro

    Q.)

    ro
    ‘M
    r-t

    C
    .,-1

    ro Ol
    a. ‘- c
    Q.)
    0 +oJ
    00
    ‘:J :J r-t

    ~

    »0 0
    u. u..

    U

    ro
    D
    rn.c
    C

    Q.)

    Q.)

    W

    ALTERNATOR

    ::L-

    0)

    00
    0)
    .,-1

    0

    ‘M

    C

    U

    Q.)

    -4J

    0)

    I

    ro

    FUEL FILTER SWITCH

    C
    .,-1

    r-t

    0
    00

    ro

    (!)

    ‘0
    0
    ‘0
    I
    lCl

    MALFUNCTION
    INDICATOR
    ~
    w

    u

    GLOW

    AIR BAG
    AIR BAG
    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR
    UNIT

    HEL552A

    EL-26

    WARNING LAMPS
    Wiring Diagram With Tachometer

    WARN -/LHD

    Models

    EL-WARN-01
    FUSE
    BLOCK

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    (JIB)

    @:

    ~

    @:

    Gasoline engine
    Diesel engine

    p

    m NATS

    MALFUNCTION
    INDICATOR

    SECURITY
    INDICATOR
    ~

    GLOW

    lbi=JJ

    ~
    OR

    COMBINATION
    METER
    @

    ~

    ORIL

    OR

    O~~——.I

    CBID

    lbi=ll
    OR

    @

    ~

    ~
    OR

    ORIL

    I

    m
    ~
    YIR

    Y/R

    ~ OL

    1

    B

    I

    i>

    OR

    I

    OR

    I

    P/L

    OAIL IU»Arn

    ~~

    I~ICEID

    .
    I

    IIiII
    OR

    ~:.1
    I

    FUEL

    12•91

    lbi=U

    ?:y

    OIL

    12~fer to

    LOW CB18)

    OIL
    LOW ~~if~~RE

    HIGH

    lbi=JJ

    .,— m>

    B/W

    HIGH

    EC-MIL .)

    ~
    (b): LHO models

    vIa

    …..

    HIGH

    BRAKE
    FLUID
    LEVEL
    SWITCH

    _CiJ
    S

    I

    @

    m

    VIS

    1c;:J1~

    mCBID

    VIB

    V 18

    r=&:.~

    n2″

    ,… 183’

    BRAKE
    LOW FLUID
    LEVEL
    ‘-SWITCH

    ~
    L

    11211 @

    HIGH

    ~*
    L::j=’

    B

    0

    I

    V/B

    m

    PARKING
    BRAKE
    PULLED SWITCH

    I

    RELEASEcr

    »

    s
    -!-

    J2:2.J

    ~

    a
    ~

    mm

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    m
    ~

    @:

    G/Y ~

    G/Y

    m

    ~O,

    G/Y

    @

    m

    G~Y

    ‘lfl’~em

    SPIRAL
    CABLE

    m

    G/Y

    ~

    8

    AIR BAG

    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR

    UNIT

    <1m>

    i——I

    1
    QJ1
    QJ
    G

    G

    HORN
    (LOW)

    HORN
    SWITCH

    HORN
    (HIGH)

    m

    -=

    RE- …..
    _-»

    m

    LEASED

    _-»

    RE- …..
    LEASED

    HORN
    SWITCH

    Refer to last page

    Fnm
    [ill] w

    mm
    mI>
    L..:J B’
    B ‘ B
    F:11

    DID:Il]m

    rnfHID

    ~m*~m*

    ~W

    BR

    lIJiifiJ

    R

    p

    RRSP
    RH (+)

    (In antenna
    base)

    ANT

    RRSP
    RH (-)

    RRSP
    LH (+)

    ~
    B/P

    ~
    LG

    RRSP
    LH (-)

    LIGHTING
    SW

    ~
    B/Y

    U:iJJ

    OR @ B/P

    LG

    B/Y

    OR @ B/P

    LG

    B/Y

    I I

    ~

    I I

    B/P

    ~

    ~

    RIG ~

    To EL-ILL

    :

    B/Y

    REAR
    SPEAKER
    RH
    @:@

    ~
    ~

    RIG

    If It
    If It
    rcp-~:-t!J~————~~~—$
    ~

    RADIO

    SIGNAL

    REAR
    SPEAKER
    LH
    ID:@

    r————————,

    Hatchback mode Is
    @: Models with
    4-speaker

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .

    wW@
    (Ig)

    SR

    • SA

    * : This connector is not shown in «HARNESS LAYOUT».

    HEL529A

    EL-41

    AUDIO
    Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)

    AUDIO -/LHD

    Models

    EL-AUDIO-02
    RADIO
    FRSP

    FRSP
    RH (+)

    FRSP

    LH

    RH (-)

    ~

    ~

    B/R

    BR

    (+)

    LH (-)

    &iJJ
    L

    l’=i=JJ

    SR

    B/R

    ff1l1

    rrtiJ

    B/W

    If

    It

    If

    It

    L

    B/W

    ff1l1

    rrtiJ

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR

    ~

    B/R

    t

    B/R

    f

    6-speaker

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR
    -1

    I

    lIiJJ
    B/W

    ~

    ~

    BR

    @: Models with

    1

    -3
    ~
    ~

    @

    FRSP

    L

    t

    ~

    I
    ~

    t

    L

    ~

    B/W

    t

    Refer to last page

    @

    (Foldout

    ~~

    W

    SR

    page) .

    ‘ SR

    [Q]~~@)~

    [I[g] SR ‘ BR ‘ SR ‘ SA

    CAUTION:

    Don’t attempt to repair, splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC). If the FFC is damaged, replace with
    a new one.
    HEL141

    EL-42

    HEL237A

    EL-43

    POWER DOOR LOCK/For Euro~e and Australia
    Wiring Diagram —

    D/LOCK -/LHD

    Models

    EL-D/LOCK-01
    ~:
    ~:

    Refer to EL-POWER.

    25A

    m

    ..———-.

    W

    CIRCUIT
    BREAKER

    L

    5-door Hatchback
    and Sedan models
    Models with mUlti-remote
    control system

    W

    m m

    LOCK
    REQUEST

    B

    e…..

    B

    I

    RH

    m

    ~

    Next

    ::ge
    EL-D/LOCK
    -03

    ~
    REAR
    DOOR
    SWITCH
    LH
    ~
    ~

    OPEN

    ,-CLOSED

    i-‘
    B

    8

    ! !
    Refe~ to last page
    (Foldout

    ~III~~
    87654

    rfi2l(]ID

    SR

    W

    B

    liJ

    page) .

    mm@
    BR’ BR’ SR

    HEL530A

    EL-44

    POWER DOOR LOCK/For Europe and Australia
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK -/LHD
    (Cont’d)

    Models

    EL-D/LOCK-02
    DOOR
    LOCK
    OUTPUT

    DOOR
    UNLOCK
    OUTPUT

    ~

    DR DOOR
    STATE SW

    ~

    I~
    It ti~
    I

    0

    W/R

    R/L

    ffi
    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-8
    @

    ~

    ~

    …..
    …..
    …..
    …..

    W/R

    R/L

    DOOR
    LOCK
    TIMER

    Y/R
    -R/L~

    W/R

    19>

    Next page

    -W/R~
    -R/L~

    {1l. R/L
    ~

    ~

    ~

    CMD ~

    RIL
    ~

    r-

    W/R

    _ _ _ ~

    ~

    ____

    ~

    ~

    VIR

    JUNCTION
    BOX NO.2
    ~~~~T
    CONNECTORS)

    ~

    R/L CQD W/R

    rm

    VIR

    VIR

    Y18

    rn

    ffi

    LOCKED

    UNLOCK LOCK

    UNLOCKED
    DOOR
    UNLOCK

    DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
    DRIVER SIDE
    @)

    SENSOR

    ~
    B

    CONNECTOR-1
    ~

    4J- ~

    ~~~~eding

    ~=_=_-==_~

    CQD

    I~I

    JOINT

    CMD

    8

    B

    @: 5-door Hatchback
    and Sedan models

    .J

    Refe~ to last page
    (FaIdaut

    page) .

    ~@)

    !tY

    GY

    CAUTION:

    Don’t attempt to repair. splice or modify the flexible
    flat circuit (FFC) . If the FFC is damaged, replace with
    a new one.

    HEL239A

    EL-45

    POWER DOOR LOCK/For Europe and Australia
    Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK -/LHD
    (Cont’d)

    Models

    EL-D/LOCK-03
    DOOR

    LOCK

    TIMER

    PASS DOOR
    STATE sw

    Preceding
    page

    ~

    RIL

    «S

    ~«S

    :a

    «0

    >- (ij
    Q) 0

    :sc.> .DC:
    0
    Q)
    CIJ

    Q)

    c::

    0

    ~Q)
    Q)
    «C

    …..

    .5

    ~
    .u
    0 £
    Q)
    CIJ
    Q)
    ~ c:Q)
    C ~
    a.
    C c.>
    CIJ

    t)

    0

    0
    c.>

    ~>- c~
    £ E CIJ
    ~c.> 0CIJ ~
    Q)

    ..Q
    «C

    0
    «C

    c
    ~ .9

    t)
    Q)

    c
    c:

    0
    c.>

    e
    .2

    -J

    ~
    Q)

    =~

    a.

    ;f ~

    ~ g
    .9 0 .9
    3:
    Q)
    :sCIJ ~~ EQ)
    a. 1i.i
    Q)

    CO

    e

    >-

    CIJ

    iC

    HEL533A

    EL-49

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Main Harness/LHD Models
    LO

    CJ

    u.

    u..

    UJ

    w

    Cl

    o
    u

    ~0
    c:

    2

    ~

    «C

    >-

    o

    ~0>

    :a

    Q)

    :;
    U

    .0

    C

    en

    0

    ~

    £;

    U

    <1>

    (1)

    .s
    (1)

    c:
    c:
    0
    u
    <1>

    .c:
    +oJ

    ~

    u
    .Q
    «‘0

    c:

    <13

    t)
    Q)

    c

    0

    ~ ~
    0 <1>
    <1>

    en

    :J

    Ci>

    ()

    «‘0

    +oJ

    .5

    ~

    .0
    c:

    ~ 0u 0
    ><13 c:
    <1>

    <13
    E en
    0

    en

    0
    «C

    .s
    (1)

    .2

    c: .cu
    c: LL.
    0
    u

    ~

    ….J

    CO

    ~
    Q)

    :5
    0:J

    1:
    .2>

    ~
    0 .8
    ~:J ~3= E
    .as

    .s

    «

    en
    Q)

    CO

    ..

    Q)

    0-

    ~

    Ci)
    >-

    en

    «

    il

    LO

    CJ

    HEL284A

    EL-50

    HARNESS LAYOUr
    Main Harness/LHD Models (Cont’d)

    ~

    ()

    w

    CJ

    u..

    ~

    CJ

    a:

    cr:
    CD

    ~

    oq-

    o w

    oq-oq-~~~~~~~CJCJCJ

    u..u.wu.u.wu.

    CJ

    u..u..wow

    ,…

    ,…

    wwwu..www

    CJ

    CJ

    ,…

    I~

    CD

    CJ

    CJ

    u..

    U.

    en

    o

    ~u
    .2

    oo

    «C

    t5
    Q)

    Q;

    ::
    o

    c::
    c::
    o
    u

    Q.

    C?

    o

    «C

    c::

    «C

    c::

    t5
    Q)

    :::s :::s c:

    c::

    c::

    c::

    000

    c:

    0, 0,

    8

    ~~~
    c::

    >. >.

    c
    .0

    :0:0:0
    E E E

    o
    «C

    o

    CD

    0

    «C
    0
    CD

    c:

    0 0
    «‘»»)()()()

    c:

    0

    HEL534A

    EL-51

    HARNESS LAYOUr
    Main Harness/RHO Models

    LL

    LL

    «‘0

    c:

    ctS

    t>0)

    g
    0)

    .2

    c: ‘(;;
    c:
    0 Uu

    W

    ~
    g <5
    ~ ~
    :J

    00

    m

    (!)

    ~

    ‘(;;
    0-

    ~

    0)

    £
    0:J

    E

    g

    .s

    W

    E

    0)’

    .
    00

    iC

    Cl

    ()

    ()

    «

    «

    CI

    HEL444A

    EL.52

    HARNESS LA YOUr
    Main Harness/RHO Models (Cont’d)

    CJ
    U.

    CJ

    CD

    CJ
    Q

    CJ

    W


    (‘t)

    Q

    CJ

    W

    HEL535A

    EL-53

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness/LHD Models
    3-DOOR HATCHBACK

    .,…

    CI

    u..

    u..

    UJ

    w

    «
    .,…

    LO

    CI

    HEL536A

    EL-54

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness/LHD Models (Cont’d)

    Cf)

    Cf)

    CJ

    o

    co

    0

    ~

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    Cf)

    C’t’)

    woo

    CJ

    cocomcococooo

    CJ
    LL

    CJ

    CJ
    LL

    CJ

    CJ

    CJ

    0000

    CJ

    C’t’)
    C’t’)
    CJ CJ CJ Cf) C’t’)
    OOOWWWW(!}LLWWOLL

    CJ

    CJ

    ~

    ~

    C’t’)

    ~

    HEL537A

    EL-55

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness/LHD Models (Cont’d)
    SEDAN

    ,…

    CJ

    «0
    C
    :J

    e

    C>

    >.

    «0

    u.

    u..

    o

    CD

    ~

    w

    UJ

    ()

    «0_C
    __
    :J

    __

    _

    e~~~~ —

    «0

    o

    CD

    CJ

    LO

    HEL540A

    EL-56

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness/LHD Models (Cont’d)

    1:1:
    CD

    Q;

    0)
    0)

    0)
    0)

    .E .E
    Q)

    Q)

    «C»C

    := 0:=

    0

    Q; «C «C
    en c: c:
    c: .~ .~

    «C

    c:
    ;:j

    e

    0)

    Q)

    «C

    c:

    0
    ()

    (1)

    ~c
    as
    .r:.

    en
    en

    ~ ~ (J (J ~
    ~ ~
    a: ~ ~~
    CD ~ co
    ~~

    ..

    (J

    CD

    I~

    c
    as

    @@@@@@@@@@@
    ;!
    et)

    C»)

    et)

    et)

    (J

    (‘I)

    et)

    Q)

    Q)

    >-

    «C
    0

    a: a: co

    . . .. .. ..

    ……..
    0
    0

    ~ ~

    (J

    C»)

    C»)

    s::.
    .c•
    ::J

    .,-

    .,-

    CD ~

    CD

    OO~OOOO

    en 00 u:

    (J

    wU-(!JU-(!J(!J(!J(!Ju-u-o

    iJj

    (J

    >:

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (J

    et)

    co ««COCOCOCO()()()

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (‘I)

    (J

    ()()

    C»)

    (‘I)

    et)

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (J

    (J

    .,-

    (J

    .,-

    .,-

    et)

    (J

    (‘I)

    (J

    (‘I)

    (‘I)

    (‘I)

    (‘I)

    (J

    (J

    OOOOO()WU-U-U-()OWCOWCO()()OOWWW

    HEL541A

    EL-57

    HARNESS LA YOUr

    Body Harness/LHD Models (Cont’d)
    5-DOOR HATCHBACK
    CJ

    LO

    u..

    u.

    w

    w

    «0

    c:
    ::::]

    o

    C,
    >-

    «0

    o

    co

    ()

    «0

    c:
    ::::]

    e —

    -!~-~-=—-

    «

    C)

    CJ

    «

    LO

    HEL544A

    EL-58

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness/LHD Models (Cont’d)

    C»)

    C»)

    C»)

    C»)

    C»)

    CI

    CI

    CI

    OaJCOOOOLUW

    :c
    a:
    :c .c

    a: B
    ~ .~
    ~

    en

    ~
    0
    c. 0
    en «0

    ~ ~
    Q)

    Q)

    a: a:

    or-

    CI

    or-

    CI

    CI

    CI

    C»)

    C»)

    (‘f»)

    CI

    CI

    CI

    CI

    CI

    (‘f»)

    co<.:

    >:

    CJ

    CI

    CI

    CI

    CI

    CI

    moo

    CJ

    CJ

    >:

    ~ >:

    CI

    CI

    CI

    (‘I’)

    CJ

    (‘I’)

    (‘I’)

    (‘I’)

    (‘I’)

    u..UJ

    UJ UJ u..

    (‘I’)

    CI

    ,-

    ,-

    CI

    CI

    (‘I’)

    (‘I’)

    CI

    CI

    CI

    CI

    ~~u..u..u..OOOCDCDmmCDOOOOOUJ

    HEL539A

    EL-61

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness/RHO Models (Cont’d)
    SEDAN

    u.

    w

    ()

    «C
    c:
    ::J

    __

    e ;

    ~~==—-«»»=»»—

    o

    co

    «C

    c:

    «

    «

    :::s

    o

    0,

    ~
    «C

    o
    co
    LO

    CJ

    HEL542A

    EL-62

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness/RHO Models (Cont’d)


    HEL543A

    EL-63

    HARNESS LA YOUr
    Body Harness/RHO Models (Cont’d)
    5-DOOR HATCHBACK
    CJ

    LL

    u..

    UJ

    w

    Cl

    «0

    c:
    ::::J

    o

    0,
    >.

    «0

    o

    CD

    o

    «

    «

    LO

    CJ

    HEL546A

    EL-64

    HARNESS LAYOUT
    Body Harness/RHO Models (Cont’d)

    Cl

    Cl

    Cl

    C»)

    Cl

    C»)

    Cl

    C»)

    OOOWWLLWW

    Q)Q)

    a. 0.
    o 0

    :; :;

    Cl

    Cl

    Cl

    Cl

    C»)

    Cl

    C»)

    Cl

    C»)

    C»)

    Cl

    LLLL.LL~~owwoomm«mmOOCOOLLOW

    Cl

    Cl

    Cl

    Cl

    C»)

    C»)

    Cl

    (t)

    Cl

    Cl

    (t)

    W

    W

    Cl

    Cl


    HEL547A

    EL-65

    III

    GENERAL INFORMATION
    SECTION
    OUTLINE OF MODIFICATIONS:

    Restraint system
    • The seat belt pre-tensioner type has been changed from the mechanical type to the electrical type (except
    on air bag less models).
    • The air bag system with a diagnosis sensor unit located in the steering wheel has been deleted.

    [F~

    CONTENTS
    PRECAUTIONS

    CONSULT

    CHECKING

    Lithium Battery Replacement…
    Checking Equipment

    2

    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    SYSTEM

    2

    IDENTIFICATION

    Function and System Application

    INFORMATION

    Model Variation
    Identification Number

    3

    3

    Modification has been included in production, starting with the following vehicle identification
    (chassis number):

    For Europe:









    JN1BCAN15U0101001
    JN1 BAAN15U0150001.
    JN1BFAN15U0101001
    JN1 FCAN15U0150001
    JN1 FAAN15U0200001
    JN1FFAN15U0150001′-‘
    JN1ECAN15U0600001+
    JN1 EAAN15U0600001
    JN1 EFAN15U0600001
    JN1 EEAN15U0600001



    .-. JN1BCAN15U0600001 •
    • JN1 BAAN15U0600001’-‘
    .-. JN1BFAN15U0600001

    +

    +



    For Israel:

    JN1BCAN15XW000101 ••
    JN1 FCAN15XW000201 •

    JN1BCAN15XW550001+

    GI-1

    3
    3

    ~’U’

    4

    4
    6
    numbers

    [f~

    M

    PRECAUTIONS
    Observe the following
    proper servicing.

    precautions

    to ensure safe and

    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    The Supplemental Restraint System such as «AIR BAG» and
    «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» used along with a seat belt,
    helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
    passenger for certain types of collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N15 is as follows
    (The composition varies according to the destination and
    optional equipment.):

    For a frontal collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag
    module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front
    passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel
    on passenger side), seat belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis
    sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.

    For a side collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air
    bag module (located in the outer side of front seat), satellite
    sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components.of air bags
    for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of
    components of air bags for a frontal collision).
    Information necessary to service the system safely is included in
    the RS section of this Service Manual.

    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could
    increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event
    of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all
    maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and
    installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury
    caused by unintentional activation of the system. For
    removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the RS
    section.
    • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit
    related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service
    Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with
    yellow insulation either just before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.

    GI-2

    CONSULT CHECKING SYSTEM
    Function and System Application
    Diagnostic

    Function

    test mode

    ENGINE

    AIRBAG

    ABS

    NATS*1

    x*2

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x

    x*2

    x

    x

    This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices
    faster and more accurately by following the indications on

    Work support

    CONSULT.
    Self-diagnostic

    Self-diagnostic

    results

    results can be read and erased quickly.

    Trouble diagnostic

    Current self-diagnostic

    record

    records previously stored can be read.

    results and all trouble diagnostic

    ECU discriminated

    Classification

    No.

    prevent an incorrect ECU from being installed.

    number of a replacement

    ECU can be read to

    Data monitor

    Input/Output

    Active test

    actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some param-

    data in the ECM can be read.

    Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSUL T drives some
    eters in a specified range.
    ECM part number

    ECM part number can be read.
    Conducted

    Function test

    by CONSUL T instead of a technician to deter-

    mine whether each system is «OK» or «NG».

    Control unit initializa-

    All registered ignition key IDs in NATS components

    tion

    initialized and new IDs can be registered.

    Self-function

    check

    ECM checks its own NATS communication

    can be

    interface.

    x: Applicable
    *1: NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System)
    *2: Not available for models with diesel engine

    Lithium Battery Replacement
    CONSULT contains a lithium battery. When replacing the battery obey the following:

    WARNING:
    Replace the lithium battery with SANYO Electric Co., Ltd., CR2032 only. Use of another battery may
    present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.
    Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.

    Checking Equipment
    When ordering the below equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor.
    Tool name

    Description

    NISSAN CONSULT

    CD

    CONSULT

    unit

    and accessories

    CD

    Program card (EE 980),
    (NATS-E940)*

    NT004

    *: An order for NATS program card must be placed only with NISSAN EUROPE N.V.

    GI-3

    IDENTIFICATION

    INFORMATION

    Model Variation
    For LHO
    LHD
    GA14DE

    Engine

    GA16DE

    SR20DE

    CD20E

    5F

    5F

    AT

    5F

    5F

    RS5F30A

    RS5F31A

    RL4F03A

    RS5F32A

    RS5F31A

    L

    BAV ALBF-EGA

    LX

    BAVALDF-EGA

    BAY ALDF-EGA

    BAY ALDA-EGA

    BVCALDF-NGA

    SLX

    BAVALFF-EGA

    BAYALFF-EGA

    BAYALFA-EGA

    BVCALFF-NGA

    Transaxle

    4-door Sedan

    3-door Hatchback

    SR

    BAY ALQF-EGA

    L

    EAV ALBF-EGA

    LX

    EAVALDF-EGA

    EA Y ALDF-EGA

    EA Y ALDA-EGA

    EVCALDF-NGA

    EA YALFA-EGA

    EVCALFF-NGA

    SLX

    EAV ALFF-EGA

    EA Y ALFF-EGA

    SR

    EAVALQF-EGA

    EAY ALQF-EGA

    GTI

    L

    FAVALBF-EGA

    LX

    FAVALDF-EGA

    FAYALDF-EGA

    FAYALDA-EGA

    FVCALDF-NGA

    SLX

    FAVALFF-EGA

    FAYALFF-EGA

    FAYALFA-EGA

    FVCALFF-NGA

    SR

    FAVALQF-EGA

    FAYALQF-EGA

    SR20DE

    CD20E

    5-door Hatchback

    EBYALUF-EGA

    For RHO
    RHD
    GA14DE

    Engine

    GA16DE

    5F

    5F

    AT

    5F

    5F

    RS5F30A

    RS5F31A

    RL4F03A

    RS5F32A

    RS5F31A

    L

    BAVARBF-EEA

    LX

    BAVARDF-EEA

    BA Y ARDF-EEA

    BAY ARDA-EEA

    BVCARDF-NEA

    SLX

    BAV ARFF-EEA

    BAY ARFF-EEA

    BAYARFA-EEA

    BVCARFF-NEA

    SR

    BAY ARQF-EEA

    Transaxle

    4-door Sedan

    3-door Hatchback

    L

    EAVARBF-EEA

    LX

    EAVARDF-EEA

    SLX

    EAV ARFF-EEA

    EA Y ARFF-EEA

    SR

    EAVARQF-EEA

    EA YARQF-EEA

    GTI

    EAYARFA-EEA

    EBYARUF-EEA

    L

    FAVARBF-EEA

    LX

    FAVARDF-EEA

    FAYARDF-EEA

    FAYARDA-EEA

    FVCARDF-NEA

    SLX

    FAVARFF-EEA

    FAYARFF-EEA

    FAYARFA-EEA

    FVCARFF-NEA

    SR

    FAVARQF-EEA

    FAYARQF-EEA

    5-door Hatchback

    GI-4

    IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
    Model Variation (Cont’d)
    Prefix and suffix designations:
    B

    AV

    A

    L

    B

    F

    N15

    E

    G

    A

    T

    T

    A: Standard

    E: RHO models

    G: LHD models
    E: Multiport fuel injection system engine
    N: Diesel engine
    Model
    A: 4-speed automatic transaxle
    F: 5-speed manual transaxle

    B: L
    0: LX or Q
    F:SLX
    Q:SR
    U:GTlorSSS
    L: Left-hand drive
    R: Right-hand drive
    A: 2-wheel drive models
    AV: GA14DE engine
    AY: GA16DE engine
    BY: SR20DE engine
    VC: CD20 engine
    B: 4-door Sedan
    F: 5-door Hatchback
    E: 3-door Hatchback

    GI-5

    IDENTIFICATION

    INFORMATION

    Identification Number
    Vehicle identification

    Emission

    control

    information

    Vehicle identification

    number

    plate

    label

    SG1908-A

    VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

    NUMBER ARRANGEMENT

    For Europe
    :

    JN1

    B

    A

    A

    U

    N15

    T

    0

    T

    XXXXXX
    —-C::le

    o : Stopgap

    Destination
    U : Europe

    Model
    A : 2-wheel drive
    Engine type
    A : GA 14DE engine
    C : GA 16DE engine
    E : SR20DE engine
    F : CD20E engine
    Body type
    B : 4-door Sedan
    F : 5-door Hatchback
    E : 3-door Hatchback
    Manufacturer
    JN1 : Nissan, Passenger vehicle

    GI.6

    CD
    serial number

    (no meaning)

    IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
    Identification Number (Cont’d)
    For Israel

    JN1

    B

    C

    A

    N15

    X

    T

    W

    T

    XXXXXX

    ~Ie

    Manufacture plant
    W: Kyushu
    Model year

    X : 1999

    Model
    A : 2-wheel drive
    Engine type
    C: GA16DE
    Body type
    B : 4-door Sedan
    F : 5-door Hatchback
    Manufacturer
    JN1 : Nissan, Passenger vehicle

    GI.7

    serial

    number

    ALPHABETICAL INDEX
    SECTION

    @~

    ~~

    ~~

    ~~

    [f~
    ~[L

    III

    ~lr
    ~~

    M
    ~~

    ~1I
    ~~

    ~1J
    [f{]ffi

    ~[L


    IDX-1

    ALPHABETICAL INDEX
    L

    A

    Air bag
    Air bag disposal
    Air bag precautions
    Audio
    AUDIO — Wiring diagram

    RS-6
    RS-12
    GI-2
    EL-41
    EL-41

    00

    EL-47

    M

    Meter……………………………………………………
    METER — Wiring diagram
    Model variation

    B

    BUZZER — Wiring diagram

    Location of electrical units

    EL-23
    EL-23
    G 1-4

    EL-39
    p

    c
    Collision diagnosis
    Combination meter
    CONSULT general information

    RS-46
    EL-23
    GI-3

    POWER — Wiring diagram
    Power door lock
    Power supply routing

    EL-6
    EL-43
    EL-4

    R

    o
    Diagnosis sensor unit
    D/LOCK — Wiring diagram

    RS-11
    EL-44

    Radio — See Audio
    Room lamp
    Room lamp — See Interior lamp
    ROOM/L — Wiring diagram

    s

    E

    Electrical units location

    EL-47

    F

    Front passenger air bag
    Front seat belt.
    Fuel gauge

    RS-6
    RS-4
    EL-23

    G

    Gauges

    EL-41
    EL-22
    EL-22
    EL-22

    EL-23

    Seat belt pre-tensioner
    Seat belt pre-tensioner disposal
    Seat belt, front
    Side air bag
    Speedometer
    SRS — See Supplemental Restraint
    System
    SRS — Wiring diagram
    SRS Trouble diagnoses
    Stop lamp
    STOP/L — Wiring diagram
    Supplemental Restraint System
    Supplemental restraint system — Wiring
    diagram

    RS-6
    RS-12
    RS-4
    RS-6
    EL-23
    RS-6
    RS-20
    RS-15
    EL-15
    EL-15
    RS-6
    RS-20

    H
    T

    Harness layout
    Hazard warning lamp
    Horn
    HORN — Wiring diagram

    EL-49
    EL-17
    EL-40
    EL-40

    Tachometer
    TURN — Wiring diagram
    Turn signal lamp

    EL-23
    EL-18
    EL-17

    v
    Interior lamp

    EL-22

    Vehicle identification number

    IDX-2

    GI-6

    ALPHABETICAL INDEX
    Warning lamps
    Water temperature gauge

    w
    WARN — Wiring diagram
    Warning buzzer

    EL-26
    EL-23

    EL-27
    EL-39


    IDX-3

    QUICK REFERENCE INDEX

    GENERAL INFORMATION

    GI

    MAINTENANCE

    MA

    ALMERA

    ENGINE MECHANICAL

    EM

    MODEL N15 SERIES

    ENGINE LUBRICATION &
    COOLING SYSTEMS

    LC

    ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

    EC

    ACCELERATOR CONTROL,
    FUEL & EXHAUST SYSTEMS

    FE

    FOREWORD

    CLUTCH

    CL

    This supplement contains information concerning necessary service
    procedures and relevant data for the
    model N15 series.

    MANUAL TRANSAXLE

    MT

    AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

    AT

    FRONT AXLE & FRONT SUSPENSION

    FA

    REAR AXLE & REAR SUSPENSION

    RA

    BRAKE SYSTEM

    BR

    STEERING SYSTEM

    ST

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM

    RS

    BODY & TRIM

    BT

    HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER

    HA

    ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

    EL

    ALPHABETICAL INDEX

    IDX

    All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this supplement are based on the latest product
    information available at the time of
    publication. If your NISSAN model
    differs from the specifications contained in this supplement, consult your
    NISSAN distributor for information.
    The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at
    any time without notice.

    Edition: February 1999
    Printing: February 1999 (01)
    Publication No. SM9E-N15CE0

    NISSAN EUROPE N.V.
    © 1999 NISSAN EUROPE N.V. Printed in THE NETHERLANDS
    Not to be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of Nissan Europe N.V., Amsterdam, The
    Netherlands.

    HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
    ~

    This Service Manual contains the new service procedures, service data and specifications for the face-lifted
    model N15 which has been in production since January, 1999.

    ~

    This Service Manual Supplement does not contain the service procedures, etc. which are the same as those
    for former models. *
    Except for Europe:
    Please use this manual in conjunction with the NISSAN model N15 series Service Manual (Pub. No.
    SM5E-ON15GO)and Supplement-II (SM7E-N15BG1).
    For Europe:
    Please use this manual in conjunction with the NISSAN model N15 series Service Manual (Pub. No.
    SM5E-ON15EO),Supplement-I (Pub. No. SM6E-N15SEO)and Supplement-II (Pub. No. SM8E-N15SEO).

    ~

    Follow the instruction below when using this supplement.

    1__
    lNSINE

    COOllNr;

    MECHANICAl—~~
    &

    LUBqlCAltON

    SYS H MS

    lNGIN~ CUNIHOl

    -SYSHM

    ACCELERATOR CONTROl,FUH
    EXHAUST SYSTEMS

    White on black

    CLIJTLH

    —& __

    ——-

    MANlJIlIHANSA:C~

    —-

    NISSAN
    MODEL

    N1!5

    BERIES

    —ffE~

    Black on white

    Specific sections titles are printed white on a
    black background in the QUICK REFERENCE
    INDEX.

    Those sections which are printed black on a
    white background are not contained in this
    manual.

    Service procedures and
    service data are added
    or changed.
    Use this SUPPLEMENT
    MANUAL.
    Only the added or
    changed points are
    introduced in
    these chapters.

    Service procedures are the same as those for
    the former models*. Refer to Service Manuals
    shown below.

    NISSAN

    N15
    SUPPLEMENT-III

    Item
    Service Manual

    SERVICE MANUAL
    _.—-

    Publication

    No.

    Remarks

    SM5E-ON 15GO or
    SM5E-ON15EO

    Supplement-I

    SM6E-N 15SEO

    For Europe

    Supplement-II

    SM7E-N 15BG 1

    Except for Europe

    SM8E-N15SEO

    For Europe

    * Former models: Models before the model N15 series introduced in January, 1999.

    IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
    The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of the mechanic and the efficient functioning
    of the vehicle.
    The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a manner that the service may be performed
    safely and accurately.
    Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the mechanic and the tools and parts available.
    Accordingly, anyone using service procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended by
    NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service method selected.

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM

    @~

    SECTION
    MODIFICATION

    NOTICE:

    The air bag system with a diagnosis sensor unit located in the steering wheel has been deleted.
    The seat belt pre-tensioner type has been changed from the mechanical type to the electrical type
    (except on air bag less models).

    CONTENTS
    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    SEAT BELTS
    Front Seat Belt
    SUPPLEMENTAL
    RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
    Precautions for SRS «AIR BAG» and «SEAT
    BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    Service
    Special Service Tools
    Description
    SRS Component Parts Location
    Maintenance Items
    Removal and Installation — Diagnosis Sensor
    Unit, Seat Belt Pre-tensioner and Satellite
    Sensor

    2

    Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt
    Pre-tensioner

    2

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES — Supplemental
    Restraint System (SRS)
    Trouble Diagnoses Introduction
    How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
    and Accurate Repair
    Schematic
    Wiring Diagram — SRS Self-diagnosis
    Trouble Diagnoses for Air Bag Warning Lamp
    COLLISION DIAGNOSIS

    3
    4
    6
    6
    6
    8
    9
    10

    11

    RS-1

    12

    ~1
    15
    15
    17
    19
    20
    26
    44
    46

    PRECAUTIONS
    Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR
    BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER»
    The Supplemental. Restraint System such as «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» used along
    with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
    types of collision. The SRS composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N15 is as follows (The composition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):

    For a frontal collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the
    steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side),
    seat belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.

    For a side collision
    The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of
    front seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision),
    wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).

    WARNING:
    • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
    in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
    • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
    • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related t9 the SRS unless instructed to in this
    Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation either just
    before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.

    RS-2

    SEAT BELTS
    CAUTION:










    Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect
    both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
    Do not use electrical test equipment for seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
    After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting seat belt pretensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to «Self-diagnosis» (RS-27) for details.
    Do not use disassemble buckle or seat belt assembly.
    Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.
    Never oil tongue and buckle.
    If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat
    belt assembly.
    If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.
    When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine seat belt assembly.
    After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached
    hardwares (i.e., guide rail set).

    RS.3

    SEAT BELT$
    Front Seat Belt
    4.DOOR SEDAN AND 5.DOOR HATCHBACK

    o

    Remove front seat. Refer to «SEAT» in 8T section
    of Service Manual, Pub. No. SM6E-N15SEO.
    CD Remove adjuster cover.m
    @ Remove outer anchor bolt.
    @) Remove shoulder anchor bolt.
    Remove center pillar trim. Refer to «INTERIOR
    TRIM» in 8T section of Service Manual, Pub.
    No. SM6E-N15SEO.

    Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner connector.

    @ Remove second sash guide.
    (j) Remove the bolt securing seat belt pre-tensioner retractor, then remove seat belt and seat
    belt pre-tensioner retractor.
    @ Remove bolt securing seat bolt adjuster, then
    remove seat belt adjuster.

    o

    SEC. 769-868

    B
    ~

    43 — 55

    (4.4 — 5.6, 32 — 41)
    Adjuster
    cover

    Pawl

    Adjuster

    cover

    <

    ~

    : N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    SRS668

    RS-4

    SEAT BELTS
    Front Seat Belt (Cont’d)
    3.DOOR HATCHBACK

    CD

    Remove front and rear seats. Refer to «SEAT» in 8T section of Service Manual, Pub. No. SM6E-N15SEO.

    @ Remove floor anchor bolts.

    o

    ill

    @
    @
    (j)
    @

    Remove shoulder cover.
    Remove shoulder anchor bolt.
    Remove rear side lower garnish. Refer to «INTERIOR TRIM» in 8T section of Service Manual, Pub. No.
    SM6E-N15SEO.
    Remove the bolts securing second sash guide.
    Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
    Remove the bolts securing seat belt pre-tensioner retractor, then remove seat belt and seat belt pretensioner retractor.

    SEC. 769-868

    tCJ

    tCJ

    43 — 55 (4.4 — 5.6, 32 • 41)

    43 — 55 (4.4 — 5.6, 32 — 41)

    tCJ
    tCJ : N.m

    43 • 55 (4.4 — 5.6, 32 • 41)

    (kg-m, ft-Ib)
    SRS657

    RS.5

    ~~


    ~tr

    SUPPLEMENTAL

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
    Precautions for SRS «AIR BAG» and «SEAT
    BELT PRE. TENSIONER» Service





    Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
    Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch «OFF», disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
    3 minutes.
    For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt
    pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do. not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes
    have passed.
    Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks
    pointing towards the front of
    the vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before
    installation and replace as required.
    The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt
    to turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
    Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and passenger air bag modules with the pad side
    facing upward and front side air bag modules (built-in type) with the stud bolt side facing down.
    Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
    After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.

    «l»

    Special Service Tools
    Tool number
    Tool name
    KV991072S0
    Air bag deployment

    Description
    Disposing of air bag module
    kit

    KV991 06400
    Deployment tool
    NT357

    KV991065S0
    Deployment tool
    adapters

    *: Use KV991 08200 for deployment tool
    adapters for seat belt pre-tensioner.

    For seat belt
    pre-tensioner*

    NT768

    Anchoring

    KV991 05300
    Air bag module bracket

    air bag module

    NT354

    HT61961000 and
    HT62152000 combined
    *Special torx bit

    c

    TORX

    a: 3.5 (0.138) dia.
    b: 8.5 • 8.6 (0.335 • 0.339) dia.
    c: approx. 10 (0.39) sq.
    Unit: mm (in)

    a
    NT361

    *: Special tool or commercial

    Use for special bolts
    [TAMPER RESISTANT
    (Size T50)]

    equivalent

    RS-6

    SUPPLEMENTAL

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

    Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
    Tool number
    Tool name

    Description

    KV991 08300

    For built-in type
    side air bag module

    Deployment tool adapters
    for built-in type side air bag

    NT769

    KV991 08200
    For seat belt
    pre-tensioner

    Deployment tool adapters
    for seat belt pre-tensioner

    NT721

    1m

    RS-7

    SUPPLEMENTAL

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

    Description
    The air bag deploys if the diagnosis sensor unit activates while the ignition switch is in the «ON» or «8T ART»
    position.
    SRS configurations vary with vehicle depending on the optional equipment and destination.

    Driver air bag
    module

    Seat belt
    pre-tensioner
    (Driver side)

    Diagnosis
    • Auxiliary

    Passenger
    module

    air bag

    Seat belt
    pre-tensioner
    (Passenger
    side)

    sensor unit
    power source (condenser)

    • Drive circuit
    • CPU
    Satellite sensor (LH)
    (G sensor for side
    air bag LH)

    Side air bag
    module (LH)
    (Built-in type)

    • G sensor
    (for driver and passenger
    belt pre-tensioner)

    air bags, seat

    • Safing sensor
    (for driver and passenger
    belt pre-tensioner)

    air bags, seat

    Satellite sensor
    (RH)
    (G sensor for
    side air bag RH)

    Side air bag
    module (RH)
    (Built-in type)

    • Safing sensor
    (for side air bag)

    SRS585-A

    The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different among the 8R8
    systems. For example, the driver air bag module and passenger air bag module are activated in a frontal
    collision but not in a side collision.
    8R8 configurations which are activated for some collision modes are as follows;
    Frontal collision

    Left side collision

    Right side collision

    0
    0
    0
    0

    Side air bag module (LH)

    0

    Side air bag module (RH)

    0

    SRS configuration
    Driver air bag module
    Passenger

    air bag module

    Seat belt pre-tensioner

    (Driver side)

    Seat belt pre-tensioner

    (Passenger

    side)

    RS-8

    SUPPLEMENTAL

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

    SRS Component Parts Location
    SRS configurations vary with vehicle depending on the optional equipment and destination.

    SEC. 240-251-253-484-680-868-870

    Passenger

    @~

    air bag module

    Driver air bag module

    WiJ~
    ~~

    ~~

    ~~

    ~~

    ~[L

    Ii
    Wiring

    harness

    fATf
    Satellite

    sensor

    SRS561-C

    ~~

    M
    ~~

    ~lf


    ~i
    ~~

    ~[L
    ~[g))A

    RS.9

    SUPPLEMENTAL

    RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

    Maintenance Items
    CAUTION:

    Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuit.

    AIR

    BAG
    SRS296

    1. Check operation of «AIR BAG» warning lamp. After turning
    ignition key to «ON» position, the «AIR BAG» warning lamp
    illuminates. The «AIR BAG» warning lamp will go off after
    about 7 seconds if no malfunction is detected. If any of the
    following warning lamp conditions occur, immediately check
    the air bag system. Refer to RS-26 for details.
    • The «AIR BAG» warning lamp does not illuminate when the
    ignition switch is turned «ON».
    • The «AIR BAG» warning lamp does not go off about 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned «ON».
    • The «AIR BAG» warning lamp blinks after about 7 seconds
    after the ignition switch is turned «ON».
    2. Visually check SRS components.
    (1) Diagnosis sensor unit
    • Check diagnosis sensor unit and bracket for dents, cracks or
    deformities.
    • Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
    (2) Air bag module and steering wheel

    Remove air bag module from steering wheel, instrument
    panel or seatback. Check harness cover and connectors for
    damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.

    Install driver air bag module to steering wheel to check fit or
    alignment with the wheel.
    • Check steering wheel for excessive free play.

    Install passenger air bag module to instrument panel to
    check fit or alignment with the instrument panel.
    • Install side air bag module to seatback to check fit and alignment with the seat.
    (3)


    Spiral cable
    Check spiral cable for dents, cracks, or deformities.
    Check connectors and protective tape for damage.
    Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation.

    (4) Main harness and air bag harness
    • Check connectors for poor connections, damage, and terminals for deformities.
    • Check harnesses for binding, chafing or cut.
    (5) Seat belt pre-tensioner
    • Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals
    for deformities, and harness for binding.
    • Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
    • Check retractor for smooth operation.

    Perform self-diagnosis for seat belt pre-tensioner using bulb
    or CONSULT. Refer to «Self-diagnosis» for details. (RS-27)
    (6) Satellite sensor
    • Check satellite sensor (including bracket portion) for dents,
    cracks or deformities.
    • Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
    CAUTION:

    Replace previously used special bolts, ground bolt, nuts
    coated with bonding agent and anchor bolt with new ones.

    RS-10

    SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
    Removal and Installation — Diagnosis
    Sensor Unit, Seat Belt Pre-tensioner and
    Satellite Sensor
    CAUTION:
    • Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
    3 minutes.
    • Do not use old bolts and nuts coated with bonding agent after removal; replace with new ones.
    • Check diagnosis sensor unit, seat belt pre-tensioner and satellite sensor for proper installation.
    • Check diagnosis sensor unit and satellite sensor to ensure they are free of deformities, dents,
    cracks or rust. If they show any visible signs of damage, replace them with new ones.
    • Check diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure they are free of deformities and rust.
    • After replacement of diagnosis sensor unit, seat belt pre-tensioner and satellite sensor, check
    SRS function and perform self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to «Self-diagnosis» for details. (RS-26)
    • Do not attempt to disassemble diagnosis sensor unit, seat belt pre-tensioner and satellite sensor.
    • Replace diagnosis sensor unit, seat belt pre-tensioner and satellite sensor if it has been dropped
    or sustained an impact.
    • Do not expose seat belt pre-tensioner to temperatures exceeding 80°C (176°F).

    Models with side air bag
    SEC. 253
    Special

    C1

    Ground bolt

    REMOVAL OF DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
    bolt

    C1

    tCJ 15

    — 25
    (1.5 — 2.5,
    11 — 18)

    SRS514

    Without side air bag
    SEC. 253
    Ground

    Q — ~
    Front.

    ~

    C1

    ~.):

    Special bolt~
    ~
    ~
    ~- .. 15 — 25
    (1.5 — 2.5, «»
    11 — 18)

    Special bolt

    tCJ 15 — 25
    ~
    ~~.5_»1:)5,

    bolt ~

    tCJ:

    ~~.~~.
    ~ ~

    0

    «‘»

    1. Disconnect driver, passenger and side air bag module connectors. Also, disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
    2. Remove console box. Refer to «INSTRUMENT PANEL» in
    BT section.
    3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connector.
    4. Remove ground bolt and also remove special bolts using the
    TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T50), from diagnosis
    sensor unit.
    Then remove the diagnosis sensor unit.

    ~b

    ~I
    lL~
    ~~

    [F~

    ~nr
    !A~
    [Fffi

    M

    NOTE:
    • To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence.
    ~~
    • After replacement, perform self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer
    to «Self-diagnosis» for details (RS-26).
    ~l?
    CAUTION:
    ~u
    • Do not use old special bolts and ground bolt coated with
    bonding agent; replace with new coated special bolts •
    and ground bolt.

    .
    DiagnosIs
    sensor unit

    Forward mark
    N. m (kg-m, ft-Ib)

    @~

    SRS658

    REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
    For removal of seat belt pre-tensioner, refer to «Front Seat Belt»
    for details. (RS-4)
    NOTE:

    To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence.

    RS-11

    SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
    Removal and Installation — Diagnosis
    Sensor Unit, Seat Belt Pre-tensioner and
    5-door
    Satellite Sensor (Cont’d)

    4-door Sedan and
    Hatchback
    ~~

    /

    10 — 20
    (1.0 — 2.1,
    87 — 182)

    REMOVAL OF SATELLITE SENSOR
    1. Remove seat belt retractor. Refer to «Front Seat Belt» for
    details. (RS-4)
    2. Disconnect satellite sensor connector.
    3. Remove bolt and nuts from satellite sensor unit.
    Then remove the satellite sensor.
    NOTE:


    3-door Hatchback

    ~ fi]

    Ground

    fi] : N. m

    To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence.

    CAUTION:

    10 — 20 (1.0 — 2.1, 87 — 182)

    Do not use old nuts coated with bonding agent after
    removal; replace with new coated nuts.

    bolt
    (kg-m, in-Ib)
    SRS515-A

    Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt
    Pre-tensioner










    Before disposing of air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, or vehicles equipped with such systems,
    deploy the systems. If such systems have already been deployed due to an accident, dispose of them
    as indicated in «DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» (RS-14).
    When deploying the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, always use the Special Service Tool;
    Deployment tool KV991 06400.
    When deploying the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the
    deployment component.
    When deploying air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, a fairly loud noise is made, followed by
    smoke being released. The smoke is not poisonous, however, be careful not to inhale smoke since it
    irritates the throat and can cause choking.
    Always activate one air bag module at a time.
    Due to heat, leave air bag module unattended for more than 30 minutes after deployment. Also leave
    seat belt pre-tensioner unattended for move than 10 minutes after deployment.
    Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
    Never apply water to the deployed air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
    Wash your hands clean after finishing work.
    Place the vehicle outdoors with an open space of at least 6 m (20 ft) on all sides when deploying air
    bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner while mounted in vehicle.
    Use a voltmeter to make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged.
    Do not dispose of the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner un-deployed.

    Cut the webbing off.

    Deployment of seat belt pre-tensioner (outside of
    vehicle)

    1. Firmly grip pre-tensioner in a vise and cut the webbing off.

    SRS666

    RS-12

    SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
    Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt
    Pre-tensioner (Cont’d)
    Deployment tool
    adapter for seat belt
    pre-tensioner
    [KV991 08200]

    2. Connect deployment tool adapter [88T: KV991 08200] to
    deployment tool [88T: KV991 06400] connector and seat belt
    pre-tensioner connector.

    @~

    Deployment tool
    [KV9906400]

    SRS667

    Deployment tool
    [KV991 06400]
    SRS242-A

    3. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal.
    4. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked «deployment
    tool power», should glow green, not red.
    5. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp
    on the tool, marked «seat belt pre-tensioner connector
    voltage», will illuminate and the seat belt pre-tensioner will
    deploy.
    CAUTION:
    When deploying the seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at least
    5 m (16 ft) away from the seat belt pre-tensioner.

    If~
    ~~

    DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT
    BELT PRE-TENSIONER WHILE MOUNTED IN
    VEHICLE

    SRS006

    When disposing of a vehicle, deploy air bag modules and seat
    belt pre-tensioners while they are mounted in vehicle.
    CAUTION:
    When deploying air bag n10dule or seat belt pre-tensioner,
    ensure vehicle is empty.
    1. Disconnect both vehicle battery cables and wait 3 minutes.
    2. Disconnect air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners
    connector.
    3. Connect deployment tool [88T: KV991 06400] to air bag
    module or seat belt pre-tensioner.
    For front passenger air bag module, attach deployment tool
    adapter [88T: KV991 06580] to the tool connector. For side
    air bag module, attach deployment tool adapter [88T:
    KV991 08300] to the tool connector. For seat belt pretensioner,
    attach
    deployment
    tool
    adapter
    [88T:
    KV991 08200] to the tool connector.
    4. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal.
    5. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked «deployment
    tool power», should glow green, not red.
    6. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp
    on the tool, marked «air bag connector voltage», will illuminate and the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner will
    deploy.
    CAUTION:
    Activate only one air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner
    at a time.

    RS-13

    ~u

    SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
    Disposal of Air Bag Module and Seat Belt
    Pre-tensioner (Cont’d)
    DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT
    PRE. TENSIONER
    Deployed air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are very
    hot. Before disposing of air bag module, and seat belt pretensioner, wait at least 30 minutes, and 10 minutes, respectively.
    Seal them in a plastic bag before disposal.
    CAUTION:


    SBF276H





    Never apply water to a deployed air bag module and seat
    belt pre-tensioner.
    Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air
    bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
    No poisonous gas is produced upon air bag module
    deployment. However, be careful not to inhale gas since
    it irritates throat and can cause choking.
    Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module and seat
    belt pre-tensioner.
    Air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner cannot be
    re-used.
    Wash your hands clean after finishing work.

    RS-14

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

    SU~lemental

    Restraint System (SRS)

    Trouble Diagnoses Introduction
    CAUTION:
    • Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS harness connectors unless Instructed to in
    this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified with yellow harness protector or
    yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors.
    • Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged,
    replace it with a new one.
    • Keep ground portion clean.

    @~
    ~~

    DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
    The SRS self-diagnosis results ,can be read by using «AIR BAG» warning lamp and/or CONSULT. The
    reading of these results is accornplished using one of two modes — «User mode» and «Diagnosis mode».
    The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system
    malfunction through the operation of the «AIR BAG» warning lamp.
    The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part.
    The mode applications for the «AIR BAG» warning lamp and CONSULT are as follows:
    User mode

    Diagnosis mode

    Display type

    «AIR BAG» warning lamp

    X

    X

    ON-OFF operation

    CONSULT

    X

    Monitoring

    lL~
    ~~

    DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT

    «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]»
    A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis mode) is
    displayed on the CONSULT screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs.
    «SELF-DIAG [PAST]»
    Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory (also indicated by the warning lamp flashes in the
    Diagnosis mode) are displayed on the CONSULT screen. The stored results are not erased until memory
    erasing is executed.
    «TROUBLE DIAG RECORD»
    With «TROUBLE DIAG RECORD», diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT screen.

    II ECU

    DISCRIMINATED

    ECU

    NO.1

    No.

    OOAC

    fA¥
    IffA

    «ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.»
    The diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle model is assigned
    ~IY
    with its own, individual classification number. This number
    will be displayed on the CONSULT screen, as shown at left. •
    When replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the part
    number for the compatibility. After installation, replacement
    with a correct unit can be checked by confirming this classirg>’ii’
    fication number on the CONSULT screen.
    lQ) U

    For NISSAN MODEL N15, the diagnosis sensor unit classification

    number assigned

    SRS659

    RS-15

    is OOAC.

    M

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

    SUlPlemental Restraint System (SRS)
    Trouble Diagnoses Introduction (Cont’d)

    HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

    00 With

    MODE

    CONSULT

    From User mode to Diagnosis mode
    After selecting AIR BAG on the «SELECT SYSTEM» screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis mode.

    I~

    SELECT SYSTEM

    DI

    1

    ENGINE

    1

    I

    AIT

    1

    AIRBAG
    ASS

    I

    1

    1

    1========1

    1

    «AI R BAG» warning
    indicates Diagnosis

    lamp operation
    mode.
    SRS391

    From Diagnosis mode to User mode
    To return to User mode from diagnosis mode, touch «BACK» key of CONSULT until «SELECT SYSTEM»
    appears. Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode.
    ~

    SELECT SYSTEM

    D

    ENGINE

    AIT
    AIRBAG
    ASS
    «AI R BAG» warning lamp operation
    indicates User mode.
    SRS392

    1

    I

    CONSULT

    Diagnosis mode activates only when a malfunction is detected,
    by pressing the driver’s door switch at least 5 times within 7
    seconds after turning the ignition «ON». SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected.

    -:0 ~~
    Door switch

    Without

    From User mode to Diagnosis mode

    -~~o 11r-U

    «AIR
    /
    ~ BAG

    /,’

    /~6

    @

    ~

    SRS462

    From Diagnosis mode to User mode
    After a malfunction is repaired, switch the ignition «OFF» for at least 1 second, then back «ON». Diagnosis
    mode returns to User mode. If switching from Diagnosis mode to User mode is required while malfunction
    is being detected, switch the ignition «OFF», then back «ON» and press the driver’s door switch at least 5
    times within 7 seconds.

    RS-16

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

    00

    SU~lemental Restraint System (SRS)
    Trouble Diagnoses Introduction (Cont’d)

    RESULTS

    With CONSULT

    «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]»
    A current Self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT screen in real time. After the malfunction
    is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]».

    I

    SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]

    «SELF-DIAG [PAST]»
    Return to the «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]» CONSULT screen
    by pushing «BACK» key of CONSULT and select «SELFDIAG [CURRENT]» in «SELECT DIAG MODE». Touch
    «ERASE» in «SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]» mode.
    NOTE:

    ID

    FAILURE DETECTED

    * NO SELF

    DIAGNOSTIC
    FAILURE INDICATED.
    FURTHER TESTING
    MAY BE REQUIRED.

    I

    ERASE

    **

    PRINT

    I

    If the memory of the malfunction in «SELF-DIAG [PAST]» is
    not erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by
    the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is
    repaired completely.

    [L~
    ~(r)

    [f~

    ~!L

    SRS357

    «TROUBLE DIAG RECORD»
    The memory of «TROUBLE DIAG RECORD» cannot be erased.

    00

    Without

    fJ:ui

    CONSULT

    After a malfunction is repaired, return to User mode from Diagnosis mode by switching the ignition «OFF»
    for at least 1 second, then back «ON». At that time, the self-diagnosis result is cleared.

    How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick
    and Accurate Repair
    A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
    In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.

    INFORMATION

    FROM CUSTOMER

    WHAT
    WHEN
    WHERE
    HOW……..

    PRELIMINARY

    ~lF

    Vehicle model
    Date, Frequencies
    Road conditions
    Operating conditions, Symptoms

    CHECK

    Check that the following parts are in good order.

    Battery [Refer to EL section («BATTERY») of Service Manual.]

    Fuse [Refer to EL section («Fuse», «POWER SUPPLY ROUTING») of Service Manual.]

    System component-to-harness connections

    RS-17

    [fffi

    M
    ~~

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES —

    SU~lemental

    Restraint

    S~stem (SRS)

    How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for
    Quick and Accurate Repair (Cont’d)
    WORK FLOW
    ACTION ITEM

    REFERENCE

    ITEM

    Check in

    Listen to customer complaints

    Perform preliminary

    and requests.

    +—1

    check.

    Preliminary

    check (RS-17)

    Check for any Service Bulletin.

    Check air bag system operation by using «AIR BAG» warning
    lamp —

    User mode

    Check seat belt pre-tensioner

    Inspect malfunctioning

    DIAGNOSTIC
    (RS-26)

    PROCEDURE

    1

    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE

    2:

    system operation by using a bulb.

    part. —

    Diagnosis mode

    Using CONSULT
    Perform self-diagnosis

    using CONSULT.

    DIAGNOSTIC

    OR
    Perform self-diagnosis

    using «AIR BAG» warning lamp.

    (RS-28)

    PROCEDURE

    3:

    Using «AIR BAG» warning lamp
    (RS-32)

    Repair/Replace

    NG

    Final check —

    Diagnosis mode and User mode

    DIAGNOSTIC

    PROCEDURE

    Using CONSULT

    OK

    4:

    (RS-36)

    DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5:
    Using «AIR BAG» warning lamp
    (RS-38)

    Check out

    RS-18

    HRS040

    RS-19

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES —

    SU~lemental

    Restraint

    Wiring Diagram —

    S~stem (SRS)

    SRS —

    RS-SRS-01
    FUSE

    _________

    R,W

    R/L

    aID

    BR/W

    R/L

    rm

    rrf5TI

    ~

    AIRBAG
    WIL
    COMBINATION
    METER
    (AIR BAG
    WARNING

    IGN

    ~

    ~(]g)

    111411
    JUNCTION

    «~I

    db

    R

    BOXNO.2

    WOI~

    OPEN

    DOOR
    SWITCH
    DAIVER
    SIDE

    @

    CID

    GND
    II211
    ~

    I~~ ~~~ ~~I

    db

    A

    CLOSED

    AlA BAG
    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR
    UNIT
    DOOR
    SW
    111711
    ~

    ii~r) rr1-(-~-)—-!t
    ~

    I~~ -z~ — — — i$1

    JUNCTION
    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)

    BOX NO.2

    3

    [22]

    Refer to
    EL-POWER.

    IN~ll


    BR/W~

    ~

    10A

    BLOCK
    (JIB)

    CONNECTORS)

    B

    db

    II 1 II

    JOINT
    CONNECTOR-3
    ~

    ~~
    R

    :

    With tachometer
    Without tachometer
    *1 … 1 , @ 22
    *2 … 22 , @ 26
    *3 … 33 , @ 15

    @:

    BIR

    -!~

    Refer to last page
    (FoIdout

    ~
    BR

    page) .

    rfi2l @

    m

    B

    HRS041

    RS-20

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

    SU~lemental Restraint Sxstem (SRS)
    ~Wiring Diagram — SRS — (Cont’d)

    RS-SRS-02
    AIR BAG
    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR

    UNIT
    SQ+

    SQ-

    SQ+

    SQ-

    SEAT8ELT

    (DR)

    (DR)

    (PASS)

    (PASS)

    W/L

    ~

    ~
    *4

    lbi=ll
    G

    *5

    ~

    OR

    aID
    TX

    RX
    2 1

    .0

    ~

    ~

    1

    W/8

    GY/L

    G/8

    I I I

    H/8 @ GY IL

    G/8

    I$t~ i$t—i$1
    W/8

    G/B

    I I

    t

    t

    GY/L

    GY/L

    G/B

    rrI5n

    ~

    JUNCTION
    BOX NO.2
    (JOINT
    CONNECTORS)

    ~
    GY/L

    SPIRAL
    CABLE
    G

    @ OR

    m—rn
    @:

    ~:

    rt1l

    ~

    GIB

    m
    DATA LINK
    CONNECTOR
    FOR CONSULT
    ~

    (SQUIB)

    @

    Model with dual air bag system
    Model with single air bag system

    *4 .. ‘@

    W

    *5 … @

    ,~

    L

    ,~

    ~
    ~GY

    GY/L

    SlOE

    (SQUIB)

    G/8

    I I

    W/B
    AIR BAG
    MOOULE
    PASSENGER

    AIR BAG
    MODULE
    DRIVER
    SIDE

    ~~

    Y

    y/e

    (lJiirn@
    4521
    Y

    ~m:>

    tJjg)

    Refer to last page
    (Foldout page) .
    Y

    ij@*

    CID

    Ill!

    Y

    y

    ~ This connector is not shown in «HARNESS LAYOUT».EL section.

    HRS042

    RS-21

    TROUBLE

    DIAGNOSES —

    Sue.elemental Restraint System (SRS)
    Wiring Diagram — SRS — (Cont’d)

    RS-SRS-03
    SEAT BELT
    PRE-TENS
    lONER
    LH _

    SEAT BELT
    PRE-TENS lONER

    SIDE AIR BAG
    MODULE LH
    (SQUIB)

    RH @

    ~:@

    lbi=JJ
    GY

    ~

    lbi=JJ

    c!J1

    I~~

    LG

    I~~ — 531
    Y/R ~
    Y/L

    Y/G

    It

    If
    Y/L

    Y

    Y/G

    13-31

    13~1

    rf3l]

    13-21

    SQ+
    (SIDE

    SQ(SIDE

    SQ+
    (SIDE

    SQ(SIDE

    LH)

    It

    If

    RH)

    SATRH

    ~

    13•81

    13.51

    13•61

    B/W

    BR

    BIR

    L

    ,

    ~aID ,

    ,

    _—-

    —,

    —1

    f… — — …. —

    ….. 1

    …..
    I

    ….

    I

    AIR BAG
    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR
    UNIT

    RH)

    RH

    tl

    I

    I

    ,——

    t!

    »

    ,

    )

    »
    L

    rf4’rn

    561c!J1

    SAT+

    I
    I
    1 »

    ~

    ~

    SATLH

    I

    ~

    Y

    LG

    SAT+
    LH

    »
    ~,

    Models with
    side air bag

    ~

    GY

    Y/R

    LH)

    @:

    SIDE AIR BAG
    MODULE RH
    (SQUIB)
    @:@

    »

    B/W

    BR

    14″21

    rf3l]

    SATELLITE
    SENSOR
    LH
    ~:@

    BIA

    ~
    SATELLITE
    SENSOR

    ~

    ~m@

    ‘———‘

    ~~

    [J]g[IJw’W

    ~Y

    RH
    ~

    :@

    ~

    III~~@~*@*
    12
    y’Y’y’y

    ~————————————~
    ~ This connector is not shown in «HARNESS LAYOUT».EL section.

    HRSQ43

    RS-22

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

    SU~lemental Restraint System (SRS)
    Wiring Diagram — SRS -.(Cont’d)

    RS-SRS-04

    10A

    FUSE
    BLOCK Refer to
    (JIB)
    EL -POWER •

    ~

    ~

    IN~ll

    AIL

    I
    BA/W~

    AIL

    BA/W@

    AIL

    rFF5n

    ffi

    AIRBAG
    W/L

    IGN

    It~-l—i$1

    t

    DOOA
    SW

    COMBINATION
    METER
    (AIR

    AIR BAG
    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR
    UNIT

    aID

    GND

    BAG

    WARNING

    ~

    LAMP)

    ~
    A

    CID

    B

    A

    ~

    B

    IciJ~_z~ — ~ciJl
    t
    rm JOINT

    @

    m
    ~
    ~

    CLOSED

    OPEN

    DOOR
    SWITCH
    DRIVER
    SIDE

    CONNECTOR-4
    ~

    @

    @:
    @:

    BIA

    -!-

    With tachometer
    Without tachometer
    *1 … @ 1 , @ 22
    *2 .. · @ 22
    @ 26
    *3… @33’@15
    ,

    ~
    Refer to last page
    (Faldaut

    page) .

    HRS044

    RS.23


    ~u 1?

    rD>D

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

    SU~lemental
    Restraint System (SRS)
    Wiring Diagram — SRS — (Cont’d)

    RS-SRS-05
    AIR BAG
    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR

    UNIT
    SQ+
    (OR)

    SQ(DR)

    lki=JJ

    ~

    Y

    SQ+

    SQ-

    SEATBELT

    (PASS)

    (PASS)

    W/L

    ~
    Y/G

    Y/B

    ~

    ~

    Y/R

    @
    TX

    ~

    1 .°1

    +t~$i$~I— I
    W/B

    H/B

    GY/L

    CID 6Y IL

    I$~

    W/S

    GIB

    6/B

    i~1

    GY/L

    I

    t

    t

    RX
    2

    GY/L

    GIS

    I

    GIS

    rm m JOINT
    CONNECTOR-5
    ~

    ~~~~lki=JJ~
    GY/L

    SPIRAL
    CABLE

    GIB

    I I

    EU

    W/S

    GY/L

    GIS

    r1il

    r1l

    rtl

    AIR BAG
    MODULE
    PASSENGER
    SIDE

    AIR BAG
    MODULE
    DRIVER
    SIDE
    (SQUIB)

    DATA LINK
    CONNECTOR
    FOR CONSULT
    ~

    (SQUIB)

    @

    @): For Europe
    @: Model with dual air bag system

    ~

    ~

    OR

    ~GY

    [iiLim@
    4521

    y

    ~~*

    @

    1m

    y

    *:This connector

    ~W)

    WSJ

    Y

    Y

    is not shown in uHARNESS LAYOUTu, EL section.

    HRS045

    RS-24

    TROUBLE DIAGNOSES —

    SU~lemental Restraint Sxstem (SRS)
    Wiring Diagram — SRS — (Cont’d)

    RS-SRS-06
    SEAT BELT
    PRE-TENSIONER

    SEAT BELT
    PRE-TENSIONER
    RH

    LH
    @:@

    @:@

    SIDE AIR BAG
    MODULE LH
    (SQUIB)
    ~:@

    SIDE AIR BAG
    MODULE RH
    (SQUIB)
    ~:@

    lbi=JJ

    lbi=JJ

    ~

    GY

    4It-53~
    Y/A ~

    @:

    For Europe

    @: Models with

    side air bag

    Y/G

    It

    If

    Y/R

    Y/L

    Y

    13-31

    13-41

    SQ+
    (SIDE

    SQ(SIDE

    ri31ll

    SQ+
    (SIDE

    LH)

    LH)

    RH)

    AH)

    DIAGNOSIS
    SENSOR
    UNIT

    @@
    ,

    It

    If
    Y/G

    13~

    1

    SQ(SIDE

    LH

    SAT+
    RH

    SATAH

    13.l1

    1~81

    13.51

    13•61

    L

    B/W

    BR

    B/R

    »

    I ….
    I

    ,
    1

    ~-_

    f—~—

    ,-.,-

    »

    …….
    …..

    )~
    t!
    ….

    L

    B/W

    U41=n

    14″21

    I

    .—-….

    I
    I

    t!

    1

    1
    I#»

    …. I

    )

    ~

    .,-

    V

    »

    .,-

    AIR BAG

    »
    ~~

    I

    I

    »

    »

    SATELLITE
    SENSOR
    LH
    ~:@

    BR

    BIR

    ri31ll

    13″21

    ~@@

    SATELLITE
    SENSOR
    RH

    ‘———‘ ~

    ~

    [llgIIJw’W

    *:This connector

    @

    Y

    SAT-

    1

    1~~-56~
    Y!L

    LG ..

    LH

    I

    ~

    ~

    GY

    SAT+

    .,-

    I

    LG

    ~~

    ~y

    is not shown in «HARNESS LAYOUT»,EL

    :@

    ~

    11111~@

  • Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Обогреватель электрический масляный радиатор инструкция по применению
  • Цитофлавин система инструкция по применению цена
  • Эсперо инсектицид инструкция по применению цена
  • Руководство бизнес группы по принципу финансового холдинга предполагает что
  • Гувд по самарской области официальный сайт руководство